Frictionless® SRM 2005 Software

Buyer Online Help

Service Pack 2 (Release 4.2)

Confidential and Proprietary

FRICTIONLESS COMMERCE INCORPORATED has patents and/or patents pending covering
the subject matter contained in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you
any license or any other rights to such intellectual property.
Copyright © 1998–2006 by FRICTIONLESS COMMERCE INCORPORATED. All rights
reserved. Except as permitted under the Copyright Act of 1976, no part of this publication may be
reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system,
without the prior written permission of FRICTIONLESS COMMERCE INCORPORATED. The
product described in this documentation includes code licensed from one or more third parties.
Frictionless®, trademark is owned by FRICTIONLESS COMMERCE INCORPORATED
and is registered in the United States of America and the European Union. All other
FRICTIONLESS COMMERCE INCORPORATED brand and product names, including
FRICTIONLESS COMMERCE, are trademarks, service marks, and/or registered trademarks of
and owned by FRICTIONLESS COMMERCE INCORPORATED. Other brand and product names
are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.

Published in the U.S.A.

FRICTIONLESS COMMERCE INCORPORATED

400 Technology Square, Floor 9
Cambridge, MA 02139
Part Number: FSS, Version 4.2: Buyer Online Help
June 2006
Contents

Welcome to Frictionless SRM 1

CPO Central 3
Workbench 5
Workbench page 6
Creating a Workbench page in the Workbench 9
Editing a Workbench page in the Workbench 10
Workbench Summary page 11
Reordering channels in a column on a Workbench page 12
Viewing more information for a Workbench channel 13
Managing Workbench pages in the Workbench 14
Workbench Page Manager Summary page 15
Hiding or showing a Workbench page 16
Using the Workbench Calendar channel 17
Adding a calendar event in the Calendar channel 18
Specifying the types of events to appear in the Calendar channel 19
Specifying the maximum number of events in the Calendar channel 20
Selecting a date in the Calendar channel to view events 21
Viewing a list of events in a flyover in the Calendar channel 22
Using the Workbench Links channel 23
Visiting a site from the Links channel 24
Creating a link in the Links channel 25
Editing a link in the Links channel 26
Using the Workbench Master Agreements Search channel 27
Searching for a master agreement in the Master Agreements Search
channel 28
Searching for all master agreements for a supplier in the Master
Agreements Search channel 29
Using the Workbench Currency Exchange Rates channel 30
Selecting a base currency in the Currency Exchange Rates channel 31
Adding a comparison currency in the Currency Exchange Rates channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential iii

 32
Using the Workbench Tech Support Channel 33
Linking to Online Help in the Tech Support channel 34
Linking to Online Training in the Tech Support channel 35
Contacting technical support using the Tech Support channel 36
Using the Workbench Events channel 37
Linking to a sourcing event for the current date in the Events channel 38
Linking to a sourcing event for a date other than the current one in the
Events channel 39
Adding a calendar event in the Events channel 40
Specifying the types of events to appear in the Events channel 41
Using the Workbench Buyer Alerts channel 42
Accessing a sourcing document referenced by an alert in the Buyer
Alerts channel 43
Using the Workbench To Do List channel 44
Linking to a list of sourcing or other events in the To Do List channel 45
Specifying the types of events to appear in the To Do List channel 46
Using the Workbench Favorite Sites channel 47
Selecting another site for display in the Favorite Sites channel 48
Changing the height of the Favorite Sites channel 49
Opening a new window for the site in the Favorite Sites channel 50
Using the Workbench New Discussions channel 51
Viewing a message in the New Discussions channel 52
Using the Workbench Global Discussions channel 53
Viewing a message in the Global Discussions channel 54
Creating a discussion thread in the Global Discussions channel 55
Using the Workbench File Sharing channel 56
Using the Workbench Reports channel 57
Using the Workbench Project Status Summary channel 58
Linking to a project in the Project Status Summary channel 59
Viewing a project task report in the Project Status Summary channel 60
Using the My Workflow Activities channel 61
Viewing current approvals in the My Workflow Activities channel 62
Approving or rejecting a sourcing document in the My Workflow

iv Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Activities channel 63
Viewing approval history in the My Workflow Activities channel 64
Using the Print XPress for Internal Customers channel 65
Using the My Current XPress Requests channel 66
Using the Industry News channel 67
Using the Supplier Discovery channel 68

Navigation and Display 69

Navigation and display functions 70
Logging onto the SRM software 71
Changing your user password 72
Logging off of the SRM software 73
Returning to the Workbench 74
Moving between and within modules 75
Viewing a sourcing document list 76
Viewing a sourcing document 77
Returning to the top of a sourcing document 78
Sorting a table column 79
Getting assistance 80
Accessing and finding topics in Online Help 81

General Tasks 83
Toolbar functions 84
Edit/Save toolbar button functions 86
Editing and saving a sourcing document 87
Document toolbar button functions 89
Viewing phase information for a sourcing document 90
Duplicating a sourcing document 91
Saving a sourcing document as a template 92
Canceling a sourcing document 93
Refreshing a sourcing document 94
Closing a sourcing document 95
Actions toolbar button functions 96
Generating a contract from an auction or RFx 97
Reports toolbar button functions 98

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential v

 Viewing a report within a sourcing document 99
Attachments toolbar button functions 100
Adding an attachment by importing it from a library 101
Adding a file attachment 102
Adding a URL attachment 103
Viewing an attachment 104
Discussions toolbar button functions 105
Creating a discussion topic in a sourcing document 106
Creating a discussion message 108
Field help for discussions: Message dialog box 110
Replying to a discussion message 112
Viewing discussion messages and replies 114
Deleting a discussion topic or message 116
Subscribing and unsubscribing to discussion notifications 117
Chat toolbar button functions 118
Conducting a chat 120
Change Phase toolbar button functions 122
Changing a sourcing document phase 123
Changing the phase of a project or contract document 124
Approve and Reject toolbar button functions 126
Approving or rejecting a document from the document toolbar 127
Header functions 128
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document 129
Adding an approver to a sourcing document 130
Field help for Document Collaborator dialog box 132
Adding a document link to a sourcing document 134
Viewing change history for a sourcing document 135
Schedule functions 136
Specifying a schedule event view 137
Adding an event to a schedule 138
Editing an event in a schedule 139
Adding a dependency to an event 140
Editing dependencies for an event 141

vi Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Tracking events 142
Adding dates to an event 143
Editing dates for an event 144
Viewing event dependencies 145
Viewing event dependents 146
Creating reminders for an event 147
Importing an event from a library 148
Accounting functions 149
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document 150
Field help for the Accounting page in a sourcing document 151
Library functions 152
Importing a library component 153
Unlinking a library component in a template 154
Report functions 155
Bookmarking a report 156
Exporting a report as a PDF file 157
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file 158
Importing and exporting system data 159
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file 160
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file 161
Exporting line items as a CSV file 162
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file 163
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file 164
Miscellaneous tasks 165
Searching for a sourcing document 166
Using the Lookup icon 167
Deleting items from a list 168
Editing an item in a list 169
Reordering items in a list 170
Using keyboard shortcuts in a list 171
Selecting a currency for a sourcing document 172
Formatting text in a text field 173
Editing your user account information 174

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential vii

 Quick Reference: Working with sourcing document workflow 175

Spend and Compliance 177

Spend and Compliance by Commodity 178
Spend and Compliance by Vendor 180
Spend and Compliance by Organization 182
Spend and Compliance by Geography 183
Spend and Compliance by Accounts Payable Type 184
Spend and Compliance by Cost Center 185
Spend and Compliance Configuration 186
Reports 187

Enterprise Sourcing 189

Projects 191
Project List page 192
Creating a project 194
Creating a project from a template 195
Editing a project 196
Creating a project template 197
Editing a project template 198
Project Header page 199
Changing the status of a project 200
Project Schedule page 201
Specifying a project schedule event view 203
Adding a project schedule 205
Editing a project schedule 206
Adding a project event 207
Editing a project event 208

viii Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Adding a sub-project to a project 209
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Project 210
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Excel 212
Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Project 213
Viewing all exported project schedule information in Microsoft Project
214
Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Excel 215
Mapping tables for importing or exporting a project schedule 216
Project Schedule Settings page 218
Adding project event details 219
Project Schedule Tracking page 220
Project Schedule Dependents page 222
Project Vendors page 223
Adding a project supplier 224
Creating a supplier record in a project 225
Project Forms page 226
Adding a project form 227
Creating a project form question 228
Importing a project form from the Project library 229
Responding to a project form question 230
Project Costs page 231
Adding costs and resources to a project event 232
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report 233
Project Accounting page 234
Project toolbar functions 235
Project Document toolbar button functions 237
Importing a project template 238
Exporting a project template 240
Project Actions toolbar button functions 241
Creating a sourcing document from within a project 242
Project Report toolbar button functions 243
Viewing a project report 244
Project Schedule Extract report 245

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential ix

 Project Contributing Cost report 247
Project Change Phase toolbar button functions 250

Demand Aggregation 251

Demand Aggregation Initiator Tasks 252
Demand Aggregation Stakeholder Tasks 253
Demand Aggregation List page 254
Creating a demand aggregation document 256
Creating a demand aggregation document from a template 258
Editing a demand aggregation document 260
Creating a demand aggregation template 262
Editing a demand aggregation template 264
Demand Aggregation Document page 265
Responding to a demand aggregation document 266
Demand Aggregation Header page 268
Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page 269
Adding an alternate currency to a demand aggregation document 270
Demand Aggregation Schedule page 271
Adding a demand aggregation schedule 272
Setting stakeholder notifications for a demand aggregation document
273
Demand Aggregation Schedule Settings page 274
Demand Aggregation Schedule Tracking page 275
Demand Aggregation Schedule Dependents page 276
Demand Aggregation Stakeholders page 277
Adding a demand aggregation stakeholder 278
Demand Aggregation Master Specification page 279
Adding a demand aggregation specification 280
Proposing a demand aggregation specification 281
Demand Aggregation Line Items page 282
Adding a demand aggregation line item 283
Editing demand aggregation specification options 284
Responding to a demand aggregation line item 285
Declining to respond to a demand aggregation line item 286

x Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Proposing a demand aggregation line item 287
Demand Aggregation RFx Settings page 288
Adding a supplier to a demand aggregation document 289
Creating a supplier record in a demand aggregation document 290
Proposing a supplier for a demand aggregation document 291
Demand Aggregation Responses page 292
Reviewing a demand aggregation response 293
Demand Aggregation Proposed page 295
Reviewing line items in a demand aggregation response 296
Approving a proposed line item in a demand aggregation response 297
Declining a proposed line item in a demand aggregation response 298
Reviewing proposed specifications in a demand aggregation response
299
Approving a proposed specification in a demand aggregation response
300
Declining a proposed specification in a demand aggregation response
301
Reviewing proposed suppliers in a demand aggregation response 302
Approving a proposed supplier in a demand aggregation response 303
Declining a proposed supplier in a demand aggregation response 304
Demand Aggregation toolbar functions 305
Changing a demand aggregation document phase 306
Changing a demand aggregation response phase 307
Declining to respond to a demand aggregation document 308
Reverting a demand aggregation response phase for a stakeholder 309
Creating a new demand aggregation round 310
Creating a final demand aggregation round 311
Creating an RFx from a demand aggregation document 312
Viewing initiator reports for demand aggregation 313
Viewing stakeholder reports for demand aggregation 314

Auctions 315
Auction Event List page 316
Creating an auction 318
Creating an auction from a template 320

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xi

 Editing an auction 322
Editing an open auction 324
Creating an auction template 325
Editing an auction template 327
Auction Header page 329
Adding an amendment to an auction 331
Editing collaborators in an open auction 332
Editing collaborators in a closed auction 333
Auction Exchange Rates page 334
Adding an alternate currency to an auction 335
Auction Schedule page 336
Adding an auction schedule 340
Changing phase end times for an open auction 341
Auction Information page 342
Adding an auction information section 343
Auction Line Items page 344
Specifying an auction line item view 345
Adding line item information to an auction 346
Adding a single line item to an auction 347
Editing a single line item in an auction 348
Auction Single Line Item Summary page 349
Adding a packaged line item to an auction 351
Editing a packaged line item in an auction 352
Auction Packaged Line Item Summary page 353
Adding a sub line item to an packaged line item in an auction 355
Editing a sub line item in a packaged line item in an auction 356
Adding a material to an auction 357
Editing a material in an auction 358
Editing a line item start price in the Preview phase 359
Editing the minimum or maximum bid improvement in an open auction
360
Auction Bidders page 361
Adding a bidder to an auction 362
Adding a bidder to an open auction 363

xii Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Suspending an auction bidder 364
Unsuspending an auction bidder 365
Disqualifying an auction bidder 366
Qualifying an auction bidder 367
Suspending auction bidding activity 368
Unsuspending auction bidding activity 369
Adding terms to an auction 370
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an auction 371
Auction Weights page 372
Field help for Auction Weights page 374
Adding weighted bidding factors to an auction 376
Auction Accounting page 377
Auction Bidding page 378
Reviewing auction bid history 380
Auction Bid History page 381
Disqualifying an auction bid 383
Auction Awards page 384
Awarding auction line items manually 385
Auction toolbar functions 386
Auction Document toolbar button functions 387
Canceling an auction 388
Auction Setup: Line Item Specifications page 389
Auction Setup: Item Specification dialog box 390
Adding an auction line item specification 391
Auction Actions toolbar button functions 392
Reopening an auction in the Close Pending phase 393
Reopening a staggered line item in the Close Pending phase 394
Closing an auction line item in the Close Pending phase 395
Closing an auction manually 396
Launching the Auction Monitor 397
Using the Auction Monitor 398
Auction Reports toolbar button functions 400
Viewing an auction report 401

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xiii

 Bidder Status for an Auction Event report 402
Full Bid report 405
Bid Movement by Line Item report 408
Bid Movement by Bidders report 411
Quick Reference: Conducting an Auction 414

RFx 415
RFx List page 416
Creating an RFx from a template 419
Creating an RFx 421
Editing an RFx 423
Creating an RFx template 425
Editing an RFx template 427
RFx Header page 429
RFx Exchange Rates page 430
Adding an alternate currency to an RFx 431
RFx Schedule page 432
Adding an RFx schedule 434
Specifying a view for RFx schedule events 435
RFx Schedule Settings page 436
RFx Schedule Tracking page 438
RFx Schedule Dependents page 439
RFx Vendors page 440
Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx 441
Creating a supplier record within an RFx 442
Adding supplier disclosure rules to an RFx 444
Field help for RFx disclosure rules for suppliers 445
Adding supplier event terms to an RFx 446
Reinstating a supplier in an RFx round 447
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an RFx 448
RFx Information page 449
Adding an RFx information section 450
RFx Specs page 451
Adding an RFx event specification 452

xiv Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 RFx Questions page 453
Adjusting section weights for an RFx 454
Importing RFx questions from an Excel file 455
RFx Question Summary page 456
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx 458
Adding a question within an existing section to an RFx 460
Adding a contract clause question to an RFx 462
Including RFx supplier question responses in a contract document
464
Adding a table-based question to an RFx 468
Importing an RFx table-based question from a library 471
Editing a question for an RFx 473
Field help for Question dialog box in RFx 474
Adding a group to an RFx question section 479
Editing a group within an RFx question section 480
RFx Section Info page 481
Adding section information for an RFx question 482
RFx Preview page 483
RFx Preferences page 484
Specifying preferences and scoring methods for an RFx question 485
Adjusting question weights for an RFx 487
RFx Line Items page 488
Specifying an RFx line item view 490
Adding a line item to an RFx 492
RFx Line Item Detail page 493
Adding a material to an RFx 494
Adding a BOM to an RFx 495
Editing a BOM in an RFx 496
RFx Accounting page 497
RFx Responses page 498
Performing a simple RFx award 500
Performing a simple RFx award and creating a master agreement 501
Performing a scenario RFx award with manual awarding 502
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer 504

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xv

 Performing a scenario RFx award with automatic awarding 505
Recalculating RFx responses 509
RFx Responses Header page 510
RFx Response Questions page 511
RFx Response Summary page for questions 512
RFx Response Question Scores page 513
Editing question scores and costs in an RFx response section 514
RFx Response Answers page 515
RFx Response Line Items page 516
Accepting a firm RFx response 517
RFx Scoring page 518
Entering collaborative question scores for an RFx 520
Overriding collaborative and automatic question scores for an RFx 521
RFx Awards page 522
Reviewing the results of an RFx award 523
Comparing award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios 524
RFx Summary page for awarding 525
RFx Awards RFx Responses page 526
RFx Awards Global Rules page 527
Selecting global rules for an RFx Optimizer scenario 528
Selecting a global line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario 529
Selecting a special status rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario 530
RFx optimization rules 531
RFx Line Item Rules & Allocations page 534
Entering and editing RFx line item allocations 535
Selecting an individual line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario
536
Adding line item bundles in an RFx Optimizer scenario 537
Deleting line item bundles from an RFx Optimizer scenario 538
Deleting rules and auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx
Optimizer scenario 539
Deleting auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx Optimizer
scenario 540
RFx toolbar functions 541

xvi Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 RFx Document toolbar button functions 543
Canceling an RFx 544
Importing an RFx template 545
Exporting an RFx template 547
RFx Setup: General page 548
RFx Setup: Scoring page 549
RFx Setup: Pricing Model page 550
Specifying tiered pricing for RFx line items 552
RFx Setup: Delivery Info page 553
RFx Setup: Line Item Specifications page 554
RFx Setup: Item Specification dialog box 555
Adding an RFx line item specification 556
RFx Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page 557
Adding an RFx vendor-entered attribute 558
RFx Setup: Groups page 559
Assigning RFx line items and suppliers to display groups 560
RFx Setup: Notifications page 561
Setting RFx email notifications 562
RFx Actions toolbar button functions 563
Creating a new RFx round 564
Specifying suppliers for a new RFx round 566
Locking or retiring a question or a section in a new RFx round 567
Specifying line items for a new RFx round 568
Printing an RFx supplier preview 569
Printing an RFx 570
Printing an RFx response 571
Creating an auction from an RFx 572
Creating a master agreement from an RFx 573
Closing collaborative question scoring for an RFx 575
Reopening collaborative question scoring for an RFx 576
Publishing collaborative question scores for an RFx 577
RFx Reports toolbar button functions 578

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xvii

 Viewing an RFx report 579
RFx Vendor Response Status report 581
RFx Vendor Response Progress report 582
RFx Specification IDs report 583
Exporting RFx questions to an Excel file 584
RFx Change Phase toolbar button functions 585
Changing an RFx phase 586
Quick Reference: Setting up Collaborative RFx Question Scoring 588

BOMs 591
Bill of Materials List page 592
Creating a BOM 593
Editing a BOM 594
BOM Header page 595
Changing the revision level of a BOM 596
BOM Materials page 597
Adding a bill of materials to a BOM 598
Editing a bill of materials added to a BOM 599
Adding a material to a BOM 600
Editing a material added to a BOM 601

Library Options 603

Reports 605

Contract Management 607

Master Agreements 609
Master Agreements List page 610
Creating a master agreement 612
Creating a master agreement from a template 614
Editing a master agreement 616
Creating a master agreement template 618
Editing a master agreement template 620
Master Agreements Header page 622

xviii Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Adding master agreement header information 625
Master Agreements Schedule page 626
Adding a schedule to a master agreement 628
Specifying a view for master agreement schedule events 629
Master Agreements Schedule Settings page 630
Master Agreements Schedule Tracking page 632
Master Agreements Schedule Dependents page 634
Master Agreements Vendor Info page 635
Selecting a primary supplier contact for a master agreement 636
Adding other supplier contacts to a master agreement 637
Field help for Master Agreements Order Contact dialog box 638
Agreements page 639
Creating an agreement 640
Editing an agreement 642
Master Agreements Line Items page 644
Specifying a line item view for a master agreement 645
Adding a line item to a master agreement 648
Adding a material to a master agreement 649
Master Agreements Line Item Detail page 650
Master Agreements Line Item Terms page 651
Editing a line item in a master agreement 654
Editing a material in a master agreement 655
Master Agreements Terms page 656
Adding a master agreement term 658
Adding a master agreement rebate 659
Adding a master agreement penalty 660
Adding an additional term to a master agreement 661
Field help for Master Agreements Terms dialog box 662
Master Agreements Audits page 663
Adding a master agreement audit 664
Field help for Master Agreements Audit Detail dialog box 665
Master Agreements Performance page 666
Adding a performance metric to a master agreement 667

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xix

 Field help for Master Agreements Performance Period dialog box 668
Field help for the Master Agreement Performance Period Detail dialog
box 669
Master Agreements Savings page 671
Adding savings metrics to a master agreement 672
Field help for the Master Agreement Savings Value dialog box 673
Master Agreements Accounting page 675
Master Agreements Contract Documents page 676
Adding a contract document to a master agreement 677
Controlling contract document versions in a master agreement 678
Master Agreements Contract Documents Details page 680
Comparing contract document versions in a master agreement 682
Master agreement toolbar functions 683
Master Agreement Document toolbar button functions 685
Canceling an agreement or a master agreement 686
Closing an agreement or a master agreement 687
Master Agreement Setup: Pricing Model page 688
Specifying tiered pricing for master agreement line items 690
Master Agreement Setup: Delivery Info page 691
Master Agreement Setup: Line Item Specifications page 692
Master Agreement Setup: Item Specification dialog box 693
Adding a master agreement line item specification 694
Master Agreement Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page 695
Adding a master agreement vendor-entered attribute 696
Master Agreement Actions toolbar button functions 697
Creating an RFx from a master agreement 698
Generating a contract from a master agreement 699
Master Agreement Reports toolbar button functions 701
Viewing a report for a master agreement or agreement 702
Master Agreement/ Agreement Spend Detail report 704
Master Agreement/ Agreement Line Item Spend report 706
Master Agreement/ Agreement Spend Status report 708
Master Agreement/ Agreement Unit Price Error Summary report 710

xx Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Master Agreement/ Agreement Unit Price Errors report 713
Master Agreement/ Agreement Cover Page report 715
Master Agreement/ Agreement Line Item Spend Status report 718
Master Agreement Change Phase toolbar button functions 720

Contract Generation 721

Contract Clause List page 722
Creating a contract clause 723
Editing a contract clause 724
Contract Clause Header page 726
Adding a contract clause document to a clause 728
Adding variables to a contract clause document 729
Contract Clause toolbar functions 730
Revising a contract clause for versioning 731
Changing a contract clause phase 732
Searching for contract components and documents that use a clause
733
Globally replacing a contract clause 734
Globally removing a contract clause 735
Contract Section List page 736
Creating a contract section 737
Globally replacing a contract section 738
Globally removing a contract section 739
Contract Section Header page 740
Contract Section Clauses page 742
Adding a clause to a contract section 743
Contract Section toolbar functions 744
Revising a contract section for versioning 745
Changing a contract section phase 746
Searching for all contract components and documents that use a sec-
tion 747
Contract Document Template List page 748
Creating a contract document template 749
Contract Document Template Header page 751
Contract Document Template Sections page 752

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xxi

 Adding a section to a contract document template 753
Contract Document Template toolbar functions 754
Revising a contract document template for versioning 755
Generating a contract document from a template 756
Changing a contract document template phase 757
Contract Generation Phases Header page 758
Adding a contract generation phase 760
Editing a contract generation phase 761
Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page 762
Adding a contract generation variable 764
Field help for Contract Generation Variable Definition dialog box 765
Quick Reference: Creating a contract document 768

Vendor Management 771

Vendors 773
Vendors List page 774
Searching for a supplier by name, supplier contact, or category 776
Searching for a supplier from a list 777
Exporting supplier records 778
Creating a supplier record 779
Editing a supplier record 780
Vendors Header page 781
Vendors Addresses page 783
Adding a supplier address 784
Vendors Details page 785
Adding supplier details 788
Vendors Categories page 789
Adding an internal and external category to a supplier record 790
Editing an internal and external category for a supplier record 791
Vendors Contacts page 792
Adding a supplier contact 793
Editing a supplier contact 794

xxii Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Enabling login as a supplier contact: contact impersonation 795
Logging in as a supplier contact 796
Vendors Contact page 797
Vendors Account Management page 798
Vendors Security page 799
Vendors Relationships page 800
Adding supplier relationship information 801
Editing supplier relationship information 802
Vendors Scorecards page 803
Adding a supplier scorecard 804
Editing a supplier scorecard 806
Entering scores in a supplier scorecard 807
Vendors SRM Activities page 808
Adding an SRM activity to a supplier record 809
Importing SRM activities from a library 810
Duplicating an SRM activity 811
Field help for SRM Activity dialog box 812
Vendor toolbar functions 814
Viewing a supplier report 815
Summary of Vendor Activity (12 Months) report 816
Vendor Scorecard report 820
SRM Activity by Vendor report 823

Registration 824
Vendors Registration List page 825
Enabling a supplier to submit a registration request 826
Accepting or denying a supplier registration request 827
Vendors Modification List page 828
Accepting or denying a supplier modification request 829

Performance 830
All Analysis 831

XPress 833

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xxiii

Internal Customer XPress 836
XPress Internal Customer Workbench page 837
Creating an Internal Customer XPress request 838
Editing an Internal Customer XPress request 840
Viewing current Internal Customer XPress requests 841
Viewing closed Internal Customer XPress requests 842

CSR XPress 843

XPress CSR Workbench page 844
Performing an internal review on an XPress request 845

Buyer XPress 846

XPress Requests 847
XPress Request List page: Requests 848
Creating an XPress request 849
Editing an XPress request 850
XPress Request Header page 851
Field help for XPress Request Line Item dialog box 853
XPress Request Bidding page 854
Reviewing bids for an XPress request 855
Awarding an XPress request 856
XPress Request Awards page 857
XPress request toolbar functions 858
Creating an XPress request PDF file 859
Opening an XPress request for bidding 860
XPress Request List page: Templates 861
Creating an XPress request template 862
Editing an XPress request template 863
XPress Request Template Header page 865
XPress Request Template Schedule page 867
XPress Request Template Specifications page 868
Adding specifications to an XPress request template 869
Field help for Line Item Specification in XPress Request Template di-
alog box 870
XPress Request Template Price Components page 871

xxiv Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Adding price components to an XPress request template 872
XPress Request Template Accounting page 873
XPress Request Type List page 874
Creating an XPress request type 876
Editing an XPress request type 877
XPress Request Type page 878
XPress Reports 881
XPress Request Activity by Group report 882
XPress Awards by Vendor and Category report 884
XPress Library 886

Analysis 887
Analysis page 888
Generating an analytic report 889
Viewing a bookmarked report 890
Editing an analytic report bookmark 891
Analysis Bookmark Summary page 892
Analytic report display page 893
Bookmarking an analytic report 894

Spend Analysis reports 895

Commodity Spend reports 896
Cumulative Spend by Commodity report 897
Cumulative Spend by Selected Commodity report 899
Spend by Commodity Over Time report 901
Spend by Selected Commodity Over Selected Time report 903
Spend by Commodity Over Organization report 905
Spend by Selected Commodity Over Selected Organization report
907
Top Spend by Commodity report 909
Top Spend by Selected Commodity report 911
Spend by Vendor for Selected Commodity report 913
Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Commodity report 914

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xxv

 Top Spend by Commodity in Organization report 915
Top Spend by Selected Commodity in Organization report 917
Spend by Vendor for Commodity in Organization report 919
Vendor Spend reports 920
Cumulative Spend by Vendor report 922
Cumulative Spend by Selected Vendor report 924
Spend by Vendor Over Time report 926
Spend by Selected Vendor Over Selected Time report 928
Top Spend by Vendor report 930
Top Spend by Selected Vendor report 932
Spend by Commodity for Selected Vendor report 934
Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Vendor report 935
Top Spend by Vendor in Organization report 936
Top Spend by Selected Vendor in Organization report 938
Spend by Commodity for Vendor in Organization report 940
Spend by Vendor for Commodity report 941
Spend by Vendor for Selected Commodity report 942
Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Commodity report 943
Spend with Non-Approved Vendors Over Time report 944
Spend with Non-Approved Vendors Over Selected Time report 946
Spend by Vendor for Selected Vendor Status report 947
Organizational Spend reports 948
Cumulative Spend by Organization report 949
Cumulative Spend by Selected Organization report 951
Spend by Organization Over Time report 953
Spend by Selected Organization Over Selected Time report 955
Top Spend by Organization report 957
Top Spend by Selected Organization report 959
Spend by Vendor for Selected Organization report 961
Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Organization report 962
Spend by Commodity for Selected Organization report 963
Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Organization report 964
Geographical Spend reports 965

xxvi Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Cumulative Spend by Geography report 966
Cumulative Spend by Selected Geography report 968
Spend by Geography Over Time report 970
Spend by Selected Geography Over Selected Time report 972
Top Spend by Geography report 974
Top Spend by Selected Geography report 976
Spend by Commodity for Selected Geography report 978
Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Geography report 979
Accounts Payable Type Spend reports 980
Cumulative Spend by Accounts Payable Type report 981
Cumulative Spend by Selected Accounts Payable Type report 983
Spend by Accounts Payable Type Over Time report 985
Spend by Accounts Payable Type Over Selected Time report 987
Top Spend by Accounts Payable Type report 989
Top Spend by Selected Accounts Payable Type report 991
Spend by Vendor for Selected Accounts Payable Type report 993
Cost Center Spend reports 994
Cumulative Spend by Cost Center report 995
Cumulative Spend by Selected Cost Center report 997
Spend by Cost Center Over Time report 999
Spend by Selected Cost Center Over Time report 1001
Top Spend by Cost Center report 1003
Top Spend by Selected Cost Center report 1004
Spend by Vendor for Selected Cost Center report 1006
Sourcing Recommendation reports 1007
High Fragmentation Sourcing Opportunity report 1008
Spend by Commodity for Selected Vendor report 1010
Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Vendor report 1011
Compliance reports 1012
Spend Under Contract report 1013

Process Analysis reports 1014

Cycle Time reports 1015
Category Project Status report 1016

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xxvii

 Project Status Summary report 1019
Project Cycle Time Summary by Internal Category report 1021
Project Cycle Time Summary by External Category report 1023
RFx Cycle Time Summary by Internal Category report 1025
RFx Cycle Time Summary by External Category report 1026
Exception Analysis reports 1027
Auctions with Insufficient Bidders report 1028
RFxs with Insufficient Bidders report 1029
Master Agreements with Overdue Audits Summary report 1030
Master Agreements with Performance Metrics Due report 1032
Master Agreements with Low Performance - Summary report 1033
Workflow Analysis reports 1035
User Workload report 1036
Workflows Completed by Time Period report 1037
Workflow Cycle Time report 1039
Work Item Cycle Time by User report 1043

Sourcing Analysis reports 1044

Activity Analysis reports 1045
System Document Activity Summary report 1047
Global Impact report 1049
My Group’s Projects report 1053
Projects by Sponsor report 1054
Project Activity by Phase report 1056
Quarterly Summary of Value report 1059
RFx Award Summary by Vendor Status report 1060
Auctions and RFxs Completed by Month report 1062
Upcoming and Expired Master Agreements and Agreements report 1064
Search All Automatic Renewal Master Agreements report 1066
RFx Vendor Award Summary Breakdown report 1067
RFx Summary Status report 1068
Top Category Awards by Period report 1069
Top Supplier Awards by Period report 1070
Award Analysis reports 1071

xxviiiConfidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Agreement Item Pricing by Organization and Plant report 1073
Agreement Item Pricing by Vendor and Plant report 1075
Item Spend versus Award report 1077
Item Standard Cost Savings Projections report 1079
Item Standard Cost Savings Projections by Vendor report 1081
Material Analysis report 1083
Unawarded Items with Volumes report 1084
RFx Proposal Award Reasons Summary report 1085
Master Agreement Analysis reports 1086
Agreement Savings Impact for Owner report 1087
Master Agreements in my Cost Center(s) report 1089
Agreements in my Cost Center(s) report 1090
Cost Center Master Agreements - Canceled or Closed report 1091
Cost Center Agreements - Canceled or Closed report 1092
Search reports 1093
Master Agreement Advanced Search report 1094

Document Extract reports 1095

RFx Summary Extract report 1096
Auction Summary Extract report 1098
Project Summary Extract report 1100

Vendor Analysis reports 1102

My Scorecards with Unsatisfactory Ratings report 1103
Incomplete Scorecards report 1105

SRM Explorer 1107

SRM Explorer data reporting and analysis fundamentals 1109
Selecting data in a SRM Explorer data cube 1111
Undoing mistakes in a SRM Explorer data cube 1112
Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube 1113
Selecting your experience level in SRM Explorer 1114
Setting General preferences in SRM Explorer 1115
Setting Rows preferences in SRM Explorer 1116
Setting Columns preferences in SRM Explorer 1117

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xxix

 Setting Bar Chart preferences in SRM Explorer 1118
Setting Pie Chart preferences in SRM Explorer 1119
Setting Line Graph preferences in SRM Explorer 1120
Adjusting row and column sizes in SRM Explorer 1121
Maximizing your work area in SRM Explorer 1122
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer 1123
Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer 1124
Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer 1125
Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer 1126
Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer 1127
Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer 1129
Showing totals in SRM Explorer 1131
Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer 1132
Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer 1133
Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer 1134
Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer 1135
Finding data in SRM Explorer 1136
Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer 1137
About SRM Explorer tables 1138
Showing data as cell values in SRM Explorer 1139
Showing data as % of column total in SRM Explorer 1140
Showing data as % of row total in SRM Explorer 1141
Showing data as % of grand total in SRM Explorer 1142
Showing cell values with % of total in SRM Explorer 1143
Exception highlighting in SRM Explorer 1144
About SRM Explorer charts and graphs 1146
Working with a vertical bar chart in SRM Explorer 1147
Working with a horizontal bar chart in SRM Explorer 1148
Working with a pie chart in SRM Explorer 1149
Working with a line graph in SRM Explorer 1150
About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer 1151
Filtering by value in SRM Explorer 1153
SRM Explorer filter criteria 1154

xxx Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Filtering out blank or zero values in SRM Explorer 1155
Filtering by pattern in SRM Explorer 1156
Filtering by relative time periods in SRM Explorer 1158
Editing a filter in SRM Explorer 1160
Canceling a filter in SRM Explorer 1161
Hiding selected rows and columns in SRM Explorer 1162
Hiding unselected rows and columns in SRM Explorer 1163
Canceling hiding in SRM Explorer 1164
About sorting SRM Explorer data 1165
Sorting highest to lowest or lowest to highest in SRM Explorer 1166
Showing highest 10 or lowest 10 in SRM Explorer 1167
Custom sorting in SRM Explorer 1168
Canceling sorting in SRM Explorer 1169
About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer 1170
Replacing a category in SRM Explorer 1171
Adding a category in SRM Explorer 1172
Removing a category in SRM Explorer 1173
Moving a category in SRM Explorer 1174
Switching two categories in SRM Explorer 1175
Swapping rows and columns in SRM Explorer 1176
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns 1177
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer 1179
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer 1180
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer 1181
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer 1182
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer 1183
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer 1184
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer 1185
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer 1186
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer 1187
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer 1189
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer 1190
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer 1191

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xxxi

 Editing calculation in SRM Explorer 1193
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer 1194
About saving data in SRM Explorer 1195
Saving as Adobe PDF (.pdf) in SRM Explorer 1196
Saving as Microsoft Excel (.xls) in SRM Explorer 1197
Saving as Microsoft Word (.doc) in SRM Explorer 1198
Saving as Tab-Separated Values (.tsv) in SRM Explorer 1199
Saving as Comma-Separated Values (.csv) in SRM Explorer 1200
Exporting detail data to spreadsheet in SRM Explorer 1201

Setup 1203
Setup Overview 1205
Contexts 1207

System Setup 1209

Queries and Reports 1210
Query Definitions 1214
Creating a custom query definition 1215
Creating a query definition for a cube profile 1217
Editing a custom query definition 1219
Testing a custom query definition 1221
Query Definition Query page 1222
Field help for query definition: Query page 1224
Query Definition Result Fields page 1226
Field help for query definition: Result Fields page 1228
Field help for query definition: Query Results dialog box 1229
Query Definition Filter Prompts page 1235
Field help for query definition: Query Parameters dialog box 1237
Query Definition Chart Definition page 1241
Field help for query definition: Chart Definition dialog box 1242
Query Definition Access List page 1246
Query Definition advanced options 1247
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display 1248

xxxii Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Query definition: token substitution 1251
Query definition: common query patterns 1260
Query definition: stored procedures and queries 1266
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL 1270
Query Groups 1272
Editing a query group for a list or picker 1273
Query Group page 1275
Query Group Queries page 1277
Field help for query group: Query Reference dialog box 1278
Query Group Access List page 1279
Query Groups advanced options 1280
Query groups: tailoring the report query results layout 1281
Query groups: defining the default PDF page layout for a list or re-
port 1284
Cube Profiles 1286
Creating a cube profile 1287
Refreshing dimensions and measures in a cube profile 1288
Cube Profile page 1289
Cube Profile Dimensions page 1291
Cube Profile Measures page 1293
Cube Profile Access List page 1295
Reports 1296
Creating a report 1297
Report page 1299
Report Elements page 1300
Reports Page Layout page 1301
Reports Access List page 1302
Reports advanced options 1303
Reports: exporting query results to Excel using a workbook template
1304
Analysis Reports Setup 1305
Editing the analysis reports setup 1306
Browse Full Schema 1307
Browse Extension Schema 1308

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential

 Master Data 1309
Internal Categories 1310
Creating an internal category 1311
Editing an internal category 1312
Materials 1313
Creating a material 1314
Editing a material 1315
Metrics 1316
Creating a metric 1317
Editing a metric 1318
Numbering Table Definitions 1319
Creating a numbering table definition 1320
Editing a numbering table definition 1322
Field help for Numbering Table page 1323
Payment Term 1326
Creating a payment term 1327
Editing a payment term 1328
Reporting Calendars 1329
Creating a reporting calendar 1330
Editing a reporting calendar 1331
Time Periods 1332
Creating a time period 1333
Editing a time period 1334
Units of Measure 1335
Creating a unit of measure 1337
Editing a unit of measure 1338
Value List Types and Values 1339
Creating a value list type and values 1340
Editing a value list type and values 1341
Adding a custom phase as a value list value 1342
Custom Master Data 1343
Creating custom master data 1344
Currencies 1345

xxxivConfidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Creating a currency 1346
Editing a currency 1347
Currency Conversions 1348
Creating a currency conversion 1349
Editing a currency conversion 1350
External Categories 1351
Creating an external category 1352
Editing an external category 1353
Organization and Accounting Info 1354
Companies 1355
Creating a company 1356
Editing a company 1358
Adding company information to a new company 1360
Editing company information for a company 1362
Creating an organizational unit for a new company 1364
Editing an organizational unit for a company 1366
Adding shared links to a new company 1368
Editing shared links for a company 1369
Adding shared attachments to a new company 1370
Editing shared attachments for a company 1372
Locations 1374
Creating a location 1375
Editing a location 1376
Plants 1377
Creating a plant 1378
Editing a plant 1379
Cost Centers 1380
Creating a cost center 1381
Editing a cost center 1382
General Ledger Accounts 1383
Creating a general ledger account 1384
Editing a general ledger account 1385
Entities 1386

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xxxv

 Creating an entity 1387
Editing an entity 1388
Accounts Payable Type 1389
Creating an accounts payable type 1390
Editing an accounts payable type 1391
Geography 1392
Creating a geography 1393
Editing a geography 1394
Activities 1395
Creating an activity 1396
Editing an activity 1397
Workbench Setup 1398
Desktop Channel 1399
Creating a Workbench channel 1401
Editing a Workbench channel 1402
Iframe Configurations 1403
Creating an Iframe configuration 1405
Editing an Iframe configuration 1406
Workbench Page 1407
Workbench Template 1408
Creating a Workbench page in Setup 1410
Editing a Workbench page in Setup 1411
Creating a Workbench page template 1413
Editing a Workbench page template 1415
Sharing a Workbench page 1417
Setting a Workbench page layout 1419
Setting up CPO Central 1421
Field help for Workbench template Layout page 1423
User Workbench configurations 1424
Query and report Workbench channels 1426
Page Manager 1429
Managing Workbench pages in Setup 1430
Global Discussion Manager 1431

xxxviConfidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Creating a Global Discussion Manager 1432
Editing a Global Discussion Manager 1433
Scheduled Tasks 1434
Scheduled Tasks 1435
Creating a scheduled task 1436
Creating a Report Execution Task 1437
Creating a Report Results Cleanup Task 1438
Creating a Data Import Monitor Task 1439
Field help for the Data Import Monitor scheduled task 1440
Scheduled Task Types 1442
Editing a scheduled task type 1443
Configuration 1444
Extension Definition 1445
Creating an extension definition 1447
Editing an extension definition 1449
Field help for extension definition: Extension page 1451
Field help for extension definition: Attributes page 1452
Field help for extension definition: Extension Attributes page 1453
Field help for extension definition: Default Value page 1457
Field help for extension definition: Collection List page 1458
Extension definition and vendor management 1459
Extension definition and importing data 1460
Extension Reference Types 1462
Creating an extension reference type 1463
Editing an extension reference type 1464
Directory Configuration 1465
Creating a directory configuration 1466
Editing a directory configuration 1468
Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page 1470
Field help for directories: Properties page 1475
Field help for directories: Attributes Mapping page 1477
Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios 1479
Directory configuration: LDAP searching operations 1481

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential

 Directory configuration: SSL support 1484
Directory configuration: password management 1485
Directory configuration: sample directory configurations 1487
Directory configuration: customizing the authentication mechanism
1493
Cluster Configuration 1498
Creating a cluster configuration 1500
Editing a cluster configuration 1502
Field help for cluster configuration: Cluster Info page 1503
Cluster configuration: example configurations 1505
System Properties 1508
Creating a system property 1511
Editing a system property 1512
Viewing all system properties 1513
Integration API 1514
Editing an integration API configuration 1515
Mail Message Templates 1516
Creating and customizing a mail message template 1519
Editing a mail message template 1521
Field help for Mail Message Template Summary page 1522
Mail Configurations 1524
Creating a mail configuration 1525
Editing a mail configuration 1526
Field help for Mail Configuration Summary page 1527
Enterprise Dictionary Words 1529
Creating an enterprise dictionary word 1530
Editing an enterprise dictionary word 1531
Cache Configuration 1532
Editing a cache configuration 1533
Customization: Rebuilding the EAR file 1534
User Interface 1535
Language Packs 1536
Creating a language pack 1537
Localized Resources 1538

xxxviiiConfidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Creating a localized resource in Setup 1540
Creating a localized resource on the fly 1541
Editing a localized resource 1542
Field help for Localized Resource Summary page 1543
System Toolbars 1544
Page Customization 1545
Customizing a page element 1546
Field help for Page Customization Summary page 1549
Toolbar Customizations 1553
Creating a toolbar customization 1555
Style Sets 1557
Creating a style set 1558
Editing a style set 1559
Field help for Style Set Summary page 1560
Style Configurations 1562
Creating a style configuration 1563
Themes 1564
Creating a theme 1566
Selecting a theme for an enterprise 1567
File Attachment Container 1568
Workflow 1569
Workflow Definitions 1570
Creating a workflow definition 1571
Viewing currently active workflow processes 1572
Current Workflow Processes report 1573
Field Help for Process Template dialog box 1574
Editing a workflow process template 1576
Workflow Process Owners 1578
Creating a workflow process owner 1579
Associating a workflow process owner with a context 1581
Canceling a workflow action 1582
Quick Reference: Setting up workflow in a sourcing document 1584
Integration 1588

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential

 Integration API 1589
Export Results 1590
Script Definition 1591

Document Setup 1593

General 1594
Event Terms Templates 1595
Creating an event terms template 1596
Editing an event terms template 1597
Category Manager 1598
Creating a category manager 1599
Editing a category manager 1600
Document Report Configuration 1601
Creating a document report configuration 1602
Editing a document report configuration 1603
Document Security Templates 1604
Creating a document security template 1607
Editing a document security template 1608
Document Link Definitions 1610
Creating a document link definition 1611
Editing a document link definition 1612
Collaborator Role Definitions 1613
Creating a collaborator role definition 1615
Editing a collaborator role definition 1616
Attachment Library 1617
Creating an attachment library 1618
Master Agreements 1619
Master Agreement Types 1620
Creating a master agreement type 1624
Editing a master agreement type 1625
Master Agreement Terms 1626
Creating a master agreement term 1627
Editing a master agreement term 1628
Master Agreement Schedule Library 1629

xl Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Creating a master agreement schedule 1630
Editing a master agreement schedule 1631
RFx 1632
RFx Types 1633
Creating an RFx type 1637
Editing an RFx type 1638
RFx System Answer Sources 1639
Creating an RFx system answer source 1640
Editing an RFx system answer source 1641
RFx Questions Library 1642
Creating RFx library questions 1643
Editing RFx library questions 1644
RFx Schedule Library 1645
Creating an RFx schedule 1646
Editing an RFx schedule 1647
RFx Information Library 1648
Creating RFx information 1649
Editing RFx information 1650
RFx Table Design Library 1651
Creating an RFx table design 1653
Editing an RFx table design 1654
Vendors 1655
Vendor Scorecard Definition 1656
Creating a vendor scorecard definition 1657
Editing a vendor scorecard definition 1659
Metric Entry 1661
Creating a metric entry 1662
Editing a metric entry 1663
Vendor Management Configuration 1664
Editing the vendor management configuration 1665
SRM Activity Library 1666
Creating an SRM activity library 1667
Auctions 1668

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xli

 Auction Types 1669
Creating an auction type 1673
Projects 1674
Project Types 1675
Creating a project type 1677
Form Library 1678
Creating a project library form component 1679
Editing a project library form component 1680
Project Library Schedule 1681
Creating a project library schedule component 1682
Editing a project library schedule component 1683
Projects Configurable Phase Definition 1684
Creating a project configurable phase definition 1687
Contract Generation 1688
Demand Aggregation 1689
Demand Types 1690
Creating a demand aggregation type 1691
Editing a demand aggregation type 1692
XPress 1693
XPress Request Types 1695
XPress Request Specification Libraries 1696
Creating an XPress request specification library 1697
Editing an XPress request specification library 1698
XPress Request Templates 1699
XPress Self-Registration Configuration 1700
Creating an XPress self-registration configuration 1701
Editing an XPress self-registration configuration 1702
Contract Documents 1703
Contract Document Types 1704
Creating a contract document type 1706
Contract Document Phase Configuration 1707
Creating a contract document phase configuration 1711
Editing a contract generation phase configuration 1713

xlii Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration 1715
Accounts and Security 1716
Change Password 1721
Buy-side User Accounts 1722
Creating a buy-side user account 1723
Editing a buy-side user account 1725
Field help for User Account: Account Properties page 1727
Field help for User Account: Account Management page 1729
Field help for User Account: Security page 1731
Security Profiles 1733
Creating a security profile 1738
Editing a security profile 1740
Configuring navigation bar buttons in a security profile 1741
Configuring calendar event creation in a security profile 1742
Restricting access to a security profile 1743
Groups 1744
Creating a group 1745
Editing a group 1746
User Dictionary Words 1747
Creating a user dictionary word 1748
Editing a user dictionary word 1749
System Management 1750
System Information 1751
Viewing system information 1752
Editing system information 1753
Field help for Service Registration page 1754
Field help for Cache/DB page 1755
Field help for Logs page 1757
Field help for Daemons page 1760
Registered Servers 1761
Creating a service registration 1762
Editing a service registration 1763
Administrative Reports 1764

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xliii

 Alert Log 1765
Creating an alert 1766
Editing an alert 1767
Events 1768
Creating an event 1769
Editing an event 1770
User Activity 1771
Viewing a user activity report 1772
Background Task Status 1773
Viewing background task status 1774
Queued Messages 1775
Viewing queued messages 1776
Processed Messages 1777
Viewing processed messages 1778
Security Profile Usage Summary 1779
Viewing a security profile usage summary 1780
Pending Upgrade Issues 1781
Viewing pending upgrade issues 1782
Spend Environment Management 1783
Spend Environment Configuration 1784
Creating a spend environment configuration 1785
Editing a spend environment configuration 1786
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Header page 1787
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Actions page 1789
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Dimensions page 1791
Initialize Spend Environment 1793
Initializing the spend environment 1794
Convert Master Data: Update Spend Dimensions 1795
Converting master data to dimension data: updating spend dimen-
sions 1796
Field help for converting master data: Action page 1798
Import Spend Data 1800
Importing spend data 1801
Duplicating a spend import action document 1802

xliv Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Resolving unrecognized dimension references (invalid IDs) in spend
data 1803
Spend data import file format 1804
Spend date format in imported spend data 1809
Remove Spend Data 1811
Removing spend data 1812
Remove Spend Environment 1813
Removing the spend environment 1814
Dimension ID Synonym Maps 1815
Creating a dimension ID synonym map 1816
Editing a dimension ID synonym map 1817
Importing a dimension ID synonym map 1818
Dimension ID Synonym Map Sets 1821
Creating a dimension ID synonym map set 1822
Editing a dimension ID synonym map set 1823
Importing a dimension ID synonym map set 1824
Reporting Considerations 1825
Selectivity of date range report parameters 1826
Providing custom attributes of spend data 1828
Spend environment backup and recovery 1829
Import Data 1831
Importing data from a CSV file 1832
Viewing imported data results 1833
Installing language packs 1834
Importing agreements 1836
Export Data 1838
Creating an export package 1840
Exporting an existing export package 1841
Exporting objects for migration 1842

SRM Glossary 1845

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential xlv

xlvi Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help
Welcome to Frictionless SRM
Welcome to a better way of doing business. Frictionless® SRM is an enterprise
software solution that automates the entire sourcing process, including spend and
compliance, enterprise sourcing tasks, contract management, and supplier
management. It lets your organization create a disciplined process for the way you buy
goods and services.

Confidential 1
2 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help
CPO Central

To achieve sustainable performance, leaders in procurement, supply chain and

information technology need to understand the full extent of their activities and
performance. The CPO Central module in Frictionless® SRM provides a comprehensive
executive dashboard that goes beyond basic reporting and into a real-time view of the
all activities that pertain to your supply base.
CPO Central is a "splash page" that a CPO sees after logging into Frictionless SRM. This
page gives you a snapshot of purchasing activity, displaying a number of reports that
allow you to quickly understand how your organization is performing against defined
goals such as annual savings. CPO Central reports can be customized and other reports
can be added by a system administrator.

The CPO Central module enables you to:

` Measure best practice adoption and ensure policy compliance
` Track individual and group performance
` Gain visibility into all key activities

A set of standard reports is available on the CPO Central dashboard. These reports are
organized under the following tabs:
` Business Process Management
` Performance Analysis
` Portfolio Management

Click a tab to see the reports for that tab. Click a report name to view the report.

To see the Frictionless SRM Workbench and get access to all SRM options, click the
FrictionlessSRM link at the top of the page.

Related Topics
Analysis page

Confidential 3
 CPO Central

4 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench

The SRM Workbench allows relevant purchasing data to be stored and viewed in one
location and provides easy access to the entire SRM software. You can readily see
sourcing events and related data, go directly to the various sourcing modules and
sourcing documents, and communicate with suppliers.
The Workbench is made up of a number of channels, each of which shows a particular
type of sourcing information. A channel can also show a pre-selected website that
automatically updates information on a periodic basis.
From the Workbench, you can initiate discussions to share information with
collaborators and suppliers. You can view a calendar that highlights dates on which you
have tasks and view other types of information, such as a list of events for the current
day.
You can customize the Workbench by specifying the channels to appear and by setting
the column layout. You can have more than one Workbench page. You can create and
edit basic Workbench pages directly in the Workbench. You can access more
Workbench creation and editing options in Setup.
Workbench pages can be shared in Setup. Shared Workbench pages can also be edited,
but only by the individual who created them.

Note: Each Workbench channel has its own set of parameters. Parameters fine tune the
content and its display. Each channel has its own default parameter values. In general,
you should not change these values. Your system administrator should edit most of the
parameter values. Channels in which you can edit some parameters are the Calendar,
Links, Currency Exchange Rates, Events, To Do List, and Favorite Sites channels.

Confidential 5
Workbench page Workbench

Workbench page
Note: Each Workbench channel has its own set of parameters. Parameters fine tune the
content and its display. Each channel has its own default parameter values. In general,
you should not change these values. Your system administrator should edit most of the
parameter values. Channels in which you can edit some parameters are the Calendar,
Links, Currency Exchange Rates, Events, To Do List, and Favorite Sites channels.

In each channel on a Workbench page, you can perform one or more tasks.

In the Calendar channel, you can:

` Add a custom event, such as a note about an upcoming professional conference
` Specify the types of events to appear in the channel
` Specify the maximum number of events for each event type
` Select a date for which to view events in the Events channel
` View a list of events for a date in a flyover

In the Links channel, you can:

` Visit a site
` Create and edit links
` Reorder links

In the Master Agreements Search channel, you can:

` Search for a specific master agreement
` Search for all master agreements for a specific supplier

In the Currency Exchange Rates channel, you can:

` Select a base currency
` Add a currency to compare against the base currency and view the exchange rates

In the Tech Support channel, you can:

` Link to Online Help
` Contact Technical Support by sending email, calling, or linking

In the Events channel, you can:

` Link to a sourcing event for the current date
` Link to a sourcing event for a date other than the current one
` Add a custom event

6 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Workbench page

` Specify the types of events to appear in the channel

In the Buyer Alerts channel, you can:

` Access a sourcing document referenced by an alert

In the To Do List channel, you can:

` Link to a list of sourcing events within a category, such as My RFxs Open for
Bidding, or to another event category appearing in the channel
` Select the categories of events to appear in the channel

In the Favorite Sites channel, you can:

` Select another site to show in the channel using the Favorites drop-down list or
icons in the Favorite sites channel
` Select another site or group of sites to show in the channel using the Edit function
` Change the height of the channel
` Open a new window for the site currently appearing in the Favorite Sites channel

In the New Discussions channel, you can view new discussions related to a sourcing
document.

In the Global Discussions channel, you can view global discussions unrelated to a
sourcing document.

In the File Sharing channel, you can view files shared within your company or
enterprise.

In the Reports channel, you can view reports related to SRM activities and events.

In the Project Status Summary channel, you can:

` View the current status of all projects to which you have access
` Link to a project
` View a report of a project’s tasks and dates

In the My Workflow Activities channel, you can you can locate and review your
current workflow tasks and open their associated documents.

In the Print XPress for Internal Customers channel, you can get access to the
XPress Internal Customer functionality.

In the My Current XPress Requests, you can view and access current XPress
requests that you created.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 7

Workbench page Workbench

Related Topics
Workbench page
Using the Workbench Calendar channel
Using the Workbench Links channel
Using the Workbench Master Agreements Search channel
Using the Workbench Currency Exchange Rates channel
Using the Workbench Tech Support Channel
Using the Workbench Events channel
Using the Workbench Buyer Alerts channel
Using the Workbench To Do List channel
Using the Workbench Favorite Sites channel
Using the Workbench New Discussions channel
Using the Workbench Global Discussions channel
Using the Workbench File Sharing channel
Using the Workbench Reports channel
Using the Workbench Project Status Summary channel
Using the My Workflow Activities channel

8 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Workbench page

Creating a Workbench page in the Workbench

You can create a basic Workbench page directly in the Workbench.

To create a Workbench page:

1 On the Workbench page, click Add.
2 On the Summary page, fill in general information fields.
3 Select a layout option from the Layout drop-down list.
4 Under Channel Configurations, click one of the following buttons:
■ Add to Column 1
■ Add to Column 2
■ Add to Column 3
5 In the dialog box, check the box for each channel to appear in the selected column.
You can add a channel that does not appear on the Workbench page by default by
checking its box.
6 Click OK.
7 To add channels to other columns, repeat steps 2 through 4.

8 To remove a channel from the Workbench page, click its Trashcan icon .
9 Optionally, reorder channels.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can access more Workbench page creation options in Setup.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Editing a Workbench page in the Workbench
Reordering channels in a column on a Workbench page
Viewing more information for a Workbench channel
Creating a Workbench page in Setup

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 9

Workbench page Workbench

Editing a Workbench page in the Workbench

If you have the appropriate rights, you can edit a Workbench page. You can make basic
Workbench edits directly in the Workbench.

To edit a Workbench page:

1 On the Workbench page, click Edit.
2 On the Summary page, edit general information fields.
3 Select a layout option from the Layout drop-down list.
4 Under Channel Configurations, click one of the following buttons:
■ Add to Column 1
■ Add to Column 2
■ Add to Column 3
5 In the dialog box, check the box for each channel to appear in the selected column.
You can add a channel that does not appear on the Workbench page by default by
checking its box.
6 Click OK.
7 To add channels to other columns, repeat steps 2 through 4.

8 To remove a channel from the Workbench page, click its Trashcan icon .
9 Optionally, reorder channels.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can access more Workbench page options in Setup.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Creating a Workbench page in the Workbench
Reordering channels in a column on a Workbench page
Viewing more information for a Workbench channel
Editing a Workbench page in Setup

10 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Workbench Summary page

Workbench Summary page

On the Summary page, you can:
` Add or edit basic Workbench page information and specify Workbench page layout
options
` Reorder Workbench channels

Related Topics
Workbench page
Creating a Workbench page in the Workbench
Editing a Workbench page in the Workbench
Reordering channels in a column on a Workbench page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 11

Workbench Summary page Workbench

Reordering channels in a column on a Workbench page

1 On the Summary page under Channel Configurations, click Reorder. You see a list
of the channels for all columns.
2 Click the Page icon for a channel and drag the channel to the desired position.
Note: You can also move a channel from one column to another one.
3 Click OK.
4 To move other channels, repeat steps 2 through 4.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Creating a Workbench page in the Workbench
Editing a Workbench page in the Workbench

12 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Workbench Summary page

Viewing more information for a Workbench channel

Some Workbench channels provide a More link that leads you to the Analysis module.
The Analysis module provides a report for the channel and enables you to perform a
number of actions.

To view more information for a channel:

1 In any channel with a More link, click the link. You see the channel report in the
Analysis module.
2 Optionally, do any of the following:
■ View help for the channel report
■ Bookmark the report
■ Export the report as a PDF or CSV file
■ Search for an item in the report

Related Topics
Workbench page
Creating a Workbench page in the Workbench
Editing a Workbench page in the Workbench
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Searching for a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 13

Workbench Summary page Workbench

Managing Workbench pages in the Workbench

Managing your Workbench pages includes reordering, hiding, and showing the pages.

To manage Workbench pages:

1 On the Workbench page, click Manage.
2 On the Summary page, reorder your Workbench pages.
3 Hide or show Workbench pages.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also manage Workbench pages in Setup.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Reordering items in a list
Hiding or showing a Workbench page
Managing Workbench pages in Setup

14 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Workbench Page Manager Summary page

Workbench Page Manager Summary page

On the Summary page, you can:
` Reorder your Workbench pages
` Hide or show Workbench pages

Related Topics
Workbench page
Reordering items in a list
Hiding or showing a Workbench page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 15

Workbench Page Manager Summary page Workbench

Hiding or showing a Workbench page

1 On the Workbench Page Manager Summary page, in the Hide column, check the
box for each Workbench page to hide.
2 In the Hide column, clear the box for each Workbench page to show.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also manage Workbench pages in Setup.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Reordering items in a list
Managing Workbench pages in Setup

16 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Calendar channel

Using the Workbench Calendar channel

The Calendar channel contains a calendar for the current month. This calendar shows
events that are either added automatically from the Events channel or that you add.
The events are specific sourcing events, such as a contract that is up for renewal or an
RFx that is due.

In the Calendar channel, you can:

` Add a custom event, such as a note about an upcoming professional conference
Note: To add an event to the Calendar channel, you must have the appropriate
rights assigned in your Security Profile. Please contact your system administrator for
details.
` Specify the types of events to appear in the channel
` Specify the maximum number of events for each event type
` Select a date for which to view events in the Events channel
` View a list of events for a date in a flyover

Note: Days on which you have events scheduled appear in bold. The current date
appears in gray.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Adding a calendar event in the Calendar channel
Specifying the types of events to appear in the Calendar channel
Specifying the maximum number of events in the Calendar channel
Selecting a date in the Calendar channel to view events
Viewing a list of events in a flyover in the Calendar channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 17

Using the Workbench Calendar channel Workbench

Adding a calendar event in the Calendar channel

To add an event to the Calendar channel, you must have the appropriate rights
assigned in your Security Profile. Please contact your system administrator for details.

To add a calendar event:

1 In the Calendar channel, click Add.
2 In the New Calendar Event dialog box, fill in the fields.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: Except for adding a calendar event, specifying types of events to appear, and
specifying the maximum number of events to appear for each event type, it is strongly
recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the Calendar
channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Specifying the types of events to appear in the Calendar channel
Specifying the maximum number of events in the Calendar channel
Selecting a date in the Calendar channel to view events
Viewing a list of events in a flyover in the Calendar channel

18 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Calendar channel

Specifying the types of events to appear in the Calendar channel

1 In the Calendar channel, click Edit.
2 On the Header page, clear the Use Channel Default Parameters checkbox if it is
checked.
3 In the table under Parameter Values, the Parameter Value column indicates

whether an event type is set to appear in the channel. Click the Edit icon for
the event type to edit.
4 In the dialog box for New Channel Parameter Value in Channel Configuration, do
one of the following:
■ Check a box to select an event type for the channel.
■ Clear a box to remove an event type from the channel.
5 Click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To return to the default event types, check the Use Channel Default
Parameters box.

Note: Except for adding a calendar event, specifying event types, and specifying the
maximum number of events to appear for each event type, it is strongly recommended
that you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the Calendar channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Adding a calendar event in the Calendar channel
Specifying the maximum number of events in the Calendar channel
Selecting a date in the Calendar channel to view events
Viewing a list of events in a flyover in the Calendar channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 19

Using the Workbench Calendar channel Workbench

Specifying the maximum number of events in the Calendar

channel
You can specify the maximum number of events to appear for each event type.

To specify the maximum number of events to appear:

1 In the Calendar channel, click Edit.
2 On the Header page, clear the Use Channel Default Parameters checkbox if it is
checked.

3 Under Parameter Values, click the Edit icon for Maximum Events.
4 In the dialog box for New Channel Parameter Value in Channel Configuration, type a
new number in the Value field.
5 Click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To return to the default number of events, check the Use Channel Default
Parameters box.

Note: Except for adding a calendar event, specifying types of events to appear, and
specifying the maximum number of events to appear for each event type, it is strongly
recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the Calendar
channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Adding a calendar event in the Calendar channel
Specifying the types of events to appear in the Calendar channel
Selecting a date in the Calendar channel to view events
Viewing a list of events in a flyover in the Calendar channel

20 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Calendar channel

Selecting a date in the Calendar channel to view events

The Events channel shows a list of events for a specific date. You can select a date in
the Calendar channel to determine the events that appear in the Events channel.

To select a date to view events:

` In the Calendar channel, click a date. You see the events for that date listed in the
Events channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Adding a calendar event in the Calendar channel
Specifying the types of events to appear in the Calendar channel
Specifying the maximum number of events in the Calendar channel
Viewing a list of events in a flyover in the Calendar channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 21

Using the Workbench Calendar channel Workbench

Viewing a list of events in a flyover in the Calendar channel

Calendar dates that have scheduled events are indicated in bold.

To view a list of events in a flyover:

` In the Calendar channel, move your cursor over any date in bold. You see a flyover
with a list of the events for that date.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Adding a calendar event in the Calendar channel
Specifying the types of events to appear in the Calendar channel
Specifying the maximum number of events in the Calendar channel
Selecting a date in the Calendar channel to view events

22 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Links channel

Using the Workbench Links channel

The Links channel shows links to external websites or to your organization’s intranet.
Links might be to a specific supplier website that you need to visit frequently. Both you
and a system administrator can create links. You can edit and delete only those links
that you create.

In the Links channel, you can:

` Visit a site
` Create and edit links
` Reorder links

Note: Except for creating and reordering links, and editing links you created, it is
strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the
Links channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Visiting a site from the Links channel
Creating a link in the Links channel
Editing a link in the Links channel
Reordering items in a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 23

Using the Workbench Links channel Workbench

Visiting a site from the Links channel

` In the Links channel, click the link for the site to visit.

Note: Except for creating and reordering links, and editing links you created, it is
strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the
Links channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Creating a link in the Links channel
Editing a link in the Links channel
Reordering items in a list

24 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Links channel

Creating a link in the Links channel

Both you and a system administrator can create links. You can edit and delete only
those links that you create.

To create a link:
1 In the Links channel, click Edit.
2 On the Header page under Links, click Add.
3 In the dialog box for New Channel Link in Channel Configuration, fill in the fields.
4 Click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: Except for creating and reordering links, and editing links you created, it is
strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the
Links channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Visiting a site from the Links channel
Editing a link in the Links channel
Reordering items in a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 25

Using the Workbench Links channel Workbench

Editing a link in the Links channel

Both you and a system administrator can create links. You can edit and delete only
those links that you create.

To edit a link:
1 In the Links channel, click Edit.

2 On the Header page under Links, click the Edit icon for the link to edit.
3 In the dialog box for Channel Link in Channel Configuration, edit the fields.
4 Click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: Except for creating and reordering links, and editing links you created, it is
strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the
Links channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Visiting a site from the Links channel
Creating a link in the Links channel
Reordering items in a list

26 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Master Agreements Search channel

Using the Workbench Master Agreements Search channel

The Master Agreements Search channel can show a specific master agreement or all
master agreements for a specific supplier. The search results lead you to the Analysis
module, so that you can analyze and generate reports on some or all master
agreements for the specific supplier.

Note: You can only find a master agreement in the Master Agreements Search channel
if the master agreement owner checked the Summary Published to Search box.

You can search for a master agreement using any of the following criteria for a
document:
` Name
` Description
` Internal Category
` Location
` Supplier Name

In addition, you can search for a master agreement using any of the following line item
criteria:
` Part Number
` Description
` Supplier Part Number
` Category
` Location

In the Master Agreements Search channel, you can:

` Search for a specific master agreement
` Search for all master agreements for a specific supplier

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the Master Agreements Search channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Searching for a master agreement in the Master Agreements Search channel
Searching for all master agreements for a supplier in the Master Agreements Search
channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 27

Using the Workbench Master Agreements Search channel Workbench

Searching for a master agreement in the Master Agreements

Search channel
Note: You can only find a master agreement in the Master Agreements Search channel
if the master agreement owner checked the Summary Published to Search box.

You can search for a master agreement using any of the following criteria for a
document:
` Name
` Description
` Internal Category
` Location
` Supplier Name

You can search for a master agreement using any of the following line item criteria:
` Part Number
` Description
` Supplier Part Number
` Category
` Location

You can search for a master agreement by typing a keyword that appears in the master
agreement. A keyword searches in the titles of master agreements, not in the body.

To search for a master agreement:

1 In the Master Agreements channel in the Search For box, type the search criteria.
2 Click Show.
3 Click a link in the Master Agreement Title column to see the master agreement in
the Analysis module.

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the Master Agreements Search channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Searching for all master agreements for a supplier in the Master Agreements Search
channel

28 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Master Agreements Search channel

Searching for all master agreements for a supplier in the Master

Agreements Search channel
Note: You can only find a master agreement in the Master Agreements Search channel
if the master agreement owner checked the Summary Published to Search box.

1 In the Master Agreements channel in the Search For box, type the name of the
supplier for the master agreements to view.
2 Click Show. You see a list of one or more agreements for the selected supplier.
3 Click a link in the Master Agreement Title column to see the master agreement in
the Analysis module.

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the Master Agreements Search channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Searching for a master agreement in the Master Agreements Search channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 29

Using the Workbench Currency Exchange Rates channel Workbench

Using the Workbench Currency Exchange Rates channel

Exchange rates are used in a sourcing document to compare responses if suppliers use
currencies other than the default currency specified on the Header page of a sourcing
document.
The Currency Exchange Rates channel can show currency exchange rates for two or
more types of currency that are compared to a base currency.

In the Currency Exchange Rates channel, you can:

` Select a base currency
` Add a currency to compare against the base currency and view the exchange rates

Note: Except for selecting a base currency and adding a comparison currency, it is
strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the
Currency Exchange Rates channel.

Field help for the Currency Exchange Rates channel

USD/Unit: USD can be any base currency. Unit refers to any comparison currency.
The exchange rate indicates how many units of the base currency are equal to one unit
of the comparison currency.
Units/USD: Units refer to any comparison currency. USD can be any base currency.
The exchange rate indicates how many units of the comparison currency are equal to
one unit of the base currency.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Selecting a base currency in the Currency Exchange Rates channel
Adding a comparison currency in the Currency Exchange Rates channel

30 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Currency Exchange Rates channel

Selecting a base currency in the Currency Exchange Rates

channel
1 In the Currency Exchange Rates channel, click Edit.
2 On the Header page, clear the Use Channel Default Parameters checkbox if it is
checked.

3 Under Parameter Values, click the Edit icon for the base currency.
4 In the dialog box, for the Value field, click the Lookup icon to select a new base
currency.
5 Click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To return to the default currency, check the Use Channel Default Parameters
box.

Note: Except for selecting a base currency and adding a comparison currency, it is
strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the
Currency Exchange Rates channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Adding a comparison currency in the Currency Exchange Rates channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 31

Using the Workbench Currency Exchange Rates channel Workbench

Adding a comparison currency in the Currency Exchange Rates

channel
Exchange rates are used in a sourcing document to compare responses if suppliers use
currencies other than the default currency specified on the Header page of a sourcing
document.

To add a comparison currency:

1 In the Currency Exchange Rates channel, click Edit.
2 Under Currencies, click Add.
3 In the dialog box, for the Currency field, click the Lookup icon to select a
comparison currency.
4 Click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: Except for selecting a base currency and adding a comparison currency, it is
strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the
Currency Exchange Rates channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Selecting a base currency in the Currency Exchange Rates channel

32 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Tech Support Channel

Using the Workbench Tech Support Channel

The Tech Support channel shows information about and links to assistance and
technical support information.

In the Tech Support channel, you can:

` Link to Online Help
` Link to Online Training and other training documents
` Contact Technical Support by sending email, calling, or linking

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the Tech Support channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Linking to Online Help in the Tech Support channel
Linking to Online Training in the Tech Support channel
Contacting technical support using the Tech Support channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 33

Using the Workbench Tech Support Channel Workbench

Linking to Online Help in the Tech Support channel

You can access Online Help through the Tech Support channel on the Workbench.

To access Online Help:

` In the Tech Support channel, click the Online Help link. You see the SRM Online
Help.

Note: You can also access Online Help by clicking the Help link at the top of any SRM
page.

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the Tech Support channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Using the Workbench Tech Support Channel
Linking to Online Training in the Tech Support channel
Contacting technical support using the Tech Support channel

34 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Tech Support Channel

Linking to Online Training in the Tech Support channel

You can access Online Training CBTs and other training documentation through the
Tech Support channel on the Workbench.

To access Online Training:

1 In the Tech Support channel, click the Online Training link. You see the SRM
Collaborator Training.
2 Under Disclaimer, click I Accept.
You see the Collaborator Training tutorial. Click the name of the section to view.

To access additional training documentation:

1 In the Tech Support channel, click the Training Guide link. You see the Training
documentation page.
2 Click the link for the training document to view.

Note: You can also access training by clicking the RG link at the top of any SRM page
and then clicking the Training Documentation link.

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the Tech Support channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Using the Workbench Tech Support Channel
Linking to Online Help in the Tech Support channel
Contacting technical support using the Tech Support channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 35

Using the Workbench Tech Support Channel Workbench

Contacting technical support using the Tech Support channel

You can contact SRM technical support in three ways.

To contact technical support:

` In the Tech Support channel, do one of the following:
■ Email your local Technical Support contact.
■ Call your local Technical Support contact.
■ Click the Tech Support Website link.

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the Tech Support channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Using the Workbench Tech Support Channel
Linking to Online Help in the Tech Support channel
Linking to Online Training in the Tech Support channel

36 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Events channel

Using the Workbench Events channel

The Events channel shows specific sourcing events occurring on a selected day. By
default, the current day is selected.

In the Events channel, you can:

` View events for a specific date
` Link to a sourcing event for the current date
` Link to a sourcing event for a date other than the current one
` Add a custom event
` Specify the types of events to appear in the channel

Note: Except for specifying the event types to appear, it is strongly recommended that
you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the Events channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Selecting a date in the Calendar channel to view events
Linking to a sourcing event for the current date in the Events channel
Linking to a sourcing event for a date other than the current one in the Events channel
Adding a calendar event in the Events channel
Specifying the types of events to appear in the Events channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 37

Using the Workbench Events channel Workbench

Linking to a sourcing event for the current date in the Events

channel
` In the Events channel, click the link for the sourcing event to view.

Note: Except for specifying the event types to appear, it is strongly recommended that
you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the Events channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Selecting a date in the Calendar channel to view events
Linking to a sourcing event for a date other than the current one in the Events channel
Adding a calendar event in the Events channel
Specifying the types of events to appear in the Events channel

38 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Events channel

Linking to a sourcing event for a date other than the current one
in the Events channel
1 In the Calendar channel, click the date for which to view a sourcing event.
2 In the Events channel, click the link for the sourcing event to view.

Note: Except for specifying the event types to appear, it is strongly recommended that
you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the Events channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Selecting a date in the Calendar channel to view events
Linking to a sourcing event for the current date in the Events channel
Adding a calendar event in the Events channel
Specifying the types of events to appear in the Events channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 39

Using the Workbench Events channel Workbench

Adding a calendar event in the Events channel

To add an event to the Calendar, you must have the appropriate rights assigned in your
Security Profile. Please contact your system administrator for details.

To add an event in the Events channel:

1 In the Events channel, click Add.
2 In the New Calendar Event dialog box, fill in the fields.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: Except for specifying the event types to appear, it is strongly recommended that
you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the Events channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Selecting a date in the Calendar channel to view events
Linking to a sourcing event for the current date in the Events channel
Linking to a sourcing event for a date other than the current one in the Events channel
Specifying the types of events to appear in the Events channel

40 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Events channel

Specifying the types of events to appear in the Events channel

1 In the Events channel, click Edit.
2 On the Header page, clear the Use Channel Default Parameters checkbox if it is
checked.
3 In the table under Parameter Values, the Parameter Value column indicates

whether an event type is set to appear in the channel. Click the Edit icon for
the event type to edit.
4 In the dialog box for New Channel Parameter Value in Channel Configuration, do
one of the following:
■ Check a box to select an event type for the channel.
■ Clear a box to remove an event type from the channel.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To return to the default event types, check the Use Channel Default
Parameters box.

Note: Except for specifying the event types to appear, it is strongly recommended that
you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the Events channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Selecting a date in the Calendar channel to view events
Linking to a sourcing event for the current date in the Events channel
Linking to a sourcing event for a date other than the current one in the Events channel
Adding a calendar event in the Events channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 41

Using the Workbench Buyer Alerts channel Workbench

Using the Workbench Buyer Alerts channel

The Buyer Alerts channel notifies you of important situations related to your sourcing
events as well as showing alert messages generated as reminders by other buyers. The
Buyer Alerts channel also shows the dates on which the alerts were generated. For
example, if an auction closes and contains a line item that did not meet the reserve
price, an alert appears in your Alerts channel along with the generation date. When you
click an alert for a sourcing event, you go directly to the related event.
In the Buyer Alerts channel, you can access a sourcing document referenced by an
alert.

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the Buyer Alerts channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Accessing a sourcing document referenced by an alert in the Buyer Alerts channel

42 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Buyer Alerts channel

Accessing a sourcing document referenced by an alert in the

Buyer Alerts channel

` In the Buyer Alerts channel, click the Page icon for the sourcing document to
access. You see the referenced sourcing document.

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the Buyer Alerts channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Using the Workbench Buyer Alerts channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 43

Using the Workbench To Do List channel Workbench

Using the Workbench To Do List channel

The To Do List channel shows current sourcing events, organized by module, such as
RFxs, Auctions, and Projects. The items in the To Do List can be different from those in
the Events and Calendar channels. Whereas the Events and Calendar channels show
sourcing events for a specific date, the To Do List channel can show an event or all
events in specific modules where you are involved, regardless of date.
Each module can be organized into different sub-categories. For example, there might
be one link for all RFxs, another link for RFxs that are currently open for bidding, and
yet another link for RFxs waiting to be scored and awarded.
Each time you create an RFx, auction, project, master agreement, or demand
aggregation document, it appears in the To Do List channel.

In the To Do List channel, you can:

` Link to a list of sourcing events within a category, such as My RFxs Open for
Bidding, or to another event category appearing in the channel
` Select the types of events to appear in the channel

Note: Except for selecting the categories of events to appear, it is strongly

recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the To Do List
channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Linking to a list of sourcing or other events in the To Do List channel
Specifying the types of events to appear in the To Do List channel

44 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench To Do List channel

Linking to a list of sourcing or other events in the To Do List

channel
` In the To Do List channel, click the category of events to view.

Note: Except for selecting the categories of events to appear, it is strongly

recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the To Do List
channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Specifying the types of events to appear in the To Do List channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 45

Using the Workbench To Do List channel Workbench

Specifying the types of events to appear in the To Do List

channel
1 In the To Do List channel, click Edit.
2 On the Header page, clear the Use Channel Default Parameters checkbox if it is
checked.
3 In the table under Parameter Values, the Parameter Value column indicates

whether an event type is set to appear in the channel. Click the Edit icon for
the event type to edit.
4 In the dialog box for New Channel Parameter Value in Channel Configuration, do
one of the following:
■ Check a box to select an event type for the channel.
■ Clear a box to remove an event type from the channel.
5 Click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To return to the default event types, check the Use Channel Default
Parameters box.

Note: Except for selecting the categories of events to appear, it is strongly

recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any editing in the To Do List
channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Linking to a list of sourcing or other events in the To Do List channel

46 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Favorite Sites channel

Using the Workbench Favorite Sites channel

In the Favorite Sites channel, you can view the contents of an important website within
a small frame, controlled by vertical and horizontal scroll bars. The view is updated as
the site is updated.

In the Favorite Sites channel, you can:

` Select another site to show in the channel using the Favorites drop-down list,
toolbar icons, or the Edit function
` Change the height of the channel
` Open a new window for the site currently appearing in the Favorite Sites channel

Note: A system administrator sets up a home site as well as any additional sites for the
channel. You can select but not set up sites.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Selecting another site for display in the Favorite Sites channel
Changing the height of the Favorite Sites channel
Opening a new window for the site in the Favorite Sites channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 47

Using the Workbench Favorite Sites channel Workbench

Selecting another site for display in the Favorite Sites channel

You can select another site for the Favorite Sites channel in two ways: using the toolbar
or the Edit function.

To select a site from the Favorite Sites channel toolbar, do one of the following:
■ Select another site from the Favorites drop-down list.

■ Click the Forward icon to go to the next available site.

■ Click the Back icon to go to the previous site.

■ Click the Home icon to go to the home or default site.

To select a site using the Edit function:

1 In the Favorite Sites channel, click Edit.
2 Clear the Use Channel Default Parameters checkbox if it is checked.

3 On the Header page under Parameter Values, click the Edit icon for IFrame
Configuration.
4 In the dialog box for New Channel Parameter Value in Channel Configuration, click
the Lookup icon for the Value field and select a site or group of sites.
5 Click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To return to the default site, check the Use Channel Default Parameters box.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Changing the height of the Favorite Sites channel
Opening a new window for the site in the Favorite Sites channel

48 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Favorite Sites channel

Changing the height of the Favorite Sites channel

1 In the Favorite Sites channel, click Edit.
2 Clear the Use Channel Default Parameters checkbox if it is checked.

3 On the Header page under Parameter Values, click the Edit icon for Height.
4 In the dialog box for New Channel Parameter Value in Channel Configuration, type a
number in the Value field.
5 Click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To return to the default height, check the Use Channel Default Parameters
box.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Selecting another site for display in the Favorite Sites channel
Opening a new window for the site in the Favorite Sites channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 49

Using the Workbench Favorite Sites channel Workbench

Opening a new window for the site in the Favorite Sites channel

` In the toolbar for the Favorite Sites channel, click the New Window icon .

Related Topics
Workbench page
Selecting another site for display in the Favorite Sites channel
Changing the height of the Favorite Sites channel

50 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench New Discussions channel

Using the Workbench New Discussions channel

Discussions are a collaboration tool used by you, your collaborators, and suppliers to
clarify issues related to a product or the sourcing process.
The New Discussions channel lists unread messages that were created in sourcing
documents within the last three days. You can link to both the message and the related
sourcing document.

In the New Discussions channel, you can:

` View and reply to new discussion threads related to sourcing documents

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the New Discussions channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Viewing a message in the New Discussions channel
Replying to a discussion message

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 51

Using the Workbench New Discussions channel Workbench

Viewing a message in the New Discussions channel

Discussions are a collaboration tool used by you, your collaborators, and suppliers to
clarify issues related to a product or the sourcing process.
The New Discussions channel lists unread messages that were created in sourcing
documents within the last three days. You can link to both the message and the related
sourcing document.
Discussions are categorized by forum and thread. A forum groups discussions by topic
and can contain multiple threads. A thread is a series of related messages in a forum.
Messages within a discussion thread are hierarchical: replies are stored in a hierarchy
under the first message in the thread. You can expand a message to view its replies.

To view a message in the New Discussions channel:

1 In the New Discussions channel, click the Discussion icon for the message to
view. You see the message in the Messages dialog box.
2 To expand the message to see its replies, click the black triangle before the
message subject. If the message has no replies, no triangle appears.
3 Optionally, reply to the message by clicking the Reply button.
4 When you finish viewing the message, click OK in the Messages dialog box.
5 In the Threads dialog box, click OK.
6 In the Forums dialog box, click OK. You see the sourcing document in which the
message was created.

Note: You can also view threads and replies in the Global Discussions channel on the
Workbench and through the Discussions button in the sourcing document toolbar. The
Global Discussions channel contains discussions that are unrelated to particular sourcing
documents.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Using the Workbench New Discussions channel
Replying to a discussion message

52 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Global Discussions channel

Using the Workbench Global Discussions channel

Discussions are a collaboration tool used by you, your collaborators, and suppliers to
clarify issues related to a product or the sourcing process.
The Global Discussions channel lists discussions and threads unrelated to sourcing
documents. These discussions can be about a specific supplier, sourcing activities
coming up, policies regarding RFxs or projects, and so forth.

In the Global Discussions channel, you can:

` View and reply to global discussion threads unrelated to sourcing documents
` Create global discussion threads

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the Global Discussions channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Viewing a message in the Global Discussions channel
Replying to a discussion message
Creating a discussion thread in the Global Discussions channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 53

Using the Workbench Global Discussions channel Workbench

Viewing a message in the Global Discussions channel

Discussions are a collaboration tool used by you, your collaborators, and suppliers to
clarify issues related to a product or the sourcing process. The Global Discussions
channel contains discussions that are not associated with a particular sourcing
document. Global discussions can cover any topic of interest to you or a supplier.
Discussions are categorized by forum and thread. A forum groups discussions by topic
and can contain multiple threads. A thread is a series of related messages in a forum.
Messages within a discussion thread are hierarchical: replies are stored in a hierarchy
under the first message in the thread. You can expand a message to view its replies.

To view a discussion thread:

1 In the Global Discussions channel, click the forum in which to view a thread. The
Discussion icon indicates the activity in the forum:

■ If the document has no topics: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with unread messages: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with no unread messages: .

2 In the Threads dialog box, click the name of the thread to view. You see the
messages for the thread in the Messages dialog box.
3 To expand any message to see its replies, click the black triangle before the
message subject. If the message has no replies, no triangle appears.
4 When you finish viewing the thread, click OK.
5 In the Threads dialog box, click OK.
6 In the Forums dialog box, click OK.

Note: You can also view threads and replies in the New Discussions channel on the
Workbench and through the Discussions button in the sourcing document toolbar. The
New Discussions channel shows unread messages related to sourcing documents for
which you are the owner or a collaborator.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Using the Workbench Global Discussions channel
Replying to a discussion message
Creating a discussion thread in the Global Discussions channel

54 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Global Discussions channel

Creating a discussion thread in the Global Discussions channel

Discussions are a collaboration tool used by you, your collaborators, and suppliers to
clarify issues related to a product or the sourcing process. The Global Discussions
channel contains discussions that are not associated with a particular sourcing
document. Global discussions can cover any topic of interest to you or a supplier.
Discussions are categorized by forum and thread. A forum groups discussions by topic
and can contain multiple threads. A thread is a series of related messages in a forum.
Messages within a discussion thread are hierarchical: replies are stored in a hierarchy
under the first message in the thread. You can expand a message to view its replies.

To create a discussion thread:

1 In the Global Discussions channel, click the forum in which to create a thread. The
Discussion icon indicates the activity in the forum:

■ If the document has no topics: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with unread messages: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with no unread messages: .

2 In the Threads dialog box, click New Thread.
3 In the dialog box, type a subject for the message and the message contents, and

optionally add an attachment by clicking the Lookup icon .

4 Click OK. You see the new message in the Messages dialog box.
5 In the Messages dialog box, click OK.
6 In the Threads dialog box, click OK.
7 In the Forums dialog box, click OK.

Note: You can also view threads and replies in the New Discussions channel on the
Workbench and through the Discussions button in the sourcing document toolbar. The
New Discussions channel shows unread messages related to sourcing documents for
which you are the owner or a collaborator.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Using the Workbench Global Discussions channel
Replying to a discussion message

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 55

Using the Workbench File Sharing channel Workbench

Using the Workbench File Sharing channel

The File Sharing channel shows links to files that are shared with every SRM user in
your company or enterprise. Files are shared in Setup.
In the File Sharing channel, you can view shared files.

To view a shared file:

` In the File Sharing channel, click the Attachment icon for the file to view. You
see the file in a new browser window.

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the File Sharing channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page

56 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Reports channel

Using the Workbench Reports channel

The Reports channel allows you to view reports detailing current activities and events in
Frictionless SRM. Click a report name to view the report.

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the Reports channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 57

Using the Workbench Project Status Summary channel Workbench

Using the Workbench Project Status Summary channel

The Project Status Summary channel shows the current status of each of your projects.
Status indicators are:
` Future: All milestone dates are in the future.
` Green: Project activity has begun and all dates are on target.
` Yellow: Some tasks did not start on their planned start date, or have projected
end dates that are later than the baseline end date.
` Red: The projected end date for the project is later than the baseline end date,
indicating that the critical path is delayed.

In the Project Status Summary channel, you can:

` View the current status of all projects to which you have access
` Link to a project
` View a report of a project’s tasks and dates

Note: It is strongly recommended that you ask your system administrator to do any
editing in the Project Status Summary channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Linking to a project in the Project Status Summary channel
Viewing a project task report in the Project Status Summary channel

58 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Workbench Project Status Summary channel

Linking to a project in the Project Status Summary channel

` In the Project Status Summary channel, click the Project icon in the ID column
for the project to view. You see the project.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Viewing a project task report in the Project Status Summary channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 59

Using the Workbench Project Status Summary channel Workbench

Viewing a project task report in the Project Status Summary

channel
You can link to the Analysis module to see a detailed report of tasks and dates for a
project.

To view a project task report:

` In the Project Status Summary channel, click the link in the Status column for a
project. You see the report for the selected project in the Analysis module.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Linking to a project in the Project Status Summary channel

60 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the My Workflow Activities channel

Using the My Workflow Activities channel

In the My Workflow Activities channel, you can view your current approvals and your
workflow history.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Viewing current approvals in the My Workflow Activities channel
Approving or rejecting a sourcing document in the My Workflow Activities channel
Viewing approval history in the My Workflow Activities channel
Quick Reference: Working with sourcing document workflow

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 61

Using the My Workflow Activities channel Workbench

Viewing current approvals in the My Workflow Activities

channel
From the My Workflow Activities channel, you can view any documents that are
currently in a workflow phase that requires your approval. The Current Approvals icon
indicates the current number of pending approvals in parentheses.

To view your current approvals:

1 In the My Workflow Activities channel, click Current Approvals .

2 Review the list of approvals.
3 Optionally, click a document link to open the document, or approve or reject a
document from this page. For details, see Approving or rejecting a sourcing
document in the My Workflow Activities channel.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Using the My Workflow Activities channel
Approving or rejecting a sourcing document in the My Workflow Activities channel
Viewing approval history in the My Workflow Activities channel
Quick Reference: Working with sourcing document workflow

62 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the My Workflow Activities channel

Approving or rejecting a sourcing document in the My Workflow

Activities channel
From the My Workflow Activities channel, you can view any documents that are
currently in a workflow phase that requires your approval. The Current Approvals icon
indicates the current number of pending approvals in parentheses.
You can only approve or reject a document if you are designated as an Approver in the
document’s Collaborator list, or if the process template associated with the document’s
workflow indicates that you are an Approver.
You can approve or reject a sourcing document directly from the Current Approvals
report available from the My Workflow Activities channel. You can also approve a
sourcing document from the toolbar of the document.

To approve or reject the document in the My Workflow Activities channel:

1 In the My Workflow Activities channel of the Workbench, click Current Approvals.
2 In the report table, find the line for the document and do one of the following:

■ To approve the document, click the Approve icon .

■ To reject the document, click the Reject icon .

3 In the confirmation dialog box that appears, do the following:
■ Optionally, enter comments.
■ If you are rejecting the document, optionally select a reason for the rejection.
■ Optionally, add an attachment.
■ Click Finish.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Using the My Workflow Activities channel
Viewing current approvals in the My Workflow Activities channel
Viewing approval history in the My Workflow Activities channel
Approving or rejecting a document from the document toolbar
Quick Reference: Working with sourcing document workflow

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 63

Using the My Workflow Activities channel Workbench

Viewing approval history in the My Workflow Activities channel

From the My Workflow Activities channel, you can view a list of all documents you have
approved.

To view your current approvals:

1 In the My Workflow Activities channel, click Approval History .

2 Review your approval history.
3 Optionally, click a document link to open the document.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Using the My Workflow Activities channel
Viewing current approvals in the My Workflow Activities channel
Approving or rejecting a sourcing document in the My Workflow Activities channel
Quick Reference: Working with sourcing document workflow

64 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Print XPress for Internal Customers channel

Using the Print XPress for Internal Customers channel

The Print XPress for Internal Customers channel gives you quick access to the XPress
functionality for Internal Customers. For details about this functionality, see Internal
Customer XPress.

Related Topics
Workbench page
Internal Customer XPress

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 65

Using the My Current XPress Requests channel Workbench

Using the My Current XPress Requests channel

The My Current XPress Requests channel lets you view and access all current XPress
requests that you created.

To see details for an XPress request, do one of the following:

` To view an XPress request, click its title.

` To edit an XPress request, click the Edit icon for the request.

For more information about XPress requests, see XPress Request List page:
Requests.

Related Topics
Workbench page
XPress
Editing an XPress request

66 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Workbench Using the Industry News channel

Using the Industry News channel

The Industry News channel provides access to live news related to your industry. For
example, if your company is in the health research field, a health research news service
can be displayed in this channel.
The content of this channel is determined by your system administrator, in conjunction
with Frictionless Commerce. For details about activating this channel, see your system
administrator or consult with your Frictionless Commerce representative.

Related Topics
Workbench page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 67

Using the Supplier Discovery channel Workbench

Using the Supplier Discovery channel

The Supplier Discovery channel provides access to a supplier content provider that can
help you identify suppliers in your industry.
The content of this channel is determined by your system administrator, in conjunction
with Frictionless Commerce. For details about activating this channel, see your system
administrator or consult with your Frictionless Commerce representative.

Related Topics
Workbench page

68 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Navigation and Display

This section of the Online Help describes how to navigate through and view information
in the SRM modules.

Confidential 69
Navigation and display functions Navigation and Display

Navigation and display functions

Frictionless® SRM navigation and display functions include logging on and off, viewing
and editing sourcing documents, and moving within and between modules.

Related Topics
Logging onto the SRM software
Changing your user password
Logging off of the SRM software
Returning to the Workbench
Moving between and within modules
Viewing a sourcing document list
Viewing a sourcing document
Returning to the top of a sourcing document
Sorting a table column
Getting assistance
Accessing and finding topics in Online Help

70 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Navigation and Display Navigation and display functions

Logging onto the SRM software

Your system administrator will send you the SRM URL and your user name and initial
password. It is recommended that you change this password to one that you choose.

To log on:
1 Enter the URL for the SRM software.
2 In the dialog box, type your user name and password and click Log On.
3 In the page that appears, read the user terms and click Accept. You see your
Workbench.

Note: If your session expires, you are required to log onto the software again.

Related Topics
Changing your user password
Logging off of the SRM software
Returning to the Workbench
Moving between and within modules
Viewing a sourcing document list
Viewing a sourcing document
Returning to the top of a sourcing document
Sorting a table column
Getting assistance
Accessing and finding topics in Online Help

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 71

Navigation and display functions Navigation and Display

Changing your user password

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 Under System Administration, select Change Password from the Accounts and
Security drop-down list and click OK.
3 In the dialog box, fill in the fields with your old password and your new password.
4 Click OK. Your password is changed.

Related Topics
Logging onto the SRM software
Logging off of the SRM software
Returning to the Workbench
Moving between and within modules
Viewing a sourcing document list
Viewing a sourcing document
Returning to the top of a sourcing document
Sorting a table column
Getting assistance
Accessing and finding topics in Online Help

72 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Navigation and Display Navigation and display functions

Logging off of the SRM software

` Click Log Off in the toolbar at the top of the page.

Related Topics
Logging onto the SRM software
Changing your user password
Returning to the Workbench
Moving between and within modules
Viewing a sourcing document list
Viewing a sourcing document
Returning to the top of a sourcing document
Sorting a table column
Getting assistance
Accessing and finding topics in Online Help

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 73

Navigation and display functions Navigation and Display

Returning to the Workbench

` Click Workbench in the toolbar at the top of the page.

Note: You cannot return to the Workbench from a page within a module until you click
the Save button or the Undo button in the document toolbar.

Related Topics
Logging onto the SRM software
Changing your user password
Logging off of the SRM software
Moving between and within modules
Viewing a sourcing document list
Viewing a sourcing document
Returning to the top of a sourcing document
Sorting a table column
Getting assistance
Accessing and finding topics in Online Help

74 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Navigation and Display Navigation and display functions

Moving between and within modules

To move from one module to another, select the new module from the navigation
toolbar.

Note: If you are currently editing a sourcing document, you must click the Save button
or the Undo button in the document toolbar before navigating to another module.

To move within a module, click the tabs that appear at the top of any sourcing
document.

Related Topics
Logging onto the SRM software
Changing your user password
Logging off of the SRM software
Returning to the Workbench
Viewing a sourcing document list
Viewing a sourcing document
Returning to the top of a sourcing document
Sorting a table column
Getting assistance
Accessing and finding topics in Online Help

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 75

Navigation and display functions Navigation and Display

Viewing a sourcing document list

` On a List page, select a document list from the drop-down list. You see the list of
documents.

Related Topics
Logging onto the SRM software
Changing your user password
Logging off of the SRM software
Returning to the Workbench
Moving between and within modules
Viewing a sourcing document
Returning to the top of a sourcing document
Sorting a table column
Getting assistance
Accessing and finding topics in Online Help

76 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Navigation and Display Navigation and display functions

Viewing a sourcing document

` On a List page, click the name of the document to view. You see the document
Header page.

Related Topics
Logging onto the SRM software
Changing your user password
Logging off of the SRM software
Returning to the Workbench
Moving between and within modules
Viewing a sourcing document list
Returning to the top of a sourcing document
Sorting a table column
Getting assistance
Accessing and finding topics in Online Help

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 77

Navigation and display functions Navigation and Display

Returning to the top of a sourcing document

` To return to the top of a sourcing document, click the Return to Top icon in the
bar at the bottom of the document.

Related Topics
Logging onto the SRM software
Changing your user password
Logging off of the SRM software
Returning to the Workbench
Moving between and within modules
Viewing a sourcing document list
Viewing a sourcing document
Sorting a table column
Getting assistance
Accessing and finding topics in Online Help

78 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Navigation and Display Navigation and display functions

Sorting a table column

You can sort most tables, including those on List pages, by any column.

To sort a table column:

` Click a column heading or the Sort icon to sort the table by that column. The
Sort icon in the column heading changes from white to yellow to indicate the
active sort column.
An up-arrow indicates that the column is sorted in ascending order. A down-arrow
indicates that the column is sorted in descending order.

Related Topics
Logging onto the SRM software
Changing your user password
Logging off of the SRM software
Returning to the Workbench
Moving between and within modules
Viewing a sourcing document list
Viewing a sourcing document
Returning to the top of a sourcing document
Getting assistance
Accessing and finding topics in Online Help

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 79

Navigation and display functions Navigation and Display

Getting assistance
To get assistance with Frictionless SRM:
` Use Online Help, which you can reach from any page in the SRM software by
clicking the Help icon .
` Consult the additional technical help resources listed in the Tech Support channel
on your Workbench. You reach the Workbench by clicking the Workbench
icon , which appears in the top toolbar.
` For technical information abou the application, click RG in the top toolbar. This
displays the Reference Guide Index page.
` For information about the current release, see the Release Notes.

Related Topics
Logging onto the SRM software
Changing your user password
Logging off of the SRM software
Returning to the Workbench
Moving between and within modules
Viewing a sourcing document list
Viewing a sourcing document
Returning to the top of a sourcing document
Sorting a table column
Accessing and finding topics in Online Help

80 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Navigation and Display Navigation and display functions

Accessing and finding topics in Online Help

The Online Help window contains a left Navigation panel and a right Topics panel. You
find topics using the Navigation panel with its Contents, Index, and Search features.
You view a help topic in the Topics panel.

To access Online Help:

` Click Help at the top of any Frictionless® SRM page.

To find a topic in the Contents view:

1 In the Navigation panel, click Contents.
2 Click a book to see its topics and subtopics.
3 Click the name of a topic to see it in the Topics panel.

To find a topic in the Index view:

1 Click Index.
2 In the Navigation panel, scroll to a letter of the alphabet.
3 Scroll through the topics for that letter.
4 Click an index entry to see the associated topic in the Topics panel.

To find a topic in the Search view:

1 Click Search.
2 In the text box in the Navigation panel, type the word or words for which to search.
3 Click Go.
The Navigation panel displays a list of links containing at least one of the words you
entered, in order of relevance.
4 Click a link to see the associated topic in the Topics panel.

To view the currently displayed topic in the Contents view of the Navigation panel:

` Click the Find in Contents icon . The Contents view is expanded to display the
title of the current topic.

To go to the previous topic:

` Click the Previous icon in the Topics panel.

To go to the next topic:

` Click the Next icon in the Topics panel.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 81

Navigation and display functions Navigation and Display

To see a related topic:

` Click the Related Topic icon , which appears both at the bottom of the Topics
panel and in the toolbar of the Online Help window.

To print a topic:

` Click the Print icon in the Topics panel.

Related Topics
Logging onto the SRM software
Changing your user password
Logging off of the SRM software
Returning to the Workbench
Moving between and within modules
Viewing a sourcing document list
Viewing a sourcing document
Returning to the top of a sourcing document
Sorting a table columnGetting assistance

82 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks

This section of the Online Help describes general tasks that you perform throughout
most Frictionless® SRM modules.

Confidential 83
Toolbar functions General Tasks

Toolbar functions
Most pages in each module have one or more toolbars offering access to various
features, such as duplicating, saving a sourcing document as a template, adding an
attachment, creating or viewing a discussion topic, viewing reports, and so forth.

Using the toolbar, you can:

` Click the Edit/Save button to
■ Edit a sourcing document
` Click the Document button to:
■ Duplicate a document
■ Save a document as a template
■ Cancel a sourcing document
■ Refresh a sourcing document
■ Close a sourcing document
` Click the Actions button to:
■ Generate a contract from an RFx, auction, or master agreement
` Click the Reports button to:
■ View a report
` Click the Attachments button to:
■ Import an attachment from a library
■ Add a file attachment
■ Add a URL attachment
■ View an attachment
` Click the Discussions button to:
■ Create a discussion topic
■ Create a discussion message
■ Reply to a discussion message
■ View a discussion topic or message
■ Delete a discussion message
` Click the Chat button to conduct a chat.

` Click the Change Phase button to change the phase of a sourcing document.

Related Topics
Editing and saving a sourcing document

84 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Duplicating a sourcing document

Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling a sourcing document
Closing a sourcing document
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file
Refreshing a sourcing document
Changing a sourcing document phase
Adding an attachment by importing it from a library
Adding a file attachment
Adding a URL attachment
Viewing an attachment
Creating a discussion topic in a sourcing document
Creating a discussion message
Replying to a discussion message
Viewing discussion messages and replies
Viewing a report within a sourcing document
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Header functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 85

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Edit/Save toolbar button functions

Click the Edit/Save toolbar button to:
` Edit and save a sourcing document

Related Topics
Editing and saving a sourcing document
Toolbar functions

86 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Editing and saving a sourcing document

You use buttons in the toolbar to make a sourcing document editable, save changes,
undo the most recent set of changes, and close a document without saving changes.

Editing a sourcing document

` To edit a sourcing document, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
Note: In Edit mode, this button toggles to a Save button and the Undo button is
also displayed.

Saving a sourcing document

` To save changes to a sourcing document, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also save a sourcing document by clicking the Save icon in the bar
at the bottom of the document.

Undoing changes to a sourcing document

` To undo changes made to a sourcing document since the last save, click the Undo
button in the toolbar.

Closing a sourcing document

` To close a sourcing document and return to the List page, click the Close icon in
the upper right corner of the sourcing document. Do one of the following in the
dialog box that appears:
■ Click Save to save your changes and close the document.
■ Click Discard to discard your most recent changes and close the document.
■ Click Cancel to return to the document without saving or closing.

Note: You use the Close icon simply to navigate away from a sourcing
document. To close the document permanently and remove it from the list of active
documents, click the Document toolbar button and select Close from the
drop-down list. For more details, see Closing a sourcing document.

Related Topics
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling a sourcing document
Refreshing a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 87

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Closing a sourcing document

Changing a sourcing document phase
Adding an attachment by importing it from a library
Adding a file attachment
Adding a URL attachment
Viewing an attachment
Creating a discussion topic in a sourcing document
Creating a discussion message
Replying to a discussion message
Viewing discussion messages and replies
Viewing a report within a sourcing document
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Header functions

88 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Document toolbar button functions

` Click the Document button to:
■ View phase information for a sourcing document
■ Duplicate a sourcing document
■ Save a sourcing document as a template
■ Cancel a sourcing document
■ Refresh a sourcing document
■ Close a sourcing document

Related Topics
Viewing phase information for a sourcing document
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling a sourcing document
Refreshing a sourcing document
Closing a sourcing document
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 89

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Viewing phase information for a sourcing document

You can use the Document toolbar button to view the Phase Information page. This
page displays information about the current, previous and next phases for a sourcing
document.

Note: Phase information is currently available only for projects and contract documents.

A graphical representation of the document’s phases appears at the top of the Phase
Information page. The table below it indicates all the phase change actions that have
been performed. If any phase is associated with a workflow, all workflow actions are
also displayed in the table. Any attachments added during document approval or
rejection are displayed in the Comments column of the table.

To view document phase information:

1 On the toolbar, click the Document button and select Phase Information from
the menu.
2 On the Phase Information page, review phase information.
3 When you have finished reviewing information, click OK.

Related Topics
Quick Reference: Working with sourcing document workflow
Changing the phase of a project or contract document
Changing a sourcing document phase
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling a sourcing document
Refreshing a sourcing document
Closing a sourcing document
Toolbar functions

90 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Duplicating a sourcing document

You duplicate a sourcing document to reuse its information in a new document.

Note: To duplicate a sourcing document, the document must be in view mode.

To duplicate a document:
1 On the toolbar, click the Document button and select Duplicate from the menu.
2 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. You see a copy of the document.
3 Type a name for the duplicated document.
4 Edit any document information.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Viewing phase information for a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling a sourcing document
Refreshing a sourcing document
Closing a sourcing document
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 91

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Saving a sourcing document as a template

Templates are predefined documents, or portions of documents, that are used to
standardize document creation and minimize the work of creating a new document. You
save a sourcing document as a template to reuse its information in multiple documents.

Note: To save a sourcing document as a template, the document must be in view mode.

To save a document as a template:

1 On the toolbar, click the Document button and select Save as Template from the
menu.
2 Type a name for the template.
3 Fill in the fields with any template information.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Viewing phase information for a sourcing document
Duplicating a sourcing document
Canceling a sourcing document
Refreshing a sourcing document
Closing a sourcing document
Toolbar functions

92 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Canceling a sourcing document

When you cancel a sourcing document, all activity for the sourcing event stops and the
document is removed from the list of active documents.

To cancel a document:
1 On the toolbar, click the Document button and select Cancel from the menu.
2 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The document is canceled.

Related Topics
Viewing phase information for a sourcing document
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Refreshing a sourcing document
Closing a sourcing document
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 93

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Refreshing a sourcing document

You can refresh a sourcing document to ensure that you are viewing the most current
document information.

To refresh a sourcing document:

` On the toolbar, click the Document button and select Refresh from the menu. The
document is refreshed.

Related Topics
Viewing phase information for a sourcing document
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling a sourcing document
Closing a sourcing document
Toolbar functions

94 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Closing a sourcing document

After you complete a sourcing document and no more activity is to occur, you can close
the document. The closed document no longer appears in a list of active documents.

To close a sourcing document:

1 On the toolbar, click the Document button and select Close from the menu.
2 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The document is closed.

Related Topics
Viewing phase information for a sourcing document
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling a sourcing document
Refreshing a sourcing document
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 95

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Actions toolbar button functions

Click the Actions toolbar button to:
` Generate a contract from an RFx, auction, or master agreement

Related Topics
Generating a contract from an auction or RFx
Toolbar functions

96 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Generating a contract from an auction or RFx

You can generate a contract from an auction or an RFx. After you generate a contract,
it is stored as an attachment to the sourcing document. The attachment serves as a
preview of the actual contract and is not associated with any master agreement.
You can also generate a contract from a master agreement or from a contract
document template. For details, see Generating a contract from a master
agreement and Generating a contract document from a template.

To generate a contract:
1 On the toolbar of the sourcing document, click the Actions button and select
Generate Contract from the menu.
2 Follow the prompts to generate the contract.

Related Topics
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 97

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Reports toolbar button functions

Click the Reports toolbar button to:
` View a report within a sourcing document

Related Topics
Viewing a report within a sourcing document
Toolbar functions

98 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Viewing a report within a sourcing document

Reports convey analytical information about a sourcing document. Each sourcing
document module offers its own customized reports.

To view a report:
1 On the toolbar, click the Reports button and select the report to view from the
menu. You see the report.
2 Optionally, view help for the report.
3 Optionally, bookmark the report.
4 Optionally, export the report as a PDF file.
5 When you finish viewing the report, click Close Window.

Related Topics
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 99

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Attachments toolbar button functions

Click the Attachments toolbar button to:
` Import an attachment from a library
` Add a file attachment
` Add a URL attachment
` View an attachment

Related Topics
Adding an attachment by importing it from a library
Adding a file attachment
Adding a URL attachment
Viewing an attachment
Toolbar functions

100 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Adding an attachment by importing it from a library

Attachments enable you to reference additional information that you cannot include in
the sourcing document itself. You can attach a file, a library component, or a URL.
You attach a library component to reference a standard internal document.

Note: You can also add attachments to discussion messages and to individual line items
and project schedule events within a sourcing document.

To add an attachment by importing it from a library:

1 On the sourcing document toolbar, or in a line item, project schedule event, or
discussion message, click the Attachments button. The Attachment button
appears as follows:

■ If the document has no attachments, this icon appears .

■ If the document has one or more attachments, this icon appears .

2 In the Attachments dialog box, click Import from Library.
3 In the dialog box, select a library from the drop-down list.
4 Check the box for the attachment to import. You can check more than one box to
import multiple attachments.
5 Click OK.
6 In the Attachments dialog box, click OK.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Adding a file attachment
Adding a URL attachment
Viewing an attachment
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 101

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Adding a file attachment

Attachments enable you to reference additional information that you cannot include in
the sourcing document itself. You can attach a file, a standard internal library document
or component, or a URL.
You add a file attachment to reference an external document within a sourcing
document.

Note: You can also add attachments to discussion messages and to individual line items
and project schedule events within a sourcing document.

To add a file attachment:

1 On the sourcing document toolbar, or in a line item, project schedule event, or
discussion message, click the Attachments button. The Attachment button
appears as follows:

■ If the document has no attachments, this icon appears .

■ If the document has one or more attachments, this icon appears .

2 In the Attachments dialog box, click Attach File.
3 In the Required Information dialog box, do the following:

a Click the Lookup icon and select an attachment.

b In the Description field, type a description for the attachment.
c If the document is visible to vendors (such as an RFx), use the Visibility field
to select whether the attachment will be viewable on the sell-side and the
buy-side, or the buy-side only.
d Click Finish.
4 Click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To quickly add a file attachment without entering a description or selecting a

visibility, click Quick Upload instead of Attach File to select the attachment to add.

Related Topics
Adding an attachment by importing it from a library
Adding a URL attachment
Viewing an attachment
Toolbar functions

102 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Adding a URL attachment

Attachments enable you to reference additional information that you cannot include in
the sourcing document itself. You can attach a file, a standard internal library document
or component, or a URL.
You add a URL attachment to reference an external Web site within a sourcing
document.

Note: You can also add attachments to discussion messages and to individual line items
and project schedule events within a sourcing document.

To add a URL attachment:

1 On the sourcing document toolbar, or in a line item, project schedule event, or
discussion message, click the Attachments button. The Attachment button
appears as follows:

■ If the document has no attachments, this icon appears .

■ If the document has one or more attachments, this icon appears .

2 In the Attachments dialog box, click Attach URL.
3 In the Required Information dialog box, type a name, URL, and description for the
attachment.
4 Click Finish.
5 Click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Adding an attachment by importing it from a library
Adding a file attachment
Viewing an attachment
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 103

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Viewing an attachment
Attachments reference additional information that cannot be included in the sourcing
document itself. An attachment might be a file, a standard internal library document or
component, or a URL.

Note: You can also add attachments to discussion messages and to individual line items
and project schedule events within a sourcing document.

To view an attachment:
1 On the sourcing document toolbar, or in a line item, project schedule event, or
discussion message, click the Attachments button. If the document has one or

more attachments, this icon appears .

2 In the Attachments dialog box, click the name of the attachment to view. You see
the attachment.
3 When you finish viewing the attachment, close the attachment and click OK in the
Attachments dialog box.

Related Topics
Adding an attachment by importing it from a library
Adding a file attachment
Adding a URL attachment
Toolbar functions

104 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Discussions toolbar button functions

Click the Discussions toolbar button to:
` Create a discussion topic
` Create a discussion message
` Reply to a discussion message
` View a discussion message and its replies
` Delete a discussion message

In your user profile, you can subscribe or unsubscribe to discussion notifications.

Related Topics
Creating a discussion topic in a sourcing document
Creating a discussion message
Field help for discussions: Message dialog box
Replying to a discussion message
Viewing discussion messages and replies
Deleting a discussion topic or message
Subscribing and unsubscribing to discussion notifications
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 105

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Creating a discussion topic in a sourcing document

Discussions are a collaboration tool used by you, your document collaborators, and
suppliers to clarify issues related to a product or the sourcing process. A discussion is
associated with a sourcing document and stored as part of its history.
Discussions are categorized by topic. You can create messages and replies within a
topic.
In most modules, discussions are visible only to you and your collaborators. The
Auctions, RFx, and Master Agreement modules provide the option to enable all
associated suppliers or a single supplier to see and respond to a discussion message.

Note: You can also participate in global discussions that are not associated with a
particular sourcing document. Global discussions appear in the Global Discussions
channel of the Workbench. Since global discussion topics are predefined, you cannot
create them, but you can add messages to them. For details, see Using the
Workbench Global Discussions channel.

To create a discussion topic:

Note: A sourcing document must be in edit mode to create a discussion topic.

1 On the toolbar, click the Discussions button. The Discussions button appears as
follows:

■ If the document has no topics: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with unread messages: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with no unread messages: .

2 In the Discussions dialog box, click New Topic.
3 In the New Topic dialog box, type a name and description for the topic.
4 Optionally, create a new message. For details, see Creating a discussion
message.
5 Click OK.
6 In the Discussions dialog box, click OK.

Related Topics
Creating a discussion message
Field help for discussions: Message dialog box
Replying to a discussion message

106 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Viewing discussion messages and replies

Deleting a discussion topic or message
Subscribing and unsubscribing to discussion notifications
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 107

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Creating a discussion message

Discussions are a collaboration tool used by you, your document collaborators, and
suppliers to clarify issues related to a product or the sourcing process. A discussion is
associated with a sourcing document and stored as part of its history.
Discussions are categorized by topic. You can start a new topic or create messages
within an existing topic. You can also reply to a message. For details, see Replying to
a discussion message.
In most modules, discussions are visible only to you and your collaborators. The
Auctions, RFx, and Master Agreement modules provide the option to enable all
associated suppliers or a single supplier to see and respond to a discussion message.

Note: You can also create messages unrelated to particular sourcing documents in the
Global Discussions channel of the Workbench. Global discussion topics are predefined by
a systems administrator. For details, see Using the Workbench Global Discussions
channel.

To create a discussion message:

Note: The sourcing document must be in edit mode to create a discussion message.

1 On the toolbar, click the Discussions button. The Discussions button appears as
follows:

■ If the document has no topics: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with unread messages: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with no unread messages: .

2 In the Discussions dialog box, do one of the following:
■ To create a message in a new topic, click New Topic, fill in the fields in the
New Topic dialog box, and click New Message.

■ To create a message in an existing topic, click the Edit icon for the topic
in which to create a message and click New Message.
3 In the New Message dialog box, fill in the fields and optionally add an attachment

by clicking the Lookup icon .

4 Click OK. You see the message listed in the Topic dialog box.
5 In the Topic dialog box, click OK.
6 In the Discussions dialog box, click OK.

108 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Related Topics
Creating a discussion topic in a sourcing document
Field help for discussions: Message dialog box
Replying to a discussion message
Viewing discussion messages and replies
Deleting a discussion topic or message
Subscribing and unsubscribing to discussion notifications
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 109

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Field help for discussions: Message dialog box

Discussions are a collaboration tool used by you, your document collaborators, and
suppliers to clarify issues related to a product or the sourcing process. A discussion is
associated with a sourcing document and stored as part of its history.
The Message dialog box is displayed when you click the New Message button in a

discussion or when you click the Edit icon for an existing message.

Visibility: Select one of the following from the drop-down list:

` Buyers and Vendors: Select this option to make the message visible to document
collaborators and suppliers associated with the document.
` Buy-Side Only: Select this option to make the message visible to document
collaborators.
` Specific Vendor: Select this option to make the message visible to a specific
supplier associated with the document.

Specific Vendor: Select the supplier to view this message. This field appears only if
you selected Specific Vendor from the Visibility drop-down list.

Notification Settings: Select one of the following from the drop-down list:
` No Notification: Select this option to send no notification of the new message.
` Notify All Collaborators: Select this option to send a notification of the new
message to all collaborators.
` Notify Selected Collaborators: Select this option to send a notification only to
selected collaborators.
Note: Only collaborators who have subscribed to discussion notifications will receive
notifications. For details, see Subscribing and unsubscribing to discussion
notifications.

Collaborator Notification List: Select the collaborators to receive notification of the

new message. This table appears only if you selected Notify Selected Collaborators
from the Notification Settings drop-down list.

Message Contents

Author: Indicates the author of the discussion message.

Company: Indicates the company to which the author belongs.

Subject: Type a subject for the message.

110 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Content: Type the content of the message.

Attachment: Click the Lookup icon to add an attachment.

Related Topics
Creating a discussion topic in a sourcing document
Creating a discussion message
Replying to a discussion message
Viewing discussion messages and replies
Deleting a discussion topic or message
Subscribing and unsubscribing to discussion notifications
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 111

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Replying to a discussion message

Discussions are a collaboration tool used by you, your document collaborators, and
suppliers to clarify issues related to a product or the sourcing process. A discussion is
associated with a sourcing document and stored as part of its history.
Discussions are categorized by topic. As well as replying to a message, you can start a
new topic or create a new message within a topic. For details, see Creating a
discussion topic in a sourcing document and Creating a discussion message.
In the Discussion and Topic dialog boxes, messages are displayed chronologically, with
the most recent message (or the message with the most recent reply) displayed first.
You click a message to view its replies.

Note: You can also reply to messages unrelated to particular sourcing documents in the
Global Discussions channel of the Workbench. Global discussion topics are predefined by
a systems administrator. For details, see Using the Workbench Global Discussions
channel.

To reply to a message:
1 On the toolbar, click the Discussions button. The Discussions button appears as
follows:

■ If the document has no topics: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with unread messages: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with no unread messages: .

2 In the Discussions dialog box, do one of the following:

■ If the document is in edit mode, click the Edit icon for the message to
which to reply and then click the Reply button in the Message dialog box.

■ If the document is in view mode, click the View icon for the message to
which to reply and then click the Reply button in the Message dialog box.

■ In either edit mode or view mode, click the triangle next to the Edit icon

or the View icon for the message to which to reply, and select Reply to
Last Message from the menu.
3 In the New Message dialog box, fill in the Subject and Content fields and

optionally add an attachment by clicking the Lookup icon .

4 Click OK.

112 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

5 In the Discussions dialog box, click OK.

To view the replies to a message, click the Edit icon or the View icon for
the message in the Discussions or Topic dialog box.

Related Topics
Creating a discussion topic in a sourcing document
Creating a discussion message
Field help for discussions: Message dialog box
Viewing discussion messages and replies
Deleting a discussion topic or message
Subscribing and unsubscribing to discussion notifications
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 113

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Viewing discussion messages and replies

Discussions are a collaboration tool used by you, your document collaborators, and
suppliers to clarify issues related to a product or the sourcing process. A discussion is
associated with a sourcing document and stored as part of its history.
Discussions are categorized by topic. You can create messages and replies within a
topic. Message replies are stored in a hierarchy under the message.
In the Discussion and Topic dialog boxes, messages are displayed chronologically, with
the most recent message (or the message with the most recent reply) displayed first.
You click a message to view its replies.

Note: You can also view messages and replies in the New Discussions and Global
Discussions channels of the Workbench. The New Discussions channel shows unread
messages related to all sourcing documents for which you are the owner or a
collaborator. The Global Discussions channel contains discussions that are unrelated to
particular sourcing documents. For details, see Using the Workbench New
Discussions channel and Using the Workbench Global Discussions channel.

To view a message:
1 On the toolbar, click the Discussions button. The Discussions button appears as
follows:

■ If the document has no topics: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with unread messages: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with no unread messages: .

2 In the Discussions dialog box, do one of the following:

■ If the document is in edit mode, click the Edit icon for the message to
view.

■ If the document is in view mode, click the View icon for the message to
view.
In the Messages dialog box, you see the message with its replies, if any.
3 When you have finished viewing the message, click OK in the Messages dialog box.
4 In the Discussions dialog box, click OK.

Related Topics
Creating a discussion topic in a sourcing document
Creating a discussion message

114 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Field help for discussions: Message dialog box

Replying to a discussion message
Deleting a discussion topic or message
Subscribing and unsubscribing to discussion notifications
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 115

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Deleting a discussion topic or message

Discussions are a collaboration tool used by you, your document collaborators, and
suppliers to clarify issues related to a product or the sourcing process. A discussion is
associated with a sourcing document and stored as part of its history.
Discussions are categorized by topic. You can create messages and replies within a
topic. Message replies are stored in a hierarchy under the message. When you delete a
message, you also delete any replies associated with the message.
You cannot use the Undo button to cancel discussion changes. You must delete topics
and messages as described below.

Note: To delete a discussion topic or message, you must be given the appropriate
access rights in your Security Profile. Contact your system administrator for details.

To delete a discussion topic or message:

Note: The sourcing document must be in edit mode to delete a message.

1 On the toolbar, click the Discussions button. The Discussions button appears as
follows:

■ If the document has no topics: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with unread messages: .

■ If the document has one or more topics with no unread messages: .

2 In the Discussions dialog box, click the Trashcan icon for the topic or message
to delete.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The topic or message is deleted.
4 In the Discussions dialog box, click OK.

Related Topics
Creating a discussion topic in a sourcing document
Creating a discussion message
Field help for discussions: Message dialog box
Replying to a discussion message
Viewing discussion messages and replies
Subscribing and unsubscribing to discussion notifications
Toolbar functions

116 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Subscribing and unsubscribing to discussion notifications

Discussions are a collaboration tool used by you, your document collaborators, and
suppliers to clarify issues related to a product or the sourcing process. A discussion is
associated with a sourcing document and stored as part of its history.
Discussions are categorized by topic. You can create messages and replies within a
topic. Message replies are stored in a hierarchy under the message.
You can subscribe or unsubscribe to discussions by editing your user account
information. Subscribing to discussion notifications enables you to receive email
notifications of new discussion messages in sourcing documents for which you are a
collaborator.

Note: You receive notification of a new message only if the message creator chooses
to send notifications to collaborators.

To subscribe or unsubscribe to discussion notifications:

1 Click your user name in the upper right corner of any Frictionless SRM page.
2 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
3 On the Account Properties page, under Other Information, do one of the following:
■ To subscribe, check the Subscribe to Discussion Notifications box.
■ To unsubscribe, remove the checkmark from the Subscribe to Discussion
Notifications box.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a discussion topic in a sourcing document
Creating a discussion message
Field help for discussions: Message dialog box
Replying to a discussion message
Viewing discussion messages and replies
Deleting a discussion topic or message
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 117

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Chat toolbar button functions

You use the Chat feature to send instant messages to collaborators and suppliers
associated with a sourcing document. Chat messages can be public, to include all
collaborators and/or suppliers, or private, to be directed to a single collaborator or
supplier. Chat users receive message alerts when they have new chat messages that
have not been viewed. Icons help you identify the status of a given message.

Click the Chat toolbar button to:

` Conduct a chat

Field Help for the Chat window

Users in Channel
The Users in Channel panel displays the users associated with the sourcing document
(collaborators and, if applicable, suppliers) who are currently viewing the document.
User names are displayed as follows:

` Users who are logged onto Frictionless SRM are indicated with a gray icon .
These users can view their public and private messages when they open the Chat
window for the document.
` Users who have the document and its Chat window open are identified with a

yellow icon . These users can view public and private messages.
` The name of the current user (that is, your name) appears in grey.

Private Messages
Private messages can only be sent to users listed in the Users in Channel panel. Click a
user name to post a private message to a single user. Click Cancel to return to the
Public Message feature.
You can send a private message to a user who is logged on but does not have the Chat
window open. When the user switches pages in Frictionless SRM, a message will be
displayed indicating that the user has a message to read.

Public Messages
Public messages sent by the document owner or collaborators can be seen by all
collaborators and suppliers listed in the Users in Channel panel. Public messages sent
by a supplier can only be seen by the document collaborators, not by other suppliers.
Users who are logged on but do not have the Chat window open will be notified about
public messages when they switch pages in Frictionless SRM.

118 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Color Schemes and Fonts

Each message is identified by the name of the user who sent it. The system color codes
each user type for easy identification.
` The current user's name (that is, your name) appears in red.
` Collaborator names appear in blue.
` Supplier names appear in green.

The system distinguishes between different types of messages as follows:

` Public messages appear in regular text.
` Private messages appear in italics and indicate the name of the user to whom the
message was sent.

Message Alert
If a public or private message is sent to you when you do not have the Chat window
open, you will be notified about the message when you switch pages in the application.
Click OK to open the Chat window (also opening the document, if necessary) and see
the message.

Channel List
The Channel List displays a list of all documents, types, and templates that you have
permission to view. The following icons indicate a document’s chat status:

` Documents with no messages are indicated with a blank icon .

` Documents with messages that have been read are indicated by a checkmark .

` Documents with unread public messages are indicated by quotes .

` Documents with unread private messages are indicated by blinking quotes .

Related Topics
Conducting a chat
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 119

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Conducting a chat
You use the chat feature to send instant messages to collaborators and suppliers
associated with a sourcing document. Chat messages can be public, to include all
collaborators and/or suppliers, or private, to be directed to a single collaborator or
supplier. Chat users receive message alerts when they have new chat messages that
have not been viewed. Icons help you identify the status of a given message.
You can only send chat messages to users who are currently logged onto Frictionless
SRM.
You access chat by clicking the Chat button in the toolbar of a sourcing document. For
more details about Chat, see Chat toolbar button functions.

To send a private message:

1 Click a user name. User names are displayed as follows:

■ Users who are logged onto Frictionless SRM are indicated with a gray icon .
These users can view messages when they open the document.
■ Users who have the document and its Chat window open are identified with a

yellow icon . These users can receive messages.

2 In the Private Message text box, type the message.
3 Click Send.
The message appears in the message panel. Only the selected user can view the
message. If the user does not have the Chat window open, the user will receive
notification of the message when switching pages in Frictionless SRM or upon
opening the current document.

To respond to a private message:

1 To respond to a private message with a private response, click the name of the user
to whom to respond. Note that if you do not click a user name, your response is
public and can be viewed by all users associated with the document.
2 In the Private Message text box, type the response.
3 Click Send.
The message appears in the message panel. Only the selected user can view the
message.

To send a public message:

1 In the Public Message text box, type the message.
Note: If the Private Message text box is displayed, click Cancel to display the
Public Message text box.

120 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

2 Click Send.
The message appears in the message panel. All users who have Chat open for this
document can view the message. Users who do not have the Chat window open will
receive notification of the message when switching pages in Frictionless SRM or
upon opening the current document.

Related Topics
Chat toolbar button functions
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 121

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Change Phase toolbar button functions

Click the Change Phase button to:

` Change the phase of a sourcing document

Related Topics
Changing a sourcing document phase
Changing the phase of a project or contract document
Toolbar functions

122 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Changing a sourcing document phase

The phases you can select for a sourcing document are determined by the document
type and by any special rights or workflow constraints associated with the document.

Phase types vary by sourcing document. For information on specific phase types, see:
` Changing an RFx phase
` Changing a demand aggregation document phase
` Changing a demand aggregation response phase
` Changing a contract clause phase
` Changing a contract section phase
` Changing a contract document template phase

To change a phase:

1 On the toolbar, click the Change Phase button . The button text indicates the
current document phase.
2 In the Change Phase dialog box, select the new phase.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
4 In the Change Phase dialog box, click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Changing the phase of a project or contract document
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 123

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Changing the phase of a project or contract document

For a project or contract document, the method of changing a phase is different from
that for other types of sourcing documents.
For projects and contract documents, you change the phase of the document using the
Change Phase button and drop-down list. Some phases in the list may be associated
with workflows, which may be linked to approval processes. See Workflow for a full
overview.

The Change Phase button provides the following information:

` When the document is first created, the Change Phase button may read No Phase.

` If the phase is not associated with an approval workflow, its icon is:
` If the phase is associated with an approval workflow that has not been completed,

its icon is:

` If the phase is associated with an approval workflow and the document has been

approved, its icon is: .

` If the phase is associated with an approval workflow and the document has been

rejected, its icon is: .

Note: A phase associated with a workflow may change automatically rather than
manually, depending on the workflow design.

For information on changing the phase for other sourcing documents, see Changing a
sourcing document phase.

To change a phase for a project or contract document:

1 Ensure that all the necessary information has been added to the document.
2 On the toolbar, click the Change Phase button. The button text indicates the
current document phase. When the document is created, it may read No Phase.
3 Select a phase from the drop-down list.
Note: The phase configuration determines the phases to which the document can
move, depending on its current phase. Some phases may be disabled.
4 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The document advances to the chosen
phase.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

124 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Related Topics
Quick Reference: Working with sourcing document workflow
Viewing phase information for a sourcing document
Changing a sourcing document phase
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 125

Toolbar functions General Tasks

Approve and Reject toolbar button functions

Click the Approve button or the Reject button to approve or reject a

document.
You can only approve or reject a document if you are designated as an Approver in the
document’s Collaborator list, or if the process template associated with the document’s
workflow indicates that you are an Approver.

Related Topics
Approving or rejecting a document from the document toolbar
Approving or rejecting a sourcing document in the My Workflow Activities channel
Quick Reference: Working with sourcing document workflow
Toolbar functions

126 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Toolbar functions

Approving or rejecting a document from the document toolbar

You can only approve or reject a document if you are designated as an Approver in the
document’s Collaborator list, or if the process template associated with the document’s
workflow indicates that you are an Approver.
You can approve or reject a sourcing document directly from the Current Approvals
Report available from the My Workflow Activities channel. For details, see Approving
or rejecting a sourcing document in the My Workflow Activities channel. You
can also approve a sourcing document from the toolbar of the document.

To approve or reject the document from the document toolbar:

1 Open the document to approve or reject.

2 In the toolbar, click the Approve button or the Reject button .

3 In the confirmation dialog box that appears, do the following:
■ Optionally, enter comments.
■ If you are rejecting the document, optionally select a reason for the rejection.
■ Optionally, add an attachment.
■ Click Finish.
Note: Clicking Cancel in the confirmation dialog box only cancels this approval or
rejection. It has no effect on the overall workflow process.

Related Topics
Approving or rejecting a sourcing document in the My Workflow Activities channel
Quick Reference: Working with sourcing document workflow
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 127

Header functions General Tasks

Header functions
This section covers adding a collaborator, a group of collaborators, or a collaborating
company, as well as adding document links and viewing change history.

Related Topics
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding an approver to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Viewing change history for a sourcing document

128 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Header functions

Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document

Collaborators are other Frictionless® SRM users within your enterprise who have access
to your sourcing document. You can determine collaborators’ access privileges by
assigning them a role. You can add a coworker, a group of coworkers, or a company
within your organization as a collaborator.

To add a collaborator:
1 On the Header page under Collaborators, click one of the following buttons:
■ Add User Account
■ Add Group
■ Add Company
2 Check the box for any user, group, or company to add. You may check more than
one box to add multiple collaborators.
3 Click OK.
4 On the Header page under Collaborators, optionally select a new role from the Role
drop-down list. For details about roles, see Field help for Document
Collaborator dialog box.
Note: The role determines the collaborator’s access to the document. Access
privileges appear in the Role Access column.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To edit a collaborator, click the Edit icon for the collaborator to edit on the
Header page.

Related Topics
Adding an approver to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Field help for Document Collaborator dialog box
Viewing change history for a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 129

Header functions General Tasks

Adding an approver to a sourcing document

A collaborator with the Approver role can approve or reject a document that is in a
phase associated with an approval workflow. As with other types of collaborators, you
can add single users or groups of users as approvers.

Approver Rules
The following rules illustrate how approvers work together in Frictionless® SRM.
` If more than one individual approver is added to the document, all approvers must
approve the document to complete the workflow and unlock the document.
However, if one approver rejects the document, the workflow is completed and the
document is rejected. Once the document is rejected, no other approvers can take
action.
` If approvers are added as a group, only one member of the approver group must
approve or reject the document in order to complete the workflow.
` If approvers are added as a mixture of groups and individual users, all individual
users and one member of each group must approve the document to complete the
workflow. Only one individual approver or one member of any approver group is
required to reject the document.
` Scripting in the workflow process template can modify these rules by specifying
whether any member or all members of an approver group must approve the
document to complete the workflow.

To add a collaborator:
1 On the Header page under Collaborators, click one of the following buttons:
■ Add User Account
■ Add Group
Note: You cannot add a company as an approver. If you attempt to assign the
Approver role to a company, an error message will be displayed.
2 Check the box for any user, group, or company to add. You may check more than
one box to add multiple collaborators.
3 Click OK.
4 On the Header page under Collaborators, select Approver from the Role drop-down
list.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Quick Reference: Working with sourcing document workflow
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document

130 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Header functions

Adding a document link to a sourcing document

Field help for Document Collaborator dialog box
Viewing change history for a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 131

Header functions General Tasks

Field help for Document Collaborator dialog box

In the Document Collaborator dialog box, you can edit collaborator information,
including changing the collaborator’s role. Much of the default information in this dialog
box is based on Collaborator Role Definitions.

Do Not Send Collaborator Alerts or Notices: Check this box to ensure that the
collaborator does not receive alerts or notices regarding this sourcing document.
Type: Indicates the collaborator’s user type in Frictionless® SRM. This field is read
only.

User Name: Indicates the collaborator’s user name. Click the Lookup icon to
select a different user.

Role: Indicates the collaborator’s role in the sourcing document. Click the Lookup icon
to select a different role.

Default collaborator roles include the following:

` Approver: This user can edit the sourcing document. Approvers can also approve
or reject the document if it is in a phase that is associated with an approval
workflow.
` Auditor: This user or group can view but not edit the sourcing document. It is
often assigned to a group for business process standards review.
` External Category Manager: This user has all rights to the sourcing document
and is responsible for the external category identified in the business document
` Owner: This user has all rights to the sourcing document and is responsible for
that document.
` Purchasing Manager: This user has all rights to the sourcing document. This role
is used with RFQuick templates to assign the owner at document creation.
` Sponsor: This user has all rights to the sourcing document and is typically an
executive within the organization sponsoring this activity.
` Reviewer: This user or group can view but not edit the sourcing document. It is
typically given to users to bring them into the business process.
` Requester: This user can view but not edit the sourcing document. It is used in
some business processes to track the person who initiated the request for this
document.
` Collaborator: A collaborator is a member of the project team. Users identified as
collaborators can view and edit the sourcing document and participate in
Discussions.

Email: Indicates the email address for the collaborator. This field is read only.

132 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Header functions

Represents: From the drop-down list, select the department or group to which this
collaborator belongs.

Collaborator Required to Approve RFx: Check this box to indicate that the
collaborator must approve the RFx before it can be viewed by suppliers. This field is
displayed only in an RFx document.
This box will be checked by default if the RFx has an Approve phase and the Security
Profile for the collaborator role is set to Allow for the Approve Business Documents
permission. Changing this permission to Not Set will prevent this box from being
checked by default. Contact your system administrator with questions about Security
Profiles.

Collaborator Approves RFx: If checked, indicates that the collaborator has approved
the RFx. This field is displayed only in an RFx document and is applicable only if the
Collaborator Required to Approve RFx box is checked.

Timestamp for Approval: This field indicates the date and time of the collaborator
approval, if the Collaborator Approves RFx box is checked.

Related Topics
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding an approver to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Viewing change history for a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 133

Header functions General Tasks

Adding a document link to a sourcing document

A document link can be either internal, to another sourcing document, or external, to a
URL. For example, you might create an external document link to an external business
document, such as a purchase order, requisition, or contract in another application.

To add a document link:

1 On the Header page under Document Links, click Add.
2 In the New Document Link dialog box, select whether the document is internal or
external.
3 Fill in the fields for the type of link you selected.
4 Click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding an approver to a sourcing document
Viewing change history for a sourcing document

134 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Header functions

Viewing change history for a sourcing document

Each sourcing document shows a record of when and by whom it was modified.

To view change history:

1 On the Header page for any sourcing document, scroll to the bottom of the page.
Under Change History, you see the most recent change information.
2 To view the complete change history for the document, click View Detailed
History.
3 When you finish viewing the detailed change history, click OK in the Change History
dialog box.

Related Topics
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding an approver to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 135

Schedule functions General Tasks

Schedule functions
You use schedules in the Projects, Demand Aggregation, Auction, RFx, and Contracts
modules. Schedules help you track the progress of projects, specify due dates for RFxs
and demand aggregation documents, specify renewal dates for master agreements,
plan tasks and milestones, and so forth.

Related Topics
Specifying a schedule event view
Adding an event to a schedule
Editing an event in a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Editing dependencies for an event
Tracking events
Adding dates to an event
Editing dates for an event
Viewing event dependencies
Viewing event dependents
Creating reminders for an event
Importing an event from a library

136 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Schedule functions

Specifying a schedule event view

Schedules help you track the progress of a sourcing document. For most sourcing
documents, you can use a schedule to create and track events associated with the
document.
On the Schedule page, you can select a view for schedule events. In any schedule
event view, event status is indicated as follows:
` Events that are in progress appear in bold.
` Events that are behind schedule appear in red.

In the Setup view, you can:

` Add and edit basic information about a schedule event
` Import schedule events from a library
` Reorder schedule events

In the Tracking view, you can:

` Add and edit the planned and actual dates for a schedule event
` Reorder schedule events

In the Dependency view, you can view dependencies for an event.

Related Topics
Adding an event to a schedule
Editing an event in a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Editing dependencies for an event
Tracking events
Adding dates to an event
Editing dates for an event
Viewing event dependencies
Viewing event dependents
Creating reminders for an event
Importing an event from a library

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 137

Schedule functions General Tasks

Adding an event to a schedule

1 On the Schedule page, click Add.
2 On the Settings page, fill in fields for basic information and fields under Type and
Reminders.
3 Click the Tracking tab to fill in fields for basic tracking information.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Specifying a schedule event view
Editing an event in a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Editing dependencies for an event
Tracking events
Adding dates to an event
Editing dates for an event
Viewing event dependencies
Viewing event dependents
Creating reminders for an event
Importing an event from a library

138 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Schedule functions

Editing an event in a schedule

1 On the Schedule page, click the Edit icon for the item to edit.
2 On the Settings page, fill in fields for basic information and fields under Type and
Reminders.
3 Click the Tracking tab to fill in fields for basic tracking information.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Specifying a schedule event view
Adding an event to a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Editing dependencies for an event
Tracking events
Adding dates to an event
Editing dates for an event
Viewing event dependencies
Viewing event dependents
Creating reminders for an event
Importing an event from a library

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 139

Schedule functions General Tasks

Adding a dependency to an event

1 On the Schedule page, click the Edit icon for the event to which to add
dependencies.
2 Under Type, select Depends on Event in the Start Date field.
3 In the Event table, click Add.
4 Select a dependency from the Event drop-down list and fill in the other fields.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Specifying a schedule event view
Adding an event to a schedule
Editing an event in a schedule
Editing dependencies for an event
Tracking events
Adding dates to an event
Editing dates for an event
Viewing event dependencies
Viewing event dependents
Creating reminders for an event
Importing an event from a library

140 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Schedule functions

Editing dependencies for an event

1 On the Schedule page, click the Edit icon for the event for which to edit a
dependency.

2 On the Settings page under Type, click the Edit icon for the dependency to
edit.
3 In the dialog box, edit any fields and click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Specifying a schedule event view
Adding an event to a schedule
Editing an event in a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Tracking events
Adding dates to an event
Editing dates for an event
Viewing event dependencies
Viewing event dependents
Creating reminders for an event
Importing an event from a library

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 141

Schedule functions General Tasks

Tracking events

1 On the Schedule page, click the Edit icon for any event.
2 Click the Tracking tab. You see the baseline, planned, and actual start and end
dates for each event.

Note: You can also use the Tracking View to track events.

Related Topics
Specifying a schedule event view
Adding an event to a schedule
Editing an event in a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Editing dependencies for an event
Adding dates to an event
Editing dates for an event
Viewing event dependencies
Viewing event dependents
Creating reminders for an event
Importing an event from a library

142 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Schedule functions

Adding dates to an event

1 On the Schedule page, click the Edit icon for any event.
2 Click the Tracking tab.
3 Fill in the fields with date information.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
5 On the Schedule page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also use the Tracking View to add dates to an event.

Related Topics
Specifying a schedule event view
Adding an event to a schedule
Editing an event in a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Editing dependencies for an event
Tracking events
Editing dates for an event
Viewing event dependencies
Viewing event dependents
Creating reminders for an event
Importing an event from a library

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 143

Schedule functions General Tasks

Editing dates for an event

1 On the Schedule page, click the Edit icon for any event.
2 Click the Tracking tab.
3 Edit any date information in the fields.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
5 On the Schedule page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also use the Tracking View to edit dates for an event.

Related Topics
Specifying a schedule event view
Adding an event to a schedule
Editing an event in a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Editing dependencies for an event
Tracking events
Adding dates to an event
Viewing event dependencies
Viewing event dependents
Creating reminders for an event
Importing an event from a library

144 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Schedule functions

Viewing event dependencies

` On the Schedule page, select Dependency View from the drop-down list. You see
the dependencies for each event.

Related Topics
Specifying a schedule event view
Adding an event to a schedule
Editing an event in a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Editing dependencies for an event
Tracking events
Adding dates to an event
Editing dates for an event
Viewing event dependents
Creating reminders for an event
Importing an event from a library

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 145

Schedule functions General Tasks

Viewing event dependents

1 On the Schedule page, click the Edit icon for the event for which to view
dependents.
2 On the Settings page, click the Dependents tab. You see the events that are
dependent on this event.

Related Topics
Specifying a schedule event view
Adding an event to a schedule
Editing an event in a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Editing dependencies for an event
Tracking events
Adding dates to an event
Editing dates for an event
Viewing event dependencies
Creating reminders for an event
Importing an event from a library

146 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Schedule functions

Creating reminders for an event

1 In the Setup view for the Schedule page, click the Edit icon for the event for
which to create reminders. You see the Settings page.
2 Under Reminders, fill in the fields with reminder information.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
4 On the Schedule page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Specifying a schedule event view
Adding an event to a schedule
Editing an event in a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Editing dependencies for an event
Tracking events
Adding dates to an event
Editing dates for an event
Viewing event dependencies
Viewing event dependents
Importing an event from a library

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 147

Schedule functions General Tasks

Importing an event from a library

You can import an event from a library into a schedule in a sourcing document or
template. An event is one type of library component.
When imported into a document, a library component is no longer linked to its library.
When imported into a template, a library component is linked by default to its library,
so that any changes to the library component affect all linked templates. After you
import a library component into a template, you can unlink it from the library. An
unlinked component does not change if the corresponding component is modified in the
library.
After a component is unlinked from a library, it cannot be linked again. To recreate the
link, reimport the component from the library.

To import an event from a library:

1 On the Schedule page, click Import from Library.
2 From the drop-down list, select the library from which to import the event.
3 Check the box for the event to import. You can check more than one box to import
multiple events.
4 Click OK. You see the imported events in the events list.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Specifying a schedule event view
Adding an event to a schedule
Editing an event in a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Editing dependencies for an event
Tracking events
Adding dates to an event
Editing dates for an event
Viewing event dependencies
Viewing event dependents
Creating reminders for an event

148 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Accounting functions

Accounting functions
The Accounting page in a sourcing document allows you to assign costs to different
parts of your business. Ultimately, all cost data rolls up into the general ledger, which
becomes the legal record for accounting information. However, general ledger accounts
often focus on accounting needs and do not provide a complete picture of cost. The
Accounting page provides additional fields that enable you to assign and track costs as
needed.
You can add accounting information to projects, RFxs, auctions, and master
agreements.

Related Topics
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Field help for the Accounting page in a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 149

Accounting functions General Tasks

Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

The Accounting page in a sourcing document allows you to assign costs to different
parts of your business. Ultimately, all cost data rolls up into the general ledger, which
becomes the legal record for accounting information. However, general ledger accounts
often focus on accounting needs and do not provide a complete picture of cost. The
Accounting page provides additional fields that enable you to assign and track costs as
needed.
You can add accounting information for projects, RFxs, auctions, and master
agreements.

To add accounting information:

1 On the Accounting page under Accounting Information, click Add.

2 In the Accounting Information table, fill in each field by clicking its Lookup icon .
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can click an Edit icon on the Accounting page to edit existing accounting
information.

Related Topics
Field help for the Accounting page in a sourcing document

150 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Accounting functions

Field help for the Accounting page in a sourcing document

The Accounting page in a sourcing document allows you to assign costs to different
parts of your business. Ultimately, all cost data rolls up into the general ledger, which
becomes the legal record for accounting information. However, general ledger accounts
often focus on accounting needs and do not provide a complete picture of cost. The
Accounting page provides additional fields that enable you to assign and track costs as
needed.
You can edit accounting information for projects, RFxs, auctions, and master
agreements.

The following provides help for the fields on the Accounting page.

Activity: Click the Lookup icon to select the business activity against which to
track costs. For example, activities might include travel, professional fees, training,
software expenses, and so on. Activities are created in Setup or imported from the
system of record.

Cost Center: Click the Lookup icon to select a cost center for the activity. A cost
center is an organizational unit or department (sales, services, IT, finance, marketing,
engineering, and so on) to which to assign the specified cost. Cost center information is
used for spend analysis. Cost centers are created in Setup or imported from the system
of record.

Entity: Click the Lookup icon to select the business entity for the activity. An entity
can be a legal entity, for multi-location companies, or a company within a
conglomerate. Entities are created in Setup or imported from the system of record.

General Ledger Account: Click the Lookup icon to select a general ledger
account (GLA), which represents a general ledger account (the lowest organizational
unit of cost assignment) in your accounting system. GLAs are created in Setup or
imported from the system of record.
Benefit (%): Type the percentage you expect to save with this accounting activity.
The sum of the percentage values in the Benefit column must equal 100.

Related Topics
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 151

Library functions General Tasks

Library functions
Libraries contain components that can be imported into contracts, sourcing documents,
and templates. You can import a library component from within any module. Each
sourcing document module has its own library, as does the contract generation
process.
When a library component is imported into a template, a link to the library can be
maintained so that changes made to a component are reflected in each linked template
using that component. Thus, you need to modify common, standard components only
once.
You create and modify library components for all modules in Setup.

Related Topics
Importing a library component
Unlinking a library component in a template

152 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Library functions

Importing a library component

Libraries contain components that can be imported into contracts, sourcing documents,
and templates. You can import a library component from within any module. Each
sourcing document module has its own library, as does the contract generation
process.
When imported into a document, a library component is no longer linked to its library.
When imported into a template, a library component is linked by default to its library,
so that any changes to the library component affect all linked templates.
After you import a library component into a template, you can unlink it from the library.
An unlinked component does not change if the corresponding component is modified in
the library.
After a component is unlinked from a library, it cannot be linked again. To recreate the
link, reimport the component from the library.

To import a library component:

1 In any sourcing document or template, in the toolbar under a list of items, click
Import from Library.
2 In the dialog box, select a library from the drop-down list.
3 Check the box for the component to import. You can check more than one box to
import multiple components.
4 Click OK. You see the imported components in the list of items.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Unlinking a library component in a template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 153

Library functions General Tasks

Unlinking a library component in a template

Libraries contain components that can be imported into contracts, sourcing documents,
and templates. You can import a library component from within any module. Each
sourcing document module has its own library, as does the contract generation
process.
After you import a library component into a template, you can unlink it from the library.
An unlinked component does not change if the corresponding component is modified in
the library.
After a component is unlinked from a library, it cannot be linked again. To recreate the
link, reimport the component from the library.

To unlink a library component:

1 In a template in a list of items, check the box for the imported library component to
unlink. You can check more than one box to select multiple components.
2 In the toolbar under the list of items, click Unlink.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

Related Topics
Importing a library component

154 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Report functions

Report functions
Reports can convey document-specific information or a broader range of information
about the application. You can see document-specific reports by clicking the Reports
button in the document toolbar.

You can see more general reports on the Analysis page. To display the Analysis page,
do one of the following:
` Click Spend and Compliance in the navigation bar and select Reports from the
drop-down list.
` Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Reports from the
drop-down list.
` Click Vendor Management in the navigation bar and select Reports from the
drop-down list.

This section describes the functions you can perform within any report, including the
following:
` Bookmark a report
` Exporting a report as a PDF file
` Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

Related Topics
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 155

Report functions General Tasks

Bookmarking a report
You can bookmark a report for future reference.

To bookmark a report:
1 On the report toolbar, click the Bookmark Report button.
2 In the New Bookmark dialog box, type the name of the bookmark and click OK.

Related Topics
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Report functions

156 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Report functions

Exporting a report as a PDF file

You can export a report as a PDF file to save or print.

To export a report as a PDF:

1 On the report toolbar, click the Export PDF button. You see the report as a PDF file.
2 Save or print the report.

Related Topics
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Report functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 157

Report functions General Tasks

Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

You choose whether to export documents as Excel or CSV files by editing your user
account information. The default setting is to export as an Excel file.

To export a report as an Excel or CSV file:

1 On the report toolbar, click the Export Excel or Export CSV button.
2 In the File Download dialog box, click Save.
3 In the Save As dialog box, type a file name, choose a location for the file, and click
Save. The file is exported to the selected location.

Related Topics
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Report functions

158 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Importing and exporting system data

Importing and exporting system data

This section covers tasks associated with importing and exporting data from
Frictionless® SRM.

Related Topics
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Exporting line items as a CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 159

Importing and exporting system data General Tasks

Formatting line items for import from a CSV file

You can import line items from a CSV file into an auction, an RFx, a demand
aggregation document, or a master agreement. To format the line items for import, you
obtain a template from the sourcing document module. Import templates are for use
with Microsoft® Excel.

To obtain a template and format line items:

1 On the Line Items page of the sourcing module into which to import line items, click
Import.
2 In the Import Wizard dialog box, click the template link in the Template field.
3 In the File Download dialog box, click Open. The import template opens in
Microsoft Excel.
4 Type line item information into the appropriate columns.
5 Name and save the document. The document is ready for import.

Related Topics
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Exporting line items as a CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

160 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Importing and exporting system data

Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

You can import line items from a CSV file into an auction, an RFx, a demand
aggregation document, or a master agreement. You can also import RFx specifications
from a CSV file.
For information about formatting line items for import, see Formatting line items for
import from a CSV file.

To import line items:

1 On the Line Items page of the sourcing module into which to import line items, click
Import.

2 In the Import Wizard dialog box, click the Lookup icon for the Upload Import
File field and select the file to import.
3 To see a preview of the line items before importing, check the File Preview box.
4 Follow the prompts in the wizard to import the file. You see the imported line items
on the Line Items page.

Related Topics
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Exporting line items as a CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 161

Importing and exporting system data General Tasks

Exporting line items as a CSV file

The sourcing document must be in view mode to export line items.

To export line items:

1 On the Line Items page, click the Export button.
2 In the File Download dialog box, click Save.
3 In the Save As dialog box, type a file name, choose a location for the file, and click
Save. The file is exported to the selected location.

Related Topics
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

162 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Importing and exporting system data

Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV

file
You choose whether to export documents as Excel or CSV files by editing your user
account information. The default setting is to export as an Excel file.

To export a list of sourcing documents as Excel or CSV:

1 On the List page of any module, click the Export Excel or Export CSV button.
2 In the File Download dialog box, click Save.
3 In the Save As dialog box, type a file name, choose a location for the file, and click
Save. The file is exported to the selected location.

Related Topics
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Exporting line items as a CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 163

Importing and exporting system data General Tasks

Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

1 On the List page of any module, click the Export PDF button. You see the list of
sourcing documents as a PDF file.
2 Save or print the PDF file.

Related Topics
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Exporting line items as a CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

164 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Miscellaneous tasks

Miscellaneous tasks
This section covers miscellaneous tasks that you can perform throughout most
modules.

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Using the Lookup icon
Deleting items from a list
Editing an item in a list
Reordering items in a list
Using keyboard shortcuts in a list
Selecting a currency for a sourcing document
Formatting text in a text field
Editing your user account information

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 165

Miscellaneous tasks General Tasks

Searching for a sourcing document

You search for a sourcing document on the List page of its sourcing document module.
For example, you search for a project on the Project List page.

To search for a document:

1 On the List page of any module, select a set of documents to search from the
drop-down list. You see a list of that set of documents.
2 In the In box, select a search criterion from the drop-down list.
3 In the Find box, type a search string and click Go. The row for the first document
matching your search string is highlighted.
4 Click Go again to find another match.
5 To view a document, click its name.

Related Topics
Using the Lookup icon
Deleting items from a list
Editing an item in a list
Reordering items in a list
Using keyboard shortcuts in a list
Selecting a currency for a sourcing document
Formatting text in a text field
Editing your user account information

166 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Miscellaneous tasks

Using the Lookup icon

You use the Lookup icon to select an item from a group of items.

To use the Lookup icon:

1 Click the Lookup icon .

2 Select a group of items to view from the drop-down list.
3 Depending on the option you select, do one of the following:
■ Type a search string in the box and press Show.
■ Type a search string in the Find box, select a search criterion in the In box, and
press Go.
4 Check a box to select an item in the list. In some cases, you can check more than
one box to select multiple items.
5 Click OK.

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Deleting items from a list
Editing an item in a list
Reordering items in a list
Using keyboard shortcuts in a list
Selecting a currency for a sourcing document
Formatting text in a text field
Editing your user account information

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 167

Miscellaneous tasks General Tasks

Deleting items from a list

You can delete any item that has a Trashcan icon .

There are two ways to delete items: individually or as part of a selected group.

Note: Be sure that you want to delete the item or items before performing this action.
You cannot recover a deleted item.

To delete a single item:

1 Click the Trashcan icon for the item to delete.

2 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The item is deleted.

To delete multiple items:

1 In any list table with an initial column of checkboxes, check the boxes for the items
to delete. To select all items, check the box in the table header.
2 Click Delete Selected.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The items are deleted.

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Using the Lookup icon
Editing an item in a list
Reordering items in a list
Using keyboard shortcuts in a list
Selecting a currency for a sourcing document
Formatting text in a text field
Editing your user account information

168 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Miscellaneous tasks

Editing an item in a list

1 Click the Edit icon for the item to edit.

2 Edit the item.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Using the Lookup icon
Deleting items from a list
Reordering items in a list
Using keyboard shortcuts in a list
Selecting a currency for a sourcing document
Formatting text in a text field
Editing your user account information

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 169

Miscellaneous tasks General Tasks

Reordering items in a list

You can reorder listed items within sourcing documents. However, you cannot reorder
sourcing documents on a List page.

To reorder items:
1 In the toolbar below the list, click Reorder.
2 Reorder the items by dragging them into new positions.
3 Click OK. You see the items in the order you indicated.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Using the Lookup icon
Deleting items from a list
Editing an item in a list
Using keyboard shortcuts in a list
Selecting a currency for a sourcing document
Formatting text in a text field
Editing your user account information

170 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Miscellaneous tasks

Using keyboard shortcuts in a list

You can use a keyboard shortcut to perform certain actions in a list.

Keyboard shortcuts are as follows:

` For Next, press CTRL-Shift-n. The next page in the list is displayed.
` For Previous, press CTRL-Shift-p. The previous page in the list is displayed.
` For Find Next, press CTRL-Shift-f. The next instance of the value in the Find field is
displayed.

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Using the Lookup icon
Deleting items from a list
Editing an item in a list
Reordering items in a list
Selecting a currency for a sourcing document
Formatting text in a text field
Editing your user account information

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 171

Miscellaneous tasks General Tasks

Selecting a currency for a sourcing document

1 On the Header page for a sourcing document, select a currency from the Currency
drop-down list.
2 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Using the Lookup icon
Deleting items from a list
Editing an item in a list
Reordering items in a list
Using keyboard shortcuts in a list
Formatting text in a text field
Editing your user account information

172 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Miscellaneous tasks

Formatting text in a text field

Some sourcing documents contain text fields in which you can format text using a
formatting toolbar.

To format text:
1 Type your text in the text box.
2 Use the standard text formatting drop-down lists and icons to format the text.
3 To add a hyperlink to the text, do the following:
a Select the text to hyperlink.

b Click the Hyperlink icon .

c In the Hyperlink dialog box, enter Type and URL information and click OK.
4 To use text with HTML formatting, type or paste the HTML text and formatting into
the text box and check the View HTML Source box.
5 To check the spelling of the text, click Spell Check.
6 When you finish formatting text, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Using the Lookup icon
Deleting items from a list
Editing an item in a list
Reordering items in a list
Using keyboard shortcuts in a list
Selecting a currency for a sourcing document
Editing your user account information

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 173

Miscellaneous tasks General Tasks

Editing your user account information

You can edit your own user account information from anywhere in the Frictionless®
SRM application. If you have any questions about your user account information, see
your system administrator.

To edit your user account information:

1 Click your user name in the upper right corner of any Frictionless SRM page.
2 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
3 On the Account Properties page, edit any fields under Account Information, Contact
Information, and Other Information. For details, see Field help for User Account:
Account Properties page.
Note: You can choose whether to export documents as Excel or CSV files. To export
as Excel, leave the Export as Excel box under Other Information checked. This is
the default setting. To export as CSV, remove the checkmark.
4 Click the Account Management tab. You do not have access to the fields on this
page unless you are a system administrator. For more information, see Editing a
buy-side user account.
5 Click the Security tab. You do not have access to the fields on this page unless you
are a system administrator. For more information, see Editing a buy-side user
account.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Using the Lookup icon
Deleting items from a list
Editing an item in a list
Reordering items in a list
Using keyboard shortcuts in a list
Selecting a currency for a sourcing document
Formatting text in a text field
Editing a buy-side user account

174 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

General Tasks Quick Reference: Working with sourcing document workflow

Quick Reference: Working with sourcing document workflow

SRM Workflow provides the ability to enforce compliance in the management of critical
sourcing processes, such as document approvals, project development and financial
sign-offs. Workflow ensures consistency in process execution by automating the steps
that you designate as critical.
Currently, workflow is enabled for two types of documents: projects and contract
documents. The document type controls the workflow associated with the document.
Below is a quick reference list of tasks associated with workflow in a sourcing
document. For information on setting up workflow for a sourcing document, see Quick
Reference: Setting up workflow in a sourcing document.

Create a Document Using a Workflow Document Type

Create a project or contract document based on a document type that is associated

with a phase configuration. This will enable the workflow process in the phase
configuration to be applied to that document.
` For details on phase configurations, see Projects Configurable Phase Definition
or Contract Document Phase Configuration.
` For details on creating a project, see Creating a project.
` For details on creating a contract document, see Quick Reference: Creating a
contract document.

Set up Document Approvers

For a document with an approval workflow, add collaborators and assign them the
Approver role (unless this is done programmatically by the workflow process template).
For details on adding approvers and approver rules, see Adding an approver to a
sourcing document.
If there are no approvers assigned when the document phase is changed to a phase
associated with an approval workflow, and the workflow process template script does
not assign approvers, the document is automatically approved.

Approve or Reject the Document

When a document has advanced to a phase with an approval workflow definition, the
document is locked to all users except the designated approver or approvers. An
approver must approve or reject the document before it becomes editable to other
users.
You can approve or reject the document from the document toolbar or from the My
Workflow Activities channel of the Workbench.
` For details on approving or rejecting from the document toolbar, see Approving or
rejecting a document from the document toolbar.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 175

Quick Reference: Working with sourcing document workflow General Tasks

` For details on approving or rejecting from the Workbench, see Approving or

rejecting a sourcing document in the My Workflow Activities channel.

View Phase History

For any project or contract document with associated phases, you can view a page of
phase information. If any phase is associated with a workflow, this page also lists all
workflow-related activities.
For details, see Viewing phase information for a sourcing document.

Review Workflow Information from the Workbench

Optionally, you can use the Workbench to view your current approvals and your
workflow history in the My Workflow Activities channel.

For details, see the following:

` Viewing current approvals in the My Workflow Activities channel
` Viewing approval history in the My Workflow Activities channel

Related Topics
Toolbar functions

176 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend and Compliance
The Spend and Compliance module provides a full analytic capability to analyze past
and forecasted spend. This enables you to identify savings opportunities and track
spend against contracts to capture savings.

This section documents the options for Spend and Compliance. For information on
administering spend analysis, see Spend Environment Management.

Confidential 177
 Spend and Compliance by Commodity

Spend and Compliance by Commodity

This section provides help for Spend and Compliance options by Commodity.

Note: You can access a full list of reports on the Analysis page by clicking Spend and
Compliance and selecting Reports from the drop-down list.

Spend and Compliance reports by Commodity are as follows.

Report Description

Cumulative Spend by This report shows a list of commodities ranked by spend with a
Commodity report running total of spend amount and % spend for a selected date
range. Rank and spend data are also graphically shown in a pie
chart and line graph. You can drill down by commodity to see
spend for the children of the selected parent.
Top Spend by Commodity This report ranks the Top X commodities (where X is a number
report you define) by total spend. You can drill down by commodity to
see spend for the children of the selected parent. This report also
provides a count of the number of suppliers with spend in a
commodity with a drill-down to the list of suppliers that account
for the spend.
Spend by Commodity Over This report shows total spend per commodity summarized by time
Time report period (such as years, quarters, or months) for a selected date
range. You can drill down by commodity to view spend for the
children of the selected parent and by time period to break out
the spend data into the next time period increment.
Top Spend by Commodity This report ranks the Top X commodities (where X is a number
in Organization report you define) by total spend for a selected date range and
organization. You can drill down by commodity to see spend for
the sub-categories of the selected parent. This report also
provides a count of the number of suppliers with spend in a
commodity with a drill-down to the list of suppliers that account
for the spend.
Spend by Commodity Over This report shows total spend per commodity by organization for
Organization report a selected date range. You can drill down by either commodity or
organizational unit to view spend for the units in the next level of
the hierarchy structure.

Related Topics
Spend and Compliance by Vendor
Spend and Compliance by Organization
Spend and Compliance by Geography

178 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend and Compliance by Commodity

Spend and Compliance by Accounts Payable Type

Spend and Compliance by Cost Center
Spend and Compliance Configuration
Analysis

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 179

 Spend and Compliance by Vendor

Spend and Compliance by Vendor

This section provides help for Spend and Compliance options by Vendor.

Note: You can access a full list of reports on the Analysis page by clicking Spend and
Compliance and selecting Reports from the drop-down list.

Spend and Compliance reports by Vendor are as follows.

Report Description

Cumulative Spend by Vendor This report shows a list of suppliers ranked by spend with a
running total of spend amount and % spend for a selected date
range. You can drill down on a parent supplier to see spend for
the next level of business entities in the supplier's organization.
One-click access to the supplier management record lets you
quickly review supplier details.
Top Spend by Vendor in This report ranks the Top X suppliers (where X is a number you
Organization define) by total spend for a selected date range and organization.
You can drill down by supplier to see spend for the next level of
business entities in the supplier's organization. This report also
provides a count of the number of commodities with spend for a
supplier and a drill-down to the list of commodities that account
for the spend.
Top Spend by Vendor This report ranks the Top X suppliers (where X is a number you
define) by total spend. You can drill down by supplier to see
spend for the next level of business entities in the supplier's
organization. This report also provides a count of the number of
commodities that account for spend with a supplier and a drill
down to the list of commodities.
Spend by Vendor Over Time This report shows spend by supplier across time periods (such as
years, quarters, or months) for a selected date range. You can
drill down by supplier to see spend for the next level of business
entities in the supplier's organization, or by time period to see
spend data broken out by the next time period increment.
Spend with Non-Approved This report shows spend with approved versus non-approved
Vendors Over Time suppliers across time periods for a selected date range. You can
drill down by time period to see spend data broken out by the
next time period increment. This report also provides a count of
the number of suppliers that account for the spend in a time
period and a drill-down to the list of supplier names.
Spend by Vendor for This report lists the top suppliers by total spend for a selected
Community commodity. You can drill down by supplier to see spend for the
next level of business entities in the supplier's organization.

180 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend and Compliance by Vendor

Related Topics
Spend and Compliance by Commodity
Spend and Compliance by Organization
Spend and Compliance by Geography
Spend and Compliance by Accounts Payable Type
Spend and Compliance by Cost Center
Spend and Compliance Configuration
Analysis

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 181

 Spend and Compliance by Organization

Spend and Compliance by Organization

This section provides help for Spend and Compliance options by Organization.

Note: You can access a full list of reports on the Analysis page by clicking Spend and
Compliance and selecting Reports from the drop-down list.

Spend and Compliance reports by Organization are as follows.

Report Description

Cumulative Spend by This report shows a list of organizations ranked by spend with a
Organization running total of spend amount and % spend for a selected date
range. You can drill down by company to view spend for the
organizational units in the next level of the hierarchy structure.
Spend by Organization Over This report shows spend by organization across time periods
Time (such as years, quarters, or months) for a selected date range.
You can drill down on a parent company to see spend for the next
level of units in the organizational hierarchy, or by time period to
see spend data broken out by the next time period increment.
Top Spend by Organization This report ranks the Top X organizations by total spend for a
selected date range. This report also provides a count of the
number of commodities and suppliers with spend from an
organization and a drill-down to the list of commodities and
suppliers that account for the spend.

Related Topics
Spend and Compliance by Commodity
Spend and Compliance by Vendor
Spend and Compliance by Geography
Spend and Compliance by Accounts Payable Type
Spend and Compliance by Cost Center
Spend and Compliance Configuration
Analysis

182 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend and Compliance by Geography

Spend and Compliance by Geography

This section provides help for Spend and Compliance options by Geography.

Note: You can access a full list of reports on the Analysis page by clicking Spend and
Compliance and selecting Reports from the drop-down list.

Spend and Compliance reports by Geography are as follows.

Report Description

Cumulative Spend by This report shows a list of geographies ranked by spend with a
Geography running total of spend amount and % spend for a selected date
range. You can drill down by geography to view spend for the
units in the next level of the hierarchy structure.
Top Spend by Geography This report ranks the Top X geographies (where X is a number
you define) by total spend for a selected date range. This report
also provides a count of the number of commodities and suppliers
with spend from a geography and a drill down to the list of
commodities and suppliers that account for the spend.
Spend by Geography Over This report shows spend by geography across time periods (such
Time as years, quarters, or months) for a selected date range. You can
drill down on a parent geography to see spend for the next level
of units in the hierarchy, or by time period to see spend data
broken out by the next time period increment.

Related Topics
Spend and Compliance by Commodity
Spend and Compliance by Vendor
Spend and Compliance by Organization
Spend and Compliance by Accounts Payable Type
Spend and Compliance by Cost Center
Spend and Compliance Configuration
Analysis

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 183

 Spend and Compliance by Accounts Payable Type

Spend and Compliance by Accounts Payable Type

This section provides help for Spend and Compliance options by Accounts Payable Type.

Note: You can access a full list of reports on the Analysis page by clicking Spend and
Compliance and selecting Reports from the drop-down list.

Spend and Compliance reports by Accounts Payable Type are as follows.

Report Description

Spend by Accounts Payable This report shows spend by accounts payable (AP) type across
Type Over Time time periods (such as years, quarters, or months) for a selected
date range. You can drill down by AP type to view spend for the
types in the next level of the hierarchy structure, or by time
period to break out the spend data into the next time period
increment.
Cumulative Spend by Accounts This report shows a list of accounts payable (AP) types ranked by
Payable Type spend with a running total of spend amount and % spend for a
selected date range. You can drill down by accounts payable type
to view spend for the AP types in the next level of the hierarchy
structure.
Top Spend by Accounts This report ranks the Top X accounts payable (AP) types (where X
Payable Type is a number you define) by total spend for a selected date range.
This report also provides a count of the number of suppliers with
spend for that AP type and a drill-down to the list of suppliers that
account for the spend.

Related Topics
Spend and Compliance by Commodity
Spend and Compliance by Vendor
Spend and Compliance by Organization
Spend and Compliance by Geography
Spend and Compliance by Cost Center
Spend and Compliance Configuration
Analysis

184 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend and Compliance by Cost Center

Spend and Compliance by Cost Center

This section provides help for Spend and Compliance options by Cost Center.

Note: You can access a full list of reports on the Analysis page by clicking Spend and
Compliance and selecting Reports from the drop-down list.

Spend and Compliance reports by Cost Center are as follows.

Report Description

Top Spend by Cost Center This report ranks the Top X cost centers (where X is a number
you define) by total spend for a selected date range. This report
also provides a count of the number of suppliers with spend
against that cost center and a drill-down to the list of suppliers
that account for the spend.
Cumulative Spend by Cost This report shows a list of cost centers ranked by spend with a
Center running total of spend amount and % spend for a selected date
range. You can drill down by cost center to view spend for the
cost centers in the next level of the hierarchy structure.
Spend by Cost Center Over This report shows spend by cost center across time periods (such
Time as years, quarters, or months) for a selected date range. You can
drill down by cost center to view spend for the cost centers in the
next level of the hierarchy structure, or by time period to break
out the spend data into the next time period increment.

Related Topics
Spend and Compliance by Commodity
Spend and Compliance by Vendor
Spend and Compliance by Organization
Spend and Compliance by Geography
Spend and Compliance by Accounts Payable Type
Spend and Compliance Configuration
Analysis

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 185

 Spend and Compliance Configuration

Spend and Compliance Configuration

This section provides help for Spend and Compliance configuration options. For
information on administering spend analysis, see Spend Environment Management.

Option Description

Create Import Spend Data Select this option to import spend data. For details, see
Importing spend data.
List Import Spend Data Select this option to see a list of imported spend data. For
details, see Import Spend Data.
Create Update Spend Dimensions Select this option to update spend dimension data. For details,
see Converting master data to dimension data: updating
spend dimensions.
List Update Spend Dimensions Select this option to see a list of spend dimension data. For
details, see Convert Master Data: Update Spend
Dimensions.
Create Dimension ID Synonym Select this option to create a dimension ID synonym map set.
Map Sets For details, see Creating a dimension ID synonym map
set.
List Dimension ID Synonym Map Select this option to see a list of dimension ID synonym map
Sets sets. For details, see Dimension ID Synonym Map Sets.
Create Dimension ID Synonym Select this option to create a dimension ID synonym map. For
Maps details, see Creating a dimension ID synonym map.
List Dimension ID Synonym Maps Select this option to see a list of dimension ID synonym maps.
For details, see Dimension ID Synonym Maps.

Related Topics
Spend and Compliance by Commodity
Spend and Compliance by Vendor
Spend and Compliance by Organization
Spend and Compliance by Geography
Spend and Compliance by Accounts Payable Type
Spend and Compliance by Cost Center
Analysis

186 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Reports

Reports

To get help for all reports, see the Analysis module.

Related Topics
Spend and Compliance by Commodity
Spend and Compliance by Vendor
Spend and Compliance by Organization
Spend and Compliance by Geography
Spend and Compliance by Accounts Payable Type
Spend and Compliance by Cost Center
Spend and Compliance Configuration
Analysis

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 187

 Reports

188 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Enterprise Sourcing
The Enterprise Sourcing module provides a complete negotiation toolkit, including the
following:
` Projects
` Demand Aggregation
` Auctions
` RFx
` RFQuick
` Bill of Materials (BOMs)
` Library Options
` Reports

This section documents the options for Enterprise Sourcing.

Confidential 189
190 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help
Projects

A project is a strategic sourcing effort that organizes multiple sourcing events and
ensures consistent buying discipline. The Frictionless® SRM Project Management
module allows you to create and maintain project schedules, track costs and resources,
and communicate with collaborators. Each project can include multiple auctions, RFxs,
and contracts, as well as related projects. Project schedules can also be imported from
and exported to Microsoft® Excel or Microsoft Project.

Click the Enterprise Sourcing button in the navigation bar to see the Projects
submenu, which contains the following basic options for this module:

Option Description

Create Project From Template Click to create a new project from a template. See Creating a
project from a template.
Create Project Click to create a new project. See Creating a project.
My Projects Click to see the Project List page displaying a list of projects for
which you are an owner or collaborator.
Projects in My Cost Center(s) Click to see the Project List page displaying a list of projects
associated with the cost centers defined in your user account
setup.
All Projects Click to see the Project List page displaying a list of all projects.
Project Summary Extract Click to see a report providing access to the summary information
report for a set of projects in a given time period for printing or exporting.
Create Project Template Click to create a new project template. See Creating a project
template.

Confidential 191
Project List page Projects

Project List page

To display the Project List page:
` Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the Projects submenu:
■ My Projects
■ Projects in My Cost Center(s)
■ All Projects

On the Project List page, you can:

` View projects in the following ways.

Option Description

My Projects View a list of all projects for which you are an owner or
collaborator.
Browse Projects Tree View View a list of all projects displayed in a hierarchy based on
document links.
Projects in My Cost Center(s) View a list of projects containing activity associated with the cost
centers defined in your user account setup
All Projects View a list of all active projects
Search Project Documents by Search for projects by document name.
Name
Search Project Documents by Search for projects by company name.
Company
Search Projects by Collaborator Search for projects by collaborator name.
Search Projects by Creator Search for projects by creator name.
Search Projects by Budgeted Find projects with a budgeted value within a specified range.
Value
Search Projects by Estimated Find projects with an estimated value within a specified range.
Value
Search Projects by Internal Search for projects by internal category.
Category
Search Projects by Search for projects by organizational unit.
Organizational Unit
Search Projects by Owner Search for projects by owner.

192 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project List page

Option Description

Search Projects by Status Search for projects by status.

All Project Templates View a list of all project templates.
All Inactive Project Templates View a list of project templates currently flagged as inactive.
My Projects - Canceled or View a list of projects for which you are an owner or collaborator
Closed that have been canceled or closed
Cost Center Projects - View a list of inactive projects containing activity associated with
Canceled or Closed the cost centers defined in your user account setup
Projects - Canceled or Closed View a list of all projects that have been canceled or closed

` Create and edit a project or project template

` Export a project list to a CSV file or to a PDF file

Note: The tabs that appear in a project are determined by the project type. All tabs
might not appear in every document.

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Creating a project
Creating a project from a template
Editing a project
Creating a project template
Editing a project template
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 193

Project List page Projects

Creating a project
Note: The tabs that appear in a project are determined by the project type. All tabs
might not appear in every project.

To create a project:
1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create Project from the
Projects submenu.
Note: You can also create a project by clicking the Create button on the Project
List page.
2 In the Create dialog box, select a project type, or select a template by clicking the
Lookup icon .
3 Click Finish.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic project information and add
collaborators and document links.
5 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule.
6 Click the Vendors tab to associate suppliers with the project.
7 Click the Forms tab to create and associate question forms with the project.
8 Click the Costs tab to enter costs and resources.
9 Click the Accounting tab to enter accounting information.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a project from a template
Editing a project
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Adding a project schedule
Adding a project supplier
Adding a project form
Adding costs and resources to a project event
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

194 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project List page

Creating a project from a template

Note: The tabs that appear in a project are determined by the project type. All tabs
might not appear in every project.

To create a project from a template:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create Project From
Template from the Projects submenu. You see the Project List page with a list of
links you can use to create the project from a template.
2 On the Project List page, click the link for the template to use. You see a new
project created from the selected template.
Note: You can also create a project from a template by clicking the Create button
on the Project List page and selecting a template in the Create dialog box.
3 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic project information and add
collaborators and document links.
4 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule.
5 Click the Vendors tab to associate suppliers with the project.
6 Click the Forms tab to create and associate question forms with the project.
7 Click the Costs tab to enter costs and resources.
8 Click the Accounting tab to enter accounting information.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Editing a project
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Adding a project schedule
Adding a project supplier
Adding a project form
Adding costs and resources to a project event
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 195

Project List page Projects

Editing a project
Note: The tabs that appear in a project are determined by the project type. All tabs
might not appear in every project.

To edit a project:
1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the Projects submenu:
■ My Projects
■ Projects in My Cost Center(s)
■ All Projects
You see the Project List page displaying the selected list of projects.
2 On the Project List page, click the project to edit.
3 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 On the Header page, edit basic project information and add or remove collaborators
and document links.
5 Click the Schedule tab to edit schedule information.
6 Click the Vendors tab to edit supplier information.
7 Click the Forms tab to edit, create, or associate question forms.
8 Click the Costs tab to edit costs and resources.
9 Click the Accounting tab to edit accounting information.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Creating a project from a template
Changing the status of a project
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Editing a project schedule
Adding a project supplier
Creating a project form question
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

196 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project List page

Creating a project template

Templates are predefined documents, or portions of documents, that are used to
standardize document creation and minimize the work of creating a new document.
Templates store information so that it can be used in multiple documents.
Using a template to create a project incorporates the template information into the new
project.

To create a project template:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create Project
Template from the Projects submenu.
Note: You can also create a project template by clicking the Create Template
button on the Project List page.
2 In the Create dialog box, select the type of template to create.
3 Click Finish.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic template information and add
collaborators.
5 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule.
6 Click the Vendors tab to associate suppliers with the template.
7 Click the Forms tab to create and associate question forms with the template.
8 Click the Costs tab to enter costs and resources.
9 Click the Accounting tab to enter accounting information.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Creating a project from a template
Editing a project template
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Adding a project schedule
Adding a project supplier
Adding a project form
Adding costs and resources to a project event
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 197

Project List page Projects

Editing a project template

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the Projects submenu:
■ My Projects
■ Projects in My Cost Center(s)
■ All Projects
You see the Project List page.
2 On the Project List page, select All Project Templates from the drop-down list.
3 Click the template to edit.
4 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 On the Header page, edit basic template information and add or remove
collaborators.
6 Click the Schedule tab to edit schedule information.
7 Click the Vendors tab to edit supplier information.
8 Click the Forms tab to edit, create, or associate question forms.
9 Click the Costs tab to edit costs and resources.
10 Click the Accounting tab to edit accounting information.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Creating a project from a template
Creating a project template
Changing the status of a project
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Editing a project schedule
Adding a project supplier
Adding a project form
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

198 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Header page

Project Header page

On the Header page, you can:
` Enter and edit basic information about a project, including the status
` Add and remove project collaborators
` Add and remove document links

Related Topics
Creating a project
Creating a project from a template
Changing the status of a project
Changing the status of a project
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 199

Project Header page Projects

Changing the status of a project

Each time you edit a project, you should review its status on the Header page and
change it if necessary. This allows you and your collaborators to track the progress of
the project.
Status options are determined for each project type by a system administrator.

To change the status of a project:

1 On the Header page, select the new status from the Status drop-down list.
2 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Changing the status of a project

200 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Schedule page

Project Schedule page

You use the Project Schedule page to add events such as tasks and milestones to the
project, as well as costs and resources for the events. You can create events on the
Schedule page or import them from the Project library or from a CSV file created in
Microsoft® Project or Microsoft® Excel.
You can select a view for events. In each view, you can add and edit different
information for the events. In any schedule event view, event status is indicated as
follows:
` Events that are in progress appear in bold.
` Events that are behind schedule appear in red.

On the Schedule page, you can:

` Enter and edit basic project schedule information
` Create and edit an event
` Add a sub-project to your schedule
` Import an event from a library
` Import a project schedule from a CSV file
` Export the project schedule to a CSV file
` Enter and edit costs and resources for an event
` Enter and edit dates for an event
` View dependency information for all events in the project
` Reorder events

Related Topics
Creating a project
Specifying a project schedule event view
Adding a project schedule
Adding a project event
Adding project event details
Adding a sub-project to a project
Importing an event from a library
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Project
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Excel
Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Project
Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Excel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 201

Project Schedule page Projects

Adding project costs to a contributing cost report

Adding dates to an event
Viewing event dependencies
Reordering items in a list

202 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Schedule page

Specifying a project schedule event view

You can select a view for events. In each view, you can add and edit different
information for the events. In any schedule event view, event status is indicated as
follows:
` Events that are in progress appear in bold.
` Events that are behind schedule appear in red.

In the Setup View, you can:

` Enter and edit basic project schedule information
` Create and edit an event
` Add a sub-project to your schedule
` Import an event from a library
` Import a project schedule from a CSV file
` Export the project schedule to a CSV file
` Reorder events

In the Cost View, you can:

` Enter and edit costs and resources for an event
` Reorder events

In the Tracking View, you can:

` Enter and edit the actual start and dates for an event
` Reorder events

In the Dependency View, you can:

` View dependency information for all events in the project
` Reorder events

To specify a schedule event view:

` On the Schedule page, select a view from the drop-down list.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report
Adding dates to an event

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 203

Project Schedule page Projects

Viewing event dependencies

204 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Schedule page

Adding a project schedule

1 In the Setup view for the Schedule page, fill in the fields with basic schedule
information.
Note: Check the Lock baseline dates box to keep the baseline dates at their
current values. If you check this box, the baseline dates (which appear on the
Tracking page for an event) do not change, even if you change the planned dates
for an event. Once an Actual Start or End date is entered for any event in the project,
the baseline dates are locked automatically.
2 Add project events.
3 Optionally, add a sub-project to the project schedule.
4 Optionally, import events from a library.
5 Optionally, import events from a CSV file.
6 Optionally, reorder the project events.
7 Select Cost View from the drop-down list to enter costs and resources.
8 Select Tracking View from the drop-down list to enter dates for the project.

9 Optionally, click the Edit icon in any view to view and enter event details,
including dependencies.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Editing a project schedule
Adding a project event
Adding a sub-project to a project
Importing an event from a library
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Project
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Excel
Reordering items in a list
Adding costs and resources to a project event
Adding dates to an event
Adding project event details
Editing dependencies for an event

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 205

Project Schedule page Projects

Editing a project schedule

You can edit a project schedule to update it as the project proceeds. For example, you
might add additional events to the schedule, or edit a particular event to enter its
Actual Start or End date.

To edit a project schedule:

1 In the Setup view for the Schedule page, edit any fields.
2 Edit project events.
3 Optionally, add or remove sub-projects.
4 Optionally, import events from a library.
5 Optionally, import events from a CSV file.
6 Optionally, reorder the project events.
7 Select Cost View from the drop-down list to edit costs and resources.
8 Select Tracking View from the drop-down list to edit dates for the project.

9 Click the Edit icon in any view to edit event details, including dependencies.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Editing a project event
Adding a sub-project to a project
Importing an event from a library
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Project
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Excel
Reordering items in a list
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report
Editing dates for an event
Editing dependencies for an event

206 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Schedule page

Adding a project event

1 In the Setup view for the Schedule page, click Add. A new row is added to the
event list.
2 Fill in the fields in the new row.

3 Click the Edit icon for the event to view or add further details.
a On the Settings page, fill in the basic information fields and the fields under
Type, Reminders, and Cost.
b Click the Tracking tab to enter actual date information.
c Click the Save button in the toolbar.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also use the Cost View to enter cost and resource information, and use
the Tracking View to enter date information.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Editing a project event
Adding project event details
Adding a dependency to an event
Creating reminders for an event
Adding costs and resources to a project event
Adding dates to an event

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 207

Project Schedule page Projects

Editing a project event

You can edit a project event to update it as the project proceeds. For example, you
might edit an event to enter its Actual Start or End date.

To edit a project event:

1 In the Setup view for the Schedule page, edit any basic information for the event.

2 In any view, click the Edit icon for the event to edit further details.
a On the Settings page, edit any basic information fields or the fields under Type,
Reminders, and Cost.
b Click the Tracking tab to edit actual date information.
c Click the Save button in the toolbar.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also use the Cost View to enter cost and resource information, and use
the Tracking View to enter actual date information.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Adding a project event
Editing dependencies for an event
Creating reminders for an event
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report
Editing dates for an event

208 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Schedule page

Adding a sub-project to a project

1 In the Setup view for the Schedule page, click Add Sub-Project.
2 Select the list of projects to view from the drop-down list.
3 Check the box for each sub-project to add to the current project. You can check
multiple boxes to add more than one sub-project.
4 Click OK. You see the sub-project or sub-projects you selected in the project events
list.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Editing a project schedule

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 209

Project Schedule page Projects

Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Project

On the Project Schedule page, you can import a CSV file created in either Microsoft®
Project or Microsoft Excel®. Frictionless® SRM is compatible with Microsoft Project 1998
and 2000.
Before you import a Microsoft Project file, you must perform some configuration steps.

To configure and import a Microsoft Project file:

1 In Microsoft Project, open the file to import into Frictionless SRM.
2 Make sure the file follows these guidelines:
■ Use the standard 5-working-day calendar, or the 7-day calendar. Holidays are
not accounted for when the project is imported into SRM.
■ Be sure that the information in the Tools/Change Working Time dialog box is
consistent with that on the Tools/Options/Calendar page. This ensures
consistent dates and duration values.
■ Use whole number days, not partial days, in the Duration column.
■ Avoid using a task hierarchy, which is flattened when saved to a CSV file.
3 From the File menu, select Save As.
4 In the Save As dialog box, type a file name, select a file location, select CSV
(Comma delimited) from the Save as type drop-down list, and click Save.
5 In the Import/Export map list in the Export Mapping dialog box, select Task
“Export Table” map and click Edit.
6 From the Text delimiter drop-down list in the Define Import/Export Map dialog
box, select comma (,) and click OK.
7 In the Import Mapping dialog box, click Save.
8 In Frictionless SRM, in the Setup view for the Schedule page, click Import.
9 Follow the prompts to select, preview, and import the file. You see the imported
events added to the project event list.

Note: Only selected Microsoft Project columns map to fields in Frictionless SRM. See
Mapping tables for importing or exporting a project schedule for information on
how Project columns map to SRM fields.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Excel
Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Project

210 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Schedule page

Viewing all exported project schedule information in Microsoft Project

Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Excel
Mapping tables for importing or exporting a project schedule

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 211

Project Schedule page Projects

Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Excel

On the Project Schedule page, you can import a CSV file created in either Microsoft®
Project or Microsoft Excel®.

To import a Microsoft Excel file:

1 Create a file in Microsoft Excel using the Project Column Headings indicated in
Mapping tables for importing or exporting a project schedule.
2 From the File menu, select Save As.
3 In the Save As dialog box, type a file name, select a file location, select CSV
(Comma delimited) from the Save as type drop-down list, and click Save.
4 In each of the confirmation dialog boxes, click Yes.
5 In Frictionless SRM, in the Setup view for the Schedule page, click Import.
6 Follow the prompts to select, preview, and import the file. You see the imported
events added to the project event list.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Project
Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Project
Viewing all exported project schedule information in Microsoft Project
Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Excel
Mapping tables for importing or exporting a project schedule

212 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Schedule page

Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Project

You can export a project schedule to view and edit in either Microsoft® Project or
Microsoft® Excel. You must perform some configuration steps to open an exported file
in Microsoft Project.

Note: You must be in view mode to export a project schedule. The Export button does
not appear in edit mode.

To export and configure a project schedule for Microsoft Project:

1 In Frictionless® SRM, in the Setup view for the Schedule page, click Export.
2 Follow the prompts to export the file and save it to your local computer.
Note: You can save the file with the default .csv extension or you can change the
extension to .mpp. You can work with a CSV file in both Microsoft Excel and Microsoft
Project. You can work with an MPP file in Microsoft Project only.
3 Open Microsoft Project, browse for the saved file, and open the file.
Note: If you see a dialog box with a message asking whether to open the file as
text only, click Yes.
4 In the Import/Export map list in the Import Mapping dialog box, select Task
“Export Table” map and click Edit.
5 From the Text delimiter drop-down list in the Define Import/Export Map dialog
box, select comma (,) and click OK.
6 In the Import Mapping dialog box, click Open. The file opens.
Note: All column information in Frictionless SRM is exported to Microsoft Project.
However, only the default Microsoft Project columns appear automatically. You can
add new columns to view all exported schedule information.
Note: Frictionless® SRM field names are slightly different from Microsoft Project
column headings. See Mapping tables for importing or exporting a project
schedule to determine how SRM fields map to Project columns.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Project
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Excel
Viewing all exported project schedule information in Microsoft Project
Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Excel
Mapping tables for importing or exporting a project schedule

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 213

Project Schedule page Projects

Viewing all exported project schedule information in Microsoft

Project

When you open an exported project schedule in Microsoft® Project, six default columns
appear. To view additional exported schedule information, you must add new columns
to the file.

To add a new column to a file exported from Frictionless® SRM into Microsoft Project:
1 In Microsoft Project, open an exported project schedule file. You see the file with its
default columns.
2 Right-click any column heading and select Insert Column from the short-cut menu.
3 In the Column Definition dialog box, select the column to add from the Field Name
drop-down list.
Note: See Mapping tables for importing or exporting a project schedule for
a list of Frictionless SRM fields that map to Microsoft Project columns.
4 Click OK. The column is added.
5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to add additional columns.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Project
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Excel
Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Project
Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Excel
Mapping tables for importing or exporting a project schedule

214 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Schedule page

Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Excel

You can export a project schedule to view and edit in either Microsoft® Project or
Microsoft® Excel.

Note: You must be in view mode to export a project schedule. The Export button does
not appear in edit mode.

To export a project schedule to Microsoft Excel:

1 In Frictionless® SRM, in the Setup view for the Schedule page, click Export.
2 Follow the prompts to export the file and save it to your local computer.
Note: Be sure to save the file with the default .csv extension. You can work with a
CSV file in both Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Project.
3 Do one of the following:
■ In Windows Explorer, navigate to the saved file and open it. It launches in
Microsoft Excel.
■ Open Microsoft Excel, browse for the saved file, and open the file.
4 Edit the file as needed.
5 Save the file.
Note: Frictionless SRM field names are slightly different from Microsoft Excel column
headings. See Mapping tables for importing or exporting a project schedule
to determine how SRM fields map to Excel columns.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Project
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Excel
Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Project
Viewing all exported project schedule information in Microsoft Project
Mapping tables for importing or exporting a project schedule

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 215

Project Schedule page Projects

Mapping tables for importing or exporting a project schedule

When you open a project schedule exported from Frictionless® SRM to Microsoft®
Project, six default columns appear. To view additional exported schedule information,
you must add new columns in the file. When you open an exported project schedule in
Microsoft® Excel, all exported information appears automatically.
The following mapping tables list the Frictionless SRM fields that map to Microsoft
Project or Microsoft Excel columns.

Note: The fields exported from a Frictionless SRM project schedule are a subset of the
fields used in Microsoft Project. Only the fields listed in the mapping tables can be
imported to or exported from Frictionless SRM.

The following SRM field values appear by default after being exported from Frictionless
SRM to Microsoft Project.

Frictionless SRM Field Name Microsoft Project Column Name

Task or Milestone Name Task Name

Duration Duration
Planned Start Start Date
Planned End Finish
Dependency’ Predecessors
Note: If a task is dependent on another task,
the Predecessors field indicates the
dependency for that task (4 indicates that the
dependency is Task 4). An offset is indicated
by a formula. For example, 4FS+1 day
indicates that the task is dependent on Task
4 and is offset by 1 day.
Owner Resource Names

216 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Schedule page

The following SRM field values can be viewed by adding columns after export to
Microsoft Project.

Frictionless SRM Field Name Microsoft Project Column Name

Description Notes
Actual Start Date (from Tracking view) Actual Start
Actual Finish Date (from Tracking view) Actual Finish
Baseline Start Date (from Tracking view) Baseline Start
Actual Finish Date (from Tracking view) Baseline Finish
Estimated Value Cost
Budgeted Value Baseline Cost
Currency (from Header page) Baseline Cost Currency and Cost Currency
Planned Start Constraint Date (and Start column)
Start Type Constraint Type

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Project
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Excel
Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Project
Viewing all exported project schedule information in Microsoft Project
Exporting a project schedule to Microsoft Excel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 217

Project Schedule page Projects

Project Schedule Settings page

The Settings page provides a single location to enter and edit much of the event
information that appears in the Setup, Cost, and Dependency views.

On the Settings page, you can:

` Enter and edit basic information about the project event
` Enter and edit event type and dependency information under Type
` Enter and edit information under Reminders
` Enter and edit cost and resource information under Cost

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Adding a project event
Adding a dependency to an event
Creating reminders for an event
Adding costs and resources to a project event

218 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Schedule page

Adding project event details

1 On the Schedule page, click the Edit icon for the event to which to add details.
2 On the Settings page, fill in the basic project information fields.
3 Fill in the fields under Type with event type and dependency information.
4 Fill in the fields under Reminders.
5 Fill in the fields under Cost with cost and resource information.
6 Optionally, add attachments to the event.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
8 On the Schedule page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can edit project event details after adding them.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Adding a project event
Adding a dependency to an event
Creating reminders for an event
Adding costs and resources to a project event
Adding an attachment by importing it from a library
Adding a file attachment
Adding a URL attachment

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 219

Project Schedule page Projects

Project Schedule Tracking page

On the Tracking page, you can:
` Review date information for a project, and enter and edit the actual start and end
dates for a project event

Field help for Project Schedule Tracking page

Baseline Start: This value is based on the date you enter in the Fixed at field on
either the Schedule page or the Settings tab. If the event is dependent on another
event, this date is determined by the end date of the dependency.
The baseline start date reflects the date you enter when creating the event. If you edit
the date after event creation, and the Lock baseline dates box on the Schedule page
is checked, the baseline date on the Tracking page remains the same, while the
planned dates change.
Once an actual start or end date is entered for any event in the project, the baseline
dates are locked automatically.

Baseline End: The baseline end date for a task is determined by the baseline start
date (in the Fixed at field on the Schedule page), or by the dependency end date, plus
the value in the Duration field.
The baseline end date reflects the date that is calculated when you create the event. If
you make date changes after event creation, and the Lock baseline dates box on the
Schedule page is checked, the baseline date on the Tracking page remains the same,
while the planned dates change.
Once an actual start or end date is entered for any event in the project, the baseline
dates are locked automatically.

Planned Start: This value is based on the date you enter in the Fixed at field on
either the Schedule page or the Settings tab. If the event is dependent on another
event, this date is determined by the end date of the dependency.
The planned start date is identical to the baseline start date, unless the baseline dates
are locked. You lock the baseline dates by checking the Lock baseline dates box on
the Schedule page or by entering an actual start or end date for any event in the
project. If baseline dates are locked, and you edit the dates on the Schedule page, the
planned date values on the Tracking page will change, while the baseline date values
remain the same.

Planned End: The planned end date for a task is determined by the planned start date
(in the Fixed at field on the Schedule page), or by the dependency end date, plus the
value in the Duration field.
The planned end date is identical to the baseline end date, unless the baseline dates
are locked. You lock the baseline dates by checking the Lock baseline dates box on

220 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Schedule page

the Schedule page or by entering an actual start or end date for any event in the
project. If baseline dates are locked, and you edit the dates on the Schedule page, the
planned date values on the Tracking page will change, while the baseline date values
remain the same.

Actual Start: You enter the actual start date after a task is started or a milestone is
accomplished. Entering the actual start date for an event is crucial to project schedule
tracking.
Once an actual start or end date is entered for any event in the project, the baseline
dates are locked automatically.

Actual End: You enter the actual end date after a task is finished or a milestone is
accomplished. Entering the actual end date for an event is crucial to project schedule
tracking.
Once an actual start or end date is entered for any event in the project, the baseline
dates are locked automatically.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Adding a project event
Adding project event details
Adding dates to an event
Editing dates for an event

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 221

Project Schedule page Projects

Project Schedule Dependents page

On the Dependents page, you can view the events that are dependent on a specific
project event.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project schedule
Adding a project event
Viewing event dependents

222 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Vendors page

Project Vendors page

On the Vendors page, you can choose suppliers to be involved in one or more of the
project’s sourcing events. This page is for your reference only. Suppliers cannot view a
project or its contents.
The Vendors page appears only if enabled in the project type.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project supplier
Creating a supplier record in a project

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 223

Project Vendors page Projects

Adding a project supplier

The Vendors page appears only if enabled in the project type.

To add a project supplier:

1 On the Vendors page, click Add Contact.
2 In the dialog box, select a supplier and contact name.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Creating a supplier record in a project
Creating a supplier record

224 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Vendors page

Creating a supplier record in a project

When you create a supplier record, it is stored in the Vendors module, where you can
add further details as needed.
The Vendors page appears only if enabled in the project type.

To create a supplier record:

1 On the Vendors page, click Add Contact.
2 In the dialog box, click Create.
3 In the dialog box, enter supplier information and click OK.
4 Optionally, select the supplier you added and click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project supplier
Creating a supplier record

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 225

Project Forms page Projects

Project Forms page

Forms contain project questions to be asked of project collaborators. For example, a
form might include questions about project requirements, potential suppliers, or
general procurement issues.
Based on the project type, your project may contain a number of forms by default.
Forms are associated with project types by a system administrator.
The Forms page appears only if enabled in the project type. If you have the appropriate
rights, you can add and edit forms.

On the Forms page, you can:

` Add or edit a form with customized questions
` Create and edit project form questions
` Import a standard form from a library
` Respond to a question in a form

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project form
Creating a project form question
Creating a project form question
Importing a project form from the Project library
Importing a project form from the Project library
Responding to a project form question

226 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Forms page

Adding a project form

Forms contain project questions to be asked of project collaborators. For example, a
form might include questions about project requirements, potential suppliers, or
general procurement issues.
The Forms page appears only if enabled in the project type. If you have the appropriate
rights, you can add a project form.

To add a project form:

1 On the Forms page, click Add.
2 Fill in the fields with basic form information.
3 Create form questions.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
5 On the Forms page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

To edit a form, click its Edit icon on the Forms page.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Creating a project form question
Creating a project form question
Importing a project form from the Project library
Importing a project form from the Project library
Responding to a project form question

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 227

Project Forms page Projects

Creating a project form question

Forms contain project questions to be asked of project collaborators. For example, a
form might include questions about project requirements, potential suppliers, or
general procurement issues.
The Forms page appears only if enabled in the project type. If you have the appropriate
rights, you can create questions for a form.

To create a project form question:

1 On the Forms page, click the Edit icon for the form to edit.
2 Under Questions & Responses, make sure that you are in the Question View. This is
the default view for this page.
3 Click Add.
4 In the Question field, enter your question.
5 If necessary, enter information in the Response field. For example, you might
provide instructions about how to answer the question.
6 Click OK.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
8 On the Forms page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

To edit a form question, click its Edit icon under Questions & Responses.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project form
Creating a project form question
Importing a project form from the Project library
Importing a project form from the Project library
Responding to a project form question

228 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Forms page

Importing a project form from the Project library

Forms contain project questions to be asked of project collaborators. For example, a
form might include questions about project requirements, potential suppliers, or
general procurement issues.
The Forms page appears only if enabled in the project type. If you have the appropriate
rights, you can import a standard form from the Project library for use in your project.

To import a project form from the Project library:

1 On the Forms page, click Import from Library.
2 Select a list of forms from the drop-down list.
3 Check the box for the form to import.
4 Click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project form
Creating a project form question
Creating a project form question
Importing a project form from the Project library
Responding to a project form question

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 229

Project Forms page Projects

Responding to a project form question

Forms contain project questions to be asked of project collaborators. For example, a
form might include questions about project requirements, potential suppliers, or
general procurement issues.
Multiple collaborators can respond to the same question in a form. The most recent
responder and response date appear in the Response view for the Form page.
The Forms page appears only if enabled in the project type. If you have the appropriate
rights, you can respond to form questions. You may not be able to edit the question or
other form information.

To respond to a project form question:

1 On the Forms page, click the Edit icon for the form to edit.
2 On the Form page under Questions & Responses, select Respond View from the
drop-down list.

3 Click the Edit icon for the question to which to respond.

4 Enter your response in the Response field.
5 Add an attachment or URL to provide additional documentation for the response.
6 Click OK.
7 Repeat steps 2-6 for each form question to which to respond.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
9 On the Forms page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding a project form
Creating a project form question
Creating a project form question
Importing a project form from the Project library
Importing a project form from the Project library

230 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Costs page

Project Costs page

The Costs page appears only if enabled in the project type.

On the Costs page, you can:

` View cost report components for the project
` Add and edit costs and resources
` Specify costs to include in a contributing cost report for the project
` Generate a contributing cost report for the project

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding costs and resources to a project event
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report
Project Contributing Cost report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 231

Project Costs page Projects

Adding costs and resources to a project event

The Costs page appears only if enabled in the project type.

To add costs and resources to an event:

1 On the Costs page, click the Edit icon for the event to which to add costs and
resources.
2 On the Settings page, fill in the fields under Cost.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
4 On the Costs page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also add costs and resources in the Cost view for the Schedule page.

You can edit cost and resource information after adding it.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report
Project Contributing Cost report

232 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project Costs page

Adding project costs to a contributing cost report

A contributing cost report provides estimated and budgeted totals for the costs you
specified, and indicates the percentage of the project budget that those costs
represent.
The Costs page appears only if enabled in the project type.

To add costs to a contributing cost report:

` On the Costs page, check the box in the In Cost Report column for each event and
linked document to add to the cost report. The selected costs are included in the
next contributing cost report you generate for the project.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding costs and resources to a project event
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report
Adding project costs to a contributing cost report
Project Contributing Cost report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 233

Project Accounting page Projects

Project Accounting page

On the Accounting page, you can add and edit accounting information.
The Accounting page appears only if enabled in the project type.

Related Topics
Creating a project
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

234 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project toolbar functions

Project toolbar functions

Using the Project toolbar, you can:
` Click the Edit button to edit a project
` Click the Save button to save a project
` Click the Undo button to undo your most recent set of changes
` Click the Document button to:
■ View phase information
■ Duplicate a project
■ Save a project as a template
■ Cancel a project
■ Close a project
■ Import or export a project template (Template toolbar)
` Click the Actions button to:
■ Create another sourcing document from within the project
` Click the Reports button to view a project report
` Click the Attachments button to attach a file, URL, or library object
` Click the Discussions button to conduct a discussion
` Click the Chat button to conduct a chat

` Click the Change Phase button to change the project phase

Related Topics
Editing and saving a sourcing document
Viewing phase information for a sourcing document
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling a sourcing document
Closing a sourcing document
Importing a project template
Exporting a project template
Creating a sourcing document from within a project
Viewing a project report
Attachments toolbar button functions
Discussions toolbar button functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 235

Project toolbar functions Projects

Chat toolbar button functions

Changing the phase of a project or contract document

236 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project toolbar functions

Project Document toolbar button functions

Click the Document toolbar button to:
` View phase information for a project
` Duplicate a project
` Save a project as a template
` Cancel a project
` Close a project
` Import or export a project template (Template toolbar)

Related Topics
Project toolbar functions
Viewing phase information for a sourcing document
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling a sourcing document
Closing a sourcing document
Importing a project template
Exporting a project template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 237

Project toolbar functions Projects

Importing a project template

The Import/Export Business Document feature allows you to share RFx and Project
templates between companies and organizations. You use the Import Business
Document option to import a template from another company. You use the Export
Business Document option to share a template with another company. For example,
you might post an exported project template on the Frictionless® user group web site
to share best practices with other members of the user group.
By default, you can only import and export templates if you have System Administrator
or Buyer Manager access to Frictionless SRM. To import a template, you must be using
the version of SRM that was used to create and export the template.

To import a project template:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create Project
Template from the Projects submenu.
Note: You must import the template into a new, blank template. Do not modify the
new template after clicking Create. Importing a template into an template that is
not blank can produce unexpected results.
2 In the Create dialog box, select any project type and click Create. The type you
select should support the same structural features as the template to import. If the
type does not support the features in the imported template, errors can occur after
import.
3 In the template toolbar, click Document and select Import Business Document
from the menu.

4 In the Choose File for Import wizard screen, click the Lookup icon to select the
template to import.
5 In the Add Attachment dialog box, select the template to import and click OK.
6 Click Next.
7 In the Object Reference Matching wizard screen, select a mapping value as needed
for each field in the template. Default mappings are provided in the table. To
change the default mapping for a field, select a new value in the right column.
You use this table only to resolve discrepancies in field values, not to change the
field values. For each object, select the value that most closely matches the value in
the imported template.
For example, if the Currency value for the imported template is US Dollars, select
the mapping value that corresponds most closely to US Dollars. After importing the
template, you can change the Currency to another value, such as Canadian Dollars,
if necessary.
All required fields must have mapped values. Non-required fields can be left blank.
When you have finished mapping objects, click Next.

238 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project toolbar functions

8 If any mapped field values are invalid, you see an error message. Click Back,
resolve the mapping errors, and then click Next.
9 In the Finish Import wizard screen, click Finish. You see the imported template
with the appropriate mapped field values.
10 Edit the template as necessary.
11 Click Save in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Project toolbar functions
Exporting a project template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 239

Project toolbar functions Projects

Exporting a project template

The Import/Export Business Document feature allows you to share RFx and Project
templates between companies and organizations. You use the Import Business
Document option to import a template from another company. You use the Export
Business Document option to share a template with another company. For example,
you might post an exported project template on the Frictionless® user group web site
to share best practices with other members of the user group.
By default, you can only import and export templates if you have System Administrator
or Buyer Manager access to Frictionless SRM. To import a template, you must be using
the version of SRM that was used to create and export the template.

To export a project template:

1 Create the template containing the information you want to export. For details, see
Creating a project template.
2 In the template toolbar, click Document and select Export Business Document
from the menu.
Note: You can only select this option if the template is in View mode.
3 In the Save Exported File wizard screen, click the name of the document.
4 In the File Download dialog box, click Save.
5 In the Save As dialog box, select a location for the template and click Save.
6 In the Save Exported File wizard screen, click Finish.

The project template is saved to the location you specified. To share the template, post
it in a location that can be accessed by another group, company, or organization, such
as the Frictionless user group web site.
To import the template, the group must be using the version of SRM that was used to
create and export the template.

Related Topics
Project toolbar functions
Importing a project template

240 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project toolbar functions

Project Actions toolbar button functions

Click the Actions toolbar button to:
` Create another sourcing document from within the project

Related Topics
Project toolbar functions
Creating a sourcing document from within a project

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 241

Project toolbar functions Projects

Creating a sourcing document from within a project

You can create an RFx, an auction, a demand aggregation document, or a master
agreement from within a project.

Note: You must be in view mode to create a document. The Create Document button
does not appear in edit mode.

To create a sourcing document:

1 In the toolbar, click Actions and select the type of document to create from the
menu.
2 Follow the prompts in the Create Document wizard.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Project toolbar functions

242 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project toolbar functions

Project Report toolbar button functions

Click the Report toolbar button to view a project report. Project reports include:
` Project Schedule Extract report
` Project Contributing Cost report

Related Topics
Project toolbar functions
Viewing a project report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 243

Project toolbar functions Projects

Viewing a project report

You can view a number of reports that give you information about a project.
Click a report name to view more information about the report.

Option Description

Project Schedule Extract This report provides access to a selected project's schedule tasks
report and milestones for printing or exporting. It lets you quickly review
the definition of a schedule to ensure that dates and assignments
are set up correctly.
Project Contributing Cost This report provides analysis of project cost compared to spend,
report budget variance, and spend against budget, to help manage
project costs and review planning accuracy.
Note: Before viewing the Contributing Cost report, you must
select the items to include on the Costs page.

To view a project report:

1 In the toolbar for a project, click Reports and select the report to view from the
menu. You see the report.
2 Optionally, bookmark the report.
3 Optionally, export the report as a PDF, Excel (XLS), or CSV file.
4 After you finish viewing the report, click Close Window.

Note: For more reports including project data, see the Analysis module.

Related Topics
Project toolbar functions
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

244 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project toolbar functions

Project Schedule Extract report

This report provides access to a selected project's schedule tasks and milestones for
printing or exporting. It lets you quickly review the definition of a schedule to ensure
that dates and assignments are set up correctly.
The following is a description of the fields in this report.

Project Schedule Summary

This report table includes a brief outline of the schedule information that is defined at
the summary level.

Field Description

Name The project name

Base Date The base date of the project
Phase The current phase of the project
Calendar Type The project calendar type, which identifies whether the task durations are
expressed in calendar days or workdays
Baseline Dates Indicates whether the baseline dates and planned dates should be
Locked synchronized. Once baseline dates are locked, they will not change when
planned dates are rescheduled.

Project Schedule Extract

This report table provides a list and event details of the tasks and milestone events that
are part of the project schedule.

Field Description

Name The name of the milestone or task event

Owner The assigned owner of the schedule event
Phase The project phase associated with this event
Publish to Calendar Indicates whether reminders about upcoming schedule events should
be sent and published in the Workbench Calendar channel
Milestone Indicates whether this event is a milestone or task
Duration The expected number of days to complete a task

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 245

Project toolbar functions Projects

Field Description

Dependent on Other Indicates whether the dates of this event rely on the progress of
Events another event
Description The task or milestone description
Baseline Start The proposed start date that serves as a base for comparison
Baseline End The proposed end date that serves as a base for comparison
Planned Start The scheduled start date of the schedule event. The planned start date
may differ from the baseline date if events are rescheduled (and
baseline dates are locked).
Planned End The scheduled end date of the schedule event
Actual Start The actual date the schedule event began
Actual End The actual date the schedule event was finished

Related Topics
Project toolbar functions
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

246 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project toolbar functions

Project Contributing Cost report

A contributing cost report provides estimated and budgeted totals for the costs
associated with your project tasks and milestones, and indicates the percentage of the
expected spend amount represented by those costs. This report summarizes the cost of
an initiative compared to the expected value, providing a cost/benefit ratio. You can
also use this report to view the variance between budgeted and estimated values.
The Costs page appears only if enabled in the project type.

Cost - Spend Comparison

This report table compares effort to expected spend value based on estimated and
budgeted amounts.

Field Description

Total Project Costs The sum of selected tasks or milestones' estimated/budgeted cost
Total Expected Value The sum of selected documents' estimated/budgeted value
Cost/Value Ratio % (Total Project Costs/Total Expected Value) * 100

Expected Spend Value

This report table provides a total and lists the individual projects and events that
contribute to the total spend value of the project.

Field Description

Document The document ID of the project or linked events.

Title The name of the project or linked events.
Estimated Value The estimated value entered on the document's Header tab.
Budgeted Value The budgeted value entered on document's Header tab.
Budget Variance % The percentage difference between the original budgeted cost and the
current estimated cost.
[(Budgeted Value - Estimated Value)/Budget] * 100

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 247

Project toolbar functions Projects

Expected Project Cost

This report table provides a total and lists the individual schedule events that contribute
to the total cost of the project.

Field Description

Task or Milestone The schedule event name

Category The cost category assigned to the task or milestone.
Estimated Value The estimated value entered on the task or milestone cost.
Budgeted Value The budgeted value entered on the task or milestone cost.
Budget Variance % The percentage difference between the original budgeted cost and the
current estimated cost. [(Budgeted Value - Estimated Value)/Budget] * 100
% of Budget Spent The portion of the budget the estimated cost represents.
(Estimated Value/Budgeted Value) * 100

To generate a contributing cost report:

1 On the Costs page, check the boxes for the events and linked documents to include
in the contributing cost report. The documents’ estimated and projected values
define the spend value. The project events define the cost.
2 In the toolbar, click Reports and select Contributing Cost Report from the menu.
You see the cost report.
3 Select the documents and events to include in the Expected Spend Value fields.
4 Select the project schedule tasks and milestones to include in the Expected Project
Cost table.

Note: When specifying the documents to include in this report, you may not want to
select both a project and individual events, as this can result in counting some values
twice. Instead, focus on either the project or the events. For example, the project values
may represent the initial estimate of the spend value, but over time, the values from
individual events may be more accurate.

Related Topics
Project toolbar functions
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Adding costs and resources to a project event

248 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Projects Project toolbar functions

Adding project costs to a contributing cost report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 249

Project toolbar functions Projects

Project Change Phase toolbar button functions

Click the Change Phase button to change the project phase. For details, see
Changing the phase of a project or contract document.

Related Topics
Project toolbar functions
Changing the phase of a project or contract document

250 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation

Demand aggregation allows initiators to gather the quantity, product, and price
information they need to purchase in bulk for time and cost efficiency. In a demand
aggregation document, initiators collect information from multiple locations in their
organization, analyze and combine purchasing needs, and request feedback from
stakeholders. When the demand aggregation document is complete, it can be used to
create an RFx to source the products.
Demand aggregation allows stakeholders to inform the initiator about their purchasing
needs and to provide feedback and suggestions based on their own experience.
Initiators and stakeholders perform different tasks in the Demand Aggregation module.
Each Demand Aggregation Help topic indicates whether it is intended for the initiator or
the stakeholder.

Click the Enterprise Sourcing button in the navigation bar to see the Demand
submenu, which contains the following basic options for this module:

Option Description

Create Demand Aggregation Click to create a new demand aggregation document from a
From Template template. See Creating a demand aggregation document
from a template.
Create Demand Aggregation Click to create a new demand aggregation document. See
Document Creating a demand aggregation document.
All Demand Aggregation Click to see the Demand Aggregation List page displaying a list
Documents of all demand aggregation documents.
My Demand Aggregation Click to see the Demand Aggregation List page displaying a list
Documents of all demand aggregation documents for which you are the
initiator, a collaborator, or a stakeholder.
My Demand Aggregation Click to see the Demand Aggregation List page displaying a list
Responses of all demand aggregation responses to your demand aggregation
documents.
Create Demand Aggregation Click to create a new demand aggregation template. See Creating
Document Template a demand aggregation template.

Confidential 251
Demand Aggregation Initiator Tasks Demand Aggregation

Demand Aggregation Initiator Tasks

The initiator of the demand aggregation document creates the document by adding
specifications and line items, as well as other information, and then distributes the
document to stakeholders in other locations to gather information about their
purchasing needs.
The initiator can view stakeholders’ responses while they are in progress. After a
stakeholder’s responses are firm, the initiator reviews the responses and approves or
declines any line items, specifications, or suppliers proposed by the stakeholder. When
all stakeholder feedback is collected, the initiator can hold subsequent rounds to collect
further information and comments on the changes. After the final round, the initiator
can create an RFx from the demand aggregation document.

Initiator tasks include:

Creating a demand aggregation document
Creating a demand aggregation document from a template
Creating a demand aggregation template
Adding an alternate currency to a demand aggregation document
Adding a demand aggregation schedule
Setting stakeholder notifications for a demand aggregation document
Adding a demand aggregation stakeholder
Adding a demand aggregation specification
Adding a demand aggregation line item
Editing demand aggregation specification options
Adding a supplier to a demand aggregation document
Reviewing a demand aggregation response
Reviewing line items in a demand aggregation response
Reviewing proposed specifications in a demand aggregation response
Reviewing proposed suppliers in a demand aggregation response
Changing a demand aggregation document phase
Reverting a demand aggregation response phase for a stakeholder
Creating a new demand aggregation round
Creating a final demand aggregation round
Creating an RFx from a demand aggregation document
Viewing initiator reports for demand aggregation

252 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Stakeholder Tasks

Demand Aggregation Stakeholder Tasks

The stakeholder of the demand aggregation document responds to the document by
adding proposed specification values for each relevant line item. The stakeholder can
also propose additional line items, specifications, or suppliers for consideration in the
RFx process.

Stakeholder tasks include:

Responding to a demand aggregation document
Declining to respond to a demand aggregation document
Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page
Demand Aggregation Schedule Settings page
Responding to a demand aggregation line item
Declining to respond to a demand aggregation line item
Proposing a demand aggregation line item
Proposing a demand aggregation specification
Proposing a supplier for a demand aggregation document
Changing a demand aggregation response phase
Viewing stakeholder reports for demand aggregation

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 253

Demand Aggregation List page Demand Aggregation

Demand Aggregation List page

To display the Demand Aggregation List page:
` Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the Demand drop-down list:
■ All Demand Aggregation Documents
■ My Demand Aggregation Documents
■ My Demand Aggregation Responses

On the Demand Aggregation List page, all users can view demand aggregation
information in the following ways.

Option Description

All Demand Aggregation View a list of all demand aggregation documents.

Documents
My Demand Aggregation View a list of all demand aggregation documents that list you as a
Documents collaborator.
My Demand Aggregation View a list of all demand aggregation responses that include you on
Responses the collaborator list.
All Demand Aggregation View a list of all active demand aggregation templates.
Templates
My Demand Documents - View a list of all inactive demand aggregation documents that include
Canceled or Closed you on the collaborator list.
All Demand Documents - View a list of all inactive demand aggregation documents.
Canceled or Closed
Demand Aggregation View a list of all demand aggregation documents that contain activity
Documents in My Cost associated with the cost centers defined in your user account setup.
Center(s)
Cost Center Demand View a list of all inactive demand aggregation documents that contain
Aggregation Documents - activity associated with the cost centers defined in your user account
Canceled or Closed setup.

On the Demand Aggregation List page, the initiator can:

` Search for a demand aggregation document by ID, Name, Internal Category,
Company, Owner, Estimated Value, or Phase
` Create and edit a demand aggregation document or template
` Export a list to a CSV file or to a PDF file

254 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation List page

On the Demand Aggregation List page, the stakeholder can:

` Search for a demand aggregation document by ID, Name, Internal Category,
Company, Owner, Estimated Value, or Phase
` Respond to a demand aggregation document
` Export a list to a CSV file or to a PDF file

Note: The tabs that appear in a demand aggregation document are determined by the
document type. All tabs might not appear in every document.

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Creating a demand aggregation document
Creating a demand aggregation document from a template
Editing a demand aggregation document
Creating a demand aggregation template
Editing a demand aggregation template
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file
Responding to a demand aggregation document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 255

Demand Aggregation List page Demand Aggregation

Creating a demand aggregation document

This is an initiator task.
Demand aggregation allows initiators to gather the quantity, product, and price
information they need to purchase in bulk for time and cost efficiency. In a demand
aggregation document, initiators collect information from multiple locations in their
organization, analyze and combine purchasing needs, and request feedback from
stakeholders. When the demand aggregation document is complete, it can be used to
create an RFx to source the products.
You can also create a demand aggregation document from within a project.

Note: The tabs that appear in a demand aggregation document are determined by the
document type. All tabs might not appear in every document.

To create a demand aggregation document:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create Demand
Aggregation Document from the Demand submenu.
Note: You can also create a demand aggregation document by clicking the Create
button on the Demand Aggregation List page.
2 In the Create dialog box, select a document type, or select a template by clicking
the Lookup icon .
3 Click Finish.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic information and add collaborators
and document links.
5 Click the Exchange Rates tab to select alternate currencies and exchange rates. The
Exchange Rates tab appears only if enabled by the document type.
6 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule.
7 Click the Stakeholders tab to select stakeholders.
8 Click the Master Specification tab to add specifications.
9 Click the Line Items tab to add line items.
10 Click the RFx Settings tab to select or create suppliers for RFxs that will be
associated with the document.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document from a template
Editing a demand aggregation document
Adding an alternate currency to a demand aggregation document

256 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation List page

Adding a demand aggregation schedule

Adding a demand aggregation stakeholder
Adding a demand aggregation specification
Adding a demand aggregation line item
Adding a supplier to a demand aggregation document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 257

Demand Aggregation List page Demand Aggregation

Creating a demand aggregation document from a template

This is an initiator task.
Demand aggregation allows initiators to gather the quantity, product, and price
information they need to purchase in bulk for time and cost efficiency. In a demand
aggregation document, initiators collect information from multiple locations in their
organization, analyze and combine purchasing needs, and request feedback from
stakeholders. When the demand aggregation document is complete, it can be used to
create an RFx to source the products.
You can also create a demand aggregation document from within a project.

Note: The tabs that appear in a demand aggregation document are determined by the
document type. All tabs might not appear in every document.

To create a demand aggregation document from a template:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create Demand
Aggregation From Template from the Demand submenu. You see the Demand
Aggregation List page with a list of links you can use to create the demand
aggregation document from a template.
2 On the Demand Aggregation List page, click the link for the template to use. You
see a new demand aggregation document created from the selected template.
Note: You can also create a demand aggregation document from a template by
clicking the Create button on the Demand Aggregation List page and selecting a
template in the Create dialog box.
3 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic information and add collaborators
and document links.
4 Click the Exchange Rates tab to select alternate currencies and exchange rates. The
Exchange Rates tab appears only if enabled by the document type.
5 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule.
6 Click the Stakeholders tab to select stakeholders.
7 Click the Master Specification tab to add specifications.
8 Click the Line Items tab to add line items.
9 Click the RFx Settings tab to select or create suppliers for RFxs that will be
associated with the document.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Editing a demand aggregation document

258 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation List page

Adding an alternate currency to a demand aggregation document

Adding a demand aggregation schedule
Adding a demand aggregation stakeholder
Adding a demand aggregation specification
Adding a demand aggregation line item
Adding a supplier to a demand aggregation document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 259

Demand Aggregation List page Demand Aggregation

Editing a demand aggregation document

This is an initiator task.
Demand aggregation allows initiators to gather the quantity, product, and price
information they need to purchase in bulk for time and cost efficiency. In a demand
aggregation document, initiators collect information from multiple locations in their
organization, analyze and combine purchasing needs, and request feedback from
stakeholders. When the demand aggregation document is complete, it can be used to
create an RFx to source the products.

Note: The tabs that appear in a demand aggregation document are determined by the
document type. All tabs might not appear in every document.

To edit a demand aggregation document:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the Demand submenu:
■ All Demand Aggregation Documents
■ My Demand Aggregation Documents
■ My Demand Aggregation Responses
You see the Demand Aggregation List page displaying the selected list of
documents.
2 On the Demand Aggregation Document List page, click the document to edit.
3 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 On the Header page, edit basic information and add or remove collaborators and
document links.
5 Click the Exchange Rates tab to edit alternate currencies and exchange rates. The
Exchange Rates tab appears only if enabled by the document type.
6 Click the Schedule tab to edit the schedule.
7 Click the Stakeholders tab to edit the stakeholders.
8 Click the Master Specification tab to edit specifications.
9 Click the Line Items tab to edit line items.
10 Click the RFx Settings tab to edit supplier information for RFxs associated with the
document.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Creating a demand aggregation document from a template

260 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation List page

Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page

Field help for Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page
Editing demand aggregation specification options
Adding a supplier to a demand aggregation document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 261

Demand Aggregation List page Demand Aggregation

Creating a demand aggregation template

This is an initiator task.
Templates are predefined documents, or portions of documents, that are used to
standardize document creation and minimize the work of creating a new document.
Templates store information so that it can be used in multiple documents.
Using a template to create a document incorporates the template information into the
new document.

To create a template:
1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create Demand
Aggregation Document Template from the Demand submenu.
Note: You can also create a demand aggregation template by clicking the Create
Template button on the Demand Aggregation List page.
2 In the Create dialog box, select the type of template to create.
3 Click Finish.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic template information and add
collaborators and document links.
5 Click the Exchange Rates tab to select alternate currencies and exchange rates. The
Exchange Rates tab appears only if enabled by the document type.
6 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule.
7 Click the Stakeholders tab to select stakeholders.
8 Click the Master Specification tab to add specifications.
9 Click the Line Items tab to add line items.
10 Click the RFx Settings tab to select or create suppliers for RFxs associated with the
template.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Creating a demand aggregation document from a template
Editing a demand aggregation template
Adding an alternate currency to a demand aggregation document
Adding a demand aggregation schedule
Adding a demand aggregation stakeholder
Adding a demand aggregation specification
Adding a demand aggregation line item

262 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation List page

Adding a supplier to a demand aggregation document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 263

Demand Aggregation List page Demand Aggregation

Editing a demand aggregation template

This is an initiator task.

To edit a template:
1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the Demand submenu:
■ All Demand Aggregation Documents
■ My Demand Aggregation Documents
■ My Demand Aggregation Responses
You see the Demand Aggregation List page.
2 On the Demand Aggregation Document List page, select All Demand Aggregation
Templates from the drop-down list.
3 Click the template to edit.
4 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 On the Header page, edit basic template information and add or remove
collaborators and document links.
6 Click the Exchange Rates tab to edit alternate currencies and exchange rates. The
Exchange Rates tab appears only if enabled by the document type.
7 Click the Schedule tab to edit the schedule.
8 Click the Stakeholders tab to edit the stakeholders.
9 Click the Master Specification tab to edit specifications.
10 Click the Line Items tab to edit line items.
11 Click the RFx Settings tab to edit supplier information for RFxs associated with the
template.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation template
Creating a demand aggregation document
Creating a demand aggregation document from a template
Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page
Field help for Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page
Editing demand aggregation specification options
Adding a supplier to a demand aggregation document

264 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Document page

Demand Aggregation Document page

On the Demand Aggregation Document page, the stakeholder can respond to a demand
aggregation document.
Responding to a demand aggregation document allows you to review and provide
feedback on the initiator’s purchasing plans, as well as proposing alternative line items,
specifications, and suppliers to be considered for a subsequent RFx.

To see the Demand Aggregation Document page, do one of the following:

` Click a demand aggregation response link in an email announcement or in the
Alerts channel.
` Click a demand aggregation document name in the Demand Aggregation List
page.

Related Topics
Responding to a demand aggregation document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 265

Demand Aggregation Document page Demand Aggregation

Responding to a demand aggregation document

This is a stakeholder task.
When an initiator lists you as a stakeholder for a demand aggregation document and
opens the document for response, you receive an email notification. You also see an
announcement in the Alerts channel of your Workbench.

To respond to a demand aggregation document:

1 Do one of the following:
■ Click the demand aggregation response link in the email announcement or in
the Alerts channel.
■ Click the demand aggregation document name in the Demand Aggregation
List page.
2 On the Demand Aggregation Document page, click the document name.
3 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 Review general document information and optionally add collaborators.
5 Click the Schedule tab to review schedule information, including the response due
date.
6 Click the Line Items tab to respond or decline to respond to line items and to
propose new line items.
7 Click the Master Specification tab to propose new specifications.
8 Click the RFx Settings tab to review selected suppliers and propose additional
suppliers.
9 Change the response phase to indicate that your responses are In Progress or Firm.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: Before responding to the second and subsequent rounds of a document, you may
want to review recent document changes in the Key Changes from Last Round Report.

Related Topics
Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Demand Aggregation Schedule Settings page
Responding to a demand aggregation line item
Declining to respond to a demand aggregation line item
Proposing a demand aggregation line item
Proposing a demand aggregation specification

266 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Document page

Proposing a supplier for a demand aggregation document

Changing a demand aggregation response phase
Viewing stakeholder reports for demand aggregation

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 267

Demand Aggregation Header page Demand Aggregation

Demand Aggregation Header page

On the Header page, the initiator can:
` Enter and edit basic information for a demand aggregation document
` Add and remove document collaborators
` Add and remove document links

On the Header page, the stakeholder can:

` Review basic information about the demand aggregation document
` Add and remove response collaborators

Related Topics
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document

268 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page

Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page

Exchange rates are used in the demand aggregation document to compare costs for all
stakeholders, regardless of the currency they use.
The Exchange Rates page appears only if enabled in the document type.

On the Exchange Rates page, the initiator can:

` Add an alternate currency for any stakeholder who does not use the currency
specified on the Header page, and specify the exchange rates.

Field help for Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page

From Rate: Enter the rate used to convert from the default currency to the alternate
currency. This rate might be one you obtained from an outside system.
For example, if USD is the default currency and EUR is the alternate currency, and 1
USD = .877 EUR, enter .877 in the From Rate field.
To Rate: Enter the rate used to convert to the default currency from the alternate
currency.
For example, if USD is the default currency and EUR is the alternate currency, and 1
EUR = 1.14 USD, enter 1.14 as the To Rate.
Use System Rates: Check the box to use the system-defined rates, which are
determined by a system administrator.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Adding an alternate currency to a demand aggregation document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 269

Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page Demand Aggregation

Adding an alternate currency to a demand aggregation

document
This is an initiator task.
The Exchange Rates page appears only if enabled in the document type.

To add an alternate currency:

1 On the Exchange Rates page, click Add Currency.
2 In the dialog box, select the currency or currencies to add. You should select an
alternate currency for any stakeholder who does not use the default currency
specified on the Header page.
3 Click OK.
4 Specify the exchange rates to use for the currency or select the system-defined
rates, which are determined by a system administrator. For details, see Field help
for Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Field help for Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page

270 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Schedule page

Demand Aggregation Schedule page

Schedules help an initiator track the progress of a demand aggregation document. The
Schedule page shows information about document phases and standard dates, such as
the response due date, and information about schedule events.
Under Schedule Events, you can select a view for events. In each view, you can add
and edit different information for the events. In any schedule event view, event status
is indicated as follows:
` Events that are behind schedule appear in red.
` Events that are in progress appear in bold.

On the Schedule page, the initiator can:

` Specify a schedule event view
` Add and edit a demand aggregation schedule
` Add and edit schedule events
` Set stakeholder notifications
` Add dates to an event
` View event dependencies
` Reorder events

On the Schedule page, the stakeholder can review the schedule for the demand
aggregation document.

Related Topics
Specifying a schedule event view
Adding a demand aggregation schedule
Adding an event to a schedule
Setting stakeholder notifications for a demand aggregation document
Adding dates to an event
Viewing event dependencies
Reordering items in a list
Demand Aggregation Schedule Settings page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 271

Demand Aggregation Schedule page Demand Aggregation

Adding a demand aggregation schedule

This is an initiator task.

To add a schedule:
1 In the Setup view for the Schedule page, fill in the fields with basic schedule
information, including the date the responses are due.
2 Add events.
3 Set stakeholder notifications.
4 Optionally, reorder events.
5 Select Tracking View from the drop-down list to enter dates for the schedule.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Adding an event to a schedule
Setting stakeholder notifications for a demand aggregation document
Reordering items in a list
Adding dates to an event

272 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Schedule page

Setting stakeholder notifications for a demand aggregation

document
This is an initiator task.

To set stakeholder notifications:

1 In the Setup view for the Schedule page, click Email Notification Settings.
2 In the Notification Settings dialog box, check the box for each notification to send
to stakeholders and, in some cases, collaborators.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Adding a demand aggregation schedule

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 273

Demand Aggregation Schedule page Demand Aggregation

Demand Aggregation Schedule Settings page

The Settings page provides a single location to enter and edit much of the event
information in the Setup and Dependency views.

On the Settings page, the initiator can:

` Enter and edit basic information about the event
` Enter and edit event type and dependency information under Type
` Enter and edit information under Reminders

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Adding a demand aggregation schedule
Adding an event to a schedule
Editing an event in a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Creating reminders for an event

274 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Schedule page

Demand Aggregation Schedule Tracking page

On the Tracking page, the initiator can:
` Review date information, and enter and edit the actual dates for an event

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Adding a demand aggregation schedule
Adding dates to an event

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 275

Demand Aggregation Schedule page Demand Aggregation

Demand Aggregation Schedule Dependents page

On the Dependents page, the initiator can view the events that are dependent on a
specific event.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Adding a demand aggregation schedule
Viewing event dependents

276 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Stakeholders page

Demand Aggregation Stakeholders page

Stakeholders are buy-side respondents to the demand aggregation document. Each
stakeholder represents a unique location in the organization. Stakeholders can add
collaborators as needed.
Stakeholders cannot view each other’s responses to the document.
On the Stakeholders page, the initiator can add stakeholders and edit stakeholder
information.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Adding a demand aggregation stakeholder

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 277

Demand Aggregation Stakeholders page Demand Aggregation

Adding a demand aggregation stakeholder

This is an initiator task.

To add a stakeholder:
1 On the Stakeholders page, click Add User Account.
2 In the dialog box, select the stakeholder or stakeholders to add.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

To edit stakeholder information, click the Edit icon for the stakeholder on the
Stakeholders page.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document

278 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Master Specification page

Demand Aggregation Master Specification page

On the Master Specification page, the initiator can add and edit specifications for the
line items in the demand aggregation document. Specifications are the parameters
used to describe each line item in the document and to obtain comparable requirement
information from each stakeholder. Along with line items, specifications can also be
selected for inclusion in the RFx that is generated from the demand aggregation
document.
On the Master Specification page, the stakeholder can propose new specifications for
the demand aggregation document.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Adding a demand aggregation specification
Responding to a demand aggregation document
Proposing a demand aggregation specification

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 279

Demand Aggregation Master Specification page Demand Aggregation

Adding a demand aggregation specification

This is an initiator task.
Specifications are the parameters that describe the line items in the demand
aggregation document. For example, specifications for paper products might include
absorbency, price, recycled content, and so forth. Specifications should be broad
enough to apply to all line items in the demand aggregation document.

To add a specification:
1 On the Master Specification page, click Add.
2 Fill in the fields in the Specification dialog box.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

To edit a specification, click its Edit icon on the Master Specification page.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document

280 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Master Specification page

Proposing a demand aggregation specification

This is a stakeholder task.
Specifications should be broad enough to apply to all line items in the demand
aggregation document.

To propose a specification:
1 On the Master Specification page under Proposed Specifications, click Add.
2 In the Specification dialog box, fill in the fields with information about your
proposed specification, including any comments for the initiator.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Responding to a demand aggregation document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 281

Demand Aggregation Line Items page Demand Aggregation

Demand Aggregation Line Items page

The Line Items page shows the products that the initiator chooses to include in the
demand aggregation document. Each line item represents a unique product.

On the Line Items page, the initiator can:

` Enter and edit line items for the demand aggregation document
` Edit specification options, such as the default ordering unit, whether a brand target
is used in the document, and the terms of delivery

On the Line Items page, the stakeholder can:

` Respond or decline to respond to line items
` Propose additional line items

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Adding a demand aggregation line item
Editing demand aggregation specification options
Responding to a demand aggregation line item
Declining to respond to a demand aggregation line item
Proposing a demand aggregation line item

282 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Line Items page

Adding a demand aggregation line item

This is an initiator task.

To add a line item:

1 On the Line Items page, click Add.
2 Fill in the fields with basic information about the line item.
3 For each specification, fill in the fields in the table with brand target values, if
applicable, and proposed target values. If any specification does not apply to the
current line item, leave its fields blank.
4 Click OK.

To edit a line item, click its Edit icon on the Line Items page.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 283

Demand Aggregation Line Items page Demand Aggregation

Editing demand aggregation specification options

This is an initiator task.
When editing specification options, keep in mind that the edits apply to all specifications
and line items in the demand aggregation document. For example, removing a delivery
term could affect the cost of all line items in the document.

To edit specification options:

1 On the Line Items page, click Options.
2 In the Specification Options dialog box, edit fields to specify the default ordering
unit and whether to use a brand target for the document.
3 Under Delivery Terms, click Add Demand Delivery Term.
d Select the delivery terms for the line items in the document. Delivery term
options are specified by a system administrator at your organization.
e Click OK.
4 In the Specification Options dialog box, click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document

284 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Line Items page

Responding to a demand aggregation line item

This is a stakeholder task.

To respond to a line item:

1 On the Line Items page, click the Edit icon for the line item to respond to.
2 In the dialog box, fill in fields with general information for the line item. You can
also decline to respond to the line item if you do not need to purchase it.
3 Under Delivery Terms, enter the cost for the indicated delivery terms.
4 Type any comments about the line item.
5 In the specification table, fill in your proposed values for each specification. You can
leave a field blank unless a response is required for that specification.
6 Click OK.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Responding to a demand aggregation document
Declining to respond to a demand aggregation line item

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 285

Demand Aggregation Line Items page Demand Aggregation

Declining to respond to a demand aggregation line item

This is a stakeholder task.
You can decline to respond to a line item if you do not need to purchase the item.

To decline to respond to a line item:

1 On the Line Items page, check the Decline to Participate box for the line item to
which you do not plan to respond.
2 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also decline to respond to the item by clicking the Edit icon for the
line item and then checking the Decline to Participate box in the line item dialog box.

Related Topics
Responding to a demand aggregation document
Responding to a demand aggregation line item

286 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Line Items page

Proposing a demand aggregation line item

This is a stakeholder task.
When proposing a line item, keep in mind that it should be similar to the other line
items in the demand aggregation document. It should also be easily described by the
current specifications.

To propose a line item:

1 On the Line Items page under Proposed Line Items, click Add.
2 In the dialog box, fill in the fields with general information for the line item.
3 In the specification table, fill in the fields with brand target values, if applicable, and
proposed target values. If any specification does not apply to the current line item,
leave its fields blank.
4 Click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Responding to a demand aggregation document
Responding to a demand aggregation line item

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 287

Demand Aggregation RFx Settings page Demand Aggregation

Demand Aggregation RFx Settings page

On the RFx Settings page, the initiator can select suppliers and create records for
suppliers to participate in the RFx that is created from the demand aggregation
document.

On the RFx Settings page, the stakeholder can propose additional suppliers for the
demand aggregation document. For example, stakeholders might propose suppliers
they use frequently.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Adding a supplier to a demand aggregation document
Creating a supplier record in a demand aggregation document
Creating an RFx from a demand aggregation document
Responding to a demand aggregation document
Proposing a supplier for a demand aggregation document

288 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation RFx Settings page

Adding a supplier to a demand aggregation document

This is an initiator task.
You can select suppliers to participate in the RFx that is created from the demand
aggregation document.

To add a supplier:
1 On the RFx Settings page, click Add Contact.
2 In the dialog box, select a supplier and contact name.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Creating a supplier record in a demand aggregation document
Creating an RFx from a demand aggregation document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 289

Demand Aggregation RFx Settings page Demand Aggregation

Creating a supplier record in a demand aggregation document

This is an initiator task.
You can create records for suppliers to participate in the RFx that is created from the
demand aggregation document.
When you create a supplier record, it is stored in the Vendors module, where you can
add further details as needed.

To create a supplier record:

1 On the RFx Settings page, click Add Contact.
2 In the dialog box, click Create.
3 In the dialog box, enter supplier information and click OK.
4 Optionally, select the supplier you added and click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Adding a supplier to a demand aggregation document
Creating an RFx from a demand aggregation document
Creating a supplier record

290 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation RFx Settings page

Proposing a supplier for a demand aggregation document

This is a stakeholder task.
You can propose additional suppliers for the demand aggregation document. For
example, you might propose suppliers you use frequently.

To propose a supplier:
1 On the RFx Settings page under Proposed Specifications, click Add.
2 In the dialog box, select a supplier.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Responding to a demand aggregation document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 291

Demand Aggregation Responses page Demand Aggregation

Demand Aggregation Responses page

The Responses tab is created when the phase of a demand aggregation document is
changed to Open for Response.

On the Responses page, the initiator can:

` Review each stakeholder’s demand aggregation response
` Approve or decline proposed line items
` Approve or decline proposed specifications
` Approve or decline proposed suppliers

Related Topics
Reviewing a demand aggregation response
Reviewing line items in a demand aggregation response
Approving a proposed line item in a demand aggregation response
Declining a proposed line item in a demand aggregation response
Reviewing proposed specifications in a demand aggregation response
Approving a proposed specification in a demand aggregation response
Declining a proposed specification in a demand aggregation response
Reviewing proposed suppliers in a demand aggregation response
Approving a proposed supplier in a demand aggregation response
Declining a proposed supplier in a demand aggregation response

292 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Responses page

Reviewing a demand aggregation response

This is an initiator task.
When a demand aggregation response is ready for your review, you receive an email
announcement. You also see the announcement in the Alerts channel of your
Workbench.
You can review a response at any time, regardless of the phase it is in. However, you
cannot approve proposed line items, specifications, or suppliers until the stakeholder
changes the response phase to Firm.

To review a demand aggregation response:

1 Do one of the following:
■ Click the demand aggregation response link in the email announcement or the
Alerts channel.
■ Click the demand aggregation document in the Demand Aggregation Document
List page.
2 Click the Responses tab.
3 Click the response to review.
4 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Review general response information, including collaborators.
6 Click the Line Items tab to review line item responses and proposed line items. You
can approve and decline proposed line items during your review.
7 Click the Master Specification tab to review proposed specifications. You can
approve and decline proposed specifications during your review.
8 Click the RFx Settings tab to review proposed suppliers. You can approve and
decline proposed suppliers during your review.
9 Click the Proposed tab to review all proposed items by all stakeholders. You can
approve and decline proposed line items, specifications and suppliers during your
review.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: In addition to reviewing stakeholder responses individually, you may want to view
demand aggregation reports to compare stakeholder information, track changes, and
note specifications that do not match the target values.

Related Topics
Reviewing line items in a demand aggregation response
Reviewing proposed specifications in a demand aggregation response
Reviewing proposed suppliers in a demand aggregation response

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 293

Demand Aggregation Responses page Demand Aggregation

Viewing initiator reports for demand aggregation

294 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Proposed page

Demand Aggregation Proposed page

The Proposed tab is created when the phase of a demand aggregation document is
changed to Open for Response.

On the Proposed page, the initiator can:

` Review all proposed line items, specifications, and suppliers from all stakeholders
` Approve or decline proposed line items, specifications, and suppliers

Related Topics
Reviewing line items in a demand aggregation response
Approving a proposed line item in a demand aggregation response
Declining a proposed line item in a demand aggregation response
Reviewing proposed specifications in a demand aggregation response
Approving a proposed specification in a demand aggregation response
Declining a proposed specification in a demand aggregation response
Reviewing proposed suppliers in a demand aggregation response
Approving a proposed supplier in a demand aggregation response
Declining a proposed supplier in a demand aggregation response

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 295

Demand Aggregation Proposed page Demand Aggregation

Reviewing line items in a demand aggregation response

This is an initiator task.

To review line items:

1 On the Line Items page of the response, review general information under Line
Items.
2 To view detailed information for a line item, click its description link. After you finish
reviewing detailed information, click the Save button in the toolbar.
3 Under Proposed Line Items, review any proposed line items. You can approve or
decline items during your review.
4 To view detailed information for a proposed line item, click its description link. After
you finish reviewing detailed information, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also review all proposed line items for all stakeholders on the Proposed
page.

Related Topics
Reviewing a demand aggregation response
Approving a proposed line item in a demand aggregation response
Declining a proposed line item in a demand aggregation response

296 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Proposed page

Approving a proposed line item in a demand aggregation

response
This is an initiator task.
After you approve a proposed line item, it appears on the Line Items page when the
next round of the document is created.

To approve a proposed line item:

1 On the Line Items page of the response, review the proposed line item.
2 Select Approved from the Item Status drop-down list.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also approve line items on the Proposed page.

Related Topics
Reviewing a demand aggregation response
Reviewing line items in a demand aggregation response
Declining a proposed line item in a demand aggregation response

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 297

Demand Aggregation Proposed page Demand Aggregation

Declining a proposed line item in a demand aggregation

response
This is an initiator task.
If you decline a proposed line item, it does not appear on the Line Items page when the
next round of the document is created.

To decline a proposed line item:

1 On the Line Items page of the response, review the proposed line item.
2 Select Declined from the Item Status drop-down list.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also decline line items on the Proposed page.

Related Topics
Reviewing a demand aggregation response
Reviewing line items in a demand aggregation response
Approving a proposed line item in a demand aggregation response

298 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Proposed page

Reviewing proposed specifications in a demand aggregation

response
This is an initiator task.

To review proposed specifications:

1 On the Master Specification page of the response, review information under
Proposed Specifications. You can approve or decline specifications during your
review.
2 To view detailed information for a proposed specification, click its description link.
After you finish reviewing information in the Specification dialog box, click OK.

Note: You can also review all proposed specifications for all stakeholders on the
Proposed page.

Related Topics
Reviewing a demand aggregation response
Approving a proposed specification in a demand aggregation response
Declining a proposed specification in a demand aggregation response

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 299

Demand Aggregation Proposed page Demand Aggregation

Approving a proposed specification in a demand aggregation

response
This is an initiator task.
After you approve a proposed specification, it appears on the Master Specification page
when the next round of the document is created.

To approve a proposed specification:

1 On the Master Specification page of the response, review the proposed
specification.
2 Select Approved from the Specification Status drop-down list.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also approve specifications on the Proposed page.

Related Topics
Reviewing a demand aggregation response
Reviewing proposed specifications in a demand aggregation response
Declining a proposed specification in a demand aggregation response

300 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Proposed page

Declining a proposed specification in a demand aggregation

response
This is an initiator task.
If you decline a proposed specification, it does not appear on the Master Specification
page when the next round of the document is created.

To decline a proposed specification:

1 On the Master Specification page of the response, review the proposed
specification.
2 Select Declined from the Specification Status drop-down list.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also decline specifications on the Proposed page.

Related Topics
Reviewing a demand aggregation response
Reviewing proposed specifications in a demand aggregation response
Approving a proposed specification in a demand aggregation response

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 301

Demand Aggregation Proposed page Demand Aggregation

Reviewing proposed suppliers in a demand aggregation

response
This is an initiator task.

To review proposed suppliers:

1 On the RFx Settings page of the response, review information under Proposed
Additional Vendors. You can approve or decline suppliers during your review.
2 To view detailed information for a proposed supplier, click its description link. After
you finish reviewing detailed supplier information, click OK.

Note: You can also review all proposed suppliers for all stakeholders on the Proposed
page.

Related Topics
Reviewing a demand aggregation response
Approving a proposed supplier in a demand aggregation response
Declining a proposed supplier in a demand aggregation response

302 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation Proposed page

Approving a proposed supplier in a demand aggregation

response
This is an initiator task.
After you approve a proposed supplier, it appears on the RFX Settings page when the
next round of the document is created.

To approve a proposed supplier:

1 On the RFX Settings page of the response, review the proposed supplier.
2 Select Approved from the Vendor Status drop-down list.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also approve suppliers on the Proposed page.

Related Topics
Reviewing a demand aggregation response
Reviewing proposed suppliers in a demand aggregation response
Declining a proposed supplier in a demand aggregation response

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 303

Demand Aggregation Proposed page Demand Aggregation

Declining a proposed supplier in a demand aggregation

response
This is an initiator task.
If you decline a proposed supplier, it does not appear on the RFX Settings page when
the next round of the document is created.

To decline a proposed supplier:

1 On the RFX Settings page of the response, review the proposed supplier.
2 Select Declined from the Vendor Status drop-down list.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also decline suppliers on the Proposed page.

Related Topics
Reviewing a demand aggregation response
Reviewing proposed suppliers in a demand aggregation response
Approving a proposed supplier in a demand aggregation response

304 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation toolbar functions

Demand Aggregation toolbar functions

The Demand Aggregation toolbar provides buttons for a number of functions.

Using the toolbar, the initiator can do the following in a demand aggregation document:
` Change the phase of the document
` Create a new demand aggregation round
` Create an RFx from the document
` View demand aggregation reports

Using the toolbar, the initiator can do the following in a demand aggregation response:
` Revert the phase of the response
` View demand aggregation reports

Using the toolbar, the stakeholder can do the following in a demand aggregation
response:
` Change the phase of the response
` Decline to respond to a demand aggregation document
` View demand aggregation reports

Related Topics
Changing a demand aggregation document phase
Creating a new demand aggregation round
Creating a final demand aggregation round
Creating an RFx from a demand aggregation document
Viewing initiator reports for demand aggregation
Reverting a demand aggregation response phase for a stakeholder
Changing a demand aggregation response phase
Declining to respond to a demand aggregation document
Viewing stakeholder reports for demand aggregation

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 305

Demand Aggregation toolbar functions Demand Aggregation

Changing a demand aggregation document phase

This is an initiator task.
The demand aggregation document phase determines whether stakeholders can see
and respond to the document. Demand aggregation document phases are Created,
Open for Response, Closed to Response, and Aggregated.

To change a phase:
1 In the demand aggregation document toolbar, click the Change Phase button

. The button text indicates the current document phase.

2 In the Change Phase dialog box, select the new phase.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
4 In the Change Phase dialog box, click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Reverting a demand aggregation response phase for a stakeholder

306 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation toolbar functions

Changing a demand aggregation response phase

This is a stakeholder task.
You change the phase in a demand aggregation response to indicate that it is in
progress or that it is complete. The initiator can always view your response, regardless
of the phase it is in. The initiator can only approve or decline your proposals when the
response is in the Firm phase.
Demand aggregation response phases are Created, In Progress, Declined, and Firm.
You can edit the response in the Created and In Progress phases. You cannot edit the
response in the Declined or Firm phase.

To change a demand aggregation response phase:

1 In any page of the demand aggregation response, click the Phase Change button

in the toolbar. The button text indicates the current document phase.
2 In the Change Phase dialog box, select the new phase.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
4 In the Change Phase dialog box, click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Responding to a demand aggregation document
Declining to respond to a demand aggregation document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 307

Demand Aggregation toolbar functions Demand Aggregation

Declining to respond to a demand aggregation document

This is a stakeholder task.
You can decline to respond to any round of a demand aggregation document. If you
decline to respond, you do not see further rounds of the document.

To decline to respond:
1 In any page of the demand aggregation response, click the Phase Change button

in the toolbar. The button text indicates the current document phase.
2 In the Change Phase dialog box, select Declined.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
4 In the Change Phase dialog box, click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Responding to a demand aggregation document
Changing a demand aggregation response phase

308 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation toolbar functions

Reverting a demand aggregation response phase for a

stakeholder
This is an initiator task.
After a stakeholder changes the response phase to Firm, the stakeholder can no longer
edit the response. If the stakeholder needs to make further changes to the response,
you can revert the response phase to In Progress to enable the stakeholder to edit it.

To revert a demand aggregation response phase:

1 In any page of the demand aggregation response, click the Phase Change button

in the toolbar. The button text indicates the current document phase.
2 In the Change Phase dialog box, select In Progress.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
4 In the Change Phase dialog box, click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Changing a demand aggregation document phase

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 309

Demand Aggregation toolbar functions Demand Aggregation

Creating a new demand aggregation round

This is an initiator task.
A new round incorporates all recently approved line items and specifications from
stakeholders. Each demand aggregation round carries forward information and
cumulative changes from all previous rounds.
After creating a new round, you can reopen the document for response to get new
feedback on the changes you made.

To end one round and create a new round:

1 Change the document phase to Closed for Response.
2 Review response information, approve or decline stakeholder proposals, and make
any needed changes to specification values.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
4 In the toolbar, click Actions and select Create New Round from the menu.
5 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
6 On the Header page, fill in fields with information about the new round, including a
round label.
7 On the Schedule page, select a response due date for this round.
8 Open the document for response.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Changing a demand aggregation document phase
Reviewing a demand aggregation response
Creating a final demand aggregation round

310 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation toolbar functions

Creating a final demand aggregation round

This is an initiator task.
Flagging a demand aggregation round as final notifies stakeholders that this is their last
opportunity to provide feedback. After the final round is over, you can optionally view a
Final Demand Aggregation Summary Report and generate an RFx from the aggregated
information.

To create a final round:

1 Change the document phase to Closed for Response.
2 Review response information, approve or decline stakeholder proposals, and make
any needed changes to specification values.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
4 In the toolbar, click Actions and select Create New Round from the menu.
5 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
6 On the Header page, do the following:
a Check the Final Round box.
b Select Final from the Round Label drop-down list.
7 On the Schedule page, select a response due date for this round.
8 Gather and review responses as in any other round.
9 To end the final round, change the document phase to Aggregated.

Note: If you need to make changes to the demand aggregation document after the final
round, you can revert the phase from Aggregated and, if necessary, create an additional
round.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Creating a new demand aggregation round
Changing a demand aggregation document phase
Reviewing a demand aggregation response

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 311

Demand Aggregation toolbar functions Demand Aggregation

Creating an RFx from a demand aggregation document

This is an initiator task.

To create an RFx:
1 At the end of the final round, change the document phase to Closed for Response.
2 Review response information, approve or decline stakeholder proposals, and make
any final changes to specification values.
3 Change the document phase to Aggregated.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
5 In the toolbar, click Actions and select Create RFx from this Demand from the
menu.
6 Create the RFx. Some key information from the demand aggregation document is
filled in automatically.

Note: After the RFx is awarded, you have the option to view a DA/RFx Bid Allocation
report, which indicates the supplier to whom the bid was awarded, the final pricing, and
the allocations to each stakeholder. You can also make this report available to
stakeholders.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation document
Creating a new demand aggregation round
Changing a demand aggregation document phase
Reviewing a demand aggregation response
Creating an RFx
Viewing initiator reports for demand aggregation

312 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Demand Aggregation Demand Aggregation toolbar functions

Viewing initiator reports for demand aggregation

This is an initiator task.
During the demand aggregation process, the initiator can view a number of reports that
consolidate information and highlight changes in stakeholder responses.
Initiator reports include:
` Key Changes from Last Round. This report highlights specification values,
quantities, and current prices that changed in the responses since the last round.
You can view this report after a round opens for response.
` Specification Value Outliers by Product. This report highlights response
specification values that differ from the proposed target values. You can view this
report at any time after the first round opens for response.
` Final Demand Aggregation Summary. This report indicates the quantities and
current prices entered by each stakeholder. You can view this report at any time
after the first round is opened for response. This report may be useful in creating
the RFx after the final round of demand aggregation.
` DA/RFx Bid Allocation. This report indicates suppliers to whom the bid was
awarded, the final pricing, and the allocations to each stakeholder. You can view
this report after the RFx is awarded to one or more suppliers. You can also make
this report available to stakeholders.

To view a report:
1 Change the phase as required by the report.
2 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
3 Click Reports in the toolbar and select the report to view from the drop-down list.
4 Optionally, bookmark the report.
5 Optionally, export the report as a PDF, Excel (XLS), or CSV file.
6 After you finish viewing the report, click Close Window.

Related Topics
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Duplicating a sourcing document
Creating a demand aggregation document
Changing a demand aggregation document phase
Reviewing a demand aggregation response

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 313

Demand Aggregation toolbar functions Demand Aggregation

Viewing stakeholder reports for demand aggregation

This is a stakeholder task.
During the demand aggregation process, the stakeholder can view a number of reports
that consolidate information and highlight changes in the document.
Stakeholder reports include:
` Key Changes from Last Round. This report highlights new products, new
specifications, and changed target values in the current round of the document.
You can view this report after the second or any subsequent round opens for
response.
` Final Demand Aggregation Summary. This report indicates the quantities
allocated to each stakeholder. You can view this report after the initiator changes a
document phase to Aggregated.
` DA/RFx Bid Allocation. This report indicates suppliers to whom the bid was
awarded, the final pricing, and the allocations to each stakeholder. You can view
this report after the RFx is awarded to one or more suppliers and the initiator
makes the report available.

To view a report:
1 Verify that the demand aggregation document is in the appropriate phase for the
report.
2 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
3 Click Reports in the toolbar and select the report to view from the menu. You see
the report.
4 Optionally, bookmark the report.
5 Optionally, export the report as a PDF, Excel (XLS), or CSV file.
6 After you finish viewing the report, click Close Window.

Related Topics
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Duplicating a sourcing document
Responding to a demand aggregation document

314 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions

Auctions

An auction is a strategic sourcing event that is used to negotiate the best value in a
short period of time. In an auction, suppliers bid to provide products and services. An
auction can occur on its own or in conjunction with an RFx. Unlike an RFx, which can go
on for weeks, auctions typically last for a few hours to a few days.
Although auctions can be either reverse or forward, you typically use reverse auctions
for your sourcing events. In a reverse auction, the price drops as the auction proceeds,
whereas in a forward auction, the price increases as the auction proceeds.
Auction types determine the structure of the auction by defining its bidding and
disclosure rules. A number of predefined auction types are included in the Auctions
module. A system administrator can create additional auction types.
The Auctions module features an Auction Monitor that enables you and the bidders to
observe the events of the auction in real time. You can also use the Auction Monitor to
communicate with bidders through instant messaging.

Click the Enterprise Sourcing button in the navigation bar to see the Auctions
submenu, which contains the following basic options for this module:

Option Description

Create Auction From Click to create a new auction from a template. See Creating an
Template auction from a template.
Create Auction Event Click to create a new auction. See Creating an auction.
My Auctions Click to see the Auction Event List page displaying a list of
auctions for which you are an owner or collaborator.
My Running Auctions Click to see the Auction Event List page displaying a list of your
auctions that are currently in progress.
All Auctions Click to see the Auction Event List page displaying a list of all
auctions.
Closed Auctions Click to see the Auction Event List page displaying a list of
auctions that are closed.
Auction Summary Extract Click to see a report providing access to the summary information
report and auction type attributes for a set of auction events in a given
time period for printing or exporting.
Create Auction Event Click to create a new auction template. See Creating an auction
Template template.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 315

Auction Event List page Auctions

Auction Event List page

To display the Auction Event List page:
` Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the Auctions submenu:
■ My Auctions
■ My Running Auctions
■ All Auctions
■ Closed Auctions

On the Auction Event List page, you can:

` View auctions in the following ways.

Option Description

My Auctions View a list of all auctions that include you on the collaborator list. This
list includes all auction statuses.
My Scheduled Auctions View a list of all active auctions that include you on the collaborator
list. This report includes auctions with a status of Not started yet,
Running, or Close Pending.
My Running Auctions View a list of all auctions that have a status of Running or Close
Pending and include you on the Collaborator list.
My Closing Auctions View a list of all auctions that are scheduled to close on the current
date and that include you on the collaborator list.
Auctions in My Cost View a list of auctions that contain activity associated with the cost
Center(s) centers defined in your user account setup.
All Auctions View a list of all active auctions.
Scheduled Auctions View a list of all active auctions with a status of Not started yet,
Running, or Close Pending.
Running Auctions View a list of all auctions that have a status of Running or Close
Pending.
Closing Auctions View a list of all auctions that are scheduled to closed on the current
date.

316 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Event List page

Option Description

Closed Auctions View a list of all auctions that are closed for bidding.
All Cancelled Auctions View a list of all auctions that were cancelled.
All Auction Templates View a list of all active auction templates.
All Inactive Auction View a list of all inactive auction templates; i.e. cancelled templates.
Templates

` Search by ID, Name, Type, Owner, or Status

` Create and edit an auction or template
` Export an auction list to a CSV file or to a PDF file

Note: The tabs that appear in an auction are determined by the auction type. All tabs
might not appear in every document.

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Creating an auction
Creating an auction from a template
Editing an auction
Creating an auction template
Editing an auction template
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 317

Auction Event List page Auctions

Creating an auction
An auction is a strategic sourcing event that is used to negotiate the best value in a
short period of time. In an auction, suppliers bid to provide products and services. An
auction can occur on its own or in conjunction with an RFx. Unlike an RFx, which can go
on for weeks, auctions typically last for a few hours to a few days.
You can also create an auction from within a project.

Note: The tabs that appear in an auction are determined by the auction type. All tabs
might not appear in every document.

To create an auction:
1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create Auction from
the Auctions submenu.
Note: You can also create an auction by clicking the Create button on the Auction
Event List page.
2 In the Create dialog box, select an auction type, or select a template by clicking the

Lookup icon . The type description indicates whether the auction is reverse or
forward and can include other settings, such as bidding and disclosure rules.
3 Click Finish.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields for basic information and those under Settings,
and add collaborators and document links.
5 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule.
6 Click the Information tab to add one or more information sections.
7 Click the Line Items tab to add line items.
8 Click the Bidders tab to add bidders.
9 Click the Weights tab to add weighted bidding factors for an auction with weighted
bidding.
10 Click the Accounting tab to add accounting information.
11 Click the Exchange Rates tab to select alternate currencies and exchange rates.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction from a template
Editing an auction
Adding an amendment to an auction
Adding an auction schedule

318 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Event List page

Adding an auction information section

Adding line item information to an auction
Adding a bidder to an auction
Adding weighted bidding factors to an auction
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Adding an alternate currency to an auction
Creating a sourcing document from within a project

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 319

Auction Event List page Auctions

Creating an auction from a template

An auction is a strategic sourcing event that is used to negotiate the best value in a
short period of time. In an auction, suppliers bid to provide products and services. An
auction can occur on its own or in conjunction with an RFx. Unlike an RFx, which can go
on for weeks, auctions typically last for a few hours to a few days.
You can also create an auction from within a project.

Note: The tabs that appear in an auction are determined by the auction type. All tabs
might not appear in every document.

To create an auction from a template:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create Auction From
Template from the Auctions submenu. You see the Auction Event List page with a
list of links you can use to create the auction from a template.
2 On the Auction Event List page, click the link for the template to use. You see a new
auction created from the selected template.
Note: You can also create an auction from a template by clicking the Create button
on the Auction Event List page and selecting a template in the Create dialog box.
3 On the Header page, fill in the fields for basic information and those under Settings,
and add collaborators and document links.
4 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule.
5 Click the Information tab to add one or more information sections.
6 Click the Line Items tab to add line items.
7 Click the Bidders tab to add bidders.
8 Click the Weights tab to add weighted bidding factors for an auction with weighted
bidding.
9 Click the Accounting tab to add accounting information.
10 Click the Exchange Rates tab to select alternate currencies and exchange rates.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Editing an auction
Adding an amendment to an auction
Adding an auction schedule
Adding an auction information section
Adding line item information to an auction

320 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Event List page

Adding a bidder to an auction

Adding weighted bidding factors to an auction
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Adding an alternate currency to an auction
Creating a sourcing document from within a project

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 321

Auction Event List page Auctions

Editing an auction
Note: The tabs that appear in an auction are determined by the auction type. All tabs
might not appear in every document.

To edit an auction:
1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the Auctions submenu:
■ My Auctions
■ My Running Auctions
■ All Auctions
■ Closed Auctions
You see the Auction Event List page displaying the selected list of auctions.
2 On the Auction Event List page, click the auction to edit.
3 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 On the Header page, edit any fields, and add or remove collaborators and
document links.
5 Click the Schedule tab to edit the schedule.
6 Click the Information tab to edit information sections.
7 Click the Line Items tab to edit line items.
8 Click the Bidders tab to add or remove bidders.
9 Click the Weights tab to edit weighted bidding factors for an auction with weighted
bidding.
10 Click the Accounting tab to edit the accounting information.
11 Click the Exchange Rates tab to edit alternate currencies and exchange rates.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Creating an auction from a template
Adding an amendment to an auction
Adding an auction schedule
Changing phase end times for an open auction
Adding an auction information section
Adding line item information to an auction
Adding a bidder to an auction

322 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Event List page

Adding weighted bidding factors to an auction

Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Field help for Auction Exchange Rates page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 323

Auction Event List page Auctions

Editing an open auction

To edit an open auction, you must first suspend bidding activity. Suspending bidding
activity is a way to temporarily stop the activity of the auction. No bids can be placed
while the bidding activity is suspended. For details, see Suspending auction bidding
activity.

While the auction is suspended, you can make the following edits to the auction:
` Add an amendment
` Add or delete a collaborator
` Add a document link
` Change the minimum or maximum bid improvement
` Change end times for the Pre-bid, Preview, and Open phases
` Change the start price for a line item (in Preview phase only)
` Add one or more bidders
` Disqualify a bidder
` Add accounting information
` Disqualify a bid
` Add or remove an alternate currency

Related Topics
Suspending auction bidding activity
Suspending an auction bidder
Unsuspending an auction bidder
Unsuspending auction bidding activity
Adding an amendment to an auction
Editing collaborators in an open auction
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Editing the minimum or maximum bid improvement in an open auction
Editing a line item start price in the Preview phase
Changing phase end times for an open auction
Adding a bidder to an open auction
Disqualifying an auction bidder
Disqualifying an auction bid
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Adding an alternate currency to an auction

324 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Event List page

Creating an auction template

Templates are predefined documents, or portions of documents, that are used to
standardize document creation and minimize the work of creating a new document.
Templates store information so that it can be used in multiple documents.
Using a template to create an auction incorporates the template information into the
new auction.

Note: The tabs that appear in an auction template are determined by the template type.
All tabs might not appear in every document.

To create an auction template:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create Auction Event
Template from the Auctions submenu.
Note: You can also create an auction event template by clicking the Create
Template button on the Auction Event List page.
2 In the Create dialog box, select the type of template to create. The template
description indicates whether the auction is reverse or forward and can include
other settings, such as bidding and disclosure rules.
3 Click Finish.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields for basic information and those under Settings,
and add collaborators and document links.
5 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule.
6 Click the Information tab to add one or more information sections.
7 Click the Line Items tab to add line items.
8 Click the Bidders tab to add bidders.
9 Click the Weights tab to add weighted bidding factors for an auction with weighted
bidding.
10 Click the Accounting tab to add accounting information.
11 Click the Exchange Rates tab to select alternate currencies and exchange rates.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Creating an auction from a template
Editing an auction template
Adding an amendment to an auction
Adding an auction schedule

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 325

Auction Event List page Auctions

Adding an auction information section

Adding line item information to an auction
Adding a bidder to an auction
Adding weighted bidding factors to an auction
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Adding an alternate currency to an auction

326 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Event List page

Editing an auction template

Note: The tabs that appear in an auction template are determined by the template type.
All tabs might not appear in every document.

To edit an auction template:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the Auctions submenu:
■ My Auctions
■ My Running Auctions
■ All Auctions
■ Closed Auctions
You see the Auction Event List page.
2 On the Auction Event List page, select All Auction Templates from the drop-down
list.
3 Click the template to edit.
4 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 On the Header page, edit any fields, and add or remove collaborators and
document links.
6 Click the Schedule tab to edit the schedule.
7 Click the Information tab to edit information sections.
8 Click the Line Items tab to edit line items.
9 Click the Bidders tab to edit bidders.
10 Click the Weights tab to add weighted bidding factors for an auction with weighted
bidding.
11 Click the Accounting tab to edit the accounting information.
12 Click the Exchange Rates tab to edit alternate currencies and exchange rates.
13 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Creating an auction template
Creating an auction from a template
Adding an amendment to an auction
Changing phase end times for an open auction
Adding an auction information section

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 327

Auction Event List page Auctions

Adding a bidder to an auction

Adding weighted bidding factors to an auction
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Field help for Auction Exchange Rates page

328 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Header page

Auction Header page

On the Header page, you can:
` Enter and edit basic and settings information
` Add amendments
` Add and remove collaborators
` Add and remove document links

Field help for the Auction Header page

Many field values on the Header page are preset by the auction type.

Settings

Note: Some fields in this section appear only if enabled in the auction type.

Auction Direction:
` Reverse Auction: The price drops as the auction proceeds. Reverse auctions are
typically used for sourcing events.
` Forward Auction: The price increases as the auction proceeds. Forward auctions
might be used to sell excess inventory or stock, for example.
Bidding Rules:
` Standard bidding: Bidders must beat the leading bid price by the specified
minimum bid improvement and meet or exceed the leading bid quantity.
` Proxy bidding: An automated way to place a bid. Each bidder places one
best-offer bid. The software evaluates all best-offer bids and places incremental
bids on behalf of each bidder. Each bid is reduced by the amount indicated as the
minimum bid improvement. The winning bid must meet the reserve price, if it is set
on the Auction Line Items page.
` Open bidding: Bidders must meet or exceed their own most recent bid in both
quantity and bid price, but do not have to beat the current leading bid.
` Any price bidding: Bidders can place a bid for any value, regardless of the current
winning bid. Thus, bids can go up or down, regardless of whether the auction is
reverse or forward. At the conclusion of the auction, you choose the winning bidder.
Bid History Rules:
` Public: All suppliers can see the full bid history.
` Sealed: Suppliers can see only their own bid. No other bid information is displayed.
Vendor Rank:
` Do not display rank information: Suppliers cannot see any ranking information
for their bids.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 329

Auction Header page Auctions

` Display rank: Suppliers can see the ranking of their bids compared to other bids.
For example, a bidder might be ranked third in the auction.
` Display rank and number of participants: Suppliers can see the ranking of their
bids compared to other bids and can see the number of bidders in the auction. For
example, a bidder might be ranked third out of 11 bidders.
Additional Bid Information:
` Anonymous bidders: Suppliers see aliases rather than the company names of
other bidders.
` Leading bid: Suppliers can see the leading auction bid.

Amendments
You use this section to add a text amendment to change or add information to an
auction in progress. For details, see Adding an amendment to an auction.

Collaborators
You use this section to add and remove collaborators. You can edit the collaborator list
during any phase of the auction, including Closed. To edit collaborators during the
Pre-bid, Preview, or Open phase, you must first suspend auction bidding.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding an amendment to an auction
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Suspending auction bidding activity
Editing collaborators in an open auction
Editing collaborators in a closed auction

330 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Header page

Adding an amendment to an auction

You add a text amendment to an open auction to change or add information.

To add an amendment:
1 Suspend bidding activity by suspending all bidders. For details, see Suspending
auction bidding activity.
2 Click the Header tab.
3 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 On the Header page under Amendments, click Add.
5 Enter the text of the amendment in the text field.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
7 Unsuspend bidding activity by unsuspending all bidders. For details, see
Unsuspending auction bidding activity.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding an amendment to an auction
Suspending auction bidding activity
Unsuspending auction bidding activity

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 331

Auction Header page Auctions

Editing collaborators in an open auction

You add or delete collaborators in any phase (including Closed). To edit the collaborator
list for an auction in the Preview, Pre-bid, or Open phase, you must first suspend
auction bidding.

To edit collaborators in an open auction:

1 Suspend bidding activity by suspending all bidders. For details, see Suspending
auction bidding activity.
2 Click the Header tab.
3 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 On the Header page under Collaborators, edit the collaborator list as needed. For
details, see Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
6 Unsuspend bidding activity by unsuspending all bidders. For details, see
Unsuspending auction bidding activity.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Suspending auction bidding activity
Unsuspending auction bidding activity
Editing collaborators in a closed auction

332 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Header page

Editing collaborators in a closed auction

You add or delete collaborators in any phase, including Closed. The collaborator list is
the only auction element that is editable in the Closed phase.

To edit collaborators in a closed auction:

1 On the Header tab, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
2 Under Collaborators, edit the collaborator list as needed. For details, see Adding a
collaborator to a sourcing document.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Suspending auction bidding activity
Unsuspending auction bidding activity
Editing collaborators in an open auction

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 333

Auction Exchange Rates page Auctions

Auction Exchange Rates page

Exchange rates are used in the auction to compare bids if suppliers use alternate
currencies.
The Exchange Rates page appears only if enabled in the auction type.

On the Exchange Rates page, you can:

` Select an alternate currency for any bidder who does not use the default currency
specified on the Header page, specify the exchange rates to use, and specify
synchronization options.

Field help for Auction Exchange Rates page

The Exchange Rates page appears only if enabled in the document type.

From Rate: Enter the rate used to convert from the default currency to the alternate
currency. This rate might be one you obtained from an outside system.
For example, if USD is the default currency and EUR is the alternate currency, and 1
USD = .877 EUR, enter .877 in the From Rate field.
To Rate: Enter the rate used to convert to the default currency from the alternate
currency.
For example, if USD is the default currency and EUR is the alternate currency, and 1
EUR = 1.14 USD, enter 1.14 as the To Rate.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding an alternate currency to an auction

334 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Exchange Rates page

Adding an alternate currency to an auction

You should add an alternate currency for any bidder who does not use the default
currency specified on the Header page.
The Exchange Rates page appears only if enabled in the auction type.

To add an alternate currency:

1 On the Exchange Rates page, click Add Currency.
2 In the dialog box, select the currency or currencies to add.
3 Click OK.
4 Specify the exchange rates to use for the currency or use the system-defined rate,
which is determined by a system administrator. The system-defined rate is used by
default.
5 Fill in fields indicating whether to synchronize the exchange rates when the auction
opens for bidding. For details, see Field help for Auction Exchange Rates page.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Field help for Auction Exchange Rates page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 335

Auction Schedule page Auctions

Auction Schedule page

On the Schedule page, you can:
` Enter and edit schedule information for the auction, including the start and end
time, optional early close information, and pending close information
` Change the close time for an open auction

Field help for the Auction Schedule page

The following provides help for the fields on the Schedule page.

Dates and Times

Note: Some fields in this section appear only if enabled in the auction type.

Publish to Vendor: Check the box to publish the auction to the Workbench of all
approved suppliers. Clear the box to hold a private auction for invited suppliers only.
Date to Publish/Invite: Select the date to send invitations to bidders and to publish
the auction to the Workbench of all approved suppliers, if the auction is public. If you
select today’s date, the auction will be published and suppliers will be invited
immediately after you save the auction.
Preview Start: Type the time and date that suppliers can view the auction before it
opens for bidding. Suppliers cannot place bids until the time specified in either the
Pre-bid Start or the Bidding Open field.
Preview Duration: Type the duration of the preview phase. If enabled, this field
determines the Pre-bid Start time and, along with the Pre-bid Duration field,
determines the Bidding Open time. This field is used only in auctions with
system-calculated dates and times.
If the auction is suspended during the preview phase, the suspension time will be
added to the Preview Duration when the auction is unsuspended. When unsuspending
an auction, you can also specify additional time for the preview phase. Any such
additional time is also added to the Preview Duration.
Pre-bid Start: Type the time and date that suppliers can enter pre-bids before the
auction opens for bidding. A pre-bid is used as the supplier’s first bid. In the case of a
tie between two pre-bids, the earlier pre-bid is designated as the leading bid when the
auction opens.
Pre-bid Duration: Type the duration of the pre-bid phase. If enabled, this field, along
with the Preview Duration field, determines the Bidding Open time. This field is used
only in auctions with system-calculated dates and times.
If the auction is suspended during the pre-bid phase, the suspension time will be added
to the Pre-Bid Duration when the auction is unsuspended. When unsuspending an
auction, you can also specify additional time for the pre-bid phase. Any such additional
time is also added to the Pre-Bid Duration.

336 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Schedule page

Bidding Open: Type the time and date that the auction will open for bidding. This may
be automatically determined by the values in the Pre-bid and Preview Duration fields.
Line Item Minimum Bid Duration: Type the minimum amount of time that each line
item will be open for bidding. This specifies the earliest time the auction can close and
will set the time in the Earliest Line Item Close field.
If an auction is suspended and then unsuspended, the amount of time that the auction
was suspended will be added to the Line Item Minimum Bid Duration. When
unsuspending, you can specify that additional time be added. This additional time is
factored into the Line Item Minimum Bid Duration.
If early close is enabled, any time automatically added to the bidding time is not added
to the Line Item Minimum Bid Duration. (This automatically added time is reflected in
the Earliest Close Date).
Earliest Line Item Close: Indicates the next time that a line item will enter the Close
Pending phase (if enabled) or the Closed state.
Auction Bid Duration: Type the length of time that the auction will be open for
bidding. This determines the time in the Bidding Close field. Once this is reached, the
auction will close.
This field is used only in auctions with early close enabled. When this type of auction is
being defined, the Auction Bid Duration represents the total amount of time that the
auction can be open for bidding. (However, inactivity in the auction may cause bidding
to end before this time. See the field definitions for Early Close, Inactivity Window and
Overtime Duration for more information.)
The final end date is calculated by adding the Auction Bid Duration to the Bidding Open
date.
When an auction is suspended and then unsuspended, the amount of time that it was
suspended is automatically added to the Auction Bid Duration. When unsuspending an
auction, you can specify that additional time be added. This additional time is factored
into the Auction Bid Duration.
When an auction with a Close Pending phase is reopened, you can specify the amount
of additional bidding time to add to the auction. This amount of time, plus the amount
of time that the auction was in Close Pending, is then automatically added to the
Auction Bid Duration.
Bidding Close: Indicates the date and time that the auction will close for bidding (or
enter the Close Pending phase, if that phase is enabled).
When an auction is suspended and then unsuspended, or an auction with Close Pending
is reopened, the Bidding Close date will be updated based on the recalculation of either
the Line Item Minimum Duration or the Auction Bid Duration.
Pending Duration: Type the duration of the Close Pending phase, if this is enabled for
the auction. The Close Pending phase allows you to reopen a staggered line item after it
closes, or reopen an entire auction after it closes.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 337

Auction Schedule page Auctions

The Close Pending phase is an optional auction phase. If an auction is configured with
this phase, when the open bidding phase has ended, the auction will enter the Close
Pending phase rather than the Closed state. The auction will remain in the Close
Pending phase until you reopen the auction or the Pending Duration elapses. If the
Pending Duration elapses, the auction will close.
When you reopen an auction, the system will prompt you for the amount of time to add
to the Open Bidding phase. The Bidding Close date and the permanent end date will
then be adjusted by the specified time plus the amount of time that the auction has
been in the Close Pending phase. The auction will then return to the Open Bidding
phase.
At the new Open Bidding phase end time, the auction will enter the Close Pending state
again and the process outlined above will be repeated. There is no limit to the number
of times the auction can be reopened.
Final Close: Indicates the time the auction will close after the Close Pending phase.
The Final Close time is calculated by adding the Pending Duration value to the
scheduled Bidding Close time. The auction cannot be reopened after the Final Close
time is reached.
For auctions without a Close Pending phase, the Final Close time is the same as the
Bidding Close time.

Staggered Line Items

Note: The fields in this section only appear if enabled in the auction type.

Offset Type: Select whether to stagger line item start times, end times, or both start
and end times. If you stagger start times, each line item opens for bidding later than
the previous one. If you stagger end times, each line item closes for bidding later than
the previous one.
Offset Time: Select the interval by which to stagger the line items. For example, if the
offset time is 15 minutes, each line item opens and/or closes for bidding 15 minutes
later than the previous one. The offset time must be applicable to all line items without
exceeding the Auction Bid Duration value. If the offset time does exceed the Auction
Bid Duration value, an error message will be displayed.

Early Close

Note: The fields in this section only appear if enabled in the auction type.

An auction can be configured to close early if there is no activity. This is called early
close. You use the following two fields to configure early close.

Inactivity Window (minutes): Type the interval preceding the Earliest Line Item
Close time during which, if a bid is entered, the close time will be overridden. The
length of the added time is determined by the Overtime Duration field.

338 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Schedule page

If no bid is received during the inactivity window, the line item will close at the specified
Earliest Line Item Close time.
Overtime Duration (minutes): Type the length of time to add to a line item’s bidding
time if bids are received during the inactivity window. For example, the inactivity
window might be 15 minutes and the overtime duration 30 minutes. In this case, if a
bid is received in the final 15 minutes before the Earliest Line Item Close time, 30
minutes will be added to that time.
If the auction has staggered line items, when a line item's close time is changed, the
end time for all unopened, opened and close pending line items is also changed.
Bidding within the inactivity window will continue the bidding until the end time for the
last line item to close reaches the Bidding Close date.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding an auction schedule
Changing phase end times for an open auction
Changing phase end times for an open auction

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 339

Auction Schedule page Auctions

Adding an auction schedule

1 On the Schedule page, fill in the fields under Dates and Times with auction start
and end information.
2 Fill in the fields under Early Close. This section appears only if enabled by the
auction type.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

For more information, see Field help for the Auction Schedule page.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Changing phase end times for an open auction
Changing phase end times for an open auction

340 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Schedule page

Changing phase end times for an open auction

You can change the end time for the Preview, Pre-Bid, and/or Open phase in an auction
that has opened, as long as that end time has not yet been reached. When you change
a phase end time for an open auction, you can only change it to a later time, not to an
earlier time.

Note: To close an auction immediately, see Closing an auction manually.

To change an auction phase end time:

1 On the Bidders page, suspend bidding activity by suspending all bidders. For
details, see Suspending auction bidding activity.
2 Click the Schedule tab.
3 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 Fill in the fields with the new time information.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
6 Unsuspend bidding activity by unsuspending all bidders. For details, see
Unsuspending auction bidding activity.
All qualified bidders are notified of this change through a Workbench alert and an
email message.

Note: You are automatically given the opportunity to change the auction closing time
when you unsuspend a bidder.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding an auction schedule
Changing phase end times for an open auction
Suspending auction bidding activity
Unsuspending auction bidding activity

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 341

Auction Information page Auctions

Auction Information page

Information sections typically provide boilerplate information about your company and
the auction. For example, you might include information sections for nondisclosure
agreements, warranties, your company’s procurement practices, instructions for the
auction, and so forth.

On the Information page, you can:

` Add and edit an information section, such as policies, instructions, and legal
information
` Import an information section from a library
` Delete information sections
` Reorder information sections

Field help for Auction Information page

Add: Click to add an information section. On the Info Section page, fill in the Title
field, enter or paste the information in the text box, and click the Save button in the
toolbar.
Import from Library: Click to import a standard information section from a library.
Delete Selected: Select one or more information sections and click this button to
delete them. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Reorder: Click to reorder the list of information sections.

Related Topics
Adding an auction information section
Creating an auction
Importing a library component
Reordering items in a list

342 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Information page

Adding an auction information section

Information sections typically provide boilerplate information about your company and
the auction. For example, you might include information sections for nondisclosure
agreements, warranties, your company’s procurement practices, instructions for the
auction, and so forth.

To add an information section:

1 On the Information page, click Add.
2 On the Info Section page, enter a title and add content to the information section.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
4 On the Information page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can edit an information section by clicking its Edit icon on the Information
page.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Importing a library component
Reordering items in a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 343

Auction Line Items page Auctions

Auction Line Items page

The Line Items page displays the line items for suppliers to bid on. Line items can be
added individually or as part of a package.
On the Line Items page, you can select a view for line items. In each line item view,
you can perform one or more tasks. For details, see Specifying an auction line item
view.

Field help for Auction Line Items page

Delivery Terms: Select a delivery term from the drop-down list. This is a required
field.
Options: Optionally, check one or more of the following.
` Allow partial quantity bidding: Check this box to allow suppliers to bid on partial
quantities of a line item unit.
` Enable start price: Check this box to set a price at which bidding will start for the
line item.
` Enable reserve price: Check this box to set a reserve price that bidding must
meet or exceed to award the line item.

Line Items
` Click Add to add a line item. For details, see Adding a single line item to an
auction and Adding a packaged line item to an auction.
` Click Add Materials to add one or more direct materials to the auction. For details,
see Adding a material to an auction.
` Select one or more line items and materials and click Delete Selected to remove
them from the auction.
` Click Import to import line items. For details, see Importing line items and
specifications from a CSV file.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Specifying an auction line item view
Adding line item information to an auction
Adding a single line item to an auction
Adding a packaged line item to an auction
Adding a material to an auction
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

344 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Line Items page

Specifying an auction line item view

On the Line Items page, you can select a view for line items. In each line item view,
you can perform one or more tasks.

In the Basic view, you can:

` Add and edit general line item information
` Add and edit single line items
` Add and edit packaged line items
` Add and edit materials
` Import line items

In the Price view, you can:

` View line item price information
` Import line items

In the Miscellaneous view, you can:

` View miscellaneous line item information
` Import line items

To specify a line item view:

` On the Line Items page, select a view from the drop-down list.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding line item information to an auction
Adding a single line item to an auction
Adding a packaged line item to an auction
Adding a material to an auction
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 345

Auction Line Items page Auctions

Adding line item information to an auction

1 In the Basic view for the Line Items page, fill in the fields with general line item
information.
2 Add line items to the auction.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Specifying an auction line item view
Adding a single line item to an auction
Adding a packaged line item to an auction
Adding a material to an auction
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

346 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Line Items page

Adding a single line item to an auction

1 In the Basic view for the Line Items page, under Line Items, select how to view the
line items from the drop-down lists.
2 Select Single Line Item from the drop-down list.
3 Click Add.

4 Fill in the fields in the new line in the Line Items table or click the Edit icon to
fill in the fields on the Summary page. For details, see Field help for Single Line
Item Summary page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
6 On the Line Items page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Specifying an auction line item view
Adding line item information to an auction
Adding a packaged line item to an auction
Adding a material to an auction
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 347

Auction Line Items page Auctions

Editing a single line item in an auction

You can only edit line items before the auction starts. After the auction opens for
bidding, most line item information is not editable. For details about fields that can be
edited, see Editing an open auction.

To edit a line item:

1 In the Basic view for the Line Items page, click the Edit icon for the line item
to edit.
2 On the Summary page, edit any fields. For details, see Field help for Single Line
Item Summary page.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
4 On the Line Items page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Specifying an auction line item view
Adding a single line item to an auction
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

348 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Line Items page

Auction Single Line Item Summary page

On the Summary page, you can:
` Enter and edit general, quantity and pricing information for a line item, attach a
picture of the line item, and enter comments for collaborators.

Field help for Single Line Item Summary page

General

Status: Indicates the line item status. This field is read only.
Part Number: Type the part number for the line item.
Name & Description: Type a name and short description for the line item. This is a
required field.
Long Description: Type a long description for the line item. This field supports rich
text and preserves formatting in text copied from another source.
Line Item Type: Indicates that this is a single line item.

Internal Category: Click the Lookup icon to choose an internal category for the
line item.

External Category: Click the Lookup icon to choose an external category for the
line item.

Plant: Click the Lookup icon to choose a plant for the line item.

Quantity

Quantity: Type a quantity for the line item and select a unit of measure from the
drop-down list.

Pricing

Unit Start Price: Type the line item unit price at which the bidding will start. This field
appears if the Enable start price box is checked on the Auction Line Items page.
Unit Reserve Price: Type the unit price the bidding must reach for this line item to be
awarded. This field appears if the Enable reserve price box is checked on the
Auction Line Items page.
Unit Current Price: Type the price of this line item unit based on current contract or
market pricing.
Unit Target Price: Type the goal price for the line item unit that you hope to attain
through this auction.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 349

Auction Line Items page Auctions

Unit Bid Improvement:

Min: Type the minimum increment by which a bid must improve the previous bid in
order to be valid. For all auctions except those with weighted bidding, you can express
the bid improvement as a percentage or in terms of the default auction currency. For
weighted bidding auctions, this value must be expressed as a price.
The minimum bid improvement is used to calculate the next valid bid in an auction.
Max: Type the maximum increment by which a bid can improve the previous bid in
order to be valid. This enables you to prevent accidental overbids by the supplier. For
all auctions except those with weighted bidding, you can express the bid improvement
as a percentage or in terms of the default auction currency. For weighted bidding
auctions, this value must be expressed as a price.
If a supplier submits a bid that exceeds the maximum bid improvement, an error
message is displayed.

Image: Click the Lookup icon to choose an image for the line item.
Comment for Collaborators: Type any comments to share with auction collaborators.
Line Item Specification: For each specification in the table, enter a value
corresponding to this line item. If you do not enter a new value, the default value
entered in the Auction Setup: Item Specification dialog box will be used. For
details, see Adding an auction line item specification.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding line item information to an auction
Adding a single line item to an auction

350 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Line Items page

Adding a packaged line item to an auction

A packaged line item is a set of line items that suppliers bid on as a unit. The packaged
line item is made up of sub line items. A supplier designates a bid for each of the sub
line items; the sum of these bids makes up the total bid for the packaged line item.

To add a packaged line item:

1 In the Basic view for the Line Items page, under Line Items, select how to view the
line items from the drop-down lists.
2 Select Packaged Line Item from the drop-down list.
3 Click Add.

4 Fill in the fields in the new line in the Line Items table or click the Edit icon to
fill in the fields on the Summary page. For details, see Field help for Packaged
Line Item Summary page.
5 Add sub line items. For details, see Adding a sub line item to an packaged line
item in an auction.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
7 On the Line Items page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Specifying an auction line item view
Adding line item information to an auction
Adding a single line item to an auction
Adding a sub line item to an packaged line item in an auction
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 351

Auction Line Items page Auctions

Editing a packaged line item in an auction

A packaged line item is a set of line items that suppliers bid on as a unit. The packaged
line item is made up of sub line items. A supplier designates a bid for each of the sub
line items; the sum of these bids makes up the total bid for the packaged line item.
You can only edit line items before the auction starts. After the auction opens for
bidding, most line item information is not editable. For details, see Editing an open
auction.

To edit a packaged line item:

1 In the Basic view for the Line Items page, click the Edit icon for the line item
to edit.
2 On the Summary page, edit any fields. For details, see Field help for Packaged
Line Item Summary page.
3 Edit sub line items.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
5 On the Line Items page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Specifying an auction line item view
Adding line item information to an auction
Adding a single line item to an auction
Adding a packaged line item to an auction
Adding a sub line item to an packaged line item in an auction
Editing a sub line item in a packaged line item in an auction
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

352 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Line Items page

Auction Packaged Line Item Summary page

A packaged line item is a set of line items that suppliers bid on as a unit. The packaged
line item is made up of sub line items. A supplier designates a bid for each of the sub
line items; the sum of these bids makes up the total bid for the packaged line item.

On the Summary page, you can:

` Enter and edit general and pricing information for a packaged line item, attach a
picture of the packaged line item, and enter comments for collaborators
` Add and edit sub line items

Field help for Packaged Line Item Summary page

General

Status: Indicates the line item status. This field is read only.
Name & Description: Type a name and short description for the line item. This is a
required field.
Long Description: Type a long description for the line item. This field supports rich
text and preserves formatting in text copied from another source.
Line Item Type: Indicates that this is a packaged line item.

Pricing

Start Price: Type the line item price at which the bidding will start.
Current Price: Type the price of this line item based on current contract or market
pricing.
Target Price: Type the goal price for the line item that you hope to attain through this
auction.
Bid Improvement:
Min: Type the minimum increment by which a bid must improve the previous bid in
order to be valid. For all auctions except those with weighted bidding, you can express
the bid improvement as a percentage or in terms of the default auction currency. For
weighted bidding auctions, this value must be expressed as a price.
The minimum bid improvement is used to calculate the next valid bid in an auction.
Max: Type the maximum increment by which a bid can improve the previous bid in
order to be valid. This enables you to prevent accidental overbids by the supplier. For
all auctions except those with weighted bidding, you can express the bid improvement
as a percentage or in terms of the default auction currency. For weighted bidding
auctions, this value must be expressed as a price.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 353

Auction Line Items page Auctions

If a supplier submits a bid that exceeds the maximum bid improvement, an error
message is displayed.

Sub Line Items

Click the Add button to add sub line items. For details, see Adding a sub line item to
an packaged line item in an auction.

Image: Click the Lookup icon to choose an image for the line item.
Comment for Collaborators: Type any comments to share with auction collaborators.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding line item information to an auction
Adding a packaged line item to an auction
Adding a sub line item to an packaged line item in an auction
Editing a sub line item in a packaged line item in an auction

354 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Line Items page

Adding a sub line item to an packaged line item in an auction

A packaged line item is a set of line items that suppliers bid on as a unit. The packaged
line item is made up of sub line items. A supplier designates a bid for each of the sub
line items; the sum of these bids makes up the total bid for the packaged line item.
You can only add single line items as sub line items.

To add a sub line item:

1 On the Packaged Line Item Summary page, click Add.
2 On the Single Line Item Summary page, enter summary information for the sub
line item. For details, see Field help for Single Line Item Summary page.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
4 On the Packaged Line Item Summary page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding a packaged line item to an auction
Editing a sub line item in a packaged line item in an auction

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 355

Auction Line Items page Auctions

Editing a sub line item in a packaged line item in an auction

A packaged line item is a set of line items that suppliers bid on as a unit. The packaged
line item is made up of sub line items. A supplier designates a bid for each of the sub
line items; the sum of these bids makes up the total bid for the packaged line item.
You can only edit line items before the auction starts. After the auction opens for
bidding, line item information is not editable. To communicate any changes to bidders
during the auction, add an amendment.

To edit a sub line item:

1 On the Packaged Line Item Summary page, click the Edit icon for the sub line
item to edit.
2 On the Single Line Item Summary page, edit any fields. For details, see Field help
for Single Line Item Summary page.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
4 On the Packaged Line Item Summary page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding a packaged line item to an auction
Adding a sub line item to an packaged line item in an auction

356 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Line Items page

Adding a material to an auction

On the Line Items page, you can add both line items and materials to an auction. In
Frictionless SRM, line items are supplies that are not directly related to the production
of finished products, such as office supplies, machine parts, etc. Materials are direct
materials that are part of a final product. Materials are created in Setup and can be
imported into an RFx, auction, or master agreement.

To add a material to an auction:

1 On the Line Items page, click Add Materials.
2 In the Lookup dialog box, select one or more materials.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding a single line item to an auction
Adding a packaged line item to an auction
Editing a material in an auction
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 357

Auction Line Items page Auctions

Editing a material in an auction

On the Line Items page, you can add both line items and materials to an auction. In
Frictionless SRM, line items are supplies that are not directly related to the production
of finished products, such as office supplies, machine parts, etc. Materials are direct
materials that are part of a final product. Materials are created in Setup and can be
imported into an RFx, auction, or master agreement.

To edit a material for an auction:

1 On the Line Items page, click the Edit icon for the material to edit.
2 On the Line Item page, edit any fields. For details, see Field help for Single Line
Item Summary page.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding a single line item to an auction
Adding a packaged line item to an auction
Adding a material to an auction
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

358 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Line Items page

Editing a line item start price in the Preview phase

You can edit a line item start price while the auction is in the Preview phase.

To edit a line item start price:

1 On the Line Items page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.

2 Click the Edit icon for the line item to edit.

3 On the Summary page, edit the Start Price or Unit Start Price as needed.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
5 On the Line Items page, click the Save button in the toolbar.
All qualified bidders are notified of this change through a Workbench alert and an
email message.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Specifying an auction line item view
Adding line item information to an auction
Adding a single line item to an auction
Adding a packaged line item to an auction
Adding a sub line item to an packaged line item in an auction
Editing a sub line item in a packaged line item in an auction
Formatting line items for import from a CSV file
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 359

Auction Line Items page Auctions

Editing the minimum or maximum bid improvement in an open

auction
You can edit the minimum and maximum bid improvement values in the Preview,
Pre-bid, or Open phase of an auction. To edit these values, you must first suspend
bidding activity.

To edit the minimum or maximum bid improvement:

1 On the Bidders page, suspend bidding activity by suspending all bidders. For
details, see Suspending auction bidding activity.
2 On the Line Items page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.

3 Click the Edit icon for the line item to edit.

4 Under Bid Improvement or Unit Bid Improvement, edit fields as needed. For details,
see Field help for Auction Line Items page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
6 Unsuspend bidding activity by unsuspending all bidders, including the newly added
ones. For details, see Unsuspending auction bidding activity.
Bidders are notified by email about any change to the minimum bid improvement.
They are not notified about changes to the maximum bid improvement, but will see
an error message if they place bids that exceed its new value.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Specifying an auction line item view
Adding line item information to an auction
Adding a single line item to an auction
Adding a packaged line item to an auction
Adding a sub line item to an packaged line item in an auction
Editing a sub line item in a packaged line item in an auction

360 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Bidders page

Auction Bidders page

Auction bidders are the suppliers who participate in the auction.
When you add bidders to an auction, you invite the companies of those contacts to
participate in the auction. Uninvited suppliers can request to be included in the auction,
if you check the box for Publish Notice to All Vendors on the Schedule page.

Note: You use the Workbench To Do List channel to accept or deny supplier requests
to participate in an open auction.

On the Bidders page, you can:

` Add auction bidders
` Suspend and unsuspend bidders
` Disqualify and qualify bidders
` Suspend and unsuspend bidding activity
` Add auction terms

Field help for Auction Bidders page

Access Type: This field indicates whether the auction is company-wide or

contact-specific. A company-wide auction is open to all contacts at a supplier company.
A contact-specific auction limits auction visibility and bidding to selected contacts within
a supplier company.
This field is read-only. The access type is determined by the auction type document.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding a bidder to an auction
Suspending an auction bidder
Unsuspending an auction bidder
Disqualifying an auction bidder
Qualifying an auction bidder
Suspending auction bidding activity
Unsuspending auction bidding activity
Adding terms to an auction
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an auction

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 361

Auction Bidders page Auctions

Adding a bidder to an auction

You can add bidders to either a public auction or a private auction. However, if the
auction is private, you must add bidders, since private auctions are only visible to
invited bidders.
When you add bidders to an auction, they receive invitations to participate. Invitations
are sent on the date you select on the Schedule page. If the auction starts on the same
date that you create it, invitations are sent immediately after you add and save
bidders.
In a public auction, bidders are added to this page automatically when they place their
first bid.
You can add bidders to an open auction, but you must first suspend bidding activity. For
details, see Adding a bidder to an open auction.

To add a bidder:
1 On the Bidders page under Bidders, click Add Contact.
2 Select one or more contacts in the dialog box and click OK.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Suspending an auction bidder
Unsuspending an auction bidder
Disqualifying an auction bidder
Qualifying an auction bidder
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an auction

362 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Bidders page

Adding a bidder to an open auction

You can add bidders to an open auction after suspending bidding activity. Bidders will
be added to the auction as Suspended. To resume auction activity and activate the new
bidders, unsuspend all bidders.

To add a bidder to an open auction:

1 On the Bidders page, suspend bidding activity by suspending all bidders. For
details, see Suspending auction bidding activity.
2 On the Bidders page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
3 Under Bidders, click Add Contact.
4 Select one or more contacts in the dialog box and click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
6 Unsuspend bidding activity by unsuspending all bidders, including the newly added
ones. For details, see Unsuspending auction bidding activity.
Email notifications are sent to the new bidders.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Suspending an auction bidder
Unsuspending an auction bidder
Disqualifying an auction bidder
Qualifying an auction bidder
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an auction

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 363

Auction Bidders page Auctions

Suspending an auction bidder

You can suspend a bidder during an open auction. A suspended bidder can no longer
place bids, but the bidder’s previous bids remain in the auction.

To suspend a bidder:
1 On the Bidders page, select the bidder or bidders to suspend and click Suspend
Bidder.
2 In the Confirm Suspend Bidders dialog box, optionally enter comments to be
emailed to the suspended bidders.
3 Click Finish.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding a bidder to an auction
Unsuspending an auction bidder
Disqualifying an auction bidder
Qualifying an auction bidder
Suspending auction bidding activity
Unsuspending auction bidding activity
Adding terms to an auction
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an auction

364 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Bidders page

Unsuspending an auction bidder

You can unsuspend a suspended bidder during an open auction. The bidder can then
resume placing bids.

To unsuspend a bidder:
1 On the Bidders page, select the bidder or bidders to unsuspend and click
Unsuspend Bidder.
2 In the Confirm Unsuspend Bidders dialog box, optionally enter comments to be
emailed to the suspended bidders.
3 Under Extend Duration, select whether to change the auction close time and specify
the amount of time to add.
4 Click Finish.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding a bidder to an auction
Suspending an auction bidder
Disqualifying an auction bidder
Qualifying an auction bidder
Suspending auction bidding activity
Unsuspending auction bidding activity
Adding terms to an auction
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an auction

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 365

Auction Bidders page Auctions

Disqualifying an auction bidder

You can disqualify a bidder during an open auction. When you disqualify a bidder, the
bids made by the bidder are removed and the auction proceeds with the remaining
bidders and bids.

To disqualify a bidder:
1 On the Bidders page, suspend bidding activity by suspending all bidders.
2 Select the bidder or bidders to disqualify and click Disqualify Bidder.
3 In the Confirm Disqualify Bidders dialog box, optionally enter comments to be
emailed to the disqualified bidders.
4 Click Finish.
5 Unsuspend bidding activity by unsuspending bidders.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding a bidder to an auction
Suspending an auction bidder
Unsuspending an auction bidder
Qualifying an auction bidder
Suspending auction bidding activity
Unsuspending auction bidding activity
Adding terms to an auction
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an auction

366 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Bidders page

Qualifying an auction bidder

You can qualify a disqualified bidder during an open auction. A qualified bidder can
resume placing bids, but the bidder’s previous bids are not restored.

To qualify a bidder:
1 On the Bidders page, suspend bidding activity by suspending all bidders.
2 Select the bidder or bidders to qualify and click Qualify Bidder.
3 In the Confirm Qualify Bidders dialog box, optionally enter comments to be emailed
to the qualified bidders.
4 Under Extend Duration, select whether to change the auction close time and specify
the amount of time to add.
5 Click Finish.
6 Unsuspend bidding activity by unsuspending bidders.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding a bidder to an auction
Suspending an auction bidder
Unsuspending an auction bidder
Disqualifying an auction bidder
Suspending auction bidding activity
Unsuspending auction bidding activity
Adding terms to an auction
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an auction

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 367

Auction Bidders page Auctions

Suspending auction bidding activity

Suspending bidding activity is a way to temporarily stop the activity of the auction. No
bids can be placed while the bidding activity is suspended.
While the auction is suspended, you can make a number of edits to the auction. For
details, see Editing an open auction.

To suspend bidding activity:

` On the Bidders page, suspend all auction bidders. For details, see Suspending an
auction bidder.

Note: When suspending bidding activity, you should enter comments in the Confirm
Suspend Bidders dialog box indicating that bidding activity is being suspended. These
comments are emailed to the auction bidders.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Editing an open auction
Adding a bidder to an auction
Suspending an auction bidder
Unsuspending an auction bidder
Disqualifying an auction bidder
Qualifying an auction bidder
Unsuspending auction bidding activity
Adding terms to an auction
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an auction
Adding an amendment to an auction
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Changing phase end times for an open auction
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Adding an alternate currency to an auction

368 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Bidders page

Unsuspending auction bidding activity

You can suspend bidding activity to make a number of changes to an auction. When
you finish making changes to the auction, you must unsuspend bidding activity for the
bidding to continue.

To unsuspend bidding activity:

` On the Bidders page, unsuspend all auction bidders. For details, see
Unsuspending an auction bidder.
Note: When unsuspending bidding activity, you should enter comments in the
Confirm Unsuspend Bidders dialog box indicating that bidding activity is being
unsuspended. These comments are emailed to the auction bidders.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding a bidder to an auction
Suspending an auction bidder
Unsuspending an auction bidder
Disqualifying an auction bidder
Qualifying an auction bidder
Suspending auction bidding activity
Adding terms to an auction
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an auction

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 369

Auction Bidders page Auctions

Adding terms to an auction

Terms describe the conditions to which a supplier must agree in order to participate in
the auction. You can create a set of terms or add one from a template in the Terms
library.

To add terms:
1 On the Bidders page under Terms, click Add.

2 Optionally, add a terms template by clicking the Lookup icon .

3 Fill in the fields for term information, including the text of the term.
4 Click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding a bidder to an auction
Suspending an auction bidder
Unsuspending an auction bidder
Disqualifying an auction bidder
Qualifying an auction bidder
Suspending auction bidding activity
Unsuspending auction bidding activity
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an auction

370 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Bidders page

Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an

auction
Uninvited suppliers can request to be included in the auction, if you check the box for
Publish Notice to All Vendors on the Schedule page. After a supplier submits a
request, you see it in the To Do List channel on the Workbench.

To accept or deny a supplier’s invitation request:

1 In the To Do List channel on the Workbench, click the link for Vendor Invite
Requests. You see a list of supplier requests.
2 Click the supplier request to consider. On the Summary page, you see fields you
can view but not edit. These fields show event, supplier, and approval information.
3 On the toolbar, do one of the following:
■ Click the Approve button.
■ Click the Deny button.
Under Approval Information, you see the new status for the request. The supplier
sees the status of the request in the Upcoming Events channel on the Supplier
Workbench.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding a bidder to an auction
Suspending an auction bidder
Unsuspending an auction bidder
Disqualifying an auction bidder
Qualifying an auction bidder
Suspending auction bidding activity
Unsuspending auction bidding activity
Adding terms to an auction

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 371

Auction Weights page Auctions

Auction Weights page

On the Weights page, you can add auction weights by supplier and by line item.

About Weighted Bidding

You use the Weights page to set up weighted bidding for an auction. Typical auction
analysis does not provide a full picture of the costs and preferences associated with the
auction. Weighted bidding allows you to level the playing field by taking into account
such factors as service levels, transportation costs, switching costs, import tax, and so
on.
In an auction with weighted bidding, you see both the suppliers’ actual bids and the
weighted bid totals. If the auction type enables the suppliers to see each other’s bids,
each supplier will see the other bids adjusted by their own weighting factors. This
provides an accurate representation of the leading bid to beat.
In an automatically awarded auction, the award will go to the leading weighted bid. If
the auction is used to create an RFx, the actual bid price (not the weighted price) is
used in the RFx. That is, the weighted price is not exchanged between the auction and
the RFx.
The Weights page only appears if weighted bidding is enabled in the auction type. For
details, see Field help for Auction Type page.

Weighted Bidding Formulas

The following formulas are applied on the buy-side to create weights for a supplier and
modify auction bids:

Weighted Unit Price = (100% + m%) (Bid + a) + b

Weighted Total Cost = Weight Unit Price * Bid Quantity + s
` In the (m) Multiplier column, enter a value that should be applied as a percentage
to a particular supplier.
` In the (a) Additive Value 1 column, enter an additive value to which the
multiplier applies.
` In the (b) Additive Value 2 column, enter an additive value to which the
multiplier does not apply.
` In the (s) Setup Cost column, enter any setup cost. Setup costs are applied to the
total cost of the bid, not to the unit price.
For complete details and examples, see Field help for Auction Weights page.

The following formula is applied on the sell-side to modify the auction bids that each
supplier sees:

Adjusted Bid Price/Unit = [ (Weighted Bid - b) / (1 + m) ] - a

372 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Weights page

This formula accurately shows the leading bid that a supplier has to beat, adjusted by
the supplier’s own weights.

Related Topics
Adding weighted bidding factors to an auction
Field help for Auction Weights page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 373

Auction Weights page Auctions

Field help for Auction Weights page

You use the Weights page to set up weighted bidding for an auction. Typical auction
analysis does not provide a full picture of the costs and preferences associated with the
auction. Weighted bidding allows you to level the playing field by taking into account
such factors as service levels, transportation costs, switching costs, import tax, and so
on.
You can enter auction weights by supplier and then apply them to line items. You can
also enter or override individual line item values.

Vendor Weights

In the upper table, enter weights by supplier. Weights are applied using the following
formulas:

Weighted Unit Price = (100% + m%) (Bid + a) + b

Weighted Total Cost = (Weighted Unit Price * Bid Quantity) + s

Note: The examples below apply to a reverse auction.

` (m) Multiplier: Enter a value that should be applied as a percentage to a

particular supplier. For example, for you might enter 20 for a 20% switching cost,
or -3 for a 3% discount. See lines 1 and 4 in the Example table below.
` (a) Additive Value 1: Enter an additive value to which the multiplier applies. For
example, you might enter 2 to indicate a $2 transportation fee to which an import
tax applies. See line 2 in the Example table.
` (b) Additive Value 2: Enter an additive value to which the multiplier does not
apply. For example, you might enter 5 to indicate a $5 delivery fee to which sales
tax does not apply. See line 3 in the Example table.
` (s) Setup Cost: Enter any setup cost. This indicates an incurred cost that does not
vary with volume or quantity and is most applicable to partial quantity auctions.
The setup cost is applied to the total cost of the bid, not to the bid unit price. See
line 5 in the Example table.
The setup cost is shown in the Weighted Bidding by Supplier report. It does not
affect bidding rank or unit price in the auction display.
` Apply Weights to Line Items: Select the suppliers whose weights you want to
apply to line items and click this button. You can also manually enter or override
weights in the Line Item Weights table.

374 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Weights page

Examples

(m) Multiplier (a) Additive Value 1 (b) Additive Value 2 (s) Setup Cost

1 20 0 2 0
2 5 2 0 0
3 8 3 0 5
4 -3 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 30

For a $10 bid, the weights in this table are applied as follows in a reverse auction:
` Line 1: (100% + 20% switching cost) ($10 bid + 0) + $2 transportation fee = $14
unit price
` Line 2: (100% + 5% import tax) ($10 bid + $2 transportation fee) + 0 = $12.60
unit price
` Line 3: (100% + 8% sales tax) ($10 bid + $3 service fee) + $5 delivery fee =
$19.04 unit price
` Line 4: (100% - 3% discount) ($10 bid + $0) + 0 = $9.70 unit price
` Line 5: Assuming a bid quantity of 20 items:
($10 bid * 20) + $30 setup cost = $230.00 for the extended bid price (not the unit
price)

Note: For information about the formula used to display weighted bids on the sell-side,
see Auction Weights page.

Line Item Weights

In the lower table, enter or override values for line item weights. Line item weights are
applied using the same formulas and rules described above.

Related Topics
Auction Weights page
Adding weighted bidding factors to an auction

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 375

Auction Weights page Auctions

Adding weighted bidding factors to an auction

You use the Weights page to set up weighted bidding for an auction. Typical auction
analysis does not provide a full picture of the costs and preferences associated with the
auction. Weighted bidding allows you to level the playing field by taking into account
such factors as service levels, transportation costs, switching costs, import tax, and so
on.
You can enter weight valued by supplier and then apply them to line items. You can
also enter or override individual line item values.

To add auction weighted bidding factors:

1 If the auction is not in Edit mode, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
2 On the Weights page, in the upper table, enter weight values by supplier if you
want to assign the same values to all or most line items for this supplier. Enter
weight values as follows:
■ In the (m) Multiplier column, enter a value that should be applied as a
percentage to a particular supplier.
■ In the (a) Additive Value 1 column, enter an additive value to which the
multiplier applies.
■ In the (b) Additive Value 2 column, enter an additive value to which the
multiplier does not apply.
■ In the (s) Setup Cost column, enter any setup cost. Setup costs are applied to
the total cost of the bid, not to the unit price.
For details and examples, see Field help for Auction Weights page.
3 Apply the supplier weights to line items by selecting the suppliers whose weights to
apply and clicking Apply Weights to Line Items.
4 In the lower table, optionally enter or override weights for individual line items
using the formulas described above.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Auction Weights page
Field help for Auction Weights page

376 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Accounting page

Auction Accounting page

You use the Accounting page to enter and edit accounting information.
The Accounting page appears only if enabled in the auction type.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 377

Auction Bidding page Auctions

Auction Bidding page

The Bidding page is created when the auction opens for bidding.

On the Bidding page, you can:

` View auction status and phase information and time remaining
` Click a line item to review bid history

Field help for Auction Bidding page

Current Phase: Indicates the current auction phase. The phase indicates the type of
activity that can currently be performed in the auction. Phases are determined by the
auction type, and can include the following:
` Preview enables suppliers to view the auction before it opens for bidding.
` Pre-bid enables suppliers to enter pre-bids before the auction opens for bidding.
` Open enables suppliers to submit bids for auction line items.
` Close Pending enables you to reopen an auction for a specified length of time
after bidding closes. This enables suppliers to submit a final, best bid if they were
not able to do so previously.
` Closed indicates that suppliers can no longer bid in the auction.
Approximate Time Remaining: Provides a dynamic countdown clock indicating the
time remaining in the auction.
Next Phase: Indicates the phase that will follow the current auction phase. For
example, this field indicates whether Pre-bid or Open will follow a Preview phase.
Status: Indicates the status of the auction. The status indicates whether any auction
activity can be performed. Statuses include Open, Suspended, and Closed.

Summary Bid History

This table displays a summary of bid history for the line item.

Status: Indicates the status of the line item. Line item statuses include Open, Close
Pending, and Closed.
Name & Description: Indicates the name and description of the line item. Click the
link for a line item to view the Auction Bid History page.
Location: Indicates the location of the line item, if specified.
Quantity Filled: Indicates the line item quantity filled by the bid.
Start Price: Indicates the start price for this line item, if any.

378 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Bidding page

Leading Bid: Indicates the leading bid for this line item. If weighted bidding is
enabled, this value is the leading bid after weighting factors are applied. If a reserve
price is set for the line item, a red star indicates that the reserve price is not met.
Leading Bidder: Indicates the leading bidder for this line item.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Reviewing auction bid history
Disqualifying an auction bid

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 379

Auction Bidding page Auctions

Reviewing auction bid history

1 On the Bidding page, review the information under Summary Bid History.
2 To see detailed bid information for a line item, click the line item. You see the
Auction Bid History page.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Disqualifying an auction bid
Auction Bid History page

380 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Bidding page

Auction Bid History page

On the Bid History page, you can:
` View bidding information such as bidding rules
` View line item information
` View the line item’s bidding history, including the leading bid and bidder ranking
` Delete a bid by disqualifying it

To view the Bid History page, click the link for a line item in the Auction Bidding
page.

Field help for Bid History page

Status: Indicates whether the line item is open for bidding, closed, or close pending.
Bidding Open: Indicates the bidding start time for this line item.
Bidding Close: Indicates the bidding close time for this line item.
Automatic Early Close: Indicates whether the early close feature is enabled for this
line item. The line item will close early if there are no bids for a specified length of time.
Bidding Rules: Indicates the type of bidding used for this auction.
Bid History Rules: Indicates whether the bid history is visible to bidders.
Bid History Shows: Indicates the information displayed in the bid history.

Line Item Information

This table indicates key bidding information about this line item.

Name & Description: Indicates the name and description of the line item.
Location: Indicates the location of the line item, if specified.
Quantity: Indicates the line item quantity.
Start Price: Indicates the start price for this line item, if any.
Leading Bid: Indicates the leading bid for this line item. If weighted bidding is
enabled, this value is the leading bid after weighting factors are applied. If a reserve
price is set for the line item, a red star indicates that the reserve price is not met.
Leading Bidder: Indicates the leading bidder for this line item.

Bid Comment: If a Bid Comment icon appears in this column, move your cursor
over it to read the bid comment in a flyover.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 381

Auction Bidding page Auctions

Bid History

Rank: This column indicates the rank of each bidder.

Bidder: This column indicates each bidder’s name.
Date & Time: This column indicates the date and time of each bidder’s most recent
bid.
Price: This column indicates the amount of each bidder’s most recent bid.
Weighted Price: In an auction with weighted bidding, this column indicates the most
recent bid for each bidder, weighted by that bidder’s weighting factors.
Quantity: This column indicates the line item quantity on which each bidder has bid.
Leading Bid: A check mark indicates the leading bid for this line item.

Related Topics
Auction Bidding page
Reviewing auction bid history

382 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Bidding page

Disqualifying an auction bid

When you disqualify a bid, the bid is removed from the auction, along with all prior bids
placed by the associated bidder. All bids placed after the disqualified bid are also
removed.

To disqualify a bid:
1 On the Bidders page, suspend bidding activity by suspending all bidders.
2 On the Bid History page, select the bid or bids to disqualify and click Disqualify
Bid.
3 Follow the prompts to disqualify the bid.
4 Unsuspend bidding activity by unsuspending bidders.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Suspending auction bidding activity
Unsuspending auction bidding activity
Reviewing auction bid history

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 383

Auction Awards page Auctions

Auction Awards page

The Awards page is created when the auction closes for bidding. The Awards page
appears only if enabled in the auction type.
On the Awards page, you can manually award line items to suppliers.

Note: You can only award line items manually if this action is enabled by the auction
type. If automatic awarding is enabled, awards will be made and announced
automatically at the end of the auction, based on the winning bids.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Awarding auction line items manually

384 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction Awards page

Awarding auction line items manually

Manual line item awards give you full control over the auction award process. When you
award line items manually, you can award a line item to a single supplier or award
partial quantities of a line item to multiple suppliers.

Note: You can only award line items manually if this action is enabled by the auction
type. If automatic awarding is enabled, awards will be made and announced
automatically at the end of the auction, based on the winning bids.

To award line items manually:

1 On the Awards page under Award Summary, click Add.

2 In the New Award dialog box, click the Edit icon for the line item to award.
3 In the New Line Item Award dialog box, enter the number of units to award to each
supplier in the Award Quantity column.
4 Click Calculate Totals to calculate the number of units awarded and the
percentage awarded to each supplier.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
6 Repeat steps 2 - 5 for each line item to award.
7 In the New Award dialog box, click the Save button in the toolbar.
8 On the Awards page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an auction

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 385

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Auction toolbar functions

Using the Auction toolbar, you can do any of the following:
` Click the Document button to:
■ Duplicate an auction
■ Save the auction as a template
■ Cancel the auction
■ Refresh the auction
■ Perform auction setup tasks, such as adding line item specifications
` Click the Actions button to:
■ Reopen an auction or a staggered line item in the Close Pending phase
■ Close a line item in the Close Pending phase
■ Close the auction manually
■ Launch and use the Auction Monitor
■ Create a master agreement from the auction
■ Generate a contract from the auction
` Click the Reports button to view an auction report.
` Click the Chat button to conduct a chat.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling an auction
Refreshing a sourcing document
Reopening an auction in the Close Pending phase
Reopening a staggered line item in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction line item in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction manually
Launching the Auction Monitor
Using the Auction Monitor
Viewing an auction report

386 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Auction Document toolbar button functions

Click the auction Document toolbar button to:
` Duplicate an auction
` Save the auction as a template
` Cancel the auction
` Refresh the auction
` Perform auction setup tasks, such as adding line item specifications

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling an auction
Adding an auction line item specification
Refreshing a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 387

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Canceling an auction
When you cancel an auction, one of the following occurs:
` If the auction is open, all activity stops and there is no auction winner
` If the auction has not started, it does not open at the start time and no bids can be
placed
In either case, the auction does not proceed, but you can still view the auction
document.

Note: The auction must be in Edit mode to perform this action.

To cancel an auction:
1 If the auction is open, suspend bidding activity.
2 In the toolbar, click Document and select Cancel from the menu.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Adding an auction line item specification
Refreshing a sourcing document

388 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Auction Setup: Line Item Specifications page

You use the Line Item Specifications page to add and define line item specifications.
Line item specifications provide detailed information such as technical and service
specifications for the line items in the RFx.
You can assign specification values to individual line items on the Auction Single Line
Item Summary page or Auction Packaged Line Item Summary page.

To see the Line Item Specifications page:

1 In the toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Line Item Specifications tab.
3 Fill in the fields as described below.
4 Click Save.

Field Help for Auction Setup: Line Item Specifications Page

Add Spec: Click to add a specification in the Item Specification dialog box. You must
add at least one group before adding specifications. You can add an unlimited number
of specifications.
Add Group: Click to add a group to organize your specifications. You can add an
unlimited number of groups.
Reorder: Click to reorder groups and/or specifications or to move specifications from
one group to another.

Related Topics
Auction Setup: Item Specification dialog box
Adding an auction line item specification

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 389

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Auction Setup: Item Specification dialog box

You use the Item Specification dialog box to enter information for a line item
specification. Line item specifications provide detailed information such as technical and
service specifications for the line items in the auction.

Field Help for Item Specification dialog box

Specification Name: Enter the name of the specification. This is a required field.
Required: Check this box if the specification is required for all line items in the auction.
Type: From the drop-down list, select the type of specification value.
Description: Enter a description for the specification.
Options: Click Add to add a multiple choice option to the specification. Enter the
option in the new line that appears in the Options table. The Options table appears only
when you select Multiple Choice as the specification type.
Display Field: Select the format in which to display the specification.
Value: Enter or select a default value for the specification.

Value List Source: Click the Lookup icon to select the source of the value list to
use. This field appears only when you choose Select from List as the specification type.
Field Width: Enter the width of the specification field in pixels. This is a required field.

Related Topics
Auction Setup: Line Item Specifications page
Adding an auction line item specification

390 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Adding an auction line item specification

Line item specifications provide detailed information such as technical and service
specifications for the line items in the auction.
After adding a line item specification in Setup, you can assign it a value for a specific
line item on the Auction Single Line Item Summary page or Auction Packaged
Line Item Summary page. If you do not assign a new value, the default specification
value will be used.

To add a line item specification:

1 In the toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Line Item Specifications tab. For details, see Auction Setup: Line Item
Specifications page.
3 In the Line Item Specification table, click Add Spec.
4 Fill in the fields in the Item Specification dialog box. For details, see Field Help for
Item Specification dialog box.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Save.
7 Click the Line Items tab.

8 Click the Edit icon for a line item.

9 On the Line Item Detail page, change the default specification value as needed.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Auction Setup: Line Item Specifications page
Auction Setup: Item Specification dialog box

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 391

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Auction Actions toolbar button functions

Click the auction Actions toolbar button to:
` Reopen an auction or a staggered line item in the Close Pending phase
` Close a line item in the Close Pending phase
` Close the auction manually
` Launch and use the Auction Monitor
` Create a master agreement from the auction
` Generate a contract from the auction

Related Topics
Reopening an auction in the Close Pending phase
Reopening a staggered line item in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction line item in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction manually
Launching the Auction Monitor
Using the Auction Monitor

392 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Reopening an auction in the Close Pending phase

You can reopen an auction after it closes, provided that the auction is in the Close
Pending phase. For example, you might want to reopen an auction if you receive
notification that a supplier has not had time to submit a best and final bid. This might
occur due to user error, network connectivity issues, or other technical problems.
Reopening the auction gives suppliers a final opportunity to submit a bid, which can
result in further cost savings for you.
The Close Pending phase immediately follows the bidding close time. You specify the
duration of this phase on the Auction Schedule page. You can reopen the auction as
many times as you like during the Close Pending phase until the Final Close time is
reached.

Note: The auction type determines whether an auction moves to the Close Pending
phase after bidding close.

To reopen an auction in the Close Pending phase:

1 With the auction in the Close Pending phase, click the Actions button in the toolbar
and select Re-open Auction.
2 In the Re-open Auction dialog box, enter the amount of time you wish to add to the
bidding time. You can reopen the auction for any length of time.
3 Click Next.
4 In the Confirm Re-open Auction dialog box, click Finish.
The auction is reopened for the specified length of time. After this length of time,
the auction returns to the Close Pending phase for the full Pending Duration.

You can close the auction manually before the Pending Duration is over. For details, see
Closing an auction manually.
You can also choose to close some line items before reopening the auction for bidding.
For details, see Closing an auction line item in the Close Pending phase.

Related Topics
Reopening a staggered line item in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction line item in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction manually
Launching the Auction Monitor
Using the Auction Monitor

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 393

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Reopening a staggered line item in the Close Pending phase

You can reopen a staggered line item after it closes, provided that the line item is in the
Close Pending phase. For example, you might want to reopen a line item if you receive
notification that a supplier has not had time to submit a best and final bid. This might
occur due to user error, network connectivity issues, or other technical problems.
Reopening the line item gives suppliers a final opportunity to submit a bid, which can
result in further cost savings for you.
The Close Pending phase immediately follows the bidding close time for the line item.
You specify the duration of this phase on the Auction Schedule page. You can reopen
the line item as many times as you like during the Close Pending phase. The Bidding
page indicates the current phase for each line item.
When you re-open a line item, all subsequent line items are also opened for the same
length of time, as long as they are not in the Closed phase.
After the auction’s Bidding Close time is reached, you can reopen the whole auction
during the Close Pending phase. For details, see Reopening an auction in the Close
Pending phase.

Note: The auction type determines whether a staggered line item moves to the Close
Pending phase after its close.

To reopen a line item in the Close Pending phase:

1 In an auction with at least one line item in the Close Pending phase, click the
Actions button in the toolbar and select Re-open Auction.
2 In the Re-open Auction dialog box, enter the amount of time you wish to add to the
line item’s bidding period. You can reopen the line item for any length of time.
3 Click Next.
4 In the Confirm Re-open Auction dialog box, click Finish.
The line item is reopened for the specified length of time, as are all subsequent line
items that are not in the Closed phase.

If you do not reopen a line item during its Close Pending phase, the line item will close
automatically at the end of this phase.

Related Topics
Reopening an auction in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction line item in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction manually
Launching the Auction Monitor
Using the Auction Monitor

394 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Closing an auction line item in the Close Pending phase

Before reopening an auction in the Close Pending phase, you can close one or more
individual line items for which you do not want to receive further bids.
You can only manually close line items if the auction is in the Close Pending phase.
Closing a line item has no effect on the closing times or statuses of any other line
items.

Note: The auction type determines whether an auction will move to the Close Pending
phase after bidding close.

To close a line item in the Close Pending phase:

1 With the auction in the Close Pending phase, click the Actions button in the toolbar
and select Close Line Item(s).
2 In the Close Line Items dialog box, select the line item or items to close and click
Next.
3 In the Confirm Closing Line Items dialog box, click Finish.

If you reopen the auction after closing one or more line items, auction bidders will only
be able to bid on the line items that remain open. For details, see Reopening an
auction in the Close Pending phase.

Related Topics
Reopening an auction in the Close Pending phase
Reopening a staggered line item in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction manually
Launching the Auction Monitor
Using the Auction Monitor

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 395

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Closing an auction manually

When you close an auction manually, all activity stops. If automatic awarding is
enabled, the current leading bid becomes the auction winner.

To close an auction:
1 On the Bidders page, suspend all bidders. For details, see Suspending an auction
bidder.
2 In the toolbar, click Actions and select Close Now from the menu.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

Related Topics
Reopening an auction in the Close Pending phase
Reopening a staggered line item in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction line item in the Close Pending phase
Launching the Auction Monitor
Using the Auction Monitor

396 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Launching the Auction Monitor

The Auction Monitor helps you track the bidding process in an open auction. It enables
you to view all bidding for each line item and to communicate with all bidders through
instant messaging.
The Auction Monitor appears in a new window so that you can track bidding while
continuing to work with Frictionless® SRM. After you launch the Auction Monitor, it
refreshes automatically throughout the course of the bidding.

To launch the Auction Monitor:

1 In the toolbar, click Actions and then select Auction Monitor from the menu.
2 If you are launching the Auction Monitor for the first time, do the following:
a If you are prompted to install the Java plug-in, click Yes to install it.
b In the Security Warning dialog box, click Yes. You see the Downloading status
bar, followed by an installation wizard.
c Follow the prompts in the installation wizard to install the Auction Monitor.
3 In the Java Security Warning dialog box, click Grant this session, to enable Java
this time only, or Grant always, to enable it whenever you launch the Auction
Monitor. The Auction Monitor launches in a new window.

Related Topics
Reopening an auction in the Close Pending phase
Reopening a staggered line item in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction line item in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction manually
Using the Auction Monitor

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 397

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Using the Auction Monitor

The Auction Monitor helps you track the bidding process in an open auction. It enables
you to view all bidding for each line item and to communicate with auction participants
through instant messaging.
The Auction Monitor appears in a new window so that you can track bidding while
continuing to work with Frictionless® SRM. After you launch the Auction Monitor, it
refreshes automatically throughout the course of the bidding.

To use the Auction Monitor:

1 In the upper panel of the Auction Monitor window, review auction bidding. This
panel contains a graphical display of bids, organized as follows:
■ Each bid is represented by a dot, and each bidder is indicated by a different
color, as detailed in the Bidders section of the Auction Monitor window. Bids for
each line item are linked together. Move your cursor over a bid to see any
associated bid information, such as the bidder name, bid placement time, and
bid price.
■ The horizontal axis indicates the time of bid placement.
■ The vertical axis displays the bid price.
2 To see information about a bidder, move your cursor over the bidder’s name
under Bidders. You see a flyover with any available bidder information, such as
name, user name, e-mail address, and so on.
3 To see bidding information for a particular line item, click the line item in the
Auction Monitor window under Line Items. You see a chart in the upper panel
detailing all bidding for that line item. Move your cursor over a bid to see any
associated bid information.
4 To change the currency for an auction, select a currency from the currency
drop-down list. You see the bid values in the currency you selected.
Note: You can only choose a currency that was included in the auction by its
creator. You cannot add a currency to an auction in the Auction Monitor.
5 To send an instant message, or to view instant messages, do the following:
a Under Bidders, click the bidder symbol next to any bidder’s name. You see a
new Channel window showing any instant messages sent during the auction.
b To send a message to all auction participants, type the message in the Public
Message text box and click Send. Your message appears in the Channel
window and is seen by all auction participants.
c To send a message to a single auction participant, click the participant’s
name in the Users in Channel box, type the message in the Private Message
text box and click Send. Your message appears in the Channel window and is
seen by the selected auction participant.

398 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Note: You can only send an instant message to an auction participant who is
currently logged onto the Frictionless SRM application.)
6 To view bidding for another auction, click Auction in the upper left corner and
select an auction from the drop-down list.

Related Topics
Reopening an auction in the Close Pending phase
Reopening a staggered line item in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction line item in the Close Pending phase
Closing an auction manually
Launching the Auction Monitor

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 399

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Auction Reports toolbar button functions

Click the auction Reports toolbar button to view an auction report.

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Viewing an auction report
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

400 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Viewing an auction report

You can view a number of reports that give you information about the auction. You can
only view auction reports when the auction is in view mode.
Click the report name to view more information about the report.

Report Description

Bidder Status for an This report provides detailed information about each supplier's
Auction Event report response to an invitation to participate in an auction event.
Full Bid report This report provides a summary view of an auction event's setup
and line items and a complete bid history for each of the line
items for further analysis of the bidding progress.
Bid Movement by Line Item This report shows the total bid movement of a line item during an
report auction event to show how a line item's savings evolved. Detail by
supplier shows how aggressive each bidder was in moving from
their starting bid to their best bid relative to other suppliers.
Potential savings against current price are also calculated.
Bid Movement by Bidders This report shows the total bid movement by supplier during an
report auction event to show how aggressively a supplier negotiated.
Detail by supplier shows which line items generated the greatest
and least activity. Potential savings against current price are also
calculated.
Weighted Bid By Supplier This report displays a summary of the weighted cost of each line
report item by bidder. It includes the total weighted cost, which takes
into account any setup cost that has been added.

To view an auction report:

1 In the toolbar, click Reports and select the report to view from the menu. You see
the report.
2 Optionally, bookmark the report.
3 Optionally, export the report as a PDF, Excel (XLS), or CSV file.
4 After you finish viewing the report, click Close Window.

Related Topics
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 401

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Bidder Status for an Auction Event report

This report provides detailed information about each supplier's response to an invitation
to participate in an auction event.
The following is a description of the fields in this report.

Auction Summary
This report section displays information about the auction event setup parameters.

Field Description

Auction Type The auction type

Preview Start The date on which this auction is visible to suppliers
Pre-bid Start The date and time when suppliers can enter pre-bids before the
auction bidding begins
Bidding Start The date and time when the auction bidding phase opens
Bidding End The date and time when the auction bidding phase closes based on
the earliest line item close time. If Automatic Early Close is enabled,
the auction may close later than the displayed time.
Automatic Early Close Indicates whether the auction can close after the line item minimum
bid duration, if no bids are entered during the inactivity interval
Inactivity Window A period of time preceding the current line item close time when a lack
(minutes) of bid activity will result in the close of line item's bidding phase at the
current line item close time
Overtime Duration If any bids are received during the inactivity window, the bidding will
(minutes) continue for the defined overtime duration
Staggered Line Items Indicates whether this auction allows line items to start and/or end at
different times

402 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Line Item Detail

This report section provides summary information for each line item in the auction.

Field Description

Line Item The line item sequence number

Description The line item description
Location The location associated with this line item
Requested Quantity The quantity desired
Current Price The price of this line item based on current contract or market pricing
Target Price The goal price that you hope to attain through this auction
Leading Price The best bid among all the bids entered
Savings % The percentage savings over the current price [(Current Price - Leading
Price)/Current Price] * 100
Savings Amount The amount of savings over the current price [(Current Price - Leading Price)
* Requested Quantity]
Bid Count The number of bids submitted for this line item

Bid Detail
This report section provides a list of the bids submitted for each line item.

Field Description

Line Item The line item sequence number

Description The line item description
Bidder The name of the supplier company that submitted the bid
Rank The relative supplier rank for a line item. Only the best bid per
supplier has an assigned rank.
Bid Quantity The quantity bid by supplier. This is the same as the requested
quantity, except in partial quantity auctions.
Bid Unit Price (Base The price bid by the supplier in the auction event's default currency
Currency)

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 403

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Field Description

Bid Unit Price (Bid Currency) The price bid by the supplier in the default currency, if this is a
multi-currency auction
Total Bid Amount (Base The extended price shown in the auction event's default currency
Currency)
Total Bid Amount (Bid The extended price shown in the default currency, if this is a
Currency) multi-currency auction
Date & Time The date and time that the bid was entered
Bid Comment Any comment entered with a bid, if bid comments are enabled for
the auction type

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Viewing an auction report
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

404 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Full Bid report

This report provides a summary view of an auction event's setup and line items and a
complete bid history for each of the line items for further analysis of the bidding
progress.
This report is generated for the selected auction and can be run during any phase of the
auction.
The following is a description of the fields in this report.

Auction Summary
This report section displays information about the auction event setup parameters.

Field Description

Auction Type The auction type

Preview Start The date on which this auction is visible to suppliers
Pre-bid Start The date and time when suppliers can enter pre-bids before the
auction bidding begins
Bidding Start The date and time when the auction bidding phase opens
Bidding End The date and time when the auction bidding phase closes based on
the earliest line item close time. If Automatic Early Close is enabled,
the auction may close later than the displayed time.
Automatic Early Close Indicates whether the auction can close after the line item minimum
bid duration, if no bids are entered during the inactivity interval
Inactivity Window A period of time preceding the current line item close time when a lack
(minutes) of bid activity will result in the close of line item's bidding phase at the
current line item close time
Overtime Duration If any bids are received during the inactivity window, the bidding will
(minutes) continue for the defined overtime duration
Staggered Line Items Indicates whether this auction allows line items to start and/or end at
different times

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 405

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Line Item Detail

This report section provides summary information for each line item in the auction.

Field Description

Line Item The line item sequence number

Description The line item description
Location The location associated with this line item
Requested Quantity The quantity desired
Current Price The price of this line item based on current contract or market pricing
Target Price The goal price that you hope to attain through this auction
Leading Price The best bid among all the bids entered
Savings % The percentage savings over the current price [(Current Price - Leading
Price)/Current Price] * 100
Savings Amount The amount of savings over the current price [(Current Price - Leading Price)
* Requested Quantity]
Bid Count The number of bids submitted for this line item

Bid Detail
This report section provides a list of bids submitted for each line item. This may include
only your bids or other suppliers' bids depending on the event's disclosure rules.

Field Description

Line Item The line item sequence number

Description The line item description
Bidder The name of the supplier company that submitted the bid
Rank The relative supplier rank for a line item. Only the best bid per
supplier has an assigned rank.
Bid Quantity The quantity bid by supplier. This is the same as the requested
quantity, except in partial quantity auctions.
Bid Unit Price (Base The price bid by the supplier in the auction event's default currency
Currency)

406 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Field Description

Bid Unit Price (Bid Currency) The price bid by the supplier in the default currency, if this is a
multi-currency auction
Total Bid Amount (Base The extended price shown in the auction event's default currency
Currency)
Total Bid Amount (Bid The extended price shown in the default currency, if this is a
Currency) multi-currency auction
Date & Time The date and time that the bid was entered
Bid Comment Any comment entered with a bid, if bid comments are enabled for
the auction type

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Viewing an auction report
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 407

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Bid Movement by Line Item report

This report shows the total bid movement of a line item during an auction event to
show how a line item's savings evolved. Detail by supplier shows how aggressive each
bidder was in moving from their starting bid to their best bid relative to other suppliers.
Potential savings against current price are also calculated.

Note: You must enter a Current Price for line items during auction setup in order to
calculate savings.

This report is generated for the selected auction and can be run during any phase of the
auction.

Auction Summary
This section displays information about the auction event setup parameters.

Field Description

Auction Type Name of auction type.

Preview Start Date on which this auction is visible to suppliers.
Pre-bid Start Date and time when suppliers can enter pre-bids before the
auction bidding begins.
Bidding Start Date and time when the auction bidding phase opens.
Bidding End Date and time when the auction bidding phase closes based on
the earliest line item close time. If Automatic Early Close is
enabled, the auction may close later than the displayed time.
Automatic Early Close Identifies whether the auction can close after the line item
minimum bid duration if no bids are entered during the inactivity
interval.
Inactivity Window (minutes) The inactivity window is a period of time preceding the current
line item close time when a lack of bid activity will result in the
close of line item's bidding phase at the current line item close
time.
Overtime Duration (minutes) If any bids are received during the inactivity window, the bidding
will continue for the defined overtime duration.
Staggered Line Items Identifies whether this auction allows line items to start and/or
end at different times.

408 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Bid Detail
This section provides bid movement information for each line item.

Field Description

Line Item Line item sequence number

Description Line item description
Current Price Price of this line item based on current contract or market pricing.
Quantity Quantity desired.
Bidder Supplier company name of bidder
Rank Relative supplier rank for a line item.
# Bids Number of bids submitted by bidder for this line item.
Bid Quantity Quantity bid by supplier. This is the same as the requested quantity,
except in partial quantity auctions.
Starting Bid Initial bid placed by bidder for this line item.
Best Bid The last bid placed by bidder for this line item.
Bid Movement The difference or movement from starting bid to best bid. [Starting bid -
Best Bid]
% Bid Movement Percentage movement from starting bid (Bid Movement/Starting Price) *
100
Savings Amount Amount of savings over the current price. [(Current Price - Best Bid) *
Requested Quantity]
Savings % Percentage savings over the current price. [(Current Price - Best
Bid)/Current Price] * 100
Line Item Average Average % Bid Movement: The sum of % Bid Movements for all bidders/#
of bidders on this line item
Line Item Highest Highest % Bid Movement: Bid movement with the highest value for this
line item
Line Item Lowest Lowest % Bid Movement: Bid movement with the lowest value for this line
item

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 409

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Auction Totals
This section provides a summary of the savings for all line items in the auction based on
the best bid per line item.

Field Description

Current Price Total The sum of current price amount for each line item: The sum of (Current
Price * Requested Quantity for each line item)
Best Bid Total The sum of the best bid amount for each line item: The sum of (Best Bid
price * Requested Quantity for each line item)
Savings Amount Total savings for all line items in auction: (Current Price Total - Best Bid
Total)
Savings % Percentage savings over the current price for all line items. (Best Bid Total
/ Current Price Total) * 100

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Viewing an auction report
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

410 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Bid Movement by Bidders report

This report shows the total bid movement by supplier during an auction event to show
how aggressively a supplier negotiated. Detail by supplier shows which line items
generated the greatest and least activity. Potential savings against current price are
also calculated.

Note: You must enter a Current Price for line items during auction setup in order to
calculate savings.

This report is generated for the selected auction and can be run during any phase of the
auction.

Auction Summary
This section displays information about the auction event setup parameters.

Field Description

Auction Type Name of auction type.

Preview Start Date on which this auction is visible to suppliers.
Pre-bid Start Date and time when suppliers can enter pre-bids before the
auction bidding begins.
Bidding Start Date and time when the auction bidding phase opens.
Bidding End Date and time when the auction bidding phase closes based on
the earliest line item close time. If Automatic Early Close is
enabled, the auction may close later than the displayed time.
Automatic Early Close Identifies whether the auction can close after the line item
minimum bid duration if no bids are entered during the inactivity
interval.
Inactivity Window (minutes) The inactivity window is a period of time preceding the current
line item close time when a lack of bid activity will result in the
close of line item's bidding phase at the current line item close
time.
Overtime Duration (minutes) If any bids are received during the inactivity window, the bidding
will continue for the defined overtime duration.
Staggered Line Items Identifies whether this auction allows line items to start and/or
end at different times.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 411

Auction toolbar functions Auctions

Bid Detail
This section provides bid movement information for each bidder.

Field Description

Bidder Supplier company name of bidder

Line Item Line item sequence number
Description Line item description
# Bids Number of bids submitted by bidder for this line item.
Rank Relative supplier rank for a line item.
Bid Quantity Quantity bid by supplier. This is the same as the requested quantity, except
in partial quantity auctions.
Current Price Price of this line item based on current contract or market pricing.
Starting Bid Bidder's initial bid for this line item.
Best Bid Bidder's last bid for this line item.
Bid Movement The difference or movement from starting bid to best bid. [Starting bid -
Best Bid]
% Bid Movement Percentage movement from starting bid (Bid Movement/Starting Price) *
100
Savings Amount Amount of savings over the current price. [(Current Price - Best Bid) *
Requested Quantity]
Savings % Percentage savings over the current price. [(Current Price - Best
Bid)/Current Price] * 100
Supplier Total Current Price Total: Sum of current price total for all line items on which
the bidder placed a bid.
Best Bid Total: Sum of best bid amount for each line item: The sum of
(Best Bid price * Requested Quantity for each line item)
% Bid Movement: Weighted Average of Bid Movement Percent The sum
of (Bid Movement * Bid Qty per line) / (The sum of Starting Price * Bid Qty
per line)
Savings Amount: Total savings for all line items in auction: (Current Price
Total - Best Bid Total)
Savings Percentage: Percentage savings over the current price for all line
items. (Best Bid Total / Current Price Total) * 100

412 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Auctions Auction toolbar functions

Auction Totals
This section provides a summary of the savings for all line items in the auction based on
the best bid per line item.

Field Description

Current Price Total Sum of current price amount for each line item: The sum of (Current Price
* Requested Quantity for each line item)
Best Bid Total Sum of best bid amount for each line item: The sum of (Best Bid price *
Requested Quantity for each line item)
Savings Amount Total savings for all line items in auction: (Current Price Total - Best Bid
Total)
Savings % Percentage savings over the current price for all line items. (Best Bid Total
/ Current Price Total) * 100

Related Topics
Creating an auction
Viewing an auction report
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 413

Quick Reference: Conducting an Auction Auctions

Quick Reference: Conducting an Auction

The following is a quick reference guide to conducting an auction.

Create the Auction

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create Auction from
the Auctions submenu.
2 In the Create dialog box, select an auction type or template. The type description
indicates whether the auction is reverse or forward and can include other settings,
such as bidding and disclosure rules.
3 Click Finish.
4 On the Header page, fill in basic auction information.
5 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule. The schedule controls when the auction
begins and ends. For details, see Adding an auction schedule.
6 Click the Line Items tab to add line items. Line items are the commodities you are
sourcing in the auction. For details, see Adding line item information to an
auction.
7 Click the Bidders tab to add bidders. Bidders are the suppliers you are inviting to
bid in the auction. For details, see Adding a bidder to an auction.
8 Click the Accounting tab to add accounting information.
9 Click the Exchange Rates tab to select alternate currencies and exchange rates.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Monitor the Auction

1 In the toolbar, click Actions and then select Auction Monitor from the menu. For
details, see Launching the Auction Monitor.
2 Use the Auction Monitor to track activity in the auction. For details, see Using the
Auction Monitor.

Award the Auction

` If automatic awards are enabled in the auction type, awards will be made and
announced automatically at the end of the auction, based on the winning bids.
` If manual awards are enabled in the auction type, click the Awards tab to award the
line items manually when the auction closes. For details, see Awarding auction
line items manually.

414 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx

An RFx is a sourcing document that enables you to request information, quotes, and
prices regarding goods and services from multiple suppliers. Suppliers respond with
answers and their best prices. You can then score the responses and compare them by
supplier. After you score responses, you can award the RFx either automatically or
manually.
Line items and questions are the heart of the RFx. Line items describe the specific
products and services you want to source. Questions can ask about the company and
its policies, procedures, and so forth. Questions are associated with the RFx as a whole,
not with individual line items.

Click the Enterprise Sourcing button in the navigation bar to see the RFx submenu,
which contains the following basic options for this module:

Option Description

Create RFx From Template Click to create a new RFx from a template. See Editing an RFx.
Create RFx Click to create a new RFx. See Creating an RFx.
My RFxs Click to see the RFx List page displaying a list of RFxs for which
you are an owner or collaborator.
My RFxs Open for Bidding Click to see the RFx List page displaying a list of your RFxs that
are currently open for bidding.
My RFxs in Scoring and Click to see the RFx List page displaying a list of your RFxs that
Awarding are currently being scored and awarded.
All RFxs Click to see the RFx List page displaying a list of all RFxs.
RFx Summary Extract Click to see a report providing access to the summary information
for a set of RFxs in a given time period for printing or exporting.
Create RFx Template Click to create a new RFx template. See Creating an RFx
template.

Confidential 415
RFx List page RFx

RFx List page

To display the RFX List page:
` Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the RFx submenu:
■ My RFXs
■ My RFXs Open for Bidding
■ My RFXs in Scoring and Awarding
■ All RFXs

On the RFx List page, you can:

` View RFxs in the following ways:

Option Description

My RFxs View a list of all RFxs that include you on the collaborator list. This list
includes all RFx statuses.
My RFxs Open for Bidding View a list of all RFxs that include you on the collaborator list but only
when the RFxs are in a phase where suppliers can enter responses.
My RFxs in Scoring and View a list of all RFxs that include you on the collaborator list, but only
Awarding when the RFxs are in a phase in which buyers can enter scores and
award the winners.
My RFxs Sorted by Creator View a list of all RFxs that include you on the collaborator list and sort
by the creator's name.
My RFxs Sorted by Owner View a list of all RFxs that include you on the collaborator list and sort
by the current owner's name.
My RFxs Sorted by View a list of all RFxs that include you on the collaborator list and sort
Estimated Value by the estimated value.
RFx(s) in My Cost Center(s) View a list of RFx that contain activity associated with the cost centers
defined in your user account setup.
My RFx(s) - Canceled or View a list of all canceled and closed RFxs that include you on the
Closed collaborator list.
Cost Center RFx(s) - View a list of canceled and closed RFxs that contain activity
Canceled or Closed associated with the cost centers defined in your user account setup.
All RFxs View a list of all active RFxs.
Search RFxs by Internal Find specific RFx(s) by internal category.
Category

416 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx List page

Option Description

Search RFxs by Company Find specific RFx(s) by company.

Search RFxs by Find specific RFx(s) by organizational unit.
Organizational Unit
Search RFxs by Creator Find specific RFx(s) by creator.
Search RFxs by Owner Find specific RFx(s) by owner.
Search RFxs by Find specific RFx(s) by a collaborator listed on the document.
Collaborator
Search RFxs by Estimated Find specific RFx(s) by estimated value.
Value
Search RFxs by Budgeted Find specific RFx(s) by budgeted value.
Value
RFx Templates List of all active RFx templates.
RFQuick Templates List of all active RFQuick templates.
RFxs - Canceled or Closed List of all inactive RFxs.
All Inactive RFx Templates List of all inactive RFx templates.
All Inactive RFQuick List of all inactive RFQuick templates.
Templates

` Search for an RFx by ID, Name, Internal Category, Business Unit, Owner,
Estimated Value, or RFx Phase
` Create and edit an RFx or RFx template
` Export the RFx list as an Excel (XLS) or PDF file

Note: The tabs that appear in an RFx are determined by the RFx type. All tabs might
not appear in every document.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx from a template
Creating an RFx
Editing an RFx
Creating an RFx template
Editing an RFx template
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 417

RFx List page RFx

Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

Searching for a sourcing document

418 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx List page

Creating an RFx from a template

Templates are predefined documents, or portions of documents, that are used to
standardize document creation and minimize the work of creating a new document.
Templates store information so that it can be used in multiple documents. Templates
can also be used to provide default field values for users creating new RFxs.
Using a template to create an RFx incorporates the template information into a new
RFx.
You can also create an RFx from within a project.

Note: The tabs that appear in an RFx are determined by the RFx type. All tabs might
not appear in every document.

To create an RFx from a template:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create RFx From
Template from the RFx submenu. You see the RFx List page with a list of links you
can use to create the RFx from a template.
2 On the RFx List page, click the link for the template to use. You see a new RFx
created from the selected template.
Note: You can also create an RFx from a template by clicking the Create button on
the RFx List page and selecting a template in the Create dialog box.
3 On the Header page, fill in the fields for basic information and, optionally, add
collaborators and document links.
4 Click the Exchange Rates tab to select alternate currencies and specify exchange
rates.
5 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule.
6 Click the Vendors tab to add suppliers.
7 Click the Information tab to add boilerplate information, such as nondisclosure
agreements, instructions for the response, and so forth.
8 Click the Specs tab to add event specifications.
9 Click the Questions tab to ask suppliers questions about their products, services,
procedures, companies, and so forth.
10 Click the Line Items tab to add line items for products, services, and direct
materials.
11 Click the Accounting tab to add accounting information.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 419

RFx List page RFx

12 If no delivery term is selected in the template, do the following:

a Click the Document button in the toolbar and select the Setup option.
b On the Delivery Info page, click Add Delivery Term to select a delivery term.
c Select a period type from the Line Item Period Type drop-down list.
d Optionally, click Add Delivery Period to add a delivery period.
e Click the Save button in the toolbar.
f Optionally, use the Setup tabs to add or edit other Setup information. See RFx
Document toolbar button functions for details about setup tasks.
g Click the RFx name at the top of the page to return to the RFx tabs.
Note: You must select a delivery term before you can advance the RFx phase
beyond Created.
13 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
14 When you are satisfied with your RFx, change the RFx to the next phase.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Editing an RFx
RFx Exchange Rates page
Adding an alternate currency to an RFx
Adding an RFx schedule
Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx
Adding an RFx information section
Adding an RFx event specification
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a line item to an RFx
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

420 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx List page

Creating an RFx
You can also create an RFx from a template or from within a project.

Note: The tabs that appear in an RFx are determined by the RFx type. All tabs might
not appear in every document.

To create an RFx:
1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create RFx from the
RFx submenu.
Note: You can also create an RFx by clicking the Create button on the RFx List
page.
2 In the Create dialog box, select an RFx type, or select a template by clicking the
Lookup icon .
3 Click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields for basic information and, optionally, add
collaborators and document links.
5 Click the Exchange Rates tab to select alternate currencies and specify exchange
rates.
6 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule.
7 Click the Vendors tab to add suppliers.
8 Click the Information tab to add boilerplate information, such as nondisclosure
agreements, instructions for the response, and so forth.
9 Click the Specs tab to add event specifications.
10 Click the Questions tab to ask suppliers questions about their products, services,
procedures, companies, and so forth.
11 Click the Line Items tab to add line items for products, services, and direct
materials.
12 Click the Accounting tab to add accounting information.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 421

RFx List page RFx

13 Add Setup information. At a minimum, do the following:

a Click the Document button in the toolbar and select the Setup option.
b On the Delivery Info page, click Add Delivery Term to select a delivery term.
c Select a period type from the Line Item Period Type drop-down list.
d Optionally, click Add Delivery Period to add a delivery period.
e Click the Save button in the toolbar.
f Optionally, use the Setup tabs to add or edit other Setup information. See RFx
Document toolbar button functions for details about setup tasks.
g Click the RFx name at the top of the page to return to the RFx tabs.
Note: You must select a delivery term before you can advance the RFx phase
beyond Created.
14 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
15 When you are satisfied with your RFx, change the RFx to the next phase.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx from a template
Editing an RFx
Adding an alternate currency to an RFx
Adding an RFx schedule
Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx
Adding an RFx information section
Adding an RFx event specification
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a line item to an RFx
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

422 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx List page

Editing an RFx
Note: The tabs that appear in an RFx are determined by the RFx type. All tabs might
not appear in every document.

To edit an RFx:
1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the RFx submenu:
■ My RFXs
■ My RFXs Open for Bidding
■ My RFXs in Scoring and Awarding
■ All RFXs
You see the RFx List page displaying the selected list of RFxs.
2 On the RFx List page, click the RFx to edit.
3 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 On the Header page, edit any fields for basic information and add or remove
collaborators and document links.
5 Click the Exchange Rates tab to select alternate currencies and specify exchange
rates.
6 Click the Schedule tab to edit the schedule.
7 Click the Vendors tab to add or remove suppliers.
8 Click the Information tab to edit boilerplate information, such as nondisclosure
agreements, instructions for the response, and so forth.
9 Click the Specs tab to edit event specifications.
10 Click the Questions tab to edit suppliers’ questions.
11 Click the Line Items tab to edit line items for products, services, and direct
materials.
12 Click the Accounting tab to edit accounting information.
13 Click the Document button in the toolbar and select the Setup option to edit Setup
information.
14 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
15 When you are satisfied with your RFx, change the RFx to the next phase.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx from a template
Creating an RFx
Adding an alternate currency to an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 423

RFx List page RFx

Adding an RFx schedule

Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx
Adding an RFx information section
Adding an RFx event specification
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a line item to an RFx
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

424 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx List page

Creating an RFx template

Templates are predefined documents, or portions of documents, that are used to
standardize document creation and minimize the work of creating a new document.
Templates store information so that it can be used in multiple documents.
Using a template to create an RFx incorporates the template information into a new
RFx.

Note: The tabs that appear in an RFx template are determined by the RFx type. All tabs
might not appear in every document.

To create an RFx template:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create RFx Template
from the RFx submenu.
Note: You can also create an RFx template by clicking the Create Template button
on the RFx List page.
2 In the Create dialog box, select an RFx type.
3 Click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields for basic information and, optionally, add
collaborators and document links.
5 Click the Exchange Rates tab to select alternate currencies and specify exchange
rates.
6 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule.
7 Click the Vendors tab to add suppliers.
8 Click the Information tab to add boilerplate information, such as nondisclosure
agreements, instructions for the response, and so forth.
9 Click the Specs tab to add event specifications.
10 Click the Questions tab to ask suppliers questions about their products, services,
procedures, companies, and so forth.
11 Click the Line Items tab to add line items for products, services, and direct
materials.
12 Click the Accounting tab to add accounting information.
13 Click the Document button in the toolbar and select the Setup option to add Setup
information.
14 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx from a template
Creating an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 425

RFx List page RFx

Editing an RFx
Editing an RFx template
Adding an alternate currency to an RFx
Adding an RFx schedule
Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx
Adding an RFx information section
Adding an RFx event specification
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a line item to an RFx
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

426 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx List page

Editing an RFx template

Templates are predefined documents, or portions of documents, that are used to
standardize document creation and minimize the work of creating a new document.
Templates store information so that it can be used in multiple documents.
Using a template to create an RFx incorporates the template information into a new
RFx.

Note: The tabs that appear in an RFx template are determined by the RFx type. All tabs
might not appear in every document.

To edit an RFx template:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the RFx submenu:
■ My RFXs
■ My RFXs Open for Bidding
■ My RFXs in Scoring and Awarding
■ All RFXs
You see the RFx List page.
2 On the RFx List page, select All RFx Templates from the drop-down list.
3 Click the template to edit.
4 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 On the Header page, edit any fields for basic information and add or remove
collaborators and document links.
6 Click the Exchange Rates tab to select alternate currencies and specify exchange
rates.
7 Click the Schedule tab to edit the schedule.
8 Click the Vendors tab to add or remove suppliers.
9 Click the Information tab to edit boilerplate information, such as nondisclosure
agreements, instructions for the response, and so forth.
10 Click the Specs tab to edit event specifications.
11 Click the Questions tab to edit suppliers’ questions.
12 Click the Line Items tab to edit line items for products, services, and direct
materials.
13 Click the Accounting tab to edit accounting information.
14 Click the Document button in the toolbar and select the Setup option to edit Setup
information.
15 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 427

RFx List page RFx

Related Topics
Creating an RFx from a template
Creating an RFx template
Editing an RFx
Adding an alternate currency to an RFx
Adding an RFx schedule
Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx
Adding an RFx information section
Adding an RFx event specification
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a line item to an RFx
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

428 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Header page

RFx Header page

On the Header page, you can:
` Add and edit basic information
` Add and remove collaborators
` Add and remove document links

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 429

RFx Exchange Rates page RFx

RFx Exchange Rates page

Exchange rates are used in an RFx to compare responses if suppliers use currencies
other than the default currency specified on the Header page.

On the Exchange Rates page, you can add and edit alternate currencies.

Field help for the RFx Exchange Rates page

From Rate: Enter the rate used to convert from the default currency to the alternate
currency. This rate might be one you obtained from an outside system.
For example, if USD is the default currency and EUR is the alternate currency, and 1
USD = .877 EUR, enter .877 in the From Rate field.
To Rate: Enter the rate used to convert to the default currency from the alternate
currency.
For example, if USD is the default currency and EUR is the alternate currency, and 1
EUR = 1.14 USD, enter 1.14 as the To Rate.
Use System Rates: Check the box to use the system-defined rates, which are
determined by a system administrator.

Related Topics
Adding an alternate currency to an RFx
Creating an RFx

430 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Exchange Rates page

Adding an alternate currency to an RFx

1 On the Exchange Rates page, click Add Currency.
2 In the dialog box, select the currency or currencies to add.
3 Click OK.
4 Specify the exchange rates to use for each currency or select the system-defined
rates, which are determined by a system administrator.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Field help for the RFx Exchange Rates page
Creating an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 431

RFx Schedule page RFx

RFx Schedule page

Schedules help you track the progress of and specify renewal dates for RFxs. The
Schedule page shows information about RFx phases and standard dates, such as the
response due date, and information about schedule events.
Under Schedule Events, you can select a view for events. In each view, you can add
and edit different information for the events. In any Schedule Event view, event status
is indicated as follows:
` Events that are in progress appear in bold.
` Events that are behind schedule appear in red.

On the Schedule page, you can:

` Add and edit basic schedule information and specify standard dates
` Specify a view for a schedule event
` Add and edit a schedule event
` Import a schedule event from a library
` Reorder schedule events

Field help for RFx Schedule page

Phase: This field indicates the current phase of the RFx.

Phase Configuration: This field indicates which phases have been configured by the
RFx type. The phase configuration might be All Phases, Skip Waiting for Approval, Skip
Open for Review, or Skip Waiting for Approval and Open for Review.

Standard Dates

Planned Open Date: Enter the date and time when you plan to open the RFx for
review.
Automatic phase change on planned open date: If you entered a Planned Open
Date, optionally check this box to automatically change the RFx phase to Open for
Review on that date.
If the Open for Review phase is skipped for this RFx (as indicated by the Phase
Configuration field), the phase will change automatically to Open for Response.
Intention to Respond Date: Enter the date by which suppliers must indicate whether
or not they intend to respond to the RFx. Any supplier who does not indicate an
intention by this date will lose access to the RFx response at 11:59 PM on the indicated
date.
This value must be earlier than the Response Due Date. It cannot indicate the same
day as the Response Due Date.

432 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Schedule page

RFx Response Due Date: Enter the date and time by which suppliers must respond to
the RFx.
Automatic phase change on due date: Check this box to automatically change the
RFx phase to Closed for Response on the RFx Response Due Date.
Skip Preliminary state on RFx Response: Check this box to skip the Preliminary
phase in the RFx response. In the Preliminary phase, you can see suppliers’ RFx
responses in progress, before they are marked Firm by the suppliers.
View RFx Responses Only After Bidding Closes: Check this box to make RFx
responses visible, and create the RFx Responses tab, only after bidding ends and the
RFx phase is changed to Closed for Response.
If this box is not checked, you can see any RFx response in the Preliminary (if enabled)
or Firm phase.
Date to Publish Notice: Indicate the date on which the RFx will appear in suppliers’
Upcoming Events channel.
Publish Notice to All Vendors: Check this box to publish this RFx to the Upcoming
Events channel for all suppliers, not just invited suppliers. If you check this box, you
must enter a Date to Publish Notice.

Base Date: This field indicates the base date for the RFx (usually the date when the
RFx was created). It is used as the basis for calculating other dates in the RFx schedule.
This is a required field.

Schedule Items
You can use this table to specify a view and add and edit events.

Related Topics
Adding an RFx schedule
Specifying a view for RFx schedule events
Adding an event to a schedule
Setting RFx email notifications
Importing a library component
Reordering items in a list
Creating an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 433

RFx Schedule page RFx

Adding an RFx schedule

Schedules help you track the progress of and specify renewal dates for RFxs. An RFx
schedule contains information about RFx phases and standard dates, such as the
response due date, and information about schedule events.
Under Schedule Events, you can select a view for events. In each view, you can add
and edit different information for the events. In any Schedule Event view, event status
is indicated as follows:
` Events that are in progress appear in bold.
` Events that are behind schedule appear in red.

To add an RFx schedule:

1 On the Schedule page, fill in the fields for basic schedule information and those
under Standard Dates. For details, see Field help for RFx Schedule page.
2 Optionally, under Schedule Events, select the Setup view from the view drop-down
list to add a schedule event.
Note: After you add a schedule event, you can select the Tracking view to add and
edit schedule event dates, or select the Dependency view to add and edit
dependency events.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Adding an RFx schedule
Specifying a view for RFx schedule events
Adding an event to a schedule
Setting RFx email notifications
Importing a library component
Reordering items in a list
Field help for RFx Schedule page
Creating an RFx

434 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Schedule page

Specifying a view for RFx schedule events

Schedules help you track the progress of and specify renewal dates for RFxs. An RFx
schedule contains information about RFx phases and standard dates, such as the
response due date, and information about schedule events.
Under Schedule Events, you can select a view for schedule events. In any Schedule
Event view, event status is indicated as follows:
` Events that are in progress appear in bold.
` Events that are behind schedule appear in red.

In the Setup view, you can:

` Add and edit the basic information about a schedule event
` Import schedule events from a library
` Reorder schedule events

In the Tracking view, you can:

` Add and edit the planned and actual dates for a schedule event
` Reorder schedule events

In the Dependency view, you can:

` Add and edit a dependencies for a schedule event
` Import dependencies from a library
` Reorder dependencies

To specify an RFx schedule event view:

` On the Schedule page under Schedule Events, select an RFx schedule event view
from the drop-down list.

Related Topics
Adding an RFx schedule
Setting RFx email notifications
Adding an event to a schedule
Setting RFx email notifications
Importing a library component
Reordering items in a list
Field help for RFx Schedule page
Creating an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 435

RFx Schedule page RFx

RFx Schedule Settings page

The Settings page provides a single location to enter and edit much of the event
information in the Setup and Dependency views.

On the Settings page, you can:

` Enter and edit basic information about the event
` Enter and edit event type and dependency information under Type
` Enter and edit information under Reminders

Field help for RFx Schedule Settings page

Name: Type a name for the event. This is a required field.

Description: Type a description of the event.
Phase: From the drop-down list, select the RFx phase during which the event will
occur.
Required: Check this box if the event is required.
Share with Vendors: Check this box to share the event with suppliers associated with
the RFx.
Publish to Project: If there is a project associated with this RFx, check this box to
publish this event to the project.

Type

Event Type: Select one of the following:

` Select Task for an event with a time duration. Type the duration in the text box.
` Select Milestone for an event that occurs on a selected date.

Start Date: Select one of the following:

` Select Fixed for an event with a fixed start date. Type or click the Calendar icon

to select the fixed date.

` Select Depends on Event for an event that depends on another event, and then
do the following:
■ Click the Add button in the dependency table.
■ Select the dependency from the Event drop-down list.
■ Select whether the dependency is on the start or end of the event from the
Depends On drop-down list.

436 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Schedule page

■ Type any offset days in the Additional Offset field. For example, if the event
will start two days after the dependency event occurs, type 2 in this field.

Owner: Select one of the following as the owner of this event:

` Select Specific User and click the Lookup icon to select a user other than the
document owner.
` Select Document Owner to choose the document owner.

Reminders

Publish to Calendar: Click this box to publish this even to the Calendar channel on
the Workbench.
Reminder Rules: To send a reminder for this event, fill in the following fields:
` Send reminder: Check this box and type the number of days before the event to
send the reminder.
` Collaborators: Select to send the event reminder to all document collaborators.
` Individual: Select to send the event reminder to a specific user, and click the

Lookup icon to select the user.

Related Topics
Adding an RFx schedule
Creating an RFx
Adding an event to a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Creating reminders for an event

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 437

RFx Schedule page RFx

RFx Schedule Tracking page

On the Tracking page, you can:
` Review date information, and enter and edit the actual dates for an event

Related Topics
Adding an RFx schedule
Creating an RFx
Adding dates to an event

438 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Schedule page

RFx Schedule Dependents page

On the Dependents page, you can view the events that are dependent on a specific
event.

Related Topics
Adding an RFx schedule
Creating an RFx
Viewing event dependents

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 439

RFx Vendors page RFx

RFx Vendors page

Supplier contacts are the people in supplier companies with whom you do business.
When you add one or more supplier contacts to an RFx, you invite the companies of
those contacts to participate in the RFx. Uninvited suppliers can request to be included
in the RFx, if you check the box for Publish Notice to All Vendors on the Schedule
page and set the date to publish the notice.

Note: You can use the Workbench To Do List channel to accept or deny supplier
requests to participate in an open RFx, if you are designated as a Vendor Manager in
your Security Profile.

On the RFx Vendors page, you can:

` Add one or more supplier contacts to an RFx
` Edit a supplier contact’s information
` Create a supplier record
` Add supplier information, such as disclosure rules and event terms
` Reinstate an excluded supplier to an RFx round

Related Topics
Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx
Creating a supplier record within an RFx
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an RFx
Creating a supplier record
Adding supplier disclosure rules to an RFx
Adding supplier event terms to an RFx
Reinstating a supplier in an RFx round
Creating an RFx

440 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Vendors page

Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx

When you add one or more supplier contacts to an RFx, you invite the companies of
those contacts to participate in the RFx. Uninvited suppliers can request to be included
in the RFx, if you check the box for Publish Notice to All Vendors on the Schedule
page and set the date to publish the notice.

To add one or more supplier contacts:

1 On the RFx Vendors page under Invited Vendors, click Add.
2 In the Lookup box, search for the desired contact.
3 Check the boxes for any supplier you want to invite to the sourcing event.
4 Click OK.
5 Specify the disclosure rules for how much competitive information to share with
suppliers.
6 Optionally, under Event Terms, add an event term.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can edit supplier contact information by clicking the Edit icon on the Vendors
page.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record within an RFx
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an RFx
Creating a supplier record
Adding supplier disclosure rules to an RFx
Adding supplier event terms to an RFx
Reinstating a supplier in an RFx round
Creating an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 441

RFx Vendors page RFx

Creating a supplier record within an RFx

When you create a supplier record within an RFx, it is stored in the Vendor module,
where you can add further details as needed.

Note: You must have the appropriate rights to create a supplier record on the Vendors
page.

To create a supplier record:

1 On the RFx Vendors page, click Add.
2 In the dialog box, click Create.
3 In the dialog box, enter supplier information and click OK.
4 Optionally, select the supplier you added and click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

After creating a supplier record within an RFx, you must perform the following
additional steps in the Vendor module to enable the supplier to log in to Frictionless®
SRM:
1 Click Vendor Management in the navigation bar and select All Vendors from the
Vendors submenu.
2 On the Vendors List page, click the name of the supplier company for which you
added a supplier record.
3 Click the Contacts tab.
4 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.

5 Click the Edit icon for the supplier contact you added in the RFx.
6 Click the Account Management tab.
7 Check the Enable User to Login box. Checking this box enables the new supplier
contact to log in. This box will not be checked by default.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
9 Optionally, click the Header tab and remove the checkmark from the Preliminary
box. If this box is checked, the supplier will only be able to participate in the RFx for
which the supplier record was created. Removing the checkmark will add the
supplier to the list of active suppliers for all sourcing events.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx

442 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Vendors page

Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an RFx

Creating a supplier record
Adding supplier disclosure rules to an RFx
Adding supplier event terms to an RFx
Reinstating a supplier in an RFx round
Creating an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 443

RFx Vendors page RFx

Adding supplier disclosure rules to an RFx

One of the ways you compare supplier RFx responses is by comparing their scores. You
can use disclosure rules to specify how much competitive information about scores to
share with suppliers.

To add supplier disclosure rules:

1 On the RFx Vendors page under Rank, select a disclosure rule. For details, see Field
help for RFx disclosure rules for suppliers.
2 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an RFx
Creating a supplier record
Editing a supplier record
Field help for RFx disclosure rules for suppliers
Adding supplier event terms to an RFx
Reinstating a supplier in an RFx round
Creating an RFx

444 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Vendors page

Field help for RFx disclosure rules for suppliers

One of the ways you compare supplier RFx responses is by comparing their scores. You
can specify how much competitive information about scores to share with suppliers by
selecting one of the following disclosure rules:
` Do not disclose rank: Does not show any competitive information to suppliers.
Suppliers can see only their own RFx responses and cannot see how their RFx
responses measure against those of other suppliers.
` By quartile: Ranks suppliers by quartile. Suppliers can see how their RFx
responses measure against other suppliers’ RFx responses in a specific quartile.
This ranking choice is not recommended if there are fewer than four suppliers.
` Do not show total number participating: Ranks suppliers numerically.
Suppliers can see their rank positions but cannot see the total number of suppliers.
` Show total number participating: Lists suppliers by rank with total number of
participating suppliers. Suppliers can see their positions in the ranking and see the
total number of suppliers.

Related Topics
Adding supplier disclosure rules to an RFx
Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx
Creating a supplier record
Creating an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 445

RFx Vendors page RFx

Adding supplier event terms to an RFx

Event terms specify one or more conditions a supplier must accept to participate in the
RFx.

To add supplier event terms:

1 On the RFx Vendors page under Event Terms, click Add.
2 In the dialog box, fill in the fields with event terms information.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also click Import from Library to import standard event terms from a
library. For details, see Importing a library component.

Related Topics
Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an RFx
Creating a supplier record
Editing a supplier record
Adding supplier disclosure rules to an RFx
Reinstating a supplier in an RFx round
Creating an RFx

446 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Vendors page

Reinstating a supplier in an RFx round

You can reinstate a supplier you excluded from an RFx round before you open the
round for response. However, the supplier’s previous responses are not considered for
an award.
Suppliers are excluded from a round in the wizard used to create the new round.

Note: The RFx must be in the Created phase to reinstate a supplier.

To reinstate an excluded supplier to an RFx round:

1 On the Vendors page, click the Edit icon for the supplier to reinstate.
2 In the dialog box, clear the Exclude this vendor checkbox.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar. The supplier is reinstated to the RFx.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Specifying suppliers for a new RFx round
Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx
Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an RFx
Creating a supplier record within an RFx
Creating a supplier record
Editing a supplier record
Adding supplier disclosure rules to an RFx
Adding supplier event terms to an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 447

RFx Vendors page RFx

Accepting or denying a supplier request to participate in an RFx

Uninvited suppliers can request to be included in the RFx, if you check the box for
Publish Notice to All Vendors on the Schedule page and set the date to publish the
notice.
If you have the appropriate rights, you see the supplier’s request to participate in the
To Do List channel on the Workbench.

To accept or deny a supplier’s invitation request:

1 In the To Do List channel on the Workbench, click the link for Vendor Invite
Requests. You see a list of supplier requests.
2 Click the supplier request to consider. On the Summary page, you see fields you
can view but not edit. These fields show event, supplier, and approval information.
3 On the toolbar, do one of the following:
■ Click the Approve button.
■ Click the Deny button.
Under Approval Information, you see the new status for the request. The supplier
sees the status of the request in the Upcoming Events channel on the Vendor
Workbench.

Related Topics
Adding one or more supplier contacts to an RFx
Creating a supplier record within an RFx
Creating a supplier record
Editing a supplier record
Editing an RFx
Adding supplier disclosure rules to an RFx
Adding supplier event terms to an RFx

448 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Information page

RFx Information page

Information sections typically provide boilerplate information about your company and
the RFx. For example, you might include information sections for nondisclosure
agreements, warranties, your company’s procurement practices, instructions for the
proposal, and so forth.

On the Information page, you can:

` Add and edit an information section, such as policies, instructions, and legal
information
` Import an information section from a library
` Delete information sections
` Reorder information sections

Field help for RFx Information page

Add: Click to add an information section. On the Info Section page, fill in the Title
field, enter or paste the information in the text box, and click the Save button in the
toolbar.
Import from Library: Click to import a standard information section from a library.
Delete Selected: Select one or more information sections and click this button to
delete them. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Reorder: Click to reorder the list of information sections.

Related Topics
Adding an RFx information section
Creating an RFx
Importing a library component
Reordering items in a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 449

RFx Information page RFx

Adding an RFx information section

Information sections typically provide boilerplate information about your company and
the RFx. For example, you might include information sections for nondisclosure
agreements, warranties, your company’s procurement practices, instructions for the
proposal, and so forth.

To add an information section:

1 On the Information page, click Add.
2 On the Info Section page, enter a title and add content to the information section.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
4 On the Information page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can edit an information section by clicking its Edit icon on the Information
page.

Related Topics
Importing a library component
Creating an RFx

450 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Specs page

RFx Specs page

Event specifications are additional RFx information that you provide to the supplier.

On the Specs page, you can:

` Add and edit event specifications
` Import event specifications from a CSV file
` Reorder event specifications

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding an RFx event specification
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Reordering items in a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 451

RFx Specs page RFx

Adding an RFx event specification

Event specifications are additional RFx information that you provide to the supplier.

To add an event specification:

1 On the Specs page, click Add.
2 In the Specification dialog box, fill in the fields.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Importing a library component
Reordering items in a list

452 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

RFx Questions page

You can add questions to an RFx about suppliers’ products, services, procedures,
companies, and so forth. The questions can be external and viewed by suppliers and
you and your collaborators, or they can be internal and viewed only by you and your
collaborators. Associated with the RFx as a whole, questions are organized in groups
within sections. You can add and edit sections, groups, and questions.
Questions can be scored so that you can make side-by-side comparisons with suppliers’
responses.
For information about question types, see RFx Question Summary page.

On the Questions page, you can:

` Add and edit a question
` Adjust section weights
` Set questions as ready for release
` Import a list of questions from an external file
` Reorder questions

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Editing an RFx
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a question within an existing section to an RFx
Editing a question for an RFx
Adjusting section weights for an RFx
Importing RFx questions from an Excel file
Reordering items in a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 453

RFx Questions page RFx

Adjusting section weights for an RFx

The total weight for all sections in an RFx must equal 100, if scoring is enabled.

To adjust weights for all sections:

1 On the Questions page, click Adjust Section Weights.
2 In the Adjust Section Weights dialog box, type a numeric value in the Question
Weight field or move the slider to an appropriate position in the Scale field for a
section.
3 Optionally, check the Weight Locked box for a section.
Note: If a section weight is locked, that weight does not change if you adjust all
section weights to 100.
4 Click Sum Weights to see the total of all section weights.
5 If the total weight for all sections is more or less than 100, click Adjust to 100.
The software allocates proportional weights for all sections that are not locked.
6 Click OK.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Specifying preferences and scoring methods for an RFx question
Importing RFx questions from an Excel file
Adjusting question weights for an RFx

454 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

Importing RFx questions from an Excel file

RFx question import and export enables you to edit questions off-line and then
re-import them. This feature also allows you to share questions by exporting them from
a template or RFx and importing them into another template or RFx.
You can only import new questions and sections into an RFx. To replace existing
questions and sections, delete the original versions from the RFx before importing the
new versions. You cannot import new questions into an existing section.
For information on exporting RFx questions, see Exporting RFx questions to an
Excel file.

To import RFx questions from an Excel file:

1 On the Questions page, click Import.

2 In the Import Wizard dialog box, click the Lookup icon for Upload Import
File. Browse to select the file to import and click OK.
3 Optionally, check the File Preview box to preview the imported questions.
4 Click Next.
5 If you selected File Preview, review the questions in the Import Wizard: CSV
Preview dialog box and click Next.
6 Monitor the import status and progress in the Import Wizard: Importing dialog box.
When the Percent Complete reaches 100, click Finish.
The questions are displayed on the RFx Questions page.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Editing an RFx
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a question within an existing section to an RFx
Editing a question for an RFx
Adjusting section weights for an RFx
Exporting RFx questions to an Excel file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 455

RFx Questions page RFx

RFx Question Summary page

You can add questions to an RFx about suppliers’ products, services, procedures,
companies, and so forth. The questions can be external and viewed by suppliers and
you and your collaborators, or can be internal and viewed only by you and your
collaborators. Associated with the RFx as a whole, questions are organized in groups
within sections. You can add and edit sections, groups, and questions.
Questions can be scored so that you can make side-by-side comparisons with suppliers’
responses.
When you create a question, you first select a question type. The question type
determines the format of the supplier’s response. The question types you can select
are:
` Free Text: This question type allows responses of up to 2000 characters.
` Big Text: This question type allows responses up to 2 GB in size. The text can
contain formatting such as bold, underline, italics, and font choices. The text can
also be designated as HTML. A system property determines whether this question
type or the Big Text question type is available.
` Plain Text: This question types allows responses in plain text, up to 2GB in size. A
system property determines whether this question type or the Big Text question
type is available.
` File Attachment
` Contract Clause: This question type allows you to select a contract clause from
the clause library to verify that a supplier agrees to its terms. This enables you to
begin contract negotiation during the RFx negotiation process.
` Number
` Yes or No
` Multiple Choice
` Quantity
` Cost or Charge
` Date
` Time
` Date and Time
` Table-Based: This question type allows you to simplify complicated requests for
information by putting the requested information in a table format. This format also
makes it easier for suppliers to answer questions.
Clicking Add after selecting this question type will display a wizard that enables you
to create a new table question or import table-based questions from a library.

456 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

` System-Answered: This question type enables the SRM software, which has
relevant stored data, to answer the question. An example might be a question
about a supplier contact name.

On the Question Summary page, you can:

` Add and edit a question and a section
` Add and edit a question in an existing section
` Add and edit a group for questions within a section
` Import questions from a library
` Reorder questions

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Editing an RFx
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a question within an existing section to an RFx
Editing a question for an RFx
Adding a contract clause question to an RFx
Including RFx supplier question responses in a contract document
Adding a table-based question to an RFx
Importing an RFx table-based question from a library
Adding a group to an RFx question section
Field help for Question dialog box in RFx.
Editing a group within an RFx question section
Importing a library component
Reordering items in a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 457

RFx Questions page RFx

Adding a question and a new section to an RFx

Questions are organized in groups within sections. You can add and edit sections,
groups, and questions.
You always add questions to a group within a section, whether it is the default section
or one that you create.

To add a question and new section to an RFx:

1 On the Questions page, specify whether to enable scoring, and under Question
Sections, click Add.
2 On the Question Summary page, fill in the general fields, including the one for
Question Section Name.
3 Select a view from the view drop-down list.
4 Optionally, click Add Group to add a group to the current section instead of using
the default group.
5 Select a question type from the Question Type drop-down list.
6 Click Add.
7 In the Question dialog box, fill in the fields. For more information, see Field help
for Question dialog box in RFx.
8 Click OK.
9 Repeat steps 6 through 8 to add more questions.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
11 Repeat steps 1 through 10 to add another section.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also import questions from a library. For details, see Importing a
library component.

To go to another section:
` Select a section from the sections drop-down list in the toolbar and click Go.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a question within an existing section to an RFx
Editing a question for an RFx
Adding a contract clause question to an RFx
Including RFx supplier question responses in a contract document
Adding a table-based question to an RFx

458 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

Importing an RFx table-based question from a library

Field help for Question dialog box in RFx
Adding a group to an RFx question section
Reordering items in a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 459

RFx Questions page RFx

Adding a question within an existing section to an RFx

Questions are organized in groups within sections. You can add and edit sections,
groups, and questions. You always add questions to a group within a section, whether it
is the default section or one that you create.

To add a question within an existing section:

1 On the Questions page, specify whether to enable scoring.

2 Click the Edit icon for the section in which to add a question.
3 On the Question Summary page, fill in the fields and select a view from the view
drop-down list.
4 Select a question type from the Question Type drop-down list.
5 Optionally, click Add Group to add a group to the current section instead of using
the default group.
6 Click Add.
7 In the Question dialog box, fill in the fields. For more information, see Field help
for Question dialog box in RFx.
8 Click OK.
9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 to add another question.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
11 On the Questions page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also import questions from a library. For details, see Importing a
library component.

To go to another section:
` Select a section from the sections drop-down list in the toolbar and click Go.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Editing a question for an RFx
Adding a table-based question to an RFx
Including RFx supplier question responses in a contract document
Adding a contract clause question to an RFx
Importing an RFx table-based question from a library
Field help for Question dialog box in RFx

460 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

Adding a group to an RFx question section

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 461

RFx Questions page RFx

Adding a contract clause question to an RFx

A contract clause question displays contract clause content selected from the clause
library. You can use the question to verify that a supplier agrees to the terms of the
clause. This enables you to begin contract negotiation during the RFx negotiation
process, when your organization has the most leverage. In the RFx response, the
supplier can accept the terms or refuse them and propose alternate terms.

To add a contract clause question:

1 Do one of the following:

■ To add a contract clause question to an existing section, click the Edit icon
for the section on the Questions page.
■ To add a contract clause question to a new section, click Add on the Questions
page and fill in question section information on the Question Summary page.
2 On the Question Summary page, select Contract Clause from the question type
drop-down list.
3 Optionally, click Add Group to add a group to the current section instead of using
the default group.
4 Click Add.
5 In the Question dialog box, do the following:
a In the Question text box, type the question text. For this question type, you
might use a question such as “Do you agree with the following terms?”
b For the Clause Content field, click Select to select a clause from the clause
library. In the Clause Content Selection wizard, select the clause to include and
click Finish.
c Fill in the basic fields as needed. For more information, see Field help for
Question dialog box in RFx.
d Click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a question within an existing section to an RFx
Editing a question for an RFx
Including RFx supplier question responses in a contract document
Adding a table-based question to an RFx

462 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

Importing an RFx table-based question from a library

Field help for Question dialog box in RFx
Adding a group to an RFx question section

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 463

RFx Questions page RFx

Including RFx supplier question responses in a contract

document
You can set up an RFx question to prompt a supplier for a response that can be used as
a contract clause. When a contract document is generated, the supplier response can
be included in the contract. For example, you might set up a question that asks for the
supplier’s financial information and include the response in the final contract.
You can only include RFx supplier question responses by creating a master agreement
from the RFx award and then generating the contract document from this master
agreement. This ensures that all RFx award information is captured appropriately.
The process of setting up and including such a question requires a number of steps
across several modules.

Creating a Variable for the Vendor Response

You create a variable in the Variable Library that becomes a placeholder for the supplier
response you want to include in your contract.
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Variable Library from
the Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also add a variable by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of the
page, selecting Variable Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list, and
clicking OK.
2 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
3 Click Add.
4 In the Variable Definition dialog box, fill in the fields as follows:
■ In the Display Name field, type a name for the variable, such as RFx
Response.
■ In the Token field, enter the token to use for this variable, in the following
format:
<%letters.numbers%>
For example:
<%RFx.Response%>
■ In the Source Object field, select RFx from the drop-down list.
■ In the Variable Type field, select RFx Question from the drop-down list.
■ Check the Remove for blank values box to allow contract generation to
remove the token from the generated contract when the system has no
corresponding data to substitute. For example, this might happen if you map
the variable to a response that is not required, and the supplier does not
provide a response.
■ Click OK.

464 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Inserting the Variable Tag in a Contract Clause

Next, insert the variable you created in a Microsoft Word document.

1 Create a Microsoft Word document that contains the desired text for the clause that
will include the supplier response.
2 Copy the value from the Token field of the Variable Definition dialog box and
paste it into the Microsoft Word clause document. Be sure to paste the token
exactly where the supplier response should be included.
3 Save the document.

Incorporating the Clause into a Contract Document Template

You incorporate the Microsoft Word document you created into a Frictionless SRM
contract clause, add the clause to a section, and add the section to a contract document
template.
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Clause List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also create a clause by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of the
page, selecting Clause Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list, and
clicking OK.
2 On the Clause List page, click Create.
3 On the Contract Clause Header page, type a name for the clause in the Display
Name field.
4 Under Content Options, click Add and follow the steps in the wizard to add the
Microsoft Word clause document you created.
5 Change the clause phase to Approved. For details, see Changing an RFx phase.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
7 Add the clause to a section. For details, see Adding a clause to a contract
section.
8 Add the section to a contract document template. For details, see Adding a
section to a contract document template.

Create an RFx Question and Associate the Variable

You next create a new RFx question and link it to the variable you created. You can also
link a variable to an existing RFx question.
1 Open an RFx and click Edit in the toolbar.
2 Click the Questions tab and do one of the following:

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 465

RFx Questions page RFx

■ To add a contract clause question to an existing section, click the Edit icon
for the section on the Questions page.
■ To add a contract clause question to a new section, click Add on the Questions
page and fill in question section information on the Question Summary page.
3 On the Question Summary page, select a type such as Free Text from the question
type drop-down list.
4 Optionally, click Add Group to add a group to the current section instead of using
the default group.
5 Click Add.
6 In the Question dialog box, select the name of the variable you created from the
Contract Variable drop-down list.
7 Fill in the rest of the fields in the Question dialog box. For details, see Field help
for Question dialog box in RFx.
8 Click OK.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Completing the RFx, Creating a Master Agreement and Generating a Contract

To complete the process, finish the RFx and create a master agreement and a contract
document.
1 Complete the RFx as needed, receive supplier responses, and award the RFx to one
or more suppliers.
2 Create a master agreement from an RFx award scenario.
3 Generate a contract document from the master agreement. The contract
generation wizard displays the variable you created on the Variable
Confirmation/Override page under RFx Question Variables.
During contract generation, the variable you defined is replaced by the actual
supplier response. The final contract document displays that response as part of its
content.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a question within an existing section to an RFx
Editing a question for an RFx
Adding a contract clause question to an RFx
Adding a table-based question to an RFx

466 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

Importing an RFx table-based question from a library

Field help for Question dialog box in RFx
Adding a group to an RFx question section

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 467

RFx Questions page RFx

Adding a table-based question to an RFx

Table-based questions allow you to simplify complicated requests for information by
putting the requested information in a table format. This format also makes it easier for
suppliers to answer questions.
For example, you might ask a car rental agency to provide rates for various classes of
cars in a number of countries. In this case, you might enter the car classes as column
headers and the countries as row labels to create a table similar to the following:

Compact Intermediate Full Size

US
UK
Germany

You can create table-based questions when creating an RFx, or import them from a
library. You can only import table-based questions if they have been created in the RFx
Table Design Library. For information on importing table-based questions, see
Importing an RFx table-based question from a library.

To add a table-based question:

1 Do one of the following:

■ To add a table-based question to an existing section, click the Edit icon for
the section on the Questions page.
■ To add a table-based question to a new section, click Add on the Questions
page and fill in question section information on the Question Summary page.
2 On the Question Summary page, select Table Based from the question type
drop-down list.
3 Optionally, click Add Group to add a group to the current section instead of using
the default group.
4 Click Add.
5 In the Table Based Question Creation wizard, select Create New Table Question.
6 In the fields that appear, type the number of rows and columns to use in the table,
select a default data type for the responses from the Default Data Type
drop-down list, and click Create.
7 In the Question dialog box, fill in the basic fields. For more information, see Field
help for Question dialog box in RFx.

468 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

8 Under Question Setup, do the following:

■ Type column names for the table in the Column Headers fields. These are the
attributes about which you are requesting information from the supplier (such
as car classes in the car rental example above).
■ In the Attribute Type column, select a data type for the response value for
each attribute.
■ In the Response Required column, indicate whether a response is required
for each attribute. If you check this box, the supplier must enter values for this
entire column before moving the RFx to Firm status.
Note: If you designate the question as Response Required, but you do not
designate any attributes as Response Required, a supplier must enter a
response for at least one cell in each table row.

■ Optionally, click the Edit icon next to a column header name to add further
information about the attribute in the Table Attribute dialog box.
For example, if the Attribute Type is Number Attribute, you can specify a
minimum and maximum value for the attribute, and indicate that a total should
be calculated for the column.
■ Type row names for the table in the Row Labels fields (such as countries in the
car rental example above).
■ Under Question Preview, click Refresh Table to preview the table you created.
■ Optionally, to switch the orientation of the table rows and columns, click
Change Table Orientation. When you change the orientation, the table row

labels become the column headers. You can then click the Edit icon next to
a row label name under Row Labels to add or change attribute information in
the Table Attribute dialog box.
9 Click OK.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Editing a question for an RFx
Adding a contract clause question to an RFx
Including RFx supplier question responses in a contract document
Importing an RFx table-based question from a library
Field help for Question dialog box in RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 469

RFx Questions page RFx

Adding a group to an RFx question section

470 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

Importing an RFx table-based question from a library

Table-based questions allow you to simplify complicated requests for information by
putting the requested information in a table format. This format also makes it easier for
suppliers to answer questions.
For example, you might ask a car rental agency to provide rates for various classes of
cars in a number of countries. In this case, you might enter the car classes as column
labels (attributes) and the countries as row labels to create a table similar to the
following:

Compact Intermediate Full Size

US
UK
Germany

You can create table-based questions when creating an RFx, or import them from a
library. You can only import table-based questions if they have been created in the RFx
Table Design Library.

To add a table-based question:

1 Do one of the following:

■ To add a table-based question to an existing section, click the Edit icon for
the section on the Questions page.
■ To add a table-based question to a new section, click Add on the Questions
page and fill in question section information on the Question Summary page.
2 On the Question Summary page, select Table Based from the question type
drop-down list.
3 Optionally, click Add Group to add a group to the current section instead of using
the default group.
4 Click Add.
5 In the Table Based Question Creation wizard, select Create from Table Design
Library, click the Lookup icon to select a table design, and click Next.
6 In the Question dialog box, fill in the basic fields. For more information, see Field
help for Question dialog box in RFx.
7 Under Question Setup, select the rows and columns to include in the table-based
question.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 471

RFx Questions page RFx

Note: You can select the attributes to include in imported table-based questions,
but you cannot edit these attributes.
8 Under Question Preview, click Refresh Table to preview the table you have
created.
9 Click OK.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Editing a question for an RFx
Adding a contract clause question to an RFx
Including RFx supplier question responses in a contract document
Adding a table-based question to an RFx
Field help for Question dialog box in RFx
Adding a group to an RFx question section

472 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

Editing a question for an RFx

Questions are organized in groups within sections. You can add and edit sections,
groups, and questions.
You always add questions to a group within a section, whether it is the default section
or one that you create.

To edit a question:

1 On the Questions page, click the Edit icon for the section containing the
question to edit.
2 On the Question Summary page, edit any fields.

3 Click the Edit icon for the question to edit.

4 In the Question dialog box, edit any fields. For more information, see Field help
for Question dialog box in RFx.
5 Click OK.
6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to edit another question.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

To go to another section:
` Select a section from the sections drop-down list in the toolbar and click Go.

Related Topics
Editing an RFx
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a question within an existing section to an RFx
Adding a contract clause question to an RFx
Including RFx supplier question responses in a contract document
Adding a table-based question to an RFx
Importing an RFx table-based question from a library
Field help for Question dialog box in RFx
Editing a group within an RFx question section

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 473

RFx Questions page RFx

Field help for Question dialog box in RFx

The Question dialog box appears when you click Add or the Edit icon on the
Question Summary page.

Note: The fields that appear in the Question dialog box are based on the question type
selected on the Question Summary page. All fields do not appear for every type.

Question: Type the text of the question. There is a 2000-character limit for question
text.

Change Question Type: Click this button to change the question type you selected on
the Questions page. In the dialog box, select a new question type from the drop-down
list and click OK.

Clause Content: Click Select to select a clause from the clause library and incorporate
its content into the question. This field appears only for the Contract Clause question
type. This question type enables you to verify that the supplier agrees with the terms of
the clause.

Insertion Point: Indicates the group in which the question is created and displayed.

Contributes to Total Cost: Check this box to indicate that the question answer will
contribute to the Total Cost of the RFx, which is the total cost to be paid by the buyer.
(Total Cost includes the Total Price charged by the supplier, plus any additional
associated costs.)
If you check this box, you can enter the additional associated costs for this question on
the Preferences page. For details, see Specifying preferences and scoring methods
for an RFx question.

Contributes to Total Price: This field applies only to a question of the Cost or Charge
type. Check this box to indicate that the question answer will contribute to the Total
Price of the RFx, which is the price to be charged by the supplier.
If you check this box, the answer value entered by the supplier will be added to the
sum of the line item prices to calculate the Total Price of the RFx.

Response Required: Check this box to require that suppliers answer this question.

Contract Variable: Click Select to select a contract variable. This enables you to use
a variable to insert the supplier’s response to this question into a contract clause.

Description for Vendors: Type the question description that will be seen by suppliers.

474 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

Description for Collaborators: Type any additional information to be seen only by

collaborators. This field is not displayed to suppliers.

Decision Factor: From the drop-down list, select a value to allow you to prioritize and
categorize this question.
The Decision Factor can be used to compare suppliers’ answers from round to round.

Decision Factor Category: From the drop-down list, select the category for the
Decision Factor you selected.

Question Setup
This section appears only for questions whose type is Table Based.
Table-based questions allow you to simplify complicated requests for information by
putting the requested information in a table format. This format also makes it easier for
suppliers to answer questions.
For example, you might ask a car rental agency to provide rates for various classes of
cars in a number of countries. In this case, you might enter the car classes as column
labels (attributes) and the countries as row labels to create a table similar to the
following:

Compact Intermediate Full Size

US
UK
Germany

Column Headers: Type column names for the table. These are the attributes about
which you are requesting information from the supplier (such as car classes in the car
rental example above).
Note: If you click Change Table Orientation under Question Preview, the Row
Labels replace the Column Headers as attribute names.

Attribute Type: Select a data type for the response value for each attribute.

Note: You can only edit attributes in table-based questions you create in an RFx. You
cannot edit attributes for questions imported from a library.

Data types include the following:

` Text Attribute: The supplier enters a text response for this attribute.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 475

RFx Questions page RFx

` Number Attribute: The supplier enters a numeric response for this attribute.

Click the Edit icon next to the column header name to add the following
information in the Table Attribute dialog box:
■ Totals: Check this box to indicate that a total should be calculated for this
attribute column.
■ Minimum: Type the minimum value that the supplier can enter for this
attribute.
■ Maximum: Type the maximum value that the supplier can enter for this
attribute.
` Yes or No Attribute: The supplier selects one of two responses (by default, Yes or
No) for this attribute.

Click the Edit icon next to the column header name to add the following
information in the Table Attribute dialog box:
■ Yes: Replace this label with another response.
■ No: Replace this label with another response.
` Multiple Choice Attribute: The supplier selects among multiple choices for this
attribute.

Click the Edit icon next to the column header name to add the following
information in the Table Attribute dialog box:
■ Multiple Choice Options: Enter the options for the supplier to select. To
create additional options, click Add.
■ Display Method: Select whether to display these options in a drop-down list or
as radio buttons.
` Quantity Attribute: The supplier enters a quantity for this attribute.

Click the Edit icon next to the column header name to add the following
information in the Table Attribute dialog box:
■ Unit of Measure: Select a unit of measure for the quantity from the
drop-down list.
■ Minimum: Type the minimum quantity that the supplier can enter for this
attribute.
■ Maximum: Type the maximum quantity that the supplier can enter for this
attribute.
` Cost or Charge Attribute: The supplier enters a cost or charge for this attribute.

476 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

Click the Edit icon next to the column header name to add the following
information in the Table Attribute dialog box:
■ Totals: Check this box to indicate that a total should be calculated for this
attribute column.
■ Minimum: Type the minimum cost that the supplier can enter for this
attribute.
■ Maximum: Type the maximum cost that the supplier can enter for this
attribute.
` Date Attribute: The supplier enters a date response for this attribute.
` Time Attribute: The supplier enters a time response for this attribute.
` Date and Time Attribute: The supplier enters a date and time response for this
attribute.

Response Required: Check this box to indicate that a response is required for the
attribute. If you check this box, the supplier must enter values for this entire column
before moving the RFx to Firm status. For questions imported from a library, this value
is predetermined and the field is read-only.
Note: If you designate the question as Response Required, and do not designate
any attributes as Response Required, a supplier must enter a response for at least
one cell in each table row.

Row Labels: Type row names for the table (such as countries in the example above).

Question Preview

Refresh Table: Click this button to preview the table you have created.
Change Table Orientation: Click this button to reverse the orientation of the table
rows and columns.
When you change the orientation, the table row labels become the attribute names.

You can then click the Edit icon next to a row label name under Row Labels to add
or change attribute information in the Table Attribute dialog box.

Related Topics
Editing an RFx
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a question within an existing section to an RFx
Editing a question for an RFx
Adding a contract clause question to an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 477

RFx Questions page RFx

Including RFx supplier question responses in a contract document

Adding a table-based question to an RFx
Importing an RFx table-based question from a library
Editing a group within an RFx question section

478 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

Adding a group to an RFx question section

Questions are organized in groups within sections. You can add and edit sections,
groups, and questions.
You always add questions to a group within a section, whether it is the default section
or one that you create.

To add a group:
1 On the Question Summary page, click Add Group.
2 In the dialog box, fill in the fields.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

To go to another section:
` Select a section from the sections drop-down list in the toolbar and click Go.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a question within an existing section to an RFx
Editing a group within an RFx question section
Reordering items in a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 479

RFx Questions page RFx

Editing a group within an RFx question section

Questions are organized in groups within sections. You can add and edit sections,
groups, and questions.
You always add questions to a group within a section, whether it is the default section
or one that you create.

To edit a group:

1 On the Question Summary page, click the Edit icon for the group to edit.
2 In the dialog box, edit any fields.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

To go to another section:
` Select a section from the sections drop-down list in the toolbar and click Go.

Related Topics
Editing an RFx
Adding a group to an RFx question section
Editing a question for an RFx
Adding a question and a new section to an RFx
Adding a question within an existing section to an RFx

480 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

RFx Section Info page

On the Section Info page, you can add and edit information about a section, including
choosing the visibility of the section.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding section information for an RFx question

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 481

RFx Questions page RFx

Adding section information for an RFx question

1 On the Section Info page, fill in the fields, including selecting the visibility of the
section.
2 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx

482 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

RFx Preview page

On the Preview page, you can view the way questions appear to suppliers.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 483

RFx Questions page RFx

RFx Preferences page

A preference represents your first choice for an answer to a question. Preferences and
scoring methods enable you to score questions so that you can compare suppliers on a
side-by-side basis. There are two ways to score questions:
` Specify a preference and scoring method
` Select Manually Scored as the scoring method when you do not specify a
preference
After specifying preferences and scoring methods, you set weights for questions.
Weights let you establish relative values for different questions and generate scores for
each supplier.

On the Preferences page, you can:

` Specify preferences and scoring methods
` Adjust weights for all questions within a section

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Specifying preferences and scoring methods for an RFx question
Adjusting question weights for an RFx
Adjusting section weights for an RFx

484 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

Specifying preferences and scoring methods for an RFx question

A preference represents your first choice for an answer to a question. Preferences and
scoring methods enable you to score questions so that you can compare suppliers on a
side-by-side basis. There are two ways to score questions:
` Specify a preference and scoring method
` Select Manually Scored as the scoring method when you do not specify a
preference
After specifying preferences and scoring methods, you set weights for questions.
Weights let you establish relative values for different questions and generate scores for
each supplier.

To specify preferences:
1 On the Preferences page, specify your preference for a question, whether and how
to score the question, and whether suppliers must meet your preference.
2 If applicable, enter additional costs as follows:
a To specify a single set of associated costs, regardless of quantity, enter the
costs in the Associated Costs field. This field only appears if you checked
Contributes to Total Cost in the Question dialog box for this question. For
details, see Field help for Question dialog box in RFx.
b For quantity-based questions, to specify associated costs based on quantity,
enter a minimum and a maximum value in the Low and High fields. These
values must be within the minimum and maximum parameters you set in the
Question dialog box for this question.
For example, you might specify a low value of 1 and a high value of 100.
c Click the Cost Options button to specify quantity break points. In the dialog
box, enter the number of break points and click OK.
To continue the above example, you might enter a value of 2 for two quantity
ranges, 1-50 units and 51-100 units.
d In the Associated Costs fields, enter the associated costs for each indicated
quantity range.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each question in a section.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

To go to another section:
` Select a section from the sections drop-down list in the toolbar and click Go.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 485

RFx Questions page RFx

Adjusting question weights for an RFx

Adjusting section weights for an RFx

486 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Questions page

Adjusting question weights for an RFx

The total weight for all questions in a section must equal 100.

To adjust question weights:

1 On the Preferences page, click Adjust Question Weights at the bottom of the
page.
2 In the Adjust Question Weights dialog box, type a numeric value in the Question
Weight field or move the slider to an appropriate position in the Scale field for a
question.
3 Optionally, check the Weight Locked box for a question.
Note: If a question weight is locked, that weight does not change if you adjust all
question weights within a section to 100.
4 Click Sum Weights to see the total of all question weights within a section.
5 If the total weight for all questions in the section is more or less than 100, click
Adjust to 100. The software allocates proportional weights for all questions that
are not locked.
6 Click OK.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

To go to another section:
` Select a section from the sections drop-down list in the toolbar and click Go.

Note: You must adjust question weights in each section.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Specifying preferences and scoring methods for an RFx question
Adjusting section weights for an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 487

RFx Line Items page RFx

RFx Line Items page

Line items are the goods and services you want to purchase. On the Line Items page,
you can add both line items and materials. In Frictionless SRM, line items are supplies
that are not directly related to the production of finished products, such as office
supplies, machine parts, etc. Materials are direct materials that are part of a final
product. Materials are created in Setup and can be imported into an RFx, auction, or
master agreement.
You select a view for showing the line item information. Each view shows different
information for the line item. You can add line items only in the Basic view. You can edit
a line item in any view. You can specify line item details only when you edit a line item.

On the Line Items page, you can:

` Add and edit line items
` Add and edit materials
` Add and edit bills of materials (BOMs)
` Delete selected line items
` Specify tiered pricing or price components for line items
` Specify a line item view
` Specify settings for line items
` Assign line items and suppliers to display groups
` Import line items from a CSV file
` Export line items to a CSV file
` Reorder line items

Field help for the Line Items page

Add: Click to add a line item to the RFx.

Add Materials: Click to add a material to the RFx.
Delete Selected: Select one or more line items and materials and click this button to
remove them from the RFx.
Add BOM: Click to add a BOM to the RFx.
Import: Click to import line items from a CSV file.
Export: Click to export line items from a CSV file.
Reorder: Click to reorder line items.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx

488 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Line Items page

Adding a line item to an RFx

Adding a material to an RFx
Specifying line items for a new RFx round
Specifying tiered pricing for RFx line items
Specifying an RFx line item view
Assigning RFx line items and suppliers to display groups
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Exporting line items as a CSV file
Reordering items in a list
Deleting items from a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 489

RFx Line Items page RFx

Specifying an RFx line item view

Line items represent the goods and services you want to purchase. You can select a
view for schedule events. In each view, you can add or edit as well as view different
information for line items.

In the Basic view, you can:

` Add and edit a line item
` Add and edit materials
` Add and edit bills of materials (BOMs)
` Delete selected line items

In the Attributes for Buyer Values view, you can:

` Add and edit values for attributes you specified in the Settings dialog box
` Add and edit bills of materials (BOMs)

In the Display Groups view, you can:

` Edit the group, specified in the Settings dialog box, in which the line item is located
` Add and edit bills of materials (BOMs)

In the Cost/Savings view, you can:

` Add and edit current and target costs
` Add and edit bills of materials (BOMs)

In the Delivery Schedule view, you can:

` Edit delivery items, you specified in the Settings dialog box
` Add and edit bills of materials (BOMs)

In the Unit Price view, you can:

` Add and edit unit price and effective dates

In the Price Components view, you can:

` Add and edit contracted quantities and pricing structure s

In all views, you can:

` Import line items from a CSV file
` Export line items to a CSV file
` Reorder line items

490 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Line Items page

To specify an RFx line item view:

` On the Line Item Detail page under Line Items, select an RFx line item view from
the drop-down list.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a line item to an RFx
Adding a material to an RFx
Adding a BOM to an RFx
Editing a BOM in an RFx
Specifying line items for a new RFx round
Specifying tiered pricing for RFx line items
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Exporting line items as a CSV file
Reordering items in a list
Deleting items from a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 491

RFx Line Items page RFx

Adding a line item to an RFx

On the Line Items page, you can add both line items and materials to an RFx. In
Frictionless SRM, line items are supplies that are not directly related to the production
of finished products, such as office supplies, machine parts, etc. Materials are direct
materials that are part of a final product. Materials are created in Setup and can be
imported into an RFx, auction, or master agreement.
You select a view for showing the line item information. Each view shows different
information for the line item. You can add line items only in the Basic view. You can edit
a line item in any view. You can specify line item details only when you edit a line item.

Note: It is recommended that you specify line item settings before you add line items
and materials. Settings apply to all line items and materials in a specific RFx.

To add a line item to an RFx:

1 On the Line Items page, select a view in the view drop-down list.
2 In the Group By drop-down list, select an option for showing all line items or for
grouping them.
3 Click Add.
4 In the new line that appears in the table, fill in the fields for the line item. To add

additional line item information, click the Edit icon and fill in the fields on the
Line Item Detail page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To edit an existing line item, click its Edit icon on the Line Items page.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a material to an RFx
Specifying line items for a new RFx round
Specifying tiered pricing for RFx line items
Specifying an RFx line item view

492 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Line Items page

RFx Line Item Detail page

On the Line Item Detail page, you can enter detailed information about a line item. To

see the RFx Line Item Detail page, click the Edit icon for a line item on the Line
Items page.

Field help for RFx Line Item Detail page

Part Number: Type the part number for the line item.
Description: Type a name and short description for the line item. This is a required
field.
Long Description: Type a long description for the line item. This field supports rich
text and preserves formatting in text copied from another source.

Location: Click the Lookup icon to choose a location for the line item

Plant: Click the Lookup icon to choose a plant for the line item.

Category: Click the Lookup icon to choose an internal category for the line item.

Quantity: Type a quantity for the line item and select a unit of measure from the
drop-down list. This is a required field.

Delivery Schedule: Specify delivery schedules by entering a line item quantity for
each appropriate delivery period.
Delivery Terms: Type a current price and a target price for each appropriate delivery
term.
Display Group: Optionally, select a display group for the line item. The line item will
only be visible to suppliers in this display group.
Line Item Specification: For each specification in the table, enter a value
corresponding to this line item. If you do not enter a new value, the default value
entered in the RFx Setup: Item Specification dialog box will be used. For details,
see Adding an RFx line item specification.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a material to an RFx
Specifying line items for a new RFx round
Specifying tiered pricing for RFx line items
Specifying an RFx line item view

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 493

RFx Line Items page RFx

Adding a material to an RFx

On the Line Items page, you can add both line items and materials. In Frictionless SRM,
line items are supplies that are not directly related to the production of finished
products, such as office supplies, machine parts, etc. Materials are direct materials that
are part of a final product. Materials are created in Setup and can be imported into an
RFx, auction, or master agreement.

Note: It is recommended that you specify line item settings before you add line items
and materials. Settings apply to all line items and materials in a specific RFx.

To add a direct material to an RFx:

1 On the Line Items page, click Add Materials.
2 In the Lookup box, select one or more materials.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To edit an existing material, click its Edit icon on the Line Items page.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a line item to an RFx
Adding a BOM to an RFx
Editing a BOM in an RFx
Specifying line items for a new RFx round
Specifying tiered pricing for RFx line items
Specifying an RFx line item view

494 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Line Items page

Adding a BOM to an RFx

You can add bills of materials (BOMs) as line items in an RFx. A BOM is a list of related
items, which can include both direct and indirect materials, that are needed to create a
finished product.
You select a view for showing the line item information. Each view shows a number of
common and unique columns.

Note: It is recommended that you specify line item settings before you add line items
and materials. Settings apply to all line items and materials in a specific RFx.

To add a BOM to an RFx:

1 On the Line Items page, click Add BOM.
2 In the wizard, make selections from the following fields:
■ Keep BOM Hierarchy with fixed quantity relationships: Select this option
to maintain any hierarchical relationships in the imported BOM, such as those
between materials and submaterials.
■ Expand BOM into individual materials: Select this option to import
materials from the BOM without maintaining their hierarchy.
■ Allow edit of BOM material quantities: If you selected to keep the BOM
hierarchy, check this box to allow the quantities for each material to be
editable. Leave the box unchecked to prevent edit of the original quantities
entered for these materials.
3 Click Add BOM.
4 Check the box for one or more BOMs to add.
5 Click OK.
6 In the Quantity column, enter a quantity for the BOM.
7 Click Finish.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a line item to an RFx
Adding a material to an RFx
Editing a BOM in an RFx
Specifying line items for a new RFx round
Specifying tiered pricing for RFx line items
Specifying an RFx line item view

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 495

RFx Line Items page RFx

Editing a BOM in an RFx

If you checked the Allow edit of BOM material quantities box when adding the
BOM, you can edit the quantities in the RFx. You cannot edit other BOM information in
the RFx.
You select a view for showing the line item information. Each view shows a number of
common and unique columns.

To edit a BOM in an RFx:

1 On the Line Items page, do one of the following
■ Edit the BOM material quantity directly in the Quantity column.

■ Click the Edit icon for the BOM to edit, edit the Quantity field on the Line
Item Detail page, and click the Save button in the toolbar.
2 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Adding a line item to an RFx
Adding a BOM to an RFx
Specifying line items for a new RFx round
Specifying tiered pricing for RFx line items
Specifying an RFx line item view

496 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Accounting page

RFx Accounting page

On the Accounting page, you can add and edit accounting information.

Related Topics
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 497

RFx Responses page RFx

RFx Responses page

An RFx response is the document in which a supplier answers questions and provides
prices and other information for an RFx. All RFx responses are listed on this page.

On the RFx Responses page, you can:

` Exclude a supplier from an RFx round
` Recalculate RFx responses
` Perform a simple award of the RFx and optionally create a master agreement
` Perform a scenario award of the RFx, either manual or automatic

A simple award allows you to award the whole RFx to one supplier. You can choose to
create a master agreement while performing a simple award. A scenario award enables
you to award the RFx to multiple suppliers, either manually or automatically. For an
automatic award, you can create multiple award scenarios and run the Optimizer to
determine which scenario to use for awarding.
You can only perform an automatic scenario award if you have the Optimizer
component installed. For more information, see RFx optimization rules.

Note: Although you can award an RFx to one or more suppliers, either manually or
automatically, you are not required to award an RFx to any supplier.

Field Help for RFx Responses Page

RFx Response Status: This column indicates the status of the response for each
vendor. Statuses are as follows:
` No Activity: The RFx response has not been opened by the supplier.
` Declined: The supplier has declined to respond to the RFx.
` Waiting for Acceptance: The supplier has opened the RFx response and
confirmed participation, but has made no changes to the response.
` In Progress: The supplier is entering information into the RFx response. The
response cannot be viewed on the buy-side.
` Preliminary: The supplier has entered preliminary information into the RFx
response and it can be viewed on the buy-side. This phase appears only if it has
been selected for inclusion in the RFx type.
` Firm: The supplier has completed the RFx response and can make no further
changes to it. A firm response can be included in an RFx award.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx

498 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Responses page

Specifying suppliers for a new RFx round

Recalculating RFx responses
Performing a simple RFx award
Performing a simple RFx award and creating a master agreement
Performing a scenario RFx award with manual awarding
Performing a scenario RFx award with automatic awarding
Accepting a firm RFx response

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 499

RFx Responses page RFx

Performing a simple RFx award

A simple award allows you to award the whole RFx to one supplier.
You can also create a master agreement during the simple award process. For details,
see Performing a simple RFx award and creating a master agreement.

Note: You are not required to award an RFx to any supplier.

To perform a simple award:

1 Optionally, accept one or more RFx responses. (If you do not do this manually, it
will happen automatically during the award process.)
2 Change the RFx phase to Closed for Response.
3 On the RFx Responses page, check the box for the response to which to award the
RFx.
4 Click the Simple Award button.
5 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
6 In the Publish Award dialog box, select one of the following options for publishing
the award:
■ No, manually publish later: Select this option if you want to manually
publish the award to suppliers at a later point.
■ Yes, publish now: Select this option to publish the award to suppliers
automatically upon completion.
7 Click Finish.
The RFx phase changes automatically to Award, and the Awards tab is created. The
award is published to suppliers if you selected that option.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Accepting a firm RFx response
Changing a sourcing document phase
Performing a simple RFx award and creating a master agreement
Performing a scenario RFx award with manual awarding
Performing a scenario RFx award with automatic awarding

500 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Responses page

Performing a simple RFx award and creating a master

agreement
A simple award allows you to award the whole RFx to one supplier. During this process,
you have the option to create a master agreement from the RFx award. If you do not
create a master agreement during the award process, you can create one later from the
toolbar within the award scenario. For details, see Creating a master agreement
from an RFx.

Note: You are not required to award an RFx to any supplier.

To perform a simple award and create a master agreement:

1 Optionally, accept one or more RFx responses. (If you do not do this manually, it
will happen automatically during the award process.)
2 Change the RFx phase to Closed for Response.
3 On the RFx Responses page, check the box for the response to which to award the
RFx.
4 Click the Simple Award button.
5 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
6 In the Publish Award dialog box, select Yes, publish now & create an
agreement.
7 Click Finish.
8 Following the prompts, select options for the master agreement creation. For
details, see Creating a master agreement from an RFx.
The RFx phase changes automatically to Award, and the Awards tab is created. The
award is published to suppliers if you selected that option.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Accepting a firm RFx response
Changing a sourcing document phase
Performing a scenario RFx award with manual awarding
Performing a scenario RFx award with automatic awarding

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 501

RFx Responses page RFx

Performing a scenario RFx award with manual awarding

A scenario award enables you to award the RFx to multiple suppliers, either manually or
automatically. You are not required to award an RFx to any supplier.
When you award an RFx manually, you can allocate line item awards to suppliers
offering the lowest price, lowest cost, or highest score, or you can specify percentages
or amounts to award to selected suppliers.

To perform a scenario award with manual awarding:

1 Change the RFx phase to Closed for Response.
2 On the RFx Responses page, click the Scenario Award button.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
4 In the first dialog box of the award wizard, check the Accept all firm proposals?
box, which will accept all firm RFx responses if you have not already done so. Click
Next.
5 In the Choose Award Type dialog box, select Manual. You only see this step if you
have the Optimizer component installed.
6 In the Choose RFx Response(s) dialog box, select the response or responses you
want to include in the scenario award. Click Next.
7 In the Select Manual Awarding Method dialog box, select one of the following:
■ No Default Award: Select this option to make all award allocations yourself.
■ Award to Vendor/Offer with Lowest Price: Select this option to
automatically allocate line item awards based on the lowest price bids. (Price
indicates the amount a supplier bids for a line item.)
■ Award to Vendor/Offer with Lowest Cost: Select this option to
automatically allocate line item awards based on the lowest cost bids. (Cost
indicates the line item price plus any additional costs specified by the supplier.)
■ Award to Vendor/Offer with Highest Score (this option only appears if the
RFx includes scored questions): Select this option to automatically allocate line
item awards based on the highest scores to the RFx questions.
8 On the New Scenario Summary page, enter a title and optionally enter a description
for the scenario.
9 Click the RFx Responses tab to view information about the selected RFx responses.
10 Click the Line Items & Allocations tab to view and edit automatic line item
allocations.

11 On the Line Items & Allocations tab, click the Edit icon for a line item to view
its award allocations.
12 On the Line Item Award Scenario page, review allocations, if any.

502 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Responses page

13 Enter or edit line allocations. For details, see Entering and editing RFx line item
allocations.
14 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
15 Repeat steps 11 through 14 for each line item to review and allocate. (You will not
have to repeat step 4: Accept All Firm Responses.)
16 If you have the Optimizer component installed, you can create additional scenarios
to compare their award allocations. To create additional scenarios, click the Save
button in the toolbar and then repeat steps 2 through 16 for each scenario to
create. Then, in the preferred scenario, follow the steps below to create an RFx
award.
17 After you have finished awarding line items to suppliers, change the scenario phase
to Complete. In the Complete phase, you cannot make further changes to a
scenario. However, you can revert the scenario phase from Complete to In
Progress.
Note: You can delete an award scenario if it is in the In Progress or Complete phase.
To delete a scenario, click its Trashcan icon on the Awards page.
18 To accept the current scenario for awarding, change the scenario phase to
Accepted.
After you accept a scenario, an Award tab is created in the scenario. This tab
contains a summary of the final award.
19 In the scenario toolbar, click Actions and select Publish Award. (You can also
choose Cancel Acceptance if you decide not to publish this award.)
The selected RFx award scenario is published to suppliers. When the scenario is
published, the award is finalized and no additional scenarios can be accepted.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Accepting a firm RFx response
Changing a sourcing document phase
Performing a simple RFx award
Performing a simple RFx award and creating a master agreement
Performing a scenario RFx award with automatic awarding

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 503

RFx Responses page RFx

Basics for using the RFx Optimizer

Note: The Optimizer is an optional Frictionless® SRM component. Before you can use
the Optimizer, your company must purchase it.

When you award an RFx automatically, you use the RFx Optimizer component to create
an award scenario. The Optimizer is a tool that performs complex calculations and
comparisons to determine an award based on your specified priorities.
You first specify a top-level goal, such as achieving the lowest cost or the highest
quality, and rules for a scenario. Then you run the Optimizer, which generates the best
possible solutions to meet your goal and is consistent with the specified rules. You can
manually override the Optimizer results when making awards.
Depending on your selections, results can be available in seconds or can take longer.
The Optimizer always runs in the background.

After the optimization process is complete, you can review the results and take any of
the following actions:
` View a report to see the award details
` Accept the awards or override them at a global or line item level
` Fine-tune existing rules or create alternate scenarios
` Conduct what-if analyses by creating one or more additional scenarios with
different rules and comparing the scenarios
When you are satisfied with the results, you can notify suppliers about the portions of
the RFx awarded to them and create master agreements or contracts.

The Optimizer has these phases:

` In Progress (Automatic)
` Ready for Optimization (Automatic)
` Optimized (Automatic)
` Complete (Manual)
` Accepted (Manual)
From any phase, except Accepted and Optimizing, you can return to the In Progress
phase, where you can edit the rules for the Optimizer to use.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Performing a scenario RFx award with automatic awarding

504 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Responses page

Performing a scenario RFx award with automatic awarding

A scenario award enables you to award the RFx to more than one supplier, either
manually or automatically.
When you award an RFx automatically, you use the RFx Optimizer to create an award
scenario. You first specify a top-level goal, such as achieving the lowest cost or the
highest quality, and rules for a scenario. Then you run the Optimizer, which generates
the best possible solutions to meet your goal and is consistent with the specified rules.
You can manually override the Optimizer results when making awards.
Before awarding an RFx using the Optimizer, you might also want to review Basics for
using the RFx Optimizer and RFx optimization rules.

Note: Although you can award RFxs to one or more suppliers, either manually or
automatically, you are not required to award an RFx to any supplier.

To perform an automatic scenario award:

1 Change the RFx phase to Closed for Response.
2 On the RFx Responses page, click the Scenario Award button.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
4 In the wizard, check the Accept all firm proposals? box, which will accept all firm
RFx responses if you have not already done so. Click Next.
5 In the Choose Award Type dialog box, select Automatic. You only see this step if
you have the Optimizer component installed.
6 In the Choose RFx Response(s) dialog box, select the response or responses you
want to include in the scenario award. Click Next.
7 In the Select Rule Set dialog box, select one of the following. (This dialog box only
appears if this is not the first scenario created for the RFx.)
■ New: Select this option to create an entirely new scenario.
■ From Related Scenario: Select this option to base this scenario on an existing
scenario. Click the Lookup icon to choose the existing scenario.
8 In the Enter Title and Save Scenario dialog box, enter a scenario title, check the
box for Save Scenario, and click Create.
Note: You can add exclusion rules only after the scenario is saved. After it is saved,
you can no longer discard changes to the scenario. However, you may manually
delete the scenario.
9 On the New Scenario Summary page, enter a title and optionally enter a description
for the scenario.
10 Click the RFx Responses tab to view information about the selected RFx responses.
11 Click the Global Rules tab and fill in the fields under Allocation Rules.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 505

RFx Responses page RFx

For details, see RFx optimization rules and Selecting global rules for an RFx
Optimizer scenario.
12 Optionally, under Default Line Item Rule, click Add Rule to add a rule for all line
items. The default value for all line items is Unconstrained.
For details, see Selecting a global line item rule for an RFx Optimizer
scenario.
13 Optionally, under Advanced Rule, click Add Special Status Rule to add a special
status rule.
For details, see Selecting a special status rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario.
14 Click the Line Items & Allocations tab to view the global line item rule applied,
create and manage a line item bundle, or delete rules and auto-allocations.
For details, see Selecting an individual line item rule for an RFx Optimizer
scenario and Adding line item bundles in an RFx Optimizer scenario.

15 In the toolbar, click the Change Phase button and change the phase to Ready
for Optimization.
16 You can optionally create additional scenarios and optimize them all to compare
their award allocations. To create additional scenarios:
a Click the Save button in the toolbar.
b Repeat steps 2 through 15 for each scenario to create. (You will not have to
repeat step 4: Accept All Firm Proposals.)
Follow the steps below to prepare the scenarios for optimization.
17 After you have finished creating scenarios, change the scenario phase to Ready for
Optimization.
18 To optimize a single scenario:
a On the scenario toolbar, click Actions and select Optimize.
b In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
c During optimization, you can do any of the following:
Click Actions and select Cancel Optimization to cancel the action.
Click Actions and select Check Optimization status to view the status of the
optimization process.
Click Actions and select Refresh to view awards when optimization is
complete.

506 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Responses page

19 To optimize multiple scenarios at once:

a On the Awards tab, click the Set Ready for Optimization button.
b In the dialog box, select one or more scenarios and click OK.
c On the Awards tab, click the Optimize button.
d In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
e During optimization, you can do any of the following:
Click Actions and select Cancel Optimization to cancel the action.
Click Actions and select Check Optimization status to view the status of the
optimization process.
Click Actions and select Refresh to view awards when optimization is
complete.
f When optimization is complete, select two or more scenarios and click the
Compare button that appears on the Awards tab to compare the optimized
scenarios.
20 Optionally, compare scenarios. For details, see Comparing award results in RFx
Optimizer scenarios.
21 Optionally, override the allocations determined by the Optimizer. Before editing
optimizer allocations or rules, revert the scenario phase to In Progress.
For details on editing allocations, see Entering and editing RFx line item
allocations.
22 After you have finished allocating line items, change the scenario phase to
Complete. In the Complete phase, you cannot make further changes to a scenario.
However, you can revert the scenario phase from Complete to In Progress.
Note: You can delete an award scenario if it is in the In Progress or Complete phase.
To delete a scenario, click its Trashcan icon on the Awards page.
23 To accept the current scenario for awarding, change the scenario phase to
Accepted.
24 In the scenario toolbar, click Actions and select Publish Award. (You can also
choose Cancel Acceptance if you decide not to publish this award.)
The RFx is published to suppliers.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Accepting a firm RFx response
Changing a sourcing document phase
Performing a simple RFx award
Performing a simple RFx award and creating a master agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 507

RFx Responses page RFx

Performing a scenario RFx award with manual awarding

Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
RFx optimization rules

508 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Responses page

Recalculating RFx responses

If you manually override a supplier’s score or costs, or if you close collaborative
scoring, you must recalculate RFx responses to integrate the scores into the
responses.

To recalculate all RFx responses at one time:

` On the RFx Responses page, click Recalculate RFx Responses.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Specifying suppliers for a new RFx round
Closing a sourcing document
Changing a sourcing document phase

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 509

RFx Responses page RFx

RFx Responses Header page

The Responses Header page only appears for a Preliminary or higher phase.

On the Header page, you can:

` View general information, including buyer status, supplier status, and change
history
` Accept a firm RFx response

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Specifying suppliers for a new RFx round
Accepting a firm RFx response

510 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Responses page

RFx Response Questions page

On the RFx Response Questions page, you can:
` View summarized section information

` Click an Edit icon to view question section information

` Accept a firm RFx response

Note: The Total Price value on the Response Questions page indicates the sum of the
lowest price for each line item, regardless of the delivery term. To see Total Price values
organized by delivery term, go to the RFx Response Line Items page.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
RFx Response Summary page for questions
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Reordering items in a list
Deleting items from a list
Accepting a firm RFx response

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 511

RFx Responses page RFx

RFx Response Summary page for questions

To see the Summary page for a question, click the an Edit icon for a question on
the RFX Response Questions page.

On the Summary page for questions, you can view summary information for the
question section.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
RFx Response Summary page for questions
Editing question scores and costs in an RFx response section

512 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Responses page

RFx Response Question Scores page

To see the Question Scores page for a question, do the following:

1 Click an Edit icon for a question on the RFX Response Questions page.
2 Click the Question Scores tab.

On the Question Scores page for questions, you can:

` View for each question in a single section:
■ Questions
■ Answers
■ Any additional information communicated by the supplier
■ Scoring information
■ Any associated costs
■ Whether a preference had to be met
` Edit question costs and scores for an RFx response

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Editing question scores and costs in an RFx response section
Exporting line items as a CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 513

RFx Responses page RFx

Editing question scores and costs in an RFx response section

1 On the RFx Response Questions page, click the Edit icon for the section to
edit.
2 Click the Question Scores tab.
3 For a specific question, optionally edit the score.
4 For a specific question, click Override Costs to manually enter a cost for the
question.
5 In the dialog box, fill in the fields and click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
7 Click Recalculate RFx Responses to calculate the costs and scores of all suppliers
whose responses you edited.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

To go to another section:
` Select a section from the sections drop-down list in the toolbar and click Go.

Note: You cannot edit question costs and scores after you accept a document.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
RFx Response Summary page for questions
Editing question scores and costs in an RFx response section

514 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Responses page

RFx Response Answers page

To see the Question Scores page for a question, do the following:

1 Click an Edit icon for a question on the RFX Response Questions page.
2 Click the Answers tab.

On the Answers page for questions, you can view question text and answers for all
questions in a single section.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
RFx Response Summary page for questions
Editing question scores and costs in an RFx response section
RFx Response Line Items page
Reordering items in a list
Deleting items from a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 515

RFx Responses page RFx

RFx Response Line Items page

On the RFx Response Line Items page, you can:
` View information about line items, depending on the selected view
` Accept a firm RFx response

Note: The Total Price values on the Line Items page indicate the sum of the line item
prices for each delivery term in the response. A Total Price value on this page may not
match the Total Price value on the RFx Response Questions page, which indicates the
lowest possible total of the line items, regardless of delivery term.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Specifying an RFx line item view
Reordering items in a list
Deleting items from a list
Accepting a firm RFx response

516 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Responses page

Accepting a firm RFx response

When you accept at least one RFx response, the RFx can be changed to the Award
phase. You can accept an RFx response that has been marked as Firm by the supplier.

To accept a firm RFx response:

1 On the RFx Responses page, click the Edit icon for the firm RFx response to
view.
2 On the tool bar appearing on the Header, Questions, or Line Items page, click
Actions and select Accept this RFx Response.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
RFx Responses page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 517

RFx Scoring page RFx

RFx Scoring page

The Scoring page is created when the RFx phase changes to Closed for Response. This
page is created only if collaborative scoring is enabled in the RFx. For details, see
Quick Reference: Setting up Collaborative RFx Question Scoring.

Note: If collaborative scoring is enabled, an email is sent to collaborative scorers when

the RFx phase changes to Closed for Response and the Scoring page is created.

On the Scoring page, you can:

` Enter scores for questions, if you are a designated scorer
` Override scores, if you are have rights to finalize scores in the document

Field Help for RFx Scoring page

Enter Scores: Click this button to enter scores.

By Question/By Vendor: From this drop-down list, select how to display the
responses, by question or by supplier.
Show Only: From this drop-down list, select the questions and responses to view:
` My Unscored
` All Unscored
` Manually Scored
` Show All
` All Overridden Scores

Score Source: Indicates whether the scoring for a question is manual or automatic.
Question Weight %: Indicates the weight percentage represented by the question.
Final Score: Indicates either the current average collaborative score or the overridden

score for the question. Click the Information icon to see any comments entered for
the question.
Avg. Score out of 10: For Manual scores, indicates the average of all scores that have
been entered for the question. For Automatic scores, indicates the score calculated by
the scoring engine.

Click the Information icon to see how the current question score is calculated. If
scorers are given weights, the following formula is used to calculate a question score:
(scorer1 weight x scorer1 score) + (scorerN weight x scorerN score) / scorer total
weight = question score
For example:

518 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Scoring page

Collaborator1 has a weight of 10 and has entered a question score of 10.

Collaborator2 has a weight of 1 and has entered a question score of 8.
Collaborator3 has a weight of 4 and has entered a question score of 9.
(10 x 10) + (1 x 8) + (4 x 9) / (10 + 1 + 4) = 9.6
144 / 15 = 9.6
Question score = 9.6

Response: Enter a question score in the text field next to your name. If private scoring
is not enabled, you can also view the scores entered by other scorers for each question.

Collaborative Scoring Rights

Collaborative scoring activities require different types of rights. The following list
indicates the users who can perform each type of collaborative scoring activity:
` Set up collaborative scoring: The document owner or any user with edit rights to
the RFx.
` Enter collaborative scores: Users who are entered as collaborators on the
Header Tab and designated as Scorers on the RFx Setup: Scoring page.
` Override scores: Users who are entered as collaborators on the Header Tab,
designated as Scorers, and designated as Able to Override Scores on the RFx
Setup: Scoring page.
` Close scoring: The document owner or any user with edit rights to the RFx.
` Reopen scoring: The document owner or any user with edit rights to the RFx.
` View scores: In a public scoring event, or a private event for which the scores
have been published, any buy-side user with view rights to the RFx. In a private
scoring event for which the scores have not been published, only the document
owner can view the scores.

Related Topics
RFx Setup: Scoring page
Entering collaborative question scores for an RFx
Overriding collaborative and automatic question scores for an RFx
Closing collaborative question scoring for an RFx
Reopening collaborative question scoring for an RFx
Publishing collaborative question scores for an RFx
Quick Reference: Setting up Collaborative RFx Question Scoring

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 519

RFx Scoring page RFx

Entering collaborative question scores for an RFx

You must be a designated scorer for the RFx to enter collaborative question scores.
Scorers are selected on the RFx Setup: Scoring page.
You finalize scores on the Scoring page. The Scoring page only appears when the RFx
changes to Closed for Response. An email notification is sent to all scorers when the
Scoring page is created.

To enter collaborative scores:

1 If the RFx is not in Edit mode, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
2 On the Scoring page, click the Enter Scores button.
3 In the Responses column, enter a score for each question in the text field next to
your name. If private scoring is not enabled, you can also view the scores entered
by other scorers for each question.
For more information about the fields on this page, see RFx Scoring page.
4 When you have finished entering scores, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Setup: Scoring page
RFx Scoring page
Overriding collaborative and automatic question scores for an RFx
Closing collaborative question scoring for an RFx
Reopening collaborative question scoring for an RFx
Publishing collaborative question scores for an RFx
Quick Reference: Setting up Collaborative RFx Question Scoring

520 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Scoring page

Overriding collaborative and automatic question scores for an

RFx
You can override the averaged collaborative scores if you are a scorer who is
designated as Able to Override Scores on the RFx Setup: Scoring page.
You override scores on the Scoring page. The Scoring page only appears when the RFx
changes to Closed for Response.

To override collaborative scores:

1 If the RFx is not in Edit mode, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
2 On the Scoring page, override any score by typing over its value in the Final Score
column.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can also override traditionally/automatically scored questions on the Scoring page.

To override automatic scores in an RFx without multiple scorers:

1 Create an RFx that has collaborative scoring enabled, but do not select scorers.
2 Conduct the RFx process as usual, including scoring questions.
3 After scoring is complete, go to the Scoring tab to override automatic scores as
needed.

To override automatic scores in an RFx that has both collaboratively scored questions
and automatically scored questions:
1 Conduct the RFx process as usual.
2 After scoring the RFx, close collaborative scoring. For details, see Closing
collaborative question scoring for an RFx.
3 On the Scoring page, display both collaborative and traditional scores.
4 Enter override values as needed in the Final Score column.

Related Topics
RFx Setup: Scoring page
RFx Scoring page
Entering collaborative question scores for an RFx
Closing collaborative question scoring for an RFx
Reopening collaborative question scoring for an RFx
Publishing collaborative question scores for an RFx
Quick Reference: Setting up Collaborative RFx Question Scoring

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 521

RFx Awards page RFx

RFx Awards page

The Awards page is created when the RFx phase changes to Award. This page displays
information about the RFx award.
On the Awards page, you can:
` Review RFx awards
` Compare award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios

Related Topics
Reviewing the results of an RFx award
Comparing award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios
Creating an RFx
Accepting a firm RFx response
Changing a sourcing document phase
Performing a simple RFx award
Performing a scenario RFx award with manual awarding
Performing a scenario RFx award with automatic awarding
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
RFx optimization rules

522 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Awards page

Reviewing the results of an RFx award

1 On the Awards page under Awards, click the Edit icon for the award scenario
to review.
2 To view reports for the award, click Reports in the toolbar and select the report to
view.
For a manual award, you can view the following report:
■ Award Allocation Report
For an award using the Optimizer, you can view the following report:
■ Vendor Award Report
■ Line Item Award Report
■ Line Item Awards for Export Report
3 After reviewing the report, click Close Window.
4 Click the Global Rules tab to review any global rules applied for the scenario.
5 Click the RFx Responses tab to view information, which can include costs and
scores, about the selected RFx responses.
6 Click the Line Item Rules & Allocations tab view information, which can include
costs, scores, and the global line item rule applied, about the awarded line items.
7 Click the Award tab to view basic award information.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Comparing award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios
Creating an RFx
Accepting a firm RFx response
Changing a sourcing document phase
Performing a simple RFx award
Performing a scenario RFx award with manual awarding
Performing a scenario RFx award with automatic awarding
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
RFx optimization rules

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 523

RFx Awards page RFx

Comparing award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios

After you optimize one scenario, you can create and optimize additional scenarios using
different sets of rules. Then you can compare all the scenario results with one another
for total cost and value. For example, you can create scenarios to answer questions,
such as the following:
` What is the impact of awarding 3% versus 5% of the total RFx to a minority-owned
business?
` Does a 70/30 split between two suppliers versus a 70/20/10 split among three
suppliers have any significant effect?
` Is switching costs to award business to a new supplier instead of an incumbent
supplier worth considering?

To compare RFx award scenarios:

1 Create one scenario.
2 Create one or more additional scenarios.
3 On the Awards page under Awards, check the scenarios to compare.
4 Click Compare. You see a report showing graphs and table items for summary
scenario and line item comparisons.
5 Click a graph component to view detailed information about the component.
6 Optionally, export the report as a PDF file.
7 Click Close Window.

Related Topics
Reviewing the results of an RFx award
Creating an RFx
Accepting a firm RFx response
Changing a sourcing document phase
Performing a simple RFx award
Performing a scenario RFx award with manual awarding
Performing a scenario RFx award with automatic awarding
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
RFx optimization rules

524 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Awards page

RFx Summary page for awarding

To see the Summary page for awarding, click the Edit icon for an award scenario
on the Awards page.

On the Summary page for awarding, you can review an RFx award scenario by supplier
and by line item.

Related Topics
Reviewing the results of an RFx award
Comparing award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios
Creating an RFx
Accepting a firm RFx response
Changing a sourcing document phase
Performing a simple RFx award
Performing a scenario RFx award with manual awarding
Performing a scenario RFx award with automatic awarding
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
RFx optimization rules

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 525

RFx Awards page RFx

RFx Awards RFx Responses page

To see the RFx Responses page:

1 Click the Edit icon for an award scenario on the Awards page.
2 Click the RFx Responses tab.

On the RFx Awards Responses page, you can:

` Check an RFx response to include it in a scenario
` Remove the checkmark from an RFx response to remove it from a scenario

Related Topics
Reviewing the results of an RFx award
Comparing award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios
Creating an RFx
Accepting a firm RFx response
Changing a sourcing document phase
Performing a simple RFx award
Performing a scenario RFx award with manual awarding
Performing a scenario RFx award with automatic awarding
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
RFx optimization rules

526 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Awards page

RFx Awards Global Rules page

The Global Rules page only appears in an automatic (Optimizer) award scenario. For
details about rules, see RFx optimization rules.

To see the Global Rules page:

1 Click the Edit icon for an award scenario on the Awards page.
2 Click the Global Rules tab.

On the Global Rules page, you can:

` Select global rules for an Optimizer RFx scenario
` Select a global line item rule for an Optimizer RFx scenario
` Select a special status rule for an Optimizer RFx scenario

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
RFx optimization rules
Selecting global rules for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Selecting a global line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Selecting a special status rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 527

RFx Awards page RFx

Selecting global rules for an RFx Optimizer scenario

For details about global rules, see RFx optimization rules.

To select global rules:

1 On the Global Rules page under Allocation Rules, fill in the fields.
2 Under Default Line Item Rule, click Add Rule to add a global line item rule other
than the default one, which is Unconstrained.
3 Optionally, under Advanced Rules, click Add Special Status Rule.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
RFx optimization rules
Selecting global rules for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Selecting a global line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Selecting a special status rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario

528 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Awards page

Selecting a global line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario

For details about global line item rules, see RFx optimization rules.

To select global line item rules:

1 On the Global Rules page under Default Line Item Rule, click Add Rule.
2 In the Choose a Rule Type dialog box, check one rule.
3 Click Create.
4 In the dialog box for the line item rule, fill in the fields.
5 Click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
RFx optimization rules
Selecting global rules for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Selecting a global line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Selecting a special status rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 529

RFx Awards page RFx

Selecting a special status rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario

A special status rule specifies that a minimum percentage of the total award price is
allocated to suppliers who satisfy specified criteria for a specific RFx question. This rule
can also ensure that a minimum percentage of the total award price goes to suppliers
who satisfy decision-making criteria, such as being minority-owned or women-owned
businesses.
The rule criteria are based on the questions you added to the RFx. For example, you
might add the question “Is the business minority owned?” to the RFx, with the intention
of using it for a special status rule.
For details about other global rules, see RFx optimization rules.

To select a special status rule:

1 On the Global Rules page under Default Line Item Rule, click Add Special Status
Rule.
Note: This button only appears if you have added questions to the RFx.
2 In the Special Status Rule dialog box, in the Allocate Minimum % field, enter the
percentage of the total price to award.
3 Click the Where the Question button and select the question for which to create a
rule. You see a list of all the questions in the RFx.
4 In the Matches this response field, enter the desired response to the question.
Depending on the question type, you may also choose how to match the response:
Exactly, At Most, At Least, Match Any, or Match All.
5 Click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
RFx optimization rules
Selecting global rules for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Selecting a global line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Selecting a special status rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario

530 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Awards page

RFx optimization rules

Optimization rules can be categorized as global, line item, line item bundle, advanced,
general exclusion, or supplier exclusion. Using these rules, the Optimizer allocates
awards in a way that is best for your company.

Global Rules
Global rules include the following:
` Award Method: This rule specifies whether the high-level objective is to minimize
total cost or to maximize the value score.
` Maximum Number of Vendors: This rule limits the total number of suppliers the
RFx can be divided among.
` Default Global Line Item: This rule applies a standard line item rule globally. The
default rule is Unconstrained. Other available line item rules are All or None and
Fixed Percentage.

Line Item Rules

Line item rules include the following:
` Unconstrained: This rule generates the best possible line item allocation without
considering any rules.
` All or None: This rule awards the entire requested quantity for a line item to a
single supplier. If no supplier can offer the entire quantity, the line item is not
awarded.
` Fixed Percentage: This rule specifies a set of percentages to allocate to one or
more suppliers.
` Basic: This rule provides basic support for exclusions, filters, and the capability to
inherit properties of a default rule.
` Manual Allocation: This rule is manually applied. You specify a quantity or
percentage of a line item to allocate to one or more specified suppliers.

Line Item Bundle Rules

Line item bundle rules include the following:
` Sole Sourcing: This rule awards the entire quantity of all line items in a bundle to
a single supplier.
` Maximum Number of Vendors: This rule limits the total number of suppliers the
bundle can be divided among.
` Line Item Award Percentage: This rule specifies a set of percentages to allocate
to one or more suppliers.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 531

RFx Awards page RFx

Advanced Rule
The advanced rule is the following:
` Special Status: This rule specifies that a minimum percentage of the total award
price is allocated to suppliers who satisfy specified criteria for a specific RFx
question. This rule can also ensure that a minimum percentage of the total award
price goes to suppliers who satisfy decision-making criteria, such as being
minority-owned or women-owned businesses.
The rule criteria are based on the questions you added to the RFx. For example,
you might add the question “Is the business minority owned?” to the RFx, with the
intention of using it for a special status rule.

General Exclusion Rules

General exclusion rules can be applied as global, line item, or line item bundle rules and
include the following:
` Exclude Alternate Item Bundle Offers: This rule does not consider multiple
offers per line item from the same supplier.
` Exclude Substitute Line Item Offers: This rule does not consider substitute
offers for line items.
` Exclude Partial Allocation: This rule considers only suppliers that can satisfy the
complete quantity requirement for a line item. If no supplier can satisfy the
quantity requirement, the line item is not awarded. This rule does not consider
suppliers that can offer only a partial quantity for a line item.

Offer Exclusion Rules

Offer exclusion rules can be applied as global, line item, or line item bundle rules and
include the following:
` Exclude Vendor: This rule excludes specified suppliers.
` Exclude RFx Response: This rule excludes RFx responses for specified suppliers
for specified RFx rounds.
` Exclude Offer: If this rule is applied at a global level, you specify which offers to
exclude from a list of all line items and all offers for all suppliers. If this rule is
applied at a line item level, you specify which offers to exclude from a list of all
offers for a single line item.

Offer Filter Rules

Offer filter rules can be applied as global, line item, or line item bundle rules and
include the following:
` Delivery Term Filter: This rule only considers specified delivery terms.

532 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Awards page

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
Selecting global rules for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Selecting a global line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Selecting a special status rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 533

RFx Awards page RFx

RFx Line Item Rules & Allocations page

An auto-allocation is the allocation generated by the Optimizer for a specific line item to
one or more suppliers.

To see the Line Item Rules & Allocations page:

1 Click the Edit icon for an award scenario on the Awards page.
2 Click the Line Item Rules & Allocations tab.

On the Line Item Rules & Allocations page, you can do the following for a specific
Optimizer scenario:
` View the details for RFx line items
` Edit line item allocations
` Select an individual line item rule
` Add and delete RFx line item bundles
` Delete rules and auto-allocations for selected RFx line items
` Delete auto-allocations for selected RFx line items

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
RFx optimization rules
Entering and editing RFx line item allocations
Selecting an individual line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Adding line item bundles in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting line item bundles from an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting rules and auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Comparing award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios

534 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Awards page

Entering and editing RFx line item allocations

You can enter a line item allocation for a manual scenario or override an automatic line
item allocation.

To enter or edit a line item allocation:

1 On the Line Item Rules & Allocations page, click the Edit icon for the line item
to allocate.
2 On the Line Item Award Scenario page, click Allocate Manually.
3 In the Quantity or Percent text box, specify a quantity or percentage of the line
item to be filled, and click Show Offers to see a list of suppliers who can supply
that quantity or percentage.
4 Click the Add button for each supplier to whom you want to allocate the specified
quantity or percentage of the line item. The suppliers are added to the allocation
table.
5 Click Finish.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
RFx optimization rules
Selecting an individual line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Adding line item bundles in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting line item bundles from an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting rules and auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Comparing award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 535

RFx Awards page RFx

Selecting an individual line item rule for an RFx Optimizer

scenario

1 On the Line Items & Allocations page, click the Edit icon for each line items for
which you want to select a rule.
2 In the dialog box for Line Item Award Scenario in Scenario, click Add Rule.
3 In the dialog box for Choose a Rule Type, check a box for a rule.
4 Click Create.
5 In the dialog box for the new rule, fill in the fields.
6 Click OK.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
RFx optimization rules
Entering and editing RFx line item allocations
Adding line item bundles in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting line item bundles from an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting rules and auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Comparing award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios

536 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Awards page

Adding line item bundles in an RFx Optimizer scenario

1 On the Line Items & Allocations page, select a grouping option from the Group By
drop-down list.
2 Click Manage Bundles.
3 In the Bundles dialog box, click one of the following:
■ Add Custom Bundle
■ Add Category Bundle
■ Add Location Bundle
■ Add Plant Bundle
■ Add Material Bundle
4 In the dialog box for New Line Item Bundle Rule in Scenario, fill in the fields under
Included Line Items, Rule Settings, General Exclusions, Offer Exclusions, and
Filters.
5 Under Included Line Items, click Add.
6 In the Select Line Items dialog box, check the box for each line item to include in
the scenario and click Finish.
Note: Only items that do not already have an assigned rule can be added to a
bundle.
7 Click OK.
8 In the Bundles dialog box, click OK.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
RFx optimization rules
Entering and editing RFx line item allocations
Selecting an individual line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting line item bundles from an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting rules and auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Comparing award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 537

RFx Awards page RFx

Deleting line item bundles from an RFx Optimizer scenario

1 On the Line Items & Allocations page, select a grouping option from the Group By
drop-down list.
2 Click Manage Bundles.
3 In the Bundles dialog box, check the box for each bundle to delete.
4 Click Delete Selected Bundle.
5 In the Confirmation box, click OK.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
RFx optimization rules
Entering and editing RFx line item allocations
Selecting an individual line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Adding line item bundles in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting rules and auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Comparing award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios

538 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx Awards page

Deleting rules and auto-allocations for selected line items in an

RFx Optimizer scenario
An auto-allocation is the allocation generated by the Optimizer for a specific line item to
one or more suppliers. You can delete an auto-allocation only or delete an
auto-allocation and a rule.

To delete rules and auto-allocations for selected line items:

1 On the Line Items & Allocations page, check the box for each line item for which to
delete a rule and auto-allocation.
2 Click Delete Rules.
3 In the Confirmation box, click OK.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
RFx optimization rules
Entering and editing RFx line item allocations
Selecting an individual line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Adding line item bundles in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting line item bundles from an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Comparing award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 539

RFx Awards page RFx

Deleting auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx

Optimizer scenario
An auto-allocation is the allocation generated by the Optimizer for a specific line item to
one or more suppliers. You can delete an auto-allocation only or delete an
auto-allocation and a rule.

To delete auto-allocations for selected line items:

1 On the Line Items & Allocations page, check the box for each line item for which to
delete an auto-allocation.
2 Click Delete Auto-Allocations.
3 In the Confirmation box, click OK.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Basics for using the RFx Optimizer
RFx optimization rules
Entering and editing RFx line item allocations
Selecting an individual line item rule for an RFx Optimizer scenario
Adding line item bundles in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting line item bundles from an RFx Optimizer scenario
Deleting rules and auto-allocations for selected line items in an RFx Optimizer scenario
Comparing award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios

540 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

RFx toolbar functions

Using the RFx toolbar, you can:
` Click the Edit button to edit an RFx
` Click the Save button to save an RFx
` Click the Undo button to undo your most recent set of changes
` Click the Document button to:
■ Duplicate an RFx
■ Save an RFx as a template
■ Cancel an RFx
■ Close an RFx
■ Import or export an RFx template (Template toolbar)
■ Perform RFx setup tasks, such as specifying scoring, pricing, delivery
information, line item specifications, supplier-entered attributes, groups, and
notifications.
` Click the Actions button to:
■ Create a new RFx round, including specifying suppliers, locking and retiring
questions, and specifying line items
■ Print a supplier preview of an RFx
■ Print an RFx
■ Print an RFx response (Response toolbar)
■ Create an auction
■ Generate a contract
■ Create a master agreement (Scenario toolbar)
■ Close collaborative scoring
■ Reopen collaborative scoring
■ Publish collaborative scores
` Click the Reports button to:
■ View an RFx report
■ Export RFx questions to an Excel file
` Click the Attachments button to attach a file, URL, or library object
` Click the Discussions button to conduct a discussion
` Click the Chat button to conduct a chat

` Click the Change Phase button to change the phase of the RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 541

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Related Topics
Editing and saving a sourcing document
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling a sourcing document
Closing a sourcing document
Importing an RFx template
Exporting an RFx template
Creating a new RFx round
Printing an RFx supplier preview
Printing an RFx
Printing an RFx response
Creating an auction from an RFx
Creating a master agreement from an RFx
Viewing an RFx report
Closing a sourcing document
Changing an RFx phase

542 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

RFx Document toolbar button functions

Click the RFx Document toolbar button to:
` Cancel an RFx
` Import or export an RFx template
` Close an RFx
` Perform RFx setup tasks, such as specifying scoring, pricing, delivery information,
line item specifications, supplier-entered attributes, groups, and notifications.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
Canceling an RFx
Importing an RFx template
Exporting an RFx template
Closing a sourcing document
RFx Setup: General page
RFx Setup: Scoring page
RFx Setup: Pricing Model page
RFx Setup: Delivery Info page
RFx Setup: Line Item Specifications page
RFx Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page
RFx Setup: Groups page
RFx Setup: Notifications page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 543

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Canceling an RFx
When you cancel an RFx, one of the following occurs:
` If the RFx is open, all activity stops, and there is no winning RFx response.
` If the RFx is not yet open, it is not published to suppliers, and no bids can be
placed.
In either case, the RFx does not proceed, but you can still view the RFx document. The
RFx is removed from the active list.

To cancel an RFx:
1 In the toolbar, click Document and select Cancel RFx from the menu.
2 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions
Importing an RFx template
Exporting an RFx template
Closing a sourcing document

544 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

Importing an RFx template

The Import/Export Business Document feature allows you to share RFx and Project
templates between companies and organizations. You use the Import Business
Document option to import a template from another company. You use the Export
Business Document option to share a template with another company. For example,
you might post an exported RFx template on the Frictionless® user group web site to
share best practices with other members of the user group.
By default, you can only import and export templates if you have System Administrator
or Buyer Manager access to Frictionless SRM. To import a template, you must be using
the version of SRM that was used to create and export the template.

To import an RFx template:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create RFx Template
from the RFx submenu.
Note: You must import the template into a new, blank template. Do not modify the
new template after clicking Create. Importing a template into an template that is
not blank can produce unexpected results.
2 In the Create dialog box, select any RFx type and click Create. The type you select
should support the same structural features as the template to import (such as line
items, attachments, questions, and so on). If the type does not support the
features in the imported template, errors can occur after import.
3 In the template toolbar, click Document and select Import Business Document
from the menu.

4 In the Choose File for Import wizard screen, click the Lookup icon to select the
template to import.
5 In the Add Attachment dialog box, select the template to import and click OK.
6 Click Next.
7 In the Object Reference Matching wizard screen, select a mapping value as needed
for each field in the template. Default mappings are provided in the table. To
change the default mapping for a field, select a new value in the right column.
You use this table only to resolve discrepancies in field values, not to change the
field values. For each object, select the value that most closely matches the value in
the imported template.
For example, if the Currency value for the imported template is US Dollars, select
the mapping value that corresponds most closely to US Dollars. After importing the
template, you can change the Currency to another value, such as Canadian Dollars,
if necessary.
All required fields must have mapped values. Non-required fields can be left blank.
When you have finished mapping objects, click Next.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 545

RFx toolbar functions RFx

8 If any mapped field values are invalid, you see an error message. Click Back,
resolve the mapping errors, and then click Next.
9 In the Finish Import wizard screen, click Finish. You see the imported template
with the appropriate mapped field values.
10 Edit the template as necessary.
11 Click Save in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions
Exporting an RFx template

546 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

Exporting an RFx template

The Import/Export Business Document feature allows you to share RFx and Project
templates between companies and organizations. You use the Import Business
Document option to import a template from another company. You use the Export
Business Document option to share a template with another company. For example,
you might post an exported RFx template on the Frictionless user group web site to
share best practices with other members of the user group.
By default, you can only import and export templates if you have System Administrator
or Buyer Manager access to Frictionless® SRM.

To export an RFx template:

1 Create the template containing the information you want to export. For details, see
Creating an RFx template.
2 In the template toolbar, click Document and select Export Business Document
from the menu.
Note: You can only select this option if the template is in View mode.
3 In the Save Exported File wizard screen, click the name of the document.
4 In the File Download dialog box, click Save.
5 In the Save As dialog box, select a location for the template and click Save.
6 In the Save Exported File wizard screen, click Finish.

The RFx template is saved to the location you specified. To share the template, post it
in a location that can be accessed by another group, company, or organization, such as
the Frictionless user group web site.
To import the template, the group must be using the version of SRM that was used to
create and export the template.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions
Importing an RFx template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 547

RFx toolbar functions RFx

RFx Setup: General page

You can use the RFx Setup: General page to:
` Allow or disallow supplier line item import
` Set the earliest allowed date response

To use the RFx Setup: General page:

1 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 On the General page, fill in the fields as described below.
3 Click Save.

Field Help for the RFx Setup: General Page

Allow Vendor Line Item Import: Check to allow suppliers to export the line items,
work on the RFx response off-line, and then re-import the line items.

Earliest Allowed Date Response: If you specified a date as a supplier attribute,

enter the default date that will appear as the value for that attribute. The supplier can
change this value to a later one, but not to an earlier one.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions

548 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

RFx Setup: Scoring page

You can use the RFx Setup: Scoring page to set up scoring for the RFx.

To see the RFx Setup: Scoring page:

1 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Scoring tab.
3 Fill in the fields and add scorers as described below.
4 Click Save.

Field Help for the RFx Setup: Scoring Page

Scoring Type: This field indicates whether the RFx has standard or collaborative
scoring. This field is determined by the RFx type and is read-only.

Private Scoring: If this box is checked, each collaborator’s scores can only be seen by
that collaborator and the document owner. If the box is not checked, all scores can be
seen by all collaborators.

Use Equally Weighted Average for All Scorers: If this box is checked, the same
weight is given to each collaborator’s scores. If this box is not checked, you can enter a
different weight for each scorer, so that some scorers have greater influence over the
final question score.

Scorers: Click Add to add scorers from the list of collaborators. Any user specified as a
Collaborator on the Header page can be added as a scorer.
` Scorer Weight: If use Equally Weighted Average for All Scores is not
checked, you can enter a weight for each scorer. For example, if Scorer A’s input is
more important than that of Scorer B, you might enter a greater weight for Scorer
A. You can select an integer from 1 to 10 as a weight value.
` Able to Override Scores: Check this box to give a scorer the ability to override
collaborators’ scores.

` Click the Trashcan icon to remove a scorer from the RFx. Scorers can be
removed at any time, except while the scorer is editing the document.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 549

RFx toolbar functions RFx

RFx Setup: Pricing Model page

You can use the RFx Setup: Pricing Model page to:
` Allow multiple line item offers
` Allow a substitute part number
` Set the RFx pricing structure
` Set fixed costs for the RFx

To see the RFx Setup: Pricing Model page:

1 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Pricing Model tab.
3 Fill in the fields as described below.
4 Click Save.

Field Help for the RFx Setup: Pricing Model Page

General

Allow Multiple Line Item Offers: Check to allow suppliers to submit multiple offers
for the same line item.

Allow Substitute Part Number: Check to allow suppliers to provide a substitute part
number for a line item.

Variable Costs

Pricing Structure: Select a pricing structure. This field indicates how the supplier can
respond to a line item. The options are as follows:
` Unit Price: Select this option for the supplier to enter a unit price value.
` Unit Price Components: Specify the components for unit price. For example, in a
print order for a brochure, you might specify components for four-color print,
two-color print, and black only. In the RFx response, the supplier will enter prices
for each component.
Specifying this pricing structure creates the Price Components view for the Line
Items page.
` Tiered Pricing: If you select this option, you must specify quantity ranges in the
Quantity Price Schedule field on the Line Items page. In the RFx response, the
supplier will enter prices for each quantity range.

550 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

Tiered Pricing is used to allow the supplier to offer discounts for higher-volume
purchases. For example, the supplier might specify one unit price for a 10-unit
purchase, and a lower unit price for a 20-unit purchase.
For more information, see Specifying tiered pricing for RFx line items.

Lock Buyer-Defined Quantity Ranges for Vendor: This checkbox appears only if
you select Tiered Pricing as the Pricing Structure. Check this box to lock the quantity
ranges you specified in the Quantity Price Schedule field on the Line Items page.
Locking the quantity ranges prevents the supplier from altering the minimum or
maximum of the quantity ranges, or adding or deleting quantity ranges. Leave the box
unchecked to allow the supplier to edit the quantity ranges.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
Specifying tiered pricing for RFx line items
RFx Document toolbar button functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 551

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Specifying tiered pricing for RFx line items

Tiered Pricing is used to allow the supplier to offer discounts for higher-volume
purchases. For example, the supplier might specify one unit price for a 10-unit
purchase and a lower unit price for a 20-unit purchase.

To specify tiered pricing for line items:

1 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Pricing Model tab.
3 Under Variable Costs, select Tiered Pricing from the Pricing Structure drop-down
list.
4 Optionally, check the Lock Buyer-Defined Quantity Ranges for Vendor box.
For more information on these fields, see RFx Setup: Pricing Model page.
5 Click Save.
6 Click the Line Items tab.

7 On the Line Items page, click the Edit icon for a line item for which you want
to set tiered pricing.
8 Under Quantity Price Schedule, click Add to add a quantity range.
9 In the table row that appears, enter a minimum and a maximum quantity for the
quantity range. For example, you might enter 1 for the minimum quantity and 10
for the maximum quantity.
10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 for each quantity range you want to add for the line item. For
example, you might create additional quantity ranges of 10 to 20 units, 20 to 30
units, and so on.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
12 Repeat steps 1 to 10 for each line item for which you want to set tiered pricing.
13 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

In the RFx response document, the supplier will see the option to set unit prices for
each of the quantity ranges you specified.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions
RFx Setup: Pricing Model page

552 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

RFx Setup: Delivery Info page

You can use the RFx Setup: Delivery Info page to:
` Set delivery terms
` Set the line item period type
` Set the RFx delivery schedule

To see the RFx Setup: Delivery Info page:

1 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Delivery Info tab.
3 Fill in the fields as described below.
4 Click Save.

Field Help for the RFx Setup: Delivery Info Page

Delivery Information

Delivery Terms: Click Add Delivery Term to add a term.

Line Item Period Type: Select a period type from the drop-down list.

Delivery Schedule: Click Add Delivery Period to add a time period for the line item.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 553

RFx toolbar functions RFx

RFx Setup: Line Item Specifications page

You use the RFx Setup: Line Item Specifications page to add and define line item
specifications. Line item specifications provide detailed information such as technical
and service specifications for the line items in the RFx.
You can assign specification values to individual line items on the RFx Line Item
Detail page.

To see the RFx Setup: Line Item Specifications page:

1 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Line Item Specifications tab.
3 Fill in the fields as described below.
4 Click Save.

Field Help for RFx Setup: Line Item Specifications Page

Add Spec: Click to add a specification in the Item Specification dialog box. You must
add at least one group before adding specifications. You can add an unlimited number
of specifications.
Add Group: Click to add a group to organize your specifications. You can add an
unlimited number of groups.
Reorder: Click to reorder groups and/or specifications or to move specifications from
one group to another.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Setup: Item Specification dialog box
RFx Document toolbar button functions
RFx Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page
Adding an RFx line item specification

554 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

RFx Setup: Item Specification dialog box

You use the Item Specification dialog box to enter information for a line item
specification or supplier-entered attribute. Line item specifications provide detailed
information such as technical and service specifications for the line items in the RFx.
Supplier-entered attributes are attributes whose values are entered by suppliers.

Field Help for Item Specification dialog box

Specification Name: Enter the name of the specification. This is a required field.
Required: Check this box if the specification is required for all line items in the RFx.
Type: From the drop-down list, select the type of specification value.
Description: Enter a description for the specification.
Options: Click Add to add a multiple choice option to the specification. Enter the
option in the new line that appears in the Options table. The Options table appears only
when you select Multiple Choice as the specification type.
Display Field: Select the format in which to display the specification.
Value: Enter or select a default value for the specification.

Value List Source: Click the Lookup icon to select the source of the value list to
use. This field appears only when you choose Select from List as the specification type.
Field Width: Enter the width of the specification field in pixels. This is the minimum
width of the field when it is displayed in a list, and is intended to prevent the data from
wrapping. This field is required.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions
RFx Setup: Line Item Specifications page
RFx Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page
Adding an RFx line item specification

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 555

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Adding an RFx line item specification

Line item specifications provide detailed information such as technical and service
specifications for the line items in the RFx.
After adding a line item specification in Setup, you can assign it a value for a specific
line item on the RFx Line Item Detail page. If you do not assign a new value, the
default specification value will be used.

To add a line item specification:

1 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Line Item Specifications tab. For details, see RFx Setup: Line Item
Specifications page.
3 In the Line Item Specification table, click Add Spec.
4 Fill in the fields in the Item Specification dialog box. For details, see Field Help for
Item Specification dialog box.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Save.
7 Click the Line Items tab.

8 Click the Edit icon for a line item.

Note: You can also edit a specification in the Line Item Specifications view. To open
this view, select it from the view drop-down list.
9 On the Line Item Detail page, change the default specification value as needed.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions
RFx Setup: Line Item Specifications page
RFx Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page

556 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

RFx Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page

You can use the RFx Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page to add and define
attributes whose values are entered by suppliers. This enables you to solicit specific
information from suppliers and make a more informed awarding decision.
These attributes are displayed in the RFx response, where the supplier is prompted to
enter a response for each attribute for each line item.

To see the RFx Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page:

1 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Vendor Entered Attributes tab.
3 Fill in the fields as described below.
4 Click Save.

Field Help for RFx Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes Page

Add Spec: Click to add an attribute in the RFx Setup: Item Specification dialog
box. You must add at least one group before adding specifications. You can add an
unlimited number of specifications.
Add Group: Click to add a group to organize your specifications. You can add an
unlimited number of groups.
Reorder: Click to reorder groups and/or specifications or to move specifications from
one group to another.
Enabled attributes appear on the Line Item Detail page, where you can enter values for
each attribute. For example, you might specify Color as an attribute in the Settings
dialog box and enter White as a value on the Line Item Detail page.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Setup: Item Specification dialog box
RFx Document toolbar button functions
RFx Setup: Line Item Specifications page
Adding an RFx vendor-entered attribute

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 557

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Adding an RFx vendor-entered attribute

Vendor-entered attributes are attributes whose values are entered by suppliers. They
enable you to solicit specific information from suppliers and make a more informed
awarding decision.
These attributes are displayed in the RFx response, where the supplier is prompted to
enter a response for each attribute for each line item.

To add a vendor-entered attribute:

1 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Vendor Entered Attributes tab. For details, see RFx Setup: Vendor
Entered Attributes page.
3 In the Vendor Entered Attribute table, click Add Spec.
4 Fill in the fields in the Item Specification dialog box. For details, see Field Help for
Item Specification dialog box.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Save.

To view vendor-entered attributes, do one of the following:

` In the toolbar, click Reports and select Vendor-Entered Attributes Analysis Report.
This report displays all vendor-entered attributes.
` Click the RFx Responses tab, click a response to open it, click the Line Items tab,
and click a line item. The vendor-entered attributes are displayed on the RFx Line
Item Detail page.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions
RFx Setup: Line Item Specifications page
RFx Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page

558 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

RFx Setup: Groups page

You can use the RFx Setup: Groups page to specify line item groups.

To see the RFx Setup: Groups page:

1 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Groups tab.
3 Fill in the fields as described below.
4 Click Save.

Field Help for RFx Setup: Groups Page

For more information about groups, see Assigning RFx line items and suppliers to
display groups.

Line Item Groups

Groups: Display groups determine the line items that suppliers can see. Click Add to
create display groups. Click Visibility Rules to assign suppliers to the display groups.

Note: After adding display groups and assigning suppliers, you can assign line items to
the display groups on the Line Items page. Suppliers will only be able to see the line
items assigned to their own display group or groups.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions
Assigning RFx line items and suppliers to display groups

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 559

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Assigning RFx line items and suppliers to display groups

You can create display groups for line items and assign suppliers to the display groups.
Suppliers will only be able to see the line items in the display groups to which they are
assigned.

Note: It is recommended that you add suppliers to the RFx before creating display
groups.

To create display groups and assign line items and suppliers:

1 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Groups tab. For details, see RFx Setup: Groups page.
3 In the Groups table, click Add.
4 In the blank row that appears in the Groups table, fill in the display group name.
5 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each display group you want to create.
6 Click Visibility Rules.
7 In the Group Visibility Rules dialog box, check the box for each group that you want
each supplier to see.
8 Click OK.
9 Click Save.
10 Click the Line Items tab.

11 Click the Edit icon for a line item to assign to a display group.
12 On the Line Item Detail page, select a display group for the line item from the
Display Group drop-down list.
13 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
14 Repeat steps 9 through 11 for each line item to assign to a display group.
Note: Line items that are not assigned to a display group are visible to all suppliers.
15 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions
RFx Setup: Groups page

560 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

RFx Setup: Notifications page

You can use the RFx Setup: Notifications page to specify which RFx email notifications
to include in the RFx process.

To see the RFx Setup: Notifications page:

1 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Notifications tab.
3 Fill in the fields as described below.
4 Click Save.

Field Help for RFx Setup: Notifications Page

For more information about notifications, see Setting RFx email notifications.

Line Item Groups

Groups: Display groups determine the line items that suppliers can see. Click Add to
create display groups. Click Visibility Rules to assign suppliers to the display groups.

Note: After adding display groups and assigning suppliers, you can assign line items to
the display groups on the Line Items page. Suppliers will only be able to see the line
items assigned to their own display group or groups.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions
Setting RFx email notifications

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 561

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Setting RFx email notifications

Notifications are announcements of specific events, phases, and conditions of the RFx
process. They are sent via email and can also appear on your Workbench or on the
Workbenches of collaborators and suppliers.

To specify email notifications:

1 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Notifications tab.
3 Check the notifications to include in the RFx process. For details, see RFx Setup:
Notifications page.
4 Click Save.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
RFx Document toolbar button functions
RFx Setup: Notifications page

562 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

RFx Actions toolbar button functions

Click the RFx Actions toolbar button to:
` Create a new RFx round, including specifying suppliers, locking and retiring
questions, and specifying line items
` Print a supplier preview of an RFx
` Print an RFx
` Print an RFx response (Response toolbar)
` Create an auction
` Generate a contract
` Create a master agreement (Scenario toolbar)
` Close collaborative scoring
` Reopen collaborate scoring
` Publish collaborative scores

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
Creating a new RFx round
Specifying suppliers for a new RFx round
Locking or retiring a question or a section in a new RFx round
Specifying line items for a new RFx round
Printing an RFx supplier preview
Printing an RFx
Printing an RFx response
Creating an auction from an RFx
Generating a contract from an auction or RFx
Creating a master agreement from an RFx
Closing collaborative question scoring for an RFx
Reopening collaborative question scoring for an RFx
Publishing collaborative question scores for an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 563

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Creating a new RFx round

It is recommended practice to run an initial RFI, followed by an RFP. Multiple rounds of
an RFx can help further refine your requests. A new RFx round preserves all the content
for the RFx and the RFx responses. Each round of an RFx is saved so that you can later
refer to it for audits and comparisons.
In a new round, you can:
` Add or edit information
` Specify which suppliers to include in a round
` Lock, retire, add, or edit questions
` Specify line items for a round
` Add or edit accounting information
` Add or edit discussions and attachments

Note: Before you can create a new round for an RFx, you must save the RFx.

You can create a new round while the previous round is still Open for Response.
However, before you can change the phase of the new round to Open for Response, you
must change the phase of the previous round to Closed for Response.

To create a new round for an RFx:

1 In the toolbar, click Actions and select New Round from the menu.
2 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
3 In the wizard that appears, follow the prompts to specify suppliers, lock or retire
questions, and delete line items.
4 On the RFx Header page, make sure that the Enable Multiple Rounds box is
checked.
5 Select a round name from the Round Name drop-down list.
6 Fill in or edit any additional fields.
7 Click the Schedule tab to add schedule information.
8 Click the Vendors tab to add new suppliers or reinstate excluded suppliers.
9 Click the Questions tab to add, edit, lock, or retire questions. If you retired any
weighted questions, you must adjust the section weights for the remaining
questions.
10 Click the Line Items tab to add, edit, or delete line items.
11 Click the Accounting tab to add or edit accounting information.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

564 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

13 When you are satisfied with the new RFx, change the RFx to the Open for Response
phase.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Specifying suppliers for a new RFx round
Specifying line items for a new RFx round
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Adding a file attachment
Adding a URL attachment
Creating a discussion message

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 565

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Specifying suppliers for a new RFx round

You specify suppliers for a round in the wizard when creating the new round. You can
choose which suppliers from the previous round to include or exclude.
You can reinstate an excluded supplier on the Vendors page. However, the supplier’s
previous responses are not considered in the response.

To specify suppliers for a new RFx round:

1 In the toolbar, click Actions and select New Round from the menu.
2 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
3 In Step 1 of the wizard that appears, check the box in the Carry to Next Round
for each supplier you want to include. Exclude suppliers by leaving their checkboxes
clear.
4 Follow the remaining prompts to complete the wizard and create the new round.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Specifying line items for a new RFx round
Reinstating a supplier in an RFx round
Reordering items in a list
Deleting items from a list

566 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

Locking or retiring a question or a section in a new RFx round

You can lock and retire questions and sections of an RFx in the wizard used to create a
new round.
Locking questions and sections closes them so that suppliers cannot respond or change
responses to them. However, locked questions and sections are assigned scores and do
contribute to the response score and supplier rank. If a new supplier is invited to the
new round, that supplier can respond to a locked question or section.
Retiring questions and sections removes them from the new round so suppliers do not
see them. Retired questions and sections are not assigned value scores and do not
contribute to the response score and supplier rank.
When you lock or retire a question or section, you must readjust the question weights
within a section as well as readjust the section weight.

Note: If you lock or retire a section, all questions within that section are locked.
However, when you restore a section, you must restore each question individually.

Locked or retired questions and sections can be restored during the cycle of the current
round or any future rounds.

To lock or retire a question or section:

1 In the toolbar, click Actions and select New Round from the menu.
2 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
3 In Step 1 of the wizard that appears, specify suppliers for the round and click Next.
4 In Step 2 of the wizard, do one of the following:
■ Select Locked or Retired from the drop-down list in the Round Status column
for the section containing questions to lock or retire.
■ Select Locked or Retired from the drop-down list in the Round Status column
for a single question to lock or retire.
5 Follow the remaining prompts to complete the wizard and create the new round.

Note: You can also add, edit, lock, or retire questions on the Questions page. If you
used the wizard to retire any weighted questions, you must adjust the section weights
on the Questions page before you change the RFx phase to Open for Response.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Specifying suppliers for a new RFx round
Specifying line items for a new RFx round

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 567

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Specifying line items for a new RFx round

You delete an item from an RFx round in the wizard used to create the new round.
If you delete a line item from a new RFx round, suppliers cannot make new bids for the
line item. Previous bids made by suppliers on the removed line items are not included
as part of the suppliers’ responses in the first round.
There are two ways to delete line items: individually or as part of a selected group.

Note: Be sure that you want to delete the line item or items before performing this
action. You cannot recover an item that has been deleted.

To delete a single line item in a new RFx round:

1 In the toolbar, click Actions and select New Round from the menu.
2 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
3 In Step 1 of the wizard that appears, specify suppliers for the round and click Next.
4 In Step 2 of the wizard, lock and retire questions for the round and click Next.
5 In Step 3 of the wizard, check the box in the Carry to Next Round for each line
item you want to include. Delete line items by leaving their checkboxes clear.
6 Click Finish to create the new round.

Note: You can also add, edit and delete line items on the line items page.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx
Specifying suppliers for a new RFx round
Locking or retiring a question or a section in a new RFx round

568 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

Printing an RFx supplier preview

You can print a version of the RFx that shows how the supplier sees it.

To print a supplier preview:

1 In the toolbar, click Actions and select Create Vendor Preview PDF from the
menu. You see a PDF file of the RFx supplier preview.
2 Print the preview using your browser’s Print function.

Related Topics
Creating a new RFx round
Printing an RFx
Printing an RFx response
Viewing an RFx report
Creating an auction from an RFx
Header functions
Creating a master agreement from an RFx
Canceling an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 569

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Printing an RFx
1 In the toolbar, click Actions and select Create RFx PDF from the menu. You see a
page with a progress meter indicating the PDF creation status.
2 Do one of the following:
■ Click Stop Waiting, E-mail PDF Instead to resume work and have the PDF
emailed to you when it is finished. Open the PDF from your email.
■ Wait for the PDF to be created. You see a PDF file of the buy-side version of the
RFx.
3 Print the RFx using your browser’s Print function.

Related Topics
Creating a new RFx round
Printing an RFx supplier preview
Printing an RFx response
Viewing an RFx report
Creating an auction from an RFx
Header functions
Creating a master agreement from an RFx
Canceling an RFx

570 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

Printing an RFx response

1 In the toolbar of the response, click Actions and select Print RFx Response from
the menu. You see a page with a progress meter indicating the PDF creation status.
2 Do one of the following:
■ Click Stop Waiting, E-mail PDF Instead to resume work and have the PDF
emailed to you when it is finished. Open the PDF from your email.
■ Wait for the PDF to be created. You see a PDF file of the RFx response.
3 Print the RFx response using your browser’s Print function.

Related Topics
Creating a new RFx round
Printing an RFx supplier preview
Viewing an RFx report
Creating an auction from an RFx
Header functions
Creating a master agreement from an RFx
Canceling an RFx

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 571

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Creating an auction from an RFx

After you close an RFx to responses, you can create an auction from it. An auction can
help you negotiate a better value than you discovered with the RFx. Unlike an RFx,
which can go on for weeks, an auction typically lasts for a few hours to a few days.
You must have the appropriate rights before you can create an auction from an RFx.

Note: You must change the RFx phase to Closed for Response before you can create an
auction.

To create an auction:
1 In the toolbar, click Actions and select Create Auction from the menu.
2 Follow the prompts to create the auction.

Related Topics
Creating a new RFx round
Printing an RFx supplier preview
Printing an RFx
Printing an RFx response
Viewing an RFx report
Creating an auction
Creating a master agreement from an RFx
Canceling an RFx

572 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

Creating a master agreement from an RFx

A master agreement is a feature that enables you to analyze, audit, and measure
specific buying activity against a contract’s original strategic goals. With master
agreements, you can leverage contract negotiations and management into cost savings
and improved compliance.
You can create master agreements from within the Contracts module as well as from
within the RFx and Auction modules at the conclusion of a sourcing event.
You must have the appropriate rights before you can create a master agreement from
an RFx. You create a master agreement from an award scenario.

Note: You must award and publish the RFx before you can create a master agreement.

To create a master agreement:

1 On the Awards page, click the Edit icon for the award scenario to use as the
basis for a master agreement.
2 In the toolbar of the award scenario, click Actions and select Create Master
Agreements from the menu.
3 On the Step 1: Select Awarded Proposals page of the Create Master Agreement
wizard, select the proposal for which to generate the agreement and click Next.
4 On the Step 2: Select Document Type page of the wizard, select the type of master
agreement to create and click Next.
Note: If you want to create sub-agreements within the master agreement, select
Advanced as the document type.
5 On the Step 3: Settings page of the wizard, do the following:
a In the Place Line Items At field, if applicable, choose to create line items at
the Master Agreement level or the Agreement level.
b In the Group Line Items by field, choose to group line items by category or
location, or leave them ungrouped.
c In the End Date field, enter an end date for the master agreement or select
one using the calendar icon. This field is required.
d Click Next.
6 In the Step 4: Preview and Confirm Selections page of the wizard, review the
selections you made. If necessary, click the Back button to change selections.
When you finish reviewing your selections, click Finish.
You see the master agreement you created. You can continue entering information
into this master agreement. For details, see Creating a master agreement.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 573

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Related Topics
Creating a new RFx round
Printing an RFx supplier preview
Printing an RFx
Printing an RFx response
Viewing an RFx report
Creating an auction from an RFx
Creating a master agreement
Canceling an RFx

574 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

Closing collaborative question scoring for an RFx

You close collaborative scoring to end the scoring process and finalize the scores. An
email is sent notifying scorers that scoring has ended.
Any user with edit rights to the RFx can close collaborative scoring. After scoring is
closed, scorers cannot enter questions for scores unless scoring is reopened.

To close collaborative scores:

1 If the RFx is not in Edit mode, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
2 Click the Actions button in the toolbar and select Close Collaborative Scoring from
the menu.
3 In the confirmation dialog box that appears, click Yes.
An email is sent to all collaborative scorers indicating that the collaborative scoring
period has ended and scores cannot be added or changed. However, scores can still
optionally be overridden after scoring is closed. For details, see Overriding
collaborative and automatic question scores for an RFx.
If you do not close scoring manually, it is closed automatically when RFx awarding
begins. For details, see RFx Awards page.
4 Optionally, to see the collaborative scoring results applied to the responses, click
the RFx Responses tab and click Recalculate RFx Responses to recalculate the
response scores.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Setup: Scoring page
RFx Scoring page
Entering collaborative question scores for an RFx
Overriding collaborative and automatic question scores for an RFx
Reopening collaborative question scoring for an RFx
Publishing collaborative question scores for an RFx
Quick Reference: Setting up Collaborative RFx Question Scoring

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 575

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Reopening collaborative question scoring for an RFx

After collaborative scoring is closed, scoring can be reopened to give scorers an
additional opportunity to enter scores.
Any user with edit rights to the RFx can reopen scoring.

To reopen collaborative scores:

1 If the RFx is not in Edit mode, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
2 Click the Actions button in the toolbar and select Reopen RFx for Collaborative
Scoring from the menu.
An email is sent to all collaborative scorers indicating that the collaborative scoring
period has reopened.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Setup: Scoring page
RFx Scoring page
Entering collaborative question scores for an RFx
Overriding collaborative and automatic question scores for an RFx
Closing collaborative question scoring for an RFx
Publishing collaborative question scores for an RFx
Quick Reference: Setting up Collaborative RFx Question Scoring

576 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

Publishing collaborative question scores for an RFx

If an RFx uses Private Scoring, as indicated on the RFx Setup: Scoring page, you can
publish collaborative scores at any time during or after the scoring process. Publishing
scores makes them visible on the Scoring page to all collaborative scorers. An email is
sent notifying scorers that scores have been published.
Only the document owner can publish scores.
You publish scores on the Scoring page. The Scoring page only appears when the RFx
changes to Closed for Response.

To publish collaborative scores:

1 If the RFx is not in Edit mode, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
2 Click the Actions button in the toolbar and select Publish Scores from the menu.
3 In the confirmation dialog box that appears, click Yes.
An email is sent to all collaborative scorers indicating that scoring is now public and
that all collaborative scores can be viewed on the Scoring page.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Setup: Scoring page
RFx Scoring page
Entering collaborative question scores for an RFx
Overriding collaborative and automatic question scores for an RFx
Reopening collaborative question scoring for an RFx
Closing collaborative question scoring for an RFx
Quick Reference: Setting up Collaborative RFx Question Scoring

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 577

RFx toolbar functions RFx

RFx Reports toolbar button functions

Click the RFx Reports toolbar button to:
` View an RFx report
` Export RFx questions to an Excel file

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
Viewing an RFx report

578 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

Viewing an RFx report

You can view a number of reports that give you information about the RFx. Some
reports you can view are:

Report Description

RFx Vendor Response This is a report of significant events for each supplier's response,
Status report such as the date they accepted the terms and completed their
response.
RFx Vendor Response This is a report of each supplier's progress in their response to an
Progress report RFx including % of questions answered and % of required
questions answered.
RFx Response Analysis This report is a side-by-side comparison analysis of supplier
responses including actual answers and scoring information.
RFx Line Item Savings For each supplier response to a line item, the report shows a
calculation of savings based on the item's current price. In
addition, the highest potential savings is shown in total and for
each item.
RFx Line Item Lowest Price For all supplier responses to line items, the report shows the unit
and extended price and determines which supplier provided the
lowest price quote.
RFx Question Extract This report is an export of all RFx Questions for offline analysis.
RFx Line Item Extract This report is an export of all RFx Line Items for offline analysis.
RFx Schedule and This report is an export of the RFx Schedule and Collaborators list
Collaborators Extract for offline analysis.
Round Change Summary For multi-round RFxs, this report shows the questions the buyer
has added, changed, or retired from round-to-round.
RFx Specification IDs This report cross-references the specification names in a
report Frictionless RFx and the company-specific IDs used to reference
these specifications.
RFx Question Export (in This function allows you to export RFx questions to an Excel file
Import format) report for off-line editing or sharing.
Vendor-Entered Attributes This report displays all vendor-entered attributes for this RFx.
Analysis report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 579

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Report Description

RFx Optimization Comparison This report is a detailed comparison of multiple potential award
Scenario scenarios. The Compare button to activate this report only
appears after selecting more than one Optimized award scenario.
Vendor Award Report For a selected award scenario, this report shows a breakdown by
supplier of the item-level awards.
Line Item Award Report For a selected award scenario, this report shows a breakdown by
item of the awards to each supplier.
Line Item Award Report for This report is an export of detailed line item award information for
Export offline award analysis.

To view an RFx report:

1 In the toolbar, click Reports and select the report to view from the menu. You see
the report.
2 Optionally, bookmark the report.
3 Optionally, export the report as a PDF, Excel (XLS), or CSV file.
4 After you finish viewing the report, click Close Window.

Related Topics
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Creating a new RFx round
Printing an RFx supplier preview
Printing an RFx
Printing an RFx response
Viewing a report within a sourcing document
Creating an auction from an RFx
Header functions
Creating a master agreement from an RFx
Canceling an RFx

580 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

RFx Vendor Response Status report

This report lists each response provided, by supplier, the current status of the
Response (Firm or Preliminary), and the date responded.

RFx Vendor Response Status

Field Description

Vendor The name of the supplier providing the response.

Vendor ID The Frictionless Internal ID number for the supplier.
Contact The name of the contact at the supplier.
Contact Email The email for the supplier contact.
Vendor Status The current status of the supplier on the RFX (Invited, Excluded,
Retracted).
RFX Response ID The Frictionless ID given to the RFX in question.
Event Terms Status Indicates whether the supplier has accepted the terms to participate.
Event Terms Updated At The date and time the Event Terms were accepted.
Event Terms Updated By The name of the contact that accepted the Event Terms.
Intention to Respond The date by which the supplier must respond with their intentions to
Expires respond or decline.
Date Responded The date at which the response was submitted to the buyer.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
Viewing an RFx report
Exporting RFx questions to an Excel file
Importing RFx questions from an Excel file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 581

RFx toolbar functions RFx

RFx Vendor Response Progress report

This report lists the current responses submitted against an RFx and the level of
completion of each response.

RFx Vendor Response Progress

Field Description

RFX Response ID The Frictionless ID assigned to this response when it is received by the
buyer.
Vendor The name of the supplier submitting the response.
Questions Answered The number of questions that include responses out of the total number
of questions available for response.
Questions Answered (%) The percentage of questions that include responses.
Required Questions The number of required questions that include responses out of the total
Answered number of questions available for response.
Required Questions The percentage of required questions that include responses.
Answered (%)
RFx Response Status The current status of the response (In Progress, Preliminary, Firm).

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
Viewing an RFx report
Exporting RFx questions to an Excel file
Importing RFx questions from an Excel file

582 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

RFx Specification IDs report

This report cross-references the specification names in a Frictionless RFx and the
company-specific IDs used to reference these specifications. The report lists any
specifications utilized in the RFx, the internal ID, and the ID number of the RFX in which
the specification was used.

RFx Specification IDs

Field Description

Internal ID The company-specific naming convention used to identify the specification.

Name The name of the specification.
Description The description provided for the specification
RFX Last Used The ID of the RFX in which the specification was utilized.
Name The name of the RFX.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
Viewing an RFx report
Exporting RFx questions to an Excel file
Importing RFx questions from an Excel file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 583

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Exporting RFx questions to an Excel file

RFx question import and export enables you to edit questions off-line and then
re-import them. This feature also allows you to share questions by exporting them from
a template or RFx and importing them into another template or RFx.
For information on importing RFx questions, see Importing RFx questions from an
Excel file.

To export RFx questions to an Excel file:

1 In the toolbar of an RFx or RFx template, click Reports and select RFx Question
Export.
Note: The Reports toolbar button appears after the RFx has been saved.
2 The RFx Question Export report appears. This report indicates the data and format
that will be used if the questions are re-imported.
3 Click Export Excel.
4 In the File Download dialog box, click Save.
5 In the Save As dialog box, indicate a name and location for the file and click Save.
The questions are saved to the indicated file.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
Viewing an RFx report
Importing RFx questions from an Excel file

584 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

RFx Change Phase toolbar button functions

Click the Change Phase button to:

` Change the phase of an RFx

The RFx phase determines the actions that can be performed on the RFx. RFx phases
are:
` Created: This is the initial phase of the RFx. Most RFx information is entered
during this phase, including basic information, collaborators, scorers, questions,
and line items.
` Waiting for Approval: An RFx in this phase must be approved by all collaborators
who are designated as approvers before it can be advanced to the next phase.
` Open for Review: In this RFx phase, suppliers are notified about the RFx and can
view their responses but cannot yet edit them.
` Open for Response: In this RFx phase, suppliers can edit and submit their
responses.
Note: An RFx must contain at least one question or one line item before it can be
opened for response.
` Closed to Response: In this RFx phase, suppliers can no longer respond to the
RFx. The document owner can complete any manual scoring and weight
adjustments that are necessary before awarding the RFx.
` Awarded: In this RFx phase, scoring and weighting are locked and the RFx is
awarded to one or more suppliers. During a simple award, the RFx is automatically
advanced to this phase. For a scenario award, the document owner must manually
advance the RFx to this phase.

The phases used in an RFx are determined by the RFx type.

Related Topics
RFx toolbar functions
Changing an RFx phase

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 585

RFx toolbar functions RFx

Changing an RFx phase

The RFx phase determines the actions that can be performed on the RFx. RFx phases
are:
` Created: This is the initial phase of the RFx. Most RFx information is entered
during this phase, including basic information, collaborators, scorers, questions,
and line items.
` Waiting for Approval: An RFx in this phase must be approved by all collaborators
who are designated as Approvers before it can be advanced to the next phase.
To choose an approver, add a collaborator on the Header page and then choose
Approver from the drop-down list in the Role column.
If no approvers have been assigned to the RFx, you can advance it to the next
phase without approval. The RFx can be edited while in this phase.
` Open for Review: In this RFx phase, suppliers are notified about the RFx and can
view their responses but cannot yet edit them. In this phase, you can edit only the
preferences, weights, and total cost fields in the question sections.
` Open for Response: In this RFx phase, suppliers can edit and submit their
responses.
Note: An RFx must contain at least one question or one line item before it can be
opened for response.
` Closed to Response: In this RFx phase, suppliers can no longer respond to the
RFx. The document owner can complete any manual scoring and weight
adjustments that are necessary before awarding the RFx.
` Awarded: In this RFx phase, scoring and weighting are locked and the RFx is
awarded to one or more suppliers. During a simple award, the RFx is automatically
advanced to this phase. For a scenario award, the document owner must manually
advance the RFx to this phase.

The phases used in an RFx are determined by the RFx type.

To change a phase:

1 In the RFx document toolbar, click the Change Phase button . The button text
indicates the current document phase.
2 In the Change Phase dialog box, select the new phase.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
4 In the Change Phase dialog box, click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics

586 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx RFx toolbar functions

RFx toolbar functions

RFx Change Phase toolbar button functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 587

Quick Reference: Setting up Collaborative RFx Question Scoring RFx

Quick Reference: Setting up Collaborative RFx Question Scoring

The following is a quick reference guide to setting up collaborative scoring for RFx
questions.
Collaborative scoring allows you to invite RFx collaborators to score questions based on
their areas of expertise. You can give collaborators’ scores the same weights or choose
to weight them differently based on their depth of knowledge or importance in your
organization.
You can set up collaborative scoring if you are the document owner or any user with
edit rights to the RFx.

Create or Modify the RFx Type

To use collaborative scoring, enable it in the RFx type as follows:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the RFx section of Document Setup, select RFx Types from the drop-down list
and click OK.
3 On the RFx Type List page, click Create to create an RFx, or click the RFx type
name to edit.
4 For an existing RFx type, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Check Questions to enable questions.
6 Check Enable Scoring.
7 From the drop-down list, select Collaborative.
8 Check Private Scoring if the collaborators should not see each other’s scores.
9 Check Use Equally Weighted Average for All Scorers to use equal weights for
each scorer, rather than setting weights individually. Leave this box unchecked to
enable the RFx owner to set individual weights for scorers. This value can be
changed in an RFx of this type.
10 Fill in the other RFx type fields as needed. For details, see Creating an RFx type.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Create the RFx and add Scorers

Add collaborators and designate them as scorers, as follows:

1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create RFx from the
RFx submenu.
2 In the Create dialog box, select an RFx type that specifies collaborative scoring as
described above.
3 Click Finish.

588 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

RFx Quick Reference: Setting up Collaborative RFx Question Scoring

4 On the Header page, add collaborators. Be sure to add all users you want to
designate as scorers, including yourself. If you do not add yourself as a scorer, you
will not be able to enter question scores, but you will be able to override scores.
5 In the RFx toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
6 Click the Scoring tab.
7 Click Add to add scorers from the list of collaborators. Any user specified as a
Collaborator on the Header page can be added as a scorer.
8 Fill in other fields for scoring. For details, see RFx Setup: Scoring page.
9 Enter any other Setup information, including a required Delivery Term on the
Delivery Info page.
10 Click Save.

Add Questions and Select Scoring Methods and Weights

To enable collaborative scoring for a question, you must select Manual Scoring for the
question and set its weight and the weight for its section, as follows:
1 On the Questions page, add questions as described in the topics under RFx
Question Summary page.

2 To select scoring methods and weights for questions, click the Edit icon for a
section on the Questions page.
3 Click the Preferences tab.
4 For each question for which to use collaborative scoring, select Manually Score from
the Scoring Method drop-down list.
5 Click the Adjust Question Weights button at the bottom of the page.
6 In the Adjust Weights dialog box, for each question, type a weight in the Question
Weight field or select it using the Scale slider. Optionally, check the Weight
Locked box to keep the weight from being automatically adjusted.
7 Click Sum Weights to total the question weights. To automatically adjust the
weights to total 100, click Adjust to 100. The sum of the weights must be 100.
8 Click OK.
9 Click Save in the document toolbar.
10 Click the RFx name at the top of the page to return to the Questions page.
11 Click the Adjust Section Weights button at the bottom of the page.
12 In the Adjust Weights dialog box, for each section, type a weight in the Section
Weight field or select it using the Scale slider. Optionally, check the Weight
Locked box to keep the weight from being automatically adjusted.
13 Click Sum Weights to total the section weights. To automatically adjust the
weights to total 100, click Adjust to 100. The sum of the weights must be 100.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 589

Quick Reference: Setting up Collaborative RFx Question Scoring RFx

14 Click OK.
15 Click Save in the document toolbar.
16 Click the RFx name at the top of the page to return to the Questions page.
17 On the Questions page, select Ready for Release from the Status drop-down list
for all sections.
18 Finish adding other RFx information as described in Creating an RFx.

Related Topics
RFx Setup: Scoring page
RFx Scoring page
Entering collaborative question scores for an RFx
Overriding collaborative and automatic question scores for an RFx
Closing collaborative question scoring for an RFx
Publishing collaborative question scores for an RFx

590 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

BOMs

A bill of materials (BOM) is a list of related items, which can include both direct and
indirect materials, that are needed to create a finished product. The list can contain
additional BOMs as sub-assemblies.
A BOM is a complex collection of items, and can represent a significant amount of
spending. In fact, a large percentage of a product’s cost is the cost of its direct
materials. You can track and control these costs by creating BOMs and then sourcing
the collected list in an RFx.
Materials to add to BOMs are created in Setup. You can also import and export BOMs
and materials as CSV files in Setup.

Click the Enterprise Sourcing button in the navigation bar to see the BOM submenu,
which contains the following basic options for this module:

Option Description

Create Bill of Materials Click to create a new BOM. See Creating a BOM.
All BOMs Click to see the Bill of Materials List page displaying a list of all
BOMs.

Confidential 591
Bill of Materials List page BOMs

Bill of Materials List page

To display the Bill of Materials List page:
` Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select All BOMs from the BOM
submenu.

On the Bill of Materials List page, you can:

` View BOMs in the following ways:

Option Description

My BOMs View a list of all active Bills of Materials.

All Inactive BOMs View a list of all inactive Bills of Materials.

` Search for a BOM by Name, Description, Creator, Revision, or Plant

` Create and edit a BOM
` Export a BOM list to a CSV file or to a PDF file

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Creating a BOM
Editing a BOM
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

592 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

BOMs Bill of Materials List page

Creating a BOM
1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Create Bill of Materials
from the BOM submenu.
Note: You can also create a BOM by clicking the Create button on the Bill of
Materials List page.
2 On the Header page, fill in the basic information for the BOM.
3 Click the Materials tab to add a bill of materials or a material.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Editing a BOM
Adding a bill of materials to a BOM
Adding a material to a BOM

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 593

Bill of Materials List page BOMs

Editing a BOM
1 Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select All BOMs from the BOM
submenu.
2 On the Bill of Materials List page, click the BOM to edit.
3 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 On the Header page, edit any fields.
5 Click the Materials tab to add, edit, or remove a bill of materials or a material.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a BOM
Adding a bill of materials to a BOM
Editing a bill of materials added to a BOM
Adding a material to a BOM
Editing a material added to a BOM

594 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

BOMs BOM Header page

BOM Header page

On the BOM Header page, you can add and edit basic BOM information, including the
revision level.

Related Topics
Creating a BOM
Changing the revision level of a BOM

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 595

BOM Header page BOMs

Changing the revision level of a BOM

Each time you edit a BOM, you should change its revision level on the Header page.
This allows you and your collaborators to track changes in the BOM.
You can enter a number, word, or any other string as the revision level.

To change the revision level:

1 On the Header page, enter a new revision level in the Revision Level field.
2 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
BOM Header page

596 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

BOMs BOM Materials page

BOM Materials page

Materials are specific parts of the products to be assembled. Each material becomes a
line item in the BOM. You can also add another BOM to the BOM.
Materials to add to BOMs are created in Setup. You can also import and export BOMs
and materials as CSV files in Setup.

On the Materials page, you can:

` Add and edit a bill of materials
` Add and edit a material
` Reorder BOMs and materials

Related Topics
Creating a BOM
Adding a bill of materials to a BOM
Editing a bill of materials added to a BOM
Adding a material to a BOM
Editing a material added to a BOM
Reordering items in a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 597

BOM Materials page BOMs

Adding a bill of materials to a BOM

BOMs are hierarchical and can contain other BOMs as line items.

To add a BOM:
1 On the Materials page, click Add Bill of Materials.
2 Check the box for one or more bills of materials and click OK.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a BOM
Editing a bill of materials added to a BOM
Adding a material to a BOM
Editing a material added to a BOM

598 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

BOMs BOM Materials page

Editing a bill of materials added to a BOM

1 On the Materials page, click the Edit icon for the bill of materials to edit.
2 In the dialog box, edit any fields.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a BOM
Adding a bill of materials to a BOM
Adding a material to a BOM
Editing a material added to a BOM

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 599

BOM Materials page BOMs

Adding a material to a BOM

Materials are specific parts of the products to be assembled. Each material becomes a
line item in the BOM.
Materials to add to BOMs are created in Setup. You can also import and export BOMs
and materials as CSV files in Setup.

To add a material:
1 On the Materials page, click Add Material.
2 Check the box for one or more materials and click OK.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a BOM
Adding a bill of materials to a BOM
Editing a bill of materials added to a BOM
Editing a material added to a BOM

600 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

BOMs BOM Materials page

Editing a material added to a BOM

1 On the Materials page, click the Edit icon for the material to edit.
2 In the dialog box, edit any fields.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a BOM
Adding a bill of materials to a BOM
Editing a bill of materials added to a BOM
Adding a material to a BOM

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 601

BOM Materials page BOMs

602 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Library Options

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. This
minimizes the amount of manual data entry that is required to create a sourcing
document.
Once you add a library schedule component to a sourcing document, it can be modified
as needed.

Click the Enterprise Sourcing button in the navigation bar to see the Library
submenu, which contains the following options:

Option Description

Form Library The form library enables you to store pre-defined form questions.
Forms help standardize project creation and enforce best
practices.
Project Library Schedule The project schedule library enables you to store pre-defined
milestones and tasks, so that you can create standard project
schedules and use them as needed in your projects.
RFx Schedule Library The RFx schedule library enables you to store pre-defined
milestones and tasks, so that you can create standard schedules
and use them as needed in your RFxs.
RFx Information Library The RFx information library allows you to store RFx information
for use in multiple RFxs.
RFx Questions Library The RFx questions library allows you to store questions for use in
multiple RFxs.
RFx Table Design Library The RFx table design library enables you to store custom table
formats. You add a table format to an RFx on the RFx Questions
page.
Event Terms Templates Event terms define the conditions to which a supplier must agree
in order to participate in a sourcing event. The event terms library
stores standard legal terms and language that can be reused
when creating sourcing documents.
Attachment Library Attachments enable you to reference additional information that
you cannot include in the sourcing document itself.

Note: Library options can also be accessed from the Setup page. Click Setup and
choose a library option from the appropriate drop-down list under Document Setup.

Related Topics

Confidential 603
 Library Options

Projects
Demand Aggregation
Auctions
RFx
BOMs
Analysis

604 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Reports

Reports

To get help for all reports on the Analysis page, see the Analysis module.

Related Topics
Projects
Demand Aggregation
Auctions
RFx
BOMs
Library Options

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 605

 Reports

606 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Management
The Contract Management module enables you to manage the contract life cycle,
enforce internal policies to eliminate unnecessary spend, and ensure compliance.
Click the Contract Management button in the navigation bar to see the options for
this module.

Agreements
The Agreements submenu contains the following options.

Option Description

Create Master Agreement Click to create a new master agreement from a template. See
From Template Creating a master agreement from a template.
Create Master Agreement Click to create a new master agreement. See Creating a master
agreement.
My Master Agreements and Click to see the Master Agreements List page displaying a list of
Agreements all master agreements and agreements for which you are an owner
or collaborator.
Search Master Agreements Click to see the Master Agreements List page displaying a
and Agreements number of text fields for search criteria.
All Master Agreement Click to see the Master Agreements List page displaying a list of
Templates all master agreement templates.
Create Master Agreement Click to create a new master agreement template. See Creating a
Template master agreement template.

Confidential 607
Clause Library
The Clause Library submenu contains the following options.

Option Description

Clause List Click to see the Contract Clause List page displaying a list of all
contract clauses.
Section List Click to see the Contract Section List page displaying a list of all
contract sections.
Contract Document Click to see the Contract Document Template List page displaying
Template List a list of all contract document templates.
Library Item Phase Click to see the Contract Generation Phases Header page
Configuration displaying a list of all contract item phases.
Variable Library Click to see the Contract Generation Variable Configuration
Header page displaying a list of all contract variables.

Agreement Analysis
The Agreement Analysis submenu contains the following options.

Option Description

Upcoming and Expired This report is a list of master agreements and agreements that will
Master Agreements and expire soon, or which have expired within a configurable number of
Agreements report days.
Agreement Savings This report is a summary of master agreement and agreement
Impact for Owner report savings associated with a given agreement owner.
Spend Under Contract This report indicates spend on contract vs. spend off contract,
report grouped by time period.
Master Agreements with This report is a summary of master agreements with audits
Overdue Audits Summary overdue.
report
Master Agreement This report is a list of all master agreements with one or more key
Advanced Search report attributes (or with sub-agreement attributes) containing a
user-entered text string. This report also searches by supplier.

This section documents the options for Contract Management.

608 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements

A contract is a legal agreement between a purchasing enterprise and a supplier which

dictates buying, payment, and delivery terms over time. A master agreement is a
Frictionless® SRM feature that enables you to analyze, audit, and measure specific
buying activity against a contract’s original strategic goals. With master agreements,
you can leverage contract negotiations and management into cost savings and
improved compliance.
You create and monitor master agreements through the Contract Management module.
You can also create a master agreement from within an RFX, auction or project.

Note: You create contracts, the legal documents, through Contract Generation. For
information on contract generation, see Contract Generation.

Click the Contract Management button in the navigation bar to see the Agreements
submenu, which contains the following basic options for this module:.

Option Description

Create Master Agreement Click to create a new master agreement from a template. See
From Template Creating a master agreement from a template.
Create Master Agreement Click to create a new master agreement. See Creating a master
agreement.
My Master Agreements and Click to see the Master Agreements List page displaying a list of
Agreements all master agreements and agreements for which you are an owner
or collaborator.
Search Master Agreements Click to see the Master Agreements List page displaying a
and Agreements number of text fields for search criteria.
Note: Although the Renewal Date After and Renewal Date
Occurs within filters are required, this option will find agreements
without a renewal date if all other filter values are valid.
All Master Agreement Click to see the Master Agreements List page displaying a list of
Templates all master agreement templates.
Create Master Agreement Click to create a new master agreement template. See Creating a
Template master agreement template.

Confidential 609
Master Agreements List page Master Agreements

Master Agreements List page

To display the Master Agreement List page:
` Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the Agreements submenu:
■ My Master Agreements and Agreements
■ Search Master Agreements and Agreements
■ All Master Agreement Templates

On the Master Agreements List page, you can:

` View master agreements in the following ways.

Option Description

My Master Agreements and View a list of all master agreements and agreements for which you
Agreements are an owner or collaborator. You can filter your search results
using the following criteria:
■ Only agreements I own

Search Master Agreements Find specific master agreements by a number of attributes.

and Agreements
All Master Agreement View a list of all master agreement templates. You can filter your
Templates search results using the following criteria:
■ Internal Category

610 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements List page

Option Description

Master Agreements and View a list of all master agreements and agreements for which you
Agreements Requiring are an owner or collaborator that have tasks or milestones
Attention requiring attention. You can filter your search results using the
following criteria:
■ Only agreements I own
■ Planned End Date for Items Occurs within (days)
■ End Date Occurs within (days)

My Master Agreements and View a list of master agreements and agreements for which you are
Agreements - Canceled or an owner or collaborator that have been canceled or closed. You
Closed can filter your search results using the following criteria:
■ Only agreements I own

Search Master Agreements Find specific master agreements that have been canceled or closed.
and Agreements - Canceled You can filter your search results using the following criteria:
or Closed ■ Agreement Name
■ Vendor Name
■ Agreement Manager
■ Internal Category
■ Company
■ Renewal After (date)
■ Renewal Date Occurs within (days)

All Inactive Master Agreement View a list of all inactive master agreement templates. You can
Templates filter your search results using the following criteria:
■ Internal Category

` Create or edit a master agreement or template.

` Export a master agreement list to a CSV file or to a PDF file.

Note: The tabs that appear in a master agreement are determined by the master
agreement type. All tabs might not appear in every document.

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Creating a master agreement
Creating a master agreement from a template
Editing a master agreement
Creating a master agreement template
Editing a master agreement template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 611

Master Agreements List page Master Agreements

Creating a master agreement

Note: You can also create a master agreement from within an RFx, auction, or project.

To create a master agreement:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Create Master
Agreement from the Agreements submenu.
Note: You can also create a master agreement by clicking the Create button on the
Master Agreements List page.
2 In the Create dialog box, select a master agreement type or select a template by
clicking the Lookup icon .
3 Click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields for basic information and those under Control
Info, and add collaborators and document links. For details, see Field help for
Master Agreements Header page.
5 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Schedule page.
6 Click the Vendor Info tab to select a primary contact for the supplier and add other
contacts. For details, see Field help for Master Agreements Vendor Info page.
7 Click the Agreements tab to add sub-agreements. For details, see Creating an
agreement.
8 Click the Line Items tab to add line items. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Line Items page.
9 Click the Terms tab to add a term, rebate, penalty, or additional term. For details,
see Field help for Master Agreements Terms page.
10 Click the Audits tab to add audit events. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Audits page.
11 Click the Performance tab to add evaluation criteria and performance metrics. For
details, see Field help for Master Agreements Performance page.
12 Click the Savings tab to add savings metrics. For details, see Field help for the
Master Agreement Savings Value dialog box.
13 Click the Accounting tab to add accounting information. For details, see Adding
accounting information to a sourcing document.
14 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement from a template
Editing a master agreement

612 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements List page

Adding master agreement header information

Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Adding a schedule to a master agreement
Selecting a primary supplier contact for a master agreement
Adding other supplier contacts to a master agreement
Creating an agreement
Adding a line item to a master agreement
Adding a master agreement term
Adding a master agreement audit
Adding a performance metric to a master agreement
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Creating a sourcing document from within a project

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 613

Master Agreements List page Master Agreements

Creating a master agreement from a template

Templates are predefined documents, or portions of documents, that are used to
standardize document creation and minimize the work of creating a new document.
Templates store information so that it can be used in multiple documents.
Using a template to create a master agreement incorporates the template information
into the new master agreement.

Note: You can also create a master agreement from within an RFx, auction, or project.

To create a master agreement from a template:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Create Master
Agreement From Template from the Agreements submenu. You see the Master
Agreement List page with a list of links you can use to create the master agreement
from a template.
2 On the Master Agreement List page, click the link for the template to use. You see a
new master agreement created from the selected template.
Note: You can also create a master agreement from a template by clicking the
Create button on the Master Agreements List page and selecting a template in
the Create dialog box.
3 On the Header page, fill in the fields for basic information and those under Control
Info, and add collaborators and document links. For details, see Field help for
Master Agreements Header page.
4 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Schedule page.
5 Click the Vendor Info tab to select a primary contact for the supplier and add other
contacts. For details, see Field help for Master Agreements Vendor Info page.
6 Click the Agreements tab to add sub-agreements. For details, see Creating an
agreement.
7 Click the Line Items tab to add line items. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Line Items page.
8 Click the Terms tab to add a term, rebate, penalty, or additional term. For details,
see Field help for Master Agreements Terms page.
9 Click the Audits tab to add audit events. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Audits page.
10 Click the Performance tab to add evaluation criteria and performance metrics. For
details, see Field help for Master Agreements Performance page.
11 Click the Savings tab to add savings metrics. For details, see Field help for the
Master Agreement Savings Value dialog box.

614 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements List page

12 Click the Accounting tab to add accounting information. For details, see Adding
accounting information to a sourcing document.
13 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Editing a master agreement
Adding master agreement header information
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Adding a schedule to a master agreement
Selecting a primary supplier contact for a master agreement
Adding other supplier contacts to a master agreement
Creating an agreement
Adding a line item to a master agreement
Adding a master agreement term
Adding a master agreement audit
Adding a performance metric to a master agreement
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Creating a sourcing document from within a project

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 615

Master Agreements List page Master Agreements

Editing a master agreement

To edit a master agreement:
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the Agreements submenu:
■ My Master Agreements and Agreements
■ My Master Agreements and Agreements Requiring Attention
You see the Master Agreements List page displaying the selected list of master
agreements.
2 On the Master Agreements List page, click the master agreement to edit.
3 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 On the Header page, edit any fields for basic and control information and add or
remove collaborators and document links. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Header page.
5 Click the Schedule tab to edit a schedule. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Schedule page.
6 Click the Vendor Info tab to edit supplier contact information. For details, see Field
help for Master Agreements Vendor Info page.
7 Click the Agreements tab to edit sub-agreements. For details, see Editing an
agreement.
8 Click the Line Items tab to edit line items. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Line Items page.
9 Click the Terms tab to edit a term, rebate, penalty, or additional term. For details,
see Field help for Master Agreements Terms page.
10 Click the Audits tab to edit audit events. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Audits page.
11 Click the Performance tab to edit evaluation criteria and performance metrics. For
details, see Field help for Master Agreements Performance page.
12 Click the Savings tab to edit savings metrics. For details, see Field help for the
Master Agreement Savings Value dialog box.
13 Click the Accounting tab to edit accounting information. For details, see Adding
accounting information to a sourcing document.
14 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Creating a master agreement from a template
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document

616 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements List page

Adding a document link to a sourcing document

Specifying a view for master agreement schedule events
Selecting a primary supplier contact for a master agreement
Adding other supplier contacts to a master agreement
Editing an agreement
Adding a material to a master agreement
Adding a master agreement rebate
Adding a performance metric to a master agreement
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 617

Master Agreements List page Master Agreements

Creating a master agreement template

Templates are predefined documents, or portions of documents, that are used to
standardize document creation and minimize the work of creating a new document.
Templates store information so that it can be used in multiple documents.
Using a template to create a master agreement incorporates the template information
into the new master agreement.

To create a master agreement template:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Create Master
Agreement Template from the Agreements submenu.
Note: You can also create a master agreement template by clicking the Create
Template button on the Master Agreements List page.
2 In the Create dialog box, select a master agreement template type.
3 Click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields for basic information and those under Control
Info, and add collaborators and document links. For details, see Field help for
Master Agreements Header page.
5 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Schedule page.
6 Click the Vendor Info tab to select a primary contact for the supplier and add other
contacts. For details, see Field help for Master Agreements Vendor Info page.
7 Click the Agreements tab to add sub-agreements. For details, see Creating an
agreement.
8 Click the Line Items tab to add line items. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Line Items page.
9 Click the Terms tab to add a term, rebate, penalty, or additional term. For details,
see Field help for Master Agreements Terms page.
10 Click the Audits tab to add audit events. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Audits page.
11 Click the Performance tab to add evaluation criteria and performance metrics. For
details, see Field help for Master Agreements Performance page.
12 Click the Savings tab to add savings metrics. For details, see Field help for the
Master Agreement Savings Value dialog box.
13 Click the Accounting tab to add accounting information. For details, see Adding
accounting information to a sourcing document.
14 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

618 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements List page

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement from a template
Editing a master agreement template
Adding master agreement header information
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Adding a schedule to a master agreement
Selecting a primary supplier contact for a master agreement
Adding other supplier contacts to a master agreement
Creating an agreement
Adding a line item to a master agreement
Adding a master agreement term
Adding a master agreement audit
Adding a performance metric to a master agreement
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 619

Master Agreements List page Master Agreements

Editing a master agreement template

Templates are predefined documents, or portions of documents, that are used to
standardize document creation and minimize the work of creating a new document.
Templates store information so that it can be used in multiple documents.
Using a template to create a master agreement incorporates the template information
into the new master agreement.

To edit a master agreement template:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select All Master
Agreement Templates from the Agreements submenu.
2 On the Master Agreements List page, click the master agreement template to edit.
3 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 On the Header page, edit any fields for basic and control information and add or
remove collaborators and document links. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Header page.
5 Click the Schedule tab to edit a schedule. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Schedule page.
6 Click the Vendor Info tab to edit supplier contact information. For details, see Field
help for Master Agreements Vendor Info page.
7 Click the Agreements tab to edit sub-agreements. For details, see Editing an
agreement.
8 Click the Line Items tab to edit line items. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Line Items page.
9 Click the Terms tab to edit a term, rebate, penalty, or additional term. For details,
see Field help for Master Agreements Terms page.
10 Click the Audits tab to edit audit events. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Audits page.
11 Click the Performance tab to edit evaluation criteria and performance metrics. For
details, see Field help for Master Agreements Performance page.
12 Click the Savings tab to edit savings metrics. For details, see Field help for the
Master Agreement Savings Value dialog box.
13 Click the Accounting tab to edit accounting information. For details, see Adding
accounting information to a sourcing document.
14 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement from a template
Creating a master agreement template

620 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements List page

Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document

Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Specifying a view for master agreement schedule events
Selecting a primary supplier contact for a master agreement
Adding other supplier contacts to a master agreement
Editing an agreement
Adding a material to a master agreement
Adding a master agreement rebate
Adding a performance metric to a master agreement
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 621

Master Agreements Header page Master Agreements

Master Agreements Header page

On the Master Agreements Header page, you can:
` Add and edit basic and control information
` Add and remove collaborators
` Add and remove document links

Field help for Master Agreements Header page

Status: Select a status for the master agreement from the drop-down list. This field
can be edited to reflect changes in the master agreement cycle. This is a required field.
Name: Type a name for the master agreement. This is a required field.
Description: Type a description for the master agreement.
Document Type: Indicates the master agreement type upon which this document is
based. This field is read-only.
Company: Indicates the company with which the master agreement is associated. This
field is read-only.

Organizational Unit: Click the Lookup icon to select an organizational unit within
the company with which the master agreement is associated.

Location: Click the Lookup icon to select the location with which the master
agreement is associated. This is a required field.
Currency: Select a primary currency for the master agreement from the drop-down
list. This is a required field.

Control Info

Effective Date: Type or click the Calendar icon to select the date on which the
master agreement will become effective. This is a required field.

Renewal Review Reminder Date: Type or click the Calendar icon to select the
date on which a reminder will be sent to the master agreement owner and collaborators
to review the master agreement for renewal. The renewal review reminder alert is
enabled in the master agreement type.
Perpetual Term: Check this box to indicate that the master agreement is
perpetual and has no associated end date.

622 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Header page

End Date: Type or click the Calendar icon to select the date on which the master
agreement will end. This field only appears if you do not check the Perpetual Term
box. If displayed, this is a required field.
Auto Renewal: Check this box to indicate that the master agreement should be
renewed when it reaches its end date. This field is for tracking purposes only and
will not trigger the system to renew the agreement. Auto Renewal master
agreements must be individually reviewed, renegotiated, and renewed manually.
This checkbox appears only for master agreements that are not Perpetual Term.
You can use the Search All Automatic Renewal Master Agreements report on
the Analysis page to find and track all Auto Renewal master agreements.

Retention Date: Type or click the Calendar icon to select the date until which
the master agreement must be stored in the system. After this date, the master
agreement should be manually deleted.
Termination Notice Lead Time: Type the number of days before the termination
notice for the master agreement will be sent to the supplier.

Termination Communicated Date: Type or click the Calendar icon to select the
date on which intent to terminate is formally communicated to the supplier.
Physical Location: Type the physical location of the printed master agreement. This
field is not used by the application and is for reference purposes only.
Record Series: Type the internal record series, if any, to which this master agreement
belongs. This field is not used by the application and is for reference purposes only.
Summary Published to Search: Check this box to enable the master agreement to
be searched for in the Master Agreements Search channel. The End Date field must
also be set to the current date or later for the master agreement to be searchable.
Publish to Vendor: Check this box and select a date to enable the master agreement
appear in the Active Contracts channel on the Vendor’s Workbench.
Contract Cross Reference: Type any relevant cross-reference information for the
contract. This field is provided as an example of an extension attribute.

Collaborators
Click Add Users, Add Groups, or Add Company to add collaborators to this master
agreement.

Document Links
Click Add to add a link to another sourcing document within Frictionless® SRM.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 623

Master Agreements Header page Master Agreements

Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document

Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Adding master agreement header information

624 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Header page

Adding master agreement header information

1 On the Master Agreements List page, click Create.
2 In the Create dialog box, select a master agreement type or select a template by
clicking the Lookup icon .
3 Click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields for basic information and those under Control
Info. For details, see Field help for Master Agreements Header page.
Note: Under Control Info, check the box for Summary Published to Search to
enable the master agreement to be searched for in the Master Agreements Search
channel. The End Date field must also be set to the current date or later in order for
the master agreement to be searched for in this channel.
Note: Under Control Info, check the box for Publish to Vendor and select a date
to have the master agreement appear in the Active Contracts channel on the
Vendor’s Workbench.
5 Optionally, add collaborators.
6 Optionally, add document links.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Field help for Master Agreements Header page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 625

Master Agreements Schedule page Master Agreements

Master Agreements Schedule page

Schedules help you track the progress of and specify renewal dates for master
agreements.
The Schedule page shows baseline date information and information about schedule
events.
Under Schedule Events, you can select a view for events. In each view, you can add
and edit different information for the events. In any Schedule Event view, event status
is indicated as follows:
` Events that are in progress appear in bold.
` Events that are behind schedule appear in red.

On the Schedule page, you can:

` Enter and edit basic master agreement schedule information
` Specify a view for a schedule event
` Add and edit a schedule event
` Import an event from a library
` Reorder events

Field help for Master Agreements Schedule page

Lock baseline dates: Check this box to keep the baseline dates at their current
values. If you check this box, the baseline dates (which appear on the Tracking page
for an event) do not change, even if you change the planned dates for one or more
events. Once an Actual Start or End date is entered for any event in the document, the
baseline dates are locked automatically.

Base Date: Type or click the Calendar icon to select a baseline date for this
master agreement. This date helps you track whether your master agreement is
proceeding on schedule.

Schedule Items
Select a schedule view from the drop-down list and click Add or Import from Library
to add events to the schedule.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Specifying a view for master agreement schedule events
Adding a schedule to a master agreement

626 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Schedule page

Schedule functions
Reordering items in a list
Deleting items from a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 627

Master Agreements Schedule page Master Agreements

Adding a schedule to a master agreement

Schedules help you track the progress of and specify renewal dates for master
agreements.
Under Schedule Events, you can select a view for events. In each view, you can add
and edit different information for the events. In any Schedule Event view, event status
is indicated as follows:
` Events that are in progress appear in bold.
` Events that are behind schedule appear in red.

To add a master agreement schedule:

1 On the Schedule page, fill in the fields for basic schedule information. For details,
see Field help for Master Agreements Schedule page.
2 Optionally, under Schedule Events, select the Setup view from the view drop-down
list to add a schedule event.
Note: After you add a schedule event, you can select the Tracking view to add and
edit schedule event dates, or select the Dependency view to add and edit
dependency events.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Specifying a view for master agreement schedule events
Schedule functions
Reordering items in a list
Deleting items from a list
Field help for Master Agreements Schedule page

628 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Schedule page

Specifying a view for master agreement schedule events

Schedules help you track the progress of and specify renewal dates for master
agreements.
Under Schedule Events, you can select a view for events. In each view, you can add
and edit different information for the events. In any Schedule Event view, event status
is indicated as follows:
` Events that are in progress appear in bold.
` Events that are behind schedule appear in red.

In the Setup view, you can:

` Add and edit the basic information about a schedule event
` Import schedule events from a library
` Reorder schedule events

In the Tracking view, you can:

` Add and edit the planned and actual dates for a schedule event
` Reorder schedule events

In the Dependency view, you can:

` Add and edit a dependencies for a schedule event
` Reorder dependencies

To specify a master agreement schedule event view:

` On the Schedule page under Schedule Events, select a schedule event view from
the drop-down list.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Specifying a view for master agreement schedule events
Adding a schedule to a master agreement
Specifying a view for master agreement schedule events
Schedule functions
Field help for Master Agreements Schedule page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 629

Master Agreements Schedule page Master Agreements

Master Agreements Schedule Settings page

The Settings page provides a single location to enter and edit much of the event
information in the Setup and Dependency views.

On the Settings page, you can:

` Enter and edit basic information about the event
` Enter and edit event type and dependency information under Type
` Enter and edit information under Reminders

Field help for Master Agreements Schedule Settings page

Name: Type a name for the event. This is a required field.

Description: Type a description of the event.
Publish to Project: If there is a project associated with this master agreement, check
this box to publish this event to the project.

Type

Event Type: Select one of the following:

` Select Task for an event with a time duration. Type the duration in the text box.
` Select Milestone for an event that occurs on a selected date.

Start Date: Select one of the following:

` Select Fixed for an event with a fixed start date. Type or click the Calendar icon

to select the fixed date.

` Select Depends on Event for an event that depends on another event, and then
do the following:
■ Click the Add button in the dependency table.
■ Select the dependency from the Event drop-down list.
■ Select whether the dependency is on the start or end of the event from the
Depends On drop-down list.
■ Type any offset days in the Additional Offset field. For example, if the event
will start two days after the dependency event occurs, type 2 in this field.

Owner: Select one of the following as the owner of this event:

` Select Specific User and click the Lookup icon to select a user other than the
document owner.

630 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Schedule page

` Select Document Owner to choose the document owner.

Reminders

Publish to Calendar: Click this box to publish this even to the Calendar channel on
the Workbench.
Reminder Rules: To send a reminder for this event, fill in the following fields:
` Send reminder: Check this box and type the number of days before the event to
send the reminder.
` Collaborators: Select to send the event reminder to all document collaborators.
` Individual: Select to send the event reminder to a specific user, and click the
Lookup icon to select the user.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a schedule to a master agreement
Adding an event to a schedule
Editing an event in a schedule
Adding a dependency to an event
Creating reminders for an event

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 631

Master Agreements Schedule page Master Agreements

Master Agreements Schedule Tracking page

On the Tracking page, you can:
` Review date information, and enter and edit the actual dates for an event

Field help for Master Agreements Schedule Tracking page

Baseline Start: This value is based on the date you enter in the Fixed at field on
either the Schedule page or the Settings tab. If the event is dependent on another
event, this date is determined by the end date of the dependency.
The baseline start date reflects the date you enter when creating the event. If you edit
the date after event creation, and the Lock baseline dates box on the Schedule page
is checked, the baseline date on the Tracking page remains the same, while the
planned dates change.
Once an actual start or end date is entered for any event in the project, the baseline
dates are locked automatically.

Baseline End: The baseline end date for a task is determined by the baseline start
date (in the Fixed at field on the Schedule page), or by the dependency end date, plus
the value in the Duration field.
The baseline end date reflects the date that is calculated when you create the event. If
you make date changes after event creation, and the Lock baseline dates box on the
Schedule page is checked, the baseline date on the Tracking page remains the same,
while the planned dates change.
Once an actual start or end date is entered for any event in the project, the baseline
dates are locked automatically.

Planned Start: This value is based on the date you enter in the Fixed at field on
either the Schedule page or the Settings tab. If the event is dependent on another
event, this date is determined by the end date of the dependency.
The planned start date is identical to the baseline start date, unless the baseline dates
are locked. You lock the baseline dates by checking the Lock baseline dates box on
the Schedule page or by entering an actual start or end date for any event in the
project. If baseline dates are locked, and you edit the dates on the Schedule page, the
planned date values on the Tracking page will change, while the baseline date values
remain the same.

Planned End: The planned end date for a task is determined by the planned start date
(in the Fixed at field on the Schedule page), or by the dependency end date, plus the
value in the Duration field.
The planned end date is identical to the baseline end date, unless the baseline dates
are locked. You lock the baseline dates by checking the Lock baseline dates box on

632 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Schedule page

the Schedule page or by entering an actual start or end date for any event in the
project. If baseline dates are locked, and you edit the dates on the Schedule page, the
planned date values on the Tracking page will change, while the baseline date values
remain the same.

Actual Start: You enter the actual start date after a task is started or a milestone is
accomplished. Entering the actual start date for an event is crucial to project schedule
tracking.
Once an actual start or end date is entered for any event in the project, the baseline
dates are locked automatically.

Actual End: You enter the actual end date after a task is finished or a milestone is
accomplished. Entering the actual end date for an event is crucial to project schedule
tracking.
Once an actual start or end date is entered for any event in the project, the baseline
dates are locked automatically.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a schedule to a master agreement
Adding dates to an event

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 633

Master Agreements Schedule page Master Agreements

Master Agreements Schedule Dependents page

On the Dependents page, you can view the events that are dependent on a specific
event.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a schedule to a master agreement
Viewing event dependents

634 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Vendor Info page

Master Agreements Vendor Info page

On the Master Agreements Vendor Info page, you can:
` Select a primary supplier contact
` Add other contacts in the same company
` View agreement internal and external categories

Field help for Master Agreements Vendor Info page

Vendor Primary Contact: Click the Lookup icon to select a primary supplier
contact for the master agreement.
Primary Contact Email: Indicates the email address of the primary supplier contact
you selected. This field is read-only.
Vendor’s Contract Number: Type the number for the contract associated with the
supplier, if any.

Internal Category: Click the Lookup icon to select an internal category for the
supplier.

External Category: Click the Lookup icon to select an external category for the
supplier.

Order Contacts

Click Add to add an additional supplier contact to the master agreement. Fill in the
fields in the Order Contact dialog box and click OK. For details, see Field help for
Master Agreements Order Contact dialog box.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Selecting a primary supplier contact for a master agreement
Adding other supplier contacts to a master agreement
Field help for Master Agreements Vendor Info page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 635

Master Agreements Vendor Info page Master Agreements

Selecting a primary supplier contact for a master agreement

1 On the Vendor Info page, click the Lookup icon for Vendor Primary Contact.
2 Select a supplier contact from the lookup dialog box.
3 Optionally, type a Vendor Contract Number.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding other supplier contacts to a master agreement
Field help for Master Agreements Vendor Info page

636 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Vendor Info page

Adding other supplier contacts to a master agreement

1 On the Vendor Info page, click Add.
2 Fill in the fields in the New Contact dialog box.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Selecting a primary supplier contact for a master agreement
Field help for Master Agreements Vendor Info page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 637

Master Agreements Vendor Info page Master Agreements

Field help for Master Agreements Order Contact dialog box

The following provides help for the fields in the Order Contact dialog box.

Name: Type a name for the contact.

Phone: Type a phone number for the contact.
Email: Type an email address for the contact.
Location: Type a location for the contact.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Selecting a primary supplier contact for a master agreement
Adding other supplier contacts to a master agreement
Field help for Master Agreements Vendor Info page

638 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Agreements page

Agreements page
The Agreements page allows you to create sub-agreements within a master agreement.
This page is enabled in the master agreement type.
You usually create agreements for services rather than for products. An agreement
enables you to analyze, audit, and measure specific purchasing for services against a
contract’s original strategic goals.
Like those in a master agreement, the pages and fields in an agreement are determined
by the master agreement type. These pages and fields have the same function as the
corresponding pages and fields in a master agreement. For example, you fill out the
fields on the Agreements Line Items page just as you would those on the Master
Agreements Line Items page.
On the Agreements page, you can add and edit an agreement.

Related Topics
Creating an agreement
Editing an agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 639

Agreements page Master Agreements

Creating an agreement
You usually create agreements for services rather than for products. An agreement
enables you to analyze, audit, and measure specific purchasing for services against a
contract’s original strategic goals.
Like those in a master agreement, the pages and fields in an agreement are determined
by the master agreement type. These pages and fields have the same function as the
corresponding pages and fields in a master agreement. For example, you fill out the
fields on the Agreements Line Items page just as you would those on the Master
Agreements Line Items page.

To create an agreement:
1 On the Agreements page, click Add.
2 On the Header page, fill in the fields for basic information and those under Control
Info, and add collaborators. For details, see Field help for Master Agreements
Header page.
3 Click the Schedule tab to create a schedule. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Schedule page.
4 Click the Vendor Info tab to select a primary contact for the supplier and add other
contacts. For details, see Field help for Master Agreements Vendor Info page.
5 Click the Line Items tab to add line items. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Line Items page.
6 Click the Terms tab to add a term, rebate, penalty, or additional term. For details,
see Field help for Master Agreements Terms page.
7 Click the Audits tab to add audit events. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Audits page.
8 Click the Performance tab to add evaluation criteria and performance metrics. For
details, see Field help for Master Agreements Performance page.
9 Click the Savings tab to add savings metrics. For details, see Field help for the
Master Agreement Savings Value dialog box.
10 Click the Accounting tab to add accounting information. For details, see Adding
accounting information to a sourcing document.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Editing an agreement
Adding master agreement header information
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document

640 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Agreements page

Adding a schedule to a master agreement

Selecting a primary supplier contact for a master agreement
Adding other supplier contacts to a master agreement
Adding a line item to a master agreement
Adding a master agreement term
Adding a master agreement audit
Adding a performance metric to a master agreement
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Creating a sourcing document from within a project

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 641

Agreements page Master Agreements

Editing an agreement
You usually create agreements for services rather than for products. An agreement
enables you to analyze, audit, and measure specific purchasing for services against a
contract’s original strategic goals.

To edit an agreement:

1 On the Agreements page, click the Edit icon for the agreement to edit.
2 On the Header page, edit any fields for basic and control information and add or
remove collaborators. For details, see Field help for Master Agreements Header
page.
3 Click the Schedule tab to edit a schedule. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Schedule page.
4 Click the Vendor Info tab to edit supplier contact information. For details, see Field
help for Master Agreements Vendor Info page.
5 Click the Line Items tab to edit line items. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Line Items page.
6 Click the Terms tab to edit a term, rebate, penalty, or additional term. For details,
see Field help for Master Agreements Terms page.
7 Click the Audits tab to edit audit events. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Audits page.
8 Click the Performance tab to edit evaluation criteria and performance metrics. For
details, see Field help for Master Agreements Performance page.
9 Click the Savings tab to edit savings metrics. For details, see Field help for the
Master Agreement Savings Value dialog box.
10 Click the Accounting tab to edit accounting information. For details, see Adding
accounting information to a sourcing document.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating an agreement
Adding master agreement header information
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a document link to a sourcing document
Adding a schedule to a master agreement
Selecting a primary supplier contact for a master agreement
Adding other supplier contacts to a master agreement

642 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Agreements page

Adding a line item to a master agreement

Adding a master agreement term
Adding a master agreement audit
Adding a performance metric to a master agreement
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Creating a sourcing document from within a project

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 643

Master Agreements Line Items page Master Agreements

Master Agreements Line Items page

Line items represent the goods and services you want to purchase. You can select a
view for line items. In each view, you can add or edit as well as view different
information for line items.
This page is enabled in the master agreement type.

On the Line Items page, you can:

` Add and edit line items and materials
` Specify a line item view
` Import line items from CSV file
` Delete selected line items

Field help for Master Agreements Line Items page

Line Items table

` From the view drop-down list, select a view for the line items.
` From the Group By drop-down list, select a grouping for the line items.
` Click Add to add a line item to the master agreement. Fill in the fields in the new

row or click the Edit icon to fill in the fields on the Line Item page.
` Click Add Materials to add a direct material to the master agreement.
` Click Delete Selected to delete any checked line items.
` Click Import to import line items from a CSV file.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Specifying a line item view for a master agreement
Adding a line item to a master agreement
Adding a material to a master agreement
Editing a line item in a master agreement
Editing a material in a master agreement
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Deleting items from a list
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Deleting items from a list
Field help for Master Agreements Line Items page

644 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Line Items page

Specifying a line item view for a master agreement

Line items represent the goods and services you want to purchase. You can select a
view for schedule events. In each view, you can add or edit as well as view different
information for line items.

In the Basic view, you can:

` Add and edit line items
` Add and edit materials
` Delete selected line items
` Import line items from a CSV file
` Specify settings

In the Delivery Schedule view, you can:

` Edit line items
` Edit delivery information you specified in the Settings dialog box
` Import line items from a CSV file
` Specify settings

In the Unit Price view, you can:

` Edit line items
` Add and edit unit price and effective dates for awarded line items
` Import line items from a CSV file
` Specify settings

Note: This view appears in the drop-down list only if you choose Unit Price as the Pricing
Structure in the Settings dialog box.

In the Buyer Attributes view, you can:

` Edit line items
` Edit the attribute values you specified in the Line Item Detail page
` Import line items from a CSV file
` Specify settings

In the Purchasing view, you can:

` Edit line items
` Add and edit contracted and minimum quantities and lead times for awarded line
items

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 645

Master Agreements Line Items page Master Agreements

` Import line items from a CSV file

` Specify settings

In the Price Components view, you can:

` Add and edit contracted quantities and pricing structure for awarded line items
` Import line items from a CSV file
` Specify settings

Note: This view appears in the drop-down list only if you choose Unit Price Components
as the Pricing Structure in the Settings dialog box.

In the Vendor Attributes view, you can:

` Edit line items
` Edit the attribute values you specified in the Line Item Detail page
` Import line items from a CSV file
` Specify settings

In the Tiered Pricing view, you can:

` Add and edit minimum and maximum quantities and the unit price for delivery
terms for awarded line items
` Import line items from a CSV file
` Specify settings

Note: The Tiered Pricing view can be created for a master agreement in two ways. If
you create a master agreement within the Contracts module, you select Tiered Pricing
in the Settings dialog box and then define the unit pricing. If you create a master
agreement from an RFx award, the tiered pricing schedule that you defined is
automatically copied as the line item view into the master agreement.

To specify a line item view:

` On the Line Items page under Line Items, select a view from the drop-down list.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a line item to a master agreement
Adding a material to a master agreement
Editing a line item in a master agreement
Editing a material in a master agreement

646 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Line Items page

Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

Field help for Master Agreements Line Items page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 647

Master Agreements Line Items page Master Agreements

Adding a line item to a master agreement

You can add both indirect and direct materials to a master agreement. Both indirect
and direct materials appear in a table of a single row or multiple rows.
Indirect materials are referred to as line items. Direct materials are referred to as
materials and appear as line items in a table. Materials are created in Setup.
You select a view for showing the line item information. Each view shows different
information for the line item. You can add line items only in the Basic view. You can edit
a line item from any view. You can specify line item details only when you edit a line
item.

Note: It is recommended that you specify line item settings before you add line items
and materials. Settings apply to all line items and materials in a specific master
agreement.

To add a line item:

1 On the Line Items page, select the Basic view from the view drop-down list.
2 In the Group By field, select how to group the line items from the drop-down list.
Category, Location, and Plant are some of the options.
3 Click Add.

4 Fill in the fields for the line item, or click the Edit icon to fill in additional
information. For details, see Field help for Master Agreements Line Item
Detail page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Specifying a line item view for a master agreement
Adding a material to a master agreement
Editing a line item in a master agreement
Editing a material in a master agreement
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Field help for Master Agreements Line Items page

648 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Line Items page

Adding a material to a master agreement

You can add both indirect and direct materials to a master agreement. Both indirect
and direct materials appear in a table of a single row or multiple rows.
Indirect materials are referred to as line items. Direct materials are referred to as
materials and appear as line items in a table. Materials are created in Setup.
You select a view for showing the line item information. Each view shows different
information for the line item. You can add line items only in the Basic view. You can edit
a line item from any view. You can specify line item details only when you edit a line
item.

Note: It is recommended that you specify line item settings before you add line items
and materials. Settings apply to all line items and materials in a specific master
agreement.

To add a material:
1 On the Line Items page, select a line item view from the view drop-down list.
2 In the Group By field, select how to group the line items, by Location or Category,
from the drop-down list.
3 Click Add Material.

4 Fill in the fields for the material, or click the Edit icon to fill in additional
information. For details, see Field help for Master Agreements Line Item
Detail page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Specifying a line item view for a master agreement
Adding a line item to a master agreement
Editing a line item in a master agreement
Editing a material in a master agreement
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Field help for Master Agreements Line Items page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 649

Master Agreements Line Items page Master Agreements

Master Agreements Line Item Detail page

On the Line Item Detail page, which you see when you edit a line item or material, you
can edit fields for general line item information and fields under Attributes for Buyer
Values, if the latter fields appear. You specify Attributes for Buyer Values in the
Specifying Line Items dialog box.
On the Line Item Detail page, you can also view the Master Agreement/ Agreement
Line Item Spend Status report.

Field help for Master Agreements Line Item Detail page

Part Number: Type a part number for the line item.

Description: Type a description for the line item. This is a required field.
Vendor Part Number: Type the supplier’s part number for the line item.
Unit Price: Type the unit price for the line item.
Extended Price: Type the total price for the contracted quantity of the line item.

Internal Category: Click the Lookup icon to select an internal category.

External Category: Click the Lookup icon to select an external category.

Location: Click the Lookup icon to select a location for the line item.

Plant: Click the Lookup icon to select a plant for the line item.
Contracted Quantity: Type the quantity of the line item that the supplier has
contracted to provide. This is a required field.

Note: Part Number, Description, Internal/External Category, Location, and Plant are not
editable for line items added using the Add Material button. These attributes are
defined in the Material definition.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Specifying a line item view for a master agreement
Adding a line item to a master agreement
Adding a material to a master agreement
Editing a line item in a master agreement
Editing a material in a master agreement
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Field help for Master Agreements Line Items page

650 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Line Items page

Master Agreements Line Item Terms page

On the Line Item Terms page, which you see when you edit a line item or material, you
can:
` Add and edit information under:
■ Purchasing Details
■ Pricing
■ Delivery
■ Minimum and Limit
` Add and edit rebates for the line item or material
` Add and edit penalties for the line item or material

Field help for Master Agreements Line Item Terms page

Purchasing Details

Minimum Order Quantity: Type the minimum quantity of the line item you are
contracted to order from the supplier.
Program Lead Time (Days): Type the lead time required to set up the program, if
any.
Order Lead Time (Days): Type the lead time the supplier requires to place orders for
items.
Delivery Lead Time (Days): Type the number of days to allow between order and
delivery of the line item.

Pricing

Pricing Structure: Indicates the pricing structure selected on the Master Agreement
Setup: Pricing Model page.
Pricing: Enter pricing information for each delivery term defined on the Master
Agreement Setup: Delivery Info page.
Note: Once you enter pricing information, one delivery term must be selected as
Awarded by checking the Awarded box. You can also set a term as awarded by
clicking Set Awarded on the Master Agreement Setup: Delivery Info page.
List Unit Price: Type the list unit price of the line item.

Unit Price Date Begin: Type or click the Calendar icon to select the date the
unit price becomes valid.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 651

Master Agreements Line Items page Master Agreements

Unit Price Date End: Type or click the Calendar icon to select the last date that
the unit price is valid.

Delivery

Delivery Schedule: Indicates the delivery period or periods selected on the Master
Agreement Setup: Delivery Info page. If the delivery schedule is defined, the sum
of the values in the Quantity column must total the contracted quantity for this line
item.

Minimum and Limit

Line Item Limit Quantity: Type the maximum quantity of this line item to be
ordered.
Line Item Minimum Quantity: Type the minimum quantity of this line item to be
ordered.
Minimum Alert Offset: If line item minimum alerts are enabled in the master
agreement type, set this value to control the number of days before the end date on
the agreement the alert should be generated.
Alert if Actual is within: If line item limit alerts are enabled in the master agreement
type, set the value to the percentage at which the alert should be triggered.
Alert if Forecast is within: If line item limit alerts are enabled in the master
agreement type, set the value to the percentage at which the alert should be triggered.

Rebates

Click Add to add a rebate. Fill in the fields in the new row that appears in the rebates
table.
Volume Threshold: Type the volume that the line item must exceed for the buyer to
receive a rebate.
Rebate Amount: Type the amount of the rebate.
Alert: Indicates whether an alert will be created when the rebate volume threshold is
exceeded. Line item rebate alerts are set in the master agreement type.

Penalties

Click Add to add a penalty. Fill in the fields in the new row that appears in the penalties
table.
Volume Threshold: Type the volume that the line item must meet in order to avoid a
penalty. If the line item volume falls below this number, the buyer will pay a penalty.

652 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Line Items page

Penalty Amount: Type the amount of the penalty.

Alert: Indicates whether an alert will be created when the penalty volume threshold is
exceeded. Line item penalty alerts are set in the master agreement type.
Contract Expiration Alert (Days): Type the number of days before the contract
expires that an alert will be sent. Line item penalty alerts must be enabled in the
master agreement type for this field to be editable.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Specifying a line item view for a master agreement
Adding a line item to a master agreement
Adding a material to a master agreement
Editing a line item in a master agreement
Editing a material in a master agreement
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file
Master Agreements Line Item Terms page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 653

Master Agreements Line Items page Master Agreements

Editing a line item in a master agreement

You can add both indirect and direct materials to a master agreement. Both indirect
and direct materials appear in a table of a single row or multiple rows.
Indirect materials are referred to as line items. Direct materials are referred to as
materials and appear as line items in a table. Materials are created in Setup.
You select a view for showing the line item information. Each view shows different
information for the line item. You can add line items only in the Basic view. You can edit
a line item from any view. You can specify line item details only when you edit a line
item.

To edit a line item:

1 On the Line Items page, select a view from the view drop-down list.
2 In the Group By field, select how to group the line items from the drop-down list.
Category, Location, and Plant are some of the options.

3 Click the Edit icon for the line item to edit.

4 On the Line Items page, edit any fields for the line item. For details, see Field help
for Master Agreements Line Item Detail page.
5 Click the Terms tab to edit any fields under Purchasing Details, Pricing, Delivery,
Minimum and Limit or to add or edit Rebates and Penalties. For details, see Field
help for Master Agreements Line Item Terms page.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Specifying a line item view for a master agreement
Adding a line item to a master agreement
Adding a material to a master agreement
Editing a line item in a master agreement
Editing a material in a master agreement
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

654 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Line Items page

Editing a material in a master agreement

You can add both indirect and direct materials to a master agreement. Both indirect
and direct materials appear in a table of a single row or multiple rows.
Indirect materials are referred to as line items. Direct materials are referred to as
materials and appear as line items in a table. Materials are created in Setup.
You select a view for showing the line item information. Each view shows different
information for the line item. You can add line items only in the Basic view. You can edit
a line item from any view. You can specify line item details only when you edit a line
item.

Note: It is recommended that you specify line item settings before you add line items
and materials. Settings apply to all line items and materials in a specific master
agreement.

To edit a material:
1 On the Line Items page, select a view from the view drop-down list.
2 In the Group By field, select how to group the line items from the drop-down list.
Category, Location, and Plant are some of the options.

3 Click the Edit icon for the material to edit.

4 On the Line Items page, edit any fields for the material. For details, see Field help
for Master Agreements Line Item Detail page.
5 Click the Terms tab to edit any fields under Purchasing Details, Pricing, Delivery,
Minimum and Limit or to add or edit Rebates and Penalties. For details, see Field
help for Master Agreements Line Item Terms page.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Specifying a line item view for a master agreement
Adding a line item to a master agreement
Adding a material to a master agreement
Editing a line item in a master agreement
Editing a material in a master agreement
Importing line items and specifications from a CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 655

Master Agreements Terms page Master Agreements

Master Agreements Terms page

A term for a master agreement refers to the conditions under which your company
receives title of and responsibility for goods and services. Terms usually include
conditions for payment, replenishment, maximum and minimum prices, rebates, and
penalties.
This page is enabled in the master agreement type.

On the Master Agreements Terms page, you can:

` Add and edit terms
` Add and edit rebates
` Add and edit penalties
` Add and edit additional terms

Field help for Master Agreements Terms page

Payment Terms: Click the Lookup icon to select the payment terms for the
master agreement. Payment terms are created in Setup under Master Data.
Payment Terms Description: Indicates the description of the payment terms you
selected. This field is read-only.
Replenishment: Select the form of replenishment from the drop-down list.
Replenishment indicates the assignment of responsibility for the purchase of additional
products. Replenishment values are defined in Setup under Value List Types and
Values.
Replenishment Description: Indicates the description of the replenishment value
you selected. This field is read-only.

Minimum and Limit

Agreement Limit: Type the maximum monetary value represented by the master
agreement.
Agreement Minimum: Type the minimum monetary value represented by the master
agreement.
Minimum Alert Offset: If agreement minimum alerts are enabled in the master
agreement type, set this value to control the number of days before the end date on
the agreement the alert should be generated.
Alert if Actual is within: If agreement limit alerts are enabled in the master
agreement type, set the value to the percentage at which the alert should be triggered.
Alert if Forecast is within: If agreement limit alerts are enabled in the master
agreement type, set the value to the percentage at which the alert should be triggered.

656 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Terms page

Rebates

Click Add or Add as Percent to add a rebate. Fill in the fields in the new row that
appears in the rebates table.
Volume Threshold: Type the volume that the master agreement must exceed for the
buyer to receive a rebate.
Rebate Amount: If you clicked Add, type the amount of the rebate.
Amount/Percent: If you clicked Add as Percent, type the percentage of the rebate.
Alert: Indicates whether an alert will be created when the rebate volume threshold is
exceeded. Agreement rebate alerts are set in the master agreement type.

Penalties

Click Add or Add as Percent to add a penalty. Fill in the fields in the new row that
appears in the penalties table.
Volume Threshold: Type the volume that the master agreement must meet in order
to avoid a penalty. If the master agreement volume falls below this number, the buyer
will pay a penalty.
Penalty Amount: If you clicked Add, type the amount of the penalty.
Amount/Percent: If you clicked Add as Percent, type the percentage of the penalty.
Alert: Indicates whether an alert will be created when the penalty volume threshold is
exceeded. Agreement penalty alerts are set in the master agreement type.
Contract Expiration Alert (Days): Type the number of days before the contract
expires that an alert will be sent. Agreement penalty alerts must be enabled in the
master agreement type for this field to be editable.

Additional Terms
Click Add to add an additional term. Fill in the fields in the Master Agreement Terms
dialog box and click OK.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a master agreement term
Adding a master agreement rebate
Adding a master agreement rebate
Adding a master agreement penalty
Adding an additional term to a master agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 657

Master Agreements Terms page Master Agreements

Adding a master agreement term

A term for a master agreement refers to the conditions under which your company
receives title of and responsibility for goods and services. Terms usually include
conditions for payment, replenishment, maximum and minimum prices, rebates, and
penalties.

To add a master agreement term:

1 On the Terms page, fill in the fields for basic information and those under Minimum
and Limit. For details, see Field help for Master Agreements Line Item Terms
page.
2 Optionally, add a rebate. For details, see Adding a master agreement rebate.
3 Optionally, add a penalty. For details, see Adding a master agreement penalty.
4 Optionally, add an additional term. For details, see Adding a master agreement
penalty.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can edit a master agreement term after it is added.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a master agreement rebate
Adding a master agreement rebate
Adding a master agreement penalty
Adding an additional term to a master agreement
Field help for Master Agreements Terms page

658 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Terms page

Adding a master agreement rebate

A rebate is an incentive for your company to purchase a specific quantity of goods or
services. It is often a reduced price for a specific good or service after your company
exceeds a spending or quantity threshold. Sometimes, a rebate is a refund sum of
money across all purchases of a good or service, which is returned at the end of the
contract.

To add a rebate:
1 On the Terms page under Rebates, click Add.
2 Fill in the fields for the rebate. For details, see Field help for Master Agreements
Terms page.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can edit a master agreement rebate after it is added.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a master agreement term
Adding a master agreement penalty
Adding an additional term to a master agreement
Field help for Master Agreements Terms page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 659

Master Agreements Terms page Master Agreements

Adding a master agreement penalty

A penalty results if your company or a supplier violates agreed-upon conditions for
purchase or payment of goods and services. A penalty is usually exacted as a sum of
money.

To add a penalty:
1 On the Terms page under Penalties, click Add.
2 Fill in the fields for the penalty. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Terms page
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can edit a master agreement penalty after it is added.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a master agreement term
Adding a master agreement rebate
Adding an additional term to a master agreement
Field help for Master Agreements Terms page

660 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Terms page

Adding an additional term to a master agreement

A term for a master agreement refers to the conditions under which your company
receives title of and responsibility for goods and services. Terms usually include
conditions for payment, replenishment, maximum and minimum prices, rebates, and
penalties.

To add an additional term:

1 On the Terms page under Additional Terms, click Add.
2 Fill in the fields in the dialog box. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreements Terms dialog box.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can edit an additional term for a master agreement after it is added.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a master agreement term
Adding a master agreement rebate
Adding a master agreement penalty
Field help for Master Agreements Terms page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 661

Master Agreements Terms page Master Agreements

Field help for Master Agreements Terms dialog box

The following provides help for the fields in the Master Agreement Terms dialog box.

Term Type: Select Standard to add a predefined term or Custom to create a new
term.
Term Name: Select a standard term name from the drop-down list or type a custom
term name. This is a required field.
Description: Type a description for the item. This is a required field.
URL: Enter an associated URL for this term.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a master agreement term
Adding a master agreement rebate
Adding a master agreement rebate
Adding a master agreement penalty
Adding an additional term to a master agreement

662 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Audits page

Master Agreements Audits page

An audit is an analysis of a master agreement to determine whether the supplier is
following conditions such as delivery time and method, charged price, quality, and so
forth.
This page is enabled in the master agreement type.

On the Master Agreements Audits page, you can add and edit an audit.

Field help for Master Agreements Audits page

Evaluation Criteria: Type the criteria used to evaluate this master agreement during
an audit.

Audit History

Click Add to add an audit to the master agreement. Fill in the fields in the Audit Detail
dialog box and click OK.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a master agreement audit
Field help for Master Agreements Audits page
Field help for Master Agreements Audit Detail dialog box

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 663

Master Agreements Audits page Master Agreements

Adding a master agreement audit

An audit is an analysis of a master agreement to determine whether the supplier is
following conditions such as delivery time and method, charged price, quality, and so
forth.

To add an audit for a master agreement:

1 On the Audits page, type the Evaluation Criteria for the audit. For details, see
Field help for Master Agreements Audits page.
2 Under Audit History, click Add.
3 In the Audit Detail dialog box, fill in the fields for the audit. For details, see Field
help for Master Agreements Audit Detail dialog box.
4 Click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can edit a master agreement audit after it is added.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Field help for Master Agreements Audits page
Field help for Master Agreements Audit Detail dialog box

664 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Audits page

Field help for Master Agreements Audit Detail dialog box

The following provides help for the fields in the Audit Detail dialog box.

Audit: Type a name for the audit. This is a required field.

Due Date: Type or click the Calendar icon to select the date the audit is due. This
is a required field.
Publish to Calendar: Check this box to publish this date to the Calendar channel on
the Workbench.

Audit Date: Type or click the Calendar icon to select the date the audit was
performed. If this date is set, the due date will not be published to the Calendar
channel.
Audit Comments: Type any comments associated with the audit.

Audit file: Click the Lookup icon to choose a file to attach to the audit.
Expected Auditor: Indicates the user who is expected to perform this audit. By
default, this is the document owner. Click the Lookup icon to choose another user.
Audited By: Indicates the person who performed the audit. This attribute is set when
the Audit Date field is set, indicating that the audit has been performed.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a master agreement audit
Field help for Master Agreements Audits page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 665

Master Agreements Performance page Master Agreements

Master Agreements Performance page

By reviewing a supplier’s performance, you can understand exactly how well your
company performed against a signed contract. Metrics, the specific means for
understanding performance, are a measure of compliance or non-compliance with the
contract.
Examples of non-compliance you might discover are:
` Pricing errors, where the price paid exceeds that listed in the contract
` Minimum quantity issues, where the minimum purchase quantity is not reached
` Delivery date errors, where the supplier delivers goods and services before or after
the specified dates

On the Master Agreements Performance page, you can add and edit a performance
metric.
This page is enabled in the master agreement type.

Field help for Master Agreements Performance page

Evaluation Criteria: Type the criteria used to evaluate supplier performance during
this master agreement.
Last Updated: Indicates the date that the master agreement was last updated.

Next Update Due: Type or click the Calendar icon to select the date that the
next Performance metric data is due to be entered. The Master Agreements with
Performance Metrics Due report can be used to find agreements with overdue
Performance metric data.

Performance Metrics
` Select a view of the performance metrics from the drop-down list.
` From the drop-down list, select Count or Percent to indicate the type of metric to
add.
` Click Add to add performance metrics to the master agreement. Fill in the fields in
the Performance Detail dialog box and click OK.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a performance metric to a master agreement
Field help for Master Agreements Performance Period dialog box
Field help for the Master Agreement Performance Period Detail dialog box

666 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Performance page

Adding a performance metric to a master agreement

By reviewing a supplier’s performance, you can understand exactly how well your
company performed against a signed contract. Metrics, the specific means for
understanding performance, are a measure of compliance or non-compliance with the
contract.
Examples of non-compliance you might discover are:
` Pricing errors, where the price paid exceeds that listed in the contract
` Minimum quantity issues, where the minimum purchase quantity is not reached
` Delivery date errors, where the supplier delivers goods and services before or after
the specified dates

To add a performance metric:

1 On the Performance page, fill in the Evaluation Criteria field and other fields. For
details, see Field help for Master Agreements Performance page.
2 Under Performance Metrics, select a performance detail from the drop-down list.
3 Click Add.
4 In the Performance Period dialog box, fill in the fields. For details, see Field help
for Master Agreements Performance Period dialog box.
5 Click Add to add a time period.
6 In the Performance Period Detail dialog box, fill in the fields for the time period.
Note: For details about this dialog box, see Field help for the Master Agreement
Performance Period Detail dialog box.
7 Click OK.
8 In the Performance Detail dialog box, click OK.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can edit a master agreement performance metric after it is added.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Field help for Master Agreements Performance page
Field help for Master Agreements Performance Period dialog box
Field help for the Master Agreement Performance Period Detail dialog box

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 667

Master Agreements Performance page Master Agreements

Field help for Master Agreements Performance Period dialog

box
The following provides help for the fields in the Performance Period dialog box.

Name: Indicates the name of the performance period. This is a required field.
Type: Indicates the type of the performance period. This value is set on the
Performance page.
Evaluator: Indicates the user who will evaluate the supplier for this performance
period. By default, this is the document owner. Click the Lookup icon to choose
another user.

Period Type: Click the Lookup icon to choose a time period to evaluate. This is a
required field.

Click Add to add a time period. Fill in the fields in the Performance Period Detail dialog
box and click OK.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a performance metric to a master agreement
Field help for Master Agreements Performance page
Field help for the Master Agreement Performance Period Detail dialog box

668 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Performance page

Field help for the Master Agreement Performance Period Detail

dialog box
The following provides help for the fields in the dialog box for performance period
details. To clarify these fields, sample values will be provided for the following example:
You set up a performance metric to track on-time deliveries for a supplier. The supplier
has made a total of 10 deliveries, 8 of which were on time.

Time Period: Select the time period to which to apply the performance metric.
Number of Occurrences: Enter the number of times the performance metric criteria
have been met. In the above example, you would enter the number of on-time
deliveries: 8.
Total Occurrences: Enter the total number of instances to apply the criteria. In the
above example, you would enter the total number of deliveries: 10.
Performance Record: For a percentage performance detail, this field is system
calculated and indicates the percentage of time the performance metric criteria have
been met. Using the above example, this field value would be 80%.
For a count performance detail, type a value indicating the percentage of time the
performance metric criteria have been met.
Performance Target: Enter the percentage of time you require the supplier to meet
the metric criteria. In the above example, you might enter 90%.
Alert Trigger: Enter a value that will generate an alert. When the value in the Alert
Trigger field is reached, the alert is generated. Use the following guidelines in selecting
an alert trigger:
■ If a high number for the metric is more desirable (as in the above example,
when tracking on-time deliveries), enter an Alert Trigger value that is smaller
than the Target value. If the record falls below the alert trigger value, an alert
is generated. In the above example, you might enter 75%.
■ If a low number is more desirable (for example, if you are tracking late
deliveries), enter an Alert Trigger value that is larger than the Target value.
If the record rises above the alert trigger value, an alert is generated.
■ It is not recommended that you enter the same value in the Alert Trigger and
Target fields. If these values are the same, the system assumes that higher
values are preferable, and a record that falls below the alert trigger value will
generate the alert.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding a performance metric to a master agreement
Field help for Master Agreements Performance page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 669

Master Agreements Performance page Master Agreements

Field help for Master Agreements Performance Period dialog box

670 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Savings page

Master Agreements Savings page

Savings metrics refer to the difference between the budgeted and the actual costs for
goods and services over a specific time period.
On the Savings page, you can add and edit savings metrics. This page is enabled in the
master agreement type.

Related Topics
Creating an agreement
Adding savings metrics to a master agreement
Field help for the Master Agreement Savings Value dialog box

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 671

Master Agreements Savings page Master Agreements

Adding savings metrics to a master agreement

Savings metrics refer to the difference between the budgeted and the actual costs for
goods and services over a specific time period.

To add savings metrics:

1 On the Savings page under Savings Metrics, click Add.
2 In the Value dialog box, fill in the fields for basic information and those under
Budget vs. Actual and Savings Breakdown. Field help for the Master Agreement
Savings Value dialog box.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

To edit a savings metric, click its Edit icon on the Savings page.

Related Topics
Creating an agreement
Field help for the Master Agreement Savings Value dialog box

672 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Savings page

Field help for the Master Agreement Savings Value dialog box
The following provides help for the fields in the dialog box for adding savings metrics to
a master agreement.

Period: Click the Lookup icon to select a time period during which the savings
entry applied.
Expected Value: Type the value of the spend expected to have taken place, for the
specified time period, against the given agreement.

Budgeted vs. Actual

Budgeted Value: Type the value of the budgeted spend for the specified time period,
for the given agreement.
Actual Value: Type the value of the actual spend for the specified time period, against
the given agreement.
Total Savings: Indicates the total savings, calculated as the difference between the
budgeted and actual spend for the agreement. The value will compute as negative
savings if the actual value exceeds the budgeted value.

Savings Breakdown

Cost Savings: Type the value representing the portion of the total savings allocated to
cost savings for the agreement. Buying organizations often have different definitions of
cost savings. One definition is the portion of total savings attributed to having
negotiated lower pricing with the given supplier.
Cost Avoidance: Type the value representing the portion of the total savings allocated
to cost avoidance for the agreement. Buying organizations often have different
definitions of cost avoidance. One definition is the portion of total savings that is not
attributed to having negotiated lower pricing with the given supplier, but is related to
having avoided realizing certain costs.
For example, a sourcing group has two separate business units in the enterprise with
the same need for renting a certain piece of equipment. The group is able to match
these two needs by enabling the business units to share the same rental and avoid
renting the same piece of equipment on two separate occasions. The cost of the second
occurrence of the rental can be allocated to cost avoidance.
Total Savings: Indicates the total savings, calculated as the sum of the cost savings
plus the cost avoidance for the agreement. This savings value must equal the budgeted
vs. actual total savings value.

Related Topics
Creating an agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 673

Master Agreements Savings page Master Agreements

Adding savings metrics to a master agreement

674 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Accounting page

Master Agreements Accounting page

On the Accounting page, you can add and edit accounting information. This page is
enabled in the master agreement type.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document
Field help for the Accounting page in a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 675

Master Agreements Contract Documents page Master Agreements

Master Agreements Contract Documents page

A contract document is the final product of contract generation in Frictionless SRM. It
can also be created manually from a master agreement. Regardless of how it is
created, a contract document initially contains a draft version of a Microsoft Word
document and is used as a starting point for downstream negotiations.

On the Contract Documents page, you can:

` View the contract documents associated with the master agreement
` Add external contract documents to the master agreement and edit existing
contract documents
` Control contract document versions
` Delete selected contract documents
` Change the status of the latest version of contract documents

Field help for the Master Agreement Contract Documents page

Visibility: Indicates whether the contract can be viewed on the buy-side only, or on
both the buy-side and the sell-side. This field is read-only.
Type: Indicates the contract document type. This field is read-only.
Name: Indicates the name of the contract document.
Description: Indicates the contract document description. This field is read-only.
Checked Out By: Indicates the user who currently has the contract document checked
out. This field is read-only.
Comment: Indicates any comments that the user entered during the last check-out or
check-in process. This field is read-only.
Status: Select a status for the contract document from the drop-down list. For
information on phase configuration, see the Contract Generation Phases Header
page.
Add: Click this button to add an external contract document to the master agreement.

Related Topics
Master Agreements Contract Documents Details page
Adding a contract document to a master agreement
Controlling contract document versions in a master agreement
Comparing contract document versions in a master agreement

676 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Contract Documents page

Adding a contract document to a master agreement

On the Master Agreements Contract Documents page, you can add an external contract
file to a master agreement. Contract files are typically in Microsoft® Word.
You can also use Frictionless® SRM to generate a contract from the master agreement.
For details, see Generating a contract from a master agreement.

To add a contract to a master agreement:

1 On the Contract Documents page, click the Add button.
2 In the Contract Document Type dialog box, select a contract document type and
click Next.
3 In the Name dialog box, enter a name for the contract document in the File Name
field and click the Lookup icon to select the contract file.
4 Click Create.
The contract document is listed on the Contract Documents page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Master Agreements Contract Documents page
Master Agreements Contract Documents Details page
Controlling contract document versions in a master agreement
Comparing contract document versions in a master agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 677

Master Agreements Contract Documents page Master Agreements

Controlling contract document versions in a master agreement

Version control enables you to manage contract modifications and prevent the contract
document from being edited by multiple users simultaneously. Using version control,
you check out a contract document to edit it. No other user can modify the contract
document while you have it checked out. When you finish your changes, check the
contract document in. The changes you made are saved and the contract document can
be edited by other users.
Any contract document generated from within the master agreement is displayed on
the Contract Documents tab. For details, see Generating a contract from a master
agreement. You can also add a contract document directly without generating it from
a template. For details, see Adding a contract document to a master agreement.

To use version control for a contract document:

1 On the Master Agreements Contract Documents page, click the Edit icon next
to a contract document name to open the Contract Document Details page.

Note: As a shortcut, you can also click the triangle on the Edit icon on the
Contract Documents page and select Check Out. However, this option does not give
you access to the Contract Document Details page and its Version History table.
2 Click the Actions button in the toolbar and select Check Out. You can only check
out a contract document if no other user has checked it out.
Note: You can cancel the check out of the contract document if your have checked
out the contract document, or if you are an administrator you can cancel other users'
checkout. Click the Actions button in the toolbar and select Cancel Check Out
3 In the Comment dialog box, enter comments to describe the anticipated changes
and click OK.
4 Click the contract document name in the File Name column and save the
document locally or to a network server.
5 Open the contract document from its saved location and edit it as necessary in
Microsoft® Word.
6 Save your changes.
7 On the Contract Document Details page, click the Actions button in the toolbar and
select Check In.

8 In the Check In a New Version dialog box, click the Lookup icon to find the
contract document you edited.
9 In the Comment dialog box, enter any comments, such as a description of the
changes you made to this version.

678 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Contract Documents page

10 Optionally, to keep the contract document checked out after checking in a new
version, check the Keep Document Checked Out box.
11 Click OK.
Frictionless® SRM automatically creates a new version of the contract document,
incorporates the changes, updates the document version number, and stores it in
the Version History Table on the Contract Document Details page.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Master Agreements Contract Documents page
Master Agreements Contract Documents Details page
Adding a contract document to a master agreement
Comparing contract document versions in a master agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 679

Master Agreements Contract Documents page Master Agreements

Master Agreements Contract Documents Details page

A contract document is the final product of contract generation in Frictionless SRM. It
can also be created manually from a master agreement. Regardless of how it is
created, a contract document initially contains a draft version of a Microsoft Word
document and is used as a starting point for downstream negotiations.

On the Contract Documents Details page, you can:

` Compare contract document versions

Field help for the Master Agreement Contract Documents Details page

General

Name: Type the display name of the contract document. This field is required.
Description: Type the description of the contract document.
Type: Indicates the document type of the contract document. This field is read-only.
Generation Detail: Indicates the generation detail summary if the contract document
was created through contract generation. This field is read-only.

Check Out Information

Checked Out By: Indicates the user who currently has the contract document checked
out. This field is read-only.
Check Out Comment: Indicates any comment entered by the user when checking out
the contract document. This field is read-only.

Version History

Visibility: Indicates the visibility of the version. This can be either Buy-Side or Buy/Sell
Sides. This field is read-only.
Date Added: Indicates the date that the version was checked in. This field is
read-only.
File Name: Indicates the file name of the version. Click the link to download this
version of the contract document. This field is read-only.
Added By: Indicates the user who checked in this version of the contract document.
This field is read-only.
Version: Indicates the version number of this version of the contract document. This
field is read-only. This field is read-only.
Check In Comment: Indicates any comment entered by the user when checking in
this version. This field is read-only. This field is read-only.

680 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master Agreements Contract Documents page

Status: Select a status for this version. You can only edit the status of the latest
version. Click the drop-down menu to select a status option.

Related Topics
Master Agreements Contract Documents page
Adding a contract document to a master agreement
Controlling contract document versions in a master agreement
Comparing contract document versions in a master agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 681

Master Agreements Contract Documents page Master Agreements

Comparing contract document versions in a master agreement

You compare contract document versions on the Contract Documents Details page by
generating a Microsoft® Word document highlighting the differences between the two
versions.

Note: Although you can add contract documents in any format to the Contract
Documents page, in order to compare two documents, both must be in Microsoft Word
document format.

Any contract document generated from the master agreement is displayed on the
Contract Documents tab. For details, see Generating a contract from a master
agreement. You can also add an external contract document to this tab. For details,
see Adding a contract document to a master agreement.
For details on creating multiple contract document versions and using version control,
see Controlling contract document versions in a master agreement.

To compare two contract document versions:

1 On the Contract Documents page, click the Edit icon next to a contract
document name to open the Contract Document Details page.
2 In the Version History table, select two contract document versions to compare.
3 Click Compare.
4 Optionally, select Add Compare Document as a New Version to save the
comparison as a new version in the Version History table. You can also choose to
keep the contract document checked out, if this option is already selected.
5 Click the contract document name in the Version Compare wizard to view the
results of the comparison.
6 Click Finish.

Related Topics
Master Agreements Contract Documents page
Master Agreements Contract Documents Details page
Adding a contract document to a master agreement
Controlling contract document versions in a master agreement

682 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Master agreement toolbar functions

Using the master agreement toolbar, you can:
` Click the Edit button to edit a master agreement
` Click the Save button to save a master agreement
` Click the Undo button to undo your most recent set of changes
` Click the Document button to:
■ View phase information (for a contract document only)
■ Duplicate a master agreement
■ Save a master agreement as a template
■ Cancel a master agreement
■ Close a master agreement
■ Perform master agreement setup tasks, such as specifying pricing, delivery
information, line item specifications, and vendor-entered attributes.
` Click the Actions button to:
■ Create an RFx from a master agreement
■ Generate a contract
` Click the Reports button to:
■ View a master agreement report
` Click the Attachments button to attach a file, URL, or library object
` Click the Discussions button to conduct a discussion
` Click the Chat button to conduct a chat

` Click the Change Phase button (in a contract document only) to change the
phase

Related Topics
Viewing phase information for a sourcing document
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling an agreement or a master agreement
Closing an agreement or a master agreement
Viewing a report for a master agreement or agreement
Creating an RFx from a master agreement
Generating a contract from a master agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 683

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Attachments toolbar button functions

Discussions toolbar button functions
Conducting a chat
Changing the phase of a project or contract document
Toolbar functions

684 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Master Agreement Document toolbar button functions

Click the Master Agreement Document toolbar button to:
` View phase information (for a contract document only)
` Duplicate a master agreement
` Save a master agreement as a template
` Cancel a master agreement
` Close a master agreement
` Perform master agreement setup tasks, such as specifying pricing, delivery
information, line item specifications, and vendor-entered attributes.

Related Topics
Viewing phase information for a sourcing document
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling an agreement or a master agreement
Closing an agreement or a master agreement
Master Agreement Setup: Pricing Model page
Master Agreement Setup: Delivery Info page
Master Agreement Setup: Line Item Specifications page
Master Agreement Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 685

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Canceling an agreement or a master agreement

When you cancel an agreement or a master agreement, it is removed from the list of
active documents.
You can only cancel an agreement or master agreement that, due to one or more
conditions, cannot be closed. For details, see Closing an agreement or a master
agreement

You can cancel an agreement or master agreement if the following conditions are met:
` The current date is before both the End Date and the termination date (the
Termination Communication Date + the Termination Lead Time).
Note: For a perpetual term agreement or master agreement, since there is no End
Date, the current date must be before the termination date. (If the Termination
Communication Date and the Termination Lead Time fields are empty, the
current date is considered to be before the termination date.)
` The Total Actual Price is not set.
` Actual Start and Actual End dates have not been entered on the Tracking page
for any schedule item.
` All associated contract documents are checked in on the Contract Documents page.
` For a master agreement, all sub-agreements are canceled.

To cancel an agreement or master agreement:

1 In the toolbar, click Document and select Cancel from the menu.
2 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The document is canceled.

Related Topics
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Closing an agreement or a master agreement

686 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Closing an agreement or a master agreement

When you close an agreement or master agreement, it is removed from the list of
active documents. You must have the appropriate rights to close an agreement or
master agreement.

You can close an agreement if the following conditions are met:

` The current date is later than the value in the End Date field on the Header page,
or
` The current date is later than the termination date. The termination date is the
Termination Communicated Date + the Termination Notice Lead Time on the
Header page. (If these fields are empty, the termination date is not considered to
have passed.)
Note: For a perpetual term agreement or master agreement, since there is no End
Date, the termination date must have passed.
` Actual Start and Actual End dates have been entered on the Tracking page for all
schedule items.
` All associated contract documents are checked in on the Contract Documents page.
` The agreement or master agreement has been saved at least once and has not
been canceled.
` For a master agreement, all sub-agreements are canceled or closed.

Note: You cannot close a master agreement template.

To close an agreement or master agreement:

1 In the toolbar, click Document and select Close from the menu.
2 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The document is closed.

Related Topics
Duplicating a sourcing document
Saving a sourcing document as a template
Canceling an agreement or a master agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 687

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Master Agreement Setup: Pricing Model page

You can use the Master Agreement Setup: Pricing Model page to set the pricing
structure for the master agreement.

To see the Master Agreement Setup: Pricing Model page:

1 In the toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Pricing Model tab.
3 Fill in the fields as described below.
4 Click Save.

Field Help for the Master Agreement Setup: Pricing Model Page

Pricing Structure: Select a pricing structure. This field indicates how the supplier
responded to a line item. When the line items are entered from scratch, the assumption
is that the negotiation for each line item occurred off line. The options are as follows:
` Unit Price: In an RFx, you selected this option for line items. In the master
agreement, you select the option and enter the value entered by the supplier in the
RFx response.
` Unit Price Components: In an RFx, you specified the components for unit price.
For example, in a print order for a brochure, you might have specified components
for four-color print, two-color print, and black only. In the RFx response, the
supplier entered prices for each component. In the master agreement, you select
the option and enter the values entered by the supplier in the RFx response.
Specifying this pricing structure creates the Price Components view for the Line
Items page.
` Tiered Pricing: In an RFx, you specified the tiers or quantity ranges on the Terms
page when you added a line item. In the RFx response, the supplier entered prices
for each tier. In the master agreement, you select the option and enter the values
entered by the supplier in the RFx response.
If you select this option, you must specify quantity ranges in the Quantity Price
Schedule field on the Master Agreements Line Item Terms page. The supplier
will enter prices for each quantity range.
Tiered Pricing is used to allow the supplier to offer discounts for higher-volume
purchases. For example, the supplier might specify one unit price for a 10-unit
purchase, and a lower unit price for a 20-unit purchase.
For more information, see Specifying tiered pricing for master agreement line
items.

Marginal Pricing (reports only): This checkbox appears only if you select Tiered
Pricing as the Pricing Structure and is used for Spend Analysis reports.

688 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Related Topics
Specifying tiered pricing for master agreement line items
Master Agreement Setup: Delivery Info page
Master Agreement Setup: Line Item Specifications page
Master Agreement Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 689

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Specifying tiered pricing for master agreement line items

Tiered Pricing is used to allow the supplier to offer discounts for higher-volume
purchases. For example, the supplier might specify one unit price for a 10-unit
purchase and a lower unit price for a 20-unit purchase.

To specify tiered pricing for line items:

1 In the toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Pricing Model tab.
3 Select Tiered Pricing from the Pricing Structure drop-down list.
4 Optionally, check the Marginal Prices box.
For more information on these fields, see Master Agreement Setup: Pricing
Model page.
5 Click Save.
6 Click the Line Items tab.

7 On the Line Items page, click the Edit icon for a line item for which you want
to set tiered pricing.
8 Click the Terms tab.
9 Under Quantity Price Schedule, click Add to add a quantity range.
10 In the table row that appears, enter a minimum and a maximum quantity for the
quantity range. For example, you might enter 1 for the minimum quantity and 10
for the maximum quantity.
11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 for each quantity range you want to add for the line item.
For example, you might create additional quantity ranges of 10 to 20 units, 20 to
30 units, and so on.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
13 Repeat steps 1 to 11 for each line item for which you want to set tiered pricing.
14 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Setup: Pricing Model page

690 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Master Agreement Setup: Delivery Info page

You can use the Master Agreement Setup: Delivery Info page to:
` Set delivery terms
` Set the line item period type
` Set the delivery schedule

To see the Master Agreement Setup: Delivery Info page:

1 In the toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Delivery Info tab.
3 Fill in the fields as described below.
4 Click Save.

Field Help for the Master Agreement Setup: Delivery Info Page

Delivery Information

Delivery Terms: Click Add Delivery Term to add a term. To select a delivery term as
Awarded, check its box and click Set Awarded. You can also select a term as Awarded
on the Master Agreements Line Item Terms page. This value is used to set the
Awarded delivery term on newly created line items. Changing this value has no effect
on existing line items.

Line Item Period Type: Select a period type from the drop-down list.

Delivery Schedule: Click Add Delivery Period to add a time period for the line item.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Setup: Pricing Model page
Master Agreement Setup: Line Item Specifications page
Master Agreement Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 691

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Master Agreement Setup: Line Item Specifications page

You use the Master Agreement Setup: Line Item Specifications page to add and define
line item specifications. Line item specifications provide detailed information such as
technical and service specifications for the line items in the master agreement.
You can assign specification values to individual line items on the Master Agreements
Line Item Detail page.

To see the Master Agreement Setup: Line Item Specifications page:

1 In the toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Line Item Specifications tab.
3 Fill in the fields as described below.
4 Click Save.

Field Help for Master Agreement Setup: Line Item Specifications Page

Add Spec: Click to add a specification in the Item Specification dialog box. You must
add at least one group before adding specifications. You can add an unlimited number
of specifications.
Add Group: Click to add a group to organize your specifications. You can add an
unlimited number of groups.
Reorder: Click to reorder groups and/or specifications or to move specifications from
one group to another.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Setup: Item Specification dialog box
Adding a master agreement line item specification
Master Agreement Setup: Pricing Model page
Master Agreement Setup: Line Item Specifications page
Master Agreement Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page

692 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Master Agreement Setup: Item Specification dialog box

You use the Item Specification dialog box to enter information for a line item
specification or vendor-entered attribute. Line item specifications provide detailed
information such as technical and service specifications for the line items in the master
agreement. Vendor-entered attributes are attributes whose values are entered by
suppliers.

Field Help for Item Specification dialog box

Specification Name: Enter the name of the specification. This is a required field.
Required: Check this box if the specification is required for all line items in the master
agreement.
Type: From the drop-down list, select the type of specification value.
Description: Enter a description for the specification.
Options: Click Add to add a multiple choice option to the specification. Enter the
option in the new line that appears in the Options table. The Options table appears only
when you select Multiple Choice as the specification type.
Display Field: Select the format in which to display the specification.
Value: Enter or select a default value for the specification.

Value List Source: Click the Lookup icon to select the source of the value list to
use. This field appears only when you choose Select from List as the specification type.
Field Width: Enter the width of the specification field in pixels. This is the minimum
width of the field when it is displayed in a list, and is intended to prevent the data from
wrapping. This field is required.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Setup: Line Item Specifications page
Adding a master agreement line item specification
Master Agreement Setup: Pricing Model page
Master Agreement Setup: Line Item Specifications page
Master Agreement Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 693

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Adding a master agreement line item specification

Line item specifications provide detailed information such as technical and service
specifications for the line items in the master agreement.
After adding a line item specification in Setup, you can assign it a value for a specific
line item on the Master Agreements Line Item Detail page. If you do not assign a
new value, the default specification value will be used.

To add a line item specification:

1 In the toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Line Item Specifications tab. For details, see Master Agreement Setup:
Line Item Specifications page.
3 In the Line Item Specification table, click Add Spec.
4 Fill in the fields in the Item Specification dialog box. For details, see Field Help for
Item Specification dialog box.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Save.
7 Click the Line Items tab.

8 Click the Edit icon for a line item.

Note: You can also edit a specification in the Line Item Specifications view. To open
this view, select it from the view drop-down list.
9 On the Line Item Detail page, change the default specification value as needed.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Setup: Item Specification dialog box
Master Agreement Setup: Line Item Specifications page

694 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Master Agreement Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page

You can use the Master Agreement Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page to add and
define attributes whose values are entered by suppliers. This enables you to solicit
specific information from suppliers and make a more informed awarding decision.
These attributes are displayed in the master agreement, where the supplier is
prompted to enter a response for each attribute for each line item.

To see the Master Agreement Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page:

1 In the toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Vendor Entered Attributes tab.
3 Fill in the fields as described below.
4 Click Save.

Field Help for Master Agreement Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes Page

Add Spec: Click to add an attribute in the Master Agreement Setup: Item
Specification dialog box. You must add at least one group before adding
specifications. You can add an unlimited number of specifications.
Add Group: Click to add a group to organize your specifications. You can add an
unlimited number of groups.
Reorder: Click to reorder groups and/or specifications or to move specifications from
one group to another.
Enabled attributes appear on the Line Item Detail page, where you can enter values for
each attribute. For example, you might specify Color as an attribute in the Settings
dialog box and enter White as a value on the Line Item Detail page.

Related Topics
Adding a master agreement vendor-entered attribute
Master Agreement Setup: Item Specification dialog box
Master Agreement Setup: Pricing Model page
Master Agreement Setup: Line Item Specifications page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 695

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Adding a master agreement vendor-entered attribute

Vendor-entered attributes are attributes whose values are entered by suppliers. They
enable you to solicit specific information from suppliers and make a more informed
awarding decision.
These attributes are displayed in the master agreement, where the supplier is
prompted to enter a response for each attribute for each line item.

To add a vendor-entered attribute:

1 In the toolbar, click the Document button and select the Setup option.
2 Click the Vendor Entered Attributes tab. For details, see Master Agreement
Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page.
3 In the Vendor Entered Attribute table, click Add Spec.
4 Fill in the fields in the Item Specification dialog box. For details, see Field Help for
Item Specification dialog box.
5 Click OK.
6 Click Save.

To view these attributes after they have been entered by the supplier, do one of the
following:
` In the toolbar, click Reports and select Vendor-Entered Attributes Analysis Report.
This report displays all vendor-entered attributes.
` Click the Line Items tab and click a line item. The vendor-entered attributes are
displayed on the Master Agreements Line Item Detail page.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Setup: Vendor Entered Attributes page

696 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Master Agreement Actions toolbar button functions

Click the Master Agreement Actions toolbar button to:
` Create an RFx from a master agreement
` Generate a contract

Related Topics
Creating an RFx from a master agreement
Generating a contract from a master agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 697

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Creating an RFx from a master agreement

An RFx enables you to request information, quotes, and prices regarding goods and
services from multiple suppliers. Suppliers respond with answers and their best prices.
You can then score the responses and compare them by supplier. After you score
responses, you can award the RFx either automatically or manually.
In addition to creating an RFx from a master agreement, you can create an RFx from
within the RFx and Auction modules. When you create an RFx from an auction, the
auction must have been created originally from an RFx.
You must have the appropriate rights before you can create an auction from an RFx.

Note: The master agreement must be in view mode to create an RFx.

To create an RFx:
1 In the toolbar, click Actions and select Create RFx from the menu.
2 Follow the prompts to create the RFx.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Actions toolbar button functions
Generating a contract from a master agreement

698 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Generating a contract from a master agreement

When you generate a contract from a master agreement, the contract is displayed on
the Contract Documents tab of the master agreement and version control is enabled for
the contract. For details, see Master Agreements Contract Documents page.

Note: To create the most detailed possible contract, it is recommended that you create
a master agreement from an RFx award scenario and then generate the contract
from the master agreement.

To generate a contract:
1 On the toolbar of the master agreement, click the Actions button and select
Generate Contract from the menu.
2 On the Create page of the contract generation wizard, select Contract as the
document type and click Next.
3 On the Contract Generation Setup page of the wizard, do the following:

a Under Select Contract Document Template, click the Lookup icon to

select a contract document template. This is a required field.
b If you want the option to add and remove clauses and sections during contract
generation, check Customize Content.
c Optionally, under Select Related RFx Vendor Proposal, click the Lookup
icon to select the RFx supplier proposal on which to base the contract.
d Click Next.
4 On the Choose Clause Content Options page of the wizard, do the following:
a In the table under Contract Document Template, select the sections and clauses
to include in the contract. You can choose to exclude any clauses or sections
that are not designated as required.
b To add a section or clause that does not appear in the table, click Add Section
or Add Clause, select the section or clause, and click OK.
c Under Stand Alone RFx Clause Questions, you see a list of all clauses that were
created from RFx supplier question responses. For details, see Including RFx
supplier question responses in a contract document.
Select the clauses to include in the contract.
d Click Next.
5 If any of the clauses you selected requires content options to be selected, these
options are displayed in the next Choose Clause Content Wizard page. For each
clause, select the version to include.
If a supplier has suggested alternate language for a clause, it appears on this page.
If you select the supplier’s suggested language for a clause, this clause will appear

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 699

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

in the final contract document using marked-up text to indicate the changes made
by the supplier.
When you have finished selecting clause content options, click Next.
6 On the Processing Request page, wait until Percent Complete reaches 100 and
then click Next.
7 On the Variable Confirmation/Override page of the wizard, do the following:
a Under Attribute Variables, review the variables and their default values and
enter value overrides as necessary. This table displays variables that appear in
your clause documents.
b Under RFx Question Variables, review the variables and their default values and
enter value overrides as necessary. This table displays variables in your clause
documents that retrieve data from RFx supplier question responses.
c The Collection Variables table lists any collection variables in your clause

documents. Click the Edit icon for a list to edit its contents.
8 On the Processing Request page, wait until Percent Complete reaches 100 and
then click Next.
9 On the Document Generation Complete page, click the contract document link to
open the file or click Finish to return to the master agreement.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx from a master agreement
Master Agreement Actions toolbar button functions

700 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Master Agreement Reports toolbar button functions

Click the master agreement Reports toolbar button to view a master agreement
report.

Related Topics
Viewing a report for a master agreement or agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 701

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Viewing a report for a master agreement or agreement

You can view a number of reports that give you information about a master agreement
or agreement.
Click a report name to view more information about the report.

Option Description

Master Agreement/ This report lists all spend transactions that map to the current master
Agreement Spend Detail agreement or agreement.
report
Master Agreement/ This report lists all spend transactions that map to the current master
Agreement Line Item agreement or agreement line item.
Spend report
Master Agreement/ This report is a summary of all spend mapped to the current master
Agreement Spend agreement, including the following:
Status report ■ Spend over minimum
■ Spend volume
■ Special term adjustments
■ Total spend (including any special term adjustments)

Master Agreement/ Summary of all non-compliance (unit price errors) for transactions
Agreement Unit Price made against the master agreement/agreement.
Error Summary report
Master Agreement/ List of all spend transactions for a given agreement or line item where
Agreement Unit Price the transaction unit price is not equal to the agreement item unit
Errors report price.
Master Agreement/ This report is a summary of key high-level master agreement or
Agreement Cover Page agreement attributes in a printable format.
report
Master Agreement/ This report is a summary of all spend mapped to the current master
Agreement Line Item agreement or agreement line item, including the following:
Spend Status report ■ Spend over minimum
■ Spend volume
■ Special term adjustments
Total spend (including any special term adjustments)
Note: This report is only available from the Master Agreements
Line Item Detail page.

To view a master agreement report:

1 In the toolbar for a master agreement or agreement, click Reports and select the
report to view from the menu. You see the report.
2 Optionally, bookmark the report.

702 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

3 Optionally, export the report as a PDF, Excel (XLS), or CSV file.

4 After you finish viewing the report, click Close Window.

Note: For more reports including master agreement data, see the Analysis module.

Related Topics
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 703

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Master Agreement/ Agreement Spend Detail report

This report is a list of all spend transactions that map to the current master agreement
or agreement.
This report will only display results if both of the following conditions are true:
` The buying organization is importing spend transactions into the SRM system and
these transactions provide data facilitating mapping transactions to a specific SRM
agreement.
` There have been transactions imported against the agreement currently being
viewed.

Tip: The Master Agreement/Agreement Spend Detail report is useful if your organization
is not tracking transactions to specific agreement line items but is tracking them to
agreements. This report enables you to research specific spend transactions made under
a specific agreement.

The following is a description of the fields in this report.

Field Description

Spend Date The date on which the spend transaction took place
Source Document The transaction source document name, for example, PO1001,
INV3004
Source Document Line The position of the transaction on the transaction source document
Item (e.g., line number from the purchase order)
Agreement ID The ID of the master agreement or agreement against which this
transaction was posted
Line Item Number The number of the agreement line item against which this transaction
was posted
Material Number The material number of the product purchased
Description The description of the product or service purchased
Item Quantity The item quantity of the product or service purchased
Unit The ordering unit of the product or service purchased
Unit Price The unit price of the product or service purchased
Item Price The item price of the product or service purchased (unit price *
quantity)
Vendor Part Number The supplier part number of the product or service purchased

704 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Field Description

Spend Date The date on which the spend transaction took place
Manufacturer Part The manufacturer part number of the product or service purchased
Number
GL Account Code The general ledger account code against which the transaction is
posted
Cost Center The cost center against which the transaction is posted
Location (Ship To) The ship to location for the product or service purchased
Payment Terms The payment terms for the product or service purchased

Related Topics
Viewing a report for a master agreement or agreement
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 705

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Master Agreement/ Agreement Line Item Spend report

This report is a list of all spend transactions that map to the current master agreement
or agreement line item.
This report will only display results if both of the following conditions are true:
` The buying organization is importing spend transactions into the SRM system and
these transactions provide data facilitating mapping transactions to a specific SRM
agreement.
` There have been transactions imported against the agreement currently being
viewed.

Tip: This report enables you to research specific spend transactions made under a
specific agreement line item.

The following is a description of the fields in this report.

Line Item Spend Roll-up by Item

This report table provides a count of the total number of transactions and the spend
sum associated with each item in the master agreement or agreement. Click the
transaction count link to drill down to the next section.

Field Description

Agreement ID The master agreement or agreement ID associated with the transaction

Line Item Number The number of the agreement line item against which this transaction was
posted
Material Number The material number of the product purchased
Item Description The description of the product or service purchased
Transaction Count The total number of transactions that have been posted against this line
item
Spend The total of all transaction spend posted against this line item

706 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Line Item Spend Detail

This report table provides a detailed view of all transactions.

Field Description

Spend Date The date on which the spend transaction took place
Source Document The transaction source document name, e.g., PO1001, INV3004
Source Document Line The position of the transaction on the transaction source document
Item (for example, the line number from the purchase order)
Line Item Number The number of the agreement line item against which this
transaction was posted
Material Number The material number of the product purchased
Item Description The description of the product or service purchased
Item Quantity The item quantity of the product or service purchased
Unit The ordering unit of the product or service purchased
Unit Price The unit price of the product or service purchased
Item Price The item price of the product or service purchased (unit price *
quantity)
Vendor Part Number The supplier part number of the product or service purchased
Manufacturer Part Number The manufacturer part number of the product or service purchased
GL Account Code The general ledger account code against which the transaction is
posted
Cost Center The cost center against which the transaction is posted
Location (Ship To) The ship to location for the product or service purchased
Payment Terms The payment terms for the product or service purchased

Related Topics
Viewing a report for a master agreement or agreement
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 707

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Master Agreement/ Agreement Spend Status report

This report is a summary of all spend mapped to the current master agreement,
including the following:
` Spend over minimum
` Spend volume
` Special term adjustments
` Total spend (including any special term adjustments)

Tip: The Master Agreement/Agreement Spend Status report provides a quick way for
you to discover total spend made against the agreement to date, in order to understand
potential risk associated with exceeding a defined agreement spend limit or not reaching
a defined agreement spend minimum.

The following is a description of the fields in this report.

Field Description

Spend Over Minimum/Forecast The spend (spend transactions defined as forecast

spend) over the defined master agreement or
agreement minimum. Note that if no minimum is
defined, the spend will display as $0.
Spend Over Minimum/Actual The spend (spend transactions defined as actual
spend) over the defined master agreement or
agreement minimum. Note that if no minimum is
defined, the spend will display as $0.
Master Agreement Spend/Forecast The total of all spend transactions (defined as forecast
spend) posted to the current master agreement or
agreement.
Master Agreement Spend/Actual The total of all spend transactions (defined as actual
spend) posted to the current master agreement or
agreement.

708 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Field Description

Adjustments (Rebate(-) or The total of all adjustments as a result of realized

Penalty(+))/Forecast rebates or penalties based upon all processed spend
transactions (defined as forecast spend) to date.
Adjustments (Rebate(-) or The total of all adjustments as a result of realized
Penalty(+))/Actual rebates or penalties based upon all processed spend
transactions (defined as actual spend) to date.
Total Spend after Adjustments/Forecast The total of all spend transactions (defined as forecast
spend) posted to the current master agreement or
agreement, including adjustments.
Total Spend after Adjustments/Actual The total of all spend transactions (defined as actual
spend) posted to the current master agreement or
agreement, including adjustments.

Related Topics
Viewing a report for a master agreement or agreement
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 709

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Master Agreement/ Agreement Unit Price Error Summary report

This report is a summary of all spend transactions where the transaction unit price is
not equal to the agreement item unit price.

Tip: This report enables the buying organization to quickly identify transactions for
which they have overpaid, enabling them to seek reimbursement from their
suppliers.

Summary
This section displays total amount of unit price discrepancies for all items in the master
agreement and agreement (if launched from the master agreement) or for all items in
the agreement (if launched from the agreement).

You can filter this section by the following:

` Time Period Beginning at
` Time Period Ending at

The following is a description of the fields in this section.

Field Description

Master Agreement The ID of the master agreement or agreement related to the given
item pricing discrepancies
Line Item Number The number of the agreement line item
Item ID The part number of the product or service purchased
Item Description The description of the product or service purchased
Spend The total spend amount for all transactions posted to the item
to-date. (Shown in the currency as provided in the spend transaction
import.)
Agreement Spend Detail The total spend amount for all transactions posted to the item
to-date. (Shown in the currency of the agreement.)

710 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Field Description

Total Calculated Spend The total spend amount for all transactions posted to the item to
date, calculated by multiplying the transaction quantities by the
agreement item unit price, rather than by the spend amount taken
directly from the transaction.
Non-Compliance (All Errors) The difference between the Agreement Spend Detail and the Total
Calculated Spend.
Non-Compliance (Overpaid The difference between the Agreement Spend Detail and the Total
Errors) Calculated Spend, but only the differences which are positive (over
charges by the supplier).

Item Detail
This section shows the detailed transactions for the specific item. The pricing errors for
the detailed transactions sum to the overall item discrepancy.

You can filter this section by the following:

` Time Period Beginning at
` Time Period Ending at

The following is a description of the fields in this section.

Field Description

Spend Date The date on which the spend transaction took place.
Spend ID The ID of the spend transaction.
Source Document The transaction source document number, e.g., PO1001, INV3004
Source Document Line Item The position of the transaction on the transaction source
document (e.g., line number from the purchase order)
Item ID The part number of the product or service purchased
Item Description The description of the product or service purchased
Line Item Number The number of the agreement line item against which this
transaction was posted
Item Quantity The quantity of the product or service purchased
Item Quantity Unit The ordering unit of the product or service purchased
Actual Unit Price The unit price (as documented on the spend transaction) of the
product or service purchased

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 711

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Field Description

Contracted Unit Price The unit price (as documented on the contract line item associated
with the transaction) of the product or service purchased
Agreement Price The extended price (as documented on the spend transaction) of
the product or service purchased (actual unit price * quantity)
Contracted Extended Price The extended price (as documented on the contract line item
associated with the transaction) of the product or service
purchased (contracted unit price * quantity)
Pricing Error (Total) The difference between the Actual Unit Price and the Contracted
Unit Price * Item Quantity.
Delivery Terms The Delivery Term associated with the product purchased (if
applicable)
Item Vendor Part Number The supplier part number of the product or service purchased
Manufacturer Part Number The manufacturer part number of the product or service
purchased
GL Account Code The general ledger account code against which the transaction is
posted
Cost Center The cost center against which the transaction is posted
Location (Ship To) The ship to location for the product or service purchased

Related Topics
Viewing a report for a master agreement or agreement
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Toolbar functions

712 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Master Agreement/ Agreement Unit Price Errors report

This report is a list of all spend transactions in which the transaction unit price is not
equal to the agreement item unit price.

Tip: This report enables the buying organization to quickly identify transactions for
which they have overpaid, enabling them to seek reimbursement from their suppliers.

The following is a description of the fields in this report.

Field Description

Spend Amount Type The type of spend transaction (actual, forecast or planned)
Spend Date The date on which the spend transaction took place
Source Document The transaction source document number, e.g., PO1001, INV3004
Source Document Line The position of the transaction on the transaction source document
Item (e.g., line number from the purchase order)
Agreement ID The ID of the master agreement or agreement against which the
transaction was posted
Line Item Number The number of the agreement line item against which this transaction
was posted
Material Number The material number of the product purchased
Description The description of the product or service purchased
Item Quantity The quantity of the product or service purchased
Actual Unit Price The unit price (as documented on the spend transaction) of the product
or service purchased
Contracted Unit Price The unit price (as documented on the contract line item associated with
the transaction) of the product or service purchased
Actual Extended Price The extended price (as documented on the spend transaction) of the
product or service purchased (actual unit price * quantity)
Contracted Extended The extended price (as documented on the contract line item
Price associated with the transaction) of the product or service purchased
(contracted unit price * quantity)
Pricing Error (Total) The difference between the Actual Unit Price and the Contracted Unit
Price * Item Quantity
Delivery Terms The delivery term associated with the product purchased (if applicable)
Vendor Part Number The supplier part number of the product or service purchased

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 713

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Field Description

Manufacturer Part The manufacturer part number of the product or service purchased
Number
Commodity The commodity against which the transaction is posted
GL Account Code The general ledger account code against which the transaction is
posted
Cost Center The cost center against which the transaction is posted
Location (Ship To) The ship to location for the product or service purchased

Related Topics
Viewing a report for a master agreement or agreement
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Toolbar functions

714 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Master Agreement/ Agreement Cover Page report

This report is a summary of key high-level master agreement or agreement attributes
in a printable format.
The following is a description of the fields in this report.

Field Description

Agreement ID The ID of the agreement. This field only applies when report is run
from an Agreement
Master Agreement ID The ID of the master agreement
Master Agreement Type The Master Agreement Type used to generate the master
agreement
Description The agreement description
Publish Summary to Vendor The indicator communicating whether or not the agreement is
tagged to have the agreement summary published to the supplier
Date to Publish The date the agreement was published to the supplier.
Summary Published to Search The indicator communicating whether or not the agreement is
tagged to be published to the workbench Search channel
Created By The user who first saved the agreement in the system
Modified By The user who performed most recent update to the agreement
Created At The date on which the agreement was first saved in the system
Last Modified The date on which the most recent update was saved to the
system for the agreement
Organizational Unit The organizational unit associated with the agreement
Company The company associated with the agreement
Agreement Manager The manager of the agreement
Effective Date The effective date of the agreement
Renewal Review Reminder The date a reminder will be sent out to review the agreement
Date before renewal
End Date The end date of the agreement
Perpetual Term The indicator communicating whether or not the agreement is
defined as perpetual term, without an explicit end date
Vendor The supplier associated with the agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 715

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Field Description

Address The address of the supplier

Vendor Primary Contact The primary contact for the supplier
Phone The phone number of the supplier
Vendor's Contract Number The contact number of the supplier
Location The location of the agreement
Currency The currency used for the agreement
Status The status of the agreement
Payment Terms The payment terms of the agreement
Payment Terms Description The description of the payment terms
Replenishment The assignment of responsibility for the purchase of additional
products
Replenishment Description Any description provided for the replenishment process
Internal Category If the report is run for an agreement, the Internal Category will
display as one value. If run for master agreement with
agreements, the Internal Category may display multiple
categories.
External Category If the report is run for an agreement, the Internal Category will
display as one value. If run for master agreement with
agreements, the Internal Category may display multiple
categories.
Cover Page Terms Info A list of Additional Term data, including a Term Name and
Description for each term in the associated agreement
Note: This report section only displays when there is at least one
additional term defined in the agreement.

716 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Cover Page Accounting Info Section

This report table includes all accounting information associated with the agreement.

Field Description

Activity The type of activity associated with a charge warranting the accounting
entry
Cost Center The cost center against which the activity charge is tracked
Entity The buy-side business entity accountable for the activity charge
General Ledger Account The general ledger account against which the activity charge is tracked
Benefit (%) The percent actual benefit derived from the activity

Related Topics
Viewing a report for a master agreement or agreement
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 717

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Master Agreement/ Agreement Line Item Spend Status report

This report is a summary of all spend mapped to the current master agreement or
agreement line item, including the following:
` Spend over minimum
` Spend volume
` Special term adjustments
` Total spend (including any special term adjustments)

Note: This report is only available from the Master Agreements Line Item Detail
page.

Tip: The Line Item Spend Status report provides a quick way for you to discover total
spend made against the line item to date, in order to understand potential risk
associated with exceeding a defined item spend limit or not reaching a defined item
spend minimum.

The following is a description of the fields in this report.

Field Description

Spend Quantity over Minimum (in Units) The spend (in Units) (spend transactions
/Forecast defined as forecast spend) over the defined line
item minimum. Note that if no minimum is
defined, the spend will display as 0.
Spend Quantity over Minimum (in The spend (in Units) (spend transactions
Units)/Actual defined as actual spend) over the defined line
item minimum. Note that if no minimum is
defined, the spend will display as 0.
Line Item Spend/Forecast The total of all spend transactions (defined as
forecast spend) posted to the given line item.
Line Item Spend/Actual The total of all spend transactions (defined as
actual spend) posted to the given line item.

718 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Master agreement toolbar functions

Field Description

Adjustments (Rebate(-) or The total of all adjustments as a result of

Penalty(+))/Forecast realized rebates or penalties based upon all
processed spend transactions (defined as
forecast spend) to date.
Adjustments (Rebate(-) or Penalty(+))/Actual The total of all adjustments as a result of
realized rebates or penalties based upon all
processed spend transactions (defined as actual
spend) to date.
Total Spend after Adjustments/Forecast The total of all spend transactions (defined as
forecast spend) posted to the given line item,
including adjustments.
Total Spend after Adjustments/Actual The total of all spend transactions (defined as
actual spend) posted to the given line item,
including adjustments.

Related Topics
Viewing a report for a master agreement or agreement
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 719

Master agreement toolbar functions Master Agreements

Master Agreement Change Phase toolbar button functions

Click the Change Phase button to:

` Change the phase in a contract document

The Change Phase button appears only in the toolbar of a contract document. To see
the Change Phase button, click the Contract Documents tab and click a contract
document to open it.

Related Topics
Changing the phase of a project or contract document

720 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation

A contract is a legal agreement between a purchasing enterprise and a supplier, which

dictates buying, payment and delivery terms over time. Frictionless® SRM enables you
to generate a contract from an RFx, auction, or master agreement.
Each contract is based on a contract document template, which consists of clauses and
sections of standard legal terms. Clauses can contain variables that are automatically
replaced with terms and other detailed information taken directly from a sourcing event
such as an RFx or auction or from a specific Frictionless agreement. These features
enable streamlined contract generation that saves time and eliminates repetitive tasks.
The contract document is a Microsoft® Word file that is attached to the sourcing event
from which it is created. After it is generated, a contract can be edited in Microsoft
Word and used for negotiation with the supplier.

Note: For information about master agreements, which enable you to analyze, audit,
and measure specific buying activity against a contract’s goals, see Master
Agreements.

Click the Contract Management button in the navigation bar to see the Clause Library
submenu, which contains the following basic options for this module:

Option Description

Clause List Click to see the Contract Clause List page displaying a list of all
contract clauses.
Section List Click to see the Contract Section List page displaying a list of all
contract sections.
Contract Document Click to see the Contract Document Template List page displaying
Template List a list of all contract document templates.
Library Item Phase Click to see the Contract Generation Phases Header page
Configuration displaying a list of all contract phases.
Variable Library Click to see the Contract Generation Variable Configuration
Header page displaying a list of all contract variables.

Confidential 721
Contract Clause List page Contract Generation

Contract Clause List page

Clauses are the building blocks of contract documents. Each clause, which is usually a
single paragraph, contains text that specifies a set of legal terms. Clauses make up
contract sections, which are then assembled to create a contract document template.
Clauses can also contain variables that apply information from a sourcing document
such as an RFx. For example, you can use the Vendor Name variable to insert a master
agreement supplier name wherever it is appropriate in the clause.
Before working with clauses in Frictionless® SRM, you must save the text of each
clause as a Microsoft® Word document and add any variables. You can then attach the
clause documents in Frictionless SRM to add them to the Clause library.
Before creating contract clauses, it is recommended that you do the following:
` Create a .DOT template in Microsoft Word that precisely defines the paragraph
styles you want to use. This is especially important if you want to include numbered
paragraph styles in your clauses.
` After creating the .DOT file, distribute it and use it consistently for all clauses in
SRM. Failure to use a consistent template may display inconsistent formatting in
the final contract document.

To display the Clause List page:

` Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Clause List from the
Clause Library submenu.

On the Clause List page, you can:

` Search for a clause by Name, Description, Version, Phase, or Type
` Create and edit a clause
` Export a clause list to a CSV file or to a PDF file

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Creating a contract clause
Editing a contract clause
Adding variables to a contract clause document
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

722 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Clause List page

Creating a contract clause

For details contract clauses and their use, see Contract Clause List page. You must
have the appropriate rights to create a clause.

Note: To supply the text of a clause, you must create a clause document in Microsoft®
Word.

To create a clause:
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Clause List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also create a clause by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of the
page, selecting Clause Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list, and
clicking OK.
2 On the Clause List page, click Create.
3 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic clause information. For details, see
Field help for Contract Clause Header page.
4 Under Content Options, add one or more clause documents to the clause. For
details, see Adding a contract clause document to a clause.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
6 Optionally, add variables to the contract clause. For details, see Adding variables
to a contract clause document.
7 Optionally, change the phase of the contract clause. Default phases include:
■ Draft: The creation phase of the clause.
■ Review: The phase in which collaborators can review the clause.
■ Approved: The phase in which a clause can be used to generate contract
documents.
■ Retired: The phase in which the clause is removed from the active list and can
no longer be used to generate contract documents.
To include the clause in sections and templates that can be used to generate
contracts, you must advance the phase to Approved. For details, see Changing a
sourcing document phase.
Phases are configurable. For details, see the Contract Generation Phases Header
page.

Related Topics
Editing a contract clause
Adding a contract clause document to a clause
Adding variables to a contract clause document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 723

Contract Clause List page Contract Generation

Editing a contract clause

Changes made to a clause apply to every section containing that clause.
You must have the appropriate rights to edit a clause. Additionally, the current phase of
a clause, and the configuration rules associated with that phase, determine whether
you can edit the clause. For details, see Contract Generation Phases Header page.
In cases where you cannot edit a clause, you might choose to revise the clause for
versioning instead. For details, see Revising a contract clause for versioning.

To edit a clause:
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Clause List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also edit a clause by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of the
page, selecting Clause Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list, and
clicking OK.
2 On the Clause List page, click the clause to edit.
3 On the Header page, edit basic clause information. For details, see Field help for
Contract Clause Header page.
4 Optionally, under Content Options, add or remove clause documents. For details,
see Adding a contract clause document to a clause.
Note: To edit the text of a clause, you must edit the clause document in Microsoft®
Word, delete the document under Contents, and then re-add the clause document.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
6 Optionally, add variables to the contract clause. For details, see Adding variables
to a contract clause document.
7 Optionally, change the phase of the contract clause. Default phases include:
■ Draft: The creation phase of the clause.
■ Review: The phase in which collaborators can review the clause.
■ Approved: The phase in which a clause can be used to generate contract
documents.
■ Retired: The phase in which the clause is removed from the active list and can
no longer be used to generate contract documents.
To include the clause in sections and templates that can be used to generate
contracts, you must advance the phase to Approved. For details, see Changing a
sourcing document phase.
Phases are configurable. For details, see the Contract Generation Phases Header
page.

724 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Clause List page

Related Topics
Creating a contract clause
Adding variables to a contract clause document
Adding a contract clause document to a clause
Adding variables to a contract clause document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 725

Contract Clause List page Contract Generation

Contract Clause Header page

On the Header page, you can:
` Enter basic clause information
` Add clause content in one or more Microsoft® Word documents

Field help for Contract Clause Header page

Display Name: Type a name for the clause. This is a required field.
Type: Select a type for the clause. You can choose from among the following default
options:
` None
` Terms & Conditions
` Confidentiality
` Termination
` Severability
` Governing Law
` Force Majeure
` Limitation of Damages

The options in this list can be configured by a system administrator.

Description: Type a short description for the clause. The description should be
targeted to users who will be editing or using the clause. This field value is limited to
256 characters.
Version: Indicates the version number of the clause. You can create new versions by
clicking the Actions button. This field is read only.
Owner: By default, the document creator is selected as the clause owner. Click the

Lookup icon to select another owner. This field is informational only and does not
affect the behavior of or access to the clause.

Master Agreement Term: Click the Lookup icon to select a master agreement
term to associate with this clause. This field is informational only and does not affect
the behavior of or access to the clause.
Comments: Type comments describing the intent of the legal text in the clause. You
can enter a field value of up to 2000 characters.

726 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Clause List page

Content Options

Click the Add button to select and add a clause document. A clause document is a
Microsoft® Word document that contains the legal content of the clause. You can add
more than one clause document if multiple pre-approved legal options are available for
this clause.
Content Description: Type a short description indicating the business conditions
under which this particular Content Option should be used. This text will be displayed in
the Contract Generation wizard when the user is prompted to select a Content Option.
Default: Select one Content Option as the default option. This can be used to steer
users toward a particular option in the Contract Generation Wizard.
Set Document: Click this button to change the document associated with this content
option.

Related Topics
Creating a contract clause
Adding a contract clause document to a clause
Adding variables to a contract clause document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 727

Contract Clause List page Contract Generation

Adding a contract clause document to a clause

The text of a contract clause is contained in a Microsoft® Word document. Each clause
in the library can contain one or more clause documents. For example, you might add
multiple iterations or variations of the clause text as needed. You can select one version
of the clause to use as the default during contract generation.
You must create a clause document in Word before attaching it in Frictionless® SRM.
You must have the appropriate rights to add a clause document.

To add a clause document:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Clause List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also add a clause document by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the
top of the page, selecting Clause Library from the Contract Generation drop-down
list, and clicking OK.
2 On the Clause List page, click the clause to which to attach a clause document.
3 Under Content Options, click Add.
4 Follow the steps in the wizard to attach the clause document. You see the document
title in the Document field on the Header page.
5 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add additional clause documents or iterations of the same
clause document.
6 Optionally, check the box in the Default column for one clause document. When
generating a contract, this clause document will be selected to use by default. You
can change this selection during contract generation.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a contract clause
Adding variables to a contract clause document
Field help for Contract Clause Header page

728 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Clause List page

Adding variables to a contract clause document

Clauses are Microsoft® Word documents containing the legal terms of a contract. They
can also contain variables that are automatically replaced with contract-specific
information when the contract is generated.
You add variables to a clause document in Microsoft Word. You must have the
appropriate rights to add variables to a clause.

To add variables to a clause:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Variable Library from
the Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also add variables by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of the
page, selecting Variable Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list, and
clicking OK.
You see the Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page. For details on
this page, see Field help for Contract Generation Variable Configuration
Header page.
2 Open the clause document in Microsoft Word.
3 Copy and paste the desired Token text from the Contract Generation Variables
Header page into the appropriate locations in the clause document.
4 Save the clause document in Microsoft Word.

Related Topics
Creating a contract clause

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 729

Contract Clause List page Contract Generation

Contract Clause toolbar functions

On the Contract Clause toolbar, you can:
` Revise a clause for versioning purposes
` Change the phase of the clause
` Search all components using a specific clause
` Globally replace or remove a clause

Related Topics
Creating a contract clause
Revising a contract clause for versioning
Adding a contract clause document to a clause
Changing a contract clause phase
Searching for contract components and documents that use a clause
Globally replacing a contract clause
Globally removing a contract clause

730 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Clause List page

Revising a contract clause for versioning

When you revise a contract clause, you create a new version of the clause and preserve
a previous copy for reference.
The current phase determines whether the clause can be revised.
You must have the appropriate rights to revise a clause.

Note: You must be in view mode to revise a clause.

To revise a clause:
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Clause List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also revise a clause by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of the
page, selecting Clause Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list, and
clicking OK.
2 On the Clause List page, click the clause to revise.
3 On the Contract Clause List toolbar, click Actions and select Create New Version.
You see the new version of the clause.
4 Edit the new version of the clause.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a contract clause
Adding a contract clause document to a clause
Changing a contract clause phase
Searching for contract components and documents that use a clause
Globally replacing a contract clause
Globally removing a contract clause

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 731

Contract Clause List page Contract Generation

Changing a contract clause phase

The contract clause phase determines the actions that can be performed on the clause.
Contract clause phases are:
` Draft: This is the initial phase of the clause.
` Review: A clause in this phase must be approved by a reviewer before advancing
to the next phase.
` Approved: A clause in this phase has been approved and can be used to generate
contract sections.
` Retired: A clause in this phase has been removed from the active list and can no
longer be used to generate contract sections.

To change a phase:

1 In the toolbar, click the Change Phase button . The button text indicates the
current phase.
2 In the Change Phase dialog box, select the new phase.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
4 In the Change Phase dialog box, click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a contract clause
Revising a contract clause for versioning
Adding a contract clause document to a clause
Searching for contract components and documents that use a clause
Globally replacing a contract clause
Globally removing a contract clause

732 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Clause List page

Searching for contract components and documents that use a

clause
From within a clause, you can search all templates, sections, and generated contract
documents to see where the clause is used. This is useful in determining which
components will be affected by any edits to the clause.

To search for all components and documents that use a clause:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Clause List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also search for a clause by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top
of the page, selecting Clause Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list,
and clicking OK.
2 On the Clause List page, click the clause to use in your search.
3 In the toolbar on the Header page, click Reports and select Search All Components
Using a Specific Clause.
You see a report listing all templates, sections, and documents containing the
clause.

Related Topics
Creating a contract clause
Editing a contract clause
Globally replacing a contract clause
Globally removing a contract clause

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 733

Contract Clause List page Contract Generation

Globally replacing a contract clause

You can replace a clause in one or more sections and templates that include the clause.
This allows you to globally replace an out-of-date clause with one that contains
up-to-date information, for example.
You must have the appropriate rights to globally replace a clause.

To globally replace a clause:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Clause List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also access this page by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of
the page, selecting Clause Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list,
and clicking OK.
2 On the Clause List page, click Actions in the toolbar and select Global Replace
Clause.
3 In the Select Clauses dialog box, under Select Clause to be Removed, click the
Lookup icon to select the clause to replace.

4 Under Select Clause to be Inserted, click the Lookup icon to select the clause to
insert as a replacement.
5 Click Next.
6 In the Confirm Sections/Templates to be Updated dialog box, de-select any section
and template combinations in which you do not want to replace the clause. By
default, all sections and templates are selected for clause replacement.
If the sections and templates containing the clause are editable, they will be
modified accordingly. If any section or template is not editable, a new version will
be created and the old version will be retired. The newly created section or
template will automatically be advanced to the correct phase.
7 Click Next.
8 In the Global Update Status dialog box, click Close. The selected clause is replaced
as indicated.

Related Topics
Creating a contract clause
Adding variables to a contract clause document
Adding a contract clause document to a clause
Adding variables to a contract clause document
Globally removing a contract clause

734 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Clause List page

Globally removing a contract clause

You can remove a clause from one or more sections and templates that include the
clause. This allows you to globally remove a clause that is no longer relevant, for
example.
You must have the appropriate rights to globally remove a clause.

To globally remove a clause:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Clause List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also access this page by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of
the page, selecting Clause Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list,
and clicking OK.
2 On the Clause List page, click Actions in the toolbar and select Global Remove
Clause.
3 In the Select Clauses dialog box, under Select Clause to be Removed, click the
Lookup icon to select the clause to remove.
4 Click Next.
5 In the Confirm Sections/Templates to be Updated dialog box, de-select any section
and template combinations from which you do not want to remove the clause. By
default, all sections and templates are selected for clause removal.
If the sections and templates containing the clause are editable, they will be
modified accordingly. If any section or template is not editable, a new version will
be created and the old version will be retired. The newly created section or
template will automatically be advanced to the correct phase.
6 Click Next.
7 In the Global Update Status dialog box, click Close. The selected clause is removed
as indicated.

Related Topics
Creating a contract clause
Adding variables to a contract clause document
Adding a contract clause document to a clause
Adding variables to a contract clause document
Globally replacing a contract clause

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 735

Contract Section List page Contract Generation

Contract Section List page

A section is a logical grouping of one or more contract clauses. Sections are organized
into contract document templates to create a contract document. For more information
on templates, see Creating a contract document template.
Sections are stored in the Section library.

To display the Section List page:

` Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Section List from the
Clause Library submenu.

On the Section List page, you can:

` Search for a section by Name, Description, Version, Phase, or Type
` Create and edit a section
` Globally replace or remove a section
` Export a section list to an Excel file, CSV file, or PDF file

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Creating a contract section
Globally replacing a contract section
Globally removing a contract section
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

736 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Section List page

Creating a contract section

A section is a logical grouping of one or more contract clauses. Sections are organized
into contract document templates to create a contract document. For more information
on templates, see Creating a contract document template.
You must have the appropriate rights to create a contract section.

To create a contract section:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Section List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also create a section by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of
the page, selecting Section Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list,
and clicking OK.
2 On the Section List page, click Create.
3 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic section information. For details, see
Field help for Contract Section Header page.
4 Click the Clauses tab to add clauses to the section. For details, see Field help for
Contract Section Clauses page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
6 Optionally, change the phase of the contract section. Default phases include:
■ Draft: The creation phase of the section.
■ Review: The phase in which collaborators can review the section.
■ Approved: The phase in which a section can be used to generate contract
documents.
■ Retired: The phase in which the section is removed from the active list and can
no longer be used to generate contract documents.
To include the section in templates that can be used to generate contracts, you
must advance the phase to Approved. For details, see Changing a sourcing
document phase.
Phases are configurable. For details, see the Contract Generation Phases Header
page.

To edit a section after it is added, click the section on the Section List page, and click
the Edit toolbar button on the Section Header page.

Related Topics
Adding a clause to a contract section
Globally replacing a contract section
Globally removing a contract section

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 737

Contract Section List page Contract Generation

Globally replacing a contract section

You can replace a section in one or more templates that include the section. This allows
you to globally replace an out-of-date section with one that contains up-to-date
information, for example.
You must have the appropriate rights to globally replace a section.

To globally replace a section:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Section List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also access this page by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of
the page, selecting Section Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list,
and clicking OK.
2 On the Section List page, click Actions in the toolbar and select Global Replace
Section.
3 In the Select Sections dialog box, under Select Section to be Removed, click the
Lookup icon to select the section to replace.

4 Under Select Section to be Inserted, click the Lookup icon to select the section
to insert as a replacement.
5 Click Next.
6 In the Confirm Templates to be Updated dialog box, de-select any template in
which you do not want to replace the section. By default, all templates are selected
for section replacement.
If a template containing the section is editable, it will be modified accordingly. If
any listed template is not editable, a new version will be created and the old version
will be retired. The newly created template will automatically be advanced to the
correct phase.
7 Click Next.
8 In the Global Update Status dialog box, click Close. The selected section is replaced
as indicated.

Related Topics
Creating a contract section
Adding a clause to a contract section
Globally removing a contract section

738 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Section List page

Globally removing a contract section

You can remove a section from one or more templates that include the section. This
allows you to globally replace an out-of-date section with one that contains up-to-date
information, for example.
You must have the appropriate rights to globally remove a section.

To globally remove a section:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Section List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also access this page by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of
the page, selecting Section Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list,
and clicking OK.
2 On the Section List page, click Actions in the toolbar and select Global Remove
Section.
3 In the Select Sections dialog box, under Select Section to be Removed, click the
Lookup icon to select the section to remove.
4 Click Next.
5 In the Confirm Templates to be Updated dialog box, de-select any template from
which you do not want to remove the section. By default, all templates are selected
for section removal.
If a template containing the section is editable, it will be modified accordingly. If
any listed template is not editable, a new version will be created and the old version
will be retired. The newly created template will automatically be advanced to the
correct phase.
6 Click Next.
7 In the Global Update Status dialog box, click Close. The selected section is
removed as indicated.

Related Topics
Creating a contract section
Adding a clause to a contract section
Globally replacing a contract section

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 739

Contract Section List page Contract Generation

Contract Section Header page

A section is a logical grouping of one or more contract clauses. Sections are organized
into contract document templates to create a contract document. For more information
on templates, see Creating a contract document template.
On the Header page, you can enter basic section information, including a phase for the
section.

Field help for Contract Section Header page

Display Name: Type a name for the section. This is a required field.
Type: Select a type for the section. You can choose from among the following default
options:
` None
` Introduction
` Warranty
` Notification
` Payment
` Quality
` Disputes
` Transaction Terms
` General

The options in this list can be configured by a system administrator.

Description: Type a description of the section. The description should be targeted to

users who will be editing or using the section. This field value is limited to 256
characters.
Version: Indicates the version number of the section. You can create new versions by
clicking the Actions button. This field is read only.
Owner: By default, the document creator is selected as the section owner. Click the

Lookup icon to select another owner. This field is informational only and does not
affect the behavior of or access to the section.

Master Agreement Term: Click the Lookup icon to select a master agreement
term to associate with this section. This field is informational only and does not affect
the behavior of or access to the section.

740 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Section List page

Comments: Type comments describing the intent of the legal text in the section
clauses and indicating the intended usage of the section. You can enter a field value of
up to 2000 characters.

Related Topics
Creating a contract section

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 741

Contract Section List page Contract Generation

Contract Section Clauses page

On the Clauses page, you can:
` Add and remove section clauses
` Reorder clauses

Field help for Contract Section Clauses page

Click Add Clause to select and add a clause to the section. This page displays the
following information about the clause:
` Name
` Type
` Version
` Phase
` Description
` Master Agreement Term
` Owner

Click Reorder to reorder the clauses in this section. For more information, see
Reordering items in a list.

Related Topics
Creating a contract section
Adding a clause to a contract section
Reordering items in a list

742 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Section List page

Adding a clause to a contract section

You must have the appropriate rights to add a clause.

To add a clause:
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Section List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also add a clause to a section by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the
top of the page, selecting Section Library from the Contract Generation drop-down
list, and clicking OK.
2 On the Section List page, click the section to which to add a clause.
3 Click the Clauses tab.
4 Click Add Clause.
5 In the dialog box, select one or more clauses to add to the section and click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a contract section
Reordering items in a list
Field help for Contract Section Clauses page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 743

Contract Section List page Contract Generation

Contract Section toolbar functions

On the Contract Section toolbar, you can:
` Revise a section for versioning purposes
` Change the phase of a section
` Search all contract document templates using a specific section

Related Topics
Creating a contract section
Revising a contract section for versioning
Changing a contract section phase
Searching for all contract components and documents that use a section

744 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Section List page

Revising a contract section for versioning

When you revise a contract section, you create a new version of the section and
preserve a previous copy for reference.
The current phase determines whether the section can be revised. You must have the
appropriate rights to revise a section.

Note: You must be in view mode to revise a section.

To revise a section:
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Section List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also revise a section by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of
the page, selecting Section Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list,
and clicking OK.
2 On the Section List page, click the section to revise.
3 On the Contract Section List toolbar, click Actions and select Create New Version.
You see the new version of the section.
4 Edit the new version of the section.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a contract section
Changing a contract section phase
Searching for all contract components and documents that use a section

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 745

Contract Section List page Contract Generation

Changing a contract section phase

The contract section phase determines the actions that can be performed on the
section. Contract section phases are:
` Draft: This is the initial phase of the section.
` Review: A section in this phase must be approved by a reviewer before advancing
to the next phase.
` Approved: A section in this phase has been approved and can be used to generate
contract .
` Retired: A section in this phase has been removed from the active list and can no
longer be used to generate contract document templates.

To change a phase:

1 In the toolbar, click the Change Phase button . The button text indicates the
current phase.
2 In the Change Phase dialog box, select the new phase.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
4 In the Change Phase dialog box, click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a contract section
Revising a contract section for versioning
Searching for all contract components and documents that use a section

746 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Section List page

Searching for all contract components and documents that use a

section
From within a section, you can search all templates and generated contract documents
to see where the section is used. This is useful in determining which components will be
affected by any edits to the section.

To search for all components and documents that use a section:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Section List from the
Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also search for a section by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top
of the page, selecting Section Library from the Contract Generation drop-down
list, and clicking OK.
2 On the Section List page, click the section to use in your search.
3 In the toolbar on the Header page, click Reports and select Search All Contract
Document Templates Using a Specific Section.
You see a report listing all templates and documents containing the section.

Related Topics
Creating a contract section
Revising a contract section for versioning
Changing a contract section phase

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 747

Contract Document Template List page Contract Generation

Contract Document Template List page

Contract document templates contain a list of logically ordered sections and are used to
generate contract documents. Each template can be used to generate many unique
contracts with individual suppliers. You can optionally organize contract document
templates by internal category.

To display the Contract Document Template List page:

` Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Contract Document
Template List from the Clause Library submenu.

On the Contract Document Template List page, you can:

` Search for a template by Name, Description, Version, Phase, or Internal Category
` Create and edit a template
` Export a template list to a CSV file or to a PDF file

Related Topics
Searching for a sourcing document
Creating a contract document template
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

748 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Document Template List page

Creating a contract document template

Contract document templates contain a list of logically ordered sections and are used to
generate contract documents. Each template can be used to generate many unique
contracts with individual suppliers. You can optionally organize contract document
templates by internal category.

You must have the appropriate rights to create a contract document template.

To create a template:
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Contract Document
Template List from the Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also create a template by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of
the page, selecting Contract Document Template Library from the Contract
Generation drop-down list, and clicking OK.
2 On the Contract Document Template List page, click Create.
3 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic template information, optionally add
a Microsoft® Word template, and add collaborators. For details, see Field help for
Contract Document Template Header page.
4 Click the Sections tab to add sections. For details, see Field help for Contract
Document Template Sections page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
6 Optionally, change the phase of the contract document template. Default phases
include:
■ Draft: The creation phase of the template.
■ Review: The phase in which collaborators can review the template.
■ Approved: The phase in which a template can be used to generate contract
documents.
■ Retired: The phase in which the template is removed from the active list and
can no longer be used to generate contract documents.
To generate contract documents from the template, you must advance the phase to
Approved. For details, see Changing a sourcing document phase.
Phases are configurable. For details, see the Contract Generation Phases Header
page.

To edit a template after it is added, click the template on the Contract Document
Template List page, and then click the Edit toolbar button on the Contract Document
Template Header page.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 749

Contract Document Template List page Contract Generation

Related Topics
Adding a section to a contract document template

750 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Document Template List page

Contract Document Template Header page

Contract document templates contain a list of logically ordered sections and are used to
generate contract documents. Each template can be used to generate many unique
contracts with individual suppliers. You can optionally organize contract document
templates by internal category.

On the Header page, you can:

` Enter basic template information, including a phase for the template and a
Microsoft® Word template
` Add and remove collaborators

Field help for Contract Document Template Header page

Display Name: Type a name for the template. This is a required field.
Description: Type a description for the template. The description should be targeted
to users who will be editing or using the template. This field value is limited to 256
characters.
Company: Indicates the company with which the template owner is associated.

Organizational Unit: Click the Lookup icon to select an organizational unit for the
template.

Internal Category: Click the Lookup icon to select an internal category for the
template.
Version: Indicates the version number of the template. You can create new versions
by clicking the Actions button.
Comments: Type any comments about the template. Type comments describing the
intent of the legal text in the clauses and sections and indicating the intended usage of
the template. You can enter a field value of up to 2000 characters.

Microsoft Word Template: Click the Lookup icon to select a Microsoft Word
template to use to format contracts generated using this template.

Collaborators
Click Add Users, Add Groups, or Add Company to add collaborators.

Related Topics
Creating a contract document template
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 751

Contract Document Template List page Contract Generation

Contract Document Template Sections page

Contract document templates contain a list of logically ordered sections and are used to
generate contract documents. Each template can be used to generate many unique
contracts with individual suppliers. You can optionally organize contract document
templates by internal category.

On the Sections page, you can:

` Add sections to a template
` Reorder sections

Field help for Contract Document Template Sections page

Click Add Section to select and add a section to the template. This page displays the
following information about the section:
` Name
` Type
` Version
` Phase
` Description
` Master Agreement Term
` Owner

Click Reorder to reorder the sections in this template. For more information, see
Reordering items in a list.

Related Topics
Creating a contract document template
Adding a section to a contract document template
Reordering items in a list

752 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Document Template List page

Adding a section to a contract document template

You must have the appropriate rights to add a section.

To add a section:
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Contract Document
Template List from the Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also add a section to a template by clicking Setup in the toolbar at
the top of the page, selecting Contract Document Template Library from the
Contract Generation drop-down list, and clicking OK.
2 On the Contract Document Template List page, click the template to which to add a
section.
3 Click the Sections tab.
4 Click Add Section.
5 In the dialog box, select one or more sections to add to the template and click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a contract document template
Field help for Contract Document Template Sections page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 753

Contract Document Template List page Contract Generation

Contract Document Template toolbar functions

On the Contract Document Template toolbar, you can:
` Revise a template for versioning purposes
` Generate a contract from a template
` Add and view attachments
` View and conduct discussions or chat
` Change the phase of the template

Related Topics
Creating a contract document template
Revising a contract document template for versioning
Generating a contract document from a template
Viewing an attachment
Viewing discussion messages and replies
Changing a contract document template phase

754 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Document Template List page

Revising a contract document template for versioning

When you revise a contract document template, you create a new version of the
template and preserve a previous copy for reference.
The current phase of the template determines whether the template can be revised.
You must have the appropriate rights to revise a template.

Note: You must be in view mode to revise a template.

To revise a template:
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Contract Document
Template List from the Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also revise a template by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of
the page, selecting Contract Document Template Library from the Contract
Generation drop-down list, and clicking OK.
2 On the Contract Document Template List page, click the template to revise.
3 On the Contract Document Template List toolbar, click Actions and select Create
New Version. You see the new version of the template.
4 Edit the new version of the template.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a contract document template
Generating a contract document from a template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 755

Contract Document Template List page Contract Generation

Generating a contract document from a template

Most often, a contract document is generated from an RFx, auction, or master
agreement. You can also generate a contract document without variable substitution
directly from a template. You might want to do this, for example, to verify that the
template is set up properly to format contract documents correctly.
You must have the appropriate rights to generate a contract document from a
template.

To generate a contract document:

1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Contract Document
Template List from the Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also generate a contract from a template by clicking Setup in the
toolbar at the top of the page, selecting Contract Document Template Library from
the Contract Generation drop-down list, and clicking OK.
2 On the Contract Document Template List page, click the template to use to
generate a contract.
3 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 On the Contract Document Template toolbar, click Actions and select Generate
Contract from the menu.
5 On the Choose Clause Content Options dialog box, select the clause document you
want to use for the clause contents and click Next.
6 In the Variable Substitution dialog box, enter any values that you want to use to
override the default values in the template, and click Next.
7 Follow the remaining prompts to generate the contract.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: After you generate a contract from a template, it is stored as an attachment to

the template. To see the generated contract, click Attachments in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a contract document template
Revising a contract document template for versioning
Header functions

756 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Document Template List page

Changing a contract document template phase

The contract document template phase determines the actions that can be performed
on the template. Contract document template phases are:
` Draft: This is the initial phase of the contract document template.
` Review: A contract in this phase must be approved by a reviewer before advancing
to the next phase.
Note: A contract document template must contain at least one section and one
clause before it can be advanced to the Review phase.
` Approved: A contract document template in this phase has been approved and can
be used to generate contracts.
` Retired: A contract document template in this phase has been removed from the
active list and can no longer be used to generate contracts.

To change a phase:
1 In the contract document template document toolbar, click the Change Phase

button . The button text indicates the current document phase.

2 In the Change Phase dialog box, select the new phase.
3 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
4 In the Change Phase dialog box, click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Contract Document Template toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 757

Contract Generation Phases Header page Contract Generation

Contract Generation Phases Header page

Contract generation phases determine the tasks that can be performed on contract
items. Frictionless® SRM provides four default phases that can be used in configuring
contract clauses, sections, and templates. You can edit the description and rules
associated with any of these default phases. If your maintenance and approval process
is more complex and requires additional steps, you can add custom phases to the
library.

To display the Contract Generation Phases Header page, do one of the following:
` Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Library Item Phase
Configuration from the Clause Library submenu.
` Click Setup at the top of the page. Under Document Setup, select Library Item
Phase Configuration from the Contract Generation drop-down list.

On the Header page, you can:

` Add and edit phases
` Reorder phases

Field help for Contract Generation Phases Header page

Click Add to add a phase or click an Edit icon to edit an existing phase.

Display Name: Click the Lookup icon to select a name for the phase from the list
of localized resources. This is a required field. If the phase name is not in the list, your
system administrator can add a new localized resource for the desired name.

Description: Click the Lookup icon to select a description from the list of localized
resources. If the phase description is not in the list, your system administrator can add
a new localized resource for the desired description.
Phase Type: This is a required field. You can select from among the following options:
` Draft
` Review
` Approved
` Retired
Allow return to a previous phase: Check this box to enable a user to return to a
previous phase from this phase.
Allow editing: Check this box to allow a document in this phase to be edited.

758 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Generation Phases Header page

Allow revisions: Check this box to allow a document in this phase to be revised by
creating a new version.

Click Reorder to reorder phases. For more information, see Reordering items in a
list.

Related Topics
Adding a contract generation phase
Editing a contract generation phase
Field help for Contract Generation Phases Header page
Reordering items in a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 759

Contract Generation Phases Header page Contract Generation

Adding a contract generation phase

Contract generation phases determine the tasks that can be performed on contract
items. Frictionless® SRM provides four default phases that can be used in configuring
contract clauses, sections, and templates. You can edit the description and rules
associated with any of these default phases. If your maintenance and approval process
is more complex and requires additional steps, you can add custom phases to the
library.

You must have the appropriate rights to add a contract generation phase.

To add a phase:
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Library Item Phase
Configuration from the Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also add a phase by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of the
page, selecting Library Item Phase Configuration from the Contract Generation
drop-down list, and clicking OK.
2 On the Contract Generation Phases Header page, click the Edit button in the
toolbar.
3 Click Add.
4 Fill in the fields with phase information, including the activities that can be
performed during the phase. For details, see Field help for Contract Generation
Phases Header page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Editing a contract generation phase
Field help for Contract Generation Phases Header page

760 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Generation Phases Header page

Editing a contract generation phase

Contract generation phases determine the tasks that can be performed on contract
items. Frictionless® SRM provides four default phases that can be used in configuring
contract clauses, sections, and templates. You can edit the description and rules
associated with any of these default phases. If your maintenance and approval process
is more complex and requires additional steps, you can add custom phases to the
library.

You must have the appropriate rights to edit a contract generation phase.

To edit a phase:
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Library Item Phase
Configuration from the Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also edit a phase by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of the
page, selecting Library Item Phase Configuration from the Contract Generation
drop-down list, and clicking OK.
2 On the Contract Generation Phases page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.

3 Click the Edit icon for the phase to edit.

4 Edit phase information. For details, see Field help for Contract Generation
Phases Header page
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

6 Click the Close icon to close the Contract Generation Phases Header page.
7 On the Contract Generation Phases page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also edit a phase by clicking it in the Contract Document Template List
page.

Related Topics
Adding a contract generation phase
Field help for Contract Generation Phases Header page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 761

Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page Contract Generation

Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page

Contract generation variables are variables in a clause that are automatically replaced
with contract-specific information (such as the agreement effective date, for example)
when the contract is generated. A number of default variables are defined as standard.
Additional standard fields, as well as extension fields, can be added by a system
administrator.
Variables must be defined in the Variable Library before they can be added to a clause.
When you define a variable, you associate a token (the placeholder string) with a
particular attribute. You can then include these tokens in your clause library
components. During contract generation, the tokens are replaced by actual data from a
specified sourcing document.

To display the Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page, do one of the
following:
` Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Variable Library from
the Clause Library submenu.
` Click Setup at the top of the page. Under Document Setup, select Variable Library
from the Contract Generation drop-down list.

On the Header page, you can:

` Add and edit variables
` Reorder variables

Field help for Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page

The Header page displays the variables that are currently available. Click Add to add a

variable or click an Edit icon to edit an existing variable.

The table of variables includes the following information about each variable:

Display Name: Indicates the name of the variable definition.

Source Object: Indicates the type of sourcing document in which the variable can be
used.
Token: Indicates the token used for this variable.
Type: Indicates the type of variable: Attribute, Collection, or RFx Question.

Reorder: Click to reorder variables. For more information, see Reordering items in a
list.

762 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page

Related Topics
Adding a contract generation variable
Field help for Contract Generation Variable Definition dialog box
Creating an extension definition
Reordering items in a list

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 763

Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page Contract Generation

Adding a contract generation variable

Contract generation variables are variables in a clause that are automatically replaced
with contract-specific information (such as the agreement effective date, for example)
when the contract is generated. A number of default variables are defined as standard.
Additional standard fields, as well as extension fields, can be added by a system
administrator.
Variables must be defined in the Variable Library before they can be added to a clause.
When you define a variable, you associate a token (the placeholder string) with a
particular attribute. You can then include these tokens in your clause library
components. During contract generation, the tokens are replaced by actual data from a
specified sourcing document.
You must have the appropriate rights to add a variable.

To add a variable:
1 Click Contract Management in the navigation bar and select Variable Library from
the Clause Library submenu.
Note: You can also add a variable by clicking Setup in the toolbar at the top of the
page, selecting Variable Library from the Contract Generation drop-down list, and
clicking OK.
2 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
3 Click Add.
4 In the Variable Definition dialog box, fill in the fields with variable information. For
details, see Field help for Contract Generation Variable Definition dialog
box.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

To edit a variable after it is added, click its Edit icon on the Header page.

Related Topics
Creating an extension definition
Field help for Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page
Field help for Contract Generation Variable Definition dialog box

764 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page

Field help for Contract Generation Variable Definition dialog box

Contract generation variables are variables in a clause that are automatically replaced
with contract-specific information (such as the agreement effective date, for example)
when the contract is generated. A number of default variables are defined as standard.
Additional standard fields, as well as extension fields, can be added by a system
administrator.
Variables must be defined in the Variable Library before they can be added to a clause.
When you define a variable, you associate a token (the placeholder string) with a
particular attribute. You can then include these tokens in your clause library
components. During contract generation, the tokens are replaced by actual data from a
specified sourcing document.

To see this dialog box, click Add or click the Edit icon for a variable on the
Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page.

Display Name: Type a name for the variable definition. This is a required field.
Token: Type a token to use for this variable. This is a required field.
You use tokens to add variables to the Microsoft Word documents that contain clause
text. The token value used to identify each variable must be unique.
Token values must begin with <% and end with %> and must contain only letters
(upper case or lower case) and numbers, with a period used as a separator.
For example:
<%AZaz.09%>
or
<%Agreement.ID%>

Source Object: Select an object from the drop-down list. This determines the type of
sourcing document in which the variable can be used. If you are mapping an extension
attribute, select the module in which the attribute was created.
This is a required field. You can choose from among the following options:
` Common: Select this object to enable the variable to be used in all listed sourcing
documents (Auctions, Master Agreements, and RFxs).
` Auction
` Master Agreement
` Agreement
` Common Agreement: Select this object to use the common data fields of the
“master agreement” and “sub-agreement” objects. It allows these shared data
fields to be defined as “common” so that they will be resolved correctly when the
contract generation is run from a Master Agreement or a Sub-Agreement. You can

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 765

Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page Contract Generation

use this source object to avoid duplicating the variable setup for both master
agreement and sub-agreement sources.
` RFx
` Vendor
` Current User: Select this object to enable the variable to use the user account of
the logged-in user to resolve tokens.
` Calendar: Select this object to allow date/time variables to be defined to return
the current date/time. It is useful for including the current time in the output
document.

Variable Type: Choose the type of variable to add. This type determines the values
displayed in the Attribute Name field below. You can choose from among the following
options:
` Attribute: Choose this option to see a list of single attributes in the Attribute Name
drop-down list.
` Collection: Choose this option to see a list of collection attributes in the Attribute
Name drop-down list. Choosing this option will create a Sub-Variables section in
the dialog box, which allows you to specify the sub-variables in the collection.
` RFx Question: Choose this option to see a list of RFx questions in the Attribute
Name drop-down list. This option only appears if you selected RFx in the Source
Object field.

Attribute Name: Select an attribute or collection ID from the drop-down list. The set
of options in this list is determined by the selections you make in the Source Object
and Variable Type fields. Each option in the list includes a Display Name (if available)
and an attribute ID (in parentheses). This list includes any extensions that are defined.

Template: This field is visible only when the Advanced Object Reference box is
checked or when you choose Collection in the Variable Type field. Click the Set
Document button to attach a Microsoft® Word .doc file. This file specifies the layout
for the variables defined in the Sub-Variables collection. During contract generation,
this template file is used to lay out the data for these sub-variables.

Set Document: Use this button to attach a Microsoft Word .doc file when a collection
of variables is specified.

Format: This field is visible only when you choose Collection in the Variable Type
field. It provides two options for formatting collections during contract generation:
Table and Paragraph. The selected value determines how contract generation will
expand the variables in the Microsoft Word document specified in the Template field.
If Table is selected, the document should have a single table defined. In general, the
table should contain exactly two rows. The first row should be marked as the Header

766 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page

row and contain the column headers. The second row should contain the tokens from
the variable collection. For example:

Name Description URL

<%Term.Name%> <%Term.Description%> <%Term.Url%>

Advanced Object Reference: If the selected Attribute Name maps to an Object

Reference, this checkbox will be visible. Check this box to allow variables to be defined
that map to attributes on the referenced object. If this box is checked, the Template
field and the Sub-Variables section will be displayed.
Remove for blank values: Check this box to allow contract generation to remove the
token from the generated contract when the system has no corresponding data to
substitute. For example, this situation may occur when a variable is mapped to a
non-required field.
Select individual collection items: Check this box to allow users to deselect
individual collection members during contract generation. By default, all collection
members are included in the generated contract.

Sub-Variables
This section is displayed if you select Collection as the Variable Type or check the
Advanced Object Reference box. This section allows you to define the sub-variables
that make up the collection or that map to attributes on the referenced object.
Click Add to add a sub-variable. The same fields are used for sub-variables as for
top-level variables, except that the Source Object field is not displayed. The source is
either the object reference or the collection member.

Related Topics
Creating an extension definition
Adding a contract generation variable
Field help for Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 767

Quick Reference: Creating a contract document Contract Generation

Quick Reference: Creating a contract document

A contract is a legal agreement between a purchasing enterprise and a supplier, which
dictates buying, payment and delivery terms over time. Frictionless® SRM enables you
to generate a contract from an RFx, auction, or master agreement.
Each contract is based on a contract document template, which consists of clauses and
sections of standard legal terms. Clauses can contain variables that are automatically
replaced with terms and other detailed information taken directly from a sourcing event
such as an RFx or auction or from a specific Frictionless agreement. These features
enable streamlined contract generation that saves time and eliminates repetitive tasks.
The contract document is a Microsoft® Word file that is attached to the sourcing event
from which it is created. After it is generated, a contract can be edited in Microsoft
Word and used for negotiation with the supplier.

Note: For information about master agreements, which enable you to analyze, audit,
and measure specific buying activity against a contract’s goals, see Master
Agreements.

To create a contract:
1 Create clause content in Microsoft Word. Each clause contains approximately one
paragraph of legal text for a contract document, and can contain variables to be
replaced by actual data from a sourcing document.
For details, see Adding variables to a contract clause document.
2 Create one or more clauses in Frictionless SRM.
For details, see Creating a contract clause.
3 Ensure that each clause is reviewed and/or approved, and change its phase
accordingly.
For details about changing a phase, see Changing a sourcing document phase.
4 Create one or more sections in Frictionless SRM.
For details, see Creating a contract section.
5 Ensure that each section is reviewed and/or approved, and change its phase
accordingly.
For details about changing a phase, see Changing a sourcing document phase.
6 Create a contract document template. For details, see Creating a contract
document template.
7 Ensure that the template is reviewed and/or approved, and change its phase
accordingly.
For details about changing a phase, see Changing a sourcing document phase.

768 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Contract Generation Quick Reference: Creating a contract document

8 Generate the contract from an auction, RFx, or master agreement, selecting the
contract document template you created.
When you generate a contract from an auction or RFx (or from the contract
document template itself), you create an attachment that serves as a preview of
the actual contract. The attachment is not associated with a master agreement. For
details, see Generating a contract from an auction or RFx.
When you generate a contract from a master agreement, the contract is displayed
on the Contract Documents tab of the master agreement and version control is
enabled for the contract. For details, see Generating a contract from a master
agreement.
9 Save the contract document.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 769

Quick Reference: Creating a contract document Contract Generation

770 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendor Management
The Vendor Management module provides a complete view of supplier activity and
performance within your organization, including a supplier portal, supplier scorecards,
and supplier self-registration.
Click the Vendor Management button in the navigation bar to see the options for this
module.

Vendors
The Vendors submenu contains the following options.

Option Description

Create Vendor Click to create a new supplier. See Creating a supplier record.
All Vendors Click to see the Vendors List page displaying a list of all supplier
records.
Search Vendor by Name Click to see the Vendors List page and search for a supplier by
name.
Search Vendor Contacts by Click to see the Vendors List page and search for a supplier
Name contact by name.
Search Vendors by Category Click to see the Vendors List page and search for a supplier by
category.

Registration
The Registration submenu contains the following options.

Option Description

Vendor Modification List Click to see the Vendors Modification List page displaying a list
of all pending supplier modifications.
Vendor Registration List Click to see the Vendors Registration List page displaying a list
of all pending supplier registrations.
Vendor Management Click to see the Vendor Management Configuration page in
Configuration Setup.

Confidential 771
Performance
The Performance submenu contains the following options.

Option Description

My Scorecards with Click to see a list of your supplier scorecards with unsatisfactory
Unsatisfactory Ratings ratings.
Incomplete Scorecards Click to see a list of incomplete supplier scorecards.
Metrics Click to see the Metrics page in Setup.
Metric Entry Click to see the Metric Entry page in Setup.
Vendor Scorecard Definition Click to see the Vendor Scorecard Definition page in Setup.
Import Data Click to see the Import Data page in Setup.

All Analysis
Click All Analysis to see the Analysis page.

This section documents the options for Vendor Management.

772 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors

Frictionless® SRM allows sourcing enterprises to keep an active list of suppliers for all
sourcing modules. Each supplier record contains address, phone, tax, billing, and
contact information. Each contact represents a person within a supplier’s organization,
with one person serving as the primary contact.
In addition to serving as a repository for suppliers’ information, the SRM software can
maintain scorecards for each supplier. A scorecard keeps track of performance metrics.
It can be associated with various categories, depending on the supplier’s role within
your enterprise. Scorecard information can be entered manually or can be imported
from survey results and external feedback. All these features allow you to create and
maintain the most relevant information for each supplier.
Click the Vendor Management button in the navigation bar to see the options for the
Vendors submenu.

Option Description

Create Vendor Click to create a new supplier. See Creating a supplier record.
All Vendors Click to see the Vendors List page displaying a list of all supplier
records.
Search Vendor by Name Click to see the Vendors List page and search for a supplier by
name.
Search Vendor Contacts by Click to see the Vendors List page and search for a supplier
Name contact by name.
Search Vendors by Category Click to see the Vendors List page and search for a supplier by
category.

Confidential 773
Vendors List page Vendors

Vendors List page

The Vendors List page shows a list of suppliers and associated information.

To display the Vendors List page:

` Click Vendor Management in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the Vendors submenu:
■ All Vendors
■ Search Vendor by Name
■ Search Vendor Contacts by Name
■ Search Vendors by Category

On the Vendors List page, you can:

` View supplier records in the following ways.

Option Description

All Vendors View a list of all suppliers.

Search Vendor by Name Find specific suppliers by name or description.
Search Vendor Contacts by Find specific suppliers by first name, last name, user name, or
Name email.
Search Vendors by Category Find specific suppliers who supply a certain Internal Category
code.
All Vendors on Purchasing Hold View a list of suppliers who are currently on Purchasing Hold.
All Preliminary Vendors View a list of suppliers who are flagged as Preliminary.
Vendors by Buyer Contact View a list of all buyer contacts and the number of suppliers under
their management. Click on the supplier number link to see the
list of suppliers for that buyer.
Export Selected Vendors View a list of suppliers created after a specific date. Use this list to
periodically synchronize supplier masters in an external system.
All Inactive Vendors View a list of suppliers who are currently flagged as inactive.
Search Diversity Vendor View a list of supplier contact names at companies classified as
Contacts diversity suppliers, such as a company that has a business
classification such as minority-owned, small business, etc. Click
the supplier contact name to view the supplier contact record.

` Export a list of selected suppliers.

774 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors List page

` Create and edit a supplier record.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Editing a supplier record
Exporting supplier records
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 775

Vendors List page Vendors

Searching for a supplier by name, supplier contact, or category

1 Click Vendor Management in the navigation bar and select one of the following
from the Vendors submenu:
■ Search Vendor by Name
■ Search Vendor Contacts by Name
■ Search Vendors by Category
Note: You can also search for a supplier from the Vendors List page.
2 Type a search string in the box for Search vendors with names or descriptions
containing, and press Show. You see a list of suppliers matching the string you
typed.
3 In the In box, select a search criterion from the drop-down list.
4 In the Find box, type a search string and click Go. The row for the first supplier
matching your search string is highlighted.
5 Click Go again to find another match.

Related Topics
Searching for a supplier from a list
Creating a supplier record

776 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors List page

Searching for a supplier from a list

1 On the Vendors List page, select one of the following options from the drop-down
list:
■ All Vendors
■ All Vendors on Purchasing Hold
■ All Preliminary Vendors
■ All Vendors by Buyer Contact
■ All Inactive Vendors
You see the selected list of suppliers.
2 In the In box, select a search criterion from the drop-down list.
3 In the Find box, type a search string and click Go. The row for the first supplier
matching your search string is highlighted.
4 Click Go again to find another match.

Related Topics
Vendors List page
Searching for a supplier by name, supplier contact, or category
Creating a supplier record

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 777

Vendors List page Vendors

Exporting supplier records

You can export all supplier records that were created after a certain date. This allows
you to export only the records that were created since the last export.

To export supplier records:

1 On the Vendors List page, select Export Selected Vendors from the drop-down list.

2 Click the Calendar icon to select a date limiting your list to supplier records
created after a specific date.
3 In the In box, select a search criterion from the drop-down list.
4 In the Find box, type a search string and click Go. The row for the first supplier
matching your search string is highlighted.
5 Click Go again to find another match.
6 Do one of the following:
a Click the Export CSV icon and follow the prompts to export the list to a CSV
file.

b Click the Export PDF icon and follow the prompts to export the list to a
PDF file.

Related Topics
Vendors List page
Searching for a supplier from a list
Creating a supplier record

778 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors List page

Creating a supplier record

A supplier record contains information about a supplier, such as address, phone, tax,
billing, and contact.

To create a supplier record:

1 Click Vendor Management in the navigation bar and select Create Vendor from
the Vendors submenu.
Note: You can also create a supplier record by clicking the Create button on the
Vendors List page.
2 On the Header page, fill in the fields under Basic Information.
3 Click the Addresses tab to enter information in the fields under Order From Address
and Remit To Address.
4 Click the Details tab to enter information in the fields under Tax Information,
Information about Payment, and Attributes.
5 Click the Categories tab to specify internal and external categories.
6 Click the Contacts tab to add a contact to the supplier record.
7 Click the Scorecards tab to add one or more scorecards for a specific supplier.
8 Click the Reminders tab to add internal or external reminders about renewing
certifications and planning upcoming conferences.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Editing a supplier record
Adding a supplier address
Adding supplier details
Adding an internal and external category to a supplier record
Adding a supplier contact
Adding supplier relationship information
Adding a supplier scorecard
Adding an SRM activity to a supplier record

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 779

Vendors List page Vendors

Editing a supplier record

A supplier record contains information about a supplier, such as address, phone, tax,
billing, and contact.

To edit a supplier record:

1 Click Vendor Management in the navigation bar and select All Vendors from the
Vendors submenu.
2 On the Vendors List page, click the name of the supplier to edit.
3 Click Edit Document.
4 On the Header page, edit any fields under Basic Information and Vendor Audit
Information.
5 Click the Addresses tab to edit information in the fields under Order From Address
and Remit To Address.
6 Click the Details tab to edit information in the fields under Tax Information,
Information about Payment, and Attributes.
7 Click the Categories tab to add new internal and external categories or to edit
existing ones.
8 Click the Contacts tab to add a new contact or to edit information for an existing
one.
9 Click the Scorecard tab to add a new scorecard or edit an existing one.
10 Click the Reminders tab to edit internal or external reminders about renewing
certifications and planning upcoming conferences.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Editing an internal and external category for a supplier record
Editing a supplier contact
Editing supplier relationship information
Editing a supplier scorecard

780 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Header page

Vendors Header page

On the Vendors Header page, you add and edit basic and audit information about a
supplier.

Field help for the Vendors Header page

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that the supplier is inactive and remove the
supplier from the Active list. If this box is not checked, the supplier is considered
Active, regardless of the supplier’s assigned status in the categories described below.

Purchasing Hold: A check in this box prevents the supplier from participating in
sourcing events. A supplier with this status will appear on the list of suppliers to select
for a sourcing event. However, if the supplier is selected, a message will appear
indicating that the supplier cannot be invited due to Purchasing Hold status.
Additionally, if a contract involving this supplier is edited, an error message will be
displayed to alert you that the supplier is on Purchasing Hold.
On the Vendor List page, you can conduct a search for all suppliers with a Purchasing
Hold status.

Preliminary: This box is checked automatically by the system to indicate that the
supplier was created on the fly, for example, during creation of an RFx. If this box is
checked, the supplier will only be able to precipitate in the event for which the supplier
record was created. The supplier will not appear in the active supplier list for other
events.
Remove the checkmark to add the supplier to the list of active suppliers for all sourcing
events.
Note: To enable login for a supplier who was created on the fly, you must go to the
Contacts tab, click the appropriate contact name, click the Account Management tab,
and check the Enable User to Login box. This box will not be checked by default.
On the Vendor List page, you can conduct a search for all suppliers with a Preliminary
status.

Approved Vendor: A check in this box indicates that the supplier is approved to
participate in sourcing events. A supplier with this status will appear in the list of
suppliers to select for a sourcing event.

Preferred Vendor: Check this box to identify a supplier you prefer or work with
frequently. A supplier with this status will appear in the list of suppliers to select for a
sourcing event.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 781

Vendors Header page Vendors

A supplier will receive the appropriate login information regardless of the supplier’s
assigned status. A search conducted for All Vendors will retrieve suppliers in all of the
above status categories.

Related Topics
Editing a supplier record

782 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Addresses page

Vendors Addresses page

On the Addresses page, you can add and edit the fields under Order From Address and
Remit To Address for a supplier’s address.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Adding a supplier address

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 783

Vendors Addresses page Vendors

Adding a supplier address

1 On the Addresses page for a specific supplier, fill in the fields under Order From
Address and the Remit To Address.
2 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can edit a supplier address after adding it.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record

784 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Details page

Vendors Details page

On the Details page, you can add and edit fields under Tax Information, Payments, and
Attributes.

Field help for the Vendors Details page

Tax Information

Tax Exempt: Check to indicate that this supplier is tax exempt (as in the case of a
federal non-profit organization).
Tax ID: Enter the supplier’s tax ID number.
Tax Jurisdiction: Enter the supplier’s tax jurisdiction code.

Payment

Forms of Payment:
` Checks: Check to indicate that this supplier accepts checks as payment.
` Letters of Credit: Check to indicate that this supplier accepts letters of credit as
payment.
` ACH: Check to indicate that this supplier can accept payment through the
Automated Clearing House network, a nationwide batch-oriented electronic funds
transfer system governed by the NACHA OPERATING RULES, which provide for the
interbank clearing of electronic payments for participating depository financial
institutions.
http://www.nacha.org
` SWIFT: Check to indicate that this supplier can accept payment through SWIFT.
This is the worldwide network run by the Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial
Telecommunication, by which messages concerning financial transactions are
exchanged among banks and other financial institutions.
http://www.swift.com/

Default Payment Term: Click the Lookup icon to select default payment terms
for this supplier.

Business Classification

Small Business: Check to indicate that this supplier qualifies as a small business.

Small Disadvantaged Business: Check to indicate that this supplier qualifies as a

small, disadvantaged business.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 785

Vendors Details page Vendors

Minority-Owned Business: Check to indicate that this supplier qualifies as a

minority-owned business.

Women-Owned Business: Check to indicate that this supplier qualifies as a

women-owned business.

Veteran Owned: Check to indicate that this supplier qualifies as a veteran-owned

business.

Disabled Vet: Check to indicate that this supplier qualifies as a disabled

veteran-owned business.

8 (a) firm: Check to indicate that the supplier is a firm participating in the Small
Business Administration’s 8 (a) Business Development Program for small
disadvantaged businesses.
http://www.sba.gov/gcbd/indexbd.html

HUBZone business: Check to indicate that the supplier is a business participating in

the HUBZone Empowerment Contracting Program, which provides Federal contracting
preferences to small businesses.
http://www.sba.gov/hubzone/

Non Profit: Check to indicate that this business qualifies as a non-profit organization.

Attributes

EDI: Check to indicate that this supplier can support use of the Electronic Data
Interchange, the data format used for the majority of electronic commerce
transactions.

Electronic Commerce capable: Check to indicate that the supplier can support
electronic commerce activities. This is a general flag indicating that the supplier is an
eBusiness. Its specific criteria can be determined by your organization.

ISO 9000: Check to indicate that this supplier is compliant with ISO 9000 standards.
As outlined by the International Organization for standardization, this is a set of
standards primarily concerned with quality management.
http://www.iso.org/iso/en/iso9000-14000/index.html

ISO 14000: Check to indicate that this supplier is compliant with ISO 14000
standards. As outlined by the International Organization for standardization, this is a
set of standards primarily concerned with environmental management.
http://www.iso.org/iso/en/iso9000-14000/index.html

786 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Details page

Default Delivery Term: Select the supplier’s default delivery term from the
drop-down list.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Adding supplier details

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 787

Vendors Details page Vendors

Adding supplier details

1 Click the Details tab for a specific supplier.
2 Fill in the fields under Tax Information, Payment, and Attributes.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can edit supplier details after adding them.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Field help for the Vendors Details page

788 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Categories page

Vendors Categories page

A supplier record can specify one or more internal or external categories for a supplier.
An internal category refers to the code used by your enterprise for goods, such as
biochemicals, computers, office furniture, and so forth. An external category refers to
the standard code for these goods. These two sets of codes do not have to match.
By selecting appropriate categories for suppliers, you readily see which suppliers can
best supply your needs for specific types of goods.

On the Categories page, you can add and edit internal and external categories.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Adding an internal and external category to a supplier record
Editing an internal and external category for a supplier record

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 789

Vendors Categories page Vendors

Adding an internal and external category to a supplier record

A supplier record can specify one or more internal or external categories for a supplier.
An internal category refers to the code used by your enterprise for goods, such as
biochemicals, computers, office furniture, and so forth. An external category refers to
the standard code for these goods. These two sets of codes do not have to match.
By selecting appropriate categories for suppliers, you readily see which suppliers can
best supply your needs for specific types of goods.

To add an internal or external category:

1 On the Categories page under Internal Category, click Add.
2 Check a box for each Internal Category to add.
3 Click OK.
4 Under External Category, click Add.
5 Check a box for each External Category to add.
6 Click OK.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Editing an internal and external category for a supplier record

790 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Categories page

Editing an internal and external category for a supplier record

A supplier record can specify one or more internal or external categories for a supplier.
An internal category refers to the code used by your enterprise for goods, such as
biochemicals, computers, office furniture, and so forth. An external category refers to
the standard code for these goods. These two sets of codes do not have to match.
By selecting appropriate categories for suppliers, you readily see which suppliers can
best supply your needs for specific types of goods.

To edit an internal or external category:

1 On the Categories page under Internal Category, click the Edit icon for the
Internal Category to edit.
2 Edit any fields in the dialog box.
3 Click OK.

4 Under External Category, click the Edit icon for the External Category to
edit.
5 Edit any fields in the dialog box.
6 Click OK.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Editing a supplier record
Adding an internal and external category to a supplier record

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 791

Vendors Contacts page Vendors

Vendors Contacts page

Supplier contacts are the individuals that you interact with at a supplier company.

On the Contacts page, you can add and edit supplier contacts and enable contact
impersonation, which allows buyers and technical support to log in as a supplier
contact.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Adding a supplier contact
Editing a supplier contact
Logging in as a supplier contact

792 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Contacts page

Adding a supplier contact

Supplier contacts are the individuals that you interact with at a supplier company.

To add a supplier contact:

1 On the Contacts page for a specific supplier, optionally enable or disable contact
impersonation under Call Center.
2 Fill in the fields under Buyer Contacts.
3 Under Vendor Contacts, click Add to add a supplier contact.
4 On the Contact page, fill in the fields under Contact Information, Basic Information,
and Other Information.
5 Click the Account Management tab.
6 Fill in the fields under Directory Information.

7 Under Account Maintenance, click the Lookup icon for Reassign to Directory
Account, select a directory account, and click OK.
8 Fill in the rest of the fields under Account Maintenance.
9 Click the Security tab to view security information.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Editing a supplier contact
Enabling login as a supplier contact: contact impersonation
Logging in as a supplier contact

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 793

Vendors Contacts page Vendors

Editing a supplier contact

Supplier contacts are the individuals that you interact with at a supplier company.

To edit a supplier contact:

1 On the Contacts page for a specific supplier, optionally enable or disable contact
impersonation under Call Center.
2 Edit any fields under Buyer Contacts

3 Under Vendor Contacts, click the Edit icon for the contact whose information
to edit.
4 Edit any fields under Directory Information, Contact Information, and Basic
Information.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Editing a supplier record
Adding a supplier contact
Enabling login as a supplier contact: contact impersonation
Logging in as a supplier contact

794 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Contacts page

Enabling login as a supplier contact: contact impersonation

Contact impersonation allows buyers and technical support personnel to log into a
supplier’s account. For example, you might log in to enter bids on a supplier’s behalf if
the supplier is having technical problems. Contact impersonation also allows technical
support to investigate any problems the supplier is having.
You can enable supplier contact impersonation only if the supplier has also enabled this
function. On the sell-side, this feature is enabled by default.

To enable or disable contact impersonation:

1 On the Contacts page for a specific supplier, if the Allow Technical Support to
Enable Contact Impersonation box is checked, do one of the following:
■ Check the Impersonation Enabled box to enable contact impersonation.
■ Remove the checkmark from the Impersonation Enabled box to disable
contact impersonation.
2 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Editing a supplier record
Adding a supplier contact
Editing a supplier contact
Logging in as a supplier contact

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 795

Vendors Contacts page Vendors

Logging in as a supplier contact

If both you and the supplier have enabled the contact impersonation feature, you can
log into a supplier’s account. For example, you might log in to enter bids on a supplier’s
behalf if the supplier is having technical problems.
For more information on contact impersonation, see Enabling login as a supplier
contact: contact impersonation.

Note: You must be in Edit mode to perform this action.

To log in as a supplier contact:

1 On the Contacts page for a specific supplier, click the name of the supplier contact
for whom you want to log in.
2 In the toolbar, click Actions and select Login as Vendor. You are logged in as the
supplier contact and can perform any necessary supplier actions.

Related Topics
Editing a supplier record
Adding a supplier contact
Editing a supplier contact
Enabling login as a supplier contact: contact impersonation

796 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Contacts page

Vendors Contact page

On the Contact page, you can fill in general information for a supplier contact.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Adding a supplier contact
Editing a supplier contact

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 797

Vendors Contacts page Vendors

Vendors Account Management page

On the Account Management page, you can fill in directory and account maintenance
information for a supplier contact.

Note: To enable login for a supplier contact, you must check the Enable User to Login
box on this page. If you create a supplier contact on the fly, during the creation of a
sourcing document, this box will not be checked by default. The supplier contact will not
be able to log into Frictionless® SRM until you check this box.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Adding a supplier contact
Editing a supplier contact

798 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Contacts page

Vendors Security page

On the Security page, you can view security information for a supplier contact.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Adding a supplier contact
Editing a supplier contact

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 799

Vendors Relationships page Vendors

Vendors Relationships page

A relationship indicates your connection to a supplier based on business dealings other
than those of buyer and supplier. For example, the supplier might also be a customer or
partner of your company. This information gives buyers visibility into business
relationships and could impact invitation decisions.

On the Vendors Relationships page, you can add and edit supplier relationship
information.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Adding supplier relationship information
Editing supplier relationship information

800 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Relationships page

Adding supplier relationship information

A relationship indicates your connection to a supplier based on business dealings other
than those of buyer and supplier. For example, the supplier might also be a customer or
partner of your company. This information gives buyers visibility into business
relationships and could impact invitation decisions.

To add relationship information:

1 On the Relationships page, click Add.
2 Fill in the fields.
Note: The values for the Vendor Partner Relationship field are created by a
system administrator.
3 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Editing supplier relationship information

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 801

Vendors Relationships page Vendors

Editing supplier relationship information

A relationship indicates your connection to a supplier based on business dealings other
than those of buyer and supplier. For example, the supplier might also be a customer or
partner of your company. This information gives buyers visibility into business
relationships and could impact invitation decisions.

To edit relationship information:

1 On the Relationships page, perform one of these actions:
■ For a specific relationship, edit any fields.

■ For a specific relationship, click its Edit icon , edit any fields in the dialog
box, and click OK.
2 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Editing a supplier record
Adding supplier relationship information

802 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Scorecards page

Vendors Scorecards page

Scorecards contain an assessment of supplier performance, which is based on targeted
and actual scores for the supplier. These scores are entered for the metrics defined in
the scorecard definition.
Before you can add a scorecard to a supplier record, a scorecard definition must exist
for a specific category or for all categories. The scorecard definitions are created in
Setup.
You can add one or more scorecards for a supplier. If you add more than one scorecard,
each scorecard must cover different time periods.
The scorecard is updated automatically if its metrics are edited.

On the Scorecards page, you can add and edit scorecards for specific suppliers.

Field help for the Vendors Scores page

Rating: Reflects how the actual score compares to the target score. The field values
are defined in the Scorecard Definition.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Adding a supplier scorecard
Editing a supplier scorecard
Entering scores in a supplier scorecard

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 803

Vendors Scorecards page Vendors

Adding a supplier scorecard

Scorecards contain an assessment of supplier performance, which is based on targeted
and actual scores for the supplier. These scores are entered for the metrics defined in
the scorecard definition.
Before you can add a scorecard to a supplier record, a scorecard definition must exist
for a specific category or for all categories. To see the current scorecard definitions,
click Vendor Management in the navigation bar and select Vendor Scorecard
Definition from the Performance submenu.
You can add one or more scorecards to a supplier record. If you add more than one
scorecard, each scorecard must cover different time periods.

To add a supplier scorecard:

1 On the Scorecards page for a supplier record, click Add.
2 In the Create Vendor Scorecard dialog box, select values for the criteria fields from
lookup boxes.
3 Click Finish. Based on the criteria you select, the software selects a Scorecard
Definition for you.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields.
Note: Check the box for Publish to Vendor and enter a date in the Date to
Publish field to have the Scorecard appear in the Current Scorecards channel on the
Vendor’s Workbench.
5 Click the Scores tab.
6 On the Scores page under Scores, you see the Sections and Metrics associated with
the selected Scorecard Definition. You can fill in the fields for Target Score, Actual
Score, and Rating.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
8 On the Scorecards page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can also add a supplier scorecard in the following ways:

` Click the Vendor Management button in the navigation bar and select Metric
Entry from the Performance submenu.
` To import a supplier scorecard, click the Vendor Management button in the
navigation bar and select Import Data from the Performance submenu.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Editing a supplier scorecard
Entering scores in a supplier scorecard

804 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Scorecards page

Field help for the Vendors Scores page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 805

Vendors Scorecards page Vendors

Editing a supplier scorecard

Scorecards contain an assessment of supplier performance, which is based on targeted
and actual scores for the supplier. These scores are entered for the metrics defined in
the scorecard definition.
Before you can add a scorecard to a supplier record, a scorecard definition must exist
for a specific category or for all categories. To see the current scorecard definitions,
click Vendor Management in the navigation bar and select Vendor Scorecard
Definition from the Performance submenu.
You can add one or more scorecards for a supplier. If you add more than one scorecard,
each scorecard must be based on different scorecard definitions, or if based on the
same scorecard definition, they must cover different time periods.
The scorecard is updated automatically if its metrics are edited in Setup.

To edit a supplier scorecard:

1 On the Scorecards page in a supplier record, click the Edit icon for the
scorecard to edit.
2 On the Header page, edit any fields.
Note: Check the box for Publish to Vendor and enter a date in the Date to
Publish field to have the Scorecard appear in the Current Scorecards channel on the
Vendor’s Workbench.
3 Click the Scores tab.

4 On the Scores page under Scores, click the Edit icon for the section to edit.
5 Edit the Comments box, which is the only field you can edit.
6 Click OK.

7 Under Scores, click the Edit icon for the metric to edit.
8 Edit any fields.
9 Click OK.
10 On the Scores page, click Rescore.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Editing a supplier record
Adding a supplier scorecard
Entering scores in a supplier scorecard
Field help for the Vendors Scores page

806 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors Scorecards page

Entering scores in a supplier scorecard

Scorecards contain an assessment of supplier performance, which is based on targeted
and actual scores for the supplier. These scores are entered for metrics defined in the
scorecard definition.
The scorecard is updated automatically if its metrics are edited in Setup.

To enter scores in a supplier scorecard:

1 On the Scorecards page for the selected supplier, click the Edit icon for the
scorecard to edit.
2 On the Header page, edit any fields.
Note: Check the box for Publish to Vendor and enter a date in the Date to
Publish field to have the Scorecard appear in the Current Scorecards channel on the
Vendor’s Workbench.
3 Click the Scores tab.

4 Edit any fields, or click the Edit icon for a metric to edit.
5 Edit any fields, including Actual Score.
6 Click OK.
7 On the Scores page, click Rescore.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

You can also add a supplier scorecard in the following ways:

` Click the Vendor Management button in the navigation bar and select Metric
Entry from the Performance submenu.
` To import a supplier scorecard and its scores, click the Vendor Management
button in the navigation bar and select Import Data from the Performance submenu.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Adding a supplier scorecard
Editing a supplier scorecard
Field help for the Vendors Scores page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 807

Vendors SRM Activities page Vendors

Vendors SRM Activities page

The SRM Activities page enables you to plan and manage supplier activities and
communications. It provides support for managing, sharing, and tracking the activities
associated with maintaining an ongoing supplier relationship. These activities include
re-certifications, diversity reporting, and supplier meetings. You can also set up initial
notification alerts and follow-up reminders to keep participants up to date on upcoming
events.

On the SRM Activities page, you can add, edit, and import SRM activities.

Related Topics
Adding an SRM activity to a supplier record
Importing SRM activities from a library
Duplicating an SRM activity
Field help for SRM Activity dialog box

808 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors SRM Activities page

Adding an SRM activity to a supplier record

On the SRM Activities page, you can add activities to track events associated with a
particular supplier. Activities can include re-certifications, diversity reporting, and
supplier meetings. You can also set up initial notification alerts and follow-up reminders
to keep participants up to date on upcoming events.

To add an SRM activity to a supplier record:

1 On the SRM Activities page, click Add.
2 In the SRM Activity dialog box, fill in the fields. For details, see Field help for SRM
Activity dialog box.
3 Click OK.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

To edit an SRM activity, click its Edit icon on the SRM Activities page.

Related Topics
Vendors SRM Activities page
Importing SRM activities from a library
Duplicating an SRM activity
Field help for SRM Activity dialog box

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 809

Vendors SRM Activities page Vendors

Importing SRM activities from a library

When you import activities from an SRM activity library, you import all the activities in
the selected library. After import, you can delete activities as needed.

To import a supplier activity from a library:

1 On the SRM Activities page, click Import from Library.
2 Check the box for one or more libraries to import and click OK.
3 The activities in the library or libraries appear on the SRM Activities page.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Vendors SRM Activities page
Adding an SRM activity to a supplier record
Duplicating an SRM activity
Field help for SRM Activity dialog box

810 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors SRM Activities page

Duplicating an SRM activity

You can create a new SRM activity by duplicating an existing activity and editing the
date and other information as needed. This enables you to manage recurring activities
with a minimum of new data entry.

To duplicate an SRM activity:

1 On the SRM Activities page, click the Edit icon for the SRM activity to
duplicate.
2 In the SRM Activity dialog box, click the Document button in the toolbar and select
Duplicate.
3 In the Unsaved Changes dialog box, click Save.
You see the new copy of the SRM activity.
4 Edit the SRM activity as needed and click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Vendors SRM Activities page
Adding an SRM activity to a supplier record
Importing SRM activities from a library
Field help for SRM Activity dialog box

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 811

Vendors SRM Activities page Vendors

Field help for SRM Activity dialog box

You use the SRM Activity dialog box to create an SRM activity.

Name: Type a name for the SRM activity. This is a required field.
Type: Select the type of SRM activity from the drop-down list. This is a required field.
Default values are as follows:
` Certification
` Activity
` Diversity Reporting
These values can be customized as value list values. For details, see Value List Types
and Values or contact your system administrator.

Tracking

Status: Indicates the status of the SRM activity. Statuses are as follows:
` Scheduled: Indicates that the due date is in the future.
` Overdue: Indicates that the due date has passed and the item is not complete.
` Done: Indicates that the Actual Completion date has been entered.

Owner: Click the Lookup icon to select the owner of the SRM activity. This field is
required if you check the Publish to calendar box.
Effective Date: Enter or select the date the SRM activity becomes effective.
Expiration Date: Enter or select the date the SRM activity expires.
Due Date: Enter or select the due date for the SRM activity. This is a required field.
Actual Completion Date: Enter or select the date the actual completion date for the
SRM activity.

Reminders

Reminder Rules: Check the box to enable one or more of the following reminder
rules:
` Publish to calendar and notify with alert and email
` Send 1st reminder __ day(s) before due date
` Send 2nd reminder __ day(s) before due date
Send Reminder To: Select one of the following options to send the reminder to:
` Owner
` Vendor

812 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendors SRM Activities page

` Owner and Vendor

Internal Comment: Type a comment to be viewed internally.
Vendor Instructions: Type instructions to be viewed by the supplier.

Attachments
Click Attach File or Attach URL to add an attachment to the activity. For details, see
Adding a file attachment and Adding a URL attachment.

Related Topics
Vendors SRM Activities page
Adding an SRM activity to a supplier record
Duplicating an SRM activity
Importing SRM activities from a library

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 813

Vendor toolbar functions Vendors

Vendor toolbar functions

Using the Vendor toolbar, you can:
` View a supplier report
` Create and view attachments

Related Topics
Toolbar functions
Adding an attachment by importing it from a library
Adding a file attachment
Adding a URL attachment
Viewing an attachment

814 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendor toolbar functions

Viewing a supplier report

You can view a report that gives you information about a supplier.
Click the report name to view more information about the report.

Report Description

Summary of Vendor This report provides a list of events and documents related to a
Activity (12 Months) report given supplier over the last 12 months.
Vendor Scorecard report This report contains an assessment of supplier performance for a
specific time period, category, and geography. It provides a
detailed view of a supplier's ratings by section and metric.
Note: The Vendor Scorecard Report is available only from the
Scorecard tab, and only if you have created a scorecard for the
supplier.
SRM Activity by Vendor This report provides an overall view of the SRM activities planned
report for a supplier. A supplier manager can quickly see which items are
scheduled in each time period and review the current status of
those events.

To view a supplier report:

1 In supplier record toolbar, click Reports and select the report to view from the
menu. You see the report.
2 Optionally, bookmark the report.
3 Optionally, export the report as a PDF, Excel (XLS), or CSV file.
4 After you finish viewing the report, click Close Window.

Note: For more reports including supplier data, see the Analysis module.

Related Topics
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Duplicating a sourcing document
Summary of Vendor Activity (12 Months) report
Vendor Scorecard report
SRM Activity by Vendor report
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 815

Vendor toolbar functions Vendors

Summary of Vendor Activity (12 Months) report

This report provides a list of events and documents related to a given supplier over the
last 12 months. A supplier manager can easily see a summary of activity by RFx,
auctions, agreements, Xpress requests, and projects to review a supplier's participation
and award levels.
The following is a description of the fields in this report.

Vendor Activity Summary by Area

This section includes a count of the number of events or documents by area giving a
quick snapshot of the level of activity in each area.

Field Description

RFx, Auctions, Agreements, XPress, Count of the number of events or documents that
Projects included this supplier.

The following sections detail the supplier activity by document/event type. Each section
includes a list of the specific events or documents that included this supplier.

Vendor Activity - RFx

Field Description

RFx RFx document name

Round Number indicating the round or phase of RFx
negotiations
Description RFx document description
Category Internal category name
Owner RFx owner
Vendor Supplier's company name
Created Date this RFx was created.
Award Status Current award status
Award Value Amount awarded

816 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendor toolbar functions

Vendor Activity - Auction

Field Description

Auction Auction event name

Description Auction event description
Category Internal category name
Owner Auction owner
Vendor Supplier's company name.
Close Date Date the auction closes for bidding
Award Status Current award status
Award Value Amount awarded

Vendor Activity - Agreements

Field Description

Agreement Agreement name

Description Agreement description
Category Internal category name
Owner Agreement owner
Vendor Supplier's company name
Effective Date Date agreement became active
Status Displays the current agreement status
Effective Through Agreement end date
Expected Value Total expected value for agreement. Calculated
from sum of the expected value for each savings
metric period.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 817

Vendor toolbar functions Vendors

Vendor Activity - Xpress

Field Description

XPress Request Request name

Description Request description
Category Internal category name
Owner Request owner
Vendor Supplier's company name
Created Date the request was created
Status Current request status
Award Value Amount awarded

Vendor Activity - Projects

Field Description

Project Project name

Description Project description
Category Internal category name
Owner Project owner
Vendor Supplier's company name
Created Date the project was created
Risk Indicator User-assigned assessment of project risk
Status Current project status
Phase Current schedule phase
Estimated Value Estimated project value

Related Topics
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file

818 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendor toolbar functions

Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

Duplicating a sourcing document
Viewing a supplier report
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 819

Vendor toolbar functions Vendors

Vendor Scorecard report

This report contains an assessment of supplier performance for a specific time period,
category, and geography. It provides a detailed view of a supplier's ratings by section
and metric.

Note: The Vendor Scorecard Report is available only from the Scorecard tab, and only
if you have created a scorecard for the supplier.

Tip: To publish the Vendor Scorecard report to the supplier’s Workbench, check Publish
to Vendor and enter a Date to Publish on the Header tab of the Vendor Scorecard in
a supplier record,

The following is a description of the fields in this report.

820 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendor toolbar functions

Summary
This report section includes an overall score and specifies the supplier, category,
geography, and time period that this scorecard represents.

Field Description

Overall The overall performance of the supplier.

Performance
Vendor The name of the supplier.
Internal Category The name of the specific internal category to which this scorecard pertains,
or “All” if this scorecard applies to every category for this supplier.
External Category The name of specific external category to which this scorecard pertains, or
“All” if this scorecard applies to every category for this supplier.
Geography The name of specific geographical region to which this scorecard pertains, or
'"All” if this scorecard applies to all geographies for this supplier.
Time Period The name of the time period for the supplier performance evaluation.

Detail
This report section displays the scores, ratings, and weights for each section and
metrics within a section.

Field Description

Section The name of the scorecard section into which metrics have been grouped.
Metric The name of the metric.
Raw Metric Raw data collected externally used to calculate a metric score.
Metric Target Score The target score for the metric.
Metric Actual Score The actual score that is calculated based on metric conversion rules.
Metric Rating The metric rating, which may be Red, Green, or Yellow, depending on the
comparison of the actual score to the target score.
Metric Weight % The emphasis given to a specific metric relative to other metrics in the
section.
Weighted Metric Score Metric Actual Score * Metric Weight %
Section Score The total of weighted metric scores for metrics in this section.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 821

Vendor toolbar functions Vendors

Field Description

Section Weight % The emphasis given to a specific section relative to other sections in the
scorecard.
Weighted Section Section Score * Section Weight %
Score
Section Rating The section rating, which is Green if all metric ratings are green, or Red if
any metric rating is red.
Comments Notes entered with raw metrics.

Overall Performance
This row contains a summary of scorecard results.

Field Description

Section Weight % The total of section weight %.

Weighted Section Score The total of weighted section scores.
Section Rating The section rating, which is Green if all section ratings are green, or Red
if any section rating is red.

Related Topics
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Duplicating a sourcing document
Viewing a supplier report
Toolbar functions

822 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendors Vendor toolbar functions

SRM Activity by Vendor report

The SRM Activity by Vendor report provides an overall view of the SRM activities
planned for a supplier. A supplier manager can quickly see which items are scheduled in
each time period and review the current status of those events.
This report is filtered by the following:
` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Time Period Type

SRM Activity by Vendor Chart

This section includes a vertical stacked bar graph comparing the number of activities by
time period. Each bar represents the number of items in a given time period with items
are grouped by activity type.

SRM Activity by Vendor

This section shows a list of SRM activities organized by Time Period.

Field Description

SRM Activities Name of SRM activity.

Activity Type Type of activity.
Status Scheduled if due date is in the future; Overdue if due date has past and item is
not complete; Done if Actual Completion date has been entered.
Time period For the selected time period, either a due date or completion is displayed for
the corresponding activity based on its current status.
Comment Note for buy-side users with additional instructions or details about activity.

Related Topics
Bookmarking a report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Duplicating a sourcing document
Viewing a supplier report
Toolbar functions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 823

Vendor toolbar functions Registration

Registration

Click the Vendor Management button in the navigation bar to see the options for the
Registration submenu.

Option Description

Vendor Modification List Click to see the Vendors Modification List page displaying a list
of supplier modifications.
Vendor Registration List Click to see the Vendors Registration List page displaying a list
of supplier registrations.
Vendor Management Click to see the Vendor Management Configuration page in
Configuration Setup.

824 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Registration Vendors Registration List page

Vendors Registration List page

The Vendors Registration List page shows information associated with supplier
registration.

To display the Vendors Registration List page:

` Click Vendor Management in the navigation bar and select Vendor Registration
List from the Registration submenu.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Enabling a supplier to submit a registration request
Accepting or denying a supplier registration request

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 825

Vendors Registration List page Registration

Enabling a supplier to submit a registration request

If you have the appropriate rights, you can enable a supplier to submit a registration
request.

To enable a supplier to submit a request:

1 Ask your system administrator for the Vendor Registration Request URL.
2 Type or copy the URL into an email.
3 Send the email to a supplier who requested to register with your enterprise.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Accepting or denying a supplier registration request
Accepting or denying a supplier modification request

826 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Registration Vendors Registration List page

Accepting or denying a supplier registration request

If you have the appropriate rights, you can accept or deny a supplier registration
request. Supplier registration requests are displayed in the To Do List channel on your
Workbench.

To accept or deny a request:

1 In the To Do List channel, click the Vendor Registration Pending link. You see a
list of pending supplier registrations.
2 Click the name of the supplier request to review. You see the supplier’s completed
registration form.
3 Do one of the following:
■ Click Approve Request. An email is automatically sent to the supplier with an
account number, user name, password, and URL for logging on to Frictionless®
SRM.
■ Click Deny Request. You can optionally send an email with any comments you
want to make to the supplier.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Vendors Registration List page
Enabling a supplier to submit a registration request
Accepting or denying a supplier modification request

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 827

Vendors Modification List page Registration

Vendors Modification List page

The Vendors Modification List page shows information associated with pending supplier
modifications that are waiting for approval.

To display the Vendors Modification List page:

` Click Vendor Management in the navigation bar and select Vendor Modification
List from the Registration submenu.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Accepting or denying a supplier modification request

828 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Registration Vendors Modification List page

Accepting or denying a supplier modification request

If you have the appropriate rights, you can accept or deny a supplier modification
request. Supplier modification requests are displayed in the To Do List channel on your
Workbench.

To accept or deny a request:

1 In the To Do List channel, click the Vendor Modification Pending link. You see a
list of pending supplier modifications.
2 Click the name of the supplier request to review. You see the supplier’s modification
request.
3 Do one of the following:
■ Click Approve Request. The supplier’s modifications are accepted.
■ Click Deny Request. You can optionally send an email with any comments you
want to make to the supplier.

Related Topics
Creating a supplier record
Vendors Modification List page
Enabling a supplier to submit a registration request
Accepting or denying a supplier registration request

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 829

Vendors Modification List page Performance

Performance

Click the Vendor Management button in the navigation bar to see the options for the
Performance submenu.

Option Description

My Scorecards with Click to see a list of your supplier scorecards with unsatisfactory
Unsatisfactory Ratings ratings.
Incomplete Scorecards Click to see a list of incomplete supplier scorecards.
Metrics Click to see the Metrics page in Setup.
Metric Entry Click to see the Metric Entry page in Setup.
Vendor Scorecard Definition Click to see the Vendor Scorecard Definition page in Setup.
Import Data Click to see the Import Data page in Setup.

830 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

All Analysis Vendors Modification List page

All Analysis

To get help for all reports on the Analysis page, see the Analysis module.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 831

Vendors Modification List page All Analysis

832 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

XPress
The XPress module provides a comprehensive, automated solution for the pricing and
purchase of services, such as print services. This functionality enables you to easily and
quickly source on a project-by-project basis, from request through award, for simple
and complex jobs. By directing end-user initiated requests through the Frictionless®
XPress module, you can increase savings by increasing the amount of spend under
management, without increasing headcount.
The XPress module can help you do the following:
` Alter maverick spending habits by offering an effective mechanism for initiating a
print request that's as easy as a phone call when you can't mandate compliance.
` Get the best available price on every job based on the supplier's current capacity at
the moment of need. By getting job-specific bids with multiple suppliers, you can
realize additional cost savings.
` Lower the bar for "worthwhile" projects by improving efficiency and streamlining
processes across multiple organizations. For example, submitting internal customer
requests for estimates directly to approved suppliers eliminates the need for buyer
intervention, while still allowing oversight.
` Reduce suppliers' cost to do business with you by ensuring your preferred suppliers
the opportunity to bid on all print jobs and eliminating the need for salespersons.

There are three types of users for the XPress module:

` Internal Customer: Internal Customers are users who purchase services but who
are outside your company’s Purchasing group. For example, an Internal Customer
might be a graphics designer who needs to source a marketing brochure.
Internal Customers have their own Workbench page, which provides a streamlined
version of the XPress module. Internal Customers can initiate XPress requests and
in some cases can review and award requests to suppliers. Internal Customers do
not have access to other Frictionless SRM modules.
For more information, see Internal Customer XPress.
` CSR: A CSR (Customer Service Representative) is a user outside your company’s
Purchasing group who has expertise in a specific category and in tactical sourcing.
For example, a CSR might be a member of a business unit such as a print buying
team, or a graphics department that handles the tactical sourcing of print services.
CSRs have their own Workbench page, which provides access to the XPress
module. CSRs can also click the XPress button in the navigation bar to access
XPress features. CSRs can create, review, and award XPress requests, and have
limited access to other Frictionless SRM modules.
For more information, see CSR XPress.

Confidential 833
` Buyer: A buyer is a frequent, fully trained user of Frictionless SRM, who is part of
your company’s Purchasing group. Buyers can perform all XPress functions and
have full access to the Frictionless SRM system.
For more information, see Buyer XPress.

Buyers and CSRs can click the XPress button in the navigation bar to see the following
options for this module.

Requests
The Requests submenu contains the following options.

Option Description

Create XPress Request Click to create an XPress request. See Creating an XPress
request.
Create XPress Request Click to create an XPress request template. See Creating an
Template XPress request template.
My XPress Requests Click to see the XPress Request List page: Requests displaying
a list of all XPress requests for which you are the Owner in the
Collaborator list.
XPress Request Templates Click to see the XPress Request List page: Templates
displaying a list of all XPress request templates.
XPress Request Types Click to see the XPress Request Type List page displaying a list
of all XPress request types.

834 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Reports
The Reports submenu contains the following options.

Option Description

XPress Awards by Vendor and This report shows the % of spend by supplier within a category to
Category determine what you’re spending with each supplier. This enables
an organization to determine whether some suppliers are receiving
a disproportionate share of business, whether diversity policies are
being followed, and so on.
XPress Request Activity by This report shows activity by CSR to manage workload and status.
Group
XPress Requests by Category This report presents a historical view of the types of jobs and
and Job Type volume that were requested. It can be used to plan ahead for
future contracts.

Library
The Library submenu contains the following options.

Option Description

XPress Request Specification Click to see the XPress Request Specification Libraries List
Libraries page.
Event Terms Templates Click to see the Event Terms Templates List page.
Attachment Library Click to see the Attachment Library List page

This section documents the options for XPress.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 835

 Internal Customer XPress

Internal Customer XPress

As an Internal Customer, you have a purchasing need or request, but are not a member
of your company’s Purchasing group. For example, an Internal Customer might be a
graphics designer who needs to source a marketing brochure. The XPress module of
Frictionless® SRM provides a streamlined way for you to create such a sourcing
request.
The Internal Customer Workbench page, which you see when you log onto Frictionless
SRM, provides your access to the XPress module. You use this module to create
requests to purchase services. In some cases, you can also review and award requests
to suppliers.

Note: Internal Customers do not have access to other Frictionless SRM modules.

This section documents the options available to an Internal Customer for this module.

836 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Internal Customer XPress XPress Internal Customer Workbench page

XPress Internal Customer Workbench page

You see the Internal Customer Workbench page when you log into Frictionless® SRM.

On this page, you can:

` Create a new XPress request
` View a list of current XPress requests
` View a list of closed XPress requests
` Update your user profile
` Access online Help or contact Technical Support by email

Related Topics
XPress
Internal Customer XPress
Creating an Internal Customer XPress request
Editing an Internal Customer XPress request
Viewing current Internal Customer XPress requests
Viewing closed Internal Customer XPress requests

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 837

XPress Internal Customer Workbench page Internal Customer XPress

Creating an Internal Customer XPress request

An XPress request is a request to purchase services, such as print services, from
selected suppliers. You enter a job description and specifications in the request and
submit it to a list of suppliers. The suppliers respond with bids, and the job is awarded
to a single supplier.
In some cases (as determined by the request type), you will award the request
yourself. In other cases, a Customer Service Representative or a buyer in your
organization will award the request.

Note: The XPress request type determines the fields that appear on the XPress request.
All fields might not appear in every request.

To create an XPress request:

1 On the Internal Customer Workbench page, click Create Request.
2 In the Enter Job Description dialog box, do the following:
■ Under Job Description, fill in the fields with basic information about this
request.
■ Under Line Items, enter a brief description of each line item to add.
■ Under Collaborators (if shown), optionally add collaborators to the default list.
■ Under Vendors (if shown), optionally add suppliers to the default list, if this
feature is enabled. An XPress request can include a maximum of 15 suppliers.
■ Under Request Attachments (if shown), optionally add attachments to the
request, if this feature is enabled.
■ Click Next.
3 In the Enter Specification dialog box, do the following:
■ Under Description, edit the description fields as necessary.
■ Under Quantity, enter quantity information for the line item. This may include
multiple quantities on which the supplier will bid.
■ Under Specification, enter information about each option, if multiple options
have been enabled. In some cases, you can also override default specification
values.
■ Click Next.
4 Repeat step 3 for each line item you entered.
5 In the Submit Request dialog box, review the information you entered and click
Submit. Your request is submitted either to a CSR for internal review or directly to
the specified suppliers, as determined by the XPress request type.

Related Topics

838 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Internal Customer XPress XPress Internal Customer Workbench page

XPress
Internal Customer XPress
XPress Internal Customer Workbench page
Editing an Internal Customer XPress request
Viewing current Internal Customer XPress requests
Viewing closed Internal Customer XPress requests
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Adding a file attachment
Adding a URL attachment

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 839

XPress Internal Customer Workbench page Internal Customer XPress

Editing an Internal Customer XPress request

An XPress request is a request to purchase services, such as print services, from
selected suppliers. You enter a job description and specifications in the request and
submit it to a list of suppliers. The suppliers respond with bids, and the job is awarded
to a single supplier.
In some cases (as determined by the request type), you will award the request
yourself. In other cases, a Customer Service Representative or a buyer in your
organization will award the request.

Note: The XPress request type determines the fields that appear on the XPress request.
All fields might not appear in every request.

To edit an XPress request:

1 On the Internal Customer Workbench page, click View Current Requests.
2 On the XPress Request List page, click the description of the request to edit.
3 On the XPress Request Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 Edit the request as needed.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
XPress
Internal Customer XPress
XPress Internal Customer Workbench page
Creating an Internal Customer XPress request
Viewing current Internal Customer XPress requests
Viewing closed Internal Customer XPress requests

840 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Internal Customer XPress XPress Internal Customer Workbench page

Viewing current Internal Customer XPress requests

On the Internal Customer Workbench page, click View Current Requests. You see the
XPress Request List page displaying a list of Current XPress requests.

Related Topics
XPress
Internal Customer XPress
XPress Request List page: Requests
XPress Internal Customer Workbench page
Creating an Internal Customer XPress request
Editing an Internal Customer XPress request
Viewing current Internal Customer XPress requests
Viewing closed Internal Customer XPress requests

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 841

XPress Internal Customer Workbench page Internal Customer XPress

Viewing closed Internal Customer XPress requests

On the Internal Customer Workbench page, click View Closed Requests. You see the
XPress Request List page displaying a list of closed XPress requests.

Related Topics
XPress
Internal Customer XPress
XPress Request List page: Requests
XPress Internal Customer Workbench page
Creating an Internal Customer XPress request
Editing an Internal Customer XPress request
Viewing current Internal Customer XPress requests
Viewing closed Internal Customer XPress requests

842 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

CSR XPress XPress Internal Customer Workbench page

CSR XPress

As a CSR, you have expertise in a specific category and in tactical sourcing, but are not
a member of your company’s Purchasing group. For example, a CSR might be part of a
business unit such as a print buying team, or a graphics department that handles the
tactical sourcing of print services.
The CSR Workbench page, which you see when you log onto Frictionless SRM, provides
your access to the XPress module. You can also click the XPress button in the
navigation bar to access XPress features. You can create, review, and award XPress
requests, and have limited access to other Frictionless SRM modules.

This section documents CSR-specific options for this module. See Buyer XPress for
details on all XPress functions.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 843

XPress CSR Workbench page CSR XPress

XPress CSR Workbench page

You see the CSR Workbench page when you log into Frictionless® SRM.

On this page, you can:

` Create a new XPress request
` View XPress requests in the following ways:
■ My Current Requests
■ My Awarded Requests
■ My Inactive Requests
You can also group requests by status or category, and view all requests due within
a certain time period.
` Update your user profile
` Access online Help or contact Technical Support by email

Related Topics
XPress
CSR XPress
Creating an XPress request
Performing an internal review on an XPress request

844 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

CSR XPress XPress CSR Workbench page

Performing an internal review on an XPress request

The request type determines whether an XPress request requires review before it is
submitted to suppliers for bidding. Users identified as CSRs in the Collaborator list
serve as the reviewers for the XPress request. CSRs receive notification when the
request advances to the Waiting for Acceptance phase.

To perform an internal review on an XPress request:

1 On your CSR Workbench page, or on the XPress Request List page, click the name
of an XPress request that is in the Waiting for Acceptance phase. You see the
request.
2 Click the Edit button in the toolbar. The request phase changes automatically to
Internal Review.
3 Review the information in the request, including all tabs and line items. Click a line
item description to review its details.
4 Make any necessary changes to the XPress request.
5 Do one of the following:
■ To save the XPress request for further review, click the Save button in the
toolbar.
■ To finish your review and open the request for bidding, click the Change Phase

button in the XPress request toolbar and select Open for Bid from the
phase menu.

Related Topics
XPress
CSR XPress
XPress CSR Workbench page
XPress Request List page: Requests
Creating an XPress request

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 845

XPress CSR Workbench page Buyer XPress

Buyer XPress

As a buyer, you are a frequent, fully trained user of Frictionless SRM, and are part of
your company’s Purchasing group. Buyers can perform all XPress functions and have
full access to Frictionless SRM system.
This section documents the complete set of options for the XPress module.

846 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

XPress Requests

This section documents the options in the Requests submenu of the XPress module:

Option Description

Create XPress Request Click to create an XPress request. See Creating an XPress
request.
Create XPress Request Click to create an XPress request template. See Creating an
Template XPress request template.
My XPress Requests Click to see the XPress Request List page: Requests, which
displays a list of all XPress requests for which you are the Owner in
the Collaborator list.
XPress Request Templates Click to see the XPress Request List page: Templates, which
displays a list of all XPress request templates for which you are the
Owner in the Collaborator list.
XPress Request Types Click to see the XPress Request Type List page, which displays
a list of all XPress request types for which you are the Owner in the
Collaborator list.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 847

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

XPress Request List page: Requests

To see a list of all your XPress requests, click XPress in the navigation bar and select
My XPress Requests from the Request drop-down list.

On the XPress Request List: Requests page, you can:

` View XPress requests in the following ways:

Report Description

My Print XPress Requests View a list of all Print XPress requests for which you are the
Owner in the Collaborator list.
My XPress Requests View a list of all your XPress requests for which you are the
Owner in the Collaborator list.
All XPress Request Documents View a list of all XPress request documents.
Search XPress Request Documents Search for an XPress request by name.
by Name
All Inactive XPress Request View a list of all inactive XPress request documents.
Documents

On this page, you can also:

` Create or edit an XPress request
` Export an XPress request list to a CSV file or to a PDF file

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request
Editing an XPress request
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as a PDF file

848 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

Creating an XPress request

An XPress request is a request to purchase services, such as print services, from
selected suppliers. You enter details about the services job in the request and submit it
to a list of suppliers. After the suppliers respond with bids, you award the request to a
single supplier.

To create an XPress request:

1 Click XPress in the navigation bar and select Create XPress Request from the
Requests drop-down list.
Note: You can also create an XPress request by clicking the Create button on the
XPress Request List page: Requests.
2 In the Select Job Type dialog box, select the template on which to base the XPress
request and click Create.
Note: Every XPress request is based on an XPress request template. For more
information about templates, see XPress Request List page: Templates.
3 On the Header page, fill in the fields under Job Description.
For details, see Field help for XPress Request Header page.
4 Under Line Items, click Add to add a line item.
5 In the dialog box, fill in the fields and click OK.
For details, see Field help for XPress Request Line Item dialog box.
6 Under Vendors, you see a list of default suppliers. Click Add to add additional
suppliers to the request. An XPress request can include a maximum of 15 suppliers.
7 Under Collaborators, you see a list of default collaborators. Click Add to add
additional collaborators to the request.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
XPress
Editing an XPress request
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document
Opening an XPress request for bidding
Reviewing bids for an XPress request
Awarding an XPress request

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 849

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

Editing an XPress request

An XPress request is a request to purchase services, such as print services, from
selected suppliers. You enter details about the services job in the request and submit it
to a list of suppliers. After the suppliers respond with bids, you award the request to a
single supplier.
You can edit a request that has not been opened for bidding.

To create an XPress request:

1 Click XPress in the navigation bar and select My XPress Requests from the
Requests drop-down list.
2 In the XPress Request List page, click the name of the XPress request to edit.
3 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 Edit any fields. For more information, see Field help for XPress Request Header
page.
5 Under Line Items, click Add to add a line item or click a line item description to edit
an existing line item.
6 In the Line Item dialog box, fill in or edit any fields and click OK. For details, see
Field help for XPress Request Line Item dialog box.
7 Under Vendors, click Add to add additional suppliers to the request. To delete
suppliers, check the box for each supplier to delete and click Delete Selected.
8 Under Collaborators, click Add to add additional collaborators to the request. For
details, see Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request
Opening an XPress request for bidding
Reviewing bids for an XPress request
Awarding an XPress request

850 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

XPress Request Header page

The Header page is the first page of an XPress request.

On the Header page, you can:

` Add and modify basic job description information, line items, and suppliers to the
request
` Add and remove collaborators

Field help for XPress Request Header page

Note: The XPress request type and your user type determine the sections and fields
that appear on the Header page. All sections and fields might not appear on every
Header page.

For information about toolbar options such as Attachments and Discussions, see
XPress request toolbar functions.

Job Description

Job Type: Choose an option from the drop-down list. The following are default options
and may be modified after installation.
` Custom: Select this option to group the request with other custom requests on the
XPress Request List page.
` Standard: Select this option to group the request with other standard requests on
the XPress Request List page.

Title: Type a title for the XPress request.

Quote Due Date: Enter a date and time when the quote will be due.
Budgeted Value: Type the budgeted value for this request in order to calculate
potential savings.
Urgent (Priority): Check this box if the request is high priority.

Line Items
Click Add to add a line item, or click the description of a line item to edit it. For details,
see Field help for XPress Request Line Item dialog box.

Vendors
Click Add to add suppliers to the request. Select one or more suppliers from the list and
click OK.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 851

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

To delete suppliers, check the box for each supplier to delete and click Delete
Selected.

Collaborators
Click Add to add a collaborator. For details, see Adding a collaborator to a sourcing
document.

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request
Field help for XPress Request Line Item dialog box

852 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

Field help for XPress Request Line Item dialog box

The following provides help for the fields in the Line Item dialog box.

Description

Item Description: Type a description for the line item.

Delivery Date: Enter a date and time for the delivery of the line item.

Quantity
If this request specifies multiple quantities, enter the quantities that suppliers will use
to price the job.

Specifications

Option Description: If this request specifies multiple line item options, enter a
description for each option.
Specifications: If applicable, replace the default specification values as needed. The
XPress request template determines whether you can edit specification fields.

Line Item Attachments

Optionally, add one or more attachments to the line item. For details, see Adding a
file attachment and Adding a URL attachment.

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request
Field help for XPress Request Header page
Adding a file attachment
Adding a URL attachment

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 853

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

XPress Request Bidding page

The Bidding tab appears when an XPress request is opened for bidding.

On the Bidding page, you can:

` View invited suppliers’ RSVP status
` Click a supplier name to view information about the supplier
` View bidding details for all line items

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request
Opening an XPress request for bidding
Reviewing bids for an XPress request
Awarding an XPress request

854 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

Reviewing bids for an XPress request

The Bidding tab appears when an XPress request is opened for bidding. You can review
current bidding details throughout the bidding process.

To review bids:
` On the Bidding tab, under Vendor Bids, review bidding details for each line item.

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request
XPress Request Bidding page
Opening an XPress request for bidding
Awarding an XPress request

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 855

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

Awarding an XPress request

After one or more suppliers responds to the XPress request with a bid, you may award
the XPress request.
You can only award an XPress request to a single supplier. You are not required to
award all line items in the request.

Note: You can only award an XPress request when it is in Edit mode.

1 On the Bidding page, in the XPress request toolbar, click the Change Phase button

and select Ready for Awarding from the phase menu.

Note: This phase change occurs automatically when the request reaches the quote
due date and time.
2 Under Vendors, select one supplier and click the Award button.
3 Follow the steps in the wizard to select the line items, options, and quantities to
award.
4 In the final screen, click Finish. The bidding suppliers are notified that an award
has been made.

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request
XPress Request Bidding page
Opening an XPress request for bidding
Reviewing bids for an XPress request

856 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

XPress Request Awards page

The Awards tab appears after you award the XPress request to a supplier.

On the Awards page, you can review the XPress request supplier award.

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request
XPress Request Bidding page
Opening an XPress request for bidding
Reviewing bids for an XPress request
Awarding an XPress request

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 857

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

XPress request toolbar functions

Note: The XPress request type enables toolbar functions in the request. All toolbar
functions might not be enabled in every request.

Using the XPress request toolbar, you can:

` Duplicate an XPress request
` Create an XPress request PDF file
` Create an attachment to the request, if enabled
` Create and participate in discussions, if enabled
` Use the chat feature
` Change the phase of the request to Internal Review, Open for Bid, or Ready for
Awarding

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request
Duplicating a sourcing document
Creating an XPress request PDF file
Viewing an attachment
Viewing discussion messages and replies
Performing an internal review on an XPress request
Opening an XPress request for bidding
Awarding an XPress request

858 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

Creating an XPress request PDF file

You can create a PDF version of an XPress request in any phase. You might do this, for
example, if you want to print the content of the XPress request.

To create an XPress request PDF file:

1 In the XPress request toolbar, click Actions and select Create XPress Request PDF.
2 You see a dialog box notifying you that this action may take some time. Click OK.
A PDF version of the XPress request is created and displayed.

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request
XPress request toolbar functions
Duplicating a sourcing document
Viewing an attachment
Viewing discussion messages and replies
Performing an internal review on an XPress request
Opening an XPress request for bidding
Awarding an XPress request

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 859

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

Opening an XPress request for bidding

If an XPress request requires an internal review, you can open it for bidding after it is
reviewed by a CSR. If it does not require internal review, you can open it for bidding at
any time after all required information is entered.
When you open a request for bidding, the request is distributed to the selected
suppliers, who must respond before the request due date.

To open an XPress request for bidding:

` Click the Change Phase button in the XPress request toolbar and select Open
for Bid from the phase menu.

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request
XPress request toolbar functions
Duplicating a sourcing document
Viewing an attachment
Viewing discussion messages and replies
Performing an internal review on an XPress request
Awarding an XPress request

860 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

XPress Request List page: Templates

XPress request templates form one level of the hierarchy of documents that determine
the parameters of an XPress request.
` XPress request types control the business rules and features for an XPress
request template. For example, they determine rules for Internal Customers and
suppliers, and indicate whether a template can include multiple line item options,
quantity breaks, and price components.
For more information about types, see XPress Request Type List page.
` XPress request templates are predefined documents that store crucial content
for an XPress request. For example, they determine line item specifications,
preferred suppliers, and price components.
Every XPress template is based on an XPress request type.
` XPress request documents are the live pricing requests that are seen by
suppliers. They contain specific line items that suppliers will bid on.
Every XPress request is based on an XPress request template.

To see a list of XPress request templates, click XPress in the navigation bar and select
XPress Request Templates from the Request drop-down list.

On the XPress Request List: Templates page, you can view XPress request templates in
the following ways:

Report Description

All Print XPress Templates View a list of all Print XPress templates.
All XPress Request Templates View a list of all XPress request templates.
All Inactive XPress Request View a list of all inactive XPress request templates.
Templates

On this page, you can also:

` Create or edit an XPress request template
` Export an XPress request template list to a CSV file or to a PDF file

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request template
Editing an XPress request template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 861

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

Creating an XPress request template

XPress request templates are predefined documents that store crucial content for an
XPress request. For example, they determine line item specifications, preferred
suppliers, and price components.

Note: The XPress request type determines the tabs that appear in an XPress request
template. All tabs might not appear in every template.

To create an XPress request template:

1 Click XPress in the navigation bar and select Create XPress Request Template from
the Requests drop-down list.
Note: You can also create an XPress request by clicking the Create button on the
XPress Request List page: Templates.
2 In the Create dialog box, select the type of template to create and click Create.
3 On the Header page, fill in the fields under Job Description and add suppliers, event
terms, and collaborators to the template.
For details, see Field help for XPress Request Template Header page.
4 Click the Schedule tab to add a schedule to the template.
5 On the Schedule page, click Add to add an event to the schedule.
For details, see Adding an event to a schedule.
6 Click the Specifications tab to add specifications to the template.
7 On the Specifications page, click Add to add an line item specification. Fill in the
fields in the Line Item Specification dialog box and click OK.
For details, see Field help for Line Item Specification in XPress Request
Template dialog box.
8 Click the Price Components tab to break down line item prices into components for
this template.
9 On the Price Components page, click Add to add price components.
For details, see Adding price components to an XPress request template.
10 Click the Accounting tab to add accounting information to the template.
For details, see Adding accounting information to a sourcing document.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request List page: Templates
Editing an XPress request template

862 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

Editing an XPress request template

XPress request templates are predefined documents that store crucial content for an
XPress request. For example, they determine line item specifications, preferred
suppliers, and price components.

Note: The XPress request type determines the tabs that appear in an XPress request
template. All tabs might not appear in every template.

To edit an XPress request template:

1 Click XPress in the navigation bar and select XPress Request Templates from the
Requests drop-down list.
2 On the XPress Request List page, click the name of the template to edit.
3 On the Header page, click the Save button in the toolbar.
4 Edit any fields under Job Description and add suppliers, event terms, and
collaborators as needed. For details, see Field help for XPress Request
Template Header page.
5 Click the Schedule tab to edit the schedule for the template.
6 On the Schedule page, click Add to add an event to the schedule or click the Edit
icon to edit an event.
For details, see Adding an event to a schedule.
7 Click the Specifications tab to edit specifications for the template.
8 On the Specifications page, click Add to add an line item specification or click the
Edit icon to edit a specification. Fill in the fields in the Line Item Specification
dialog box and click OK.
For details, see Field help for Line Item Specification in XPress Request
Template dialog box.
9 Click the Price Components tab to break down line item prices into components for
this template.
10 On the Price Components page, click Add to add price components.
For details, see Adding price components to an XPress request template.
11 Click the Accounting tab to add accounting information to the template.
For details, see Adding accounting information to a sourcing document.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
XPress

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 863

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

XPress Request List page: Templates

Creating an XPress request template

864 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

XPress Request Template Header page

On the Header page, you can:
` Add basic job description information, suppliers, and event terms to the template
` Add collaborators to the template

Field help for XPress Request Template Header page

Note: The XPress request type determines the sections and fields that appear on the
template Header page. All sections and fields might not appear on every Header page.

Job Description

Job Type: Choose one of the following from the drop-down list:
` Custom: Select this option to group the template with other custom templates on
the XPress Request List: Templates page.
` Standard: Select this option to group the template with other standard templates
on the XPress Request List: Templates page.

Title: Type a title for the XPress request template.

Description: Type a description for the XPress request template.

Company: Click the Lookup icon to select the company to which this template will
apply.
This field determines which Internal Customers can view the template. To display the
template to all Internal Customers, do not select a company. Select a company to
display the template only to Internal Customers in that company.

Internal Category: Click the Lookup icon to select an internal category for the
template.
Quote Due Offset (days): Type the number of days that will be used to calculate a
default due date. For example, if you typically allow suppliers one business week to
respond, you might enter 5 in this field. The default due date in the request will be 5
days from the creation date. This date can be changed by the initiator of the request.
Delivery Date Offset (days): Type the number of days that will be used to calculate
a default delivery date. For example, if you typically require delivery two weeks from
the creation of the request, you might enter 10 in this field. The default delivery date in
the request will be 10 business days from the creation date. This date can be changed
by the initiator of the request. The delivery date must be later than the quote due date.
Note: The XPress request type determines whether calendar days or business days
are used to calculate these dates in the request.
Budgeted Value: Type the default budgeted value for this template.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 865

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

Default Unit of Measure: Select a default unit of measure for line items from the
drop-down list.
Currency: Select a bid currency from the drop-down list.
Urgent (Priority): Check this box if the request is high priority.

Vendors

The XPress request type determines whether a list of default suppliers appears in the
template. Default suppliers cannot be removed from the request document by Internal
Customers. Buyers and CSRs can delete default suppliers from requests.
To add one or more suppliers to the default list, click Add. In the dialog box, select one
or more suppliers and click OK.

Note: An XPress request can include a maximum of 15 suppliers.

Event Terms
Event terms specify the terms to which a supplier must agree in order to submit a bid in
response to an XPress request.
Under Event Terms, click Add to add event terms. In the New Terms and Conditions
dialog box, type a title and the terms of the event and click OK.
Note: You can also add a set of standard terms by clicking Import from Library.

Collaborators

Click Add to add a collaborator. For details, see Adding a collaborator to a sourcing
document.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request List page: Templates
XPress Request Template Header page
Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document

866 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

XPress Request Template Schedule page

On the Schedule page, you can add schedule events to the template.
For details, see Adding an event to a schedule.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request List page: Templates
Adding an event to a schedule

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 867

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

XPress Request Template Specifications page

On the Specifications page, you can:
` Add line item specifications to the template
` Import specifications from a library

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request List page: Templates
Adding specifications to an XPress request template
Field help for Line Item Specification in XPress Request Template dialog box
Importing a library component

868 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

Adding specifications to an XPress request template

For details about individual fields on this page, see Field help for Line Item
Specification in XPress Request Template dialog box.

To add specifications:
1 On the Specifications page, click Add.
2 In the Line Item Specification dialog box, fill in the fields.
3 Click OK.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each specification to add.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request List page: Templates
XPress Request Template Specifications page
Field help for Line Item Specification in XPress Request Template dialog box
Importing a library component

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 869

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

Field help for Line Item Specification in XPress Request

Template dialog box
The following provides help for the fields in the Line Item Specification dialog box.

Specification Attribute Name: Type a name for the specification.

Entry Required by Internal Customer: Check this box to indicate that an Internal
Customer must enter a value for this specification.

Entry Required before open for Bid: Check this box to indicate that this specification
must contain a value in order to open the request for bidding.

Allow Multiple Options per Line Item: Check this box to allow the XPress request
creator to add multiple options for this specification.

Type: Select the type of specification response from the drop-down list.

Description: Type a description of the specification.

Display Field: If applicable, select the type of field in which the request creator will
enter the response.

Default Value: If applicable, specify a default value for the specification.

Allow Override of Default Value: Check this box to enable the request creator to
replace the default value with another value.

Internal ID: Type an internal ID for the specification. This value is used as a
cross-reference tag in custom reports.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request List page: Templates
XPress Request Template Specifications page
Adding specifications to an XPress request template
Importing a library component

870 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

XPress Request Template Price Components page

Price components break line item prices into individual components for which you want
to see price quotes. For example, for a print services line item, you might create
components such as Preparation, Paper, and Printing. In preparing your quote, the
supplier must provide a cost for each component.

On the Price Components page, you can add line item price components to the
template.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request List page: Templates
Adding price components to an XPress request template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 871

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

Adding price components to an XPress request template

Price components break line item prices into individual components for which you want
to see price quotes. For example, for a print services line item, you might create
components such as Preparation, Paper, and Printing. In preparing your quote, the
supplier must provide a cost for each component.

To add price components:

1 Click Add in the price component table.
2 In the new row that appears, type a price component and a description. For
example, enter Preparation in the Price Component column and describe the
preparation process in the Description column.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each price component to add.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request List page: Templates
XPress Request Template Price Components page

872 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

XPress Request Template Accounting page

You use the Accounting page to enter and edit accounting information.
The Accounting page appears only if enabled in the XPress request type.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request List page: Templates
Adding accounting information to a sourcing document

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 873

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

XPress Request Type List page

XPress request types make up one level of the document hierarchy that determines the
parameters of an XPress request.
` XPress request types control the business rules and features for an XPress
request template. For example, they determine rules for Internal Customers and
suppliers, and indicate whether a template can include multiple line item options,
quantity breaks, and price components.
` XPress request templates are predefined documents that store crucial content
for an XPress request. For example, they determine line item specifications,
preferred suppliers, and price components.
Every XPress template is based on an XPress request type.
For more information about templates, see XPress Request List page:
Templates.
` XPress request documents are the live pricing requests that will be seen by
suppliers. Requests contain specific line items that suppliers will bid on.
Every XPress request is based on an XPress request template.
For more information about XPress requests, see XPress Request List page:
Requests.

To see a list of XPress request types, click XPress in the navigation bar and select
XPress Request Types from the Request drop-down list.

On the XPress Request Type List page, you can:

` View XPress request types in the following ways:

Report Description

All XPress Request Types View the XPress Request Type List page displaying a list
of all XPress request types.
Search XPress Request Types by Search for an XPress request type by name.
Name
All Inactive XPress Request Types View the XPress Request Type List page displaying a list
of all inactive XPress request types.

On this page, you can also:

` Create or edit an XPress request type
` Export an XPress request type list to a CSV file or to a PDF file

874 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request type
Editing an XPress request type

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 875

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

Creating an XPress request type

XPress request types control the business rules and features for an XPress request
template. For example, they determine rules for Internal Customers and suppliers, and
indicate whether a template can include multiple line item options, quantity breaks, and
price components.

To create an XPress request type:

1 Click XPress in the navigation bar and select XPress Request Types from the
Requests drop-down list.
2 On the XPress Request Type List page, click Create.
3 On the Type page, fill in the fields. For details, see Field help for XPress Request
Type page.
4 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request Type List page
Editing an XPress request type

876 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

Editing an XPress request type

XPress request types control the business rules and features for an XPress request
template. For example, they determine rules for Internal Customers and suppliers, and
indicate whether a template can include multiple line item options, quantity breaks, and
price components.

To edit an XPress request type:

1 Click XPress in the navigation bar and select XPress Request Types from the
Requests drop-down list.
2 On the XPress Request Type List page, click the name of the XPress request type to
edit.
3 On the Type page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 Edit any fields. For details, see Field help for XPress Request Type page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request Type List page
Creating an XPress request type

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 877

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

XPress Request Type page

On the XPress Request Type page, you can:
` Fill in the fields for an XPress request type
` Duplicate an XPress request type

Field help for XPress Request Type page

General Info

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that the request type is inactive and unavailable
for use.
Document ID: Type a unique name for the request type.
Description: Select a language for the description from the drop-down list, and then
type the description in the text box.
Order: Type a number to specify where this type will be displayed in the type list on
the XPress Type List page.

Numbering Table: Click the Lookup icon to select a numbering table for templates
associated with this type.
Quick Request Type: Check this box to indicate that this is a quick request type. A
quick request provides Internal Customers with a description, quantity, and date to
simplify request entry.

Features

Discussions: Check this box to activate the Discussions feature for templates
associated with this type.
Attachments: Check this box to activate the Attachments feature for templates
associated with this type.
Accounting: Check this box to enable an Accounting tab in templates associated with
this type.
Specifications: Check this box to enable a Specifications tab in templates associated
with this type.
Schedules: Check this box to enable a Schedule tab in templates associated with this
type.

Rules

Allows Duplication: Check this box to allow duplication of request documents

associated with this type.

878 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Requests

Requires Internal Category: Check this box to require an Internal Category to be

selected in templates associated with this type.
Schedule Working Days: Specify the type of working days to apply to templates and
requests associated with this type.
` Calendar Days: Select this option to count all calendar days, including weekends
and holidays, when determining dates such as the delivery date and response due
date.
` Standard Work Days: Select this option to count only work days, Monday through
Friday, when determining dates such as the delivery date and response due date.

Line Item Options

Supports Line Item Attachments: Check this box to indicate that templates and
requests associated with this type will support line item attachments.
Maximum Number of Line Items: Select the maximum number of line items that
may be added by Internal Customers to requests associated with this type.
Maximum Number of Quantity Breaks: Select the maximum number of quantity
breaks that may be used in requests associated with this type.
Maximum Number of Options: Select the maximum number of line item options that
may be used in requests associated with this type.
Pricing Structure:
` Standard Price: Select this option to associate a single price with each line item.
` Component Price: Select this option to allow line item prices to be broken into
components.

Internal Customer Rules

Submit to: Select the user to whom requests will initially be submitted.
` CSR: Select this option to require a request to be reviewed by a CSR before it is
submitted to suppliers.
` Vendor: Select this option to allow a request to be submitted to suppliers without
any internal review.

Show Specifications: Check this box to allow an Internal Customer to see line item
specifications.
Show Vendors: Check this box to allow an Internal Customer to see the list of
suppliers.
Show Collaborators: Check this box to allow an Internal Customer to see the list of
collaborators.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 879

XPress Requests Buyer XPress

Show Schedule: Check this box to allow an Internal Customer to see the Schedule
tab.
Allow Internal Customer to Add Vendors: Check this box to allow an Internal
Customer to add to the list of suppliers.
Allow Internal Customer to Add Non-Approved Vendors: Check this box to allow
an Internal Customer to add suppliers that have not previously been approved.
Allow Internal Customer to View Vendor Bids: Check this box to allow an Internal
Customer to see the Bidding tab.
Allow Internal Customer to Award Business: Check this box to allow an Internal
Customer to award the XPress request to a supplier.

Vendor Rules

Vendor Rank: Select one of the following from the drop-down list. Rank information
can only be displayed in requests that do not have multiple line item options or quantity
breaks.
` Do not display rank information: Suppliers will not see any information about
rank or number of participants in the XPress request.
` Display rank: Suppliers will see their own rank in the XPress request.
` Display rank and number of participants: Suppliers will see their own rank and
the number of participants in the XPress request.

Alert and Email Notifications

Click Email Notifications to select the email notifications you want to send with the
XPress request. In the Notification dialog box, check each notification to send and then
click OK.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request Type List page
Creating an XPress request type
Editing an XPress request type

880 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Reports

XPress Reports

The XPress Reports submenu contains the following options.

Option Description

XPress Request Activity This report shows activity by CSR to manage workload and status.
by Group report
XPress Awards by Vendor This report shows the % of spend by supplier within a category to
and Category report determine how much you are spending with each supplier. This
enables an organization to determine whether some suppliers are
receiving a disproportionate share of business and whether
diversity policies are being followed, for example.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 881

XPress Reports Buyer XPress

XPress Request Activity by Group report

This report provides managers with visibility into the volume and amount of XPress
requests by group. Managers can quickly see the spend under management in their
group and drill down to view how the workload is allocated across their group.
Individual print buyers can display their list of active requests organized by phase.
You can filter the data in this report by start date and end date.
If you are a manager of a group, this report automatically displays a list of the groups
you manage. If you are a CSR with active requests, the XPress Requests Activity by
CSR report displays showing requests currently assigned to you.

XPress Request Activity by Group section

This section provides a list of the groups that you manage directly and an overview of
the activity by group.

Field Description

Group Name of user group. Click the group name to drill down to view a
list of the CSRs/buyers in this group.
Number of Requests Number of active requests currently being processed by this group.
Total Request Value Total budgeted value of requests for this group.

XPress Request Activity by Group chart

This report includes a vertical bar graph showing the budgeted value of active requests
by CSR in descending sequence.

XPress Request Activity by Group

This section provides a list of the CSRs/buyers who are members of the selected group
and their assigned workload.

Field Description

Customer Service Rep Name of user who is the designated CSR on a request. Click the user
name to see a list of requests that this CSR is currently processing.
Number of Requests Number of active requests currently being processed by this CSR.
Total Request Value Total budgeted value of requests for this CSR.

882 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Reports

This section provides a list of the subgroups that are part of the selected group.

Field Description

Group Name of user group. Click the group name to drill down to view a list of
the CSRs/buyers in this sub-group.
Number of Requests Number of active requests currently being processed by this group.
Total Request Value Total budgeted value of requests for this group.

XPress Requests by CSR

This section provides a list of the requests that the selected CSR is managing.

Field Description

Phase Name of request phase.

Phase Total Sum of budgeted value from all requests in this phase.
Title Name of request.
Job Type Type of job that describes this request.
Quote Due Date Date that a pricing quote is due from supplier.
Requestor Name of internal customer who submitted request.
Organizational Unit Name of internal customer's business unit.
Budgeted Value Budgeted value of individual request.
Total Total budgeted value for all requests managed by this CSR.

Related Topics
XPress Reports
XPress Awards by Vendor and Category report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 883

XPress Reports Buyer XPress

XPress Awards by Vendor and Category report

This report shows the % of spend by supplier within a category to determine how much
you are spending with each supplier. This enables an organization to determine
whether some suppliers are receiving a disproportionate share of business and whether
diversity policies are being followed, for example. Statistics by supplier include
invitation, participation, and awards percentages and award rank based on amount.
You can filter the data in this report by the following:
` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Category

XPress Awards by Vendor for Category chart

This section shows the distribution of spend by supplier in a pie chart or line graph,
enabling you to quickly identify which suppliers comprise the largest portion of awards
for the selected category and time period.

XPress Awards by Vendor for Category table

This table lists suppliers ranked by total awards from highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank Relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on

award amounts for the selected category and time period.
Vendor Supplier company name.
Award Amount Total amount awarded to this supplier for selected time period and
internal category. Click the award amount to see a list of the requests
that were awarded to this supplier.
# Requests Total number of request invitations that were sent to this supplier.
% Invitation Percentage of total invitations that included this supplier. % Invitation =
(# invitations to this supplier/Total # of invitations) * 100
% Participation Percentage of invitations that this supplier bid on. % Participation = (#
requests that this supplier bid on/# requests to which this supplier was
invited) * 100

884 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Buyer XPress XPress Reports

Field Description

% of # Awarded Percentage of awards to this supplier based on number of requests. %

of # Awarded = (# requests awarded to this supplier/Total # of
requests awarded) * 100
% of Award Amount Percentage of awards to this supplier based on amount. % of Award
Amount = (Total amount awarded to this supplier/Total amount
awarded) * 100
Vendor document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

XPress Awards by Vendor for Category (Detail)

This report shows a listing of the XPress awards for a given supplier when you drill
down from the Award Amount on XPress Awards by Vendor for Category report.

XPress Awards by Vendor for Category (Detail) table

The table below the chart lists awards for this supplier ranked by total spend from
highest to lowest.

Field Description

Request ID Request number

Title Request Name
Owner User name of person who entered the request
Organizational Unit Business unit of the document owner
Job Type Name of the job group for this request
Line Item Description Description of line item
Award Date Date the award was created.
Quantity Quantity awarded of this line item.
Unit Price Price per unit of measure
Award Amount Extended amount = Quantity x Unit Price

Related Topics
XPress Reports
XPress Request Activity by Group report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 885

XPress Library Buyer XPress

XPress Library

The XPress Library submenu contains the following options.

Option Description

XPress Request Specification Click to see the XPress Request Specification Libraries List
Libraries page.
Event Terms Templates Click to see the Event Terms Templates List page.
Attachment Library Click to see the Attachment Library List page

886 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Analysis
Using the Analysis page, you can generate reports that provide automatic analysis of
spending, sourcing processes, and system usage. You can use spending reports to
discover sourcing opportunities, to measure savings, and so forth. You can create
reports on demand or on a periodic basis.
Frictionless® SRM can import spend data extracted from other transactional systems
used by your company.

Confidential 887
 Analysis page

Analysis page

Reports convey analytical information about various aspects of the SRM processes.

To display the Analysis page, do one of the following:

` Click Spend and Compliance in the navigation bar and select Analysis from the
drop-down list.
` Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and select Analysis from the
drop-down list.
` Click Vendor Management in the navigation bar and select Analysis from the
drop-down list.

On the Analysis page, you can:

` Generate a report. Each of the following contains a number of reports that you can
generate.
n Spend Analysis reports
Note: This category appears only when an SRM spend environment has been
created for the user’s context and some spend data has been imported into it.
Additionally, other reports that rely on spend data will not function properly if no
data has been imported.
n Process Analysis reports
n Sourcing Analysis reports
n Document Extract reports
n Vendor Analysis reports
` View a bookmarked report
` Edit an analytic report bookmark

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

888 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Analysis page Generating an analytic report

Generating an analytic report

Reports convey analytical information about various aspects of the SRM process. You
can run reports on demand or on a periodic basis. Specifying a periodic basis for
generating a report is done in Setup under Scheduled Tasks.

To generate a report:
1 On the Analysis page, select a report name from a drop-down list.
2 Click OK. You see the report on the report display page.
3 Optionally, click Bookmark Report in the toolbar to add the report to a list of
bookmarked reports.
4 Optionally, click Export PDF in the toolbar to export the report as a PDF file.
5 Optionally, click Export Excel in the toolbar to export the report as an Excel
workbook, displaying each report results table as a separate worksheet.

Related Topics
Bookmarking an analytic report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 889

Viewing a bookmarked report Analysis page

Viewing a bookmarked report

1 On the Analysis page under Bookmarks, select a report from the My Bookmarks
drop-down list. You see the selected report on the report display page.
2 Click OK.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Bookmarking an analytic report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

890 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Analysis page Editing an analytic report bookmark

Editing an analytic report bookmark

After you create one or more bookmarks, the My Bookmarks section appears on the
Analysis page. You can edit the name and description of this section and edit
information for individual bookmarks.

To edit an analytic report bookmark:

1 On the Analysis page, under My Bookmarks, click Edit.
2 On the Summary page, edit the name and description of the My Bookmarks section.

3 Click the Edit icon for a a bookmark to edit it.

4 In the dialog box, edit the bookmark name and click OK.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Bookmarking an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 891

Editing an analytic report bookmark Analysis page

Analysis Bookmark Summary page

On the Analysis Bookmark Summary page, you can edit the name and description of
the My Bookmarks section on the Analysis page and edit information for individual
bookmarks.

Related Topics
Editing an analytic report bookmark
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report

892 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Analysis page Editing an analytic report bookmark

Analytic report display page

On the report display page, you can:
` Bookmark a report
` Export a report as a PDF file or an Excel workbook

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Bookmarking an analytic report
Bookmarking an analytic report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 893

Editing an analytic report bookmark Analysis page

Bookmarking an analytic report

You can bookmark a report for future reference. A bookmark is stored for the current
user.

To bookmark a report:
1 On the report display page, click Bookmark Report in the toolbar.
2 In the dialog box, type the name of the bookmark and click OK.
The bookmarked report appears in a list of My Bookmarks on the Analysis page.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Exporting a report as a PDF file
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Editing an analytic report bookmark

894 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Editing an analytic report bookmark

Spend Analysis reports

This category appears on the Analysis page only when an SRM spend environment has
been created for the user’s context, and some spend data has been imported into it.
Spend Analysis reports include:
` Commodity Spend reports
` Vendor Spend reports
` Organizational Spend reports
` Geographical Spend reports
` Accounts Payable Type Spend reports
` Cost Center Spend reports
` Sourcing Recommendation reports
` Compliance reports

To generate a Spend Analysis report:

1 From the drop-down list, select the report you want to generate.
2 Click OK. You see the report on the report display page.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 895

Commodity Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Commodity Spend reports

This section provides help for the reports in the Commodity Spend drop-down list in the
Spend Analysis section of the Analysis page.

Note: You can also access these reports by clicking Spend and Compliance in the
toolbar and selecting by Commodity from the drop-down list.

Commodity Spend reports are as follows.

Report Description

Cumulative Spend by This report shows a list of commodities ranked by spend with a
Commodity report running total of spend amount and % spend for a selected date
range. Rank and spend data are also graphically shown in a pie
chart and line graph. You can drill down by commodity to see
spend for the children of the selected parent.
Spend by Commodity Over This report shows total spend per commodity summarized by time
Time report period (such as years, quarters, or months) for a selected date
range. You can drill down by commodity to view spend for the
children of the selected parent and by time period to break out
the spend data into the next time period increment.
Spend by Commodity Over This report shows total spend per commodity by organization for
Organization report a selected date range. You can drill down by either commodity or
organizational unit to view spend for the units in the next level of
the hierarchy structure.
Top Spend by Commodity This report ranks the Top X commodities (where X is a number
report you define) by total spend. You can drill down by commodity to
see spend for the children of the selected parent. This report also
provides a count of the number of suppliers with spend in a
commodity with a drill-down to the list of suppliers that account
for the spend.
Top Spend by Commodity This report ranks the Top X commodities (where X is a number
in Organization report you define) by total spend for a selected date range and
organization. You can drill down by commodity to see spend for
the sub-categories of the selected parent. This report also
provides a count of the number of suppliers with spend in a
commodity with a drill down to the list of suppliers that account
for the spend.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

896 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Commodity Spend reports

Cumulative Spend by Commodity report

This report shows a list of commodities ranked by spend with a running total of spend
amount and percentage of spend for a selected date range. Rank and spend data are
also graphically shown in a pie chart and line graph. You can drill down by commodity
to see spend for the children of the selected parent.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Note: Only top-level parent commodities are listed in this report. A drill-down is
provided to view the children for the selected parent commodity.

Cumulative Spend by Commodity chart

This report section shows the spend by internal category in a pie chart or line graph,
enabling you to quickly identify which commodities comprise the largest portion of
spend for the selected time period.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 897

Commodity Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Cumulative Spend by Commodity table

The report table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest
to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other

commodities based on spend for the selected time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click this link to drill down to the
Cumulative Spend by Selected Commodity report, which details
spend for this commodity's sub-categories.
Spend The total spend for this commodity for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities)
* 100
Cumulative Spend The running total of spend for current and prior commodities in list.
Cumulative % of Spend The percentage of cumulative spend relative to total spend.
Cumulative % of Spend = (Cumulative Spend/Total Spend for all
commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

898 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Commodity Spend reports

Cumulative Spend by Selected Commodity report

This report shows the proportion of spend by sub-category when you drill down from a
parent commodity on the Cumulative Spend by Commodity report report. You can
continue to drill down through the category hierarchy by clicking the Commodity name.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Cumulative Spend by Commodity chart

This report section shows the spend by sub-category in a pie chart or line graph,
enabling you to quickly identify which commodities comprise the largest portion of
spend.

Cumulative Spend by Commodity table

The report table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest
to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other

commodities based on spend for the selected time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click this link to drill down to the next
level of the category hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this commodity for time period and spend amount
type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities)
* 100
Cumulative Spend The running total of spend for current and prior commodities in the
list.
Cumulative % of Spend The percentage of cumulative spend relative to total spend.
Cumulative % of Spend = (Cumulative Spend/Total Spend for all
commodities) * 100

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 899

Commodity Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

900 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Commodity Spend reports

Spend by Commodity Over Time report

This report shows total spend per commodity summarized by time period (such as
years, quarters, months) for a selected date range. You can drill down by commodity to
view spend for the children of the selected parent and by time period to break out the
spend data into the next time period increment.
The imported spend data and the Master Data Time Period definition determine the
time periods you see.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Note: Only top-level parent commodities are listed in this report. A drill-down is
provided to view the children for the selected parent commodity.

Spend by Commodity Over Time chart

This report section shows spend by commodity in a bar chart across one or more time
periods. You can quickly see the distribution of spend across commodities in a given
time period and spot trends in commodity spending from period to period.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 901

Commodity Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend Matrix Pivot table

The report table below the chart shows spend by commodity per time period.

Field Description

Time Period name The column heading showing the time period for the spend data. Click this
link to drill down to the Spend by Selected Commodity Over Selected
Time report to show spend broken out in the next time increment.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click this link to drill down to the Spend by
Selected Commodity Over Selected Time report, which details spend
for this commodity's sub-categories.
Spend The spend amount for this commodity and spend amount type in the time
period shown in column heading.
% Spend The percentage of total commodity spend attributable to this time period.
% Spend = (Spend for commodity in time period/Total Spend for this
commodity) * 100
Total The sum of spend for a commodity across time periods shown.
% The percentage of total spend for this commodity relative to total spend for
all commodities.
% = (Total/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

902 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Commodity Spend reports

Spend by Selected Commodity Over Selected Time report

This report shows total spend per commodity by time period for the next level in the
hierarchy structure for a selected parent commodity or time period.
If you drill down by time period from the Spend by Commodity Over Time report,
this report shows total spend per commodity broken out by the next time period
increment. For example, if you start with the yearly time period, the yearly spend data
is broken out into quarterly buckets on this report.
If you drill down by commodity from the Spend by Commodity Over Time report, this
report shows spend by sub-category for the selected parent commodity.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Selected Commodity Over Selected Time chart

This report section shows the proportion of spend by commodity in a bar chart across
one or more time periods. You can quickly see the distribution of spend across
commodities in a given time period and spot trends in commodity spending from period
to period.

Spend Matrix Pivot table

The report table below the chart shows spend by commodity broken down by time
period.

Field Description

Time Period name The column heading showing the time period for the spend data. Click this
link to drill down to see spend data broken out in next time increment.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click this link to drill down to the next level of
the category hierarchy.
Spend The spend for this commodity and spend amount type in the time period
shown in column heading.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 903

Commodity Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Field Description

% Spend The percentage of total commodity spend attributable to this time period.
% Spend = (Spend for commodity in time period/Total Spend for this
commodity) * 100
Total The sum of spend for a commodity across time periods shown.
% The percentage of total spend for this commodity relative to total spend for
all commodities.
% = (Total/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

904 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Commodity Spend reports

Spend by Commodity Over Organization report

This report shows total spend per commodity by organization for a selected date range.
You can drill down by either commodity or organizational unit to view spend for the
units in the next level of the hierarchy structure.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Note: Only top-level parent commodities are listed in this report. A drill-down is
provided to view the children for the selected parent commodity.

Spend by Commodity Over Organization chart

This report section shows the total spend per commodity by organizational unit in a bar
chart, enabling you to quickly identify which commodities comprise the largest portion
of spend.

Spend Matrix Pivot table

The report table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest
to lowest.

Field Description

Organizational unit name The column heading showing the organizational unit for the spend
data. Click this link to drill down to the Spend by Selected
Commodity Over Selected Organization report to show spend
for the next level of units in the organizational hierarchy.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click this link to drill down to the Spend
by Selected Commodity Over Selected Organization report,
which shows spend for this commodity's sub-categories.
Spend The total spend for this commodity and organization for selected time
period and spend amount type.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 905

Commodity Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Field Description

% (of Spend) The percentage of total organization spend attributable to this

commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities)
in organization * 100
Total The sum of spend for a commodity across organizations shown.
% The percentage of total spend for this commodity relative to total
spend for all commodities.
% = (Total/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

906 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Commodity Spend reports

Spend by Selected Commodity Over Selected Organization

report
This report shows total spend per commodity by organization for the next level of the
selected commodity's or organization's hierarchy structure.
If you drill down by organizational unit from the Spend by Commodity Over
Organization report, this report shows total spend per commodity summarized by the
next level in the organizational hierarchy.
If you drill down by commodity from the Spend by Commodity Over Organization
report, this report shows spend by sub-category for a selected parent commodity
(internal category).

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Note: Only top-level parent commodities are listed in this report. A drill-down is
provided to view the children for the selected parent commodity.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 907

Commodity Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Selected Commodity Over Selected Organization chart

This report section includes a bar graph showing spend by commodity per
organizational unit.

Spend Matrix Pivot table

The report table below the chart shows spend by commodity per organizational unit
with a running total of spend.

Field Description

Organizational Unit name The column heading showing the organizational unit for the spend
data. Click this link to drill down to the next level of the organizational
hierarchy.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click this link to drill down to the next
level of the category hierarchy.
Spend The spend for commodity and spend amount type in the organization
shown in column heading.
% (Spend) The percentage of total organization spend attributable to this
commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all
commodities) in organization * 100
Total The sum of spend for a commodity across organizations shown.
% The percentage of total spend for this commodity relative to total
spend for all commodities.
% = (Total/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

908 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Commodity Spend reports

Top Spend by Commodity report

This report ranks the Top X commodities (where X is a number you define) by total
spend. You can drill down by commodity to see spend for the children of the selected
parent. This report also provides a count of the number of suppliers with spend in a
commodity with a drill-down to the list of suppliers that account for the spend.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top-Ranked Commodities

Note: Only top-level parent commodities are listed in this report. A drill-down is
provided to view the children for the selected parent commodity.

Top Spend by Commodity chart

This report section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among
top-ranked commodities. You select the number of commodities to show in the filter
criteria.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 909

Commodity Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Top Spend by Commodity table

The report table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest
to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other commodities based
on spend for the selected time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click this link to view the Top Spend by Selected
Commodity report report, which drills down to the next level of the category
hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this commodity for selected time period and spend amount
type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100
Vendor Count The number of suppliers that account for the spend in this commodity. Click the
supplier count to drill down to the list of suppliers.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

910 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Commodity Spend reports

Top Spend by Selected Commodity report

This report ranks the Top X sub-categories (where X is a number you define) by total
spend, when you drill down from a parent commodity on the Top Spend by
Commodity report. You can continue to drill down through the category hierarchy by
clicking the Commodity name. This report also provides a count of the number of
suppliers with spend in a commodity with a drill down to view the list of suppliers.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top-Ranked Commodities

Top Spend by Selected Commodity chart

This report section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among
top-ranked commodities. You select the number of commodities to show in the filter
criteria.

Top Spend by Selected Commodity table

The report table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest
to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other commodities based
on spend for the selected time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click this link to drill down to the next level of the
category hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this commodity for time period and spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100
Vendor Count The number of suppliers that account for the spend amount. Click the supplier
count to drill down to the list of suppliers.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 911

Commodity Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Editing an analytic report bookmark

912 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Commodity Spend reports

Spend by Vendor for Selected Commodity report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend by supplier for a selected commodity
when you drill down from the Vendor Count on the Top Spend by Commodity report.
Additionally, this report shows a ranked listing of the spend with suppliers for a selected
commodity. You can also view this report by drilling down by commodity name on the
High Fragmentation Sourcing Opportunity report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Vendor for Selected Commodity chart

This report section includes a pie chart that shows spend by supplier for the selected
commodity.

Spend by Vendor for Selected Commodity table

The table below the chart lists suppliers ranked by total spend from highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on
spend for the selected commodity in the selected time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, click the supplier
name to view spend for the next level of business entities in the supplier's
organization.
Spend The spend with this supplier for selected commodity, time period, and
spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend with this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend with supplier/Total Spend with all suppliers) * 100
Vendor Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 913

Commodity Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Commodity report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend with a parent supplier's subsidiaries for
a selected commodity when you drill down by supplier name from the Spend by
Vendor for Selected Commodity report or the Top Spend by Commodity report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Commodity chart

This report section includes a pie chart that shows spend by subsidiary for the selected
commodity.

Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Commodity table

The report table below the chart lists subsidiaries ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on
spend for the selected commodity in the selected time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, click the supplier
name to view spend for the next level of business entities in the supplier's
organization.
Spend The spend with this supplier for selected commodity, time period, and
spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend with this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend with supplier/Total Spend with all suppliers) * 100
Vendor Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

914 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Commodity Spend reports

Top Spend by Commodity in Organization report

This report ranks the Top X commodities (where X is a number you define) by total
spend for a selected date range and organization. You can drill down by commodity to
see spend for the sub-categories of the selected parent. This report also provides a
count of the number of suppliers with spend in a commodity with a drill down to the list
of suppliers that account for the spend.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Organization
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top-Ranked Commodities

Note: Only top-level parent commodities are listed in this report. A drill-down is
provided to view the children for the selected parent commodity.

Top Spend by Commodity in Organization chart

This report section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among
top-ranked commodities within an organization. You select the number of commodities
to show in the filter criteria.

Top Spend by Commodity in Organization table

The report table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest
to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other commodities based on
spend for the selected organization and time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click this link to view the Top Spend by Selected
Commodity in Organization report, which shows the top-ranked spend for
this commodity's sub-categories.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 915

Commodity Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Field Description

Spend The spend in this commodity for selected organization, time period, and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities in
Organization) * 100
Vendor Count The number of suppliers that account for the spend in this commodity. Click the
supplier count to view the Spend by Vendor for Commodity in
Organization report, which drills down to the list of suppliers.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

916 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Commodity Spend reports

Top Spend by Selected Commodity in Organization report

This report ranks the Top X sub-categories (where X is a number you define) by total
spend when you drill down from a parent commodity on the Top Spend by
Commodity in Organization report. You can continue to drill down through the
category hierarchy by clicking the Commodity name. This report also provides a count
of the number of suppliers with spend in a commodity with a drill-down to the list of
suppliers that account for the spend.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top Ranked Commodities

Top Spend by Selected Commodity in Organization chart

This report section includes a pie chart showing the top-ranked sub-categories,
according to spend in the selected organization.

Top Spend by Selected Commodity in Organization table

The report table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest
to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other commodities based
on spend for the selected time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name.Click this link to drill down to the next level of the
category hierarchy.
Spend The spend in this commodity for selected organization, time period, and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities in
Organization) * 100
Vendor Count The number of suppliers that account for the spend amount. Click the supplier
count to drill down to the list of suppliers.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 917

Commodity Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Viewing a bookmarked report

Editing an analytic report bookmark

918 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Commodity Spend reports

Spend by Vendor for Commodity in Organization report

This report shows a ranked listing of the selected organization's spend by supplier for a
selected commodity when you drill down from the Vendor Count on the Top Spend by
Commodity in Organization report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Vendor for Commodity in Organization chart

This report section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend by supplier for
the selected organization and commodity.

Spend by Vendor for Commodity in Organization table

The report table below the chart lists suppliers ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on
spend for the selected commodity in the selected time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name.
Spend The spend with this supplier for selected organization, commodity, time
period, and spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100
Vendor Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier master record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 919

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Vendor Spend reports

This section provides help for the reports in the Vendor Spend drop-down list in the
Spend Analysis section of the Analysis page.

Note: You can also access these reports by clicking Spend and Compliance in the
toolbar and selecting by Vendor from the drop-down list.

Vendor Spend reports are as follows.

Report Description

Cumulative Spend by This report shows a list of suppliers ranked by spend with a
Vendor report running total of spend amount and % spend for a selected date
range. You can drill down on a parent supplier to see spend for
the next level of business entities in the supplier's organization.
One-click access to the supplier management record lets you
quickly review supplier details.
Spend by Vendor Over This report shows spend by supplier across time periods (such as
Time report years, quarters, or months) for a selected date range. You can
drill down by supplier to see spend for the next level of business
entities in the supplier's organization, or by time period to see
spend data broken out by the next time period increment.
Top Spend by Vendor This report ranks the Top X suppliers (where X is a number
report you define) by total spend. You can drill down by supplier to see
spend for the next level of business entities in the supplier's
organization. This report also provides a count of the number of
commodities that account for spend with a supplier and a drill
down to the list of commodities.
Top Spend by Vendor in This report ranks the Top X suppliers (where X is a number
Organization report you define) by total spend for a selected date range and
organization. You can drill down by supplier to see spend for the
next level of business entities in the supplier's organization. This
report also provides a count of the number of commodities with
spend for a supplier and a drill-down to the list of commodities
that account for the spend.
Spend by Vendor for This report lists the top suppliers by total spend for a selected
Commodity report commodity. You can drill down by supplier to see spend for the
next level of business entities in the supplier's organization.
Spend with Non-Approved This report shows spend with approved versus non-approved
Vendors Over Time report suppliers across time periods for a selected date range. You can
drill down by time period to see spend data broken out by the
next time period increment. This report also provides a count of
the number of suppliers that account for the spend in a time
period and a drill-down to the list of supplier names.

920 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 921

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Cumulative Spend by Vendor report

This report shows a list of suppliers ranked by spend with a running total of spend
amount and percentage of spend for a selected date range. You can drill down on a
parent supplier to see spend for the next level of business entities in the supplier's
organization. One-click access to the supplier management record lets you quickly
review supplier details.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Cumulative Spend by Vendor chart

This section shows the distribution of spend by supplier in a pie chart or line graph,
enabling you to quickly identify which suppliers comprise the largest portion of spend
for the selected time period.

922 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Cumulative Spend by Vendor table

The table below the chart lists suppliers ranked by total spend from highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based
on spend for the selected time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click
the supplier name to view the Cumulative Spend by Selected
Vendor report, which shows spend for the next level of business
entities in the supplier's organization.
Spend The total spend for this supplier for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100
Cumulative Spend The running total of spend for current and prior suppliers in list.
Cumulative % of Spend The percentage of cumulative spend relative to total spend.
Cumulative % of Spend = (Cumulative Spend/Total Spend for all
suppliers) * 100
Vendor document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 923

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Cumulative Spend by Selected Vendor report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend with a parent vendor's subsidiaries
when you drill down from the Vendor name on the Cumulative Spend by Vendor
report. You can continue to drill down through the supplier hierarchy by clicking the
Vendor name.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Cumulative Spend by Selected Vendor chart

This section shows the distribution of spend by subsidiary in a pie chart or line graph
enabling you to quickly identify which suppliers account for the largest portion of
spend.

Cumulative Spend by Selected Vendor table

The table below the chart lists suppliers ranked by total spend from highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based
on spend for the selected time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click
the supplier name to view spend for the next level of business entities
in the supplier's organization
Spend The total spend for this supplier for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100
Cumulative Spend The running total of spend for current and prior suppliers in list.
Cumulative % of Spend The percentage of cumulative spend relative to total spend.
Cumulative % of Spend = (Cumulative Spend/Total Spend for all
suppliers) * 100
Vendor document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

924 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 925

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Vendor Over Time report

This report shows spend by supplier across time periods (such as years, quarters, or
months) for a selected date range. You can drill down on a parent supplier to see spend
for the next level of business entities in the supplier's organization or time period to see
spend data broken out by the next time period increment.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Note: The imported spend data and the Master Data Time Period definition determine
the time periods you see.

Spend by Vendor Over Time chart

This section shows spend by supplier in a bar chart across one or more time periods.
You can quickly see the distribution of spend across suppliers in a given time period and
spot trends in supplier spending from period to period.

Spend Matrix Pivot with Document table

The table below the chart shows spend by commodity per time period.

Field Description

Time Period name The column heading showing the time period for the spend data. Click this
link to drill down to the Spend by Selected Vendor Over Selected Time
report to show spend broken out in next time increment.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click the
supplier name to view spend for the next level of business entities in the
supplier's organization.
Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.
Spend The total spend with this supplier for selected time period and spend
amount type.

926 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Field Description

% Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier.

% of Spend = (Spend for supplier/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100
Total The sum of spend for a supplier across time periods shown.
% The percentage of total spend with this supplier relative to total spend for all
suppliers.
Cumulative % of Spend = (Total/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 927

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Selected Vendor Over Selected Time report

This report shows total spend per supplier by time period for the next level in the
hierarchy structure for a selected parent supplier or time period.
If you drill down by time period from the Spend by Vendor Over Time report, this
report shows total spend per supplier broken out by the next time period increment.
For example, if you start at the yearly time period, the yearly spend data is broken out
into quarterly buckets on this report.
If you drill down by supplier from the Spend by Vendor Over Time report, this report
shows spend by subsidiary for a selected parent supplier.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Selected Vendor Over Selected Time chart

This section shows the proportion of spend by supplier in a bar chart across one or
more time periods. You can quickly see the distribution of spend across suppliers in a
given time period and spot trends in supplier spend from period to period.

Spend Matrix Pivot table

The table below the chart shows spend by supplier broken down by time period.

Field Description

Vendor ID The supplier number.

Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click the
supplier name to view spend for the next level of business entities in the
supplier's organization.
Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.
Spend The total spend with this supplier for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100
Total The sum of spend for a supplier across time periods shown.
% The percentage of total spend with this supplier relative to total spend for all
suppliers.
Cumulative % of Spend = (Total/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100

928 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 929

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Top Spend by Vendor report

This report ranks the Top X suppliers (where X is a number you define) by total spend.
You can drill down by supplier to see spend for the next level of business entities in the
supplier's organization. This report also provides a count of the number of commodities
that account for spend with a supplier and a drill down to the list of commodities.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top Ranked Vendors

Top Spend by Vendor chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among top-ranked
suppliers. You select the number of suppliers to show in the filter criteria.

Top Spend by Vendor table

The table below the chart lists suppliers ranked by total spend from highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on
spend for the selected time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click the
supplier name to view the Top Spend by Selected Vendor report,
which shows spend for the next level of business entities in the supplier's
organization.
Spend The total spend with this supplier for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100
Commodity Count The number of commodities that account for the spend with this supplier.
Click the commodity count to drill down to the list of commodities.
Vendor Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report

930 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Viewing a bookmarked report

Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 931

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Top Spend by Selected Vendor report

This report ranks the Top X subsidiaries (where X is a number you define) by total
spend for a selected supplier when you drill down from a parent supplier on the Top
Spend by Vendor report. You can continue to drill down through the supplier
hierarchy by clicking the Vendor name. This report also provides a count of the number
of commodities that account for spend with a supplier and a drill down to view the list of
commodities.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top Ranked Vendors

Top Spend by Selected Vendor chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among top-ranked
subsidiaries. You can select the number of suppliers to show in the filter criteria.

Top Spend by Selected Vendor table

The table below the chart lists suppliers ranked by total spend from highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on
spend for the selected time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. Click the supplier name to drill down to the
next level of the supplier hierarchy.
Spend The total spend with this supplier for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100
Commodity Count The number of commodities that account for the spend with this supplier.
Click the commodity count to drill down to the list of commodities.
Vendor Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report

932 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Viewing a bookmarked report

Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 933

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Commodity for Selected Vendor report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend by commodity for a selected supplier
when you drill down from the Commodity Count on the Top Spend by Vendor report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Commodity Selected Vendor chart

This section includes a pie chart that shows the distribution of spend by commodity for
the selected supplier.

Spend by Commodity Selected Vendor table

The table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other commodities

based on spend for the commodity in the selected time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. click the category name to view the Spend by
Selected Commodity for Selected Vendor report, which shows the
spend for sub-categories of this commodity.
Spend The spend for this commodity for selected supplier, date range, and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

934 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Vendor report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend with a selected supplier by sub-category
when you drill down from a parent commodity on the Spend by Commodity for
Selected Vendor report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Selected Commodity Selected Vendor chart

This section includes a pie chart that shows the distribution of spend with a selected
supplier among sub-categories.

Spend by Selected Commodity Selected Vendor table

The table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other commodities

based on spend for the commodity in the selected time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. click the category name to view the Spend by
Selected Commodity for Selected Vendor report, which shows the
spend for sub-categories of this commodity.
Spend The spend for this commodity for selected supplier, date range, and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 935

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Top Spend by Vendor in Organization report

This report ranks the Top X (where X is a number you define) suppliers by total spend
for a selected date range and organization. You can drill down by supplier to see spend
for the next level of business entities in the supplier's organization. This report also
provides a count of the number of commodities with spend for a supplier and a drill
down to the list of commodities that account for the spend.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Organization
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top Ranked Vendors

Top Spend by Vendor in Organization chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of a selected organization's
spend among top-ranked suppliers. You select the number of suppliers to show in the
filter criteria.

Top Spend by Vendor in Organization table

The table below the chart lists suppliers ranked by total spend from highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on spend
for the selected organization and time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click the supplier
name to view the Top Spend by Selected Vendor in Organization report,
which drills down to the next level of business entities in the supplier's
organization.
Spend The total spend with this supplier for selected organization, time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100
Commodity The number of commodities that account for the spend with this supplier. Click
Count the commodity count to drill down to the list of commodities.
Vendor Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.
Document

936 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 937

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Top Spend by Selected Vendor in Organization report

This report ranks the Top X subsidiaries (where X is a number you define) by total
spend in a selected organization when you drill down from a parent supplier on the Top
Spend by Vendor report. You can continue to drill down by supplier to see spend for the
next level of business entities in the supplier's organization. This report also provides a
count of the number of commodities with spend for a supplier and a drill down to the
list of commodities that account for the spend.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top Ranked Vendors

Top Spend by Selected Vendor in Organization chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of a selected organization's
spend among top-ranked suppliers. You select the number of suppliers to show in the
filter criteria.

Top Spend by Selected Vendor in Organization table

The table below the chart, shows spend by subsidiary for a selected organization.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on spend
for the selected organization and time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click the supplier
name to continue to drill down to the spend data for the next level of the supplier
hierarchy.
Spend The total spend with this supplier for selected organization, time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100
Commodity The number of commodities that account for the spend with this supplier. Click
Count the commodity count to drill down to the list of commodities.
Vendor Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.
Document

938 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 939

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Commodity for Vendor in Organization report

This report shows a ranked listing of an organization's spend by commodity with a
selected supplier when you drill down from the Commodity Count on the Top Spend by
Vendor in Organization report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Commodity for Vendor in Organization chart

This section includes a pie chart that shows the distribution of spend by commodity for
a selected supplier and organization.

Spend by Commodity for in Organization table

The table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other commodities based
on spend with the selected supplier, organization, and time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click the category name to continue to drill down to
the spend data for the next level of the category hierarchy.
Spend The spend for this commodity with selected supplier and organization for date
range and spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

940 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Spend by Vendor for Commodity report

This report lists suppliers by total spend for a selected commodity. You can drill down
by supplier to see spend for the next level of business entities in the supplier's
organization.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Commodity ID
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Vendor for Commodity chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among suppliers for a
selected commodity.

Spend by Vendor for Commodity table

The table below the chart lists suppliers ranked by total spend from highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on
spend for the selected commodity and time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click the
supplier name to view the Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected
Commodity report, which shows spend for the next level of business
entities in the supplier's organization.
Spend The total spend for this supplier for selected commodity, time period, and
spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100
Vendor Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 941

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Vendor for Selected Commodity report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend by supplier for a selected commodity
when you drill down from the Spend by Vendor for Commodity report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Vendor for Selected Commodity chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among suppliers for a
selected commodity.

Spend by Vendor for Selected Commodity table

The table below the chart lists suppliers ranked by total spend from highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on
spend for the selected commodity and time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click the
supplier name to view spend for the next level of business entities in the
supplier’s organization.
Spend The total spend for this supplier for selected commodity, time period, and
spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100
Vendor Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

942 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Commodity report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend with a parent supplier's subsidiaries for
a selected commodity when you drill down from the Vendor name on the Spend by
Vendor for Selected Commodity report or Spend by Vendor for Commodity
report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Commodity chart

This section includes a pie chart that shows spend by subsidiary for the selected
commodity.

Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Commodity table

The table below the chart lists subsidiaries ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on
spend for the selected commodity and time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click the
supplier name to view spend for the next level of business entities in the
supplier’s organization.
Spend The total spend for this supplier for selected commodity, time period, and
spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100
Vendor Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 943

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend with Non-Approved Vendors Over Time report

This report shows spend with approved versus non-approved suppliers across time
periods (such as years, quarters, months) for a selected date range. You can drill down
by time period to see spend data broken out by the next time period increment. This
report also provides a count of the number of suppliers that account for the spend in a
time period and a drill down to see the list of suppliers names.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Note: The imported spend data and the Master Data Time Period definition determines
the time periods you see.

Spend with Non-Approved Vendors Over Time chart

This section includes a vertical stacked bar graph showing spend across one or more
time periods. A time period's bar may include different color stacks representing the
portion of spend with approved and non-approved suppliers.

944 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Spend with Non-Approved Vendors Over Time table

The table below the chart shows spend with approved versus non-approved suppliers
per time period.

Field Description

Time Period name The column heading showing the time period for the spend data. Click this
link to drill down to the Spend with Non-Approved Vendors Over
Selected Time report to show spend with non-approved suppliers broken
out in the next time increment.
Vendor Status The Approved or Non-Approved label.
Spend The total spend for this supplier status for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier status in this time
period.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier status/Total Spend for all suppliers) in
time period * 100
Vendors The number of suppliers that account for the spend in a time period. Click
the count to drill down to the list of supplier names.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 945

Vendor Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend with Non-Approved Vendors Over Selected Time report

This report shows spend with approved versus non-approved suppliers broken out by
the next time period increment when you drill down by time period from the Spend
with Non-Approved Vendors Over Time report. For example, if you start at the
yearly time period, the yearly spend data is broken out into quarterly buckets on this
report.

Note: The imported spend data and the Master Data Time Period definition determines
the time periods you see.

Spend with Non-Approved Vendors Over Selected Time chart

This section includes a vertical stacked bar graph showing spend across one or more
time periods. A time period's bar may include different color stacks representing the
portion of spend with approved and non-approved suppliers.

Spend with Non-Approved Vendors Over Time table

The table below the chart shows spend with approved versus non-approved suppliers
per time period.

Field Description

Time Period name The column heading showing the time period for the spend data.
Vendor Status The Approved or Non-Approved label.
Spend The total spend for this supplier status for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier status in this time
period.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier status/Total Spend for all suppliers) in
time period * 100
Vendors The number of suppliers that account for the spend in a time period. Click
the count to drill down to the list of supplier names.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

946 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Vendor Spend reports

Spend by Vendor for Selected Vendor Status report

This report ranks the Top X approved or non-approved suppliers (where X is a number
you define) by total spend when you drill down from the Vendor count on the Spend
with Non-Approved Vendors Over Time report.
You can filter this report by the number of Top-Ranked Vendors.

Spend by Vendor for Selected Vendor Status chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the proportion of spend by supplier for the
selected supplier status.

Spend by Vendor for Selected Vendor Status table

The table below the chart lists suppliers ranked by total spend from highest to lowest.
The number of suppliers shown is determined by the filter criteria.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on
spend for the selected supplier status and date range.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name.
Spend The total spend for this supplier (including subsidiaries) for selected time
period and spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend for supplier/Total Spend for all suppliers) * 100
Vendor Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 947

Organizational Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Organizational Spend reports

This section provides help for the reports in the Organizational Spend drop-down list in
the Spend Analysis section of the Analysis page.

Note: You can also access these reports by clicking Spend and Compliance in the
toolbar and selecting by Organization from the drop-down list.

Organizational Spend reports are as follows.

Report Description

Cumulative Spend by This report shows a list of organizations ranked by spend with a
Organization report running total of spend amount and % spend for a selected date
range. You can drill down by company to view spend for the
organizational units in the next level of the hierarchy structure.
Spend by Organization This report shows spend by organization across time periods
Over Time report (such as years, quarters, or months) for a selected date range.
You can drill down on a parent company to see spend for the next
level of units in the organizational hierarchy, or by time period to
see spend data broken out by the next time period increment.
Top Spend by Organization This report ranks the Top X organizations (where X is a number
report you define) by total spend for a selected date range. This report
also provides a count of the number of commodities and suppliers
with spend from an organization and a drill-down to the list of
commodities and suppliers that account for the spend.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

948 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Organizational Spend reports

Cumulative Spend by Organization report

This report shows a list of organizations ranked by spend with a running total of spend
amount and percentage of spend for a selected date range. You can drill down by
company to view spend for the organizational units in the next level of the hierarchy
structure.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Cumulative Spend by Organization chart

This section shows the distribution of spend by organization in a pie chart or line graph
enabling you to quickly identify which units account for the largest portion of spend for
the selected time period.

Cumulative Spend by Organization table

The table below the chart lists organizational units ranked by total spend from highest
to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this organization compared to other units based on
spend for the selected time period.
Organization ID The organization number.
Organization The company name. If this is a parent organization, you can click the
organization name to view the Cumulative Spend by Selected
Organization report, which shows spend for the next level of organizational
units in this company.
Spend The total spend for this organization for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this organization.
% of Spend = (Spend for organization /Total Spend for all units) * 100
Cumulative Spend The running total of spend for current and prior organizations in list.
Cumulative % of The percentage of cumulative spend relative to total spend.
Spend
Cumulative % of Spend = (Cumulative Spend/Total Spend for all
organizations) * 100

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 949

Organizational Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

950 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Organizational Spend reports

Cumulative Spend by Selected Organization report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend with a parent company's organizational
units when you drill down by organization from the Cumulative Spend by
Organization report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Cumulative Spend by Selected Organization chart

This section shows the distribution of spend by organizational unit in a pie chart or line
graph, enabling you to quickly identify which units account for the largest portion of
spend.

Cumulative Spend by Selected Organization table

The table below the chart lists organizations ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this organization compared to other units based on
spend for the selected time period.
Organization ID The organization number.
Organization The company name. If this is a parent organization, you can click the
organization name to continue drilling down through the organization
hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this organization for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this organization.
% of Spend = (Spend for organization /Total Spend for all units) * 100
Cumulative Spend The running total of spend for current and prior organizations in list.
Cumulative % of The percentage of cumulative spend relative to total spend.
Spend
Cumulative % of Spend = (Cumulative Spend/Total Spend for all
organizations) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 951

Organizational Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Viewing a bookmarked report

Editing an analytic report bookmark

952 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Organizational Spend reports

Spend by Organization Over Time report

This report shows spend by organization across time periods (such as years, quarters,
months) for a selected date range. You can drill down on a parent company to see
spend for the next level of units in the organizational hierarchy or time period to see
spend data broken out by the next time period increment.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Note: The imported spend data and the Master Data Time Period definition determines
the time periods you see.

Spend by Organization Over Time chart

This section shows spend by organization in a bar chart across one or more time
periods. You can quickly see the distribution of spend across units in a given time
period and spot trends in organization spending from period to period.

Spend by Organization Over Time table

The table below the chart shows spend by organization per time period.

Field Description

Time Period name The column heading showing the time period for the spend data. Click this
link to drill down to the Spend by Selected Organization Over
Selected Time report to show spend broken out in next time increment.
Organization ID The organization number.
Organization The company name. If this is a parent organization, you can click the
organization name to view the Spend by Selected Organization Over
Selected Time report, which shows spend for the next level of
organizational units in this company.
Spend The total spend for this organization for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% (of Spend) The percentage of total spend attributable to this organization.
% of Spend = (Spend for organization /Total Spend for all units) * 100
Total The sum of spend for an organization across time periods shown.
% The percentage of total spend with this organization relative to total spend
for all units.
Cumulative % of Spend = (Total/Total Spend for all organizations) * 100

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 953

Organizational Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

954 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Organizational Spend reports

Spend by Selected Organization Over Selected Time report

This report shows total spend per organization by time period for the next level in the
hierarchy structure for a selected parent company or time period.
If you drill down by time period from the Spend by Organization Over Time report,
this report shows total spend per organization broken out by the next time period
increment. For example, if you start at the yearly time period, the yearly spend data is
broken out into quarterly buckets on this report.
If you drill down from the Spend by Organization Over Time report by organization, this
report shows spend by organizational unit for a selected parent company.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Selected Organization Over Selected Time chart

This section shows the proportion of spend by organization in a bar chart across one or
more time periods. You can quickly see the distribution of spend across units in a given
time period and spot trends in organization spend from period to period.

Spend Matrix Pivot table

The table below the chart shows spend by organization broken down by time period.

Field Description

Organization ID The organization number.

Organization The company name. If this is a parent organization, you can click the
organization name to continue drilling down through the organization
hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this organization for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% (of Spend) The percentage of total spend attributable to this organization.
% of Spend = (Spend for organization /Total Spend for all units) * 100
Total The sum of spend for an organization across time periods shown.
% The percentage of total spend with this organization relative to total spend
for all units.
Cumulative % of Spend = (Total/Total Spend for all organizations) * 100

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 955

Organizational Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

956 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Organizational Spend reports

Top Spend by Organization report

This report ranks the Top X organizations (where X is a number you define) by total
spend for a selected date range. This report also provides a count of the number of
commodities and suppliers with spend from an organization and a drill down to the list
of commodities and suppliers that account for the spend.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top Ranked Organizations

Top Spend by Organization chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among top-ranked
organizations. You select the number of organizations to show in the filter criteria.

Top Spend by Organization table

The table below the chart lists organizations ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this organization compared to other units based
on spend for the selected time period.
Organization ID The organization number.
Organization The company name. If this is a parent organization, you can click the
organization name to view the Top Spend by Selected Organization
report, which shows spend for the next level of organizational units in
this company.
Spend The total spend for this organization for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this organization.
% of Spend = (Spend for organization /Total Spend for all units) * 100
Vendor Count The number of suppliers that account for the spend with this
organization. Click the supplier count to drill down to the list of suppliers.
Commodity Count The number of commodities that account for the spend with this
organization. Click the commodity count to drill down to the list of
commodities.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 957

Organizational Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

958 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Organizational Spend reports

Top Spend by Selected Organization report

This report ranks the Top X organizations (where X is a number you define) by total
spend for a when you drill down from a parent company on the Top Spend by
Organization report. You can continue to drill down through the organizational
hierarchy by clicking the organization name. This report also provides a count of the
number of commodities and suppliers that account for spend with a unit and a drill
down to view the list of commodities and suppliers.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top Ranked Organizations

Top Spend by Selected Organization chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among top-ranked
organizational units. You can select the number of organizations to show in the filter
criteria.

Top Spend by Selected Organization table

The table below the chart lists organizations ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this organization compared to other units based
on spend for the selected time period.
Organization ID The organization number.
Organization The company name. If this is a parent organization, you can click the
organization name to continue drilling down to the next level of
organizational units in this company.
Spend The total spend for this organization for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this organization.
% of Spend = (Spend for organization /Total Spend for all units) * 100
Vendor Count The number of suppliers that account for the spend with this
organization. Click the supplier count to drill down to the list of suppliers.
Commodity Count The number of commodities that account for the spend with this
organization. Click the commodity count to drill down to the list of
commodities.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 959

Organizational Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

960 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Organizational Spend reports

Spend by Vendor for Selected Organization report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend by supplier for a selected organization
when you drill down from the Vendor Count on the Top Spend by Organization
report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Vendor for Selected Organization chart

This section includes a pie chart that shows spend by supplier for the selected
organization.

Spend by Vendor for Selected Organization table

The table below the chart lists suppliers ranked by total spend from highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on
spend for the selected organization in the selected time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click the
supplier name to view spend for the next level of business entities in the
supplier's organization.
Spend The spend with this supplier for selected organization, time period, and
spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend with this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend with supplier/Total Spend with all suppliers) * 100
Vendor Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 961

Organizational Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Organization report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend by subsidiaries for a selected parent
supplier when you drill down by supplier name from the Spend by Vendor for
Selected Organization report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Organization chart

This section includes a pie chart that shows spend by supplier for the selected
organization.

Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Organization table

The table below the chart lists suppliers ranked by total spend from highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on
spend for the selected organization in the selected time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click the
supplier name to view spend for the next level of business entities in the
supplier's organization.
Spend The spend with this supplier for selected organization, time period, and
spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend with this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend with supplier/Total Spend with all suppliers) * 100
Vendor Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

962 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Organizational Spend reports

Spend by Commodity for Selected Organization report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend by commodity for a selected
organization when you drill down by Commodity Count from the Top Spend by
Organization report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Commodity for Selected Organization chart

This section includes a pie chart that shows the distribution of spend by commodity for
the selected organization.

Spend by Commodity for Selected Organization table

The table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other commodities based
on spend for the commodity in the selected time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click the category name to view the Spend by
Selected Commodity for Selected Organization report, which shows the
spend for sub-categories of this commodity.
Spend The spend for this commodity for selected organization, date range, and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 963

Organizational Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Organization report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend with a selected organization by
sub-category when you drill down from a parent commodity on the Spend by
Commodity for Selected Organization report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Organization chart

This section includes a pie chart that shows the distribution of spend with a selected
organization among sub-categories.

Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Organization table

The table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other commodities based
on spend for the commodity in the selected time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click the category name to continue to drill down to
the spend data for the next level of the category hierarchy.
Spend The spend for this commodity for selected organization, date range, and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

964 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Geographical Spend reports

Geographical Spend reports

This section provides help for the reports in the Geographical Spend drop-down list in
the Spend Analysis section of the Analysis page.

Note: You can also access these reports by clicking Spend and Compliance in the
toolbar and selecting by Geographical from the drop-down list.

Geographical Spend reports are as follows.

Report Description

Cumulative Spend by This report shows a list of geographies ranked by spend with a
Geography report running total of spend amount and % spend for a selected date
range. You can drill down by geography to view spend for the
units in the next level of the hierarchy structure.
Spend by Geography Over This report shows spend by geography across time periods (such
Time report as years, quarters, or months) for a selected date range. You can
drill down on a parent geography to see spend for the next level
of units in the hierarchy, or by time period to see spend data
broken out by the next time period increment.
Top Spend by Geography This report ranks the Top X geographies (where X is a number
report you define) by total spend for a selected date range. This report
also provides a count of the number of commodities and suppliers
with spend from a geography and a drill down to the list of
commodities and suppliers that account for the spend.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 965

Geographical Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Cumulative Spend by Geography report

This report shows a list of geographies ranked by spend with a running total of spend
amount and percentage of spend for a selected date range. You can drill down by
geography to view spend for the units in the next level of the hierarchy structure.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Cumulative Spend by Geography chart

This section shows the distribution of spend by geography in a pie chart or line graph
enabling you to quickly identify which areas account for the largest portion of spend for
the selected time period.

Cumulative Spend by Geography table

The table below the chart lists geographies ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this geography compared to other areas based on spend
for the selected time period.
Geography ID The geography external ID.
Geography The geography name. If this is a parent geography, you can click the geography
name to view the Cumulative Spend by Selected Geography report, which
shows spend for the next level in the geography hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this geography for selected time period and spend amount
type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this geography.
% of Spend = (Spend for geography /Total Spend for all geographies) * 100
Cumulative The running total of spend for current and prior geographies in list.
Spend
Cumulative % of The percentage of cumulative spend relative to total spend.
Spend
Cumulative % of Spend = (Cumulative Spend/Total Spend for all geographies) *
100

966 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Geographical Spend reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 967

Geographical Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Cumulative Spend by Selected Geography report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend with sub-geographies when you drill
down by geography from the Cumulative Spend by Organization report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Cumulative Spend by Selected Geography chart

This section shows the distribution of spend by geography in a pie chart or line graph
enabling you to quickly identify which areas account for the largest portion of spend.

Cumulative Spend by Selected Geography table

The table below the chart lists geographies ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this geography compared to other areas based on spend
for the selected time period.
Geography ID The geography external ID.
Geography The geography name. If this is a parent geography, you can click the geography
name to continue drilling down through the geography hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this geography for selected time period and spend amount
type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this geography.
% of Spend = (Spend for geography /Total Spend for all geographies) * 100
Cumulative The running total of spend for current and prior geographies in list.
Spend
Cumulative % of The percentage of cumulative spend relative to total spend.
Spend
Cumulative % of Spend = (Cumulative Spend/Total Spend for all geographies) *
100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report

968 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Geographical Spend reports

Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 969

Geographical Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Geography Over Time report

This report shows spend by geography across time periods (such as years, quarters,
months) for a selected date range. You can drill down on a parent geography to see
spend for the next level of units in the hierarchy or time period to see spend data
broken out by the next time period increment.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Note: The imported spend data and the Master Data Time Period definition determines
the time periods you see.

Spend by Geography Over Time chart

This section shows spend by geography in a bar chart across one or more time periods.
You can quickly see the distribution of spend across areas in a given time period and
spot trends in spend by area from period to period.

Spend Matrix Pivot table

The table below the chart shows spend by geography per time period.

Field Description

Time Period name The column heading showing the time period for the spend data. Click this
link to drill down to the Spend by Selected Geography Over Selected
Time report to show spend broken out in next time increment.
Geography ID The geography external ID.
Geography The geography name. If this is a parent geography, you can click the
geography name to view the Spend by Selected Geography Over
Selected Time report, which shows spend for the next level of the
geographical hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this geography for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% (of Spend) The percentage of total spend attributable to this geography.
% of Spend = (Spend for geography /Total Spend for all areas) * 100
Total The sum of spend for this geography across time periods shown.
% The percentage of total spend with this geography relative to total spend
for all areas.
Cumulative % of Spend = (Total/Total Spend for all geographies) * 100

970 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Geographical Spend reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 971

Geographical Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Selected Geography Over Selected Time report

This report shows total spend per geography by time period for the next level in the
hierarchy structure for a selected parent geography or time period.
If you drill down by time period from the Spend by Geography Over Time report,
this report shows total spend per geography broken out by the next time period
increment. For example, if you start at the yearly time period, the yearly spend data is
broken out into quarterly buckets on this report.
If you drill down from the Spend by Geography Over Time report by geography, this
report shows spend by area for a selected parent geography.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Selected Geography Over Selected Time chart

This section shows the proportion of spend by geography in a bar chart across one or
more time periods. You can quickly see the distribution of spend across areas in a given
time period and spot trends in spend by area from period to period.

Spend Matrix Pivot table

The table below the chart shows spend by geography per time period.

Field Description

Geography ID The geography external ID.

Geography The geography name. If this is a parent geography, you can click the
geography name to view spend for the next level of the geography
hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this geography for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% (of Spend) The percentage of total spend attributable to this geography.
% of Spend = (Spend for geography /Total Spend for all areas) * 100
Total The sum of spend for this geography across time periods shown.
% The percentage of total spend with this geography relative to total spend
for all areas.
Cumulative % of Spend = (Total/Total Spend for all geographies) * 100

972 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Geographical Spend reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 973

Geographical Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Top Spend by Geography report

This report ranks the Top X geographies (where X is a number you define) by total
spend for a selected date range. This report also provides a count of the number of
commodities and suppliers with spend from a geography and a drill down to the list of
commodities that account for the spend.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top-Ranked Geographies

Top Spend by Geography chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among top-ranked
geographies. You select the number of geographies to show in the filter criteria.

Top Spend by Geography table

The table below the chart lists geographies ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this geography compared to other areas based on
spend for the selected time period.
Geography ID The geography external ID.
Geography The geography name. If this is a parent geography, you can click the
geography name to view the Top Spend by Selected Geography report,
which shows spend for the next level of the geographical hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this geography for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this geography.
% of Spend = (Spend for geography /Total Spend for all areas) * 100
Commodity Count The number of commodities that account for the spend in this geography.
Click the commodity count to drill down to the list of commodities.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report

974 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Geographical Spend reports

Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 975

Geographical Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Top Spend by Selected Geography report

This report ranks the Top X geographies (where X is a number you define) by total
spend for a when you drill down from a parent geography on the Top Spend by
Geography report. You can continue to drill down through the geographical hierarchy
by clicking the geography name. This report also provides a count of the number of
commodities that account for spend with an area and a drill down to view the list of
commodities.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top-Ranked Geographies

Top Spend by Selected Geography chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among top-ranked
geographies. You can select the number of geographies to show in the filter criteria.

Top Spend by Selected Geography table

The table below the chart lists geographies ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this geography compared to other areas based on
spend for the selected time period.
Geography ID The geography external ID.
Geography The geography name. If this is a parent geography, you can click the
geography name to continue drilling down to the next level of the
geographical hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this geography for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this geography.
% of Spend = (Spend for geography /Total Spend for all areas) * 100
Commodity Count The number of commodities that account for the spend in this geography.
Click the commodity count to drill down to the list of commodities.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report

976 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Geographical Spend reports

Viewing a bookmarked report

Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 977

Geographical Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Commodity for Selected Geography report

This report ranks the Top X geographies (where X is a number you define) by total
spend for a when you drill down from a parent geography on the Top Spend by
Geography report. You can continue to drill down through the geographical hierarchy
by clicking the geography name. This report also provides a count of the number of
commodities that account for spend with an area and a drill down to view the list of
commodities.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Commodity for Selected Geography chart

This section includes a pie chart that shows the distribution of spend by commodity for
the selected geography.

Spend by Commodity for Selected Geography table

The table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other commodities based on
spend for the commodity in the selected time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID
Commodity The internal category name. Click the category name to view the Spend by
Selected Commodity for Selected Geography report, which shows the
spend for sub-categories of this commodity.
Spend The spend for this commodity for selected geography, date range, and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

978 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Geographical Spend reports

Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Geography report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend with a selected geography by
sub-category when you drill down from a parent commodity on the Spend by
Commodity for Selected Geography report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Geography chart

This section includes a pie chart that shows the distribution of spend with a selected
geography among sub-categories.

Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Geography table

The table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other commodities based on
spend for the commodity in the selected time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click the category name to continue to drill down to
the spend data for the next level of the category hierarchy.
Spend The spend for this commodity for selected geography, date range, and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 979

Accounts Payable Type Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Accounts Payable Type Spend reports

This section provides help for the reports in the Accounts Payable Type Spend
drop-down list in the Spend Analysis section of the Analysis page.

Note: You can also access these reports by clicking Spend and Compliance in the
toolbar and selecting by Accounts Payable Type from the drop-down list.

Accounts Payable Type Spend reports are as follows.

Report Description

Cumulative Spend by This report shows a list of accounts payable (AP) types ranked by
Accounts Payable Type spend with a running total of spend amount and % spend for a
report selected date range. You can drill down by accounts payable type
to view spend for the AP types in the next level of the hierarchy
structure.
Spend by Accounts Payable This report shows spend by accounts payable (AP) type across
Type Over Time report time periods (such as years, quarters, or months) for a selected
date range. You can drill down by AP type to view spend for the
types in the next level of the hierarchy structure, or by time
period to breakout the spend data into the next time period
increment.
Top Spend by Accounts This report ranks the Top X accounts payable (AP) types (where
Payable Type report X is a number you define) by total spend for a selected date
range. This report also provides a count of the number of
suppliers with spend for that AP type and a drill-down to the list of
suppliers that account for the spend.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

980 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Accounts Payable Type Spend reports

Cumulative Spend by Accounts Payable Type report

This report shows a list of accounts payable types ranked by spend with a running total
of spend amount and percentage of spend for a selected date range. You can drill down
by accounts payable type to view spend for the accounts payable types in the next level
of the hierarchy structure.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Note: Only top-level parent accounts payable types are listed in this report. A drill-down
is provided to view the children for the selected parent accounts payable type.

Cumulative Spend by Accounts Payable Type chart

This section shows the spend by accounts payable type in a pie chart or line graph,
enabling you to quickly identify which types comprise the largest portion of spend for
the selected time period.

Cumulative Spend by Accounts Payable Type table

The table below the chart lists accounts payable types, ranked by total spend from
highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this accounts payable type compared to

other types, based on spend for the selected time period.
Accounts Payable Type ID The accounts payable type external ID.
Accounts Payable Type The accounts payable type name. If this is a parent type, click the
name to drill down to the Cumulative Spend by Selected
Accounts Payable Type report, which details spend for the next
level of the account type hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this accounts payable type for the selected time
period and spend amount type.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 981

Accounts Payable Type Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Field Description

% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this accounts payable

type.
% of Spend = (Spend for AP type/Total Spend for all AP types) *
100
Cumulative Spend The running total of spend for current and prior accounts payable
types in the list.
Cumulative % of Spend The percentage of cumulative spend relative to total spend.
Cumulative % of Spend = (Cumulative Spend/Total Spend for all AP
types) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

982 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Accounts Payable Type Spend reports

Cumulative Spend by Selected Accounts Payable Type report

This report shows the proportion of spend by sub-accounts payable type when you drill
down from a parent accounts payable type on the Cumulative Spend by Accounts
Payable Type report. You can continue to drill down through the account type
hierarchy by clicking the accounts payable type name.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Cumulative Spend by Selected Accounts Payable Type chart

This section shows the spend by children accounts payable types in a pie chart or line
graph, enabling you to quickly identify which types comprise the largest portion of
spend for the selected time period.

Cumulative Spend by Selected Accounts Payable Type table

The table below the chart lists accounts payable types, ranked by total spend from
highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this accounts payable type compared to

other types, based on spend for the selected time period.
Accounts Payable Type ID The accounts payable type external ID.
Accounts Payable Type The accounts payable type name. If this is a parent type, click the
name to continue drilling down through the account type hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this accounts payable type for the selected time
period and spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this accounts payable
type.
% of Spend = (Spend for AP type/Total Spend for all AP types) *
100
Cumulative Spend The running total of spend for current and prior accounts payable
types in the list.
Cumulative % of Spend The percentage of cumulative spend relative to total spend.
Cumulative % of Spend = (Cumulative Spend/Total Spend for all AP
types) * 100

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 983

Accounts Payable Type Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

984 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Accounts Payable Type Spend reports

Spend by Accounts Payable Type Over Time report

This report shows total spend per accounts payable type, summarized by time period
(for example, years, quarters, or months) for a selected date range. You can drill down
by accounts payable type to view spend for the children of the selected parent and by
time period to break out the spend data into the next time period increment.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Note: Only top-level parent accounts payable types are listed in this report. A drill-down
is provided to view the children for the selected parent accounts payable type.

The imported spend data and the Master Data Time Period definition determine the
time periods that you see.

Spend by Accounts Payable Type Over Time chart

This section shows spend by accounts payable type in a bar chart across one or more
time periods. You can quickly see the distribution of spend across types in a given time
period and spot trends in spending by type from period to period.

Spend Matrix Pivot table

The table below the chart shows spend by AP type per time period.

Field Description

Time Period name The column heading showing the time period for the spend data.
Click this link to drill down to the Spend by Accounts Payable
Type Over Selected Time report to show spend broken out in
next time increment.
Accounts Payable Type ID The accounts payable type external ID
Accounts Payable Type The accounts payable type name. If this is a parent type, click the
name to continue drilling down through the account type hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this accounts payable type for selected time
period and spend amount type.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 985

Accounts Payable Type Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Field Description

% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this AP type.

% of Spend = (Spend for AP type/Total Spend for all AP types) *
100
Total The sum of spend for this AP type across time periods shown.
% Percentage of total spend for this AP type relative to total spend for
all types.
% = (Total/Total Spend for all AP types) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

986 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Accounts Payable Type Spend reports

Spend by Accounts Payable Type Over Selected Time report

This report shows total spend per accounts payable type by time period for the next
level in the hierarchy structure for a selected parent accounts payable type or time
period.
If you drill down by time period from the Spend by Accounts Payable Type Over
Time report, this report shows total spend per account type broken out by the next
time period increment. For example, if you start at the yearly time period, the yearly
spend data is displayed in quarterly segments.
If you drill down by type from the Spend by Accounts Payable Over Time report, this
report shows spend by sub-type for a selected parent accounts payable type.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Accounts Payable Type Over Selected Time chart

This section shows spend by accounts payable type in a bar chart across one or more
time periods. You can quickly see the distribution of spend across types in a given time
period and spot trends in spending by type from period to period.

Spend Matrix Pivot table

The table below the chart shows spend by accounts payable type per time period.

Field Description

Time Period name The column heading showing the time period for the spend data.
Click this link to drill down to show spend broken out in next time
increment.
Accounts Payable Type ID The accounts payable type external ID
Accounts Payable Type The accounts payable type name. If this is a parent type, click the
name to continue drilling down through the account type hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this accounts payable type for selected time
period and spend amount type.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 987

Accounts Payable Type Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Field Description

% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this AP type.

% of Spend = (Spend for AP type/Total Spend for all AP types) *
100
Total The sum of spend for this AP type across time periods shown.
% Percentage of total spend for this AP type relative to total spend for
all types.
% = (Total/Total Spend for all AP types) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

988 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Accounts Payable Type Spend reports

Top Spend by Accounts Payable Type report

This report ranks the top accounts payable types by total spend for a selected date
range. This report also provides a count of the number of suppliers with spend in an
accounts payable type and a drill-down to the list of suppliers that account for the
spend.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top Ranked Accounts Payable Types

Top Spend by Accounts Payable Type chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among top-ranked
accounts payable types. You select the number of accounts payable types to show in
the filter criteria.

Top Spend by Accounts Payable Type table

The table below the chart lists accounts payable types ranked by total spend from
highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this accounts payable type compared to

other areas based on spend for the selected time period.
Accounts Payable Type ID The accounts payable type external ID.
Accounts Payable Type The accounts payable type name. If this is a parent accounts
payable type, you can click the accounts payable type name to view
the Top Spend by Selected Accounts Payable Type report,
which shows spend for the next level of the type hierarchy.
Spend Total spend for this accounts payable type for selected time period
and spend amount type.
% of Spend Percentage of total spend attributable to this accounts payable
type.
% of Spend = (Spend for AP type /Total Spend for all areas) * 100
Vendor Count Number of suppliers that account for the spend in this accounts
payable type. click the supplier count to drill down to the list of
suppliers.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 989

Accounts Payable Type Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

990 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Accounts Payable Type Spend reports

Top Spend by Selected Accounts Payable Type report

This report ranks the top accounts payable types by total spend for a selected time
period, when you drill down from a parent accounts payable type on the Top Spend by
Accounts Payable Type report. You can continue to drill down through the account
type hierarchy by clicking the accounts payable type name. This report also provides a
count of the number of suppliers that account for spend within a type and a drill-down
to view the list of suppliers.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top Ranked Accounts Payable Types

Top Spend by Selected Accounts Payable Type chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among top-ranked
accounts payable types. You select the number of accounts payable types to show in
the filter criteria.

Top Spend by Selected Accounts Payable Type table

The table below the chart lists accounts payable types ranked by total spend from
highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this accounts payable type compared to

other areas based on spend for the selected time period.
Accounts Payable Type ID The accounts payable type external ID.
Accounts Payable Type The accounts payable type name. If this is a parent accounts
payable type, you can click the accounts payable type name to view
the Top Spend by Accounts Payable Type report, which shows
spend for the next level of the type hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this accounts payable type for selected time
period and spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this accounts payable
type.
% of Spend = (Spend for AP type /Total Spend for all areas) * 100
Vendor Count The number of suppliers that account for the spend in this accounts
payable type. Click the supplier count to drill down to the list of
suppliers.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 991

Accounts Payable Type Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

992 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Accounts Payable Type Spend reports

Spend by Vendor for Selected Accounts Payable Type report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend by supplier for a selected accounts
payable type when you drill down by Vendor Count from the Top Spend by Accounts
Payable Type report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Vendor for Selected Accounts Payable Type chart

This section includes a pie chart that shows the distribution of spend by supplier for the
selected accounts payable type.

Spend by Vendor for Selected Accounts Payable Type table

The table below the chart lists accounts payable types ranked by total spend from
highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on
spend for the selected cost center in the selected time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click the
supplier name to view spend for the next level of business entities in the
supplier's organization.
Spend The spend with this supplier for selected cost center, time period, and
spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend with this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend with supplier/Total Spend with all suppliers) * 100
Vendor Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 993

Cost Center Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Cost Center Spend reports

This section provides help for the reports in the Cost Center Spend drop-down list in the
Spend Analysis section of the Analysis page.

Note: You can also access these reports by clicking Spend and Compliance in the
toolbar and selecting by Cost Center from the drop-down list.

Cost Center Spend reports are as follows.

Report Description

Cumulative Spend by Cost This report shows a list of cost centers ranked by spend with a
Center report running total of spend amount and % spend for a selected date
range. You can drill down by cost center to view spend for the
cost centers in the next level of the hierarchy structure.
Spend by Cost Center Over This report shows spend by cost center across time periods (such
Time report as years, quarters, or months) for a selected date range. You can
drill down by cost center to view spend for the cost centers in the
next level of the hierarchy structure, or by time period to breakout
the spend data into the next time period increment.
Top Spend by Cost This report ranks the Top X cost centers (where X is a number
Center report you define) by total spend for a selected date range. This report
also provides a count of the number of suppliers with spend
against that cost center and a drill-down to the list of suppliers
that account for the spend.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

994 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Cost Center Spend reports

Cumulative Spend by Cost Center report

This report shows a list of cost centers ranked by spend with a running total of spend
amount and the percentage of spend for a selected date range. You can drill down by
cost center to view spend for the cost centers in the next level of the hierarchy
structure.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Note: Only top-level parent cost centers are listed in this report. A drill-down is provided
to view the children for the selected parent cost center.

Cumulative Spend by Cost Center chart

This section of the report shows the spend by cost center in a pie chart or line graph,
enabling you to quickly identify which cost centers comprise the largest portion of
spend for the selected time period.

Cumulative Spend by Cost Center table

The table below the chart lists cost centers ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this cost center compared to other cost centers
based on spend for the selected time period.
Cost Center ID The cost center external ID.
Cost Center The cost center name. If this is a parent cost center, click the name to drill
down to the Cumulative Spend by Selected Cost Center report, which
details spend for the next level of the cost center hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this cost center for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this cost center.
% of Spend = (Spend for cost center/Total Spend for all cost centers) * 100
Cumulative Spend The running total of spend for current and prior cost centers in list.
Cumulative % of The percentage of cumulative spend relative to total spend.
Spend
Cumulative % of Spend = (Cumulative Spend/Total Spend for all cost
centers) * 100

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 995

Cost Center Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

996 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Cost Center Spend reports

Cumulative Spend by Selected Cost Center report

This report shows the proportion of spend by sub-cost center when you drill down from
a parent cost center on the Cumulative Spend by Cost Center report. You can
continue to drill down through the cost center hierarchy by clicking the cost center
name.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Cumulative Spend by Selected Cost Center chart

This section shows the spend by children cost centers in a pie chart or line graph,
enabling you to quickly identify which cost centers comprise the largest portion of
spend for the selected time period.

Cumulative Spend by Selected Cost Center table

The table below the chart lists cost centers ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this cost center compared to other cost centers
based on spend for the selected time period.
Cost Center ID The cost center external ID.
Cost Center The cost center name. If this is a parent cost center, click the name to drill
down to the next level of the cost center hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this cost center for selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this cost center.
% of Spend = (Spend for cost center/Total Spend for all cost centers) * 100
Cumulative Spend The running total of spend for current and prior cost centers in list.
Cumulative % of The percentage of cumulative spend relative to total spend.
Spend
Cumulative % of Spend = (Cumulative Spend/Total Spend for all cost
centers) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 997

Cost Center Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Viewing a bookmarked report

Editing an analytic report bookmark

998 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Cost Center Spend reports

Spend by Cost Center Over Time report

This report shows total spend per cost center summarized by time period (for example,
years, quarters, or months) for a selected date range. You can drill down by cost center
to view spend for the children of the selected parent and by time period to break out
the spend data into the next time period increment.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Note: Only top-level parent cost centers are listed in this report. A drill-down is provided
to view the children for the selected parent cost center.

Spend by Cost Center Over Time chart

This section shows spend by cost center in a bar chart across one or more time periods.
You can quickly see the distribution of spend across cost centers in a given time period
and spot trends in spending by cost center from period to period.

Spend Matrix Pivot table

The table below the chart shows spend by cost center per time period.

Field Description

Time Period name The column heading showing the time period for the spend data. Click this
link to drill down to the Spend by Selected Cost Center Over Time
report to show spend broken out in next time increment.
Cost Center ID The cost center external ID.
Cost Center The cost center name. If this is a parent cost center, click the name to drill
down to the Spend by Selected Cost Center Over Time report to show
spend for the next level of the cost center hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this cost center for the selected time period and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this cost center.
% of Spend = (Spend for cost center/Total Spend for all cost centers) * 100
Total The sum of spend for this cost center across time periods shown.
% The percentage of total spend for this cost center relative to total spend for
all cost centers.
% = (Total/Total Spend for all cost centers) * 100

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 999

Cost Center Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1000 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Cost Center Spend reports

Spend by Selected Cost Center Over Time report

This report shows total spend per cost center by time period for the next level in the
hierarchy structure for a selected parent cost center or time period.
If you drill down by time period from the Spend by Cost Center Over Time report,
this report shows total spend per cost center broken out by the next time period
increment. For example, if you started at the yearly time period, then the yearly spend
data is broken out into quarterly buckets on this report.
If you drill down by cost center from the Spend by Cost Center Over Time report, this
report shows spend by sub-cost center for a selected parent.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Note: Only top-level parent cost centers are listed in this report. A drill-down is provided
to view the children for the selected parent cost center.

Spend by Selected Cost Center Over Time chart

This section shows spend by cost center in a bar chart across one or more time periods.
You can quickly see the distribution of spend across cost centers in a given time period
and spot trends in spending by cost center from period to period.

Spend Matrix Pivot table

The table below the chart shows spend by cost center per time period.

Field Description

Time Period name The column heading showing the time period for the spend data. Click this
link to drill down to the next time increment.
Cost Center ID The cost center external ID.
Cost Center The cost center name. If this is a parent cost center, click the name to drill
down to the next level of the cost center hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this cost center for the selected time period and spend
amount type.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1001

Cost Center Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Field Description

% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this cost center.

% of Spend = (Spend for cost center/Total Spend for all cost centers) * 100
Total The sum of spend for this cost center across time periods shown.
% The percentage of total spend for this cost center relative to total spend for
all cost centers.
% = (Total/Total Spend for all cost centers) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1002 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Cost Center Spend reports

Top Spend by Cost Center report

This report ranks the top cost centers by total spend for a selected date range. This
report also provides a count of the number of suppliers with spend against a cost center
and a drill-down to the list of suppliers that account for the spend.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top-Ranked Cost Centers

Top Spend by Cost Center chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among top-ranked
cost centers. You select the number of cost centers to show in the filter criteria.

Top Spend by Cost Center table

The table below the chart lists cost centers ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this cost center compared to other areas based on
spend for the selected time period.
Cost Center ID The cost center external ID.
Cost Center The cost center name. If this is a parent cost center, you can click the cost
center name to view the Top Spend by Selected Cost Center report,
which shows spend for the next level of the cost center hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this cost center for selected time period and spend amount
type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this cost center.
% of Spend = (Spend for cost center /Total Spend for all areas) * 100
Vendor Count The number of suppliers that account for the spend in this cost center. Click
the supplier count to drill down to the list of suppliers.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1003

Cost Center Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Top Spend by Selected Cost Center report

This report ranks the top cost centers by total spend for a selected date range when
you drill down from a parent cost center on the Top Spend by Cost Center report.
You can continue to drill down through the cost center hierarchy by clicking the cost
center name. This report also provides a count of the number of suppliers that account
for spend against a cost center and a drill-down to view the list of suppliers.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)
` Number of Top-Ranked Cost Centers

Top Spend by Selected Cost Center chart

This section includes a pie chart showing the distribution of spend among top-ranked
cost centers. You can select the number of cost centers to show in the filter criteria.

Top Spend by Selected Cost Center table

The table below the chart lists cost centers ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this cost center compared to other areas based on
spend for the selected time period.
Cost Center ID The cost center external ID.
Cost Center The cost center name. If this is a parent cost center, you can click the cost
center name to continue drilling down to the next level of the cost center
hierarchy.
Spend The total spend for this cost center for selected time period and spend amount
type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this cost center.
% of Spend = (Spend for cost center /Total Spend for all areas) * 100
Vendor Count The number of suppliers that account for the spend in this cost center. Click
the supplier count to drill down to the list of suppliers.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report

1004 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Cost Center Spend reports

Viewing a bookmarked report

Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1005

Cost Center Spend reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Vendor for Selected Cost Center report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend by supplier for a selected cost center
when you drill down by Vendor Count from the Top Spend by Cost Center report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Vendor for Selected Cost Center chart

This section includes a pie chart that shows the distribution of spend by supplier for the
selected cost center.

Spend by Vendor for Selected Cost Center table

The table below the chart lists suppliers ranked by total spend from highest to lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this supplier compared to other suppliers based on
spend for the selected cost center in the selected time period.
Vendor ID The supplier number.
Vendor The supplier company name. If this is a parent supplier, you can click the
supplier name to view spend for the next level of business entities in the
supplier's organization.
Spend The spend with this supplier for selected cost center, time period, and
spend amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend with this supplier.
% of Spend = (Spend with supplier/Total Spend with all suppliers) * 100
Vendor Document Click the supplier icon to view the supplier management record.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1006 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Sourcing Recommendation reports

Sourcing Recommendation reports

This section provides help for the reports in the Sourcing Recommendation drop-down
list in the Spend Analysis section of the Analysis page.
Sourcing Recommendation reports are as follows.

Report Description

High Fragmentation This report analyzes historical spend data to identify new strategic
Sourcing Opportunity sourcing opportunities. By examining a number of factors in the
report historical data, the report identifies areas likely to yield future cost
savings.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1007

Sourcing Recommendation reports Spend Analysis reports

High Fragmentation Sourcing Opportunity report

The High Fragmentation report analyzes historical spend data to identify new strategic
sourcing opportunities. By examining a number of factors contained within the
historical data, the report identifies areas likely to yield future cost savings.
You can drill down by commodity name to see the Spend by Vendor for Selected
Commodity report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

This section of the report shows a list of dimensions ranked by score showing the areas
with greatest potential for additional cost savings from highest to lowest.

Field Description

Dimension ID The dimension ID or number. For example, if the dimension is commodity, the
dimension ID might be the internal category ID. This is established in the
Spend Analysis Configuration.
Dimension Label The name of the dimension. For example, if the dimension is Commodity, the
dimension Label might be the internal category name. This is established in
the Spend Analysis Configuration.
Dimension The dimension type.

1008 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Sourcing Recommendation reports

Field Description

Level The level in the hierarchy of the dimension type. Level 1 represents a top-level
parent in a hierarchy chart.
Spend The total spend attributable to this dimension label.
Score The spend data within the specified date range is analyzed to determine how
many suppliers are in commodities in which the company spends a significant
amount of money.
For each commodity, the “Large Commodities with Many Vendors Rule”
calculates the number of suppliers and the amount (dollar/euro/etc.) of spend.
The raw totals are then used to calculate the metrics:
c1 = #suppliers / (max#suppliers_for_a_commodity); and
c2 = c1 * $Spend
The spend data is also analyzed to determine how many commodities of
goods or services each supplier sells to the company. Suppliers with whom the
company spends a significant amount of money, and which sell many different
commodities of goods or services, represent the best possibility for strategic
sourcing savings.
For each supplier, the “Large Vendor with Many Commodities Rule” calculates
the number of commodities and the amount (dollar/euro/etc.) of spend.
The raw totals are then used to calculate the metrics:
v1 = #commodities / (maximum#commodities_for_a_supplier); and
v2 = v1 * Spend
The scores c2 and v2 are then normalized to arrive at a value s where 0 <= s
<= 100 by dividing the score by the maximum dollars spent for any
commodity and from any supplier. The normalized score indicates the degree
of sourcing opportunity for the company.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1009

Sourcing Recommendation reports Spend Analysis reports

Spend by Commodity for Selected Vendor report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend by commodity for a selected supplier
when you drill down by supplier name on the High Fragmentation Sourcing
Opportunity report.

Note: This report can also be accessed from the Top Spend by Vendor report

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Commodity for Selected Vendor table

This section includes a pie chart that shows the distribution of spend by commodity for
the selected supplier.

Spend by Commodity for Selected Vendor chart

The table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other commodities based
on spend for the commodity in the selected time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click the category name to view the Spend by
Selected Commodity for Selected Vendor report, which shows the spend
for sub-categories of this commodity.
Spend The spend for this commodity for selected supplier, date range, and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1010 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Sourcing Recommendation reports

Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Vendor report

This report shows a ranked listing of the spend with a selected supplier by sub-category
when you drill down from a parent commodity on the Spend by Commodity for
Selected Vendor report.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At and Time Period Ending At
` Spend Amount Type (Actual, Planned, or Forecast)

Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Vendor table

This section includes a pie chart that shows the distribution of spend with a selected
supplier among sub-categories.

Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Vendor chart

The table below the chart lists commodities ranked by total spend from highest to
lowest.

Field Description

Rank The relative position of this commodity compared to other commodities based
on spend for the commodity in the selected time period.
Commodity ID The internal category ID.
Commodity The internal category name. Click the category name to continue to drill down to
the spend data for the next level of the category hierarchy.
Spend The spend for this commodity for selected supplier, date range, and spend
amount type.
% of Spend The percentage of total spend attributable to this commodity.
% of Spend = (Spend for commodity/Total Spend for all commodities) * 100

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1011

Compliance reports Spend Analysis reports

Compliance reports
This section provides help for the reports in the Compliance drop-down list in the Spend
Analysis section of the Analysis page.
Compliance reports are as follows.

Report Description

Spend Under Contract This report indicates spend on contract vs. spend off contract,
report grouped by time period.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1012 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Spend Analysis reports Compliance reports

Spend Under Contract report

This report indicates spend on contract vs. spend off contract, grouped by time period.

Field Description

Time Period The time period name, e.g., FY04-Q1.

Total Spend The total spend for the given time period.
Spend Under Contract The portion of the total spend for the time period that was matched to a
system contract.
% Under Contract The percentage of the total spend for the time period that the spend
under contract represents.

You can filter the data in this report by the Time Period Beginning at (date), Time
Period Ending at (date), or Spend Amount Type (drop-down selection) field.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1013

Compliance reports Process Analysis reports

Process Analysis reports

Process Analysis reports are as follows.

` Cycle Time reports
` Exception Analysis reports
` Workflow Analysis reports

To generate a Process Analysis report:

1 From the Cycle Time, Exception Analysis, or Workflow Analysis drop-down list,
select the report you want to generate.
2 Click OK. You see the report on the report display page.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1014 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Cycle Time reports

Cycle Time reports

This section provides help for the reports in the Cycle Time drop-down list in the
Process Analysis section of the Analysis page.
Cycle Time reports are as follows.

Report Description

Category Project Status This report provides a view of estimated spend and current
report project schedule status by category. Start with a graphical bar
chart and drill down to successive levels of project and schedule
detail as necessary
Project Status Summary This report provides visibility into the current status of your
report projects, including the ability to drill down to project schedule
details when necessary to review late or high-risk projects
Project Cycle Time This report compares the length of time it takes to complete a
Summary by Internal project by category. It allows you to see how much activity is
Category report occurring per category and which categories take longer to
complete
Project Cycle Time This report compares the length of time it takes to complete a
Summary by External project by external category. It allows you to see how much
Category report activity is occurring per category and which categories take longer
to complete
RFx Cycle Time Summary For each internal category, including all launched RFxs, this report
by Internal Category report calculates the average cycle time for suppliers to accept the
document and the average cycle time to award.
RFx Cycle Time Summary For each external category, including all launched RFxs, this
by External Category report calculates the average cycle time for suppliers to accept
report the document and the average cycle time to award.

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1015

Cycle Time reports Process Analysis reports

Category Project Status report

This report provides a view of estimated spend and current project schedule status by
category. Start with a graphical bar chart and drill down to successive levels of project
and schedule detail as necessary.

Category Project Status Chart

This report includes a vertical stacked bar graph showing the estimated value of active
projects by category in descending sequence. A category's bar may include different
color stacks showing the portion of projects in each scheduling status.

1016 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Cycle Time reports

Category Project Status

This report table lists all active projects with high-level status information.

Field Description

ID Click the document icon in this column to display the project document.
Category The internal category name.
Project The project name.
Business Unit The business unit that the project owner represents.
Owner The project owner.
Status Click the status link to see the Project Status Detail.
Complete: All schedule events have an Actual End Date.
Late: One or more schedule events is overdue.
Future: All schedule events have Planned dates that are later than the current
date.
Risk Indicator The risk indicator for the project.
Estimated Value The estimated value entered on the project's Header tab.

Category Project Status Detail

This report table lists each schedule task and milestone event with planned and current
dates and status information.

Field Description

Milestone The name of the milestone or task event.

Assigned The assigned owner of the schedule event.
Original End The Baseline End date of the schedule event.
Plan/Act Start The Planned Start date (if the schedule event is not active) or the Actual Start date
(if the schedule event has had activity).

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1017

Cycle Time reports Process Analysis reports

Field Description

Plan/Act End The Planned End date (if the schedule event is not done) and the Actual End date
(if the schedule event is complete).
Active Displays X if the event has an Actual Start date entered, but no Actual End date.
Done Displays X if the event has an Actual End date entered.
Late Displays X if the event is complete, but the Actual End date is later than the
Original End date or if the current date is later than the Original End date and the
event is not complete.

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Cycle Time reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1018 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Cycle Time reports

Project Status Summary report

This report provides visibility into the current status of your projects, including the
ability to drill down to project schedule details when necessary to review late or
high-risk projects.

Project Summary Status

This report table lists your projects with high-level status information. This report only
displays projects for which you are the owner or a collaborator.

Field Description

ID Click the document icon in this column to display the project document.
Project The project name.
Description The project description.
Owner The project owner.
Status Click the status link to see the Project Status Detail.
Complete: All schedule events have an Actual End Date.
Late: One or more schedule events is overdue.
Future: All schedule events have Planned dates that are later than the current
date.
Manager's Status The risk indicator for the project.

Project Status Detail

This report table lists each schedule task and milestone event with planned and current
dates and status information.

Field Description

Milestone The name of the milestone or task event.

Assigned The assigned owner of the schedule event.
Original End The Baseline End date of the schedule event.
Plan/Act Start The Planned Start date (if the schedule event is not active) or the Actual Start
date (if the schedule event has had activity).

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1019

Cycle Time reports Process Analysis reports

Field Description

Plan/Act End The Planned End date (if the schedule event is not complete) or the Actual End
date (if the schedule event is complete).
Active Displays X if the event has an Actual Start date, but no Actual End date.
Done Displays X if the event has an Actual End date.
Late Displays X if the event is complete, but the Actual End date is later than the
Original End date, or if the current date is later than the Original End date and the
event is not complete.

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Cycle Time reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1020 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Cycle Time reports

Project Cycle Time Summary by Internal Category report

This report compares the length of time it takes to complete projects by category. It
allows you to see the amount of activity occurring per category and to identify which
categories take longer to complete.

Note: Only projects that contain an internal category name are included on this report.

Project Cycle Time Summary by Internal Category

This report table includes a vertical bar graph comparing the actual average cycle time
by internal category over time. Each bar represents the actual average cycle time for all
the projects with completed tasks that started in the shown month.

Field Description

Unlabeled Click the document icon in this column to display the category record.
Category The internal category for the project.
Description The description for the internal category.
Start Month The month and year that contains projects that were launched in the given
month and have completed tasks.
Completed The number of projects with completed tasks that were started in the month
Projects shown.
Launched
Actual Avg Cycle The average cycle time of the projects in this category based on actual date.s
Time (Days)
Baseline Avg The average cycle time of the projects in this category based on baseline dates.
Cycle Time
(Days)

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1021

Cycle Time reports Process Analysis reports

Project Cycle Time Detail

This report table provides details about each of the projects in the categories shown in
the summary section. A link lets you view schedule task details in each project.

Field Description

Name The project name. You can click the project name link if you have
access to this project.
Summary Category The parent category name.
Category The internal category name.
Baseline Start The Baseline Start Date of the earliest schedule task or milestone on
the project schedule.
Baseline End The Baseline End Date of the latest schedule task or milestone on the
project schedule.
Baseline Cycle Time The number of days between the Baseline Start Date and Baseline End
(Days) Date.
Actual Start The Actual Start Date of the earliest schedule task or milestone on the
project schedule.
Actual End The Actual End Date of the latest schedule task or milestone on the
project schedule.
Actual Cycle Time (Days) The number of days between the actual Start Date and Actual End
Date.
Variance The percentage variance of actual against baseline.
Variance = (Baseline Cycle Days - Actual Cycle Days)/Baseline Cycle
Days

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Cycle Time reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1022 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Cycle Time reports

Project Cycle Time Summary by External Category report

This report compares the length of time it takes to complete projects by external
category. It allows you to see the amount of activity occurring per category and to
identify which categories take longer to complete.

Note: Only projects that contain an external category name are included on this report.

Project Cycle Time Summary by External Category

This report table includes a vertical bar graph comparing the actual average cycle time
by external category over time. Each bar represents the actual average cycle time for
all the projects with completed tasks that started in the shown month.

Field Description

Unlabeled Click the document icon in this column to display the category record.
Category The external category for the project.
Description The description for the external category.
Start Month The month and year that contains projects that were launched in the given
month and have completed tasks.
Completed The number of projects with completed tasks that were started in the month
Projects shown.
Launched
Actual Avg Cycle The average cycle time of the projects in this category based on actual dates.
Time (Days)
Baseline Avg The average cycle time of the projects in this category based on baseline dates.
Cycle Time
(Days)

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1023

Cycle Time reports Process Analysis reports

Project Cycle Time Detail

This report table provides details about each of the projects in the categories shown in
the summary section. A link lets you view schedule task details in each project.

Field Description

Name The project name. You can click the project name link if you have
access to this project.
Summary Category The parent category name.
Category The external category name.
Baseline Start The Baseline Start Date of the earliest schedule task or milestone on
the project schedule.
Baseline End The Baseline End Date of the latest schedule task or milestone on the
project schedule.
Baseline Cycle Time The number of days between the Baseline Start Date and Baseline End
(Days) Date.
Actual Start The Actual Start Date of the earliest schedule task or milestone on the
project schedule.
Actual End The Actual End Date of the latest schedule task or milestone on the
project schedule.
Actual Cycle Time (Days) The number of days between the actual Start Date and Actual End
Date.
Variance The percentage variance of actual against baseline.
Variance = (Baseline Cycle Days - Actual Cycle Days)/Baseline Cycle
Days

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Cycle Time reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1024 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Cycle Time reports

RFx Cycle Time Summary by Internal Category report

This report measures the average cycle time to award acceptance. It shows a
breakdown by internal category and the average cycle time for each RFx.

Total Completed RFxs Launched Chart

This section includes a vertical bar graph showing the average cycle time (in days) to
award acceptance by internal category. The average cycle time is calculated for the
total RFxs launched.

RFx Cycle Time Detail

For each RFX, this section shows the detail of time to award acceptance and award
publishing.

Note: Only events associated with internal categories are included in the report.

Field Description

Name The name of the event. Click the name to view the event
document.
Summary Category The top-level category name.
Category The category name.
RFx Created The date the RFx was created.
ID The RFx ID.
Accepted Cycle Time (Days) The total time in days from the time the RFx was created to the
time the award was accepted.
Awarded Cycle Time (Days) The total time in days from the time the RFx was created to the
time it was published.
RFx Accepted Date The date the RFx award was accepted.
RFx Awarded Date The date the RFx award was published.

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Cycle Time reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1025

Cycle Time reports Process Analysis reports

RFx Cycle Time Summary by External Category report

This report measures the average cycle time to award acceptance. It shows a
breakdown by external category and the average cycle time for each RFx.

Total Completed RFxs Launched Chart

This section includes a vertical bar graph showing the average cycle time (in days) to
award acceptance by external category. The average cycle time is calculated for the
total RFxs launched.

RFx Cycle Time Detail

For each RFX, this section shows the detail of time to award acceptance and award
publishing.

Note: Only events associated with external categories are included in the report.

Field Description

Name The name of the event. Click the name to view the event
document.
Summary Category The top-level category name.
Category The category name.
RFx Created The date the RFx was created.
ID The RFx ID.
Accepted Cycle Time (Days) The total time in days from the time the RFx was created to the
time the award was accepted.
Awarded Cycle Time (Days) The total time in days from the time the RFx was created to the
time it was published.
RFx Accepted Date The date the RFx award was accepted.
RFx Awarded Date The date the RFx award was published.

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Cycle Time reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1026 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Exception Analysis reports

Exception Analysis reports

This section provides help for the reports in the Exception Analysis drop-down list in the
Process Analysis section of the Analysis page.
Exception Analysis reports are as follows.

Report Description

Auctions with Insufficient This report identifies all current and prior auction events with
Bidders report fewer than five qualified suppliers.
RFxs with Insufficient This report identifies all current and prior RFx events with fewer
Bidders report than five qualified suppliers.
Master Agreements with This report is a summary of master agreements with audits
Overdue Audits Summary overdue.
report
Master Agreements with This report is a list of master agreements with performance
Performance Metrics Due metrics due.
report
Master Agreements with This report is a summary of master agreements with performance
Low Performance - metric targets which were not met.
Summary report
Documents Sourced without For a selected time period and breakdown (i.e. yearly, quarterly,
Templates monthly), this report shows the number of sourcing documents,
including Projects, RFxs, Auctions, and Agreements, that were
created without using a best practices template document.

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1027

Exception Analysis reports Process Analysis reports

Auctions with Insufficient Bidders report

This report identifies all current and prior auction events with fewer than 5 qualified
suppliers.

Field Description

ID The auction ID number.

Auction The auction name.
Description The auction description.
Bidders The number of suppliers who are qualified to participate in event.
Owner The name of the document owner.
Procurement Group The name of the default group to which the document owner belongs.

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Exception Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1028 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Exception Analysis reports

RFxs with Insufficient Bidders report

This report identifies all current and prior RFx events with fewer than 5 qualified
suppliers.

Field Description

ID RFx ID Number.
Title RFx name. Click the name to view the RFx document.
Description The RFx description.
Bidders The number of suppliers who are qualified to participate in event.
Owner The name of the document owner.
Procurement Group The name of the default group to which the document owner belongs.

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Exception Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1029

Exception Analysis reports Process Analysis reports

Master Agreements with Overdue Audits Summary report

This report is a summary of master agreements with audits overdue.

Tip: This report enables the contract manager to quickly identify all agreements with
audits overdue in order to manage the overdue activity to completion.

Summary
This report table displays the master agreements and agreements with overdue audits
and additional summary information.

Field Description

Master The Master Agreement ID. If the overdue audit(s) are at the master agreement
Agreement ID level and if the logged-in user is a collaborator on the master agreement, the
ID appears as a link to the associated master agreement.
Agreement ID The agreement ID, if the overdue audit(s) are at the agreement level. If the
logged-in user is a collaborator on the master agreement, this ID appears as a
link to the associated agreement.
Agreement Name The name of either the master agreement or agreement, whichever is
applicable.
Vendor The supplier associated with the master agreement.
Owner The master agreement owner.
Audits The number of audits overdue for the given master agreement/agreement.
Days The number of days overdue. If there is more than one audit overdue, Days
Overdue will show the number of days overdue for the most overdue audit.

Audit Detail
This report table displays the details of the individual audits due.

Field Description

Audit Event The name of the audit event that is overdue.

Expected Auditor The individual expected to perform the audit.
Due Date The date the audit was due.
Days Overdue The number of days overdue.

1030 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Exception Analysis reports

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Exception Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1031

Exception Analysis reports Process Analysis reports

Master Agreements with Performance Metrics Due report

This report is a summary of master agreements with performance metrics due.

Tip: This report enables the contract manager to quickly identify all agreements with
performance metrics due in order to manage the activity due to completion.

Field Description

ID A link to the associated master agreement.

Agreement Name The master agreement name.
Agreement Name The agreement name, if the overdue audits are at the agreement level.
Vendor The supplier associated with the master agreement.
Owner The master agreement owner.
Update Due The date on which the performance metric update was due.
Days Overdue The number of days overdue.

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Exception Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1032 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Exception Analysis reports

Master Agreements with Low Performance - Summary report

This report is a summary of master agreements with performance metric targets that
were not met.

Tip: This report enables the contract manager or supplier relationship manager to
quickly identify all agreements with performance metric targets which were not met. This
enables the manager to communicate specific performance issues with the supplier in
order to improve performance and/or to collect fees from the supplier associated with
not having reached certain performance targets.

Summary
This report table displays the summary-level information for master agreements and
agreements with low performance.

Field Description

ID A link to the associated master agreement.

Agreement Name The master agreement name.
Agreement Name The agreement name, if the overdue audits are at the agreement level.
Vendor The supplier associated with the master agreement.
Owner The master agreement owner.
Performance Not Met The number of performance metrics which were not met.

Agreement Metric Summary

This report table displays the individual metrics whose performance was not met.

Field Description

Metric Name The name of the metric.

Metric Type The type of metric (percent or count).
Overall Performance Record The average performance over all time periods for a given metric.
Overall Performance Target The average performance target over all time periods for a given
metric.
Periods Not Met The number of periods in which performance target was not met.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1033

Exception Analysis reports Process Analysis reports

Metric Detail
This report table displays the time periods for which the performance targets were not
met.

Field Description

Time Period E.g., FY03- Q1.

Performance Record The performance record for the given time period.
Performance Target The performance target for the given time period.
Variance The difference between the performance target and record for the given time
period.

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Exception Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1034 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Workflow Analysis reports

Workflow Analysis reports

This section provides help for the reports in the Workflow Analysis drop-down list in the
Process Analysis section of the Analysis page.
Workflow Analysis reports are as follows.

Report Description

User Workload report This report provides managers with visibility into the status and
number of workflow tasks assigned to individual users. Managers
can quickly see how work is allocated across their group or to an
individual by time period.
Workflows Completed by This report provides performance indicators about the number of
Time Period report workflow processes expected and completed per month. This
report gives an overview of the level of activity and completion
rate by workflow process and time period.
Workflow Cycle Time This cycle time report provides performance trends for workflow
report cycle times to help identify bottleneck processes. On a per
workflow basis, this report shows the average cycle time as a
trend over time, with a drill-down view to the individual
documents. Users can see which workflows have longer
turnaround times and identify whether factors such as month or
category have an impact.
Work Item Cycle Time by This report compares the performance of users in completing a
User report work item. You can determine which users are more efficient,
which document types or categories take longer to process, and
which work items are more consuming.
Work Item Activity by
Document

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1035

Workflow Analysis reports Process Analysis reports

User Workload report

This report provides managers with visibility into the status and number of workflow
tasks assigned to individual users. Managers can quickly see how work is allocated
across their group or to an individual by time period.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` User name
` Group
` Start date and End date

User Workload
This section provides a list of users and their associated workflow queue with total
workload days by user name/month and total days by user.

Field Description

User name The name of the user.

Month The month that the work item was created based on Date Received.
Total Days The estimated duration of the workflow step. The first row for each user
name shows the total workload days assigned to this user. Next to each
month, this report shows sub-totals of the total workload days for a user in
this time period.
Work Item Name The name of the workflow task.
Document The name of the document. Click the link to display the document.
Status The status of the task which may be Blank or Overdue.
Date Received The date the workflow task was initiated.
Date Due The expected completion date of the workflow task based on Date Received
offset by Total Days.

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Workflow Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1036 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Workflow Analysis reports

Workflows Completed by Time Period report

This report provides performance indicators about the number of workflow processes
expected and completed per month. This report gives an overview of the level of
activity and completion rate by workflow process and time period.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Start date and End date
` Work Item Name

Workflows Completed by Time Period

This section provides a list of workflow templates that were processed by month. For
each month, a list of the documents with workflow processes initiated is shown with
their current status.

Field Description

Month The month that the workflow was expected based on Date Due.
Workflow The name of workflow template.
Document ID The ID of document that triggered the workflow process.
Document The document name.
Work Item Name The name of the workflow task.
Document The name of the document. Click the link to display the document.
Status The workflow task status, which may be Completed or Active.
Expected The total number of all workflow processes expected to be completed this
month. A sub-total shows the number of a specific workflow process
expected to be completed this month.
Completed The actual number of all workflow processes completed this month. A
sub-total shows the actual number of a specific workflow process completed
this month.
Percent Complete % Complete = # Completed/# Expected

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Workflow Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1037

Workflow Analysis reports Process Analysis reports

Viewing a bookmarked report

Editing an analytic report bookmark

1038 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Workflow Analysis reports

Workflow Cycle Time report

This report provides performance trends for workflow cycle times to help identify
bottleneck processes. On a per workflow basis, this report shows the average cycle
times as a trend over time, with a drill-down view to the individual documents. Users
can see which workflows have longer turnaround times and identify whether factors
such as month or category have an impact.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Workflow Name

Workflow Cycle Time chart

This section shows average cycle time by workflow in a line chart across one or more
time periods. You can quickly spot trends in workflow cycle times from period to period
and identify which workflow processes are the most time consuming.

Workflow Cycle Time table

The table below the chart shows average cycle time per workflow and time period.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1039

Workflow Analysis reports Process Analysis reports

Field Description

Workflow The workflow template name.

Month The month and year.
Average Cycle Time The average time it takes to complete this workflow.

Workflow Cycle Time Detail table

This table shows the supporting detail for the average cycle time summary. This report
lists each workflow process that was completed for a document in the time period.

1040 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Workflow Analysis reports

Field Description

n Workflow The workflow template name.

n Month The month and year.
n Document The name of the document.
n Internal Category The internal category name entered in the document.
n Completed Date The date the last work step of the workflow process was completed.
n Cycle Time (Days) The cycle time for this workflow process in this document: the time
between the actual start date of the first work step and actual completion
date of last work step.

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Workflow Analysis reports

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1041

Workflow Analysis reports Process Analysis reports

Generating an analytic report

Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1042 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Process Analysis reports Workflow Analysis reports

Work Item Cycle Time by User report

This report compares the performance of users in completing a work item to the
average cycle time. Use this report to identify work items that are more time
consuming for a given user and bottlenecks within a workflow process.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Performer
` Work Item Name

Work Item Cycle Time by User

This section shows the average cycle time by work item for a user. Details about the
cycle time per document help identify specific instances that were exceptions to the
typical cycle time. You can determine which users are more efficient, which document
types or categories take longer to process, and which work items are more time
consuming.

Field Description

Workflow The workflow template name.

Work Item Name The name of the work step in the workflow template.
Performer The user assigned to approve or complete the work item.
Document The name of the document.
Internal Category The internal category name entered in the document.
Cycle Time (Days) The cycle time for this work item in this document: the time
between the initiation of the work step and actual completion date
of the work step.
Average Cycle Time (Days) The average time it takes all users or an individual performer to
complete this work item.

Related Topics
Process Analysis reports
Workflow Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1043

Workflow Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Sourcing Analysis reports

Sourcing Analysis reports include:

` Activity Analysis reports
` Award Analysis reports
` Master Agreement Analysis reports
` Search reports

To generate a Sourcing Analysis report:

1 From the Activity Analysis, Award Analysis, Master Agreement Analysis, or Search
drop-down list, select the report you want to generate.
2 Click OK. You see the report on the report display page.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1044 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Activity Analysis reports

Activity Analysis reports

This section provides help for the reports in the Activity Analysis drop-down list in the
Sourcing Analysis section of the Analysis page.
Activity Analysis reports are as follows.

Report Description

System Document Activity This report shows a history of documents by type that have been
Summary report created in the system to measure usage and adoption over time
by type of sourcing activity.
Global Impact report For a selected time period, the report measures the level of
current and potential sourcing activity and value for suppliers that
may also have customer relationships with the company. The
report shows a breakdown by business unit and the number of
Projects and RFxs where supplier/customer relationships exist.
My Group’s Projects report This report provides summary and detailed visibility to ongoing
projects by group. Managers can quickly see the spend under
management in their group and drill down to view how the
workload is allocated across their group
Projects by Sponsor report This report shows the value and number of projects by sponsor
name. You can start from a high level view and drill down into the
individual project
Project Activity by Phase This report provides a value-based summary of project activity by
report phase within a project type. A manager can quickly see what
percentage of projects is in each phase and review progress
through the project pipeline.
Quarterly Summary of This report shows a chart of the total value of all sourcing
Value report activities broken down by business units. This report
demonstrates the value that Frictionless SRM is delivering to each
organization in the company.
RFx Award Summary by This report summarizes and lists the total award values for
Vendor Status report Approved, Unapproved, and Preferred suppliers during a specific
time period.
Auctions and RFxs For a selected time period and Internal Category, this report
Completed by Month report shows the number of auctions and RFxs completed and their total
value per month.
Upcoming and Expired This report is a list of master agreements and agreements that
Master Agreements and will expire soon, or which have expired within a configurable
Agreements report number of days

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1045

Activity Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Report Description

Search All Automatic This report enables you to find all master agreements and
Renewal Master agreements that are marked Auto Renewal. These master
Agreements report agreements must be reviewed, renegotiated, and renewed
manually.
RFx Vendor Award For a selected time period, this report summarizes all RFx supplier
Summary Breakdown awards by Organizational Unit, Internal Category, and Buyer
report Manager.
RFx Summary Status For a selected time period, this report summarizes all RFx activity
report by Organizational Unit, Internal Category, and Buyer Manager.
Top Category Awards by For a selected time period, this report ranks the top categories by
Period report total award value. The report also drills down to the actual RFxs
awarded in that category.
Top Supplier Awards by For a selected time period, the report ranks the top suppliers by
Period report total award value. The report also drills down to the actual RFxs
awarded for that supplier.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1046 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Activity Analysis reports

System Document Activity Summary report

This report shows a history of documents by type that have been created in the system
to measure usage and adoption over time by type of sourcing activity.

System Document Activity Summary

This section includes a stacked bar graph showing the number of documents created by
document type and month. Each bar represents the number of documents created in
the month shown.

System Document Activity List

The System Document Activity List includes the number of events or documents by
month and gives a quick snapshot of the level of activity by document type and time
bucket. Users can view the list of documents created during the month by clicking the
number shown.

Field Description

Month Shows the name of the month that has activity for at least one document
type.
Projects The number of projects for the month.
RFxs The number of RFxs for the month.
Auctions The number of auctions for the month.
Master Agreements The number of master agreements for the month.
Agreements The number of sub-agreements for the month.
Demand The number of demand aggregation documents for the month.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1047

Activity Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

RFx Activity by Month

This report lists the RFxs created within the selected month when you drill down from
the System Document Activity List report. You can open a specific document by clicking
the RFx name.

Field Description

RFx The name of the RFx document. The name allows you to link to the document if
you are authorized to view the document.
ID The RFx document ID.
Description The RFx description.
Category The internal category name.
Created The date the RFx was created.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1048 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Activity Analysis reports

Global Impact report

The Global Impact report measures the level and value of current and potential
sourcing activity with suppliers that have customer or other relationships with the
company. The report shows a breakdown by business unit and the number of Projects
and RFxs where additional relationships between the supplier and buying company
exist.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At
` Time Period Ending At

Global Impact Report Chart

This section includes a vertical bar graph showing the number of projects and RFxs that
include suppliers with additional relationships with the buying company compared to
the number of all projects/RFxs by business unit.

Global Impact Report

This section shows a summary by organizational unit of the number and estimated
value of events with suppliers that have additional supplier relationships compared to
the total estimated value of all projects and RFxs in that business unit.

Note: Only events associated with an organizational unit are included in the report. This
report only lists projects that include suppliers and have a task with “Vendor
Involvement” within the selected time period.

Field Description

Organizational Unit Name of the business unit.

Total Projects Value Sum of estimated value for all projects in business unit with
suppliers that have a task with supplier involvement in the
selected time period.
Projects Total number of projects in business unit with suppliers who
have a task with supplier involvement in the selected time
period. Click the number to view the list of projects.
Projects with Vendor Relationships Total number of projects in business unit that have a task
with supplier involvement in the selected time period and
include suppliers who have additional relationships with the
buying company. Click the number to view the list of
projects.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1049

Activity Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Field Description

Total RFxs Value Sum of estimated value for all RFxs in business unit.
RFxs Total number of RFxs in business unit within selected time
period. Click the number to view the list of RFxs.
RFxs with Vendor Relationships Total number of RFxs in business unit that include suppliers
that have additional relationships with the buying company.
Click the number to view the list of RFxs.

Project Report
This report lists all projects for the selected business unit if you clicked the number of
Projects in the Global Impact report.

Field Description

Title Name of project. Click the title to view the project document.
Description Document description.
Category Internal category name associated with spend.
Estimated Value Estimated value defined for project.
Owner Document owner.
# Vendors Number of suppliers listed in project. Click the number to view the list
of suppliers.
Organizational Unit Business unit defined for project.

Projects with Vendor Relationships Report

This report lists all projects for the selected business unit that include a supplier with
active additional relationships defined, if you clicked the number of Projects with a
Vendor Relationship in the Global Impact report.

Field Description

Title Name of project. Click the title to view the project document.
Description Document description.
Category Internal category name associated with spend.

1050 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Activity Analysis reports

Field Description

Estimated Value Estimated value defined for project.

Owner Document owner.
# Vendors Number of suppliers with additional supplier relationships. Click the number to
view the list of suppliers.
Organizational Business unit defined for project.
Unit

RFxs Report
This report lists all RFxs for the selected business unit if you clicked the number of RFxs
in the Global Impact report.

Field Description

Title Name of RFx. Click the title to view the RFx document.
Description Document description.
Category Internal category name associated with spend.
Estimated Value Estimated value defined for RFx.
Owner Document owner.
# Vendors Number of suppliers listed in RFx. Click the number to view the list of
suppliers.
Organizational Unit Business unit defined for RFx.

RFxs with Vendor Relationships Report

This report lists all projects for the selected business unit that include a supplier with
active additional relationships defined, if you clicked the number of RFxs with a Vendor
Relationship in the Global Impact report.

Field Description

Title Name of RFx. Click the title to view the RFx document.
Description Document description.
Category Internal category name associated with spend.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1051

Activity Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Field Description

Estimated Value Estimated value defined for RFx.

Owner Document owner.
# Vendors Number of suppliers with additional supplier relationships. Click the number
to view the list of suppliers.
Organizational Unit Business unit defined for RFx.

Vendors Report
This report lists suppliers for the selected business unit if you clicked the number of
suppliers in the Projects or Projects with Vendor Relationships report. This report
includes all suppliers on projects if you clicked the number of suppliers from the
Projects report. If you clicked the number of suppliers from the Projects with a Vendor
Relationship report, only suppliers with active additional relationships defined are
listed.

Field Description

Title Name of project. Click the title to view the project document.
Description Document description.
Category Internal category name associated with spend.
Estimated Value Estimated value defined for project.
Owner Document owner.
Organizational Unit Business unit defined for project.
Vendors Name of supplier. Click name to view supplier record.
Relationships List of additional relationships defined for supplier.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1052 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Activity Analysis reports

My Group’s Projects report

This report provides summary and detailed visibility to ongoing projects by group.
Managers can quickly see the spend under management in their group and drill down to
view how the workload is allocated across their group.
This report automatically displays a list of groups that you belong to either as a
manager or member.

Field Description

Group Name The supplier scorecard title. Clicking the link displays the scorecard.
Manager The supplier company name.
Number of Projects The name of the specific internal category to which this scorecard
pertains or “All” if this scorecard applies to every category for this
supplier.
Value in Company The reporting period for this scorecard.
Currency

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1053

Activity Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Projects by Sponsor report

This report shows the value and number of projects by sponsor name. You can start
from a high level view and drill down into the individual project.
This report includes a bar chart with the Total Project Value graphed by sponsor in
descending value order. A table provides summary information such as the number of
projects by sponsor in a table below the chart.

Field Description

Sponsor The name of the user who is sponsoring projects. Click this link to see a list of
individual projects.
Number of Projects The number of projects for this sponsor.
Total Projects The total estimated value of projects for this sponsor.
Value

When you click a Sponsor link, you see the following information about each project
being sponsored by that user.

Field Description

Title The project name. Click the link to drill down to the project document.
Description The project description.
Category The internal category name.
Estimated Value The estimated value defined for the project.
Value in Company The estimated value displayed in the company currency.
Currency
Owner The project owner.
Sponsor The name of the user with the role of sponsor on the project.
Business Unit The business unit that the project owner represents.

To generate a Projects by Sponsor report:

1 From the Activity Analysis drop-down list, select Projects by Sponsor.
2 Click OK. You see the report on the report display page.

1054 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Activity Analysis reports

3 Click a Sponsor link to see individual project information for that sponsor.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1055

Activity Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Project Activity by Phase report

This report provides a value-based summary of project activity by phase within a
project type. A manager can quickly see what percentage of projects is in each phase
and review progress through the project pipeline.
You can filter this report by the following:
` Project Status: Filter the report by a specific status as defined on the Project
Header tab. To include all projects regardless of status, choose None.
` Include Projects Closed After and Projects Closed Before: Limits the inclusion
of closed projects to those that were closed within the date range you enter.

Project Activity by Phase Chart

This section includes a vertical bar graph comparing the estimated value by Project
Type in each Phase. Each bar represents the estimated value for all the projects of a
Project Type in a given phase.

Project Activity by Phase

This section shows a list of projects organized by Project Type/Phase. Within each
phase, projects are listed in descending Estimated Value.

Note: The Project Type and Phase are listed in display order, not alphabetical order.
Projects in a Closed status are listed last within a Project Type and Cancelled projects
are excluded.

Field Description

Project Type The name of the project type.

Phase The current phase of this project as defined on the project's
Schedule tab.
Project Name The project name. Click the link in this column to display the
project document.
Owner The owner name.
Category The internal category name.
Estimated Value The estimated value entered on the document's Header tab.
Estimated Value (Base Currency) The estimated value entered on the document's Header tab
shown in the base currency.
Status The state or progress of this project.
Risk Indicator The level of risk associated with project.

1056 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Activity Analysis reports

Phase Totals
This section includes totals by phase within a project type.

Field Description

A count of the number of projects in this specific phase for

this project type.
Estimated Value (Base Currency) Total Estimated value for all active projects in this phase and
project type shown in the base currency.
% of Project Type Shows what portion of the estimated value projects in Phase
X represent relative to all projects in this Project Type.
(Total Estimated Value for Projects in Phase / Total
Estimated Value of All Projects in this Project Type) * 100

Closed Totals
This section includes totals for the closed projects within a project type.

Field Description

A count of the number of projects that were Closed within

the entered date range for this project type.
Estimated Value (Base Currency) Total Estimated value for all closed projects in this project
type shown in the base currency.
% of Project Type Shows what portion of the estimated value Closed projects
represent relative to all projects in this Project Type.
(Total Estimated Value for Closed Projects / Total Estimated
Value of All Projects in this Project Type) * 100

Project Type Totals

This section includes totals by project type.

Field Description

A count of the number of projects in this project type.

Estimated Value (Base Currency) Total Estimated value for all projects in this project type.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1057

Activity Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Grand Total
This section includes totals for all project types.

Field Description

A count of the number of projects across all project types.

Estimated Value (Base Currency) Total Estimated value for all projects shown in the base
currency.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1058 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Activity Analysis reports

Quarterly Summary of Value report

This report utilizes a bar graph format to summarize the total Estimated Value of each
business document type, across business units and companies. Business Unit subtotals
are outlined using the Business Unit Name and the suffix “BU”.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1059

Activity Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

RFx Award Summary by Vendor Status report

This report graphically displays the total value of awards for each supplier type. The
detail section at the bottom of the page outlines, by each supplier status (Preferred,
Approved, Preliminary, Hold), the recipient of the award and the award amount.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Beginning Time Period
` Ending Time Period
` RFx Type

RFx Award Summary by Vendor Status

This section outlines the individual awards for each supplier status.

Field Description

Vendor The name of the supplier receiving the award.

# Awards The number of awards presented to the supplier.
Award Amount The total value of the awards combined.
Award Amount in Base The Award Amount, converted to the user's Base Currency when
Currency multi-currency is made available.

Grand Total
This section includes the grand total of awards for all supplier statuses.

Field Description

Award Amount The total value of the awards combined.

Award Amount in Base The Award Amount, converted to the user's Base Currency when
Currency multi-currency is made available.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report

1060 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Activity Analysis reports

Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1061

Activity Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Auctions and RFxs Completed by Month report

This report shows the number and total value of auctions and RFxs completed by month
for a selected time period and internal category. Over a period of time, this report can
identify which time periods had the greatest level of activity.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Time Period Beginning At
` Time Period Ending At

Auctions and RFxs Completed by Month Chart

This section includes a vertical bar graph showing the estimated value of auctions and
RFxs completed by month.

Total Auctions and RFxs Completed Report

This section shows a summary by month of the number and estimated value of auction
and RFx events completed.

Field Description

Month Name of monthly time period.

Number of Auctions Total number of auctions that closed in this month.
Click the number to view a list of the auctions.
Number of RFxs Total number of RFxs that moved into a Closed for
Response phase in this month. Click the number to
view a list of the RFxs.
Total Estimated Value in Company Currency Sum of estimated value for all auctions and RFxs
completed in the month.

RFxs Completed by Month

This section shows a list of the RFxs completed in the selected month and category.

1062 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Activity Analysis reports

This section lists the RFxs for the selected month and category.

Field Description

Title Name of RFx. Click the title to view the RFx document.
Description Document description.
Category Internal category name.
Estimated Value Estimated value for RFx.
Owner Document owner.
Sponsor Sponsor name.
Organizational Unit Business unit associated with RFx.

Auctions Completed by Month

This section shows a list of the auctions completed in the selected month and category.

Field Description

Title Name of auction. Click the title to view the auction document.
Description Document description.
Category Internal category name.
Estimated Value Estimated value for auction.
Owner Document owner.
Sponsor Sponsor name.
Organizational Unit Business unit associated with auction.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1063

Activity Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Upcoming and Expired Master Agreements and Agreements

report
This report is a list of master agreements and agreements that will expire soon, or
which have expired within a configurable number of days.

Upcoming Master Agreements and Agreements

This report table displays master agreements and agreements that have a renewal date
that has passed and the agreement has not expired or is perpetual, and a document
link of type Future Agreement Does Not Exist.

Field Description

Name The name of the master agreement or agreement.

Description The description of the master agreement or agreement.
Vendor The supplier associated with the master agreement or agreement.
Category The category of the master agreement or agreement.
Organizational Unit The organizational unit associated with the master agreement or
agreement.
Agreement Manager The manager for the master agreement or agreement.
End Date The end date for the master agreement or agreement.
Renewal Date The renewal date for the master agreement or agreement.

Expired Master Agreements and Agreements

This report table displays master agreements and agreements that have expired and
have an end date within the user-entered number of days from today.

Field Description

Name The name of the master agreement or agreement.

Description The description of the master agreement or agreement.
Vendor The supplier associated with the master agreement or agreement.
Category The category of the master agreement or agreement.

1064 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Activity Analysis reports

Field Description

Organizational Unit The organizational unit associated with the master agreement or
agreement.
Agreement Manager The manager for the master agreement or agreement.
End Date The end date for the master agreement or agreement.
Renewal Date The renewal date for the master agreement or agreement.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1065

Activity Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Search All Automatic Renewal Master Agreements report

This report is a list of master agreements that are flagged as Auto Renewal on the
Master Agreements Header page.

Search All Automatic Renewal Master Agreements

This report table displays master agreements flagged for automatic renewal.

Field Description

Master Agreement ID The ID of the master agreement.

Agreement ID The ID of the agreement, if any.
Agreement Title The title of the master agreement or agreement.
Vendor The supplier associated with the master agreement or agreement.
Status The status of the master agreement or agreement.
Start Date The start date for the master agreement or agreement.
End Date The end date for the master agreement or agreement.
Renewal Reminder The date for the reminder to renew the master agreement or agreement.
Date
Termination The date on which intent to terminate is formally communicated to the
Communicated Date supplier.
Termination Notice The number of days before the termination notice for the master
Lead Time (Days) agreement will be sent to the supplier.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1066 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Activity Analysis reports

RFx Vendor Award Summary Breakdown report

This report outlines all supplier awards, sorted by Internal Category within each
Organizational Unit (default). Users can resort by selecting the arrow icon within any of
the column headings.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Beginning Time Period
` Ending Time Period

RFx Vendor Award Summary Breakdown

Field Description

Organizational Unit The business unit within a company, as defined within the Company
definition (Setup).
Internal Category The category ID used, internally, by an organization to classify the
marketplace that this opportunity represents.
Buyer Manager The person responsible for overseeing the strategic sourcing decisions.
Vendor The name of the supplier to which this opportunity was awarded.
Preferred Vendor An indicator to identify whether this supplier has been categorized as a
preferred supplier.
Count The number of awards.
Total The sum of value across all awards for this supplier.
Award Value The value associated with the award(s).
Percent of Total The percent of the total value that this individual award represents.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1067

Activity Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

RFx Summary Status report

This report summarizes, for each business unit and category, the number of RFXs in
each Phase (Created, Open, Closed, Awarded, New Round).

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Start Date
` End Date

RFx Summary Status

Field Description

Organizational Unit The business unit within a company, as determined by the Company
definition in Setup.
Category The category associated with the RFx.
Buyer Manager The person responsible for overseeing the strategic sourcing decisions.
Created The date on which this document was created.
Open The number of RFX documents that contain a Status of Open.
Closed The number of RFX documents that contain a Status of Closed.
Awarded The number of RFX documents that contain a Status of Awarded.
New Round The number of RFX documents that contain a Status of New Round.
Total The total number of RFxs for this grouping.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1068 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Activity Analysis reports

Top Category Awards by Period report

This report graphically displays the total awarded to each market category. The table at
the bottom of the page lists the individual awards, the amount of each award, and its
percentage of the total.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Beginning Time Period
` Ending Time Period

Top Category Awards by Period

Field Description

Rank This value represents a rating of an individual award's value, from largest to
smallest. The award with the largest percent of the total awards, for
example, receives a rank of 1.
Category The market category that the award represents.
Awarded The total value of the award.
% of Total The percentage of the total awards that this individual category represents.
Number of Award The number of actual awards in the total value.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1069

Activity Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Top Supplier Awards by Period report

This report graphically displays the total value of awards by supplier per quarter. The
table at the bottom of the page lists the individual suppliers and outlines the total
awarded to each and the percentage of the total that each supplier represents.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Beginning Time Period
` Ending Time Period

Top Supplier Awards by Period

Field Description

Rank This value represents a rating of an individual award's value, from largest to
smallest. The award with the largest percent of the total awards, for
example, receives a rank of 1.
Category The market category that the award represents.
Awarded The total value of the award.
% of Total The percentage of the total awards that this individual category represents.
Number of Award The number of actual awards in the total value.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Activity Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1070 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Award Analysis reports

Award Analysis reports

This section provides help for the reports in the Award Analysis drop-down list in the
Sourcing Analysis section of the Analysis page.
Award Analysis reports are as follows.

Report Description

Agreement Item Pricing by For a selected date range, this report lists all materials that were
Organization and Plant previously under contract but have expired, and groups the
report output by organization and by plant.
Agreement Item Pricing by For a selected date range, this report lists all materials that were
Vendor and Plant report previously under contract but have expired, and groups the
output by supplier and by plant.
Item Award Sheet by Vendor For a selected supplier, this report lists all items under contract,
grouped by the plant. Detailed contract information per item is
shown, including pricing and terms.
Item Spend versus Award For a selected date range, this report lists all materials under
report contract, compares the expected spend per item from the
contract terms to the actual spend, and calculates the percentage
of agreement consumed. The list is grouped by buying
organizational unit and plant.
Item Standard Cost For a selected date range, this report lists all materials under
Savings Projections report contract and determines the amount of savings expected by
comparing the material’s standard cost to the standard material
price. The list is grouped and totaled by buying organizational unit
and plant.
Item Standard Cost For a selected date range, this report lists all materials under
Savings Projections by contract and determines the amount of savings expected by
Vendor report comparing the material’s standard cost to the contracted material
price. The list is grouped and totaled by supplier and then by
plant.
Material Analysis report For a selected material, this report lists all agreements in which
the material appears and shows the contract price compared to
the standard cost and the actual spend against the contract. The
report also lists all RFx events in which the material has been
included for pricing and shows prices by supplier response.
Unawarded Items with For materials that were under contract during a selected date
Volumes report range, but are no longer under contract as of a specified date,
this report lists the volumes or quantities that those items had
represented and lists the output by buying organization and plant.
RFx Proposal Award For a specified time period, this report provides visibility into the
Reasons Summary report reason why RFx proposals were awarded.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1071

Award Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1072 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Award Analysis reports

Agreement Item Pricing by Organization and Plant report

For a selected date range, this report lists all materials that were previously under
contract but have expired, and groups the output by organization and then by plant.
You can filter the data in this report by the following:
` Expiration Date After
` Expiration Date Before

Agreement Item Pricing by Organization and Plant

This list provides detailed information for all agreements that contain the material.

Field Description

Organizational Unit The supplier associated with the agreement.

Plant The Plant name.
Agreement The Agreement name. Click on the link to display the
agreement.
Vendor The supplier associated with the agreement.
Part Number The part number.
External ID The external ID associated with the part number.
Description The part description.
Effective Date The effective date of the agreement.
Expiration Date (if not perpetual) The expiration date of the agreement. If perpetual, there is
no expiration date.
Unit Price The price per unit
Delivery Terms Terms of delivery, e.g., FOB
Contracted Quantity Quantity listed in the agreement
Extended Price Extended price = Unit Price * Contracted Quantity
Extended Price (Base Currency) Extended price in the base currency

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Award Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1073

Award Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Viewing a bookmarked report

Editing an analytic report bookmark

1074 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Award Analysis reports

Agreement Item Pricing by Vendor and Plant report

For a selected date range, this report lists all materials that were previously under
contract but have expired, and groups the output by supplier and then by plant.
You can filter the data in this report by the following:
` Expiration Date After
` Expiration Date Before

Agreement Item Pricing by Vendor and Plant

This list provides detailed information for all agreements that contain the material.

Field Description

Vendor The supplier associated with the agreement.

Plant The Plant name.
Agreement The Agreement name. Click on the link to display the
agreement.
Part Number The part number.
External ID The external ID associated with the part number.
Description The part description.
Effective Date The effective date of the agreement.
Expiration Date (if not perpetual) The expiration date of the agreement. If perpetual, there is
no expiration date.
Unit Price The price per unit
Delivery Terms Terms of delivery, e.g., FOB
Contracted Quantity Quantity listed in the agreement
Extended Price Extended price = Unit Price * Contracted Quantity
Extended Price (Base Currency) Extended price in the base currency

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Award Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1075

Award Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Editing an analytic report bookmark

1076 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Award Analysis reports

Item Spend versus Award report

For a selected date range, this report lists all materials under contract and compares
the expected spend per item from the contract terms to the actual spend and calculates
a percent of agreement consumed. The list is grouped by buying organizational unit
and plant.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Expiration Date After
` Expiration Date Before

Item Spend versus Award

This list provides detailed spend information for all agreements within the date range.

Field Description

Organizational Unit The buying business unit.

Plant Plant Name.
Agreement Agreement name. Click on the link to display the
agreement.
Part Number The part number associated with the item.
External ID The external ID associated with the part number.
Description The item description.
Unit Price Price per unit.
Contracted Quantity Quantity listed in the agreement.
Extended Price Extended price = Unit Price * Contracted Quantity
Extended Price (Base Currency) Extended price in the base currency
Total Actual Spend Total amount actually spent
Total Actual Spend (Base Currency) Total amount actually spent (in the base currency)
% of Agreement Spend Total Actual Spend (Base Currency) / Extended Price
(Base Currency)

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Award Analysis reports

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1077

Award Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Generating an analytic report

Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1078 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Award Analysis reports

Item Standard Cost Savings Projections report

For a selected date range, this report lists all materials under contract and determines
the amount of savings expected by comparing the material's standard cost to the
contracted material price. The list is grouped and totaled by buying organizational unit
then plant.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Expiration Date After
` Expiration Date Before
` Agreement Length Greater Than (days)
` Agreement Length Greater Than (days)

Item Standard Cost Savings Projections

This list provides detailed spend information for all agreements within the date range.

Field Description

Organizational Unit The buying business unit.

Plant Plant Name.
Agreement Agreement name. Click on the link to display the agreement.
Part Number The part number associated with the item.
External ID The external ID associated with the item.
Description The item description.
Vendor Supplier name.
Standard Cost Standard cost
Unit Price Price per unit.
Contracted Quantity Quantity listed in the agreement.
Delivery Terms Delivery terms, e.g. FOB
Effective Date Effective date of the agreement.
Expiration Date (if not perpetual) Expiration date of the agreement. If perpetual, there is no
expiration date.
Days Length of the agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1079

Award Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Field Description

Extended Price Extended price = Unit Price * Contracted Quantity

Extended Price (Base Currency) Extended price in the base currency
Cost Savings (Standard Cost * Contracted Quantity) - Extended Price (Base
Currency)

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Award Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1080 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Award Analysis reports

Item Standard Cost Savings Projections by Vendor report

For a selected date range, this report lists all materials under contract and determines
the amount of savings expected by comparing the material's standard cost to the
contracted material price. The list is grouped and totaled by supplier and then by plant.

You can filter the data in this report by the following:

` Expiration Date After
` Expiration Date Before
` Agreement Length Greater Than (days)
` Agreement Length Greater Than (days)

Item Standard Cost Savings Projections by Vendor

This list provides detailed spend information for all agreements within the date range.

Field Description

Vendor Supplier Name.

Plant Plant Name.
Agreement Agreement name. Click on the link to display the agreement.
Part Number The part number associated with the item.
External ID The external ID associated with the item.
Description The item description.
Standard Cost Standard cost
Unit Price Price per unit.
Contracted Quantity Quantity listed in the agreement.
Delivery Terms Delivery terms, e.g. FOB
Effective Date Effective date of the agreement.
Expiration Date (if not perpetual) Expiration date of the agreement. If perpetual, there is no
expiration date.
Days Length of the agreement

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1081

Award Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Field Description

Extended Price Extended price = Unit Price * Contracted Quantity

Extended Price (Base Currency) Extended price in the base currency
Cost Savings (Standard Cost * Contracted Quantity) - Extended Price
(Base Currency)

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Award Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1082 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Award Analysis reports

Material Analysis report

This report provides the capability to search for a particular material across all RFxs and
view the associated details, such as delivery terms and price. All information for the
material can then be seen in a consolidated view.
The report provides the option to search for materials by description and plant name or
by name, number, or description. The asterisk wildcard may be used to indicate “all”
records.
The list of materials matching the search request is presented. When you select a
material, all RFxs containing that material are displayed.

Material Analysis Agreements

This section provides the detailed information for all RFxs that contain the material..

Field Description

ID The RFx ID with which the material is associated.

Name The RFx name with which the material is associated.
Vendor The name of the supplier to whom the material was awarded
Material The number associated with the material.
Quantity Filled The total quantity filled of the material.
Delivery Terms The terms associated with the delivery of material.
Unit price The price per unit.
Extended price The price per unit times the total quantity filled.
Extended Price (Base Currency) The price per unit times the total quantity filled in the base
currency.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Award Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1083

Award Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Unawarded Items with Volumes report

This report provides visibility into the total number of items that are not yet awarded.
Associated volumes are included for each contract to show the size of outstanding
items.
The report provides the option to search for items under contract between 2 dates not
under agreement on a particular date. Unawarded items meeting the search criteria are
then displayed.

Unawarded Items with Volumes

This section provides the detailed information for all unawarded items.

Field Description

Organizational Unit The Organizational Unit.

Plant The plant name
Agreement The contract agreement ID. Contains a hotlink to the contract document.
Part Number The part number.
External ID The external ID.
Description The description of the item.
Contracted Quantity The total quantity (with associated units) of the item.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Award Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1084 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Award Analysis reports

RFx Proposal Award Reasons Summary report

This report provides visibility into the reason why RFx proposals were awarded, for
proposals awarded in a specified time period. A pie chart displays the breakdown of
award reasons, and a list of each award with the associated reason is provided.
The report provides the option to search for proposals awarded during a specified time
period. Search results can be narrowed further by internal category.

Results Summary
The awards for the given search criteria are displayed in a pie chart by award reason.

RFx Proposal Award Reasons Summary

For each award, the award reason and additional details are provided.

Field Description

Award Reason The reason for the award.

Vendor The supplier name. A link to the supplier record is provided.
RFx The name of the RFx that was awarded.
Category The category associated with the RFx.
Owner The award owner.
Created The data the proposal was awarded.
Award Reason Updated By The name of the individual who updated the award reason.
Award Status The status of the award, e.g. full, partial, etc.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Award Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1085

Master Agreement Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Master Agreement Analysis reports

This section provides help for the reports in the Master Agreement Analysis drop-down
list in the Sourcing Analysis section of the Analysis page.
Master Agreement Analysis reports are as follows.

Report Description

Agreement Savings Impact This report is a summary of master agreement and agreement
for Owner report savings associated with a given agreement owner.
Master Agreements in my This report is a list of master agreements in cost centers
Cost Center(s) report associated with my system user account.
Agreements in my Cost This report is a list of agreements associated with the cost centers
Center(s) report defined in your user account setup.
Cost Center Master This report is a list of master agreements that are associated with
Agreements - Canceled or the cost centers defined in your user account setup and which
Closed report have been canceled or closed.
Cost Center Agreements - This report a list of agreements that are associated with the cost
Canceled or Closed report centers defined in your user account setup and which have been
canceled or closed.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1086 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Master Agreement Analysis reports

Agreement Savings Impact for Owner report

This report is a summary of master agreement and agreement savings associated with
a given agreement owner.

Tip: This report enables a sourcing executive to measure employees' performance

based upon total savings achieved across all of an employee's agreements.

Summary
This report table displays all master agreements owned by the user entered owner and
any savings impact data pertaining to the master agreement.

Field Description

Master Agreement ID The ID of master agreement associated with the savings record.
Agreement Name The name of the master agreement.
Vendor The supplier associated with the master agreement.
Status The status of the master agreement.
Internal Category The internal category for the master agreement.
Organizational Unit The organizational unit of the master agreement.
Effective Date The effective date of the master agreement.
Renewal Date The renewal date of the master agreement.
End Date The end date of the master agreement.
Agreement Manager The manager for the master agreement.
Expected Value The expected value total (expected total spend value of the master
agreement during the master agreement's life cycle) for the master
agreement. Note: if the master agreement has sub-agreements, this
value may have been computed by taking a sum of all expected values
for all sub-agreements.
Actual Value The actual value total (actual total spend value of the master agreement
to date) for the master agreement. Note: if the master agreement has
sub-agreements, this value may have been computed by taking a sum of
all actual values for all sub-agreements.
Cost Savings The cost savings total for the master agreement. Note: if the master
agreement has sub-agreements, this value may have been computed by
taking a sum of all cost savings values for all sub-agreements.
# Agreements The number of agreements associated with the given master agreement.
The number displayed is a link.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1087

Master Agreement Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Drill-Down
This report table provides savings impact data by sub-agreement.

Field Description

Master Agreement The ID of master agreement associated with the savings record.
ID
Agreement ID The ID of agreement associated with the savings record.
Agreement Name The name of the agreement.
Vendor The supplier associated with the agreement.
Status The status of the agreement.
Internal Category The internal category for the agreement.
Organizational Unit The organizational unit of the agreement.
Effective Date The effective date of the agreement.
Renewal Date The renewal date of the agreement.
End Date The end date of the agreement.
Expected Value The expected value total (expected total spend value of the agreement
during the agreement's life cycle) for the agreement.
Actual Value The actual value total (actual total spend value of the agreement to date) for
the agreement.
Total Savings The savings total for the agreement.
Agreement The manager of the agreement.
Manager

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Master Agreement Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1088 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Master Agreement Analysis reports

Master Agreements in my Cost Center(s) report

This report is a list of master agreements associated with the cost centers defined in
your user account setup.

Tip: If your sourcing organization tracks master agreement activity by cost center, this
report enables you to identify all master agreements that you own or for which you are
a collaborator and which are associated with your assigned cost centers.

Field Description

ID The ID of master agreement associated with logged in user account's cost

center(s)
Master Agreement The master agreement name
Vendor The supplier associated with the master agreement
Status The status of the master agreement
Start Date Effective date of master agreement
Renewal Date The renewal date of the master agreement
Total Value The total value of the entire master agreement. The data is taken from the
Savings tab.
Note: if the master agreement contains sub-agreements, the total value will
sum the value of all sub-agreements.
Agreement Manager The manager of the agreement

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Master Agreement Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1089

Master Agreement Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Agreements in my Cost Center(s) report

This report is a list of agreements associated with the cost centers defined in your user
account setup.

Tip: If your sourcing organization tracks agreement activity by cost center, this report
enables you to identify all agreements that you own or for which you are a collaborator
and which are associated with your assigned cost centers

Field Description

Master Agreement ID The ID of the master agreement associated with the agreement which is
associated with the logged in user account's cost center(s).
Master Agreement The master agreement name.
Agreement The agreement name.
Vendor The supplier associated with the agreement.
Agreement Status The status of the agreement.
Start Date Effective date of agreement.
Renewal Date The renewal date of the agreement.
Total Value The total value of the agreement. The data is taken from the Savings tab.
Agreement Manager The manager of the agreement.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Master Agreement Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1090 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Master Agreement Analysis reports

Cost Center Master Agreements - Canceled or Closed report

This report is a list of master agreements that are associated with the cost centers
defined in your user account setup and which have been canceled or closed.

Field Description

ID The ID of the master agreement associated with the agreement that is

associated with the logged-in user account's cost center(s).
Master Agreement The master agreement name.
Vendor The supplier associated with the master agreement.
Start Date The effective date of the master agreement.
Total Value The total value of the master agreement. The data is taken from the
Savings tab.
Agreement Manager The manager of the master agreement.
Date Canceled The date the master agreement was canceled.
Date Closed The date the master agreement was closed.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Master Agreement Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1091

Master Agreement Analysis reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Cost Center Agreements - Canceled or Closed report

This report is a list of agreements that are associated with the cost centers defined in
your user account setup and which have been canceled or closed.

Field Description

Master Agreement ID The ID of the master agreement associated with the agreement that is
associated with the logged-in user account's cost center(s).
Master Agreement The master agreement name.
Agreement ID The ID of the agreement associated with the logged-in user account's cost
center(s).
Agreement The agreement name.
Vendor The supplier associated with the agreement.
Start Date The effective date of the agreement.
Total Value The total value of the agreement. The data is taken from the Savings tab.
Agreement Manager The manager of the agreement.
Date Canceled The date the agreement was canceled.
Date Closed The date the agreement was closed.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Master Agreement Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1092 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Sourcing Analysis reports Search reports

Search reports
This section provides help for the reports in the Search drop-down list in the Sourcing
Analysis section of the Analysis page.
Search reports are as follows.

Report Description

Master Agreement This report is a list of all master agreements with one or more key
Advanced Search report attributes (or with sub-agreement attributes) containing a
user-entered text string.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1093

Search reports Sourcing Analysis reports

Master Agreement Advanced Search report

This report a list of all master agreements with one or more key attributes (or with
sub-agreement attributes) containing a user-entered text string.

Tip: This report enables a user knowing minimal information about an existing master
agreement or a user wishing to identify whether a certain type of master agreement
exists, to find one or more master agreements simply based upon entering a text string
that will be matched to the following:

` Internal Category
` Agreement Name
` Agreement Description
` Location
` Line items for which the user-entered text string matches one of the following item
attributes:
n Internal Category
n Part Description
n Location
n Part Number
n Vendor Part Number

Field Description

Agreement Name The name of the master agreement or agreement with a key attribute
containing the user-entered text string and the user-entered supplier.
Vendor The supplier name.
Expires The end date of the master agreement or agreement.
Effective The effective date of the master agreement or agreement.

Related Topics
Sourcing Analysis reports
Search reports
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1094 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Extract reports Search reports

Document Extract reports

Document Extract reports include:

RFx

Report Description

RFx Summary Extract This report provides access to summary information for a set of
report RFxs in a given time period for printing or exporting.

Auction

Report Description

Auction Summary Extract This report provides access to the summary information and
report auction type attributes for a set of auction events in a given time
period for printing or exporting.

Project

Report Description

Project Summary Extract This report provides access to the summary information for a set
report of projects in a given time period for printing or exporting.

To generate a Document Extract report:

1 From the RFx, Auction, or Project drop-down list, select the report you want to
generate.
2 Click OK. You see the report on the report display page.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1095

RFx Summary Extract report Document Extract reports

RFx Summary Extract report

This report provides access to the summary information for a set of RFxs in a given
time period for printing or exporting.
You can filter the data in this report by the following:
` Time Period Beginning At
` Time Period Ending At

Field Description

RFx Type The type of RFx (that is, RFP, RFQ, etc.)
Name The name of the RFx. Click the link to view the RFx.
ID The RFx ID
Description The description of the RFx
Enable Multiple Rounds Indicates whether the RFx can include multiple response rounds.
Round Name The name of the current round in the RFx.
Currency The base currency used by the RFx.
Default Rank For RFx The attribute used to sort RFx responses.
Responses
Estimated Value The estimated value for the RFx.
Estimated Value Currency The estimated value currency for the RFx.
Budgeted Value The budgeted value for the RFx.
Budgeted Value Currency The budgeted value currency for the RFx.
Internal Category The internal category used by the RFx.
Company The company to which the RFx applies.
Organizational Unit The business unit within a company associated with this RFx.
Owner The owner of the RFx.
Location The location selected for the RFx.
Geography The geographical region selected for the RFx.
Country The country selected for the RFx.
RFx Phase The current phase for the RFx.
Line Items The number of line items in the RFx

1096 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Extract reports RFx Summary Extract report

Field Description

Questions The number of questions in the RFx.

Line Items Awarded Price The price at which the line items were awarded.
Line Items Awarded Price The currency of the award.
Currency
Planned Open Date The planned open date for the RFx.
RFx Response Due Date The date on which responses are due for this RFx.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1097

Auction Summary Extract report Document Extract reports

Auction Summary Extract report

This report provides access to the summary information and auction type attributes for
a set of auction events in a given time period for printing or exporting.
You can filter the data in this report by the following:
` Time Period Beginning At
` Time Period Ending At

Tip: This report is useful for verifying that an auction event includes the bidding and
disclosure rules that you expect and the correct dates before supplier invitations are
sent.

Field Description

ID The auction ID.

Title The auction name. Click the link in this column to display the auction
document.
Description The auction description.
Company The name of company within an enterprise that is associated with this
auction.
Organizational Unit The business unit within a company associated with this auction.
Owner The owner name.
Internal Category The internal category ID and name.
Currency The base currency.
Budgeted Value The budgeted spend value for this auction.
Estimated Value The initial estimated of the spend value for this auction.
Actual Value The actual spend value for this auction.
Start time The start date of the auction. This is the start date and time of the first
auction phase, which is not necessarily the bidding phase.
End time The earliest line item close date and time.
Preview Indicates whether this auction includes a preview phase.
Preview start The start date and time of the preview phase, when suppliers can see the
auction details before the auction bidding begins.
Preview end The end date and time of preview phase.
Pre-bid Indicates whether this auction includes a pre-bid phase.

1098 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Extract reports Auction Summary Extract report

Field Description

Pre-bid start The date and time when you can enter pre-bids before the auction bidding
begins.
Pre-bid end The end date and time of the pre-bid phase.
Allow early close Indicates whether the auction can close after the line item minimum bid
duration if no bids are entered during the inactivity interval.
Inactivity window The period of time preceding the current line item close time when a lack
(minutes) of bid activity will result in the close of line item's bidding phase at the
current line item close time.
Overtime duration If any bids are received during the inactivity window, the bidding will
(minutes) continue for the defined overtime duration.
Bidding format The bidding rule in effect for auction.
Vendor rank Indicates whether the supplier rank is disclosed.
Vendor count Indicates whether the number of suppliers is disclosed.
Anonymous bidders Indicates whether the suppliers’ company names are hidden.
Leading bid Indicates whether the leading bid is disclosed to suppliers.
Automatic award at Indicates whether awards are automatically given to the best bidder at
auction close auction close.
Publish to vendor Indicates whether this is a public auction event.
Date to Publish/Invite Indicates the date to publish a public event or send invitations for a private
event.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1099

Project Summary Extract report Document Extract reports

Project Summary Extract report

This report provides access to the summary information for a set of projects in a given
time period for printing or exporting.
You can filter the data in this report by the following:
` Time Period Beginning At
` Time Period Ending At

Field Description

Project Type The project type.

Name The project name. Click the link in this column to display the project document.
ID The project ID.
Description The project description.
Currency The base currency.
Estimated Value The estimated value entered on the document's Header tab.
Budgeted Value The budgeted value entered on the document's Header tab.
Internal Category The internal category ID and name.
Company The name of the company within an enterprise that is associated with this
project.
Business Unit The business unit for a company associated with this project.
Status The state or progress of this project.
Priority The relative importance of this project.
Risk Indicator The level of risk associated with project.
Owner The owner name.
Created By The name of the user who created the project.
Created At The date and time the project was created.
Last Modified By The name of the user who last updated the project.
Last Modified At The date and time the project was last updated.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report

1100 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Extract reports Project Summary Extract report

Viewing a bookmarked report

Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1101

Project Summary Extract report Vendor Analysis reports

Vendor Analysis reports

Vendor Analysis reports include:

Performance Analysis

Report Description

My Scorecards with This report helps supplier managers quickly identify the list of
Unsatisfactory Ratings their supplier scorecards with an unsatisfactory Red rating.
report Managers can drill down to the scorecard and see the specific
metrics that had an unsatisfactory score.

Exception Analysis

Report Description

Incomplete Scorecards This report is an exception report to identify scorecards that are
report missing scores for one or more metrics. Use this report to verify
that all information is complete before publishing scorecards to
suppliers.

To generate a Vendor Analysis report:

1 From the Performance Analysis or Exception Analysis drop-down list, select the
report you want to generate.
2 Click OK. You see the report on the report display page.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1102 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendor Analysis reports My Scorecards with Unsatisfactory Ratings report

My Scorecards with Unsatisfactory Ratings report

This report helps supplier managers quickly identify the list of their supplier scorecards
with an unsatisfactory Red rating. Managers can drill down to the scorecard and see the
specific metrics that had an unsatisfactory score.
This report automatically includes only those suppliers for which you are the buyer
manager contact.

My Scorecards with Unsatisfactory Ratings

This report section provides a list of the individual scorecards that contain a scorecard
section with a Red rating.

Field Description

Title The supplier scorecard title. Clicking the link displays the actual scorecard.
Vendor The supplier company name.
Internal The name of the specific internal category to which this scorecard pertains, or
Category “All” if this scorecard applies to every category for this supplier.
Time Period The reporting period of this scorecard.
Geography The geography to which this scorecard pertains.
Rating The scorecard rating. Click the rating to see the individual metrics with a Red
rating.

Scorecard Metric Ratings

This report section displays the scores, ratings, and weights for each section and
metrics within a section.

Field Description

Section The name of the scorecard section into which metrics have been grouped.
Metric Name The name of the metric.
Rating The metric rating, based on comparison of actual score to target score.
Raw Metric Raw data collected externally used to calculate a metric score.
Target Score The target score for the metric.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1103

My Scorecards with Unsatisfactory Ratings report Vendor Analysis reports

Field Description

Actual Score The actual score that is calculated based on metric conversion rules.
Weight % The emphasis given to a specific metric, relative to other metrics in the
section.
Weighted Metric Metric Actual Score * Metric Weight %
Score
Metric Origin The origin of the metric data, such as a survey or name of 3rd party
system.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

1104 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Vendor Analysis reports Incomplete Scorecards report

Incomplete Scorecards report

This report is an exception report to identify scorecards that are missing scores for one
or more metrics. Use this report to verify that all information is complete before
publishing scorecards to suppliers.

Field Description

Name The supplier scorecard title.

Vendor The supplier company name.
Geography The specific geography to which this scorecard pertains.
Time Period The reporting period of the scorecard.
Section The name of the section containing the blank metric score.
Metric Name The name of the metric with a blank score.

Related Topics
Generating an analytic report
Viewing a bookmarked report
Editing an analytic report bookmark

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1105

Incomplete Scorecards report Vendor Analysis reports

1106 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer

The SRM Explorer module provides enhanced, interactive ad-hoc reporting and data
analysis, including a multi-dimensional drill-down capacity. Additional data analysis is
available through the use of calculated columns and exception highlighting.
Using SRM Explorer, you can view, explore and analyze data in interactive charts,
graphs, and tables. You can compare data categories, perform calculations, and use
tools to sort, filter, hide, and highlight. You can create an offline copy of your data to
work disconnected from the Internet, or simply print the data, or save it in various
industry standard formats, such as Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Word, and Adobe Acrobat
PDF.
Reports created in SRM Explorer are known as data cubes. Default data cubes are
provided in Frictionless SRM, and others can be created by your system administrator.
You cannot export cube data in any form. Cube data must be viewed in Frictionless®
SRM. Data cubes cannot be bookmarked.
Data cubes are currently used only for spend data.
The data cubes available by default are as follows.

Report Description

Spend by Five Standard This report enables you to analyze spend by commodity, supplier,
Dimensions organization, geography, and time.
Average Unit Price Analysis This report provides visibility into average unit prices by
geography, quarter, and so on, to detect compliance issues or
price trends.
Vendor Minority Status with This report enables you to analyze which organizations, regions,
Standard Dimensions commodities, and so on, are sourced from minority suppliers.

Related Topics
SRM Explorer data reporting and analysis fundamentals
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
About SRM Explorer tables
About SRM Explorer charts and graphs
About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer
About sorting SRM Explorer data
About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns

Confidential 1107
 SRM Explorer

About saving data in SRM Explorer

1108 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer SRM Explorer data reporting and analysis fundamentals

SRM Explorer data reporting and analysis fundamentals

Data
Data is organized into categories and units of measure, which are automatically
delivered to you over the Internet in a package commonly known as a data cube.
A category consists of a set of data items (or subcategories) that are organized into a
hierarchy of parents and children. For example, you might organize data into three
categories: Distributors, Products, and Date. The Products category contains the data
items Auto and Home, which subsequently contain Tire and Filter, and Toaster and
Blender, respectively. Notice that each level further down the hierarchy contains
increasingly detailed information. This hierarchical organization enables you to gain
both high-level and low-level understanding of the data -- by navigating up or down the
hierarchy to display generalized or detailed information, as required.
A unit of measure is a value that provides the metrics of interest. There might be two
units of measure in the example above: Revenue and Quantity.
The units of measure are grouped together into a special category called the Measures
category.

Tables, Charts, and Graphs

You can identify trends, detect anomalies, create reports, evaluate status, and so on,
by comparing and combining data categories in a table, chart, or graph format. In each
format, you can select the unit of measure to display. For example, you might graph
the Revenue for Products sold by Distributors over Date, or chart Lifespan for Age
Groups by World Regions.
You see the categories in a chart or graph as the row and column labels on an axis, or
the labels in a legend. In a table, the categories appear as row and column labels.

Analyze
Powerful analysis features enable you to quickly and easily answer intuitive and
complex questions about your data, such as, “What is my revenue for this year across
the southwest distributors for my focus products?” To answer such a question, you
might arrange the data categories Distributors and Products in a table. You could then
select the time frame (this year) to see from the Date category, and the unit of
measure, Revenue. Then you might sort the data, and filter any Distributors and
Products that you do not want to see. Finally, you could display the answer in a chart
format and then navigate this interactive chart to see results on a quarterly or monthly
basis.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
About SRM Explorer tables

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1109

SRM Explorer data reporting and analysis fundamentals SRM Explorer

About SRM Explorer charts and graphs

About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer
About sorting SRM Explorer data
About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
About saving data in SRM Explorer

1110 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Selecting data in a SRM Explorer data cube

Selecting data in a SRM Explorer data cube

As you work with your data, you will occasionally need to select particular rows or
columns. For example, you might select the rows or columns to display in a chart or
graph.

To select a row (or column):

` Click a row (or column) label. The selected label is highlighted.

To select multiple rows (or columns) one at a time:

1 Click a row (or column) label. The selected label is highlighted.
2 Press and hold CTRL, and then click one or more additional row (or column) labels.
Each selected label is highlighted.

To select a range of rows (or columns):

1 Click the first row (or column) label in the range. The selected label is highlighted.
2 Press and hold SHIFT, and then click the last row (or column) label in the range. All
selected labels in the range are highlighted.

To deselect all rows (or columns):

` Press ESC to deselect all selected rows (or columns).

To deselect a particular row (or column):

` Press and hold CTRL, and then click a selected row (or column) label.

Related Topics
SRM Explorer data reporting and analysis fundamentals
Undoing mistakes in a SRM Explorer data cube
Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1111

Undoing mistakes in a SRM Explorer data cube SRM Explorer

Undoing mistakes in a SRM Explorer data cube

When you are working with your data, you can undo the most recent action that you
performed. If you then decide you did not want to undo an action, you can redo the
action automatically.

To undo or redo an action:

` To undo an action, on the toolbar, click Undo.
` To redo an action, on the toolbar, click Redo.

Note: You cannot undo an action that creates, saves, or deletes a report.

Related Topics
SRM Explorer data reporting and analysis fundamentals
Selecting data in a SRM Explorer data cube
Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer

1112 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube

Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube

You can customize how you work by setting preference options. You can do any of the
following:
` Select your experience level
` Set data display preferences for:
■ General
■ Rows
■ Columns
■ Bar Chart
■ Pie Chart
■ Line Graph
` Dynamically adjust row and column sizes
` Maximize your work area

Note: When you open a report, the report will automatically set default data display
preferences for the table, chart or graph.

Tip: You can quickly access the data display preference dialogs by right-clicking a data
element in a table, chart, or graph, and then clicking one of the preferences options.

Related Topics
SRM Explorer data reporting and analysis fundamentals
Selecting your experience level in SRM Explorer
Setting General preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Rows preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Columns preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Bar Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Pie Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Line Graph preferences in SRM Explorer
Adjusting row and column sizes in SRM Explorer
Maximizing your work area in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1113

Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube SRM Explorer

Selecting your experience level in SRM Explorer

You can select the experience level that best suits your needs and experience. Each
experience level offers a unique set of features for working with data. For example, one
experience level might be appropriate if you are working with reports exclusively, while
another experience level might be appropriate for advanced analysis.

To select your experience level:

` On the toolbar, click Preferences, point to Experience Level, and then select an
experience level. The menus and tool bars will change to reflect the new experience
level.

Tip: If you are unable to find a specific feature, try selecting another experience level.
The feature might not be available for your current experience level.

Related Topics
Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube
Setting General preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Rows preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Columns preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Bar Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Pie Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Line Graph preferences in SRM Explorer
Adjusting row and column sizes in SRM Explorer
Maximizing your work area in SRM Explorer

1114 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube

Setting General preferences in SRM Explorer

To set General preferences:
1 On the SRM Explorer toolbar, click Preferences and then click General. The
Preferences dialog box appears with the General tab displayed. Do one or more of
the following:
■ To show the Expand and Collapse buttons on row and column labels, select the
Show Expand and Collapse controls checkbox.
■ To show grid lines in tables, charts and graphs, select the Show grid lines
checkbox.
■ To show both cell values and % of total results in tables, select the Show cell
values with % of total checkbox.
■ To set the number of decimal places displayed for percentage of totals values,
in the Decimal places for % of total box, type the number of decimal places.
■ To change the format of row and column labels, in the Show labels as area,
select Columnar or Hierarchical. Columnar layout displays the labels for each
category level in a separate column, while Hierarchical layout displays the
category levels in a tree structure.
2 Click OK.

Tip: You can quickly access the data display preference dialogs by right-clicking a data
element in a table, chart, or graph, and then clicking one of the preferences options.

Related Topics
Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube
Selecting your experience level in SRM Explorer
Setting Rows preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Columns preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Bar Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Pie Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Line Graph preferences in SRM Explorer
Adjusting row and column sizes in SRM Explorer
Maximizing your work area in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1115

Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube SRM Explorer

Setting Rows preferences in SRM Explorer

To set Row preferences:
1 On the toolbar, click Preferences and then click Rows. The Preferences dialog box
appears with the Rows tab displayed. Do one or more of the following:
■ To show rows containing column totals, select the Show totals checkbox.
■ To show the parent-child hierarchy of the categories on the rows axis, select the
Show category hierarchy checkbox. (This option applies only if Show labels
as is set to Hierarchical.)
■ To show rows that do not contain any data, select the Show blank rows
checkbox.
■ To show rows containing only zero (0) values, select the Show rows with all
zeros checkbox.
■ To automatically resize row labels for optimal display, select the Automatically
size label width checkbox.
2 Click OK.

Tip: You can quickly access the data display preference dialogs by right-clicking a data
element in a table, chart, or graph, and then clicking one of the preferences options.

Related Topics
Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube
Selecting your experience level in SRM Explorer
Setting General preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Columns preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Bar Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Pie Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Line Graph preferences in SRM Explorer
Adjusting row and column sizes in SRM Explorer
Maximizing your work area in SRM Explorer

1116 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube

Setting Columns preferences in SRM Explorer

To set Column preferences:
1 On the toolbar, click Preferences, and then click Columns. The Preferences dialog
box appears with the Columns tab displayed. Do one or more of the following:
■ To show columns containing row totals, select the Show totals checkbox.
■ To show the parent-child hierarchy of the categories on the columns axis, select
the Show category hierarchy checkbox. (This option applies only if Show
labels as is set to Hierarchical.)
■ To show columns that do not contain any data, select the Show blank
columns checkbox.
■ To show columns containing only zero (0) values, select the Show columns
with all zeros checkbox.
■ To automatically resize column labels for optimal display, select the
Automatically size label height checkbox.
2 Click OK.

Tip: You can quickly access the data display preference dialogs by right-clicking a data
element in a table, chart, or graph, and then clicking one of the preferences options.

Related Topics
Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube
Selecting your experience level in SRM Explorer
Setting General preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Rows preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Bar Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Pie Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Line Graph preferences in SRM Explorer
Adjusting row and column sizes in SRM Explorer
Maximizing your work area in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1117

Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube SRM Explorer

Setting Bar Chart preferences in SRM Explorer

To set Bar Chart preferences:
1 On the toolbar, click Preferences, point to Charts and Graphs, and then click Bar
Chart. The Preferences dialog box appears with the Bar Chart tab displayed. Do
one or more of the following:
■ To show Bar Charts in 3 dimensions, select the Show 3-D visual effect
checkbox.
■ To show data values on the chart, select the Show data values as checkbox,
and then click Percentage (%) to display the data values as a percentages, or
click Numeric to display the data values as numbers.
2 Click OK.

Tip: You can quickly access the data display preference dialogs by right-clicking a data
element in a table, chart, or graph, and then clicking one of the preferences options.

Related Topics
Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube
Selecting your experience level in SRM Explorer
Setting General preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Rows preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Columns preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Pie Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Line Graph preferences in SRM Explorer
Adjusting row and column sizes in SRM Explorer
Maximizing your work area in SRM Explorer

1118 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube

Setting Pie Chart preferences in SRM Explorer

To set Pie Chart preferences:
1 On the toolbar, click Preferences, point to Charts and Graphs, and then click Pie
Chart. The Preferences dialog box appears with the Pie Chart tab displayed. Do one
or more of the following:
■ To show Pie Charts in 3 dimensions, select the Show 3-D visual effect
checkbox.
■ To show data values on the chart, select the Show data values as checkbox,
and then click Percentage (%) to show data as percentage values, or click
Numeric to show data as numeric values.
■ To show labels on the chart, select the Show labels checkbox.
2 In the Pie Slices area, do one of the following:
■ To show a separate pie slice for each data item in the chart, click Show all
slices.
■ To combine several small pie slices into a single slice called “Other”, click Limit
display by combining slices that are less than this % of the pie, and then
in the box, type a percentage value. All data items with a percentage value less
than the value you specify are grouped into the Other slice.
■ To display a specific number of the largest slices, click Limit display by
number of slices, and then in the box, type the number of slices to display.
Any remaining slices are grouped into a single slice called “Other”.
3 Click OK.

Tip: You can quickly access the data display preference dialogs by right-clicking a data
element in a table, chart, or graph, and then clicking one of the preferences options.

Related Topics
Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube
Selecting your experience level in SRM Explorer
Setting General preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Rows preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Columns preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Bar Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Line Graph preferences in SRM Explorer
Adjusting row and column sizes in SRM Explorer
Maximizing your work area in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1119

Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube SRM Explorer

Setting Line Graph preferences in SRM Explorer

To set Line Graph preferences:
1 On the toolbar, click Preferences, point to Charts and Graphs, and then click
Line Graph. The Preferences dialog box appears with the Line Graph tab displayed.
Do one or more of the following:
■ To show data values on the graph, select the Show data values as checkbox,
and then click Percentage (%) to show data as percentage values, or click
Numeric to show data as numeric values.
■ To show labels on the chart, select the Show labels checkbox.
2 Click OK.

Tip: You can quickly access the data display preference dialogs by right-clicking a data
element in a table, chart, or graph, and then clicking one of the preferences options.

Related Topics
Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube
Selecting your experience level in SRM Explorer
Setting General preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Rows preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Columns preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Bar Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Pie Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Adjusting row and column sizes in SRM Explorer
Maximizing your work area in SRM Explorer

1120 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube

Adjusting row and column sizes in SRM Explorer

You can adjust the row and column sizes to customize the data display. Do one or more
of the following:
` To manually set the size of the row (or column) labels, click, hold and drag a label
edge, and drop it in a new location on the rows (or columns) axis.
` To automatically set the height of the row labels, on the toolbar, click the Fit to
Page Height button.
` To automatically set the width of the column labels, on the toolbar, click the Fit to
Page Width button.
` To automatically adjust the width of the row labels for optimal display, on the
toolbar, click Preferences, click Rows, and then select the Automatically size
label width checkbox.
` To automatically adjust the height of the column labels for optimal display, on the
toolbar, click Preferences, click Columns, and then select the Automatically
size label height checkbox.

Tip: If a row (or column) is too small to read the label, pause your mouse pointer over
the label and the complete label appears as a screen tip.

Related Topics
Selecting your experience level in SRM Explorer
Setting General preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Rows preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Columns preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Bar Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Pie Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Line Graph preferences in SRM Explorer
Adjusting row and column sizes in SRM Explorer
Maximizing your work area in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1121

Setting preferences in a SRM Explorer data cube SRM Explorer

Maximizing your work area in SRM Explorer

You can maximize your work area by opening a new window that does not contain any
of your Web browser's menus, tool bars, status bars, or other controls.

To maximize your work area:

` On the title bar, click the New Window button. A new window is opened, and your
data is displayed exactly as it appeared in the original window.

Note: While you are working in this new window, the original Web browser window
remains open. When you close the new window, you can resume working with your data
in the original window. If you close the original window while you are working in the new
window, both windows will be closed.

Related Topics
Selecting your experience level in SRM Explorer
Setting General preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Rows preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Columns preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Bar Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Pie Chart preferences in SRM Explorer
Setting Line Graph preferences in SRM Explorer
Adjusting row and column sizes in SRM Explorer
Maximizing your work area in SRM Explorer

1122 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer

Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer

You can view data in the following ways:
` Work in Presentation view or Analysis view using View.
` Format data in a table, vertical bar chart, horizontal bar chart, pie chart, or line
graph.
` Compare the data categories in your table, chart or graph.
` Select the data to see in your table, chart or graph using the Categories bar.
` Change the unit of measure displayed in your table, chart, or graph.
` Use Preference settings to view totals, hide empty rows and columns, and format
data values.
` You can navigate the data in a table, chart or graph by doing any of the following:
■ Use the scroll bars to view data that is not shown in the data display area.
■ Use Expand, Collapse, and Expand to level to see more specific or more
general information. For example, you might expand a slice of a pie chart to see
the specific data that makes up that slice of the pie, or you might navigate up
and down the different levels of data items in a category.
■ Use Drill through to detail data to retrieve the original (source) data records
that were used to calculate the value of a data element in a table, chart, or
graph.
■ Use Find to search for items in a category.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer
Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer
Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer
Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer
Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer
Showing totals in SRM Explorer
Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer
Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer
Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer
Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer
Finding data in SRM Explorer
Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1123

Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer

You can work in either Presentation view or Analysis view.
Presentation view offers a natural presentation of tables, charts and graphs, and allows
you to navigate the data, work with reports, and perform other common tasks.
Analysis view offers a more technical presentation of tables, charts and graphs, which
enables you to perform more sophisticated analysis tasks. For example, you can
arrange data categories, insert calculated rows and columns, and use of other
advanced features.

To work in Presentation view:

` On the toolbar, click View and then click Presentation view.

To work in Analysis view:

` On the toolbar, click View and then click Analysis view.

Tip: In Presentation view, you can hide, show, or resize the legend in a chart or graph
by clicking and dragging the right edge of the chart or graph. Also, right-click the legend
for preference options.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer
Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer
Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer
Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer
Showing totals in SRM Explorer
Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer
Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer
Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer
Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer
Finding data in SRM Explorer
Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer

1124 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer

Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer

You can work with your data in any of the table, chart or graph formats. You can switch
from one format to another at any time.

To choose table format:

` On the toolbar, click Table.

To choose vertical bar chart format:

` On the toolbar, click Vertical Bar Chart and then click one of the vertical bar chart
formats.

To choose horizontal bar chart format:

` On the toolbar, click Horizontal Bar Chart and then click one of the horizontal bar
chart formats.

To choose pie chart format:

` On the toolbar, click Pie Chart.

To choose line graph format:

` On the toolbar, click Line Graph.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer
Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer
Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer
Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer
Showing totals in SRM Explorer
Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer
Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer
Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer
Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer
Finding data in SRM Explorer
Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1125

Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer

You compare data categories in a table, chart or graph to identify trends, detect
anomalies, create reports, and evaluate status, and so on. You see the categories in a
chart or graph as the row and column labels on an axis, or the labels in a legend. In a
table, the categories appear as row and column labels.
You can do any of the following with the categories displayed in a table, chart, or
graph:
` Navigate to find and compare data items.
` Filter or hide data items you do not want to view.
` Sort the data items in a specific order.
` Arrange categories to replace, add, remove, or move a category, switch one
category with another, or swap all categories.
` Insert calculated rows or columns into a category.

Note: You must work in Analysis view to arrange categories in a table, chart or graph.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer
Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer
Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer
Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer
Showing totals in SRM Explorer
Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer
Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer
Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer
Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer
Finding data in SRM Explorer
Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer

1126 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer

Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer

You can select the data you want to see in a table, chart or graph by choosing the items
of interest from the categories on the Categories bar. For example, in a life span chart,
you might select North America, 2004, and Female to see the expected life span of
North American females born in the year 2004.

Notes on selecting data

You can also change the unit of measure displayed for the selected data.
If you are working in Analysis view, you can arbitrarily arrange the data categories that
are compared in your table, chart, or graph.
If there is no data that matches the items you have selected, the message “No data to
display” will appear in the data display area.
If you are selecting from a Date category, the Select dialog might offer the option to
Use relative time periods. If you select a relative time period, such as Previous Year,
the resulting table, chart, or graph shows only data for that time period. The available
time periods are relative to the reference date of the data, which is displayed after “As
of” in the Select Time Period dialog.

To select the data you want to see:

1 On the Categories bar, click a category button. The Select dialog appears.
2 Select the checkbox beside one or more items. (Click Expand or use the Expand
to level box to show the available items.)
3 Click OK or Apply. The data in your table, chart, or graph is updated to reflect the
selected items. On the Categories bar, the category button label will change to
display the selected items, and a filter icon will appear in the lower right corner of
the button.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer
Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer
Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer
Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer
Showing totals in SRM Explorer
Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer
Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer
Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer
Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1127

Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Finding data in SRM Explorer

Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer

1128 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer

Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer

You can display a single unit of measure, or multiple units of measure, for the data in
your tables, charts, and graphs. The units of measure available are grouped together in
the Measures category.

To display a single unit of measure:

1 On the Categories bar, click the Measures category button. (The Measures
category is the last button on the Categories bar.) The Select Unit of Measure dialog
appears.
2 Select the button beside the unit of measure to display.
3 Click OK or Apply. The data display area updates to display the selected measure.

To display multiple units of measure:

` On the Categories bar, click, hold and drag the Measures category button, and
drop it on the rows (or columns) axis. (The Measures category button is the last
button on the Categories bar.) The data display area updates to show all of the
units of measure.

Notes
If you cannot find the Measures category on the Categories bar, you will find it on the
rows or columns axis.
You must work in Analysis view to move the Measures category button from the
Categories bar. In addition, if you are working in Analysis view, you can arrange the
categories to place the Measures category in any position on the rows (or columns)
axis.

Tips
Right-click a table, chart, or graph for options to format the unit of measure.
If the Measures category is on the rows (or columns) axis, you can use filtering and
hiding to temporarily hide measures that you do not want displayed.
You can use exception highlighting to automatically reveal anomalies and significant
trends.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer
Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer
Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer
Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1129

Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Showing totals in SRM Explorer

Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer
Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer
Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer
Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer
Finding data in SRM Explorer
Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer

1130 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer

Showing totals in SRM Explorer

You can show totals for the data in your tables, charts, and graphs.

To show totals:
` Right-click a data element (cell in a table, bar in a bar chart, slice in a pie chart, or
point on a line graph), point to Show row totals as (or Show column totals as),
and then click Leading or Trailing on the shortcut menu.

To hide totals:
` Right-click a data element (cell in a table, bar in a bar chart, slice in a pie chart, or
point on a line graph), point to Show row totals as (or Show column totals as),
and then click None on the shortcut menu.

Notes
Total values show the actual values of the data items in the category hierarchy. For
example, a Products category containing the data items Auto and Home, which
subsequently contain Tire and Filter, and Toaster and Blender, respectively. If you show
totals for the Products category, additional rows (or columns) will appear to display the
values for Auto, Home, and Products.
Total values are unaffected by filtering and hiding. That is, if you use filtering and
hiding to temporarily hide data that you do not want displayed, the total values do not
change.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer
Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer
Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer
Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer
Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer
Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer
Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer
Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer
Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer
Finding data in SRM Explorer
Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1131

Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer

You can expand a data item to display more detailed information in your table, chart or
graph. For example, you might expand Europe to see detailed information for each
country in the region.

To expand a data element in a table, chart or graph:

` Right-click a data element (cell in a table, bar in a bar chart, slice in a pie chart, or
point on a line graph), and then click Expand on the shortcut menu.

To expand a data item on the rows or columns axis, or legend:

` On a data item label, click Expand. (Alternatively, right-click a data item label, and
then click Expand on the shortcut menu.)

Note: You can expand an item only if more detailed information is available. Otherwise,
Expand will not be available.

Tip: Double-click a data element in a table, chart or graph to expand it.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer
Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer
Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer
Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer
Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer
Showing totals in SRM Explorer
Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer
Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer
Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer
Finding data in SRM Explorer
Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer

1132 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer

Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer

You can collapse a data item to display more general information in your table, chart or
graph. For example, you might collapse Europe to see only the summary information
for the region.

To collapse a data element in a table, chart or graph:

` Right-click a data element (cell in a table, bar in a bar chart, slice in a pie chart, or
point on a line graph), and then click Collapse on the shortcut menu.

To collapse a data item on the rows or columns axis, or legend:

` On a data item label, click Collapse. (Alternatively, right-click a data item label,
and then click Collapse on the shortcut menu.)

Note: You can collapse an item only if more general information is available. Otherwise,
Collapse will not be available.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer
Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer
Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer
Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer
Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer
Showing totals in SRM Explorer
Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer
Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer
Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer
Finding data in SRM Explorer
Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1133

Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer

Using Expand to level, you can quickly expand (or collapse) a category or data item to
a specific level in its hierarchy. For example, in a Date category with a Year, Quarter
and Month hierarchy, you could use Expand to level to expand Date to the month level
in a single step.

To expand a category or data item to a specific level:

` Right-click a category label or data item label, point to Expand to level on the
short-cut menu, and then click a level name.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer
Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer
Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer
Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer
Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer
Showing totals in SRM Explorer
Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer
Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer
Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer
Finding data in SRM Explorer
Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer

1134 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer

Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer

Using Drill through to detail data, you can navigate to the detail data (source records)
that were used to calculate the value of a data element in a table, chart, or graph. The
detail data is presented in tabular format in a new Web browser window.

To drill through to detail data:

1 Right-click one of the following data elements:
■ Cell in a table
■ Bar in a bar chart
■ Segment in a pie chart
■ Point in a graph
2 On the short-cut menu, click Drill through to detail data. The detailed source
records are retrieved from the server and displayed in a new window.

Notes
Depending on your server configuration, it may take a few seconds or minutes to
retrieve the detail data.
A maximum of 100 source records are displayed at a time. To display the next 100
records, click the button at the bottom of the detail data window.
Drill through to detail data is unavailable if you are working offline or your information
provider has disabled the feature.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer
Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer
Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer
Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer
Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer
Showing totals in SRM Explorer
Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer
Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer
Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer
Finding data in SRM Explorer
Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1135

Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Finding data in SRM Explorer

You can search for data items in a category displayed in a table, chart, or graph.

To find data:
1 On the rows (or columns) axis, right-click the label of the category to search, and
then click Find. The Find dialog box appears.
2 In the Find what box, type the word, term, or number to find, and then click Find
Next. The category is searched for the specified text and, if found, the next
instance is highlighted.

Note: To find data in a category, the category must border the data display area.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer
Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer
Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer
Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer
Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer
Showing totals in SRM Explorer
Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer
Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer
Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer
Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer
Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer

1136 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer

Refreshing the data display area in SRM Explorer

The data display area is automatically refreshed as you open a report, navigate through
the data, and otherwise interact with the data. However, you can use the Manual
Update features to control when the data display area is refreshed.

To activate the Manual Update feature:

` On the toolbar, click Update On/Off.

To manually refresh the data display area:

` On the toolbar, click Update.

Notes
Manual Update is an optional feature, which your information provider might have
disabled. If Manual Update is disabled, the data display area will be automatically
refreshed, as required.

Related Topics
Viewing and navigating data in SRM Explorer
Working in Presentation view or Analysis view in SRM Explorer
Choosing a table, chart or graph format in SRM Explorer
Comparing data categories in SRM Explorer
Selecting the data you want to see in SRM Explorer
Changing the unit of measure in SRM Explorer
Showing totals in SRM Explorer
Expanding a data item in SRM Explorer
Collapsing a data item in SRM Explorer
Using Expand to level in a category in SRM Explorer
Drilling through to detail data in SRM Explorer
Finding data in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1137

About SRM Explorer tables SRM Explorer

About SRM Explorer tables

You click Table on the toolbar to display data in rows and columns. You can interact
with a table to view, explore and analyze data dynamically. You use standard methods
to view and navigate data, filter and hide data, sort data, arrange data categories, and
set preferences.
In a table cell, the data value is called the cell value. You can display cell values in any
of the following formats:
` Cell value
` Percentage of column total
` Percentage of row total
` Percentage of grand total
` Cell value with percentage of total

In addition, you can do any of the following in a table:

` Use exception highlighting to conditionally highlight data values to automatically
reveal anomalies and significant trends
` Insert calculated rows and columns

Related Topics
Showing data as cell values in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of column total in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of row total in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of grand total in SRM Explorer
Showing cell values with % of total in SRM Explorer
Exception highlighting in SRM Explorer

1138 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer tables

Showing data as cell values in SRM Explorer

You can format each table cell to show the cell value, or actual data value.

To show data as cell values:

` In a table cell, right-click, point to Show data as, and then click Cell value.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer tables
Showing data as % of column total in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of row total in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of grand total in SRM Explorer
Showing cell values with % of total in SRM Explorer
Exception highlighting in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1139

About SRM Explorer tables SRM Explorer

Showing data as % of column total in SRM Explorer

You can format each cell value as a percentage of its column total.

To show data as percentage of column total:

` In a table cell, right-click, point to Show data as, and then click % of column
total.

Notes
Sorting always orders tables by the actual cell values, regardless of how the values are
formatted.
Showing data as % of column total automatically cancels any Sort applied to the rows
axis, unless cell values are displayed with % of total formats.
% of total format is not supported in charts or graphs.

Tips
To set the number of decimal places displayed in % of total formats, use General
preferences.
You can display cell values with % of total formats.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer tables
Showing data as cell values in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of row total in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of grand total in SRM Explorer
Showing cell values with % of total in SRM Explorer
Exception highlighting in SRM Explorer

1140 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer tables

Showing data as % of row total in SRM Explorer

You can format each cell value as a percentage of its row total.

To show data as percentage of row total:

` In a table cell, right-click, point to Show data as, and then click % of row total.

Notes
Sorting always orders tables by the actual cell values, regardless of how the values are
formatted.
Showing data as % of row total automatically cancels any Sort applied to the columns
axis, unless cell values are displayed with % of total formats.
% of total format is not supported in charts or graphs.

Tips
To set the number of decimal places displayed in % of total formats, use General
preferences.
You can display cell values with % of total formats.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer tables
Showing data as cell values in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of column total in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of grand total in SRM Explorer
Showing cell values with % of total in SRM Explorer
Exception highlighting in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1141

About SRM Explorer tables SRM Explorer

Showing data as % of grand total in SRM Explorer

You can format each cell value as a percentage of the table grand total.

To show data as percentage of grand total:

` In a table cell, right-click, point to Show data as, and then click % of grand
total.

Notes
Sorting always orders tables by the actual cell values, regardless of how the values are
formatted.
% of total format is not supported in charts or graphs.

Tips
To set the number of decimal places displayed in % of total formats, use General
preferences.
You can display cell values with % of total formats.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer tables
Showing data as cell values in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of column total in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of row total in SRM Explorer
Showing cell values with % of total in SRM Explorer
Exception highlighting in SRM Explorer

1142 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer tables

Showing cell values with % of total in SRM Explorer

When showing cell values in % of total format, you can also display the corresponding
cell values.

To show cell values with % of total:

` In a table cell, right-click, and then click to select Show cell value with % of
total.

To cancel show cell values with % of total:

` In a table cell, right-click, and then click to clear Show cell value with % of
total.

Tip: To set the number of decimal places displayed in % of total formats, use General
preferences.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer tables
Showing data as cell values in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of column total in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of row total in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of grand total in SRM Explorer
Exception highlighting in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1143

About SRM Explorer tables SRM Explorer

Exception highlighting in SRM Explorer

You can use exception highlighting to automatically reveal anomalies and significant
trends in data. With exception highlighting, you use color to highlight table cells based
on the cell value, or how the cell value compares to other values. For example, cells
with values below 10 might be colored red, while cells with values exceeding 100 might
be colored green. You can apply more than one exception highlighting rule at a time.

To apply an exception highlighting rule:

1 On the toolbar, click Exception Highlighting. The Exception Highlighting dialog
box appears.
2 Select the checkbox next to the exception highlight rules to apply.
3 Click OK or Apply.

To define a new exception highlight:

1 To apply an exception highlight in a particular row or column, select that row or
column.
2 On the toolbar, click Exception Highlighting. The Exception Highlighting dialog
box appears.
3 Click New.
4 In the Rule Properties area, type a label, and then specify the exception
condition, and corresponding highlight colors.
5 Click Save Changes.
6 Click OK or Apply.

Notes
To use exception highlighting, you must be working in table format.
You can also use the Exception Highlighting dialog to change or delete exception
highlighting rules.
If more than one exception highlighting rule applies to the same table cell, the
highlights will be applied in the order that they appear in the Exception Highlighting
dialog. In the Exception Highlighting dialog, you can use the up and down arrows to
change the ordering.
In the Rule Properties area, if the Condition box is set to % of row total, % of column
total, or % of grand total, then the Value box is assumed to contain percentage values.
For example, in the Value box, type 20 for 20%, rather than 0.2.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer tables

1144 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer tables

Showing data as cell values in SRM Explorer

Showing data as % of column total in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of row total in SRM Explorer
Showing data as % of grand total in SRM Explorer
Showing cell values with % of total in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1145

About SRM Explorer charts and graphs SRM Explorer

About SRM Explorer charts and graphs

You click Vertical Bar Chart, Horizontal Bar Chart, Pie Chart, or Line Graph on the
toolbar to display data in a chart or graph. You can interact with a chart or graph to
view, explore and analyze data dynamically. You use standard methods to view and
navigate data, filter and hide data, sort data, arrange data categories, and set
preferences.
You can select the data to appear in your chart or graph. In addition, your charts and
graph are interactive, and will automatically adjust as you navigate through the data.
For charts and graphs with a number scale, you can have the scale automatically adjust
to the data, or set the scale to a specific number range and increment. Right-click the
scale to access the formatting options.

Related Topics
Working with a vertical bar chart in SRM Explorer
Working with a horizontal bar chart in SRM Explorer
Working with a pie chart in SRM Explorer
Working with a line graph in SRM Explorer

1146 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer charts and graphs

Working with a vertical bar chart in SRM Explorer

In a vertical bar chart, you can select the rows to display as vertical bars in each
column.

In Analysis view, to work with a vertical bar chart:

` Select one or more rows to chart. The chart updates to display the selected rows.

In Presentation view, to work with a vertical bar chart:

` Right-click an item in the legend, and then click Expand (or Collapse) to view
more (or less) detail. The chart updates to display the selected data.

Notes
Rows are automatically selected as you navigate through the data.
If you choose the Stacked 100% chart format, the chart scale shows percentages.

Tips
Right-click the chart for bar chart preference options.
Right-click the chart scale for formatting options.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer charts and graphs
Working with a horizontal bar chart in SRM Explorer
Working with a pie chart in SRM Explorer
Working with a line graph in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1147

About SRM Explorer charts and graphs SRM Explorer

Working with a horizontal bar chart in SRM Explorer

In a horizontal bar chart, you can select the columns to display as horizontal bars in
each row.

In Analysis view, to work with a horizontal bar chart:

` Select one or more columns to chart. The chart updates to display the selected
columns.

In Presentation view, to work with a horizontal bar chart:

` Right-click an item in the legend, and then click Expand (or Collapse) to view
more (or less) detail. The chart updates to display the selected data.

Notes
Columns are automatically selected as you navigate through the data.
If you choose the Stacked 100% chart format, the chart scale shows percentages.

Tips
Right-click the chart for bar chart preference options.
Right-click the chart scale for formatting options.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer charts and graphs
Working with a vertical bar chart in SRM Explorer
Working with a pie chart in SRM Explorer
Working with a line graph in SRM Explorer

1148 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer charts and graphs

Working with a pie chart in SRM Explorer

In a pie chart, you can select the rows to display in a pie chart for a chosen column.

In Analysis view, to work with a pie chart:

` Select one or more rows to chart. The chart updates to display the selected rows for
the currently selected column.
` Select a column to chart. The chart updates to display the currently selected rows
for the selected column.

In Presentation view, to work with a pie chart:

` Right-click an item in the legend, and then click Expand (or Collapse) to view
more (or less) detail. The chart updates to display the selected data.
` Select a column to chart. The chart updates to display the currently selected data
for the selected column.

Notes
Rows are automatically selected as you navigate through the data.
Data values in the chart that are below a threshold are grouped into a single pie slice
labeled “Other”. You can control this threshold using pie chart preference options.

Tip: Right-click the chart for pie chart preference options.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer charts and graphs
Working with a vertical bar chart in SRM Explorer
Working with a horizontal bar chart in SRM Explorer
Working with a line graph in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1149

About SRM Explorer charts and graphs SRM Explorer

Working with a line graph in SRM Explorer

In a line graph, you can select the rows to graph across the columns.

In Analysis view, to work with a line graph:

` Select one or more rows to graph. The graph updates to display the selected rows.

In Presentation view, to work with a line graph:

` Right-click an item in the legend, and then click Expand (or Collapse) to view
more (or less) detail. The chart updates to display the selected data.

Note: Rows are automatically selected as you navigate through the data.

Tips
Right-click the chart for line graph preference options.
Right-click the chart scale for formatting options.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer charts and graphs
Working with a vertical bar chart in SRM Explorer
Working with a horizontal bar chart in SRM Explorer
Working with a pie chart in SRM Explorer

1150 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer

About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer

You can use filtering and hiding to temporarily hide data in a table, chart, or graph that
you do not want displayed. For example, you might want to display only the Products
rows that have a value greater than 100 in the Quantity column, or that the rows that
have product names starting with the “ABC”.
Using filtering and hiding to temporarily hide data does not affect the values of the
remaining data items. For example, hiding New York and California does not affect the
total value displayed for United States.

You can do any of the following:

` Filter by value
` Filter out blank or zero values
` Filter by pattern
` Filter by relative time period
` Hide selected
` Hide unselected

If you have applied filtering or hiding, you can then:

` Edit a filter
` Cancel a filter
` Cancel hiding

Notes
The filter icon indicates filtering or hiding is applied to a category or data item.
If filtering and hiding causes all of the items in a category to be hidden, the message
“No data to display” will appear in the data display area.
Unlike sorting, filtering does not change the order of the data items.
Any filtering or hiding is automatically cancelled if you open a report, or rearrange the
category to which the filtering or hiding is applied.

Related Topics
Filtering by value in SRM Explorer
SRM Explorer filter criteria
Filtering out blank or zero values in SRM Explorer
Filtering by pattern in SRM Explorer
Filtering by relative time periods in SRM Explorer
Editing a filter in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1151

About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Canceling a filter in SRM Explorer

Hiding selected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Hiding unselected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Canceling hiding in SRM Explorer

1152 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer

Filtering by value in SRM Explorer

You can display only the rows that meet criteria you specify for a column. Conversely,
you can display only the columns that meet criteria you specify for a row. For example,
you might want to display only the Products rows that have a value greater than 100 in
the Quantity column.

To filter by value:
1 On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click a data item label, and then click Filter by
value. The Filter by Value dialog box appears.
2 In the Filter box, type the filter criteria. For example, “x > 100".
3 Click OK. All rows (or columns) that do not meet the filter criteria are hidden from
view, and a filter icon appears in the lower right corner of the data item label
indicating a filter is applied.

Notes
To filter by value, the category must border the data display area.
Filter by value always works with the actual data values, regardless of what format is
currently used to show the data. For example, a data element with a value of 8 might
be shown in percentage format as 42%. In this case, Filter by value will work with 8,
not 42%.
If you apply a filter that hides all of the items in a category, the message “No data to
display” will appear in the data display area.
You can quickly filter out blank or zero values.

Related Topics
About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer
SRM Explorer filter criteria
Filtering out blank or zero values in SRM Explorer
Filtering by pattern in SRM Explorer
Filtering by relative time periods in SRM Explorer
Editing a filter in SRM Explorer
Canceling a filter in SRM Explorer
Hiding selected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Hiding unselected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Canceling hiding in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1153

About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

SRM Explorer filter criteria

You can specify one or more conditions that a column (or row) value must satisfy for
the corresponding row (or column) to be displayed. For example,
x > 100
indicates the column (or row) value must be greater than 100, while
x >= 10 AND x < 20
indicates the column (or row) value must be greater than or equal to 10, and less
then 20.

Follow these conventions to specify filter criteria:

` Use the letter “x” to represent the row (or column) to filter.
` Use the mathematical operators = (equals), < (less than), <= (less than or equal),
> (greater than), >= (greater than or equal), and != (not equal) to make
comparisons.
` Use the logical operators AND and OR to combine two conditions.
` Use the logical operator NOT to negate a condition.
` Use parenthesis, “(“and ”)”, to group conditions, and specify the order of
precedence.
` Use NaN to indicate a blank value. For example, “x != NaN”.

Related Topics
About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer
Filtering by value in SRM Explorer
Filtering out blank or zero values in SRM Explorer
Filtering by pattern in SRM Explorer
Filtering by relative time periods in SRM Explorer
Editing a filter in SRM Explorer
Canceling a filter in SRM Explorer
Hiding selected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Hiding unselected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Canceling hiding in SRM Explorer

1154 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer

Filtering out blank or zero values in SRM Explorer

You can display only the rows that have a non-blank or non-zero value for a column.
Conversely, you can display only the columns that a non-blank or non-zero value for a
row. For example, you might want to display the Products rows that have a non-zero
value in the Quantity column.

To filter out blank or zero values:

1 On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click a data item label, and then click one of
the following:
■ Filter out blank values
■ Filter out zero values
All rows (or columns) that do not meet the filter criteria are hidden from view, and
a filter icon appears in the lower right corner of the data item label indicating a filter
is applied.

Notes
To filter out blank or zero values, the category must border the data display area.
Filter out zero values and Filter out blank values both apply a Filter by value. You
can edit the filter to view or change the filter criteria.
If you do not want to display any blank or zero rows (or columns), you can set the
appropriate Rows Preferences (or Columns Preferences).
If you apply a filter that hides all of the items in a category, the message “No data to
display” will appear in the data display area.

Related Topics
About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer
Filtering by value in SRM Explorer
SRM Explorer filter criteria
Filtering by pattern in SRM Explorer
Filtering by relative time periods in SRM Explorer
Editing a filter in SRM Explorer
Canceling a filter in SRM Explorer
Hiding selected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Hiding unselected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Canceling hiding in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1155

About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Filtering by pattern in SRM Explorer

You can filter a category on the rows or columns axis to display only the data items that
match the pattern you specify for a label. For example, you might want to display only
the Products that have labels that start with the letters “ABC”.

To filter by pattern:
1 On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click a category button, and then click Filter
by pattern. The Filter by Pattern dialog box appears.
2 In the Pattern box, type the pattern to match. If there is more than one pattern,
use a comma (,) to separate one pattern from another. For example:
Apple,Orange,Pear
3 Specify how the pattern must match a data item label by clicking on one of the
following:
■ Whole word - to match the entire data item label.
■ Contains - to match any part of a data item label.
■ Starts with - to match the start of a data item label.
■ Ends with - to match the end of a data item label.
4 If the exact letter case must match, select the Case-sensitive checkbox.
5 To display only the matching data items, select the Show matching checkbox.
Otherwise, clear the checkbox to display only the data items that do not match.
6 Click OK. All data items that do not meet the filter criteria are hidden from view,
and a filter icon appears in the lower right corner of the category button indicating
a filter is applied.

Notes
You must work in Analysis view to filter by pattern.
If you apply a filter that hides all of the items in a category, the message “No data to
display” will appear in the data display area.

Related Topics
About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer
Filtering by value in SRM Explorer
SRM Explorer filter criteria
Filtering out blank or zero values in SRM Explorer
Filtering by relative time periods in SRM Explorer
Editing a filter in SRM Explorer
Canceling a filter in SRM Explorer

1156 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer

Hiding selected rows and columns in SRM Explorer

Hiding unselected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Canceling hiding in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1157

About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Filtering by relative time periods in SRM Explorer

You can filter a Date category to show only the data items in a specific time period,
such as Previous Year or Current Month. All other Date data items will be temporarily
hidden from view in your table, chart, or graph.

To filter a category by relative time periods:

1 On the rows or columns axis, right-click the category button of the Date category to
filter, and then click Filter by relative time periods. The Filter by Relative Time
Periods dialog box appears.
2 In the Choose time period box, click a time period.
3 Click OK. All data items that do not meet the filter criteria are hidden from view,
and a filter icon appears in the lower right corner of the category button indicating
a filter is applied.

Notes
To filter by relative time periods, you must be working in table format or Analysis view.
The available time periods are relative to the reference date of the data, which is
displayed after “As of” in the Filter by Relative Time Periods dialog.
If you apply a relative time period filter, the category will automatically expand to the
appropriate level. For example, if you filter on Current Month, the category will
automatically expand to the month level.
You can show a given time period in regular intervals. For example, you might want to
show the current month for each of the past 5 years. To do this, select the Show more
than one time period checkbox, and then set the number of intervals and the repeat
period.
If you apply a filter that hides all of the items in a category, the message “No data to
display” will appear in the data display area.

Related Topics
About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer
Filtering by value in SRM Explorer
SRM Explorer filter criteria
Filtering out blank or zero values in SRM Explorer
Filtering by pattern in SRM Explorer
Editing a filter in SRM Explorer
Canceling a filter in SRM Explorer
Hiding selected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Hiding unselected rows and columns in SRM Explorer

1158 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer

Canceling hiding in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1159

About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Editing a filter in SRM Explorer

You can edit a filter to view or modify the filter criteria. A filter is indicated by a filter
icon, which is displayed in a category button, or beside a data item label on the rows
(or columns) axis.

To edit a Filter by value:

` On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click the label of the data item with the filter to
edit, and then click Edit value filter.

To edit a Filter by pattern:

` On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click the category button of the category with
the filter to edit, and then click Edit pattern filter.

To edit a Filter by relative time periods:

` On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click the category button of the category with
the filter to edit, and then click Edit relative time periods filter.

Note: If you apply a filter that hides all of the items in a category, the message “No
data to display” will appear in the data display area.

Related Topics
About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer
Filtering by value in SRM Explorer
SRM Explorer filter criteria
Filtering out blank or zero values in SRM Explorer
Filtering by pattern in SRM Explorer
Filtering by relative time periods in SRM Explorer
Canceling a filter in SRM Explorer
Hiding selected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Hiding unselected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Canceling hiding in SRM Explorer

1160 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer

Canceling a filter in SRM Explorer

You can cancel a filter to display the data that was temporarily hidden by the filter.

To cancel a Filter by value:

` On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click the label of the data item with the filter to
cancel, and then click Cancel value filter.

To cancel a Filter by pattern:

` On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click the category button of the category with
the filter to cancel, and then click Cancel pattern filter.

To cancel a Filter by relative time periods:

` On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click the category button of the category with
the filter to cancel, and then click Cancel relative time periods filter.

Tip: A filter icon appears in the lower right corner of a category button or data item label
on the rows (or columns) axis to indicate that filtering or hiding is applied.

Related Topics
About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer
Filtering by value in SRM Explorer
SRM Explorer filter criteria
Filtering out blank or zero values in SRM Explorer
Filtering by pattern in SRM Explorer
Filtering by relative time periods in SRM Explorer
Editing a filter in SRM Explorer
Hiding selected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Hiding unselected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Canceling hiding in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1161

About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Hiding selected rows and columns in SRM Explorer

You can hide the rows (or columns) that are selected to temporarily hide data that you
do not want displayed.

To hide the selected rows (or columns):

1 Select one or more rows (or columns). The selected row (or column) labels are
highlighted.
2 Right-click a selected row (or column) label, and then click Hide selected. All rows
(or columns) that are selected are hidden from view, and an icon appears in the
lower right corner of the category button indicating that there are hidden rows (or
columns).

Notes
To hide rows (or columns), you must be working in table format, and the category must
border the data display area. Later, if you choose a chart or graph format, the hidden
data will remain hidden.
Hidden rows (or columns) can become visible if you apply a filter, sort, or show or hide
totals.
If you hide all of the items in a category, the message “No data to display” will appear
in the data display area.

Related Topics
About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer
Filtering by value in SRM Explorer
SRM Explorer filter criteria
Filtering out blank or zero values in SRM Explorer
Filtering by pattern in SRM Explorer
Filtering by relative time periods in SRM Explorer
Editing a filter in SRM Explorer
Canceling a filter in SRM Explorer
Hiding unselected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Canceling hiding in SRM Explorer

1162 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer

Hiding unselected rows and columns in SRM Explorer

You can hide the rows (or columns) that are not selected to temporarily hide data that
you do not want displayed.

To hide the unselected rows (or columns):

1 Select one or more rows (or columns). The selected row (or column) labels are
highlighted.
2 Right-click a selected row (or column) label, and then click Hide unselected. All
rows (or columns) that are not selected are hidden from view, and an icon appears
in the lower right corner of the category button indicating that there are hidden
rows (or columns).

Notes
To hide rows (or columns), you must be working in table format, and the category must
border the data display area. Later, if you choose a chart or graph format, the hidden
data will remain hidden.
Hidden rows (or columns) can become visible if you apply a filter, sort, or show or hide
totals.
If you hide all of the items in a category, the message “No data to display” will appear
in the data display area.

Related Topics
About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer
Filtering by value in SRM Explorer
SRM Explorer filter criteria
Filtering out blank or zero values in SRM Explorer
Filtering by pattern in SRM Explorer
Filtering by relative time periods in SRM Explorer
Editing a filter in SRM Explorer
Canceling a filter in SRM Explorer
Hiding selected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Canceling hiding in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1163

About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Canceling hiding in SRM Explorer

You can cancel hiding to display hidden data.

To cancel hiding:
` On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click the category button, and then click
Cancel hiding.

Tip: A filter icon appears in the lower right corner of a category button on the rows (or
columns) axis to indicate that filtering or hiding is applied to that category.

Related Topics
About filtering and hiding data in SRM Explorer
Filtering by value in SRM Explorer
SRM Explorer filter criteria
Filtering out blank or zero values in SRM Explorer
Filtering by pattern in SRM Explorer
Filtering by relative time periods in SRM Explorer
Editing a filter in SRM Explorer
Canceling a filter in SRM Explorer
Hiding selected rows and columns in SRM Explorer
Hiding unselected rows and columns in SRM Explorer

1164 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About sorting SRM Explorer data

About sorting SRM Explorer data

You can sort the data in a table, chart, or graph. You can sort the rows based on the
values in a column, or sort the columns based on the values in a row. For example, you
might want to display the Products rows ordered by the values in the Quantity column.
You can do any of the following:
` Sort highest to lowest or lowest to highest
` Show highest 10 or lowest 10
` Define a custom sort order

Notes
The sort icon indicates sorting is applied to a data item. You can click this icon to
reverse the order.
You can sort at most one row and one column at a time.
Data is sorted based on actual values, regardless of how the values are formatted. For
example, if the data is formatted as% of column total, the actual values, not the
percentage values, are used in sorting.

Related Topics
Sorting highest to lowest or lowest to highest in SRM Explorer
Showing highest 10 or lowest 10 in SRM Explorer
Custom sorting in SRM Explorer
Canceling sorting in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1165

About sorting SRM Explorer data SRM Explorer

Sorting highest to lowest or lowest to highest in SRM Explorer

You can sort the rows in ascending or descending order based on the values in a
column. Conversely, you can sort the columns in ascending or descending order based
on the values in a row.

To sort highest to lowest or lowest to highest:

` On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click a data item label, point to Sort, and then
click one of the following:
■ Highest to lowest
■ Lowest to highest
All rows (or columns) are displayed in the chosen order, and a sort icon appears in
the lower right corner of the data item label indicating a sort is applied.

Notes
To sort rows or columns, the category must border the data display area.
By default, the rows (or columns) are sorted relative to their peers within the category
hierarchy. For example, States might be sorted within each Country. To sort the rows
(or columns) without regard for the category hierarchy, use Custom sort.

Tip: You can click the sort icon to reverse the order.

Related Topics
About sorting SRM Explorer data
Showing highest 10 or lowest 10 in SRM Explorer
Custom sorting in SRM Explorer
Canceling sorting in SRM Explorer

1166 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About sorting SRM Explorer data

Showing highest 10 or lowest 10 in SRM Explorer

You can display only the rows with the highest 10 or lowest 10 values in a column.
Conversely, You can display only the columns with the highest 10 or lowest 10 values in
a row.

To show highest 10 or lowest 10:

` On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click a data item label, point to Sort, and then
click one of the following:
■ Show highest 10
■ Show lowest 10
The highest 10 or lowest 10 rows (or columns) are displayed, and a sort icon
appears in the lower right corner of the data item label indicating a sort is applied.

Notes
To show the highest or lowest rows (or columns), you must work in Analysis view, and
the category must border the data display area. Further, the Show labels as
preference option must be set to Hierarchical.
The highest 10 or lowest 10 rows (or columns) are displayed, regardless of their
position in their category hierarchy. For example, the highest 10 States might be
displayed, regardless of Country.
To use a number other than 10, use Custom sort.

Tip: You can click the sort icon to switch between highest 10 and lowest 10.

Related Topics
About sorting SRM Explorer data
Sorting highest to lowest or lowest to highest in SRM Explorer
Custom sorting in SRM Explorer
Canceling sorting in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1167

About sorting SRM Explorer data SRM Explorer

Custom sorting in SRM Explorer

You can customize how data is sorted.

To custom sort:
1 On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click a data item label, point to Sort, and then
click Custom. The Sort dialog box appears.
2 Select options as required, and then click OK. All rows (or columns) are displayed
in the chosen order, and a sort icon appears in the lower right corner of the data
item label indicating a sort is applied.

Notes
To custom sort, you must work in Analysis view, and the category must border the data
display area. Further, the Show labels as preference option must be set to
Hierarchical.
If you set Show to All values in the Sort dialog, the rows (or columns) are sorted
relative to their peers within the category hierarchy. For example, States might be
sorted within each Country. To sort the rows (or columns) without regard for the
category hierarchy, select the Disregard category hierarchy checkbox.

Related Topics
About sorting SRM Explorer data
Sorting highest to lowest or lowest to highest in SRM Explorer
Showing highest 10 or lowest 10 in SRM Explorer
Canceling sorting in SRM Explorer

1168 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About sorting SRM Explorer data

Canceling sorting in SRM Explorer

To cancel sorting:
` On the columns (or rows) axis, right-click the label of the sorted data item, point to
Sort, and then click Cancel sorting.

Tip: A sort icon appears in the lower right corner of a data item label on the rows (or
columns) axis to indicate that sorting is applied to that data item.

Related Topics
About sorting SRM Explorer data
Sorting highest to lowest or lowest to highest in SRM Explorer
Showing highest 10 or lowest 10 in SRM Explorer
Custom sorting in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1169

About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer

In comparing data categories in a table, chart or graph, you can arrange the categories
in any position or order on the rows (and columns) axis. You see the categories in a
chart or graph as the row and column labels on an axis, or the labels in a legend. In a
table, the categories appear as row and column labels.
You can do any of the following:
` Replace a category with another category from the Categories bar.
` Add a category from the Categories bar.
` Remove a category to the Categories bar.
` Move a category to a new position.
` Switch the positions of any two categories.
` Swap all of the categories on the rows axis with all of the categories on the columns
axis.

Note: In general, you must work in Analysis view to arrange categories in a table, chart
or graph. You can swap all of the categories whether you are working in Analysis view
or Presentation view.

Related Topics
Replacing a category in SRM Explorer
Adding a category in SRM Explorer
Removing a category in SRM Explorer
Moving a category in SRM Explorer
Switching two categories in SRM Explorer
Swapping rows and columns in SRM Explorer

1170 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer

Replacing a category in SRM Explorer

You can replace a category in a table, chart or graph with another category from the
Categories bar.

To replace a category:
1 On the Categories bar, locate the category button for the category to use in the
table, chart or graph.
2 Click, hold and drag the category button to the category to replace on the rows (or
columns) axis. A rectangular outline appears around the category that will be
replaced.
3 Drop the category button. The data display area updates to show data for the new
category arrangement.

Note: You must work in Analysis view to arrange categories in a table, chart or graph.

Related Topics
About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer
Adding a category in SRM Explorer
Removing a category in SRM Explorer
Moving a category in SRM Explorer
Switching two categories in SRM Explorer
Swapping rows and columns in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1171

About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Adding a category in SRM Explorer

You can add a category from the Categories bar to a table, chart or graph. The new
category will be inserted above, below, or between the existing categories on the rows
(or columns) axis.

To add a category:
1 On the Categories bar, locate the category button for the category to use in the
table, chart or graph.
2 Click, hold and drag the category button to a position above or below an existing
category on the rows (or columns) axis. A highlight line appears at the position the
category will be added.
3 Drop the category button. The data display area updates to show data for the new
category arrangement.

Notes
You must work in Analysis view to arrange categories in a table, chart or graph.
There is a limit on the number of categories that can be stacked, one on top of the
other, on the rows (or columns) axis. If you have reached this limit, you will not be able
to add another category without first removing a category.

Related Topics
About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer
Replacing a category in SRM Explorer
Removing a category in SRM Explorer
Moving a category in SRM Explorer
Switching two categories in SRM Explorer
Swapping rows and columns in SRM Explorer

1172 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer

Removing a category in SRM Explorer

You can remove a category from a table, chart or graph to the Categories bar.

To remove a category:
1 On the rows (or columns) axis, locate the category button for the category to
remove from the table, chart or graph.
2 Click, hold and drag the category button to the Categories bar. A rectangular outline
appears around the Categories bar.
3 Drop the category button. The data display area updates to show data for the new
category arrangement.

Note: You must work in Analysis view to arrange categories in a table, chart or graph.

Related Topics
About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer
Replacing a category in SRM Explorer
Adding a category in SRM Explorer
Moving a category in SRM Explorer
Switching two categories in SRM Explorer
Swapping rows and columns in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1173

About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Moving a category in SRM Explorer

You can move a category in a table, chart or graph to a new position on the rows (or
columns) axis.

To move a category:
1 On the rows (or columns) axis, locate the category button for the category to move.
2 Click, hold and drag the category button to a new position above or below an
existing category on the rows (or columns) axis. A highlight line appears at the
position the category will be placed.
3 Drop the category button. The data display area updates to show data for the new
category arrangement.

Note: You must work in Analysis view to arrange categories in a table, chart or graph.

Related Topics
About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer
Replacing a category in SRM Explorer
Adding a category in SRM Explorer
Removing a category in SRM Explorer
Switching two categories in SRM Explorer
Swapping rows and columns in SRM Explorer

1174 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer

Switching two categories in SRM Explorer

You can switch the positions of any two categories in a table, chart or graph.

To switch two categories:

1 On the rows (or columns) axis, locate the category button for one of the categories
to switch.
2 Click, hold and drag the category button to the other category to switch on the rows
(or columns) axis. A rectangular outline appears around the category that will be
switched.
3 Drop the category button. The data display area updates to show data for the new
category arrangement.

Note: You must work in Analysis view to arrange categories in a table, chart or graph.

Related Topics
About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer
Replacing a category in SRM Explorer
Adding a category in SRM Explorer
Removing a category in SRM Explorer
Switching two categories in SRM Explorer
Swapping rows and columns in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1175

About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Swapping rows and columns in SRM Explorer

You can swap all of the categories on the rows axis with all of the categories on the
columns axis in a table, chart or graph.

To swap rows and columns:

` On the rows (or columns) axis, right-click a category button or data item label, and
then click Swap rows and columns. The data display area updates to show data
for the new category arrangement.

Note: You can work in Analysis view or Presentation view to swap rows and columns in
a table, chart or graph.

Related Topics
About arranging data categories in SRM Explorer
Replacing a category in SRM Explorer
Adding a category in SRM Explorer
Removing a category in SRM Explorer
Moving a category in SRM Explorer
Switching two categories in SRM Explorer

1176 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns

About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns

You can insert a calculated row (or column) into a category in a table. The data values
in an inserted row (or column) are calculated from corresponding values in other rows
(or columns). For example, you might insert a row that averages the values in three
other rows. Once inserted in a table, you can display the calculated rows (and columns)
in a chart or graph.
You can use Calculate on the toolbar to insert one or more rows (or columns) that:
` Calculate the Sum of two or more rows (or columns)
` Calculate the Average of two or more rows (or columns)
` Calculate the Difference between two rows (or columns)
` Calculate the Ratio of one row (or column) relative to another
` Calculate the percentage Growth of one row (or column) relative to another
` Calculate the Minimum of two or more rows (or columns)
` Calculate the Maximum of two or more rows (or columns)
` Calculate the Percentage of the row (or column) total
` Calculate the Sum for a Relative time period in a Date category
` Calculate the Union of distinct values in two or more rows (or columns)
` Calculate the Intersection of distinct values in two or more rows (or columns)
` Calculate the Performance Index for all rows and columns

Once you have inserted a calculated row (or column), you can:
` Edit a calculated row (or column)
` Delete a calculated row (or column)

Notes
To insert a calculated row (or column), you must be working in table format. Also, when
you have categories stacked on the rows or columns axis, you can only insert a
calculated row (or column) into a category that borders the data display area.
A calculated row (or column) is automatically deleted when you move or remove the
category from the rows (or columns) axis, or open a report.
If a cell value calculation results in a division by zero, the symbol “/0” appears in the
cell.
If a calculated row and calculated column intersect, the column calculation takes
precedence. In the following example, the calculated row A/B, which calculates the
ratio of A to B, intersects the calculated column X+Y, which calculates the sum of X and

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1177

About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns SRM Explorer

Y. Since the column calculation takes precedence, the intersecting cell's value is 1.25
(= 0.50 + 0.75), rather than 0.67 (= 4 / 6).

X Y X+Y

A 1 3 4
B 2 4 6
A/B 0.50 0.75 1.25

Related Topics
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

1178 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns

Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer

You can insert a row (or column) into a category that calculates the sum of
corresponding values in two or more rows (or columns).

To insert a row (or column) that calculates a sum:

1 Select two or more rows (or columns) for which to calculate the sum of the values.
2 On the toolbar, click Calculate and then click Sum. The Calculate dialog box
appears.
3 In the Label box, type a name for the calculated row (or column).
4 As needed, in the Format area, select the formatting options to apply to the
calculated values.
5 Click OK. The calculated row (or column) is inserted after the last row (or column)
you selected.

Note: To insert a calculated row (or column), you must be working in table format.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1179

About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns SRM Explorer

Calculating an average in SRM Explorer

You can insert a row (or column) into a category that calculates the average of
corresponding values in two or more rows (or columns).

To insert a row (or column) that calculates an average:

1 Select two or more rows or columns for which to calculate the average of the
values.
2 On the toolbar, click Calculate and then click Average. The Calculate dialog box
appears.
3 In the Label box, type a name for the calculated row (or column).
4 As needed, in the Format area, select the formatting options to apply to the
calculated values.
5 Click OK. The calculated row (or column) is inserted after the last row (or column)
you selected.

Note: To insert a calculated row (or column), you must be working in table format.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

1180 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns

Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer

You can insert a row (or column) into a category that calculates the difference between
corresponding values in two rows (or columns). A difference value (A-B) is calculated
by subtracting a value in the second row (or column) from the corresponding value in
the first row (or column).

To insert a row (or column) that calculates a difference:

1 Select two rows (or columns) for which to calculate the difference of the values.
2 On the toolbar, click Calculate and then click Difference. The Calculate dialog box
appears.
3 In the Label box, type a name for the calculated row (or column).
4 As needed, in the Format area, select the formatting options to apply to the
calculated values.
5 Click OK. The calculated row (or column) is inserted after the last row (or column)
you selected.

Note: To insert a calculated row (or column), you must be working in table format.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1181

About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns SRM Explorer

Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer

You can insert a row (or column) into a category that calculates the ratio of
corresponding values in two rows (or columns). A ratio value (A/B) is calculated by
dividing a value in the first row (or column) by the corresponding value in the second
row (or column).

To insert a row (or column) that calculates a ratio:

1 Select two rows (or columns) for which to calculate the ratio of the values.
2 On the toolbar, click Calculate and then click Ratio. The Calculate dialog box
appears.
3 In the Label box, type a name for the calculated row (or column).
4 As needed, in the Format area, select the formatting options to apply to the
calculated values.
5 Click OK. The calculated row (or column) is inserted after the last row (or column)
you selected.

Note: To insert a calculated row (or column), you must be working in table format.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

1182 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns

Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer

You can insert a row (or column) into a category that calculates the percentage growth
between corresponding values in two rows (or columns). A percentage growth value
((B-A)/A) is calculated by subtracting a value in the first row (or column) from the
corresponding value in the second row (or column), and then dividing this result by the
value in the first row (or column).

To insert a row (or column) that calculates percentage growth:

1 Select two rows (or columns) for which to calculate the percentage growth of the
values.
2 On the toolbar, click Calculate and then click % Growth. The Calculate dialog box
appears.
3 In the Label box, type a name for the calculated row (or column).
4 As needed, in the Format area, select the formatting options to apply to the
calculated values.
5 Click OK. The calculated row (or column) is inserted after the last row (or column)
you selected.

Note: To insert a calculated row (or column), you must be working in table format.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1183

About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns SRM Explorer

Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer

You can insert a row (or column) into a category that calculates the minimum of
corresponding values in two or more rows (or columns).

To insert a row (or column) that calculates a minimum:

1 Select two or more rows (or columns) for which to calculate the minimum values.
2 On the toolbar, click Calculate and then click Minimum. The Calculate dialog box
appears.
3 In the Label box, type a name for the calculated row (or column).
4 As needed, in the Format area, select the formatting options to apply to the
calculated values.
5 Click OK. The calculated row (or column) is inserted after the last row (or column)
you selected.

Note: To insert a calculated row (or column), you must be working in table format.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

1184 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns

Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer

You can insert a row (or column) into a category that calculates the maximum of
corresponding values in two or more rows (or columns).

To insert a row (or column) that calculates a maximum:

1 Select two or more rows (or columns) for which to calculate the maximum values.
2 On the toolbar, click Calculate and then click Maximum. The Calculate dialog box
appears.
3 In the Label box, type a name for the calculated row (or column).
4 As needed, in the Format area, select the formatting options to apply to the
calculated values.
5 Click OK. The calculated row (or column) is inserted after the last row (or column)
you selected.

Note: To insert a calculated row (or column), you must be working in table format.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1185

About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns SRM Explorer

Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer

You can insert a row (or column) into a category that calculates the percentage of total
for corresponding values in a row (or column). That is, for each value, you can calculate
its value as a percentage of the row or column total.

To insert a row (or column) that calculates a percentage of total:

1 Select a row (or column) for which to calculate the percentage of total values.
2 On the toolbar, click Calculate and then click % of Total. The Calculate dialog box
appears.
3 In the Label box, type a name for the calculated row (or column).
4 As needed, in the Format area, select the formatting options to apply to the
calculated values.
5 Click OK. The calculated row (or column) is inserted after the last row (or column)
you selected.

Note: To insert a calculated row (or column), you must be working in table format.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

1186 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns

Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer

You can insert a row (or column) into a Date category that sums the values for a given
time period, such as Current Year, or Previous Month.

To insert a row (or column) that calculates a sum over Relative Time Periods:
1 Select a row (or column) in a Date category.
2 On the toolbar, click Calculate and then click Relative time periods. The
Calculate Relative Time Periods dialog box appears.
3 To insert a row (or column), click the time period in the Available relative time
periods box, and then click Add. Repeat to insert additional relative time period
calculations.
4 To remove a row (or column), click the time period in the Insert relative time
periods box, and then click Remove. Repeat to remove additional relative time
period calculations.
5 In the Show area, select one of the following:
■ Only relative time periods - to show only the calculated rows (or columns).
■ Relative time periods leading fixed time periods - to show the calculated rows
(or columns) before all other rows (or columns).
■ Relative time periods trailing fixed time periods - to show the calculated rows
(or columns) after all other rows (or columns).
6 Click OK. The calculated rows (or columns) are inserted into the table.

Notes
To insert a calculated row (or column), you must be working in table format.
The available time periods are relative to the reference date of the data, which is
displayed after “As of” in the Calculate Relative Time Periods dialog.
If you select Only relative time periods in the Show box, the fixed time rows (columns)
are automatically filtered out of the table. Later, you can cancel this filter by returning
to the Calculate Relative Time Periods dialog, and selecting another option in the Show
area.

Tip: Click a time period in the Available relative time periods box to see the start and
end of that period.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1187

About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns SRM Explorer

Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer

Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

1188 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns

Calculating a union in SRM Explorer

You can insert a row (or column) into a category that calculates the union of
corresponding values in two or more rows (or columns).
For the Union calculation, the data must contain a unit of measure that counts the
number of distinct occurrences of a particular category. For example, if there is a
measure that counts distinct individuals that visit medical offices, you can use the
Union calculation to determine how many unique individuals visited office A or office B.

To insert a row (or column) that calculates a union:

1 Select two or more rows (or columns) for which to calculate the union of the values.
2 On the toolbar, click Calculate and then click Union. The Calculate dialog box
appears.
3 In the Label box, type a name for the calculated row (or column).
4 As needed, in the Format area, select the formatting options to apply to the
calculated values.
5 Click OK. The calculated row (or column) is inserted after the last row (or column)
you selected.

Note: To insert a calculated row (or column), you must be working in table format.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1189

About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns SRM Explorer

Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer

You can insert a row (or column) into a category that calculates the intersection of
corresponding values in two or more rows (or columns).
For the Intersection calculation, the data must contain a unit of measure that counts
the number of distinct occurrences of a particular category. For example, if there is a
measure that counts distinct individuals that visit medical offices, you can use the
Intersection calculation to determine how many individuals visited office A and office B.

To insert a row (or column) that calculates an intersection:

1 Select two or more rows (or columns) for which to calculate the intersection of the
values.
2 On the toolbar, click Calculate and then click Intersection. The Calculate dialog
box appears.
3 In the Label box, type a name for the calculated row (or column).
4 In the Format area, select the formatting options to apply to the calculated values.
5 Click OK. The calculated row or column is inserted after the last selected row or
column.

Notes
To insert a calculated row (or column), you must be working in table format.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

1190 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns

Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer

You can calculate the Performance Index for each cell in a table. Performance Index is
used to measure how well an individual (cell) is performing relative to the entire group
(table). If the Performance Index value is:
` Equal to one (1), then the individual's performance matches the overall group
performance.
` Greater than one (>1), then the individual's performance is above the overall group
performance.
` Less than one (<1), then the individual's performance is above the overall group
performance.
For example, you might use Performance Index to determine which products over
performed or under performed in a given market.

To calculate the Performance Index:

1 On the toolbar, click Calculate and then click Performance Index. The Calculate
dialog box appears.
2 As needed, in the Format area, select the formatting options to apply to the
calculated values.
3 Click OK.

Notes
To use Performance Index, you must be working in table format.
A Performance Index value is calculated by multiplying the cell value and the grand
total, and then dividing the result by the row total, and then the column total.

Tip: To show cell values with the Performance Index calculation results, right-click a
table cell, and then click Show cell values with % of total.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1191

About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns SRM Explorer

Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer

Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

1192 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns

Editing calculation in SRM Explorer

You can edit a calculated row (or column) to change the name or format.

To edit a calculated row (or column):

1 Right-click the label of the calculated row (or column) to edit, and then click Edit
calculation. The Calculate dialog box appears.
2 Make changes as needed, and then click OK.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1193

About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns SRM Explorer

Deleting calculation in SRM Explorer

To delete a calculated row (or column):
` Right-click the label of the calculated row (or column) to delete, and then click
Delete calculation.

Notes
A calculated row (or column) is automatically deleted when you move or remove the
category from the rows (or columns) axis.

Related Topics
About SRM Explorer calculated rows and columns
Calculating a sum in SRM Explorer
Calculating an average in SRM Explorer
Calculating a difference in SRM Explorer
Calculating a ratio in SRM Explorer
Calculating % growth in SRM Explorer
Calculating a minimum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a maximum in SRM Explorer
Calculating a % of total in SRM Explorer
Calculate a sum over Relative Time Periods in SRM Explorer
Calculating a union in SRM Explorer
Calculating an intersection in SRM Explorer
Calculating a performance index in SRM Explorer
Editing calculation in SRM Explorer

1194 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About saving data in SRM Explorer

About saving data in SRM Explorer

You can save your table, chart, or graph to a file in any of the following formats:
` Adobe Acrobat
` Microsoft Word

You can save the data in your table, chart, or graph to a file in any of the following
formats:
` Microsoft Excel
` Tab-Separated Values
` Comma-Separated Values
In addition, you can export the detail data (source records) that makes up a data
element (such as a cell in a table, bar in a bar chart, segment in a pie chart, and point
on a graph) to Microsoft Excel format.

Tip: You can also send data via email.

Related Topics
Saving as Adobe PDF (.pdf) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Microsoft Excel (.xls) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Microsoft Word (.doc) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Tab-Separated Values (.tsv) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Comma-Separated Values (.csv) in SRM Explorer
Exporting detail data to spreadsheet in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1195

About saving data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Saving as Adobe PDF (.pdf) in SRM Explorer

You can save your table, chart, or graph to an Adobe Acrobat document.

To save data as an Adobe PDF document:

1 On the toolbar, click Save, point to Save as, and then click Adobe PDF (.pdf).
The Page Setup dialog box appears.
2 Select the Show “Save as...” dialog box checkbox, and select other options as
needed, and then click OK. The Save As dialog box appears.
3 In the File name box, type a file name for the document.
4 Click Save. The document is created. Adobe Acrobat, if installed, is then
automatically started in a new Web browser window for you to view the document.

Notes
If the document will be longer than one page in length, the Page Range dialog box will
appear to allow you to choose the pages to include in the document.
In the Page Setup dialog, you can type a Header, which will appear below the report
title at the top of each printed page, or a Footer, which will appear at the bottom of
each printed page. In the Header and Footer boxes, you can use substitution variables
to automatically include dynamic information. For example, if you type
%column-categories%, the names of the categories on the columns axis will appear in
the document. For a complete list of substitution variables, see Substitution Variables.

Related Topics
About saving data in SRM Explorer
Saving as Microsoft Excel (.xls) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Microsoft Word (.doc) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Tab-Separated Values (.tsv) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Comma-Separated Values (.csv) in SRM Explorer
Exporting detail data to spreadsheet in SRM Explorer

1196 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About saving data in SRM Explorer

Saving as Microsoft Excel (.xls) in SRM Explorer

You can save the data in your table, chart, or graph to a Microsoft Excel file. Each row
will appear as a row in an Excel worksheet, and data values appear as labels, numbers,
or formulas.

To save data as a Microsoft Excel file:

1 On the toolbar, click Save, point to Save as, and then click Microsoft Excel
(.xls). The Save As dialog box appears.
2 In the File name box, type a name for the file.
3 Click Save. The file is created. Microsoft Excel, if installed, is then automatically
started in a new Web browser window for you to view the file.

Notes
The Microsoft Excel file is created in spreadsheet format (SYLK) with a Microsoft Excel
(.xls) file extension. This format enables you to view the data with common
spreadsheet programs.
A calculated row (or column) in your table, chart, or graph is represented in the
worksheet as Excel formulas, if the calculation is based on visible rows (or columns).
Otherwise, the calculated row (or column) is represented by numeric values equal to
the current calculation results.
Microsoft Excel imposes a limit of 64,000 rows and 256 columns of data in a worksheet.
If you exceed this limit, use filtering and hiding to reduce the amount of data in your
table, chart, or graph.

Related Topics
About saving data in SRM Explorer
Saving as Adobe PDF (.pdf) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Microsoft Word (.doc) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Tab-Separated Values (.tsv) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Comma-Separated Values (.csv) in SRM Explorer
Exporting detail data to spreadsheet in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1197

About saving data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Saving as Microsoft Word (.doc) in SRM Explorer

You can save your table, chart, or graph to a Microsoft Word document.

To save data as a Microsoft Word document:

1 On the toolbar, click Save, point to Save as, and then click Microsoft Word
(.doc). The Page Setup dialog box appears.
2 Select the Show “Save as...” dialog box checkbox, and select other options as
needed, and then click OK. The Save As dialog box appears.
3 In the File name box, type a file name for the document.
4 Click Save. The document is created. Microsoft Word, if installed, is then
automatically started in a new Web browser window for you to view the document.

Notes
If the document will be longer than one page in length, the Page Range dialog box will
appear to allow you to choose the pages to include in the document.
In the Page Setup dialog, you can type a Header, which will appear below the report
title at the top of each printed page, or a Footer, which will appear at the bottom of
each printed page. In the Header and Footer boxes, you can use substitution variables
to automatically include dynamic information. For example, if you type
%column-categories%, the names of the categories on the columns axis will appear in
the document. For a complete list of substitution variables, see Substitution Variables.

Related Topics
About saving data in SRM Explorer
Saving as Adobe PDF (.pdf) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Microsoft Excel (.xls) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Tab-Separated Values (.tsv) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Comma-Separated Values (.csv) in SRM Explorer
Exporting detail data to spreadsheet in SRM Explorer

1198 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About saving data in SRM Explorer

Saving as Tab-Separated Values (.tsv) in SRM Explorer

You can save the data in your table, chart, or graph to a text file containing
tab-separated values. Each row is saved as a record in the file. The data values in a row
are saved as character strings or numbers, and are separated by a tab character.

To save data as a Tab-Separated Values:

1 On the toolbar, click Save, point to Save as, and then click Tab-Separated
Values (.tsv). The Save As dialog box appears.
2 In the File name box, type a name for the file.
3 Click Save. The file is created.

Note: Any '$', '|', and '#' characters that appear in your table, chart, or graph will not
appear in the file. Also, data values are formatted show a decimal symbol, without any
leading or trailing symbol, or thousand separators.

Related Topics
About saving data in SRM Explorer
Saving as Adobe PDF (.pdf) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Microsoft Excel (.xls) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Microsoft Word (.doc) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Comma-Separated Values (.csv) in SRM Explorer
Exporting detail data to spreadsheet in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1199

About saving data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

Saving as Comma-Separated Values (.csv) in SRM Explorer

You can save the data in your table, chart, or graph to a file containing
comma-separated values. Each row is saved as a record in the file. The data values in a
row are saved as character strings or numbers, and are separated by a comma (,)
character.

To save data as a Comma-Separated Values:

1 On the toolbar, click Save, point to Save as, and then click Comma-Separated
Values (.csv). The Save As dialog box appears.
2 In the File name box, type a name for the file.
3 Click Save. The file is created.

Note: Any '$', '|', and '#' characters that appear in your table, chart, or graph will not
appear in the file. Also, data values are formatted show a decimal symbol, without any
leading or trailing symbol, or thousand separators.

Related Topics
About saving data in SRM Explorer
Saving as Adobe PDF (.pdf) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Microsoft Excel (.xls) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Microsoft Word (.doc) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Tab-Separated Values (.tsv) in SRM Explorer
Exporting detail data to spreadsheet in SRM Explorer

1200 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Explorer About saving data in SRM Explorer

Exporting detail data to spreadsheet in SRM Explorer

Using Export detail data to spreadsheet, you can save the detail data (source records)
that makes up a data element in a table, chart, or graph. The detail data is saved in
Microsoft Excel format.

To export detail data to spreadsheet:

1 Right-click one of the following data elements:
■ Cell in a table
■ Bar in a bar chart
■ Segment in a pie chart
■ Point in a graph
2 On the short-cut menu, click Export detail data to spreadsheet. The detailed
source records are retrieved from the server, and saved to a file. Microsoft Excel, if
installed, is then automatically started in a new Web browser window for you to
view the file.

Notes
Depending on your server configuration, it may take a few seconds or minutes to
retrieve the detail data.
Export detail data to spreadsheet is unavailable if you are working offline.

Related Topics
About saving data in SRM Explorer
Saving as Adobe PDF (.pdf) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Microsoft Excel (.xls) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Microsoft Word (.doc) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Tab-Separated Values (.tsv) in SRM Explorer
Saving as Comma-Separated Values (.csv) in SRM Explorer

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1201

About saving data in SRM Explorer SRM Explorer

1202 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Setup
Frictionless® SRM Setup gives users and system administrators access to a wide
variety of setup and configuration options. You access these options by clicking Setup
in the toolbar at the top of any Frictionless SRM page. Setup activities can only be
performed by users with the appropriate roles.

Examples of Setup tasks that can be performed by general users include:

` Changing their own user passwords
` Editing their personal user account information
` Creating and editing user dictionary words

Examples of Setup tasks that should be performed by qualified content providers

include:
` Creating and editing master agreement terms
` Creating and editing standard RFx criteria and schedule components
` Creating and editing supplier scorecard definitions
` Creating and editing auction types
` Creating contract clauses, sections, and templates
` Adding and editing activities and materials
` Adding and editing information about companies, cost centers, and general ledger
accounts

Examples of Setup tasks that should be performed by enterprise administrators

include:
` Creating and editing numbering tables and extensions
` Creating user accounts

Examples of Setup tasks that should be performed by system administrators include:

` Creating and editing cluster configurations
` Creating and editing system properties
` Creating and editing directory configurations

If you have any questions about how or when to perform a particular Setup activity,
please consult your system administrator or Frictionless Commerce technical support.

Related Topics
Queries and Reports
Master Data

Confidential 1203
Organization and Accounting Info
Workbench Setup
Scheduled Tasks
Configuration
User Interface

1204 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Setup Overview

Setup Overview

Define
Define Define Define Define
Numbering
Cluster Context Extensions Accounts
Tables

System Setup Data Enterprise Master Data

Installed as System Administrator Installed as Enterprise Administrator

Define Define Cost Define

Activities Centers Materials

Sourcing Company Master Data

Installed as a valid account

The diagram above outlines a logical flow for defining and implementing the
Frictionless® SRM application. Each block of the diagram corresponds to a Setup Help
section. It is recommended that you review the entire process, use it as an outline for
making implementation decisions, and then follow it as a checklist for the
implementation.
The following key sections will guide you through your SRM implementation:

Section Contents

Cluster Configuration This section describes how to work with the Frictionless SRM
clustering scheme for application scaling and load balancing.
Contexts Frictionless SRM allows a single implementation to support
multiple enterprises, with each enterprise including one or more
companies. These enterprises and companies can be set up as
separate contexts, each with a different set of business rules and
isolated view of data. This section provides a basic introduction
of contexts as background for the sections that follow.
Extension Definition This section describes how to define custom extensions to
Frictionless SRM business objects.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1205

 Setup Overview

Section Contents

Numbering Table Definitions This section describes how to define rules for generation of
numbers for new documents and objects.
Buy-side User Accounts This section describes how to set up the user management
Security Profiles system to integrate with the corporate directory, handle external
Groups (typically sell-side) users, and comply with corporate security
policies.
Master Data This section describes how to define your enterprise for the
Frictionless SRM application.

Deployment information can be found by clicking the Installation and Configuration

Guide link on the Reference Guide (RG) index page.

Customization information can be found by clicking the Customization README link

on the Reference Guide (RG) index page.

Related Topics
Queries and Reports
Master Data
Organization and Accounting Info
Workbench Setup
Scheduled Tasks
Configuration
User Interface

1206 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Setup Overview Contexts

Contexts

Define Define
Cluster Context

System Setup Data

Installed as System Administrator

Frictionless SRM allows a single implementation to support multiple enterprises, with

each enterprise including one or more companies. These enterprises and companies
can be setup as separate contexts, each with a different set of business rules and
isolated view of data. This section provides a basic introduction to contexts as
background for the sections that follow.
The context provides a logical partitioning of the Frictionless SRM data. As indicated in
the figure below, a single system can be divided into one or more Enterprise contexts,
with each Enterprise context containing one or more company contexts. The system is
implemented by defining master data at the Enterprise level, and sourcing documents
at the Company level. Using contexts in this way, the implementation shares a single
set of master data across all companies in the enterprise, but partitions sourcing
documents like RFxs so that they are available only to users within a particular
company. The System Context is used only for the definition of clusters and contexts.
Contexts, therefore, provide the highest level of data scoping. Since maintaining
master data has some overhead, the goal is to leverage a single set of master data for
as many users as possible. Unless implementation requirements dictate different
master data information, a single enterprise context is typical for most
implementations. The segregation of sourcing documents into company contexts
provides the most basic level of visibility control and should be considered at initial
system implementation based on the desired sharing between business units.

Company 1
Enterprise 1
Company 2

Enterprise 2

System

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1207

Contexts Setup Overview

It is important to understand that a context represents a separate object from a

Company, and that one or more Companies can be associated with a single context.
This allows the enterprise to be defined with some Companies sharing access to
sourcing documents, and others having segregated data.
It is important to note that suppliers are implemented by default at the enterprise level.
This allows a supplier to be invited to events hosted by any company context within the
enterprise. While this gives suppliers broad access to sourcing documents (events),
their actual access to events is controlled by the buyer's invitation, and so their access
to the system is properly restricted.
You can only create and configure contexts by logging into the administration portal
(/fssystem/portal/login) as the system administrator and clicking Enterprise Contexts
on the Setup page. Procedures for creating contexts can be found in the Installation
and Configuration Guide.
Once you start to create production data, it is extremely difficult to modify decisions
about contexts. Deciding how to leverage contexts is a crucial step in planning the
implementation, and should be done with careful consideration of future planned usage
of the system. Throughout the Setup Help, you will see specific references to context
scoping as relevant to specific areas of the implementation.

Related Topics
Queries and Reports
Master Data
Organization and Accounting Info
Workbench Setup
Scheduled Tasks
Configuration
User Interface

1208 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Contexts

System Setup

The System Setup section of Setup provides options for customizing and configuring
the following:
` Queries and Reports
` Master Data
` Organization and Accounting Info
` Workbench Setup
` Scheduled Tasks
` Configuration
` User Interface

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1209

Queries and Reports System Setup

Queries and Reports

The Query component of Frictionless® SRM provides customizable access to data. In

particular, queries drive the following:
` Lists, such as My RFPs
` Object pickers, such as Search Contents by Vendor
` Channels, such as the To Do List channel
` Reports, such as Cumulative Spend by Commodity, in the Analysis module
` The selection of objects to be exported

The Query component has been developed to allow implementers to customize and
extend these areas of the product. This section describes query capabilities and
explains how to create and manage queries using the Query Definition, Query Group,
Cube Profile, and Report options in Setup.
In Frictionless SRM, working with queries assumes knowledge of SQL and a basic
understanding of the Frictionless SRM data model. The data model reference is
available in a separate document through the Frictionless Commerce Professional
Services organization.
Frictionless SRM is delivered with a broad set of queries. These queries are not
modifiable as part of the implementation. It is possible, however, to view the definition
of these standard queries, use them as a model for custom queries, and incorporate the
custom queries either as additions or replacements in the user’s view of the system.
For details on integrating queries, see Query Groups.

What is a Query?

At the lowest level, a query is a single SQL SELECT statement or a call to a single SQL
stored procedure. Frictionless SRM adds powerful functionality that enhances the query
development and results presentation, and provides the integration of the SQL
statement with the application. Key query capabilities are as follows.
` Formatting
For each result column identifying the type of data presented, the appropriate
presentation format is automatically selected, for example, right justified for
monetary amounts. Additionally, data can be formatted to display as a hyperlink to
enable navigation to other system objects or to provide drill-down linking of
queries.
` Prompting
Frictionless SRM queries can include one or more user-supplied parameters, for
example, Show All Vendors With Names Like. The Query component supports a
simple, powerful wild-card model.

1210 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

` Paging, Sorting and Searching

Frictionless SRM queries support sorting and searching within the returned result
set. Clickable sort arrows on the heading of each column allow the results to be
resorted based on any single result column. Clicking again toggles the sort direction
between ascending and descending. Additionally, it is possible to move forward and
backward through pages of the result set, and to search for any entered value in
any column of the results set.
` Totaling
SQL queries can incorporate totaling, but generally this only shows summary
results. The Query component adds the ability to generate column totals while still
returning detailed results information, for example, showing each auction in a
category, with the total dollar value included, rather than simply returning one line
of total information.
` Tokens
The Query component incorporates powerful token substitution that significantly
simplifies the development and enhances the usability of common query features.
For example, a typical query might show all RFPs associated with the current user.
Without token substitution, the query would have to prompt for the user name at
runtime. The token CURRENT_USER_ID can be used in the query definition to
automatically filter the results based on the user executing the query. This
eliminates the need to prompt the user at runtime, and simplifies the query
definition by eliminating the need to join to the user account definition tables.
` Charting
The Query component is integrated with a charting servlet that allows automatic
generation of pie, bar and line charts from the query results. The charts include
hot-spots for hyperlinks included in the query results, and the option to
automatically aggregate an Other category, keeping the number of data elements
shown in the chart usable.
For performance reasons, query definitions and groups are cached. (See Cache
Configuration for details.) Note that queries and groups should not be edited
directly in a production database. They should be edited in a staging database and
migrated as a unit to a production database.

What is a Report?
A report is the presentation of the results of one or more queries. The queries in a
report are listed in the report elements tab of the report document. All queries in the
report are executed, so multiple tables and charts can appear on one page or be
distributed as a PDF document. The order and relative position of the results of each
query can be tailored.
Some reports appear in channels on the workbench. Reports can be launched from the
Analysis page. Some reports are document-type-specific and can be launched from a
drop-down list in the document toolbar. Reports can also be scheduled to be executed
at a certain date and time or at regular intervals. The results of a scheduled report can

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1211

Queries and Reports System Setup

be announced by an alert or be delivered as a PDF document via email to multiple

addresses, including those for people who do not have access to the SRM system.

Invoking a Report
One step in implementing a report is to edit one or more objects that control where the
report is executed in the system and where its results are displayed. Query parameter
names and values can be stored in these objects, to be passed to the report's query (or
queries) when the report is executed. The common locations invoking report execution
are:
` Analysis page
` Workbench report channel
` Document toolbar
The Analysis page can be configured to add the new report to one of the sub-categories
on the page. This is done using the Analysis Reports Setup option in Setup.
Using the Edit button on a Workbench page, a channel can be configured to execute the
report. The report is executed automatically, with no user action needed to start it.
A report that is designed to show data related to a single document (such as an RFx)
can be added to a list of reports available in the toolbar for documents of that type. This
is done using the Document Report Configuration option in Setup. Each of these reports
should have a query with the Number parameter CurrentDocument. The object ID of
the current document being viewed will be passed as the value of this parameter to the
query when the report is executed. Vendor RFx Response Status is an example of such
a report.
If a report will be available as a drill-down from another report, its location is specified
differently. To create the drill-down, the parent query must include a column of the
Internal Link type, with a value structured as in the following example:

'/analysis/report?queryGroupName=FCI-Analytics2&Param1=Value'

In the link, analysis/report identifies the report page, and parameter values follow the
question mark. The queryGroupName is required and contains the name of the Query
Group defining the report as its value. Any parameters being passed into the query as
filter prompts follow the query group name as name/value pairs, separated by
ampersands (&). Note also that the report page name can be generated using the
<%REQUEST_PAGE_PATH%> token to display the linked report on the same page as
the original report. This can be useful with reports used both as a Workbench channel
and in the Analysis module.

This section describes options for customizing queries and reports in System Setup.

Related Topics
Query Definitions

1212 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Query Groups
Cube Profiles
Reports
Analysis Reports Setup

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1213

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query Definitions

The Query component of Frictionless® SRM provides customizable access to data. In

particular, queries drive the following:
` Lists, such as My RFPs
` Object pickers, such as Search Contents by Vendor
` Channels, such as the To Do List channel
` The selection of objects to be exported

You use the Query component to customize and extend these areas of the application.
Working with queries requires knowledge of SQL and a basic understanding of the
Frictionless SRM data model. The data model reference is available in a separate
document through the Frictionless Commerce Professional Services organization.
Frictionless Sourcing provides an extensive set of queries by default. You cannot edit
these queries, but you can duplicate a query to use it as a model for a custom query.
You can edit custom queries as needed.

This section describes how to create and edit a query definition.

Related Topics
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Testing a custom query definition
Query Definition Query page
Field help for query definition: Query page
Query Definition Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Query Results dialog box
Query Definition Filter Prompts page
Field help for query definition: Query Parameters dialog box
Query Definition Chart Definition page
Field help for query definition: Chart Definition dialog box
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

1214 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Creating a custom query definition

Frictionless SRM provides an extensive set of queries by default. You cannot edit these
queries, but you can duplicate a query to use it as a model for a custom query. You can
edit custom queries as needed.

Note: Although you can use the Create button on the Query Definition List page to
create a query from scratch, it is strongly recommended that you duplicate an existing
query to use as a model for your custom query.

To create a custom query definition:

Note: See the individual query definition page topics and field help topics for detailed
procedure and field information.

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.

2 In the Queries and Reports section of System Setup, select Query Definitions from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Query Definition List page, click the query definition to use as a model for
your query.
4 On the Query page, click Document in the toolbar and select Duplicate from the
drop-down list.
5 In the confirmation dialog box that appears, click OK.
6 In the Query Definition Query page for the new query that appears, edit any
fields.
7 Click the Result Fields tab.
8 In the Query Definition Result Fields page, edit or add Result columns.
9 Click the Filter Prompts tab.
10 In the Query Definition Filter Prompts page, edit or add filter parameters.
11 Click the Chart Definition tab.
12 In the Query Definition Chart Definition page, edit or add charts
13 Click the Access List tab.
14 Click Add Groups, Add Users, or Add Company to add a collaborator. For details,
see Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document.
15 When you finish creating the query definition, click the Query tab, click Actions in
the toolbar and select Preview from the drop-down list to see a preview of your
query.
16 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1215

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query Definitions
Editing a custom query definition
Testing a custom query definition
Query Definition Query page
Field help for query definition: Query page
Query Definition Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Query Results dialog box
Query Definition Filter Prompts page
Field help for query definition: Query Parameters dialog box
Query Definition Chart Definition page
Field help for query definition: Chart Definition dialog box
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

1216 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Creating a query definition for a cube profile

You can create a custom query for use with the Cube Profiles that generate the
reports known as data cubes for SRM Explorer.
As with any custom query, it is strongly recommended that you duplicate an existing
query to use as a model for your query.

To create a query definition for a cube profile:

Note: See the individual query definition page topics and field help topics for detailed
procedure and field information.

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.

2 In the Queries and Reports section of System Setup, select Query Definitions from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Query Definition List page, click the query definition to use as a model for
your query.
4 On the Query page, click Document in the toolbar and select Duplicate from the
drop-down list.
5 In the confirmation dialog box that appears, click OK.
6 In the Query Definition Query page, click the Edit button in the toolbar and use
the following guidelines:
n In the Query String field, use no <%ORDERBY%> tokens.
n The <%DIM_LEVEL_EXPAND%> token is typically used in queries for SRM
Explorer.
This token is used in conjunction with the column’s Dimension ID, which
signifies that data from a spend dimension is being selected. The number of
levels in the dimension axis will be automatically derived from the spend
dimension. If this automatic derivation is not done, the Level Count field in the
corresponding cube profile dimension must be provided explicitly.
7 Click the Result Fields tab.
In the Query Definition Result Fields page, click Add to add a column that defines
the source of the data for a dimension or a measure to the cube profile. Add one
column per dimension, plus at least one additional column for a measure, following
these guidelines:
a Leave the Convert Scale to field blank to ensure that this value is as precise
as possible.
b Do not check Total this field at bottom of table, as it impairs performance
without adding value.
c In the Dimension ID drop-down list, if applicable, select the dimension
represented by this column.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1217

Queries and Reports System Setup

8 Click the Filter Prompts tab.

9 In the Query Definition Filter Prompts page, edit or add filter parameters.
10 Click the Access List tab.
Note: The SRM Explorer creates its own charts, so do not define a chart on the Chart
Definition tab.
11 Click Add Groups, Add Users, or Add Company to add a collaborator. For details,
see Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document.
12 When you finish creating the query definition, click the Query tab, click Actions in
the toolbar and select Preview from the drop-down list to see a preview of your
query.
13 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Cube Profiles
Query Definitions
Editing a custom query definition
Testing a custom query definition
Query Definition Query page
Field help for query definition: Query page
Query Definition Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Query Results dialog box
Query Definition Filter Prompts page
Field help for query definition: Query Parameters dialog box
Query Definition Chart Definition page
Field help for query definition: Chart Definition dialog box
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

1218 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Editing a custom query definition

Frictionless® SRM provides an extensive set of queries by default. You cannot edit
these queries, but you can duplicate a query to use it as a model for a custom query.

You can edit custom queries as needed.

To edit a custom query definition:

Note: See the individual query definition page topics and field help topics for detailed
procedure and field information.

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.

2 In the Queries and Reports section of System Setup, select Query Definitions from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Query Definition List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Query Definitions by Name, search for
the query definition to edit, and click the definition.
n From the drop-down list, select All Query Definitions or All Inactive Query
Definitions and click the query definition to edit.
4 In the Query Definition Query page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Result Fields tab.
7 In the Query Definition Result Fields page, edit or add Result columns.
8 Click the Filter Prompts tab.
9 In the Query Definition Filter Prompts page, edit or add filter parameters.
10 Click the Chart Definition tab.
11 In the Query Definition Chart Definition page, edit or add charts
12 Click the Access List tab.
13 In the Query Definition Access List page, add collaborators.
14 When you finish editing the query definition, click the Query tab, click Actions in
the toolbar and select Preview from the drop-down list to see a preview of your
changes.
15 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Testing a custom query definition

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1219

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query Definition Query page

Field help for query definition: Query page
Query Definition Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Query Results dialog box
Query Definition Filter Prompts page
Field help for query definition: Query Parameters dialog box
Query Definition Chart Definition page
Field help for query definition: Chart Definition dialog box
Query Definition Access List page
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

1220 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Testing a custom query definition

It is useful to test custom queries before they are fully integrated with the SRM
application.
A user must have permission to duplicate a query in order to preview it. Many queries
have hidden or locked parameters that are visible and changeable in preview mode.
This allows access to data that is restricted in the normal execution of the query. The
query preview page also presents a resolved SQL statement which contains
security-related information. This should not be visible to all users.

To test a custom query definition:

1 On the Query page for the query definition, click Actions in the toolbar and select
Preview from the drop-down list. You see a new page, showing the fully formed
SQL string (with all recognized tokens expanded) and the results of the query.
2 Use the breadcrumbs at the top of the page to return to the query definition for
further editing.

Note: If a token appears in the SQL Preview display, the token has not been recognized.
Check the spelling, capitalization and formatting of the token.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Query Definition Query page
Field help for query definition: Query page
Query Definition Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Query Results dialog box
Query Definition Filter Prompts page
Field help for query definition: Query Parameters dialog box
Query Definition Chart Definition page
Field help for query definition: Chart Definition dialog box
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1221

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query Definition Query page

Creating a Query

You can create a query by filling in the fields on the Query page and adding the list of
columns to be selected.
The Query String field is the heart of the query. It is the skeleton of the SQL statement
that will be executed. Here is a simple example:
SELECT <%RESULTS%> FROM <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_MAS_CURRENCY WHERE INACTIVE = 0 AND
CONTEXTID=<%CONTEXT(masterdata.Currency)%> <%ORDERBY%>
This query returns the selected column values for all active currencies in the user's
context.
Query tokens provide flexibility and advanced capabilities. For complete details, see
Query definition: token substitution. The four most commonly used tokens are:

<%RESULTS%>
Instead of supplying the list of columns to be selected directly in the Query String, use
the <%RESULTS%> token to direct the Query component to build the SQL SELECT
clause from the information supplied in the Result Fields tab of the Query Definition.

<%SCHEMA%>
This token is used to add the Oracle schema identifier in front of each table name in the
SQL FROM clause. It is recommended that this be used with all table, view, function,
and package names in all queries.

<%CONTEXT(name)%>
This token is used to ensure that the query results are filtered such that only rows in
the same context as the currently logged-in user are returned. This token should
generally be included in all queries.
For details on determining the (name) portion of the token, see Query definition:
token substitution.

<%ORDERBY%>
This token directs the Query component to build the SQL ORDER BY clause using the
Sort information in the Result Fields tab of the Query Definition object.
Note that the tokens must be spelled and capitalized exactly as shown, including the
delimiter characters. If they do not match exactly, the tokens will not be substituted
and the query will fail to execute.

1222 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Providing Locale-Specific Strings

The display name and description of the query cannot be typed in directly, as this does
not allow the query to be localized. Instead, string fields in queries (and other objects)
that are to be displayed elsewhere in the product (such as on a list page) should be
defined as Localized Resources. Each resource is essentially a code that is replaced
on the fly with a string that has been translated into the language of the current user.
In edit mode, the Display Name Resource and Description Resource field controls are
pickers for system resources.

For field-specific information for this page, see Field help for query definition:
Query page.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Field help for query definition: Query page
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1223

Queries and Reports System Setup

Field help for query definition: Query page

This page provides help for the fields on the Query page.

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that this query definition is inactive and
unavailable for use. An inactive query does not appear in the list of available query
definitions or in drop-down lists of available list and picker options.

Display Name Resource: Click the Lookup icon to select a display name for the
query from the list of localized resources. If the query name is not in the list, click
Create in the dialog box to create a new localized resource.

Internal Name: Enter a unique identifier for the query. This name is not displayed
with query results. During the import of new versions of queries into a database, it is
used to find and replace old query versions, and therefore should not be changed.
Default queries start with “FCI-”, but custom queries must not use this prefix.

Description Resource: Click the Lookup icon to select a description for the
query.

Query String: Enter the base SQL statement to be executed. It is possible to fully
define a query using the query string. You can also include query tokens for advanced
capabilities.

Max. Rows Returned: Enter the maximum number of rows to be returned when the
query is executed. By default, all rows are returned. This field is normally used to limit
the height of a report channel when it is only necessary to display some of the results.
(Complete results are typically available via the More link to the same or a similar
report which does not have the row limit.)
Beware of setting a row limit when the query calculates a total for any column or has a
chart defined. In either case, limiting the number of returned rows can produce
unexpected results. Totals will not include values from rows beyond the limit, and some
charts might not display relevant input data.
When this value is exceeded for a query which executes anywhere other than in a
report channel, the user will see a warning message indicating that all the rows could
not be returned. (In a report channel, the warning is omitted because it is assumed
that the limit can be exceeded under normal operating conditions.) To reduce the
number of rows returned, prompted parameters can be added to a query that will filter
the results.

Rows Per Page: Enter the number of rows to be displayed per page.

Stored Procedure: Typically, this box should not be checked. For details on its use,
see Query definition: stored procedures and queries.

1224 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Category: A classification of the query used for administrative purposes, particularly

for standard queries. This does not affect the execution of the query. If you are creating
a query, select the module for which the query will be used.

Workbook Template: Select a workbook template to be used as the basis of an Excel

file when this query’s results are exported from a list page. This workbook template
would also be used when exporting only this query’s results from a report. It would not
be used when exporting the results from all the queries of a report. There are separate
Export to Excel buttons on the report page for the two different export functions.

Style Targets: Select formatting styles to be used to format query results when
exported to Excel. A previously defined set of styles may be selected for each part of
the query results display (column headers, a single column, and so on). These
formatting styles take precedence over any styles that have been specified by a
workbook template for the same region of a workbook.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Query Definition Query page
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1225

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query Definition Result Fields page

On the Result Fields page, you can format your query results.
Assuming that the <%RESULTS%> token has been used in the Query String,
formatting the results does the following:
` Defines the columns to be retrieved (that is, building the SELECT clause of the SQL
statement).
` Controls how each column is displayed in the user interface.
The Result Fields page displays the list of currently defined fields. Clicking the hyperlink
for a field displays the settings for that field. In edit mode, you use the Add button at
the bottom of the list of defined fields to create new field definitions. Note that
Frictionless SRM standard queries are not editable.

System-Wide Result Set Management

Query result set data is displayed in list pages, picker pages, and reports. Each result
set above a configurable number of rows is written to a file rather than held in memory.
When a result set is to be sorted by the values of a selected column, the data sort in
one of these files is done piecemeal to limit memory consumption.
The following system properties specify the parameters that control these operations.
Their default values are shown. To see a note with a brief explanation of the purpose of
the property, click the property on the System Properties List page.

Note: These properties only appear on the System Properties List page if you are logged
on as the system user via the system login page.

system.FiledResultSet.maxNumberRowsInMemory=200
system.FiledResultSet.readWindowSizeKB=24
system.FiledResultSet.maxFileSizeMB=128
system.FiledResultSet.maxSortKeyMemorySizeKB=1024
system.FiledResultSet.encodeToUTF8=true
system.ResultSet.maxNumberRowsExported=10000

For field-specific information for the Result Fields page, see Field help for query
definition: Result Fields page and Field help for query definition: Query Results
dialog box.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition

1226 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Editing a custom query definition

Query Definition Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Query Results dialog box
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1227

Queries and Reports System Setup

Field help for query definition: Result Fields page

This page provides help for the fields on the Query Results Fields page.

Total Table Width: Indicates the width in pixels of all currently defined columns. This
field can be used to determine whether column widths should be adjusted to fit a
limited horizontal area, such as a Workbench channel.
In a thin Workbench channel, the column widths should total no more than 230 pixels.
In a wide Workbench channel, the total should be no more than 490 pixels.

Result Columns: Click Add to add rows to the query results. Each row represents a
column to be retrieved through the SELECT clause of the SQL statement and potentially
displayed to the user.
Clicking Add displays the Query Results dialog box. For field-specific information, see
Field help for query definition: Query Results dialog box.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Query Definition Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Query Results dialog box
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

1228 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Field help for query definition: Query Results dialog box

This page provides help for the fields in the Query Results dialog box.

Database Column Name

This field defines the entry that will be added to the SQL SELECT clause. That is, it
names the column to be retrieved from the database. The value can be a column name
or can leverage another SQL function, as in the following examples:

Database Column Name Usage

T1.DISPLAY_NAME Simple column name

607 AS CLASSID Static value for all rows
UPPER(T1.DISPLAY_NAME) Column name with formatting
SUBSTR(T1.FIRST_NAME,1,1) || '. ' || Concatenated values
T1.LAST_NAME
NVL(T1.TOTAL_EXPECTED_PRICE, 0) Define a value to use for null data
SUM(NVL(T1.TOTAL_EXPECTED_PRICE, 0)) SQL sum function
CASE WHEN T1.WOMEN_BIZ=1 THEN Return value depending on condition; Use
'cterms$cterm.yes' ELSE null END CASE rather than DECODE.

This field is not displayed to users

Check for the query to retrieve the column but not display it to users. A common use of
this feature is to sort the query results on a value that is not displayed. For example, a
displayed column might show the Vendor name in mixed case, while a second hidden
column for the database column name UPPER(DISPLAY_NAME) could be included as
basis for sorting to ensure that sorting ignored case.

Column Header Resource

Select the column heading from the drop-down list. This is the system resource to be
used to provide a locale-specific column heading in the display. This field is required for
all columns, including hidden ones.

Column Type
Select the column type from the drop-down list. The column type may be simple or
complex. Complex types require that multiple columns be created in a specific order.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1229

Queries and Reports System Setup

The Column Type controls the presentation of the data. The following table describes
the simple column types:

Column Type Usage

Number Right-justified numeric value

Date Right-justified date value (MM/DD/YY)
Note: If the Date, Time or Date/Time type is
selected, then the returned column must be a
full database date/time stamp. If the
column, for example, is only a date value,
then the string type must be used.
Date Time Right-justified date/time stamp
Time Right-justified time value (HH:MM:SS)
Boolean 0 Displays 'false', 1 'true'
String Left-justified text value
String Resource Locale-specific value for this system resource, left
justified
Enumeration Translates numeric value to left-justified text value
Note: If the Enumeration type is selected, then the
name of the enumeration must also be supplied.

In addition to the simple column types, there are complex types used for displaying
monetary amounts, quantities with units, object names, hypertext-linked data, and so
on. Each of these types requires multiple columns, and the column types for each
complex type must be included in the order described below.
` Monetary Amounts: Use the Monetary Amount type for the amount column,
followed immediately by the Monetary Currency type for the text name of the
currency. The two values will be concatenated and displayed in a single
right-justified column, for example, 123.45 USD.
` Quantities With Units: Use the Quantity Amount type for the amount column,
followed immediately by Quantity Unit Object ID for the Units Object ID column,
and then immediately by the Quantity Unit Display Name for the name of the units
(for example, Kg). The Quantity Amount and Quantity Unit Display Name will be
concatenated and displayed in a single right-justified column, for example, 100 kg.
` Object Names: This complex type is used to display the names of other system
objects as hypertext links. To show an object name without a link, use the Display
Name column as a simple text field. To show the object as a link, use the Object ID
column, immediately followed by the Class ID column, and then the Display Name

1230 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

column. The Display Name will be displayed as a link, and clicking on the link will
take the authorized user to the object. See any of the business object list queries
for examples.
Alternatively, instead of the Display Name column type, the third column in the
object name can be specified as an Icon Display Name. In this case, the column
displays an icon that links to the object in the same way as the basic text display
name link. This is a useful way to minimize the width of the object name column.
The column should still reference the display name value, as this value is displayed
as fly-over text on the icon. The system displays an object-specific icon when such
icons are available, such as for Vendor and the Business Document classes, and
uses a generic icon for other classes. The column width for an icon object reference
should be 18 pixels, allowing for the 16 x 16 icon with border space. Use a
relatively short display name for the column to keep the small column width.
Another alternative to the Display Name column type is the Display Name
Resource. This is typically used for objects that have documents installed with the
system, such as value list values and queries themselves. Such documents need
display names that are appropriate for users in different locales.
` Links: In addition to object names displayed as hypertext links, any returned data
value can be displayed as a link. For example, to create drill-down queries for
spend data, the spend category value can be displayed with a hypertext link to a
more detailed query, including the category value as an input parameter to the
second query. Use the URL column type for the displayed value, followed
immediately by either the Internal Page or External Page type to provide the link
value. Internal Page should be used for linking to other Frictionless SRM pages and
External Page for linking to other web sites or applications. Links can also be
displayed as buttons, using the Link Image Source attribute on the result field
defined as the URL column. Supply the URL to a GIF image file of the button in the
specification for this column, and the link will be displayed as a button. See the
Upcoming Auction Event Detail query for an example. For more information, see
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL.
` Dimension Reference: A dimension reference is displayed only in spend analysis
dimension picker queries. A selected dimension reference serves as a parameter
value to some spend analysis reports. There are two display values, a unique
dimension ID and a corresponding label (essentially a short description). One of
these picker queries is All First Level Organizations. The Dimension Type column is
a literal integer from the DimensionEnum, such as 4 for the Organization
dimension. The Dimension Level represents the level of the hierarchy the reference
is in, typically provided by a dimension level token. Dimension Value ID is the
unique dimension ID, with Dimension Value Label serving as a short description.
The Dimension URL Fragment column composes a link with the displayed label text
to a drill-down query group which finds the children of the dimension ID. Dimension
Parent ID is the unique dimension ID at the next higher level. For first-level IDs,
the parent ID is null.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1231

Queries and Reports System Setup

Display Width (characters) and Display Width (pixels)

Enter the width of the table column using either characters or pixels.

Resolve Token(s) in Value

Checking this box indicates that the value of the string field in the query results might
contain one or more tokens that must be resolved. The ARGn tokens are the primary
use case. This is different from the normal token resolution, because tokens are
normally resolved before the query is executed.

Convert Scale to
A selected number value will be rounded to the number of decimal digits which is
entered in this field. Zero is often used to drop digits to the right of the decimal place
when many values are being summed. (By default, any totals of the number values are
done before rounding. Setting the system property,
system.ResultSet.setScaleOnAddend, to TRUE reverses this behavior.)

Show Image
Some column types support the display of an image instead of or in addition to the
display of the normal text value of the column. If this support is available for a column
type, a drop-down list of image display options are provided. The options are:

Option Behavior

None Display the usual text string – no image is shown.

Image Only Display the image, with the text visible in a fly-over.
Image with Text Display both the image and the text.

Displaying both the image and the text is recommended when the only distinguishing
characteristic among images on different rows is their color. Some shape difference or
text difference is needed to provide sufficient meaning to each image.
Selecting an option to show an image for a String column will cause the string value to
be interpreted as the path to an image file, leading to the image being displayed. The
image file is sought in the class path first. If it is not found in a JAR in the class path, it
is sought as an instance of a file attachment container. If the image cannot be found,
only the string is displayed.
Selecting an option to show an image for an Enumeration or String Resource column
indicates that an associated locale-specific image should be displayed. If an image is
not available, only the string is displayed. The image to be displayed is found indirectly,
through the resource ID which is associated with an enum value or which is returned as
the value of the string resource. Internally, a suffix of “.image” is appended to the

1232 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

resource ID, and the resulting resource ID is sought. If it is found, its value is expected
to be the path to an image file, such as “/signal/sphere_red.gif”.
Selecting an option to show an image for a URL column will cause the string value to be
interpreted as a resource ID with an associated locale-specific image which is to be
displayed. This is the same behavior as for a String Resource column. The old behavior
of providing a source image path in the column definition is still supported, which is to
display the same image for each row. If both the image path is set and an option to
show an image is selected, an image retrieved via a resource ID supersedes the static
image.
If it is inconvenient to store an image in a JAR in the class path, it can be imported as
an attachment in a file attachment container. The path name of the file attachment
container is the path to the image file. The image should have a GIF or JPEG format so
that it can be exported to PDF.

Conversion Unit
This field appears when you select Quantity Unit Display Name in the Column Type
field. Select the unit of measure to which to convert the selected values.
This is a picker for a unit of measure to which the selected values will be converted, if a
legitimate conversion is possible, from the selected unit to the conversion unit. The
original quantities are displayed in one column, as usual, along with an additional
column containing the converted quantity. If no conversion was possible, the additional
column's value for that row will be empty.

Currency Conversion Source

This field appears when you select Monetary Currency in the Column Type field. Select
the target currency from the following options:
` None: No conversion is done.
` User: The current user’s currency is the target of the conversion.
` Organization: The current user’s organization’s currency is the target of the
conversion.
` Selection: The target currency is selected from a drop-down list.

Conversion Unit
This field appears when you select Selection in the Currency Conversion Source field.
Select the target currency.

Total this field at bottom of table

Check to provide a total below the individual detailed result rows. This field can be used
with Number, Monetary Amount or Quantity columns. A total can be provided for an
amount or quantity column only if all values have the same unit, such as dollars. An

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1233

Queries and Reports System Setup

additional row will be generated at the bottom of the results list with any calculated
totals.

Style Set
Select formatting styles for exporting the query results to Microsoft Excel. A previously
defined set of formatting styles may be selected for this column. This field overrides
any style set selected for all columns on the Query page.

Sorting
If the <%ORDERBY%> token has been used in the Query String, use the Sorting fields
to define the SQL ORDER BY clause that will be generated for the query. If you want to
sort, for example, by Last Name and then First Name, enter 1 in the Sort Order field
for Last Name and 2 in the Sort Order field for First Name. Check Ascending if an
ascending sort is desired.

Dimension ID
If you selected Dimension Value Label in the Column Type field, select an ID for the
dimension to be displayed. For example, if this query column will select a label column
in the Organization spend dimension table, Organization should be selected in this
drop-down list. This will support an option in the corresponding spend configuration
document's dimension definition to hide this column to save space in the display of
query results.

Document ID
This identifier associates a query column definition with an axis definition. It also
appears in a cube profile's axis definition.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Field help for query definition: Query page
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

1234 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Query Definition Filter Prompts page

On the Filter Prompts page, you can set the prompts for your query.
Prompt parameters allow the user to filter the returned results. For example, a user can
choose to see all suppliers with names like “Acme,” where the user supplies the value
“Acme” at runtime.
If the query includes these parameters, they are defined in two places: initially as a
placeholder in the query string and then on the Filter Prompts page.

Adding Parameters
First, the parameter is added to the query string. Using the example above, the query
string would appear similar to the following:
SELECT <%RESULTS%> FROM <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_MAS_VENDOR WHERE DISPLAY_NAME LIKE
? AND CONTEXTID = <%CONTEXT(masterdata.Vendor)%> <%ORDERBY%>

The question mark (?) is the placeholder for the prompted parameter. Note that the
parameters are positional: the order of the prompt field definitions in the query
definition must match the order of the corresponding question marks in the query
string.

Defining Parameters
The second step is the definition of each parameter. Click the Filter Prompts tab to
display a list of the existing parameter prompts. In edit mode, you use the Add button
to define additional prompts. Clicking Add or an existing prompt displays the Query
Parameters dialog box.

For field-specific information for this page, see Field help for query definition:
Query Parameters dialog box.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Query Definition Filter Prompts page
Field help for query definition: Query Parameters dialog box
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1235

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

1236 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Field help for query definition: Query Parameters dialog box

This page provides help for the fields in the Query Parameters dialog box.

Parameter Name: Enter a unique name for the parameter. This name is never visible
to users. The name is an identifier used by the software to cache user prompt entries.
When the user fills in a value for a specific prompt, e.g., “Acme,” the value will be
defaulted to “Acme” when the user returns to that prompt. This caching is tied only to
the prompt name, so you should use unique names across queries to prevent confusing
behavior. (Note that the caching persists for a user's session. The cache is cleared
when the session terminates.)
For example, if “DisplayName” is used as the parameter name for all names in all
queries, a name that a user entered to locate suppliers will appear as the default
parameter value on a subsequent query to locate RFPs. This is probably not a desired
behavior. Note that if a query has default values for all of its parameters, it will attempt
to exit without waiting for user input. The user can, of course, change the parameter
values and re-execute the query.
A second use of the parameter name relates to reports. Each report is defined as a
Query Group, and the query group can contain multiple queries. For example, you
might define an initial query that produced summary header information, followed by
another query that returned the detailed information. Consider a report showing RFP
activity in a specific commodity category. The initial query might show the count of
events and the total dollar amount budgeted and spent, with a second query listing the
date, owner and amounts for each RFP in that category. Both queries will require the
category ID as an input parameter. If the two queries in the query group for the report
use the same filter prompt name for the category ID, the user will only be prompted
once for the value. This is an important usability consideration when naming
parameters within report query groups.

Prompt Message Resource: Select the system resource to be displayed as a

message to the user when prompting for the filter parameters.

Default Value: Enter a default value for the prompt. The value is entered and stored in
string form and converted to the appropriate data type when needed. If you do not
provide a default value, the user is prompted for one at run time.
If the prompt Data Type is an Object Reference, a default identifying the class of the
object to be picked is required. The format of the default object reference is
“null:classid:null”. For example, for a Contact Object Reference, the class ID of
Contacts is 600, so the default value would be null:600:null. For a list of class IDs, see
the online Reference Guide (RG).
A value list value prompt control is a drop-down list. Providing a default value for a
value list value in a standard query should be avoided if there is no guarantee that the
values in that list will not be changed by the customer. If the default value is not in the
list, the drop-down list will not have a value pre-selected (which is acceptable), but a

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1237

Queries and Reports System Setup

valid selection for this parameter will not be required. This means that the absence of a
valid selection will not stop the query from being executed with the invalid default
value.
Data Type: Select the input parameter type to ensure the correct prompt
presentation. The following types are supported:

Default Value
Parameter Data Type Related Fields Example Default Value Comment

String String Matching Abc No quotes

Integer 42
Big Decimal 3.14159
Boolean true Anything else, including
“yes”, yields false
Date 2003/06/30 YYYY/MM/DD
Spend date range token
allowed
Date-Time 2003/06/30 2359 YYYY/MM/DD HHMM
No colon in time
Object Reference null:611:null Vendor object; Required
Value List Value Value List Type Red Display name ID of the
value list value (presumably
for a value list type for
color) - not a resource ID
Dimension Reference 4:1:null:null:null First level of the
organization dimension (4 in
DimensionEnum); Required
Enumeration Enum Type Name, 1 Default chosen from
Enumeration Enumeration drop-down list

String Matching: Select the type of matching to be done for string parameters.
The type of match is really controlled by the query string. If the query string uses an
equality format, e.g., DISPLAY_NAME = ?, an exact match will be performed. If instead,
the query string uses a like format, e.g., DISPLAY_NAME LIKE ?, wildcarding will be

1238 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

honored. The String Matching field controls the software's wildcard behavior as
follows:

Setting Behavior

Exact Match No special wildcard processing

Wildcard Match or Begins With If the user enters no wildcards in the prompt value (for
example, just “ACME”), the software will automatically append
the multi-character matching wild card, so the query will return
anything beginning with ACME. If the user has entered a
prompt containing either the single or multi-character wildcard,
it will be used unmodified.
Contains If the user enters no wildcards in the prompt value (for
example, just “ACME”), the software will automatically insert
both a leading and trailing multi-character wildcard, so the
search will return anything containing ACME. Note that leading
wild card searches are typically more demanding on the
database server performance and should be used only where
necessary.

The Oracle wildcards are % for matching any number of positions and _ for matching a
single position. Typically, users are more familiar with * for multiple positions and ? for
a single position (the DOS and UNIX standards). The software will honor the Oracle
characters if entered, but will also translate * and ? so that they are also treated as
wildcards. Users should be trained to use * and ?.
Note that string matching is case sensitive by default. There are methods for
performing case-insensitive matching, and while they have a performance impact, they
can be used where appropriate. One technique is to have a WHERE clause that uses the
pattern “WHERE UPPER(DISPLAY_NAME) = UPPER(?).

Checkbox Options
` Prefill value from cache: Check to reduce the frequency that the user must enter
the filter value. This box should always be checked.
` Optional: This field is for String columns only. Check to indicate that if a filter
value is not provided, all column values are accepted.
` Hidden: Check to prevent this prompt from being displayed. You check this box if
the filter value will be provided without being supplied by the user.
` Locked: Check to indicate that the filter value may not be changed by the user.
You check this box if the filter value will be provided without being supplied by the
user.

Related Topics

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1239

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Query Definition Filter Prompts page
Field help for query definition: Query Parameters dialog box
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

1240 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Query Definition Chart Definition page

On the Chart Definition page, you can associate charts with queries.
The Query component provides the ability to present results in chart form as part of a
report. Chart presentation is enabled by the Chart page. In edit mode, click Add to
display the Chart Definition dialog box.

Chart Definition Fonts

The selection of the font family used for axis and legend text in charts is now more
flexible. By default, the Arial Unicode MS font family will be used if it is available on the
server. If it is not available, the Lucida Sans font family will be used as a backup.
This default font family selection can be overridden per user language by entering one
or more properties in the fcisystem.properties file. For example,
userinterface.chart.fontFamily.en=Courier New
would cause the Courier New font family to be used in charts for those users with
English (en) as their language, according to their user accounts. “ja” would be the
language code used in a separate property to support Japanese text. The language
codes are the same as those used in the import of language packs.

For field-specific information for the Chart Definition page, see Field help for query
definition: Chart Definition dialog box.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Field help for query definition: Chart Definition dialog box
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1241

Queries and Reports System Setup

Field help for query definition: Chart Definition dialog box

This page provides help for the fields in the Chart Definition dialog box.

Chart Type: Select the chart type from the drop-down list. Supported chart types are
Bar, Pie, and Line. When a series of data points is available, a chart with multiple lines
or clustered bars can be created. An alternative to clustered bars is a stacked bar chart.
An example of the use of a clustered bar chart is the Spend by Commodity over Time
chart: a series of bars is displayed, with each cluster representing the amount spent for
all selected commodities during a time period, and with each bar in the cluster
representing a commodity.

Column Containing Label for Data: From the drop-down list, select the Result Field
column to be used to label the chart elements (the bars, line points, or pie slices).

Column Containing Data: From the drop-down list, select the Result Field column to
provide the numeric data for the chart elements.
Each row in the result set that does not have a value for the data column (i.e., in which
the column is null) will not be represented in the chart. If none of the rows has a value
for the data column, the chart is suppressed.

Maximum Number of Data Points: Enter the maximum number of data points to be
used in the chart. It is recommended that you enter a value in this field if the query
might return a large number of rows.

Use “Other” Category and Sort Data: This field is used if the number of rows
returned exceeds the value in the Maximum Number of Data Points field. Check to
aggregate the additional rows into a single “Other” category in the chart.

Other Category Label Resource: Select the label to be used for the “Other” chart
element. This option is enabled by checking the Use “Other” Category and Sort Data
box. A system resource for the English term “Other” is predefined and available in all
supported languages.

Column Containing Label for Series: For queries returning a series of data points,
select the Result Field column to be used to label the series elements.
Note: The charting component requires the data to be sorted by the series label
column. Ensure that an order-by directive is included in the query results definition
for the column.

Maximum Number of Series: Enter the maximum number of series to be used in the
chart.

1242 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Use “Other” Series and Sort Data: This field is used if the number of rows returned
exceeds the value in the Maximum Number of Series field. Check to aggregate the
additional rows into a single “Other” element in the chart.
If the query results contain a column with an Internal or External Link type, the
software will automatically add the link values to the appropriate chart elements. This
allows clicking on the chart element to navigate to the same hyperlink that is included
in the corresponding data row. Since the Other category is an aggregate, no link is
enabled for that chart element.

Other Series Label Resource: Select the label to be used for the “Other” series
element. This option is enabled by checking the Use “Other” Series and Sort Data
box.

Color Palette: Select the chart color palette to use. The drop-down list offers High
Contrast, Blue to White, Teal to White, Red to White, RFP Phase Progression and Bell
Curve Progression. These pre-packaged palettes offer color sets designed for effective
data presentation.

Legend: Specify the position of the chart legend as follows:

` None: Suppresses the legend.
` East: Displays the legend at the right edge of the chart.
` South: Displays the legend at the bottom of the chart.
For charts to be displayed as Workbench channels, None or South is recommended.

Data Sorting in Charts

Pie Chart
In a pie chart, the order of the rows of data in the result set does not matter, because
the chart code will sort the rows by decreasing numeric value so that the slices are
arranged by size. In bar and line charts, the order of the data rows does matter.

Simple Bar or Line Chart

For one set of numeric values, such as a simple bar chart with a single color for each
bar or a chart with a single line, the data rows should be sorted by the desired order of
display, from left to right (or top to bottom for an inverted chart). This order is not
necessarily the alphabetic order of the labels.
If the number of data values exceeds the maximum and Use “Other” is checked, the
charting code takes control of the order and shows the highest values only, in
descending order. The lowest values are accumulated and shown at the end, labeled as
“Other”.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1243

Queries and Reports System Setup

If the number of data values exceeds the maximum, n, and Use “Other” is not
checked, then the first n values are shown in their original order and the rest are
ignored.

Clustered Bar, Stacked Bar, or Multi-Line Chart

For multiple series, such as when a stacked bar or clustered bar or multi-line chart is
used, the data rows in the result set should be sorted first by the desired order of the
series (which is the outer, primary classification) and then by the desired order of data
values within each series. In a time-based report of document activity, for example, the
data would be sorted first by the time period and then by the type of documents active
within each time period.
Separate settings for the maximum count and for the “Other” category can be specified
for the series and the data values within each series. The following table shows how the
display of data is affected by excessive counts of series and data values. A stacked bar
chart is assumed for these cases.

“Other” Not Used for Series “Other” Used for Series

“Other” Not Used for Bars ordered same as primary Bars ordered by descending total of
Data sort of result set. Segments in numeric data value of entire bar,
each bar ordered same as with bars beyond maximum series
secondary sort of result set. count totaled in Other bar.
Segments in each bar ordered same
as secondary sort of result set.
“Other” Used for Data Bars ordered same as primary Bars ordered by descending total of
sort of result set. Segments in numeric data value of entire bar,
each bar ordered by descending with bars beyond maximum series
numeric data value, with values count totaled in Other bar.
beyond maximum data value Segments in each bar ordered by
count totaled in Other segment. descending numeric data value, with
values beyond maximum data value
count totaled in Other segment.

For queries ordered by a series of time periods, it is best not to use “Other” for the
series; if the maximum number of time periods was exceeded, the periods would be
reordered. If “Other” is not set and the maximum count n is exceeded, then the first n
bars are displayed in their original order.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition

1244 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Query Definition Chart Definition page

Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1245

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query Definition Access List page

You use the Access List page to add collaborator information to a query definition
access list. For details, see Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document.

Note: By default, no collaborators are specified for the query. In this case, all users are
granted default access rights. After one or more collaborators are specified, however,
other users are denied access to the query. This has the effect of hiding the query in the
selection list of a query group or picker from those other users.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Testing a custom query definition
Query Definition Query page
Field help for query definition: Query page
Query Definition Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Result Fields page
Field help for query definition: Query Results dialog box
Query Definition Filter Prompts page
Field help for query definition: Query Parameters dialog box
Query Definition Chart Definition page
Field help for query definition: Chart Definition dialog box

1246 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Query Definition advanced options

This section describes advanced options for query definition.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Testing a custom query definition
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1247

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display

URL parameters can be provided in various locations to change the display of query
results, usually to override settings in the query definition. These locations include:
` The URL Parameters field of the report item in the master category, if the report is
to be launched from the Analysis page
` The URL Parameters field of the Workbench channel parameter definition object, for
a report channel
` The Parameters field of a document report configuration
` A query definition column using SQL to compose a URL to be used as a link to
another report
For the report item in the master category and for the document report configuration,
the URL parameters are entered as a string value. For example:
&querySuppressTable=FCI-MyQueryDefinition&MyOtherParam=42

Note that both of the parameters start with an ampersand (&).

For the report channel definition, the URL parameters are also entered as a string
value, but the string value must be identified with a Parameter ID of
“multiquery.urlparams”. A sample string value might be:
querySuppressTable=FCI-MyQueryDefinition&MyOtherParams=42

Note that the string does not start with an ampersand, but an ampersand separates
additional parameter name=value pairs.
Most of the URL parameters cited below affect chart display.

URL Parameters
chartInvert={ true | <internal-query-name>[,...] }

This parameter enables horizontal bars for a bar or stacking bar chart, rather than the
default vertical orientation. The chart will expand vertically as more bars or bar clusters
are added to the data.
In the case of “chartInvert=true”, all bar charts in the report will be inverted (made
horizontal). Specific charts in a report can be inverted by providing the list of internal
query names which contain those charts. The chartInvert parameter has no effect on
charts of other types (pie and line).
querySuppressTable={ true | <internal-query-name>[,...] }

This parameter will suppress one or more tables in the report. If the value is “true”, all
the tables in a report will be suppressed.

1248 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Specific tables can be suppressed by providing the list of internal query names
associated with those tables.
querySuppressChart={ true | <internal-query-name>[,...] }

This parameter is used to suppress one or more charts in a report. It is not likely to be
used, but is available for completeness.
chartLegendPos={ EAST | SOUTH | NONE } [,<internal-query-name>[, ...] ] [:
...]}

The following are examples of this parameter:

` All charts in the report have the legend positioned on the bottom:
chartLegendPos=SOUTH
` One query has a chart in the EAST and two other queries have no legend:
chartLegendPos=EAST,FCI-GreatStuff:NONE,FCI-Other1,FCI-Other2

Use the following rules for this parameter:

` If multiple positions must be specified, separate them with a colon (:).
` If all queries' charts use the same position, do not specify query names.
chartType={ BAR | PIE | LINE },<internal-query-name>}

A query may have more than one chart definition, each having a different type. The
default type to use in the type in the first chart definition in the collection. If a query
identified by <internal-query-name> has a chart defined for the specified type, that will
be used.
This parameter was designed to be generated by a drop-down list of available chart
types in the report UI. Because it was not designed for direct report developer use, it
does not support multiple queries or allow the query name to be omitted. However, it is
available if it is necessary to change the default chart type of one query in the report.
reportFormatDirectives

The URL parameter “reportFormatDirectives” can be added to any report entry in the
Analysis page, to any report document configuration, or any link composed in query
results which launches a report. Each directive would be in the value of this parameter,
separated by a comma. The formatting directives are as follows:
` suppressTableGrid: do not show vertical or horizontal borders for columns and
rows
` suppressTableColumnHeaders: do not show table column headers
` suppressTableQueryDisplayName: do not show query display name above table
` suppressTableToolbar: do not show block w/ Find controls and export control for
table

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1249

Queries and Reports System Setup

The directives can be used independently or together. The following example will
suppress the controls that appear above the table data in a report:

&reportFormatDirectives=suppressTableGrid,suppressTableColumnHeaders,s
uppressTableToolbar

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Testing a custom query definition
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

1250 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Query definition: token substitution

Token substitution is provided to facilitate the definition of complex queries and to
enhance runtime usability. This section describes the supported tokens and their usage.
Note that the spelling, capitalization and formatting of tokens must match the
information provided here exactly or the token will not be substituted and the query will
fail.

Token Description Usage

<%CURRENT_USER_ID%> Object ID corresponding to WHERE

the currently logged in user DOC_OWNER_USER_OBJECT
at query execution. _ID =
<%CURRENT_USER_ID%>
<%CURRENT_USER_NAME%> String name of the WHERE
currently logged-in user at DOC_OWNER_USER_OBJECT
query execution. _NAME =
<%CURRENT_USER_NAME
%>
<%NOW%> Current date and time at WHERE CREATED_AT <=
query execution. '<%NOW%>'
<%TODAY%> Current date at query WHERE
execution. TO_CHAR(CREATED_AT,
'MM/DD/YY') =
TO_CHAR(<%TODAY%>,
'MM/DD/YY')
<%CURRENT_USER_COMPANY%> Object ID of the Company WHERE
associated with the current BUYER_COMP_OBJECT_ID =
logged-in user at the time <%CURRENT_USER_COMPA
of query execution. NY%>
<%COMPANY_CURRENCY_OBJ_ID%> Object ID of the currency <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_DOC_C
that is set for the company UR_CONVERT(ESTIMATED_P
associated with the current RICE,ESTIMATED_OBJECT_I
logged-in user at the time D,<%COMPANY_CURRENCY
of query execution. _OBJ_ID%>)

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1251

Queries and Reports System Setup

Token Description Usage

<%CURRENT_USER_VENDOR%> Object ID of the Vendor WHERE

associated with the current VENDOR_REF_OBJECT_ID =
logged-in user at the time <%CURRENT_USER_VENDO
of query execution. R%>
Note: The current user
supplier is only defined for
sell-side users. As a result,
this token will not expand
in the SQL Preview mode
since the Query Definition
object is only visible to
buy-side users.
<%CURRENT_USER_ENTERPRISE%> Object ID of the Enterprise WHERE CONTEXTID =
associated with the current <%CURRENT_USER_ENTER
logged-in user at the time PRISE%>
of query execution.
Note: This token is
applicable in very limited
circumstances. Query
results are generally
filtered for the correct
company or enterprise
using the
<%CONTEXT(name)%>
token.
<%CURRENT_USER_GROUPS%> Comma-separated list of WHERE
Object ID's of groups T2.USER_GROUP_OBJECT_I
where the current D IN
logged-in user is a (<%CURRENT_USER_GROU
member. Frequently used PS%>)
in queries examining
collaborator membership
on documents.
<%USER_LOCALE_KEY%> String with language and FCI_GET_RESOURCE_VALUE
country of current user, (
used as parameter to SQL cterms$cterm.important.msg
function to find , <%USER_LOCALE_KEY%>
locale-specific string in )
stored procedure.
<%CONTEXT(logicalName)%> Context of the current WHERE CONTEXTID =
logged in user at the time <%CONTEXT(projects.projec
Note: <logicalName> refers to the of query execution. See the ts)%>
value in the Class ID column of the notes following the table
Class List table located in the Class for details. The case of
Reference section of the online logicalName must be
Reference Guide (RG). correct.

1252 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Token Description Usage

<%SCHEMA%> Used to prefix the current FROM

Oracle schema identifier to <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_MAS_C
any table names URRENCY
<%EXT_TABLE(logicalName)%> Fully qualified table name FROM
<%EXT_TABLE(logicalName,Collection of extension table for <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_MAS_V
Name)%> object identified by logical ENDOR,
name. The first form <%EXT_TABLE(masterdata.
Note: <logicalName> refers to the provides the name of the Vendor)%>
value in the Class ID column of the table with the “default”
Class List table located in the Class extension attributes. The
Reference section of the online second form provides the
Reference Guide (RG). name of the table which
contains the row(s) of an
extension collection.
<%RESULTS%> Tells the query component SELECT <%RESULTS%>
to build the list of columns FROM
for the SQL SELECT clause <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_MAS_C
from the information URRENCY
entered on the Result
Fields tabs of the Query
Definition object.
<%ORDERBY%> Tells the query component SELECT <%RESULTS%>
to build the SQL ORDER BY FROM
clause based on the sorting <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_MAS_C
information entered on the URRENCY <%ORDERBY%>
Result Fields tab of the
Query Definition object.
<%RES_ID(resourceId)%> Finds locale-specific string NVL(T1.PHONE_1,<%RES_I
for resource ID. D(cterms$cterm.not_availabl
e_in_brackets)%>)
<%PROPS(appId,propId)%> Finds the string value of <%PROP(system,
the system property that is system.default.language)%>
identified by the appId and
propId combination.
<%ARGn%> If a String, URL, or String 'The expiration date of this
Resource query column material is <%ARG1%>'
definition has “Resolve Note: If this token is the
token(s) in Value” database column name of a
checkbox set, and one or String column, for example,
more tokens of the form and the 1st column after that
'<%ARGn%>' returned in contains a date, then the
the value of the column, date value will replace the
each of these tokens will <%Arg1%> token.
be replaced by the string
form of the nth result item
following the defined
column.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1253

Queries and Reports System Setup

Token Description Usage

<%REQUEST_PAGE_PATH%> Echoes the properly '<%REQUEST_PAGE_PATH

formatted URL to the %>'||'queryGroupName=FCI
current page. Used by -AllCategories'
queries to generate
internal page links to other
(drill-down) queries,
especially when the same
query can be executed
from multiple pages, for
example, Picker queries.
<%REQUEST_PATH_OBJ%> Gets the part of the HTML '<%REQUEST_PAGE_PATH
request path that identifies %>,<%REQUEST_PATH_OB
a target object. This is J%>?rqaction=markinactive
between the first and &objref=')||to_char(OBJECTI
second commas in the D)||':619'
path. Usually, this is a
simple object reference.
<%BASE_SERVLET_PATH%> Gets the base servlet path, 'javascript:confirmAndPostUrl
which is the part of an (''<%BASE_SERVLET_PATH
internal page link that %><%REQUEST_PAGE_PAT
starts with the http H%>,REQUEST_PATH_OBJ
protocol and includes the %>?rqaction=markinactive&
host name, port (if any), objref=' || OBJECTID ||
application name (if any), ':619'',''' ||
and servlet name. <%RES_ID(system$system.
Example: ui.confirmation.delete)%> ||
“http://fc-whatever:8100/s ''')'
ourcing/fsbuyer”.
This is used when the URL
string is embedded in the
column value, precluding
the automatic prefixing of
the base servlet path for an
internal page link. In the
Usage example, the
column type is external
page link so that the
prefixing will not be done.
<%LOAD_PAGE(logicalName,objectId) Resolves to an SQL string <%LOAD_PAGE(doc.auction.
%> concatenation expression multi.universal.auctionevent,
to compose the URL that T1.OBJECTID)%>
will load the referenced
document.

1254 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Token Description Usage

LOAD_PAGE_CLASSID(classId,objectId Resolves to a URL that '<%LOAD_PAGE_CLASSID('

) loads the referenced || T2.CLASSID || ',' ||
document. classId and T2.OBJECTID || ')%>'
objectId are integers.
Note: This token is
optionally resolved for each
link column value in the
result set, unlike
LOAD_PAGE, which is
resolved before the query
executes.
<%DISCUSSIONS_PAGE(classId,object Resolves to an SQL string <%DISCUSSIONS_PAGE(T1.
Id)%> concatenation expression PARENT_CLASS_ID,T1.PARE
to compose the URL that NT_OBJECT_ID)%>||'&targe
will load the discussions tObjref='||T1.OBJECTID||':3
page for the referenced 80'
document.
<%DUPLICATE_DOC(logicalName,obje Resolves to an SQL string <%DUPLICATE_DOC(rfx.RFX
ctId)%> concatenation expression Doc,T1.OBJECTID)%>
to compose the URL that
Note: <logicalName> refers to the will duplicate the
value in the Class ID column of the referenced document.
Class List table located in the Class
Reference section of the online
Reference Guide (RG).
<%MULTIPICKER_FIELD_PARAMS%> This token is specifically '<%REQUEST_PAGE_PATH
designed for building %>'||'queryGroupName=FCI
internal page links within -AllCategories'||<%MULTIPI
queries designed for CKER_FIELD_PARAMS%>||'
multi-select pickers. For an &oid='||TO_CHAR(OBJECTID
example, see the Category )
and Vendor Tree Browse
queries. The multi-select
picker needs a number of
context parameters to
manage the activation of
multiple selections. This
token echoes those
parameters when linking to
a new query page as
additions to the internal
page URL. Note that the
token includes a leading,
but not trailing, & delimiter
for the parameters.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1255

Queries and Reports System Setup

Token Description Usage

<%SOURCE_OBJREF_PARAM%> Compose a URL parameter '/comp/selection?queryGroup

with the simple object Name=FCI-DimensionCusto
reference of the report m4LowerLevel&<%SOURCE
being executed, so that its _OBJREF_PARAM%>'
query parameter values will
be shared with the linked
report or query group.
<%CHART_SERIES_LABEL%> Columns with this token in SUM(DECODE(DIMENSION2
a pivot query will be _LABEL,<%CHART_SERIES_
expanded to multiple LABEL%>,SPEND,0))
columns, each with one of
the chart series label
strings selected by the
previous query in the
report.
<%CHART_SERIES_LABEL_LIST%> Used with SUM(CASE WHEN
<%CHART_SERIES_LABEL DIMENSION2_LABEL NOT IN
%>, this generates a list of (<%CHART_SERIES_LABEL_
the chart series label LIST%>) THEN SPEND ELSE
strings so that other labels 0 END) AS SPEND_OTHER
not in this list can be
identified.
<%SA_ENV%> Gets the suffix for names FROM
of database objects that <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_SA_FAC
have been created for a T<%SA_ENV%> T1
spend environment in the
current context.
<%LEVEL_COMMODITY%> Gets the suffix for a T4.COMMODITY_ID<%LEVE
dimension table column L_COMMODITY%>
name, representing the
current drill-down level in
the hierarchy. Other spend
dimensions have
corresponding token
names.
<%DIM_LEVEL_EXPAND(columnExpre Expand columnExpression <%DIM_LEVEL_EXPAND(T3.
ssion,tableAlias,levelCount)%> to a delimited series of COMMODITY, T3,
expressions which are <%DIM_LEVEL_COMMODIT
suitable for the cube profile Y_COUNT%>)%>
to derive a cube dimension
definition for the SRM Note: The nested
Explorer. levelCount DIM_LEVEL_COMMODITY_C
determines the number of OUNT token is replaced with
expressions in the series. the current level count of the
commodity dimension.

1256 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Using the CONTEXT Token

The CONTEXT token is an extremely important component of query development. The
Frictionless SRM application allows master data objects and business documents to be
associated with an organizational unit, and to limit access to those objects to users that
are also associated with that business unit. Additional levels of security in the product
provide more granular control, but the organizational unit level partitioning is the first
level.
The Frictionless SRM application supports two levels of organizational units for this data
security feature: enterprises and companies, where companies are contained within an
enterprise. It is not necessary to use this partitioning in an implementation, which can
be modeled as one enterprise, using other attributes to identify the business owner of
the document, without blocking data access based on the organizational unit.
Additionally, different classes of objects or documents can be scoped at different levels,
for example, there can be one set of Vendor information shared across the enterprise,
with RFPs, Auctions and Contracts isolated at the company level.
In most cases, it is desirable for queries to show users only those objects or documents
that they subsequently have access to, for example, if there are RFPs associated with
two separate companies within an enterprise stored in the database, users from one
company should only be allowed to see the documents that are associated with their
company. This is controlled in part by a CONTEXTID column in the top-level database
row associated with that document, and managed by the Frictionless SRM framework.
For queries, the correct approach is to include a WHERE clause filter to check the
context ID against the context association of the current user. The CONTEXT token
simplifies this step: the software understands whether the object being queried is
enterprise- or company-scoped, and based on the logged-in user, in turn knows the ID
of the user's associated enterprise or company. The required WHERE clause segment is
therefore “AND CONTEXTID = CONTEXT(name)”, where name is the logical class name
of the object being queried.
To find the logical class name of an object, its integer class ID, or its table name, see
the Class Reference section of the on-Line Reference Guide (RG). To see the table
name, go to the object's Schema View.
The CONTEXT token has a slightly different behavior for queries executed by sell-side
users. For a company-scoped object (for example, RFxs), the CONTEXT token returns a
comma-separated list of all of the context IDs that are children of the enterprise
context containing the supplier. Since Vendors and Contacts are typically enterprise
scoped, they can be invited to events by any company in any context that is part of that
enterprise context. The unique sell-side behavior of the CONTEXT token ensures that
sell-side queries can also see the full set of business documents in any context that is
part of that enterprise. Supplier access to those documents is typically further
controlled by whether the supplier is invited to participate. Using the comma-separated
list returned by the CONTEXT token on the sell side implies a WHERE clause filter using
the SQL IN, instead of the = operator used with single values.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1257

Queries and Reports System Setup

Using the ARGn Token

This section describes the use of the ARGn token, including examples.
If a String, URL, or String Resource query column definition has the Resolve token(s) in
Value checkbox set, and one or more tokens of the form '<%ARGn%>' returned in the
value of the column, each of these tokens will be replaced by the string form of the nth
result item following the defined column.
Example of providing date in user's format:
` Define a String column A with the “Database Column Name” of:
'The expiration text of this material is <%ARG1%>'
` Define a hidden Date column B following column A.
Each value returned for A will have the properly formatted date inserted in the
place of the ARG1 token. B is expected to be hidden, though it is not required.
Multiple argument token example:
` Define a String column A with the “Database Column Name” of:
CASE WHEN PRIMARY_UNIT = 1 THEN '<%ARG2%>' ELSE SYNONYMS || '<%ARG1%>'
END
followed by three columns (OBJECTID, class ID literal, DISPLAY_NAME) and then by
two more columns (numeric amount and unit of measure).
The first three columns compose an object reference result item. The following two
columns compose a quantity (dimensioned numeric) result item. If PRIMARY_UNIT
= 1, then the value of column A will be the quantity in string form (because it is the
second result item after column A). If PRIMARY_UNIT <> 1, then the value of
column A will be the value of the SYNONYMS column concatenated with the string
form of an object reference (because the object reference is the first result item
after column A).
This is not a logical example, but it illustrates the use of multiple arguments in any
order. It also highlights the rule that ARGn means the nth result item, not the nth
column.
Resource ID example:
` Define a String Resource column A with the “Database Column Name” of:
'auction$auction_bidder_status'
This literal resource ID will initially resolve to a locale-specific string. If this string
has ARGn tokens in it, then the string would be resolved further by replacing the
tokens with the values of the corresponding result items after column A. This
behavior is not obvious from looking at the query definition, so it should be applied
only when the output value must vary by locale.
Other rules are as follows:
` Note that an ARGn token with the same value for n can appear multiple times. That
is, “ARG3” can be used more than once in the same column.

1258 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

` There can be gaps in the argument numbering. For example, ARG1 and ARG4 can
be the only tokens used.
` The number of result items following a column definition with ARGn tokens must be
greater than or equal to the highest value of n. If ARG4 is used, then there must be
at least 4 result items following the column which uses the tokens.
` The URL intended column type is supported, but not the internal or external link
fragment column types. The URL is the column whose value is displayed in the UI.

Using the DIM_LEVEL_EXPAND token

A query to generate the input data for a SRM Explorer cube would typically use this
token for each dimension column, if the column is of String type. A column using this
token would also have the Dimension ID field set.
A database column name of:
<%DIM_LEVEL_EXPAND(T3.COMMODITY,T3,3)%>
would be expanded to:
T3.COMMODITY1
|| DECODE(T3.BALANCING2,1,NULL,'^' || T3.COMMODITY2
|| DECODE(T3.BALANCING3,1,NULL,'^' || T3.COMMODITY3))
The level count (3, in this example) would normally be represented by a level count
token, such as <%DIM_LEVEL_COMMODITY_COUNT%>.
It is possible for a column expression to contain more than one column name, in which
case appending the dimension level at the end of the expression is incorrect. A complex
expression requires the <%LEVEL%> token to be placed at the end of each base
column name which represents the dimension.
A comma is not allowed in the column expression. This would hinder the recognition of
the other token parameters, which are separated by a comma.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Testing a custom query definition
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1259

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query definition: common query patterns

This section outlines common query patterns in the Frictionless SRM application.
Together with the Frictionless SRM Data Model reference documentation, available
through the Professional Services organization, these patterns provide the basis for
understanding product queries and developing additional custom queries.

Simple Single Object Query

The following is the simplest query pattern, reflecting a query against a single table:
SELECT <%RESULTS%> FROM <%SCHEMA%>.tablename WHERE
CONTEXTID=<%CONTEXT(classname)%> AND INACTIVE = 0 <%ORDERBY%>

Multiple Selection Criteria

The following is a more complex but still typical pattern, selecting objects from one
table based on disjoint selection criteria. Typically, this pattern is used for queries such
as “Show me all RFPs in which I am the owner or a collaborator”. To avoid limitations
related to joins, it is recommended that this type of query leverage sub-selects and
unions, as illustrated below.
SELECT <%RESULTS%> FROM <%SCHEMA%>.tablename T1 WHERE OBJECTID IN
(
SELECT OBJECTID FROM <%SCHEMA%>.tablename T2 WHERE
T2.CONTEXTID=<%CONTEXT(classname)%> AND T2.
DOC_OWNER_USER_OBJECT_ID=<%CURRENT_USER_ID%>
UNION
SELECT OBJECTID FROM <%SCHEMA%>.tablename T3
<%SCHEMA%>.FCI_DOC_COLLABORATOR T4 WHERE
T3.CONTEXTID=<%CONTEXT(classname)%> AND T4.PARENT_CLASS_ID = classid AND
T4.PARENT_OBJECT_ID = T3.OBJECTID AND T4. USER_NAME_OBJECT_ID =
<%CURRENT_USER_ID%>
)
<%ORDERBY%>

The outer query returns the actual results from the objects selected by the inner
queries. The first inner query selects those rows where the current user is the
document owner, and the second inner query selects those rows where the current user
is a collaborator. The use of table aliases ensures unambiguous use of common column
names. References to parent class and object ID is explained below. The UNION
operator will eliminate duplicate records returned by both inner queries.

Selecting Subordinate Objects

In the previous example, the query incorporated information from a primary business
document and from a subordinate object, in this case the collaborator list. All

1260 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

subordinate objects have a common set of columns relating them to their parent. These
are PARENT_OBJECT_ID, PARENT_CLASS_ID, PARENT_COLLN_ID and
COLLECTION_ORDER_CODE.
In the simplest case, where the collection is only related to a single parent object table,
the relationship is defined by:
WHERE T2.PARENT_OBJECT_ID = T1.OBJECTID

In this case, T2 is the subordinate table and T1 is the parent. An inner join is used
above, so only parents that have a subordinate will be selected. Note also that in some
cases, a parent may have multiple rows in the subordinate table, and so it may be
necessary to use SELECT DISTINCT on the main query.
In other cases, the subordinate table is shared by multiple parents. In fact, this is the
case in the original example of the business document and collaborator tables. The
same collaborator table, FCI_DOC_COLLABORATOR, is used by all business document
types. Since OBJECTIDs are unique only within a given table, it is now necessary to
define the relationship based on two elements:
WHERE T2.PARENT_OBJECT_ID = T1.OBJECTID AND T2.PARENT_CLASS_ID = x

The PARENT_CLASS_ID value can be found in Appendix 2.

Finally, in some cases, a parent object will contain multiple collections of the same
subordinate type. In this case, it is also necessary to include the PARENT_COLLN_ID in
the definition of the relationship:
WHERE T2.PARENT_OBJECT_ID = T1.OBJECTID AND T2.PARENT_CLASS_ID = x AND
T2.PARENT_COLLN_ID = 1

When it is important for the query to respect the order of the members in the
subordinate collection, this is handled in the ORDER BY clause, with either WHERE
clause pattern, by including COLLECTION_ORDER_CODE.

Selecting Only Active Documents

Most Frictionless SRM objects support an Active/Inactive state. In general, instead of
deleting objects, they are marked inactive. This allows previously established
references to those objects to remain, but object picker queries filter out inactive
objects, preventing new references from being created. Sourcing documents can also
either be regular documents or flagged as templates. Frequently, queries must filter to
include only active instances and only documents that are not templates. This is
accomplished through two standard WHERE clause components:
WHERE INACTIVE = 0 AND IS_TEMPLATE=0

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1261

Queries and Reports System Setup

Querying Against Extensions

Frictionless SRM 3.0 incorporates dynamic schema generation for extensions, allowing
the extension attributes for a given class to be stored in a single table row, following
the pattern used by subordinate objects.
Either the query token <%EXT_TABLE(logicalName)%> or
<%EXT_TABLE(logicalName,CollectionName)%> provides the name of an extension
table which has been defined for the business object identified by “logicalName”. The
column names for each extension table are found in the extension definition for that
object.

Note: The <logicalName> value refers to the value in the Class ID column of the Class
List table, which is located in the Class Reference section of the online Reference Guide
(RG). (This value is not referred to here as the Class ID to avoid any potential confusion
with the Class Number.)

In the following example, the first form of this token is used to find the name of the
extension table containing attributes that apply to the vendor object as a whole.
SELECT <%RESULTS%> FROM <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_MAS_VENDOR T1,
<%EXT_TABLE(masterdata.Vendor)%> T2 WHERE T1.CONTEXTID =
<%CONTEXT(masterdata.Vendor)%> AND T2.PARENT_OBJECT_ID = T1.OBJECTID
<%ORDERBY%>

The next example adds the second form of this token to find the name of the extension
table which contains attributes in the “AuditInformation” collection, which has been
defined as an collection extension of the vendor object.
SELECT <%RESULTS%> FROM <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_MAS_VENDOR T1,
<%EXT_TABLE(masterdata.Vendor)%> T2,
<%EXT_TABLE(masterdata.Vendor,AuditInformation)%> T3 WHERE T1.CONTEXTID =
<%CONTEXT(masterdata.Vendor)%> AND T2.PARENT_OBJECT_ID = T1.OBJECTID AND
T3.PARENT_OBJECT_ID = T1.OBJECTID<%ORDERBY%>
The column names for the extension attributes being included in the results can be
viewed through the “Browse Extension Schema” report available in Setup under
Queries and Reports.

Querying Against Value List Extensions - Option 1

Additional steps are required to write a query against a value list extension. In the
following example, the query is written against an Alternate Time Zone extension
attribute on Vendor. Two options are presented for authoring the query. This option is
easier to author due to the provided database function. However, from a database
perspective, this option does not provide optimal performance. The performance aspect
becomes significant if the number of rows from the source table is very large.
For hosted customers authoring queries, the expectation is that this option will be used.
The query string for this example is as follows:

1262 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

SELECT <%RESULTS%> FROM <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_MAS_VENDOR T1,

<%EXT_TABLE(masterdata.Vendor)%> T2 WHERE T1.INACTIVE = 0 AND
T1.CONTEXTID=<%CONTEXT(masterdata.Vendor)%> AND T1.OBJECTID =
T2.PARENT_OBJECT_ID <%ORDERBY%>

To create this query, follow these additional steps.

1 Create the value list extension. The value list type will be selected as part of the
definition. For details, see Creating an extension definition.
2 Create a new query, duplicate a query or modify an existing query.
3 On the Query page of the query definition, in the Query String field, join the table
of the extension owner (in this case, FCI_MAS_VENDOR) to its extension definition
table by adding a WHERE clause condition. For the name of the extension table
query token, see Query definition: token substitution.
In the above example, the extension table is:
<%EXT_TABLE(masterdata.Vendor)%> T2
In the above example, the condition is as follows:
T1.OBJECTID = T2.PARENT_OBJECT_ID
4 On the Results Fields page of the query definition, add a new column for the value
list value. In this case, the Database Column Name will use the value list value
reference from the extension table as the parameter to the database function
FCI_MAS_GETVLVRESID which returns a resource string.
Only a reference to the value list value is stored in the extension table. To get the
referencing column name in the extension table through which to join to the object
ID in the value list value table, copy the Attribute Internal Name value from the
extension definition and append _OBJECT_ID, as in the following example:
TIME_ZONE_ALT_OBJECT_ID
In this example, the Database Column Name is as follows:
<%SCHEMA%>.FCI_MAS_GETVLVRESID(T2.TIME_ZONE_ALT_OBJECT_ID)
Note: The value for the Column Type field must be String Resource to allow the
correct localized string to be displayed for the column name.
5 Preview the query to verify that it returns the intended data.

Note: The FCI_MAS_GETVLVRESID function can be used for each value list value
appearing in the results from the tables selected in the query string.

Querying Against Value List Extensions - Option 2

This option implements the query above from Option 1 in different manner, resulting in
optimal query performance from a database perspective. However, from an authoring
perspective, this approach is more complicated, as a join to the value list value table is
necessary for each value list value displayed in the results. In this example, the query
is written against an Alternate Time Zone extension.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1263

Queries and Reports System Setup

SELECT <%RESULTS%> FROM <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_MAS_VENDOR T1,

<%EXT_TABLE(masterdata.Vendor)%> T2, <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_MAS_VALUE_LIST_VALUE
T3 WHERE T1.INACTIVE = 0 AND T1.CONTEXTID=<%CONTEXT(masterdata.Vendor)%>
AND T1.OBJECTID = T2.PARENT_OBJECT_ID AND T2.TIME_ZONE_ALT_OBJECT_ID =
T3.OBJECTID <%ORDERBY%>

To create this query, follow these additional steps.

1 Create the value list extension. The value list type will be selected as part of the
definition. For details, see Creating an extension definition.
2 Create a new query, duplicate a query or modify an existing query.
3 On the Query page of the query definition, in the Query String field, join the table
of the extension owner (in this case, FCI_MAS_VENDOR) to its extension definition
table by adding a WHERE clause condition. For the name of the extension table
query token, see Query definition: token substitution.
In the above example, the extension table is:
<%EXT_TABLE(masterdata.Vendor)%> T2
In the above example, the condition is as follows:
T1.OBJECTID = T2.PARENT_OBJECT_ID
4 Join the extension definition table to the value list value table by adding a WHERE
clause condition. (The value list value table name, which can also be found in the
Reference Guide, is FCI_MAS_VALUE_LIST_VALUE.)
Only a reference to the value list value is stored in the extension table. To get the
referencing column name in the extension table through which to join to the object
ID in the value list value table, copy the Attribute Internal Name value from the
extension definition and append _OBJECT_ID, as in the following example:
TIME_ZONE_ALT_OBJECT_ID
In the above example, the condition is as follows:
T2.TIME_ZONE_ALT_OBJECT_ID = T3.OBJECTID
5 On the Results Fields page of the query definition, add a new column for the value
list value. In this case, the Database Column Name is T3.DISPLAY_NAME_ID.
Note: The value for the Column Type field must be String Resource to allow the
correct localized string to be displayed for the column name.
6 Preview the query to verify that it returns the intended data.

Querying Against External Data Sources

Another important capability is authoring queries that retrieve data from databases
external to the Frictionless Sourcing database. This data can be in other Oracle
instances or in non-Oracle databases. If a non-Oracle database is to be accessed,
Oracle's Heterogeneous Services must be running so that Oracle can communicate with
it.

1264 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Note that this section applies to data outside of the Oracle instance which contains the
Frictionless schema. If data exists in custom tables in the same Oracle instance as the
core Frictionless Sourcing database, it is possible to refer to the custom data by simply
inserting the proper schema prefix before each custom table in the FROM clause of the
SELECT statement, and ensuring that the users have the necessary Oracle rights to
access the table.
The following example assumes that a table REVENUE_FACT exists in a separate Oracle
instance providing annual revenue numbers for each U.S. business unit, and that the
Frictionless Sourcing Business Unit objects have been created with EXTERNAL_ID
values matching the BUSINESSUNITNAME in the external table.
To select a list of business units, including the description from the Frictionless SRM
database and the annual sales figure from the external database, an Oracle link must
first be created by the DBA in the Frictionless SRM database. For example:
CREATE DATABASE LINK sales.us.americas USING 'sales_us'

Once the link exists, our query can be created as follows:

SELECT T1.DISPLAY_NAME, T1.DESCRIPTION, T2.ANNUAL_REVENUE
FROM <%SCHEMA%>.FCI_BUSINESS_UNIT T1, [email protected] T2
WHERE T1.EXTERNAL_ID = T2.BUSINESSUNITNAME ORDER BY 3 DESC, 1

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Testing a custom query definition
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: stored procedures and queries
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1265

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query definition: stored procedures and queries

The basic Query Object executes a single SELECT statement. It is possible, however, to
execute an SQL stored procedure instead. This greatly expands the selection,
manipulation, and presentation that can be done through queries. Many examples are
included in the queries shipped with the product. This section outlines the steps
required to create stored-procedure-based queries.
This section is not intended as an SQL Primer. It assumes that the reader has sufficient
knowledge of SQL to build the stored procedure. The focus of this section is the specific
requirements for the structure of that procedure, and the steps required to integrate it
with a Frictionless SRM query object.

The Stored Procedure

The stored procedure must return results. To return results, an Oracle stored procedure
needs to have two characteristics: it needs to have a results cursor, and it needs to be
delivered as a Package. The following example shows the Package declaration,
including the definition of the results cursor:

CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE FCI DESK UPCOMING QRY

AS
TYPE eventRptCur IS REF CURSOR ;
PROCEDURE FCI_BUILD_UPCOMINGLIST
(
curVarOut OUT FCI_DESK_UPCOMING_QRY .eventRptCur,
enterpriseId IN NUMBER,
contactId IN NUMBER,
vendorId IN NUMBER
);
END;

The package defines the results cursor type, as well as the parameters for the stored
procedure. Notice that the first parameter is actually the results cursor as an output
parameter. This is important when configuring the query to call the stored procedure,
and it must be true for all stored procedures designed to run as queries.
The following is an excerpt from the stored procedure where the actual results are
returned.

1266 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY FCI_DESK_UPCOMING_QRY

AS PROCEDURE FCI_BUILD_UPCOMINGLIST
(
curVarOut OUT FCI_DESK_UPCOMING_QRY.eventRptCur,
enterpriseId IN NUMBER,
contactId IN NUMBER,
vendorId IN NUMBER
)
AS
BEGIN

-- Delete stale records from work table for this

user.
DELETE FROM FCI_TMP_UPCOMING_QUERY WHERE USER_OBJECTID =
contactId;
COMMIT;
………

--
-- select and return the results
--
OPEN curVarOut FOR
SELECT
'View Invitation Details For '||UNIQUE_DOC_NAME,
DECODE(CLASSID, 900,
'/vendordesktop/report/reportdetail?queryGroupName=FCI-
InviteDetailR&EventObjId=',
'/vendordesktop/report/reportdetail?queryGroupName=FCI-
InviteDetailA&EventObjId=')||
TO_CHAR(OBJECTID)||'&link_crumb=true',
DISPLAY_NAME, EVENT_TYPE, PLANNED_DATE_DATE,
PLANNED_DATE_STRING, INVITE_STATUS
FROM FCI_TMP_UPCOMING_QUERY
WHERE
USER_OBJECT_ID = contactId
ORDER BY PLANNED_DATE_DATE ASC;
END;
END FCI_BUILD_UPCOMINGLIST;
END FCI_DESK_UPCOMING_QRY;

The excerpt shows the basic structure of the stored procedure body. Following a typical
pattern, the stored procedure uses a temporary table, in this case,
FCI_TMP_UPCOMING_QUERY. The procedure (although this logic is excluded above)
inserts rows into the temporary table. The procedure concludes by opening the results

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1267

Queries and Reports System Setup

cursor and issuing the select that provides the actual results set to the calling query
object, in this case selecting those rows from that temporary table.

The Query Object

There are two steps to defining a query that calls a stored procedure. The first is
checking the Stored Procedure checkbox on the main tab of the Query object, and
the second is providing the call in the Query String field. The following examples shows
the syntax for the call statement:

{CALL
<%SCHEMA%>.FCI_DESK_UPCOMING_QRY.FCI_BUILD_UPCOMINGLIST(?,<%CURRENT
_USER_ENTERPRISE%>,<%CURRENT_USER_ID%>,<%CURRENT_USER_VENDOR%>)}

Please note the following:

` The basic syntax is {CALL procedure name(parameters)}.
` Parameters markers are used with stored procedure queries the same way they are
for standard queries. Just as “?” is used in the Query String to mark a prompted
parameter in a standard query, the same technique is used for stored procedure
queries, with one addition: there is always one “?” in the first parameter position as
the marker for the output parameter that is the results cursor. In the above
example, this is the only parameter marker, as there are no prompted parameters.
` It is recommended that you always precede the package and procedure name with
the <%SCHEMA%> token. This will ensure the correct behavior regardless of the
database setup.
` It is possible to use tokens in the stored procedure call just as they are used in
standard query objects. The example uses tokens to pass the current user's
enterprise, the current user's user object ID, and the current user's vendor object
ID (since this is a sell-side query).

Returning Results
Results returned from stored procedure queries are handled in generally the same way
as results from standard queries, with some limitations. The structure and order of the
results is defined by the stored procedure itself.
The Result Field information in the Query Object for a Stored Procedure Query provides
information on how to display the results, but cannot affect the results. For example, it
is possible in a standard query object to include SQL functions in the Result Field
Database Column Name, such as UPPER(DISPLAY_NAME), to force the returned result
to be translated to upper case. This is not possible in a stored procedure query. That
processing would have to be included in the SELECT statement within the query. The

1268 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

result fields are matched by position with stored procedure queries, and the Database
Column name information is required, but not significant.
The Display Name which controls the column heading, along with the attributes that
define the type of result field, whether to display and whether to total are all still
significant for stored procedure queries, and behave exactly as they do for standard
queries.

Working With Temporary Tables

In many cases, it is helpful to use a temporary results table in a stored procedure
query. It is important to remember that multiple users may access the procedure at the
same time. The pattern followed for the stored procedure queries within Frictionless
SRM is to create the temporary table as part of the installation, and to include a column
in the table for a user object ID. The call statement to the query passes
<%CURRENT_USER_ID%> to the procedure as a parameter, and the procedure follows
the following steps:
1 Delete all rows from the temporary table where the user object ID matches the
passed value. This deletes old results.
2 Include the passed user object ID in all rows inserted to the temporary table.
3 Include the passed user object ID in the WHERE clause of the SELECT for the result
cursor. This ensures that only that user's results are returned.
It is recommended that this pattern be followed by all stored procedures which use
temporary tables. When creating the temporary table with a column for the user ID, the
creation of an index on that column should be considered. This could speed the select
statement that returns results to the caller.
The creation of the temporary table must be coordinated with the creation of the
package and the population of the query in the database. Database access privileges
must also be granted to the table and package for the SRM database user or role.

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Testing a custom query definition
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1269

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query definition: generating a query date parameter in SQL

Occasionally, a date value must be included in a URL to go to a page that will execute a
query with a date parameter. The date value can be selected by the SQL that composes
the URL, but the query must be informed of the format of the date (or date-time) string
value. The current user's date format cannot be assumed. Therefore, the URL date
parameter should be accompanied by another URL parameter that specifies the format
being used for the date.
The following example is a query column definition that composes a URL invoking a
report.
'/analysis/report?queryGroupName=FCI-ProjectsNoTemplates&TimePeriodBeginn
ing=' || TO_CHAR(TIME_PERIOD_START_DATE,'YYYY/MM/DD') ||
'&TimePeriodBeginning_format=7&link_crumb=true'

This example provides a value for a date parameter with the name of
TimePeriodBeginning. This parameter name must be the same as the name for the
parameter that is defined in one or more of the queries in the FCI-ProjectsNoTemplates
report. The value of TimePeriodBeginning is next in the URL. The date column
TIME_PERIOD_START_DATE is being converted to a string using the Oracle
“YYYY/MM/DD” format. This format corresponds to a format that SRM code
understands, which can be identified numerically by the code as format 7. The next URL
parameter specifies the format code of 7. This parameter name must be the same as
the date value parameter name, with a suffix of “_format”.
In the next example, the same report is using a date-time parameter rather than a
date.
'/analysis/report?queryGroupName=FCI-ProjectsNoTemplates&TimePeriodBeginn
ing=' || TO_CHAR(TIME_PERIOD_START_DATE,'YYYY/MM/DD') ||
'&TimePeriodBeginning_time=' || SUBSTR(TO_CHAR(CREATED_AT,'YYYY/MM/DD
HH24MI'),12) || '&TimePeriodBeginning_format=7&link_crumb=true'

The time part of the date parameter in the first example was assumed to be 00:00,
midnight. The second example provides the time value as a separate URL parameter,
but using the same database column that provides the date value. The separate
parameter name must be the same as the date parameter name with a suffix of
“_time”. The Oracle conversion format being used for this date-time value is
“YYYY/MM/DD HH24MI”. Again, this corresponds to format 7 in the SRM code.
Warning: A time value should not be sent to the report as described unless all users
are in the same time zone and the system time zone is the same as well. The time zone
of the date-time column value will be in the system time zone; it will not be converted
to the current user's time zone.
Date-time format 7 uses a 4-digit year, which avoids the century ambiguity, and a
24-hour clock, which avoids an a.m./p.m. parameter. Other formats understood by
SRM may be used, too. However, it is recommended that the same format be used in
all cases, for consistency.

1270 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Related Topics
Query Definitions
Creating a custom query definition
Editing a custom query definition
Testing a custom query definition
Query definition: URL parameters affecting query display
Query definition: token substitution
Query definition: common query patterns
Query definition: stored procedures and queries

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1271

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query Groups
Query groups are used to integrate queries into the list pages and picker windows of
the Frictionless® SRM application. After a query is defined, it must be integrated into
the application to make it available to users. These actions are performed using the
Query Group option in Setup.
A query group contains a list of queries. These queries are all made available to the
user through a drop-down list, with the one marked in the query group as a default
initially selected.
Frictionless SRM provides an extensive set of query groups by default. You can edit list
and picker query groups by adding queries to them, by hiding standard queries, and by
changing the default query.

This section describes how to create and edit a query group.

Related Topics
Editing a query group for a list or picker
Query Group page
Query Group Queries page
Field help for query group: Query Reference dialog box
Query groups: tailoring the report query results layout
Query groups: defining the default PDF page layout for a list or report

1272 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Editing a query group for a list or picker

Query groups are used to integrate queries into the Frictionless® SRM application. You
can integrate new list or picker queries by adding them to an existing query group or by
replacing members of an existing query group.

Note: To add or replace a list or picker query, find the query group whose Query page
contains the correct User View (Buy Side or Sell Side), the correct Query Use (List or
Picker), and the correct Class ID of the target object to be queried (for example, RFPs
are class ID 900). For a list of class IDs, see the Class Reference of the online Reference
Guide (RG).

Note: A Query Use value of Selection creates a picker query with stringent filters
tailored to specific documents. It is not recommended that you use this value or edit
query groups containing this value.

To edit a query group:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Queries and Reports section of System Setup, select Query Groups from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Query Group List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Query Groups by Name or Search Query
Groups by Queries Used, search for the group to edit, and click the group.
n From the drop-down list, select All Query Groups, All Inactive Query Groups, or
Query Group Review, and click the group to edit.
4 On the Query Group page, click the Save button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Queries tab.

7 Click the Edit icon for a query reference to edit the query reference.
8 In the dialog box, edit any fields and click OK.
Note: For list and picker queries, it is recommended that you check the Default
Query box for one query in the group. This query is executed when the list or picker
page is displayed. If no default query is selected, the first query in the list is
executed. Only one query in a group can be set as the default query.
Note: A standard query can be replaced by a custom query, but it cannot be
removed from a query group. To prevent it from being displayed, check the Remove
from Selection List box.
9 Optionally, add or delete queries.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1273

Queries and Reports System Setup

10 Optionally, click Reorder to reorder queries. For lists and pickers, the order
controls the order the queries will appear in the drop-down list of available queries.
11 Click the Access List tab.
12 On the Query Group Access List page, add or remove collaborators.
13 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: It is not necessary to click the Page Layout tab for list or picker query groups.
This tab is for reports only.

Related Topics
Query Group page
Query Group Queries page
Field help for query group: Query Reference dialog box
Query groups: tailoring the report query results layout
Query groups: defining the default PDF page layout for a list or report

1274 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Query Group page

You use the Query Group page to enter basic query group information.

Field help for Query Group page

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that this query group is inactive and unavailable
for use. An inactive report query group does not appear in a Lookup window of available
reports. A picker or list query group for a business object can be made inactive and
replaced with a custom query group for the same object, but this is not recommended.
It is preferable to customize a standard picker or list query group. It can then be
updated when moving to a future release.

Internal Name: Type a unique identifier for the query group. During the import of new
versions of queries into a database, this value is used to find and replace old query
group versions, and therefore should not be changed. Default queries begin with “FCI-”,
but custom query groups must not use this prefix.

User View: Select the perspective of the user who will see this query group, either
buy-side or sell-side.

Query Use: Queries can be grouped for different uses. Select the use of this query
group from the drop-down list.

Class ID: For list, picker, or selection query groups, type the integer class ID which
corresponds to the object being listed or picked. (A selection query group is essentially
a special-purpose picker.)

Display Name Resource: ClickClick the Lookup icon to select a display name for
the query group from the list of localized resources. If the query group name is not in
the list, click Create in the dialog box to create a new localized resource.

Description Resource: Click the Lookup icon to select a query description.

Category: A classification of the query group used for administrative purposes,

particularly for standard query groups. If you are creating a query group, select the
module for which the group will be used.

Related Topics
Editing a query group for a list or picker
Query Group Queries page
Field help for query group: Query Reference dialog box
Query groups: tailoring the report query results layout

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1275

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query groups: defining the default PDF page layout for a list or report

1276 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Query Group Queries page

The Queries page displays a list of contained queries. You use the Queries page to
delete, reorder, and add queries.
For detailed information, see Creating a report and Editing a query group for a list
or picker. Also see Field help for query group: Query Reference dialog box.

Related Topics
Editing a query group for a list or picker
Query Group page
Field help for query group: Query Reference dialog box
Query groups: tailoring the report query results layout
Query groups: defining the default PDF page layout for a list or report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1277

Queries and Reports System Setup

Field help for query group: Query Reference dialog box

You access the Query Reference dialog box by clicking the Edit icon for a query
reference on the Query Group Queries page. The following provides help for the
fields in the Query Reference dialog box.

Default Query: Check this box to designate the query as the default query. For list
and picker queries, it is recommended that one query in each query group be
designated as the default query to execute when the list or picker page is displayed. If
no default query is selected, the first query in the list will be executed. Only one query
in a group can be set as the default query.

Remove Query from Selection List: If a standard query is to be replaced by a

(presumably similar) custom query, the custom query is typically added to the same
query group as the one to be replaced. Standard queries may not be removed from a
query group, however. Check this box to prevent the standard query name from
appearing in a list or picker page's selection list.

Include in SRM Navigation: Check this box to add the query to the Frictionless® SRM
navigation bar.

Related Topics
Editing a query group for a list or picker
Query Group page
Query Group Queries page
Query groups: tailoring the report query results layout
Query groups: defining the default PDF page layout for a list or report

1278 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Query Group Access List page

You use the Access List page to add collaborator information to a query group access
list. For details, see Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document.

Note: By default, no collaborators are specified for the query group. In this case, all
users are granted default access rights. Once one or more collaborators are specified,
however, other users are denied access to the query group. When the query group is
used as a list page, this has the effect of hiding the list page from those other users.
When the query group is used as a picker, the picker is not hidden.

Related Topics
Editing a query group for a list or picker
Query Group page
Query Group Queries page
Field help for query group: Query Reference dialog box
Query groups: tailoring the report query results layout
Query groups: defining the default PDF page layout for a list or report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1279

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query Groups advanced options

This section describes advanced options for query groups.

Related Topics
Editing a query group for a list or picker
Query Group page
Query Group Queries page
Field help for query group: Query Reference dialog box
Query groups: tailoring the report query results layout
Query groups: defining the default PDF page layout for a list or report

1280 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Query groups: tailoring the report query results layout

The order, relative position, and format of query results can be changed from the usual
sequential layout in table format. An XML file is needed to describe the new layout. If a
file in the directory /content/report/layout exists in the classpath that has a filename of
the report internal name with the .xml suffix, its contents will be used to override the
table format.
An alternative to placing the XML file in the classpath is to load it as an attachment in a
file attachment container (accessed from the Setup page). The Purpose enumeration
in the file attachment container UI should be changed to “Report Layout”. The Path
Name should include the “/report/layout” directory (without “/content”), and the
filename in the path should be the same as described above. The XML file will be
cached with other XML documents if such caching is in effect for the system. This cache
would have to be cleared so that an updated XML file in the file attachment container
could be recognized.
For example, the vendor Scorecard Report has two queries, with the first query
generating just one row of data. Rather than using the usual table format, a layout XML
file changes the presentation of that data to a vertical list of name/value pairs. The
column headers are the names and the corresponding data values appear to the right
of the names.
The following is the XML in FCI-ScorecardReportBuySide.xml.

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<reportPanelLayout>
<row>
<column width="100" border="false">
<query internalName="FCI-ScoreChannelDetailHeader"
format="verticalNameValuePair"/>
<query internalName="FCI-ScorecardReportBuySide"
format="table"/>
</column>
</row>
</reportPanelLayout>

The first query, FCI-ScoreChannelDetailHeader, has a format attribute of

verticalNameValuePair. The second query has the usual format of table. The format
attribute must be provided. No default is assumed.
There is always one node named “reportPanelLayout” in this type of XML file. The
relative order and position of the query results are determined by the row and column
nodes. One row column is always on the outside, with nested column nodes. Column
nodes can have nested row nodes. This is recursive, but the available space in an
output page makes deep nesting impractical. The query results will not shrink to fit the

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1281

Queries and Reports System Setup

reduced space. Although HTML windows can be scrolled, it is best to display a page that
can also fit on a printed PDF page.
An example of a layout and order change based on the same report is shown below.

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>

<reportPanelLayout>
<row>
<column width="45" border="true">
<query internalName="FCI-ScorecardReportBuySide"
format="table"/>
</column>
<column width="55" border="true">
<query internalName="FCI-ScoreChannelDetailHeader"
format="verticalNameValuePair"/>
</column>
</row>
</reportPanelLayout>

In this case, the report has two columns. The first column has the table-formatted
query results, with some columns removed to keep it from being too wide. The second
column has the query with the name/value pair format. Nothing has been changed in
the report definition; only the XML report layout has changed.
Note that the column node's width attribute assigns the specified percentage of the
browser window to the query results. The width values of all the column nodes in one
row should add up to 100. If there were multiple rows, each row's set of columns would
add up to 100, independent of the other rows.
Note also that the border attribute has been set to true for each of the query results.
This XML technique of specifying query result order and relative position has no effect
on PDF output. The original query order in the report is followed, with each query's
results appearing below the previous one. The name/value pair formatting, though, is
preserved in the PDF output.

Related Topics
Reports
Creating a report
Report Elements page
Reports Page Layout page
Reports Access List page
Editing a query group for a list or picker

1282 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Query Group page

Query Group Queries page
Field help for query group: Query Reference dialog box
Query groups: defining the default PDF page layout for a list or report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1283

Queries and Reports System Setup

Query groups: defining the default PDF page layout for a list or
report
When a report or list page is exported to PDF format, information is added to page
header and footer fields. Each header and footer has three sections: left, center, and
right. There are hard-coded defaults for the source of the data that is put in these fields
on each page, but the defaults can be overridden.
One set of system properties can override the defaults for all reports. Another set of
properties can override the list page defaults. As indicated in Creating a report, a
report's page layout can be tailored for a single report by editing that report's Page
Layout tab, overriding both the hard-coded defaults and the report pages' system
properties.
Any of the following system properties can be defined. The current hard-coded defaults
are shown, so there is no need to define these. Only define those properties whose
hard-coded defaults you want to change.
The defaults for logo_url and conf_url require some explanation. The value of each of
these properties is a classpath-relative pathname to an image file. In the case of the
logo URL, there is no hard-coded default, but the company logo that is associated with
the user running the report is used. In the case of the confidentiality statement logo,
there is no default, but nothing is displayed for this item unless an override is provided.
Like logo_url, a value for conf_url is a path name to an image file, such as
/images/confStmt.gif.

report_page.logo_url=
report_page.conf_url=
report_page.orientation=LANDSCAPE
report_page.header_left=LOGO_URL
report_page.header_center=REPORT_DISPLAY_NAME
report_page.header_right=
report_page.footer_left=CONFIDENTIALITY_STMT_URL
report_page.footer_center=CURRENT_USER_AND_DATE_TIME
report_page.footer_right=PAGE_NUMBER

list_page.logo_url=
list_page.conf_url=
list_page.orientation=LANDSCAPE
list_page.header_left=LOGO_URL
list_page.header_center=
list_page.header_right=QUERY_DISPLAY_NAME

1284 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

list_page.footer_left=CONFIDENTIALITY_STMT_URL
list_page.footer_center=CURRENT_USER_AND_DATE_TIME
list_page.footer_right=PAGE_NUMBER

The orientation enum has possible values of PORTRAIT or LANDSCAPE (the default
value).

The full set of possible values for the header/footer fields is as follows:

LOGO_URL
CONFIDENTIALITY_STMT_URL
REPORT_DISPLAY_NAME
QUERY_DISPLAY_NAME
REPORT_DESCRIPTION
QUERY_DESCRIPTION
CURRENT_DATE
CURRENT_DATE_TIME
PAGE_NUMBER
CURRENT_USER
CURRENT_USER_AND_DATE_TIME

Related Topics
Editing a query group for a list or picker
Query Group page
Query Group Queries page
Field help for query group: Query Reference dialog box
Query groups: tailoring the report query results layout

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1285

Queries and Reports System Setup

Cube Profiles
Cube profiles contain metadata used to generate the data cubes used in SRM
Explorer.
Data cubes provide enhanced, interactive ad-hoc reporting and data analysis with
seamless multi-dimensional drill-down capability. Default data cubes are provided in
Frictionless SRM, and others can be created by your system administrator.
A cube profile defines how data in the data cube is organized and presented. The profile
is closely associated with a query definition defining the source of the raw data that will
be selected from the database as input to the building of the data cube. The columns in
the query definition are used to set the initial collection of dimensions and measures.
Collectively, the dimension and measures are the axes of the cube. The axes can then
be edited.
You can export cube data only through the SRM Explorer applet, using the Save As
menu option, rather than through the standard SRM export feature. Data cubes cannot
be bookmarked.
Default data cubes are currently used only for spend data. Custom cubes may be
created for other types of data.

Related Topics
Creating a cube profile
Refreshing dimensions and measures in a cube profile
Cube Profile page
Cube Profile Dimensions page
Cube Profile Measures page
Cube Profile Access List page

1286 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Creating a cube profile

Cube profiles contain data used to generate the data cubes used in SRM Explorer.

To create a cube profile:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Queries and Reports section of System Setup, select Cube Profiles from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Cube Profile List page, click Create.
4 On the Cube Profile page, fill in the fields with basic profile setup information. For
details, see Cube Profile page.
5 Click the Dimensions tab to edit or delete dimensions. For details, see Cube Profile
Dimensions page
6 Click the Measures tab to edit or delete measures. For details, see Cube Profile
Measures page.
7 Click the Access List tab to add collaborators.
8 Click Add Groups, Add Users, or Add Company to add a collaborator. For details,
see Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To edit a cube profile, click the profile name on the Cube Profile List page and
then click the Edit button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Refreshing dimensions and measures in a cube profile
Cube Profile page
Cube Profile Dimensions page
Cube Profile Measures page
Cube Profile Access List page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1287

Queries and Reports System Setup

Refreshing dimensions and measures in a cube profile

You can refresh the dimensions and measures in a cube profile to bring its data up to
date.
If the query definition that is associated with the cube profile has been edited since the
profile was defined, the profile should be updated to reflect those changes. The
selection of raw data as input for the cube must be compatible with the dimensions and
measures.

To refresh dimensions and measures:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Queries and Reports section of System Setup, select Cube Profiles from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Cube Profile List page, click a cube profile to open it.
4 Click the Actions button in the toolbar and select Refresh Dimensions and
Measures.

Related Topics
Creating a cube profile
Cube Profile page
Cube Profile Dimensions page
Cube Profile Measures page
Cube Profile Access List page

1288 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Cube Profile page

You use the Cube Profile page to input setup information for generation of data cubes.

Field help for Cube Profiles page

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that this cube profile is inactive and unavailable
for use.

Internal Name: Type a unique identifier for the cube profile. During the import of new
versions of cube profiles into a database, this value is used to find and replace old
versions, and therefore should not be changed. Default objects begin with “FCI-”, but
custom cube profiles must not use this prefix.

Display Name Resource: Click the Lookup icon to select a display name for the
cube profile from the list of localized resources. If the cube profile name is not in the
list, click Create in the dialog box to create a new localized resource.

Description Resource: Click the Lookup icon to select a description for the cube
profile.

Data Source: Click the Lookup icon to select the query definition to use as a data
source for data cubes created from this cube profile. This query definition determines
the initial set of dimensions and measures used in the cube profile.

Category: A classification of the cube profile used for administrative purposes,

particularly for standard cube profiles. If you are creating a cube profile, select the
module associated with the data that will be retrieved.
Hide Column Totals: Check to hide the column totals in the data cube. Leaving it
unchecked will create an additional column displaying the column totals.
Hide Row Totals: Check to hide the row totals in the data cube. Leaving it unchecked
will create an additional column displaying the row totals.
Cube Display Property List: The display of the cube data in the browser can be
tailored by field values in the cube profile document such as Hide Row Totals.
Properties in the form of a list of name=value pairs, each separated by a semi-colon,
can also be specified to tailor the display. For a list of properties to affect all cube
profiles in an enterprise, the list should be defined as the value of the system property
with a set name of analysis and a property name of
analysis.databeacon.applet.params. For a list of properties to affect only one cube
profile, the list should be defined in this field, Cube Display Property List. Properties
defined in this field override those of the same name in the system property.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1289

Queries and Reports System Setup

Properties which may be set are:

Name Value Example Comment

horizontalcolor (158,158,205) Sets the color for the column headers, using the
red, green and blue (RGB) values in the range
0-255.
verticalcolor (158,207,178) Sets the color for the row headers.
celltotalcolor (204,205,255) Sets the color for the cells that contain totals.
decimalsforpercentages 1 Sets the scale (number of decimal points) for
calculated percentage values.
defaultexperiencelevel 3 Determines which controls are available in the UI.
1 = Novice; 2 = Standard; and 3 = Advanced.

This is an example of a property list:

horizontalcolor=(158,158,205);verticalcolor=(158,207,178)

Related Topics
Creating a cube profile
Refreshing dimensions and measures in a cube profile
Cube Profile Dimensions page
Cube Profile Measures page
Cube Profile Access List page

1290 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Cube Profile Dimensions page

You use the Dimensions page to edit and reorder dimensions in a data cube.
Dimensions represent all the categories that appear in a data cube. You can indicate
whether a dimension appears as a horizontal or vertical axis.
Measures are determined by the query definition selected in the Data Source field on
the Cube Profile page.

Field help for Cube Profile Dimensions page

Query Column Missing: Indicates that the query column is missing for this
dimension. This can be seen after refreshing the dimensions from the query definition
data source. If the query definition has been edited by removing the column that
corresponded to this dimension, this dimension must either be removed as well, or
edited to be an expression that uses other column definitions.

Click the Edit icon for a dimension to edit its properties in the Cube Profile
Dimension dialog box.

Field help for Cube Profile Dimension dialog box

Axis Name: Click the Lookup icon to select a new axis name for the dimension.

Alias: Indicates the axis name alias, if any.

Query Column Document ID: Indicates the document ID for the query column.

Override Axis Definition: Check to override the default axis definition. Checking this
box will display the Axis Definition text box.

Axis Definition: Enter an axis definition other than the default one. This value can be
a more complex expression than the default. This text box only appears when
Override Axis Definition is checked.

Display on Horizontal Axis: Check to display this dimension on the horizontal axis of
the data cube.

Display on Vertical Axis: Check to display this dimension on the vertical axis of the
data cube.

Level Count: Enter a level count for the dimension. A level count is required when the
associated query result string field does not have a dimension ID.

Related Topics

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1291

Queries and Reports System Setup

Creating a cube profile

Refreshing dimensions and measures in a cube profile
Cube Profile page
Cube Profile Measures page
Cube Profile Access List page

1292 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Cube Profile Measures page

You use the Measures page to add measures to a data cube. Measures are the numeric
data used in the data cube.
Measures are determined by the query definition selected in the Data Source field on
the Cube Profile page.

Field help for Cube Profile Measures page

Query Column Missing: Indicates that the query column is missing for this measure.
This can be seen after refreshing the measures from the query definition data source. If
the query definition has been edited by removing the column that corresponded to this
measure, this measure must either be removed as well, or edited to be an expression
that uses other column definitions.

Click the Edit icon for a measure to edit its properties in the Cube Profile
Dimension dialog box.

Field help for Cube Profile Measure dialog box

Axis Name: Click the Lookup icon to select a new axis name for the measure.

Alias: Indicates the axis name alias, if any.

Query Column Document ID: Indicates the document ID for the query column.

Override Axis Definition: Check to override the default axis definition. Checking this
box will display the Axis Definition text box.

Axis Definition: Enter an axis definition other than the default one. This value can be
a more complex expression than the default. This text box only appears when
Override Axis Definition is checked. This text box only appears when Override Axis
Definition is checked.

Hidden: Check to hide this measure in the data cube.

Display Scale: Enter the number of digits that will be displayed for this measure.

Storage Scale: Enter the number of digits to use when calculating this measure in
generating the data cube.

Related Topics
Creating a cube profile

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1293

Queries and Reports System Setup

Refreshing dimensions and measures in a cube profile

Cube Profile page
Cube Profile Dimensions page
Cube Profile Access List page

1294 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Cube Profile Access List page

You use the Access List page to add collaborators to a cube profile.

For details on adding collaborators, see Adding a collaborator to a sourcing

document.

Note: By default, no collaborators are specified for the cube profile. In this case, all
users are granted default access rights. After one or more collaborators are specified,
however, other users are denied access to the report.

Related Topics
Creating a cube profile
Refreshing dimensions and measures in a cube profile
Cube Profile page
Cube Profile Dimensions page
Cube Profile Measures page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1295

Queries and Reports System Setup

Reports
After a query or a cube profile is defined, it must be integrated into the application to
make it available to users. Reports are one way of integrating these objects into the
Frictionless® SRM application. (See Query Groups for other ways to integrate
queries.) A query or cube profile can be added to the collection of report elements of a
report. This action is performed using the Report option in Setup. Each query in the
collection is executed sequentially. Each cube profile in the collection is used to
construct an SRM Explorer cube.
Frictionless SRM provides an extensive set of reports by default. The collection of
queries and cube profiles in a standard report cannot be changed, but a custom report
can be created which can include both standard and custom report elements.

Related Topics
Creating a report
Report page
Report Elements page
Reports Page Layout page
Reports Access List page
Reports: exporting query results to Excel using a workbook template

1296 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Creating a report
Reports are used to integrate queries and cube profiles into the Frictionless SRM
application. You can integrate new queries and cube profiles by defining a new report
and adding them to the report.

To create a report:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Queries and Reports section of System Setup, select Reports from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Reports List page, click Create.
4 On the Report page, fill in the fields with basic report information.
5 In the User View field, select Buy-side from the drop-down list.
6 Click the Report Elements tab to add query definitions and cube profiles.
7 Click Add Query Definition to add a query.
8 In the dialog box, check the box for one or more queries to add and click OK.
9 Click Add Cube Profile to add a cube profile to the report. There is usually only
one cube profile in a report, without any queries, but there is no restriction to the
number of queries and/or cube profiles which can be added.
10 In the dialog box, check the box for one or more cube profiles to add and click OK.
11 Optionally, click Reorder to reorder report elements. The order of the report
elements controls the sequence of their execution and the default order of the
display of the results.
12 Optionally, click the Page Layout tab to change the default layout of the report
when it is viewed as a PDF file.
13 Click Add. You see the Query Page Layout dialog box displaying the default page
layout settings.
14 For each section you want to change, click the Override checkbox and enter or
select the new value. For detailed information, see Query groups: defining the
default PDF page layout for a list or report.
15 Click OK.
16 Click the Access List tab.
17 Click Add Groups, Add Users, or Add Company to add a collaborator. For details,
see Adding a collaborator to a sourcing document.
18 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To fully implement a report, you must edit one or more objects that control where
the report is executed in the system and where its results are displayed. For details, see
Queries and Reports.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1297

Queries and Reports System Setup

Related Topics
Report page
Report Elements page
Reports Page Layout page
Reports Access List page
Reports: exporting query results to Excel using a workbook template

1298 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Report page
The Reports component provides customizable access to reports, such as Cumulative
Spend by Commodity, in the Analysis module.

Field help for Report page

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that this report is inactive and unavailable for use.
An inactive report query group does not appear in a Lookup window of available
reports.

Internal Name: Type a unique identifier for the report. During the import of new
versions of reports into a database, this value is used to find and replace old versions,
and therefore should not be changed. Default objects begin with “FCI-”, but custom
reports must not use this prefix.

Display Name Resource: Click the Lookup icon to select a display name for the
report from the list of localized resources. If the report name is not in the list, click
Create in the dialog box to create a new localized resource.

Description Resource: Click the Lookup icon to select a description for the
report.

Category: A classification of the report used for administrative purposes, particularly

for standard query reports. If you are creating a report, select the module associated
with the data that will be retrieved.

Workbook Template: Select a workbook template to be used as the basis of an Excel

file when the results from all the queries in the report are exported to Excel from a
report results page. This workbook template would not be used when exporting only
the results of a single query from the report results page. There are separate Export to
Excel buttons on the report page for the two different export functions.

Related Topics
Creating a report
Report Elements page
Reports Page Layout page
Reports Access List page
Reports: exporting query results to Excel using a workbook template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1299

Queries and Reports System Setup

Report Elements page

You use the Report Elements page to add query definitions and cube profiles to a report
and to reorder the display of the report results.

Related Topics
Creating a report
Report page
Reports Page Layout page
Reports Access List page
Reports: exporting query results to Excel using a workbook template

1300 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Reports Page Layout page

You use the Page Layout page to modify the default layout of a report page when it is
viewed as a PDF. This is an optional step.
For detailed information, see Creating a report and Query groups: defining the
default PDF page layout for a list or report.

Related Topics
Creating a report
Report page
Report Elements page
Reports Access List page
Reports: exporting query results to Excel using a workbook template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1301

Queries and Reports System Setup

Reports Access List page

You use the Access List page to add information to a report access list.

Note: By default, no collaborators are specified for the report. In this case, all users are
granted default access rights. After one or more collaborators are specified, however,
other users are denied access to the report. This has the effect of hiding the report on
the Analysis page from those other users.

Related Topics
Creating a report
Report page
Report Elements page
Reports Page Layout page
Reports: exporting query results to Excel using a workbook template

1302 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Reports advanced options

This section describes advanced options for reports.

Related Topics
Creating a report
Report page
Report Elements page
Reports Page Layout page
Reports Access List page
Reports: exporting query results to Excel using a workbook template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1303

Queries and Reports System Setup

Reports: exporting query results to Excel using a workbook

template
One of the purposes of the file attachment container object is to enable the import of
Excel workbook files to be used as a pool of templates for exporting query results from
report and list pages to Excel. A workbook template may contain macros and embedded
objects. It may also have various format options pre-set.

A suitable workbook template can be selected during report definition or query

definition. This selection can be made for custom query definitions and for both custom
and standard reports. The same workbook template may be selected for multiple query
definitions and for multiple reports. For a report, this template would be used when
exporting the results of all the queries in the report to Excel. For a query definition, this
would be used when exporting the results of the single query in a list page or from a
single query in a report.

If no workbook template has been selected for a report or for the query in a list page
that is being exported, the value of an optional, enterprise-scoped system property will
be used to provide the path name to the workbook template. The name of the property
is export.workbook_template.path.default in the userinterface section. This
serves as a default for all exported query results in the enterprise. The path name in
the property is expected to be the same as the path name of a file attachment
container. If neither a workbook template object reference nor a property value has
been provided, the export to Excel is done without a template.

A report can have multiple queries. When a report is exported to Excel, each query
result set is written to a separate sheet in the workbook. If a workbook template has
been specified, the sheets in the template are used sequentially for each query result
set. If there are more query result sets than sheets in the template, a new sheet is
created for each additional result set.

Related Topics
Creating a report
Report page
Report Elements page
Reports Page Layout page
Reports Access List page
Exporting a report as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file
Exporting a list of sourcing documents as an Excel (XLS) or CSV file

1304 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Analysis Reports Setup

A report is the presentation of the results of one or more queries. You can determine
the order and relative position of the results of each query in a report.
Based on their type, reports can be viewed or launched from various locations in the
Frictionless® SRM application, including:
` In Workbench channels
` In the Analysis module
` From the sourcing document toolbar
` Via an alert or email

Reports can also be executed on a scheduled date and time or at regular intervals.

This section describes how to modify the analysis reports setup.

Related Topics
Editing the analysis reports setup

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1305

Queries and Reports System Setup

Editing the analysis reports setup

A report is the presentation of the results of one or more queries. You can determine
the order and relative position of the results of each query in a report.

To modify the analysis reports setup:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Queries and Reports section of System Setup, select Analysis Reports Setup
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Category List page, click the Analysis link.
4 On the Report Category page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Under Subcategories, click Add to add a subcategory.
6 In the dialog box for New Subcategory in Category, fill in the fields.
7 Click Add under Subcategories to add a nested subcategory.
8 In the dialog box, fill in the fields and click OK.
9 On the Report Category page under Items, select the type of item to add and click
Add.
10 In the dialog box, fill in the fields and click OK.

11 Click the Edit icon to edit a category.

12 In the dialog box for Subcategory in Category, edit, add or remove subcategories
and items and click OK.
13 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Analysis Reports Setup

1306 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Queries and Reports

Browse Full Schema

Browse Full Schema presents a list of all the user (non-system) tables in the database
schema. Selecting one of the tables displays a list of the columns in that table.
This information can be helpful when defining custom queries.

Related Topics
Browse Extension Schema

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1307

Queries and Reports System Setup

Browse Extension Schema

Browse Extension Schema shows a list of all the Extension Definitions for which a
database table has been created. Selecting one of the database table names displays a
list of the columns in that table.
This information can be helpful when defining custom queries.

Related Topics
Browse Full Schema

1308 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Master Data
Master data is a set of high-level data types, such as currencies, internal product codes,
and units of measure. You can add to and edit these data types in System Setup.
Some master data is populated during installation of Frictionless® SRM. Other data is
added as users create sourcing documents. You can also import data from external
files.

This section describes options for creating and editing master data types in System
Setup.

Related Topics
Internal Categories
Materials
Metrics
Numbering Table Definitions
Payment Term
Reporting Calendars
Time Periods
Units of Measure
Value List Types and Values
Custom Master Data
Currencies
Currency Conversions
External Categories

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1309

Master Data System Setup

Internal Categories
Internal categories represent your classification hierarchy for expenditures. They may
be specific to your organization or follow a standard such as SIC, NAICS, or UN/SPSC.
Internal categories are used in association with documents such as RFXs, auctions, and
master agreements and with other enterprise data. Typically, the set of internal
categories for your enterprise is imported from the ERP system of record. You can also
create and edit internal categories manually.
Internal categories are custom required data.

This section describes how to create and edit an internal category.

Related Topics
Creating an internal category
Editing an internal category

1310 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Creating an internal category

Internal categories represent your classification hierarchy for expenditures. They may
be specific to your organization or follow a standard such as SIC, NAICS, or UN/SPSC.
Internal categories are used in association with documents such as RFXs, auctions, and
master agreements and with other enterprise data. Typically, the set of internal
categories for your enterprise is imported from the ERP system of record. You can also
create and edit internal categories manually.
Internal categories are custom required data.

To create an internal category:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Internal Categories from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Internal Category List page, click Create.
4 On the Internal Category page, fill in the fields with information about the internal
category.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Internal Categories
Editing an internal category

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1311

Master Data System Setup

Editing an internal category

Internal categories represent your classification hierarchy for expenditures. They may
be specific to your organization or follow a standard such as SIC, NAICS, or UN/SPSC.
Internal categories are used in association with documents such as RFXs, auctions, and
master agreements and with other enterprise data. Typically, the set of internal
categories for your enterprise is imported from the ERP system of record. You can also
create and edit internal categories manually.
Internal categories are custom required data.

To edit an internal category:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Internal Categories from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Internal Category List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Internal Category by Name or Search
Internal Category by Code, search for the category to edit, and click the
category.
n From the drop-down list, select All Internal Categories or All Inactive Internal
Categories and click the category to edit.
4 On the Internal Category page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Internal Categories
Editing an internal category

1312 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Materials
A material represents a standard item that is used and purchased repeatedly. It is used
as a line item in RFxs and auctions and can be added to a bill of materials (BOM). Each
material is associated with a plant.
Materials are custom optional data.

This section describes how to create and edit a material.

Related Topics
Creating a material
Editing a material

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1313

Master Data System Setup

Creating a material
A material represents a standard item that is used and purchased repeatedly. It is used
as a line item in RFxs and auctions. Each material is associated with a plant.
Materials are custom optional data.

To create a material:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Materials from the drop-down
list and click OK.
3 On the Materials List page, click Create.
4 On the Material page, fill in the fields with basic information about the material.
5 Click the Manufacturer Parts tab to add one or more manufacturer parts to the
material. You use this page to specify a list of manufacturers who can supply the
material as well as each manufacturer’s part number for the material.
6 Click Add.
7 Fill in the fields in the dialog box for New Manufacturer Part Numbers in New
Material.
8 Click OK.
9 Repeat steps 6 through 8 to add additional manufacturer parts.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Materials
Editing a material

1314 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Editing a material
A material represents a standard item that is used and purchased repeatedly. It is used
as a line item in RFxs and auctions. Each material is associated with a plant.
Materials are custom optional data.

To edit a material:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Materials from the drop-down
list and click OK.
3 On the Materials List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Materials by Name, search for the
material to edit, and click the material.
n From the drop-down list, select All Materials or All Inactive Materials and click
the material to edit.
4 On the Material page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields for basic information.
6 Click the Manufacturer Parts tab to edit one or more manufacturer parts. You use
this page to specify a list of manufacturers who can supply the material as well as
each manufacturer’s part number for the material.

7 Click the Edit icon for the manufacturer part to edit.

8 Edit any fields in the dialog box for Manufacturer Part Numbers in Material.
9 Click OK.
10 Repeat steps 7 through 9 to edit additional manufacturer parts.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Materials
Editing a material

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1315

Master Data System Setup

Metrics
Metrics are criteria used to measure supplier performance on supplier scorecards.
Metrics provide a library of standard factors that can be used to evaluate and compare
multiple suppliers. For example, these factors might include timely delivery, quality
attributes, or price performance.
After you define standard metrics, you can add them to a supplier scorecard definition.
To calculate supplier scores using standard metrics, you can use the Metric Entry
option to enter raw data and automatically assign a scorecard definition to a supplier.
You can also enter scores for metrics directly in a supplier scorecard.
Metrics are custom optional data.

This section describes how to create and edit a standard metric.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the Metric Master List page by
clicking Vendor Management in the navigation bar and then choosing Metric Entry
from the Performance submenu.

Related Topics
Creating a metric
Editing a metric
Creating a vendor scorecard definition
Creating a metric entry

1316 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Creating a metric
Metrics are criteria used to measure supplier performance on supplier scorecards.
Metrics provide a library of standard factors that can be used to evaluate and compare
multiple suppliers. For example, these factors might include timely delivery, quality
attributes, or price performance.
After you define standard metrics, you can add them to a supplier scorecard definition.
To calculate supplier scores using standard metrics, you can use the Metric Entry
option to enter raw data and automatically assign a scorecard definition to a supplier.
You can also enter scores for metrics directly in a supplier scorecard.
Metrics are custom optional data.

To create a standard metric:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Metrics from the drop-down list
and click OK.
Note: You can also access the Metric Master List page by clicking Vendor
Management in the navigation bar and then choosing Metric Entry from the
Performance submenu.
3 On the Metric Master List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, fill in the fields with information about the metric.
5 Click the Conversion Rules tab to add one or more conversion rules to the metric.
6 Click Add. You see a new empty row in the Metric Conversion Rules table.
7 Fill in the fields in the empty row.
8 Click OK.
9 Repeat steps 6 through 8 to add additional conversion rules.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Metrics
Editing a metric
Creating a vendor scorecard definition
Creating a metric entry

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1317

Master Data System Setup

Editing a metric
Metrics are criteria used to measure supplier performance on supplier scorecards.
Metrics provide a library of standard factors that can be used to evaluate and compare
multiple suppliers. For example, these factors might include timely delivery, quality
attributes, or price performance.
After you define standard metrics, you can add them to a supplier scorecard definition.
To calculate supplier scores using standard metrics, you can use the Metric Entry
option to enter raw data and automatically assign a scorecard definition to a supplier.
You can also enter scores for metrics directly in a supplier scorecard.
Metrics are custom optional data.

To edit a standard metric:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Metrics from the drop-down list
and click OK.
Note: You can also access the Metric Master List page by clicking Vendor
Management in the navigation bar and then choosing Metric Entry from the
Performance submenu.
3 On the Metric Master List page, select All Metrics or All Inactive Metrics and click the
metric to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Conversion Rules tab to edit one or more conversion rules.

7 Click the Edit icon for the conversion rule to edit.

8 Edit any fields in the dialog box for Conversion Rule in Metric Master.
9 Click OK.
10 Repeat steps 7 through 9 to edit additional conversion rules.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Metrics
Editing a metric
Creating a vendor scorecard definition
Creating a metric entry

1318 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Numbering Table Definitions

Define
Define Define Define Define
Numbering
Cluster Context Extensions Accounts
Tables

System Setup Data Enterprise Master Data

Installed as System Administrator Installed as Enterprise Administrator

Frictionless® SRM provides the ability to automatically generate formatted numbers for
objects and documents created within the system. Numbering tables are the objects
created by the implementer to define the rules and formats for these generated
numbers. For example, a company might wish to sequentially number all RFIs created
in the year 2002 with the format RFI-2002-0001, RFI-2002-0002, and so on.
Numbering tables provide the capability to automatically generate numbers with this
format. Since numbering can be applied to other system objects, the numbering table
definition must be addressed early in the implementation process.
Numbering table definitions are accessed under Master Data in Setup. A default
numbering table is provided for each type of sourcing document. You can edit the
default numbering tables and create new ones.
When generating a number for a new object, the system locates the numbering table
defined for the document type. If no numbering table is defined, the default numbering
table for the class is used.
The generated number contains a prefix, the generated sequential number, and a
suffix. The number can have a fixed width, with or without padding. Numbers are
generated from an assigned starting point, and using a configured increment. In
addition to string literals, the prefix and suffix of the numbering table definition can also
contain tokens.

This section describes how to create and edit a numbering table.

Related Topics
Creating a numbering table definition
Editing a numbering table definition
Field help for Numbering Table page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1319

Master Data System Setup

Creating a numbering table definition

Frictionless® SRM provides the ability to automatically generate formatted numbers for
objects and documents created within the system. Numbering tables are the objects
created by the implementer to define the rules and formats for these generated
numbers. For example, a company might wish to sequentially number all RFIs created
in the year 2002 with the format RFI-2002-0001, RFI-2002-0002, and so on.
Numbering tables provide the capability to automatically generate numbers with this
format. Since numbering can be applied to other system objects, the numbering table
definition must be addressed early in the implementation process.

Numbering Tables and Document Types

A default numbering table is defined for each class of sourcing document. Many
sourcing documents support additional Type definitions. For example, RFx Types allow
an implementation to differentiate between RFIs, RFPs, and any other named type of
RFx, each with its own business rules and options. One of those options is defining
separate numbering schemes for RFIs and RFPs.
To maintain separate numbering for document types, a new numbering definition must
be created for each type. The new numbering table definition defines a non-default
numbering table for the same class of object. You must then reference the numbering
table in the appropriate document type definition (for this example, RFx Types) under
Document Setup.

Note: A numbering table can only be assigned to a document type when the type is
being created. It cannot be added later.

To create a numbering table definition:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Numbering Table Definition from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Numbering Table List page, click Create.
4 On the Numbering Table page, fill in the fields with information about the
numbering table. For details, see Field help for Numbering Table page.
For a non-default numbering table, such as a numbering table for a specific
document type, do the following:
n Uncheck the Use as Class Default box.
n Fill in the Tabled ID field that appears with a unique ID for this table.
n After saving this numbering table, go to the appropriate document type

definition (such as a definition found in RFx Types), click the Lookup icon
for the Numbering Table field, and select this numbering table to reference it.

1320 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Numbering Table Definitions
Editing a numbering table definition
Field help for Numbering Table page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1321

Master Data System Setup

Editing a numbering table definition

Frictionless® SRM provides the ability to automatically generate formatted numbers for
objects and documents created within the system. Numbering tables are the objects
created by the implementer to define the rules and formats for these generated
numbers. For example, a company might wish to sequentially number all RFIs created
in the year 2002 with the format RFI-2002-0001, RFI-2002-0002, and so on.
Numbering tables provide the capability to automatically generate numbers with this
format. Since numbering can be applied to other system objects, the numbering table
definition must be addressed early in the implementation process.

Note: You can also use numbering tables to define a separate numbering scheme for
each document type, such as RFIs and RFPs, for example. For details, see Creating a
numbering table definition.

To edit a numbering table definition:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Numbering Table Definition from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Numbering Table List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Numbering Tables by Name, search for
the numbering table to edit, and click the table.
n From the drop-down list, select All Numbering Tables and click the table to edit.
4 On the Numbering Table page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields. For details, see Field help for Numbering Table page.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Numbering Table Definitions
Editing a numbering table definition
Field help for Numbering Table page

1322 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Field help for Numbering Table page

The following provides help for the fields on the Numbering Table page.

Name: Type a name for the numbering table.

Class Name: Select a class for the numbering table from the drop-down list.

Use as Class Default: When generating a number for a new object, the system
locates the numbering table defined for the document type. If no numbering table is
defined, the default numbering table for the class is used.
Leave this box checked to use this numbering table as the default for the selected class.
Remove the checkmark to create a non-default numbering table.

Table ID: This field appears if you remove the checkmark from the Use as Class
Default checkbox. Type a unique ID for this non-default numbering table.

Prefix: Object numbers contain a prefix, the generated sequential number, and a
suffix. Type a prefix into this field or enter a token from the table below.

Postfix (or Suffix): Object numbers contain a prefix, the generated sequential
number, and a suffix. Type a suffix into this field or enter a token from the table below.

Sequence Number Width: Type a maximum width for the generated sequential
number in the object ID. The default value is 10.

Note: Changing this value will restart the sequence. For example, changing the width
from 5 to 6 will reset the sequence to 1. You must ensure that the width will be sufficient
for the interval over which the sequence is used. For example, if you set the width to 5,
you should be sure that the number of objects generated will be fewer than 100,000.

Sequence Number Padded: Check this box to fix the width of the generated
sequential number, so that it always matches the value in the Sequence Number
Width field. For example, you might create a numbering table with a company name
prefix and a year suffix; if the Sequence Number Width is 5 and padding is enabled,
there will always be five digits in the sequential number, as follows:
PROP-BIOGENX-00001-2004
PROP-BIOGENX-00002-2004
PROP-BIOGENX-00003-2004
PROP-BIOGENX-00004-2004
PROP-BIOGENX-00005-2004 ...
PROP-BIOGENX-08261-2004 ...

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1323

Master Data System Setup

Start Number: Object numbers are generated from an assigned starting point. Type
the start number into this field. The default value is 1.

Number Incremented By: Object numbers are generated using a configured

increment. Type the increment into this field The default value is 1.

Number Definition Token Substitution

In addition to string literals, the prefix and suffix of the numbering table definition can
contain tokens, as indicated in the table below:

Token Definition Example

<%MON%> lowercase current month March = mar

<%MONTH%> uppercase current Month March = MAR
<%M%> unjustified current numeric month March = 3
<%MM%> justified current numeric month March = 03
<%D%> unjustified current day 8
<%DD%> justified current day 08
<%YYYY%> four-digit current year 2002 = 2002
<%YY%> two-digit current year 2002 = 02
<%ABBREV_NAME%> current company abbreviated name ACME
<%DEPLOYMENT%> Current value of STG
doc.numbering_table.token.deployment

The Abbreviated Name is a property on the company object and allows documents to
be identified based on their owning company, and for each company's documents to be
separately numbered starting from the assigned starting number. The use of date
components allows for numbers to reset when that portion of the date changes. The
current day values are provided for symmetry, but it is expected that the use of these
tokens is limited in most cases to the year value, and in some cases to the year
followed by the month. If the year is used, document numbering will restart from the
assigned starting point when the year changes.
The Deployment token must be used to ensure that two different implementations use
different numbering sequences. Generating different numbering sequences becomes
important when using the Object Migration Facility to migrate classes that use
numbering tables between systems, if new objects are added to both implementations.
For example, consider the migration of suppliers from a staging to a production system.

1324 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

If both use the same numbering system, the first supplier added to each system will
have the same numbering-table-generated number, such as “Vendor-1”. If suppliers
are then migrated across these systems, the database-unique constraint typically
applied to the column containing the generated number will fail. Using the Deployment
token on both systems will ensure different numbering sequences for the systems and
a successful migration.
In addition to configuring the Numbering Table object to use a Deployment token, the
system administrator must set the document system property
doc.numbering_table.token.deployment with different values on the source and
target implementations and ensure that the property's Lock during Migration
property is set to prevent overwriting the token value during migration of System
Property objects. See System Properties for details.

Related Topics
Numbering Table Definitions
Creating a numbering table definition
Editing a numbering table definition

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1325

Master Data System Setup

Payment Term
Payment terms are payment arrangements required by the supplier. They are used in
RFxs and Master Agreements.
Frictionless® SRM provides default payment terms. You can also create and edit
payment terms.

This section describes how to create and edit a payment term.

Related Topics
Creating a payment term
Editing a payment term

1326 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Creating a payment term

Payment terms are payment arrangements required by the supplier. They are used in
RFxs and Master Agreements.

To create a payment term:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Payment Term from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Payment Term List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, fill in the fields with information about the payment term.
5 Click Add to add a discount. You see a new empty row in the Discounts table.
6 Fill in the fields in the empty row.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to add additional discounts.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Payment Term
Editing a payment term

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1327

Master Data System Setup

Editing a payment term

Payment terms are the payment arrangements the supplier requires. They are used in
RFxs and Master Agreements.

To edit a payment term:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Payment Term from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Payment Term List page, select All Payment Terms or All Inactive Payment
Terms from the drop-down list and click the metric to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.

6 Click the Edit icon for a discount to edit the discount.

7 In the dialog box, edit any fields.
8 Click OK.
9 Repeat steps 6 through 8 to edit additional discounts.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Payment Term
Creating a payment term

1328 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Reporting Calendars
A reporting calendar is a common and structured set of Time Periods. It consists of
calendar periods and sub-periods. Reporting calendars are used in analytic reports.
Frictionless® SRM provides default reporting calendars. You can also create and edit
reporting calendars.

This section describes how to create and edit a reporting calendar.

Related Topics
Creating a reporting calendar
Editing a reporting calendar
Creating a time period

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1329

Master Data System Setup

Creating a reporting calendar

A reporting calendar is a common and structured set of Time Periods. It consists of
calendar periods and sub-periods. Reporting calendars are used in analytic reports.

To create a reporting calendar:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Reporting Calendars from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Reporting Calendar List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, fill in the fields with basic calendar information.
5 Select a time period type from the Calendar Type drop-down list.
6 Under Calendar Period, click Add to add a time period to the calendar.
7 On the Summary page, fill in the fields with basic time period information.
8 Click the Sub Periods tab to add sub-periods.
9 Select a sub-period type from the Sub Period Type drop-down list.
10 Under Sub Periods, click Add to add the sub-period to the calendar.
11 Repeat steps 7 through 10 to create the sub-period and add a further sub-period
level. You can add an unlimited number of sub-period levels.
12 In each sub-period, click the Save button in the toolbar.
13 In the time period, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Reporting Calendars
Editing a reporting calendar
Creating a time period

1330 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Editing a reporting calendar

A reporting calendar is a common and structured set of Time Periods. It consists of
calendar periods and sub-periods. Reporting calendars are used in analytic reports.

To edit a reporting calendar:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Reporting Calendars from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Reporting Calendar List page, click the calendar to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.

6 Under Calendar Period, click the Edit icon for a time period to edit.
7 On the Summary page, edit any fields.
8 Click the Sub Periods tab to edit sub-periods.

9 Under Sub Periods, click the Edit icon for a sub-period to edit.
10 Edit any fields.
11 In the sub-period, click the Save button in the toolbar.
12 In the time period, click the Save button in the toolbar.
13 On the Summary page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Reporting Calendars
Creating a reporting calendar
Creating a time period

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1331

Master Data System Setup

Time Periods
A time period is a length of time during which your company agrees to do business with
a supplier. Time periods are organized in Reporting Calendars and provide a
consistent reporting structure. They are used in RFx delivery schedules and contract
value metrics.
Frictionless® SRM provides default time periods. You can also create and edit time
periods.

This section describes how to create and edit a time period.

Related Topics
Creating a time period
Editing a time period
Creating a reporting calendar

1332 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Creating a time period

A time period is a length of time during which your company agrees to do business with
a supplier. Time periods are organized in Reporting Calendars and provide a
consistent reporting structure. They are used in RFx delivery schedules and contract
value metrics.

To create a time period:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Time Periods from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Time Period List page, click Create.
4 On the Time Period page, fill in the fields with information about the time period,
including the start and end date.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Time Periods
Editing a time period
Creating a reporting calendar

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1333

Master Data System Setup

Editing a time period

A time period is a length of time during which your company agrees to do business with
a supplier. Time periods are organized in Reporting Calendars and provide a
consistent reporting structure. They are used in RFx delivery schedules and contract
value metrics.

To edit a time period:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Time Periods from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Time Period List page, click the time period to edit.
4 On the Time Period page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Time Periods
Creating a time period
Creating a reporting calendar

1334 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Units of Measure
Units of measure are used in sourcing documents to specify the quantities of items
being sourced. They are defined along with their conversion to a primary unit within
their category.
Frictionless® SRM provides default units of measure. This list is based on ISO standard
naming. You can also create and edit units of measure.

This section describes how to create and edit a unit of measure.

Field help for units of measure

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that the unit of measure is inactive and
unavailable for use.

Category: Select the category to which the unit of measure applies (such as Length or
Volume). For a unit that has no category, you can select Dimensionless in this field and
specify a quantity such as “box” or “bag” in the Display Name field.
Each category can have multiple units of measure, but must have one and only one unit
designated as a Primary Unit, as described below.

Display Name: Type a display name for the unit of measure.

Description: Type a description for the unit of measure.

Conversion Factor: Type the conversion factor to convert quantities expressed with
this unit to a quantity in the primary unit. The conversion factor is determined as
follows:
<Unit of Measure>/<Conversion Factor> = <Primary Unit>
For example, the primary unit for Weight is Kilograms. Based on the formula above, the
conversion factor for Grams is 1,000:
Grams/1,000 = Kilograms

Conversion Factor Scale: Specify the number of decimal places (digits after the
decimal point) to use when calculating the conversion.

Primary Unit: Check this box if this is the primary unit for the category. Quantities
expressed using other units in this category can be converted to a quantity in the
primary unit. For example, Liter is the primary unit for Volume. Quantities expressed in
Quarts will be converted to Liters using the conversion factor in the Conversion field.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1335

Master Data System Setup

Plugin: This field supports custom conversion factors. Type the java class name to be
called when a conversion to the unit is needed. This field might be used, for example, in
manufacturing environments where non-linear conversions are required.

Synonyms: Type any substitute names or abbreviations for the unit of measure. For
example, lb is a synonym for pound.

Precision: Type the total number of digits after the decimal point that will be stored for
quantities expressed with this unit of measure. This allows you to specify very small
amounts if necessary.

Scale: Type the total number of digits after the decimal point that will be displayed for
quantities expressed with this unit of measure. This might be smaller than the value in
the Precision field. For example, you might want to have the capacity to specify a
number with 10 decimal places, to account for very small quantities, but only display 2
decimal places in the user interface.

Related Topics
Creating a unit of measure
Editing a unit of measure

1336 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Creating a unit of measure

Units of measure are used in sourcing documents to specify the quantities of items
being sourced. They are defined along with their conversion to a primary unit within
their category.
The default list of units of measure is based on ISO standard naming. You create a unit
of measure when none of the default units is sufficient to describe a line item.

To create a unit of measure:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Units of Measure from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Units of Measure List page, click Create.
4 On the Units of Measure page, fill in the fields with information about the unit of
measure. For details, see Field help for units of measure.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Units of Measure
Editing a unit of measure
Field help for units of measure

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1337

Master Data System Setup

Editing a unit of measure

Units of measure are used in sourcing documents to specify the quantities of items
being sourced.

To edit a unit of measure:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Units of Measure from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Units of Measure List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Units of Measure by Name, search for
the unit of measure to edit, and click the unit.
n From the drop-down list, select All Units of Measure or All Inactive Units of
Measure and click the unit to edit.
4 On the Unit of Measure page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields. For details, see Field help for units of measure.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Units of Measure
Creating a unit of measure
Field help for units of measure

1338 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Value List Types and Values

A value list is a drop-down list used in Frictionless® SRM. It allows users to select a
value from a list. Examples of value list types include cost category, project status and
phase, and payment method.
Frictionless SRM provides default value lists and types. You can also create new list
types and edit all values. Value list values must be associated with Localized
Resources.

This section describes how to create and edit value list types and values.

Field help for Value List Value Page

Inactive: Check to indicate that the value is inactive and unavailable for use.
Display Name ID: Type a unique ID for the value list value.

Display Name: Click the Lookup icon to select a display name for the value list
value from the list of localized resources. If the value name is not in the list, click
Create in the dialog box to create a new localized resource.
Alternate Name: Type an alternate name to refer to the value list value.
Description: Type a description for the value list value.

Related Topics
Creating a value list type and values
Editing a value list type and values
Localized Resources

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1339

Master Data System Setup

Creating a value list type and values

A value list is a drop-down list used in Frictionless® SRM. It allows users to select a
value from a list.
Frictionless SRM provides default value lists and types. You can also create new list
types and edit all values. Value list values must be associated with Localized
Resources.

To create a value list type and its values:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Value List Types and Values
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Value List Type List page, click Create.
4 On the Value List Values page, fill in a name for the value list type.
5 Click Add to add a value list value.
6 On the Value List Value page, fill in value information. For details, see Field help
for Value List Value Page.
7 Click Create to create a localized resource for the value.
8 Fill in field information in the New Localized Resource dialog box.
9 Click OK.
10 On the Value List Value page, click the Save button in the toolbar.
11 Repeat steps 5 through 9 to add additional values.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Value List Types and Values
Editing a value list type and values
Localized Resources

1340 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Editing a value list type and values

A value list is a drop-down list used in Frictionless® SRM. It allows users to select a
value from a list.
Frictionless SRM provides default value lists and types. You can also create new list
types and edit all values. Value list values must be associated with Localized
Resources.

To edit a value list type and its values:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Value List Types and Values
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Value List Type List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Value List Types by Name, search for
the value list type to edit, and click the value list type.
n From the drop-down list, select All Value List Types and click the value list type
to edit.
4 On the Value List Values page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Optionally, edit the name of the value list type.

6 Click the Edit icon for a value list value to edit.

7 On the Value List Value page, edit any fields. For details, see Field help for Value
List Value Page.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
9 Repeat steps 7 through 9 to edit additional values.
10 Click Add to add a value list value.
11 On the Value List Value page, fill in value information, including selecting a value
name from the list of localized resources.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
13 Repeat steps 5 through 7 to add additional values.
14 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Value List Types and Values
Creating a value list type and values
Localized Resources

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1341

Master Data System Setup

Adding a custom phase as a value list value

Phases determine the steps or actions to be taken in a sourcing document workflow
cycle. When one phase is completed, the document is advanced (either manually or
automatically) to the next phase.
Frictionless SRM provides a number of default phases. You can add custom phases as
value list values.

To add a custom phase:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Value List Types and Values
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 Do one of the following:
n To edit or create phases for projects, click Project Phases.
n To edit or create phases for contract documents, click Contract Document
Phase.
4 Click Edit in the toolbar.
5 Click Add at the bottom of the table.
6 On the Value List Value page, add phase information as needed, including selecting
or creating a localized resource for the Display Name field. For details, see
Field help for Value List Value Page.
7 Click Save in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Value List Types and Values
Creating a value list type and values
Localized Resources
Workflow

1342 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Custom Master Data

Custom master data can be created for custom spend analysis dimensions. It can be
created to represent any kind of data. Custom master data is custom optional data.

Note: If you add custom master data, all localized resources containing the value being
replaced (Custom1, Custom2, and so on) must be edited to reflect the new value. To do
this, go to the Localized Resources List page, enter “Custom1” (or the appropriate term)
in the And Value Contains text box, and click Show. Click each localized resource
found in the search and type the new value in the Value Override field.

This section describes how to create and edit custom master data.

Related Topics
Creating custom master data

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1343

Master Data System Setup

Creating custom master data

Custom master data can be created for custom spend analysis dimensions. It can be
created to represent any kind of data.

Note: If you add custom master data, all localized resources containing the value being
replaced (Custom1, Custom2, and so on) must be edited to reflect the new value. To do
this, go to the Localized Resources List page, enter “Custom1” (or the appropriate term)
in the And Value Contains text box, and click Show. Click each localized resource
found in the search and type the new value in the Value Override field.

To create custom master data:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Custom Master Data 1, 2, 3, or
4 from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Custom Master Data List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields with information about the master data.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

To edit custom master data, open the master data by clicking it on the Custom Master
Data List page, and then click the Edit button in the document toolbar.

Related Topics
Custom Master Data

1344 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Currencies

Currencies are used throughout Frictionless® SRM to track monetary data.

Frictionless SRM provides default currencies. You can also create and edit currencies.

This section describes how to add and edit a currency.

Related Topics
Creating a currency
Editing a currency

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1345

Master Data System Setup

Creating a currency

Currencies are used throughout Frictionless® SRM to track monetary data.

Frictionless SRM provides default currencies. You can also create and edit currencies.

To create a currency:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Currencies from the drop-down
list and click OK.
3 On the Currency List page, click Create.
4 On the Currency page, fill in the fields with information about the currency.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Currencies
Editing a currency

1346 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Editing a currency

Currencies are used throughout Frictionless® SRM to track monetary data.

Frictionless SRM provides default currencies. You can also create and edit currencies.

To edit a currency:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Currencies from the drop-down
list and click OK.
3 On the Currency List page, click the currency to edit.
4 On the Currency page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Currencies
Creating a currency

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1347

Master Data System Setup

Currency Conversions
A currency conversion determines the conversion rate from a source currency to a
target currency. It is the source of system-defined currency conversion rates for
auctions and RFxs, and is used in the Currency Exchange Channel on the Workbench,
as well as in various reports. You can specify the currency rate and its scale.
Currency conversion rates can be entered manually, or through data imports or direct
integration. Currency conversions are custom optional data.

This section describes how to create and edit a currency conversion.

Field help for Currency Conversion page

Inactive: Check to indicate that the currency conversion is inactive and unavailable for
use.

Source Currency: Click the Lookup icon to select the source currency for the
conversion (that is, the currency from which to convert).

Target Currency: Click the Lookup icon to select the target currency for the
conversion (that is, the currency to which to convert).
Description: Type a description for the currency conversion.
Source: Enter the supplier of the rate for the currency conversion, such as Corporate
Budgeting or Interbank Rate for 3/2/03.
Rate: Type the rate at which to convert from the source currency to the target
currency.
Rate Scale: Type the number of digits to the right of the decimal point to compute in a
currency value using the this currency conversion. The value you enter also determines
the number of digits to the right of the decimal point in the Rate field.

Related Topics
Currency Conversions
Editing a currency conversion
Creating a currency conversion

1348 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Creating a currency conversion

A currency conversion determines the conversion rate from a source currency to a
target currency. It is the source of system-defined currency conversion rates for
auctions and RFxs, and is used in the Currency Exchange Channel on the Workbench,
as well as in various reports. You can specify the currency rate and its scale.
Currency conversion rates can be entered manually, or through data imports or direct
integration. Currency conversions are custom optional data.

To create a currency conversion:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Currency Conversion from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Currency Conversion List page, click Create.
4 On the Currency Conversion page, fill in the fields with information about the
currency conversion.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Currency Conversions
Editing a currency conversion
Field help for Currency Conversion page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1349

Master Data System Setup

Editing a currency conversion

A currency conversion determines the conversion rate from a source currency to a
target currency. It is the source of system-defined currency conversion rates for
auctions and RFxs, and is used in the Currency Exchange Channel on the Workbench,
as well as in various reports. You can specify the currency rate and its scale.
Currency conversion rates can be entered manually, or through data imports or direct
integration. Currency conversions are custom optional data.

To edit a currency conversion:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Currency Conversion from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Currency Conversion List page, click the currency conversion to edit.
4 On the Currency Conversion page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Currency Conversions
Creating a currency conversion
Field help for Currency Conversion page

1350 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

External Categories
External categories represent an alternate, optional classification hierarchy for
expenditures. They are used in the same manner as internal categories and can help
ease the transition from a proprietary or legacy codification to an emerging standard
such as UN/SPSC.
External categories are used in association with documents such as RFXs, auctions, and
master agreements and with other enterprise data. Typically, the set of external
categories for your enterprise is imported from the ERP system of record. You can also
create and edit external categories manually.
External categories are custom optional data.

This section describes how to create and edit an external category.

Related Topics
Creating an external category
Editing an external category

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1351

Master Data System Setup

Creating an external category

External categories represent an alternate, optional classification hierarchy for
expenditures. They are used in the same manner as internal categories and can help
ease the transition from a proprietary or legacy codification to an emerging standard
such as UN/SPSC.
External categories are used in association with documents such as RFXs, auctions, and
master agreements and with other enterprise data. Typically, the set of external
categories for your enterprise is imported from the ERP system of record. You can also
create and edit external categories manually.
External categories are custom optional data.

To create an external category:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select External Categories from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the External Category List page, click Create.
4 On the External Category page, fill in the fields with information about the internal
category.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
External Categories
Editing an external category

1352 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Master Data

Editing an external category

External categories represent an alternate, optional classification hierarchy for
expenditures. They are used in the same manner as internal categories and can help
ease the transition from a proprietary or legacy codification to an emerging standard
such as UN/SPSC.
External categories are used in association with documents such as RFXs, auctions, and
master agreements and with other enterprise data. Typically, the set of external
categories for your enterprise is imported from the ERP system of record. You can also
create and edit external categories manually.
External categories are custom optional data.

To edit an external category:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select External Categories from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the External Category List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search External Category by Name or Search
External Category by Code, search for the category to edit, and click the
category.
n From the drop-down list, select All External Categories or All Inactive External
Categories and click the category to edit.
4 On the External Category page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
External Categories
Creating an external category

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1353

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Organization and Accounting Info

This section describes options for managing organization and accounting information in
System Setup.

Related Topics
Companies
Locations
Plants
Cost Centers
General Ledger Accounts
Entities
Accounts Payable Type
Geography
Activities

1354 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Companies
Company data consists of the following:
` Contact and address information
` Organizational units
` Global Workbench settings (links and shared files)

You use Setup to add company data for all companies in your enterprise, and for the
enterprise itself. You create records to represent your organizational structure as
follows, in descending hierarchical order:
` Enterprise
` Company
` Organizational unit
` Sub-unit

Company data determines many of the activities that a user can perform and the
documents a user can create in Frictionless® SRM. Company data is custom required
data.

This section describes how to create and edit company data.

Related Topics
Creating a company
Editing a company
Adding company information to a new company
Editing company information for a company
Creating an organizational unit for a new company
Editing an organizational unit for a company
Adding shared links to a new company
Editing shared links for a company
Adding shared attachments to a new company
Editing shared attachments for a company

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1355

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Creating a company
Company data consists of the following:
` Contact and address information, terms of agreement, and other basic information
` Organizational units
` Global Workbench settings (links and shared files)

You use Setup to add company data for all companies in your enterprise, and for the
enterprise itself. You create records to represent your organizational structure as
follows, in descending hierarchical order:
` Enterprise
` Company
` Organizational unit
` Sub-unit

Company data determines many of the activities that a user can perform and the
documents a user can create in Frictionless® SRM. Company data is custom required
data.

To create a company:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select
Companies from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Company List page, click Create.
4 On the Company page, fill in the fields with company information and add buyer
terms and Welcome pages.
Note: For an enterprise-level company, you can also add supplier terms.
5 Click the Organizational Units tab to add organizational units.
6 Click the Workbench Setup tab to add shared files and links.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Companies
Editing a company
Adding company information to a new company
Editing company information for a company
Creating an organizational unit for a new company

1356 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Editing an organizational unit for a company

Adding shared links to a new company
Editing shared links for a company
Adding shared attachments to a new company
Editing shared attachments for a company

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1357

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Editing a company
Company data consists of the following:
` Contact and address information, terms of agreement, and other basic information
` Organizational units
` Global Workbench settings (links and shared files)

You use Setup to add company data for all companies in your enterprise, and for the
enterprise itself. You create records to represent your organizational structure as
follows, in descending hierarchical order:
` Enterprise
` Company
` Organizational unit
` Sub-unit

Company data determines many of the activities that a user can perform and the
documents a user can create in Frictionless® SRM. Company data is custom required
data.

To edit a company:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select
Companies from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Company List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Companies by Name, search for the
company to edit, and click the company.
n From the drop-down list, select All Companies or All Inactive Companies and
click the company to edit.
4 On the Company page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields for company information, buyer terms, and Welcome pages.
Note: For an enterprise-level company, you can also edit fields for supplier terms.
6 Click the Organizational Units tab to edit organizational units.
7 Click the Workbench Setup tab to edit shared files and links.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Companies
Creating a company

1358 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Adding company information to a new company

Editing company information for a company
Creating an organizational unit for a new company
Editing an organizational unit for a company
Adding shared links to a new company
Editing shared links for a company
Adding shared attachments to a new company
Editing shared attachments for a company

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1359

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Adding company information to a new company

When you create a company, you enter general company information on the Company
page. This information includes buyer terms, welcome pages, and, for an
enterprise-level company, supplier terms.

To add company information:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select
Companies from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Company List page, click Create.
4 On the Company page, fill in the fields under General Info and those under Other
Info, Tech Support Info, and Email Addresses.
5 Under Terms of Agreement, click Add in the Buyer Terms table to add a set of buyer
terms.
6 In the dialog box for New Terms and Conditions in New Company, optionally add a
template and fill in the fields for the title and text of the buyer terms.
7 Click OK.
8 For an enterprise-level company, do the following:
a Under Terms of Agreement, click Add in the Vendor Terms table to add a set of
supplier terms.
b In the dialog box for New Terms and Conditions in New Company, optionally
add a template and fill in the fields for the title and text of the supplier terms.
c Click OK.
9 Under Terms of Agreement, click Add in the Welcome Pages table to add a
Welcome page. A Welcome page is the screen a buyer or supplier sees immediately
after logging into Frictionless® SRM.
10 In the dialog box for New Welcome Message in New Company, fill in the fields for
the welcome message, and make the message visible by buyers, suppliers, or both
buyers and suppliers.
11 Click OK.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Companies
Creating a company
Editing a company
Editing company information for a company

1360 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Creating an organizational unit for a new company

Editing an organizational unit for a company
Adding shared links to a new company
Editing shared links for a company
Adding shared attachments to a new company
Editing shared attachments for a company

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1361

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Editing company information for a company

You enter and edit general company information on the Company page. This
information includes buyer terms, welcome pages, and, for an enterprise-level
company, supplier terms.

To edit company information:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select
Companies from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Company List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Companies by Name, search for the
company to edit, and click the company.
n From the drop-down list, select All Companies or All Inactive Companies and
click the company to edit.
4 On the Company page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields for General Info, Other Info, Tech Support Info, and Email Addresses.

6 Under Terms of Agreement, click the Edit icon in the Buyer Terms table for the
set of buyer terms to edit.
7 In the dialog box for New Terms and Conditions in Company, edit any fields.
8 Click OK.
9 For an enterprise-level company, do the following:

a Under Terms of Agreement, click the Edit icon in the Vendor Terms table
for the set of supplier terms to edit.
b In the dialog box for New Terms and Conditions in New Company, edit any
fields.
c Click OK.

10 Under Terms of Agreement, click the Edit icon in the Welcome Pages table for
the Welcome page to edit.
11 In the dialog box for New Welcome Message in Company, edit any fields.
12 Click OK.
13 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Companies

1362 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Creating a company
Editing a company
Adding company information to a new company
Creating an organizational unit for a new company
Editing an organizational unit for a company
Adding shared links to a new company
Editing shared links for a company
Adding shared attachments to a new company
Editing shared attachments for a company

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1363

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Creating an organizational unit for a new company

Organizational units are used to represent a tier within an organizational hierarchy. For
example, each organizational unit can represent a department or business division
within a company.
Within an organizational unit, you can create any number of sub-units and sub-unit
tiers to reflect your organizational structure. Organizational units are custom required
data.

To create an organizational unit:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select
Companies from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Company List page, click Create.
4 Click the Company tab and fill in the fields.
5 Click the Organizational Units tab.
6 Click Add.
7 On the Organizational Unit page, fill in the fields with organizational unit
information.
8 Click the Categories tab to add categories.
9 Under Internal Categories, click Add Internal Category.
10 In the dialog box, check the box for one or more internal categories to add and click
OK.
11 Under External Categories, click Add External Category.
12 In the dialog box, check the box for one or more external categories to add and
click OK.
13 Click the Sub-Units tab to add sub-units to the organizational unit.
14 Follow steps 6 through 12 to enter information for the sub-unit and to create
further sub-unit tiers as needed.
15 In each sub-unit, click the Save button in the toolbar.
16 In the organizational unit, click the Save button in the toolbar.
17 On the Organizational Units page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Companies
Creating a company
Editing a company

1364 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Adding company information to a new company

Editing company information for a company
Editing an organizational unit for a company
Adding shared links to a new company
Editing shared links for a company
Adding shared attachments to a new company
Editing shared attachments for a company

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1365

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Editing an organizational unit for a company

Organizational units are used to represent an additional tier within an organizational
hierarchy. For example, each organizational unit can represent a department or
business division within a company.
Within an organizational unit, you can create any number of sub-units and sub-unit
tiers to reflect your organizational structure. Organizational units are custom required
data.

To edit an organizational unit:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select
Companies from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Company List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Companies by Name, search for the
company to edit, and click the company.
n From the drop-down list, select All Companies or All Inactive Companies and
click the company to edit.
4 Click the Organizational Units tab.
5 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
6 Click Add.

7 Click the Edit icon for the organizational unit to edit.

8 On the Organizational Unit page, edit any fields.
9 Click the Categories tab to add or remove categories.
10 Under Internal Categories, add or remove internal categories.
11 Under External Categories, add or remove external categories.
12 Click the Sub-Units tab to edit sub-units for the organizational unit.
13 Follow steps 6 through 12 to edit information for any sub-unit.
14 In each sub-unit, click the Save button in the toolbar.
15 In the organizational unit, click the Save button in the toolbar.
16 On the Organizational Units page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Companies
Creating a company
Editing a company

1366 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Adding company information to a new company

Editing company information for a company
Creating an organizational unit for a new company
Adding shared links to a new company
Editing shared links for a company
Adding shared attachments to a new company
Editing shared attachments for a company

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1367

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Adding shared links to a new company

You use Setup to add and edit links to share with a company. Shared links appear in
the Links channel of the Workbench for all users in the company.

To add shared links:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select
Companies from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Company List page, click Create.
4 Click the Company tab and fill in the fields.
5 Click the Organizational Units tab and fill in the fields.
6 Click the Workbench Setup tab.
7 Under Links, click Add.
8 In the dialog box for New Company Link in New Company, fill in the fields with link
information.
Note: At the enterprise level, you can optionally share the link with all suppliers as
well as all users in the enterprise.
9 Click OK.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Companies
Creating a company
Editing a company
Adding company information to a new company
Editing company information for a company
Creating an organizational unit for a new company
Editing an organizational unit for a company
Editing shared links for a company
Adding shared attachments to a new company
Editing shared attachments for a company

1368 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Editing shared links for a company

You use Setup to add links to share with a company. Shared links appear in the Links
channel of the Workbench for all users in the company.

To edit shared links:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select
Companies from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Company List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Companies by Name, search for the
company to edit, and click the company.
n From the drop-down list, select All Companies or All Inactive Companies and
click the company to edit.
4 Click the Workbench Setup tab.
5 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.

6 Under Links, click the Edit icon for the link to edit.
7 In the dialog box, edit any fields.
8 Click OK.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Companies
Creating a company
Editing a company
Adding company information to a new company
Editing company information for a company
Creating an organizational unit for a new company
Editing an organizational unit for a company
Adding shared links to a new company
Adding shared attachments to a new company
Editing shared attachments for a company

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1369

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Adding shared attachments to a new company

You use Setup to add and edit attachments to share with a company. These
attachments appear in the File Sharing channel of the Workbench for all users in the
company. At the enterprise level, you can also add and edit attachments to be shared
with suppliers.

To add shared attachments:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select
Companies from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Company List page, click Create.
4 Click the Company tab and fill in the fields.
5 Click the Organizational Units tab and fill in the fields.
6 Click the Workbench Setup tab.
7 Under Buyside Attachments, click Import from Library, Attach File, or Attach
URL to add an attachment.
8 Fill in the fields in the dialog box with attachment information.
9 Click OK.
10 For an enterprise-level company, do the following:
a Under Sellside Attachments, click Import from Library, Attach File, or
Attach URL to add an attachment.
b Fill in the fields in the dialog box with attachment information.
c Click OK.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Companies
Creating a company
Editing a company
Adding company information to a new company
Editing company information for a company
Creating an organizational unit for a new company
Editing an organizational unit for a company
Adding shared links to a new company
Editing shared links for a company

1370 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Editing shared attachments for a company

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1371

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Editing shared attachments for a company

You use Setup to add and edit attachments to share with a company. These
attachments appear in the File Sharing channel of the Workbench for all users in the
company. At the enterprise level, you can also add and edit attachments to be shared
with suppliers.

To edit shared attachments:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select
Companies from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Company List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Companies by Name, search for the
company to edit, and click the company.
n From the drop-down list, select All Companies or All Inactive Companies and
click the company to edit.
4 Click the Workbench Setup tab.
5 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.

6 Under Buyside Attachments, click the Edit icon for the attachment to edit.
7 In the dialog box, edit any fields.
8 Click OK.
9 For an enterprise-level company, do the following:

a Under Sellside Attachments, click the Edit icon for the attachment to edit.
b In the dialog box, edit any fields.
c Click OK.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Companies
Creating a company
Editing a company
Adding company information to a new company
Editing company information for a company
Creating an organizational unit for a new company
Editing an organizational unit for a company

1372 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Adding shared links to a new company

Editing shared links for a company
Adding shared attachments to a new company

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1373

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Locations

Frictionless® SRM uses the following geographical hierarchy:

` Plant
` Location
` Geography

A location is a named place that can be used for the delivery of goods and services.
Locations are used in spend analysis, RFxs, auctions, and contracts, and in association
with materials, plants, user accounts and companies. Locations are custom required
data.

This section describes how to create and edit a location.

Related Topics
Creating a location
Editing a location

1374 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Creating a location
A location is a named place that can be used for the delivery of goods and services.
Locations are used in spend analysis, RFxs, auctions, and contracts, and in association
with materials, plants, user accounts and companies. Locations are custom required
data.

To create a location:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select Locations
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Location List page, click Create.
4 On the Location page, fill in the fields with location information.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Locations
Editing a location

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1375

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Editing a location
A location is a named place that can be used for the delivery of goods and services.
Locations are used in spend analysis, RFxs, auctions, and contracts, and in association
with materials, plants, user accounts and companies. Locations are custom required
data.

To edit a location:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select Locations
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Location List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Locations by Name, search for the
location to edit, and click the location.
n From the drop-down list, select All Locations or All Inactive Locations and click
the location to edit.
4 On the Location page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Locations
Creating a location

1376 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Plants

Frictionless® SRM uses the following geographical hierarchy:

` Plant
` Location
` Geography

A plant typically represents a manufacturing or distribution location where raw

materials are needed. Each plant can be associated with only one company, but can be
associated with multiple organizational units within that company.
A plant references a location and contains a list of categories that it consumes. Plants
are custom optional data.

This section describes how to create and edit a plant.

Related Topics
Creating a plant
Editing a plant

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1377

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Creating a plant
A plant typically represents a manufacturing or distribution location where raw
materials are needed. Each plant can be associated with only one company, but can be
associated with multiple organizational units within that company.
A plant references a location and contains a list of categories that it consumes. Plants
are custom optional data.

To create a plant:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select Plants
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Plant List page, click Create.
4 On the Plant page, fill in the fields with plant information.
5 Click Add Organizational Unit to add organizational units to the plant.
6 In the dialog box, check the box for one or more organizational units to add and
click OK.
7 Click the Categories tab to add categories.
8 Under Internal Categories, click Add Internal Category.
9 In the dialog box, check the box for one or more internal categories to add and click
OK.
10 Under External Categories, click Add External Category.
11 In the dialog box, check the box for one or more external categories to add and
click OK.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Plants
Editing a plant

1378 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Editing a plant
A plant typically represents a manufacturing or distribution location where raw
materials are needed. Each plant can be associated with only one company, but can be
associated with multiple organizational units within that company.
A plant references a location and contains a list of categories that it consumes. Plants
are custom optional data.

To edit a plant:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select Plants
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Plant List page, select All Plants or All Inactive Plants and click the plant to
edit.
4 On the Plant page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.

6 Add or remove organizational units, or click the Edit icon for an organizational
unit to edit.
7 Click the Categories tab to add or remove categories.
8 Under Internal Categories, add or remove internal categories.
9 Under External Categories, add or remove external categories.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Plants
Creating a plant

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1379

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Cost Centers
A cost center is an organizational unit or department (sales, services, IT, finance,
marketing, engineering, and so on) that is used to allocate the cost of a business
activity to an existing budget. Cost centers are usually described in a hierarchy or
grouping so that a management structure may own multiple cost centers.
Cost centers are used for spend analysis in all sourcing documents. You can generate
reports to show the activity in your cost center. Frictionless® SRM can support a
hierarchy of cost centers.
Typically, cost centers are imported from the financial or ERP system of record. You can
also create and edit cost centers manually. Cost centers are custom optional data.

This section describes how to create and edit a cost center.

Related Topics
Creating a cost center
Editing a cost center

1380 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Creating a cost center

A cost center is an organizational unit or department (sales, services, IT, finance,
marketing, engineering, and so on) that is used to allocate the cost of a business
activity to an existing budget. Cost centers are usually described in a hierarchy or
grouping so that a management structure may own multiple cost centers.
Cost centers are used for spend analysis in all sourcing documents. You can generate
reports to show the activity in your cost center. Frictionless® SRM can support a
hierarchy of cost centers.
Typically, cost centers are imported from the financial or ERP system of record. You can
also create and edit cost centers manually. Cost centers are custom optional data.

To create a cost center:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select Cost
Centers from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Cost Center List page, click Create.
4 On the Cost Center page, fill in the fields with cost center information.
5 If this is a lower-tier cost center, do the following:

a Click the Lookup icon in the Parent field.

b In the lookup box, select the parent cost center.
c Click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Cost Centers
Editing a cost center

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1381

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Editing a cost center

A cost center is an organizational unit or department (sales, services, IT, finance,
marketing, engineering, and so on) that is used to allocate the cost of a business
activity to an existing budget. Cost centers are usually described in a hierarchy or
grouping so that a management structure may own multiple cost centers.
Cost centers are used for spend analysis in all sourcing documents. You can generate
reports to show the activity in your cost center. Frictionless® SRM can support a
hierarchy of cost centers.
Typically, cost centers are imported from the financial or ERP system of record. You can
also create and edit cost centers manually. Cost centers are custom optional data.

To edit a cost center:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select Cost
Centers from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Cost Center List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Cost Centers by Name or Search Cost
Centers by Code, search for the cost center to edit, and click the cost center.
n From the drop-down list, select All Cost Centers or All Inactive Cost Centers and
click the cost center to edit.
4 On the Cost Center page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 To edit the cost center hierarchy, do the following:

a Click the Lookup icon in the Parent field.

b In the lookup box, select a new parent cost center.
c Click OK.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Cost Centers
Creating a cost center

1382 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

General Ledger Accounts

General ledger accounts are records that represent the general ledger accounts (the
lowest organizational unit of cost assignment) in an accounting system. They are used
for spend analysis, to allocate costs against the accounts established in the general
ledger. Frictionless® SRM can support a hierarchy of general ledger accounts.
Typically, general ledger accounts are imported from the system of record. You can also
create and edit general ledger accounts manually.

This section describes how to create and edit a general ledger account.

Related Topics
Creating a general ledger account
Editing a general ledger account

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1383

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Creating a general ledger account

General ledger accounts are records that represent the general ledger accounts (the
lowest organizational unit of cost assignment) in an accounting system. They are used
for spend analysis, to allocate costs against the accounts established in the general
ledger. Frictionless® SRM can support a hierarchy of general ledger accounts.

To create a general ledger account:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select General
Ledger Accounts from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the General Ledger Account List page, click Create.
4 On the General Ledger Account page, fill in the fields with general ledger account
information.
5 If this is a lower-tier general ledger account, do the following:

a Click the Lookup icon in the Parent field.

b In the lookup box, select the parent general ledger account.
c Click OK.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
General Ledger Accounts
Editing a general ledger account

1384 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Editing a general ledger account

General ledger accounts are records that represent the general ledger accounts (the
lowest organizational unit of cost assignment) in an accounting system. They are used
for spend analysis, to allocate costs against the accounts established in the general
ledger. Frictionless® SRM can support a hierarchy of general ledger accounts.

To edit a general ledger account:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select General
Ledger Accounts from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the General Ledger Account List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search General Ledger Accounts by Name or
Search General Ledger Accounts by Code, search for the general ledger account
to edit, and click the general ledger account.
n From the drop-down list, select All General Ledger Accounts or All Inactive
General Ledger Accounts and click the general ledger account to edit.
4 On the General Ledger Account page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 To edit the general ledger account hierarchy, do the following:

a Click the Lookup icon in the Parent field.

b In the lookup box, select a new parent general ledger account.
c Click OK.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
General Ledger Accounts
Creating a general ledger account

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1385

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Entities
Entities are used for tracking and allocating costs against business entities. An entity
can be a legal entity, for multi-location companies, or a company within a
conglomerate.
Typically, entities are imported from the system of record. You can also create and edit
entities manually. Entities are custom optional data.

This section describes how to create and edit an entity.

Related Topics
Creating an entity
Editing an entity

1386 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Creating an entity
Entities are used for tracking and allocating costs against business entities.
Typically, entities are imported from the system of record. You can also create and edit
entities manually. Entities are custom optional data.

To create an entity:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select Entities
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Entity List page, click Create.
4 On the Entity page, fill in the fields with entity information.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Entities
Editing an entity

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1387

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Editing an entity
Entities are used for tracking and allocating costs against business entities.
Typically, entities are imported from the system of record. You can also create and edit
entities manually. Entities are custom optional data.

To edit an entity:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select Entities
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Entity List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Entities by Name or Search Entities by
Code, search for the entity to edit, and click the entity.
n From the drop-down list, select All Entities or All Inactive Entities and click the
entity to edit.
4 On the Entity page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Entities
Creating an entity

1388 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Accounts Payable Type

An accounts payable type is a data representation of a company’s accounts payable. It
is used for accounting information in sourcing documents and in spend analysis.
Accounts payable types are hierarchical and are typically imported from the system of
record, such as an ERP. You can also create and edit accounts payable types manually.
Accounts payable types are custom optional data.

This section describes how to create and edit an accounts payable type.

Related Topics
Creating an accounts payable type
Editing an accounts payable type

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1389

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Creating an accounts payable type

An accounts payable type is a data representation of a company’s accounts payable. It
is used for accounting information in sourcing documents and in spend analysis.
Accounts payable types are hierarchical and are typically imported from the system of
record, such as an ERP. You can also create and edit accounts payable types manually.
Accounts payable types are custom optional data.

To create an accounts payable type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select Accounts
Payable Type from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Accounts Payable Type List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Accounts Payable Type
Editing an accounts payable type

1390 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Editing an accounts payable type

An accounts payable type is a data representation of a company’s accounts payable. It
is used for accounting information in sourcing documents and in spend analysis.
Accounts payable types are hierarchical and are typically imported from the system of
record, such as an ERP. You can also create and edit accounts payable types manually.
Accounts payable types are custom optional data.

To edit an accounts payable type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select Accounts
Payable Type from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Accounts Payable Type page, click the accounts payable type to edit.
4 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Accounts Payable Type
Creating an accounts payable type

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1391

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Geography

Frictionless® SRM uses the following geographical hierarchy:

` Plant
` Location
` Geography

A geography is a representation of a geographical region. It is the lowest level in the

Frictionless SRM geographical hierarchy. A geography can have multiple tiers.
Geographies are used in spend analysis and are typically imported from the system of
record. You can also create and edit geographies manually.
Geographies are custom optional data.

This section describes how to create and edit a geography.

Related Topics
Creating a geography
Editing a geography

1392 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Creating a geography
A geography is a representation of a geographical region. It is the lowest level in the
Frictionless® SRM geographical hierarchy. A geography can have multiple tiers.
Geographies are used in spend analysis and are typically imported from the system of
record. You can also create and edit geographies manually.
Geographies are custom optional data.

To create a geography:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select
Geography from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Geography List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, fill in the fields.
Note: If this is a lower-tier geography, select its parent by clicking the Lookup icon

in the Parent field.

5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Geography
Editing a geography

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1393

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Editing a geography
A geography is a representation of a geographical region. It is the lowest level in the
Frictionless® SRM geographical hierarchy. A geography can have multiple tiers.
Geographies are used in spend analysis and are typically imported from the system of
record. You can also create and edit geographies manually.
Geographies are custom optional data.

To edit a geography:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select
Geography from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Geography page, select All Geographies or All Inactive Geographies from
the drop-down list and click the geography to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Geography
Creating a geography

1394 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Activities
Activities are used for tracking and allocating costs against business activities. They are
used to classify expenses and might include travel, professional fees, training, software
expenses, and so on.
Typically, activities are imported from the system of record. You can also create and
edt activities manually. Activities are custom optional data.

This section describes how to create and edit an activity.

Related Topics
Creating an activity
Editing an activity

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1395

Organization and Accounting Info System Setup

Creating an activity
Activities are used for tracking and allocating costs against business activities. They are
used to classify expenses and might include travel, professional fees, training, software
expenses, and so on.
Typically, activities are imported from the system of record. You can also create and
edt activities manually. Activities are custom optional data.

To create an activity:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select Activities
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Activity List page, click Create.
4 On the Activity page, fill in the fields with activity information.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Activities
Editing an activity

1396 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Organization and Accounting Info

Editing an activity
Activities are used for tracking and allocating costs against business activities. They are
used to classify expenses and might include travel, professional fees, training, software
expenses, and so on.
Typically, activities are imported from the system of record. Activities are custom
optional data.

To edit an activity:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizational and Accounting Info section of System Setup, select Activities
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Activity List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Activities by Name or Search Activities
by Code, search for the activity to edit, and click the activity.
n From the drop-down list, select All Entities or All Inactive Entities and click the
activity to edit.
4 On the Activity page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Activities
Creating an activity

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1397

Workbench Setup System Setup

Workbench Setup
The Workbench portal is typically an important component of customizing Frictionless
SRM for a specific customer implementation. This section focuses on basic aspects of
integrating custom Workbench channels and leveraging Workbench templates to
manage the options available to individual portal users.

Note: The Workbench Help module provides information on how to use the Workbench
portal and the objects that configure it, including information on using the standard
channels supplied with the Frictionless SRM application.

Related Topics
Desktop Channel
Iframe Configurations
Workbench Page
Workbench Template
Page Manager
Global Discussion Manager

1398 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Desktop Channel
A Workbench channel is a unit of content that appears on an individual user’s desktop.
Frictionless® SRM provides a number of default Workbench channels. You can use
Setup to create a custom Workbench channel for your enterprise or company, or to
modify existing channels.
Each Desktop Channel object specifies the code component that renders the channel
content, along with configuration parameters for the channel. In general, it should not
be necessary to modify the Desktop Channel objects, but it may be desirable to modify
certain settings or create new objects representing custom channels.
Channels are assigned to Workbench Page templates, which determine Workbench
configurations for individual users. Information from the Desktop Channel object is
copied to the Workbench template when the channel is assigned to the template. See
the section on Individual Workbench Configurations to understand how changes to the
Desktop Channel must be propagated to ensure that all users' configurations are
updated.

This section describes how to create and edit a Workbench channel.

Field help for Desktop Channel Summary page

Title: Click the Lookup icon to select a localized resource for the channel title.
Description: Enter a description for the channel.
External ID: Indicates the ID that uniquely identifies the channel. When you create a
new channel, a unique numeric ID is automatically assigned to the channel. You can
optionally change this default value to something more user friendly.
Component: This value identifies the code that renders the channel. For example, the
entry com.frictionless.analysis.charting.imbo.MultiQueryIMBO refers to the code
that drives Query-based channels. This value should not be changed except based on
the specific advice of Frictionless Commerce Technical Support.
Buy Side / Sell Side: Check one or both boxes to determine whether the channel is
available to buy-side users, sell-side users, or both. In fact, this option controls
whether the channel can be added to a buy-side or sell-side Workbench template. The
template itself further controls what channels are available for an individual user's
Workbench.
Unique: Check this box to define the channel as unique, indicating that it can only
appear once on the desktop. Once a unique channel has been added to a particular
user's desktop or to a Workbench template, it will not be available in the list to be
added again. Channels without the Unique setting can be added to the desktop multiple
times.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1399

Workbench Setup System Setup

Wide: Check this box to indicate that the channel is a full-width channel and requires a
wide (two-column) channel to display effectively. Users can position the channel in a
single column channel, but the results will be sub-optimal.
Scope: This is a performance setting that generally should not be modified without
specific advice from Frictionless Commerce Technical Support. The two possible values
are request and session. Channels that are request scoped have their content
generated for each request for the Workbench page. Channels that are session scoped
are generated the first time the page is requested in a user's session and rendered from
cached content for subsequent requests. This field should not be modified for existing
channels at the implementation level. It should be used for the definition of new
channels only.
Parameter definitions: Click Add to add parameter definitions. Some channels
incorporate their configuration properties, such as the News topic in a news headline
channel. You can establish default values for all users as name / value pairs in the
Parameter Definition dialog box.

Related Topics
Creating a Workbench channel
Editing a Workbench channel

1400 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Creating a Workbench channel

You can use Setup to create a custom channel for your enterprise or company.

Note: It is recommended that you consult with a Frictionless® Commerce Business

Analyst before creating a new Workbench channel.

To create a Workbench channel:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workbench section of System Setup, select Desktop Channel from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Desktop Channels List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, fill in the fields with channel information, including whether
the channel will be visible to buyers, suppliers, or both buyers and suppliers.
5 Under Parameter Definitions, click Add to add a parameter definition.
6 In the dialog box for New Channel Parameter Definition in New Desktop Channels,
fill in the fields and click OK.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Desktop Channel
Editing a Workbench channel
Field help for Desktop Channel Summary page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1401

Workbench Setup System Setup

Editing a Workbench channel

In general, it should not be necessary to edit a Workbench channel, except to modify
settings.

Note: It is recommended that you consult with a Frictionless® Commerce Business

Analyst before editing a Workbench channel.

To edit a Workbench channel:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workbench section of System Setup, select Desktop Channel from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Desktop Channels List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Workbench Channels by Name, search
for the channel to edit, and click the channel.
n From the drop-down list, select All Workbench Channels and click the channel
to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.

6 Under Parameter Definitions, click the Edit icon for a parameter definition to
edit the definition.
7 In the dialog box for Channel Parameter Definition in Desktop Channels, edit any
fields and click OK.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Desktop Channel
Creating a Workbench channel
Field help for Desktop Channel Summary page

1402 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Iframe Configurations
The Iframe channel is a special browser window in the Workbench. An Iframe
configuration is a predefined set of URLs for the Iframe channel. Its function is to make
sourcing-related Web content readily available. You use the Iframe Configurations
option to define this set of URLs.
The Iframe channel is a standard Desktop Channel with the ID
com.frictionless.desktop.channels.imbo.Iframe. It should be defined as a
full-width channel. Additionally, the channel understands two parameters: a reference
to an Iframe configuration object (IFRAMECFGNAME) that defines a set of available
URLs, and a height value (HEIGHT). The height value is selected from a predefined set
of options, and specifies the size of the frame in pixels on the Workbench.
The Iframe configuration object contains a collection of URL entries, with each entry
made up of a Name to be displayed in the channel's Favorites drop-down list, the URL
itself, and a flag indicating which entry is the Home URL.
Note the following:
` Each URL must be fully qualified, e.g., http://www.frictionless.com and not simply
www.frictionless.com. Without the fully qualified prefix, the software will assume
that the URL is relative and will append it to the standard application page URL
base.
` If you are adding URLs to an Iframe configuration via the user interface, clicking
OK to save an added or modified URL will bring up a window attempting to render
the content at the URL. If a 404 Page Not Found message is displayed, look at the
title bar of the popup window to see the failed URL, and close the window. If the
page displays correctly, there is an OK button to the right of the rendered page;
scroll to it and click it to confirm the URL value. This test is done to prevent
attempting to display URLs that take over the entire browser window from within
the SRM application.
` Note that the Iframe configuration object itself is frequently shared by many users.
There are two possible control options:
n Define the parameters for this channel as fixed, preventing users from
changing their default Iframe configuration object.
n Restrict the Edit access rights on the Iframe Configuration object class to
prevent users from modifying the shared Iframe configuration objects.
The Iframe Channel is also a powerful mechanism for incorporating other application
content within the SRM Workbench. One example is included with the product: the
Supplier Discovery Channel. The second use case is to add access to other enterprise
applications directly from the Workbench. The implementation is as follows:
1 A new Desktop Channel is created with an appropriate name and with the same ID
value as the Iframe channel (com.frictionless.desktop.channels.imbo.Iframe).

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1403

Workbench Setup System Setup

2 Create a new Iframe configuration containing only the URL required to access the
special site or application
3 Lock the parameters to the Desktop Channel by adding the Channel to the
Workbench Template(s) and specifying Fixed Parameters. The Iframe Channel
configuration parameters are as follows:

Setting Action

IFRAMECFGNAME This parameter specifies the name of the Iframe Configuration object that
contains the URL information for the channel, including the list of available
URLs and indicating the one identified as the Home URL. On installation, the
BUYER Workbench Template contains an Iframe Channel configured to use
the Iframe Configuration also named BUYER. It is not necessary that the
names match, only that the channel identify the correct named Iframe
Configuration object.
HEIGHT This is the height to be allocated to the Iframe channel, in pixels. Valid
options are 250, 350,450, and 550.

Note: Typically, Frictionless SRM users access the system through secure web
connections (HTTPS). If the Iframe channel includes public web sites, these are typically
not secure connections (HTTP). Given a Frictionless SRM Workbench page containing
secure channels from the SRM application and a non-secure Iframe channel, the browser
page will contain a mix of secure and non-secure content. Typically, most enterprises
will have their browser options set to display a warning dialog when a page contains both
secure and non-secure content. This may be annoying to Iframe channel users. If the
Iframe is used as a way to include content from other customer in-house applications,
those should also be deployed via HTTPS, avoiding the issue. Future releases of
Frictionless SRM will provide mechanisms to avoid the warning for external non-secure
content.

This section describes how to create and edit Iframe configurations.

Related Topics
Creating an Iframe configuration
Editing an Iframe configuration

1404 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Creating an Iframe configuration

The Iframe channel is a special browser window in the Workbench. An Iframe
configuration is a predefined set of URLs for the Iframe channel. Its function is to make
sourcing-related Web content readily available. You use the Iframe Configurations
option to define this set of URLs.

To create an Iframe configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workbench section of System Setup, select Iframe Configurations from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Iframe Configuration List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, fill in the fields.
5 Under Favorites, click Add to add a favorite Web site.
6 In the dialog box for New Favorites URL in New Iframe Configuration, fill in the
fields and click OK. You must enter a fully qualified URL, for example,
http://www.frictionless.com. One home URL is required.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Iframe Configurations
Editing an Iframe configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1405

Workbench Setup System Setup

Editing an Iframe configuration

The Iframe channel is a special browser window in the Workbench. An Iframe
configuration is a predefined set of URLs for the Iframe channel. Its function is to make
sourcing-related Web content readily available. You use the Iframe Configurations
option to define this set of URLs.

To edit an Iframe configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workbench section of System Setup, select Iframe Configurations from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Iframe Configuration List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Iframe Configurations by Name, search
for the configuration to edit, and click the configuration.
n From the drop-down list, select All Iframe Configurations and click the
configuration to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.

6 Under Favorites, click the Edit icon for a favorite Web site to edit.
7 In the dialog box for Favorites URL in Iframe Configuration, edit any fields and click
OK. You must enter a fully qualified URL, for example, http://www.frictionless.com.
One home URL is required.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Iframe Configurations
Creating an Iframe configuration

1406 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Workbench Page
A Workbench page is a page that appears on a user’s Workbench. Each Workbench
page shows a number of channels, and each user can have multiple Workbench pages.
For information about Workbench templates, see Workbench Template.

This section describes how to create and edit Workbench pages and Workbench page
templates in Setup.

Note: You can also create and edit a basic Workbench page directly in the Workbench.

Related Topics
Workbench Template
Creating a Workbench page in Setup
Editing a Workbench page in Setup
Creating a Workbench page template
Editing a Workbench page template
Creating a Workbench page in the Workbench
Editing a Workbench page in the Workbench
Sharing a Workbench page
Setting a Workbench page layout
Setting up CPO Central
Field help for Workbench template Layout page
User Workbench configurations
Query and report Workbench channels

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1407

Workbench Setup System Setup

Workbench Template
A Workbench template sets global default configurations for users’ Workbench pages. A
Workbench template defines the following:
` A list of available Workbench channels. This restricts access to certain channels to
specific users or groups, based on their job functions.
` A default Workbench layout, including the default positioning of selected channels.
The user can optionally add any channels that are available in the template but not
included in the default layout.
` Locked content. This optionally restricts users’ ability to customize channel content
and layout in their Workbench pages.
The Workbench template can either modify or extend the parameters defaulted from
each referenced Desktop Channel. Selecting a single channel with the template open in
View mode displays the parameters and values for the channel; selecting a channel
with the Template in Edit mode allows the parameter values to be changed and
parameters to be added or deleted. If, for example, a Workbench template is being
established for a specific department's users, settings like the news headline category
can be adjusted in the Workbench Template to a value that is more appropriate for
those users than the default set at the Channel level.
There is one default template for buy-side users and one for sell-side users. These
templates can be identified by the Default Buyer Page attribute or the Default Seller
Page attribute, respectively.
Information from the Desktop Channel objects assigned to a Workbench template is
copied to the Template. Similarly, when an individual user's Workbench Configuration is
created from the Workbench template, the template information is copied to the
Workbench Configuration. See User Workbench configurations for a description of
how changes to Workbench templates need to be handled in order to insure that they
are appropriately propagated to all users.

For information about Workbench pages, see Workbench Page.

This section describes how to create and edit Workbench pages and Workbench page
templates in Setup.

Related Topics
Creating a Workbench page in Setup
Editing a Workbench page in Setup
Creating a Workbench page template
Editing a Workbench page template
Creating a Workbench page in the Workbench
Editing a Workbench page in the Workbench

1408 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Sharing a Workbench page

Setting a Workbench page layout
Field help for Workbench template Layout page
Setting up CPO Central
User Workbench configurations
Query and report Workbench channels

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1409

Workbench Setup System Setup

Creating a Workbench page in Setup

A Workbench page is a page that appears on a user’s Workbench. Each Workbench
page shows a number of channels, and each user can have multiple Workbench pages.

To create a Workbench page:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workbench section of System Setup, select Workbench Page from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Workbench Page List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, fill in general information fields and those under Properties.
This includes specifying whether the page will be visible to buyers, suppliers, or
both buyers and suppliers.
Note: You can use the Purpose field to indicate that this is a category-specific or
supplier-specific Workbench page.
5 Optionally, share the page with coworkers or suppliers by adding collaborators. For
details, see Sharing a Workbench page.
6 Click the Layout tab to add a layout to the Workbench page. For details, see
Setting a Workbench page layout.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also create and edit a basic personal Workbench page directly in the
Workbench.

Related Topics
Workbench Page
Editing a Workbench page in Setup
Creating a Workbench page template
Editing a Workbench page template
Creating a Workbench page in the Workbench
Editing a Workbench page in the Workbench
Sharing a Workbench page
Setting a Workbench page layout
Field help for Workbench template Layout page
Setting up CPO Central
User Workbench configurations
Query and report Workbench channels

1410 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Editing a Workbench page in Setup

A Workbench page is a page that appears on a user’s Workbench. Each Workbench
page shows a number of channels, and each user can have multiple Workbench pages.

To edit a Workbench page:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workbench section of System Setup, select Workbench Page from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Workbench Page List page, select All Workbench Pages, All Inactive
Workbench Pages, or My Workbench Pages from the drop-down list and click the
page to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
Note: You can use the Purpose field to indicate that this is a category-specific or
supplier-specific Workbench page.
6 Optionally, add or remove the collaborators who share the page. For details, see
Sharing a Workbench page.
7 Click the Layout tab to edit the Workbench page layout. For details, see Setting a
Workbench page layout.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also create and edit a basic personal Workbench page directly in the
Workbench.

Related Topics
Workbench Page
Creating a Workbench page in Setup
Creating a Workbench page template
Editing a Workbench page template
Creating a Workbench page in the Workbench
Editing a Workbench page in the Workbench
Sharing a Workbench page
Setting a Workbench page layout
Field help for Workbench template Layout page
Setting up CPO Central
User Workbench configurations

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1411

Workbench Setup System Setup

Query and report Workbench channels

1412 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Creating a Workbench page template

A Workbench page template sets global default configurations for users’ Workbench
pages. A Workbench page template defines the following:
` A list of available Workbench channels. This restricts access to certain channels to
specific users or groups, based on their job functions.
` A default Workbench layout, including the default positioning of selected channels.
The user can optionally add any channels that are available in the template but not
included in the default layout.
` Locked content. This optionally restricts users’ ability to customize channel content
and layout in their Workbench pages.

To create a Workbench page template:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workbench section of System Setup, select Workbench Page from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Workbench Page List page, click Create Template.
4 On the Summary page, fill in general information fields and those under Properties.
This includes specifying whether the template will be visible to buyers, suppliers, or
both buyers and suppliers.
5 Optionally, share the template with coworkers or suppliers by adding collaborators.
For details, see Sharing a Workbench page.
6 Click the Layout tab to add a layout to the Workbench template. For details, see
Setting a Workbench page layout.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Workbench Page
Creating a Workbench page in Setup
Editing a Workbench page in Setup
Editing a Workbench page template
Creating a company
Editing a buy-side user account
Sharing a Workbench page
Setting a Workbench page layout
Field help for Workbench template Layout page
Setting up CPO Central

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1413

Workbench Setup System Setup

User Workbench configurations

Query and report Workbench channels

1414 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Editing a Workbench page template

A Workbench template sets global default configurations for users’ Workbench pages. A
Workbench page template defines the following:
` A list of available Workbench channels. This restricts access to certain channels to
specific users or groups.
` A default Workbench layout, including the default positioning of selected channels.
The user can optionally add any channels that are available in the template but not
included in the default layout.
` Locked content. This optionally restricts users’ ability to customize channel content
and layout in their Workbench pages.

Note: When you add or remove channels in a Workbench page template, these changes
are propagated to any pages that have been created with the template. No other
template changes, such as edits to the layout, are propagated to the Workbench pages.

To edit a Workbench page template:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workbench section of System Setup, select Workbench Page from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Workbench Page List page, select All Workbench Page Templates or All
Inactive Workbench Page Templates from the drop-down list and click the template
to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Optionally, add or remove the collaborators who share the template. For details,
see Sharing a Workbench page.
7 Click the Layout tab to edit the Workbench page template layout. For details, see
Setting a Workbench page layout.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Workbench Page
Creating a Workbench page in Setup
Editing a Workbench page in Setup
Creating a Workbench page template
Creating a company
Editing a buy-side user account
Sharing a Workbench page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1415

Workbench Setup System Setup

Setting a Workbench page layout

Setting up CPO Central
Field help for Workbench template Layout page
User Workbench configurations
Query and report Workbench channels

1416 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Sharing a Workbench page

You can share a Workbench page so that it appears on the Workbench of a coworker, a
group of coworkers, a company within your enterprise, an individual supplier contact,
or a supplier company.
When you edit a shared Workbench page, these changes are seen by all users sharing
the page.

To share a Workbench page:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workbench section of System Setup, select Workbench Page from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Workbench Page List page, select All Workbench Pages, All Inactive
Workbench Pages, or My Workbench Pages from the drop-down list and click the
page to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 On the Summary page under Collaborators, click one of the following buttons:
n Add User Account
n Add Group
n Add Company
n Add Contact
n Add Vendor
6 Check the box for an individual, group, or company. You can check more than one
box to share the page with multiple collaborators.
7 Click OK.
8 On the Summary page under Collaborators, optionally select a new role from the
Role drop-down list.
Note: The role determines the collaborator’s access to the page. Access privileges
appear in the Role Access column.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Workbench Page
Creating a Workbench page in Setup
Editing a Workbench page in Setup
Creating a Workbench page template
Creating a company

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1417

Workbench Setup System Setup

Editing a buy-side user account

Setting a Workbench page layout
Setting up CPO Central
Field help for Workbench template Layout page
User Workbench configurations
Query and report Workbench channels

1418 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Setting a Workbench page layout

When you edit a Workbench page layout, you can specify the column configuration,
select the channels to appear in each column, and add and remove channels from the
page.

To edit a Workbench page layout:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workbench section of System Setup, select Workbench Page from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Workbench Page List page, select All Workbench Pages, All Inactive
Workbench Pages, or My Workbench Pages from the drop-down list and click the
page to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
1 Click the Layout tab.
2 Select a layout option from the drop-down list.
3 Under Channel Configurations, click one of the following buttons:
n Add to Column 1
n Add to Column 2
n Add to Column 3
4 In the dialog box, check the box for each channel to appear in the selected column.
You can add a channel that does not appear on the Workbench page by default by
checking its box.
5 Click OK.
6 To add channels to other columns, repeat steps 2 through 4.

7 To remove a channel from the Workbench page, click its Trashcan icon .
8 Optionally, reorder channels.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Workbench Page
Creating a Workbench page in Setup
Editing a Workbench page in Setup
Creating a Workbench page template
Creating a company
Editing a buy-side user account

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1419

Workbench Setup System Setup

Sharing a Workbench page

Setting up CPO Central
Field help for Workbench template Layout page
User Workbench configurations
Query and report Workbench channels

1420 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Setting up CPO Central

CPO Central is a “splash page” that a CPO sees immediately after logging into
Frictionless SRM. This page provides a comprehensive executive dashboard, giving the
CPO a snapshot of purchasing activity and displaying a number of reports.
CPO Central splash pages are typically created by the Enterprise Manager. You can
create multiple CPO Central splash pages. Each splash page is represented by a tab on
the CPO Central Workbench.

To set up CPO Central:

1 Create a Workbench page, following the procedures in Creating a Workbench
page in Setup.
2 On the Workbench Page Summary page, check the CPO Splash Page box.
3 Share the page with by adding collaborators. For details, see Sharing a
Workbench page.
Note: Typically, CPO Central users will be part of a group. Add this group to the
collaborator list to share the splash page.
4 Click the Layout tab to add a layout to the splash page. For details, see Setting a
Workbench page layout.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
6 Repeat steps 1 - 5 for each CPO Central splash page to create.

Note: To see the splash page, each of the users or group members you added to the
collaborator list must have the Show CPO Central box checked on the Account
Properties page of the User Account document. For details about this page, see Field
help for User Account: Account Properties page.

Related Topics
Workbench Page
Creating a Workbench page in Setup
Editing a Workbench page in Setup
Creating a Workbench page template
Editing a Workbench page template
Creating a Workbench page in the Workbench
Editing a Workbench page in the Workbench
Sharing a Workbench page
Setting a Workbench page layout
Field help for Workbench template Layout page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1421

Workbench Setup System Setup

User Workbench configurations

Query and report Workbench channels

1422 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Field help for Workbench template Layout page

The Layout page for a Workbench template provides options that are not available on
the Workbench page Layout tab.

The following provides help for fields that are specific to the Workbench template
Layout page.
Fixed Layout: This setting affects the Workbench layout. Frictionless SRM supports
three possible workbench layouts: three thin channels, a wide channel on the left with a
thin channel on the right, or a thin channel on the left with a wide channel on the right.
Check the Fixed Layout box to prevent the layout specified in the template from being
changed by individual users.

After adding a channel to the Layout page, click the Edit icon to edit the following
fields.
Required: This setting affects the individual channel. Check the Required box to
prevent individual users from removing it from their Workbench configurations.
Fixed Parameters: This setting affects the individual channel. Check the Fixed
Parameters box to prevent individual users from modifying the parameters for that
channel on the Workbench. This field locks in the values defaulted to the Workbench
Template from the Desktop Channel, and possibly modified or extended on the
template, preventing any end user changes. This is analogous (and preferred) to
setting the Edit URL field in the Desktop Channel to noedit.

Related Topics
Workbench Page
Creating a Workbench page in Setup
Editing a Workbench page in Setup
Creating a Workbench page template
Creating a company
Editing a buy-side user account
Sharing a Workbench page
Setting a Workbench page layout
Setting up CPO Central
User Workbench configurations
Query and report Workbench channels

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1423

Workbench Setup System Setup

User Workbench configurations

The first time a user logs in, the user’s personal Workbench Configuration is created
from the assigned Workbench Template. By clicking the Edit Workbench Layout
button in the Workbench, the user can make the following changes:
` If the Workbench Template does not specify Fixed Layout, the user can select a
different column configuration.
` The user can remove any channels not marked as Required in the Workbench
Template.
` The user can relocate any channels not marked as Fixed Position in the Workbench
Template.
` The user can add channels that are available in the Workbench Template.
` The user can modify existing parameters for a channel, or add/remove parameters
for a channel, if the channel is not marked as Fixed Parameters in the Workbench
Template.
On each subsequent login, Frictionless SRM checks to see if the Workbench Template
has been modified since the creation of the user's Workbench Configuration. If the
Workbench Template has been modified, the user's Workbench Configuration is
recreated based on the template.
Desktop Channel objects are not updated automatically. If changes are made to the
Channel object after the creation of Workbench Templates, the Template must be
updated manually by removing and reinserting the updated Desktop Channels to pick
up the changes.
To determine whether a Workbench Template has been modified, changes that a user is
allowed to make are ignored. These include:
` Changing the column layout, unless the Workbench Template now selects Fixed
Layout.
` Removing channels, unless they are specified as Required on the Workbench
Template.
` Adding channels, except those that are not present in the modified Workbench
Template.
` Moving channels, except those that are specified as Fixed Position on the
Workbench Template.
` Changing parameters, except those that are marked as Fixed Parameters on the
Workbench Template. There are some specific channel parameter exceptions for
standard system channels which are ignored even when Fixed Parameters are set:
an internal Channel ID parameter for the Links channel, the Base Currency for the
Currency Exchange Channel, and the Category on the Industry News Channel.
When creating Workbench Templates, use the Fixed Parameters setting for channels as
often as appropriate. Otherwise, if changes are made to the underlying Desktop

1424 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Channel parameter settings, not only must the Channel be manually removed and
reinserted on the Workbench Template, but it must also be manually removed and
reinserted on each user's Workbench Configuration.

Related Topics
Workbench Page
Creating a Workbench page in Setup
Editing a Workbench page in Setup
Creating a Workbench page template
Creating a company
Editing a buy-side user account
Sharing a Workbench page
Setting a Workbench page layout
Field help for Workbench template Layout page
Setting up CPO Central
Query and report Workbench channels

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1425

Workbench Setup System Setup

Query and report Workbench channels

Report-based channels are a very effective way of developing custom Workbench
content channels without developing Java code. A system or Workbench template can
include as many report channels as necessary, where each channel executes a specific
query to render its content. The flexibility of queries to present system and external
data allows this approach to cover many custom channel requirements. In fact, many
of the standard system channels are implemented in this way.

The first step in creating a query-based channel is to create the underlying Query
Definition and a Query Group containing it. (For details, see Queries and Reports.)
Use the following guidelines in developing queries targeted as channels:
` Use the Description field in the Query Definition, not in the Query Group, when
the channel is rendered by a single query. This is the case in the example above,
where Project Status Summary is the description for the Query Definition. If the
Description in the Query Group is used, the value is displayed above the heading
row of the results display, using more vertical real estate.
` Carefully manage the result field widths for the result columns, specifying width
settings in pixels instead of inches to insure a tight fit within the channel frame.
` Limit the maximum number of rows returned by the query to a small number, to
protect the vertical layout of the Workbench page. Then create a copy of the query
that potentially includes more columns of data, uses more horizontal space for
columns that can have wider values, and uses paging rather than limiting the total
number of rows returned. This second query also goes in a separate query group,
and is configured (see detailQueryGroupName below) as the MORE link for the
channel.
` For the cleanest UI, avoid prompting for parameters in channel queries. Use tokens
like <%CURRENT_USER_ID%> to tailor results to a specific user without prompting
for parameters.
` If the results include a link to a business object, as the example above does for
Projects, consider using an icon to represent the link, with the text name displayed
as flyover text, to minimize horizontal space requirements.

1426 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

` If the query contains drill-down links based on Internal Page column result types,
be sure to use the <%REQUEST_PAGE_PATH%> token so that the links work as
well from the portal page as they do from the MORE page.
Query-based channels have the following three parameters:

Parameter Usage

queryGroupName This parameter identifies the internal name of the Query Group
supplying the content for the channel.
detailQueryGroupName This parameter identifies the internal name of the Query Group
supplying the content for the MORE link for the channel.
cacheResults This parameter is an important performance consideration. If the data
in the report is unlikely to change during a user's session, consider
setting this to TRUE. The query will only execute once by default, the
first time the user sees the Workbench page, and will subsequently
render the cached results. If the data is more dynamic, set this to
FALSE and the query will execute each time the Workbench page is
refreshed.

Note that if cached results are used, the channel display is updated as shown below to
include a button requesting a manual refresh of the results, replacing the cached copies
for future refreshes of the Workbench page, and a prompt indicating when the results
were generated (which can be quite different from when the overall page is generated,
since they are cached). If it is appropriate, select cached results.

Finally, for the Edit URL on the channel, specify editreports_summary if end users
need to modify the parameters to the report, or specify noedit if they do not.

Related Topics
Workbench Page
Creating a Workbench page in Setup
Editing a Workbench page in Setup
Creating a Workbench page template
Creating a company
Editing a buy-side user account

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1427

Workbench Setup System Setup

Sharing a Workbench page

Setting a Workbench page layout
Field help for Workbench template Layout page
Setting up CPO Central
User Workbench configurations

1428 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Page Manager
Page Manager enables you to reorder, hide, and show Workbench pages.

Note: You can also manage Workbench pages using the Manage link in the Workbench.

This section describes how to manage Workbench pages in Setup.

Related Topics
Reordering items in a list
Managing Workbench pages in Setup
Managing Workbench pages in the Workbench
Hiding or showing a Workbench page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1429

Workbench Setup System Setup

Managing Workbench pages in Setup

Managing your Workbench pages includes reordering, hiding, and showing the pages.

To manage Workbench pages:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workbench section of System Setup, select Page Manager from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Summary page, reorder your Workbench pages.
4 Hide or show Workbench pages. For details, see Hiding or showing a Workbench
page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also manage Workbench pages using the Manage link in the Workbench.

Related Topics
Page Manager
Reordering items in a list
Managing Workbench pages in the Workbench
Hiding or showing a Workbench page

1430 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Global Discussion Manager

Global Discussion Manager enables you to edit the Global Discussions channel, which
supports discussions that are unrelated to a specific sourcing document.

Note: You can also work with the Global Discussions channel directly in the Workbench.

This section describes how to manage global discussions in Setup.

Related Topics
Creating a Global Discussion Manager
Editing a Global Discussion Manager
Creating a discussion thread in the Global Discussions channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1431

Workbench Setup System Setup

Creating a Global Discussion Manager

Global Discussion Manager enables you to edit the Global Discussions channel, which
supports discussions that are unrelated to a specific sourcing document.

To create a Global Discussion Manager:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workbench section of System Setup, select Global Discussion Manager from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Global Discussion Manager List page, click Create.
4 On the New Global Discussion Manager page, fill in the fields.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
6 To add forums to the new Global Discussion Manager, click the Edit button in the
toolbar.
7 Click New Forum and add the forum.

Related Topics
Global Discussion Manager
Editing a Global Discussion Manager
Creating a discussion thread in the Global Discussions channel

1432 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workbench Setup

Editing a Global Discussion Manager

Global Discussion Manager enables you to edit the Global Discussions channel, which
supports discussions that are unrelated to a specific sourcing document.

To edit a Global Discussion Manager:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workbench section of System Setup, select Global Discussion Manager from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Iframe Configuration List page, click the Global Discussion Manager to edit.
4 On the Global Discussion Manager page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.

6 Click the Edit icon for a forum to edit, or click New Forum to add a forum.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can also work with the Global Discussions channel directly in the Workbench.

Related Topics
Global Discussion Manager
Creating a Global Discussion Manager
Creating a discussion thread in the Global Discussions channel

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1433

Scheduled Tasks System Setup

Scheduled Tasks
Scheduled tasks are automatic tasks that the system runs at specified intervals. This
section describes how to create and edit scheduled tasks in Frictionless® SRM.

Field Help for the Scheduled Task page

The following provides field help for some fields on the Scheduled Task page.

Run Daily: The task will either Every Day, on Weekends, or on Weekdays. The
execution time is relative to the original start time.

Run Weekly: By default, the task will run once per week, relative to the original start
time.
If the On These Days option is selected, the task will run multiple times each week,
once on each of the selected days of the week, relative to the original start time.

Run Monthly: By default, the task will run once per month (based on a yearly
schedule), relative to the original start date.
If the On These Days option is selected, the task will only run on the selected day or
days. For example, if the task is scheduled to run monthly, starting on Wednesday,
June 1, 2005, but only Saturday and Sunday are selected, after the initial execution the
next run time will be Saturday, July 2, 2005.
If the On These Months option is selected, the task will only run in the selected
months. For example, if only January is selected, the task will only run once a year, in
January.

Related Topics
Creating a scheduled task
Editing a scheduled task type

1434 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Scheduled Tasks

Scheduled Tasks
Scheduled tasks are automatic tasks that the system runs at specified intervals.
You create a scheduled task based on a scheduled task type. There are three default
scheduled task types:
` Report Execution Task
` Report Results Cleanup Task
` Data Import Monitor

This section describes how to create and edit a scheduled task.

Related Topics
Creating a scheduled task
Creating a Report Execution Task
Creating a Report Results Cleanup Task
Creating a Data Import Monitor Task
Field help for the Data Import Monitor scheduled task

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1435

Scheduled Tasks System Setup

Creating a scheduled task

Scheduled tasks are automatic tasks that the system runs at specified intervals.
You create a scheduled task based on a scheduled task type. There are three default
scheduled task types:
` Report Execution Task
` Report Results Cleanup Task
` Data Import Monitor

For information on creating a task based on a specific type, see the individual Help
topics for these tasks.

To create a scheduled task:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Scheduled Tasks section of System Setup, select Scheduled Tasks from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Scheduled Task List page, click Create.
4 In the Create dialog box, select a document type and click Create.
5 On the Scheduled Task page, fill in the fields with scheduled task information.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To edit a scheduled task, click the task name on the Scheduled Task List page,
and then click the Edit button in the scheduled task.

Related Topics
Scheduled Tasks
Creating a Report Execution Task
Creating a Report Results Cleanup Task
Creating a Data Import Monitor Task
Field help for the Data Import Monitor scheduled task
Editing a scheduled task type

1436 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Scheduled Tasks

Creating a Report Execution Task

The report execution task generates a report in the background at a specified interval.

To create a report execution task:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Scheduled Tasks section of System Setup, select Scheduled Tasks from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Scheduled Task List page, click Create.
4 In the Create dialog box, select a Report Execution Task and click Create.
5 On the Scheduled Task page, fill in the fields with information, including the
frequency, start date and start time of the report execution.

6 Click the Edit icon for Advanced Configuration Properties.

7 On the Summary page, click the Lookup icon , select the report to execute, and
click OK.
8 From the Query Server Event Action drop-down list, select the server event that
will accompany the report execution. Options are as follows:
n None: No event occurs
n Alert: Sends an alert to the creator’s Workbench
n PDF: Emails a PDF version of the report to the addresses entered in the Mail
Recipients field
n CSV: Emails a CSV version of the report to the addresses entered in the Mail
Recipients field
n Integration Export: Adds a CSV version of the report to the directory
specified in the Export Path field
n Excel: Emails an XLS version of the report to the addresses entered in the Mail
Recipients field
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Scheduled Tasks
Creating a Report Results Cleanup Task
Creating a Data Import Monitor Task
Field help for the Data Import Monitor scheduled task
Editing a scheduled task type

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1437

Scheduled Tasks System Setup

Creating a Report Results Cleanup Task

The report results cleanup task performs periodic report results cleanup. It removes all
report results that were generated as a result of an ALERT option, and which have been
stored in the database more than 90 days.

To create a report results cleanup task:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Scheduled Tasks section of System Setup, select Scheduled Tasks from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Scheduled Task List page, click Create.
4 In the Create dialog box, select a Report Results Cleanup Task and click Create.
5 On the Scheduled Task page, fill in the fields with information, including the
frequency, start date and start time of the report results cleanup.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Scheduled Tasks
Creating a Report Execution Task
Creating a Data Import Monitor Task
Field help for the Data Import Monitor scheduled task
Editing a scheduled task type

1438 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Scheduled Tasks

Creating a Data Import Monitor Task

The data import monitor task monitors a directory on a local or FTP server for new data
uploads, in the form of CSV files, and imports the data at a specified interval.

To create a data import monitor task:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Scheduled Tasks section of System Setup, select Scheduled Tasks from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Scheduled Task List page, click Create.
4 In the Create dialog box, select Data Import Monitor and click Create.
5 On the Scheduled Task page, fill in the fields with information, including the
frequency, start date and start time of the data import monitor.

6 Click the Edit icon for Advanced Configuration Properties. For details, see
7 In the Data Import Task Configuration dialog box, under Data Storage, select a
Data Location (Local Directory or FTP).
8 Fill in the fields with directory and other information about the data location you
selected.
9 Under Notification, select receipt and completion notification types.
10 Click OK.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Scheduled Tasks
Creating a Report Execution Task
Creating a Report Results Cleanup Task
Field help for the Data Import Monitor scheduled task
Editing a scheduled task type

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1439

Scheduled Tasks System Setup

Field help for the Data Import Monitor scheduled task

Scheduled tasks are automatic tasks that the system runs at specified intervals.
Scheduled task types are provided by default. You can edit these default types but you
cannot create new types.
The Data Import Monitor scheduled task type monitors a directory for new data uploads
(CSV files) and automatically imports them.

The following provides help for some fields on the Scheduled Task page for the Data
Import Monitor scheduled task.

Advanced Configuration

Click the Edit icon under Advanced Configuration Properties to edit the following
fields.

Data Storage

Data Location: Select the location where the data is stored, either in a Local
Directory or FTP. FTP is recommended.

FTP Information: This set of fields is displayed if you select FTP for Data Location.
` Requires Authentication: If selected, an FTP user name and password must be
provided in the fields that appear. Otherwise, an anonymous login is used.
` FTP Host: Type the host name or IP address of the FTP server. (FTP URLs are not
supported.)
` FTP User: Type an FTP user name for authentication. This field appears only if
Requires Authentication is selected.
` FTP Password: Type an FTP password for authentication. This field appears only if
Requires Authentication is selected.
` Remote Directory: Type the name of the directory on the FTP server where the
data is stored. It is relative to the ftp root. (/)
` Duplicate Data Strategy: Select the strategy to be used to avoid importing the
same data multiple times. Choose one of the following options:
n Always import data that exist on ftp server: Any data found on the FTP
server is imported. The import task will leave the data on the FTP server when
it is complete. If the data is there during the next check, it will be imported
again.
n Delete data from ftp server after downloading: The importer will delete
the data from the FTP server after it has been imported. The FTP administrator
is responsible for granting delete permissions.

1440 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Scheduled Tasks

n Keep track of ftp data and only download it once: The importer will keep a
record of all data that is imported and only re-import data from the FTP server
if its timestamp or file size changes.

Upload Directory: Type the name of the directory that is actively monitored by the
import daemon. All files here are assumed to be valid import files.
Queue Directory: Type the name of the directory to which the daemon will move the
data while it is being processed. The contents of this directory should not be touched.
Archive Directory: Type the name of the directory to which the data will be moved for
archival. When the daemon is finished importing, it will compress the data and move it
to this directory.

Notification

Receipt Notice Type: Indicate whether and how a notification should be sent when
new data arrives for processing. You can select None, Desktop Alert, or Email.
Completion Notice Type: Indicate whether and how notification should be sent when
the import process completes. You can select None, Desktop Alert, or Email.

Notification User: Click the Lookup icon to select the user to send a receipt
notice or completion notice.
Notification Email: Indicates the email address of the user selected for the
Notification User field.

Related Topics
Scheduled Tasks
Creating a scheduled task
Creating a Report Execution Task
Creating a Report Results Cleanup Task
Creating a Data Import Monitor Task
Editing a scheduled task type

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1441

Scheduled Tasks System Setup

Scheduled Task Types

Scheduled tasks are automatic tasks that the system runs at specified intervals.
Scheduled task types are provided by default and can only be viewed, not created or
edited.
Scheduled task types include the following:
` The Report Execution Task executes a report in the background.
` The Report Results Cleanup Task performs periodic report results cleanup.
` The Data Import Monitor monitors a directory for new data uploads (CSV files)
and automatically imports them.

This section describes how to view a scheduled task type.

Related Topics
Editing a scheduled task type

1442 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Scheduled Tasks

Editing a scheduled task type

Scheduled tasks are automatic tasks that the system runs at specified intervals.
Scheduled task types are provided by default. You can edit these default types but you
cannot create new types.

To edit a scheduled task type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Scheduled Tasks section of System Setup, select Scheduled Task Types from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Scheduled Tasks List page, select All Scheduled Task Types or All Inactive
Scheduled Task Types and click the task type to view. You see the Scheduled Task
Type page.
4 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Scheduled Task Types

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1443

Configuration System Setup

Configuration
This section describes the configuration options in System Setup.

Related Topics
Extension Definition
Extension Reference Types
Directory Configuration
Cluster Configuration
System Properties
Integration API
Mail Message Templates
Mail Configurations
Enterprise Dictionary Words
Cache Configuration

1444 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Extension Definition

Define
Define Define Define Define
Numbering
Cluster Context Extensions Accounts
Tables

System Setup Data Enterprise Master Data

Installed as System Administrator Installed as Enterprise Administrator

Extensions are data fields you can add to sourcing documents or data records. They can
be used to gather and store data that is not collected by default. You can create reports
or queries to work with this additional data. Extensions allow for unlimited
customization of Frictionless® SRM to enable you to meet your enterprise’s specific
needs.
Extensions provide a system-wide mechanism for extending Frictionless SRM business
objects with implementation-specific properties. For example, one implementation
might require that each Vendor object track the last date that the Vendor's
non-discrimination policies were certified. Another might require that each Vendor
object track a list of ISO certifications. Historically, implementers have achieved this
level of customization by modifying the schema and code of an application product,
introducing material issues that must be revisited with each subsequent release
upgrade. Frictionless SRM provides the flexibility to extend without the requirement to
modify the product code or schema. This enables the customization to meet the
implementation requirements without increasing the cost of subsequent release
upgrades.
In addition to tracking implementation-specific data fields, extensions can be combined
with two other Frictionless SRM customization features - Query Definitions and Value
List Types and Values - to enable additional mechanisms for organizing documents.
For example, a value list might be defined with codes identifying a specific
categorization of sourcing events. An extension attribute containing a required value
list value from the new list could then be added to Auction and RFx sourcing
documents. Finally, a query could be developed for searching or sorting available
sourcing documents based on the new extension value.
Many types of extensions are supported, including text fields, numbers, checkboxes,
drop-down lists, and object references.

Note: The lack of sell-side visibility validation is a known limitation with respect to
extensions. It is recognized that it is possible to create extensions for the sell-side which
cannot be viewed or edited, due either to security considerations or to lack of
accessibility, given the absence of sell-side pickers.

This section describes how to create and edit an extension definition.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1445

Configuration System Setup

Related Topics
Extension Definition
Creating an extension definition
Editing an extension definition
Field help for extension definition: Extension page
Field help for extension definition: Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Extension Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Default Value page
Field help for extension definition: Collection List page

1446 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Creating an extension definition

Extensions are data fields you can add to sourcing documents or data records. They can
be used to gather and store data that is not collected by default. You can create reports
or queries to work with this additional data. Extensions allow for unlimited
customization of Frictionless® SRM to enable you to meet your enterprise’s specific
needs.
Many types of extensions are supported, including text fields, numbers, checkboxes,
drop-down lists, and object references.

To create an extension definition:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Extension Definition from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Extension Definition List page, click Create.
4 On the Extension page, fill in the fields. For details, see Field help for extension
definition: Extension page.
5 Click the Attributes tab.
6 Click Add to add an attribute. For details, see Field help for extension
definition: Attributes page.
7 On the Extension Attributes page, fill in the fields to define the extension field. For
details, see Field help for extension definition: Extension Attributes page.
8 Click the Default Value tab.
9 Fill in the fields for the default value. For details, see Field help for extension
definition: Default Value page.
10 If you checked the Use as collection member box on the Extension Attributes
page, click the Collection Information tab that was created.
11 Fill in the fields. For details, see Field help for extension definition: Collection
List page.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
13 On the Attributes page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: Extension definitions are statically cached. Changes may not be immediately
affect the creation of new objects. After a period of time, the cache will refresh and the
change will be visible. You can also use the Cache tab on the System Information page
to force an immediate refresh of the Extension Definition cache.

Note: It can be useful to develop queries that select or filter on extension data. These
two customization features provide a powerful capability to extend the Frictionless SRM

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1447

Configuration System Setup

product. See Query Definitions for information about creating queries that incorporate
extension values.

Related Topics
Extension Definition
Editing an extension definition
Field help for extension definition: Extension page
Field help for extension definition: Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Extension Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Default Value page
Field help for extension definition: Collection List page

1448 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Editing an extension definition

Extensions are data fields you can add to sourcing documents or data records. They can
be used to gather and store data that is not collected by default. You can create reports
or queries to work with this additional data. Extensions allow for unlimited
customization of Frictionless® SRM to enable you to meet your enterprise’s specific
needs.
Many types of extensions are supported, including text fields, numbers, checkboxes,
drop-down lists, and object references.

To edit an extension definition:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Extension Definition from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Extension Definition List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Extension Definitions by Name, search
for the definition to edit, and click the definition.
n From the drop-down list, select All Extension Definitions or All Inactive
Extension Definitions and click the definition to edit.
4 On the Extension page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields. For details, see Field help for extension definition: Extension
page.
6 Click the Attributes tab.
7 Add or remove attributes.

8 Click the Edit icon for an attribute to edit. For details, see Field help for
extension definition: Attributes page.
9 On the Extension Attributes page, edit any fields. For details, see Field help for
extension definition: Extension Attributes page.
10 Click the Default Value tab.
11 Edit any fields for default value information. For details, see Field help for
extension definition: Default Value page.
12 If you checked the Use as collection member box on the Extension Attributes
page, click the Collection Information tab that was created.
13 Fill in the fields. For details, see Field help for extension definition: Collection
List page.
14 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
15 On the Attributes page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1449

Configuration System Setup

Note: Extension definitions are statically cached. Changes may not be immediately
affect the creation of new objects. After a period of time, the cache will refresh and the
change will be visible. You can also use the Cache tab on the System Information page
to force an immediate refresh of the Extension Definition cache.

Note: It can be useful to develop queries that select or filter on extension data. These
two customization features provide a powerful capability to extend the Frictionless SRM
product. See Query Definitions for information about creating queries that incorporate
extension values.

Related Topics
Extension Definition
Creating an extension definition
Field help for extension definition: Extension page
Field help for extension definition: Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Extension Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Default Value page
Field help for extension definition: Collection List page

1450 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Field help for extension definition: Extension page

The first step in defining a new extension definition is to identify the class of objects to
which it applies and the context in which it is relevant. While extension definitions are
stored as Enterprise-scoped objects, they contain a reference to a context. This allows
separate company contexts to have different extension definitions.
This flexibility should be considered carefully, as using different extension definitions
for different contexts precludes sharing common reports that include extension
information.

The following provides help for the fields on the Extension page.

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that the extension is inactive and unavailable for
use.
Extended Class Name: From the drop-down list, select the type of document or
record to which to add the extension field. For example, this might be a master data
object such as a time period or unit of measure, or a sourcing document such as an
auction or RFx.
Note: If you are creating an extension on a Workitem (which will be displayed in
the workflow approval/rejection dialog box), you must also create an identical
extension on the Workitem Approval Wizard and Workflow Item Completion
Request objects, to ensure that the extension value is propagated throughout the
workflow approval process.

Display Name: Click the Lookup icon to select a localized resource as a display
name for the extension. This value appears in the user interface.

Description: Click the Lookup icon to select a localized resource as a description

for the extension.

Context: Click the Lookup icon to select a context for the extension.

Related Topics
Extension Definition
Creating an extension definition
Editing an extension definition
Field help for extension definition: Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Extension Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Default Value page
Field help for extension definition: Collection List page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1451

Configuration System Setup

Field help for extension definition: Attributes page

You use the Attributes page to define, maintain and review the attributes for the
extension. A single extension definition describes all extension attributes that apply to a
given class within a given context.
` To add an attribute, click Add.

` To edit an attribute, click the Edit icon for the attribute.

For details about adding and editing attributes, see Field help for extension
definition: Extension Attributes page.

Related Topics
Extension Definition
Creating an extension definition
Editing an extension definition
Field help for extension definition: Extension page
Field help for extension definition: Extension Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Default Value page
Field help for extension definition: Collection List page

1452 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Field help for extension definition: Extension Attributes page

You use the Extension Attributes page to define the properties of an extension
attribute.

Simple and Collection List Attributes

Two types of extension attributes are supported: simple attributes and collection lists.
A simple attribute extension is a single data element from the list of supported types
shown below. For example, an ISO 9000 Certification date added to the Vendor object
would be a simple attribute. An object can be extended with one or more simple
attributes.

Extension Attribute Type Example

String This is some text

Integer 7
Decimal 7.0
Boolean True
Date Jul 14, 2002
URL www.frictionless.com
The URL value is the same as a string value. Identifying an
attribute as a URL enables the UI to display it as a link.
Date Time Jul 14, 2002 09:15:00 AM
Object Reference Acme Corporation
Value List Value Accepted
Attachment CompanyOverview.doc
Amount 100 kg
Price 100 USD
Text Long (>255 characters) text field possibly containing formatting
data and text.
Note: The Text attribute type is not supported as a
collection attribute.

A collection list allows from zero to n entries, with each entry being a named grouping
of simple attribute fields. An object can be extended with one or more collection
extensions, in addition to its simple attribute extensions. The example below shows a
Vendor object extended with a simple attribute extension, the Boolean “Annual

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1453

Configuration System Setup

Inspection”, and a collection extension, the “Inspection History” collection, in which

each entry contains a string (“Inspection Year”) and a numeric (“Inspection Score”).

For more information about collection lists, see Field help for extension definition:
Collection List page.

Field Descriptions

The following provides help for the fields on the Extension Attributes page.

Inactive (Status): Check this box to indicate that the attribute is inactive and
unavailable for use.
Use as collection member: Check this box to use the attribute as part of an
extension collection. Checking this box creates the Collection List tab. See above for a
description of simple attributes and collection list attributes.
Attribute Internal Name: Type a unique name for the attribute. This value does not
appear in the user interface.

Attribute Display Name: Click the Lookup icon to select a localized resource as a
display name for the attribute. This is the value that appears in the user interface.

Attribute Description: Click the Lookup icon to select a localized resource as a

description for the attribute.

1454 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Pre-Text: Click the Lookup icon to select a localized resource as the text to
appear before the attribute.

Post-Text: Click the Lookup icon to select a localized resource as the text to
appear after the attribute.
Display After: Type the Field ID of the field after which to display the extension. An
extension can appear on any document page after any normal field.
Required: For any extension attribute type except Attachment and Text, you can
check this box to require users to enter a value for the attribute in all cases. In some
cases, objects are created without user interaction, as in creating a duplicate of an
object or creating an RFx from a Quick RFx. Therefore, if an extension attribute is
marked Required, you must provide a default value so that creation can occur even
when the user has no opportunity to provide the extension value. See Field help for
extension definition: Default Value page for details about providing default values.
Read Only: Check to indicate that the attribute is read only.
Visibility: Select the users who can see the attribute.
Note: The lack of sell-side visibility validation is a known limitation with respect to
extensions. It is recognized that it is possible to create extensions for the sell-side
which cannot be viewed or edited, due either to security considerations or to lack of
accessibility, given the absence of sell-side pickers.

Data Type: Select the data type for the attribute.

` String: Selecting this value creates the Max String Length field.
` Decimal: If you select this value, you must provide Display Scale and Storage
Scale values on the Default Value tab to ensure that the system stores values with
a consistent number of decimal places.
` DateTime: If you select this value, you can use the Default Value tab to specify the
current date and time as the default.
` Object Reference: If you select this value, you must select a value in the Object
Reference Type field that is created.
Note: The values in the Object Reference Type list are created as Extension
Reference Types. For details on creating custom types, see Creating an
extension reference type.
` Value List: If you select this value, you must select a value in the Value List Type
field.

Max String Length: Type the maximum number of characters that can be entered in
this field. The default value is 256. String and URL attributes cannot exceed 256
characters.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1455

Configuration System Setup

Object Reference Type: Click the Lookup icon to select the class of object that is
referenced. The class must be specified in order to select a default value for this
attribute.

Value List Type: Click the Lookup icon to select the value list type that is
referenced. The type must be specified in order to select a default value for this
attribute.
Column Width: For a collection list attribute, type the width in characters for the
columns in the collection list table.

Note: After an extension attribute has been created, you cannot make changes to the
Type field, the Required field, or change between simple attribute and collection use.
This is because it would not be possible to automatically convert any data that had been
stored with the old definition. You can, however, designate an attribute as inactive by
checking the Inactive box. Once inactivated, the attribute will no longer be displayed.
If all of the attributes of a collection are inactivated, the collection is considered inactive
and the collection will no longer be displayed. Changes to extension definitions should
be stabilized before production data is created.

Related Topics
Extension Definition
Creating an extension definition
Editing an extension definition
Field help for extension definition: Extension page
Field help for extension definition: Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Default Value page
Field help for extension definition: Collection List page

1456 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Field help for extension definition: Default Value page

You use the Default Value page to specify default value options for an attribute.

The following provides help for the fields on the Extension Attributes page.

Use Default Value on Copy: Check this box to prepopulate the specified default value
in copies of existing sourcing documents that use this extension, regardless of the
value the document being copied contains for the extension.
Leave this box unchecked to use the value contained in the document as the value in
the new copy.
Use Default Value on Create: Check this box to use the specified default value as the
extension attribute value in a newly created document.
Leave this box unchecked to leave the extension field empty in a newly created
document.

Note: If either Use Default On Copy or Use Default On Create is checked, you must
indicate a default value.

The most important use of these checkboxes relates to required fields. In some cases,
objects are copied or created and saved without giving the user the opportunity to edit
data. In these cases, if extension attributes are added, and those attributes are
required, it is important to specify a default value.

Default Value: Type or select a default value for this attribute, if applicable.
Display Scale: This field appears if you selected Decimal for the Data Type value on
the Extension Attribute page. Enter the number of decimal places to be displayed for
this numeric value.
Storage Scale: This field appears if you selected Decimal for the Data Type value on
the Extension Attribute page. Enter the number of decimal places to be stored for this
numeric value.

Related Topics
Extension Definition
Creating an extension definition
Editing an extension definition
Field help for extension definition: Extension page
Field help for extension definition: Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Extension Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Collection List page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1457

Configuration System Setup

Field help for extension definition: Collection List page

You use the Collection List page to specify options for a collection list attribute. The
Collection List tab appears when you check the Use as collection member box on the
Extension Attributes page.

The following provides help for the fields on the Collection List page.

Use Existing Collection: Check this box to add the attribute to an existing collection
list. If only one extension collection is defined, the attribute will be assigned to it. If
multiple extension collections exist, use the drop-down list to select the collection to
which to assign the new attribute.

Collection Internal Name: Type a unique name for the collection list to which to
assign this attribute. This value does not appear in the user interface.

Note: Ensure that the Collection Internal Name attribute has exactly the same value
for all attributes to be assigned to the same collection. Each unique value in this field
creates a separate collection.

Collection Display Name: Click the Lookup icon to select a localized resource as
a display name for the collection list. This value appears in the user interface.

Collection Description: Click the Lookup icon to select a localized resource as a

description for the collection list. This value appears in the user interface.

Enable MultiPicker: This choice is only available for Object Reference extension
types. Check this box to enable adding multiple rows to the extension collection by
selecting multiple instances of the specified Object Reference type.

Related Topics
Extension Definition
Creating an extension definition
Editing an extension definition
Field help for extension definition: Extension page
Field help for extension definition: Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Extension Attributes page
Field help for extension definition: Default Value page

1458 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Extension definition and vendor management

Special processing is provided for extensions in the Vendor Registration and Vendor
Information Change objects. These objects are used by a supplier to request creation
(Vendor Registration) or modification (Vendor Information Change) of their Vendor
master data object.
In the basic workflow for Registration, a prospective supplier creates the Vendor
Registration to request an addition to the system, a buy-side supplier administrator
approves (or denies) the request, and on approval, a Vendor master data object is
created from the values entered on the Registration. There is a parallel workflow for
Information Change Requests.
If the Vendor Registration or Vendor Information Change objects have extension
attributes with identical names to those on the Vendor object itself, the extension
values will also be propagated when the Vendor master data object is created or
modified. This allows implementers to extend the capabilities of the Vendor registration
and management functions.

Related Topics
Extension Definition
Creating an extension definition
Editing an extension definition

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1459

Configuration System Setup

Extension definition and importing data

Extensions are often used with Master Data objects, and it is common to use the
Frictionless SRM Import capabilities to set up a system deployment by importing
master data from Microsoft® Excel spreadsheets. Extension attributes can be imported
with the system-defined attributes through the same import. For details about the
import functionality, see Import Data.
Put simply, an Excel sheet in a workbook is used to provide values to be imported for a
class of objects. Columns relate to an attribute on the object, and rows contain all the
values that relate to one instance of an object. On the sheet for Vendors, each row
corresponds to a new vendor object, and the columns in that row provide the values for
each field in that vendor object. Templates for the sheets are provided with the system.
For simple extension attributes, add a column to the Excel worksheet using the
extension attribute Internal Name as the column header.
Because a collection list extension can have n rows of data for a single object, a
different structure is necessary to support import. An additional sheet is required for
each class of objects with collection list extensions. An example is included in the
sample AutoStar deployment; see the vendor_list_extensions sheet in the
AutoStarEnterprise deployment workbook in the online Reference Guide (RG). The
following sample maps to the Inspection History covered in this workbook:

Vendor Vendor
Inspection Inspection
CLASS OBJECT COLLECTION Year Score

masterdata.Vendor Rose Manufacturing Inspection History 2000 90.5

masterdata.Vendor Rose Manufacturing Inspection History 2001 92.3
masterdata.Vendor Rose Manufacturing Inspection History 2002 89.7

The first three columns in the sheet are standard and used for any collection list
extension. The next two columns are included because this specific collection list
extension includes two attributes. If, for example, the Vendor object extension included
two collection list extensions, one with two columns and one with three columns, the
spreadsheet would need eight columns: the three standard ones, two columns for the
attributes of one collection, and three columns for the second collection extension.
Note that each row has a single COLLECTION name and so only provides values for one

1460 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

set of the data columns. The following table provides details about the use of each
column:

Column Description Example

CLASS Name of the class; use the same value as the masterdata.Vendor
Internal Object Type Column on the Configuration
tab of the spreadsheet
OBJECT Unique name of the object that this data is Rose Manufacturing
associated with; use the same value as the
external_id column from the sheet where the
object was imported
COLLECTION Use the collection internal name from the Inspection History
extension definition
VendorInspectionYear Extension attribute name; use the internal name 2002
(etc). from the attribute definition

Related Topics
Extension Definition
Creating an extension definition
Editing an extension definition

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1461

Configuration System Setup

Extension Reference Types

If you select Object Reference as the data type for an extension definition, you must
create an extension reference type and link it to the extension definition.

This section describes how to create and edit an extension reference type.

Related Topics
Creating an extension reference type
Editing an extension reference type

1462 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Creating an extension reference type

If you select Object Reference as the data type for an extension definition, you must
create an extension reference type and link it to the extension definition.

To create an extension reference type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Extension Reference Types
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Extension Reference Type List page, click Create.
4 On the Extension Type page, fill in the fields with extension reference type
information.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Extension Reference Types
Editing an extension reference type

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1463

Configuration System Setup

Editing an extension reference type

If you select Object Reference as the data type for an extension definition, you must
create an extension reference type and link it to the extension definition.

To edit an extension reference type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Extension Reference Types
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Extension Reference Type List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Extension Reference Types by Name,
search for the type to edit, and click the type.
n From the drop-down list, select All Extension Reference Types or All Inactive
Extension Reference Types and click the type to edit.
4 On the Extension Type page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Extension Reference Types
Creating an extension reference type

1464 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Directory Configuration

Frictionless® SRM users are authenticated against a directory. A Frictionless Directory

object is a logical directory mapped to a physical directory, which is typically an LDAP
implementation. The directory configuration also identifies the mapping of attributes
from the LDAP directory that are synchronized with the local Frictionless User object.

Support for Multiple Directories

A cluster configuration can support a single buy-side directory and a single sell side
directory. To support multiple directories, you must define multiple cluster
configurations. (For details, see Creating a cluster configuration.) Each
configuration will have a separate external host name.

This section describes how to create and edit a directory configuration.

Related Topics
Creating a directory configuration
Editing a directory configuration
Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page
Field help for directories: Properties page
Field help for directories: Attributes Mapping page
Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios
Directory configuration: LDAP searching operations
Directory configuration: SSL support
Directory configuration: password management
Directory configuration: sample directory configurations
Directory configuration: customizing the authentication mechanism

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1465

Configuration System Setup

Creating a directory configuration

Frictionless® SRM users are authenticated against a directory. A Frictionless Directory

object is a logical directory mapped to a physical directory, which is typically an LDAP
implementation. The directory configuration also identifies the mapping of attributes
from the LDAP directory that are synchronized with the local Frictionless User object.

To create a directory configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Directory Configuration from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Directory Configuration List page, click Create.
4 On the Directory Configuration page, fill in the fields under General Directory
Information and those under LDAP Configuration and Driver Configuration. See
Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page for details.
5 Click the Properties tab.
6 Click Add to add a property. For details, see Field help for directories:
Properties page.
7 Fill in the fields in the dialog box for New Directory Configuration Properties in New
Directory Configuration.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
9 Click the Attributes Mapping tab to map attributes from an LDAP directory.
10 Click Add to add an attribute. For details, see Field help for directories:
Attributes Mapping page.
11 Fill in the fields in the dialog box for New Directory Attribute Mapping in New
Directory Configuration.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Directory Configuration
Editing a directory configuration
Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page
Field help for directories: Properties page
Field help for directories: Attributes Mapping page
Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios
Directory configuration: LDAP searching operations
Directory configuration: SSL support

1466 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Directory configuration: password management

Directory configuration: sample directory configurations
Directory configuration: customizing the authentication mechanism

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1467

Configuration System Setup

Editing a directory configuration

Frictionless® SRM users are authenticated against a directory. A Frictionless Directory

object is a logical directory mapped to a physical directory, which is typically an LDAP
implementation. The directory configuration also identifies the mapping of attributes
from the LDAP directory that are synchronized with the local Frictionless User object.

To edit a directory configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Directory Configuration from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Directory Configuration List page, select All Directory Configurations from
the drop-down list and click the type to edit.
4 On the Directory Configuration page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields. See Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page
for details.
6 Click the Properties tab.

7 Click the Edit icon for a property to edit. For details, see Field help for
directories: Properties page.
8 Edit any fields in the dialog box for New Directory Configuration Properties in New
Directory Configuration.
9 Add or remove properties.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
11 Click the Attributes Mapping tab to edit attributes mapped from an LDAP directory.

12 Click the Edit icon for an attribute to edit. For details, see Field help for
directories: Attributes Mapping page.
13 Edit any fields in the dialog box for New Directory Attribute Mapping in New
Directory Configuration.
14 Add or remove attributes.
15 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
16 On the Directory Configuration page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Directory Configuration
Creating a directory configuration
Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page

1468 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Field help for directories: Properties page

Field help for directories: Attributes Mapping page
Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios
Directory configuration: LDAP searching operations
Directory configuration: SSL support
Directory configuration: password management
Directory configuration: sample directory configurations
Directory configuration: customizing the authentication mechanism

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1469

Configuration System Setup

Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page

The following provides help for the fields on the Directory Configuration page.

General Directory Information

External ID: Type a unique identifier for the directory. The value should not contain
non-alphanumeric characters, as it must be suitable for a URL.
Display Name: Type a display name for the directory. This value appears on a query
result page containing a short description of the directory.
Default: Check the box to indicate that this is the default directory. You must have one
default buy-side and one default sell-side directory. The default directory is used
whenever a specific directory is not indicated. For example, when importing users or
contacts from a CSV file, the default directory will be assigned to each record if the
DIRECTORY column is left blank.
The sell-side default directory is automatically assigned to new supplier-managed
contacts. Primary contacts do not have an option to select an alternate directory; the
default will always be used.
Usage: Select the activation state of the directory configuration.
` Active Buyside: Select to flag the directory as buy-side only. It is used to
authenticate activated user accounts in the database and is displayed as a valid
directory to browse in the user interface. You can select this value for more than
one directory.
` Active Sellside: Select to flag the directory as sell-side only. It is used to create
new supplier contacts and authenticate them. It is also displayed as a valid
directory in the Reassign to Directory Account drop-down list on the Contacts page
when editing a supplier. You can select this value for more than one directory.
` Inactive: Select to indicate that the directory is offline and not used for any
function, including Search.
Driver: Select a driver, which is a type of directory device.
` LDAP - iPlanet Directory Server: Select to indicate that this directory is
configured to connect to an iPlanet (Sun ONE) Directory server and that it will use
built-in metadata regarding this platform. For example, it will assume that the
attribute name for static group membership is 'uniquemember'.
` LDAP SDK - Microsoft Active Directory: Select to indicate that this directory is
configured to connect to a Microsoft Active Directory (Win2000 server) and that it
will use built-in information regarding the schema (attribute names) needed for this
platform. For example, the attribute name to retrieve the value of an entry DN is
'distinguishedName'.
` File (XML): Select to indicate that this directory service does not connect to an
LDAP server but uses a local file with user information formatted in XML structure

1470 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

(a sample file is shipped with installation). This option is generally used for
demonstration, testing, and development purposes and is not available in
production mode.
` Local: Select to indicate that all user information is maintained within the SRM
database, with the exception of a small encrypted password file. This option is
generally used for demonstration, testing, and development purposes and is not
available in production mode.
Cluster: Assign a unique cluster to the directory. This defines the way that users in the
directory access the system. A buy-side directory can share a cluster with a sell-side
directory, but two or more directories with the same Usage value (buy-side or
sell-side) cannot share a cluster. Each must have its own cluster. See Creating a
cluster configuration for details on creating clusters.

LDAP Configuration
This section contains the configuration parameters needed for connection, binding,
entry searching, and attribute retrieval to and from an LDAP-compliant directory
server.

Host: Type the address or hostname of the machine running the directory server. This
field is required for all directories that use an LDAP driver.
Port: Type the port number of the LDAP service interface. For SSL support, be sure to
specify the port for encrypted connections (in most cases, it is 636). This field is
required for all directories that use an LDAP driver.
Note: This is not the port for the Administration server interface of the LDAP
directory.
Base DN: Type the root location for all searchable LDAP entries. If authentication via
search is desired (see Common Authentication Scenarios for details), the base DN is
used as the basis of the full DN of the account with which to authenticate. The base DN
also specifies the directory location for any new entries created in Frictionless SRM. This
field is required if the Browsing box is checked.
Directory Username: Type the principal name or ID of a user with administrative
privileges (permission to read and, optionally, to modify all account entries in this LDAP
directory). Specify the full DN of an administrative account, as it is specified in the
third-party directory server admin console. This field is required if the Browse Using
Stored Credentials box is checked. It should always be used for sell-side directories in
which suppliers can manage their own accounts.
Directory Password: Type the password or credential of the Directory Username.
Like all passwords in Frictionless SRM, this password is stored encrypted in the
database.
Userid Attribute: Type the attribute name or schema of the userid attribute used to
authenticate or identify a specific user. In general, user IDs in a directory server are
unique. When authentication is set to use the Search method and there is no search

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1471

Configuration System Setup

filter specified (and the Use Full DN flag control flag is not set), the system will search
the user on LDAP using the following filter: (userid=username), where username is
entered during the login attempt.
This field is required for all directories that use an LDAP driver.
Password Attribute: Type the attribute name or schema of the password attribute.
This value is used in assigning a new random password, changing or resetting an
account password, and checking to see whether a password is set. This field is required
if the system is configured to allow passwords to be expired or changed.
Base Search DN: Type the relative DN to be used by the search mechanism as the
basis for the search when it attempts to locate a user in the directory. It is also the root
tree for LDAP browsing in the user interface.
Browse Filter: Type the LDAP-compliant search filter to use for browsing the LDAP
directory on the Setup page. After submitting a keyword for browsing the LDAP
directory, this filter is applied as part of an LDAP query. This field is required if the
Browsing box is checked. See LDAP Searching Operations for more information on
configuring LDAP browsing.
Lookup Filter: Type the LDAP-compliant search filter to use to look up a user entry
during authentication and account management. See LDAP Searching Operations for
more information.
The use of a “group” objectclass in a filter is supported. The system will internally
expand the group and search its members.
Since the lookup filter is expected to return a single entry, wildcards are generally not
expected as part of the search criteria.

Driver Configuration

Authenticator: Type the name of an alternate authentication implementer. The driver

must implement the com.frictionless.api.authentication.LoginComponentIfc interface.
Features: This set of configuration switches directly affect certain user-related
functions in the system.
` Changeable Passwords: Check this box to enable the Forgot My Password field
on the Login page and the Change My Password field on the Setup page. This box
should only be checked if the Expired Passwords box is checked.
` Expired Passwords: Check this box to enable the system to expire or change
passwords when a new account is created. This box must be checked if the New
Accounts box is checked.
` New Accounts: Check this box to enable the ability to create new accounts in the
directory.
` Browsing: Check this box to display an option to browse the LDAP directory on the
Setup page and a Search LDAP button on the Contacts page for a supplier.

1472 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Controls: This set of switches acts as parameters or properties for user management
functions. See Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios for
further details on the use of these controls and their effect on directory functionality.
` SSL: Check this box to connect to the LDAP server using SSL.
` Expand Groups: Check this box for the lookup mechanism to expand any groups
encountered in the search results generated from the filter.
` Lookup via Search: This field controls how accounts are located during
authentication. Check this box for the system to assume that the record is in a
directory below the Base DN and to perform a loose search to find the entry. Leave
the box unchecked for the system to assume that the record is at a specific location
in the directory (see Use Full DN, below).
` UPN Login Names: When a directory is configured to use a Microsoft Active
Directory driver, check this box to enable the system to accept a full user principal
name (userPrincipalName) in the form of
<user-logon-name>@<active-directory-domain>. An example of such a principal
name might be: [email protected].
Be sure that the user name of the account activated in the database matches that
of the userPrincipalName.
` Use Full DN: This field controls where directory entries exist and is only applicable
if the Lookup via Search box is not checked. Check this box to use the directory
address on each SRM record (the Full DN). Leave the box unchecked for the system
to assume that the entry is located at the path specified by the Base DN, as
detailed above. This box must be checked if the Browse Using Stored
Credentials box is not checked.
` Browse Using Stored Credentials: This field controls the set of credentials that
is used to browse the directory from the user interface. Check this box to use the
stored credentials on the directory configuration. Leave the box unchecked to
challenge the user for the personal directory access credentials.

Related Topics
Directory Configuration
Creating a directory configuration
Editing a directory configuration
Field help for directories: Properties page
Field help for directories: Attributes Mapping page
Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios
Directory configuration: LDAP searching operations
Directory configuration: SSL support
Directory configuration: password management

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1473

Configuration System Setup

Directory configuration: sample directory configurations

Directory configuration: customizing the authentication mechanism

1474 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Field help for directories: Properties page

The Properties page can be used to add, remove, or modify a property.
The following provides help for the fields on the Properties page.
For each directory configuration, there is set of custom properties that can be
configured depending on the settings of features and controls. The properties included
with the system include the following.

Property Name Description Sample Value

domain_dn Defines the DN of the domain “dc=hostname,dc=company,

for the directory server. This is dc=com”
used to read directory-wide
attributes, e.g.,
maxpasswordage
ext_error_page Defines the URL for external http://host/login_error.html
login error page. This is used
when integrating with an
external authentication
mechanism.
ext_login_page Defines the URL for external http://host/login.html
login page. This is used when
integrating with an external
authentication mechanism.
passwordchangepage Specifies the URL of the http://host//pwdchng
password change page. This is
only used when integrating
with an external password
change mechanism.
passwordlength Specifies the minimum 8
number of characters for a
user password. This is used
when the attribute cannot be
retrieved from the directory.
passwordwarningpage Specifies the URL of the http://host/pwdwarning
password warning page,
which is displayed when a
password is about to expire.
This is only used when
integrating with an external
password warning
mechanism.
schema_passwordExpirationTime Defines the schema (attribute “passwordexpirationtime”
name) for the password
expiration date.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1475

Configuration System Setup

Property Name Description Sample Value

password_warning_threshold Specifies the number of days “5”

to use to calculate whether a
password is about to expire.
For example, if a password is
set to expire on July 10, 2002
and the current date is July 5,
2002, the system will issue a
warning if the value of this
property is set to 5 (or
higher).
schema_passwordExpirationFlag Custom-defined attribute in flags
directory used to flag
password expiration on initial
password reset. This value is
used by the LDAP- SDK
Microsoft Active Directory
driver.
schema_pwdexpirationwarned Retired property. No longer
used.
schema_pwdreset Retired property. No longer
used.
schema_timeformat Retired property. No longer
used.

Note: Both the schema_passwordExpirationTime and passwordchangepage properties

are required if the Changeable Passwords feature is enabled on the directory.

Related Topics
Directory Configuration
Editing a directory configuration
Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page
Field help for directories: Attributes Mapping page
Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios
Directory configuration: LDAP searching operations
Directory configuration: SSL support
Directory configuration: password management
Directory configuration: sample directory configurations
Directory configuration: customizing the authentication mechanism

1476 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Field help for directories: Attributes Mapping page

When loading an account from an LDAP directory, the system maps specific directory
attributes to corresponding fields in the SRM database. These mappings are configured
on a directory-by-directory basis.
To map an attribute from LDAP, click the Add button and select a Local ID for an SRM
attribute. The list of Local IDs also includes defined system extensions on user
accounts.
The following provides help for the fields on the Attributes Mapping page.

Standard iPlanet Mappings

Frictionless® SRM ships with standard directory mappings to iPlanet. These mappings
are as follows.

Local ID Directory ID Required

PHONE_1 telephonenumber
EMAIL mail Yes
NAME uid Yes
FIRST_NAME givenname Yes
LAST_NAME sn Yes

Standard MS Active Directory Mappings

The directory mappings for a Microsoft Active Directory are as follows.

Local ID Directory ID Required

PHONE_1 telephonenumber
EMAIL mail Yes
NAME sAMaccountName Yes
FIRST_NAME givenname Yes
LAST_NAME sn Yes

Related Topics

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1477

Configuration System Setup

Directory Configuration
Creating a directory configuration
Editing a directory configuration
Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page
Field help for directories: Properties page
Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios
Directory configuration: LDAP searching operations
Directory configuration: SSL support
Directory configuration: password management
Directory configuration: sample directory configurations
Directory configuration: customizing the authentication mechanism

1478 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios

This section describes the various authentication schemes (or modes) supported in SRM
and the corresponding settings needed to enable and configure each mode.

Search-Based
In this mode, the system conducts a search against the directory for the account with
the user name given at login time. The starting point for the search is the Base DN and
the search criteria uses an LDAP-compliant search filter specified in the Lookup Filter
setting.

Note: To allow search over multiple Base DNs, you must configure multiple directories.

Directory Property Setting

Directory Username Required, since searching will be done using the stored
credentials.
UserId Attribute Required, since the search will be performed against this
attribute.
Base DN Required. This is the starting point of the search.
Directory Password Required since searching will be done using the stored
credentials.
Lookup Filter Can be configured. If left blank, the default filters are
(uid=<%CURRENT_USER_NAME%>) for iPlanet and
(sAMAccountName=<%CURRENT_USER_NAME%>) for
Active Directory.
Lookup via Search Enabled

User-Based (or Direct)

In the user-based authentication scheme, the system directly applies the user name
and password data (entered at the login page) as the principal/credential pair for a
directory connection.
For this mode to work properly, the Full DN of a user must be stored in the account in
the SRM database. The Full DN is automatically acquired upon activating a new user
account from the Setup section or when importing user account data in a CSV file.
The following are examples of Full DN for Active Directory and iPlanet (shown with its
respective LDAP attribute name):
` Microsoft Active Directory (distinguishedName):
“cn=Buyer One,cn=users,dc=qa,dc=frictionless”

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1479

Configuration System Setup

` IPlanet Directory Server (entryDN):

“userid=seller1a,ou=people,dc=sellside,dc=frictionless,dc=com”

Directory Property Setting

Use Full DN Enabled

Lookup via Search Disabled

Related Topics
Directory Configuration
Creating a directory configuration
Editing a directory configuration
Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page
Field help for directories: Properties page
Field help for directories: Attributes Mapping page
Directory configuration: LDAP searching operations
Directory configuration: SSL support
Directory configuration: password management
Directory configuration: sample directory configurations
Directory configuration: customizing the authentication mechanism

1480 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Directory configuration: LDAP searching operations

SRM employs directory searching in two areas: Lookup and Browse. This section
discusses the difference between the two concepts and describes how to configure
filters for such search operations.

Lookup
Searching (or Lookup) occurs when attempting to find a user for authentication or
account synchronization. The starting point of the search is the Base DN and the search
criteria used is an LDAP-compliant search filter specified in the Lookup Filter setting of
the directory configuration.

Browsing
Browsing gives the user the ability, through the system's user interface, to conduct a
query against a node of a directory structure. From the Setup page, a user with a
special administrative and/or management role can browse the directory starting at the
Base DN node. The user can enter a search keyword to narrow down the results set.
The system employs the Browse Filter setting to query the directory. If browsing other
directory structures or nodes is desired, the user can select from a list of other available
directory configurations.

Support for LDAP Search Filters

The search filters used for this functionality are part of the LDAP standard used to query
the directory specifying the criteria to use in order to find the entry (lookup) or entries
(browse) to look for. An example of such a filter is as follows:
(& (objectclass=person) (| (cn=*seller*)(mail=*supplier.com*)) )

This filter could be described as follows:

Search for all entries of type person with either a common name containing seller
or an email address containing the string supplier.com.

System Tokens
SRM supports the use of system tokens within a search filter. These tokens are
replaced with their corresponding values by the system at runtime, before applying the
filter to a directory search operation. The two supported system tokens are:
` CURRENT_USER_NAME: This token is replaced with the username (or login id) of
the user currently being authenticated or already logged in.
` SEARCH_KEYWORD (for browse only): This token is replaced with the keyword
entered by the user in the browse interface at the moment of submission.
When specified in a filter, system tokens are enclosed with a <% begin tag and %> end
tag. See the following section for example filters using these tokens.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1481

Configuration System Setup

Sample Lookup Filters

To configure searching operations (lookup and browse) in the product, you should
restrict the choice of object classes to person, organization, or group (the exact naming
of these classes may vary across directory servers).
Examples of recommended filters for usage include the following.
` A filter to lookup all users in the base search tree (no group membership specified):
(&(objectclass=person)(uid=<%CURRENT_USER_NAME%>))
` A filter to lookup all users with additional inclusion of all static memberships of
group named 'fcibuyers' (applicable for an iPlanet directory):
(|(&(objectclass=person)(uid=<%CURRENT_USER_NAME%>))(&(objectclass=gro
upofuniquenames)(cn=fcibuyers)(uniquemember=<%CURRENT_USER_NAME%>)))
` A filter to lookup all users including all results from dynamic memberships (with
LDAP URL query containing 'buyer') of group named 'fcibuyers':
(|(&(objectclass=person)(uid=*<%CURRENT_USER_NAME%>*))(&(objectclass=g
roupofuniquenames)(cn=fcibuyers)(memberurl=*buyer*)))
` A filter to lookup all users including all static memberships of all groups:
(|(&(objectclass=person)(uid=<%CURRENT_USER_NAME%>))(&(objectclass=gro
upofuniquenames)(uniquemember=<%CURRENT_USER_NAME%>)))
` An Active Directory-compliant filter to return all users in group named 'fcibuyers':
(&(objectclass=group)(cn=fcibuyers))
` An Active Directory-compliant filter to return users with username of current user
inclusive with membership of group named 'fcibuyers':
(|(&(objectclass=person)(sAMAccountName=<%CURRENT_USER_NAME%>))(&(obje
ctclass=group)(cn=fcibuyers)))

Sample Browse Filters

A browse filter should include all the attributes needed to query upon. This filter can
also query for entries of type group. Two sample filters are as follows:
` A browse filter to query the directory for entries with any attribute matching the
keyword submitted:
(|(sAMaccountName=<%SEARCH_KEYWORD%>)(cn=<%SEARCH_KEYWORD%>)
(mail=<%SEARCH_KEYWORD%>)(telephoneNumber=<%SEARCH_KEYWORD%>))
` A browse filter to query the directory for entries with any attribute matching the
keyword submitted.
(|(&(objectclass=person)(|(sAMaccountName=*<%SEARCH_KEYWORD%>*)(cn=*<%
SEARCH_KEYWORD%>*)(mail=*<%SEARCH_KEYWORD%>*)))(&(objectclass=group)(c
n=fcibuyers)))

1482 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Related Topics
Directory Configuration
Creating a directory configuration
Editing a directory configuration
Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page
Field help for directories: Properties page
Field help for directories: Attributes Mapping page
Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios
Directory configuration: SSL support
Directory configuration: password management
Directory configuration: sample directory configurations
Directory configuration: customizing the authentication mechanism

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1483

Configuration System Setup

Directory configuration: SSL support

The platform supports communication with a directory service over SSL-enabled
connections. With this configuration, all communication with the directory is encrypted.
To enable SSL support for a directory configuration:
1 Set the SSL control to enabled.
2 Ensure that the port is correctly set. (In most cases, it is 636.)

Related Topics
Directory Configuration
Creating a directory configuration
Editing a directory configuration
Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page
Field help for directories: Properties page
Field help for directories: Attributes Mapping page
Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios
Directory configuration: LDAP searching operations
Directory configuration: password management
Directory configuration: sample directory configurations
Directory configuration: customizing the authentication mechanism

1484 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Directory configuration: password management

The SRM system supports password-related directory operations such as the following.
` Changing the password upon expiration or when requested by the user (as in the
case of a forgotten password).
` Interpreting the age of a password and warning the user when his or her password
is about to expire.
` Compatibility with directory password policies (e.g., the “password must change at
next logon” flag or “user cannot change password”). This offers greater
compatibility with MS Active Directory.

Note: Password changing on MS Active Directory is only supported with Frictionless

Sourcing (now SRM) version 2.0.3A and beyond. The directory must be configured to
use SSL to enable this feature. The support for password changing on MS Active
Directory is only guaranteed to work with SRM software running on Intel-based
machines running Windows OS platform (2000 or XP).

MS Active Directory Password Policies

In MS Active Directory, you can apply directory-wide security policies, which define
account and password-related variables, such as password age expiration or account
lockouts.
To configure password expiration:
1 Open the Active Directory Users and Computers program under Administrative
Tools.
2 Right-click the node with the name of the directory domain and select Properties
from the pop-up menu.
3 Click the Group Policy tab and select the Default Domain Policy.
4 Click the Edit button. You see a Group Policy window with the configuration
(Computer and User) of various security and domain settings.
5 Go to the Password Policy node under the following hierarchy: \Computer
Configuration\Windows Settings\Security Settings\Account Policies\Password Policy
6 In the right panel, double-click the Maximum Password Age and set the number
of days for which a password is valid. The system uses this value and the value of
the last date/time the password was changed to calculate the password expiration
date (sum of password last set date for the account and maximum password age of
the user's domain).

Related Topics
Directory Configuration
Creating a directory configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1485

Configuration System Setup

Editing a directory configuration

Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page
Field help for directories: Properties page
Field help for directories: Attributes Mapping page
Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios
Directory configuration: LDAP searching operations
Directory configuration: SSL support
Directory configuration: sample directory configurations
Directory configuration: customizing the authentication mechanism

1486 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Directory configuration: sample directory configurations

The following are examples of directory configurations.

Local Directory
Use this configuration when connecting to a real LDAP server is impossible,
inconvenient, or undesired.

Property Setting

External ID Enabled
Display Name Disabled
Usage Active Buyside
Driver Local
Directory Username Enter any text, such as n/a
Directory Password Enter any text, such as n/a
UID Schema No value is needed
Changeable Passwords Enabled
Expired Passwords Enabled
New Accounts Enabled
Browsing Disabled
All Controls Disabled
Properties No values are needed

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1487

Configuration System Setup

iPlanet Using Search-based Authentication

Use this configuration when connecting to an iPlanet Directory Server configured to use
a search-based authentication using stored credentials of a master user.

Property Setting

External ID dir.development.buyside
Display Name Development Buyside Directory
Usage Active Buyside
Driver LDAP - iPlanet Directory Server
Base DN ou=buyers,dc=frictionless,dc=com
Directory Username cn=Directory Manager
Directory Password Enter valid password of Master user
UserId Attribute uid
Password Attribute userpassword
Base Search DN ou=buyers,dc=frictionless,dc=com
Browse Filter (|(&(objectclass=person)(|(uid=*<%SEARCH_KEYWORD
%>*)(cn=*<%SEARCH_KEYWORD%>*)(mail=*<%SEA
RCH_KEYWORD%>*)(telephonenumber=*<%SEARCH_K
EYWORD%>*))))
Lookup Filter (&(objectclass=person)(uid=<%CURRENT_USER_NAME
%>))
Changeable Passwords Enabled
Expired Passwords Enabled
New Accounts Enabled
Browsing Enabled
Expand Groups Enabled
Lookup via Search Enabled
Browse Using Stored Credentials Enabled
Properties schema_passwordExpirationTime=passwordexpirationtim
e password_warning_threshold = 7

1488 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Active Directory Using Direct Lookup

Use this configuration when connecting to an MS Active Directory configured to use a
direct lookup authentication.

Property Setting

External ID dir.purchasing.internal
Display Name Internal Buyers Directory
Usage Active Buyside
Driver LDAP SDK - Microsoft Directory Server
Base DN cn=users,dc=domain,dc=company,dc=com
Directory Username No value is needed
Directory Password No value is needed
UserId Attribute sAMAccountName
Password Attribute userpassword
Base Search DN cn=users,dc=domain,dc=company,dc=com
Browse Filter (|(&(objectclass=person)(|(sAMAccountName=*<%SEARCH_KEYW
ORD%>*)(cn=*<%SEARCH_KEYWORD%>*)(mail=*<%SEARCH_K
EYWORD%>*))))
Lookup Filter (&(objectclass=person)(sAMAccountName=*<%CURRENT_USER_N
AME%>*))
Browsing Enabled
New Accounts Enabled
Password Expiration Enabled
Expand Groups Enabled
Use Full DN Enabled
Properties schema_passwordExpirationTime=accountExpiresdomain_dn =
dc=domain,dc=company,dc=compassword_warning_threshold = 7

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1489

Configuration System Setup

Active Directory with UPN Login Names

Use this configuration when connecting to an MS Active Directory configured to use a
direct lookup authentication via UPN (userPrincipalName, for example,
[email protected])

Property Setting

External ID dir.purchasing.buyers
Display Name Internal Buyers Directory
Usage Active Buyside
Driver LDAP SDK - Microsoft Directory Server
Base DN cn=users,dc=domain,dc=company,dc=com
Directory Username No value is needed
Directory Password No value is needed
UserId Attribute userPrincipalName
Password Attribute userpassword
Base Search DN cn=users,dc=domain,dc=company,dc=com
Browse Filter (|(&(objectclass=person)(|(sAMAccountName=*<%SEARCH_KEYWO
RD%>*)(cn=*<%SEARCH_KEYWORD%>*)(mail=*<%SEARCH_KEY
WORD%>*))))
Lookup Filter (&(objectclass=person)(userPrincipalName=<%CURRENT_USER_NAM
E%>))
Password Expiration Enabled
New Accounts Enabled
Browsing Enabled
Expand Groups Enabled
UPN Login Names Enabled
Properties schema_passwordExpirationTime=accountExpiresdomain_dn =
dc=domain,dc=company,dc=compassword_warning_threshold = 7

1490 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

iPlanet Using Group-Based Lookup

Use this configuration when connecting to an iPlanet directory configured to use a direct
lookup authentication.

Property Setting

External ID dir.purchasing.buyers.exec
Display Name Executive Buyers Directory
Usage Active Buyside
Driver LDAP - iPlanet Directory Server
Base DN ou=buyers,dc=company,dc=com
Directory Username cn=Directory Manager
Directory Password Enter password of master user
UserId Attribute uid
Password Attribute userpassword
Base Search DN ou=buyers,dc=company,dc=com
Browse Filter (|(&(objectclass=person)(|(uid=*<%SEARCH_KEYWORD%
>*)(cn=*<%SEARCH_KEYWORD%>*)(mail=*<%SEARCH_
KEYWORD%>*)))(&(objectclass=group)(cn=exec-buyers))
Lookup Filter (|(&(objectclass=person)(uid=<%CURRENT_USER_NAME%
>))(&(objectclass=group)(cn=exec-buyers)(member=<%C
URRENT_USER_NAME%>)))
Changeable Passwords Enabled
Expired Passwords Enabled
New Accounts Enabled
Browsing Enabled
Expand Groups Enabled
Lookup via Search Enabled
Browse Using Stored Credentials Enabled
Properties schema_passwordExpirationTime=passwordexpirationtime

Related Topics
Directory Configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1491

Configuration System Setup

Creating a directory configuration

Editing a directory configuration
Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page
Field help for directories: Properties page
Field help for directories: Attributes Mapping page
Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios
Directory configuration: LDAP searching operations
Directory configuration: SSL support
Directory configuration: password management
Directory configuration: customizing the authentication mechanism

1492 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Directory configuration: customizing the authentication

mechanism
Sourcing events require the collaboration of internal and external users. Providing
external users with access to enterprise applications makes security a high priority in
deploying an enterprise application.
By default, Frictionless SRM utilizes the username and password for authentication. A
login screen challenges the user for a username and password. The application
determines which LDAP directory against which to authenticate the user, and presents
the user’s credentials to the LDAP directory for authentication.
Although Frictionless SRM provides a default mechanism, the SRM application can be
configured to integrate with any security infrastructure supported by the J2EE
Application Server.
This section provides an overview of the steps involved to configure Frictionless SRM
with an external security infrastructure.

Configuring External Authentication

To enable external authentication for the Frictionless SRM application, perform the
following high level steps. Detailed descriptions of these steps are provided below.
1 Integrate the third-party authentication service into the application server.
The procedures required for this step are determined by the security product and
the application server you are integrating. Follow the steps outlined in the security
supplier's documentation to integrate their solution with the application server.
2 Enable external authentication for the directory.
Each directory configuration can specify an alternate authenticator to be used for
authentication. The ExtServletAuthentication authenticator is used to leverage the
authentication mechanism specified by the application server.
3 Declare security constraints.
Additional information can be added to the deployment descriptor (web.xml) to
specify the required security constraints.
4 Rebuild the application archive files with updated deployment descriptor.
The configure tool can be used to rebuild the application archive files.
5 Deploy the new archive on the application server.
The newly built archive files are ready for deployment to the application server.
6 Test the new authentication mechanism.

Integrating the Third-Party Authentication Service into the Application Server

The J2EE application servers provide one or more basic authentication mechanisms,
and provide mechanisms for integrating an external authentication mechanism.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1493

Configuration System Setup

However, the application server implementation determines how these mechanisms are
integrated into the server.
The actual details of this integration will depend completely on the authentication
mechanism selected and the application server with which to integrate.
For example, the WebSphere Security Center allows you to specify how users are
authenticated. Websphere allows users to be authenticated via:
` The underlying operating system registry
` Lightweight Third-Party Authentication (LTPA)

The LTPA can be used to authenticate users against an LDAP directory or a third-party
custom registry. LTPA supports both basic and certificate challenge types. The LPTA
also provides attributes to:
` Enable single-sign-on (SSO) for multiple servers within a domain.
` Enable a web trust relationship to delegate authentication to a trusted third-party
proxy server to perform authentication on behalf of the application server.
` Limit connections to SSL only.
` Expire session tokens.

Enabling External Authentication for the Directory

The authentication mechanism can be overridden on a per-directory configuration
setting. To change the configuration used on a per-directory basis, edit the directory
configuration master data object. See Editing a directory configuration for details.
The Advanced Configuration section of the directory configuration object contains an
Authenticator attribute. By default, the value of this attribute is null, indicating that
users for this directory should be authenticated by the default authentication
mechanism provided by the application.
To leverage the authentication provided by the application server, edit the document
and insert the following value in the Authenticator attribute:
com.frictionless.usermgmt.security.ExtServletAuthentication
The ExtServletAuthentication value tells the application to use the authentication
mechanism provided by the application server.

Declaring Security Constraints

The J2EE specification includes a declarative security model. This model allows the
security requirements of the application to be defined external to the application
implementation. These requirements are defined in the deployment descriptor. The
deployment descriptor (web.xml) for the Frictionless SRM application is located in
<FCI_HOMEDIR>\deploy\web.xml.
Since the default security is handled by the application, the default deployment
descriptor does not include any security constraints. In order to leverage the

1494 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

application server security, you must define the following sections to the deployment
descriptor:
` security-constraint
` login-config

Security Constraint
The security-constraint node defines the list of web resources that should be secured
via the authentication mechanism.
The auth-constraint defines a logical role that is associated with the security
constraints.
The following is an example security constraint node added to the deployment
descriptor.

<security-constraint>
<web-resource-collection>
<web-resource-name> Sourcing Users</web-resource-name>
<url-pattern>/fsbuyer/*</url-pattern>
<url-pattern>/fsvendor/*</url-pattern>
<url-pattern>/download/*</url-pattern>
<url-pattern>/charting/*</url-pattern>
</web-resource-collection>

<auth-constraint>
<role-name>Sourcing Users</role-name>
</auth-constraint>
</security-constraint>

Login Config
The login config element is used to configure the authentication method used to
authenticate users for this application. If form-based authentication is used, the
element also defines the elements required for form-based authentication.
The Login config supports three types of authentication:
` BASIC
` FORM
` CLIENT-CERT
The following is an example of the login config element:

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1495

Configuration System Setup

<login-config>
<auth-method>BASIC</auth-method>
<realm-name>Sourcing Users</realm-name>
</login-config>

Rebuilding the Application Archive

The Frictionless SRM configure tool can be used to rebuild the application archive files.
This tool is located in <FCI_HOMDIR>\bin\configure. This tool will rebuild the EAR file
using the new deployment configuration information. After the .ear file has been
rebuilt, it is ready for deployment to the application server. For details, see
Customization: Rebuilding the EAR file.
The application is now ready to be deployed to the application server and tested.

Testing the Application Login

After the authentication mechanism has been integrated into the application server,
and Frictionless SRM has been configured and deployed to support external
authentication, you are ready to log into the application.
When the user enters the URL to log into Frictionless SRM, he or she will be prompted
for credentials via the application server instead of the default Frictionless SRM login
screen. For example, if the application server is using basic authentication, the user will
be prompted with a standard web server login dialog box.
Once the user's credentials have been verified, the user will be logged into the
application and redirected to the appropriate Workbench page.

Additional Information
The following notes provide additional information that should be considered when
configuring external authentication.
` The userid used to authenticate the user must match the user's Frictionless SRM
account name.
` After the user has been authenticated, the userid must be placed in the
REMOTE_USER server variable. The Frictionless SRM application will use this ID to
locate the user's account information.
` Although Frictionless SRM allows multiple directory configurations for buy-side and
sell-side users, the application server will declare security constraints on a per web
resource basis. Currently, this requires that all directory configurations on the buy
side or sell side implement the same authentication configuration. Since the
security constraint is on the URL pattern /fsbuyer/*, all directory configurations for
the buy side should be configured to external servlet authentication.

1496 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Related Topics
Directory Configuration
Creating a directory configuration
Editing a directory configuration
Field help for directories: Directory Configuration page
Field help for directories: Properties page
Field help for directories: Attributes Mapping page
Directory configuration: common authentication scenarios
Directory configuration: LDAP searching operations
Directory configuration: SSL support
Directory configuration: password management
Directory configuration: sample directory configurations

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1497

Configuration System Setup

Cluster Configuration

Define Define
Cluster Context

System Setup Data

Installed as System Administrator

Frictionless® SRM implements a basic clustering scheme for application scaling and
load balancing. A cluster is a logical group of Frictionless SRM services. Clusters are
primarily used to define how end users access the SRM application. For example, you
might configure one cluster for buyers and another for suppliers. These two groups
normally use different hosts and authentication methods. Clusters facilitate this kind of
flexibility.
Clusters also are involved with managing performance. The clusters in Frictionless®
SRM include the ability to balance user load across all member services.
Clustering is often provided by the application server platform, for example, BEA
WebLogic or IBM WebSphere. Frictionless SRM implements a native clustering solution
for two principal reasons: to allow cluster support when deployed on application servers
that do not offer clustering, and to address conflicts that exist between application
server clustering, SSL encryption, and Frictionless SRM session management
requirements.

The System Default Cluster

A default cluster is created when the SRM software is installed. When the application
cannot determine which cluster a user is attempting to access, the user is placed in the
default cluster.
There is no single strategy for using the default cluster. Some possible scenarios
include:
` Lock Down: Create specific application clusters and deactivate the default. This
will ensure that unrecognized requests are never forwarded to an active service.
` Administration: It may be convenient to map the default cluster to a URL used
only internally by administrators. This provides administrators with a recovery path
if the configured clusters are set up incorrectly and cannot be accessed.
` Simple: Map all application contexts to the default cluster. The easiest of all
configurations, this ensures that all requests will always be mapped to a single
cluster. This is also the most limiting configuration. It is not suitable in the following
situations:

1498 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

n When using multiple sourcing contexts

n When using different network configurations for buyers and sellers
n When using more than one buy-side or sell-side LDAP directory

Note: It is almost always helpful to change the Hostname field of the default cluster.
When the product is installed, it is set to “!!DEFAULT!!”. This is a special value that
includes everything. Leaving it set to this default can hide configuration problems
because it will appear that host mapping is working correctly, even when it is not.

A cluster configuration can support a single buy-side directory and a single sell-side
directory. To support multiple directories, you define multiple cluster configurations.
For more information about directories, see Directory Configuration.

This section describes how to create and edit a cluster configuration.

Related Topics
Creating a cluster configuration
Editing a cluster configuration
Field help for cluster configuration: Cluster Info page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1499

Configuration System Setup

Creating a cluster configuration

Frictionless® SRM implements a basic clustering scheme for application scaling and
load balancing. A cluster is a logical group of Frictionless SRM services. Clusters are
primarily used to define how end users access the SRM application. For example, you
might configure one cluster for buyers and another for suppliers. These two groups
normally use different hosts and authentication methods. Clusters facilitate this kind of
flexibility.
A default cluster is created when the SRM software is installed. When the application
cannot determine which cluster a user is attempting to access, the user is placed in the
default cluster.

To create a cluster configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Cluster Configuration from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Cluster Information List page, click Create.
4 On the Cluster Info page, fill in the fields with cluster information. For detailed
information about these fields, see Field help for cluster configuration: Cluster
Info page.
5 In the Hostname Aliases table, click Add to add an alias for the host name.
6 In the dialog box, enter an alias URL and click OK.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to add additional aliases.
8 In the Cluster Members table, click Add to add a cluster member.
Note: Each cluster requires at least one member service.
9 In the dialog box, do the following:
a Enter a host name in the Hostname field. This host name is used to generate
URLs for the destination service. Do not include the port number. Be sure that
the assigned host name is visible to the user community.

b In the Service field, click the Lookup icon , select a service in the dialog
box, and click OK.
c Check the Active box.
d Click OK.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar. Cluster changes are implemented immediately
after they are saved.

Related Topics
Cluster Configuration

1500 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Editing a cluster configuration

Field help for cluster configuration: Cluster Info page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1501

Configuration System Setup

Editing a cluster configuration

Frictionless® SRM implements a basic clustering scheme for application scaling and
load balancing. A cluster is a logical group of Frictionless SRM services. Clusters are
primarily used to define how end users access the SRM application. For example, you
might configure one cluster for buyers and another for suppliers. These two groups
normally use different hosts and authentication methods. Clusters facilitate this kind of
flexibility.
A default cluster is created when the SRM software is installed. When the application
cannot determine which cluster a user is attempting to access, the user is placed in the
default cluster.

To edit a cluster configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Cluster Configuration from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Cluster Information List page, select Clusters or All Inactive Clusters and
click the cluster to edit.
4 On the Cluster Info page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields. For detailed information about the fields on this page, see Field
help for cluster configuration: Cluster Info page.

6 In the Hostname Aliases table, click the Edit icon for an alias to edit.
7 In the dialog box, edit the alias and click OK.
8 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to edit additional aliases.

9 In the Cluster Members table, click the Edit icon for a cluster member to
edit.
10 In the dialog box, edit any fields and click OK.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar. Cluster changes are implemented immediately
after they are saved.

Related Topics
Cluster Configuration
Creating a cluster configuration
Field help for cluster configuration: Cluster Info page

1502 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Field help for cluster configuration: Cluster Info page

The following provides help for some of the fields on the Cluster Info page.

System Default Cluster: Check this box to indicate that this is the default cluster for
the system.

External ID: Type a unique identifier for the cluster. This value will be used in a URL.
It should not contain spaces, and it is recommended that it include only alphanumeric
characters and no special characters.

Display Name: Type a display name for the cluster. This is the name that appears in
the user interface.

Hostname: Type the hostname that is used in the URLs with which users access the
system. This name is also used when the application generates emails.

Hostname Aliases: Click Add to create additional names that can be used to access
the same cluster. These aliases will allow users to access the cluster through the
alternate URLs, but the system will always default to the hostname for activities such as
generating emails.

Note: It is recommended that you do not give aliases and services (under Cluster
Members) identical names. If you do so, the cluster might not know where you are
supposed to end up if a session times out.

Port: Type a port for the cluster. This is an optional setting to use if users access the
cluster on one port but all services are listening on another. For example, users might
access the application using the default port (80), and then be redirected to a service
listening on port 8080. This field is usually unnecessary because this function is handled
by the proxy on the web server.
The cluster configuration assumes the default port for HTTP is 80 and the default port
for HTTPS is 443.

Settings:
` Force redirect to use SSL instead of incoming protocol: Check this box to
force SSL for all users accessing this cluster.
` External hostname is accessed via HTTP only: Check this box to generate
external links with HTTP, not HTTPS. The initial request will be HTTP and the cluster
member service will redirect the user to HTTPS. Enabling the cluster member to
explicitly redirect the user ensures that the host name in the URL can match the
server’s SSL certificate.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1503

Configuration System Setup

` Cluster can only be accessed via HTTPS: Check this box to indicate that the
cluster can only be accessed securely.
` Automatically add new services to this cluster: Check to automatically add
new services to the cluster.
` Enable load balancing on this cluster: Check to enable load balancing between
the active services in the cluster. Currently, the only way to load balance is to send
the user to the server with the lowest current user count.

Load Balancing Method: Indicates the type of load balancing used for the cluster.
Currently, only one method (Lowest Current User Count First) can be used for cluster
configurations.

Cluster Members: Click Add to add member services to the cluster. Each cluster
requires at least one member service. The member list is used to determine the actual
host to which to redirect user requests. If load balancing is enabled, users are
distributed across all available members in the cluster member list.

Related Topics
Cluster Configuration
Editing a cluster configuration
Creating a cluster configuration

1504 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Cluster configuration: example configurations

The following are examples of cluster configurations.

Single Service Cluster

The simplest cluster configuration involves only one service.

Setting Description

Cluster Identity cluster.singlemachine

Display Name Single-Machine Cluster
Hostname sourcing30.frictionless.com
Members sourcing30.frictionless.com (MyAppServer)

Multi-Service Cluster
A multi-service cluster involves at least two services. In the configuration shown below,
external requests for http://server.mydomain.com get redirected through local director
to either http://server1.mydomain.com or http://server2.mydomain.com. The
application then redirects the request back through the client as SSL requests, directly
to either server1 or server2, based on the load-balancing algorithm provided with the
cluster.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1505

Configuration System Setup

Client

Cisco Local Director

Firewall

Web Servers (SSL)

IP:196.3.3.3 IP:196.3.3.4
Name:WEBSERVER1 Name:WEBSERVER2
http://server1.mydomain.com http://server2.mydomain.com

IP:10.4.4.4
Name:MyAppServer IP:10.6.6.6
1 Name:MyAppServer2

Application Servers

1506 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Setting Description

Cluster Identity cluster.multimachine

Display Name Multi-Machine Cluster
Hostname server.mydomain.com
Enable load balancing on this cluster Selected
Force Redirect to Use SSL instead of incoming Selected
Protocol
Port 443
Members server1.mydomain.com (MyAppServer1)
server2.mydomain.com (MyAppServer2)

Related Topics
Cluster Configuration
Editing a cluster configuration
Creating a cluster configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1507

Configuration System Setup

System Properties

Properties are settings used to control the basic configuration of the Frictionless® SRM
applications. Examples of properties are the hostname of the SMTP (mail gateway)
server and the maximum size of attachments that can be uploaded by sell-side users.
Property settings are grouped by application area, with a special area reserved for
system properties. The following diagram outlines where the property settings are
stored.

fcisystem
properties
file
fcilocal
local
property
database overrides
properties
table

The primary storage for properties is in the database. These properties can be viewed
and maintained through the application as defined below.
` Some system properties are required during the system startup, before the
connection to the database is established. These properties are stored in the
fcisystem.properties file in the application config directory. These settings are
viewed and maintained using normal text editors, but should only be modified as
part of the installation process or with direct instruction from Frictionless
Commerce Technical Support.
` In many cases, multiple application servers operate against the same Frictionless
SRM database. It may be necessary to override values for a property for a specific
server. This is frequently the case in testing environments. The override settings
for any property can be placed in the fcilocal.properties file in the application config
directory.
` Some properties are read-only. These are not modifiable through the software, and
generally not documented here.

1508 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

There are three scope levels for properties:

` System properties affect the entire server or server cluster
` Enterprise properties affect the entire enterprise context
` Company properties affect a company’s context

Properties are, in general, maintained through the System Properties option in Setup.
The set of properties that you can see or edit is controlled by the scope of your user
account. If you login as the System user, you can edit System scoped properties;
logging in at the Enterprise level, you will not see those properties.
The System Property List page displays the set of properties that have already been
set. You can edit the system properties in the list and create new properties.
The following sections provide additional information for some system properties.

Mail Configuration System Properties

The following system properties are now available in the messaging set for controlling
email source information.
messaging.mail_source_policy

This property can be one of the following:

` DEFER_TO_MAILTYPE: Set the From address as specified by the mail type
configuration. For details, see Mail Configurations. To enable return receipts, this
setting must be used.
` SENDERS_COMPANY: Set the From address to the sender’s company. For
sell-side users, this is the enterprise.
` SPECIAL_ADDRESS: Set the From address, for any given email, as specified by
the messaging.force_from_address system property.
The default is SENDERS_COMPANY.
messaging.mail_reply_policy

This property can be one of the following:

` DEFER_TO_MAILTYPE: Set the Reply-to address as specified by the mail type
configuration. For details, see Mail Configurations.
` SENDERS_COMPANY: Set the Reply-to address to the sender’s company. For
sell-side users, this is the enterprise.
` SPECIAL_ADDRESS: Set the Reply-to address to any given email, as specified by
the messaging.force_reply_address system property.

The default is SENDERS_COMPANY.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1509

Configuration System Setup

To determine the rule used when setting these properties to DEFER_TO_MAILTYPE,

open the appropriate mail message template (see Mail Message Templates). The
Sender field identifies the rules used. If the Sender value is Owner, the document
owner is used. Otherwise, the Source Email attribute on the owner’s company is used.

Account Activation System Property

By default, Buyer and Supplier account activation use the same email template.
However, the system can be configured to use a separate template for buyers and
suppliers. To enable this, create the following system property:
system.mail.separate_buyer_supplier_activation

and set its value to TRUE.

After this is done, the "Account Activation [Default]" email template which was
previously used by both buyers and suppliers will now only be used by buyers, and the
new "Account Activation [Sell-Side]" template will only be used by suppliers.

Rebranding System Properties

The following system properties allow an icon/image to replace the existing

Frictionless® SRM product logo for rebranding purposes:
system.brand_logo.buyside
system.brand_logo.sellside

RFx System Properties

The following system property determines whether users can create Plain Text RFx
questions or Big Text questions (that is, questions that allow rich text characters in
vendor responses).
rfx.questions.enable_rich_text_question

If the property is set to TRUE, users can create Big Text questions and cannot create
Plain Text questions. Changing this property to Plain Text does not affect existing Big
Text questions. When importing from a CSV file, the system property will determine
whether Big Text or Plain Text questions are imported; that is, both “Big Text” and
“Plain Text” values in the Question Type column will be interpreted in the same way,
based on the system property.

Related Topics
Creating a system property
Editing a system property
Viewing all system properties

1510 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Creating a system property

Properties are settings used to control the basic configuration of the Frictionless® SRM
applications. Examples of properties are the hostname of the SMTP (mail gateway)
server and the maximum size of attachments that can be uploaded by sell-side users.
There are three scope levels for properties:
` System properties affect the entire server or server cluster
` Enterprise properties affect the entire enterprise context
` Company properties affect a company’s context
The set of properties you can see and edit in Setup is determined by your user account.
If you need to set a property and it does not appear in the list on the System Property
List page, you can create the property from the list of properties available at your scope
level. If the property you need to set does not appear in the list of available properties,
consult Frictionless® Commerce technical support.

Note: Be sure that you are logged in at the correct scope level before creating a
property or contacting technical support. All properties are not visible at all scope levels.

To create a system property:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select System Properties from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the System Property List page, click Create.
4 On the System Property page, fill in the fields with system property information.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: After making changes to properties, you must restart the server or servers, or
go to the System Information page in Setup and refresh the Properties cache on the
Cache tab.

Related Topics
System Properties
Editing a system property
Viewing all system properties

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1511

Configuration System Setup

Editing a system property

Properties are settings used to control the basic configuration of the Frictionless® SRM
applications. Examples of properties are the hostname of the SMTP (mail gateway)
server and the maximum size of attachments that can be uploaded by sell-side users.
There are three scope levels for properties:
` System properties affect the entire server or server cluster
` Enterprise properties affect the entire enterprise context
` Company properties affect a company’s context
The set of properties you can see and edit in Setup is determined by your user account.

To edit a system property:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select System Properties from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the System Property List page, select All System Properties from the drop-down
list and click the property to edit.
4 On the System Property page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
System Properties
Creating a system property
Viewing all system properties

1512 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Viewing all system properties

You can view a list of all SRM system properties, along with information about each
property.

There are three scope levels for properties:

` System properties affect the entire server or server cluster
` Enterprise properties affect the entire enterprise context
` Company properties affect a company’s context
The set of properties you can see and edit in Setup is determined by your user account.

To view all system properties:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select System Properties from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the System Property List page, select System Property Dictionary from the
drop-down list. You see a list of all system properties and their associated
information.

Related Topics
System Properties
Creating a system property
Editing a system property

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1513

Configuration System Setup

Integration API
This section describes how to modify the integration API configurations.

Related Topics
Editing an integration API configuration

1514 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Editing an integration API configuration

To edit an integration API configuration:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Integration API from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Integration API List page, select All Integration API Configurations or All
Inactive Integration API Configurations from the drop-down list and click the
configuration to edit.
4 On the Integration API page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Integration API

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1515

Configuration System Setup

Mail Message Templates

Mail templates are used to define the form and content of the email messages sent in
Frictionless® SRM. The product ships with one mail template for each mail type defined
in the system. A mail type is key, or name, used by the software to determine what
mail template to use for any given business task. You map mail message templates to
mail types in Mail Configurations.
The standard mail templates that ship with the product cannot be edited. These are
upgraded automatically when new patches are applied. Mail templates can, however,
be duplicated and customized to suite specific needs.
Any custom mail templates you create are not modified during the upgrade process.
Although this does not typically pose a problem, it is something to consider, however,
when making changes to mail content.

Mail Template Tokens

Mail templates make significant use of mail tokens when describing the message
content. Tokens are placeholders or variables that are filled in when the application
generates the email messages.
A complete list of tokens is available in the on-line Reference Guide (RG). Note that
GLOBAL tokens are for internal use and may produce unexpected results if used.
Tokens not labeled "GLOBAL" are mail-type specific and available for use by all users.
To use a mail template token, enter the name of the token surrounded by % symbols.
For example, the following text will substitute the document owner's name into the
message:
The document owner, %OWNER_FIRST_LAST_NAME%, should be notified of any
changes.

Mail Template Macros

The following macros are available for use in mail templates. These macros provide for
a degree of logic when describing email messages.

EXISTS
You can use the EXISTS macro to conditionally include content in your message. The
syntax is:
EXISTS(token,value_if_present,value_if_not_present)

You can use this feature in two ways. First, you can use it to leave out text based on
the presence of a specific token. If the URL token is not always there, for example, the
following will take that into account:
EXISTS(URL,"The URL is: %URL%")
Another common use of this feature is to model the if-then-else concept:

1516 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

EXISTS(URL,"The URL is: %URL%","You have no URL")

RES_ID
Use the RES_ID macro to pull in a string from the resource database.
RES_ID(cterms$cterm.publish_date)

This token can also be used in the subject of the mail.

FORMAT
This macro wraps the string in the given html tag if the user prefers html email.
FORMAT("htmlTag", "string")

If the user prefers plain text, only the string is used (no html).
Example:
FORMAT("b", "Posted By:") -- Display bold text

LINK
This macro embeds a URL into the message. linkString is the visible display name and
linkUrl is the target URL.
LINK(linkString, linkUrl)

If the user prefers plain text, only the linkUrl is used.

Example:
LINK("Unsubscribe", "%UNSUBSCRIBE_URL%")

Enabling Return Receipts

You can enable return receipts to be sent for system-generated emails. Return receipts
are only applicable when a buy-side user is listed in the email Reply-to field. Suppliers
will never receive return receipts.

To enable return receipts, do the following:

1 On the Account Properties tab of the User Account document, check the Return
Receipt box. For more information, see Buy-side User Accounts.
2 Set the messaging.mail_reply_policy to DEFER_TO_MAILTYPE. For more
information, see System Properties.
3 Ensure that the Mail Type originates from the Owner. For more information, see
Field help for Mail Message Template Summary page.

Related Topics

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1517

Configuration System Setup

Creating and customizing a mail message template

Editing a mail message template
Field help for Mail Message Template Summary page

1518 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Creating and customizing a mail message template

You can configure and customize the email messages sent in Frictionless® SRM by
creating and editing mail message templates. You map mail message templates to mail
types in Mail Configurations.

Note: When creating a custom mail message template, you must duplicate an existing
template rather than create a template from scratch. Duplicating an existing template
ensures that crucial default settings are used in the new template.

To create and customize a mail message template:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Mail Message Templates from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Mail Message Template List page, click the mail message template to
duplicate.
4 On the Summary page, click Document in the toolbar and select Duplicate from
the drop-down list.
5 In the confirmation dialog box that appears, click OK.
6 Edit the fields on the Summary page. For details, see Field help for Mail Message
Template Summary page.
7 It is recommended that you change the value that appears in the Display Name
field. For example, you might prefix the name with the word “Custom”. This will
make it easier to locate the template when linking it to a mail configuration.
8 Change the value in the External ID field to a unique value. For example, you
might append the word “.custom” to the value.
9 Do not change the value in the Mail Type field.
10 Edit the Message Text and Subject fields as needed. Note the following:
n You can enter plain or rich text in the Plain Message Text field.
n You can insert tokens in the message text for variable substitution. A complete
list of tokens is available in the on-line Reference Guide (RG).
n You can use macros to provide logic in email messages. For a list of macros, see
Mail Message Templates.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
12 Link the template to a mail configuration as follows:
a In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Mail Configurations from
the drop-down list and click OK.
a On the Mail Configuration List page, click the mail configuration for your
company. If the system default mail configuration is the only one available, you

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1519

Configuration System Setup

must duplicate it and save the copy with a new External ID. For more details,
see Mail Configurations.
b The Mail Types Map list assigns a mail template to each mail type in the system.
For the desired mail type, select the mail template you created from the
drop-down list.
c Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Mail Message Templates
Editing a mail message template
Field help for Mail Message Template Summary page

1520 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Editing a mail message template

You can configure and customize the email messages sent in Frictionless® SRM by
creating and editing mail message templates. You map mail message templates to mail
types in Mail Configurations.
You can only edit custom templates that you created. You cannot edit any of the default
templates that are provided with Frictionless SRM.

To edit a custom mail message template:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Mail Message Templates from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Mail Message Template List page, click the mail message template to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar. This button will only be
displayed in a custom template. Default templates are not editable.
5 Edit the fields on the Summary page. For details, see Field help for Mail Message
Template Summary page.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Mail Message Templates
Creating and customizing a mail message template
Field help for Mail Message Template Summary page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1521

Configuration System Setup

Field help for Mail Message Template Summary page

The following provides help for the fields on the Mail Message Template Summary page.

Display Name: Indicates the display name of the mail message. When creating a
custom mail message template by duplicating an existing one, it is recommended that
you change this value. For example, you might prefix the name with the word
“Custom”. This will make it easier to locate the template when linking it to a mail
configuration.
Description: Type a description of the mail message.
External ID: Type an external ID for the mail message. When creating a custom mail
message template by duplicating an existing one, change the value in the External ID
field to a unique value. For example, you might append the word “.custom” to the
value.

Subject: Click the Lookup icon to select a subject from the list of localized
resources.

Mail Type Information

Mail Type: Select the mail message type from the drop-down list. When creating a
custom mail message template by duplicating an existing one, it is recommended that
you do not change this value.
Each Mail Type has a predefined Module, Purpose, Sender, Recipient, Trigger, and
Additional Notes value that is automatically filled in whenever a new Mail Type is
selected. These fields are read-only and are there to provide contextual information
about how the message is used.
Module: Indicates the module associated with this mail message type.
Purpose: Indicates the purpose of this mail message type.
Sender: Indicates the sender of mail messages of this type.
Recipient: Indicates the recipient of mail messages of this type.
Trigger: Indicates the trigger for mail messages of this type.
Additional Notes: Displays any additional information for this mail message type.

Message Text
Type the text of the message. Note the following:
` Enter plain or rich text in the Plain Message Text field.
` You can insert tokens in the message text for variable substitution. A complete list
of tokens is available in the on-line Reference Guide (RG).

1522 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

` You can use macros to provide logic in email messages. For a list of macros, see
Mail Message Templates.

Related Topics
Mail Message Templates
Creating and customizing a mail message template
Editing a mail message template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1523

Configuration System Setup

Mail Configurations

You can determine when and to whom email messages are sent in Frictionless® SRM by
customizing mail configurations in Setup. In a mail configuration, you map pre-defined
mail types to Mail Message Templates. You can create and customize a mail
configuration for each company within your enterprise.
Often, it is desirable to change the behavior of e-mail notifications during the system
implementation process. For example:
` Adding suppliers to the system before the system is ready to go live: the
introductory e-mail to the supplier should be sent, but not until the system is live
and in production.
` Running test events immediately before go-live with production data: no e-mail
notifications should be sent to external users at all.
The Mail Configuration object encapsulates the management and control of the e-mail
processing system. Frictionless SRM ships with a standard mail configuration that can
be customized to suit various needs. The default mail configuration cannot be edited.
Rather than creating a configuration from scratch, it is considered a best practice to
duplicate the default configuration and make changes to a custom one.

Note: See System Properties for information on Mail Configuration System

Properties.

This section describes how to create and edit a mail configuration.

Related Topics
Creating a mail configuration
Editing a mail configuration
Field help for Mail Configuration Summary page

1524 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Creating a mail configuration

You can determine when and to whom email messages are sent in Frictionless® SRM by
customizing mail configurations in Setup. In a mail configuration, you map pre-defined
mail types to Mail Message Templates.
You can create and customize a mail configuration for each company within your
enterprise.

Note: When creating a mail configuration, it is important that you duplicate the system
default mail configuration rather than creating a configuration from scratch. Duplicating
the system default configuration ensures that crucial default settings are used in the new
configuration.

To create a mail configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Mail Configurations from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Mail Configuration List page, click the default mail configuration.
4 On the Summary page, click Document in the toolbar and select Duplicate from
the drop-down list.
5 In the confirmation dialog box that appears, click OK.
6 On the Summary page, edit any fields. For details, see Field help for Mail
Configuration Summary page.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Mail Configurations
Editing a mail configuration
Field help for Mail Configuration Summary page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1525

Configuration System Setup

Editing a mail configuration

You can determine when and to whom email messages are sent in Frictionless® SRM by
customizing mail configurations in Setup. In a mail configuration, you map pre-defined
mail types to Mail Message Templates.

To edit a mail configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Mail Configurations from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Mail Configuration List page, click the mail configuration to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields. For details, see Field help for Mail Configuration Summary
page.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Mail Configurations
Creating a mail configuration
Field help for Mail Configuration Summary page

1526 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Field help for Mail Configuration Summary page

The following provides help for the fields on the Summary page.

General

Display Name: Type a display name for the configuration.

External ID: Type an external ID for the configuration.

Company: Click the Lookup icon to choose the company to which to assign the
configuration.
The Company field is used to create separate mail configurations for individual
companies. If a specific company has no assigned mail configuration, the enterprise
company is used. If the enterprise company has no mail configuration, the system
default is used.

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that this configuration is inactive and unavailable
for use.

Global Rules

Use Global Rules: Mail rules can be specified globally or per message type. To set
mail rules globally, check this box. Once saved, the settings in the Buy-Side Action and
Sell-Side Action controls will then be propagated to each mail type. To use different
rules for different mail message types, leave this box unchecked.

Buy-side and Sell-side Action: Select a mail rule for each. Available mail rules
include:
` Send: Send the message.
` Hold: Hold the message in the mail queue indefinitely. The message will be sent
only when the rule is moved back to Send.
` Postpone: Postpone sending the message until the product mode has been
changed to production. This setting has no effect once the system is already in
production mode.
` Delete: Delete the message without sending it.

Custom Rule: Custom rules allow the specialization of the processing rules on a
domain-by-domain basis. To use custom rules, check the Use Global Rules box and
set both the Buy-Side Action and Sell-Side Action to Send.
In the Custom Rules text field, enter a list of rules separated by semicolons (;) of the
form domain pattern = rule.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1527

Configuration System Setup

The actual format is:

pattern + rule [;pattern + rule[....]]
Where:
` Pattern is an email destination. Examples would be @frictionless.com, @oracle.net,
etc. There is a special destination called @all that matches any email address.
` Rule is:
n send - send the message as normal
n delete - delete without sending
n deleteOrPostpone - depending on the message kind, either delete it (as above)
or mark it as postponed. A postponed message is left in the queue until the
product mode is changed back to production. The only messages currently
enabled for this option are the supplier activation and contact activation emails
for suppliers.
n redirect to <email> - redirect the message to the given email address

The following are examples of custom rules:

@frictionless.com=send;@customer.com=redirect to
[email protected];@all=delete
In the example, all messages sent to frictionless.com will be sent as normal. All
messages destined for the customer will be redirected to a frictionless account. All
others will be deleted.

Mail Types Map

Click the Lookup icon for a mail type to map it to a mail template. For details about
templates, see Mail Message Templates.

Related Topics
Mail Configurations
Creating a mail configuration
Editing a mail configuration

1528 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Enterprise Dictionary Words

Frictionless® SRM provides a spell-check feature for rich text fields. You can add
custom words to the enterprise spell-check dictionary that are relevant to your
enterprise. For example, you might add industry terminology, company terminology,
product names, abbreviations, acronyms, and so on.

This section describes how to create and edit custom enterprise dictionary words.

Related Topics
Creating an enterprise dictionary word
Editing an enterprise dictionary word

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1529

Configuration System Setup

Creating an enterprise dictionary word

Frictionless® SRM provides a spell-check feature for rich text fields. You can add
custom words to the enterprise spell-check dictionary that are relevant to your
enterprise. For example, you might add industry terminology, company terminology,
product names, abbreviations, acronyms, and so on.

To create an enterprise dictionary word:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Enterprise Dictionary Words
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Enterprise Dictionary Word List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, type the word in the Word field.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Enterprise Dictionary Words
Editing an enterprise dictionary word

1530 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Editing an enterprise dictionary word

Frictionless® SRM provides a spell-check feature for rich text fields. You can add
custom words to the enterprise spell-check dictionary that are relevant to your
enterprise. For example, you might add industry terminology, company terminology,
product names, abbreviations, acronyms, and so on.

To edit an enterprise dictionary word:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Enterprise Dictionary Words
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Enterprise Dictionary Word List page, click the word to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit the word in the Word field.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Enterprise Dictionary Words
Creating an enterprise dictionary word

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1531

Configuration System Setup

Cache Configuration
This section describes how to create and edit a cache configuration.

Related Topics
Editing a cache configuration

1532 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Configuration

Editing a cache configuration

To edit a cache configuration:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Configuration section of System Setup, select Cache Configurations from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Cache Configuration List page, click the cache configuration to edit.
4 On the Cache Configuration page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Cache Configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1533

Configuration System Setup

Customization: Rebuilding the EAR file

Frictionless SRM deploys using a standard Java Application Server archive file: the EAR
file. After customizing any content (as in Directory configuration: customizing the
authentication mechanism), this file must be updated to deploy your customization.

To rebuild the EAR file:

1 Navigate to the <FCI_HOME>/bin directory and double-click
configure.exe/bin.
2 Deselect all options except the Update EAR File option.
3 Click Next. You see a progress meter indicating the progress of the build.
4 When the EAR file is built, click Finish.
5 Deploy the newly generated EAR located in the <FCI_HOME>/fsapp directory to the
application server.

Related Topics
Configuration

1534 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

User Interface
This section describes the user interface configuration options in System Setup.

Related Topics
Language Packs
Localized Resources
System Toolbars
Page Customization
Style Sets
Style Configurations
Themes
File Attachment Container

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1535

User Interface System Setup

Language Packs
This section describes how to create and edit a language pack.

Related Topics
Creating a language pack
Installing language packs

1536 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Creating a language pack

To create a language pack:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the User Interface section of System Setup, select Language Packs from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Language Pack List page, click Create.
4 On the Language Pack page, fill in the fields with language pack information.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To edit a language pack, click the language pack to edit on the Language Pack
List page and then click Edit in the document toolbar.

Related Topics
Language Packs
Installing language packs

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1537

User Interface System Setup

Localized Resources
Frictionless SRM uses two kinds of simple text fields. Normal text fields can be entered
using a standard text box. The other type of text field, called a localized resource,
provides for text to be entered and maintained in as many languages as required.
Localized resources are constant values defined to represent all text in the Frictionless®
SRM user interface. Localized resources are provided by default for all user interface
text delivered with Frictionless SRM. If you make any text changes or additions to the
user interface in Setup, you must also define an associated localized resource for the
text.
When the product displays normal text fields, the string will be displayed as entered,
regardless of the end user's preferred language. An example of this type of string is an
RFP name.
For a localized resource, the system will attempt to display the version of the string that
matches the end user's language settings. Query and report names are examples of
localized resources.
Like other sourcing objects, localized resources are stored in the database. Because
localized resources are flexible, they can require more work to set up than normal text
fields.

Using Localized Resources in CSV Files

When specifying a localized resource in a CSV file, use the following form:
<bundle>$<resource_id>
For example: acme_custom$audit_type
You can also create a CSV file to import a large number of localized resources. See the
online Reference Guide (RG) for the file format. For more details on importing, see
Import Data.

Note: Ensure to import your customized localized resources before referring to them
from your custom CSV imports.

Turning Off Localized Resources

Localized resources are optional and can be turned off in single-language
environments. If the system property system.single_language_mode is set to true, all
localized resources will be displayed and edited as regular text boxes. In this case, the
system will create a bundle and resource id for you.
For more details about using system properties, see System Properties.

Related Topics
Creating a localized resource in Setup

1538 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Creating a localized resource on the fly

Editing a localized resource
Field help for Localized Resource Summary page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1539

User Interface System Setup

Creating a localized resource in Setup

Localized resources are constant values defined to represent all text in the Frictionless®
SRM user interface. Localized resources are provided by default for all user interface
text delivered with Frictionless SRM. If you make any text changes or additions to the
user interface in Setup, you must also define an associated localized resource for the
text.

To create a localized resource:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the User Interface section of System Setup, select Localized Resources from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Localized Resource List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, fill in the fields with localized resource information and add
locale-specific entries. For details, see Field help for Localized Resource
Summary page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Localized Resources
Creating a localized resource on the fly
Editing a localized resource
Field help for Localized Resource Summary page

1540 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Creating a localized resource on the fly

As well as Creating a localized resource in Setup, localized resources can also be
created on the fly, without having to go to the Setup page. For example, when editing
Query Definitions, the query or report name is defined as a localized resource. You
can create a new localized resource when defining the query. However, you must still
use the Setup page to enter the individual language translations for the query.

To create a localized resource on the fly:

1 Click the Lookup icon in the interface for the current procedure and search the
database for an existing localized resource. It is recommended that you share a
localized resource if one already exists for the desired purpose.
2 If a localized resource does not exist that matches the desired text, click Create to
create one dynamically.
3 Fill in the Bundle, Resource ID, and Default Value fields. For details, see Field help
for Localized Resource Summary page.
4 Click OK.
5 In the dialog box, select the new localized resource from the list.
6 If you do not see the resource you created, enter the correct Default Value in the
text box and click Show.
7 Click OK.

Related Topics
Localized Resources
Creating a localized resource in Setup
Editing a localized resource
Field help for Localized Resource Summary page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1541

User Interface System Setup

Editing a localized resource

Localized resources are constant values defined to represent all text in the Frictionless®
SRM user interface. Localized resources are provided by default for all user interface
text delivered with Frictionless SRM. If you make any text changes or additions to the
user interface in Setup, you must also define an associated localized resource for the
text.
Frictionless SRM ships with close to 10,000 localized resources to support running the
product in different languages. For the most part, the product localized resources
cannot be edited, but the Default Value can be overridden to suit customer needs.

To edit a localized resource:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the User Interface section of System Setup, select Localized Resources from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Localized Resource List page, do one of the following:
n From the drop-down list, select Search Localized Resources, search for the
resource to edit, and click the resource.
n From the drop-down list, select All Localized Resources and click the resource to
edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 In the Value Override field, enter a value that will override the Default Value.

6 Under Locale-Specific Entries, click the Edit icon for an entry to edit.
7 In the Localized Entry dialog box, in the Value Override field, enter a value that
will override the Value for the localized entry.
8 Click OK.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Localized Resources
Creating a localized resource in Setup
Creating a localized resource on the fly
Field help for Localized Resource Summary page

1542 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Field help for Localized Resource Summary page

The following provides help for the fields on the Summary page.

Bundle: Type a localized resource category. Typically, you will use the same bundle for
all custom localized resources. For example: acme_custom

Resource ID: Type a unique identifier for the localized resource. A convention
frequently used for this field is to enter the Default Value with the spaces removed. For
example: audit_type

Resource Kind: Indicates the kind of resource. Only application text can be
customized and associated with localized resources.

Default Value: Enter the default value to be used when no language-specific override
exists. Always fill in this value. For example: Audit Type

Custom: A check in this box indicates that the resource was created by the customer.
An unchecked box indicates that the resource was provided by the application and is
managed by Frictionless Commerce. This field prevents customer data from being
overwritten during an upgrade. The field is read-only.

Value Override: When editing a localized resource, enter a value that will override the
information in the Default Value field.

Locale-Specific Entries: For each desired translation of the Default Value text, add a
locale-specific entry as follows:
1 Click Add.
2 In the Localized Entry dialog box, select a language from the Language drop-down
list.
3 Type a translated value in the Value field.
4 Type a value override in the Value Override field.
5 Click OK.

Related Topics
Localized Resources
Creating a localized resource in Setup
Creating a localized resource on the fly
Editing a localized resource

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1543

User Interface System Setup

System Toolbars

Working with toolbars requires Frictionless® SRM application programming knowledge

and should not be attempted by SRM users.

1544 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Page Customization

Most pages in Frictionless® SRM are composed of a vertically arranged list of fields and
dividers between fields. While fields and dividers have different features, the
mechanisms for customizing them are identical.
You can customize page elements in a variety of ways, including the following:
` Change a field label
` Make a field editable or read-only
` Hide a field
` Make a field required
` Add a field description
` Change a field position
` Rename a tab

The procedure for customizing a page element consists of the following steps:
1 Locate the page’s UI metadata in the Reference Guide.
The Frictionless SRM online Reference Guide (RG) contains the metadata for each
page in the SRM application. The guide is organized by business object, so you
need to know what kind of object you will be editing or viewing. See the Class
Reference in the Reference Guide for a list of all business objects included in
Frictionless SRM.
2 Create a page customization and add an element override.
3 Optionally, apply conditional page customizations.
4 Test your changes.
After saving the page customization, you can test your changes by navigating to
the customized page.

Note: For detailed procedures, see Customizing a page element.

This section describes how to customize a page element.

Related Topics
Customizing a page element
Field help for Page Customization Summary page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1545

User Interface System Setup

Customizing a page element

Most pages in Frictionless® SRM are composed of a vertically arranged list of fields and
dividers between fields. While fields and dividers have different features, the
mechanisms for customizing them are identical.
You can customize page elements in a variety of ways, including the following:
` Change a field label
` Make a field editable or read-only
` Hide a field
` Make a field required
` Add a field description
` Change a field position
` Rename a tab

Note: Page customization allows you to modify page fields, but not collection fields.
Creating a page customization that attempts to modify a collection field will not cause
an error message to be displayed, but the collection field modifications will not be
reflected in the UI.

This Help topic describes each of the steps for customizing a page element.

Locate the page’s UI metadata in the Reference Guide.

The Frictionless SRM online Reference Guide (RG) contains the metadata for each page
in the SRM application. The guide is organized by business object, so you need to know
what kind of object you will be editing or viewing. See the Class Reference in the
Reference Guide for a list of all business objects included in Frictionless SRM.
1 Navigate to the page in Frictionless SRM that contains the page element to be
customized.
2 Click RG in the upper toolbar. You must have the appropriate rights to see this
button.
3 In the Class Reference page for the page element, click the UI View link.
4 Under UI Pages, copy the UI ID column value for the page containing the element
to customize. An example might be:
masterdata.alert.ui.buyside.default
Note: An object can have more than one user interface, with a separate ID assigned
to each. For example, there may be one ID for the buy-side and another for the
sell-side. You must create a separate customization record for each UI element that
you want to change.

1546 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Create a page customization and add an element override.

You create a page customization in Setup.
1 Open a new Frictionless SRM window and click Setup in the toolbar at the top of
the page.
2 In the User Interface section of System Setup, select Page Customization from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Page Customization List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, paste the value you copied from the Class Reference page
into the UI ID field.
Note: This value must be a valid UI metadata ID obtained from the Reference
Guide.
5 Under Overrides, click Add to add an override. A blank table row appears.
6 Go to the window displaying the Class Reference Page of the Reference Guide and
scroll down until you see the field values for the page containing the field to
change.
7 Under Page Fields, copy the Field ID value for the field to change. An example
might be DISPLAY_NAME.
8 Go to the window displaying the Page Customization Summary page and paste the
value you copied into the Field ID field in the empty table row.
9 From the Property drop-down list, select the property of the field to change. See
Field help for Page Customization Summary page for details about properties.
10 Select or enter a value for the property in the Value field. For example, if you
selected Required in the Property field, select Yes or No in the Value field.
Note: If you enter text as a property value, you must create a localized resource
and enter its Resource ID value in the Value field. For details, see Creating a
localized resource in Setup.
11 Repeat steps 5 through 10 to create additional overrides to customize other fields
on the same page.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Optionally, apply conditional page customizations.

Page customizations can be applied conditionally based on the state of the customized
object, its parent, another object on the page, or the logged-in user. The Dimension
on a page customization attribute identifies the field that will be used to decide if that
customization will be applied to the attribute's field.
1 On the Page Customization Summary page, optionally set the Parent Class field.
This causes the customization to be applied only if the parent of the customized
object is the class specified in this field.
2 Under Overrides, click Add to add an override. A blank table row appears.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1547

User Interface System Setup

3 Click the Edit icon for the override.

4 Fill in the basic fields as described above.
5 Fill in the conditional page customization fields as follows:
n Dimension on Parent: Check if the dimension used is an attribute of the
top-most parent of the customized object.
n Dimension Field: Type the field name of the dimension attribute.
n Dimension Field Type: Select the field type of the dimension attribute from
the drop-down list.
n Dimension Value: Select the field value that constitutes a match.

If there are multiple overrides specified for the same Field ID, Property, Dimension
Field, and Dimension Value, only the first override in the list is applied. To have more
general overrides, position those after the more specific ones in the list.
You can create more than one override for different Dimension Values. For example, to
display different pre-text on a field depending on the document type, create one
override for each document type, with a unique Dimension Value for each type.

Note: If the conditional page customization is based on a Dimension Value that will not
be present in the document at its creation (such as a value that must be selected from
a drop-down list), the page customization will not automatically be enabled when the
value is selected. The document must be closed and reloaded for the page customization
to take effect.

This might be an issue, for example, if the page customization indicates that one field is
required when another field contains a specific value.

Test your changes.

1 Navigate to the page containing the customized element or elements.
2 Refresh the page. If the element customization was successful, you see your
changes.

Related Topics
Field help for Page Customization Summary page

1548 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Field help for Page Customization Summary page

This page provides help for the fields on the Summary page.

UI ID: Paste the UI ID for the page containing the element to customize, as copied
from the Reference Guide. This value is located in the UI View of the Class Reference
page for the page to customize, under UI Pages, in the UI ID column. An example
might be:
masterdata.alert.ui.buyside.default

Parent Class: Select the parent class for the page customization. If a value is selected
in this field, customization only applies if the parent of the customized object is the
class specified.

Overrides

Field ID: Paste the Field ID for the page element to customize, as copied from the
Reference Guide. This value is located in the UI View of the Class Reference page for
the page to customize, under Page Fields, in the Field ID column. An example might be
DISPLAY_NAME.

Property: Select a property from the drop-down list. Valid properties and values for
fields and dividers are listed below.

Value: Select or enter a value for the property. For example, if you selected Required
in the Property field, select Yes or No in the Value field. Valid properties and values
for fields and dividers are listed below.
Note: If you enter text as a property value, you must create a localized resource
and enter its Resource ID value in the Value field. For details, see Creating a
localized resource in Setup.

Dimension on Parent: Check this box to indicate that the dimension used is an
attribute of the top-most parent of the customized object.

Dimension Field: Type the field name of the dimension attribute. You can set up an
override to be applied only if a particular field has a specific value. This field indicates
which field should be tested. It is the FIELD_ID as copied from the online Reference
Guide (RG).
Besides naming specific fields on a page, you may use a special token that will
automatically fill in the proper field information, including the following:
%USERGROUP% = The default group that the user is currently a member of.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1549

User Interface System Setup

Dimension Field Type: Select the field type of the dimension attribute from the
drop-down list. The FieldType column in the Class Reference for the Page Field indicates
the type for a dimension field.

Dimension Value: Select the value of the dimension field that must be set in order for
this override to be applied. The Dimension Field Type determines the options that
appear in this field.

Field Properties and Values

The properties and values for UI Fields (editable controls) are as follows

Possible
Property Description Values

hidden Allows an optional attribute to be removed from the UI. true

label Allows the label for a field to be changed. a resource id
editable Allows an optional field to be changed to read-only false
position Allows the fields on a page to be re-ordered. Position an integer
numbers are listed in the reference guide.
required Allows an optional field to be made required. true
hide_label Used to turn off the label for a field. true or false
pre_text Used to add text just before a label a resource id
post_text Used to add text just after a label. a resource id
description Used to add flyover text to a field. a resource id
checkbox_label Define a label for the right side of a boolean field type. a resource id
hide_checkbox_label Hide the right-side label for a boolean field. true or false

Divider Properties and Values

The properties and values for UI Dividers are as follows.

Property Description Possible Values

hidden Allows a divider to be removed from the UI. true

1550 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

label Allows the label for a divider to be changed. a resource id

position Allows the divider on a page to be re-ordered. Position an integer
numbers are listed in the Reference Guide (RG).
hide_label Used to turn off the label for a divider. true or false

Note: Several of the properties listed above have resource ID values. A resource ID is
an ID from the localized string database in Frictionless SRM. These IDs have the form
bundle$resource_id. An example might be cterm$cterm.display_name. If you
want to display text without entering in the string database, you can use the special
bundle “literal”. For example: literal$Display Name.

Collection Column Properties and Values

To customize the column heading for a collection list, use the name of the collection
followed by the column ID in the form <FIELD_ID>.<COLUMN_ID>.
Collection columns support the following configurable attributes.

Property Description Possible Values

label Allows the label for a column to be a resource id

changed.
description Used to add flyover text to a collection a resource id
column.

Page Customization Properties and Values

The following table provides values for customizing the Page Customization UI itself.

Field ID Property Value Notes

DISPLAY_NAME position 1 Make the name column first.

DISPLAY_NAME label cterms$cterm.display_nam Change the name of the field from
e Name to Display Name.
OVERRIDES label literal$Field Change the name of the Overrides
Customizations list to Field Customizations.
OVERRIDES.FIELD label literal$Field ID Change the name of the FIELD
column on a collection list.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1551

User Interface System Setup

Page Customization Field Values

Dimension Field
Types Usage

Boolean Provides a Yes or No response for the dimension value.

Enumeration Provides a choice from the Enumeration list. If Enumeration is selected,
the Enumeration Type must also be supplied.
Object Reference References an object type. If Object Reference is selected, the Class
Name of the object must also be specified.
Value List References a drop-down list of values. If Value List is selected, the Value
List Type must also be specified.

Related Topics
Customizing a page element

1552 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Toolbar Customizations
A toolbar customization is a change to one of the following items:
` A system navigation toolbar
` A document toolbar or one of its buttons or menus
` A document tab
` A document button (such as the Add button on a collection list)

When you customize a toolbar, you can fully or partially hide it or change its text.
This section describes how to create toolbar customizations.

Field help for Toolbar Customization Summary page

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that this toolbar customization is inactive and
unavailable for use.

Name: Enter a name for the toolbar customization.

Description: Enter a description of the toolbar customization.

Customization Type: Select one of the following customization types:

` Global and Navigation: Select this option to apply the customization globally to
all instances of this toolbar.
` Business Object: Select this option to apply the customization just to a particular
type of sourcing document (such as all RFxs) or other object (such as Packaged
Line Items). Selecting this option displays the Target Class ID field in which to
select the business object type.

Target Class ID: Select the type of business object to which to apply this
customization. This field only appears if Business Object is selected as the
Customization Type.

Target Toolbar ID: Enter the path to the toolbar action to customize. This path should
be copied and pasted from the External ID and the Action ID fields of the appropriate
System Toolbars. For details, see Creating a toolbar customization.

Overrides: Click Add to indicate the customization type. Select one of the following:
` Hidden: Select this option to hide or display the toolbar. Select Yes to hide the
toolbar, or select No to display a toolbar that is currently hidden.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1553

User Interface System Setup

` Display Name: Select this option to change the text of the toolbar. Click the

Lookup icon to select the new text to use from the list of Localized
Resources or to create a new resource to use for the toolbar text.

Related Topics
Creating a toolbar customization

1554 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Creating a toolbar customization

A toolbar customization is a change to one of the following items:
` A system navigation toolbar
` A document toolbar or one of its buttons or menus
` A document tab
` A document button (such as the Add button on a collection list)

When you customize a toolbar, you can fully or partially hide it or change its text.
When you create a toolbar customization, you must first locate and copy the
appropriate ID values from the System Toolbars section of Setup.

To create a toolbar customization:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 Find the Target Toolbar ID value as follows:
a In the User Interface section of System Setup, select System Toolbars from the
drop-down list and click OK.
b On the Toolbar Container List page, find the name of the toolbar that you want
to change. Enter part of the toolbar ID in the Find field to search for the toolbar
by ID, or choose All Toolbars from the drop-down list to find the toolbar by
Display Name.
c Click the toolbar name to open the toolbar container.
d Copy the toolbar’s External ID value and paste it into a blank document in
Notepad or Wordpad.
e If the toolbar you want to change is a subset of this parent container, it will be
listed in the Toolbar Actions table. Click the child toolbar to open it, copy its

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1555

User Interface System Setup

Action ID value and paste it into your Notepad document after the External ID,
separated by a period.
f If the toolbar you want to change is nested more than one level deep in the
parent container, repeat step g) for each nested level. The resulting value
should have the following structure:
ExternalID.ActionID.ActionID.ActionID
For example, for the Spend and Compliance button on the global navigation
toolbar, the value would be as follows:
system.toolbar.navigation.srmBlueNavGroup.spend_and_compliance
where
system.toolbar.navigation = the global navigation toolbar External ID
srmBlueNavGroup = the parent group Action ID
spend_and_compliance = the Spend and Compliance button Action ID
3 Return to the Setup page, select Toolbar Customization from the User Interface
section of System Setup, and click OK.
4 On the Toolbar Customization List page, click Create.
5 On the Summary page, fill in the fields as needed. See Field help for Toolbar
Customization Summary page.
6 Copy the value in your Notepad document (located in Step 2) and paste it into the
Target Toolbar ID field.
7 Under Overrides, click Add to select the customization type. Select one of the
following:
n Hidden: Select this option to hide or display the toolbar. Select Yes to hide the
toolbar, or select No to display a toolbar that is currently hidden.
n Display Name: Select this option to change the text of the toolbar. Click the

Lookup icon to select the new text to use from the list of Localized
Resources or to create a new resource to use for the toolbar text.
8 Click Save in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Toolbar Customizations

1556 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Style Sets
A style set specifies style properties to apply when exporting query results to Excel. A
style set can be assigned to a style set configuration, a query definition, or to a results
column within a query definition.

This section describes how to create and edit a style set.

Related Topics
Creating a style set
Editing a style set
Field help for Style Set Summary page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1557

User Interface System Setup

Creating a style set

A style set specifies style properties to apply when exporting query results to Excel. A
style set can be assigned to a style set configuration, a query definition, or to a results
column within a query definition.

To create a style set:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the User Interface section of System Setup, select Style Sets from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Style Set List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, fill in the Display Name field.
5 Under Style Properties, click Add to add a style property.
6 In the blank table row that appears, fill in the fields. For details, see Field help for
Style Set Summary page.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to add additional properties.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Style Sets
Editing a style set
Field help for Style Set Summary page

1558 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Editing a style set

A style set specifies style properties to apply when exporting query results to Excel. A
style set can be assigned to a style set configuration, a query definition, or to a results
column within a query definition.

To create a style set:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the User Interface section of System Setup, select Style Sets from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Style Set List page, click the style set to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.

6 Under Style Properties, click the Edit icon for a style property to edit.
7 Edit any fields in the table row for the style property. For details, see Field help for
Style Set Summary page.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Style Sets
Creating a style set
Field help for Style Set Summary page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1559

User Interface System Setup

Field help for Style Set Summary page

This page provides help for the fields on the Summary page.

Display Name: Enter a display name for the style set.

Style Properties: Click Add to add a new row to the Style Properties table.
The following table provides the valid values for each style properties:

Style Property Style Property Value

font-family Any font family name that is supported by the graphics

environment of the application server. A font family determines
the typographic design across several font faces. Examples:
Helvetica, Courier New
font-size An integer between 0 and 72 (inclusive)
font-bold true or false
font-italic true or false
foreground-color One of the colors listed below
background-color One of the colors listed below

Valid foreground or background colors are as follows:

aqua green light_turquoise sea_green

black grey_25_percent light_yellow sky_blue
blue grey_40_percent lime teal
blue_grey grey_50_percent olive_green turquoise
brown grey_80_percent orange violet
dark-blue indigo pale_blue white
dark_green lavender pink yellow
dark_teal light_blue plum
dark_yellow light_green red
gold light_orange rose

1560 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Related Topics
Style Sets
Creating a style set
Editing a style set

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1561

User Interface System Setup

Style Configurations
The Style Set Configuration provides default style sets for the selected target sections
of a query results table that is exported to Excel. There can be only one active style set
configuration per enterprise.
Style properties in style sets specified here can be overridden on a query-by-query
basis by creating one or more style sets and assigning them to individual query
definitions. The style sets assigned to a query definition are merged with the style sets
in the style set configuration for the same target, with the former taking precedence
when a style property of the same name is found in both. For example, a font-family
property specified for the Table Column Header target in a style set that has been
assigned to a query definition will replace a font-family property for the style set that
has been assigned to the same Table Column Header target in the style set
configuration.

This section describes how to create and modify a style configuration.

Related Topics
Creating a style configuration

1562 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Creating a style configuration

The Style Set Configuration provides default style sets for the selected target sections
of a query results table that is exported to Excel. There can be only one active style set
configuration per enterprise.
Style properties in style sets specified here can be overridden on a query-by-query
basis by creating one or more style sets and assigning them to individual query
definitions. The style sets assigned to a query definition are merged with the style sets
in the style set configuration for the same target, with the former taking precedence
when a style property of the same name is found in both. For example, a font-family
property specified for the Table Column Header target in a style set that has been
assigned to a query definition will replace a font-family property for the style set that
has been assigned to the same Table Column Header target in the style set
configuration.

To create a style configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the User Interface section of System Setup, select Style Configurations from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Style Configuration List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, fill in the Display Name field.
5 Under Style Targets, click Add to add a style target.
6 In the blank table row that appears, fill in the fields.
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 to add additional targets.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To edit a style configuration, click its Edit icon in the Summary page.

Related Topics
Style Configurations

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1563

User Interface System Setup

Themes

Themes allow you to customize elements of Frictionless® SRM to match your

established corporate look-and-feel guidelines. Configurable visual elements include
color schemes, font family, and font size. You cannot change the size or placement of
UI elements.
To customize UI elements, you must duplicate and modify the existing FCI Base Theme.
You cannot modify the FCI Base Theme directly, and you cannot create a theme from
scratch.
You must have Enterprise Manager or System Manager access to create and edit
themes. You must also have some knowledge of cascading style sheets (CSS) to work
with themes.

This section describes how to create and edit themes.

Field Help for the Themes Summary page

Display Name: Type the display name for the theme.

External ID: Type a unique external ID for the theme.
Font Family: Type the font family to use for the theme.
Default Theme: Check this box to indicate that this will be used as the default theme
for the enterprise. The default theme applies to all contexts in the enterprise.

Note: The default theme is used if the Enterprise Manager does not select a theme for
an enterprise. If for some reason there is no default theme selected for an enterprise
(and no theme is selected by the Enterprise Manager), the FCI Base Theme is used.

CSS Templates
Select the set of templates to display (buy-side, sell-side, or both) from the drop-down
list. Expand any section to see its list of templates. Templates are color-coded as
follows:
` A blue row indicates a template that is for the buy-side only.
` A yellow row indicates a template that is for the sell-side only.
` A white row indicates a template that is for both the buy-side and the sell-side.

Click the Edit icon for a template to modify the UI element associated with that
template. You cannot delete CSS templates from a theme.

CSS Template Name: Indicates the template name. This field is read-only.
CSS Template Description: Modify the template description as needed.

1564 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

UI Group: Indicates the group to which this template belongs. This field is read-only.
User Visibility: Indicates whether the UI element is visible on the buy-side, the
sell-side, or both. This field is read-only.
Color: Indicates the text color for the element. Enter a Hexadecimal Color Code, or
click the color box next to the field. In the dialog box that appears, use the sliders to
choose the desired color and then click OK.
Background Color: Indicates the background color for the element. Enter a
Hexadecimal Color Code, or click the color box next to the field. In the dialog box that
appears, use the sliders to choose the desired color and then click OK.
Font Weight: Indicates the font weight of the element. Type a new font weight as
needed. Type any valid CSS value for font weight.
Font Size: Indicates the font size of the element. Type any valid CSS value for font
size.
Font Style: Indicates the font style of the element. Type in a new font style as needed.
Type any valid CSS value for font style.

When you have finished editing the CSS template, click OK. New themes are visible for
all enterprises.

Note: If you do not see the template changes you made reflected in Frictionless SRM,
clear your browser cache.

Related Topics
Creating a theme
Selecting a theme for an enterprise

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1565

User Interface System Setup

Creating a theme

Themes allow you to customize elements of Frictionless® SRM to match your

established corporate look-and-feel guidelines. Configurable visual elements include
color schemes, font family, and font size. You cannot change the size or placement of
UI elements.
To customize UI elements, you must duplicate and modify the existing FCI Base Theme.
You cannot modify the FCI Base Theme directly, and you cannot create a theme from
scratch. For more information about themes, see Themes.
You must have Enterprise Manager or System Manager access to create and edit
themes. You must also have some knowledge of cascading style sheets (CSS) to work
with themes.
A theme created within an enterprise can be used for all companies in the enterprise.
The Enterprise Manager determines the theme for an enterprise. See Selecting a
theme for an enterprise for details.

To create a theme:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the User Interface section of System Setup, select Themes from the drop-down
list and click OK.
3 On the Theme List page, click the FCI Base Theme.
4 Click the Document button in the toolbar and select Duplicate from the
drop-down list.
5 On the Summary page, fill in the fields with basic information about the new theme.
For details, see Themes.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To edit a theme, click the theme on the Theme List page and then click the Edit
button in the toolbar. You can only edit custom themes. You cannot edit the FCI Base
Theme.

Related Topics
Themes
Selecting a theme for an enterprise

1566 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup User Interface

Selecting a theme for an enterprise

Themes allow you to customize elements of Frictionless® SRM to match your

established corporate look-and-feel guidelines. Configurable visual elements include
color schemes, font family, and font size. You cannot change the size or placement of
UI elements.
You must have Enterprise Manager access to select a theme for an enterprise.

To select a theme for an enterprise:

1 Log in as the Enterprise Manager.
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Organizing and Accounting section of System Setup, select Companies from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Company List page, click the name of the enterprise company for which to
select a theme.
4 On the Company page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.

5 Under Other Info, click the Lookup icon for the Theme field.
6 In the dialog box that appears, select a theme from the list and click OK.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: If the Enterprise Manager does not select a theme for an enterprise, the default
theme is used. If for some reason there is no default theme selected for the enterprise
(and no theme is selected by the Enterprise Manager), the FCI Base Theme is used.

Related Topics
Themes
Creating a theme

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1567

User Interface System Setup

File Attachment Container

A file attachment container allows you to store external files as attachments.

To see the File Attachment Container page:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the User Interface section of System Setup, select File Attachment Container
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 Click the file attachment container to open. You see the File Attachment Container
page.

Field Help for the File Attachment Container page

Purpose: Select the purpose of the file attachment from the drop-down list. This is a
required field.
Path Name: Type the path for the file attachment. This is a required field.

File Attachment: Click the Lookup icon to select the file attachment. This is a
required field.

1568 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workflow

Workflow
SRM Workflow provides the ability to enforce compliance in the management of critical
sourcing processes, such as document approvals, project development and financial
sign-offs. Workflow ensures consistency in process execution by automating the steps
that you designate as critical.
Using Workflow, you can model your enterprise’s unique process steps, and then
establish which steps require approval or review. Performance metrics are captured
over time to help identify bottlenecks in your business processes.
Workflow definitions allow you to ensure that critical process steps are completed.
Administrators can create scenarios that prevent end users from by-passing critical
process steps. In an approval workflow, the software locks documents awaiting
approval, preventing any further action until the required reviews and approvals take
place.
Scripting can be used to define actions associated with workflow steps, such as
including additional approvers or locking specific fields after approval. Phase
information within a document provides information about available phases, the current
document phase, and workflow history.
Managers can monitor progress through a detailed Workflow Audit History and Report,
which outlines the specifics of each workflow document, provides performance metrics
by group, and compares performance of user groups against a specific task.

This section describes the workflow setup options in System Setup.

Related Topics
Workflow Definitions
Creating a workflow definition
Viewing currently active workflow processes
Editing a workflow process template
Creating a workflow process owner
Associating a workflow process owner with a context
Canceling a workflow action

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1569

Workflow System Setup

Workflow Definitions
This section describes how to create and edit a workflow definition.

Field Help for Workflow Definition Summary page

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that this workflow definition is inactive and
unavailable for use.
Display Name: Type a name for the workflow definition. This is a required field.
Description: Type a description for the workflow definition.
Process Template: Indicates the current process template. This template is added
under Process Template Versions.

Process Template Versions

This section lists all versions of the process template for this workflow definition.
The process template is a script file that defines the acceptable approval statuses,
routing and conditions for each workflow definition. This file is created using a source
external to SRM (JaWE) and uses an .XPDL format.
For information about customizing a workflow process template, see your system
administrator. For information on XPDL, see
http://www.wfmc.org/standards/XPDL.htm.
For details on editing a process template, see Editing a workflow process template.

Add New Version: Click to add a process template. Fill in the fields in the Process
Template dialog box.
Note: Changing the process template in an existing workflow definition does not
affect currently active workflow processes referencing that definition. This change
only applies to documents created after the change is made.

Related Topics
Workflow
Field Help for Process Template dialog box
Creating a workflow definition
Viewing currently active workflow processes
Editing a workflow process template
Creating a workflow process owner
Associating a workflow process owner with a context
Canceling a workflow action

1570 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workflow

Creating a workflow definition

To create a workflow definition:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workflow section of System Setup, select Workflow Definitions from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Workflow Definition List page, click Create.
4 On the Workflow Definition Summary page, fill in the fields with workflow
information. For details, see Field Help for Workflow Definition Summary
page.
5 Click the Add New Version button to add a process template to the workflow
definition. For details, see Field Help for Process Template dialog box.
Note: Changing the process template in an existing workflow definition does not
affect currently active workflow processes referencing that definition. This change
only applies to documents created after the change is made.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Workflow
Workflow Definitions
Viewing currently active workflow processes
Field Help for Process Template dialog box
Editing a workflow process template
Creating a workflow process owner
Associating a workflow process owner with a context
Canceling a workflow action

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1571

Workflow System Setup

Viewing currently active workflow processes

You can use the Current Workflow Processes report to view the documents in which the
workflow process based on this workflow definition is currently active.

To view currently active workflow processes:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workflow section of System Setup, select Workflow Definitions from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Workflow Definition List page, click a workflow definition to open it.
4 Click Reports in the document toolbar and select Current Workflow Processes. You
see the active workflow processes.

Note: To cancel a workflow process in one of the listed documents, click its Cancel icon

Related Topics
Workflow
Workflow Definitions
Creating a workflow definition
Field Help for Process Template dialog box
Editing a workflow process template
Creating a workflow process owner
Associating a workflow process owner with a context
Canceling a workflow action

1572 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workflow

Current Workflow Processes report

This report enables you to view the documents in which the workflow process based on
this workflow definition is currently active.

Field Description

Display Name The display name of the process template being used.
Created On The date when the workflow process was added to the document.
Native Id An internal ID assigned by the system to uniquely identify the workflow
process and all its associated activities.
Native Name The native name of the current process. This is the "ID" string used in the
XPDL file.
Start Date The date when the workflow process starts.
Due Date The date when the workflow process is scheduled to end.
Document The name of the document using the process.
Phase The current phase of the document.

Related Topics
Workflow
Workflow Definitions
Creating a workflow definition
Field Help for Process Template dialog box
Editing a workflow process template
Creating a workflow process owner
Associating a workflow process owner with a context
Canceling a workflow action

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1573

Workflow System Setup

Field Help for Process Template dialog box

The process template is a script file that defines the acceptable approval statuses,
routing and conditions for each workflow definition. This file is created using a source
external to SRM and uses an .XPDL format.
For information about customizing a workflow process template, see your system
administrator. For information on XPDL, see
http://www.wfmc.org/standards/XPDL.htm.
For details on editing a process template, see Editing a workflow process template.

Note: Changing the process template in an existing workflow definition does not affect
currently active workflow processes referencing that definition. This change only applies
to documents created after the change is made.

Approval Workflow: Check to indicate that this workflow definition defines an

approval process. Documents with an approval workflow definition will be locked for
editing while the approval process is in progress.
Display Name: Type a display name for the process template. This is a required field.
Process Owner Role: From the drop-down list, select a collaborator role for the
process owner for this template. Typically, you will Process Owner for this value (you
can select any role that has the internal type of Process Owner).
The process owner is a user account created to enable the process template scripts to
function. For details, see Creating a workflow process owner.
This field is required if the Approval Workflow box is checked.
Active Approver Role: Select the collaborator role to be given to an approver who is
programatically added to the workflow via scripting in the process template. Typically,
you will select Approver for this role (you can select any role that has the internal type
of Approver). This role will not be used for an approver who is manually added to the
Collaborator list.
When a programatically added approver has completed the approval activity, that
approver is given the Inactive Approver Role, as described below.
This field is only editable if the Approval Workflow box is checked. It is a required
field for approval workflows.
Inactive Approver Role: Select the collaborator role to be given to programatically
added approvers when the approval activity is completed. For example, you might
select Reviewer for this role. You can select any role that does not have the internal
type of Approver.
This field is only editable if the Approval Workflow box is checked. It is a required
field for approval workflows.
Comment: Type any comments associated with the process template.

1574 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workflow

XPDL Source: Click the Lookup icon to select the process template for this
workflow definition. The process template is created using the Workflow Editor and has
an extension of .XPDL. For further information on process templates, see your system
administrator.

Related Topics
Workflow
Workflow Definitions
Creating a workflow definition
Viewing currently active workflow processes
Editing a workflow process template
Creating a workflow process owner
Associating a workflow process owner with a context
Canceling a workflow action

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1575

Workflow System Setup

Editing a workflow process template

The process template is a script file that defines the acceptable approval statuses,
routing and conditions for each workflow definition. This file is created using a source
external to SRM and uses an .XPDL format.
For information about customizing a workflow process template, see your system
administrator. For XPDL information, see: http://www.wfmc.org/standards/XPDL.htm.
You can use any XPDL-compliant editor to edit a process template, but JaWE is
recommended. The default Workflow Editor link is a Java Web Start link. The Workflow
Editor link can be changed using the following system property:
workflow.xpdl.editor.url

Note: After editing a process template, you must attach the edited version to the
workflow definition in order to apply the changes to the workflow. See Step 6, below.

To edit a process template:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workflow section of System Setup, select Workflow Definitions from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Workflow Definition List page, do one of the following:
n Click a workflow definition to open it.
n Click Create to create a new workflow definition.
4 On the Workflow Definition Summary page, click the Actions button in the toolbar
and select Launch Workflow Editor.
Note: You must have JRE running on your machine to launch the Workflow Editor.
To download JRE, use the following link:
http://www.java.com/en/download/windows_automatic.jsp
5 The first time you launch the workflow editor, a dialog box appears confirming the
JAWE download. Click OK. You see the Workflow Editor.
For details about using JAWE to edit the process template, see your system
administrator.
6 Create the .XPDL file, save it to a standard location, and close it.
7 Click the Add New Version button to add your .XPDL process template to the
workflow definition. For details, see Field Help for Process Template dialog
box.
Note: JaWE will not allow an XPDL file to be attached to the process template if the
file is open. You must close JaWE before attaching the file.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

1576 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workflow

Related Topics
Workflow
Workflow Definitions
Viewing currently active workflow processes
Field Help for Process Template dialog box
Creating a workflow definition
Creating a workflow process owner
Associating a workflow process owner with a context
Canceling a workflow action

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1577

Workflow System Setup

Workflow Process Owners

Frictionless® SRM requires that a user account be set up as a process owner. This
process owner will automatically execute the workflow actions on sourcing documents.
If there is no process owner assigned to a context, the document owner will be used as
the process owner. For details on creating a process owner, see Creating a workflow
process owner.
One and only one process owner must be created per context. Once you create the
process owner, you must associate it with its context. For details, see Associating a
workflow process owner with a context.
This section describes how to associate a workflow process owner with a company
context.

Field Help for Workflow Process Owner Summary page

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that this workflow process owner association is
inactive and unavailable for use.

Process Owner: Click the Lookup icon to select the process owner to associate
with a context. This is a required field.

Context: Click the Lookup icon to select the context for the process owner. This is
a required field.

Related Topics
Workflow
Workflow Definitions
Viewing currently active workflow processes
Field Help for Process Template dialog box
Creating a workflow definition
Editing a workflow process template
Creating a workflow process owner
Associating a workflow process owner with a context
Canceling a workflow action

1578 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workflow

Creating a workflow process owner

Frictionless® SRM requires that a user account be set up as a process owner. This will
enable the scripting in the workflow process template to function.
One and only one process owner must be created per context. Once you create the
process owner, you must associate it with its context. For details, see Associating a
workflow process owner with a context.
Best practices for creating a process owner are as follows:
` The user account should not have login enabled.
` The account should be granted all permissions for all the sourcing documents that
will be used during the workflow (that is, any documents referenced by the scripts
in the process template).

You must be a system administrator to create a process owner account.

To create a process owner:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Accounts and Security section of System Administration, select Buy-side
User Accounts from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the User Account List page, click Create.
4 Fill in fields as follows:
a On the Account Properties tab, fill in the First Name and Last Name tab with
values that indicate that this is a process owner account. For example, you
might enter your company context name in the First Name field and “Workflow
Process Owner” in the Last Name field.
Fill in other fields on this tab as needed. For details, see Field help for User
Account: Account Properties page.
b On the Account Management tab, uncheck the Send Notification box and then
uncheck the Enable User to Login box. (Because the process owner is not a
real user, this account should not be enabled for login.)
Fill in other fields on this tab as needed. For details, see Field help for User
Account: Account Management page.
c On the Security tab, under Security Profiles, check Buyer Manager.
Fill in other fields on this tab as needed. For details, see Field help for User
Account: Security page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Workflow

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1579

Workflow System Setup

Workflow Definitions
Field Help for Process Template dialog box
Creating a workflow definition
Viewing currently active workflow processes
Editing a workflow process template
Associating a workflow process owner with a context
Canceling a workflow action

1580 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workflow

Associating a workflow process owner with a context

Frictionless® SRM requires that a user account be set up as a process owner. This
enables the scripting in the workflow process template to function.
One and only one process owner must be created per context. Once you create the
process owner, you must associate it with its context. For details, see Creating a
workflow process owner.

To associated a workflow process owner with a context:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workflow section of System Setup, select Workflow Process Owners from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Workflow Process Owner List page, click Create.
4 On the Workflow Process Owner Summary page, fill in the fields. For details, see
Field Help for Workflow Definition Summary page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Workflow
Workflow Definitions
Field Help for Process Template dialog box
Creating a workflow definition
Viewing currently active workflow processes
Editing a workflow process template
Creating a workflow process owner
Canceling a workflow action

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1581

Workflow System Setup

Canceling a workflow action

When a document enters an approval workflow, it is locked for editing. Only a
collaborator designated as an approver can approve a document, allowing it to advance
the next phase. After the approval workflow is completed, the document can be edited
again.
If a document is in an approval phase and for some reason no approvers can approve
or reject it, its current workflow action must be canceled. This might happen, for
example, if an approver is unable to log into the system or if there is a scripting error in
the workflow process template that leaves the document locked.
Canceling a workflow action requires collaboration between the document owner and
the system administrator.

To cancel a workflow action, the system administrator must do the following:

1 Obtain the following information from the document owner or a document
collaborator:
n The document name from the Name field on the Header page
n The document type from the Document Type field on the Header page
n The phase the document is in from the document toolbar
2 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
3 In Document Setup, select the appropriate document type from its drop-down list
and click OK.
4 On the Type List page, click the name of the document type used to create the
document.
5 On the Type page, click the name of the Configurable Phase Definition.
6 On the Header page for the phase definition, click the link that represents the
current phase of the document.
7 On the Header page for the phase, click the name of the Workflow Definition.
8 On the Summary page for the workflow definition, click Reports in the toolbar and
select Current Workflow Processes.
9 In the Current Workflow Processes Report, find the line with the document name
that applies to the process to cancel, and click the Cancel icon .
10 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.
11 In the dialog box that appears, click Finish.

After the system administrator has completed these procedures, the document owner
must do the following:
1 Open the document. It will no longer be locked.

1582 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Workflow

2 Click the Edit button in the toolbar and make any necessary changes, such as
adding additional approvers.
3 Click the Phase Change button in the toolbar and change the document phase to
the previous phase in the workflow.
4 Click the Phase Change button in the toolbar and advance the document phase to
the next phase (that is, the phase in which the document was previously locked).
The document re-enters the approval workflow.

Related Topics
Workflow
Workflow Definitions
Field Help for Process Template dialog box
Creating a workflow definition
Viewing currently active workflow processes
Editing a workflow process template
Creating a workflow process owner
Associating a workflow process owner with a context

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1583

Quick Reference: Setting up workflow in a sourcing document System Setup

Quick Reference: Setting up workflow in a sourcing document

The following is a quick reference guide to setting up workflow in a sourcing document.
Currently, workflow is supported for projects and for contract
documents

Create a Define Create Review and Create Create

Process Process Workflow Design Phases Document Document
Owner Template Definition Phase Type
Configurations

Step 1. Create a Process Owner and Associate it with a Context

Frictionless® SRM requires that a user account be set up as a process owner. This
enables the scripting in the workflow process template to function.
One and only one process owner must be created per context. Once you create the
process owner, you must associate it with its context.
You can only perform this step if you have system administrator rights in Frictionless®
SRM.
1 Create the process owner. For details, see Creating a workflow process owner.
Best practices for creating a process owner are as follows:
n The user account should not have login enabled.
n The account should be granted all permissions for all the sourcing documents
that will be used during the workflow (that is, any documents referenced by the
scripts in the process template).
2 Associate the process owner with a context. For details, see Associating a
workflow process owner with a context.

Step 2. Define a Process Template (.XPDL File)

The process template is a script file that defines the acceptable approval statuses,
routing and conditions for each workflow definition. This file is created using a source
external to SRM (JaWE) and uses an .XPDL format.
For information about customizing a workflow process template, see your system
administrator. For information on XPDL, see
http://www.wfmc.org/standards/XPDL.htm.
For details on editing a process template, see Editing a workflow process template.
You can only edit a process template if you have system administrator rights in
Frictionless® SRM.

1584 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Quick Reference: Setting up workflow in a sourcing document

Step 3. Create a Workflow Definition

The workflow definition identifies the process template that governs the workflow
process, as well as other information about the workflow.
You can only create a workflow definition if you have system administrator rights in
Frictionless® SRM.

To create a workflow definition:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Workflow section of System Setup, select Workflow Definitions from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Workflow Definition List page, click Create.
4 On the Workflow Definition Summary page, fill in the fields with workflow
information. For details, see Field Help for Workflow Definition Summary
page.
5 Click the Add New Version button to add a process template to the workflow
definition. For details, see Field Help for Process Template dialog box.
Note: Changing the process template in an existing workflow definition does not
affect currently active workflow processes referencing that definition. This change
only applies to documents created after the change is made.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Step 4. Review and Design Phases

Phases determine the steps or actions to be taken in a sourcing document workflow
cycle. When one phase is completed, the document is advanced (either manually or
automatically) to the next phase.
Frictionless SRM provides a number of default phases. You can edit these phases and
create new ones as needed.

To review and design phases for your documents:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Data section of System Setup, select Value List Types and Values
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 Do one of the following:
n To edit or create phases for projects, click Project Phases.
n To edit or create phases for contract documents, click Contract Document
Phase.
4 Click Edit in the toolbar.
5 Review the list of phases.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1585

Quick Reference: Setting up workflow in a sourcing document System Setup

6 To edit an existing phase, click its Edit icon and edit the field as needed.
Note: Editing a phase in Value List Values will change the field in all phase
configurations that include it. To change the phase in only one phase configuration,
create the phase configuration, add the phase, and edit the phase there.
7 Add custom phases as needed. For details, see Adding a custom phase as a
value list value
8 Click Save in the toolbar.

Step 5. Create Document Phase Configurations

Phase configurations define the sequence of workflow actions, or phases, in a sourcing

document. When you create a phase configuration, you associate it with a workflow
definition.

Note: Changes to an existing phase configuration do not affect current documents

referencing that configuration. They only apply to documents created after the changes
are made.

To create phase configurations, do the following:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 Do one of the following:
n In the Projects section of Document Setup, select Projects Configurable Phase
Definition from the drop-down list and click OK.
n In the Contract Documents section of Document Setup, select Contract
Document Phase Configuration from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 Create a phase configuration. For details, see Projects Configurable Phase
Definition or Contract Document Phase Configuration.
Note: Use the Workflow Definition field to associate phases in the phase
configuration with the workflow definition you created.

Step 6. Create a Document Type

You can create a document type for projects or contract documents and associate it
with a phase configuration. This will apply the workflow sequence to all projects or
contract documents created from that type.

Create the document type as follows:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 Do one of the following:

1586 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Quick Reference: Setting up workflow in a sourcing document

n In the Projects section of Document Setup, select Project Types from the
drop-down list and click OK. For details, see Project Types.
n In the Contract Documents section of Document Setup, select Contract
Document Types from the drop-down list and click OK. For details, see
Contract Document Types.
3 Do one of the following:
n Click Create to create a new document type.
n Click an existing document type to open it and click Edit in the toolbar.

4 Click the Lookup icon for the Configurable Phase Definition field and select
the phase configuration you created.
Note: Changing the phase definition in a document type does not affect current
documents created from that document type. The change only applies to documents
created after the change is made.
5 Fill in or edit any other fields in the document type.
6 Click Save in the toolbar.

After you complete the above steps, you can create a project or contract document
based on the document type you created. This will enable the workflow process to be
applied to that document.
` For details on creating a project, see Creating a project.
` For details on creating a contract document, see Quick Reference: Creating a
contract document.
` For details on using workflow, see Quick Reference: Working with sourcing
document workflow.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1587

Integration System Setup

Integration
This section describes the integration options in System Setup.

Related Topics
Integration API
Export Results
Script Definition

1588 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Integration

Integration API
This section describes the integration API.

Related Topics
Export Results
Script Definition

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1589

Integration System Setup

Export Results
This section describes export results.

Related Topics
Integration API
Script Definition

1590 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Setup Integration

Script Definition
Script Definition enables an appropriately trained system administrator to modify the
default behavior of the system by defining a script for execution by the system at
certain well-defined points.
The supported scripting language is BeanShell. More information on the BeanShell
scripting language can be found at http://www.beanshell.org.

Note: This feature should not be used except by an experienced system administrator.
Serious errors can occur if this feature is used incorrectly.

Related Topics
Integration API
Export Results

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1591

Integration System Setup

1592 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup

The Document Setup section of Setup provides options for customizing and configuring
the following:
` General
` Master Agreements
` RFx
` Vendors
` Auctions
` Projects
` Contract Generation
` Demand Aggregation
` XPress
` Contract Documents

Confidential 1593
General Document Setup

General
This section describes options for general document configuration.

Related Topics
Event Terms Templates
Category Manager
Document Report Configuration
Document Security Templates
Document Link Definitions
Collaborator Role Definitions
Attachment Library

1594 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup General

Event Terms Templates

Event terms define the conditions to which a supplier must agree in order to participate
in a sourcing event. The event terms library stores standard legal terms and language
that can be reused when creating sourcing documents.

This section describes how to create and edit an event terms template.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the Event Terms Template List
page by doing one of the following:

` Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choose Event Terms
Templates from the Library submenu.
` Click XPress in the navigation bar and then choose Event Terms Templates from
the Library submenu.

Related Topics
Creating an event terms template
Editing an event terms template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1595

General Document Setup

Creating an event terms template

Event terms define the conditions to which a supplier must agree in order to participate
in a sourcing event. The event terms library stores standard legal terms and language
that can be reused when creating sourcing documents.

To create an event terms template:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the General section of Document Setup, select Event Terms Templates from the
drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the Event Terms Template List page by doing one of the
following:
■ Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choose Event Terms
Templates from the Library submenu.
■ Click XPress in the navigation bar and then choose Event Terms Templates
from the Library submenu.
3 On the Event Terms Template List page, click Create.
4 On the Event Terms Template page, fill in the fields with information about the
event terms template.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Event Terms Templates
Editing an event terms template

1596 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup General

Editing an event terms template

Event terms define the conditions to which a supplier must agree in order to participate
in a sourcing event. The event terms library stores standard legal terms and language
that can be reused when creating sourcing documents.

To edit an event terms template:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the General section of Document Setup, select Event Terms Templates from the
drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the Event Terms Template List page by doing one of the
following:
■ Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choose Event Terms
Templates from the Library submenu.
■ Click XPress in the navigation bar and then choose Event Terms Templates
from the Library submenu.
3 On the Event Terms Template List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select Search Event Terms Templates by Name, search
for the template to edit, and click the template.
■ From the drop-down list, select All Event Terms Templates and click the
template to edit.
4 On the Event Terms Template page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Event Terms Templates
Creating an event terms template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1597

General Document Setup

Category Manager
A category manager record is used to associate a group of users with the set of internal
and external categories for which they are responsible. These records are also used in
conjunction with Document Security Templates to automatically assign collaboration
rights for category managers to documents that belong to their categories.

This section describes how to create and edit a category manager.

Related Topics
Creating a category manager
Editing a category manager

1598 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup General

Creating a category manager

A category manager record is used to associate a group of users with the set of internal
and external categories for which they are responsible. These records are also used in
conjunction with Document Security Templates to automatically assign collaboration
rights for category managers to documents that belong to their categories.

To create a category manager:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the General section of Document Setup, select Category Manager from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Category Manager List page, click Create.
4 On the Category Manager page, fill in the fields with information about the category
manager.
5 Under Category Managers, click Add Users to add users to the category manager.
6 In the dialog box, check the box for each user to add and click OK.
7 Under Internal Categories, click Add Internal Category to add internal categories
to the category manager.
8 In the dialog box, check the box for each category to add and click OK.
9 Under External Categories, click Add External Category to add external
categories to the category manager.
10 In the dialog box, check the box for each category to add and click OK.
11 Under Settings, indicate whether this is the default internal or external category
manager.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Category Manager
Editing a category manager

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1599

General Document Setup

Editing a category manager

A category manager record is used to associate a group of users with the set of internal
and external categories for which they are responsible. These records are also used in
conjunction with Document Security Templates to automatically assign collaboration
rights for category managers to documents that belong to their categories.

To edit a category manager:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the General section of Document Setup, select Category Manager from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Category Manager List page, select All Category Managers or All Inactive
Category Managers from the drop-down list and click the category manager to edit.
4 On the Category Manager page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Under Category Managers, click Add Users to add users to the category manager.
7 In the dialog box, check the box for each user to add and click OK.
8 Under Internal Categories, click Add Internal Category to add internal categories
to the category manager.
9 In the dialog box, check the box for each category to add and click OK.
10 Under External Categories, click Add External Category to add external
categories to the category manager.
11 In the dialog box, check the box for each category to add and click OK.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Category Manager
Creating a category manager

1600 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup General

Document Report Configuration

The Document Report Configuration is used to manage the list of reports that appears
in the drop-down list for the Reports toolbar button.

This section describes how to create and edit a document report configuration.

Related Topics
Creating a document report configuration
Editing a document report configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1601

General Document Setup

Creating a document report configuration

The Document Report Configuration is used to manage the list of reports that appears
in the drop-down list for the Reports toolbar button.
By default, a document report is launched in a new popup window. The Open New
Window checkbox in the report entry list can be unchecked to turn off this behavior,
so that the report stays in the same window as the current document. In this case, a
breadcrumb is added for the report.
The option to display the report in the main window should be used when the report has
links to further reports or documents. Links typically require breadcrumbs, but
breadcrumbs are not supported in a popup window.
Note that launching a document report in the main window is enabled only when the
document is in view mode.

To create a document report configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the General section of Document Setup, select Document Report Configuration
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Document Report Configuration List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, fill in the fields with information about the document report
configuration.
5 Click Add Buy-Side Report to add a buy-side report to the document report
configuration.
6 In the dialog box, check the box for each report to add and click OK.
7 Click Add Sell-Side Report to add a sell-side report to the document report
configuration.
8 In the dialog box, check the box for each report to add and click OK.
9 Optionally, reorder the reports.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Document Report Configuration
Editing a document report configuration

1602 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup General

Editing a document report configuration

The Document Report Configuration is used to manage the list of reports that appears
in the drop-down list for the Reports toolbar button.
By default, a document report is launched in a new popup window. The Open New
Window checkbox in the report entry list can be unchecked to turn off this behavior,
so that the report stays in the same window as the current document. In this case, a
breadcrumb is added for the report.
The option to display the report in the main window should be used when the report has
links to further reports or documents. Links typically require breadcrumbs, but
breadcrumbs are not supported in a popup window.
Note that launching a document report in the main window is enabled only when the
document is in view mode.

To edit a document report configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the General section of Document Setup, select Document Report Configuration
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Document Report Configuration List page, select All Document Report
Configs or All Inactive Document Report Configs from the drop-down list and click
the configuration to edit.
4 On the Document Report Configuration page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click Add Buy-Side Report to add a buy-side report to the document report
configuration.
7 In the dialog box, check the box for each report to add and click OK.
8 Click Add Sell-Side Report to add a sell-side report to the document report
configuration.
9 In the dialog box, check the box for each report to add and click OK.
10 Optionally, reorder the reports.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Document Report Configuration
Creating a document report configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1603

General Document Setup

Document Security Templates

A document security template is a set of rules governing the way a sourcing document
assigns collaborator roles. A document security template determines the following:
` The default role and department representation assigned to a collaborator when the
collaborator is added to a sourcing document. This is done to streamline the
process of manually adding collaborators.
` The collaborators, defined by role and user type, that are automatically added to a
sourcing document when it is created. This aspect is the most important to consider
during system setup as it provides the base to define and enforce collaboration,
review and security policies on business documents.
A document security template is defined for each type of sourcing document. The
collaborator list for each document security template can contain any number of
collaborator assignments.
Frictionless® SRM provides document security templates by default. You can also
create and edit document security templates.

Document Security Template Overview

The first part of a collaborator assignment is the specification of the role that this
collaborator will play. The set of available roles to select from comes from the
Collaborator Role Definitions, which are also implementation configurable.
For these collaborator defaults, it is possible to identify a specific user or group, or to
instruct the system to use the user or group that subsequently creates the document
with this template.
Finally, it is possible to define whether the collaborator role or assigned principal
defaulted from the template are locked or editable by the document creator.
Use cases for document security templates include ensuring that a read-only reviewer
from the Audit Group is included on all RFx and Auction documents, or that a member
of the Purchasing Manager Group is included on all RFXs with the right to Publish that
RFx.
For sourcing documents, it is possible to specify a different document security template
for each Document Type, for example, to use one set of default collaborators for RFIs
and a different one for RFQs. The software looks for a Document Template matching
the specific type, and if none is found, selects the Document Template for the same
class (such as RFx) with no type specified. This allows a single Document Template to
be defined as the default for the entire class, with a type-specific override only where
necessary.
Document security template are enterprise scoped. This is necessary due to the
relationships between several of the security objects. It is important to consider this
when defining an implementation with different requirements by Company level

1604 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup General

context. One approach can be to leverage the use of Document Types that are
Company specific to allow the specification of different document security templates.
Document security template are used during document creation, both to set the default
collaborators and to establish the role that will be used by default when the user
manually adds new collaborators. When a document is duplicated, only the second
aspect is relevant. The default collaborators are established by copying the
collaborators from the source document. If collaborators have been added or modified
on the original document after it was originally created, the modified collaborator set is
copied during the duplicate operation. The same behavior applies when a document is
created from a template; the created document copies its collaborators from the
template, not from the defaults on the Document Security Template for the Document
Type. This allows specific templates to add or modify the basic collaborator set, for
example, to include additional collaborators on RFxs used for large capital acquisitions.
Document Templates provide the following additional security features for
collaborators:
` Object-level security is applied to the templates. For example, only users matching
a collaborator role on the template with a minimum of View access can create a
document based on that template, and only users matching a role with Edit access
can modify the template.
` Collaborator entries on the document template have an additional Type field to
specify if the collaborator Applies To Templates Only or Applies To Documents and
Templates. Apply To Documents and Templates matches the current behavior when
a document is created from a template: the collaborator assignments are copied
from the template to the newly created document. The Template Only setting can
be used to add a collaborator role providing access to the template only.
` Collaborator assignments have been discussed here in the context of object-level
security and the access that collaborators are granted to the document. These
assignments also control the system’s collaboration features. Inclusion as a
collaborator enables the user to:
■ Receive alerts about the document
■ See discussion activity in the Discussion channel regarding the document
■ Have the document included, when appropriate, in the To Do List channel
There are cases where it is desirable to add a collaborator who can access the
document, but who is not impacted by the active collaboration features. An
example might be an auditor. A field allows you to determine whether alerts and
notices will be sent to the collaborator.
A principal type for collaborators on the document security template allows collaborator
roles to be defined for different principal types. These principals can be the Current
User, Current User Group, Current User Organization, Internal Category Manager,
External Category Manager, or a specific user, group, or company. For example, this
can be used to automatically add the category manager as a collaborator for the
document.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1605

General Document Setup

This section describes how to create and edit a document security template.

Related Topics
Creating a document security template
Editing a document security template

1606 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup General

Creating a document security template

A document security template is a set of rules governing the way a sourcing document
assigns collaborator roles. A document security template determines the following:
` The default role and department representation assigned to a collaborator when the
collaborator is added to a sourcing document.
` The collaborators, defined by role and user type, that are automatically added to a
sourcing document when it is created.
A document security template is defined for each type of sourcing document.
Frictionless® SRM provides document security templates by default. You can also
create and edit document security templates.

To create a document security template:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the General section of Document Setup, select Document Security Template from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Document Security Template List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic information about the document
security template.
5 Click the New Collaborators tab.
6 Sill in the fields with collaborator information for the document security template.
This information determines the default role and department representation
assigned to any collaborators added to a document that uses this template. The list
of available roles is determined by the Collaborator Role Definitions in Setup.
7 Click the New Documents tab.
8 Click Add to add new document information to the document security template.
This information determines the collaborators that are added by default to a new
sourcing document created using this template.
9 Fill in the fields in the dialog box and click OK.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Document Security Templates
Editing a document security template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1607

General Document Setup

Editing a document security template

A document security template is a set of rules governing the way a sourcing document
assigns collaborator roles. A document security template determines the following:
` The default role and department representation assigned to a collaborator when the
collaborator is added to a sourcing document.
` The collaborators, defined by role and user type, that are automatically added to a
sourcing document when it is created.
A document security template is defined for each type of sourcing document.
Frictionless® SRM provides document security templates by default. You can also
create and edit document security templates.

To edit a document security template:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the General section of Document Setup, select Document Security Template from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Document Security Template List page, select All Document Security
Templates or All Inactive Document Security Templates from the drop-down list and
click the template to edit.
4 On the Document Security Template page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 On the Header page, edit any fields.
6 Click the New Collaborators tab to edit collaborator information. This information
determines the default role and department representation assigned to any
collaborators added to a document that uses this template. The list of available
roles is determined by the Collaborator Role Definitions in Setup.
7 Edit any fields.
8 Click the New Documents tab to add or edit new document information. This
information determines the collaborators that are added by default to a new
sourcing document created using this template.

9 Click the Edit icon for the document to edit.

10 In the dialog box, edit any fields and click OK.
11 Click Add to add a new document to the document security template.
12 Fill in the fields in the dialog box and click OK.
13 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Document Security Templates

1608 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup General

Creating a document security template

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1609

General Document Setup

Document Link Definitions

A document link definition sets up the possible relationships between sourcing
documents.

This section describes how to create and edit a document link definition.

Related Topics
Creating a document link definition
Editing a document link definition

1610 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup General

Creating a document link definition

A document link definition sets up the possible relationships between sourcing
documents.

To create a document link definition:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the General section of Document Setup, select Document Link Definitions from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Document Link Definitions List page, click Create.
4 On the Definition page, fill in the fields with information about the document link
definition.
Note: The value for the Document Class ID field can be found in the Class
Reference section of the online Reference Guide (RG).
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Document Link Definitions
Editing a document link definition

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1611

General Document Setup

Editing a document link definition

A document link definition sets up the possible relationships between sourcing
documents.

To edit a document link definition:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the General section of Document Setup, select Document Link Definitions from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Document Link Definition List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select Search Document Link Definitions by Name,
search for the definition to edit, and click the definition.
■ From the drop-down list, select All Document Relationship Definitions and click
the definition to edit.
4 On the Definition page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Document Link Definitions
Creating a document link definition

1612 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup General

Collaborator Role Definitions

A collaborator role is a set of role-based rights assigned to collaborators on sourcing
documents. Examples of collaborator roles include document owners, approvers, and
sponsors.
There are four types of collaborators:
` User Collaborator: The collaborator represents a specific user.
` Group Collaborator: The collaborator represents a group of users
` Company Collaborator: The collaborator represents everyone in the company.
` Vendor Collaborator: The collaborator represents a specific supplier.

In many cases, the same collaborator role can be assigned to multiple collaborators for
the same document.
Frictionless® SRM provides collaborator role definitions by default. You can also create
and edit collaborator role definitions.

This section describes how to create and edit a collaborator role definition.

Field help for Collaborator Role page

Inactive: Check this box to mark the collaborator role as Inactive and make it
unavailable for use.

Collaborator Role Name: Type the name of the collaborator role.

Security Profile: Click the Lookup icon to select a security profile for the
collaborator role.

Restrict to User: Check Restrict to User to indicate that the collaborator role can
only be used with User collaborators (and not with Group, Company, or Vendor
collaborators). For example, the Owner role has Restrict to User checked because an
owner is always an individual, not a group.

Allow Multiple: Check this box to indicate that a document can include multiple
collaborators with this role. Leave it unchecked to allow only a single collaborator with
this role per document. For example, the Owner role does not have Allow Multiple
checked because a document can only have a single owner.

Do Not Send Collaborator Alerts or Notices: Check this box to indicate that a
collaborator with this role in a document should not be sent alerts or notices related to
the document.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1613

General Document Setup

Internal Type
In most cases, a user-defined collaborator role should use None as its internal type.
None indicates that this is a standard role that enforces the security settings defined in
the associated security profile. Selecting an internal type will enforce the same level of
security as the None type, as well as providing additional validation to ensure that the
role is used as intended.
` Owner: This option identifies a document owner. Validation ensures that each
sourcing document has a collaborator with the Owner role.
` Purchasing Manager: In the case of an RFQuick that is submitted to a Purchasing
Manager for approval, this role is used to identify the collaborator that represents
the Purchasing Manager. Validation ensures that any RFQuick that is submitted to a
Purchasing Manager has a collaborator with this role.
` Internal/External Category Manager: This option identifies collaborators that
represent Category Managers. The users associated with this role are designated on
the Category Manager page in Setup. A document with this collaborator role is
kept in sync with the Category Manager page information. Therefore, if the
Category Manager information changes in Setup, the changes will be reflected
automatically in the document the next time it is edited.
` RFQuick Creator: This option is used to keep track of users who create an
RFQuick. Whenever a user submits an RFQuick, that user is added to the
collaborator list with this role before it is submitted to the Purchasing Manager.
` Sponsor and Requester: These are legacy roles that are used to identify the
Sponsor and Requester of a contract. No additional validation is performed for
these roles.

Role Usage: Select whether the collaborator role will be used for sourcing documents
or reports.
Description: Type a description of this collaborator role and its usage.

Related Topics
Creating a collaborator role definition
Editing a collaborator role definition

1614 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup General

Creating a collaborator role definition

A collaborator role is a set of role-based rights assigned to collaborators on sourcing
documents. Examples of collaborator roles include document owners, approvers, and
sponsors.
Frictionless® SRM provides collaborator role definitions by default. You can also create
and edit collaborator role definitions.

To create a collaborator role definition:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the General section of Document Setup, select Collaborator Role Definitions from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Collaborator Role Definitions List page, click Create.
4 On the Collaborator Role page, fill in the fields with information about the
collaborator role definition. For details, see Field help for Collaborator Role
page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Collaborator Role Definitions
Editing a collaborator role definition
Field help for Collaborator Role page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1615

General Document Setup

Editing a collaborator role definition

A collaborator role is a set of role-based rights assigned to collaborators on sourcing
documents. Examples of collaborator roles include document owners, approvers, and
sponsors.
Frictionless® SRM provides collaborator role definitions by default. You can also create
and edit collaborator role definitions.

To edit a collaborator role definition:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the General section of Document Setup, select Collaborator Role Definitions from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Collaborator Role Definitions List page, select All Collaborator Roles or All
Inactive Collaborator Roles from the drop-down list and click the definition to edit.
4 On the Collaborator Role page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields. For details, see Field help for Collaborator Role page.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Collaborator Role Definitions
Creating a collaborator role definition
Field help for Collaborator Role page

1616 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup General

Attachment Library
Attachments enable you to reference additional information that you cannot include in
the sourcing document itself.
Attachments stored in libraries can be attached to sourcing documents by clicking the
Import from Library button in the document toolbar. You can also add attachments
to discussion threads, line items and project schedules.

This section describes how to create and edit an attachment library.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the Attachment Library List page
by doing one of the following:

` Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choose Attachment
Library from the Library submenu.
` Click XPress in the navigation bar and then choose Attachment Library from the
Library submenu.

Field help for the Attachment Library Header page

Library Status: Select In Progress or Ready to indicate the status of the attachment
library.
Module Checkboxes: Use the checkboxes below Library Status to specify the type of
document for which the attachment library is available. For example, to make the
library available only for auctions, check only the By Auction box. If you want the
library to be available to all document types, check all the boxes.

Related Topics
Creating an attachment library

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1617

General Document Setup

Creating an attachment library

Attachments enable you to reference additional information that you cannot include in
the sourcing document itself.
Attachments stored in libraries can be attached to sourcing documents by clicking the
Import from Library button in the document toolbar. You can also add attachments
to discussion threads, line items and project schedules.

To create an attachment library:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the General section of Document Setup, select Attachment Library from the
drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the Attachment Library List page by doing one of the
following:
■ Click Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choose Attachment
Library from the Library submenu.
■ Click XPress in the navigation bar and then choose Attachment Library from
the Library submenu.
3 On the Attachment Library List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields with information about the attachment library
For more information, see Field help for the Attachment Library Header page.
5 Click the Attachments tab.
6 Click Attach File or Attach URL to add an attachment.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To edit an attachment library, click the library name on the Attachment Library
List page and then click Edit in the document toolbar.

Related Topics
Attachment Library
Field help for the Attachment Library Header page

1618 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Master Agreements

Master Agreements
A contract is a legal agreement between a purchasing enterprise and a supplier which
dictates buying, payment, and delivery terms over time. A master agreement is a
Frictionless® SRM feature that enables you to analyze, audit, and measure specific
buying activity against a contract’s original strategic goals.
You work with contracts using the Contract Generation option in Setup.

This section describes how to work with master agreement configuration options.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Types
Master Agreement Terms
Master Agreement Schedule Library

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1619

Master Agreements Document Setup

Master Agreement Types

Document types standardize the creation of sourcing documents. Master agreement
types enable you to predefine features in master agreements.

This section describes how to create and edit master agreement types.

Field help for Master Agreement Type page

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that the master agreement type is not in use and
will not appear in the Active list.
Name: Type a name for the master agreement type. This is a required field.
Description: Type a description for the master agreement type.
Order: Type a number to use in sequencing the master agreement type. This is a
required field.

Numbering Table: Click the Lookup icon to choose a numbering table for the
master agreement type.

Features

Discussions: Check this box to enable the Discussions feature in master agreements
of this type.
Attachments: Check this box to enable the Attachments feature in master agreements
of this type.
Accounting: Check this box to create the Accounting tab in master agreements of this
type.
Requires Internal Category: Check this box to require that an internal category be
selected in master agreements of this type.
Allows Duplication: Check this box to allow master agreements of this type to be
duplicated to create new master agreements.
Savings Metrics: Check this box to enable savings metrics to be used in master
agreements of this type.

Master Agreement:
` Agreements: Check this box to enable sub-agreements to be created in master
agreements of this type.
` Audits: Check this box to enable the Audits feature in master agreements of this
type.
` Schedules: Check this box to create the Schedule tab in master agreements of this
type.

1620 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Master Agreements

` Terms: Check this box to create the Terms tab in master agreements of this type.
` Line Items: Check this box to create the Line Items tab in master agreements of
this type.
` Performance Metrics: Check this box to enable performance metrics to be used
in master agreements of this type.

Agreement:
An agreement is a sub-agreement within a master agreement.
` Audits: Check this box to enable the Audits feature in agreements of this type.
` Schedules: Check this box to create the Schedule tab in agreements of this type.
` Terms: Check this box to create the Terms tab in agreements of this type.
` Line Items: Check this box to create the Line Items tab in agreements of this
type.
` Performance Metrics: Check this box to enable performance metrics to be used
in agreements of this type.

Rules

Schedule Working Days:

` Select Calendar Days to use all calendar days when calculating dates for this
master agreement.
` Select Standard Work Days to use only workdays, omitting weekends and
holidays, when calculating dates for this master agreement.

Defaults

Perpetual Term: Check this box to indicate that master agreements of this type will
have no expiration date. You cannot set alerts that are dependent on an End Date for
perpetual term master agreements.
Allow Marginal Pricing (reports only): If the agreement has tiered pricing as the
defined pricing structure, and if the buying organization is importing spend transactions
mapped to agreements, check this box to indicate that when computing current unit
price values based on spend-to-date, the system should use a marginal pricing module.
This means that the system will assume that the first tier volume of the product or
service should be priced at the first tier unit price, the second tier volume should be
priced at the second tier price, and so on.
Leave this box unchecked to indicate that all units should be priced at the same price,
the price associated with the tier volume of the total consumed product or service
to-date.
Search Options:

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1621

Master Agreements Document Setup

` Publish Summary to Search: Check this box to enable master agreements of this
type to be searched for in the Master Agreement Workbench Search channel.
` Publish Summary to Vendor: Check this box to publish summaries for master
agreements of this type to suppliers.

Notifications
Notifications determine which scheduled events generate an email notification or an
alert in the Alerts channel on the Workbench.
For each option in the list, select one of the following:
` No alerts: Do not create alerts.
` Alerts only: Create alerts in the Buyer Alerts Workbench channel.
` Alerts and email notifications: Create alerts in the Buyer Alerts Workbench
channel and send email notifications to the document owner and collaborators.

Renewal Review Reminder: Create alerts when the master agreement is

approaching its renewal date.
Savings Metric Over Budget Alerts: Create alerts when a savings metric exceeds its
budget.
Savings Metric Over Expected Alerts: Create alerts when a savings metric exceeds
its expected value.
Performance Metric Alerts: Create alerts if the performance target is not met.
Agreement Limit Alerts: Create alerts when the master agreement exceeds its
monetary limit.
Agreement Minimum Alerts: Create alerts when the master agreement does not
meet its monetary minimum.
Agreement Rebate Alerts: Create alerts when the agreement rebate volume
threshold has been reached and a rebate will be generated.
Agreement Penalty Alerts: Create alerts when the agreement penalty volume
threshold has been reached and a penalty will be generated.
Line Item Limit Alerts: Create alerts when a line item exceeds its monetary limit.
Line Item Minimum Alerts: Create alerts when a line item does not meet its
monetary minimum.
Line Item Rebate Alerts: Create alerts when the line item rebate volume threshold
has been reached and a rebate will be generated.
Line Item Penalty Alerts: Create alerts when the line item penalty volume threshold
has been reached and a penalty will be generated.

1622 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Master Agreements

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement type
Editing a master agreement type

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1623

Master Agreements Document Setup

Creating a master agreement type

Document types standardize the creation of sourcing documents. Master agreement
types enable you to predefine features in master agreements.

To create a master agreement type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Agreements section of Document Setup, select Master Agreement
Types from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Master Agreement Type List page, click Create.
4 On the Type page, fill in the fields under General and those under Features, Rules,
Defaults, and Notifications. For details, see Field help for Master Agreement
Type page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Types
Editing a master agreement type
Field help for Master Agreement Type page

1624 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Master Agreements

Editing a master agreement type

Document types standardize the creation of sourcing documents. Master agreement
types enable you to predefine features in master agreements.

To edit a master agreement type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Agreements section of Document Setup, select Master Agreement
Types from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Master Agreement Type List page, select All Master Agreement Types or All
Inactive Master Agreement Types from the drop-down list and click the master
agreement type to edit.
4 On the Type page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields. For details, see Field help for Master Agreement Type page
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Types
Creating a master agreement type
Field help for Master Agreement Type page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1625

Master Agreements Document Setup

Master Agreement Terms

A contract is a legal agreement between a purchasing enterprise and a supplier which
dictates buying, payment, and delivery terms over time. A master agreement is a
Frictionless® SRM feature that enables you to analyze, audit, and measure specific
buying activity against a contract’s original strategic goals.

This section describes how to create and edit master agreement terms.

Field help for Master Agreement Terms Setup page

Inactive: Check this box to remove this document from the active list.
Display Name: Type a name for this set of master agreement terms. This is a required
field.
External ID: Type an external ID for this set of master agreement terms. This is a
required field.
Description: Type a name for this set of master agreement terms.
Term Text: Type the text to use for this set of master agreement terms.
Ordering Info Term: Check this box to indicate that the standard agreement term is a
term that relates to the ordering of a line item in the agreement.
URL: Enter an associated URL for this set of master agreement terms.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement term
Editing a master agreement term

1626 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Master Agreements

Creating a master agreement term

A contract is a legal agreement between a purchasing enterprise and a supplier which
dictates buying, payment, and delivery terms over time. A master agreement is a
Frictionless® SRM feature that enables you to analyze, audit, and measure specific
buying activity against a contract’s original strategic goals.

To create a master agreement term:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Agreements section of Document Setup, select Master Agreement
Terms from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Term List page, click Create.
4 On the Term page, fill in the fields with information about the master agreement
term. For details, see Field help for Master Agreement Terms Setup page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Terms
Editing a master agreement term
Field help for Master Agreement Terms Setup page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1627

Master Agreements Document Setup

Editing a master agreement term

A contract is a legal agreement between a purchasing enterprise and a supplier which
dictates buying, payment, and delivery terms over time. A master agreement is a
Frictionless® SRM feature that enables you to analyze, audit, and measure specific
buying activity against a contract’s original strategic goals.

To edit a master agreement term:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Agreements section of Document Setup, select Master Agreement
Terms from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Term List page, click the master agreement term to edit.
4 On the Term page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields. For details, see Field help for Master Agreement Terms Setup
page.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Terms
Creating a master agreement term
Field help for Master Agreement Terms Setup page

1628 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Master Agreements

Master Agreement Schedule Library

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
master agreement schedule library enables you to store pre-defined milestones and
tasks, so that you can create standard schedules and use them as needed in your
master agreement. This minimizes the amount of manual data entry that is required to
create a master agreement.
Once you add a library schedule component to a master agreement, it can be modified
as needed.

This section describes options for working with master agreement schedules.

Field help for Master Agreement Schedule Library page

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that this schedule library is not in use and will not
appear in the Active list.
Display Name: Type a unique name for the schedule library. This is a required field.
Description: Type a description for the schedule library.
Category: Select a category from the drop-down list. This is a required field.
Library Status: Select a status from the drop-down list. This is a required field.

Click Add to add an event to the schedule library. For event fields, see the Master
Agreements Schedule Settings page.

Related Topics
Creating a master agreement schedule
Editing a master agreement schedule

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1629

Master Agreements Document Setup

Creating a master agreement schedule

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
master agreement schedule library enables you to store pre-defined milestones and
tasks, so that you can create standard schedules and use them as needed in your
master agreement. This minimizes the amount of manual data entry that is required to
create a master agreement.
Once you add a library schedule component to a master agreement, it can be modified
as needed.

To create a master agreement schedule:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Agreements section of Document Setup, select Master Agreement
Schedule Library from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Master Agreement Schedule List page, click Create.
4 On the Schedule page, fill in the fields with basic information about the master
agreement schedule. For details, see Field help for Master Agreement
Schedule Library page.
5 Click Add to add a schedule event. For more information, see Adding an event to
a schedule.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Schedule Library
Editing a master agreement schedule
Field help for Master Agreement Schedule Library page

1630 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Master Agreements

Editing a master agreement schedule

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
master agreement schedule library enables you to store pre-defined milestones and
tasks, so that you can create standard schedules and use them as needed in your
master agreement. This minimizes the amount of manual data entry that is required to
create a master agreement.
Once you add a library schedule component to a master agreement, it can be modified
as needed.

To edit a master agreement schedule:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Master Agreements section of Document Setup, select Master Agreement
Schedule Library from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Master Agreement Schedule List page, click the master agreement schedule
to edit.
4 On the Schedule page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields for basic information. For details, see Field help for Master
Agreement Schedule Library page.

6 Click the Edit icon for an event to edit, or click Add to add an event. For more
information, see Adding an event to a schedule and Editing an event in a
schedule.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Master Agreement Schedule Library
Creating a master agreement schedule
Field help for Master Agreement Schedule Library page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1631

RFx Document Setup

RFx
An RFx is a sourcing document that enables you to request information, quotes, and
prices regarding goods and services from multiple suppliers.

This section describes how to work with RFx configuration options.

Related Topics
RFx Types
RFx System Answer Sources
RFx Questions Library
RFx Schedule Library
RFx Information Library
RFx Table Design Library

1632 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup RFx

RFx Types
Document types standardize the creation of sourcing documents. RFx types enable you
to predefine features in RFxs.

This section describes how to create and edit an RFx type.

Field help for RFx Type page

General Info

Inactive: Check to indicate that this RFx type is not in the list of active types.
Document ID: Type a name for the RFx type. This is a required field.
Description: Select a description from the drop-down list and edit it as necessary in
the text box.
Order: Type a number to use in ordering the RFx type. This is a required field.

Numbering Table: Click the Lookup icon to choose a numbering table to use with
this RFx type.

Features

Discussions: Check to enable the Discussions feature in RFxs of this type.

Chat: Check to enable the chat feature in RFxs of this type.
Attachments: Check to enable the Attachments feature in RFxs of this type.
Accounting: Check to create the Accounting tab in RFxs of this type.
Requires Internal Category: Check to make the Internal Category field required in
RFxs of this type.
Information Sections: Check to create the Information tab in RFxs of this type. The
Information tab displays information sections that provide boilerplate information about
your company and the RFx.
Questions: Check to enable questions in RFxs of this type.
Line Items: Check to enable line items in RFxs of this type.
Specifications: Check to enable line item specifications in RFxs of this type.

Rules

Allows Duplication: Check to allow RFxs of this type to be duplicated to create new
RFxs.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1633

RFx Document Setup

Allow Multi Currency: Check to allow multiple currencies and to create the Exchange
Rates tab in RFxs of this type.
Enable RFx Response Duplication: Check to allow responses to RFxs of this type to
be duplicated.
Available for RFQuick: Check to make RFxs of this type available for use with the
RFQuick module.
Create Default Questions Group: Check to load a default Question Group into
Question Sections created in RFxs of this type.

Default Group Name: Click the Lookup icon to select a name for the default
Question Group that is created in a new Question Section in RFxs of this type.

Schedule Working Days:

` Select Calendar Days to use all calendar days when calculating dates for this
master agreement.
` Select Standard Work Days to use only workdays, omitting weekends and
holidays, when calculating dates for this master agreement.

Defaults

Enable Multiple Rounds: Check to enable multiple rounds in RFxs of this type.
Round Name: Select the round name that will appear by default in RFxs of this type.
This name can be changed in the RFx document.
Enable Scoring: Check to enable question scoring in RFxs of this type.
Scoring Type: Select Standard for the RFx owner to perform all question scoring.
Select Collaborative to enable the RFx owners to select collaborators as scorers. This
value cannot be changed in an RFx of this type.
Private Scoring: Check to prevent collaborative scorers from seeing scores other than
their own. This value cannot be changed in an RFx of this type.
Use Equally Weighted Average For All Scorers: Check to use equal weights for
each scorer, rather than setting weights individually. Leave this box unchecked to
enable the RFx owner to set individual weights for scorers. This value can be changed in
an RFx of this type.
Publish as Public Event: Check to publish the RFx in the Events channel of the
buy-side Workbench. Checking this box will also create the Publish to vendor
checkbox in RFxs of this type, which gives the RFx creator the option to publish the RFx
to the Workbench of all approved suppliers.
View RFx Responses Only After Bidding Closes: Check to make RFx responses
viewable only after bidding ends.

1634 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup RFx

Skip Preliminary State on RFx Response: Check to skip the Preliminary state for
responses to RFxs of this type.
Default Sort for RFx Responses: Select a default sort order for responses to RFxs of
this type.
Phase Configuration: Select the phases to use for RFxs of this type:
` All Phases
` Skip Open for Review
` Skip Waiting for Approval
` Skip Waiting for Approval and Open for Review

Enable e-mail confirmations of Vendors’ Intent to Respond to RFx: Check to

enable an email notification to be sent to the RFx owner when a supplier confirms the
intention to respond to the RFx.

Vendor Rank: Select a default supplier rank for RFxs created from this type. This
selection can be modified in the RFx.
` Do not disclose rank: Does not show any competitive information to suppliers.
Suppliers can see only their own RFx responses and cannot see how their RFx
responses measure against those of other suppliers.
` By quartile: Ranks suppliers by quartile. Suppliers can see how their RFx
responses measure against other suppliers’ RFx responses in a specific quartile.
This ranking choice is not recommended if there are fewer than four suppliers.
` Do not show total number participating: Ranks suppliers numerically.
Suppliers can see their rank positions but cannot see the total number of suppliers.
` Show total number participating: Lists suppliers by rank with total number of
participating suppliers. Suppliers can see their positions in the ranking and see the
total number of suppliers.
Notifications: Click Email Notification Settings to specify the email notifications
that will be sent for RFxs of this type. These settings can be edited in the RFx.

Export Fields
The following fields are the default query groups used to export RFx line items:
` RFx Unit Price Line Item Export
` RFx Price Components Line Item Export
` RFx Tiered Pricing Line Item Export
` RFx Response Line Item Unit Price Export
` RFx Response Line Item Price Comp Export

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1635

RFx Document Setup

Unless you have customized the columns that are exported when you click the Export
button on the RFx Line Items page, it is strongly recommended that you use the default
values for these fields.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx type
Editing an RFx type

1636 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup RFx

Creating an RFx type

Document types standardize the creation of sourcing documents. RFx types enable you
to predefine features in RFxs.

To create an RFx type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the RFx section of Document Setup, select RFx Types from the drop-down list
and click OK.
3 On the RFx Type List page, click Create.
4 On the Type page, fill in the fields under General Info and those under Features,
Rules, and Defaults.
5 Click Email Notification Settings to set up email notifications.
6 In the dialog box, check the box for each notification to set up and then click OK.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Types
Editing an RFx type
Field help for RFx Type page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1637

RFx Document Setup

Editing an RFx type

Document types standardize the creation of sourcing documents. RFx types enable you
to predefine features in RFxs.

To edit an RFx type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the RFx section of Document Setup, select RFx Types from the drop-down list
and click OK.
3 On the RFx Type List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select Search RFx Document Types by Name, search
for the type to edit, and click the type.
■ From the drop-down list, select All RFx Document Types or All Inactive RFx
Document Types and click the type to edit.
4 On the Type page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click Email Notification Settings to edit email notifications.
7 In the dialog box, edit email notifications and click OK.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Types
Creating an RFx type
Field help for RFx Type page

1638 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup RFx

RFx System Answer Sources

An RFx is a sourcing document that enables you to request information, quotes, and
prices regarding goods and services from multiple suppliers.

This section describes how to create and edit an RFx system answer source.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx system answer source
Editing an RFx system answer source

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1639

RFx Document Setup

Creating an RFx system answer source

An RFx is a sourcing document that enables you to request information, quotes, and
prices regarding goods and services from multiple suppliers.

To create an RFx system answer source:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the RFx section of Document Setup, select RFx System Answer Sources from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the System Answer Source List page, click Create.
4 On the System Answer Source page, fill in the fields with information about the
system answer source.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx System Answer Sources
Editing an RFx system answer source

1640 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup RFx

Editing an RFx system answer source

An RFx is a sourcing document that enables you to request information, quotes, and
prices regarding goods and services from multiple suppliers.

To edit an RFx system answer source:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the RFx section of Document Setup, select RFx System Answer Sources from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the System Answer Source List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select Search System Answer Sources by Name,
search for the source to edit, and click the source.
■ From the drop-down list, select All System Answer Sources or All Inactive
System Answer Sources and click the source to edit.
4 On the System Answer Source page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx System Answer Sources
Creating an RFx system answer source

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1641

RFx Document Setup

RFx Questions Library

An RFx is a sourcing document that enables you to request information, quotes, and
prices regarding goods and services from multiple suppliers. The RFx questions library
allows you to store questions for use in multiple RFxs. This reduces the amount of
manual data entry needed to create an RFx.

This section describes how to create and edit RFx criteria.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the RFx Questions List page by
clicking Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing RFx Questions
Library from the Library submenu.

Related Topics
Creating RFx library questions
Editing RFx library questions

1642 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup RFx

Creating RFx library questions

An RFx is a sourcing document that enables you to request information, quotes, and
prices regarding goods and services from multiple suppliers. The RFx questions library
allows you to store questions for use in multiple RFxs. This reduces the amount of
manual data entry needed to create an RFx.

To create RFx criteria:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the RFx section of Document Setup, select RFx Questions Library from the
drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the RFx Questions List page by clicking Enterprise
Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing RFx Questions Library from the
Library submenu.
3 On the RFx Questions List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic information about the RFx criteria.
5 Click the Questions tab.
6 Add questions in one of the following ways:
■ Click Add to add a question.
■ Click Add Group to add a question group.
■ Click Import to import questions from a CSV file.
7 Click the Preview tab to preview the questions you added.
8 Click the Preferences tab to preview your preferences.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Questions Library
Editing RFx library questions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1643

RFx Document Setup

Editing RFx library questions

An RFx is a sourcing document that enables you to request information, quotes, and
prices regarding goods and services from multiple suppliers. The RFx questions library
allows you to store questions for use in multiple RFxs. This reduces the amount of
manual data entry needed to create an RFx.

To edit RFx criteria:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the RFx section of Document Setup, select RFx Questions Library from the
drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the RFx Questions List page by clicking Enterprise
Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing RFx Questions Library from the
Library submenu.
3 On the RFx Questions List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select Search RFx Questions Library by Name, search
for the criteria to edit, and click the criteria.
■ From the drop-down list, select RFx Questions Library or Inactive RFx Questions
Library and click the criteria to edit.
4 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Questions tab to add and edit questions.

7 Click the Edit icon for a question to edit, or add questions in one of the
following ways:
■ Click Add to add a question.
■ Click Add Group to add a question group.
■ Click Import to import questions from a CSV file.
8 Click the Preview tab to preview the questions you added and edited.
9 Click the Preferences tab to preview your preferences.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Questions Library
Editing RFx library questions

1644 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup RFx

RFx Schedule Library

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
RFx schedule library enables you to store pre-defined milestones and tasks, so that you
can create standard schedules and use them as needed in your RFxs. This minimizes
the amount of manual data entry that is required to create an RFx.
Once you add a library schedule component to an RFx, it can be modified as needed.

This section describes how to create and edit an RFx schedule.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the RFx Schedule List page by
clicking Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing RFx Schedule
Library from the Library submenu.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx schedule
Editing an RFx schedule

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1645

RFx Document Setup

Creating an RFx schedule

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
RFx schedule library enables you to store pre-defined milestones and tasks, so that you
can create standard schedules and use them as needed in your RFxs. This minimizes
the amount of manual data entry that is required to create an RFx.
Once you add a library schedule component to an RFx, it can be modified as needed.

To create an RFx schedule:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the RFx section of Document Setup, select RFx Schedule Library from the
drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the RFx Schedule List page by clicking Enterprise
Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing RFx Schedule Library from the
Library submenu.
3 On the RFx Schedule List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic information about the RFx schedule.
5 Click the Schedule Items tab.
6 Click Add to add an event to the schedule. For details, see Adding an event to a
schedule.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Schedule Library
Editing an RFx schedule

1646 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup RFx

Editing an RFx schedule

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
RFx schedule library enables you to store pre-defined milestones and tasks, so that you
can create standard schedules and use them as needed in your RFxs. This minimizes
the amount of manual data entry that is required to create an RFx.
Once you add a library schedule component to an RFx, it can be modified as needed.

To edit an RFx schedule:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the RFx section of Document Setup, select RFx Schedule Library from the
drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the RFx Schedule List page by clicking Enterprise
Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing RFx Schedule Library from the
Library submenu.
3 On the RFx Schedule List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select Search RFx Schedule Library by Name, search
for the schedule to edit, and click the schedule.
■ From the drop-down list, select RFx Schedule Library or Inactive RFx Schedule
Library and click the schedule to edit.
4 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Schedule Items tab to add and edit events.

7 Click the Edit icon for an event to edit, or click Add to add an event. For more
information, see Adding an event to a schedule and Editing an event in a
schedule.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Schedule Library
Creating an RFx schedule

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1647

RFx Document Setup

RFx Information Library

An RFx is a sourcing document that enables you to request information, quotes, and
prices regarding goods and services from multiple suppliers. The RFx information
library allows you to store RFx information for reuse in multiple RFxs. This reduces the
manual data entry necessary to create an RFx.

This section describes how to create and edit RFx information.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the RFx Information List page by
clicking Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing RFx Information
Library from the Library submenu.

Related Topics
Creating RFx information
Editing RFx information

1648 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup RFx

Creating RFx information

An RFx is a sourcing document that enables you to request information, quotes, and
prices regarding goods and services from multiple suppliers. The RFx information
library allows you to store RFx information for reuse in multiple RFxs. This reduces the
manual data entry necessary to create an RFx.

To create RFx information:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the RFx section of Document Setup, select RFx Information Library from the
drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the RFx Information List page by clicking Enterprise
Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing RFx Information Library from the
Library submenu.
3 On the RFx Information List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic RFx information.
5 Click the Information tab.
6 Click Add to add an information section.
7 On the Info Section page, fill in the fields and click the Save button in the toolbar.
8 On the Information page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Information Library
Editing RFx information

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1649

RFx Document Setup

Editing RFx information

An RFx is a sourcing document that enables you to request information, quotes, and
prices regarding goods and services from multiple suppliers. The RFx information
library allows you to store RFx information for reuse in multiple RFxs. This reduces the
manual data entry necessary to create an RFx.

To edit RFx information:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the RFx section of Document Setup, select RFx Information Library from the
drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the RFx Information List page by clicking Enterprise
Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing RFx Information Library from the
Library submenu.
3 On the RFx Information List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select Search RFx Information Library by Name,
search for the information to edit, and click the information.
■ From the drop-down list, select RFx Information Library or Inactive RFx
Information Library and click the information to edit.
4 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Information tab to add and edit information sections.

7 Click the Edit icon for an information to edit, or click Add to add an
information section.
8 On the Info Section page, fill in or edit the fields and click the Save button in the
toolbar.
9 On the Header page, lick the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Information Library
Creating RFx information

1650 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup RFx

RFx Table Design Library

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
table design library enables you to store custom table formats. You add a table format
to an RFx on the Questions tab.
This section describes how to create and edit an RFx table design.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the RFx Table Design List page
by clicking Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing RFx Table
Design Library from the Library submenu.

Field help for RFx Table Design page

The fields on the Design page determine the design of a table containing table-based
questions. The following is a description of some fields in this page.

Question: Type the table-based question.

Description for Vendors: Type the question description to be seen by suppliers.

Table Orientation: This field determines whether the table displays attributes as
columns or rows.
` Entries are Rows: Click to use entries as table rows. Entries are data elements
that suppliers provide in response to your question.
` Attributes are Rows: Click to use attributes as table rows. Attributes are data
elements that you define, such as color, size, and so on.

Entry Labels: This field determines the format of supplier responses.

` Numbered with Total # of Entries: Click to number the supplier responses, and
type the total number of responses to enable for each attribute.
` Value List: Click to use a list of pre-defined values for supplier responses, and

then choose the value list to use by clicking the Lookup icon that appears.

Entry Settings:
` Allow additional entries in response: Check to create an Add button in the
table to enable suppliers to create additional entries.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1651

RFx Document Setup

Required Entries: This field determines entry requirements.

` Not Required: Click to indicate that entries are not required.
` All Entries Required: Click to indicate that all entries are required.
` Minimum Entries Required: Click and enter a number to indicate the minimum
number of required entries.

Related Topics
Creating an RFx table design
Editing an RFx table design

1652 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup RFx

Creating an RFx table design

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
table design library enables you to store custom table formats. You add a table format
to an RFx on the Questions tab in the RFx document.

To create an RFx table design:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the RFx section of Document Setup, select RFx Table Design Library from the
drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the RFx Table Design List page by clicking Enterprise
Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing RFx Table Design Library from the
Library submenu.
3 On the RFx Table Design List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic information.
5 Click the Design tab.
6 Fill in the fields with design information. For details, see Field help for RFx Table
Design page.
7 Click the Preview tab to preview the table design.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Table Design Library
Editing an RFx table design
Field help for RFx Table Design page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1653

RFx Document Setup

Editing an RFx table design

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
table design library enables you to store custom table formats. You add a table format
to an RFx on the Questions tab in the RFx document.

To edit an RFx table design:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the RFx section of Document Setup, select RFx Table Design Library from the
drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the RFx Table Design List page by clicking Enterprise
Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing RFx Table Design Library from the
Library submenu.
3 On the RFx Table Design List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select Search RFx Table Design Library by Name,
search for the design to edit, and click the design.
■ From the drop-down list, select RFx Table Design Library or Inactive RFx Table
Design Library and click the design to edit.
4 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Design tab to edit the table design.
7 Edit any fields. For details, see Field help for RFx Table Design page.
8 Click the Preview tab to preview the table design.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
RFx Table Design Library
Creating an RFx table design
Field help for RFx Table Design page

1654 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Vendors

Vendors

Frictionless® SRM allows sourcing enterprises to keep an active list of suppliers for all
sourcing modules. Each supplier record contains address, phone, tax, billing, and
contact information. Each contact represents a person within a supplier’s organization,
with one person indicated as the primary contact.
In addition to serving as a repository for suppliers’ information, the SRM software can
maintain scorecards for each supplier. A scorecard keeps track of performance metrics.
It can be associated with various categories, depending on the supplier’s role within
your enterprise. Scorecard information can be entered manually or can be
automatically entered from survey results and external feedback.

This section describes how to work with supplier configuration options.

Related Topics
Vendor Scorecard Definition
Metric Entry
Vendor Management Configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1655

Vendors Document Setup

Vendor Scorecard Definition

Frictionless® SRM allows sourcing enterprises to keep an active list of suppliers for all
sourcing modules. Each supplier record contains address, phone, tax, billing, and
contact information. Each contact represents a person within a supplier’s organization,
and one person can serve as the primary contact.
In addition to serving as a repository for suppliers’ information, the SRM software can
maintain scorecards for each supplier. A scorecard keeps track of performance metrics.
It can be associated with various categories, depending on the supplier’s role within
your enterprise. Scorecard information can be entered manually or can be
automatically entered from survey results and external feedback.
To measure supplier performance, you can add standard Metrics (which are identified
in Setup and stored as master data) and custom metrics to the scorecard. You can then
enter scores for the metrics.

Note: You can also use the Metric Entry option to calculate scores using raw data and
to automatically assign a scorecard definition to a supplier.

This section describes how to create and edit a supplier scorecard definition.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the Scorecard Definition List page
by clicking Vendor Management in the navigation bar and then choosing Vendor
Scorecard Definition from the Performance submenu.

Related Topics
Vendor Scorecard Definition
Creating a vendor scorecard definition
Editing a vendor scorecard definition
Creating a metric
Creating a metric entry

1656 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Vendors

Creating a vendor scorecard definition

Frictionless® SRM allows sourcing enterprises to keep an active list of suppliers for all
sourcing modules. Each supplier record contains address, phone, tax, billing, and
contact information. Each contact represents a person within a supplier’s organization,
and one person can serve as the primary contact.
In addition to serving as a repository for suppliers’ information, the SRM software can
maintain scorecards for each supplier. A scorecard keeps track of performance metrics.
It can be associated with various categories, depending on the supplier’s role within
your enterprise. Scorecard information can be entered manually or can be
automatically entered from survey results and external feedback.
To measure supplier performance, you can add standard Metrics (which are identified
in Setup and stored as master data) and custom metrics to the scorecard. You can then
enter scores for the metrics.

To create a supplier scorecard definition:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Vendors section of Document Setup, select Vendor Scorecard Definition from
the drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the Scorecard Definition List page by clicking Vendor
Management in the navigation bar and then choosing Vendor Scorecard Definition
from the Performance submenu.
3 On the Scorecard Definition List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields with basic scorecard information.
5 Click the Sections tab.
6 Click Add to add a section.
7 On the Section page, fill in the fields with section information, including a weight for
the section.
8 Click the Metrics tab to add metrics.
9 Click Add to add a custom metric.
10 In the dialog box, fill in the fields for the metric and click OK.
11 Click Add Standard Metric to add a standard system metric.
12 In the dialog box, check the box for each metric to add and click OK.
13 If necessary, click AutoAssign Weights to automatically assign metric weights.
14 Click the Save button in the toolbar.
15 Repeat steps 6 through 14 to add additional sections.
16 If necessary, click AutoAssign Weights on the Sections page to automatically
assign section weights.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1657

Vendors Document Setup

17 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Vendor Scorecard Definition
Editing a vendor scorecard definition
Creating a metric
Creating a metric entry

1658 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Vendors

Editing a vendor scorecard definition

Frictionless® SRM allows sourcing enterprises to keep an active list of suppliers for all
sourcing modules. Each supplier record contains address, phone, tax, billing, and
contact information. Each contact represents a person within a supplier’s organization,
and one person can serve as the primary contact.
In addition to serving as a repository for suppliers’ information, the SRM software can
maintain scorecards for each supplier. A scorecard keeps track of performance metrics.
It can be associated with various categories, depending on the supplier’s role within
your enterprise. Scorecard information can be entered manually or can be
automatically entered from survey results and external feedback.
To measure supplier performance, you can add standard Metrics (which are identified
in Setup and stored as master data) and custom metrics to the scorecard. You can then
enter scores for the metrics.

To edit a supplier scorecard definition:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Vendors section of Document Setup, select Vendor Scorecard Definition from
the drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the Scorecard Definition List page by clicking Vendor
Management in the navigation bar and then choosing Vendor Scorecard Definition
from the Performance submenu.
3 On the Scorecard Definition List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select Vendor Scorecard Definitions by Name, search
for the scorecard to edit, and click the scorecard.
■ From the drop-down list, select All Vendor Scorecard Definitions or All Inactive
Vendor Scorecard Definitions and click the scorecard to edit.
4 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Sections tab to add or edit sections.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1659

Vendors Document Setup

7 Click the Edit icon for a section to edit and do the following:
a On the Section page, edit any fields.

b On the Metric page, click the Edit icon for a metric to edit.
c In the dialog box, edit any fields and click OK.
d Click Add to add a custom metric or Add Standard Metric to add a standard
system metric.
e If necessary, click AutoAssign Weights to automatically assign metric
weights.
f Click the Save button in the toolbar.
8 On the Sections page, click Add to add additional sections.
9 If necessary, click AutoAssign Weights to automatically assign section weights.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Vendor Scorecard Definition
Creating a vendor scorecard definition
Creating a metric
Creating a metric entry

1660 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Vendors

Metric Entry

Frictionless® SRM allows sourcing enterprises to keep an active list of suppliers for all
sourcing modules. Each supplier record contains address, phone, tax, billing, and
contact information. Each contact represents a person within a supplier’s organization,
and one person can serve as the primary contact.
The criteria used to measure supplier performance are determined by metrics.
Standard Metrics are identified in Setup and stored as master data.
Metric entry enables you to calculate supplier scores using standard metrics and raw
data. The information you enter is used to automatically assign a scorecard to a
supplier.

Note: You can also enter scores manually in a supplier scorecard, using both standard
metrics and custom metrics.

This section describes how to create and edit a metric entry.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the Metric Entry List page by
clicking Vendor Management in the navigation bar and then choosing Metric Entry
from the Performance submenu.

Related Topics
Metric Entry
Creating a metric entry
Editing a metric entry
Creating a metric
Creating a vendor scorecard definition

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1661

Vendors Document Setup

Creating a metric entry

Frictionless® SRM allows sourcing enterprises to keep an active list of suppliers for all
sourcing modules. Each supplier record contains address, phone, tax, billing, and
contact information. Each contact represents a person within a supplier’s organization,
and one person can serve as the primary contact.
The criteria used to measure supplier performance are determined by metrics.
Standard Metrics are identified in Setup and stored as master data.
Metric entry enables you to calculate supplier scores using standard metrics and raw
data. The information you enter is used to automatically assign a scorecard to a
supplier.

To create a metric entry:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Vendors section of Document Setup, select Metric Entry from the drop-down
list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the Metric Entry List page by clicking Vendor
Management in the navigation bar and then choosing Metric Entry from the
Performance submenu.
3 On the Metric Entry List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, fill in the fields with metric entry information.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Metric Entry
Editing a metric entry
Creating a metric
Creating a vendor scorecard definition

1662 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Vendors

Editing a metric entry

Frictionless® SRM allows sourcing enterprises to keep an active list of suppliers for all
sourcing modules. Each supplier record contains address, phone, tax, billing, and
contact information. Each contact represents a person within a supplier’s organization,
and one person can serve as the primary contact.
The criteria used to measure supplier performance are determined by metrics.
Standard Metrics are identified in Setup and stored as master data.
Metric entry enables you to calculate supplier scores using standard metrics and raw
data. The information you enter is used to automatically assign a scorecard to a
supplier.

To edit a metric entry:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Vendors section of Document Setup, select Metric Entry from the drop-down
list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the Metric Entry List page by clicking Vendor
Management in the navigation bar and then choosing Metric Entry from the
Performance submenu.
3 On the Metric Entry List page, select Metric Entries or All Inactive Metric Entries
from the drop-down list and click the metric entry to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Metric Entry
Creating a metric entry
Creating a metric
Creating a vendor scorecard definition

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1663

Vendors Document Setup

Vendor Management Configuration

The Vendor Management Configuration page provides the information that is used
during vendor registration and configuration.

This section describes how to edit the vendor management configuration.

Field Help for the Vendor Management Configuration page

Display Name: This field indicates the display name of the Vendor Management
Configuration. It is read only.

Source Email: Enter the source email address for emails sent to suppliers. This is a
required field.

Registration Complete URL: Enter the URL that will appear on the Registration
Complete page that appears when the supplier has completed registration.

Registration Categories: Click Add to add the categories that will be used to
generate the Categories Supplied by Company list on the vendor-self registration
page. This list maps internal categories to external categories and allows vendors to
identify which categories they supply.

Related Topics
Editing the vendor management configuration

1664 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Vendors

Editing the vendor management configuration

Frictionless® SRM allows sourcing enterprises to keep an active list of suppliers for all
sourcing modules. Each supplier record contains address, phone, tax, billing, and
contact information. Each contact represents a person within a supplier’s organization,
and one person can serve as the primary contact.

To edit the supplier management configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Vendors section of Document Setup, select Vendor Management
Configuration from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Vendor Management Configuration page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 Edit any fields.

5 Under Registration Categories, click the Edit icon for a registration category to
edit.
6 In the dialog box, edit any fields and click OK.
7 Click Add to add a registration category.
8 In the dialog box, fill in the fields and click OK.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Vendor Management Configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1665

Vendors Document Setup

SRM Activity Library

You use an SRM activity library to define standard events, tasks, and activities in a
library component that can be imported into a supplier record.

This section describes how to work with an SRM activity library.

Related Topics
Creating an SRM activity library

1666 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Vendors

Creating an SRM activity library

You use an SRM activity library to define standard events, tasks, and activities in a
library component that can be imported into a supplier record. For details on importing
activities from a library, see Importing SRM activities from a library.

To create an SRM activity library:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Vendors section of Document Setup, select SRM Activity Library from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the SRM Activity Library List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields.
5 Click the SRM Activities tab.
6 Click Add to add an SRM activity.
7 Fill in the fields in the Vendor Reminder dialog box and click OK.
For details, see Field help for SRM Activity dialog box.
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each SRM activity to add.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
SRM Activity Library
Field help for SRM Activity dialog box

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1667

Auctions Document Setup

Auctions
An auction is a strategic sourcing event that is used to negotiate the best value in a
short period of time. In an auction, suppliers bid to provide products and services. An
auction can occur on its own or in conjunction with an RFx. Unlike an RFx, which can go
on for weeks, auctions typically last for a few hours to a few days.

This section describes how to work with auction configuration options.

Related Topics
Auction Types

1668 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Auctions

Auction Types
Document types standardize the creation of sourcing documents. Auction types
determine the structure of the auction by defining its bidding and disclosure rules. A
number of predefined auction types are included in the Auctions module. You can edit
auction types and create additional types.
The standard auction types provided with Frictionless® SRM are as follows:
` Reverse Auction (Standard): A standard reverse auction format with
anonymous bidding.
` Reverse Auction (Standard with Proxy): A standard reverse auction format
with anonymous bidding and proxy bidding allowed.
` Reverse Auction (Open Bids): An open bidding format with anonymous bidding
and full price disclosure.
` Reverse Auction (Sealed Bid): A reverse auction format with sealed bids.
` Reverse Auction (Ranked): A ranked reverse auction format with anonymous
bidding.
` Reverse Auction (Multi-Currency): A standard reverse auction format with
anonymous bidding and multi-currency support.
` Forward Auction (Standard): A forward auction format with anonymous bidding.
` Reverse Auction (Weighted Bidding): A reverse auction format with bid prices
weighted by buyer-assigned factors that reflect the economic value of parameters,
such as switching cost, transportation, quality, and service levels.

This section describes how to create and edit an auction type.

Field help for Auction Type page

The fields in the Auction Type page determine many of the options a user has in
creating the auction. The following is a description of some fields in this page.

General

Order: Type a value to determine the order in which the auction type is displayed on
the Auction Type List page.

Features

Discussions: Check to enable the Discussions feature in the toolbar.

Attachments: Check to enable the Attachments feature in auctions of this type.
Accounting: Check to create the Accounting tab in auctions of this type.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1669

Auctions Document Setup

Phase Configuration: Select a combination of phases for your auction. Phases are
defined as follows:
` Preview enables suppliers to view the auction before it opens for bidding.
` Pre-bid enables suppliers to enter pre-bids before the auction opens for bidding.
` Open enables suppliers to submit bids for auction line items. All phase
combinations include Open.
` Close Pending enables you to reopen an auction for a specified length of time
after bidding closes. This enables suppliers to submit a final, best bid if they were
not able to do so previously.

Rules

Allows Duplication: Check to enable the Duplicate feature in the toolbar.

Requires Internal Category: Check to make Internal Category a required field.
Publish as public event: Check to publish the auction in the Events channel of the
buy-side Workbench. Checking this box will also create the Publish to vendor
checkbox in auctions of this type, which gives the auction creator the option to publish
the auction to the Workbench of all approved suppliers.
Enable staggered start or end times for line items: Check to create the
Staggered Line Items fields, which enable the creator to stagger line item start
times, end times, or both.
Enable automatic early close: Check to create the Early Close fields, which enable
the creator to specify an inactivity window and an overtime duration. The inactivity
window is the interval preceding the line item close time, after which the line item will
close if no bids are entered. The overtime duration the length of time to extend a line
item’s bidding time if bids are received during the inactivity window.
Start Type: This field is used in conjunction with preview and pre-bid phases.
` User entered: Click to enable the creator to enter Preview Start, Pre-bid Start,
and Bidding Open times.
` System calculated: Click to enable the creator to enter Preview Duration and
Pre-bid Duration intervals, which the system uses to calculate the Pre-bid Start
and Bidding Open times.
Access Type: Select one of the following options:
` Company-wide event with access to all contacts: Select this option to create
auctions that are open to all contacts at a supplier company.
` Contact-specific event with access limited to invited contacts: Select this
option to limit auction visibility and bidding to selected contacts within a supplier
company.
Awarding:

1670 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Auctions

` Automatic awards at auction close: Check to enable automatic awarding of line

items to winning bidder. Leave unchecked to enable manual awarding.

Bidding

Auction Direction: This field determines whether the price drops or increases during
the auction.
` Reverse Auction: Check to create a reverse auction, in which the price drops as
the auction proceeds. Reverse auctions are typically used for sourcing events.
` Forward Auction: Check to create a forward auction, in which the price increases
as the auction proceeds. Forward auctions might be used to sell excess inventory or
stock, for example.
Bidding Format: This field determines which bids are valid in the auction.
` Standard bidding: Check to indicate standard bidding, in which bidders must beat
the leading bid price by the specified minimum bid improvement and meet or
exceed the leading bid quantity.
` Proxy bidding: Check to indicate proxy bidding, an automated way to place a bid.
Each bidder places one best-offer bid. The software evaluates all best-offer bids
and places incremental bids on behalf of each bidder. Each bid is reduced by the
amount indicated as the minimum bid improvement. The winning bid must meet
the reserve price, if it is set.
` Open bidding: Check to indicate open bidding, in which bidders must meet or
exceed their own most recent bid in both quantity and bid price, but do not have to
beat the current leading bid.
` Any price bidding: Check to indicate any price bidding, in which bidders can place
a bid for any value, regardless of the current winning bid. Thus, bids can go up or
down, regardless of whether the auction is reverse or forward. At the conclusion of
the auction, you choose the winning bidder.
Disallow tying bids for open bidding: Check to prevent any bid from tying with the
current leading bid in an Open bidding format.
Enable weighted bidding: Check to enable weighted bidding, which allows you to
adjust bids based on factors other than price (such as switching costs, import tax, sales
tax, and so on.)
Allow bids in multiple currencies: Check to create the Exchange Rates tab.
Enable comments with bids: Check to enable suppliers to submit comments with a
bid.

Disclosure

Bid History: This field determines whether bid history is visible to bidders.
` Public: Check to enable all suppliers to see the full bid history.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1671

Auctions Document Setup

` Sealed: Check to enable suppliers to see only their own bids. No other bid
information is displayed.
Vendor Rank: This field determines the rank information that is visible to bidders.
` Do not display rank information: Check to indicate that suppliers cannot see
any ranking information for their bids.
` Display rank: Check to enable suppliers to see the ranking of their bids compared
to other bids. For example, a bidder might be ranked third in the auction.
` Display rank and number of participants: Check to enable suppliers to see the
ranking of their bids compared to other bids and can see the number of bidders in
the auction. For example, a bidder might be ranked third out of 11 bidders.
Additional Bid Information: This field determines the other bid information that is
visible to bidders.
` Anonymous bidders: Check for bidders to see aliases rather than the company
names of other bidders.
` Leading bid: Check to enable bidders to see the leading auction bid.
` Require Bid before View: Check to require that a supplier place a bid before
viewing bid information. This prevents the disclosure of price information to
suppliers who are simply monitoring an auction.
` Vendor’s weighted bidding factors: Check to enable bidders to see the bidding
factors in an auction with weighted bidding. This checkbox is only applicable if you
have checked the Enable weighted bidding box under Bidding.

Related Topics
Creating an auction type

1672 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Auctions

Creating an auction type

Document types standardize the creation of sourcing documents. Auction types
determine the structure of the auction by defining its bidding and disclosure rules. A
number of predefined auction types are included in the Auctions module. You can edit
auction types and create additional types.

To create an auction type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Auctions section of Document Setup, select Auction Types from the
drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Auction Type List page, click Create.
4 On the Type page, fill in the fields under General and those under Features, Rules,
Bidding, and Disclosure. For more information, see Field help for Auction Type
page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To edit an auction type, click the name of the type on the Auction Type List page
and then click the Edit button in the auction type toolbar.

Related Topics
Auction Types
Field help for Auction Type page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1673

Projects Document Setup

Projects
A project is a strategic sourcing effort that combines multiple sourcing events in a
single location. The Frictionless® SRM Project Management module allows you to create
and maintain project schedules, track costs and resources, and communicate with
collaborators. Each project can include multiple auctions, RFxs, and contracts, as well
as related projects. Project schedules can also be imported from and exported to
Microsoft® Excel or Microsoft Project.

This section describes options for configuring projects.

Related Topics
Project Types
Form Library
Project Library Schedule

1674 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Projects

Project Types
Document types standardize the creation of sourcing documents. Project types enable
you to predefine features in projects. For example, you can use the project type to
determine the workflow phase definition to enable in a project.
Frictionless® SRM provides a number of default project types. You can modify these
types and create new ones.

This section describes how to create and edit a project type.

Field Help for Project Type page

General

Display Name: Type a unique name for the project. This is a required field.
Description: Select a description from the drop-down list or type a custom description
in the text box.
Order: Type a number to use in sequencing the project type. This is a required field.

Numbering Table: Click the Lookup icon to select a numbering table for the
project type.
Inactive: Check this box to indicate that the project type is not in use and will not
appear in the Active list.

Features

Discussions: Check this box to enable the Discussions feature in projects of this type.
Attachments: Check this box to enable the Attachments feature in projects of this
type.
Accounting: Check this box to create the Accounting tab in projects of this type.
Forms: Check this box to create the Forms tab in projects of this type.
Costs: Check this box to create the Costs tab in projects of this type
Vendors: Check this box to create the Vendors tab in projects of this type

Configurable Phase Definition: Click the Lookup icon to select a phase

definition. This will enable a workflow, consisting of the phases specified in the phase
definition, for projects of this type. For details, see Projects Configurable Phase
Definition.
Note: Changing the phase definition in a document type does not affect current
documents created from that document type. The change only applies to documents
created after the change is made.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1675

Projects Document Setup

Rules
Enable Project Duplication: Check this box to allow projects of this type to be
duplicated to create new projects.
Requires Internal Category: Check this box to require that an internal category be
selected in projects of this type.
Schedule Working Days:
` Select Calendar Days to use all calendar days when calculating dates for projects
of this type.
` Select Standard Work Days to use only workdays, omitting weekends and
holidays, when calculating dates for projects of this type.

Related Topics
Creating a project type

1676 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Projects

Creating a project type

Document types standardize the creation of sourcing documents. Project types enable
you to predefine features in projects. For example, you can use the project type to
determine the phases to enable in a project.
Frictionless® SRM provides a number of default project types. You can modify these
types and create new ones.

To create a project type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Projects section of Document Setup, select Project Types from the drop-down
list and click OK.
3 On the Project Type List page, click Create.
4 On the Type page, fill in the fields under General and those under Features and
Rules. For details, see Field Help for Project Type page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To edit a project type, click the type name on the Project Type List page to open
it and then click the Edit button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Project Types

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1677

Projects Document Setup

Form Library
Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
form library enables you to store pre-defined form questions. Forms help standardize
project creation and enforce best practices. They also minimize the amount of manual
data entry that is required to create a project.

This section describes how to create and edit a project library form component.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the Form Component List page
by clicking Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing Form Library
from the Library submenu.

Related Topics
Creating a project library form component
Editing a project library form component

1678 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Projects

Creating a project library form component

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
form library enables you to store pre-defined form questions. Forms help standardize
project creation and enforce best practices. They also minimize the amount of manual
data entry that is required to create a project.

To create a project library form component:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Projects section of Document Setup, select Form Library from the drop-down
list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the Form Component List page by clicking Enterprise
Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing Form Library from the Library
submenu.
3 On the Form Component List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, fill in the fields with basic information about the
component.
5 Click the Questions tab.
6 Click Add to add a question. For more information, see Creating a project form
question.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Form Library
Editing a project library form component

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1679

Projects Document Setup

Editing a project library form component

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
form library enables you to store pre-defined form questions. Forms help standardize
project creation and enforce best practices. They also minimize the amount of manual
data entry that is required to create a project.

To edit a project library form component:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Projects section of Document Setup, select Form Library from the drop-down
list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the Form Component List page by clicking Enterprise
Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing Form Library from the Library
submenu.
3 On the Form Component List page, select All Project Form Components or All
Inactive Project Form Components from the drop-down list and click the component
to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Questions tab to add and edit questions.

7 Click the Edit icon for a question to edit, or click Add to add a question. For
more information, see Importing a project form from the Project library and
Creating a project form question.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Form Library
Creating a project library form component

1680 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Projects

Project Library Schedule

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
project schedule library enables you to store pre-defined milestones and tasks, so that
you can create standard project schedules and use them as needed in your projects.
This minimizes the amount of manual data entry that is required to create a project.
Once you add a library schedule component to a project, it can be modified as needed.

This section describes how to create and edit a project library schedule component.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the Project Schedule Library List
page by clicking Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing Project
Schedule Library from the Library submenu.

Related Topics
Creating a project library schedule component
Editing a project library schedule component

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1681

Projects Document Setup

Creating a project library schedule component

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
project schedule library enables you to store pre-defined milestones and tasks, so that
you can create standard project schedules and use them as needed in your projects.
This minimizes the amount of manual data entry that is required to create a project.
Once you add a library schedule component to a project, it can be modified as needed.

To create a project library schedule component:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Projects section of Document Setup, select Project Library Schedule
Component from the drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the Project Schedule Library List page by clicking
Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing Project Schedule
Library from the Library submenu.
3 On the Project Schedule Library List page, click Create.
4 On the Schedule page, fill in the fields with basic schedule information.
5 Click Add to add an event to the schedule. For more information, see Adding a
project event.
6 Click Import to import events into the schedule. For more information, see
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Project and Importing a
project schedule from Microsoft Excel.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Project Library Schedule
Editing a project library schedule component

1682 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Projects

Editing a project library schedule component

Library components enable you to store portions of sourcing documents for reuse. The
project schedule library enables you to store pre-defined milestones and tasks, so that
you can create standard project schedules and use them as needed in your projects.
This minimizes the amount of manual data entry that is required to create a project.
Once you add a library schedule component to a project, it component can be modified
as needed.

To edit a project library schedule component:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Projects section of Document Setup, select Project Library Schedule
Component from the drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also access the Project Schedule Library List page by clicking
Enterprise Sourcing in the navigation bar and then choosing Project Schedule
Library from the Library submenu.
3 On the Project Schedule Library List page, select Project Schedule Library or
Inactive Project Schedule Library from the drop-down list and click the component
to edit.
4 On the Schedule page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Questions tab to add and edit questions.

7 Click the Edit icon for a schedule event to edit. For more information, see
Editing a project event.
8 Click Add to add an event to the schedule. For more information, see Adding a
project event.
9 Click Import to import events into the schedule. For more information, see
Importing a project schedule from Microsoft Project and Importing a
project schedule from Microsoft Excel.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Project Library Schedule
Creating a project library schedule component

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1683

Projects Document Setup

Projects Configurable Phase Definition

Project phases determine the actions that can be performed on projects and may be
associated with workflow definitions.
Frictionless® SRM provides default phases that can be used in configuring projects. You
can edit the description and rules associated with any of these default phases. If your
maintenance and approval process is more complex and requires additional steps, you
can add custom phases to the library.

Note: Changes to an existing phase configuration do not affect current documents

referencing that configuration. They only apply to documents created after the changes
are made.

This section describes how to create and edit a configurable phase for a project.

Field help for Projects Configurable Phase Definition Header page

Name: Type a name for the phase definition. This is a required field.
External ID: Type a unique external identifier for the phase definition. This is a
required field.
Description: Type a description for the phase definition.

Phases:
This section indicates the phases that are included in the phase definition.
Click Add to add phases to the definition. In the dialog box that appears, select each
phase to include in the phase definition and click OK.
Note: To add a custom phase, you must first create the phase in the Value List
Values section of Setup and then add it here. For details, see Value List Types and
Values.

Phases must be added according to the following rules:

` The sequence of phases in the phase definition should be the sequence the phases
will follow in a document.
` For each phase, be sure to set the Previous and Next phases appropriately, to
ensure that there is at least one path to follow from first phase to last phase.
` Each added phase must be included in at least one path that can be followed from
first to last phase.
` For a phase configuration that will include workflow, the first phase cannot be
associated with a workflow.
` A workflow phase must have at least one Previous phase.

1684 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Projects

` When configuring a phase, you cannot designate a phase as a Next phase if it skips
a required phase.
` You can only designate a phase as a Next phase if it falls after the current phase in
the sequence.
` You can only designate a phase as a Previous phase if it falls before the current
phase in the sequence.

To edit a phase, click its Edit icon and edit phase information in the Projects
Configurable Phase Header page.

Click Reorder to reorder the phases in the phase definition. For more information, see
Reordering items in a list.

Field help for Projects Configurable Phase Header page

Phase: Indicates the name of the phase. This field is read-only.

External ID: Indicates the external identifier for the phase. Type a new value as
needed. This field is required.

Description: Click the Lookup icon to select a new description from the list of
localized resources. If the phase description is not in the list, your system administrator
can add a new localized resource for the desired description.
Can transition back to a previous phase: Check this box to enable a user to return
to a previous phase from this phase. When you check this box, an Add button appears
in the Previous Phases table described below.
Transition to Next Phase Message: Indicates the text that is displayed to a user

who selects the next phase in the workflow. Click the Lookup icon to select a new
message from the list of localized resources. If the message is not in the list, your
system administrator can add a new localized resource for the desired message.
Transition to Previous Phase Message: Indicates the text that is displayed to a user

who selects the previous phase in the workflow. Click the Lookup icon to select a
new message from the list of localized resources. If the message is not in the list, your
system administrator can add a new localized resource for the desired message.
System Phase: Indicates that this is a system-defined phase. This field is read only.

Note: Clicking the Trashcan icon for a system phase will inactivate it, not delete
it. An inactivated system phase can be reactivated.

Required Phase: Click to indicate that the phase is required in the workflow definition.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1685

Projects Document Setup

Workflow Definition: Click the Lookup icon to select a workflow definition to

associate with this phase. For details about workflow definitions, see Workflow
Definitions.
Next Phases: Click Add to select the phase or phases that may follow this phase in
the workflow.
Previous Phases: Click Add to select the phase or phases to which the document can
be transitioned back from the current phase. The Add button only appears if the Can
transition back to a previous phase box is checked.

Note: The relative order of system phases cannot be changed when reordering phases.

Related Topics
Creating a project configurable phase definition

1686 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Projects

Creating a project configurable phase definition

Project phases determine the actions that can be performed on projects. A phase
definition is used in a workflow definition for a project. For details, see Workflow
Definitions.
Frictionless® SRM provides default phases that can be used in the project phase
definition.

Note: Changes to an existing phase configuration do not affect current documents

referencing that configuration. They only apply to documents created after the changes
are made.

To create a project configurable phase definition:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Projects section of Document Setup, select Projects Configurable Phase
Definition from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Projects Configurable Phase Definition List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields with phase information. For details, see Field
help for Projects Configurable Phase Definition Header page.
5 Click Add to add phases to the definition.
6 In the dialog box that appears, select each phase to include in the phase definition
and click OK.

7 Click the Edit icon for each phase to edit phase information, including the
sequence of phases in the workflow. For details, see Field help for Projects
Configurable Phase Header page.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Projects Configurable Phase Definition
Field help for Projects Configurable Phase Definition Header page
Field help for Projects Configurable Phase Header page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1687

Contract Generation Document Setup

Contract Generation
For information about contract generation options and procedures, see Contract
Generation.

1688 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Demand Aggregation

Demand Aggregation
Demand aggregation is a process that allows initiators to gather the quantity, product,
and price information they need to purchase in bulk for time and cost efficiency. In a
demand aggregation document, initiators collect information from multiple locations in
their organization, analyze and combine purchasing needs, and request feedback from
stakeholders. When the demand aggregation document is complete, it can be used to
create an RFx to source the products.
Demand aggregation allows stakeholders to inform the initiator about their purchasing
needs and to provide feedback and suggestions based on their own experience.

This section describes how to work with demand aggregation configuration options.

Related Topics
Demand Types

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1689

Demand Aggregation Document Setup

Demand Types
Document types standardize the creation of sourcing documents. Demand aggregation
types enable you to predefine features in demand aggregation documents.

This section describes how to create and edit a demand aggregation type.

Related Topics
Creating a demand aggregation type
Editing a demand aggregation type

1690 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Demand Aggregation

Creating a demand aggregation type

Document types standardize the creation of sourcing documents. Demand aggregation
types enable you to predefine features in demand aggregation documents.

To create a demand aggregation type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Demand Aggregation section of Document Setup, select Demand Types from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Demand Type List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in basic information fields and those under Features and
Rules.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Demand Types
Editing a demand aggregation type

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1691

Demand Aggregation Document Setup

Editing a demand aggregation type

Document types standardize the creation of sourcing documents. Demand aggregation
types enable you to predefine features in demand aggregation documents.

To edit a demand aggregation type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Demand Aggregation section of Document Setup, select Demand Types from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Demand Type List page, click the type to edit.
4 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Demand Types
Creating a demand aggregation type

1692 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup XPress

XPress
The XPress module provides a comprehensive, automated solution for the pricing and
purchase of services, such as print services. This functionality enables you to easily and
quickly source on a project-by-project basis, from request through award, for simple
and complex jobs. By directing end-user initiated requests through the Frictionless®
XPress module, you can increase savings by increasing the amount of spend under
management, without increasing headcount.
The XPress module can help you do the following:
` Alter maverick spending habits by offering an effective mechanism for initiating a
print request that's as easy as a phone call when you can't mandate compliance.
` Get the best available price on every job based on the supplier's current capacity at
the moment of need. By getting job-specific bids with multiple suppliers, you can
realize additional cost savings.
` Lower the bar for “worthwhile” projects by improving efficiency and streamlining
processes across multiple organizations. For example, submitting internal customer
requests for estimates directly to approved suppliers eliminates the need for buyer
intervention, while still allowing oversight.
` Reduce suppliers' cost to do business with you by ensuring your preferred suppliers
the opportunity to bid on all print jobs and eliminating the need for salespersons.

There are three types of users for the XPress module:

` Internal Customer: Internal Customers are users who purchase services but who
are assumed to be outside your company’s Purchasing group. For example, an
Internal Customer might be a graphics designer who needs to source a marketing
brochure.
Internal Customers have their own Workbench page, which provides a streamlined
version of the XPress module. Internal Customers can initiate XPress requests and
in some cases can award requests to suppliers. Internal Customers do not have
access to other Frictionless SRM modules.
For more information, see Internal Customer XPress.
` CSR: A CSR is a user outside your company’s Purchasing group who has expertise
in a specific category and in tactical sourcing. For example, a CSR might be a
member of a business unit such as a print buying team, or a graphics department
that handles the tactical sourcing of print services.
CSRs have their own Workbench page, which provides access to the XPress
module. CSRs can also click the XPress button in the navigation bar to access
XPress features. CSRs can create, review, and award XPress requests, and have
limited access to other Frictionless SRM modules.
For more information, see CSR XPress.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1693

XPress Document Setup

` Buyer: A buyer is a frequent, fully trained user of Frictionless SRM, who is part of
your company’s Purchasing group. Buyers can perform all XPress functions and
have full access to the Frictionless SRM system.
For more information, see Buyer XPress.

This section describes how to work with XPress options in Setup.

Related Topics
XPress Request Types
XPress Request Specification Libraries
XPress Request Templates
XPress Self-Registration Configuration

1694 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup XPress

XPress Request Types

For details about XPress request types, see XPress Request Type List page.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request Specification Libraries
XPress Request Templates
XPress Self-Registration Configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1695

XPress Document Setup

XPress Request Specification Libraries

Specifications define the details of the line items on which suppliers will bid in an XPress
request. Each XPress request specification library stores a set of specifications that can
be reused when creating XPress requests.

This section describes how to create and edit an XPress request specification library.

Related Topics
XPress
Creating an XPress request specification library
Editing an XPress request specification library
XPress Request Types
XPress Request Templates
XPress Self-Registration Configuration

1696 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup XPress

Creating an XPress request specification library

Specifications define the details of the line items on which suppliers will bid in an XPress
request. Each XPress request specification library stores a set of specifications that can
be reused when creating XPress requests.

To create an XPress request specification library:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the XPress section of Document Setup, select XPress Request Specification
Libraries from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the XPress Request Specification Library List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in basic information fields for the library.
5 Click the Specifications tab.
6 Click Add to add a specification.
7 In the Line Item Specification dialog box, fill in the fields with specification
information. For details, see Field help for Line Item Specification in XPress
Request Template dialog box.
8 Click OK.
9 Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each specification you want to add to the library.
10 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request Specification Libraries
Editing an XPress request specification library
XPress Request Types
XPress Request Templates
XPress Self-Registration Configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1697

XPress Document Setup

Editing an XPress request specification library

Specifications define the details of the line items on which suppliers will bid in an XPress
request. Each XPress request specification library stores a set of specifications that can
be reused when creating XPress requests.

To edit an XPress request specification library:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the XPress section of Document Setup, select XPress Request Specification
Libraries from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the XPress Request Specification Library List page, click the name of the library
you want to edit.
4 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any basic information fields for the library.
6 Click the Specifications tab.

7 Click Add to add a specification, or click the Edit icon to edit an existing
specification.
8 In the Line Item Specification dialog box, edit or fill in the fields with specification
information. For details, see Field help for Line Item Specification in XPress
Request Template dialog box.
9 Click OK.
10 Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each specification you want to add or edit.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request Specification Libraries
Creating an XPress request specification library
XPress Request Types
XPress Request Templates
XPress Self-Registration Configuration

1698 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup XPress

XPress Request Templates

For details about XPress request templates, see XPress Request List page:
Templates.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Request Types
XPress Request Specification Libraries
XPress Self-Registration Configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1699

XPress Document Setup

XPress Self-Registration Configuration

An XPress self-registration configuration determines security and other information for
users who register through the self-registration interface.

This section describes how to create and edit an XPress self-registration configuration.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Self-Registration Configuration
Creating an XPress self-registration configuration
Editing an XPress self-registration configuration
XPress Request Types
XPress Request Specification Libraries
XPress Request Templates

1700 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup XPress

Creating an XPress self-registration configuration

An XPress self-registration configuration determines security and other information for
users who register through the self-registration interface.

To create an XPress self-registration configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the XPress section of Document Setup, select Self Registration Configuration
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Self Registration Configuration List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields, including the context, company, security
profile, and Workbench view for users assigned this configuration.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Self-Registration Configuration
Editing an XPress self-registration configuration
XPress Request Specification Libraries
Editing an XPress request specification library
XPress Request Types
XPress Request Templates

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1701

XPress Document Setup

Editing an XPress self-registration configuration

An XPress self-registration configuration determines security and other information for
users who register through the self-registration interface.

To edit an XPress self-registration configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the XPress section of Document Setup, select Self Registration Configuration
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Self Registration Configuration List page, click the name of the library you
want to edit.
4 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields, including the context, company, security profile, or Workbench view
for users assigned this configuration.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
XPress
XPress Self-Registration Configuration
Creating an XPress self-registration configuration
XPress Request Specification Libraries
Creating an XPress request specification library
XPress Request Types
XPress Request Templates

1702 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Contract Documents

Contract Documents
The Contract Documents section of Setup enables you to work with Contract
Document Types and Contract Document Phase Configuration.

Related Topics
Contract Document Types
Contract Document Phase Configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1703

Contract Documents Document Setup

Contract Document Types

Contract document types are used with contract documents created through Contract
Generation. They are also applied to external contract documents that are added to a
master agreement on the Master Agreements Contract Documents page.
Contract document types enable Buyer Managers and System Administrators to define
the notifications and phase configurations that pertain to each type of contract
document.
By defining custom phase configurations in contract document types, Buyer Managers
can enforce specific business processes by type. For example, a manager might require
that a standard Contract follow a Draft, Review, Wait for Approval, External Review and
Vendor Draft sequence prior to Approval, while an Addendum might follow a shorter
Draft and Review sequence prior to Approval.
Frictionless® SRM provides the following default contract document types:
` Contract: A legal contract document including all standard and specific business
terms.
` Addendum: A legal document representing an addition to the original legal
contract document.
` Amendment: A legal document representing a change to the original legal
contract document.

This section describes how to create and edit contract document types.

Field help for Contract Document Type page

General

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that the contract document type is not in use and
will not appear in the Active list.
Name: Type a name for the contract document type. This is a required field.
Description: Type a description for the contract document type.
Order: Type a number to use in sequencing the contract document type. This is a
required field.

Contract Document Phase Configuration: Click the Lookup icon to choose a

phase configuration. This will enable a workflow, consisting of the phases specified in
the phase definition, for contract documents of this type. This is a required field. For
details, see Contract Document Phase Configuration.
Note: Changing the phase definition in a document type does not affect current
documents created from that document type. The change only applies to documents
created after the change is made.

1704 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Contract Documents

Contract Document Notifications

Notifications determine which contract document events generate an email notification
or an alert in the Alerts channel on the Workbench.
For each option in the list, select one of the following:
` No alerts: Do not create alerts.
` Alerts only: Create alerts on the Workbench for the document owner and
collaborators and/or the primary supplier contact, depending on the notification
type and document phase.
` Alerts and email notifications: Create alerts on the Workbench send email
notifications to the document owner and collaborators and/or the primary supplier
contact, depending on the notification type and document phase.
Version Shared with Vendor: Create alerts when the status of a version of the
contract document is changed from Buy-Side to Buy/Sell Sides. The recipients are the
primary supplier contacts of the master agreement.
Version Added by Vendor: Create alerts when a new version of the contract
document is added by a supplier. The recipients are the buy-side collaborators of the
master agreement.
Version Added by Buyer: Create alerts when a new version of the contract document
is added by a buyer. The recipients are the buy-side collaborators, and, if the new
version has a status that makes it visible to the sell-side, the primary supplier contact
of the master agreement.
Contract Document Deleted: Create alerts when a contract document is deleted. The
recipients are the buy-side collaborators, and, if the new version has a status that
makes it visible to the sell-side, the primary supplier contact of the master agreement.
Document Version Deleted: Create alerts when a version of a contract document is
deleted. The recipients are the buy-side collaborators, and, if the new version has a
status that makes it visible to the sell-side, the primary supplier contact of the master
agreement.

Related Topics
Creating a contract document type
Contract Document Phase Configuration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1705

Contract Documents Document Setup

Creating a contract document type

Contract document types are used with contract documents created through Contract
Generation. They are also applied to external contract documents that are added to a
master agreement on the Master Agreements Contract Documents page.
Contract document types enable Buyer Managers and System Administrators to define
the notifications and phase configurations that pertain to each type of contract
document.

To create a contract document type:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Contract Documents section of Document Setup, select Contract Document
Types from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Contract Document Type list page, click Create.
4 Fill in the fields, including choosing notifications under Contract Document
Notifications. For details, see Field help for Contract Document Type page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: To edit a contract document type, click the Edit button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Contract Document Types
Field help for Contract Document Type page

1706 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Contract Documents

Contract Document Phase Configuration

Phase configurations define the life cycle sequence of a contract. The phases that make
up a phase configuration, and the valid next phases associated with each phase, define
the document’s workflow sequence. Each phase controls the document’s level of access
or visibility to users.
The following phases are required for use in every phase configuration:
` Draft
` Vendor Draft
` Executed
To implement a phase configuration, assign it to a contract document type. When
creating a new contract, the system incorporates the rules defined by the phase
configuration in the type. For details, see Field help for Contract Document Type
page.

Note: Changes to an existing phase configuration do not affect current documents

referencing that configuration. They only apply to documents created after the changes
are made.

It is recommended that only system administrators work with phase configurations.

Field help for Contract Document Phase Configuration page

To see the Contract Document Phase Configuration Header page, do the following:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 Select Contract Document Phase Configuration from the Contract Document
section of Document Setup.
3 Click OK.

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that the phase configuration is not in use and will
not appear in the Active list.
Name: Type the name of the phase configuration. This is a required field.
External ID: Type a unique brief external ID for the phase configuration. This is a
required field.
Description: Type a description for the phase configuration.

Phases Table
Click Add to add a new phase from the list of existing phases.
Note: To add a custom phase, you must first create the phase in the Value List
Values section of Setup and then add it here. For details, see Value List Types and
Values.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1707

Contract Documents Document Setup

` The sequence of phases in the phase definition should be the sequence the phases
will follow in a document.
` For each phase, be sure to set the Previous and Next phases appropriately, to
ensure that there is at least one path to follow from first phase to last phase.
` Each added phase must be included in at least one path that can be followed from
first to last phase.
` For a phase configuration that will include workflow, the first phase cannot be
associated with a workflow.
` A workflow phase must have at least one Previous phase.
` When configuring a phase, you cannot designate a phase as a Next phase if it skips
a required phase.
` You can only designate a phase as a Next phase if it falls after the current phase in
the sequence.
` You can only designate a phase as a Previous phase if it falls before the current
phase in the sequence.

Click an Edit icon to edit an existing phase. You see the Contract Document Phase
Header page.

Click the Trashcan icon to delete an existing phase. The required phases cannot be
deleted.
The following fields in the Phases table are read-only:

Phase: Indicates the display name of the phase.

System Phase: Indicates that this is a system-defined phase. This field is read only.

Note: Clicking the Trashcan icon for a system phase will inactivate it, not delete
it. An inactivated system phase can be reactivated.

Required Phase: Indicates whether the phase is required.

Description: Indicates the description of the phase.
Previous Phases: Indicates the names of the phase or phases to which the document
can be transitioned back from the current phase.
Next Phases: Indicates the names of the next phases in the phase configuration
sequence.

Note: The relative order of system phases cannot be changed when reordering phases.

1708 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Contract Documents

Field Help for Contract Document Phase Header page

You see the Contract Document Phase Header page when you click the Add button or

the Edit icon for a phase on the Contract Document Phase Configuration Header
page.

Phase: Indicates the name of the phase. This field is read only.
External ID: Type a unique brief external ID for the phase. The External ID is the
name to uniquely identify a contract document phase configuration in Frictionless®
SRM. This is a required field.
Description: Type a description for the phase.
System Phase: Indicates that this is a system-defined phase.
Required Phase: Indicates whether this phase is required. This field is read only.
Frictionless designates three phases as required: Draft, Vendor Draft, and Executed.
Custom phases cannot be marked as required.
Visibility: Select whether the phase will apply to the buy-side only or both the
buy-side and the sell-side. This is a required field. Select one of the following:
` Buy-Side
` Buy-Side / Sell-Side

Transition to Next Phase Message: Lookup icon to select the message will
appear when the user chooses to return to a previous phase. This message must be
included in the list of Localized Resources.
Valid Next Phases: Click Add to select one or more phases to follow this phase in the
phase configuration sequence. This will determine the next valid status changes of a
contract document version.
Can transition back to a previous phase: Check to indicate that an approver can
transition the contract document to a previous phase in the workflow sequence. When
you check this box, the Add button appears in the Valid Previous Phases table.

Transition to Previous Phase Message: Click the Lookup icon to select the
message will appear when the user chooses to return to a previous phase. This
message must be included in the list of Localized Resources.
Valid Previous Phases: Click Add to select one or more phases Click Add to select
the phase or phases to which the document can be transitioned back from the current
phase. The Add button only appears in this table if the Can transition back to a
previous phase box is checked.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1709

Contract Documents Document Setup

Related Topics
Contract Document Phase Configuration
Creating a contract document phase configuration
Editing a contract generation phase configuration

1710 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Contract Documents

Creating a contract document phase configuration

Phase configurations define the life cycle sequence of a contract. The phases that make
up a phase configuration, and the valid next phases associated with each phase, define
the document flow. Each phase controls the document’s level of access or visibility to
users.
You can create a phase configuration from scratch or duplicate and modify an existing
configuration. You implement the phase configuration in a contract document type. For
details, see Field help for Contract Document Type page.

Note: Changes to an existing phase configuration do not affect current documents

referencing that configuration. They only apply to documents created after the changes
are made.

It is recommended that only system administrators work with phase configurations.

To create a phase configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 Select Contract Document Phase Configuration from the Contract Document
section of Document Setup.
3 Click OK.
4 On the Contract Document Phase Configuration List page, do one of the following:
■ Click Create.
■ Click the name of a phase configuration on which to base a custom phase
configuration. Click the Document button in the toolbar and select Duplicate.
5 Fill in the fields on the Contract Document Phase Configuration Header page. For
details, see Field help for Contract Document Phase Configuration page.
6 Type a unique brief name in the External ID field. The External ID is the name to
uniquely identify a contract document phase configuration in Frictionless® SRM.
7 In the Phase table, click Add to add an additional phase from the list of existing
phases.
8 Fill in the fields on the Contract Document Phase Header page. For details, see
Field Help for Contract Document Phase Header page.
The Draft, Vendor Draft, and Executed phases are required with every phase
configuration. They are displayed by default and cannot be deleted.
Note: To add a custom phase, you must first create the phase in the Value List
Values section of Setup and then add it here. For details, see Adding a custom
phase as a value list value.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1711

Contract Documents Document Setup

Related Topics
Contract Document Phase Configuration
Editing a contract generation phase configuration
Field Help for Contract Document Phase Header page
Field help for Contract Document Phase Configuration page

1712 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Document Setup Contract Documents

Editing a contract generation phase configuration

Phase configurations define the life cycle sequence of a contract. The phases that make
up a phase configuration, and the valid next phases associated with each phase, define
the document flow. Each phase controls the document’s level of access or visibility to
users.
You implement the phase configuration in a contract document type. For details, see
Field help for Contract Document Type page.
It is recommended that only system administrators work with phase configurations.

To edit a phase configuration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 Select Contract Document Types from the Contract Document section of
Document Setup.
3 Click OK.
4 On the Contract Document Phase Configuration List page, click the name of the
phase configuration to edit.
5 Edit any fields. For details, see Field help for Contract Document Phase
Configuration page.
6 In the Phase table, do one of the following:
■ Click Add to add an additional phase from the list of existing phases.

■ Click the Edit icon to edit an existing phase.

Edit or fill in the fields in the Contract Document Phase Header page. For details,
see Field Help for Contract Document Phase Header page.
The Draft, Vendor Draft, and Executed phases are required with every phase
configuration. They are displayed by default and cannot be deleted.
Note: To add a custom phase, you must first create the phase in the Value List
Values section of Setup and then add it here. For details, see Adding a custom
phase as a value list value.
7 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Contract Document Phase Configuration
Creating a contract document phase configuration
Field Help for Contract Document Phase Header page
Field help for Contract Document Phase Configuration page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1713

Contract Documents Document Setup

1714 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration

The System Administration section of Setup provides options for customizing and
configuring the following:
` Accounts and Security
` System Management
` Administrative Reports
` Spend Environment Management

Confidential 1715
Accounts and Security System Administration

Accounts and Security

Define
Define Define Define Define
Numbering
Cluster Context Extensions Accounts
Tables

System Setup Data Enterprise Master Data

Installed as System Administrator Installed as Enterprise Administrator

The Frictionless SRM application must ensure that only properly authenticated users
access the system, and that those users only see appropriate documents and are only
able to perform authorized actions. This section describes those mechanisms: the
authentication of users, the mechanisms that associate those users with their rights
and roles, and support for system access click-through access terms.
At the simplest level, a user belongs to one or more groups. A series of general rights
are associated with those groups, and users can perform actions when one of the
groups they belong to provides the necessary rights. In addition to this basic level of
access control, sourcing documents define collaborator security. Each collaborator’s
role is defined in a document, for example, Reviewer, Owner, or Approver. Additional
access rights are associated with these roles through Collaborator Role Definitions,
and are granted to the users associated with that role in a document. Finally,
Document Security Templates provide the ability to define default collaborator
associations when new documents are created.
For information about directories, see Directory Configuration.

Security Overview: Assigning Rights and Roles to Users

After you define Buy-side User Accounts, you must associate the users with their
rights. All actions in the system are controlled by access rights. These range from basic
class-level actions (which determine whether a user can view Contracts or edit Projects,
for example) to more role based actions (which determine whether a user must be the
Document Owner to publish an RFP, for example). The system performs validation to
determine that a user performing an action has the required rights. A user's set of
rights is a combination of rights specifically assigned to that user, rights assigned to
Groups of which the user is a member, and rights associated with the role the user has
in a specific document (generally, as a collaborator). This section describes how those
rights are defined, how they are associated with users, and how the system grants or
denies access based on that collection of rights.

Access Rights and The Trust Barrier

Before examining the details of access rights and their usage, it is important to
understand the basic security concepts used in the Frictionless SRM system.

1716 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

When a user attempts to perform an action through the UI (such as viewing an RFx or
canceling a project) the security framework, using a trust barrier model, ensures that
the user has the rights to perform that action.
For example, a user attempts to publish an RFx to suppliers. In order to process this
action, the software validates that the user has the rights required to publish the RFx.
Once this validation is completed, the user is considered to be inside the trust barrier.
The software will then perform any additional steps necessary to complete the request,
without requiring the user to have additional rights.
Subsequently, the software must open the supplier objects representing each of the
invited suppliers to retrieve information required for delivery of the invitation e-mail.
Accessing the supplier objects is considered as work the software needs to do fulfill the
user’s request. The supplier objects are accessed on a trusted basis, without validating
that the user has view access to supplier records.
The trust barrier approach is designed to implement security from a user's perspective,
making it easier to implement and administer. Requiring users and administrators to
understand all the objects accessed by the software “behind the scenes” to correctly
assign security rights would be extremely complicated. The trust barrier model provides
effective security with simplified administration.
Access rights are validated in the Frictionless SRM Framework software, and are not
implemented at the database level. This reduces the complexity of managing the
security model, and ensures that access checks are applied to objects even when they
are retrieved from in-memory cache instead of the database.

Class-Level Access Rights

Access rights begin with basic class-level operations: the ability to View, Edit and
Create objects are defined separately for each class of object in the system. A user
might be able to create projects but not create RFPs, for example. For sourcing
documents, the additional rights of Create Template and Cancel are defined. For
categories and menu options on the Setup page, a Setup right is also defined.
These class-level access rights are grouped into Security Profiles. A class-level
Security Profile defines settings for View, Edit, Create, and where applicable, Create
Template and Cancel for each class of object in the system. Since there are a large
number of object classes, the settings in a Security Profile are organized into Access
Groups. This is strictly a convenience and does not affect the definition or granting of
rights. The Show Only drop down list displays the permissions for each group.
The system has a defined set of classes, so the set of Access Rights is not user
configurable. The application of these class-level rights is detailed below, but the
pattern is straightforward. A user must minimally have the right to View, Edit, Create or
Create Template on a class when attempting to perform that action directly from the
UI.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1717

Accounts and Security System Administration

Role-Level Access Rights

The second type of Access Right is role based: a user’s ability to perform a function is
based on his or her collaborator role in a specific document. Sourcing documents
support the assignment of one or more document collaborators, as follows:
` Each collaborator can be a single user, a user group, or a company.
` Each collaborator is assigned a role for that document, and as noted above, the role
determines the role-level access rights for this document.
` A single user may have several roles in the document, based on multiple
assignments as an individual, group, or company collaborator for that document.
` In addition to the security component of collaborator assignments, including users
as collaborators enables their participation in the system’s collaboration
functionality, such as showing events related to the document in the users’ To Do,
Alert and Discussion channels. A flag on the collaborator entry specifies whether
alerts and notices should be sent to the collaborators represented by the entry.
To sum up, class-level access rights, described in the previous section, identify a user's
rights with respect to an entire class of objects (for example, all RFxs), but role-level
access rights describe the user’s rights regarding a specific object (for example, the
single RFx in which the user is assigned a collaborator role). Since the rights attached
to the user's role affect a single object, and not the entire class, they are referred to as
object-level rights in the administration of the system.
Object-level rights cover some of the same actions that class-level rights control, and,
as indicated in the picture below, some additional rights.

Publish
Create View Change State
Create Template Edit Change Owner
Approve

Class Level Rights Role (Object) Level Rights

1718 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

` For Create and Create Template actions, the document doesn't exist, and therefore
has no assigned collaborators. Therefore, the class-level rights alone govern
whether the operation can be performed.
` For View and Edit actions, it is first necessary to have the rights at the class level,
and then also at the role level. This means that the user must be either an
individual or a group-level collaborator in a document (which is the only way to get
the role-level rights) to view or edit a sourcing document.
` For higher-level actions controlled by the role-based rights (for example. publishing
an RFx), it is necessary to have class-level Edit rights (the action of publishing
changes or edits the state of the RFx document) and then the specific right at the
role level (in this case, Publish). We will review each of these higher-level
rights later in this chapter, identifying how they are used in the
application.

Master Data objects and Queries and Reports also support role-based object level
rights, with a slight variation. For sourcing documents, a user has no object-level rights
unless the user is explicitly included as a collaborator on the document. For Master Data
and Query objects, the assumption is that a user's class-level rights provide the
appropriate level of security. Additionally, these objects generally support only the
basic actions of Create, View and Edit. Therefore, the assignment of collaborators to
those objects is optional. In fact, in most cases, the UI does not provide a mechanism
to assign collaborators.
Query objects are the exception to this rule: each has an Access tab that allows the
assignment of collaborators. If no collaborators are assigned to the object, all users
with appropriate class-level rights are granted access. This is different than with
business documents; a business document without collaborators cannot be accessed by
anyone other than its creator. Once a collaborator is assigned to a query object, it is
assumed that this particular object requires object-level access control, and therefore
should behave like a business document, in that only a user with both class-level and
object-level rights should be granted access. A Report object represents each report in
Frictionless SRM. This mechanism allows specific reports to be restricted to a subset of
users, even if those users are able to see other reports. The model simplifies
administration, since it is only necessary to define collaborators for the limited set of
reports that need highly controlled access.
For Master Data objects, all users are typically given View access to all Master Data
classes, and the smaller subset of the user population that is responsible for managing
the Master Data is assigned to a Group and given Create and Edit access to those
classes. Similarly, all users get class-level View access to reports and lists (see Query
Definitions and Query Groups), and the subset responsible for creating and
maintaining reports is assigned to a group and given Create and Edit rights for those
classes. For more restricted reports and lists, the Access tab is used and collaborators
are assigned to limit the visibility of the reports as required.

Object-level access rights are also grouped into Security Profiles.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1719

Accounts and Security System Administration

The following objects are also used to configure and administer the assignment of
access rights:

Object Usage

Security Profiles Group and organize individual access right settings.

Buy-side User Accounts Provide first-level assignment of class-level access rights for a
user.
Groups Extend the set of rights that are granted to users. Users can
belong to one or more groups.
Collaborator Role Definitions Define the object-level rights granted to collaborators acting
in specific roles.
Document Security Templates Provide a mechanism to define default collaborator
assignments for new documents.

Each of these objects can be imported and maintained from the Setup page.

Related Topics
Change Password
Buy-side User Accounts
Security Profiles
Groups
User Dictionary Words

1720 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Change Password
For information about changing your user password, see Changing your user
password.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1721

Accounts and Security System Administration

Buy-side User Accounts

Each buy-side user account represents a Frictionless® SRM user. A user account
contains the following information:
` Access information
` Personnel information
` Contact information
` Application settings
` User groups
` Security profiles

User accounts can be imported through the Import Data feature or activated from
preexisting LDAP accounts. You can also modify existing user accounts and create new
ones.

This section describes how to create and edit a buy-side user account.

Note: You can quickly access your own user account information by clicking your user
name in the upper right corner.

Users and Access Rights

In addition to rights that default from the level of Groups, it is possible to assign
Security Profiles to specific users. For buy-side users, this should be the exception
case, and to facilitate management, all rights should be assigned at the Group level.
Since sell-side users cannot be members of Groups, assigning Security Profiles at the
user level is the only mechanism to assign rights to sell-side users. Sell-side users
automatically receive Security Profiles with an Internal Type of Application User or
Sell Side User.
The Primary Contact Internal type is used to identify a Security Profile that is
automatically granted to the Primary Contact for each supplier. In general, this is done
to allow the Primary Contact to manage the other Contact definitions for the supplier
and to request updates to their own supplier information.

Related Topics
Creating a buy-side user account
Editing a buy-side user account
Field help for User Account: Account Properties page
Field help for User Account: Account Management page
Field help for User Account: Security page

1722 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Creating a buy-side user account

Each buy-side user account represents a Frictionless® SRM user.

User accounts can be imported through the Import Data feature or activated from
preexisting LDAP accounts. You can also modify existing user accounts and create new
ones.

To create a buy-side user account:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Accounts and Security section of System Administration, select Buy-side
User Accounts from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the User Account List page, click Create.
4 On the Account Properties page, fill in the fields under Account Information and
those under Contact Information and Other Information. For details, see Field help
for User Account: Account Properties page.
5 Click the Account Management tab. This tab determines the LDAP directory
information for the user.
6 Fill in the fields under Directory Information, Account Maintenance, and Calendar
Integration. For details, see Field help for User Account: Account Management
page.
7 Click the Security tab. This tab determines the security profile that gives the user
access rights to application resources. For details, see Field help for User
Account: Security page.
8 Under Security Profiles, check the box for one or more security profiles.
9 In the Supervised Companies/Organizational Units table, click Add Company
or Add Organizational Unit.
10 In the dialog box, check the box for one or more companies or organizational units
to add and click OK.
11 In the Groups table, click Add Group.
12 In the dialog box, check the box for one or more groups to add and click OK.
13 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: You can quickly access your own user account information by clicking your user
name in the upper right corner.

Related Topics
Buy-side User Accounts
Editing a buy-side user account
Field help for User Account: Account Properties page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1723

Accounts and Security System Administration

Field help for User Account: Account Management page

Field help for User Account: Security page
Creating a security profile

1724 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Editing a buy-side user account

Each buy-side user account represents a Frictionless® SRM user.

User accounts can be imported through the Import Data feature or activated from
preexisting LDAP accounts. You can also modify existing user accounts and create new
ones.

To edit a buy-side user account:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Accounts and Security section of System Administration, select Buy-side
User Accounts from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the User Account List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select Search Active Users by Name and Company,
search for the account to edit, and click the account.
■ From the drop-down list, select All Users or All Inactive Users and click the
account to edit.
■ Type search criteria in the Show Users with First, Last or Username or
Email Containing text box, and optionally in the And Companies
Containing text box. Click Show and click the account to edit.
4 Click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 On the Account Properties page, edit any fields under Account Information, Contact
Information, and Other Information. For details, see Field help for User Account:
Account Properties page.
6 Click the Account Management tab. This tab determines the LDAP directory
information for the user.
7 Edit any fields. For details, see Field help for User Account: Account
Management page.
8 Click the Security tab. This tab determines the security profile that gives the user
access rights to application resources. For details, see Field help for User
Account: Security page.
9 Under Security Profiles, check the box for one or more security profiles.
10 In the Supervised Companies/Organizational Units table, add or remove
companies or organizational units.

11 In the Groups table, click the Edit icon to change the default status of a
group.
12 In the dialog box, edit the default status and click OK.
13 In the Groups table, add or remove groups.
14 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1725

Accounts and Security System Administration

Note: You can quickly access and edit your own user account information by clicking
your user name in the upper right corner.

Related Topics
Buy-side User Accounts
Creating a buy-side user account
Field help for User Account: Account Properties page
Field help for User Account: Account Management page
Field help for User Account: Security page
Creating a security profile

1726 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Field help for User Account: Account Properties page

Each buy-side user account represents a Frictionless® SRM user.

User accounts can be imported through the Import Data feature or activated from
preexisting LDAP accounts. You can also modify existing user accounts and create new
ones.
The following provides help for some fields on the Account Properties page.

Account Information
Inactive: Check this box to indicate that this account is inactive and remove it from
the list of active accounts.

Fill in the remaining fields in this section with basic account information.

Contact Information
Fill in the fields with basic contact information.

Other Information

Time Zone: From the drop-down list, select the time zone for the user.
Currency: From the drop-down list, select the primary currency for the user.
Display Language: From the drop-down list, select the preferred display language for
the user.
Date Format: From the drop-down list, select the preferred date format for the user.
Decimal Format: From the drop-down list, select the preferred decimal format in
which to display numbers for the user.
Auto BCC: Check this box to indicate that the user should automatically receive a blind
carbon copy of any email generated from a sourcing document for which the user is an
owner or collaborator.
Return Receipt: Check this box to indicate that the user should receive a return
receipt for any email generated from a sourcing document for which the user is an
owner or collaborator.
Note: Most email programs, including Microsoft® Outlook, allow the recipient to
ignore all return receipts or to ignore them on a message-by-message basis.
Additionally, some email programs, such as Microsoft Outlook XPress, only
processes the receipt if the user opens the email message rather than viewing it in
the preview pane.
HTML Mail: Check this box to send system-generated emails in HTML.
Export to Excel: Check this box to create XLS files when exporting from Frictionless
SRM. Leave it unchecked to create CSV files when exporting.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1727

Accounts and Security System Administration

Subscribe to Discussion Notifications: Check this box to indicate that the user
should be notified of discussion activity in sourcing documents for which the user is an
owner or a collaborator.
Show CPO Central: Check this box to display CPO Central as the user’s Workbench
page after logon.
Department Number: Type the user’s department number in the text box.

Related Topics
Buy-side User Accounts
Creating a buy-side user account
Editing a buy-side user account
Field help for User Account: Account Management page
Field help for User Account: Security page

1728 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Field help for User Account: Account Management page

Each buy-side user account represents a Frictionless® SRM user.

User accounts can be imported through the Import Data feature or activated from
preexisting LDAP accounts. You can also modify existing user accounts and create new
ones.
The following provides help for some fields on the Account Properties page. The fields
displayed are determined by the user’s Directory Configuration. All fields may not
appear for every user account.

Note: In the fields below, “directory” indicates the LDAP or other third-party directory
where user accounts are stored.

Directory Information

Enable User to Login: Check this box to enable this user to log into Frictionless SRM.
If this box is not checked, the user will not be able to log in and use the application.
Directory: From the drop-down list, select the directory in which the user account will
be created. If only one directory is available, it will be loaded into this field and no
drop-down list will appear.
User ID: Type the user’s Frictionless user name. This field cannot be edited after
account creation. To edit a user ID, you must edit it in the directory (if permitted by the
directory) and then click Synch Account with Directory.
Common Name: Enter the LDAP Common Name (CN) for this user.
Full DN: This field indicates the complete path to the directory account. It is read-only.

Account Maintenance

Synch Account with Directory: Click this button to synchronize the directory account
with the Frictionless account. For example, you might do this after making changes to
either account.

Reassign to Directory Account: Click the Lookup icon to select another

directory account to assign to this Frictionless account.
Directory Username: Type the user name that can be used to log into the directory to
edit this account.
Directory Password: Type the password that can be used to log into the directory to
edit this account.
Create Directory Account: Check this box to create a directory account that
corresponds with this Frictionless account.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1729

Accounts and Security System Administration

Generate a New Password: Check this box to generate a new temporary password.
This box is checked by default for new user accounts and can also be used to reset the
password for an existing account.
Send Notification: Check this box to send a notification to the user that this account
has been created or has changed. Depending on the boxes checked above, the user will
receive a welcome message, a new password notification, or a welcome message that
includes a new password.

Calendar Integration
The following fields are used for Microsoft® Exchange calendar integration.

Mailbox Alias: Type the mailbox name (for example, this might be the user name) for
the user’s mailbox.
Mailbox Server: Type the hostname of the user’s mailbox server.

Related Topics
Buy-side User Accounts
Creating a buy-side user account
Editing a buy-side user account
Field help for User Account: Account Properties page
Field help for User Account: Security page

1730 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Field help for User Account: Security page

Each buy-side user account represents a Frictionless® SRM user.

User accounts can be imported through the Import Data feature or activated from
preexisting LDAP accounts. You can also modify existing user accounts and create new
ones.
The following provides help for some fields on the Security page.

Security Profiles
Check the box to add one or more security profiles to this user account. For more
information, see Security Profiles.

Workbench View: Select one of the following options to determine what the user sees
on the Workbench after login.
` Standard: Select this option to display the standard Workbench. This option is
intended for a frequent, fully trained user of Frictionless SRM, who is part of your
company’s Purchasing group and who should have full access to the Frictionless
SRM system.
` Internal Customer: Select this option to display the Internal Customer
Workbench, which displays a streamlined version of the XPress module. Internal
Customers are users who purchase services but who are assumed to be outside
your company’s Purchasing group. Internal Customers may self-register to get
access to Frictionless SRM.
Internal Customers have access to a subset of XPress features and are focused on
creating and tracking the status of XPress requests. They do not have access to
other Frictionless SRM modules.
For more information, see Internal Customer XPress.
` CSR: Select this option to display the Internal Customer Workbench, which
provides access to the XPress module. A CSR (Customer Service Representative) is
a user outside your company’s Purchasing group who has expertise in a specific
category and in tactical sourcing.
CSRs have access to all XPress features and are focused on managing XPress
queues. They have limited access to other Frictionless SRM modules.
For more information, see CSR XPress.

Supervised Companies/Organizational Units:

` Click Add Company to add one or more Companies to this user account.
` Click Add Organizational Unit to add one or more Organizational Units to this
account. For more information, see Creating an organizational unit for a new
company.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1731

Accounts and Security System Administration

Related Topics
Buy-side User Accounts
Creating a buy-side user account
Editing a buy-side user account
Creating a security profile
Field help for User Account: Account Properties page
Field help for User Account: Account Management page

1732 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Security Profiles
A security profile is a set of rights and restrictions that can be associated with a user or
group of users. The security profile determines the actions (such as viewing, creating,
and editing) that a user can perform on various resources, such as sourcing documents
and master data.
A security profile can be designated for buy-side users only, sell-side users only,
primary contacts only, or all users. You assign security profiles to groups of buy-side
users and to individual sell-side users. Security profiles are also assigned through
Collaborator Role Definitions.
Frictionless® SRM provides a set of default security profiles. You can edit these profiles
and create new ones.

Security Profile Overview

A security profile is a collection of settings for access rights. Each security profile can be
either a class-level profile or an object-level profile. Class-level profiles define settings
for all class-level rights, and object-level profiles define settings for all role-based
rights. For more information about class-level and object-level access rights, see
Accounts and Security.

Each right in a security profile has a configurable setting of Allow, Deny or Not Set. The
following review of access rights explains how to use these settings:
` The system first validates class-level rights, and then validates object-level rights.
Class-level rights come from the Security Profiles assigned to the user, and from all
of the Groups in which the user is a member.
` The software merges these rights. If any one of these Security Profiles includes an
Allow setting for the right being tested, the user is granted access at the class level,
and validation proceeds to the next step. The presence of at least one Allow,
regardless of whether Deny settings are also present, is sufficient to pass the
access test.
` If access is granted at the class level, authorization proceeds to the object-level
rights. Again, the software merges all of the relevant Security Profiles. In the case
of object-level security, these profiles come from all collaborator roles assigned for
this object either directly to the User or to a Group in which the user is a member.
If one or more Allow settings are found at the object level, the system grants
access. Again, the test is for the presence of one Allow setting; it does not matter if
Deny settings are also present.
` Rights must be granted at both the class level and the object level for the security
framework to authorize the action.

A common example is the inclusion of read-only collaborators on RFPs who may be

active collaborators on other RFPs. These users are defined with class-level rights for

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1733

Accounts and Security System Administration

both View and Edit on RFPs, which may be assigned either to them as a user or to a
group where they are a member. If the role used when they are assigned as a
collaborator to a specific RFP includes only View access, they will be read-only
collaborators. If the role includes both View and Edit rights, they will be able to both
view and edit that RFP.

Security Profiles can have an Internal Type. The possible types are:
` Default Buy Side User
` Default Sell Side User
` Primary Contact
` All Users
These settings facilitate the defaulting of profiles to a population of users. Buy-side
users have Default Buy Side User and All Users profiles by default; it is possible to add
other profiles and to remove any of the default profiles (except All Users profiles)
through the User object. Similarly, Sell-side users get the Default Sell Side User and All
Users profiles. Any Sell-side primary contact automatically gets the Primary Contact
profiles.

A number of class-level Security Profiles are installed by default with the system. The
following profiles apply to buy-side users:
` System Administrator
` Buyer
` Buyer Manager
` Vendor Administrator
` Application User
` RFQuick User
` XPress User
` XPress Manager

The following profiles apply to sell-side users:

` Vendor
` Vendor Manager
` Application User (applies to both buy-side and sell-side users)

An implementer can customize the settings associated with these profiles, or define
new profiles.

1734 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Object-Level Rights
The link between a collaborator role and a Security Profile is made through
Collaborator Role Definitions. Each collaborator role is associated with one and only
one Security Profile. Each collaborator assignment on a sourcing document is given a
role, and these roles correspond to Object Level Security Profiles as defined in Security
Profiles. Examples include Document Owner, Document Reviewer, and Document
Sponsor.
The basic use of View and Edit at the object level is generally analogous to the use of
these rights at the class level, with the exception that an individual user’s privileges will
vary from document to document based on their collaborator association with the
document. The object level, however, introduces a number of additional rights that are
used in specific ways by the application.

Right Usage

Change Owner There is a special attribute in sourcing documents for the document owner,
connected to the collaborator assignment with Document Owner role.
Changing the owner of a document requires the specific Change Owner
right.
Change State Change State is used to control the Change Phase operation for a sourcing
document, except for an RFx, which uses both Change State and Publish
rights to restrict Change Phase operations.
Change Schedule Required to change scheduled planned dates.
Approve The RFx includes a Waiting For Approval phase, with the ability to designate
which collaborators need to approve the document before publication. A
user needs the Approve right in order to approve the document.
Publish In order to Publish an RFx to suppliers, the user needs the Publish right.
Since this is done in conjunction with changing the phase to Open for
Response or Open for Review (if this phase is configured), this operation
requires both the Change State and Publish rights.

Since each of the actions described above changes the associated sourcing document,
the user must have the Edit right at the object level in addition to the specific right.

Access Rule Exceptions

There are several exceptions in the system where access is controlled through different
mechanisms. In some cases, this is a temporary behavior in which the control is based
on an existing role or right to avoid schema impacts between releases.
In most other cases, the exception is related to controlling access to features on the sell
side, where object-level rather than class-level granularity is required. Exceptions exist
here because there is no concept like collaborators for the sell side, and therefore no

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1735

Accounts and Security System Administration

mechanism to assign the appropriate object-level rights. The table below outlines the
current exception cases, and what controls access in each case.

User Task Control Method

Buy Accept Request for invitation to upcoming User must have Document Owner role.
events
Sell Change Proposal state to Preliminary or User needs Vendor Manager role, which is
Firm given automatically to the Vendor Primary
Contact user only.
Buy Accepting supplier registration and data User needs Vendor Administrator role.
modification requests

Denying Access
Since the presence of a single Allow setting at both the class and object level is
sufficient to grant access, ensuring that actions are explicitly denied requires careful
setup. Typically, the best approach to controlling a specific right (for example, editing
Cluster configuration objects or approving an RFP) is the following:
1 Determine whether this right should be controlled at the class level (that is,
whether it should have the same settings for all documents of the class, or different
settings based on the document) to determine whether to control the Class or
Object Security Profiles.
2 Select the Not Set value for this right in all generally used Security Profiles.
3 Create two new Security Profiles, which include Not Set for all other values, to avoid
side effects. In one Security Profile, specify Allow for the right in question; in the
other, specify Deny for the right.
4 Do one of the following:
■ For a class-level right, consider assigning each of these two settings to a
distinct Group, and put the users that you want to be denied in the one with the
Profile that specifies Deny for the right, and the users you want to allow in the
other.
■ For an object-level right, follow the same pattern with two collaborator roles.
This will ensure that approval and denial are tightly controlled and easily managed.
For more information about access, see Accounts and Security.

Field Help for Security Profile page

Inactive: Check this box to indicate that the security profile is inactive and unavailable
for use.

1736 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Internal Name: Type an internal name for the profile.

Display Name: Type a display name for the profile.
Object Level: Check this box to indicate that the security profile applies to a single
business object.
Restrict Access: Check this box to indicate that the security profile should have
restricted access. Only a user whose Assign Restricted access right is set to Allow on
the Access Rights page can assign other users to a Restricted Access profile.
Category: Select a category for the security profile. Options include System, Buy-side,
Sell-side and None.
Internal Type: Select an internal type. Options include Default Buy-Side User, Default
Sell-Side User, Primary Contact, and All Users.
Description: Type a description for the system profile.

Related Topics
Creating a security profile
Editing a security profile
Configuring navigation bar buttons in a security profile
Configuring calendar event creation in a security profile
Restricting access to a security profile
Creating a buy-side user account
Creating a collaborator role definition

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1737

Accounts and Security System Administration

Creating a security profile

A security profile is a set of rights and restrictions that can be associated with a user or
group of users. The security profile determines the actions (such as viewing, creating,
and editing) that a user can perform on various resources, such as sourcing documents
and master data.
A security profile can be designated for buy-side users only, sell-side users only,
primary contacts only, or all users. You assign security profiles to groups of buy-side
users and to individual sell-side users. Security profiles are also assigned through
Collaborator Role Definitions.

Note: For categories and menu options on the Setup page, a Setup right is defined. To
view a Setup page option, the user must have both View and Setup set to Allow for the
item.

Frictionless® SRM provides a set of default security profiles. You can edit these profiles
and create new ones. For more information, see Security Profiles.

To create a security profile:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 Under System Administration, from the Accounts and Security drop-down list,
select Security Profiles and click OK.
3 On the Security Profile List page, click Create.
4 On the Security Profile page, fill in the fields with basic security profile information.
5 Click the Access Rights tab. This page determines the permissions to various types
of resources, which are sorted into access groups.
Note: Access rights and access groups are system data and cannot be customized.
6 From the Show Only drop-down list, select the access group for which to set
access rights.
7 In the Access Rights table, use the radio buttons to select access rights. For each
right in the profile, you can configure a setting of Not Set, Deny, or Allow.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Security Profiles
Editing a security profile
Configuring navigation bar buttons in a security profile
Configuring calendar event creation in a security profile
Restricting access to a security profile

1738 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Creating a buy-side user account

Creating a collaborator role definition

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1739

Accounts and Security System Administration

Editing a security profile

A security profile is a set of rights and restrictions that can be associated with a user or
group of users. The security profile determines the actions (such as viewing, creating,
and editing) that a user can perform on various resources, such as sourcing documents
and master data.
A security profile can be designated for buy-side users only, sell-side users only,
primary contacts only, or all users. You assign security profiles to groups of buy-side
users and to individual sell-side users. Security profiles are also assigned through
Collaborator Role Definitions.
Frictionless® SRM provides a set of default security profiles. You can edit these profiles
and create new ones. For more information, see Security Profiles.

To edit a security profile:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 Under System Administration, from the Accounts and Security drop-down list,
select Security Profiles and click OK.
3 On the Security Profile List page, select All Security Profiles, All Class Level Security
Profiles, all Object Level Security Profiles, or All Inactive Security Profiles from the
drop-down list and click the profile to edit.
4 On the Security Profile page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Access Rights tab. This page determines the permissions to various types
of resources, which are sorted into access groups.
Note: Access rights and access groups are system data and cannot be customized.
7 From the Show Only drop-down list, select the access group for which to edit
access rights.
8 In the Access Rights table, use the radio buttons to select access rights.
9 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Security Profiles
Creating a security profile
Creating a buy-side user account
Configuring navigation bar buttons in a security profile
Configuring calendar event creation in a security profile
Restricting access to a security profile
Creating a collaborator role definition

1740 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Configuring navigation bar buttons in a security profile

A security profile is a set of rights and restrictions that can be associated with a user or
group of users. The security profile determines the actions (such as viewing, creating,
and editing) that a user can perform on various resources, such as sourcing documents
and master data. For more information, see Security Profiles.
You control the visibility of buttons on the global navigation bar by granting or denying
rights in a user's security profile.

To remove a specific button from the navigation bar, do the following:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 Under System Administration, from the Accounts and Security drop-down list,
select Security Profiles and click OK.
3 On the Security Profile List page, select All Security Profiles from the drop-down list
and click the profile to edit.
4 On the Security Profile page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Click the Access Rights tab.
6 From the Show Only drop-down list, select Business Documents.
7 For the navigation bar button to hide, select Deny as the View option. For example,
to hide the navigation bar for the BOM module, select Deny in the View row under
Bill of Materials.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Security Profiles
Creating a security profile
Editing a security profile
Configuring calendar event creation in a security profile
Restricting access to a security profile
Creating a buy-side user account
Creating a collaborator role definition

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1741

Accounts and Security System Administration

Configuring calendar event creation in a security profile

A security profile is a set of rights and restrictions that can be associated with a user or
group of users. The security profile determines the actions (such as viewing, creating,
and editing) that a user can perform on various resources, such as sourcing documents
and master data. For more information, see Security Profiles.
You control whether a user can create a calendar event in the Calendar channel or
Events channel of the Workbench by granting or denying rights in the user's security
profile. The default setting for event configuration is Not Set.

To configure calendar event creation for the Workbench, do the following:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 Under System Administration, from the Accounts and Security drop-down list,
select Security Profiles and click OK.
3 On the Security Profile List page, select All Security Profiles from the drop-down list
and click the profile to edit.
4 On the Security Profile page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Click the Access Rights tab.
6 From the Show Only drop-down list, select Workbench.
7 Under Calendar Event, in the Create row, select Allow or Deny.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Security Profiles
Creating a security profile
Editing a security profile
Configuring navigation bar buttons in a security profile
Restricting access to a security profile
Creating a buy-side user account
Creating a collaborator role definition

1742 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Restricting access to a security profile

A security profile is a set of rights and restrictions that can be associated with a user or
group of users. The security profile determines the actions (such as viewing, creating,
and editing) that a user can perform on various resources, such as sourcing documents
and master data. For more information, see Security Profiles.
You can restrict access to a security profile to prevent users from acquiring rights they
should not have. For example, the System Administrator profile includes configuration
rights for various objects. A Buyer Manager needs the Edit permission on user accounts
but should not necessarily have the configuration rights of a System Administrator.
Setting the Restrict Access field on the System Administrator security profile would
prevent Buyer Managers from assigning themselves this profile.

To restrict access to a security profile:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 Under System Administration, from the Accounts and Security drop-down list,
select Security Profiles and click OK.
3 On the Security Profile List page, select All Security Profiles from the drop-down list
and click the profile to edit.
4 On the Security Profile page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Check the Restrict Access box. Only a user whose Assign Restricted access
right is set to Allow on the Access Rights page can assign other users to a
Restricted Access profile.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Security Profiles
Creating a security profile
Configuring navigation bar buttons in a security profile
Creating a buy-side user account
Creating a collaborator role definition

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1743

Accounts and Security System Administration

Groups
Groups are groups of users that are organized for a functional purpose. For example,
groups are used to assign security profiles for a set of users and to add collaborators to
sourcing documents. A user can belong to multiple groups.
Groups are hierarchical and can contain an unlimited number of sub-group levels. You
define groups with internal and external categories and with Security Profiles.
Groups are custom required data.

Groups and Security Profiles

Although it is possible to assign Security Profiles to individual buy-side users, this
should not be a common practice. To facilitate management, all buy-side profiles
should be assigned to groups.
Groups are attached to the Company / Business Unit hierarchy, and define populations
of buy-side users with common sets of rights. A Group is defined as containing a set of
users, and being granted a set of Security Profiles. The set of Security Profiles that can
be associated with a Group are those that have an Internal Type of All Users, Buy
Side Users or None.
When editing a Group, the set of available Security Profiles is listed on the Security
Profiles tab. Applicable ones are checked. Any profiles with a type of All Users are
checked and cannot be unchecked.
You define Groups to organize users based on common access rights.

This section describes how to create and edit a group.

Related Topics
Creating a group
Editing a group

1744 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Creating a group
Groups are groups of users that are organized for a functional purpose. For example,
groups are used to assign security profiles for a set of users and to add collaborators to
sourcing documents. A user can belong to multiple groups.
Groups are hierarchical and can contain an unlimited number of sub-group levels. You
define groups with internal and external categories and with security profiles.
Groups are custom required data.

To create a group:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Accounts and Security section of System Administration, select Groups from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Groups List page, click Create.
4 On the Group page, fill in the fields with basic group information.
5 Click the Users tab.
6 Click the Add User Account button to add users to the group.
7 In the dialog box, click the box for one or more users to add and click OK.
8 Click the Security Profiles tab.
9 Under Security Profiles, check the box for one or more security profiles.
10 Click the Sub Groups tab.
11 Click Add to add sub-groups to the group.
12 Repeat steps 4 through 10 to create the sub-group. You can add an unlimited
number of sub-group levels to the group.
13 In each sub-group, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Groups
Editing a group

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1745

Accounts and Security System Administration

Editing a group
Groups are groups of users that are organized for a functional purpose. For example,
groups are used to assign security profiles for a set of users and for adding
collaborators to sourcing documents. A user can belong to multiple groups.
Groups are hierarchical and can contain an unlimited number of sub-group levels. You
define groups with internal and external categories and with security profiles.
Groups are custom required data.

To edit a group:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Accounts and Security section of System Administration, select Groups from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Groups List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select All Groups and click the user to edit.
■ Type search criteria in the Show Groups containing text box. Click Show and
click the user to edit.
4 On the Group page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Users tab.
7 Click the Add User Account button to add users to the group.
8 In the dialog box, click the box for one or more users to add and click OK.
9 Click the Security Profiles tab.
10 Under Security Profiles, check the box for one or more security profiles.
11 Click the Sub Groups tab.
12 Click Add to add a sub-group. For details, see Creating a group.

13 Click the Edit icon for a sub-group to edit.

14 Repeat steps 5 through 12 to edit the sub-group and any sub-groups it contains.
15 In each sub-group, click the Save button in the toolbar.
16 On the Group page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Groups
Creating a group

1746 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

User Dictionary Words

Frictionless® SRM provides a spell-check feature for rich text fields. You can add
custom words to your personal spell-check dictionary that are relevant to your role. For
example, you might add industry terminology, company terminology, product names,
abbreviations, acronyms, and so on.

This section describes how to create and edit custom user dictionary words.

Related Topics
Creating a user dictionary word
Editing a user dictionary word

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1747

Accounts and Security System Administration

Creating a user dictionary word

Frictionless® SRM provides a spell-check feature for rich text fields. You can add
custom words to your personal spell-check dictionary that are relevant to your role. For
example, you might add industry terminology, company terminology, product names,
abbreviations, acronyms, and so on.

To create a user dictionary word:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Accounts and Security section of System Administration, select User
Dictionary Words from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the User Dictionary Word List page, click Create.
4 On the Summary page, type the word in the Word field.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
User Dictionary Words
Editing a user dictionary word

1748 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Accounts and Security

Editing a user dictionary word

Frictionless® SRM provides a spell-check feature for rich text fields. You can add
custom words to your personal spell-check dictionary that are relevant to your role. For
example, you might add industry terminology, company terminology, product names,
abbreviations, acronyms, and so on.

To edit a user dictionary word:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Accounts and Security section of System Administration, select User
Dictionary Words from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the User Dictionary Word List page, click the word to edit.
4 On the Summary page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit the word in the Word field.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
User Dictionary Words
Creating a user dictionary word

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1749

System Management System Administration

System Management
System management options enable system administrators to monitor and manage
system performance.

This section describes system management options.

Related Topics
System Information
Registered Servers

1750 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration System Management

System Information
Frictionless® SRM Setup provides a summary of critical system setup parameters,
including the following:
` Service registration: Provides basic information on the service and JVM settings.
For details, see Field help for Service Registration page.
` Components: Provides version information for installed components. Also includes
information on module license installed for this system.
` Cache/DB: Stores frequently accessed, infrequently modified objects in server
memory to eliminate the overhead of retrieving them from the database. For
details, see Field help for Cache/DB page.
` Performance: Provides performance information.
` Logs: Provides access to log files. Periodic review of the log files is an important
step in issue isolation, as well as an important preventive step to identify warning
conditions before problems occur. For details, see Field help for Logs page.
` Audits: Provides audit information.
` Daemons: Provides information about enabled daemons. For details, see Field
help for Daemons page.
` Install history: Provides install history information.

You must provide data from the System Information page when reporting an issue to
Frictionless Commerce Technical Support. System administrators can also use this page
to refresh the cache and control log settings.

Note: You should not attempt to edit system information unless you are a system
administrator working under the specific guidance of Frictionless Commerce technical
support.

This section describes how to view and configure system information.

Related Topics
Viewing system information
Editing system information

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1751

System Management System Administration

Viewing system information

Frictionless® SRM Setup provides a summary of critical system setup parameters.

You must provide data from the System Information page when reporting an issue to
Frictionless Commerce technical support. System administrators can also use this page
to refresh the cache and control log settings.

Note: You should not attempt to edit system information unless you are a system
administrator working under the specific guidance of Frictionless Commerce technical
support.

To view system information:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the System Management section of System Administration, select System
Information from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 View information on the Service Registration page. For details, see Field help for
Service Registration page.
4 Click the Components tab to view version information for installed components.
This page also includes information on the module license installed for the system.
5 Click the Cache/DB tab to view cache statistics. For details, see Field help for
Cache/DB page.
6 Click the Performance tab to view performance information.
7 Click the Logs tab to view log information. For details, see Field help for Logs
page.
8 Click the Audits tab to view audit information.
9 Click the Daemons tab to view information about enabled daemons. For details, see
Field help for Daemons page.
10 Click the Install History tab to view installation history information.
11 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
System Information
Editing system information
Field help for Service Registration page
Field help for Cache/DB page
Field help for Logs page
Field help for Daemons page

1752 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration System Management

Editing system information

Frictionless® SRM Setup provides a summary of critical system setup parameters.

You must provide data from the System Information page when reporting an issue to
Frictionless Commerce technical support. System administrators can also use this page
to refresh the cache and control log settings.

To edit system information:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the System Management section of System Administration, select System
Information from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Service Registration page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
4 View information on the Service Registration page. For details, see Field help for
Service Registration page.
5 Click the Components tab to view version information for installed components.
This page also includes information on the module license installed for the system.
6 Click the Cache/DB tab to view cache statistics and refresh the cache display. For
details, see Field help for Cache/DB page.
7 Click the Performance tab to view performance information.
8 Click the Logs tab to view log information and change diagnostic and SQL logging
settings. For details, see Field help for Logs page.
9 Click the Audits tab to view audit information.
10 Click the Daemons tab to view information about enabled daemons. For details, see
Field help for Daemons page
11 Click the Install History tab to view installation history information.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
System Information
Viewing system information
Field help for Service Registration page
Field help for Cache/DB page
Field help for Logs page
Field help for Daemons page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1753

System Management System Administration

Field help for Service Registration page

The Service Registration page contains basic information on the service and JVM
settings.
The following provides help for some fields on the Service Registration page.

Product Mode: This field is used to characterize the deployment state of the
application. Options include:
` Implementation: This is the default mode after the system is deployed for the
first time. It uses the implementation caching profile for faster startup time and
good response time. Use this mode when working out deployment issues, importing
system data, building queries and reports, and so on.
` Test: This mode uses the same caching model as Production mode. Use this mode
when running training sessions and UAT tests.
` Production: This mode uses a data caching model optimized for user response
time. The cost is slightly slower startup time and a short-lived performance
degradation when system data (such as queries, reports, and master data) is
changed. Production mode is available only when the system is properly licensed.
Modules not licensed will be hidden in the UI automatically once Production mode is
enabled. Additionally, the Local directory driver is unavailable in Production mode
for security purposes.

Related Topics
System Information
Viewing system information
Editing system information
Field help for Cache/DB page
Field help for Logs page
Field help for Daemons page

1754 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration System Management

Field help for Cache/DB page

Frictionless® SRM incorporates a cache that stores frequently accessed, infrequently

modified objects in server memory to eliminate the overhead of retrieving them from
the database. The cache provides a dramatic boost to Frictionless SRM performance.
The cache provides two basic models. The first, static caching, assumes that cached
objects are almost never modified during system operation. An example of this is
Directory Configurations. These are accessed relatively often (during each login) and
rarely if ever change after initial setup. Once the cache is active, those types of objects
that are defined as statically cached are generally all retrieved into server memory at
startup. This slows the startup process somewhat, but the trade-off is considerably
faster system operation after startup. Even statically cached objects are refreshed
periodically as changes occur, but there is no guarantee that a user will immediately see
the changes.
The second cache model is dynamic. It is used when the class of objects can change,
but changes infrequently. When an application requests the object, the cache first
verifies that its in-memory version is current, and retrieves a new version from the
database if necessary. This is still more efficient than always retrieving the object from
the database. Whether an object is cached, and the cache mode that is used, are
configured by object class. These configuration settings are loaded automatically when
the cache is enabled and are controlled by Frictionless Commerce technical personnel.
The application installs with the cache disabled by default. In general, this is
appropriate for the early stages of system implementation. While the most basic master
data objects are being defined, it can be misleading to have the cache enabled, as
changes made to the master data objects may not immediately be visible. Later in the
implementation process, the cache can be enabled to improve performance. The cache
should be enabled before the system is deployed in production mode.
To enable the cache:
1 Go to the System Administration Portal (…/fssystem/portal/login) and select
System Properties.
2 Look for the property system.db.cache.status and do one of the following:
■ If the property is there, set its value to ENABLED.
■ If the property is not there, create it and set its value to ENABLED.
After you make this change, the cache will be active when the server restarts.
You can view cache statistics on the Cache/DB page. The number of objects cached is
displayed, along with the number of cache “hits” by class. A cache hit represents
finding an object in the cache, and therefore saving database and object creation
overhead. In general, it should not be necessary to click the Refresh link on the cache
statistics display, as the refresh should be automatic. In certain special situations, you
may be guided by Technical Support to use the Refresh link that updates the cache
with the latest versions of that class of object. A high hit count indicates that caching
that object is providing a strong performance benefit; a low hit count indicates that the

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1755

System Management System Administration

usage of the object is light. If server memory is at a premium, an administrator could

work with Technical Support to stop caching that class of objects to reduce memory
usage by the cache.
Note that System Property settings, because of their extremely high usage, are cached
even when the cache is disabled.

Related Topics
System Information
Viewing system information
Editing system information
Field help for Service Registration page
Field help for Logs page
Field help for Daemons page

1756 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration System Management

Field help for Logs page

Frictionless SRM maintains log files as a diagnostic tool during normal operation. In
general, little is logged beyond server startup. Messages that are logged include the
date and time, along with an indicator of whether the message indicates an error or is
simply informational. Periodic review of the log files is an important step in issue
isolation, as well as an important preventive step to identify warning conditions before
problems occur.

Maximum Log File Size (kb)

Log files have a configured maximum size. When this size is exceeded, the file is closed
and a new log file is created. Background processing can remove old log files. This
technique prevents system logging from consuming all available hard disk storage
space, but when errors occur it is not unusual to see multiple sequential log files.
The maximum log file size can be changed on the Logs page by the system
administrator. Note the following when changing log file size:
` If there are multiple systems, the maximum log file size must be set for each
system.
` The maximum log file size set in this manner is temporary and will reset to the
default size defined in fcisystem.properties when the system is restarted.
` The minimum log file size is 1024 KB. This minimum is to prevent users from
setting an abnormally low log file size, causing the system to spend an excessive
amount of time initializing log files.

Accessing Log Files

Log Files can be accessed from the “logs” subdirectory in the application home of the
application server(s). For administrators that do not have direct access to the server
file systems, log files can also be accessed from the System Information page. The Logs
tab displays the available log files, and provides a Download link for each, allowing an
administrator to access the log files from a browser.

Errors
Periodically, scan the most recent log files for the string “ERROR”. If errors are being
logged in your system, they should be brought to the attention of Frictionless Technical
Support. In some cases, the software may have degraded gracefully after the error,
leaving the original operator unaware that a problem occurred. Scanning the logs helps
to identify these conditions.

Query Performance
In addition to errors, the system will automatically log SQL statements that exceed a
pre-configured execution time limit. This is often an early indicator of performance

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1757

System Management System Administration

issues. Scan the log files for “Start SQL Execute”. If you find multiple occurrences,
contact Frictionless Technical Support with the log files available.

Logging Modes
The System Information page provides the ability to change both the diagnostic and
SQL logging settings. Changing these settings will log an extremely large amount of
data and materially affect performance, and should only be done temporarily under the
specific guidance of Frictionless Technical Support.

Logging Severities
The application log uses the following standard types of logging severities:
` Info
` Warning
` Error
` Alert
` Critical
` Debug

Alerts
Frictionless SRM logs three different types of alerts to the application log. An alert
indicates an event that may require immediate action. However, some events may
occur as part of the normal operation of the system. The three alerts that are currently
logged by the system are:
` Slow Transaction Alert: Any database transaction that takes more than
<threshold> seconds to complete. The default threshold is 10 seconds.
` Slow Page Alert: Any user page that takes more than <threshold> to complete.
The default threshold is 15 seconds.
` Low Memory Alert: Any moment that <threshold> percentage of available
memory is used. The default threshold is 90%.
The amount of memory used is computed using the currently allocated memory as a
percentage of the total memory heap size currently available. Java can be configured
with a dynamic heap size specifying a initial starting heap size and a maximum heap
size. For our hosted customers, the minimum heap size is set to 512Mb and the
maximum heap size is set to 1024Mb. The Java virtual machine can dynamically
increase the heap size as needed.
The Java virtual machine is also responsible for freeing up unused memory in a process
known as garbage collection (GC). Often the JVM will not expand the heap of available
memory or clean up unused memory until 90% of the current memory is allocated. This
has the side affect of causing low memory alerts to be logged. Low memory alerts
should be monitored but are generally not an issue unless several (10-20) alerts occur

1758 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration System Management

in a short period of time, the heap has been extended to its maximum value, and any
garbage collections activities fail to free up memory. This scenario indicates that all
memory is being used and there is none available for the application to continue.
Low memory alerts logged before the heap size is extended or prior to a successful
garbage collection are considered normal operation of the application.

Related Topics
System Information
Viewing system information
Editing system information
Field help for Service Registration page
Field help for Cache/DB page
Field help for Daemons page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1759

System Management System Administration

Field help for Daemons page

The best practice to use for daemons is to allow all daemons to run on any machine in
the environment. If a daemon fails on one machine, it will automatically be recovered
by another machine.
The only situation in which you should specify which daemons run on all machines is if
there is a Data Import scheduled task that is reading data from a local directory (rather
than from FTP). In this case, the daemon should only run on the machine that contains
that directory.

In this situation, do the following:

1 For the machine with that directory, leave the daemon settings unchanged.
2 For all other machines in the environment, uncheck the Auto-Enable All
Daemons checkbox and then uncheck the Enabled checkbox for the Data Import
daemon.

Related Topics
System Information
Viewing system information
Editing system information
Field help for Service Registration page
Field help for Cache/DB page
Field help for Logs page

1760 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration System Management

Registered Servers
Frictionless® SRM Setup enables you to create and edit service registrations.

Note: You should not attempt to work with service registrations unless you are a system
administrator.

This section describes how to create and edit a service registration.

Related Topics
Creating a service registration
Editing a service registration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1761

System Management System Administration

Creating a service registration

Frictionless® SRM Setup enables you to create and edit service registrations.

Note: You should not attempt to work with service registrations unless you are a system
administrator.

To create a service registration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the System Management section of System Administration, select Registered
Servers from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Service Registration List page, click Create.
4 On the Service Registration page, fill in the fields.
5 Click the Components tab and fill in the fields for component information.
6 Click the Cache/DB tab and fill in the fields for cache and database information.
7 Click the Performance tab and fill in the fields for performance information.
8 Click the Logs tab and fill in the fields for log information.
9 Click the Audits tab and fill in the fields for audit information.
10 Click the Daemons tab and fill in the fields for information about enabled daemons.
11 Click the Install History tab and fill in the fields for installation history information.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Registered Servers

1762 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration System Management

Editing a service registration

Frictionless® SRM Setup enables you to create and edit service registrations.

Note: You should not attempt to work with service registrations unless you are a system
administrator.

To edit a service registration:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the System Management section of System Administration, select Registered
Servers from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Service Registration List page, click the service registration to edit.
4 On the Service Registration page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any available fields.
6 Click the Components tab to edit component information.
7 Click the Cache/DB tab to edit cache and database information.
8 Click the Performance tab to edit performance information.
9 Click the Logs tab to edit log information.
10 Click the Audits tab to edit audit information.
11 Click the Daemons tab to edit information about enabled daemons.
12 Click the Install History tab to edit installation history information.
13 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Registered Servers
Creating a service registration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1763

Administrative Reports System Administration

Administrative Reports
This section describes administrative report options.

Related Topics
Alert Log
Events
User Activity
Background Task Status
Queued Messages
Processed Messages
Security Profile Usage Summary
Pending Upgrade Issues

1764 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Administrative Reports

Alert Log
Alerts are messages that can be created or sent as emails or as Workbench channel
notifications. An alert can be sent to buy-side users, sell-side users, or both. An alert
can be designated for an individual recipient or company. Company alerts cannot be
emailed.

Note: You should not attempt to work with alerts unless you are a system
administrator.

This section describes how to create and edit an alert.

Related Topics
Creating an alert
Editing an alert

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1765

Administrative Reports System Administration

Creating an alert
Alerts are messages that can be created or sent as emails or as Workbench channel
notifications. An alert can be sent to buy-side users, sell-side users, or both. An alert
can be designated for an individual recipient or company. Company alerts cannot be
emailed.

Note: You should not attempt to work with alerts unless you are a system
administrator.

To create an alert:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Administrative Reports section of System Administration, select Alert Log
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Alert List page, click Create.
4 On the Alert page, fill in the fields with alert information.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Alert Log
Editing an alert

1766 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Administrative Reports

Editing an alert
Alerts are messages that can be created or sent as emails or as Workbench channel
notifications. An alert can be sent to buy-side users, sell-side users, or both. An alert
can be designated for an individual recipient or company. Company alerts cannot be
emailed.

Note: You should not attempt to work with alerts unless you are a system
administrator.

To create an alert:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Administrative Reports section of System Administration, select Alert Log
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Alert List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select Search Alerts by Name, search for the alert to
edit, and click the alert.
■ From the drop-down list, select All Alerts or Buyer Alerts and click the alert to
edit.
4 On the Alert page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Alert Log
Creating an alert

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1767

Administrative Reports System Administration

Events
Frictionless® SRM Setup enables you create and edit events.

Note: You should not attempt to work with events unless you are a system
administrator.

This section describes how to create and edit an event.

Related Topics
Creating an event
Editing an event

1768 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Administrative Reports

Creating an event
Note: You should not attempt to work with events unless you are a system
administrator.

To create an event:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Administrative Reports section of System Administration, select Events from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Calendar Event List page, click Create.
4 In the New Calendar Event dialog box, fill in the fields with event information.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Events
Editing an event

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1769

Administrative Reports System Administration

Editing an event
Note: You should not attempt to work with events unless you are a system
administrator.

To edit an event:
1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Administrative Reports section of System Administration, select Events from
the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Calendar Event List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select All Events by Name, search for the event to
edit, and click the event.
■ From the drop-down list, select All Events or Inactive Events and click the event
to edit.
4 In the New Calendar Event dialog box, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Events
Creating an event

1770 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Administrative Reports

User Activity
You can use Setup to view user activity reports on historical and current usage of the
Frictionless® SRM application.

This section describes how to view a user activity report.

Related Topics
Viewing a user activity report

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1771

Administrative Reports System Administration

Viewing a user activity report

You can use Setup to view user activity reports on historical and current usage of the
Frictionless® SRM application.

To view a user activity report:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Administrative Reports section of System Administration, select User Activity
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the User Activity page, review the user activity bar chart that appears.
4 To see additional user reports, enter report criteria in the fields at the bottom of the
page and click Go.

Related Topics
User Activity

1772 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Administrative Reports

Background Task Status

You can use Setup to track any errors that occur in scheduled background tasks.

This section describes how to view background task status.

Related Topics
Viewing background task status

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1773

Administrative Reports System Administration

Viewing background task status

You can use Setup to track any errors that occur in scheduled background tasks.

To view background task status:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Administrative Reports section of System Administration, select Background
Task Status from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Background Task Status List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select Daemon Alerts Since Date, Background Task
Status Events Since Date, or Search Background Task Status Events by
Session, search for the task to view, and click the task.
■ From the drop-down list, select Today’s Daemon Alerts, Today’s Background
Task Status Events, All Inactive Daemon Alerts, or All Inactive Background Task
Status Events, and click the task to view.
4 On the Alert page, view background task information.
5 To mark the task inactive, click Mark Inactive in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Background Task Status

1774 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Administrative Reports

Queued Messages
Two reports are included with the system in order to help determine the status of the
mail queue: Queued Messages and Processed Messages.
The Queued Messages report lists the mail messages currently in the mail queue,
waiting to be sent.

This section describes how to view queued messages.

Related Topics
Viewing queued messages
Processed Messages
Viewing processed messages

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1775

Administrative Reports System Administration

Viewing queued messages

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Administrative Reports section of System Administration, select Queued
Messages from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Message List page, view any current queued messages. The Message
State column will be one of the following:
■ Pending: The mail daemons have yet to send the message. The daemons run
roughly every minute.
■ Paused: The mail configuration has been set up with the Postpone rule,
indicating that the message will be kept in the queue until the system is put in
production mode.
■ Holding: The message is being held in the queue because mail rules have
indicated that it should not be sent yet. Specifically, the mail configuration is set
up with a mail rule of Hold.
■ Awaiting Retry: The message was not successfully sent to the SMTP server. It
will be retried at a later time.

Related Topics
Queued Messages
Processed Messages
Viewing processed messages

1776 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Administrative Reports

Processed Messages
Two reports are included with the system in order to help determine the status of the
mail queue: Queued Messages and Processed Messages.
The Processed Messages lists the mail messages that have been processed.

This section describes how to view processed messages.

Related Topics
Viewing processed messages
Queued Messages
Viewing queued messages

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1777

Administrative Reports System Administration

Viewing processed messages

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Administrative Reports section of System Administration, select Processed
Messages from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Processed Message List page, view the list of processed messages. The
Result column will indicate that the message has either been Sent, was Deleted, or
Failed.

Related Topics
Processed Messages

1778 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Administrative Reports

Security Profile Usage Summary

This section describes how to view a security profile usage summary.

Related Topics
Viewing a security profile usage summary

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1779

Administrative Reports System Administration

Viewing a security profile usage summary

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Administrative Reports section of System Administration, select Security
Profile Usage Summary from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Security Profile Usage Summary page, view the security profile usage
summary.

4 To view or edit a security profile, click the Page icon for the profile.

Related Topics
Security Profile Usage Summary
Creating a security profile
Editing a security profile

1780 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Administrative Reports

Pending Upgrade Issues

This section describes how to view a list of pending upgrade issues.

Related Topics
Viewing pending upgrade issues

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1781

Administrative Reports System Administration

Viewing pending upgrade issues

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Administrative Reports section of System Administration, select Pending
Upgrade Issues from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Upgrade Questions List page, select All Pending Upgrade Questions or All
Upgrade Questions from the drop-down list.
4 View the list of upgrade questions.

Related Topics
Pending Upgrade Issues

1782 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Spend Environment Management

Spend environment management follows the practices of a data warehouse, or a data
convenience store, rather than a transactional system. Note the following:
` Database administration, particularly for backups, is done differently for this
component than for the rest of the Frictionless® SRM system.
` Imported spend data is appended to previous data in the spend fact tables, which is
the fastest method. This allows reporting to continue even during the import, with
consistent results. Once spend data is imported, it cannot be updated. However,
spend amounts can be offset by data in later imports.
This section describes spend environment management options.

Related Topics
Spend Environment Configuration
Initialize Spend Environment
Convert Master Data: Update Spend Dimensions
Import Spend Data
Remove Spend Data
Remove Spend Environment
Dimension ID Synonym Maps
Dimension ID Synonym Map Sets

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1783

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Spend Environment Configuration

A separate environment is defined for each SRM context. Spend data imported in one
context is not available for users logged into another context. Each context has one and
only one active spend environment configuration document.
This section describes how to create and edit a spend environment configuration.

Related Topics
Creating a spend environment configuration
Editing a spend environment configuration
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Header page
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Actions page
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Dimensions page
Spend environment backup and recovery

1784 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Creating a spend environment configuration

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Spend Environment Management section of System Administration, select
Spend Environment Configuration from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Spend Analysis Configuration List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields. For details, see Field help for Spend
Analysis Configuration Header page.
5 Click the Actions tab and fill in the fields. For details, see Field help for Spend
Analysis Configuration Actions page.
6 Click the Dimensions tab.

7 Click the Edit icon for a dimension to edit. For details, see Field help for
Spend Analysis Configuration Dimensions page.
8 On the Dimension page, edit any fields.
9 Click the Sources tab to edit dimension sources.

10 Click the Edit icon for a dimension source to edit.

11 In the dialog box, edit any fields and click OK.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Spend Environment Configuration
Editing a spend environment configuration
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Header page
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Actions page
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Dimensions page
Spend environment backup and recovery

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1785

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Editing a spend environment configuration

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Spend Environment Management section of System Administration, select
Spend Environment Configuration from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Spend Analysis Configuration List page, select Spend Analysis Configuration,
Spend Analysis Configuration Templates, or Inactive Spend Analysis Configurations
from the drop-down list and click the configuration to edit.
4 On the Header page, edit any fields. For details, see Field help for Spend
Analysis Configuration Header page.
5 Click the Actions tab and edit any fields. For details, see Field help for Spend
Analysis Configuration Actions page.
6 Click the Dimensions tab.

7 Click the Edit icon for a dimension to edit. For details, see Field help for
Spend Analysis Configuration Dimensions page.
8 On the Dimension page, edit any fields.
9 Click the Sources tab to edit dimension sources.

10 Click the Edit icon for a dimension source to edit.

11 In the dialog box, edit any fields and click OK.
12 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Spend Environment Configuration
Creating a spend environment configuration
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Header page
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Actions page
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Dimensions page
Spend environment backup and recovery

1786 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Header page

The following provides descriptions for the fields on the Header page.

Inactive (Status): Check this box to indicate that the spend environment is inactive
and unavailable for use.

Internal Name: Type an internal name to be used for the spend environment.

Display Name: Type a name for the spend environment as it will be displayed in the
user interface.

Description: Type a description of the spend environment.

Context Suffix: A spend environment can be defined for a context (though not for the
system context). If an enterprise has sub-contexts, a separate spend environment
would be defined for each sub-context, and possibly for the enterprise context as well.
A separate set of database objects (such as tables) is defined for each spend
environment. The context suffix displayed here is the sequential number appended to
the names of the database objects for this spend environment. This suffix must appear
in the first column of spend input data that is imported for this context.

Tablespace
The spend database objects are expected to be placed in one or more tablespaces that
are separate from other SRM database objects, though still in the same schema. This
makes their maintenance and use less disruptive to other SRM operations. Oracle
tablespaces are essentially disk files. Therefore, they can be placed on separate disks.
One tablespace should be specified for the spend tables and another tablespace should
be specified for the indices to those tables.
The tablespaces should be created by the DBA before the action to initialize the spend
environment.
` Use Tablespace: Check this box to indicate that one or more tablespaces is used
for this spend environment.
` Tablespace for Tables: Type the name of an Oracle tablespace which has been
created to store the spend data tables for this spend environment. If no tablespace
is specified, the table data is stored in the same tablespace that is used for the rest
of the SRM application.
` Tablespace for Indices: Type the name of an Oracle tablespace which has been
created to store the spend data table indices for this spend environment. If no
tablespace is specified, the indices are stored in the same tablespace that is used
for the rest of the SRM application.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1787

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Dates
` Report Query Start Date: Type or select the default start date for the Spend
Analysis reports that appear on the Analysis page. The start date should be the
beginning of a time period in this spend environment's reporting calendar.
` Report Query End Date: Type or select the default end date for the Spend
Analysis reports that appear on the Analysis page. The end date should be the end
of a time period in this spend environment's reporting calendar.

Reporting Calendar: The reporting calendar is a master data object. A reference to

the calendar is required in the spend configuration document.
The reporting calendar must cover the whole range of spend dates for all imported
spend data. It is recommended that you define time periods for at least two years in
the future, partly to accommodate forecast dates and partly to avoid having to update
the reporting calendar definition soon after its original definition.
The depth of the reporting calendar should be as detailed as the desired granularity of
the time periods in the spend reports. If quarterly periods are adequate, you can define
two levels: year and quarter. If monthly periods are desired, a third level must be
added to the reporting calendar. Master data conversion supports a change to the
number of levels in the reporting calendar over time, but such a change is not
recommended after the first import. (Mapping to dimensions cannot be changed after
an import.)

Spend Currency: The currency defined in the spend configuration document is used
for labeling only. All imported spend amounts are assumed to be in this currency.
Spend amounts are not converted to this or any other currency.

Term for “Unclassified”: Specify the label that will be displayed for reporting spend
data for any dimension when a valid dimension ID has not been provided for that
dimension.

Related Topics
Spend Environment Configuration
Creating a spend environment configuration
Editing a spend environment configuration
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Actions page
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Dimensions page
Selectivity of date range report parameters
Spend environment backup and recovery

1788 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Actions page

The following provides descriptions for some fields on the Actions page.

Master Data
` Category Source: Select Internal or External categories to be the primary source
of the commodity dimension.

Conversion Action
` Update Date from Last Import: This is the value of the UPDATE_DATE column
from the input spend data that was last imported. The next input data must have
an update date later than this date.
` Statistics-Gathering Sample Size: Enter a percentage (0 to 100) to determine
how much of the spend data will be analyzed after an import to help the database
provide optimum query performance. The higher the percentage, the better the
query performance, but the longer the import action will take.

Fact Load and Remove

` Complete Import if No Invalid IDs Found: Check this box to prevent the import
action from stopping after the spend data is examined for invalid IDs. This setting
only applies to input data with no invalid (unrecognized) dimension IDs. Any invalid
IDs that are found must be resolved before the import action can continue.

` Synonym Map Set: Click the Lookup icon to select a set of synonym maps (0
or 1 map per dimension) to be used to automatically resolve invalid dimension IDs.
A synonym map set is typically defined for each source of spend data to map that
source's nomenclature to the standard used for master data in this application.
` Get Date Format from System Property: Check this box to use the system
property as the source of the default date format for import actions. If this box is
not checked, a string field appears in which the required default date format is to
be entered.
` Decimal Separator Character: Type the character (such as a period) that
separates the integral part of a spend amount from the decimal digits. This is
needed to parse spend amounts in the input data.
` Directory Containing Input File: Type the full path of the directory that contains
the spend data input file. The path must apply to the application server that is
handling the spend import action. If there are multiple application servers, any of
which could be asked to handle the import action, the path must be shared among
them all. If the import action will be assigned to one of the application servers,
which is most likely, this path must apply to the specified server. On Windows, the
path should start with a drive letter and should not end with a backslash.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1789

Spend Environment Management System Administration

` Fact Data Retention Days: Type the age, in days, of the spend data to be
retained when the action to remove old spend data is requested. By default, three
years of data will be retained. The threshold date that is derived from this number
of days will be rounded back to the beginning of the lowest-level time period
containing the date. (Note that no data is removed automatically. This action must
be requested. Also note that the action to remove old spend data is completely
different from the action to remove the spend environment. Removing the spend
environment deletes all spend fact and dimension data, and is typically requested
only to start over from scratch after a trial use of the spend analysis module.)

Related Topics
Creating a spend environment configuration
Editing a spend environment configuration
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Header page
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Dimensions page
Spend environment backup and recovery

1790 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Dimensions page

Dimensions are used to classify spend facts. Dimension data is derived from master
data.
The following provides descriptions for the fields on the Dimensions page.

Master Data Unlimited

Dimension Data Sources Levels Comment

Commodity Category X Choice of Internal (default) or

External
Material
Organization Company
Business Unit X
Vendor Vendor X
Geography Geography X
Location
Plant
Time Reporting Calendar X 1 calendar, specified in spend
config; Calendar has multiple
levels of time periods
Accounts Payable Type Accounts Payable X
Type
Cost Center Cost Center X
Custom 1 Custom 1 X
Custom 2 Custom 2 X
Custom 3 Custom 3 X
Custom 4 Custom 4 X

Note: If there are multiple master data sources for a dimension, the lowest levels of
the sources can be ignored, or omitted, from the dimension data. For example, the
Material master data source can be eliminated from the commodity dimension data. To

omit a dimension source, click the Edit icon for the dimension on the Source tab
and check the Ignored for conversion box in the dialog box.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1791

Spend Environment Management System Administration

The names of the unique ID and label columns for each custom dimension table can be
changed to be more appropriate for the use of that dimension. This is helpful in writing
custom reports.

Related Topics
Creating a spend environment configuration
Editing a spend environment configuration
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Header page
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Actions page
Providing custom attributes of spend data
Spend environment backup and recovery

1792 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Initialize Spend Environment

This section describes how to create an action to initialize the spend environment.

Related Topics
Initializing the spend environment
Spend environment backup and recovery

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1793

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Initializing the spend environment

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Spend Environment Management section of System Administration, select
Initialize Spend Environment from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Initialize Spend Environment List page, click Create.
4 On the Action page, fill in the fields.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Initialize Spend Environment
Spend environment backup and recovery

1794 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Convert Master Data: Update Spend Dimensions

Dimensions are used to classify spend facts and are derived from master data.
This section describes how to convert master data by creating an action to update
spend dimensions.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the Update Spend Dimensions
List page by clicking Spend and Compliance in the navigation bar and then choosing
List Update Spend Dimensions from the Configuration submenu.

Related Topics
Converting master data to dimension data: updating spend dimensions
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Dimensions page
Field help for converting master data: Action page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1795

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Converting master data to dimension data: updating spend

dimensions
Dimensions are used to classify spend facts and are derived from master data. You
convert master data to dimension data by creating an action to update spend
dimensions.
The “conversion” of master data to dimension data is done primarily to change the way
the hierarchical structure of the data is represented on disk. This speeds report
generation, greatly simplifies report writing, and preserves different versions of the
hierarchy.
Multiple master data tables can map to one dimension, and parent relationships in the
master data tables are implemented via foreign keys. Reporting against the master
data tables would be inefficient and complicated. In contrast, there is one table per
dimension. The hierarchy in the dimension table is balanced and flattened. Each record
represents all the branches from a leaf node in the hierarchical tree up to (or down to)
the root, such as from a material up to the most general UNSPSC code. Parent
relationships are represented by column values in the same record. This can be seen by
browsing through the records in a dimension table.
Unrecognized dimension IDs from spend data are, by default, inserted into the
dimension hierarchy. This method would not be practical when dealing with master
data directly.
An effective date range is set for each record in the dimension table to preserve the
hierarchy for a given time period. Historical master data is not preserved in the master
data tables. The effective data ranges enable a report that is executed with a given set
of parameters at one time, to yield the same results when executed with the same set
of parameters at a later date.

Database Maintenance After Master Data Import

If a large volume of master data is imported in preparation for a conversion to
dimension data, it is recommended that each of the database tables corresponding to
the imported objects be analyzed by the DBMS so that its statistics are available to
optimize database access to those tables during the conversion. This should make the
conversion run faster. A “large volume” in this instance is generally more than a
thousand rows and more than 20% of the number of existing table rows.
The gathering of the table statistics is done regularly as part of database maintenance
(typically nightly), but this scheduled operation might not happen in time if the master
data conversion action is started on the same day as the master data import. Contact
your system administrator to perform this statistics-gathering operation.

Replacing the Previous Dimension Hierarchy

The default behavior of the master data conversion action is to preserve the existing
hierarchy of dimension IDs for previously imported spend data. In essence, versions of
the dimension hierarchy are maintained. A property may be set, however, which causes

1796 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

this action to replace the most recent version of the dimension hierarchy with the
current one. This does not replace multiple versions of the hierarchy, just the previous
one. It takes effect for all dimensions. The name of the property is:
analysis.spend.action.conversion.replace_dim_hierarchy

If this property is set to TRUE, the master data conversion will act differently. Normally,
a new record is added to the dimension table when the parent of a dimension ID
changes, with a different effective date range than the old record. With the property
turned on, the old record is essentially overwritten with the new hierarchy, but with no
change to its effective date range. Its primary key is unchanged, so references from the
fact table will now point to the record which represents the new hierarchy for that
dimension ID. When reports are executed, the old spend amounts will roll up in the new
hierarchy.
If the property value is changed back to FALSE, the default behavior of the conversion
is resumed.
Note that replacing the dimension hierarchy will lead to inconsistent spend report
results for those parts of the hierarchy which have changed. Reports run before and
after the hierarchy change will yield different details and totals.

To convert master data to dimension data:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Spend Environment Management section of System Administration, select
Convert Master Data from the drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also update spend dimensions by clicking Spend and Compliance
in the navigation bar and then choosing Create Update Spend Dimensions from the
Configuration submenu.
3 On the Update Spend Dimensions List page, click Create.
4 On the Action page, fill in the fields. For details, see Field help for converting
master data: Action page.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Convert Master Data: Update Spend Dimensions
Field help for converting master data: Action page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1797

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Field help for converting master data: Action page

The following provides descriptions for the fields on the Actions page.

Display Name: This field indicates the system-created name used for the action to
convert master data and update dimensions.
Description: Type a description for the action to convert master data.

Action
` Scheduled Date: Type or select the date and time for the conversion action.
` Replace Dimension Data: Check this box to indicate that the current dimension
data should be replaced for all selected dimensions. This option is checked by
default before the first import is performed, assuming that corrections are being
made to the source master data. After the first import, replacement is not an
option. Changes to master data are represented by dimension data records that are
effective over different date ranges.

Dimensions
Dimensions are used to classify spend facts and are derived from master data. Check
the box for the type of master data you want to convert to dimension data, and type or
enter an effective date for each type.
` Time: The reporting calendar specified in the spend configuration document is
converted to time dimension data during a conversion action. Subsequent changes
to the reporting calendar will be recognized only after another conversion action
including the time dimension. The reporting calendar specified in the spend
configuration document can be changed, and this would be the source of time
period master data for the next conversion of the time dimension, but this is not
recommended. It is recommended that you edit the original reporting calendar
rather than creating a new one.
` Commodity
` Organization
` Vendor
` Geography
` Accounts Payable Type
` Cost Center
` Custom 1-4: Up to four custom dimensions can be used. Each dimension gets its
master data from a corresponding custom master data object.
The master data can be loaded via CSV import. The column headers of a CSV
import file are shown below. The value of PARENT is either null, to represent an
entry at the top level, or the EXTERNAL_ID of the parent entry.

1798 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

DISPLAY_NAME
DOCUMENT_DESCRIPTION
EXTERNAL_ID
PARENT
Extensions are supported. Custom reports can be written to include these extended
attributes and/or collections of attributes.

Effective Date
After the first import, a date field will appear to the right of each dimension name. This
date is applied to the effective date range of dimension data when differences are found
between the new and old master data. By default, this date is one day after the
UPDATE_DATE in the spend data input file that was last imported. It can be changed,
but it cannot be changed to a date which is earlier than the latest effective end date of
all records in that dimension. (The latest effective end date would have been set for
changed dimension data from a previous conversion.)
When a master data object is moved from one part of the hierarchy to another, a new
dimension record is created for it with the same dimension ID. The old record is given
an effective end date one day before the displayed date. The new record is assigned
this effective beginning date. Imported spend data with a spend date after this date are
associated with the new dimension record.
When a new master data object is added, the newly created dimension record is not
given this effective beginning date, but is instead made effective for all date ranges.
This is done to ensure that new spend data that references this new dimension ID will
not become unclassified, even if some spend dates are before the displayed effective
date.
When a master data object is inactivated, the dimension record with the corresponding
dimension ID is not given an effective end date. The dimension ID remains effective in
case there are future imports which include references to this ID. It can take some time
for the use of the ID in other enterprise systems to be phased out. A side effect of this
policy is that obsolete dimension IDs might appear in dimension reference pickers.
These pickers are used in some spend reports and in the resolution of unrecognized
dimension IDs.

Related Topics
Convert Master Data: Update Spend Dimensions
Converting master data to dimension data: updating spend dimensions

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1799

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Import Spend Data

Spend import actions append data to the fact table.
Spend data includes references to master data unique IDs (for example, Vendor
EXTERNAL_ID). To minimize the amount of spend that cannot be classified, it is
recommended you update the master data and convert it to dimension data before
each import. For details, see Converting master data to dimension data: updating
spend dimensions. If there have been no master data changes, converting the
master data is unnecessary.
The customer can provide the spend data to be imported in any of the following ways:
` Insert the data direction into the SRM schema’s staging table,
FCI_SA_FACT_STAGExxx, when extracting it from other Oracle schema or from
another data source.
` Load the data via Oracle’s SQL *Loader from a text file.
` Specify that the import action should load the data from a text file.
Note: For loading a large volume of spend data from a text file, Oracle’s SQL
*Loader will be faster than the import action’s file loading.

This section describes how to import spend data.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the Import Spend Data List page
by clicking Spend and Compliance in the navigation bar and then choosing List Import
Spend Data from the Configuration submenu.

Related Topics
Importing spend data
Duplicating a spend import action document
Resolving unrecognized dimension references (invalid IDs) in spend data
Spend data import file format
Spend date format in imported spend data
Providing custom attributes of spend data

1800 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Importing spend data

You import spend data by creating an action to update spend facts. Spend import
actions append data to the fact table.

To import spend data:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Spend Environment Management section of System Administration, select
Import Spend Data from the drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also import spend data by clicking Spend and Compliance in the
navigation bar and then choosing Create Import Spend Data from the
Configuration submenu.
3 On the Import Spend Data List page, click Create.
4 On the Action page, fill in the fields for basic information and those under Action,
Completion/Review, Spend Input File, and Import Processing.
5 Click the Synonyms tab.
6 Click Add to add a synonym.
7 In the dialog box, fill in the fields and click the Save button in the toolbar.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Note: It is strongly recommended that you back up your enterprise’s spend database
objects, tables and indexes after each spend fact import action.

Related Topics
Import Spend Data
Duplicating a spend import action document
Resolving unrecognized dimension references (invalid IDs) in spend data
Spend data import file format
Spend date format in imported spend data
Providing custom attributes of spend data

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1801

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Duplicating a spend import action document

When many options must be set on a spend import action document, it can be helpful
to create a new action document by duplicating an existing document. Be careful when
selecting an action document from the List page for the purpose of duplicating it. Some
action documents are suitable for duplication and some are not.
It is not unusual for two action documents to be created during one spend data file
import. This can occur when unrecognized dimension IDs are resolved with user
interaction. One document represents the action that found the IDs and a later one
represents the action that applied the resolutions. Only the first document is suitable
for duplication. When unrecognized dimension IDs are found by the first action, it will
stop at that point by default. After any manual resolution of unrecognized IDs is
specified, click the Actions button and select Apply Resolutions on the resolution UI
page to create a second import action document based on the first one.
The second action picks up from where the first one left off. The second action does not
reload the input file, as the data has already been loaded into a staging table, so the
document’s checkbox to load the spend data from an input file is unchecked. If the user
selects the second action document to duplicate for the purpose of starting a new
import, and does not re-check this box, the system will reread the previously loaded
data rather than loading a new input file. This will cause an error because the
UPDATE_DATE will not be later than the previous update date.
The first and second action documents are easily distinguished on the List page. The
List page shows a base action name for the second action. This base action name is the
display name of the first action document. The first action document, with no base
action name, is the one that is more suited for duplication.

Related Topics
Import Spend Data
Importing spend data
Resolving unrecognized dimension references (invalid IDs) in spend data
Spend data import file format
Spend date format in imported spend data
Providing custom attributes of spend data

1802 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Resolving unrecognized dimension references (invalid IDs) in

spend data
By default, an import action will stop automatically if an unrecognized (“invalid”)
dimension ID is found in the spend data. An invalid ID is one that is not in the
dimension tables or in the set of synonym maps specified for the import. You can
resolve such a reference by doing any of the following:
` Map the ID to a valid dimension ID.
` Treat the ID as unclassified (anonymous).
` Treat the ID as unclassified, but make the new ID show up in a report drill-down
under the Unclassified row.
` Discard the spend for records with this new ID.

Each of these decisions can apply to the current import only or to all future imports. If
you apply the decision to all future imports, it is added to the appropriate synonym
maps. After this action, the import can be resumed with the new mapping decisions in
place.

Related Topics
Import Spend Data
Importing spend data
Duplicating a spend import action document
Spend data import file format
Spend date format in imported spend data
Providing custom attributes of spend data

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1803

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Spend data import file format

The following table provides the column descriptions for spend data that will be
imported as a file. This file is typically structured by placing the column headers
(CONTEXT_SUFFIX, UPDATE_DATE, etc.) in the first row and the spend data records
starting in row 2. In addition to the first two batch identification columns, each data
record has one spend amount, one spend date, optional dimension IDs to classify the
spend, and optional attributes to describe the source of the data in more detail.
The column values in each row (including the header row) must be separated with
either tabs or commas. The tab separator is recommended, and this is the default
setting in the import action document, which initiates an import. The tab character is
not expected to be contained in any column value.
Commas, on the other hand, are often found in some column values, so each value in
these columns must be surrounded by double or single quotes. (The Trim Quotes field
in the import action document provides the choice of quote character, double quote
being the default for comma-separated values.) If the quote character itself can appear
in the column value, it must be distinguished from the end-of-value delimiter by being
doubled. For example, the following value in parentheses (Super “Wow” Enterprises,
Inc.) would have to be transformed to (“Super “”Wow”” Enterprises, Inc.”) in order to
be processed correctly when the double quote is used.
If the ASCII character set is used for all the column values, the input file can contain 1
byte per character. If some non-ASCII characters are included, 1 byte per character is
still supported if all these characters happen to be the same as the corresponding
Unicode character, with zero-padding. Characters that need multiple bytes to be
properly represented must be contained in a Unicode text file.

Target
Data Max
Column Name Reqd Type Chars Comment

CONTEXT_SUFFIX X Integer Same for each row; get from

spend config; leading zeros OK.
UPDATE_DATE X Date Same for each row; Must be later
than in previous import.
COMMODITY_ID String 64 These are dimension IDs, the
unique values defined in master
data. Synonyms (aliases) may be
used instead of dimension IDs if
they have been added to a
synonym-to-dimension-ID map.
VENDOR_ID String 64
ORGANIZATION_ID String 64

1804 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Target
Data Max
Column Name Reqd Type Chars Comment

GEOGRAPHY_ID String 64
AP_TYPE_ID String 64
COST_CENTER_ID String 64
CUSTOM1_ID String 64
CUSTOM2_ID String 64
CUSTOM3_ID String 64
CUSTOM4_ID String 64
SPEND X Decimal Spend amount in currency
defined in spend config. This is
not converted during import.
SPEND_TYPE String ACTUAL (default), PLANNED, or
FORECAST
SPEND_DATE X Date Mapped to period in time
dimension
TRANSACTION_DATE Date Date data changed on customer
system; defaults to
UPDATE_DATE if not provided
AGREEMENT_ID String 32 Agreement unique doc name
AGREEMENT_LINE_ITEM Integer Not required, even when
AGREEMENT_ID is provided
SOURCE_DOC_NUMBER String 50 For example, PO number,
Invoice number
SOURCE_DOC_LINE_ITEM String 20
ITEM_ID String 50 Also called material or part
number
ITEM_DESCRIPTION String 50
VENDOR_ITEM_ID String 50
MANUFACTURER_ITEM_ID String 50
ITEM_QUANTITY Decimal
ITEM_QUANTITY_UNIT String 10
UNIT_PRICE Decimal

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1805

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Target
Data Max
Column Name Reqd Type Chars Comment

UNIT_PRICE_CURRENCY String 3
AGREEMENT_PRICE Decimal Total item price; used to update
agreement
AGREEMENT_PRICE_CURRENCY String 3
GL_ACCOUNT_NUMBER String 50
PAYMENT_TERMS String 40
DELIVERY_TERMS String 40
SHIP_TO_LOCATION String 40
SHIP_FROM_LOCATION String 40
MISC_STRING_1 String 40 Available for customer-specific
details
MISC_STRING_2 String 40
MISC_STRING_3 String 40
MISC_NUMBER_1 Decimal
MISC_NUMBER_2 Decimal
MISC_DATE Date

Please note the following:

` All dates must be in the format specified in the import action document (which
defaults from the date format specified in the spend configuration document).
` The COMMODITY_ID should be provided even if it is the same as the ITEM_ID. It is
used to classify the spend in the commodity dimension.

Input File Columns Related to Agreement Update

The fields from SPEND to the bottom of the list are copied to the detail spend fact table.
Most of these fields are for information only, available for reports that associate the
spend data with these extra attributes.
Some of these fields are used to update agreements, assisting in compliance
measurement. They are as follows:
` SPEND_TYPE
` SPEND_DATE

1806 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

` AGREEMENT_ID
` AGREEMENT_LINE_ITEM
` ITEM_QUANTITY
` ITEM_QUANTITY_UNIT
` UNIT_PRICE
` UNIT_PRICE_CURRENCY
` AGREEMENT_PRICE
` AGREEMENT_PRICE_CURRENCY
The existence of an AGREEMENT_ID triggers an update of the identified agreement with
the spend data during the import action. Agreement updates can lead to the generation
of alerts and email notifications related to rebates and penalties. The AGREEMENT_ID
must be the unique document name of a master agreement or sub-agreement. The
AGREEMENT_LINE_ITEM is optional, but if it is provided, the agreement can be updated
to the line item level, which allows more comprehensive compliance measurement.
The AGREEMENT_PRICE and AGREEMENT_PRICE_CURRENCY are required if the
AGREEMENT_ID is set. The currency should be the same as the currency used in the
agreement, which could be different than the currency used for the spend analysis
environment for the context. The amount in the SPEND field must be in the latter
currency.
If the AGREEMENT_LINE_ITEM is provided, ITEM_QUANTITY, ITEM_QUANTITY_UNIT,
UNIT_PRICE and UNIT_PRICE_CURRENCY are required. The currency should be the
same as the currency used in the agreement. The unit of measure should be the same
unit as that which is used in the agreement line item quantity.
If these rules are not followed, the spend import will log the invalid agreement data and
stop with a failure status.

Order of Columns in Input File

The import action's file loader supports a variable ordering of the columns and the
omission of unused, optional columns. This support means that the column header row
is required and each column header must be one of the well-known terms listed in the
table above (case-insensitive). The well-known column headers will be used to interpret
the values from the subsequent data records.

Increasing the benefit of spend data

You can increase the benefit of the spend data by doing the following.
` Make the dimension ID references as specific as possible.
The columns labeled COMMODITY_ID through CUSTOM4_ID are references to the
dimension IDs. Each dimension has its own hierarchy, including the number of
levels. The lover the level of the dimension ID, the more detail can be provided in

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1807

Spend Environment Management System Administration

spend reports. All detail information is automatically rolled up for reporting at the
higher levels.
` Define the desired time periods in a reporting calendar before the first import.
Once an import has completed, the processed data cannot be changed. Therefore,
time periods should be predefined. SPEND_DATE is mapped to a time period in the
calendar. If, for example, quarterly periods are used for one import, the
SPEND_DATE is mapped to the appropriate quarter. If monthly periods are added
later, subsequent imports will map each SPEND_DATE to the appropriate month.
The data imported before this change will not be updated to map to a month rather
than a quarter.

Related Topics
Import Spend Data
Importing spend data
Duplicating a spend import action document
Resolving unrecognized dimension references (invalid IDs) in spend data
Spend date format in imported spend data
Providing custom attributes of spend data

1808 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Spend date format in imported spend data

Every record in the file that is read during a spend import action has at least one date
value (the spend date) and possibly others. In previous releases, date values had to be
in the format of dd-MMM-yyyy, such as 01-Jan-2004. The date format can now be
specified in the import action document. The import action document gets a default
date format from the spend configuration document. In turn, the spend configuration
document gets a default date format from the system property
system.importer.csv.date_format. (From the property name, it can be inferred that
the date format used by the spend importer can be made compatible with the date
format used by the SRM master data importer.) If this property is not provided, then
the default format of MM/dd/yyyy is used as the default property value.
On the Action tab of the spend configuration document, the Get Date Format from
System Property checkbox indicates whether or not to use the system property as the
source of the default date format for import actions. If this box is not checked, a string
field appears in which the required default date format is to be entered.
Any database that is upgraded to this release will have the date format of
dd-MMM-yyyy entered in the spend configuration document, so that no changes are
required in spend data generation.
The value of the system.importer.csv.date_format property and the value of the
date format field in the spend configuration are flexible. They use the same format
syntax. The year, month, and day parts must be included, but their order and the
separators between them are arbitrary. The table below describes the most common
date part patterns.

Date Part Pattern Value Supported Comment

dd 1- or 2-digit day
MM 1- or 2-digit month Numeric, e.g. 2, 03, 11
MMM 3-character or more month Text, e.g. “Jul”, “July”
yy 2- or 4-digit year
yyyy 4-digit year

The day pattern uses lower case “d”. The month pattern uses upper-case “M”. (A lower
case “m” represents minutes.) The year pattern uses lower case “y”.
2-digit years (“yy”) from 70 to 99 will be put in the 1900s (the 20th century). Values
from 00-69 will be put in the 21st century.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1809

Spend Environment Management System Administration

A date part of “y” is not recommended. A one-digit year such as “3” will not be
interpreted with this pattern as 2003, but as 3 A.D. (2 millennia ago).

Example Date Pattern One of Legal Values

dd.MM.yyyy 1.03.2003
MM/dd/yyyy 07/29/1999
dd-MMM-yy 01-Jan-2004
dd MMM, yyyy 30 September, 2003
yyyyMMdd 20040331

When no delimiters are used between date parts in the date pattern, such as for
yyyyMMdd, the number of digits in the date values must match the number of letters in
the pattern. For example, this pattern could not handle a 1-digit month.

Related Topics
Import Spend Data
Importing spend data
Duplicating a spend import action document
Resolving unrecognized dimension references (invalid IDs) in spend data
Spend data import file format
Providing custom attributes of spend data

1810 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Remove Spend Data

The action to remove old, obsolete spend data determines which records to remove
from the fact tables, primarily by comparing their spend dates to the Threshold Spend
Date specified on the Action page. Records with spend dates before the threshold will
be removed. You may need to set additional rules before the records can be removed.
Detailed spend data may contain references to agreements. This data is used to
measure agreement compliance. Such spend data must be retained as long as the
referenced agreements are retained in the production system. Only agreements that
have been canceled or deleted from the production system may have their associated
spend data removed.

This section describes how to create an action to remove spend data.

Related Topics
Removing spend data

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1811

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Removing spend data

The action to remove old, obsolete spend data determines which records to remove
from the fact tables, primarily by comparing their spend dates to the Threshold Spend
Date specified on the Action page. Records with spend dates before the threshold will
be removed. You may need to set additional rules before the records can be removed.
Detailed spend data may contain references to agreements. This data is used to
measure agreement compliance. Such spend data must be retained as long as the
referenced agreements are retained in the production system. Only agreements that
have been canceled or deleted from the production system may have their associated
spend data removed.

To remove spend data:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Spend Environment Management section of System Administration, select
Remove Spend Data from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Remove Old Spend Data List page, click Create.
4 On the Action page, fill in the fields.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Remove Spend Data

1812 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Remove Spend Environment

The action to remove a spend analysis environment is not expected to be used, except
perhaps after a trial implementation phase, which would then be followed by the real
implementation. Due to agreement spend data retention requirements, a spend
analysis environment may not be removed if any of the detailed spend data contains
agreement IDs. Therefore, a trial implementation of the spend analysis environment on
a production system should not use spend data that includes agreement IDs.
This section describes how to create an action to remove the spend environment.

Note: This action deletes all spend analysis data from the system. Be sure that you want
to do this before creating this action. Only the spend configuration document is retained,
in anticipation of a new spend environment being initialized.

Related Topics
Removing the spend environment

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1813

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Removing the spend environment

The action to remove a spend analysis environment is not expected to be used, except
perhaps after a trial implementation phase, which would then be followed by the real
implementation. Due to agreement spend data retention requirements, a spend
analysis environment may not be removed if any of the detailed spend data contains
agreement IDs. Therefore, a trial implementation of the spend analysis environment on
a production system should not use spend data that includes agreement IDs.

Note: This action deletes all spend analysis data from the system. Be sure that you want
to do this before creating this action.

To remove the spend environment:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Spend Environment Management section of System Administration, select
Remove Spend Environment from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Remove Spend Environment List page, click Create.
4 On the Action page, fill in the fields.
5 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Remove Spend Environment

1814 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Dimension ID Synonym Maps

During the import of spend data, the ID that classifies the spend amount for each
dimension in each input record is examined to see if it is found in the appropriate
dimension table. If a source of spend data exists that uses a set of IDs for one
dimension that is different from the set of IDs stored in master data for that dimension,
the spend classification performed during the import will be unable to classify the spend
amounts. The inconsistent IDs are termed “invalid” or “unrecognized”.
For example, if the commodity dimension IDs come from external category master data
containing UNSPSC codes, and some spend data contains commodity IDs that are not
UNSPSC codes, this spend will be unclassified.
Maps can be defined to substitute unrecognized IDs used by a source of spend data to
the “valid” IDs stored in the dimension tables. A map is created for one dimension. A
map is a collection of synonyms, each of which contains an unrecognized ID and,
typically, the valid ID for which it will be substituted. Many maps can be created for one
dimension.
A set of maps can also be defined. A map set contains multiple maps, with zero or one
map per dimension. Map sets are useful when specifying the maps to use during an
import action. For details and procedures, see Dimension ID Synonym Map Sets.

This section describes how to create, edit, and import a dimension ID synonym map.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the Dimension ID Synonym Maps
List page by clicking Spend and Compliance in the navigation bar and then choosing
List Dimension ID Synonym Maps from the Configuration submenu.

Related Topics
Creating a dimension ID synonym map
Editing a dimension ID synonym map
Importing a dimension ID synonym map

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1815

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Creating a dimension ID synonym map

You can create a synonym map manually, or import one using the standard import tool.
For details, see Importing a dimension ID synonym map.

To create a synonym map:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Spend Environment Management section of System Administration, select
Dimension ID Synonym Maps from the drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also create a dimension ID synonym map by clicking Spend and
Compliance in the navigation bar and then choosing Create Dimension ID Synonym
Maps from the Configuration submenu.
3 On the Dimension ID Synonym Maps List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields.
5 Click the Synonyms tab.
6 Click Add to add a synonym.
7 In the dialog box, fill in the fields and click OK.
8 Click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Dimension ID Synonym Maps
Editing a dimension ID synonym map
Importing a dimension ID synonym map

1816 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Editing a dimension ID synonym map

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Spend Environment Management section of System Administration, select
Dimension ID Synonym Maps from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Dimension ID Synonym Maps List page, do one of the following:
■ From the drop-down list, select Selected Dimension ID Synonym Maps, search
for the map to edit, and click the map.
■ From the drop-down list, select All Dimension ID Synonym Maps and click the
map to edit.
4 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Synonyms tab.

7 Click the Edit icon to edit a synonym.

8 In the dialog box, edit any fields and click OK.
9 On the Synonyms page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Dimension ID Synonym Maps
Creating a dimension ID synonym map
Importing a dimension ID synonym map

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1817

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Importing a dimension ID synonym map

Large numbers of synonyms can be imported from a CSV file using the standard import
tool. For details, see Importing data from a CSV file.
Please note the following:
` One map can have multiple entries for a synonym name, but the entries must have
effective date ranges that do not overlap. For example, one version of a synonym
might be effective from 1990 through 2004, while another synonym with the same
name might be effective from the beginning of 2005 through 2010.
` When data for a synonym map is imported and a map of the same name already
exists in the database, the synonym entry in the imported file replaces the existing
entry. For each unique synonym in a map, any synonyms of that name in the
existing map are deleted. The entries in the imported map always take precedence.
However, any synonym in the existing map with a name that is not found in the
imported map will be retained. Therefore, an imported map cannot delete an entry
in the synonym map, but it can set the effective date range of that synonym map
so that it is no longer used to resolve unrecognized dimension IDs.

1818 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Synonym Map Import File Format

The following table provides the column descriptions for a synonym map that will be
imported as a CSV file.

Target
Data Max
Column Name Reqd Type Chars Comment

DISPLAY_NAME X String 40 Name of map, unique within the

specified dimension
DIMENSION_TYPE X Enum One of:
COMMODITY
VENDOR
GEOGRAPHY
ORGANIZATION
ACCOUNTS_PAYABLE
COST_CENTER
CUSTOM1
CUSTOM2
CUSTOM3
CUSTOM4
DOCUMENT_DESCRIPTION String 256 Description of map
There is one row per synonym. Previous columns apply to the map as a whole; their values should
be the same for each synonym row in the map. The following columns identify one synonym.
EffectiveDateStart X Date Beginning of effective date range
DD-MMM-YYYY
use 01-Jan-1970 for beginning of
time
EffectiveDateEnd X Date End of effective date range
DD-MMM-YYYY
Use 31-Dec-2035 for end of time
Synonym X String 64 ID which is not from master data
SynonymLabel String 50 Meaningful description for synonym

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1819

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Target
Data Max
Column Name Reqd Type Chars Comment

MappedExternalId1 String -- Map to this valid dimension ID from

master data
MappedExternalLabel String -- Meaningful description for
MappedExternalId; just for
documentation, not stored in
database
Anonymous1 Boolean Map to Unclassified, with no
drill-down to Synonym in report;
Spend will appear as “Other” under
Unclassified spend.TRUE or empty
Dropped1 Boolean Discard spend record; TRUE or
empty

Note: MappedExternalId, Anonymous, and Dropped are mutually exclusive. Only one
of these options may be specified. If you specify none of these options, the synonym is
mapped to Unclassified and a drill-down from Unclassified spend will display this
synonym in a report.

Related Topics
Dimension ID Synonym Maps
Creating a dimension ID synonym map
Editing a dimension ID synonym map

1820 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Dimension ID Synonym Map Sets

During the import of spend data, the ID that classifies the spend amount for each
dimension in each input record is examined to see if it is found in the appropriate
dimension table. If a source of spend data exists that uses a set of IDs for one
dimension that is different from the set of IDs stored in master data for that dimension,
the spend classification performed during the import will be unable to classify the spend
amounts. The inconsistent IDs are termed “invalid” or “unrecognized”.
For example, if the commodity dimension IDs come from external category master data
containing UNSPSC codes, and some spend data contains commodity IDs that are not
UNSPSC codes, this spend will be unclassified.
Maps can be defined to substitute unrecognized IDs used by a source of spend data to
the “valid” IDs stored in the dimension tables. A map is created for one dimension. A
map is a collection of synonyms, each of which contains an unrecognized ID and,
typically, the valid ID for which it will be substituted. Many maps can be created for one
dimension.
A set of maps can also be defined. A map set contains multiple maps, with zero or one
map per dimension. Map sets are useful when specifying the maps to use during an
import action.

This section describes how to create, edit, and import a dimension ID synonym map
set.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the Dimension ID Synonym Map
Sets List page by clicking Spend and Compliance in the navigation bar and then
choosing List Dimension ID Synonym Map Sets from the Configuration submenu.

Related Topics
Creating a dimension ID synonym map set
Editing a dimension ID synonym map set
Importing a dimension ID synonym map set

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1821

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Creating a dimension ID synonym map set

You can create a synonym map set manually, or import one using the standard import
tool. For details, see Importing a dimension ID synonym map set.

To create a synonym map set:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Spend Environment Management section of System Administration, select
Dimension ID Synonym Map Sets from the drop-down list and click OK.
Note: You can also create a dimension ID synonym map set by clicking Spend and
Compliance in the navigation bar and then choosing Create Dimension ID Synonym
Map Sets from the Configuration submenu.
3 On the Dimension ID Synonym Map Sets List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields.
5 Click the Synonym Maps tab.
6 Click Add to add a synonym map.
7 In the dialog box, fill in the fields and click the Save button in the toolbar.
8 On the Synonym Maps tab, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Dimension ID Synonym Map Sets
Editing a dimension ID synonym map set
Importing a dimension ID synonym map set

1822 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Editing a dimension ID synonym map set

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Spend Environment Management section of System Administration, select
Dimension ID Synonym Maps from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Dimension ID Synonym Map Sets List page, click the map set to edit.
4 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Edit any fields.
6 Click the Synonym Maps tab.

7 Click the Edit icon to edit a synonym map.

8 In the dialog box, edit any fields and click the Save button in the toolbar.
9 On the Synonym Maps page, click the Save button in the toolbar.

Related Topics
Dimension ID Synonym Map Sets
Creating a dimension ID synonym map set
Importing a dimension ID synonym map set

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1823

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Importing a dimension ID synonym map set

Although it is easy to create a synonym map set manually in the user interface, you can
also import one from a CSV file using the standard import tool. For details, see
Importing data from a CSV file.

Synonym Map Set Import File Format

The following table provides the column descriptions for a synonym map that will be
imported as a CSV file.

Target
Data Max
Column Name Reqd Type Chars Comment

DISPLAY_NAME X String 40 Unique name of map set

There is one row per map in a map set. The previous column applies to the map set as a whole; its
value should be the same for each map row in the map set. The following columns identify one
map.
DIMENSION_TYPE X Enum Only one map per dimension is
permitted in a map set.(See map
columns for legal values.)
DOCUMENT_DESCRIPTION String 256 Description of map set
MAP_DISPLAY_NAME X String 40 Display name of synonym map

Related Topics
Dimension ID Synonym Map Sets
Creating a dimension ID synonym map set
Editing a dimension ID synonym map set

1824 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Reporting Considerations
There are some topics to consider when determining the desired set of spend reports to
provide.
Reports can include spend data and any associated attributes from standard objects in
the database. They can also include custom attributes from a variety of sources.
Providing custom attributes of spend data presents typical alternatives for storing
values for these custom attributes.
Some spend reports are extra sensitive to the ubiquitous date range parameters. The
reporting calendar being used for the spend environment is a factor in determining
what the date range should be and the level of detail provided by reports which display
data grouped by time period. This is discussed in Selectivity of date range report
parameters.

This section describes the reporting considerations for spend analysis.

Related Topics
Selectivity of date range report parameters
Providing custom attributes of spend data

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1825

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Selectivity of date range report parameters

The reporting calendar specified in the spend configuration document contains a
hierarchy of time periods. The top level almost always represents years. Lower levels
typically represent quarters and then months, though the number of levels and what is
represented at each level is arbitrary. The beginning and ending dates for each time
period are stored in the time dimension table during the conversion of master data to
dimension data. During an import of spend data, each input record's spend date is
associated with a lowest-level time period, based on the beginning and ending dates for
the period.

Filtering by Time Period

Virtually all spend reports have date range parameters. Most reports do not present
data by time period but by some combination of other dimensions. However, the spend
data for these reports is still filtered by selecting associated time periods at the lowest
level. The beginning and ending dates of the time periods must be completely
encompassed by the date range in order to be selected.
For example, for a reporting calendar with months at the lowest level, the date range
parameters of 07/01/2004 to 12/31/2004 will encompass six months, July through
December. However, a date range of 07/15/2004 to 08/15/2004 will return no data
because this range does not include even one full month, from beginning to end. It
includes two incomplete months.
Some reports do present data by time period. The standard “Over Time” reports (the
Spend by Commodity Over Time report is one example) are filtered by the
highest-level time period, which typically represents years. Spend totals by year are
presented. More detailed data for each year can be seen by drilling down through one
year to quarters and then from a quarter to the months in that quarter.
If the date range parameters of these “Over Time” reports do not encompass the
beginning and end dates of at least one year, no data is displayed. It is not unusual to
specify default date range parameters in the spend configuration document which
represent the last four quarters, a “rolling” year. (The range is updated when a new
quarter starts.) Although the date range might represent a year, it will not encompass
the beginning and ending date of any year time period unless the last four quarters
happen to coincide with all four quarters which compose one year (which would only
happen one quarter out of four).

Changing the Time Level

There are two ways to create reports that display data by top-level time period to
display results. One is to manually change the date range of the report to encompass
one or more years from the reporting calender. However, this method would be
tedious.
Another method is to direct the report to skip the top level of years and go directly to
the second or third level, which has date ranges that are encompassed by the date

1826 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

range parameters. The directive to specify a time level is named dimLevelTime. It can
be added as a URL parameter in the Analysis page setup for each report to be affected.
The form of the URL parameter is:
&dimLevelTime=2
The URLs for standard reports are not editable in production mode, so new, custom
report items must be created for each of the reports to be affected. Then the
corresponding standard report items must be hidden.

Note: It is possible to create arbitrary date ranges by writing a report which looks at
the detail fact table rather than the primary fact table. (Virtually all standard reports look
at the primary fact table, which has aggregate data.) The detail fact table has one record
for each record which is imported, so the original spend date for each record is available
and can be filtered. However, performance may be affected when the larger detail fact
table is used.

Related Topics
Reporting Considerations
Providing custom attributes of spend data
Spend by Commodity Over Time report
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Header page

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1827

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Providing custom attributes of spend data

Spend data in reports can be grouped by any of the standard dimension identifiers
(Commodity ID, Cost Center ID, etc.) and by any attributes associated with the master
data objects that are the sources of the dimension data. These attributes can be fields
in the standard master data (e.g., Minority-owned business indicator) or fields defined
in extensions to the source master data.
Spend data in reports can also be grouped by custom dimension identifiers and custom
attributes. The following are some options for supporting custom attributes of spend
data.
1 If an attribute is associated with one of the master data objects that are the source
of dimension data, add that attribute to an extension definition. For example, a
direct/indirect spend attribute might be associated with an internal category or a
material, which are the two master data sources of the commodity dimension.
With this option, the spend data being imported does not have a field that
designates the value of the attribute. The value is derived from the dimension ID
(like an internal category ID) and is available at reporting time by joining from the
dimension table back to the master data's extension table.
2 Use one of the miscellaneous fields in the input spend data to store an attribute
value. These values end up in the detailed fact table, which has one record for each
input data record. This table can be accessed by reports. (Most standard reports
access the primary fact table, which has the spend data in a more aggregated, or
rolled-up, form.)
3 Use a custom dimension to classify the spend data. The attribute can be loaded as
pseudo-master data, with a unique ID, a label (display name), a description, and a
parent reference. The unique ID would be entered for that custom dimension in the
input spend data record.
This option allows a hierarchical structure of the classification. It is usually reserved
for custom objects, which can in turn have attributes that are defined in an
extension definition. This might be excessive for many types of custom
classification.
One advantage of a custom dimension is that the first custom dimension (out of four)
has standard reports available for it. (The resource IDs for the names of the reports
and queries should be redefined to say something other than “Spend by Custom 1",
etc.) The other options to support random attributes require custom reports.

Related Topics
Reporting Considerations
Spend data import file format
Import Spend Data
Field help for Spend Analysis Configuration Dimensions page

1828 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Spend environment backup and recovery

The spend fact tables, two per context, have names that begin with FCI_SA_FACT. The
fact tables are populated using Oracle’s direct load method. This method does not
produce a change log. The dimension tables, one set per enterprise, have names that
begin with FCI_SA_DIM. Changes to the dimension tables are logged.
It is strongly recommended that you do a backup of your enterprise’s spend database
objects, tables, and indexes after each spend fact import action, which appends data to
the fact table. A minor variation on this is to back up the tables only and recreate the
indexes after a restoration of the tables.
An alternative backup procedure is to back up your enterprise’s spend database objects
less frequently. However, you should be prepared to recover data added by subsequent
conversions of master data to dimension data (which update tables) and spend fact
import actions. Changes to the dimension tables are logged, so a normal roll-forward
can be done from their most recent backup. The spend fact table, however, must be
updated by re-processing all the spend fact import actions since the most recent
backup. This requires that the imported spend fact tables be backed up, which is
recommended in any case.
To perform this alternative backup procedure for an enterprise, follow these high-level
steps:
1 Restore the spend fact table to the most recent backup.
2 Restore the dimension tables to the most recent backup data.
3 Roll forward the logged changes to the dimension tables.
4 Recreate the indices for the dimension tables, if they were not included in the
backup.
5 Recreate the indices for the spend fact tables, if they were not included in the
backup.
6 Repeat each spend fact import action since the most recent backup, in the same
order that they were originally performed.

Related Topics
Spend Environment Configuration
Initialize Spend Environment
Convert Master Data: Update Spend Dimensions
Import Spend Data
Remove Spend Data
Remove Spend Environment
Dimension ID Synonym Maps
Dimension ID Synonym Map Sets

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1829

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Additional Assistance

` To use Online Help Contents, Index, and Search, click the Panel icon in the
toolbar.Import and Export Tools
This section describes options for using import and export tools.

Related Topics
Import Data
Export Data

1830 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Import Data

You can use CSV files to import master data into Frictionless® SRM. See your
administrator for details about formatting CSV files for import.

This section describes how to import data into Frictionless SRM and view the results of
the data import. You also use the Import Data function to install language packs and
agreements.

Note: As well as from the Setup page, you can access the Data Import List page by
clicking Vendor Management in the navigation bar and then choosing Import Data
from the Performance submenu.

Related Topics
Importing data from a CSV file
Viewing imported data results
Installing language packs
Importing agreements
Creating an export package
Exporting objects for migration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1831

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Importing data from a CSV file

You can use CSV files to import master data into Frictionless® SRM. See your
administrator for details about formatting CSV files for import.

Importing value list values from a CSV file

Value list values present a special case with a number of guidelines to be followed.
To update an existing object, you must provide the object's display name in the CSV
file. If you do not specifiy an existing display name, a new object will be created in the
database. If the object already exists, this can cause database constraint violations.
The importer handles display names and display name IDs as follows:
` If both a display name and and a display name ID are present in the CSV file, the
object display name is the display name and a new resource is created or an
existing resource is updated so that the display name of the object matches the
default value of the resource.
` If only a display name is present in the CSV file, the object display name is the
display name and a new resource will be created having a default value equal to the
specified display name.
` If no display name is present in the CSV file, the display name will be set to the
default value of the existing resource.

To import data from a CSV file:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Import and Export Tools section of System Administration, select Import
Data from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Data Import List page, click Create.
Note: You can also access the Data Import List page by clicking Vendor
Management in the navigation bar and then choosing Import Data from the
Performance submenu.
4 Follow the prompts in the wizard to import the file.

Related Topics
Import Data
Viewing imported data results
Installing language packs
Importing agreements
Creating an export package
Exporting objects for migration

1832 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Viewing imported data results

You can use CSV files to import master data into Frictionless® SRM. See your
administrator for details about formatting CSV files for import.

To view the results of a data import:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Import and Export Tools section of System Administration, select Import
Data from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Data Import List page, click the file for which to view import results.
Note: You can also access the Data Import List page by clicking Vendor
Management in the navigation bar and then choosing Import Data from the
Performance submenu.
4 On the File Import page, review the import results.

Related Topics
Import Data
Importing data from a CSV file
Installing language packs
Importing agreements
Creating an export package
Exporting objects for migration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1833

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Installing language packs

You import langauge packs by using the DB Import tool outside the application.

Note: The Import Data function in Frictionless SRM cannot be used to install language
packs.

To install language packs using the DB Import tool:

1 Copy the desired version of the language jar(s) to /fci/lib.
2 From a command prompt, go to the /bin directory and type “dbimport” to
start the dbimport utility.
3 Click the Setup tab.

4 On the Setup tab, click the Lookup icon to select the fci<language name>.jar
file.
5 Navigate to the /i18n/<language> directory, and select the following
script:
install_language.xml

6 On the Setup tab, click the Lookup icon for Context and select the System
Context.
7 Enter a User Name and Password. Use “system” for the user name along with the
appropriate password.
8 Click Run.
The file runs. When it is finished, “complete” is displayed in the lower left corner of
the DB Importer tool.
Note: You can watch the script files running on the Scripts tab of the DB Importer
tool. As each script is run successfully, a green check appears to the left of the script.
If a problem occurs, a red X mark is displayed. Read the error file to determine the
problem.
9 Repeat steps 5 - 8 to import additional language packs.
10 After all desired languages are imported, close the DB Import tool.
11 In Frictionless SRM, refresh the UI cache as follows:
a Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
b Under System Administration, in the System Management section, select
System Information from the drop-down list and click OK.
c Click the Cache/DB tab.
d In the Cache Refresh field, click Refresh All.

1834 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

12 Edit the User Account document for each affected user as follows:
a In Setup, under System Administration, in the Accounts and Security section,
select Buy-Side User Accounts from the drop-down list and click OK.
b On the User Account List page, locate the desired user and click the user name
to open the User Account document.
c Click Edit in the toolbar at the top of the page.
d On the Account Properties page, change the Display Language field value to
the desired language. Change any other necessary locale-specific information
as well.
e Click Save in the toolbar at the top of the page.

Note: To display all buttons and mouseovers in the new language, each user must also
set the appropriate locale on his or her computer (Start Menu - Settings - Control Panel
- Regional Options - General tab).

Japanese PDF support

To enable Japanese language support for PDFs, Microsoft’s Arial Unicode Font is
required on the server.
To enable Japanese PDF support:
1 Ensure that the MS Arial Unicode Font (arialuni.ttf) is on the server.
2 Copy the arialuni.ttf file to the fci/config/fop/fontmetrics directory.
3 Uncomment the 'font' entry in /fci/config/fopconfig.xml
4 Restart the server

Related Topics
Import Data
Importing data from a CSV file
Importing agreements
Viewing imported data results
Creating an export package
Exporting objects for migration
Creating a language pack

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1835

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Importing agreements
You import agreements using the Contract Import Workbook and the Import Data
function. Frictionless® SRM provides the Excel spreadsheet template that serves as the
input source. Advanced users and system administrators can complete the spreadsheet
and import the data via Import Data.

To import an agreement:
1 Download the Contract Import Workbook from the online Reference Guide (RG) as
follows:
a Click RG at the top of any SRM page.
b On the RG Index page, scroll to the Additional Information section.
Note: If the Index page does not appear initially, click Index in the upper left
corner of any RG page.
c Right-click Contracts Import Workbook and choose Save Target As from
the menu.
d Save the workbook locally or to a network server.
2 Using Microsoft Excel, launch the workbook file you saved.
3 Complete the contents of the workbook. Refer to the field descriptions in the
workbook as a guideline for entering information.
a Use the Contracts tab to enter data specific to a master agreement.
b Use the Agreements tab to enter data specific to an agreement.
c Use the Contract Line Items tab to enter line item data for both master
agreements and agreements. Enter the name of the master agreement or
agreement in the Unique Doc Name field.

1836 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

4 Import the contents of the workbook as follows:

a Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of any SRM page.
b In the Import and Export Tools section of System Administration, select Import
Data from the drop-down list and click OK.
c On the Data Import List page, click Create.
d Indicate whether the workbook file is on the server or requires upload.
e Click Next.

f Click the Lookup icon to select the workbook file for import.
g Click Next.
h Chose whether to process the data input in the background or wait for the
import to finish. It is recommended that you select In the Background.
i Click Next.
j Click Finish.
The File Import page indicates the status of the import. To see the most recent
information, click the Document button in the toolbar and select Refresh.

Related Topics
Import Data
Importing data from a CSV file
Viewing imported data results
Installing language packs
Creating an export package
Exporting objects for migration
Creating a language pack

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1837

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Export Data

You can export master data from Frictionless® SRM in the form of OMA files, an XML
format used for object migration. For details on object migration, see Exporting
objects for migration.
This section describes how to create and edit an export package.

Field Help for Export Package Header page

Display Name: Type a name for the export package.

Description: Type a description of the export package.

Custom: This box is checked by default for a custom export package you create. It is
read-only.

Instructions: Click Add to add instructions for assembling an export package. Follow
the prompts in the wizard to select the data to export, including an export type. Export
types include the following:
` Single Sourcing Object: This option allows you to select a single object for
export. Only a subset of sourcing objects is available via this option. Select this
option and click Next to see a list of classes that support single object export.
` Sourcing Object List: This option allows you to select an entire class of objects to
export, for example, Queries. Select this option and click Next to select a picker
query that will return the list of sourcing objects for export. The query selected can
be one of the standard system picker queries or a custom picker query that builds
the list of objects you wish to export. If you add a custom query that builds a list
consisting of a single sourcing object, you can export a single sourcing object of
any class, eliminating the limitation noted under the description of the Single
Sourcing Object option.
` Dataset: This option allows you to build a set of sourcing object classes for export.
All objects of all classes configured as members of the dataset will be exported. You
can choose a single dataset containing a defined set of classes or multiple datasets.
Selecting all datasets is typically used to migrate sourcing objects from a staging
environment to a production environment during system implementation.
` Database Object: This option allows you to select a restricted set of Frictionless
database objects (temporary tables, functions, procedures, packages) for export.
This option will typically be used by or under the direction of Frictionless personnel.
This option is intended primarily as a means of distributing custom reports to
clients without performing a full system install.

Users of the object export capability must consider inter-object dependencies when
building export packages. Consider a simple example: you have developed a new

1838 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

report on your staging system and want to migrate the report to your production
system. You have other reports under development and only wish to migrate the single
report. In this case, you must migrate the query group associated with the report. You
must also migrate any and all queries associated with the query group. Any new
localized resources used in developing the query group and associated queries must
also be included in the export package that will migrate the report. If you fail to include
any referenced objects in the export package that do not already exist on the target
system, attempts to import the package will fail. Refer to the Class documentation in
the online Reference Guide (RG) for information concerning the interdependencies
between Frictionless sourcing objects.

Exports: Click Add to begin the export for all data indicated by the instructions. In the
New Export Header page that appears, click Save in the toolbar to begin the export in
the background. You cannot make changes to this Header page.

Click the Close icon or use the breadcrumbs to return to the Export Package Header
page. To see the current status of the export, click the Document button in the toolbar
and select Refresh. The export status appears in the Exports table.

Related Topics
Import Data
Creating an export package
Exporting an existing export package
Exporting objects for migration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1839

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Creating an export package

You export master data from Frictionless® SRM in the form of OMA files, an XML format
used for object migration. You can create an export package, described by one or more
sets of instructions, for immediate or future export. For details on object migration, see
Exporting objects for migration.
You can also export the same package multiple times as needed. For example, you
might create a package and manually export it weekly or monthly. For details, see
Exporting an existing export package.

To create an export package:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Import and Export Tools section of System Administration, select Export Data
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Export Package List page, click Create.
4 On the Header page, fill in the fields for basic export package information.
5 Under Instructions, click Add to build a set of instructions for an export package.
6 Follow the prompts in the wizard to finish adding the package. For more information
on this wizard, see Export Data.
7 Optionally, repeat steps 5 and 6 to create additional sets of instructions if multiple
types of data should be exported at the same time.
8 Under Exports, click Add to begin the export. If you have created multiple sets of
instructions, the data indicated by each set will be exported.
9 In the New Export Package Header page, click the Save button in the toolbar. The
export begins in the background. You cannot make changes to this Header page.

10 Click the Close icon or use the breadcrumbs to return to the Export Package
Header page.
11 Click the Document button in the toolbar and select Refresh. The status of the
export appears in the Exports table.

Related Topics
Export Data
Import Data
Exporting an existing export package
Exporting objects for migration

1840 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Exporting an existing export package

You export master data from Frictionless® SRM in the form of OMA files, an XML format
used for object migration. You can create an export package, described by one or more
sets of instructions, for immediate or future export. For details on object migration, see
Exporting objects for migration.
You can export an existing package multiple times as needed. For example, you might
create a package and manually export it weekly or monthly.

To export an existing export package:

1 Click Setup in the toolbar at the top of the page.
2 In the Import and Export Tools section of System Administration, select Export Data
from the drop-down list and click OK.
3 On the Export Package List page, click the export package you want to run.
4 On the Header page, click the Edit button in the toolbar.
5 Under Instructions, optionally click a link to see the set of instructions for the
export package.

6 Under Exports, optionally click the Edit icon to see details about the more
recent export.
7 Under Exports, click Add to begin the export.
8 In the New Export Header page, click the Save button in the toolbar. The export
begins in the background.

9 Click the Close icon or use the breadcrumbs to return to the Export Package
Header page.
10 Click the Document button in the toolbar and select Refresh. The status of the
export appears in the Exports table.

Related Topics
Export Data
Import Data
Creating an export package
Exporting objects for migration

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1841

Spend Environment Management System Administration

Exporting objects for migration

The Frictionless Object Migration Facility (OMF) is designed to enable the movement of
objects from a test or staging environment to a production environment. The process
for utilizing the Object Migration Facility requires definition and modification of objects
in a test or staging (source) environment followed by creation of an Object Migration
Archive (OMA) used to import the objects into the production (target) environment.
The recommended usage of this facility is to complete object definition and
implementation on the source system, followed by creation of an archive containing all
datasets, which is then imported into the target system. Once this full import is
completed, establishing the set of objects common to the source and target systems,
partial exports may be created and used to update the target system with changes
made to the source system.
Note, however, that the use of partial exports requires careful consideration of the
interdependencies between objects. For example, suppose you have defined a new RFx
template object in a source system that uses a Unit of Measure that was defined since
the time of the full object migration from the source to the target system. Also suppose
that you want to migrate the new template from the source to the target system. In
this simple case, migration of the template without migration of the new Unit of
Measure will fail, since the reference to the Unit of Measure will not be resolved during
import of the template.
The solution in this case is to create an export package of both RFx Templates and
Units of Measure. When this package is imported, the Units of Measure will be imported
prior to the RFx Templates, so that when the template is imported, the reference to the
Unit of Measure will be resolved and the import will succeed.
In practice, the previous example represents is an extremely complex problem.
Whenever an object is being imported, any object referenced by the object being
imported must exist in the target system or the import will fail. Higher-level objects
such as templates and document types contain many references to objects which
themselves may contain references to other objects. When creating a partial export, it
is suggested that the creator consult the online Reference Guide (RG) to determine the
potential set of objects which may need to be included in the export package.

Implementation Note
One object relationship which is encoded in the system but not reflected in the
reference guide is a relationship between the Extension Definition and Dynamic Class
Metadata classes of objects. If either of these object classes is added to an export
package, both object classes must be added.

Related Topics
Export Data
Import Data

1842 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

System Administration Spend Environment Management

Creating an export package

Exporting an existing export package

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1843

Spend Environment Management System Administration

1844 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

SRM Glossary

Term Definition

Accounting A page in a sourcing document that allows you to assign costs to

different parts of your business.
actual value In a master agreement, the value of the actual spend for the specified
time period, against the given agreement.
advance the phase To change a document phase to the next logical phase.
agreement A sub-agreement within a master agreement.
amendment A textual change added to an auction after bidding starts.
Analysis A module that generates reports that provide automatic analysis of
spending, sourcing processes, and system usage.
anonymous bidding A type of auction bidding in which bidders see aliases rather than the
actual company names of other bidders.
any price bidding A type of auction bidding in which bidders can place a bid for any value,
regardless of the current winning bid. Thus, bids can go up or down,
regardless of whether the auction is reverse or forward.
approved supplier A supplier who is approved to participate in sourcing events. A supplier
with this status will appear in the list of suppliers to select for a sourcing
event.
Approver A collaborator role. This user can edit and approve the sourcing
document.
attachment A file, a library component, or a URL that references additional
information that cannot be included in the sourcing document itself.
Attachment Library A collection of standard attachments that you can reference and reuse
for multiple documents.
auction A strategic sourcing event that is used to negotiate the best value in a
short period of time. In an auction, suppliers bid to provide products
and services.
auction close The point at which auction bidding stops.
Auction Monitor A graphical view that enables buyers and bidders to observe the events
of an auction in real time.
audit An analysis of a master agreement to determine whether the supplier is
following conditions such as delivery time and method, charged price,
quality, and so forth.

Confidential 1845
 Term Definition

Auditor A collaborator role. This user or group can view but not edit the
sourcing document. It is often assigned to a group for business process
standards review.
base currency A buyer's default currency.
base date A date (usually the document creation date) that is used is used as the
basis for calculating other dates in the document schedule.
bid In an auction, the price at which a supplier proposes to buy or sell a line
item.
bid history In an auction, the sequence of bids for a particular line item.
bid improvement The amount by which a line item bid improves upon the previous bid.
bidder A supplier who participates in an auction event and bids on line items.
bidding close The point at which auction bidding stops for one or more line items.
bill of materials (BOM) A list of related items, which can include both direct and indirect
materials, that are needed to create a finished product.
BOM See bill of materials.
brand target In a demand aggregation document, the brand selected by the
stakeholder as the target or goal for a line item.
budgeted value The value of the budgeted spend for the specified time period, for the
given document.
buyer alert A message appearing in the buy-side Workbench notifying you of an
important situation or milestone related to a sourcing event or
document.
buy-side The buyer interface of Frictionless SRM.
cancel an auction Discontinue an auction.
change history A record of when and by whom a business document was modified.
channel A window or portal on the Workbench that displays a specific type of
information.
chat A feature used to send instant messages to collaborators and suppliers
associated with a business document.
Close Pending phase An auction phase that allows the auction owner to reopen a line item
after it closes, or reopen an entire auction after it closes.
collaborator A user who participates and contributes to a business document. A
collaborator can view and/or edit the business document and can
participate in discussions associated with the document.

1846 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Term Definition

collaborator role A role that determines the actions a collaborator can perform on a
sourcing document.
Comma Separated Value See CSV.
commodity A categorization label for a given good or service.
compliance Either internal (to buying organization) or external (supplier) adherence
to policies and agreed-upon contract terms.
contact impersonation A feature that allows buyers and technical support personnel to log into
a supplier's account.
contract clause The lowest-level building block of a contract document. A clause is
usually a paragraph and contains legal text for a contract. The text of
each clause is saved as a Microsoft Word document. Clauses can
contain variables that apply information from a sourcing document,
such as an RFx, to the contract document. Multiple clauses make up a
contract section.
contract document A legal agreement between a buying organization and a supplier that
dictates the terms of the relationship, such as buying, payment, and
delivery terms, over time.
contract document A template containing logically ordered contract sections that can be
template used to generate a contract document.
contract generation The process of creating a legal contract document.
contract generation A token that is automatically replaced with contract-specific information
variable when the contract is generated.
contract section A logical grouping of one or more contract clauses. Sections are
organized into contract document templates to create a contract
document.
cost avoidance In a master agreement, the value representing the portion of the total
savings allocated to cost avoidance for the agreement. Buying
organizations often have different definitions of cost avoidance. One
definition is the portion of total savings that is not attributed to having
negotiated lower pricing with the given supplier, but is related to having
avoided realizing certain costs.
cost center An organizational unit or department (such as sales, services, IT,
finance, marketing, engineering, and so on) to which to assign a
specified cost. Cost center information is used for spend analysis.
cost savings In a master agreement, the value representing the portion of the total
savings allocated to cost savings for the agreement. Buying
organizations often have different definitions of cost savings. One
definition is the portion of total savings attributed to having negotiated
lower pricing with the given supplier.
CPO Chief Purchasing Officer.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1847

 Term Definition

CPO Central A module providing a comprehensive executive dashboard: a splash

page that gives a CPO a snapshot of purchasing activity and displays a
number of customizable reports depicting organizational performance
against defined goals such as annual savings.
CSR See XPress CSR.
CSV A document export format. This format can be viewed using Microsoft
Excel.
decision factor A value that allows a buyer to prioritize and categorize an RFx question.
demand aggregation A process that allows buyers to gather the quantity, product, and price
information they need to purchase in bulk for time and cost efficiency.
demand aggregation A document in which initiators collect information from multiple
document locations in their organization, analyze and combine purchasing needs,
and request feedback from stakeholders.
demand aggregation The response from the stakeholder, providing feedback about that
document response stakeholder's purchasing needs.
demand aggregation A version of a demand aggregation document that incorporates all
round recently approved line items and specifications from stakeholders. Each
demand aggregation round carries forward information and cumulative
changes from all previous rounds.
dependency A schedule event whose beginning depends on the completion of
another event.
direct material A material that becomes part of the final product in measurable
quantities.
discussion A collaboration tool used by buyers, document collaborators, and
suppliers to clarify issues related to a product or the sourcing process.
discussion message A single communication in a discussion topic.
discussion topic A group of related discussion messages.
disqualify an auction Disable a bidder's ability to place bids and remove that bidder's
bidder previous bids.
document link A link in a sourcing document. A document link can be either internal,
to another sourcing document, or external, to a URL.
document type A document that standardizes the creation of a sourcing document and
helps the buyer predefine features.
early close In an auction, a feature that closes a line item early if no bids are
received within a specified time period.
evaluator The buyer who evaluates a supplier for a specified performance period.

1848 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Term Definition

event specification In an RFx, additional RFx information provided to the supplier.

event terms The conditions to which a supplier must agree in order to participate in
a sourcing event.
external category The standard code used for goods such as computers, office furniture,
and so forth.
External Category A collaborator role. This user has all rights to the sourcing document
Manager and is responsible for the external category identified in the business
document.
forward auction An auction in which the price increases as the auction proceeds.
Frictionless SRM An enterprise software solution that automates the entire sourcing
process, including spend and compliance, enterprise sourcing activities,
contract management, and supplier management.
General Ledger Account The lowest organizational unit of cost assignment in an accounting
(GLA) system.
group A list of users who are organized for a functional purpose. For example,
groups are used to assign security profiles for a set of users and to add
collaborators to sourcing documents. A user can belong to multiple
groups.
inactivity window In an auction, the interval preceding the line item close time, after
which the line item will close if no bids are entered.
indirect material Supplies that are not directly related to the production of finished
products, such as office supplies, machine parts, etc.
initiator A user who launches and oversees a demand aggregation process. The
initiator creates and distributes the demand aggregation document.
internal category The code used by your enterprise for goods, such as biochemicals,
computers, office furniture, and so forth.
Internal Customer See XPress Internal Customer.
ISO Rating A rating that indicates a supplier's level of compliance with the
standards of the International Organization for Standardization.
leading bid In an auction, the current most competitive bid for a line item.
leading bidder In an auction, the bidder who placed the current most competitive bid
for a line item.
library A collection of reusable components that can be imported into
contracts, sourcing documents, and templates.
line item A specific product or service that is identified by a single line in a
sourcing document.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1849

 Term Definition

lock an RFx question or Close the question or section so that suppliers cannot respond or
section change responses to them. Locked questions and sections are assigned
scores and contribute to the response score and supplier rank.
master agreement A Frictionless data record containing all key contract data, including the
legal contract document, capturing all contract details. This record
enables the contract professional to create, negotiate, search and
manage all enterprise buy-side contracts.
master data A set of high-level data types, such as currencies, internal product
codes, and units of measure.
material In a bill of materials (BOM), a specific part of the products to be
assembled. Each material is a line item in the BOM.
metrics In a master agreement, a means for understanding supplier
performance. Metrics are a measure of compliance or non-compliance
with the contract. In a supplier scorecard, a standard for measuring
supplier performance.
milestone A schedule event that occurs on a specified date.
minimum bid The minimum increment by which an auction line item bid must
improvement improve upon the previous bid in order to be valid.
non-approved supplier A supplier that has not been approved to participate in sourcing events.
A supplier can be designated as Approved in the supplier record.
non-compliance Failure to adhere to policies and agreed-upon contract terms.
open bidding A type of auction bidding in which bidders must meet or exceed their
own most recent bid in both quantity and bid price, but do not have to
beat the current leading bid.
optimization scenario A set of rules and goals that allows the Optimizer tool to generate an
automatic multi-supplier RFx award.
Optimizer See RFx Optimizer.
Organizational Unit (OU) A tier within an organizational hierarchy. For example, each
organizational unit can represent a department or business division in a
company.
overtime duration In an auction, the length of time to extend a line item's bidding time if
bids are received during the inactivity window.
Owner A collaborator role. This user has all rights to the sourcing document
and is responsible for that document.
packaged line item A set of line items in an auction that suppliers bid on as a unit.
Page Manager A tool that enables you to reorder, hide, and show Workbench pages.
partial quantity bid A bid on a partial quantity of a line item unit.

1850 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Term Definition

payment term A payment arrangement required by the supplier. Payment terms are
used in RFxs and master agreements.
PDF A document export format. This format can be viewed using Adobe
Reader.
penalty In a master agreement, a sum of money exacted if the buyer or
supplier violates agreed-upon conditions for purchase or payment of
goods and services.
penalty threshold The volume that a master agreement must meet to avoid a penalty.
performance metric A numeric measure of a supplier's compliance or non-compliance with a
contract.
performance record The percentage of time a supplier's performance metric criteria have
been met.
performance target The percentage of time a supplier is required to meet the performance
metric criteria.
perpetual term A type of master agreement with no expiration date.
phase A document status that defines the progress of a document through its
life cycle.
phase configuration A sequence of phases that define the life cycle sequence of a
document.
plant A manufacturing or distribution location where raw materials are
needed. Each plant can be associated with only one company, but can
be associated with multiple organizational units within that company.
pre-bid In an auction, a single bid placed before bidding starts. A pre-bid is
used as a supplier's first bid.
preferred supplier A supplier who is preferred or frequently used by a buyer. A supplier
with this status will appear in the list of suppliers to select for a sourcing
event.
preview In an auction, a period during which bidders can review the auction but
not place a bid.
primary contact The primary person to contact within a supplier organization.
Print XPress An XPress module designed particularly for print services.
private auction An auction that is only visible to invited bidders.
project A strategic sourcing effort that organizes multiple sourcing events and
ensures consistent buying discipline.
project cycle time The length of time it takes to complete a project.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1851

 Term Definition

project form A project component containing questions to be asked of project

collaborators. For example, a form might include questions about
project requirements, potential suppliers, or general procurement
issues.
proposed line item A line item suggested by a demand aggregation stakeholder.
proposed specification A specification suggested by a demand aggregation stakeholder.
proposed supplier A supplier suggested by a demand aggregation stakeholder.
proxy bidding An automated way to place an auction bid. Each bidder places one
best-offer bid. The software evaluates all best-offer bids and places
incremental bids on behalf of each bidder. Each bid is reduced by the
amount indicated as the minimum bid improvement. The winning bid
must meet the reserve price, if it is set.
public auction An auction that is visible to all suppliers, even those not invited to
participate.
Purchasing Manager A collaborator role. This user has all rights to the sourcing document.
This role is used with RFQuick templates to assign the owner at
document creation.
qualify an auction bidder Enable a disqualified bidder's ability to resume placing bids. The
bidder's previous bids are not restored.
rebate An incentive for the buyer company to purchase a specific quantity of
goods or services. It is often a monetary pay back expressed as a dollar
amount or percentage of spend for a specific good or service after the
buyer company exceeds a spending or quantity threshold.
rebate threshold The volume that the master agreement must exceed for the buyer to
receive a rebate.
Reference Guide (RG) An online guide containing the metadata for each page in the SRM
application, as well as other technical information.
replenishment The assignment of responsibility for the purchase of additional
products.
report A collection of analytical data conveying document-specific information
or a broader range of information about the application.
Requester A collaborator role. This user can view but not edit the sourcing
document. It is used in some business processes to track the person
who initiated the request for this document.
retention The period that a document is stored in the system.
retire an RFx question or Remove the question or section from the new round so suppliers do not
section see them. Retired questions and sections are not assigned value scores
and do not contribute to the response score and supplier rank.

1852 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Term Definition

reverse auction An auction in which the price drops as the auction proceeds.
Reviewer A collaborator role. This user or group can view but not edit the
sourcing document. It is typically given to users to bring them into the
business process.
RFP An abbreviation for Request for Proposal, a type of RFx.
RFQ An abbreviation for Request for Quote a type of RFx.
RFx A sourcing document that enables buyers to request information,
quotes, and prices regarding goods and services from multiple
suppliers.
RFx auto-allocation The allocation generated by the Optimizer for a specific line item to one
or more suppliers.
RFx collaborative scoring A type of RFx scoring that allows collaborators to concurrently score
suppliers' responses to RFx questions.
RFx disclosure rule A rule that specifies how much competitive information about scores to
share with suppliers.
RFx optimization rule A rule that determines how the Optimizer allocates an RFx award.
RFx Optimizer A tool that performs complex calculations and comparisons to
determine an RFx award based on your specified priorities. The
Optimizer is an optional Frictionless SRM component.
RFx question A request in an RFx for information, such as the supplier company's
policies, procedures, and so forth.
RFx question group A set of RFx questions within a section.
RFx question section A collection of questions in an RFx. Each section can be given its own
weight for scoring purposes.
RFX response The document in which a supplier answers questions and provides
prices and other information for an RFx.
RFx round A single iteration of an RFx, during which information is gathered from
a group of suppliers.
RFx scenario award An award of the RFx to multiple suppliers, either manually or
automatically.
RFx simple award An award of the whole RFx to one supplier.
RFx supplier preview A print version of the RFx that shows how the supplier sees it.
savings metrics In a master agreement, the difference between the budgeted and the
actual costs for goods and services over a specific time period.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1853

 Term Definition

schedule A feature that helps you track the progress of a sourcing document. For
most sourcing documents, you can use a schedule to create and track
events associated with the document.
scorecard See supplier scorecard.
sealed bidding A type of auction bidding in which bidders can see only their own bids.
The competing suppliers' bid history is hidden.
section weights In an RFx, a weight that indicates the importance of a question section.
Section weights must total 100.
security profile A set of rights and restrictions that can be associated with a user or
group of users. The security profile determines the actions (such as
viewing, creating, and editing) that a user can perform on various
resources, such as sourcing documents and master data.
self-registration See XPress self-registration.
self-registration A document that determines security and other information for users
configuration who register through the self-registration interface.
sell-side The supplier interface of Frictionless SRM.
single line item In an auction, a line item that does not contain sub line items.
sourcing document A business document in Frictionless SRM.
sourcing event A business activity that occurs during the sourcing process, such as an
auction or an RFx.
spec See specification.
specification A parameter used to describe a line item in a demand aggregation
document, RFx, or XPress document. In a demand aggregation
document, specifications are used to obtain comparable requirement
information.
spend and compliance A module that provides a full analytic capability to analyze past and
forecasted spend. This enables you to identify savings opportunities
and track spend against contracts to capture savings.
Sponsor A collaborator role. This user has all rights to the sourcing document
and is typically an executive within the organization sponsoring this
activity.
SRM Activities A feature that enables the buyer to plan and manage supplier activities
and communications. It provides support for managing, sharing, and
tracking the activities associated with maintaining an ongoing supplier
relationship. These activities include re-certifications, diversity
reporting, and supplier meetings.
staggered line item In an auction, a line item that opens or closes for bidding after other
line items.

1854 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Term Definition

stakeholder A participant in the demand aggregation process who contributes

information about purchasing needs by responding to a demand
aggregation document. Each stakeholder represents a unique location
in the organization.
standard bidding A type of auction bidding in which bidders must beat the leading bid
price by the specified minimum bid improvement and meet or exceed
the leading bid quantity.
status A field indicating the progress of a project or other sourcing document.
sub line item One of the set of line items in a packaged line item.
sub-group A group within a group. Groups are hierarchical and can contain an
unlimited number of sub-group levels.
sub-project A project within a project.
supplier A vendor or vendor company.
suspend an auction Disable a bidder's ability to place bids, though the bidder's previous bids
bidder remain in the auction.
suspend auction bidding Temporarily stop the activity of the auction. No bids can be placed while
activity the bidding activity is suspended.
system administrator An SRM user who performs the functions in Setup and has a higher
level of access than a business user.
system property A setting used to control the basic configuration of Frictionless SRM.
table-based question In an RFx, a request for information in table format.
target price The goal price a buyer hopes to attain through an auction or RFx.
task A schedule event with a time duration.
template A predefined document, or portion of a document, that is used to
standardize document creation and minimize the work of creating a
new document.
tiered pricing A type of RFx and agreement pricing that allows the supplier to offer
discounts for higher-volume purchases.
token Placeholder text that is replaced with real data.
total cost In an RFx, the total cost to be paid by the buyer. Total Cost includes the
Total Price charged by the supplier, plus any additional associated
costs.)
total price In an RFx, the total price to be charged by the supplier.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1855

 Term Definition

total savings In a master agreement, the total savings, calculated as the sum of the
cost savings plus the cost avoidance for the agreement. This savings
value must equal the budgeted vs. actual total savings value.
unit of measure A unit that specifies the quantities of items being sourced (such as
pounds, etc.). Frictionless SRM uses standard ISO units of measure.
unit price The price per unit for a line item.
unit reserve price The unit price that auction bidding must reach for a line item to be
awarded.
unit start price The line item unit price at which auction bidding starts.
unsuspend an auction Enable a suspended bidder to resume placing bids.
bidder
unsuspend bidding Allow suspended bidding activity to continue.
activity
user account information Data about a user of Frictionless SRM. Each user can edit his or her own
user account information.
vendor Frictionless SRM user at a vendor company. Also known as a supplier.
vendor alerts A message appearing in the sell-side Workbench notifying the supplier
of an important situation or milestone related to a sourcing event.
vendor contact A contact person within a supplier organization.
vendor record A record containing the address, phone, tax, billing, and contact
information for a supplier organization.
vendor registration The process by which a supplier gains access to use Frictionless SRM.
vendor registration A request from a supplier to register to use Frictionless SRM.
request
vendor scorecard A feature that tracks supplier performance metrics. The scorecard
contains an assessment of supplier performance, which is based on
targeted and actual scores for the supplier. These scores are entered
for the metrics defined in the scorecard definition.
weighted bidding A type of auction bidding that provides a full picture of the costs and
preferences associated with the auction. Weighted bidding takes into
account such factors as service levels, transportation costs, switching
costs, import tax, and so on.
winning bid The auction bid that wins the award of a line item.

1856 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Term Definition

Workbench The point of entry into Frictionless SRM, which allows you to see
sourcing events and related data, go directly to the various sourcing
modules and sourcing documents, and communicate with suppliers.
The Workbench is made up of a number of channels, each of which
shows a particular type of sourcing information.
Workbench channel A window or portal on the Workbench that displays a specific type of
sourcing information.
Workbench page A tab within the Workbench that displays a customized set of channels.
Workbench page A template that sets global default configurations for users' Workbench
templates pages.
workflow A series of critical process steps that must be completed in sequence
within a sourcing document.
workflow task or action A critical process step that is monitored by workflow in a sourcing
document.
XPress A module that provides a comprehensive, automated solution for the
pricing and purchase of services, such as print services. This
functionality enables you to easily and quickly source on a
project-by-project basis, from request through award, for simple and
complex jobs.
XPress Buyer A frequent, fully trained user of Frictionless SRM, who is part of your
company's Purchasing group. Buyers can perform all XPress functions
and have full access to the Frictionless SRM system.
XPress CSR (Customer A user outside the buyer's Purchasing group who has expertise in a
Service Representative) specific category and in tactical sourcing. For example, a CSR might be
a member of a business unit such as a print buying team, or a graphics
department that handles the tactical sourcing of print services. CSRs
can create, review, and award XPress requests, and have limited access
to other Frictionless SRM modules.
XPress Internal Customer A user who purchases services but who is outside the buyer's
Purchasing group. For example, an Internal Customer might be a
graphics designer who needs to source a marketing brochure. Internal
Customers can initiate XPress requests and in some cases can review
and award requests to suppliers. Internal Customers do not have
access to other Frictionless SRM modules.
XPress price component A subset of a line item for which the buyer is requesting a price quote.
For example, for a print services line item, components might include
Preparation, Paper, and Printing.
XPress request document A request to purchase services, such as print services, from selected
suppliers. The buyer enters a job description and specifications in the
request and submits it to a list of suppliers. The suppliers respond with
bids, and the job is awarded to a single supplier.

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1857

 Term Definition

XPress Request internal A review of an XPress request by a CSR that is required before it can be
review submitted to suppliers for bidding.
XPress request template A predefined document that stores crucial content for an XPress
request. For example, the XPress request template determines line item
specifications, preferred suppliers, and price components.
XPress request type A document that controls the business rules and features for an XPress
request template. For example, the XPress request type determines
rules for Internal Customers and suppliers, and indicates whether a
template can include multiple line item options, quantity breaks, and
price components.
XPress self-registration A process that allows Internal Customers to register themselves to use
the XPress module.
XPress Vendor A supplier who participates in the XPress request process.

1858 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

A editing 1391
accepting setup 1389
auction, supplier request to participate 371 spend and compliance reports 184
firm RFx response 517 Accounts Payable Type Spend reports 980
RFx, supplier request to participate 448 Action page
supplier modification request 829 converting master data, field help 1798
supplier registration request 827 Actions page
access spend environment configuration 1789
security profile, restricting 1743 Actions toolbar button
Access List page auction functions 392
Cube Profile 1295 Project functions 241
query defnition 1246 RFx functions 563, 697
query group 1279 Actions toolbar button functions 96
reports 1302 activity
accessing creating 1396
Workbench Buyer Alerts channel, sourcing editing 1397
document 43 setup 1395
account Activity Analysis reports 1045
buy-side user, creating 1723 adding
buy-side user, editing 1725 accounting information to sourcing
buy-side user, setup 1722 document 150
setup 1716 approver to sourcing document 130
Account Management page attachment, file 102
User Account, field help 1729 attachment, importing from library 101
vendor 798 attachment, URL 103
Account Properties page auction alternate currency 335
User Account, field help 1727 auction amendment 331
accounting information 149 auction bidder 362
setup 1354 auction bidder to open auction 363
sourcing document, adding 150 auction information section 343
Accounting page auction line item information 346
auction 377 auction line item specification 391
field help, sourcing document 151 auction material 357
functions 149 auction packaged line item 351
master agreements 675 auction schedule 340
project 234 auction single line item 347
XPress request template 873 auction sub line item to packaged line item 355
accounts payable auction terms 370
spend reports 980 auction weighted bidding factors 376
accounts payable type bill of materials to a BOM 598
cost center 185, 186 BOM material 600
creating 1390 collaborator to sourcing document 129

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1859

 company information to new company 1360 RFx BOM 495
contract clause document to clause 728 RFx contract clause question 462
contract clause variables 729 RFx event specification 452
contract document to master agreement 677 RFx information section 450
contract generation phase 760 RFx line item bundles in Optimizer scenario 537
contract generation variable 764 RFx line item specification 556
contract section clause 743 RFx material 494
contract template, section 753 RFx question section group 479
dates, event 143 RFx question section information 482
demand aggregation alternate currency 270 RFx question within an existing section 460
demand aggregation line item 283 RFx schedule 434
demand aggregation schedule 272 RFx supplier contact 441
demand aggregation specification 280 RFx supplier disclosure rules 444
demand aggregation stakeholder 278 RFx supplier event terms 446
demand aggregation supplier 289 RFx table-based question 468
dependency, event 140 shared attachments to new company 1370
document link to sourcing document 134 shared links to new company 1368
event, schedule 138 SRM activity to supplier record 809
line item to an RFx 492 SRM Explorer category 1172
master agreement additional term 661 supplier addresses 784
master agreement audit 664 supplier contact 793
master agreement header information 625 supplier details 788
master agreement line item 648 supplier internal and external categories 790
master agreement line item specification 694 supplier relationship information 801
master agreement material 649 supplier scorecard 804
master agreement penalty 660 vendor-entered attribute 558, 696
master agreement performance metric 667 Workbench Calendar channel, calendar event 18
master agreement rebate 659 Workbench Currency Exchange Rates channel,
master agreement savings metrics 672 comparison currency 32
master agreement schedule 628 Workbench Events channel, calendar event 40
master agreement supplier contacts 637 XPress request template, price components 872
master agreement term 658 XPress request template, specifications 869
phases as value list values 1342 additional term
project costs to a contributing cost report 233 master agreement, adding 661
project event 207 address
project event costs and resources 232 supplier, adding 784
project event details 219 Addresses page
project form 227 vendor 783
project schedule 205 adjusting
project sub-project 209 RFx question weights 487
project supplier 224 RFx section weights 454
RFx alternate currency 431 row and column size, SRM Explorer 1121

1860 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

administrative report Analysis page 888
setup 1764 analysis reports setup 1305
agreement editing 1306
canceling 686 Analysis view, SRM Explorer 1124
closing 687 analytic report
creating 640 bookmarking 894
editing 642 generating 889
importing 1836 Analytic Report Display page 893
report, viewing 702 Approve toolbar button functions 126
Savings page 671 approver
Agreement Item Pricing by Organization and Plant sourcing document, adding to 130
report 1073 approving
Agreement Item Pricing by Vendor and Plant demand aggregation response, proposed line
report 1075 item 297
Agreements in my Cost Center(s) report 1090 demand aggregation response, proposed
Agreements page specification 300
master agreements 639 demand aggregation response, proposed
Agreements Savings page 671 supplier 303
alert document in document toolbar 127
creating 1766 document in My Workflow Activities channel 63
editing 1767 arranging
setup 1765 SRM Explorer, data categories 1170
Workbench Buyer Alerts channel, accessing assigning
sourcing document 43 RFx line items and suppliers to display
alert log groups 560
setup 1765 associating
allocation workflow process owner with context 1581
RFx line item, entering and editing 535 attachment
alternate currency file, adding 102
auction, adding 335 library, creating 1618
demand aggregation, adding 270 library, importing from 101
RFx, adding 431 shared, adding to company 1370
amendment shared, editing for company 1372
auction, adding 331 URL, adding 103
analysis viewing 104
analytic report, bookmarking 894 attachment library
analytic report, editing bookmark 891 setup 1617
analytic report, generating 889 Attachment Library Header page
Bookmark Summary page 892 field help 1617
bookmarked report, viewing 890 Attachments toolbar button functions 100
Report Display page 893 attribute
Analysis Bookmark Summary page 892 RFx, vendor-entered, adding 558, 696

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1861

Attributes page line item, editing maximum bid improvement
field help 1452 while open 360
auction line item, editing minimum bid improvement
Accounting page 377 while open 360
Actions toolbar button functions 392 line item, editing start price in Preview phase 359
alternate currency, adding 335 Line Items page 344
amendment, adding 331 Line Items page, field help 344
Auction Monitor, launching 397 line items, awarding manually 385
Auction Monitor, using 398 List page 316
Awards page 384 material, adding 357
Bid History page 381 material, editing 358
bid history, reviewing 380 open, editing 324
bidder, adding 362 open, editing collaborators 332
bidder, adding to open auction 363 Packaged Line Item Summary page 353
bidder, disqualifying 366, 383 packaged line item, adding 351
bidder, qualifying 367 packaged line item, editing 352
bidder, suspending 364 phase end time, changing 341
bidder, unsuspending 365 reopening in Close Pending phase 393
Bidders page 361, 372 reopening line item, Close Pending phase 394
Bidding page 378 report, Bid Movement by Bidders 411
Bidding page, field help 378 report, Bid Movement by Line Item 408
canceling 388 report, Bidder Status for an Auction Event 402
closed, editing collaborators 333 report, Full Bid 405
closing line item in Close Pending phase 395 report, viewing 401
closing manually 396 Reports toolbar button functions 400
conducting, quick reference 414 Schedule page 336
contract, generating 97 schedule, adding 340
creating 318 setup 1668
creating from a template 320 Setup, Item Specification dialog box 390
creating from RFx 572 Setup, Line Item Specifications page 389
Document toolbar button functions 387 Single Line Item Summary page 349
editing 322 single line item, adding 347
Exchange Rates page 334 single line item, editing 348
Header page 329 sub line item in packaged line item, editing 356
Information page 342 sub line item to packaged line item, adding 355
information section, adding 343 supplier request to participate, accepting 371
Item Specification box, field help 390 supplier request to participate, denying 371
line item information, adding 346 suspended, editing 324
line item specification, adding 391 template, creating 325
Line Item Specifications page template, editing 327
field help 389 terms, adding 370
line item view, specifying 345 toolbar functions 386

1862 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 type, creating 1673 configuration 1493
type, setup 1669 authentication scenarios, directory
weighted bidding factors, adding 376 configuration 1479
Weights page, field help 374 automatic award
Auction Accounting page 377 RFx 505
Auction Awards page 384 automatic score
Auction Bid History page 381 RFx question, overriding 521
Auction Bid History page field help 381 award
Auction Bidders page 361, 372 RFx scenario, automatic awarding 505
field help 361 RFx scenario, manual awarding 502
Auction Bidding page 378 RFx, reviewing results 523
field help 378 RFx, simple 500
Auction Event List page 316 RFx, simple with master agreement 501
Auction Exchange Rates page 334 Award Analysis reports 1071
field help 334 award results
Auction Header page 329 RFx Optimizer scenarios, comparing 524
field help 329 awarding
Auction Information page 342 auction line items manually 385
Auction Line Items page 344 XPress request 856
field help 344 Awards
Auction Monitor RFx Responses page 526
launching 397 Awards Global Rules page
using 398 RFx 527
Auction Packaged Line Item Summary page 353 Awards page
Auction Schedule page 336 auction 384
field help 336 RFx 522
Auction Single Line Item Summary page 349 XPress request 857
Auction Summary Extract report 1098
Auction Type page
field help 1669 B
auction, editing line item start price 359 background task status
Auctions and RFxs Completed by Month setup 1773
report 1062 viewing 1774
Auctions with Insufficient Bidders report 1028 backup
audit spend environment 1829
master agreement, adding 664 base currency
Audit Detail dialog box Workbench Currency Exchange Rates channel,
Master Agreement, field help 665 selecting 31
Audits page basics
Master Agreement, field help 663 using RFx Optimizer 504
master agreements 663 bid
authentication mechanism, directory XPress request, reviewing 855

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1863

bid history BOM List page 592
auction, reviewing 380 BOM Materials page 597
Bid History page bookmarked analytic report
auction 381 viewing 890
Bid Movement by Bidders report 411 bookmarking
Bid Movement by Line Item report 408 analytic report 894
bidder report 156
auction, adding 362 Browse Extension Schema 1308
auction, adding while open 363 Browse Full Schema 1307
auction, disqualifying 366, 383 buttons
auction, qualifying 367 navigation bar, configuring in security
auction, suspending 364 profile 1741
auction, unsuspending 365 Buyer Alerts channel, Workbench
Bidder Status for an Auction Event report 402 accessing sourcing document 43
Bidders page using 42
auction 361, 372 buy-side user acccount
bidding Account Management page, field help 1729
XPress request, opening for 860 Account Properties page, field help 1727
bidding activity Security page, field help 1731
auction, suspending 368 buy-side user account
auction, unsuspending 369 creating 1723
Bidding page editing 1725
auction 378 setup 1722
auction, field help 378
XPress request 854
bill of materials C
See BOM cache configuration
Bill of Materials List page 592 editing 1533
BOM setup 1532
bill of materials, adding to 598 Cache/DB page, System Information
bill of materials, editing in 599 field help 1755
creating 593 calculating
editing 594 SRM Explorer % growth 1183
Header page 595 SRM Explorer % of total 1186
List page 592 SRM Explorer average 1180
material, adding to 600 SRM Explorer difference 1181
material, editing in 601 SRM Explorer intersection 1190
Materials page 597 SRM Explorer maximum 1185
revision level, changing 596 SRM Explorer minimum 1184
RFx, adding 495 SRM Explorer peformance index 1191
RFx, editing 496 SRM Explorer ratio 1182
BOM Header page 595 SRM Explorer sum 1179

1864 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 SRM Explorer union 1189 Project functions 250
SRM Explorer, sum over relative time RFx functions 585
periods 1187 Change Phase toolbar button functions 122
Calendar channel, Workbench changing
adding Calendar event 18 auction, phase end time 341
selecting date to view events 21 BOM, revision level 596
specifying event types 19 contract clause phase 732
specifying maximum event number 20 contract section phase 746
using 17 contract template phase 757
viewing list of dates 22 demand aggregation document phase 306
calendar event demand aggregation response phase 307
creation, configuring in security profile 1742 phase, contract document 124
canceling phase, project 124
agreement 686 phase, sourcing document 123
auction 388 project status 200
master agreement 686 RFx phase 586
RFx 544 SRM Explorer unit of measure 1129
sourcing document 93 user password 72
SRM Explorer hiding 1164 Workbench Favorite Sites channel height 49
workflow action 1582 channel
Categories page Buyer Alerts, using 42
vendor 789 Calendar, using 17
category Currency Exchange Rates, using 30
external, creating 1352 Events, using 37
external, editing 1353 Favorite Sites, using 47
external, setup 1351 File Sharing, using 56
internal, creating 1311 Global Discussions, using 53
internal, editing 1312 Industry News, using 67
internal, setup 1310 Links, using in Workbench 23
supplier, adding 790 Master Agreements Search, using 27
supplier, editing 791 My Workflow Activities, using 61
category manager New Discussions, using 51
creating 1599 Print XPress for Internal Customers , using 65,
editing 1600 66
setup 1598 Project Status Summary, using 58
Category Project Status report 1016 Reports, using in Workbench 57
change Supplier Discovery, using 68
to sourcing document, undoing 87 Tech Support, using 33
change history To Do List, using 44
sourcing document, viewing 135 Workbench, reordering in column 12
Change Phase toolbar button Workbench, viewing more information 13
Master Agreement functions 720 chart

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1865

 SRM Explorer 1146 editing 1502
SRM Explorer, horizontal bar 1148 example configurations 1505
SRM Explorer, pie 1149 field help, Cluster Info page 1503
SRM Explorer, vertical bar 1147 setup 1498
Chart Definition page 1241 collaborative question scoring
chart format RFx, setting up, quick reference 588
SRM Explorer, choosing 1125 collaborative score
chat RFx question, entering 520
conducting 120 RFx question, overriding 521
Chat toolbar button functions 118 RFx question, publishing 577
choosing collaborative scoring
format in SRM Explorer 1125 RFx question, closing 575
clause RFx question, reopening 576
contract document, adding 728 rights 519
contract, adding to a section 743 collaborator
contract, adding variables to 729 sourcing document, adding to 129
contract, creating 723 collaborator role definition
contract, editing 724 creating 1615
contract, removing globally 735 editing 1616
contract, replacing globally 734 setup 1613
contract, revising for versioning 731 Collaborator Role page
contract, searching for documents and field help 1613
components 733 collaborators
contract, toolbar functions 730 auction, editing in Closed phase 333
Clauses page auction, editing while open 332
contract section 742 commodity
contract section, field help 742 spend and compliance reports 178, 896, 980
Close icon, using 87 Commodity Spend reports, spend analysis 178, 896
Close Pending phase company
auction, closing line item in 395 creating 1356
auction, reopening in 393 editing 1358
auction, reopening line item in 394 information, adding 1360
closing information, editing 1362
agreement 687 organizational unit, creating for 1364
auction line item in Close Pending phase 395 organizational unit, editing 1366
auction, manually 396 setup 1355
master agreement 687 shared attachments, adding 1370
RFx collaborative question scoring 575 shared attachments, editing 1372
sourcing document 95 shared links, adding 1368
sourcing document, Close icon 87 shared links, editing 1369
cluster configuration comparing
creating 1500 award results in RFx Optimizer scenarios 524

1866 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 master agreement contract document version 682 clause document, adding to clause 728
SRM Explorer data categories Clause Header page 726
data Clause List page 722
SRM Explorer categories, clause, adding to a contract section 743
comparing 1126 clause, adding variables to 729
comparison currency clause, changing phase 732
Workbench Currency Exchange Rates channel, clause, changing section 746
adding 32 clause, creating 723
Compliance reports, spend analysis 1012 clause, editing 724
component clause, removing globally 735
library, importing 153 clause, replacing globally 734
library, unlinking in template 154 clause, revising for versioning 731
conducting contract generation phase, adding 760
auction, quick reference 414 contract generation phase, editing 761
chat 120 Contract Generation Phases Header page 758
configuration Contract Generation Variable Configuration
setup 1444 Header page 762
Workbench, user 1424 contract generation variable, adding 764
XPress self-registration 1700 creating, quick reference 768
XPress self-registration, creating 1701 Document Template Header page 751
XPress self-registration, editing 1702 Document Template List page 748
configuring Document Template Sections page 752
calendar event creation in security profile 1742 generating from a template 756
navigation bar buttons in security profile 1741 master agreement, generating from 699
contact searching components that use a clause 733
RFx supplier, adding 441 searching components that use a section 747
supplier, adding 793 searching documents that use a clause 733
supplier, editing searching documents that use a section 747
supplier Section Clauses page 742
contact, editing 794 Section Header page 740
Contact page Section List page 736
vendor 797 section, adding to a template 753
contacting section, creating 737
Workbench Tech Support channel, technical section, removing globally 739
support 36 section, replacing globally 738
Contacts page section, revising for versioning 745
vendor 792 template, changing phase 757
context template, creating 749
setup 1207 template, revising for versioning 755
workflow process owner, associating with 1581 toolbar functions, clause 730
contract toolbar functions, section 744
auction or RFx, generating from 97 toolbar functions, template 754

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1867

contract clause contract generation tag configuration
Header page, field help 726 Header page, field help 762
Contract Clause Header page 726 Contract Generation Variable Configuration Header
Contract Clause List page 722 page 762
contract clause question contract section
RFx, adding 462 Clauses page, field help 742
contract document Header page, field help 740
adding to master agreement 677 Contract Section Clauses page 742
master agreement, comparing version 682 Contract Section Header page 740
master agreement, controlling version 678 Contract Section List page 736
phase configuration 1707 contributing cost report
phase, changing 124 project, adding costs 233
RFx, including supplier question responses 464 Contributing Cost report, project 247
setup 1703 controlling
Type page, field help 1704 master agreement contract document version 678
type, creating 1706 converting
type, setup 1704 master data to dimension data 1796
contract document phase configuration, master data, field help for Action page 1798
creating 1711 master data, setup 1795
contract document phase configuration, cost center
editing 1713 creating 1381
Contract Document Phase Header page editing 1382
field help 1709 setup 1380
contract document phases spend reports 994
Phase Configuration page, field help 1707 Cost Center Agreements - Canceled or Closed
contract document template report 1092
Header page, field help 751 Cost Center Master Agreements - Canceled or
Sections page, field help 752 Closed report 1091
Contract Document Template Header page 751 Cost Center Spend reports 994
Contract Document Template List page 748 cost report
Contract Document Template Sections page 752 See contributing cost report
Contract Documents Details page costs
master agreement, field help 680 project event, adding 232
master agreements 680 project, adding to a contributing cost report 233
Contract Documents page Costs page
master agreement, field help 676 project 231
master agreements 676 CPO Central 3
contract generation CPO Central Splash Page
Variable Definition dialog box, field help 765 setting up 1421
contract generation phases creating 1667
Header page, field help 758 accounts payable type 1390
Contract Generation Phases Header page 758 activity 1396

1868 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 agreement 640 document report configuration 1602
alert 1766 document security template 1607
attachment library 1618 entity 1387
auction 318 event 1769
auction from a template 320 event terms template 1596
auction from an RFx 572 export package 1840
auction template 325 extension definition 1447
auction type 1673 extension reference type 1463
BOM 593 external category 1352
buy-side user account 1723 general ledger account 1384
category manager 1599 geography 1393
cluster configuration 1500 global discussion manager 1432
collaborator role definition 1615 group 1745
company 1356 Iframe configuration 1405
contract clause 723 internal category 1311
contract document phase configuration 1711 language pack 1537
contract document template 749 localized resource in Setup 1540
contract document type 1706 localized resource on the fly 1541
contract document, quick reference 768 location 1375
contract section 737 mail configuration 1525
cost center 1381 mail message template 1519
cube profile 1287 master agreement 612
currency 1346 master agreement from a template 614
currency conversion 1349 master agreement from an RFx 573
custom master data 1344 master agreement schedule 1630
custom query definition 1215 master agreement template 618
demand aggregation document 256 master agreement term 1627
demand aggregation document from a master agreement type 1624
template 258 material 1314
demand aggregation template 262 metric 1317
demand aggregation type 1691 metric entry 1662
demand aggregation, final round 311 numbering table definition 1320
demand aggregation, new round 310 organizational unit for new company 1364
demand aggregation, supplier record 290 payment term 1327
dictionary word, enterprise 1530 plant 1378
dictionary word, user 1748 process owner, workflow 1579
dimension ID synonym map 1816 project 194
dimension ID synonym map set 1822 project configurable phase 1687
directory configuration 1466 project form component 1679
discussion message 108 project form question 228
discussion topic 106 project from a template 195
document link definition 1611 project schedule component 1682

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1869

 project supplier record 225 Workbench page in Setup 1410
project template 197 Workbench page in Workbench 9
project type 1677 Workbench page template 1413
query definition for cube profile 1217 workflow definition 1571
reminders, event 147 XPress request 849
report 1297 XPress request PDF file 859
reporting calendar 1330 XPress request specification library 1697
RFx 421 XPress request template 862
RFx from a master agreement 698 XPress request type 876
RFx from a template 419 XPress request, Internal Customer 838
RFx from demand aggregation document 312 XPress self-registration configuration 1701
RFx information 1649 CSV
RFx library questions 1643 SRM Explorer, saving data as 1200
RFx round, new 564 CSV file
RFx schedule 1646 exporting list as 163
RFx supplier record 442 formatting line items for import from 160
RFx system answer source 1640 importing line items and specifications 161
RFx table design 1653 importing master data from 1832
RFx template 425 importing value list values from 1832
RFx type 1637 line item, exporting as 162
scheduled task 1436 report, exporting as 158
scheduled task, Data Import Monitor 1439 cube profile
scheduled task, Report Execution 1437 creating 1287
scheduled task, Report Scheduled Cleanup 1438 dimensions, refreshing 1288
security profile 1738 measures, refreshing 1288
service registration 1762 query definition, creating for 1217
sourcing document from within a project 242 setup 1286
spend environment configuration 1785 Cube Profile Access List page 1295
style configuration 1563 Cube Profile Dimension dialog box
style set 1558 field help 1291
supplier record 779 Cube Profile Dimensions page 1291
system property 1511 field help 1291
theme 1566 Cube Profile Measures dialog box
time period 1333 field help 1293
unit of measure 1337 Cube Profile Measures page 1293
value list type 1340 field help 1293
value list value 1340 Cube Profile page 1289
vendor scorecard definition 1657 field help 1289
Workbench channel 1401 Cumulative Spend by Accounts Payable Type
Workbench Global Discussions channel report, Spend Analysis 981
discussion thread 55 Cumulative Spend by Commodity report, Spend
Workbench Links channel link 25 Analysis 897

1870 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Cumulative Spend by Cost Center report, Spend creating 1344
Analysis 995 setup 1343
Cumulative Spend by Geography report, Spend customization
Analysis 966 EAR file, rebuilding 1534
Cumulative Spend by Organization report, Spend customizing
Analysis 949 authentication mechanism 1493
Cumulative Spend by Selected Accounts Payable mail message template 1519
Type report, Spend Analysis 983 page element, field help 1549
Cumulative Spend by Selected Commodity report, Cycle Time reports 1015
Spend Analysis 899
Cumulative Spend by Selected Cost Center report,
Spend Analysis 997 D
Cumulative Spend by Selected Geography report, Daemons page, System Information
Spend Analysis 968 field help 1760
Cumulative Spend by Selected Organization report, data
Spend Analysis 951 SRM Explorer, collapsing 1133
Cumulative Spend by Selected Vendor report, Spend SRM Explorer, detail 1135
Analysis 924 SRM Explorer, expanding 1132
Cumulative Spend by Vendor report, Spend SRM Explorer, exporting details to
Analysis 922 spreadsheet 1201
currency SRM Explorer, filtering 1151
creating 1346 SRM Explorer, finding 1136
editing 1347 SRM Explorer, hiding 1151
setup 1345 SRM Explorer, refreshing display 1137
sourcing document, selecting 172 SRM Explorer, saving 1195
currency conversion SRM Explorer, saving as Adobe PDF 1196
creating 1349 SRM Explorer, saving as comma-separated
editing 1350 values 1200
setup 1348 SRM Explorer, saving as Microsoft Excel 1197
Currency Conversion page SRM Explorer, saving as Microsoft Word 1198
field help 1348 SRM Explorer, saving as tab-separated
Currency Exchange Rates channel, Workbench values 1199
adding comparison currency 32 SRM Explorer, selecting 1127
field help 30 SRM Explorer, showing as % of column
selecting base currency 31 total 1140
using 30 SRM Explorer, showing as % of grand total 1142
currency, selecting 172 SRM Explorer, showing as % of row total 1141
Current Workflow Processes report 1573 SRM Explorer, showing as cell values 1139
Current Workflow Processes, viewing 1572 SRM Explorer, viewing and navigating 1123
custom attributes of spend data data cube
spend analysis reporting considerations 1828 selecting data in 1111
custom master data setting preferences in 1113

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1871

 undoing mistakes in 1112 Document page 265
Data Import Monitor document, creating 256
scheduled task type, field help 1440 document, creating from a template 258
Data Import Monitor, creating 1439 document, declining to respond 308
data reporting and analysis document, editing 260
SRM Explorer 1109 document, responding 266
dates Exchange Rates page 269
event, adding 143 final round, creating 311
event, editing 144 Header page 268
Workbench Calendar channel, viewing in a initiator tasks 252
flyover 22 line item, adding 283
declining line item, declining to respond 286
demand aggregation response, proposed line line item, proposing 287
item 298 line item, responding 285
demand aggregation response, proposed Line Items page 282
specification 301 List page 254
demand aggregation response, proposed Master Specification page 279
supplier 304 new round, creating 310
declining to respond phase, changing 306
demand aggregation document 308 Proposed page 295
demand aggregation line item 286 response phase, changing 307
Default Value page response phase, reverting for stakeholder 309
field help, extension definition 1457, 1458 response, approving proposed line item 297
defining response, approving proposed specification 300
PDF page layout, default for list or report 1284 response, approving proposed supplier 303
deleting response, declining proposed line item 298
discussion message 116 response, declining proposed specification 301
discussion topic 116 response, declining proposed supplier 304
item from list 168 response, reviewing 293
RFx line item bundles in Optimizer scenario 538 response, reviewing line items 296
RFx Optimizer scenario, auto-allocations for response, reviewing proposed specifications 299
selected line items 540 response, reviewing proposed suppliers 302
RFx Optimizer scenario, rules and Responses page 292
auto-allocations for line items 539 RFx Settings page 288
SRM Explorer calculation 1194 RFx, creating from document 312
Delivery Info page Schedule Dependents page 276
master agreement Setup 691 Schedule page 271
master agreement, field help 691 Schedule page, Settings page 274
RFx Setup 553 Schedule page, Tracking page 275
RFx, field help 553 schedule, adding 272
demand aggregation setup 1689
alternate currency, adding 270 specification options, editing 284

1872 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 specification, adding 280 event, viewing 145
specification, proposing 281 dependent
stakeholder notifications, setting 273 event, viewing 146
stakeholder tasks 253 Dependents page
stakeholder, adding 278 demand aggregation schedule 276
Stakeholders page 277 master agreement schedule 634
supplier record, creating 290 project schedule 222
supplier, adding 289 RFx schedule 439
supplier, proposing 291 Desktop Channel
template, creating 262 Summary page, field help 1399
template, editing 264 desktop channel
toolbar functions 305 setup 1399
type 1690 details
type, creating 1691 supplier, adding 788
type, editing 1692 Details page
viewing reports, initiator 313 vendor 785
viewing reports, stakeholder 314 vendor, field help 785
Demand Aggregation Document page 265 dictionary word, enterprise
Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page 269 creating 1530
field help 269 editing 1531
Demand Aggregation Header page 268 setup 1529
Demand Aggregation Line Items page 282 dictionary word, user
Demand Aggregation List page 254 creating 1748
Demand Aggregation Master Specification editing 1749
page 279 setup 1747
Demand Aggregation Proposed page 295 dimension data
Demand Aggregation Responses page 292 converting from master data 1796
Demand Aggregation RFx Settings page 288 dimension ID synonym map
Demand Aggregation Schedule Dependents creating 1816
page 276 editing 1817
Demand Aggregation Schedule page 271 importing 1818
Demand Aggregation Schedule Settings page 274 setup 1815
Demand Aggregation Schedule Tracking page 275 dimension ID synonym map set
Demand Aggregation Stakeholders page 277 creating 1822
denying editing 1823
auction, supplier request to participate 371 importing 1824
RFx, supplier request to participate 448 setup 1821
supplier modification request 829 dimensions
supplier registration request 827 cube profile, refreshing 1288
dependency Dimensions page
event, adding 140 Cube Profile 1291
event, editing 141 spend environment configuration 1791

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1873

directory document link
field help, Attributes Mapping page 1477 sourcing document, adding to 134
field help, Directory Configuration page 1470 document link definition
field help, Properties page 1475 creating 1611
directory configuration editing 1612
common authentication scenarios 1479 setup 1610
creating 1466 Document page
customizing the authentication mechanism 1493 demand aggregation 265
editing 1468 document report configuration
examples 1487 creating 1602
LDAP searching operations 1481 editing 1603
password management 1485 setup 1601
setup 1465 document security template
SSL support 1484 creating 1607
disclosure rules editing 1608
RFx supplier, adding 444 setup 1604
disclosure rules for suppliers document setup options 1593
RFx, field help 445 document toolbar
discussion approving document 127
Message dialog box, field help 110 rejecting document 127
message, creating 108 Document toolbar button
message, deleting 116 auction functions 387
message, viewing 114 master agreement functions 685
notification, subscribing 117 Project functions 237
notification, unsubscribing 117 RFx functions 543
reply, viewing 114 Document toolbar button functions 89
thread, creating in Workbench Global Discussions drilling
channel 55 to SRM Explorer detail data 1135
thread, replying 112 duplicating
topic, creating 106 sourcing document 91
topic, deleting 116 spend import action document 1802
Discussions toolbar button functions 105 SRM activity 811
display functions 70
display groups
RFx, assiging line items and suppliers to 560 E
disqualifying EAR file
auction bidder 366, 383 rebuilding for customization 1534
DOC Edit toolbar button functions 86
SRM Explorer, saving data as 1198 editing
Document Collaborator dialog box accounts payable type 1391
field help 132 activity 1397
Document Extract reports 1095 agreement 642

1874 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 alert 1767 dimension ID synonym map 1817
analysis reports setup 1306 dimension ID synonym map set 1823
analytic report bookmark analytic report directory configuration 1468
bookmark, editing 891 document link definition 1612
auction 322 document report configuration 1603
auction collaborators, Closed phase 333 document security template 1608
auction collaborators, open 332 entity 1388
auction material 358 event 1770
auction packaged line item 352 event terms template 1597
auction single line item 348 event, schedule 139
auction sub line item in packaged line item 356 extension definition 1449
auction template 327 extension reference type 1464
auction, line item start price 359 external category 1353
auction, maximum bid improvement 360 general ledger account 1385
auction, minimum bid improvement 360 geography 1394
auction, open 324 global discussion manager 1433
auction, suspended 324 group 1746
bill of materials in a BOM 599 Iframe configuration 1406
BOM 594 integration API configuration 1515
BOM material 601 internal category 1312
buy-side user account 1725 item in list 169
cache configuration 1533 list or picker query group 1273
category manager 1600 localized resource 1542
cluster configuration 1502 location 1376
collaborator role definition 1616 mail configuration 1526
company 1358 mail message template 1521
company information for company 1362 master agreement 616
contract clause 724 master agreement line item 654
contract document phase configuration 1713 master agreement material 655
contract generation phase 761 master agreement schedule 1631
cost center 1382 master agreement template 620
currency 1347 master agreement term 1628
currency conversion 1350 master agreement type 1625
custom query definition 1219 material 1315
dates, event 144 metric 1318
demand aggregation document 260 metric entry 1663
demand aggregation specification options 284 numbering table definition 1322
demand aggregation template 264 organizational unit for company 1366
demand aggregation type 1692 payment term 1328
dependency, event 141 plant 1379
dictionary word, enterprise 1531 process template, workflow 1576
dictionary word, user 1749 project 196

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1875

 project event 208 vendor scorecard definition 1659
project form component 1680 Workbench channel 1402
project schedule 206 Workbench Links channel link 26
project schedule component 1683 Workbench page in Setup 1411
project template 198 Workbench page in Workbench 10
reporting calendar 1331 Workbench page template 1415
RFx 423 XPress request 850
RFx BOM 496 XPress request specification library 1698
RFx information 1650 XPress request template 863
RFx library questions 1644 XPress request type 877
RFx line item allocations 535 XPress request, Internal Customer 840
RFx question 473 XPress self-registration configuration 1702
RFx question section group 480 Elements page
RFx response section, question scores and report 1300
costs 514 email notifications
RFx schedule 1647 demand aggregation stakeholder, setting 273
RFx system answer source 1641 RFx, setting 562
RFx table design 1654 enabling
RFx template 427 supplier to submit a registration request 826
RFx type 1638 entering
scheduled task type 1443 RFx collaborative question scores 520
security profile 1740 RFx line item allocations 535
service registration 1763 supplier scorecard scores 807
shared attachments for company 1372 enterprise
shared links for company 1369 theme, selecting 1567
sourcing document 87 enterprise dictionary word
spend environment configuration 1786 creating 1530
SRM Explorer calculation 1193 editing 1531
style set 1559 setup 1529
supplier contact 794 entity
supplier internal and external categories 791 creating 1387
supplier record 780 editing 1388
supplier relationship information 802 setup 1386
supplier scorecard 806 event
system information 1753 adding 138
system property 1512 creating 1769
time period 1334 creation, configuring in security profile 1742
unit of measure 1338 dates, adding 143
user account information 174 dates, editing 144
value list type 1341 dependency, adding 140
value list value 1341 dependency, editing 141
vendor management configuration 1665 dependency, viewing 145

1876 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 dependent, viewing 146 demand aggregation 269
editing 139, 1770 demand aggregation, field help 269
library, importing from 148 RFx 430
project, adding 207 RFx, field help 430
project, adding details 219 Expand to level
project, editing 208 SRM Explorer, using 1134
reminders, creating 147 expanding
setup 1768 SRM Explorer data item 1132
tracking 142 export
Workbench Calendar channel, selecting date to package, creating 1840
view 21 package, exporting 1841
Workbench Events channel, adding 40 tools, setup 1830
Workbench To Do List channel, linking to 45 export results
event specification setup 1590
RFx, adding 452 exported project information
event terms Microsoft Project, viewing in 214
RFx supplier, adding 446 exporting
event terms template export package 1841
creating 1596 line items as CSV file 162
editing 1597 list of sourcing documents as CSV file 163
setup 1595 list of sourcing documents as Excel file 163
event types list of sourcing documents as PDF file 164
Workbench Calendar channel, specifying 19 master data, setup 1838
Workbench Events channel, specifying 41 objects for migration 1842
Workbench To Do List channel, specifying 46 project schedule to Microsoft Excel 215
Events channel, Workbench project schedule to Microsoft Project 213
adding calendar event 40 project schedule, mapping table 216
linking to sourcing event for another date 39 project template 240
linking to sourcing event for current date 38 query results to Excel using workbook
specifying event types 41 template 1304
using 37 report as CSV file 158
Excel file report as Excel file 158
exporting list as 163 report as PDF file 157
report, exporting as 158 RFx questions to Excel file 584
RFx questions, exporting to 584 RFx template 547
RFx questions, importing from 455 SRM Explorer detail data to spreadsheet 1201
Exception Analysis reports 1027 supplier records 778
exception highlighting exporting system data 159
SRM Explorer 1144 Extension Attributes page
Exchange Rates page field help 1453
auction 334 extension definition 1459, 1460
auction, field help 334 creating 1447

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1877

 editing 1449 cluster configuration, Cluster Info page 1503
field help, Attributes page 1452 Collaborator Role page 1613
field help, Default Value page 1457, 1458 Contract Clause Header page 726
field help, Extension Attributes page 1453 Contract Document Phase Configuration
field help, Extension page 1451 page 1707
setup 1445 Contract Document Phase Header page 1709
Extension page Contract Document Template Header page 751
field help 1451 Contract Document Template Sections page 752
extension reference type Contract Document Type page 1704
creating 1463 Contract Generation Phases Header page 758
editing 1464 Contract Generation Tag Configuration Header
setup 1462 page 762
external category Contract Generation Variable Definition dialog
creating 1352 box 765
editing 1353 Contract Section Clauses page 742
setup 1351 Contract Section Header page 740
supplier, adding 790 converting master data, Action page 1798
supplier, editing 791 Cube Profile Dimension dialog box 1291
Cube Profile Dimensions page 1291
Cube Profile Measure dialog box 1293
F Cube Profile Measures page 1293
Favorite Sites channel, Workbench Cube Profile page 1289
changing height 49 Currency Conversion page 1348
opening new window for site 50 Daemons page, System Information 1760
selecting site 48 Default Value page, extension definition 1457,
using 47 1458
field help 853 Demand Aggregation Exchange Rates page 269
Accounting page, sourcing document 151 Desktop Channel Summary page 1399
Attachment Library Header page 1617 directories, Attributes Mapping page 1477
Attributes page 1452 directories, Directory Configuration page 1470
Auction Bid History page 381 directories, Properties page 1475
Auction Bidders page 361 discussion, Message dialog box 110
Auction Bidding page 378 Document Collaborator dialog box 132
Auction Exchange Rates page 334 Extension Attributes page 1453
Auction Header page 329 Extension page 1451
Auction Item Specifications dialog box 390 Line Item Specification in XPress Request
Auction Line Item Specifications page 389 Template dialog box 870
Auction Line Items page 344 Localized Resource Summary page 1543
Auction Schedule page 336 Logs page, System Information 1757
Auction Type page 1669 Mail Configuration Summary page 1527
Auction Weights page 374 mail message template 1522
Cache/DB page, System Information 1755 master agreement Contract Documents Details

1878 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 page 680 query definition, Chart Definition dialog
master agreement Contract Documents page 676 box 1242
master agreement Delivery Info page 691 query definition, Query page 1224
master agreement Item Specifications dialog query definition, Query Parameters dialog
box 693 box 1237
master agreement Line Item Specifications query definition, Query Results dialog box 1229
page 692 query definition, Result Fields page 1228
master agreement Performance Period Detail Query Group page 1275
dialog box 669 query group, Query Reference dialog box 1278
master agreement Pricing Model page 688 Report page 1299
master agreement Savings Value dialog box 673 RFx Delivery Info page 553
Master Agreement Schedule Library page 1629 RFx disclosure rules for suppliers 445
Master Agreement Terms Setup page 1626 RFx Exchange Rates page 430
Master Agreement Type page 1620 RFx General page 548
master agreement Vendor Entered Attributes RFx Groups page 559
page 695 RFx Item Specifications dialog box 555
Master Agreements Audit Detail dialog box 665 RFx Line Item Detail page 493
Master Agreements Audits page 663 RFx Line Item Specifications page 554
Master Agreements Header page 622 RFx Line Items page 488
Master Agreements Line Item Detail page 650 RFx Notifications page 561
Master Agreements Line Item Terms page 651 RFx Pricing Model page 550
Master Agreements Line Items page 644 RFx Question dialog box 474
Master Agreements Order Contacts dialog RFx Responses page 498
box 638 RFx Schedule page 432
Master Agreements Performance page 666 RFx Schedule Settings page 436
Master Agreements Performance Period dialog RFx Scoring page 518, 549
box 668 RFx Table Design page 1651
Master Agreements Schedule page 626 RFx Type page 1633
Master Agreements Schedule Settings page 630 RFx Vendor Entered Attributes page 557
Master Agreements Schedule Tracking page 632 Scheduled Task page 1434
Master Agreements Terms dialog box 662 scheduled task type, Data Import Monitor 1440
Master Agreements Terms page 656 Security Profile page 1736
Master Agreements Vendor Info page 635 Service Registration page, System
Numbering Table page 1323 Information 1754
page customization, Summary page 1549 Spend Analysis Configuration Actions page 1789
Process Template dialog box in workflow Spend Analysis Configuration Dimensions
definition 1574 page 1791
Project Schedule Tracking page 220 Spend Analysis Configuration Header page 1787
Project Type page 1675 SRM Activity dialog box 812
Projects Configurable Phase Definition Header Style Set Summary page 1560
page 1684 Summary page, packaged line item 353
Projects Configurable Phase Header page 1685 Summary page, single line item 349

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1879

 Toolbar Customization Summary page 1553 project component, editing 1680
units of measure 1335 project, adding 227
User Account, Account Management page 1729 project, creating a question 228
User Account, Account Properties page 1727 project, importing from the Project library 229
User Account, Security page 1731 project, responding to a question 230
Value List Value page 1339 form question
Vendor Details page 785 project, creating 228
Vendor Management Configuration page 1664 project, responding to 230
Vendors Header page 781 formatting
Vendors Scores page 803 line items for import from CSV file 160
Workbench Currency Exchange Rates channel 30 text in a text field 173
Workbench template Layout page 1423 Forms page
Workflow Definition Summary page 1570 project 226
Workflow Process Owner Summary page 1578 Full Bid report 405
XPress Request Header page 851
XPress Request Services Line Item dialog
box 853 G
XPress Request Template Header page 865 general document setup 1594
XPress Request Type page 878 general ledger account
file creating 1384
attachment, adding 102 editing 1385
format, importing spend data 1804 setup 1383
format, importing synonym map 1819 General page
format, importing synonym map set 1824 RFx Setup 548
file attachment container RFx, field help 548
setup 1568 generating
File Sharing channel, Workbench analytic report 889
using 56 contract document from a template 756
Filter Prompts page 1235 contract from a master agreement 699
filtering contract from auction or RFx 97
SRM Explorer blank or zero values 1155 query date parameter in SQL 1270
SRM Explorer, by pattern 1156 Geographical Spend reports, spend analysis 965
SRM Explorer, by relative time periods 1158 geography
finding creating 1393
SRM Explorer data 1136 editing 1394
finding. See searching, searching by, searching for. setup 1392
flyover spend and compliance reports 183
Workbench Calendar channel, viewing dates global discussion manager
in 22 creating 1432
form editing 1433
library, setup 1678 setup 1431
project component, creating 1679 Global Discussions channel, Workbench

1880 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 creating discussion thread 55 help 762
viewing message 54 contract generation variable configuration 762
Workbench contract section 740
Global Discussions channel, using 53 contract section, field help 740
Global Impact report 1049 demand aggregation 268
global line item rule functions 128
RFx Optimizer scenario, selecting 529 master agreements 622
global rules Master Agreements, field help 622
RFx Optimizer scenario, selecting 528 project 199
graph project configurable phase definition, field
SRM Explorer 1146 help 1684
SRM Explorer, line 1150 project configurable phase, field help 1685
graph format RFx 429
SRM Explorer, choosing 1125 spend environment configuration 1787
group vendor 781
creating 1745 Vendors, field help 781
editing 1746 XPress Request 851
setup 1744 XPress request template 865
group within a question section XPress request template, field help 865
RFx, adding 479 XPress request, field help 851
RFx, editing 480 height
Groups page Workbench Favorite Sites channel, changing 49
RFx Setup 559 hiding
RFx, field help 559 SRM Explorer data 1151
SRM Explorer, selected rows and columns 1162
SRM Explorer, unselected rows and
H columns 1163
header Workbench page 16
master agreement, adding information 625 High Fragmentation Sourcing Opportunity report,
header functions 128 Spend Analysis 1008
Header page horizontal bar chart
Attachment Library, field help 1617 SRM Explorer 1148
auction 329
auction, field help 329
BOM 595 I
contract clause 726 icon
contract clause, field help 726 Lookup, using 167
contract document template 751 Iframe configuration
contract document template, field help 751 creating 1405
contract generation phases 758 editing 1406
contract generation phases, field help 758 setup 1403
contract generation tag configuration, field import

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1881

 formatting line items for 160 initializing
tools, setup 1830 spend environment 1794
imported data results, viewing 1833 setup 1793
importing 1801, 1803, 1804, 1819, 1824 installing
agreements 1836 language packs 1834
attachment from library 101 integration
dimension ID synonym map 1818 setup 1588
dimension ID synonym map set 1824 integration API
event from library 148 setup 1589
extension definition 1460 integration API configuration
language packs, installing 1834 editing 1515
library component 153 setup 1514
line items 161 internal category
master data from a CSV file 1832 creating 1311
master data, setup 1831 editing 1312
project form from the Project library 229 setup 1310
project schedule from Microsoft Excel 212 supplier, adding 790
project schedule from Microsoft Project 210 supplier, editing 791
project schedule, mapping table 216 Internal Customer
project template 238 XPress request, creating 838
RFx questions from Excel file 455 XPress request, editing 840
RFx table-based question from library 471 XPress request, viewing closed 842
RFx template 545 XPress request, viewing current 841
specifications 161 internal review
spend data, setup 1800 XPress request 845
SRM activities from library 810 item
value list values from a CSV file 1832 list, deleting from 168
viewing results of 1833 list, editing in 169
importing data 1460 list, reordering 170
importing system data 159 Item Rules & Allocations page
Incomplete Scorecards report 1105 RFx 534
Increasing 1807 Item Specification dialog box
increasing auction Setup 390
benefit of spend data 1807 auction, field help 390
Industry News channel, Workbench master agreement Setup 693
using 67 master agreementx, field help 693
Information page RFx Setup 555
auction 342 RFx, field help 555
RFx 449 Item Spend versus Award report 1077
information section Item Standard Cost Savings Projections by Vendor
auction, adding 343 report 1081
RFx, adding 450 Item Standard Cost Savings Projections report 1079

1882 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

J auction, adding information 346
Japanese PDF support 1835 auction, adding packaged 351
auction, adding single 347
auction, awarding manually 385
K auction, editing packaged 352
auction, editing single 348
keyboard shorcuts 171
auction, reopening in Close Pending phase 394
demand aggregation response, approving
proposed 297
L
demand aggregation response, declining
language pack 1536 proposed 298
creating 1537 demand aggregation response, reviewing 296
language packs demand aggregation, adding 283
installing 1834 demand aggregation, declining to respond 286
launching demand aggregation, proposing 287
Auction Monitor 397 demand aggregation, responding 285
layout formatting for import from CSV file 160
Workbench page, setting 1419 importing from CSV file 161
Layout page master agreement, adding 648
Workbench template, field help 1423 master agreement, editing 654
LDAP searching operations, directory RFx Optimizer scenario, adding bundles 537
configuration 1481 RFx Optimizer scenario, deleting bundles 538
library RFx, adding 492
attachment, creating 1618 RFx, assigning to display groups 560
attachment, importing from 101 RFx, entering and editing allocations 535
attachment, setup 1617 RFx, specifying for new round 568
component, importing 153 Line Item Detail page
component, unlinking in template 154 master agreements 650
event, importing from 148 master agreements, field help 650
functions 152 RFx, field help 493
master agreement schedule 1629 Line Item dialog box
options 603 XPress Request, field help 853
project form, setup 1678 line item exporting as CSV file 162
project schedule, setup 1681 Line Item page
RFx information, setup 1648 RFx 493
RFx questions, setup 1642 line item specification
RFx schedule, setup 1645 auction, adding 391
RFx table design, setup 1651 master agreement, adding 694
XPress request, specification 1696 RFx, adding 556
line graph Line Item Specification in XPress Request Template
SRM Explorer 1150 dialog box
line item field help 870

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1883

Line Item Specifications page editing link 26
auction Setup 389 using 23
auction, field help 389 visiting a site 24
master agreement Setup 692 list
master agreement, field help 692 CSV file, exporting as 163
RFx Setup 554 Excel file, exporting as 163
RFx, field help 554 item, deleting 168
Line Item Terms page item, editing 169
master agreements 651 items, reordering 170
master agreements, field help 651 keyboard shortcuts, using 171
line item view PDF file, exporting as 164
auction, specifying 345 query group, defining default page layout 1284
master agreement, specifying 645 List page
RFx, specifying 490 auction 316
Line Items page BOM 592
auction 344 contract clause 722
auction, field help 344 contract document template 748
demand aggregation 282 contract document template sections 752
Master Agreement, field help 644 contract section 736
master agreements 644 demand aggregation 254
RFx 488 master agreements 610
RFx response 516 project 192
RFx, field help 488 RFx 416
link vendor 774
shared, adding to company 1368 XPress Request Type 874
shared, editing for company 1369 XPress Request, requests 848
Workbench Links channel, creating 25 XPress Request, templates 861
Workbench Links channel, editing 26 list, using 171
linking localized resource 1538
to Online Help in Workbench Tech Support creating in Setup 1540
channel 34 creating on the fly 1541
to Online Training in Workbench Tech Support editing 1542
channel 35 Summary page, field help 1543
Workbench Events channel, sourcing event for location
another date 39 creating 1375
Workbench Events channel, sourcing event for editing 1376
current date 38 setup 1374
Workbench Project Status Summary channel, locking
project 59 RFx, question or section for new round 567
Workbench To Do List channel, events 45 logging in
Links channel, Workbench as supplier contact 796
creating link 25 logging off of the SRM software 73

1884 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

logging onto the SRM software 71 additional term, adding 661
login Agreements page 639
as supplier contact, enabling 795 Audit Detail dialog box, field help 665
Logs page, System Information audit, adding 664
field help 1757 Audits page 663
Lookup icon Audits page, field help 663
using 167 canceling 686
canceling agreement 686
closing 687
M closing agreement 687
mail configuration contract document version, comparing 682
creating 1525 contract document version, controlling 678
editing 1526 Contract Documents Details page 680
setup 1524 Contract Documents page 676
Summary page, field help 1527 contract, generating 699
system property 1509 creating 612
mail message template creating from a template 614
creating 1519 Delivery Info page
customizing 1519 field help 691
editing 1521 Document toolbar button functions 685
setup 1516 editing 616
Mail Message Template Summary page field help, Contract Documents page 676, 680
field help 1522 field help, Performance Period Detail dialog
management configuration, editing 1665 box 669
managing field help, Savings Value dialog box 673
Workbench pages in Setup 1430 header information, adding 625
Workbench pages in Workbench 14 Header page 622
manual award Header page, field help 622
RFx 502 importing agreements 1836
manual awarding Item Specification box, field help 693
auction line items 385 Line Item Detail page 650
mapping table Line Item Detail page, field help 650
project schedule, importing and exporting 216 line item specification, adding 694
Master Agreeements Search channel, Workbench Line Item Specifications page
searching by supplier 29 field help 692
searching for master agreeement 28 Line Item Terms page 651
Master Agreement Line Item Terms page, field help 651
Change Phase toolbar button functions 720 line item view, specifying 645
master agreement line item, adding 648
Accounting page 675 line item, editing 654
adding contract document to 677 Line Items page 644
additional supplier contacts, adding 637 Line Items page, field help 644

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1885

 List page 610 Terms dialog box, field help 662
material, adding 649 Terms page 656
material, editing 655 Terms page, field help 656
Order Contacts dialog box, field help 638 Terms Setup page, field help 1626
penalty, adding 660 tiered pricing for line items, specifying 690
performance metric, adding 667 toolbar functions 683
Performance page 666 Type page, field help 1620
Performance page, field help 666 type, creating 1624
Performance Period dialog box, field help 668 type, editing 1625
Pricing Model page type, setup 1620
field help 688 Vendor Entered Attributes page
primary supplier contact, selecting 636 field help 695
rebate, adding 659 Vendor Info page 635
report, viewing 702 Vendor Info page, field help 635
RFx, creating 698 Workbench Master Agreements Search channel,
RFx, creating from 573 searching by supplier 29
savings metrics, adding 672 Workbench Master Agreements Search channel,
Schedule Dependents page 634 searching for 28
schedule event view, specifying 629 Master Agreement Advanced Search report 1094
Schedule Library page, field help 1629 Master Agreement Analysis reports 1086, 1093
schedule library, setup 1629 Master Agreement/Agreement Cover Page
Schedule page 626 report 715
Schedule page, field help 626 Master Agreement/Agreement Line Item Spend
Schedule page, Settings page 630 report 706
Schedule page, Tracking page 632 Master Agreement/Agreement Line Item Spend Sta-
Schedule Settings page, field help 630 tus report 718
Schedule Tracking page, field help 632 Master Agreement/Agreement Spend Detail
schedule, adding 628 report 704
schedule, creating 1630 Master Agreement/Agreement Spend Status
schedule, editing 1631 report 708
setup 1619 Master Agreement/Agreement Unit Price Error
Setup, Delivery Info page 691 Summary report 710
Setup, Item Specification dialog box 693 Master Agreement/Agreement Unit Price Errors
Setup, Line Item Specifications page 692 report 713
Setup, Pricing Model page 688 Master Agreements Accounting page 675
Setup, Vendor Entered Attributes page 695 Master Agreements Audits page 663
template, creating 618 Master Agreements Contract Documents Details
template, editing 620 page 680
term, adding 658 Master Agreements Contract Documents page 676
term, creating 1627 Master Agreements Header page 622
term, editing 1628 Master Agreements in my Cost Center(s)
term, setup 1626 report 1089

1886 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Master Agreements Line Item Detail page 650 Workbench Calendar channel, specifying 20
Master Agreements Line Item Terms page 651 measures
Master Agreements Line Items page 644 cube profile, refreshing 1288
Master Agreements List page 610 Measures page
Master Agreements Performance page 666 Cube Profile 1293
Master Agreements Schedule Dependents page 634 message
Master Agreements Schedule page 626 discussion, creating 108
Master Agreements Schedule Settings page 630 discussion, deleting 116
Master Agreements Schedule Tracking page 632 discussion, viewing 114
Master Agreements Search channel, Workbench Workbench Global Discussions channel,
using 27 viewing 54
Master Agreements Terms page 656 Workbench New Discussions channel,
Master Agreements Vendor Info page 635 viewing 52
Master Agreements with Low Performance - Sum- Message dialog box
mary report 1033 discussion, field help 110
Master Agreements with Overdue Audits Summary metric
report 1030 creating 1317
Master Agreements with Performance Metrics Due editing 1318
report 1032 master agreement, adding performance 667
master data master agreement, adding savings 672
converting to dimension data 1796 setup 1316
custom, creating 1344 metric entry
custom, setup 1343 creating 1662
setup 1309 editing 1663
Master Specification page metric entry, setup 1661
demand aggregation 279 Microsoft Excel
material exporting project schedule to 215
auction, adding 357 importing project schedule from 212
auction, editing 358 Microsoft Project
BOM, adding to 600 exporting project schedule to 213
BOM, editing in 601 importing project schedule from 210
creating 1314 project information, viewing 214
editing 1315 migration
master agreement, adding 649 objects, exporting for 1842
master agreement, editing 655 miscellaneous tasks 165
RFx, adding 494 Modification List page
setup 1313 vendor 828
Material Analysis report 1083 modules
Materials page moving between and within 75
BOM 597 moving
maximizing work area, SRM Explorer 1122 modules, between and within 75
maximum event number SRM Explorer category 1174

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1887

My Group’s Projects report 1053 Workbench Favorite Sites channel, new window
My Scorecards with Unsatisfactory Ratings for site 50
report 1103 XPress request for bidding 860
My Workflow Activities channel, Workbench optimization rules, RFx 531
using 61 Optimizer
viewing approval history 64 RFx scenario, adding line item bundles 537
My Workflow Approvals channel, Workbench RFx scenario, deleting auto-allocations for
approving document 63 selected line items 540
rejecting document 63 RFx scenario, deleting line item bundles 538
viewing current approvals 62 RFx scenario, deleting rules and auto-allocations
for line items 539
RFx scenario, selecting global line item rule 529
N RFx scenario, selecting global rules 528
navigating RFx scenario, selecting individual line item
SRM Explorer data 1123 rule 536
navigation bar RFx scenario, selecting special status rule 530
buttons, configuring in security profile 1741 RFX, performing scenario award 505
navigation functions 70 Order Contacts dialog box
New Discussions channel, Workbench Master Agreement, field help 638
using 51 organization
viewing message 52 spend and compliance reports 182
Notifications page organization information, setup 1354
RFx Setup 561 Organizational Spend reports, spend analysis 948
RFx, field help 561 organizational unit
numbering table definition creating 1364
creating 1320 editing 1366
editing 1322 overriding
setup 1319 RFx automatic question scores 521
token substitution 1324 RFx collaborative question scores 521
Numbering Table page
field help 1323
P
Packaged Line Item Summary page
O auction 353
object field help 353
migration, exporting for 1842 page
Online Help Workbench 6
Workbench Tech Support channel, linking 34 page customization
Online Training field help, Summary page 1549
Workbench Tech Support channel, linking 35 setup 1545
opening page element
customizing, field help 1549

1888 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

Page Layout page in 394
report 1301 contract clause, changing 732
page manager contract document, changing 124
setup 1429 contract document, configuration 1707
Workbench page, managing 1430 contract document, creating configuration 1711
Page Manager Summary page contract document, editing configuration 1713
Workbench 15 contract generation, adding 760
password contract generation, editing 761
changing 72 contract section, changing 746
password management, directory contract template, changing 757
configuration 1485 custom, adding as value list value 1342
payment term demand aggregation document, changing 306
creating 1327 demand aggregation response, changing 307
editing 1328 demand aggregation response, reverting for
setup 1326 stakeholder 309
PDF project configurable definition, field help 1684
SRM Explorer, saving data as 1196 project configurable, field help 1685
PDF file project, changing 124
exporting list as 164 project, configurable definition 1684
exporting report as 157 project, creating 1687
XPress request, creating 859 RFx, changing 586
PDF page layout, defining default for list or sourcing document, changing 123
report 1284 Phase Configuration page
penalty contract document phases, field help 1707
master agreement, adding 660 phase information
pending upgrade issue viewing for sourcing document 90
setup 1781 pie chart
viewing 1782 SRM Explorer 1149
performance metric plant
master agreement, adding 667 creating 1378
Performance page editing 1379
Master Agreement, field help 666 setup 1377
master agreements 666 preferences
Performance Period Detail dialog box RFx question, specifying 485
master agreement, field help 669 Preferences page
Performance Period dialog box RFx 484
Master Agreement, field help 668 Presentation view, SRM Explorer 1124
phase Preview page
auction, changing end time 341 RFx 483
Close Pending, closing auction line item in 395 Preview phase 359
Close Pending, reopening auction in 393 price components
Close Pending, reopening auction line item XPress request template, adding 872

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1889

Price Components page event, adding costs and resources 232
XPress request template 871 event, editing 208
Pricing Model page exporting template 240
master agreement Setup 688 form component, creating 1679
master agreement, field help 688 form component, editing 1680
RFx Setup 550 form library, setup 1678
RFx, field help 550 form question, creating 228
Print XPress for Internal Customers channel, Work- form, adding 227
bench form, importing from the Project library 229
using 65, 66 Forms page 226
printing Header page 199
RFx 570 importing template 238
RFx response 571 information exported to Microsoft Project,
RFx supplier preview 569 viewing 214
Process Analysis reports 1014 library schedule, setup 1681
process owner List page 192
workflow, associating with context 1581 phase definition, Header page, field help 1684
process owner, workflow phase, changing 124
creating 1579 phase, Header page, field help 1685
Process Template dialog box report, viewing 244
field help 1574 responding to a form question 230
process template, workflow schedule component, creating 1682
editing 1576 schedule component, editing 1683
processed message Schedule Dependents page 222
setup 1777 schedule event view, specifying 203
viewing 1778 Schedule page 201
Project Schedule Settings page 218
Actions toolbar button functions 241 Schedule Tracking page 220
Change Phase toolbar button functions 250 schedule, adding 205
Document toolbar button functions 237 schedule, editing 206
Report toolbar button functions 243 schedule, exporting to Microsoft Excel 215
project schedule, exporting to Microsoft Project 213
Accounting page 234 schedule, importing from Microsoft Excel 212
configurable phase definition 1684 schedule, importing from Microsoft Project 210
configurable phase, creating 1687 setup 1674
Costs page 231 sourcing document, creating from 242
costs, adding to contributing cost report 233 status, changing 200
creating 194 sub-project, adding 209
creating from a template 195 supplier
editing 196 record, creating in project 225
event details, adding 219 supplier, adding 224
event, adding 207 template, creating 197

1890 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 template, editing 198 Project Schedule Extract report 245
toolbar functions 235 Project Schedule page 201
type, creating 1677 Project Schedule Settings page 218
type, setup 1675 Project Schedule Tracking page 220
Vendors page 223 field help 220
Workbench Project Status Summary channel, Project Status Summary channel, Workbench
linking to 59 linking to project 59
Project Accounting page 234 using 58
Project Activity by Phase report 1056 viewing project task report 60
Project Contributing Cost report 247 Project Status Summary report 1019
Project Costs page 231 Project Summary Extract report 1100
Project Cycle Time Summary by External Category project task report
report 1023 Workbench Project Status Summary channel,
Project Cycle Time Summary by Internal Category viewing 60
report 1021 Project Type page
project event field help 1675
adding 207 Project Vendors page 223
costs and resources, adding 232 Projects by Sponsor report 1054
details, adding 219 Proposed page
editing 208 demand aggregation 295
project form proposing
adding 227 demand aggregation line item 287
importing from the Project library 229 demand aggregation specification 281
question, creating 228 demand aggregation supplier 291
question, responding to 230 publishing
Project Forms page 226 RFx collaborative question scores 577
Project Header page 199
Project library 229
Project List page 192 Q
project schedule qualifying
adding 205 auction bidder 367
costs and resources, adding 232 Quarterly Summary of Value report 1059
Dependents page 222 Queries page
editing 206 query group 1277
event details, adding 219 query
event view, specifying 203 exporting results to Excel using workbook
event, adding 207 template 1304
event, editing 208 setup 1210
mapping table, importing and exporting 216 Workbench channel 1426
Settings page 218 query date parameter
Tracking page 220 generaing in SQL 1270
Project Schedule Dependents page 222 query definition 1222, 1226, 1235, 1241

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1891

 advanced options 1247 RFx, adding contract clause 462
Chart Definition page 1241 RFx, adding table-based 468
common query patterns 1260 RFx, adding within an existing section 460
creating 1215 RFx, closing collaborative scoring 575
cube profile, creating 1217 RFx, editing 473
editing 1219 RFx, entering collaborative scores 520
field help, Chart Definition dialog box 1242 RFx, including supplier responses in contract
field help, Query page 1224 document 464
field help, Query Parameters dialog box 1237 RFx, locking for new round 567
field help, Query Results dialog box 1229 RFx, overriding automatic scores 521
field help, Result Fields page 1228 RFx, overriding collaborative scores 521
Filter Prompts page 1235 RFx, publishing collaborative scores 577
query date parameter in SQL, generating 1270 RFx, reopening collaborative scoring 576
Query page 1222 RFx, specifying preferences 485
Result Fields page 1226 RFx, specifying scoring methods 485
setup 1214 weights, adjusting RFx 487
stored procedures 1266 Question dialog box
testing 1221 RFx, field help 474
token subsitution 1251 Question Scores page
URL parameters 1248 RFx response 513
Query Definition Access List page 1246 Question Summary page
query display RFx 456
URL parameters affecting 1248 Questions page
query group RFx 453
default PDF page layout, defining 1284 Questions Summary page
editing for list or picker 1273 RFx response 512
field help, Query Reference dialog box 1278 queued message
Queries page 1277 setup 1775
Query Group page 1275 viewing 1776
setup 1272 quick reference
Query Group Access List page 1279 auction, conducting 414
Query Group page 1275 creating a contract document 768
field help 1275 RFx, setting up collaborative question
Query page 1222 scoring 588
query patterns for query definition 1260 workflow, setting up in a sourcing
question document 1584
project form, creating 228 workflow, working with 175
project form, responding to 230
RFx response section, editing scores and
costs 514 R
RFx section information, adding 482 rebate
RFx table-based, importing from library 471 master agreement, adding 659

1892 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

rebuilding auction in Close Pending phase 393
EAR file 1534 auction line item, Close Pending phase 394
recalculating RFx collaborative question scoring 576
RFx responses 509 reordering
record items in list 170
supplier, creating 779 Workbench page, channels in column 12
supplier, editing 780 replacing
recovery contract clause, globally 734
spend environment 1829 contract section, globally 738
refreshing SRM Explorer category 1171
cube profile, dimensions and measures 1288 reply
sourcing document 94 discussion, viewing 114
registered server replying
setup 1761 discussion thread 112
Registration List page report
vendor 825 Accounts Payable Type Spend 980
registration request Activity Analysis 1045
supplier, enabling to submit 826 advanced options 1280, 1303
reinstating Agreement Item Pricing by Organization and
RFx supplier to round 447 Plant 1073
Reject toolbar button functions 126 Agreement Item Pricing by Vendor and
rejecting Plant 1075
document in document toolbar 127 agreement, viewing 702
document in My Workflow Activities channel 63 Agreements in my Cost Center(s) 1090
relationship information Auction Summary Extract 1098
supplier, adding 801 auction, viewing 401
supplier, editing 802 Auctions and RFxs Completed by Month 1062
Relationships page Auctions with Insufficient Bidders 1028
vendor 800 Award Analysis 1071
reminder Bid Movement by Bidders 411
event, creating 147 Bid Movement by Line Item 408
Reminders page Bidder Status for an Auction Event 402
vendor 808 bookmarked, viewing 890
removing bookmarking 156
contract clause, globally 735 Category Project Status 1016
contract section, globally 739 Cost Center Agreements - Canceled or
spend data 1812 Closed 1092
spend data, setup 1811 Cost Center Master Agreements - Canceled or
spend environment 1814 Closed 1091
spend environment, setup 1813 Cost Center Spend 994
SRM Explorer category 1173 creating 1297
reopening Cycle Time 1015

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1893

 defining default page layout 1284 Process Analysis 1014
demand aggregation initiator, viewing 313 Project Activity by Phase 1056
demand aggregation stakeholder 314 Project Contributing Cost 247
Document Extract 1095 Project Cycle Time Summary by External
Exception Analysis 1027 Category 1023
exporting as CSV file 158 Project Cycle Time Summary by Internal
exporting as Excel file 158 Category 1021
exporting as PDF file 157 Project Schedule Extract 245
exporting query results to Excel using workbook Project Status Summary 1019
template 1304 Project Summary Extract 1100
Full Bid 405 project, adding contributing costs 233
functions 155 project, viewing 244
Global Impact 1049 Projects by Sponsor 1054
Incomplete Scorecards 1105 Quarterly Summary of Value 1059
Item Spend versus Award 1077 query results layout, tailoring 1281
Item Standard Cost Savings Projections 1079 RFx Award Summary by Vendor Status 1060
Item Standard Cost Savings Projections by RFx Cycle Time Summary by External
Vendor 1081 Category 1026
Master Agreement Advanced Search 1094 RFx Cycle Time Summary by Internal
Master Agreement Analysis 1086, 1093 Category 1025
master agreement, viewing 702 RFx Proposal Award Reasons Summary 1085
Master Agreement/Agreement Cover Page 715 RFx Specification IDs 583
Master Agreement/Agreement Line Item RFx Summary Extract 1096
Spend 706 RFx Summary Status 1068
Master Agreement/Agreement Line Item Spend RFx Vendor Award Summary Breakdown 1067
Status 718 RFx Vendor Response Progress 582
Master Agreement/Agreement Spend Detail 704 RFx Vendor Response Status 581
Master Agreement/Agreement Spend Status 708 RFxs with Insufficient Bidders 1029
Master Agreement/Agreement Unit Price Error Search All Automatic Renewal Master
Summary 710 Agreements 1066
Master Agreement/Agreement Unit Price setup 1210
Errors 713 Sourcing Analysis 1044
Master Agreements in my Cost Center(s) 1089 sourcing document, viewing 99
Master Agreements with Low Performance - Sourcing Recommendation 1007
Summary 1033 Spend Analysis 895
Master Agreements with Overdue Audits Spend Analysis, Commodity Spend 178, 896
Summary 1030 Spend Analysis, Compliance 1012
Master Agreements with Performance Metrics Spend Analysis, Cumulative Spend by Accounts
Due 1032 Payable Type 981
Material Analysis 1083 Spend Analysis, Cumulative Spend by
My Group’s Projects 1053 Commodity 897
My Scorecards with Unsatisfactory Ratings 1103 Spend Analysis, Cumulative Spend by Cost

1894 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Center 995 Time 970
Spend Analysis, Cumulative Spend by Spend Analysis, Spend by Organization Over
Geography 966 Time 953
Spend Analysis, Cumulative Spend by Spend Analysis, Spend by Selected Commodity
Organization 949 for Selected Geography 979
Spend Analysis, Cumulative Spend by Selected Spend Analysis, Spend by Selected Commodity
Accounts Payable Type 983 for Selected Organization 964
Spend Analysis, Cumulative Spend by Selected Spend Analysis, Spend by Selected Commodity
Commodity 899 for Selected Vendor 935, 1011
Spend Analysis, Cumulative Spend by Selected Spend Analysis, Spend by Selected Commodity
Cost Center 997 Over Selected Organization 907
Spend Analysis, Cumulative Spend by Selected Spend Analysis, Spend by Selected Commodity
Geography 968 Over Selected Time 903
Spend Analysis, Cumulative Spend by Selected Spend Analysis, Spend by Selected Cost Center
Organization 951 Over Time 1001
Spend Analysis, Cumulative Spend by Selected Spend Analysis, Spend by Selected Geography
Vendor 924 Over Selected Time 972
Spend Analysis, Cumulative Spend by Spend Analysis, Spend by Selected Organization
Vendor 922 Over Selected Time 955
Spend Analysis, Geographical Spend 965 Spend Analysis, Spend by Selected Vendor for
Spend Analysis, High Fragmentation Sourcing Selected Commodity 914, 943
Opportunity 1008 Spend Analysis, Spend by Selected Vendor for
Spend Analysis, Organizational Spend 948 Selected Organization 962
Spend Analysis, Spend by Accounts Payable Spend Analysis, Spend by Selected Vendor Over
Type Over Selected Time 987 Selected Time 928
Spend Analysis, Spend by Accounts Payable Spend Analysis, Spend by Vendor for
Type Over Time 985 Commodity 941
Spend Analysis, Spend by Commodity for Spend Analysis, Spend by Vendor for Commodity
Selected Geography 978 in Organization 919
Spend Analysis, Spend by Commodity for Spend Analysis, Spend by Vendor for Selected
Selected Organization 963 Accounts Payable Type 993
Spend Analysis, Spend by Commodity for Spend Analysis, Spend by Vendor for Selected
Selected Vendor 934, 1010 Commodity 913, 942
Spend Analysis, Spend by Commodity for Vendor Spend Analysis, Spend by Vendor for Selected
in Organization 940 Cost Center 1006
Spend Analysis, Spend by Commodity Over Spend Analysis, Spend by Vendor for Selected
Organization 905 Organization 961
Spend Analysis, Spend by Commodity Over Spend Analysis, Spend by Vendor for Selected
Time 901 Vendor Status 947
Spend Analysis, Spend by Cost Center Over Spend Analysis, Spend by Vendor Over
Time 999 Time 926
Spend Analysis, Spend by Geography Over Spend Analysis, Spend with Non-Approved

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1895

 Vendors Over Selected Time 946 Vendor Scorecard 820
Spend Analysis, Spend with Non-Approved Workbench channel 1426
Vendors Over Time 944 Workflow Analysis 1035
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Accounts Payable Workflow Analysis, User Workload 1036
Type 989 Workflow Analysis, Work Item Cycle Time by
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Commodity 909 User 1043
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Commodity in Workflow Analysis, Workflow Cycle Time 1039
Organization 915 Workflow Analysis, Workflows Completed by
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Cost Center 1003 Time Period 1037
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Geography 974 XPress Awards by Vendor and Category 884
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Organization 957 XPress Request Activity by Group 882
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Selected Accounts Report Display page
Payable Type 991 analysis 893
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Selected Report Elements page 1300
Commodity 911 Report Execution Task, creating 1437
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Selected Report page
Commodity in Organization 917 field help 1299
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Selected Cost setup 1299
Center 1004 report query results layout, tailoring 1281
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Selected Report Scheduled Cleanup Task, creating 1438
Geography 976 Report toolbar button
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Selected Project functions 243
Organization 959 reporting calendar
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Selected creating 1330
Vendor 932 editing 1331
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Selected Vendor in setup 1329
Organization 938 reporting considerations
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Vendor 930 spend analysis, setup 1825
Spend Analysis, Top Spend by Vendor in Reports Access List page 1302
Organization 936 Reports channel
Spend Analysis, Vendor Spend 920 Workbench, using 57
Spend Under Contract 1013 Reports Page Layout page 1301
SRM Activity by Vendor 823 Reports toolbar button
Summary of Vendor Activity (12 Months) 816 auction functions 400
supplier, viewing 815 RFx functions 578, 701
System Document Activity Summary 1047 Reports toolbar button functions 98
Top Category Awards by Period 1069 request
Top Supplier Awards by Period 1070 XPress, awarding 856
Unawarded Items with Volumes 1084 XPress, creating 849
Upcoming Master Agreements and XPress, editing 850
Agreements 1064, 1087 XPress, reviewing bids 855
Vendor Analysis 1102 Resolving 1803

1896 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

resource revision level
project event, adding 232 BOM, changing 596
responding RFx
demand aggregation document 266 Accounting page 497
demand aggregation line item 285 Actions toolbar button functions 563, 697
responding to a project form question 230 alternate currency, adding 431
response auction, creating 572
demand aggregation, reviewing 293 automatic question scores, overriding 521
Response Answers page award results, reviewing 523
RFx response 515 award, scenario, automatic awarding 505
Response Questions page award, scenario, manual awarding 502
RFx 511 award, simple 500
Responses Header page award, simple with master agreement 501
RFx 510 Awards Global Rules page 527
Responses page Awards page 522
demand aggregation 292 Awards, RFx Responses page 526
RFx 498 BOM, adding 495
restricted access, security profile 1743 BOM, editing 496
Result Fields page 1226 canceling 544
Return to Top icon 78 Change Phase toolbar button functions 585
returning collaborative question scores, entering 520
to top of sourcing document 78 collaborative question scores, overriding 521
to Workbench 74 collaborative question scores, publishing 577
reverting phase collaborative question scoring, closing 575
demand aggregation response, for collaborative question scoring, reopening 576
stakeholder 309 contract, generating 97
review creating 421
XPress request, internal 845 creating from a template 419
reviewing creating from demand aggregation document 312
auction bid history 380 Delivery Info page
demand aggregation response 293 field help 553
demand aggregation response, line items 296 disclosure rules for suppliers, field help 445
demand aggregation response, proposed Document toolbar button functions 543
specifications 299 editing 423
demand aggregation response, proposed email notifications, setting 562
suppliers 302 event specification, adding 452
RFx award results 523 Exchange Rates page 430
XPress request bids 855 exporting template 547
revising General page
contract clause for versioning 731 field help 548
contract section for versioning 745 group within a question section, adding 479
contract template for versioning 755 group within a question section, editing 480

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1897

 Groups page rule 536
field help 559 Optimizer scenario, selecting special status
Header page 429 rule 530
importing template 545 phase, changing 586
information library, setup 1648 Preferences page 484
Information page 449 Preview page 483
information section, adding 450 Pricing Model page
information, creating 1649 field help 550
information, editing 1650 printing 570
Item Rules and Allocations page 534 Question dialog box, field help 474
Item Specification box, field help 555 Question Summary page 456
line item allocations, entering and editing 535 question weights, adjusting 487
Line Item Detail page 493 question within an existing section, adding 460
Line Item Detail page, field help 493 question, adding contract clause 462
line item specification, adding 556 question, adding table-based 468
Line Item Specifications page question, editing 473
field help 554 question, importing table-based from library 471
line item view, specifying 490 question, including supplier responses in contract
line item, adding 492 document 464
Line Items page 488 question, specifying preferences 485
Line Items page, field help 488 question, specifying scoring methods 485
line items, assigning to display groups 560 questions library, setup 1642
line items, specifying for new round 568 Questions page 453
List page 416 questions, creating in library 1643
master agreement, creating 573 questions, editing in library 1644
master agreement, creating from 698 report, Specification IDs 583
material, adding 494 report, Vendor Response Progress 582
Notifications page report, Vendor Response Status 581
field help 561 Reports toolbar button functions 578, 701
optimization rules 531 Response Questions page 511
Optimizer award results, comparing 524 Responses Header page 510
Optimizer scenario, adding line item bundles 537 Responses page 498
Optimizer scenario, deleting auto-allocations for round, creating new 564
selected line items 540 round, locking question or section 567
Optimizer scenario, deleting line item Schedule Dependents page 439
bundles 538 schedule event view, specifying 435
Optimizer scenario, deleting rules and schedule library, setup 1645
auto-allocations for line items 539 Schedule page 432
Optimizer scenario, selecting global line item Schedule page, field help 432
rule 529 Schedule page, Settings page 436
Optimizer scenario, selecting global rules 528 Schedule page, Tracking page 438
Optimizer scenario, selecting individual line item Schedule Settings page, field help 436

1898 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 schedule, adding 434 type, creating 1637
schedule, creating 1646 type, editing 1638
schedule, editing 1647 type, setup 1633
Scoring page 518 Vendor Entered Attributes page
field help 549 field help 557
Section Info page 481 vendor-entered attribute, adding 558, 696
section information for a question, adding 482 Vendors page 440
section weights, adjusting 454 RFx Accounting page 497
setting up collaborative question scoring, quick RFx Award Summary by Vendor Status report 1060
reference 588 RFx Awards Global Rules page 527
setup 1632 RFx Awards page 522
Setup, Delivery Info page 553 RFx Awards RFx Responses page 526
Setup, General page 548 RFx Cycle Time Summary by External Category
Setup, Groups page 559 report 1026
Setup, Item Specification dialog box 555 RFx Cycle Time Summary by Internal Category
Setup, Line Item Specifications page 554 report 1025
Setup, Notifications page 561 RFx Event List page 416
Setup, Pricing Model page 550 RFx Exchange Rates page 430
Setup, Scoring page 549 field help 430
Setup, Vendor Entered Attributes page 557 RFx Header page 429
Specs page 451 RFx Information page 449
Summary page for awarding 525 RFx Line Item Detail page 493
supplier disclosure rules, adding 444 RFx Line Item Rules & Allocations page 534
supplier event terms, adding 446 RFx Line Items page 488
supplier preview, printing 569 RFx Optimizer
supplier record, creating 442 award results, comparing 524
supplier request to participate, accepting 448 basics for using 504
supplier request to participate, denying 448 RFx Preferences page 484
supplier, assigning to display groups 560 RFx Preview page 483
supplier, reinstating to round 447 RFx Proposal Award Reasons Summary
suppliercontact, adding 441 report 1085
suppliers, specifying for round 566 RFx question
system answer source, creating 1640 exporting to Excel file 584
system answer source, editing 1641 importing from Excel file 455
system answer source, setup 1639 RFx Question Summary page 456
table design library, setup 1651 RFx Questions page 453
table design, creating 1653 RFx report
table design, editing 1654 viewing 579
template, creating 425 RFx response
template, editing 427 Answers page 515
tiered pricing for line items, specifying 552 firm, accepting 517
toolbar functions 541 Line Items page 516

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1899

 printing 571 RFx, locking question or section 567
question scores and costs, editing 514 RFx, reinstating supplier 447
Questions Scores page 513 RFx, specifying line items 568
Questions Summary page 512 RFx, specifying suppliers 566
recalculating 509 row and column size
RFx Response Answers page 515 SRM Explorer, adjusting 1121
RFx Response Line Items page 516 rules
RFx Response Questions page 511 RFx optimization 531
RFx Response Questions Scores page 513
RFx Response Questions Summary page 512
RFx Responses Header page 510 S
RFx Responses page 498 sample directory configurations 1487
RFx Responses page, field help 498 Save toolbar button functions 86
RFx Schedule Dependents page 439 saving
RFx Schedule page 432 sourcing document 87
RFx Schedule Settings page 436 sourcing document as template 92
RFx Schedule Tracking page 438 SRM Explorer data 1195
RFx Scoring page 518 SRM Explorer data as Adobe PDF 1196
field help 518 SRM Explorer data as comma-separated
RFx Section Info page 481 values 1200
RFx Settings page SRM Explorer data as Microsoft Excel 1197
demand aggregation 288 SRM Explorer data as Microsoft Word 1198
RFx Specification IDs report 583 SRM Explorer data as tab-separated values 1199
RFx Specs page 451 savings metrics
RFx Summary Extract report 1096 master agreement, adding 672
RFx Summary page for awarding 525 Savings page
RFx Summary Status report 1068 agreements 671
RFx Table Design page Savings Value dialog box
field help 1651 master agreement, field help 673
RFx Type page, field help 1633 schedule
RFx Vendor Award Summary Breakdown auction, adding 340
report 1067 demand aggregation, adding 272
RFx Vendor Response Progress report 582 event, adding 138
RFx Vendor Response Status report 581 event, editing 139
RFx Vendors page 440 master agreement, adding 628
RFxs with Insufficient Bidders report 1029 project library, setup 1681
rights project, adding 205
collaborative scoring 519 project, editing 206
round project, exporting to Microsoft Excel 215
demand aggregation, creating final 311 project, exporting to Microsoft Project 213
demand aggregation, creating new 310 project, importing from Microsoft Excel 212
RFx, creating new 564 project, importing from Microsoft Project 210

1900 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 RFx, adding 434 creating Data Import Monitor Task 1439
schedule component creating Report Execution Task 1437
project, creating 1682 creating Report Scheduled Cleanup Task 1438
project, editing 1683 setup 1435
schedule event view Scheduled Task page
master agreement, specifying 629 field help 1434
RFx, specifying 435 scheduled task type
specifying 137 Data Import Monitor, field help 1440
schedule functions, general 136 editing 1443
Schedule Library page setup 1442
master agreement, field help 1629 score
Schedule page supplier, entering in scorecard 807
auction 336 scorecard
auction, field help 336 supplier, adding 804
demand aggregation 271 supplier, editing 806
demand aggregation, Dependents page 276 supplier, entering scores 807
demand aggregation, Settings page 274 Scorecards page
demand aggregation, Tracking page 275 vendor 803
functions 136 Scores page
master agreement, Dependents page 634 vendor, field help 803
Master Agreement, field help 626 scoring methods
master agreement, Settings page 630 RFx question, specifying 485
master agreement, Tracking page 632 Scoring page
master agreements 626 RFx 518
project 201 RFx Setup 549
project, Dependents page 222 RFx, field help 518, 549
project, Settings page 218 script definition
project, Tracking page 220 setup 1591
RFx 432 Search All Automatic Renewal Master Agreements
RFx, Dependents page 439 report 1066
RFx, field help 432 searching
RFx, Settings page 436 all vendors 777
RFx, Tracking page 438 contract components that use a clause 733
XPress request template 867 contract components that use a section 747
Schedule Settings page documents that use a contract clause 733
Master Agreement, field help 630 documents that use a contract section 747
RFx, field help 436 Workbench Master Agreements Search channel,
Schedule Tracking page for master agreement 28
Master Agreement, field help 632 Workbench Master Agreements Search channel,
project, field help 220 master agreements by supplier 29
scheduled task 1434 searching for
creating 1436 inactive vendors 777

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1901

 preliminary vendors 777 experience level in SRM Explorer 1114
sourcing document 166 master agreement supplier contact 636
vendors from a selected list 777 RFx Optimizer scenario global line item rule 529
vendors on purchasing hold 777 RFx Optimizer scenario global rules 528
section RFx Optimizer scenario individual line item
contract, adding a clause to 743 rule 536
contract, adding to a template 753 RFx Optimizer scenario special status rule 530
contract, creating 737 SRM Explorer data 1127
contract, removing globally 739 theme for enterprise 1567
contract, replacing globally 738 Workbench Calendar channel, date to view
contract, revising for versioning 745 events 21
contract, searching for documents and Workbench Currency Exchange Rates channel,
components 747 base currency 31
contract, toolbar functions 744 Workbench Favorite Sites channel, site 48
RFx question, adding information 482 selectivity of date range report parameters
RFx, adding question 460 spend analysis reporting considerations 1826
RFx, locking for new round 567 self-registration
weights, adjusting RFx 454 XPress configuration 1700
Section Info page XPress configuration, creating 1701
RFx 481 XPress configuration, editing 1702
Sections page service registration
contract document template, field help 752 creating 1762
security editing 1763
setup 1716 setup 1761
Security page Service Registration page, System Information
User Account, field help 1731 field help 1754
vendor 799 setting
security profile demand aggregation stakeholder
configuring calendar event creation 1742 notifications 273
configuring navigation bar buttons 1741 RFx email notifications 562
creating 1738 Workbench page layout 1419
editing 1740 setting preferences
restricting access 1743 SRM Explorer, Bar Chart 1118
setup 1733 SRM Explorer, Columns 1117
Security Profile page SRM Explorer, data cube 1113
field help 1736 SRM Explorer, general 1115
security profile usage summary SRM Explorer, Line Graph 1120
setup 1779 SRM Explorer, Pie Chart 1119
viewing 1780 SRM Explorer, Rows 1116
selecting setting up
currency in sourcing document 172 CPO Central 1421
data in SRM Explorer data cube 1111 Settings page

1902 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 demand aggregation schedule 274 Workbench page 1417
master agreement schedule 630 shortcuts
project schedule 218 keyboard, using in a list 171
RFx schedule 436 showing
Setup 1203 SRM Explorer cell values with % of total 1143
accounting information 1354 SRM Explorer data as & of column total 1140
accounts 1716 SRM Explorer data as & of grand total 1142
administrative reports 1764 SRM Explorer data as & of row total 1141
auctions 1668 SRM Explorer data as cell values 1139
change password 1721 SRM Explorer data, highest 10 1167
configuration 1444 SRM Explorer data, lowest 10 1167
contexts 1207 SRM Explorer totals 1131
contract documents 1703 Workbench page 16
contract generation 1688 Single Line Item Summary page
demand aggregation 1689 auction 349
document security templates 1604 field help 349
export tools 1830 site
general document 1594 Workbench Favorite Sites channel, opening new
import tools 1830 window for 50
integration 1588 Workbench Favorite Sites channel, selecting
master agreements 1619 for 48
master data 1309 Workbench Links channel, visiting from 24
organization information 1354 sorting
overview 1205 SRM Explorer data 1165
projects 1674 SRM Explorer data, highest to lowest 1166
queries 1210 SRM Explorer data, lowest to highest 1166
reports 1210 SRM Explorer, custom 1168
RFx 1632 table column 79
scheduled tasks 1434 Sourcing Analysis reports 1044
security 1716 sourcing document 172
spend environment management 1783 accounting information, adding 150
system administration 1715 approver, adding 130
system management 1750 canceling 93
user interface 1535 change history, viewing 135
vendor 1655 changes, undoing 87
Workbench 1398 closing 95
workflow 1569 closing with Close icon 87
XPress 1693 collaborator, adding 129
setup creating from within a project 242
Workbench page 1407 CSV file, exporting list as 163
Workbench template 1408 document link, adding 134
sharing duplicating 91

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1903

 editing 87 RFx line item view 490
Excel file, exporting list as 163 RFx question preferences 485
list, viewing 76 RFx question scoring methods 485
PDF file, exporting list as 164 RFx schedule event view 435
phase, changing 123 RFx suppliers for round 566
refreshing 94 RFx, line item tiered pricing 552
report, viewing 99 RFx, line items for new round 568
returning to top 78 schedule event view 137
saving 87 Workbench Calendar channel, event types 19
searching for 166 Workbench Calendar channel, maximum event
template, saving as 92 number 20
viewing 77 Workbench Events channel, event types 41
workflow, working with 175 Workbench To Do List channel, event types 46
Sourcing Recommendation reports 1007 Specs page
special status rule RFx 451
RFx Optimizer scenario, selecting 530 Spend 1809
specification spend analysis
auction, line item, adding 391 Accounts Payable Type Spend reports 980
demand aggregation options, editing 284 Commodity Spend reports 178, 896
demand aggregation response, approving Compliance reports 1012
proposed 300 Cost Center Spend reports 994
demand aggregation response, declining Cumulative Spend by Accounts Payable Type
proposed 301 report 981
demand aggregation response, reviewing Cumulative Spend by Commodity report 897
proposed 299 Cumulative Spend by Cost Center report 995
demand aggregation, adding 280 Cumulative Spend by Geography report 966
demand aggregation, proposing 281 Cumulative Spend by Organization report 949
importing from CSV file 161 Cumulative Spend by Selected Accounts Payable
master agreement, line item, adding 694 Type report 983
RFx, line item, adding 556 Cumulative Spend by Selected Commodity
XPress request template, adding 869 report 899
XPress request, creating library 1697 Cumulative Spend by Selected Cost Center
XPress request, editing library 1698 report 997
XPress request, library 1696 Cumulative Spend by Selected Geography
Specifications page report 968
XPress request template 868 Cumulative Spend by Selected Organization
specifying report 951
auction line item view 345 Cumulative Spend by Selected Vendor report 924
master agreement line item view 645 Cumulative Spend by Vendor report 922
master agreement schedule event view 629 Geographical Spend reports 965
master agreement, line item tiered pricing 690 High Fragmentation Sourcing Opportunity
project schedule event view 203 report 1008

1904 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 Organizational Spend reports 948 Commodity report 914, 943
reporting considerations 1825 Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected
reporting considerations, providing custom Organization report 962
attributes of spend data 1828 Spend by Vendor for Commodity in Organization
reporting considerations, selectivity of date range report 919
report parameters 1826 Spend by Vendor for Commodity report 941
Sourcing Recommendation reports 1007 Spend by Vendor for Selected Accounts Payable
Spend by Accounts Payable Type Over Selected Type report 993
Time report 987 Spend by Vendor for Selected Commodity
Spend by Accounts Payable Type Over Time report 913, 942
report 985 Spend by Vendor for Selected Cost Center
Spend by Commodity for Selected Geography report 1006
report 978 Spend by Vendor for Selected Organization
Spend by Commodity for Selected Organization report 961
report 963 Spend by Vendor for Selected Vendor Status
Spend by Commodity for Selected Vendor report 947
report 934, 1010 Spend by Vendor Over Time report 926
Spend by Commodity for Vendor in Organization Spend with Non-Approved Vendors Over
report 940 Selected Time report 946
Spend by Commodity Over Organization Spend with Non-Approved Vendors Over Time
report 905 report 944
Spend by Commodity Over Time report 901 Top Spend by Accounts Payable Type report 989
Spend by Cost Center Over Time report 999 Top Spend by Commodity in Organization
Spend by Geography Over Time report 970 report 915
Spend by Organization Over Time report 953 Top Spend by Commodity report 909
Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Top Spend by Cost Center report 1003
Geography report 979 Top Spend by Geography report 974
Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Top Spend by Organization report 957
Organization report 964 Top Spend by Selected Accounts Payable Type
Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected report 991
Vendor report 935, 1011 Top Spend by Selected Commodity in
Spend by Selected Commodity Over Selected Organization report 917
Organization report 907 Top Spend by Selected Commodity report 911
Spend by Selected Commodity Over Selected Top Spend by Selected Cost Center report 1004
Time report 903 Top Spend by Selected Geography report 976
Spend by Selected Cost Center Over Time Top Spend by Selected Organization report 959
report 1001 Top Spend by Selected Vendor in Organization
Spend by Selected Geography Over Selected report 938
Time report 972 Top Spend by Selected Vendor report 932
Spend by Selected Organization Over Selected Top Spend by Vendor in Organization report 936
Time report 955 Top Spend by Vendor report 930
Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Vendor Spend reports 920

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1905

Spend Analysis Configuration Actions page, field Spend by Selected Commodity Over Selected Orga-
help 1789 nization report, Spend Analysis 907
Spend Analysis Configuration Dimensions page, Spend by Selected Commodity Over Selected Time
field help 1791 report, Spend Analysis 903
Spend Analysis Configuration Header page, field Spend by Selected Cost Center Over Time report,
help 1787 Spend Analysis 1001
Spend Analysis reports 895 Spend by Selected Geography Over Selected Time
spend and compliance report, Spend Analysis 972
reports by accounts payable type 184 Spend by Selected Organization Over Selected Time
reports by commodity 178, 896 report, Spend Analysis 955
reports by cost center 185, 186 Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Commodity
reports by geography 183 report, Spend Analysis 914, 943
reports by organization 182 Spend by Selected Vendor for Selected Organization
reports by vendor 180 report, Spend Analysis 962
Spend by Accounts Payable Type Over Selected Spend by Selected Vendor Over Selected Time
Time report, Spend Analysis 987 report, Spend Analysis 928
Spend by Accounts Payable Type Over Time report, Spend by Vendor for Commodity in Organization
Spend Analysis 985 report, Spend Analysis 919
Spend by Commodity for Selected Geography Spend by Vendor for Commodity report, Spend
report, Spend Analysis 978 Analysis 941
Spend by Commodity for Selected Organization Spend by Vendor for Selected Accounts Payable
report, Spend Analysis 963 Type report, Spend Analysis 993
Spend by Commodity for Selected Vendor report, Spend by Vendor for Selected Commodity report,
Spend Analysis 934, 1010 Spend Analysis 913, 942
Spend by Commodity for Vendor in Organization Spend by Vendor for Selected Cost Center report,
report, Spend Analysis 940 Spend Analysis 1006
Spend by Commodity Over Organization report, Spend by Vendor for Selected Organization report,
Spend Analysis 905 Spend Analysis 961
Spend by Commodity Over Time report, Spend Spend by Vendor for Selected Vendor Status report,
Analysis 901 Spend Analysis 947
Spend by Cost Center Over Time report, Spend Spend by Vendor Over Time report, Spend
Analysis 999 Analysis 926
Spend by Geography Over Time report, Spend spend data 1801
Analysis 970 importing 1801, 1803
Spend by Organization Over Time report, Spend importing, file format 1804
Analysis 953 importing, setup 1800
Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Geogra- increasing benefit 1807
phy report, Spend Analysis 979 invalid dimension IDs, resolving 1803
Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Organi- removing 1812
zation report, Spend Analysis 964 removing, setup 1811
Spend by Selected Commodity for Selected Vendor spend date format 1809
report, Spend Analysis 935, 1011 spend data, file format 1804

1906 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

spend data, resolving invalid dimension IDs 1803 adjusting row and column size 1121
spend dimensions Analysis view 1124
updating 1796 arranging data categories 1170
updating, setup 1795 calculated rows and columns 1177
spend environment calculating % growth 1183
backup and recovery 1829 calculating % of total 1186
configuration, Actions page field help 1789 calculating average 1180
configuration, Dimensions page field help 1791 calculating difference 1181
configuration, editing 1785 calculating intersection 1190
configuration, Header page field help 1787 calculating maximum 1185
configuration, setup 1784 calculating minimum 1184
initialization, setup 1793 calculating performance index 1191
initializing 1794 calculating ratio 1182
management, setup 1783 calculating sum 1179
removing 1814 calculating sum over relative time periods 1187
removing, setup 1813 calculating union 1189
spend environment configuration canceling a filter
editing 1786 canceling
spend facts SRM Explorer filter 1161
updating 1801 canceling hiding 1164
updating, setup 1800 canceling sorting
spend import action document canceling
duplicating 1802 SRM Explorer, sorting 1169
spend Spend by Selected Vendor Over Selected charts 1146
Time report 928 choosing format 1125
Spend Under Contract report 1013 data categories, comparing 1126
Spend with Non-Approved Vendors Over Selected data display, refreshing
Time report, Spend Analysis 946 refreshing
Spend with Non-Approved Vendors Over Time SRM Explorer data display 1137
report, Spend Analysis 944 data item, collapsing
SRM activity collapsing
duplicating 811 SRM Explorer data item 1133
importing from library 810 data item, expanding 1132
supplier record, adding to 809 data reporting and analysis 1109
SRM Activity by Vendor report 823 data, finding 1136
SRM Activity dialog box data, selecting 1127
field help 812 data, showing as % of column total 1140
SRM activity library 1666, 1667 data, showing as % of grand total 1142
creating 1667 data, showing as % of row total 1141
importing from 810 data, showing as cell values 1139
SRM Explorer 1107, 1129 deleting calculation 1194
adding category 1172 detail data, drilling through to 1135

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1907

 editing a filter setting General preferences 1115
editing setting Line Graph preferences 1120
SRM Explorer filter 1160 setting Pie Chart preferences 1119
editing calculation 1193 setting preferences in data cube 1113
exception highlighting 1144 setting Rows preferences 1116
Expand to level, using 1134 showing cell values with % of total 1143
exporting detail data to spreadsheet 1201 showing highest 10 1167
filter criteria showing lowest 10 1167
filter criteria sorting data 1165
SRM Explorer 1154 sorting highest to lowest 1166
filtering by pattern 1156 sorting lowest to highest 1166
filtering by relative time periods 1158 sorting, custom 1168
filtering by value swapping rows and columns 1176
filtering switching two categoies 1175
SRM Explorer, by value 1153 tables 1138
filtering data 1151 totals, showing 1131
filtering out blank or zero values 1155 undoing mistakes in data cube 1112
graphs 1146 vertical bar chart 1147
hiding data viewing data 1123
filtering SSL support, directory configuration 1484
SRM Explorer data 1151 staggered line item
hiding selected rows and columns 1162 auction, reopening in Close Pending phase 394
hiding unselected rows and columns 1163 stakeholder
horizontal bar chart 1148 demand aggregation notifications, setting 273
line graph 1150 demand aggregation, adding 278
maximizing work area 1122 Stakeholders page
moving category 1174 demand aggregation 277
navigating data 1123 status
pie chart 1149 project, changing 200
Presentation view 1124 stored procedure
removing category 1173 query definition 1266
replacing category 1171 style configuration
saving as Adobe PDF 1196 creating 1563
saving as comma-separated values 1200 setup 1562
saving as Microsoft Excel 1197 style set
saving as Microsoft Word 1198 creating 1558
saving as tab-separated values 1199 editing 1559
saving data 1195 field help, Summary page 1560
selecting data in data cube 1111 setup 1557
selecting experience level 1114 sub line item
setting Bar Chart preferences 1118 auction, adding to packaged line item 355
setting Columns preferences 1117 auction, editing in packaged line item 356

1908 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

sub-project project, adding 224
adding to a project 209 record, creating 779
subscribing record, creating in demand aggregation 290
discussion notification 117 record, editing 780
Summary of Vendor Activity (12 Months) registration request, accepting 827
report 816 registration request, denying 827
Summary page registration request, enabling to submit 826
analysis bookmark 892 relationship information, adding 801
auction, Packaged Line Item 353 relationship information, editing 802
auction, Single Line Item 349 report, viewing 815
Desktop Channel, field help 1399 RFx disclosure rules, field help 445
Localized Resource, field help 1543 RFx, accepting request to participate in 448
mail configuration, field help 1527 RFx, adding disclosure rules 444
Mail Message Template, field help 1522 RFx, adding event terms 446
packaged line item, field help 353 RFx, assigning to display groups 560
RFx, awarding 525 RFx, creating record 442
single line item, field help 349 RFx, denying request to participate in 448
Workbench 11 RFx, printing preview 569
supplier RFx, specifying for round 566
addresses, adding 784 scorecard, adding 804
auction, accepting request to participate in 371 scorecard, editing 806
auction, denying request to participate in 371 scorecard, entering scores 807
contact, adding 793 supplier contact impersonation
contact, adding to RFx 441 enabling and disabling 795
contact, enabling login as 795 Supplier Discovery channel, Workbench
contact, logging in as 796 using 68
demand aggregation response, approving supplier record
proposed 303 creating 779
demand aggregation response, declining SRM activity, adding 809
proposed 304 suspending
demand aggregation response, reviewing 302 auction bidder 364
demand aggregation, adding 289 auction bidding activity 368
demand aggregation, proposing 291 swapping
details, adding 788 SRM Explorer rows and columns 1176
exporting 778 switching
internal and external categories, adding 790 SRM Explorer categories 1175
internal and external categories, editing 791 synonym map
master agreement contacts, adding 637 importing, file format 1819
master agreement, selecting primary contact synonym map set
for 636 importing, file format 1824
modification request, accepting 829 synonym map set, file format 1824
modification request, denying 829 synonym map, file format 1819

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1909

system administration options 1715 Tech Support channel, Workbench
System Document Activity Summary report 1047 contacting technical support 36
System Information linking to Online Help 34
Cache/DB page, field help 1755 linking to Online Training 35
Daemons page, field help 1760 using 33
Logs page, field help 1757 technical support
Service Registration page, field help 1754 Workbench Tech Support channel, contacting 36
system information template
editing 1753 auction, creating 325
setup 1751 auction, creating from 320
viewing 1752 auction, editing 327
system management contract document, creating 749
setup 1750 contract document, toolbar functions 754
system property contract, adding a section to 753
creating 1511 contract, revising for versioning 755
editing 1512 demand aggregation document, creating
mail configuration 1509 from 258
setup 1508 demand aggregation, creating 262
viewing 1513 demand aggregation, editing 264
system setup options exporting project 240
Setup exporting RFx 547
system 1209 generating a contract document from 756
system toolbar 1544 importing project 238
importing RFx 545
library component, unlinking in 154
T master agreement, creating 618
table master agreement, creating from 614
SRM Explorer 1138 master agreement, editing 620
table column project, creating 197
sorting 79 project, creating from 195
Table Design page project, editing 198
RFx, field help 1651 RFx, creating 425
table format RFx, creating from 419
SRM Explorer, choosing 1125 RFx, editing 427
table-based question sourcing document, saving as 92
RFx, adding 468 XPress request, Accounting page 873
RFx, importing from library 471 XPress request, adding price components 872
tailoring XPress request, adding specifications 869
report query results layout 1281 XPress request, creating 862
tasks XPress request, editing 863
demand aggregation, initiator 252 XPress request, Header page 865
demand aggregation, stakeholder 253 XPress request, Price Components page 871

1910 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 XPress request, Schedule page 867 Attachments button, functions 100
XPress request, Specifications page 868 Change Phase button, Master Agreement
term functions 720
auction, adding 370 Change Phase button, Project functions 250
master agreement, adding 658 Change Phase button, RFx functions 585
master agreement, adding additional 661 Chat button, functions 118
Terms dialog box Discussions button, functions 105
Master Agreement, field help 662 Document button, auction functions 387
Terms page Document button, functions 89
Master Agreement, field help 656 Document button, master agreement
master agreements 656 functions 685
Terms Setup page Document button, Project functions 237
master agreement, field help 1626 Document button, RFx functions 543
testing Edit button, functions 86
custom query definition 1221 Report button, Project functions 243
text field Reports button, auction functions 400
formatting text in 173 Reports button, functions 98
theme Reports button, RFx functions 578, 701
creating 1566 Save button, functions 86
selecting for enterprise 1567 toolbar button
setup 1564 Approve, functions 126
thread Change Phase, functions 122
discussion, replying 112 Reject, functions 126
tiered pricing toolbar customization
master agreement, specifying for line items 690 creating 1555
RFx, specifying for line items 552 field help, Summary page 1553
time period setup 1553
creating 1333 toolbar functions 84
editing 1334 auction 386
setup 1332 contract clause 730
To Do List channel, Workbench contract document template 754
linking to events 45 contract section 744
specifying event types 46 demand aggregation 305
using 44 master agreement 683
token substitution project 235
numbering table definition 1324 RFx 541
token substitution for query definition 1251 vendor 814
toolbar XPress request 858
Actions button, auction functions 392 Top Category Awards by Period report 1069
Actions button, functions 96 Top Spend by Accounts Payable Type report, Spend
Actions button, Project functions 241 Analysis 989
Actions button, RFx functions 563, 697 Top Spend by Commodity in Organization report,

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1911

 Spend Analysis 915 Workbench Tech Support channel, linking 35
Top Spend by Commodity report, Spend TSV
Analysis 909 SRM Explorer, saving data as 1199
Top Spend by Cost Center report, Spend type
Analysis 1003 XPress request, creating 876
Top Spend by Geography report, Spend XPress request, editing 877
Analysis 974 Type page
Top Spend by Organization report, Spend auction, field help 1669
Analysis 957 contract document, field help 1704
Top Spend by Selected Accounts Payable Type master agreement, field help 1620
report, Spend Analysis 991 project, field help 1675
Top Spend by Selected Commodity in Organization RFx, field help 1633
report, Spend Analysis 917 XPress request 878
Top Spend by Selected Commodity report, Spend XPress request, field help 878
Analysis 911
Top Spend by Selected Cost Center report, Spend
Analysis 1004 U
Top Spend by Selected Geography report, Spend Unawarded Items with Volumes report 1084
Analysis 976 Undo button, using 87
Top Spend by Selected Organization report, Spend undoing
Analysis 959 changes to sourcing document 87
Top Spend by Selected Vendor in Organization mistakes, in SRM Explorer data cube 1112
report, Spend Analysis 938 unit of measure
Top Spend by Selected Vendor report, Spend creating 1337
Analysis 932 editing 1338
Top Spend by Vendor in Organization report, Spend field help 1335
Analysis 936 setup 1335
Top Spend by Vendor report, Spend Analysis 930 SRM Explorer, changing 1129
Top Supplier Awards by Period report 1070 unit of measure, changing 1129
topic unlinking
discussion, creating 106 library component in template 154
discussion, deleting 116 unsubscribing
total discusion notification 117
SRM Explorer, showing 1131 unsuspending
tracking auction bidder 365
event 142 auction bidding activity 369
Tracking page Upcoming Master Agreements and Agreements
demand aggregation schedule 275 report 1064, 1087
master agreement schedule 632 updating
project schedule 220 spend dimensions 1796
RFx schedule 438 spend dimensions, setup 1795
training spend facts 1801

1912 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 spend facts, setup 1800 Workbench New Discussions channel 51
URL Workbench Project Status Summary channel 58
attachment, adding 103 Workbench Tech Support channel 33
URL parameters affecting query display 1248 Workbench To Do List channel 44
user account
Account Management page, field help 1729
Account Properties page, field help 1727 V
buy-side, creating 1723 value list type
buy-side, editing 1725 creating 1340
editing 174 editing 1341
Security page, field help 1731 setup 1339
user activity value list value
setup 1771 creating 1340
viewing report 1772 editing 1341
user dictionary word importing from CSV file 1832
creating 1748 phase, adding 1342
editing 1749 setup 1339
setup 1747 Value List Value page
user interface field help 1339
setup 1535 variable
user Workbench configuration 1424 contract clause, adding 729
User Workload report, Workflow Analysis 1036 contract generation, adding 764
using Variable Definition dialog box
Auction Monitor 398 contract generation, field help 765
Industry News channel 67 vendor 1665
Lookup icon 167 Account Management page 798
My Workflow Activities channel 61 Addresses page 783
Print XPress for Internal Customers channel 65, Categories page 789
66 category, searching by 776
Reports channel, Workbench 57 Contact page 797
RFx Optimizer, basics 504 contact, searching by 776
Supplier Discovery channel 68 Contacts page 792
Workbench Buyer Alerts channel 42 Details page 785
Workbench Calendar channel 17 Header page 781
Workbench Currency Exchange Rates channel 30 inactive, searching for 777
Workbench Events channel 37 List page 774
Workbench Favorite Sites channel 47 management configuration, setup 1664
Workbench File Sharing channel 56 metric entry, setup 1661
Workbench Global Discussions channel 53 Modification List page 828
Workbench Links channel 23 name, searching by 776
Workbench Master Agreements Search on purchasing hold, searching for 777
channel 27 preliminary, searching for 777

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1913

 Registration List page 825 Vendors List page 774
Relationships page 800 Vendors Modification List page 828
Reminders page 808 Vendors page
RFx, reinstating to round 447 project 223
scorecard definition, creating 1657 RFx 440
scorecard definition, editing 1659 Vendors Registration List page 825
scorecard definition, setup 1656 Vendors Relationships page 800
Scorecards page 803 Vendors Reminders page 808
searching all 777 Vendors Scorecards page 803
Security page 799 Vendors Scores page
selected list, selecting from 777 field help 803
setup 1655 Vendors Security page 799
spend and compliance reports 180 version control
SRM activity library, setup 1666 contract document 678
toolbar functions 814 versioning
Vendor Analysis reports 1102 contract clause, revising for 731
Vendor Details page contract section, revising for 745
field help 785 contract template, revising for 755
Vendor Entered Attributes page vertical bar chart
master agreement Setup 695 SRM Explorer 1147
master agreement, field help 695 view
RFx Setup 557 auction line item, specifying 345
RFx, field help 557 master agreement line item, specifying 645
Vendor Info page master agreement schedule event, specifying 629
Master Agreement, field help 635 project schedule event, specifying 203
master agreements 635 RFx line item, specifying 490
vendor management 1459 RFx schedule event, specifying 435
extension definition 1459 schedule event, specifying 137
Vendor Management Configuration page viewing 314
field help 1664 agreement report 702
Vendor Scorecard report 820 attachment 104
Vendor Spend reports, spend analysis 920 auction report 401
vendor-entered attribute background task status 1774
RFx, adding 558, 696 bookmarked analytic report 890
Vendors Account Management page 798 change history for sourcing document 135
Vendors Addresses page 783 demand aggregation initiator reports 313
Vendors Categories page 789 demand aggregation stakeholder reports 314
Vendors Contact page 797 dependency, event 145
Vendors Contacts page 792 dependent, event 146
Vendors Details page 785 discussion message 114
Vendors Header page 781 discussion reply 114
field help 781 imported data results 1833

1914 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 master agreement report 702 auction, adding 376
My Workflow Activities channel, approval Weights page
history 64 auction, field help 374
My Workflow Activities channel, current Work Item Cycle Time by User report, Workflow
approvals 62 Analysis 1043
pending upgrade issue 1782 Workbench 5
phase information for sourcing document 90 Buyer Alerts channel, using 42
processed message 1778 Calendar channel, using 17
project information, exported to Microsoft channel, creating 1401
Project 214 channel, editing 1402
project report 244 channel, setup 1399
queued message 1776 Currency Exchange Rates channel, field help 30
report in sourcing document 99 Currency Exchange Rates channel, using 30
RFx report 579 Events channel, using 37
security profile usage summary 1780 Favorite Sites channel, using 47
sourcing document 77 File Sharing channel, using 56
sourcing document list 76 Iframe configuration, creating 1405
SRM Explorer data 1123 Iframe configuration, editing 1406
supplier report 815 Iframe configuration, setup 1403
system information 1752 Industry News channel, using 67
system property 1513 Links channel, using 23
user activity report 1772 Master Agreements Search channel, using 27
Workbench Calendar channel, dates 22 more channel information, viewing 13
Workbench channel, more information 13 My Workflow Activities channel, using 61
Workbench Global Discussions channel New Discussions channel, using 51
message 54 page layout, setting 1419
Workbench New Discussions channel Page Manager Summary page 15
message 52 page manager, setup 1429
Workbench Project Status Summary channel, page setup 1407
project task report 60 page template, creating 1413
workflow sequence history 1572 page template, editing 1415
XPress request, closed, Internal Customer 842 page, creating in Setup 1410
XPress request, current, Internal Customer 841 page, creating in Workbench 9
visiting page, editing in Setup 1411
Workbench Links channel, site from 24 page, editing in Workbench 10
page, managing in Setup 1430
page, sharing 1417
W Print XPress for Internal Customers channel,
weight using 65, 66
RFx question, adjusting 487 Project Status Summary channel, using 58
RFx section, adjusting 454 query channel 1426
weighted bidding factors report channel 1426

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1915

 Reports channel, using 57 process owner, associating with context 1581
returning to 74 process owner, creating 1579
setup 1398 process template, editing 1576
Summary page 11 rejecting document in document toolbar 127
Supplier Discovery channel, using 68 rejecting document in My Workflow Activities
Tech Support channel, using 33 channel 63
template setup 1408 setting up, quick reference 1584
To Do List channel, using 44 setup 1569
user configurations 1424 working with, quick reference 175
Workbench page 6 workflow analysis
channels in column, reordering 12 User Workload report 1036
creating in Setup 1410 Work Item Cycle Time by User report 1043
creating in Workbench 9 Workflow Cycle Time report 1039
creating template 1413 Workflows Completed by Time Period
editing in Setup 1411 report 1037
editing in Workbench 10 Workflow Analysis reports 1035
editing template 1415 Workflow Cycle Time report, Workflow
hiding 16 Analysis 1039
layout, setting 1419 workflow definition
managing in Setup 1430 creating 1571
managing in Workbench 14 setup 1570
sharing 1417 Workflow Definition Summary page
showing 16 field help 1570
XPress CSR 844 Workflow Process Owner Summary page
XPress Internal Customer 837 field help 1578
Workbench Page Manager Summary page 15 workflow process owners
Workbench Summary page 11 setup 1578
Workbench template workflow sequence
Layout page, field help 1423 history, viewing 1572
workbook template Workflows Completed by Time Period report, Work-
using to export query results to Excel 1304 flow Analysis 1037
workflow
action, canceling 1582
approval history, viewing in My Workflow X
Activities channel 64 XLS
approvals, viewing in My Workflow Activities SRM Explorer, saving data as 1197
channel 62 XLS file
approving document in document toolbar 127 exporting list as 163
approving document in My Workflow Activities report, exporting as 158
channel 63 XPress
Current Workflow Processes report 1573 Awards by Vendor and Category report 884
phases, custom, adding as value list values 1342 Request Activity by Group report 882

1916 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help

 request template, creating 862 Line Item Specification dialog box, field
request template, editing 863 help 870
request type, creating 876 Price Components page 871
request type, editing 877 price components, adding 872
request, awarding 856 Schedule page 867
request, creating 849 Specifications page 868
request, editing 850 XPress Request Template Accounting page 873
request, reviewing bids 855 XPress Request Template Header page 865
self-registration configuration 1700 field help 865
self-registration configuration, creating 1701 XPress Request Template Price Components
self-registration configuration, editing 1702 page 871
setup 1693 XPress Request Template Schedule page 867
XPress Awards by Vendor and Category report 884 XPress Request Template Specifications page 868
XPress CSR Workbench page 844 XPress Request Type List page 874
XPress Internal Customer Workbench page 837 XPress Request Type page 878
XPress request xpress_req_awards_page 857
Awards page 857 xpress_req_bidding_page 854
Bidding page 854 xpress_req_header_page 851
creating by Internal Customer 838 xpress_req_template_specs_page 868
editing by Internal Customer 840
Header page 851
internal review, performing 845
opening for bidding 860
PDF file, creating 859
specification library 1696
specification library, creating 1697
specification library, editing 1698
toolbar functions 858
viewing closed, Internal Customer 842
viewing current, Internal Customer 841
XPress Request Activity by Group report 882
XPress Request Awards page 857
XPress Request Bidding page 854
XPress Request Header page 851
field help 851
XPress Request List page
requests 848
templates 861
XPress Request Services Line Item dialog box 853
XPress request template
Accounting page 873
Header page 865

Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help Confidential 1917

1918 Confidential Frictionless® SRM Buyer Online Help